JP2018192088A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine such as a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), an inclusion type game machine or a reel type game machine (slot machine) comprising characteristics in performance means.SOLUTION: A game machine is configured so that, in a second performance (performance using a character NJ of Ninja), there is a first case in which a first performance (performance using a character YJ of Yoshimune who holds a bow) is changed, a third performance (performance using the character YJ of Yoshimune who performs boring) is performed by change of the first performance in the first case, and relative to when the first performance is performed, when the third performance is performed, evolution which is advantageous to a player is easily generated (jackpot easily occurs), the first performance is a certain kind of a performance (icon change performance) and the third performance may be a kind of a performance (timer notice performance) the kind being different from the certain kind, and in the first case, the different kind of the performance different from the certain kind of the performance may be executed as the third performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 250

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed type game machine, and a rotating body game machine (slot machine).

  In pachinko and other game machines, the game area of the game board is provided with an obstacle that changes in the direction of the falling of the game balls, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. It is common. When the game ball wins a prize, a bonus is given to the player such as paying out a prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1 etc.).

  In addition, some of these gaming machines are equipped with rendering means.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, conventional gaming machines have room for improvement in the presentation means.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game console characterized by presentation means.

The game console of the present invention which solves the above object is
It is a game console provided with effect means capable of executing a plurality of effects,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The second effect is an effect that has a case of changing the first effect (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”),
In the first case, the first effect is changed and the third effect is performed.
The case where the third effect is performed is more likely to be advantageous development for the player than when the first effect is performed,
The first effect is a kind of effect,
The third effect may be another type of effect than the one type of effect.
In the first case, the other type of effect may be executed as the third effect.
It is characterized by

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game console characterized by the effect means.

FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the same pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the same pachinko machine 100 from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) An example of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) It shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common drawing. (A) is a flowchart showing a flow of main control unit main processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing a flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400. (D) A flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. It is a figure showing an example of button production in steps. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the presentation which tangled the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production which tangled the operation means A, and the effect which tangled the operation means B. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production which tangled the operation means. It is a figure showing the movable part located on the back side rather than the 1st decorative symbol display 208L. It is the figure which showed the flow of an example from a false ream production to a big hit without a penetration production being performed in steps. It is the figure which showed an example of the transmission effect in steps. It is the figure which showed gradually an example in which the transmission production is performed in the state where the 1st movable role thing 251 is in the 2nd position, after the pseudo-series effect is started. It is the figure which showed gradually an example in which the transmission production is performed in the state which has the 1st movable role thing 251 in the 1st position. It is the figure which showed gradually an example in case a penetration production is performed also in a state in a 2nd position, after a penetration production is performed in the state where the 1st movable role thing 251 is in a 1st position. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the production which used the 1st movable character article 251 and the 4th movable character article 254. It is a figure which shows the example and modification which continue from FIG. 20 in steps. It is a figure showing gradually another example which follows from the same situation as Drawing 20 (m). It is a figure which shows the example and modification which continue from FIG. 22 in steps. It is a figure showing gradually an example which a rendition using the 1st movable role thing 251, and rendition of timer notice were combined. It is a figure which shows the modification of the presentation shown in FIG. 22 in steps. It is a figure which shows the further modification of the example shown to FIG. 25 (b ')-the figure (i'). It is a figure which shows multiple examples of the other production which used the 4th movable character 254. It is a figure showing gradually an example etc. where a transparent production and a production using a sub window were combined. It is a figure explaining the relation between a penetration production and various displays. It is the figure which put together the representative example of the effect demonstrated so far. It is a figure which shows the modification of the structure of a movable part. It is a figure which shows the structure of the presentation apparatus 206 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of a penetration production using production device 206 of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the transmission production demonstrated using FIGS. 33-35. It is a figure which shows the further modification etc. of the modification in the row | line on the right side of FIG. It is a figure shown about a modification of production of light guide plate IL. It is a figure which shows the structure of the presentation apparatus 206 of 3rd Embodiment, and the structure of the modification. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the rendering apparatus of 3rd Embodiment, and its modification. It is a figure which shows the structure of the presentation apparatus 206 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the presentation apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the presentation apparatus 206 of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of embodiment described so far. It is a figure which shows the example by which the accessory different from before is arrange | positioned at the back side of a transmissive liquid crystal display device. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the notice effect during preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the preliminary announcement production | presentation in preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the preliminary announcement production | presentation in preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the notice effect during preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows gradually the example of a display in tutorial display part TT1 applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the preliminary announcement production | presentation in preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of timer notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of button continuous hitting production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the production by the explanation display applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps the example of another presentation of the presentation shown in FIG. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of step-up notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 67. It is a figure showing gradually another example of step-up notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of step-up notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the false continuation production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of button notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of expansion production of a reservation display frame. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball extraction error display. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball extraction error display. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball extraction error display. It is a figure showing an example of meter production in steps. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 80 step by step. It is a figure showing an example in which a meter effect is performed and a big hit is carried out in stages. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 82 step by step. It is a figure which shows in a step-by-step manner the modification of the presentation by the change ball icon cI demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail various kinds of meter displays. It is a figure showing gradually an example of rank up production which tells whether meter display changes. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing by example the continuation of an example of the rank up effect shown in FIG. 86. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the rank up effect shown in FIG. 87 in stages. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of a re-lottery that may continue from FIG. 88 (41) step by step. It is a figure showing gradually an example of a mini game which tells whether a meter display appears. It is a figure showing an example in which a big hit is decided by the change concerned when a meter display is full, between the steps. It is a figure showing gradually an example in which a meter display is displayed in a reservation frame. It is a figure showing gradually an example of acquiring and stocking a mini item when a meter of meter indication is full. It is a figure showing gradually an example in which a plurality of items are stocked by one full tank of meter indication. It is a figure showing gradually an example in which a meter display of a full state may carry over to the next symbol variation display. It is a figure showing gradually an example where it is digested without being stocked even if a meter display becomes full and an item appears. It is a figure showing gradually an example in which two meter displays are displayed and both disappear. It is a figure showing gradually an example in which two meter displays are displayed and only one disappears. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 98 step by step. FIG. 8 is a view showing in stages the example in which the display is started with the incremental type meter display being accumulated halfway; It is a figure showing gradually an example of meter production by a meter display which shows a numerical value. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which the numerical meter display shown in FIG. 101 changes according to the operation of the operation means. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect different from meter effect explained so far. It is a figure showing gradually an example when an error occurs during display of meter display. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the error display ER1 shown in FIG. 104 step by step. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 51 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as viewed from the front side (player side). It is an appearance perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 2, (c) shows the decorative symbol An example is shown and (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. (A) is a flowchart of processing at power-on of the main control unit, (b) is a flowchart of return activation processing, and (c) is a flowchart of initial activation processing. It is a flowchart of main control part main loop processing. It is a flowchart of main-control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure state update process. (A) is a flowchart of a special drawing related lottery process, and (b) is a flowchart of a special drawing per lottery process. It is a flowchart of a process during symbol variation. It is a flowchart of special figure display decision weight processing. (A) is a flowchart of the hit start weight process, and (b) is a flowchart of the special electric power officer release process. It is a flow chart of a special electric wire operating process. It is a flowchart of a special electric power person control process. (A) is a figure explaining the content of a special electric power combination operation pattern data table, (b) is a figure explaining the content of a special electric power combination operation data table. It is a flow chart of a special-effects player residual ball detection process. It is a flowchart of a special electric power combination operation end process. It is a flowchart of a hit end display weight process. It is a figure explaining the content of the table for yes-no decision. It is a figure explaining the content of the table for special figure determination. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for 1st drawing and 2nd drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part main processing, (b) is the 1st sub control part command reception interruption It is a flowchart of a process and (c) is a flowchart of 1st secondary control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flow chart of the 2nd sub control part main processing, (b) is the 2nd sub control part command reception interruption It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of 2nd sub control part timer interruption processing, (d) is a flowchart of 2nd sub control part image control processing. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st structural example of the rendering apparatus 206, (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd structural example of the rendering apparatus 206. FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on decoration symbol display device 208 of a pachinko machine of this embodiment. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 135 in stages. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 136 step by step. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the example of the effect shown in FIG. 137 step by step. It is a figure which shows the content of the customization which can be performed with the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the option menu screen in the state which is not using member service. It is a figure which shows an example which calls an option menu screen, a volume control window, and a brightness control window from a demonstration screen. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification. (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen, and (2) is a transition diagram of a model customization screen. It is a transition diagram of a Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows a top menu screen and a Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows a model customization screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation which used the fluctuation | variation icon. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of the change production | presentation of the pending | holding icon by the navigation character YM, and the change production | generation of a fluctuation icon. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 154, a modification, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in which a pending | holding frame becomes invisible temporarily. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation which several navi characters YM appear in the presentation icon display area DIS. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a modification etc. shown in FIG. 157. An example of an effect in which an effect of a button hold icon is associated with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the example which has a period when the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is a figure which shows the example which has another period when the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is an example in which a maximum of eight pending icons are displayed. The example of an effect which entangled the decorative symbol of a common figure on the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the example in which a change advance notice display is on standby display. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation using the holding frame different from the holding frame demonstrated so far. It is a figure which shows the example in which icon I1 of the treasure box used as an icon of a change alerting | reporting alert | reporting until now appears as a pending | holding icon. An example of an effect in which a meter effect is involved in the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. An example of an effect in which a telop effect is involved in the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entangled the navigation character YM by the presentation apparatus 206 shown to FIG. 133 (b). FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example of another effect obtained by entwining the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b). FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example of still another effect obtained by entanglement of the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b). It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entangled the navigation character YM by the presentation apparatus 206 by which the 2nd display apparatus was provided under the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 (1st display apparatus). It is a figure which shows an example in case other presentation is performed during execution of the presentation selected by the player. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. It is the table | surface which put together about the music which can be output from the speaker 120. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which the music selection demonstrated using FIG. 177 is performed. FIG. 178 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 178. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation by the presentation apparatus 206 shown to FIG. 133 (b). It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which the holding frame which the player selected is changed. It is a figure which shows the modification etc. of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine set to setting in auto button mode. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the overlap relation of the display of the bulb | ball removal notification alert | reported by generation | occurrence | production of a counter-full tank error, and the other display of each of the brightness adjustment window BW. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of ball removal alerting | reporting. It is a figure which shows the example by which several types of error displays are displayed. It is the figure which showed an example of the error which the main-control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 can detect. It is the figure which showed an example of the error which the delivery control part 600 of the pachinko machine 100 can detect. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part of pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 2 (C) shows an example of a decorative symbol, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure pre-reading processing in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. (B)-(e) is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result storage part for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention was equipped. It is a figure which shows the table for the pass / fail determination for common drawing in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and an example of symbol distribution and hit operation. It is a figure which shows the example of the table for pass / fail determination for special drawing in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol allocation table for special figures 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and a big hit time operation | movement. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol allocation table for special figures 2 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and a big hit time operation | movement. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) shows the 1st 1 shows a flow of a sub control unit command reception interrupt process, (c) shows a flow of a first sub control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows a flow of an image control process. It is a figure explaining the electric Chu-long open presentation performed by the production control processing of the main processing in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric Chu-long opening effect, (b) shows an example of the electric Chu-long opening effect in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) shows the 1st 2 shows a flow of secondary control unit command reception interrupt processing, and (c) shows a flow of second secondary control unit timer interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in Example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in a time series. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in Example 2 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in a time series. It is a figure which shows the presentation example in Example 3 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in a time series. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in Example 4 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in a time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the Examples 5-7 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in a time series. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in Example 7, 8 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in a time series. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in Example 9 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in a time series. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in Example 10 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in a time series. It is a figure which shows the presentation example in Example 11 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in a time series. It is a figure which shows the presentation example in Example 12 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in a time series. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the presentation example in Example 13 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in a time series. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the presentation example in Example 13 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in a time series. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the presentation example in Example 14 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in a time series. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the presentation example in Example 14 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in a time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Examples 15-17 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in a time series. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in Example 18 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in a time series. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the modification of Example 19 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and the example of Example 19 in a time series. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the modification of Example 19 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in a time series. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in Example 20 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and its modification in a time series. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in Example 21 and 22 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in a time series. It is a figure which shows the presentation example in Example 22 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in a time series. It is a figure showing an example of suspension change production. It is a figure which shows the example in which a pending | holding change 2nd production is performed with a pending | holding change 1st production. The left half shows an example in which the hold change first effect and the hold change second effect are combined, and the right half shows an example of the hold change third effect. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in which the character BC of the Bancho of the holding | transition change 3rd production appears. FIG. 232 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example in the right half of FIG. 232 and a diagram showing the hold change fourth effect. It is a figure which shows an example of holding | maintenance change 5th production. It is a figure which shows the example in which a pending | holding change 1st production is performed with a pending | holding change 5th production. It is a figure which shows the other example in which a pending | holding change 1st production is performed with a pending | holding change 5th production. It is a figure which shows the other example of the pending | holding change 4th presentation shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which the pending | holding change 5th presentation is performed with the pending | holding change 4th presentation, and the example of the pending | holding change 6th presentation. It is a figure which shows the other example of holding | maintenance change 6th production. It is a figure which shows the example in which pending | holding change 1st presentation is performed in the state in which curtain presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the other example which combined the curtain production and the pending | holding change 1st production. It is a figure showing an example of a combination of a curtain effect and a pending change effect. It is a figure which shows the other example of a curtain effect. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st structural example of the rendering apparatus 206, (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd structural example of the rendering apparatus 206. FIG. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the change display of the decorative symbol performed in this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of change production including a pending icon change production. (4) -2 show the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 246, and (11) -1 and subsequent figures are diagrams showing an example of the change effect including the timer advance effect. It is a figure which shows an example in which the presentation using a timer display and the change presentation were combined. FIG. 250 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 248 in which the effect using the timer display and the change effect are combined. It is a figure which shows the example in which the change production | presentation using the character NJ of a ninja is performed in a different aspect. It is the figure which showed the example in which the operation means display is displayed straddling continuous symbol fluctuation display in steps. It is the figure which showed sequentially the example in which the operation means display is displayed following FIG. 251 in steps. FIG. 252 is a diagram sequentially illustrating an example in which an operation means display is displayed, continuing from FIG. 252; FIG. 195 is a diagram progressively showing an example in which a first operation means display Od1 in a pachinko machine provided with a game board having a configuration different from that of the game board shown in FIG. 195 changes to a second operation means display Od2. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 254 in steps. It is a figure showing in steps the example which changes from the 1st operation means display Od1 to the 3rd operation means display Od3, and also changes from the 3rd operation means display Od3 to the 2nd operation means display Od2. It is a figure showing gradually an example with a period when two kinds of operation means displays are displayed simultaneously. FIG. 256 is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 256 and is a view gradually showing an example in which there is a period during which a display imitating the operation means is simultaneously displayed. It is a figure showing the example in which the operation means display is displayed on each of the 2nd decorative symbol display 208M and the 3rd decorative symbol display 208N in steps. It is a figure showing gradually an example in case an effect changes before and behind change of operation means display. It is a figure showing one example in case an effect is the same before and behind change of operation means display in steps. It is a figure showing gradually an example in which chance button 136 was operated during execution of change display of the 3rd design pd3 which was performed at the timing to which suspension increased. FIG. 262 is a diagram progressively showing an example when operation of the chance button is delayed in the example shown in FIG. 262. It is a figure showing gradually the example which the operation means display after the chance button 136 is operated once disappears. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display method of an operation means display. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 51 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as viewed from the front side (player side).

  Hereinafter, a ball game machine (including an enclosed type) such as a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail using the drawings. Note that the enclosed type refers to an enclosed type game machine or the like that cyclically uses the game balls enclosed in the game machine.

<Overall configuration>
First, the entire configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described using FIG. 1. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 has an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage plate, a launcher 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 3) as an external structure. . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Moreover, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured like a frame It is a door member which made the opening part. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The frame lamp 122 is an example of a light emitting means, and in the present specification, the light source as an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a fluorescent lamp, a cold cathode tube, or the like is a lamp if it emits light. , And one that emits light corresponds to an example of the light emitting means.

  The game area 124 (see FIG. 3) is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the door opening sensor 609 (refer FIG. 4) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  In addition, the front frame door 106 is provided with a transmitting unit 190. The transmitting unit 190 includes a transmitting portion 191 different from the transparent plate member 118, and the transmitting portion 191 can be pivoted in the front-rear direction around a drive shaft (not shown) provided at the lower part. In addition, the transmitting unit 190 incorporates a light emitting diode (LED). The transmission part 191 of the transmission part unit 190 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. The transmitting portion 191 functions as an operating means (button) and also corresponds to an example of a movable means.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball firing handle 134 for launching to the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 for giving a change to the rendering mode of the various rendering devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player, and a chance button 136 are issued. It provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to the. The chance button 136 is an effect button and corresponds to an example of the operation means. The chance button 136 is also an example of the movable means, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. As will be described in detail later, this chance button 136 is capable of performing an advancing and retreating operation. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  In addition, an operation key unit 181 is provided on the right side of the chance button 136. The operation key unit 181 has a cross key 181a, an OK button 181b, and a cancel button 181c. A panel display unit 183 is also provided at the upper right of the operation key unit 181.

  The launcher 110 is attached below the main body 104, and is not shown in the figure, where the ball launch handle 134 is operated by the player to pivot the launcher (not shown) and the gaming ball is struck at the tip of the launcher. And a launcher. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at an upper opening on the back upper side of the pachinko machine 100, and the ball tank 150 is positioned below the ball tank 150 at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through the discharge port 152a and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 can play a game by this configuration. Pay out the ball to the disabled person.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. 174 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 accommodating a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 is a so-called game board of a right-handed machine. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined. In a game board of a generally known right-handed game machine, changing the strength to launch the game ball by the operation of the player allows the general drawing start port 228 and the second special view start port 232, which will be described later, and It can be divided into 1 special figure starting port 230. Specifically, with respect to the game area 124, the game ball rolling on the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special view start port 230 by the arrangement of the game nail 238 or the like is the second The game ball rolling on the second area (right side in the game area) provided with the second special view start opening 232 is configured such that entering the special view start opening 232 is difficult or impossible, and vice versa 1) It is difficult or impossible to enter the ball into the special figure starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 equipped with a right-handed game board, and can be widely applied to pachinko machines equipped with a general game board.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In the effect device 206, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N disposed on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The second decorative symbol display device The length in the width direction of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height thereof is also short. However, the display screen of each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be smaller than the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the length and height in the width direction are shown in FIG. It is not limited to the embodiment. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 3 has the right end side portion overlapping the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and similarly the third decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. The left end side of the portion 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 3 may be the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the position of the third decorative symbol display 208N shown in FIG. 3 may be the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M does not partially overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (the first decorative symbol display device 208L Position away from the left side). In addition, the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208M does not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (rightward toward the first decorative symbol display device 208L (A position away from). Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions of coming close to or separating from each other along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed as the decorative symbols are variably displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It should be added here that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol It is also possible to perform variable display of or perform multiple types of effect display. Furthermore, the number of decorative symbol display devices is not limited, and the decorative symbol display device may be a pachinko machine provided with only one, or may be a pachinko machine provided with only two, 4 It may be a pachinko machine provided with one or more. Further, the positional relationship between the plurality of decorative symbol display devices is not limited to the positional relationship shown in FIG.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. The transmissive liquid crystal display device referred to here means that at least a part (or only a part or all) of the display screen can be in a transmission state, that is, it becomes transparent. It is a possible device. In other words, it is an apparatus capable of changing the transmission amount of light in at least a part of the display screen. As a specific configuration, a known configuration may be used, and for example, a liquid crystal cell, a shutter (adjustment unit), and a light source are disposed in order from the front side. The liquid crystal cell is filled with a liquid crystal substance between two transparent glass substrates provided with transparent electrodes facing each other across a gap, and a voltage is applied to the transparent electrodes to change the alignment state of the liquid crystal and pass light Change the state of The liquid crystal cell is drive-controlled according to the acquired image data to display an image. The shutter is configured to be able to switch between a closed state in which the white turbidity state occurs and an open state in which the transparent state is reached. For example, a so-called liquid crystal shutter can be used as this shutter. That is, the shutter is configured by two-dimensionally arranging elements for transmitting (open) and blocking (closing) light by causing change in alignment of liquid crystal molecules by applying or removing electric field to the liquid crystal substance. The closed state of the shutter is a state in which the light source is made to function as a backlight of the liquid crystal cell, and the open state of the shutter is a front side through the liquid crystal cell with goods etc. arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is in the state which can be made to visually recognize from. The prizes disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L will be described later. The shutter is controlled to be able to open only an arbitrary part, but may be controlled to open only a predetermined part. It is also possible to open the entire surface. In addition, the liquid crystal cell and the shutter are shared to partially create a transmissive state and a non-transmissive state, and an image can be displayed (reproduced) in the non-transmissive portion and can not be displayed (reproduced) in the transmissive portion. It may be

  The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may also be transmissive liquid crystal display devices, or only one of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N May be a transmissive liquid crystal display device.

  In addition, a transparent light guide plate is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a lens cut in the transmission area. An irradiation means (a light emitter) such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light irradiated from the irradiation means is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, whereby the transmission region is specified. It is configured to be able to look like emitting light with a pattern of. For example, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut of a pattern in which the face of the character is shaped, and a lens cut of a pattern in which an effect image is simulated. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion that refracts light toward the player is smaller than the thickness of the portion that emits light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Also, the light guide plate may be movable. In addition, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Below the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to M, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, and the first special symbol The hold lamp 218, the second special symbol hold lamp 220, and the high-probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol". Details of the rendering device 206 will be described later.

  The three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and are configured by liquid crystal display devices here. The display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix Other display devices including display devices, 7-segment display devices, organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display devices, reel (drum) type display devices, leaf type display devices, plasma displays, and projectors may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in this case, is configured of a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven-segment LEDs here. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are symbol display means. In addition, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 in a form with enhanced effect The first decorative symbol display device 208L is also a kind of symbol display means.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later). Here, holding a common drawing fluctuation game up to a predetermined number (for example, two) Is possible. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) which are being held, and here, the predetermined number of special view fluctuation games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a second special drawing starting opening 232, around the rendering device 206, A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  A plurality of general winning openings 226 are disposed on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entry into the general winning openings 226 (when winning in the general winning openings 226) The payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls into the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. Hereinafter, the ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be referred to as being distinguished as the "prize ball", and the ball to be lent to the player may be distinguished from the "rental ball". It may be called a ball (game ball).

  The general drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. Here, one on the right side of the game board 200 It is arranged. For this reason, the common view starting opening 228 is expected to enter the game ball by hitting the right. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  Only one first special view start port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. The first special view start opening 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters is not changed. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven to drive a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as a prize ball. While discharging to 126, the special figure fluctuation game by the 1st special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special drawing start port 230 is one of the start areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed start area whose size does not change.

  Only one second special drawing start port 232 is disposed below the common drawing start port 228. That is, the second special view starting opening 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and entering the ball is expected by hitting the right. A pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid is provided in the vicinity of the second special view start opening 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special view start opening 232 is It corresponds to a variable start means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the degree of difficulty of winning to the second special view start opening 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special view start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode that is difficult to win. On the other hand, when it is elected to the common drawing fluctuating game and the common drawing display device 210 hits and displays the stop symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and to the second special drawing start opening 232 The ball can enter the ball (in a state where winning is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state in which winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special view starting opening 232 is either small size (corresponding to the first size) or large size (corresponding to the second size). This is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball is variable from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special view start port 230. When the pair of wing members 2321 is open, the game ball entering the game area 124 is the second special feature which is a variable start area than the game ball entering the first special view start port 230 which is a fixed start area. There are more gaming balls entering the figure starting opening 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with two variable winning openings. A central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to a first variable winning opening) provided at the center of the game board 200 is disposed below the first special view start opening 230. In addition, the right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to the second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is disposed below the second special view starting opening 232, and entering the ball by hitting the right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 also has a winning opening and door members 2341 and 2351 which can be opened and closed by the solenoid. The winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234, 235 may be called an attacker. The central variable winning opening 234 maintains the closed state until the big hit game is started when the big hit in the non-electric support state is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state changes between the open state and the closed state repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 maintains a closed state until a big hit game is started when a big hit occurs in the power support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state change between the open state and the closed state repeat. That is, in any of the variable winning openings 234, 235, the second open / close state (here, open) in which the game ball is easier to win than in the predetermined first open / close state (here, closed state) and the first open / close state. The variable winning means capable of changing the open / close state from one of the states) to the other, winning the special figure fluctuation game in the non-power support state, and the first special view display device 212 stops and displays the big hit symbol The door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol in the power support state, the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 has a predetermined time interval, a predetermined number of times. Open and close. The closed state does not necessarily have to be completely closed in any of the variable winning openings 234 and 235, and it may be a state in which the game ball can not enter or is difficult even if it is slightly open. . When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the center variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a winning ball for the upper dish Discharge to 126. The ball entering the central variable winning hole 234 and the ball entering the right variable winning hole 235 are also guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the gaming island side.

  According to the arrangement of the common drawing start opening 228, the first special view start opening 230, the second special view start opening 232, the central variable winning opening 234, and the right variable winning opening 235 described above, in the power support state, the right A hit is a hit that is advantageous to the player, and in the non-power support state, a left hit is a hit that is advantageous to the player.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 Then, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, central variable winning opening 234, right variable) Whether to win in the winning opening 235) or the starting opening (first special view starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232) or without winning in any winning opening or starting opening, or Only by passing through, it reaches the out port 240.

<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the rendering device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the gaming ball. In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N described above are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center of the stage 244 is the first special view starting opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the

  In a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely opened (fully open), the player can view a part or all of the display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Also, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be stopped at any positions, for example, which decorative symbol is the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L To the extent that the player can identify, it is possible to shield only a part of the decoration pattern. In addition, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed (fully closed), the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Shield all of the Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are effect display means, are also a shielding means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and also an effect movable means.

  In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, and the general character 224Fb are disposed, and move vertically in accordance with the contents of the effect. It is configured to be able to In addition, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full color LED incorporated therein, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  In addition, the above-mentioned chance button 136 which can perform advancing / retracting operation, and the permeation | transmission part 191 which can be rotated in the front-back direction are also 1 type of effect movable means.

  Further, as the effect moving means, a not-shown family crest 224E (see FIG. 46 etc.) is prepared here. The family crest 224E is disposed at an initial position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the family crest 224E starts its operation, it rises from the initial position to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (the player side). In the initial position, the family crest 224E is less visible to the player than in the state where it is overlapped with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  Here, although the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 are each formed of different circuit boards, these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. It may be one circuit board, or the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 may be one common circuit board other than the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is controlled by control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub-control means (400), second sub-control means (500). ), Or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as the control means, and the main control unit 300 is used as the first control means. One combination of the 1 sub-control unit 400 and the 2nd sub-control unit 500 can also be regarded as a second control means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 (two random number generation circuits are incorporated in this circuit) that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. ), And predetermined ball detection sensors, for example, sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and door opening such as front frame door opening sensor and inner frame opening sensor A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including the sensor and the bottom plate full-tank sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a common view display device 21 Drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the various status display unit 328 (for example, general drawing hold lamp 216, first special view holding lamp 218, second special view holding lamp 220, high probability middle lamp 222, etc.) Drive circuit 330 for performing display control, a predetermined movable member such as blade member 2321 of second special view starting port 232, door member 2341 of central variable winning hole 234, door member 2351 of right variable winning hole 235, etc. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 which are driven to open and close is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value to be used in the basic circuit 302. The generation of random numbers in the random number generation circuit 318 can be roughly classified into two types, a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value to be counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a random number seed to perform an operation with a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derives this operation result as a random number. In the second method, numerical values are read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical values are derived as random numbers.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the thus obtained value as the initial value of the counter to count up (down) in the counter mode, as the seed of the random number, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special drawing start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random number generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random number generation circuit 318, It is stored in the random number storage register corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Also, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special drawing start opening 232 has a ball, the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the second special drawing start opening 232 is the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random number storage register corresponding to second special drawing start port 232, which is built in random number generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302, which indicates that the voltage has dropped if the voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 v).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit and receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, and the main control unit 300 constantly transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information, Both can communicate in both directions. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400 The first sub control unit 400 can not transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is stored in the ROM 406 is connected.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a second decorative symbol Drive circuit 432 for performing drive control of display device 208M and third decorative symbol display device 208N, and position detection sensor 430 detecting the current position of each of second decorative symbol display device 208M and third decorative symbol display device 208N Detection signal from the operation key unit sensor 425 for detecting the operation of the detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 has been pressed, the detection unit 710 for the position detection sensor 430, the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 181 From the CPU 404 and the sensor circuit 428 which outputs the The image data etc. stored in the ROM 406 is read based on the signal, and a display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436, and the image is displayed on each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L・ The processor) is connected.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

  In addition, the basic circuit 502 includes various movable means (chance button 136 capable of performing an advancing and retreating operation, a transmitting portion 191 capable of rotating in forward and backward directions, Yatsushiro character 224Fa, general character 224Fb, and family crest character 224E) Based on drive circuits 516 for performing drive control, various movable means sensors 424 for detecting current positions of various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E, detection signals from various movable means sensors 424 And a sensor circuit 518 that outputs to the circuit 502. The basic circuit 502 further includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game board frame lamp 542; A serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the first auxiliary control unit 400 controls the image display of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, and the second auxiliary control unit 500 controls various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E are controlled, but the second sub-control unit 500 controls the image display of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, and the first sub-control unit 400 controls various moving means 136, 191, 224 Fa, 224 Fb, and 224 E may be controlled, or any one sub-control unit may perform both controls.

  Further, although not shown in FIG. 4, display control of the panel display unit 183 shown in FIG. 1 is also performed by the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the payout control unit 600, and the door opening command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. In addition, even when there is a payout error or the like, the payout control unit 600 transmits an error command to the main control unit 300.

  As for the door open command, the detection signal of the door open sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without passing through the payout control unit 600, or the payout control unit 600 may be used as a relay board. Alternatively, the door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the firing control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage directly from the power control unit 660. The second sub-control unit 500 may be supplied with a voltage after the predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second auxiliary control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first auxiliary control unit 400. The emission control unit 630 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage directly from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via the other control units (main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, etc.) and respective devices. The first auxiliary control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via each of the other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and each device. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage substantially simultaneously from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power control unit 660 earlier than both or at least one of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400. The main control unit 300 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power control unit 660 earlier than both of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400 or at least one of them. The first auxiliary control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300 or at least one of them.

  Further, the second sub-control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured to supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be The second auxiliary control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage directly from the power supply control unit 660.

  In the island facility provided in the game machine installation sales office, the 100 V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24 V, and the pachinko machine 100 is supplied with 24 V AC current. The 24V AC current is converted by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300 into a 12V DC voltage. The main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit (not shown in FIG. 4), and the DC voltage of 12 V is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (5 V in this case) by the voltage conversion circuit. Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the 12 V supply current falls below a predetermined value (9 V in this example). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply line connecting the power supply control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338, through which a 12 V DC current flows, and this power supply line is an example of a predetermined power supply line. It corresponds to Note that the low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. Further, the power management unit 660 outputs the inputted 24 V AC current as it is or converts it into a 36 V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, a current of an operating voltage (here, 5 V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  Further, the start signal output circuit 340 outputs a start signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 reaches the voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate when the power is turned on. Furthermore, when the WDT 314 times out, the CPU 304 outputs a reset signal from the WDT 314. When the WDT 3141 times out, there may be a runaway state due to a program error, or a case where the CPU 304 can not perform the originally designed operation due to a voltage drop due to a lightning strike, a fraud, or the like. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 3141 as an initial value. The start signal from the start signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The start signal output from the start signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined start signal.

  In the case of an instantaneous power failure and immediate recovery, ie, automatic recovery without turning on the power switch 178, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, first, it is determined whether the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations performed by the basic circuit 302, a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is performed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in registers are initialized. Subsequently, security check processing is performed. The security check process recalculates whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct or not. If the authentication code is correct, extension processing is performed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time or a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, the main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in registers are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained at the state before reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of symbol>
Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (c). The types of the special view and the common view to be stopped and displayed will be described. Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that a ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, and a ball is entering the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do. These "variation display of the special figure 1" and "variation display of the special figure 2" correspond to an example of the symbol variation display. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When has passed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special view 2. After that, a confirmation display for maintaining the display is performed for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms).

  Therefore, from the start of the "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol form of special figure 1 and the finalization of the final display, or after the "variation display of special figure 2" is started The period from the stop display of the stop symbol form of 2 to the end of the confirmation display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In FIG. 5A, ten types of special views from "special view A" to "special view J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, as will be described later, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, both transition to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a common drawing high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the time shortening state is referred to as a common drawing low probability state. "Special figure A" which is a 15R special jackpot symbol is a special figure high probability common figure high probability state, and "special figure B" which is a 15R big hit symbol is a special figure low probability common figure high probability state. The “special figure A” and the “special figure B” are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure C" differs in the point which is 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time, and is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure B" which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability variation, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol which is suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The "special figure E" and the "special figure F" are both 2R and are in a state of not transitioning to the time saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a 1st small hitting design, "special figure H" is a 2nd small hitting design, and all are special figure low probability common figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same thing as a 2R hourless short jackpot. That is, although the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", the effects displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are different between the two, and even in the same state By providing the special drawing G "," special drawing H "and" special drawing F ", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special figure I” is a first out-of-order symbol, and “special figure J” is a second out-of-pattern, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a symbol other than “Special Figure A” is also prepared as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decorative 1" to "decorative 10" as the decorative designs here. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are detected on the condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball enters the second special view start aperture 232. In each symbol display area of the symbol display area 208c, the order of "decorative 1" → "decorative 2" → "decorative 3" → ... "decorative 9" → "decorative 10" → "decorative 1" → ... in order Switch the display with and perform "Modified Display of Decorative Pattern". At the beginning of the variation display of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol changes at high speed (scrolling display) for each symbol display area. And when notifying 15R jackpot of "special figure B", the symbol combination corresponding to 15R jackpot corresponding to 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") Stop display of 1) and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". When informing 15R special jackpot of "special figure A", the symbol combination (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") where the same odd decorative pattern is lined up three times To stop.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called "special figure E" hidden probability variation, the 2R jackpot called "special figure F" sudden normal, or the first small hit for "special figure G" or "special figure H" In the case of notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of notifying 2R jackpot called sudden definite variation of "special figure C" or 2R jackpot called sudden time reduction of "special figure D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first out of "special figure I" and the second out of "special figure J", stop the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 3 (b) in symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  In addition, one decorative symbol display device or a plurality of decorative symbol display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a fifth symbol It may be displayed. The fifth pattern is a display of a decorative symbol smaller than the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. For example, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 5 (b) may be reduced, or the display pattern of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 5 (b) may be a different number. When the fifth symbol is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M or / and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also symbol display It is a kind of means. When the fifth symbol is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the fifth symbol is displayed in an area out of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  Furthermore, the fourth design may be displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to M. The fourth symbol is a display of a decorative symbol representing that the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or being displayed in the stop state.

FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing, "common drawing A", which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B", which is a disconnected design. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5C, the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.
<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is a counter for generating a big hit special decision random number counter initial value, a big hit special shot determination random number counter, and a small hit special win for each special view 1 and 2. Counter for generating random number counter initial value for special drawing determination, counter for small drawing special drawing determination, counter for generation of random number counter initial value for special drawing determination, random number counter for special drawing determination for lost time special drawing timer, and special drawing timer Each counter of the random number counter for number determination is provided. In addition, in the RAM 308, the number of reservations, the random number value for big hit determination, the random number value for big hit special figure determination, the random number value for small hit special figure determination, the special time special figure decision for each special figure 1 and special figure 2 A random number value, a success / failure predetermination result, a special figure predetermination result, a success / failure decision result, a special figure determination result, and a special figure timer determination result are stored. Furthermore, in the RAM 308, the reserve storage unit of the special figure divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas that can reserve the start of the determination of acceptance (lottery) separately is made separately for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. It is prepared. In the reserve storage unit of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value, the big hit special figure 1 determination random number value, the small hit special figure 1 decision random number value, and the lost time special figure 1 random number value for decision The four random number values are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored one set at a time in the winning order (holding order) for each area. In addition, in the reserve storage unit of the special figure 2, for the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value, the big hit special figure 2 determination random number value, the small hit special figure 2 decision random number value, and the lost time special figure 2 decision The four random number values are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored for each area one set at a time in the winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 6A according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, first, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initialization of the I / O 310, and various kinds of storage in the RAM 308 as initialization 1. It initializes variables, permits operations to the WDT 314, and sets initial values. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value equivalent to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. Next, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted (hereinafter, this process is referred to as WDT process). Following the WDT process, in the initialization process of step S101, whether the low voltage signal is on or not, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 causes the power management unit 660 to operate via the second sub control unit 500 as the main control unit. It is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the voltage value of the power supply supplied to 300 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 v). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to the WDT processing, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), Perform setting 2. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In initialization 2, a process of setting a value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, 1) A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  Next, in step S103, after setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process here, three initial values for generating initial values of the random number counter for big hit special figure determination, the random number counter for small hit special figure decision, and the random number counter for lost special order decision Update the value generation counter. After the basic random number initial value updating process is completed, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, effect random number update processing is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with random number counters for timer number determination for each of the special and common figures, and any of these counters is capable of determining a timer number that can take a value in the range of 0 to 99. Generate random numbers for In step S105, the value of this counter is updated. After completion of the effect random number update processing, interrupt permission is set, and the process returns to step S103.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S103 and S105 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms).

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, once in about 4 ms). The main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle. At the start of this timer interrupt processing, the value of each register of CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area, or WDT 314 is periodically (for example, once in about 2 ms which is the cycle of main controller timer interrupt). ) Or restart.

  First, in step S201, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input through the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of detection signals, It stores in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in this step S201, the information of the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal, in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no detection signal before the previous time, presence of a previous detection signal, and presence of a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal) Information to indicate that the general winning opening 226, the central variable winning opening 234, the right variable winning opening 235, the first special view start opening 230, and the second special view start opening 232 entering the ball, or It is determined that the drawing start port 228 has been passed. That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234, and 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. In addition, in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal last time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal) is stored. Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In the basic random number initial value updating process (step S203), the values of the counters for generating various random number counter initial values are updated in the range of 0 to 99, and in the subsequent basic random number updating process (step S205), the values of various random number counters are updated. The value is updated in the range of 0 to 99. For example, every time the random number counter for big hit special figure 1 determination makes one rotation, the value of the generation counter is set to the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter. The same applies to other random number counters.

  In step S207, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the first special view display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  Subsequently, a winning determination process (step S209) is performed. In the prize determination process (step S209), first, when there are prizes in the prize openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, the RAM 308 provides an award for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value of the ball number storage area is read out, 1 is added, and it is set as the original ball number storage area.

  Subsequently, in the prize determination processing, the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232 has a prize, and the number of the special figure fluctuation games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4) And stores predetermined start information. That is, if the number of reservations is less than the predetermined number, the jackpot determination random number value and various special figure determination random number values are stored. The jackpot determination random number value is a value obtained by processing the value acquired from the random number value storage register of the random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4 (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1). On the other hand, the special figure determination random number value is a value obtained by processing the software random number derived from the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (the value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). The combination of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the special drawing determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 which performs random number processing corresponds to an example of the start information deriving means. Various random number values (starting information) are stored as one set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (order of holding) in the holding storage unit of the special view provided in the RAM 308. The reserve storage unit of this special view has a predetermined upper limit number (4 in this case) of start information derived based on the game ball entering the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232. It corresponds to an example of the start information storage means which can be stored up to. At this time, various random number values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in RAM 308, and the values stored in the temporary area may be stored in the reserve storage unit of the special view. In this case, the temporary area is started It may be used as information storage means, or it may be used as a start information storage means for the suspension storage unit and the temporary area of the special view. Also, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations of the special view stored in the RAM 308, and the number of reservations of the special view increases by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the holding unit.

  In addition, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, and the number of common drawing fluctuation games being held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the common drawing wins at that timing. The value of the random number counter for numerical value generation is stored in a random number value storage area different from that for special drawing provided in the RAM 308 as a common drawing win random number value which is start information.

  Also, in this winning determination process, to a first special view start opening 230, a second special view start opening 232, a common view start opening 228, a central variable winning opening 234, or a right variable winning opening 235 by a predetermined ball detection sensor The first special view starting port 230, the second special view starting port 232, the common view starting port 228, and the center variable in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400 when a winning (entering) is detected. The winning a prize reception information indicating the presence or absence of a winning (entering) of the winning opening 234 and the right variable winning opening 235 is set.

  If the number of reservations is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S211 without storing the start information.

  When the winning determination process (step S209) is completed, the pre-reading process is called. In this pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings has increased since the pre-reading process executed last time. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of pending calls (the number of pending calls at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which will be referred to as the old pending number). The number of holdings at the time of executing the pre-reading processing of this time after the winning a prize judgment processing (step S209) is compared with the number of old holdings, and it is determined whether the number of holdings increases. If the number of reservations has not increased, this prefetch process ends without prefetching the start information. On the other hand, if the number of reservations is increased, the amount of increase in the random number value for the special view 1 jackpot determination in the special storage 1 of the special view 1 provided in the RAM 308 is read ahead, or The amount of increase in the random number value for the big hit judgment in Figure 2 is read ahead. In the look-ahead reading here, only the amount of increase may be read ahead, but all may be read ahead. In addition, although pre-reading here means reading start information prior to the pass / fail determination (this lottery), but in the subsequent pre-reading processing, the word “pre-reading” is the result of ahead (the result of pass / fail determination (this lottery) Sometimes used in the sense of reading).

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is in the control state of either the special figure low probability state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low or the relatively high special figure high probability state. Being in the special figure high probability state is called probability fluctuation. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a positive change flag is prepared. When this probability fluctuation graph is set to ON, it is a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation), and when the probability fluctuation graph is set to OFF, it is a special figure low probability state.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a pre-qualification decision table used in the pre-reading process. In this success / failure predetermination table, a random number range is defined by being divided into the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state. When pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value or the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value is finished, this time, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value or the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value It is determined as to which random number range in the table for belonging. That is, referring to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the random number value for special figure 1 big hit determination or special figure 2 big hit determination random number read ahead is a predetermined numerical range. At times, the success / failure predetermination result is pre-determined as "big hit", and when other than that, the success / failure pre-determination result is pre-determined as "loss". In the special drawing related process described later (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B), the special determination variation game is again determined using the same determination table using the same determination as the content of the preliminary determination table, The determination result here is the result of the prior determination.

  If the judgment result of the success or failure is "big hit", the big hit time special figure 1 determination random value in the reserve storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or in the reserve storage unit of the special figure 2 A big hit special look 2 random number value for decision is preread. If the success / failure predetermination result is "small hit", the small hit time special figure 1 determination random value in the reserve storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the reserve storage of the special figure 2 Look for a small-hit special figure 2 determination random number value in the department. If the result of the pass / fail judgment is “loss”, the random number value for special figure 1 determination at the time of loss in the reserve storage unit of the special view 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or in the reserve storage unit of special figure 2 When reading out, the random number value for determination of the special figure 2 is read ahead. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special-image prior determination table used in the prefetching process. A random number range corresponding to each of 10 types of stop symbol forms (“Special figure A” to “Special figure J”) shown in FIG. Depending on which random number range the figure determination random value belongs to, a special figure prior determination result (which stop symbol form shown in FIG. 5 (a) is stopped and displayed) is obtained. In addition, the determination result of the special view here is also a result of the prior determination to the last, and the determination of the stop symbol aspect of the special view is also performed again in the special figure related processing (step S213 shown in FIG. .

  The pre-reading of the start information described above and the prior determination using the pre-read start information are performed before the success / failure determination (main lottery) of the special-pattern related process (S213) described later is performed. The main control unit 300 that pre-reads the special figure 1 jackpot determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first start information prefetching means, and the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value and various The main control unit 300 for prefetching the special figure 2 determination random number value corresponds to an example of the second start information prefetching means. In addition, the main control unit 300 performing predetermination based on the special figure 1 jackpot determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first prior determination means, and is for the special figure 2 jackpot determination The main control unit 300 which performs the prior determination based on the random number value and the random numbers for determination of various special views 2 corresponds to an example of the second prior determination means.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a prefetch information temporary storage unit for the special view 1 divided into areas for each hold, and a prefetch information temporary storage unit for the special view 2 similarly divided into areas for each hold. It is done. Information representing the special-figure preliminary determination result (also information representing the special-figure and hereinafter referred to as pre-reading information) is stored in the corresponding hold area of the pre-reading information temporary storage unit.

  It should be noted that if the number of reservations has not increased, the prefetch information “no suspension” is stored in the corresponding suspension area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit. Also, in the pre-reading process, when a big hit is in progress, and when the current control state is the power support state (the short time flag is on), pre-reading and pre-judging of start information of the special figure 1 is performed. No, in these cases, "undetermined" information indicating that the predetermination of the stop symbol based on the start information of the special view 1 that has been read is not performed, the corresponding hold area of the read-ahead information temporary storage unit Remember to That is, based on having entered the starting opening where the pair of wing members 2321 is not provided (the first special view starting opening 230 whose state is a fixed starting area), it is acquired during the big hit game and during the power support Pre-judgment based on the start information is not performed, and notification (pre-reading advance notice) of the pre-judgment result is not performed. By doing this, the fairness of the player is secured. In addition, pre-reading of starting information itself is not done, but pre-reading does not do pre-judgment and the result (the pre-reading notice) it does not do pre-judgment and pre-judging. The notification (pre-reading advance notice) of may not be performed.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6 (b), a general drawing related process is performed following the winning determination process of step S209 (step S211). In this common drawing related processing, first, as common drawing state update processing, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state is performed. For example, in the process during the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the lighting / lighting drive control which repeats turning on and off of the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeated. Do. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  In the processing at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol updating timer changes from 1 to 0), the winning symbol (common drawing A shown in FIG. The on / off driving control of the 7-segment LED constituting the common view display device 210 is performed so as to display any one display mode of the common view B shown in FIG. 5 (c). Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas are prepared in which various settings are performed in various processes, not limited to the general drawing related process here. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs finalized display of either symbol pattern of the hit symbol or the lost symbol. After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the hit symbol displayed in a definite manner is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 while setting predetermined opening period (for example 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is a loss, the common drawing loss flag is turned on. When the common drawing loss flag is on, even in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the common drawing stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set.

  Subsequently, in this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuating game and the second special drawing starting opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation), and the common drawing being held. When the number of fluctuation games is one or more, the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is won or not by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number value stored in the above random number storage area In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, the special figure related process (step S213) is performed subsequent to the general drawing related process of step S211 described above. In this special drawing related processing, first, special drawing status update processing (special drawing 2 status update processing) for special drawing 2 is performed, and then, the special drawing status update processing for special drawing 1 (special drawing 1 status update) Process). The special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (the special view 2 change game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area in the command setting transmission process (step S233), and then the process is ended.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when special figure 2 fluctuation indicatory time elapses (the time when value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), in special figure related lottery process which it mentions later The 7 segment LED constituting the second special view display device 214 is turned on / off drive control based on the special view determination result (the special design stop symbol form), and special view 2 stop display is being performed in the setting area of the RAM 308 Make settings to represent things. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special figure B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special figure C), and a short time symbol (special Figure D), hidden probability variation symbol (special figure E), sudden normal symbol (special figure F), first small hitting symbol (special figure G), second small hitting symbol (special figure H), first lost symbol (special A finalized display of any one of the figure I) and the first lost symbol (special figure J) is performed. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). As a result of this setting, the special view 2 displayed in a fixed manner is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game. In addition, when the value is set in the number-of-charges storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shorts, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. If it is not during the special map probability fluctuation, the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state) or during the small hit game, the time saving flag is turned off. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the non-power support state (first approach rate control state) when in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (in the special game state).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that general command rotation stop setting transmission processing is to be executed in command setting transmission processing (step S215) described later is additionally stored in the above transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping variable display is The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that it is special view 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later.

  A big hit flag is also prepared in the RAM 308, and if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In addition to setting the special figure 2 in the setting area, the first decoration symbol display device 208L displays an image notifying the player of a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, starting the big hit game. In order to wait for a certain period, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command winning effect presentation start setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the central variable winning hole 234 or the right variable winning hole 235, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning hole 234 or the door member of the right variable winning hole 235 A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in the open state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of 2351, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308 Do. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command large winning opening opening setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the right side A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in the closed state is output to the solenoid 308 (for 1.5 seconds, for example) to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 2351 of the variable winning opening 235 and provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts opening / closing control of this door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and ends at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds) The effect is stored in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to stand by for a period during which the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like displays an image notifying the player of the end of the game. Set the information indicating the waiting period.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the open / close state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 during the big hit gaming state (special gaming state) It corresponds to an example of the variable winning combination control means which controls. The open / close patterns of the door members 2341 and 2351 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 uses the ROM 306 to select the open / close pattern according to the success or failure determination of the special view fluctuation game. get.

  In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability change flag and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON simultaneously with the end of the big hit game based on the stop symbol aspect represented by the special drawing determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability change flag and the time saving flag on when the special drawing determination result is “special drawing A” or “special drawing C” in the special drawing lottery process described later. . Further, when the special drawing determination result is "special drawing E", only the definite change flag is set to ON among the definite change flag and the time saving flag. Furthermore, when the special drawing determination result is "special drawing B" or "special drawing D", only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag is set to ON and the number of times of electricity support stored in RAM 308 is stored. Set the number of charge support times 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the entry rate control state, which is a state in which the ease of entry (entry rate) of the game ball into the second special view start opening 232 (variable start area) is controlled, It corresponds to an example of the approach rate changing means for changing between the non-power support state which is the approach rate control state and the power support state which is the second approach rate control state.

  Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, a lost flag is prepared in the RAM 308, and if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is lost, the lost flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, it is made to shift to the next process without doing anything.

  When the special view 2 state update process is completed, the special view 1 state update process is performed. In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process described above is completed, a special figure related lottery process is performed this time. In the special figure related lottery process, a process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first, and thereafter, a process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) is performed. In this manner, the main control unit 300 performs the special view 2 related lottery process prior to the special view 1 related lottery process, thereby achieving the same timing (the winning determination process in the main control unit timer interrupt process started at a predetermined timing) In the case where the start information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first special view start opening 230 in S209) and the start information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second special view start opening 232 Or, when the start condition of the special figure 2 variation game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variation game are satisfied at the same time, or the start condition of the special figure 2 variation game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variation game are satisfied Even when there is a special figure 2 variation game is moving first, the special figure 1 variation game does not start to change. Further, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special view fluctuation game by the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 is performed by the main control unit 300, and the winning of the second special view start opening 232 Based on the result of lottery based notification, it is carried out prior to the result notification of the lottery based on the winning to the first special figure starting port 230, as starting information and special drawing 1 of the special figure 1 as starting information where the lottery is not performed When only the start information of the special view 1 among the start information of 2 remains, if the start information of the special view 2 is newly stored, it is based on the start information of the special view 2 which is newly stored. Notification of the result of the lottery is performed prior to notification of the result of the lottery based on the start information of the special view 1 already stored. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing-related lottery process corresponds to an example of the lottery means (the pass / fail judgment means).

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process, execution of a lottery (judgment determination), determination of a special view to be stopped and determination, and determination of a timer number are performed. First, it is determined whether the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not the predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not established. Here, it is determined whether the second special view display device 214 is in the special view variation display or in the stop display, and when any of the display is in the main control unit timer interrupt processing If the display is not in any display, it is judged whether it is set during special drawing operation or not during special drawing operation, and if it is set during special drawing operation, main control unit timer interrupt processing If it is set in the special view non-operation state, it means that the yes / no decision prohibit condition is not established, and it is then decided whether or not the predetermined yes / no decision condition is met. The determination here refers to the holding storage unit of the special view 2 provided in the RAM 308, and determines whether the number of holdings of the special view 2 variation game is greater than zero. If the number of reservations is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing, and if it is 1 or more, the predetermined yes / no determination condition is satisfied.

  If the predetermined success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, a random number value for one set, which is start information stored most in the past, from the holding storage unit of the special view 2 provided in the RAM 308 The random number value for big hit special figure 2 decision, the random number value for small hit special figure 2 decision, and the random number value for lost time special figure 2 decision) are extracted and the start information (randomness) still stored in the reserve storage unit Move the set of numbers) from the area currently stored to the next area. In other words, if the start information stored in the past is taken out from the hold storage unit of Special Figure 2 and if the start information is stored in the hold storage unit of Special Figure 2, then the Nth oldest start information is held It is set as the (N-1) th oldest start information in the storage unit. Further, the number of reservations stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by one. One set of random numbers from the reserve storage section of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value, big hit special figure 2 decision random number value, small hit special figure 2 decision random number value, and lost time The main control unit 300 that performs processing for extracting the special figure 2 determination random number value) corresponds to an example of the second start information acquisition unit.

  Next, a success / failure determination process is performed. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a table for deciding on a pass / fail is also stored. The contents of the success / failure determination table are the same as the contents of the success / failure predetermination table described above. In this success / failure determination process, the random number value for the special figure 2 big hit determination is in the table for determining success or failure according to the control state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state) with reference to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 Based on which of the random number ranges of the above, "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" is derived as the result of the pass / fail determination. In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Deriving "big hit", "small hit", or "lost" is equivalent to a success or failure judgment (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the success or failure judgment processing here is a lottery means (a probability judgment means). Corresponds to one example. Also, "big hit" corresponds to an example of a specific result of the pass / fail judgment.

  When execution of the propriety determination processing is completed, it proceeds to the symbol determination processing of the special figure. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special drawing determination table. The contents of this special drawing determination table are the same as the contents of the special drawing prior determination table described above. In the symbol determination process of this special figure, when the success or failure determination result is "big hit", the random number value for big figure special figure 2 determination belongs to which random number range in the special figure determination table, when the big hit. The special drawing determination result is determined to be "special drawing A" to "special drawing F". In addition, when the success or failure determination result is "small hit", the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table belongs to the small figure special figure 2 determination random number value. It is determined to be “special figure G” or “special figure H”. Furthermore, if the result of the success or failure determination is “loss”, the special drawing determination result is “specially determined based on which random number range in the special drawing determination table belongs to the special drawing 2 determination table. Decide on figure I or "special figure J". The CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the symbol determination process of the special drawing corresponds to an example of the symbol determination means.

  Subsequent to the symbol determination processing of the special drawing, in the fluctuation time determination processing, the fluctuation display period in the fluctuation stop display of the special drawing is determined. In this fluctuation time determination process, the timer number determination random number is acquired from the timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The acquisition timing of the timer number determination random number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure fluctuation start, but may be the timing of acquiring the start information. A timer number determination table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In the timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each of the special figure determination results. The timer number is the time from when the second special view display device 214 or the first special view display device 212 starts changing the symbols until it displays the stop symbol representing the result of the pass / fail determination, that is, the special view changes display Represents a fluctuation table time period (special figure fluctuation time), but may be a fluctuation table time period of a decorative symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, timers of timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 2 seconds, and the super-shortened special figure fluctuation time is reached. It means to become. In addition, what is determined by timer 1 or timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure variation. The timer 3 has a special drawing fluctuation stop period of 10 seconds. In timers 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG.

  The timer 4 represents that the special drawing fluctuation stop period is 12 seconds, and when the timer 4 is determined, the reach pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is selected as normal reach. With normal reach, in general, decorative symbols whose two symbol display areas (for example, left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) are equal are stop-displayed (strictly, temporary stop) (first stop and second stop are performed) ) The remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is variably displayed, that is, the symbol display area being variably displayed is a specific symbol (symbol display area being stopped) It is a state where it will be stopped and displayed the combination of a predetermined big hit symbol if the stop indication (the third stop or the final stop) is the same as the symbol. The timer 5 represents that the special drawing fluctuation time is 40 seconds, the timer 6 represents that the special drawing fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and the timer 7 represents that the special drawing fluctuation time is 80 seconds. When the timers 5 to 7 are determined, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is selected as Super Reach. The Super Reach is a product that improves presentation effects by adding a special variable display etc. to the normal reach (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

  The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 120 seconds. When the timer 8 is determined, special variation is selected as the variation pattern of the ornamental symbol in the first ornamental symbol display device 208L. Special variation includes special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, etc. When it is determined to be timer 8, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is selected as full rotation reach Ru. The probability that the timer 8 is selected is extremely lower than the probability that other timers are selected, and this full rotation reach corresponds to the Premier Reach.

  In addition, when it only says reach, it means the change pattern of the decoration design including normal reach, super reach, and special change.

  The reach is determined after the success or failure determination that the result of the success / failure determination (main lottery) in the special drawing related process is a specific success / failure determination result (a predetermined result with high player's degree of advantage) It is a notice effect in which the player is notified in advance before notifying the result of the success or failure judgment, and whether or not the reach is to be performed is determined after the judgment on the success or failure.

  In the fluctuation time determination process here, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined depending on which random number range corresponding to the special figure determination result the acquired random number for timer number determination belongs to. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table defines the timer number in accordance with the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the current special figure 2 as well as the timer number determination random number is also available. The timer number may be determined based on the above.

  The timer number representing the special drawing fluctuation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  In addition, before special figure lottery related processing is executed (for example, the above-mentioned winning a prize decision processing S209), from the plural types timer selection table which includes the timer number which is 1 or plural period information, to the special figure advance decision result Alternatively, one type of timer selection table may be selected based on a predetermined dedicated random number lottery, and the timer number may be determined from the timer selection table here. Also in the determination of the timer number here, a lottery may be performed by a dedicated random number (for example, a timer number determination random number), or the timer number may be uniquely determined already without performing the lottery. . Further, the timer selection table may be selected in the special view lottery related process, and the first sub-control unit 400 may select the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the timer selection table.

  When the fluctuation time determination process is completed, other processes are performed, and the special figure 2 related lottery process is ended.

  Subsequently, in the special drawing related processing, the special drawing 1 related lottery processing is performed. Each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 related lottery process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it.

  Thus, the special figure related process (step S213) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B ends, and the process proceeds to the command setting transmission process (step S215). In the command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are commands. Type (for example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, number of rounds per minute specification command, big winning opening open command, big winning opening closing command, power recovery command, RAM Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to a command type), such as a clear command, a special figure hold increase command, and a general view hold increase command, which can specify the type of command).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a symbol variation start command, information representing a special figure stop symbol, information representing a control state (information representing a setting state of a time saving flag and a probability variation flag), and information representing a timer number in the command data In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, it includes information representing a special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information representing a control state, etc., and in the case of a prize effect start command and an end effect start command In the case of the hit round number designation command, the control state information is included, and the hit round number is included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning to the central variable winning opening 234 And the presence or absence of a winning on the right variable winning opening 235, and the like.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned general command rotation start setting transmission process, information representing a special figure stop symbol stored in the RAM 308 as command data (special figure determination result), information representing a control state, information representing a timer number, hold The information which shows the number of the 1st special figure fluctuation game or the 2nd special figure fluctuation game etc which are done is set. In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information representing a special figure stop symbol stored in the RAM 308 (special figure determination result), information representing a control state, etc. is set as command data. In the above-mentioned general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes information representing a special drawing determination result, information representing a control state, the number of pending first special drawing fluctuation games or second special drawing fluctuation games, etc. Set the information indicating. The winning effect start command referred to here corresponds to a big hit game start command. In the general command end effect setting transmission process described above, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be output to the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, various lamps 418 and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, Information indicating the control state, and information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game that are held are set. The first sub control unit 400 having received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 having received the termination effect control command displays an image on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like to notify the player that the predetermined termination effect period (for example, 3 seconds) is to end, ie, the big hit game is terminated. Let the jackpot game end. The end effect start command said here corresponds to a big hit game end command. In the above-mentioned general command large winning a prize opening opening setting transmission processing, the information which shows the information which shows the number of rounds which are stored in RAM308 the present round number and control state etc as a command data of big winning opening opening command . In the above-mentioned general command large winning a prize opening closing setting transmission processing, the current round number which is remembered in RAM308 as the command data of big winning a prize opening closing command, the information which shows control state, the 1st special figure fluctuation game which is suspended Alternatively, information is set that indicates the number of second special figure change games and the like.

  At step S215, general command special view reserve increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, the special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 as command data of the special view reserve increase command, control state And information representing the stop symbol of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 determined in advance (the special figure prior determination result).

  Further, in step S215, general command hold drawing increase processing is also performed. In this general command draw increasing process, information representing a control state or the like is set in the command data of the draw increasing command. In addition, a common drawing fluctuation start command indicating that the fluctuation display of the common drawing has been started (is performed) is also transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 as the common drawing related command. It should be noted that from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, a common drawing fluctuation stop command indicating that the fluctuation display of the common drawing is stopped, and the pair of blade members 2321 has started opening (done) It is also possible to transmit an electric chew open start command indicating that, or an electric chew close command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 is closed.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until the end of all the rounds based on the number of rounds included in the command and the number of current rounds.

  Further, in this command setting transmission process, the command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be outputted to the payout control unit 600 are constituted by 1 byte, and the strobe information (in the case of ON, indicates that the data is set) is shown in bit 7, the power on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after the power is turned on), Bits 4 to 5 of this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 after encryption processing It indicates the number of requested payouts.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, an external output signal setting process (step S217) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

  In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in the above-described step S201 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the underfill error, etc. When an error or a bottom plate error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate error is set in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400. In addition, the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234 and the right variable winning port 235, or via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330 Display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  When the device monitoring process in step S219 is completed, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A. However, before the return, the values of the respective registers temporarily saved in step S201 are stored in the original registers. Make settings, set interrupt permission, etc. Also, before returning, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on or not, and when the low voltage signal is on (when the interruption of the power is detected), the state at the time of power failure is restored Save a specific variable or stack pointer to the specified area of the RAM 308 as return data, perform power-off processing such as initialization of the I / O port, and then return to the main control main processing It is also good.

<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 7. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed. The effect involving the operation means described below is also controlled first in this effect control process. That is, when the symbol variation start command including the information on the variation time of the symbol is received, whether or not the effect involving the operation means is to be executed according to the length of the variation time in this effect control process If determined and executed by the lottery process, the effect data is read out from the ROM 406. According to the effect data read out here, the image display control in each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N is executed in step S313, and the movable unit control is read out to the second sub control unit 500 here A control command corresponding to the data is transmitted, and is performed by the second sub control unit 500 in step S713 described later.

  In step S311, the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 is detected via the sensor circuit 428 to determine whether the chance button 136 has been pressed. As a result of the determination here, when pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected, processing of changing the effect data updated in step S309 into effect data according to pressing operation of the chance button 136, pressing of the chance button 136 When the operation is effective, processing such as preparing effect data corresponding to an operation reception effect to be described later is performed.

  In step S313, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S309, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 among the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, when there is an operation instruction (move instruction or rotation instruction) to the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the effect data read out in step S309, The instruction is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, when there is a control command (for example, control commands related to various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E) to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309. The setting to output this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303. When the door open command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, in step S321, the door open command is set to be output to the second sub control unit.

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once in 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle.

  In step S501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. 8A. In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt processing, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step S313 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step S611, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  Although the above description is the reproduction processing of the image to the transmissive liquid crystal display device, the CPU 404 controls the transmissive liquid crystal display device to increase the light transmission amount only partially or entirely on the display screen. Do also. In the transmissive liquid crystal display device, when this control is not performed, an image is displayed (reproduced) on the display screen in an initial state. On the other hand, in the region where the light transmission amount is increased by performing this control, features and the like arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device are easily visible from the front side over the region. However, even if this control is not performed, depending on the color (for example, yellow, white, etc.) of the image reproduced on the display screen, it may be possible to visually recognize a feature or the like disposed on the back side.

<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>
Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S701 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in S701, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10. If the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S 707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 707, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed. In step S711, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, movable unit control processing is performed, and then the process returns to step S703. In the movable means control processing here, various movable means (a chance button 136 capable of performing an advancing and retreating operation, a transmitting portion 191 capable of rotating in the back and forth direction, and an eighth generation character capable of moving up and down) When a control command related to 224Fa and a general officer 224Fb and a vertically moveable family crest 224E) is received, various processing corresponding to the control command is performed, and various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E. Control each operation.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (for example, once in 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt process in a predetermined cycle. Run with

  In step S901 of the second secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Accordingly, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S 903 of the second auxiliary control unit timer interrupt process, an update process or the like of the effect random number value is performed.

  Subsequently, an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the button effect in stages. In FIG. 9, time passes in the order of alphabets and the like described in parentheses (the same applies in the subsequent drawings unless otherwise specified). In addition, the time interval between the alphabet etc. written in parentheses and the alphabet etc. written next in parentheses may be equal intervals or may be different intervals in one figure. The intervals different from the equal intervals may be mixed (the same applies to the subsequent drawings).

  In FIG. 9, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N are not shown, and only the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9, the variation icon display region 208e is provided in the central part of the effect display region 208d, and the hold icon display region 208f is on the right side of the variation icon display region 208e. Is provided. A frame-like image indicating the position of the variation icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the variation icon display area 208e. This frame-like image is always displayed, but when the display condition is satisfied (for example, when the fluctuation icon is not displayed in the fluctuation icon display area, or when it is displayed in the opposite direction), further reach effect is performed. May be displayed only when the Note that only one of the variable icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

  One or more pending icons can be displayed in the pending icon display area 208 f. Four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9A. These four suspension icons h1 to h4 are all displayed as black circles, and the display of white circles by dotted lines indicates that the suspension icon is not displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the symbol variation display of the special drawing or the start of the judgment of the special view is held, and the number of the hold icon displayed is basically that of the special view fluctuation game It is the same number as the number of reservations. However, before and after the hold processing, there may be timing when the number of display of the hold icon does not represent the hold number. The hold icon includes the hold icon of the special view 1 and the hold icon of the special view 2. The hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to be display areas for both icons. In addition, the hold icon can be previewed and notified of the hold status according to the display mode. The animation associated with the hold icon is, for example, an increase animation executed when the hold is increased and a new hold icon is displayed, or the order of the hold fluctuates due to the previous hold being digested, and the hold is performed. Movement animation performed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, the position next to the left), change animation performed when the display mode of the hold icon changes based on the pre-reading result, etc. hold is digested Erase animation that is executed when the reserve icon is erased, and save animation that is executed when the reserve icon of the special figure on the non-priority side is evacuated when reserve of the special figure on the priority side increases in the priority variable machine Etc. In addition to the animation described above, a stand-by animation that can be executed alone during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase or decrease in hold and no change in the hold icon). There is. An example of this standby animation is an animation (for example, a repetitive animation of a fixed scale animation) performed on the spot without changing the display position. In addition, there may be a case where a plurality of animations of increase, movement, change, deletion, evacuation, and standby of the hold icon are executed in a plurality of overlapping manners.

  One fluctuation icon can be displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208e. A star-shaped fluctuation icon c is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 (b). The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special drawing fluctuation game, which is displayed after the suspension is digested and the special drawing fluctuation game is started. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More strictly speaking, when the first hold icon with the oldest start winning moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the change icon display area 208e, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon or expressed as a change icon moves. May be Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the change icon display area 208 e is completed may be referred to as a change icon. The variation icon is displayed in a display size different from the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may facilitate identification of the change icon and the hold icon, but may be the same size. Also, the change icon may be a display mode associated with the display mode of the hold icon. The fluctuation icon can be notified of the success or failure of the fluctuation according to the display mode (the fluctuation prediction), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the fluctuation is notified. Therefore, the fluctuation icon can be viewed as an icon related to holding, and can also be considered as a kind of holding icon in the sense that notification of the success or failure result of the special figure fluctuation game is held. The erase timing may be a timing before, a same timing, or a timing after the timing at which the success or failure result of the change is notified.

  As an animation related to both the hold icon and the change icon, the change icon display area 208e when the hold is digested, the hold icon with the oldest start winning timing being displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. There are a moving animation for moving as a fluctuation icon, and a changing animation for changing from the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the fluctuation icon. These animations may be combined and performed simultaneously. If the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the change icon are the same, the execution of the change animation can be omitted.

  The animation related to the fluctuation icon includes a standby animation that is executed during the execution of the special drawing fluctuation game, an erasing animation that is executed when the special drawing fluctuation game is ended and the fluctuation icon is erased, and the fluctuation icon There is a change animation etc. which are performed when changing a display mode of in the middle. These animations may be performed simultaneously in combination with one another. Also, the waiting animation of the variation icon may be performed simultaneously with the movement animation or the change animation.

  The above-described hold icon or change icon corresponds to an icon related to symbol change display.

  Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special view 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special view 2 are displayed at the upper right. The fourth pattern 2081 of the special view 1 is a round display, and the fourth pattern 2082 of the special view 2 is a square display. In any of the fourth patterns 2081 and 2082, gray represents fluctuation, black represents stop display (final display) of big hit symbols, and white represents stop display of final symbol (final display). It represents that it is. These 4th designs 2081 and 2082 are also a kind of decorative designs.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 9, in addition to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the first special symbol hold lamp 218, and the second special view hold lamp 220 It is shown.

  In addition, in FIG. 9, a chance button 136 is also shown on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9, the white display represents the on / off state of the white of the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136, and the hatched display represents the chance button lamp 138. Indicates a red lighting condition. The state in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red is a state in which pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. The hatched display may be in a lighting state other than red. Moreover, although it was set as "lighting" here, it may be "flashing" (following, the same).

  The background image of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 is a background image of a castle town. When the background image is a background image of the castle town, the pachinko machine 100 is the castle town mode among the prepared effect modes. That is, the background image and the effect mode are associated with each other.

  In FIG. 9 (a), both the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 display the stop symbol of the lost (confirmation display), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is discolored. Some "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1" are displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are also displayed in white during stoppage. While four first special symbol pattern holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9 (a) are on, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays four black circle holding icons which are the holding display of the special view 1 The variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 9B, the symbol variation display of the special view is started in the first special view display device 212, and the change display of the decoration symbol is also started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, updating (variation display) of the decorative symbol is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Further, only three first special symbol pattern holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9B are lit, and three holding icons are held in the holding icon display area 208f of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (pending icons h1 to h3 Is displayed, and a star-shaped fluctuation icon c is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208e. In this example, among the four hold icons h1 to h4 displayed in FIG. 6A, the hold icon h1 having the oldest start winning timing becomes a change icon, and the change icon is displayed from the hold icon display area 208f. It is the result of having moved to the area 208e. Furthermore, the 4th design 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changing to the display (gray) while it is fluctuating.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 (c), reach effect is started. Up to this point, the variation display of the decorative symbols performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is reduced in size at the left corner and is in the reach state by the numeral 3 .

  In this example, when the reach effect is started, the button effect is also started. The button effect here is the effect that tells the development of Super Reach. Also, the button effect may be an effect that tells the type of super reach to be developed. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 9D, the button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 and the operation of the chance button 136 in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Arrow display 136 b and character display “press” as a prompting prompting (pressing), and remaining period meter display 136 c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as a valid one. The three are displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136 c is a display indicating the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. Also, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9 is in the initial position at any stage, and the chance button lamp 138 shown in FIG.

  In this example, the player does not operate the chance button 136 immediately after the button effect is started, and the chance button 136 is operated (pressed) after a while (see FIG. 9F). When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136 which has been lit in red is switched to being lit in white or is turned off.

  When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a cut-in notice indicating whether it is likely to develop into a super reach. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 (g), the display of "CHANCE" is interrupted so as to overlap the background image, and then it is developed into Super Reach A as shown in FIG. doing. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 (h), the characters Super Reach A are displayed, indicating that the effect of Super Reach A is being performed. In this example, the background of the castle town is from the beginning to the end, and the super reach A presentation is also performed on the background of the castle town. In addition, when the effect display of the super reach A is started, all the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear and are not visible. On the other hand, the frame-like image which shows the position of 4th design 2081, 2082, the fluctuation icon c, and the fluctuation icon display area 208e is continuing being displayed. The fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, the variation icon c, and the frame-like image may also be erased so as not to be visible. The Super Reach A is not a jackpot-confirmed Super Reach, and just because it has developed into a Super Reach A does not always mean a big hit. In addition, even when the display is made to expect that "CHANCE" is likely to develop into a super reach, the super reach is not necessarily started, and the lost design is stopped and displayed without the super reach being started. In some cases. Further, the display “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 9G may be a dedicated display that is not displayed when the chance button 136 is not operated, or a general-purpose display that is displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. It may be

  On the other hand, in FIG. 9 (g ') showing another example continued from FIG. 9 (f) in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), a display of "sorry" is made on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and then As shown in the same figure (h '), the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not develop into a super reach, and the decorative symbol of the loss of "decoration 3"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3" The combination is displayed stopped. In addition, even if the display of "sorry" is made, it may be a big hit by the reversal production.

  Although the operation of the chance button 136 is always accepted, the operation outside the effective period of operation is ultimately treated as an invalid one, and a new effect such as a cut-in notice is not started. That is, the state in the operation valid period in the pachinko machine 100 is a state (operation valid state) in which execution of a new effect such as a cut-in notice is started when the chance button 136 is operated. However, the operation of the chance button 136 may not always be accepted, and control may be performed to accept only the acceptance period.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for describing in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a chance button 136 capable of performing an advancing and retreating operation and a transmitting portion 191 capable of rotating in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 10 (a) shows that both the chance button 136 and the transmission part 191 are at their initial positions, as in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. That is, the chance button 136 does not protrude, and the transmitting portion 191 is also in a substantially parallel state with the transparent plate member 118. Even when the chance button 136 is in the initial position, it can be operated (pressed), and the built-in chance button lamp 138 can be lit or blinked. Also, the chance button 136 may vibrate and can vibrate even in the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 can be lit or blinked, and the speaker 120 can output a sound effect or an effect sound. The chance button 136 may be capable of vibrating only at the depressed position.

  FIG. 10 (b) shows that the transmitting portion 191 is provided at the lower part from the initial position and is pivoted about a drive shaft (not shown) and inclined forward. The drive shaft is a horizontal shaft extending in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100. In the transmitting unit 191, the LED contained in the transmitting unit 190 turns forward while turning on or flashing, and a speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or an effect sound. The transmitting portion 191 may also vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. Also, even in the state of being inclined forward as shown in FIG. 10 (b), it is possible to vibrate in the front-rear direction or in the lateral direction. In addition, the transmission part 191 may turn in small increments in the front-rear direction as strong vibration with a large swing width of vibration. Even when the transmitting part 191 is vibrating, the LED built in the transmitting part unit 190 can be lit or blinked, and the speaker 120 can output a sound effect or an effect sound. The state (second state) of the transparent portion 191 shown in FIG. 10B is closer to the player than the state (first state) in the initial position shown in FIG. The player is operable to manually push the transparent portion 191 toward the initial position, and the transparent portion 191 corresponds to an example of the operation means. Even when the transmitting unit 191 is operated and pressed, the LED built in the transmitting unit 190 is lit or blinks, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or an effect sound. The transmitting portion 191 may not vibrate at the initial position.

  FIG. 10C shows that the chance button 136 has started to move upward from the initial position. The chance button 136 advances while the built-in chance button lamp 138 lights up or flashes, and a speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or an effect sound. Further, (d) in the figure shows that the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position. The chance button 136 can also stop at one or more positions between the initial position and the maximum exit position. Therefore, it is possible to advance into multiple stages. In addition, the chance button 136 which has advanced (projected) from the initial position is also capable of vibrating, and vibrates in the lateral direction or in the vertical direction in the state of having advanced (projected). Also in this case, the chance button lamp 138 can be lighted or blinked, and the speaker 120 can output an effect sound or an effect sound. Furthermore, the chance button 136 advanced (projected) from the initial position is operable to be pushed toward the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is operated and pressed, the chance button lamp 138 lights or blinks, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or an effect sound. In addition, the chance button 136 may be configured to automatically retreat to the initial position only by being lightly pressed in the advanced state.

  The vibration of the chance button 136 or the vibration of the transmitting portion 191 may be a function that appears only in a certain setting state. For example, it may be a function that is exhibited by setting by the effect customization function by the player or setting of a switch on the side of the game shop clerk. That is, depending on the setting state, there may be no vibration at all or only a partial vibration.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an effect in which the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is entangled.

  Here, as the operation means, the chance button 136 described with reference to FIG. 10 will be described as the operation means A, and the transmission unit 191 will be described as the operation means B. Here, when the operation means A and the operation means B are compared, the operation means B is an operation means larger than the operation means A (an operation means having a large operation surface), and the operation means A can be operated even at the initial position. There is a difference that the means B can not be operated at the initial position, but the operation means B and the operation means A may be reversed, or both may be operation means of the same size, or the initial position The operation means may be operated together or may not be operated together. It should be noted that only one of a plurality of types of examples of the operation means listed here may be applied, a plurality of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. It is also good.

  In addition, the operation means described as the transmission unit 191 in the following description can be replaced with another operation means such as a second chance button provided separately from the chance button 136.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), the effect involving the operation of the operating means B (the transmitting portion 191) is more striking than the effect involving the operation of the operating means A (chance button 136). The degree of expectation of is high. Further, both of the functions A are provided, but the functions B are provided only in the operation means A. Examples of the function A include a function of vibrating at an operating position and a function of lighting. Examples of the function B include a function of rotating and a function of vibrating even at an initial position. As shown in FIG. 11A, the operation means B is inferior to the operation means A in the number of functions.

  However, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), both may have the same number of functions. That is, although the function B is provided only in the operation means A, the operation means B may be provided with the function C. An example of the function C is a function that can perform strong vibration.

  In the operation means A and the operation means B, the number of functions may be the same.

  FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a part of effect data of the operation means A. Here, the display data in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is "liquid crystal", the operation data in Yatsushiro character 224Fa and general character 224Fb and family crest character 224E is "moving means", and the sound output data from the speaker 120 is " The light emission data of the "sound", the frame lamp 122, the LED, and various built-in lamps are displayed as "LED", and the vibration data of the operation means A is displayed as "vibrate". "..." in a figure represents abbreviation | omission of data. Production No. The data of “Vibrate” in 1 is “E0”, and this “E0” represents that no vibration occurs. Production No. The data of "Vibrate" in 2 is "E1", and "E1" represents that the operating means A is vibrated before the operation of the operating means A (chance button 136). Production No. Each effect data of "liquid crystal", "movable means", "sound", and "LED" in 2 becomes effect data after the operation of the operation means A, and the operation means A vibrating before the operation is operated According to each of these effect data, the effect after the operation is started. Production No. The data of "Vibrate" in 3 is "E2", and this "E2" represents that the operating means A is vibrated after the operation of the operating means A (chance button 136). Production No. The effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound” and “LED” in 3 become effect data after the operation of the operation means A. Production No. No. 2 data and effect No. The data of 3 may also be called up when the operation means B (the transmission unit 191) is operated. This is because there may be cases where each effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound” and “LED” can be used as effect data after the operation of the operation means B. In this case, after the operation means B is operated, the effect No. No. 2 data or effect No. The effects according to the "liquid crystal", "movable means", "sound" and "LED" in the data of 3 are started, and the operation means A vibrates according to the data of "E1" or "E2". That is, for the effect No. Data 2 includes data (E1) for vibrating the operating means A before operating the operating means A, and other data such as "liquid crystal" become data after the operation of the operating means A, but the operating means B The operation No. When the data of 2 is read out, the data of “Vibrate” is also executed after the operation of the operation means B in accordance with other data such as “Liquid Crystal”. In addition, production No. No. 2 data and effect No. In the case of the data of 3, the data of at least "liquid crystal" is different as "A1" and "A2", and the data of "liquid crystal" of "A1" is used after the operation means B is operated. Is the effect No. It is not the data of 3, but the effect No. It is necessary to read out the 2 data.

  The effect data on the operation means B may also be called up when the operation means A is operated, and after the operation means A is operated, “liquid crystal”, “movable means” in the effect data on the operation means B, The presentation according to each presentation data of "Sound" and "LED" is started, and the operation means B vibrates according to the data of "Vibrate". However, the effect data regarding the operation means B may not be called even when the operation means A is operated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an execution timing regarding an effect involving the operation means A and an effect involving the operation means B. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 12, time passes from the left to the right of the figure. In the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (c), "operation means B related effect" started from the top according to the operation of the operation means B (transmission part 191), the operation means B is operated "Operation means B operation effective state" in which the operation means B related effect is started, "operation means B operation" indicating that the operation means B is operated, and operation means A (chance button 136) "Operating means A related rendering" started according to the operation, "Operating means A operation enabled state" in which the operating means A related rendering is started when the operating means A is operated, the operating means A is operated “Operating means A operation” is shown to indicate the event. The "operation means B related effect" includes an effect in which the operation means B itself vibrates, and also includes effect display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. The "operation means A-related effect" includes an effect in which the operation means A itself vibrates, and also includes effect display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. However, the “operation means A-related effect” may only indicate that the operation means A itself vibrates. In the "operation means B operation valid state", there are cases where a notification prompting the user to operate the operation means B is performed and cases where it is not performed. Even in the "operation means A operation valid state", the operation is performed. There are cases where notification (operation promotion notification) for prompting operation of the means A is performed and cases where it is not performed. If these notifications are performed, the player can know that the operation is enabled, but if it is not performed, each operation means becomes a so-called back button.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12A, the operation means B is not operated during the operation means B operation enabled state, but the operation means B related effect is started simultaneously with the end of the operation means B operation enabled state. Thus, the "operation means B related effect" may be started even if the operation means B is not operated. The “operation means B related effect” may be an effect that is always started even if the operation means B is not operated. Further, the contents of the “operation means B related effect” may be different depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the operation means B. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A related effect is started simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effect without passing through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. . Thus, the "operation means A-related effect" may also be started even if the operation means A is not operated. The “operation means A-related effect” may also be an effect that is always started even if the operation means A is not operated. Further, the contents of the “operation means A related presentation” may be different depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the operation means A. In this example, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect are the same, for example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) Start simultaneously and end simultaneously.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12 (b), when the operation means B is operated and the operation means B is operated during the operation means B operation enabled state, the operation means B operation effective state is executed to the execution of the operation means B related effect. Switch. On the other hand, with regard to the operation means A, here too, without passing through the "operation means A operation valid state" and without operating the operation means A, the operation means A related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effect It is done. Also in this example, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect are the same, for example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) Start simultaneously and end simultaneously.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 12C, when the operation means B is operated and the operation means B is operated during the operation means B operation valid state, the operation means B operation valid state is executed to the execution of the operation means B related effect Switch. On the other hand, with regard to the operation means A, here too, without passing through the "operation means A operation valid state" and without operating the operation means A, the operation means A related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effect It is done. In the example shown in FIG. 12C, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect is longer than the execution period of the operation means A-related effect, for example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission unit 191) The vibration of A (chance button 136) is simultaneously started, but after the vibration of the operation means A ends first and the vibration of the operation means A ends, the vibration of the operation means B ends.

  The start time may be the same, and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect may be longer than the execution period of the operation means B-related effect. Alternatively, the start time is different, and the operation means B-related effect starts first, and then the operation means A-related effect starts, the operation means A-related effect ends first, and then the operation means B-related effect ends. May be Also, conversely, the operation means A-related effect starts first, and then the operation means B-related effect starts, the operation means B-related effect ends first, and then the operation means A-related effect ends. Good. Further, the end time may be the same, and the operation means B-related effect starts first, and then the operation means A-related effect starts, and the operation means B-related effect and the operation means A-related effect end together Alternatively, the operation means A-related effect starts first, and then the operation means B-related effect starts, and the operation means A-related effect and the operation means B-related effect may end together .

  Further, as described with reference to FIG. 12 (a), when the operation related to the operating unit B is executed without operating the operating unit B, for example, the operation related to the operating unit B is the operation effective of the operating unit B If the mode is to be executed until the first time has elapsed from the start of the state, the operation time of the operation means B related effect may be longer as the operation means B is operated earlier. become able to.

  FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing an execution timing regarding an effect involving operation means. Arrows in each of FIG. 13A to FIG. 13C indicate a vibration period of the operation means A.

  The example shown in FIG. 13A is an example during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and when the operation promoting means B is operated in a state where the operation promoting notification of the operating means B (transmissive portion 191) is performed, the operation is performed The vibration of the means A (chance button 136) is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L etc., the judge effect is started. The judgment effect here is the judgment effect for the big hit, and corresponds to an example of the first effect. The first effect is the advance effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). Further, the first effect is not the advance notice effect on the operation means A (chance button 136). When the result of the judgment effect is displayed, the judgment effect is ended, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the fluctuation display of three decorative symbols is started as the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. The vibration of the operation means A is continued to the middle of the execution period of the fluctuation display. Soon, the fluctuation display is finished, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is displayed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13 (a), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the fluctuation time of the entire decorative symbol is already determined, and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols is displayed. Period of time is shortened, and the vibration of the operation means A will be continued until just before the end of the period of time of the reduced fluctuation indication.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, before the notification of the result regarding the player's profit such as the finalized display, the effect such as the vibration of the operation means A is ended so that the player can concentrate on the notification of the result regarding the profit. I have to.

  The example shown in FIG. 13 (b) is an example during a big hit game, and when the operation means B is operated in a state where the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission part 191) is performed, the operation means A ( The vibration of the chance button 136) is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like, the judgment effect is started. The judge in the judgment presentation here is a judge that leads to whether or not to shift to a definite change state. When the result of the judgment effect is displayed, the judgment effect is ended, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is informed that aiming at a specific winning opening (for example, V winning opening) in the next round. The vibration of the operation means A is continued halfway through the execution period of the notification. Soon, the next round is started, and it is notified again that aiming at a specific winning combination (for example, V winning combination).

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13 (b), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the specific winning opening is aimed at the next round because the maximum allowable time for one round is already determined. The execution period for notifying that is shortened, and the vibration of the operation means A is continued until slightly before the end of the shortened execution period of the notification.

  As described above, even during the big hit game, the effect involving the operation means is executed. Moreover, the round which should aim at a specific winning a prize mouth is limited, and if it can be made to win a specific winning a prize mouth in the round, it shifts to a definite change state after the end of the big hit game. For this reason, the round which should aim at the specific winning a prize opening is an important round leading to the player's profit, and before the start of the round leading to the player's profit, the effect such as the vibration of the operating means A is ended and the player We are focusing on aiming for a specific winning combination.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 13A and the example shown in FIG. 13B, even when the operation timing of the operation means B changes, the vibration period of the operation means A does not change but becomes constant.

  The example shown in FIG. 13 (c) is an example of the pseudo-series effect during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in the state where the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission part 191) is performed, the operation means B operates Then, the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) is started, and the stop display of the pseudo consecutive symbols is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like. The vibration of the operation means A is continued until the stop display of the pseudo run symbol is finished, and the vibration of the operation means A is also finished at the same time when the stop display of the pseudo run symbol is finished. Then, the next pseudo variation display is started, and the number of times of pseudo run is the nth time, and the operation promotion notification of the operation means B is performed also in the nth pseudo variation display.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13 (c), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the period of the stop display of the pseudo run symbol started by the operation of the operation means B is shortened. The vibration of the operation means A is ended simultaneously with the end of the stop display of the shortened pseudo run symbol.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13C, when the operation timing of the operating means B changes, the vibration period of the operating means A also changes.

  In summary including what has been described above, the operation means A can vibrate in a period in which a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is at least performed. In addition, the operation means A may be capable of vibrating in at least a part of a period in which a judgment effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is being performed. For example, the vibration may be ended simultaneously with the end of the judgment effect, the vibration may be continued even if the judgment effect is ended, or the vibration may be ended before the end of the judgment effect. Moreover, the vibration period in which the operation means A vibrates may be constant, and may differ according to the presence or absence of operation of the operation means B, and operation timing.

The upper example shown in FIG. 13D is an example in which the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means A. The final judge effect is a judge regarding whether or not to be a big hit in the variable display during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, or a judge showing the end of the reach production (the reach production of the final stage such as strong SP reach) It is In this upper example,
The period in which the operation means A vibrates is a period in which the operation of the operation means A is handled as effective, and when the operation means A is operated, the vibration ends and the final judgment effect is started. Therefore, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period L1 between the vibration start timing of the operation means A and the start timing of the final judgment effect becomes long, and the period in which the operation means A vibrates becomes long. In addition, even when the operation means A is not operated, the final judge effect is started. In this case, the period L1 is the longest and has a fixed period length.

  On the other hand, in the lower example shown in FIG. 13D, the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means B, and the vibration of the operation means A is also started. Therefore, the vibration start timing of the operation means A and the start timing of the final judgment effect become simultaneous, and the period length between them becomes zero. However, while the operation means A is vibrating, it can be ensured for a fixed period. The final judgment effect here also corresponds to an example of the first effect, and is an advance notice effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136), and is not an advance notice effect regarding the operation means A (chance button 136).

  In addition, while the final judgment effect is started according to the operation of the operation means B, the vibration of the operation means A is upward when it is started by operating the operation means A after the operation of the operation means B. If the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period between the start timing of the final judgment effect and the vibration start timing of the operation means A becomes long, and the period in which the operation means A vibrates becomes long.

  Then, the goods arrange | positioned rather than the 1st decorative symbol display apparatus 208L at the back side are demonstrated.

  FIG. 14 is a view showing a movable part arranged on the rear side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 14A, the front left side is the front side, and the rear right side is the rear side. A first movable character 251 is disposed on the rear side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 14 (a). The character "Chance" is displayed on the first movable character 251, and the LED is built-in, and the first movable character 251 shown in FIG. 14A has a second display mode (for example, a blue display mode). It is on. A plurality of lighting modes and blinking modes are prepared for this LED. The first movable role item 251 is a kind of effect means, and is also a moving means capable of moving from the initial position to the first position via the second position.

  Here, for example, the first display mode corresponds to a white display mode, the second display mode corresponds to a blue display mode, the third display mode corresponds to a green display mode, and the fourth display mode is The fifth display mode corresponds to a gold display mode, and the sixth display mode corresponds to a rainbow display mode. Various LEDs, various icons, and various displays can be displayed in the first to sixth display modes. Among the display modes of the first to sixth display modes, the display mode having the larger number is more advantageous to the player. For example, the larger the display mode, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the big hit, or the easier it is to start a certain effect. What has been described here is the same for each of the following effect examples. For example, the second display mode is lighting of blue and light emission, and the fourth display mode is lighting of red and light emission.

  A fourth movable character 254 is disposed on the back side further than the first movable character 251. The fourth movable character 254 is provided with LEDs 2541 to 2543 in each of the upper, middle and lower portions, and in the fourth movable character 254 shown in FIG. 14A, any of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 is lit in the second display mode doing. The upper LED 2541, the middle LED 2542, and the lower LED 2543 can be individually turned on / off or blinked, and a plurality of lighting modes and blinking modes are prepared for each of these three LEDs 2541-2543. There are also provided a lighting mode and a blinking mode in which the In the fourth movable character 254 shown in FIG. 14A, all the LEDs 2541 to 2543 are lit in the second display mode. The fourth movable character 254 is also a kind of effect means, and is also a moving means movable from the initial position. However, the fourth movable part 254 may be fixedly disposed without moving. Further, since the first movable part 251 and the fourth movable part 254 are arranged to be shifted in the front-rear direction, even if they move simultaneously, they do not collide, but both 251 and 254 in the front-rear direction You may align and arrange. In this case, movement control may be performed so that the two 251 and 254 do not interfere with each other, or the movable areas may not overlap originally. Alternatively, the effect using the first movable part 251 and the effect using the fourth movable part 254 may not be performed at the same time. That is, when the first movable combination 251 is in the visible state, the fourth movable combination 254 is in the non-visible state and is off. Note that the fourth movable role object 254 may move as long as it is in an invisible state, or may remain stationary. When the fourth movable part 254 is in the visible state, the first movable part 251 is off. The first movable role object 251 may move as long as it is in an invisible state, or may remain stationary.

  FIG. 14 (b) is a diagram showing the movement of the first movable combination 251. In FIG. 14B, a first movable part 251 shown by a solid line represents a first movable part at the initial position. The initial position of the first movable character 251 is a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (position on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L), and the first movable character object 251 has its initial position The second position and the first position overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second position is on the back side of the upper portion of the right symbol display area 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first position is on the back side of the upper portion of the middle symbol display area 208b in the first decorative symbol display device 208L Become. In FIG. 14B, the first movable part 251 at the second position is represented by a dotted line, and the first movable part 251 at the first position is represented by a dashed-dotted line.

  The first movable part 251 can be stopped at any position between the initial position and the first position, but may be stopped only at the second position. Also, it may be movable to the back side of the upper part of the left symbol display area 208a beyond the first position.

  In a certain state (for example, the state before the final display of the special figure (during symbol change display), the state where the change display of the decorative symbol is performed, the state before reach, etc.) In the case of being in one position, the effect of the first notice is more easily performed than in the case of being in the second position. Although the details will be described later with regard to the effect of the first notice referred to here, for example, it is an effect of a notice (so-called normal notice) regarding symbol variation display currently being performed, and a pseudo-sequence effect, a super reach effect, It may be a change effect of the display mode of the fluctuation icon. However, the effect of the first advance notice may be the effect of the advance notice. In addition, in a certain state (for example, a state before the final display of the special figure (during symbol variation display), a state where the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, a state before reach, etc.) In the case of the first position, it may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form finally than in the case of the second position. That is, the expectation (reliability) of the big hit may be high. Furthermore, even when the first movable role product 251 is in the second position, the effect of the first notice may be executed, and the big hit symbol form may be finally displayed. However, when the first movable character 251 is in the second position, the first notice may not be performed at all, and the big hit symbol form is finally displayed. It does not have to be at all.

  In addition, the 1st movable role thing 251 may move or emit light also in the start effect etc. of the big hit game.

  FIG. 14C is a diagram showing how the fourth movable character 254 moves. In FIG. 14C, the fourth movable part 254 indicated by a solid line represents the fourth movable part in the initial position. The initial position of the fourth movable character 254 is also a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but the initial position is a position on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth movable character 254 is movable from its initial position to a seventh position, an eighth position, and a ninth position, which overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The seventh position is on the back side of the left symbol display area 208a in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the eighth position is on the back side of the middle symbol display area 208b in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position is on the back side of the right symbol display area 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 14C, the fourth movable part 254 in the seventh position is represented by a dotted line, and the fourth movable part 254 in the eighth position is represented by a dashed dotted line, and the fourth movable part in the ninth position is illustrated. 254 is represented by a two-dot chain line.

  The fourth movable part 254 can stop at any position between the initial position and the ninth position, but may stop only at the seventh position and the eighth position. Also, the fourth movable part 254 may be movable other than the position described in FIG.

  In a certain state (for example, the state before the final display of the special figure (during symbol change display), the state where the change display of the decorative symbol is performed, the state before reach, etc.) The effect of the first notice is easier to be executed in the case of the eight position than in the case of the seventh position, and the effect in the case of the ninth position is more than that in the case of the eighth position. (1) It is easy to carry out the production of the notice. In addition, in a certain state (for example, the state before the final display of the special figure (in the symbol fluctuation display), the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed variably, the state before the reach, etc.) In the case of the eighth position, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol form than in the case of the seventh position, and in the case of the ninth position, the case of the ninth position is in the eighth position. It may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form finally than in the case. In addition, of the effects using the first movable character 251 and the effects using the fourth movable character 254, the fourth of the variations of the decorative symbol in which only the effect using the first movable character 251 is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol on which the effect using the movable character 254 is performed may be easier to display the finalized display of the jackpot symbol aspect. That is, there is a relationship between the degree of expectation of the jackpot, and of the effects using the first movable character 251 and the effects using the fourth movable character 254, only the effect using the first movable character 251 is performed. Of the effect using the first movable character 251 and the effect using the fourth movable character 254, rather than the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol performed only the effect using the fourth movable character 254 Of the jackpot may be more likely to be displayed as the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol form. Alternatively, the relationship of the degree of expectation of the jackpot is the reverse of the relation (the first movable character 251 is the opposite) of the relationship described here (the effect using the fourth movable character 254 is more likely to cause a big hit) May be a big hit).

  In addition, the 4th movable role thing 254 may also move and emit light also in the start effect etc. of the big hit game.

  As described above, the first movable character 251 and the fourth movable character 254 described with reference to FIG. 14 are, among the effects described below, even if these movable characters are not shown. , Applicable. For example, the first position, the second position, and the seventh position of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the effect example shown in FIGS. 33 to 38, the effect example shown in FIG. 40, and the effect example shown in FIG. The first movable part 251 and / or the fourth movable part 254 may be moved to each position by partially transmitting the region corresponding to the ninth position to the ninth position.

  As one of the distinctive effects in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, an effect (hereinafter referred to as “transmission effect”) is performed by increasing the light transmission amount in a part of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is a transmission liquid crystal display device. Can be mentioned.

  FIG. 15: is the figure which showed the flow of an example from pseudo | simulation consecutive production to big hit without a transparent production being performed in steps.

  In FIG. 15, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N are not shown, and only the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. In addition, in order to distinguish between the state in which the transmission effect is performed and the state in which the transmission effect is not performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is the transmission liquid crystal display device, the normal state (the light state is not performed In the state where the amount of transmission is low), the entire display screen is displayed in gray, and the region where transmission effect is performed (the region in which the amount of transmission of light is increased) is displayed in white. Hereinafter, these things are the same to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, a fluctuation icon is provided at the center The h0 is displayed in a manner of being placed on the pedestal, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are disposed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. In the hold icon display area, one hold icon is displayed on each pedestal. At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (a), three variable displays of the special view 1 are held, and the first held icon h11, the second held icon h12, and the third held icon h13 are displayed in the held icon display area. It is done. The variation icon h0, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are all in the default display mode (first display mode: white circular display mode). On the other hand, only the first hold icon h11 is in a second display mode which is one of the display modes of the pre-reading advance notice. In addition, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanatory display unit is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and various information related to games and effects are displayed (tutorial display), and the contents thereof are updated at appropriate timings. Be done. Although nothing is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 15A, the tutorial display unit TT1 is not limited to the explanation display, and a notice display or a demonstration effect display may be performed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the clear sky background display. Although the combination of the decoration patterns of this "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7" is a combination of losing, it is also a combination of chance eyes. That is, the advance notice is given by the stop display of the combination of chances. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed at the timing shown to Fig.15 (a), you may make it erase | eliminate the fluctuation icon h0 at the timing when the symbol was decidedly displayed.

  Furthermore, the states of the fourth symbol display devices 284a1 and 284a2 are shown at the upper right of each figure, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display device 284a1 corresponding to the special figure 1 is a square, and the variation of the special figure 1 During the display, it lights in white, and in the stop display of the special figure 1, it lights in the lighting mode of loss (here, the lighting mode of gray) or the lighting mode of the big hit (here, the lighting mode of black). Also, the special figure 2 fourth symbol display device 284a2 corresponding to the special figure 2 is circular, and lights in white during the variation display of the special figure 2 and during the stop display of the special figure 2, the lighting mode of Here, it lights up in the gray lighting mode) or the big hit lighting mode (here, the black lighting mode). In addition, the state of the chance button 136 is also shown below it. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 15A is lit in the first display mode.

  In FIG. 15 (b), the variable display of the special view 1 is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (b), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display In each of the regions 208c, high-speed variation of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in FIG. 15 (a), the first hold icon h11, which is the second display mode as the display mode of the advance notice, is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0 in FIG. 15 (b). In the figure (b), the display mode of the variation icon h0 is also the second display mode, and is displayed in the display mode of the normal notice. The transmission effect is more easily performed when the variation icon h0 is displayed in the display mode of the normal notice than in the default display mode. However, in the example illustrated in FIG. I can not do it. Further, the hold icon is shifted by one shift, and in FIG. 15 (b), a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12, both of which are display modes of the defiling, are displayed.

  In (d) of FIG. 15, the decorative symbol of “continuation”, which is a pseudo consecutive symbol, is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation) in the middle symbol display area 208 b. The display of the temporary stop of the pseudo run symbol is a display showing that the pseudo run effect is started. Note that "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped (swing variation) in the left symbol display area 208a, and "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped (swing variation) in the right symbol display area 208c.

  In (e) of FIG. 15, re-variation in pseudo-series effect is started, and character display “× 2” representing the number of pseudo-sequences is displayed in the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208 b. In addition, as the number of times of pseudo run increases, the degree of expectation (reliability of the big hit) to hit the big on the symbol variation display currently performed increases. That is, the character display representing the number of pseudo-sequences “× 3” has a higher degree of expectation than the character display representing the number of pseudo-sequences “× 2”.

  In FIG. 15 (g), the decorative symbol of "continuation", which is a pseudo continuous symbol, is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation) again in the middle symbol display area 208b, and in FIG. In the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b, a character display "x 3" indicating the number of times of pseudo run is displayed.

  In FIG. 15 (i), the pseudo series effect is ended, and the super reach effect is started. Super reach production here is swordsman reach production. Other super reach productions include Oppake reach production and princess discovery reach production, which will be described later. However, swordsman reach production has a higher expectation of a big hit than Ochake reach production. In addition, the princess discovery reach production also has a high expectation of the big hit than the overreach reach production. In addition, in the sword great reach production and the princess discovery reach production, the expectation for the big hit may be higher in the sword great reach production, or may be lower on the contrary. As shown in FIG. 15 (i), when sword reach effect is started, the variation display of the decorative symbols performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c disappears, Instead, the display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, when the sword strike effect is started, the UI unit UI3 disappears, the hold icons h11 and h12 become non-display, and only the change icon h0 continues to be displayed. Furthermore, since the hold icons h11 and h12 are not displayed, the hold number display is additionally displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the number-of-retentions display, the number on the left (here, "2") represents the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 and the number on the right (here, "0") represents the number of reservations in Special Figure 2. In addition, the background display changes in the Ken-Age reach production.

  In FIG. 15 (j), the main character of the lord YM and the enemy player KG are facing each other, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Although the situation after the game, that is, the situation after the game being played by pulling the swords against each other is displayed, it is in a state where it is not yet known which one has won.

  In FIG. 15 (l), the button effect is started. The button effect here corresponds to a final judge effect that displays which of the lord YM and the swordsman KG has won. When the button effect is started, the display mode of the chance button 136 which has been lit in the first display mode until then changes to the fourth display mode. Further, at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (l), a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 lit in the fourth display mode and an operation (depression) of the chance button 136 The display 136b of the arrow as the prompting display and the character display of "one blow" and the remaining period meter display 136c as the display regarding the period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as the effective one (operation effective period) are displayed. . A part (both ends) of the remaining period meter display 136c overlaps with a part of each of the lord YM and the sword master KG.

  Although the effect on the chance button 136 is referred to as a button effect, the button effect is an effect on operation means other than the chance button 136 (for example, the transmitting portion 191, a second chance button, an operation lever, etc.) The same applies to the following description.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (l), the chance button 136 lit in the fourth display mode is pressed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (m), the button images etc. 136a-c disappear. , The scene where the lord YM fell is displayed. That is, the enemy player KG wins, and it is lost in the currently displayed symbol variation display. In the fifth symbol pd5 displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (m), the combination of lost ("6"-"7"-"6") is fluctuating. When the chance button 136 is operated, it returns to lighting according to the first display mode.

  Next, an example of a big hit will be described. In FIG. 15 (l), which is a modification of FIG. 15 (l), the button effect is started, but in the button effect here, the button image 136a is displayed large and a part of the button image 136a But, it has overlapped to a part of each of the lord YM and the swordsman KG. As described above, a plurality of display modes are prepared for the display (operation promotion display) displayed by the button effect, and the success rate of the effect (here, the probability that the lord YM wins) and the big hit Expectations may change.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (l-1), the chance button 136 lit in the fourth display mode is pressed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (l-2), the button image etc. 136a The symbol c disappears, and the display is switched to a background display in which the letter "Congratulation" is displayed on the upper left, and the fifth symbol pd5 displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a combination of big hit ("6"-" 6 "-" 6 ") has started shaking. In addition, the background display in which the character of "holiday" is displayed on the upper left may be a background display for predicting that the lady YM will win, or may be a background display for notifying of the jackpot confirmation. Subsequently, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (m '), a scene in which the sword master KG falls is displayed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (n), the display of the decorative symbol is restored in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. , And the combination of the decoration pattern of the big hit ("decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6") is finalized and displayed. Moreover, the stop display is performed also with the fifth symbol pd5. Although the display of the UI unit UI3 is not resumed (return display) even when the finalized display is performed, the display of the UI unit UI3 may be resumed when the finalized display is performed, or the display of the big hit is displayed. In this case, the return display may not be displayed, and the return display may be performed in the case of the confirmation display of the lost.

  As described above, the effect example described with reference to FIG. 15 is an effect example in which the transmission effect is not performed, but when the variation icon is the display mode of the normal notice, the transmission effect is always performed. However, in the case of a big hit, a transparent effect may be performed. Moreover, even in the case of a loss, the transmission effect may be performed. Alternatively, there may be a case where a big hit is made without performing the transmission effect.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of the transmission effect in stages.

  In the following, differences from the example from the pseudo-series effect to the big hit without performing the transparent effect described with reference to FIG. 15 will be mainly described, and the description of the common points may be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 16 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7", which is the combination of chance, is stopped and displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a second display mode, which is one of display modes of the pre-reading advance notice.

  In FIG. 16 (b), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this stage, the first movable character 251 is at the initial position out of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 16C, the first movable part 251 at the initial position moves to the second position. In FIG. 16C, the first movable part 251 at the second position is indicated by a dotted line. The first movable combination 251 represented by the dotted line is in the off state. The entire first decorative symbol display device 208L is in a normal state (a state in which the amount of transmitted light is low) in which the transmission effect is not performed, and the first movable character 251 in the unlit state moved to the second position is the front It is not visible from the side. In addition, depending on the color of the image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the normal state, the first movable character 251 on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be viewed visually although it is difficult to visually recognize There is a possibility. Also in the following description, the invisible may include visual difficulty. The second position may be the initial position of the first movable combination 251.

  In FIG. 16 (d), the transmission effect is started. The display screen (entire display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 16D includes a region overlapping from the front side to the first movable combination 251 at the second position Only the second display area 208-2 is changed to a state in which the light transmission amount is enhanced. That is, all of the first movable role objects 251 at the second position overlap the second display area 208-2 from the front side. Although 2nd display area 208-2 shown in FIG.16 (d) is a transparent state, it may not be completely transparent state. Hereinafter, even if it is not a completely transparent state, a state in which the transmission amount of light is relatively enhanced is not limited to the second display area 208-2 but is referred to as a transparent state for the sake of convenience. In the following description, the transparency (transparency) may be different even if it is in the transparent state uniformly. Further, in this example, only the second display area 208-2 is changed to a state in which the transmission amount of light is enhanced, but the transmission amount of light is increased also in the area other than the second display area 208-2. It may be changed to the state as That is, the state where the amount of light transmission is enhanced also outside the display area including the area overlapping from the front side to the rendering means such as the movable part or fixed part located on the rear side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device This may be the case, and this is the same in each of the following presentation examples. However, when there are a plurality of areas where the amount of light transmission is increased, there is a overlap from the front side to the rendering means such as a movable part or fixed part located on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device. The display region including the region where the light is transmitted may be a region in which the transmission of light is most enhanced, or the transmission of light may be equally enhanced in any of the regions.

  The second display area 208-2 shown in FIG. 16 (d) is a region larger than the first movable combination 251 at the second position, but is a region of the same size as the first movable combination 251, It is also good. The second display area 208-2 is an area overlapping the entire first movable combination 251 at the second position, but an area overlapping only a portion of the first movable combination 251 at the second position. May be That is, the region may be smaller than the first movable combination 251 at the second position, or may be a region shifted from the front side of the first movable combination 251. In FIG. 16D, the first movable part 251 in the light-off state at the second position is easily visible through the second display area 208-2 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In this example, the second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state after the first movable combination 251 moves to the second position, but the first movable combination 251 is positioned at the second position. At the same time, the second display area 208-2 may change to the transparent state. In some cases, the area corresponding to the second display area 208-2 may be in a transparent state before the first movable combination 251 is positioned at the second position. Furthermore, the second display area 208-2 may change to the transparent state as part of the initial operation immediately after the power is turned on, and may be in the transparent state also in part or all of the jackpot game. It may change. That is, the first display area 208-2 may change to the transparent state before the transmission effect here, or may change to the transparent state after the transmission effect here It may be. Furthermore, in the period in which the transparent state is changed, the transmission effect here may be the longest, or a case longer than the transmission effect here may be another state, or the transmission effect here May be the shortest, or may be another state if it is shorter than the transmission effect here.

  The first movable role object 251 can be turned on in display modes other than the second display mode, and can be driven in a plurality of types of modes such as blinking. Such a plurality of display modes (including the mode in the case of not lighting) in the first movable combination 251 is the execution of the effects (for example, pseudo-sequence effect, super reach effect, judge effect, etc.) to be executed thereafter It may represent a probability or it may represent the degree of expectation (reliability) of a big hit. In this example, after the second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state, as shown in FIG. 16 (e), the first movable combination 251 lights up in the second display mode, but the second display At the same time as the area 208-2 changes to the transparent state, it may be lit in the second display mode. In addition, before the second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state, the first movable role object 251 may be lit in the second display mode.

  In FIG. 16F, the first movable combination 251 is turned off, and in FIG. 16G, the transmission effect is ended, and the second display area 208-2 returns to the state in which the light transmission amount is low. Although the transparent state is continuous from FIG. 16 (d) to 16 (f), it may be in the transparent state intermittently, or may be in the transparent state intermittently only, and only in the case of being continuous. It may be Also in each of the following presentation examples, even when the transparent state is continuous over a plurality of steps, it may be intermittently transparent or may be intermittently intermittently transparent, or continuous It may be only the case. As described above, the intermittent or continuous transparent state described here may be applied to all the transmission effects, but may be applied only to certain transmission effects.

  Also, in the state of FIG. 16 (c), the button effect is started, and the button image or // on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. And an operation prompt is displayed. A configuration in which the transmission effect is started according to the operation when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the display of the button effect is displayed, that is, the movable role object located on the back side of the transmission liquid crystal display device The display area including the area overlapping from the front side to the rendering means such as the fixed combination or the like may be changed to the transparent state. Furthermore, the size of the display area to be in the transparent state may be changed (for example, enlarged or reduced) according to the continuous hitting operation of the operation means such as the chance button 136 or the like. In addition, it may replace with continuous hitting operation and may be long press operation etc., and should just be an operation aspect different from usual single press operation. Further, in this case, if the size of the display area changes to a certain size, it may be successful, and the effect of the first notice may be started. For example, if the size of the display area is expanded to a certain size, it is a success, and if it is a failure, the display area returns to the opaque state after expanding the display area to some extent (before expanding to a certain size) It may be (disappeared) form. The various button effects described here are also applicable to each of the subsequent effect examples.

  Although the second display area 208-2 shown in FIG. 16G is in a state in which the transmission of light is completely blocked in this example, it may not be in a state in which the transmission of light is completely blocked. Hereinafter, even when the light transmission is not completely blocked, the light transmission amount is relatively low, which is not limited to the second display area 208-2 and is referred to as an opaque state for the sake of convenience. In the following description, even if it is in the opaque state, the state changes depending on the color of the image displayed in the second display area 208-2. For example, if an image of a yellowish tint or a white tint is displayed, the back side may be visible to some extent even in the opaque state. The opaque state is the initial state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but in some cases, the transparent state may be the initial state.

  In this example, although the second display area 208-2 returns to the opaque state after the first movable combination 251 is turned off, the second display area is simultaneously turned off. 208-2 may return to the opaque state. Also, in some cases, the second display area 208-2 may return to the opaque state in a state in which the first movable combination 251 is on.

  In FIG. 16 (h), the first movable part 251 which has been at the second position so far is returned to the initial position where it is separated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this example, after the second display area 208-2 returns to the opaque state, the first movable combination 251 moves from the second position to the initial position, and the first movable combination 251 moves. Although it is difficult or invisible, in some cases, the first movable part 251 may start moving toward the initial position when the second display area 208-2 is in the transparent state. The moving first movable part 251 may be in the extinguished state, or may be lit or blinked in the second display mode or the like.

  In the example shown in FIG. 16, since the transmission effect is performed in the state where the first movable combination 251 is in the second position, the pseudo effects are simulated compared to the case where the transmission effect is performed in the state where the first movable role 251 is in the first position. Although it is difficult to perform continuous production (production of the first notice) and pseudo continuous production may be started, in this example, the pseudo continuous production is not started, and as shown in FIG. On the decorative symbol display device 208L, the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 6"-"decoration 8"-"decoration 7") is displayed. According to the example shown in FIG. 16, it can be said that the notice of the fluctuation icon by the display mode of the normal notice is a false notice. Although there may be a loss even if the pseudo-series effect is executed, it can be said that the transmission effect of FIG. 16 (d) to FIG. 16 (f) is also a false announcement.

  FIG. 17: is the figure which showed gradually an example in which the transmission production is performed in the state which has the 1st movable role thing 251 in the 2nd position, after the pseudo connection effect is started.

  Hereinafter, the description overlapping with the description using FIG. 16 may be omitted.

  In FIG. 17 (b), the decorative symbol of "continuation", which is a pseudo continuous symbol, is temporarily stopped (sway fluctuation) in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a pseudo continuous effect is started. In FIG. In the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b, a character display “× 2” representing the number of times of pseudo run is displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 17, the first movable combination 251 moves to the second position (the same figure (d)) during the first re-variation of the pseudo-series effect (the figure (d)), and the second display area 208-2 is transparent. It changes to the state (the same figure (e)), and then, the first movable part 251 is lighted in the second display mode in the second position (the same figure (f)). Thereafter, while the first re-variation continues, the first movable character 251 is extinguished (FIG. 17 (g)), and then the second display area 208-2 returns to the opaque state (FIG. 17 (h)), After being in the opaque state, the first movable part 251 returns to the initial position (FIG. 6 (i)). In the pseudo-series effect, the degree of expectation of the big hit increases as the number of pseudo-sequences increases. However, in this example, the second temporary stop is not performed, and the number of pseudo-sequences is not three; In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in Fig. 7, the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 6"-"decoration 8"-"decoration 7") is finalized and displayed. In some cases, the pseudo-series effect may continue up to the third time.

  As described above, even after the pseudo-series effect is started, the transmission effect may be started, and depending on the location where the transmission effect is started, the continuation (development level) of the pseudo-series effect is shared be able to. That is, when the first movable role object 251 is at the first position, the effect of the first notice is more likely to be continued than when it is at the second position. Here, the effect of the first notice is a pseudo-series effect, but it may be an effect of a step-up notice, or may be a development effect from normal reach to super reach.

  FIG. 18: is the figure which showed gradually an example in which the transmission production is performed in the state which has the 1st movable role thing 251 in a 1st position.

  In FIG. 18 (b), the decorative symbol of "continuation" which is a pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation) in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a pseudo continuous effect is started, and in FIG. In the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b, a character display “× 2” representing the number of times of pseudo run is displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, during the first re-fluctuation of the pseudo-series effect, the first movable combination 251 moves from the initial position to the first position via the second position (FIG. 6 (d)). . The first movable role object 251 may be temporarily stopped at the second position, or may move to the first position all at once. In addition, since the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is in an opaque state as a whole, it is difficult or invisible to see the first movable combination 251 moving.

  In FIG. 18E, the transmission effect is started. The display screen (entire display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 18E, including the area overlapping from the front side to the first movable combination 251 at the first position Only the 1 display area 208-1 is in the transparent state. That is, all of the first movable role objects 251 at the first position overlap the first display area 208-1 in the transparent state from the front side. The first display area 208-1 shown in FIG. 18E is a region larger than the first movable part 251 at the first position, but is a region having the same size as the first movable part 251, It is also good. Further, the first display area 208-1 is an area overlapping the entire first movable combination 251 at the first position, but an area overlapping only a part of the first movable combination 251 at the first position. May be That is, the region may be smaller than the first movable combination 251 at the first position, or may be a region shifted from the front side of the first movable combination 251. In FIG. 18E, the first movable part 251 in the unlit state at the first position is easily visible through the first display area 208-1 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In this example, the first display area 208-1 is changed to the transparent state after the first movable combination 251 moves to the first position, but the first movable combination 251 is positioned at the first position. At the same time, the first display area 208-1 may change to the transparent state. In some cases, the area corresponding to the first display area 208-1 may be in a transparent state before the first movable combination 251 is positioned at the first position. Furthermore, the first display area 208-1 may change to the transparent state as part of the initial operation immediately after the power is turned on, and may be in the transparent state also in part or all of the jackpot game. It may change. That is, the first display area 208-1 may change to the transparent state before the transmission effect here, or may change to the transparent state after the transmission effect here It may be. Furthermore, in the period in which the transparent state is changed, the transmission effect here may be the longest, or a case longer than the transmission effect here may be another state, or the transmission effect here May be the shortest, or may be another state if it is shorter than the transmission effect here.

  In FIG. 18F, although the first movable combination 251 is lit in the second display mode, it is lit in the second display mode at the same time as the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state It is also good. In addition, before the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state, the first movable role object 251 may be lit in the second display mode. Furthermore, as described above, the first movable role product 251 can also be lit in display modes other than the second display mode, as described above, and can be driven in a plurality of modes such as blinking.

  Thereafter, while the first re-variation continues, the first movable character 251 is extinguished (FIG. 18 (g)), and then the first display area 208-1 returns to the opaque state (FIG. 18 (h)), After being in the opaque state, the first movable part 251 returns to the initial position (FIG. 6 (i)).

  In FIG. 18 (k), the decorative symbol of "continuation", which is a pseudo continuous symbol, is temporarily stopped (shake fluctuation) in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 18, since the transmission effect is performed in the state where the first movable combination 251 is in the first position, the transmission effect is performed in the state where it is in the second position (shown in FIG. 17) Compared to the example), the pseudo rendition (the first notice rendition) is easier to be continued (developed), and in FIG. 18 (l), re-variation in the pseudo rendition is started again, and in the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b The character display of “× 3” representing the number of times of pseudo run is displayed.

  Then, in FIG. 18 (m), the pseudo-series production is finished, and the super reach production of the sword master reach is started, and in FIG. 18 (n), the main character of the main character YM and the sword master KG of the enemy character are facing each other. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in (o), a state after the lord YM and the sword man KG play a break, that is, a state after the game is played by pulling out the sword with each other, is shown (p In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in), a scene in which the sword master KG falls is displayed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 18 (q), the crown pattern YM has won, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit ("decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6") is finalized and displayed It is done. In addition, even when the transmission effect is performed in the state where the first movable role object 251 is at the first position, even when the number of times of the pseudo run extends up to three times, there may be a case where the game is lost. However, when the transmission effect is performed in a state where the first movable role object 251 is at the first position, a big hit may always be made.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, although the button effect shown in FIG. 15 (l) or FIG. 15 (l-1) is not started, the button effect may be started (the same applies to the examples in FIG. ). In addition, when the button effect is started, a big hit may always be made or, conversely, it may be always lost.

  In addition, it may be a notice about continuation (the second temporary stop) of the pseudo continuous effect that the transparent effect is executed in the state where the first movable role product 251 is in the first position, or the super reach effect It may be a notice that (for example, a sword strike reach) is to be started.

  Moreover, FIG. 18 (m ') is a modification of FIG. 18 (m). In the modified example shown in FIG. 18 (m '), the transmission effect is not performed during the pseudo continuous effect, and the transmission effect is performed during the super reach of the sword strike. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 18 (m '), a part of the character display ("Kengo reach") of the start effect of the Kagoshima reach and a part of the first display area 208-1 overlap . Note that the whole of the first display area 208-1 and part or all of the character display of "Kengo reach" may overlap, or the character display of "Kengo reach" may be reduced, or the first display area 208 By enlarging -1, the whole of the character display of "Kenou reach" and part or all of the first display area 208-1 may overlap. As shown in FIG. 18 (m '), when the character display of "Kengo reach" and the first display area 208-1 overlap, a part of the character display of "Kengo reach" disappears. That is, a part of the character display of "Kengo reach" is in the transparent state, and the first movable character 251 is visible on the back side of the part in the transparent state. The first movable part 251 shown in FIG. 18 (m ') is lit in the second display mode.

  In addition, a part of character display of "Kengo reach" overlaps with a part of the 2nd display area 208-2, and when there is the 1st movable character 251 in the 2nd position, it is "Kengo reach" While the character display is displayed, the second display area 208-2 may be in a transparent state.

  In addition, if the first position of the first movable character 251 is changed from the position above the middle symbol display area 208b to the position below, at least a part of the notice display by the fluctuation icon h0 of the display form of the normal notice At least a part of the first display area 208-1 is overlapped, and a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is cut away, and the first movable role object 251 can be seen behind it. In this case, even if the second position of the first movable part 251 is also changed from the position above the right symbol display area 208b to the position below, at least a part of the notice display by the fluctuation icon h0 of the display form of the normal notice. At least a part of the second display area 208-2 does not overlap, and only the first display area 208-1 overlaps the area where the fluctuation icon h0 of the display mode of the normal advance notice is displayed.

  In addition, when the number of pseudo runs reaches the third re-variation (FIG. 18 (l)), when developing into sword reach, the number of pseudo runs becomes the second re-variation (FIG. 18 (c) to FIG. 18 (k The transmission effect may be executed both immediately before and the re-variation where the number of times of the pseudo run is the third (FIG. 18 (l)), or even if the transmission effect is performed only in one or the other. Good. That is, when a certain reach effect (for example, a super reach effect) is started after a plurality of re-variations in the pseudo-series effect, the transmission effect is executed in at least one of the plurality of re-variations. It may be a configuration.

  FIG. 19 is a view showing in stages an example of the case where the transmission effect is performed even in the second position after the transmission effect is performed in the first position, with the first movable combination 251 being in the first position. It is.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 19 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7”, which is the combination of chances, is stopped and displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a second display mode, which is one of display modes of the pre-reading advance notice.

  In FIG. 19 (b), variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and in FIG. 19 (c), the first movable part 251 moves from the initial position to the first position and is positioned at the first position in the unlit state. ing. In FIG. 19 (d), the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state, and subsequently, the first movable combination 251 is lit in the second display mode at the first position (FIG. 19 (e)). Thereafter, before the pseudo-series effect is started, the first movable combination 251 is turned off (FIG. 19 (f)), and then the first display area 208-1 returns to the opaque state (FIG. (G)). , The transparent effect is finished. After the transmission effect in the first display area 208-1 is finished, in FIG. 19 (j), the decoration symbol of "continuation", which is a pseudo continuous symbol, is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation) in the middle symbol display area 208b. The effect is started, and in the figure (k), the re-variation in the simulated effect is started, and the character display of “× 2” representing the number of pseudo operations is displayed at the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b.

  The second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state during re-variation of the pseudo-series effect, and the first movable combination 251 lit in the second display mode at the second position becomes visible (FIG. 19). (M)). In FIG. 19 (g), after the first display area 208-1 returns to the opaque state, the first movable part 251 becomes invisible or hard to recognize, and once returns to the initial position, If it moves to the second position, if it moves to the second position by the timing shown in FIG. 19 (m), it may move to the second position immediately after the first display area 208-1 returns to the opaque state. Sometimes move to the second position. In this example, the second temporary stop is not performed, and the number of pseudo-sequences is not three, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. "Decoration 6"-"decoration 8"-"decoration 7") is displayed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 19 (m ′) shows an example different from FIG. (M), and the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state again during the re-variation of the pseudo-series effect, in the first position. The first movable combination 251 lit in the second display mode is visible. In FIG. 19 (m ′), since the transmission effect is performed again with the first movable combination 251 at the first position, the second temporary stop is also performed. Specifically, it is the same as the example shown in FIG. 18 (g) to FIG. 18 (q).

  FIG. 20 is a view showing in stages an example of effects using the first movable part 251 and the fourth movable part 254.

  Fig.20 (a)-the same figure (h) are the same as Fig.16 (a)-the figure (h), and the transmission effect is performed in the state which has the 1st movable role thing 251 in the 2nd position . That is, in FIG. 20D to FIG. 20F, the second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state, and the first movable combination 251 at the second position is visible.

  As described above, the transparent effect is performed in a state where the first movable role object 251 is at the second position, but in this example, the pseudo continuous effect is started. That is, in FIG. 20 (j), the decorative symbol of "continuation" which is a pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation) in the middle symbol display area 208b, and in FIG. 20 (k), re-variation in pseudo serial effect starts In the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208 b, a character display “× 2” representing the number of times of pseudo run is displayed. As in the example here, even when the second display area 208-2 is changed to the transparent state, there may be a case where the effect of the first notice (here, the pseudo continuous effect) is started. However, only when the first display area 208-1 is changed to the transparent state, the effect of the first notice may not be started.

  Then, during the re-variation in the pseudo-series effect, the dark transition effect is started. In the dark turn effect, the entire front screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L becomes darker than before the dark turn effect is started. Depending on the color of the image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the opaque state (for example, yellowish color tone, white color tone, etc.), the first movable character on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Although it is difficult to visually recognize the 251 or the fourth movable character 254, although it may be visually recognizable, it may be visible on the back side of the area where the yellowish tint or the white tint is displayed even when the dark effect is started. Even if there is, it tends to be invisible.

  When the darkening effect is started, the variation display of the decorative symbols performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c disappears, and instead, the first decorative symbol display device 208L The display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started on the upper right. Further, the UI unit UI3 disappears, the hold icons h11 and h12 become non-display, and the change icon h0 also becomes non-display. Furthermore, the number-of-holds display is additionally displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 20 (n), the fourth movable part 254 which has been at the initial position so far moves to the seventh position. In FIG. 20 (n), the fourth movable part 254 at the seventh position is represented by a dotted line. In FIG. 20 (n), any of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 provided on the fourth movable character 254 represented by a dotted line is in the unlit state.

  In FIG. 20 (o), the LED 2541 on the upper side of the fourth movable part 254 at the seventh position starts lighting in the second display mode. The entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is in an opaque state, and a dark transition effect is being performed, but the light from the LED 2541 in the upper stage is transmitted through the first decorative symbol display device 208L and from the front side , You can see how it emits light. In addition, not only lighting by a 2nd display mode but lighting by another display mode may be sufficient, and it may be blink. In FIG. 20 (p), the LED 2541 in the upper stage is off.

  The position of the LED 2541 in the upper stage of the fourth movable part 254 in the seventh position corresponds to a certain position. Moreover, it overlaps with LED2541 of the upper stage which exists in a certain position among the display screens (all display area) of 1st decorative symbol display apparatus 208L shown to FIG. 20 (n)-the same figure (p) from the front side. And the fourth display area 208-4 including the area where the second display area 208-2 shown in (d) of FIG. 20, the first display area 208-1 shown in (d) of FIG. It also remains opaque. As described above, in FIG. 20 (o), the fourth display area 208-4 is in the opaque state, but the upper LED 2541 emits light. The fourth display area 208-4 is represented by a dashed dotted line, but all of the upper LEDs 2541 at a certain position overlap the fourth display area 208-4 from the front side. Further, the fourth display area 208-4 is a region larger than the LED 2541 at the upper position at a certain position, but may be a region of the same size as the LED 2541. Furthermore, the fourth display area 208-4 is an area overlapping the entire upper stage LED 2541 at a certain position, but may be an area overlapping only a part of the upper stage LED 2541 at a certain position. That is, the area may be smaller than the upper stage LED 2541 at a certain position, or may be an area shifted from the front side of the upper stage LED 2541.

  The fourth display area 208-4 is an area different from the second display area 208-2 shown in FIG. 20 (d), and the first display area 208-1 shown in FIG. 19 (d) is another area. is there. However, since the fourth display area 208-4 is the area immediately to the left of the first display area 208-1, the fourth movable role located at the seventh position while the fourth display area 208-4 remains opaque. When the LED 2541 in the upper stage of the object 254 is lit, the first movable office product 251 is in the first position because the LED 2541 itself in the upper stage and the fourth movable role product 254 can not be seen. In some cases, the player may be moved to a position where the first preview effect (pseudo-series effect) is more likely to be performed, and the player may be reminded that light is emitted.

  In FIG. 20 (q), the fourth movable combination 254 returns to the initial position, and in FIG. 20 (r), the darkening effect ends.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the example and the modification following FIG. 20 in a step-by-step manner.

  The left column of FIG. 21 shows an example continuing from FIG. The fourth movable part in the seventh position in a certain state (for example, a state before the final display of the special figure (during symbol variation display), a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed variably, a state before reach) When the LED 2541 in the upper stage of the object 254 is turned on, the effect of the first notice is more easily performed than in the case where the LED 2541 in the upper stage is not turned on. The first preliminary production here is a super reach production with an overreach reach production where the degree of expectation of the big hit is lower than that of the sword master reach production. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), the variation display of the decorative symbols performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c disappears even in the super reach effect by the ok reach effect, Instead, the display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the UI unit UI3 also disappears, the hold icons h11 and h12 become non-display, and only the change icon h0 continues the display. Furthermore, the number-of-holds display is additionally displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the background display changes in the overreach reach production.

  In FIG. 21 (b), the lord YM is running toward the merchant EG who runs away with a lot of ovals, and in FIG. 21 (c), the lord YM approaches quite closely to the merchant EG, but FIG. 21 (d). Then, the merchant EG has been missed, and the overreach production has ended in failure. Although the figures after this are omitted, the combination of the lost decorative symbols is finalized and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  The middle row in FIG. 21 shows an example of the case in which the overreach reach effect is successful. In the same figure (c ') as in FIG. 21 (c), the tomoku YM approaches the merchant EG considerably, and the display of the variation icon h0 disappears in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (c-2), In the fifth symbol pd5 displayed at the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the combination of the big hit ("6"-"6"-"6" is temporarily switched to the background display in which the letter "holiday" is displayed at the upper left. ") Has started shaking fluctuation. The background display in which the letter "holiday" is displayed on the upper left may be a background display foretelling that the lord YM will catch the merchant EG, or may be a background display foreseeing the jackpot confirmation. Then, in FIG. 21 (d ′), the lady YM catches the merchant EG, the overreach reach production succeeds, and the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also restored. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 21 (e) subsequent to FIG. 21 (d '), a scene in which the sword master KG falls is displayed. That is, the combination ("decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6") of the decorative symbol of the big hit is decidedly displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG.

  The right column in FIG. 21 shows an example in which the upper LED 2541 of the fourth movable part 254 at the seventh position is not lighted. FIG. 21 (m) shows the same situation as FIG. 20 (m), and the darkening effect is started. In the subsequent FIG. 21 (n), the fourth movable part 254 which has been at the initial position so far moves to the seventh position. Also in FIG. 21N, the fourth movable part 254 at the seventh position is indicated by a dotted line, and all the LEDs 2541 to 2543 provided on the fourth movable part 254 are in the unlit state.

  In FIG. 21 (q), as in FIG. 20 (q), the fourth movable part 254 is returned to the initial position. Therefore, in this example, the LED 2541 on the upper stage of the fourth movable part 254 at the seventh position is not lit.

  In FIG. 21 (r), the same effect as in FIG. 20 (r) is finished, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The decoration 8 "-" decoration 7 "is displayed. In the example in the row on the right side where the LED 2541 of the upper stage of the fourth movable character 254 at the seventh position is not lighted, the first notice presentation (super reach presentation of the cover reach presentation) is not started The combination of the decorative symbols is displayed. In addition, even if the LED 2541 on the upper stage is not lighted, the first advance notice effect (super reach effect of overreach reach effect) may be started. However, when the LED 2541 in the upper stage is not lighted, the effect of the first notice (super reach effect of overreach reach effect) may not be started.

  FIG. 22 is a view gradually showing another example continuing from the same situation as FIG. 20 (m).

  FIG. 22 (b) shows the same situation as FIG. 20 (m), and the darkening effect is started during the re-variation display in the pseudo-series effect. In the following FIG. 22C, the fourth movable part 254 which has been at the initial position so far moves to the seventh position. Also in FIG. 22C, the fourth movable part 254 at the seventh position is indicated by a dotted line, and all the LEDs 2541 to 2543 provided on the fourth movable part 254 are in the unlit state.

  In the fourth movable part 254 provided with the upper stage LED 2541, the middle stage LED 2542 and the lower stage LED 2543 and movable to the seventh position, the eighth position, and the ninth position, a certain state (for example, determination of a special figure) In the state before display (during symbol change display), the state where the change display of the decoration symbol is performed, the state before reach, etc.), when the middle stage LED 2542 (second light emitter) lights up is the upper row It is easier for the first preview effect to be executed than when the LED 2541 (first light emitter) is turned on, and the middle LED 2542 (second light) is obtained when the lower LED 2543 (third light emitter) is turned on. The effect of the first notice is more easily performed than when the light emitter of (1) lights up. That is, the effect of the first notice is more easily performed as the lower LED lights up. In addition, as described above, the fourth movable in a certain state (for example, the state before the final display of the special figure (during symbol variation display), the state where the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the state before reach) If the feature 254 is in the eighth position, the effect of the first notice is easier to be executed than in the seventh position, and if the ninth position is in the eighth position Rather than this, the first notice is more easily performed. When these things are put together, in the state where only one LED emits light, the state in which the LED 2541 of the upper stage of the fourth movable character 254 at the seventh position emits light is the effect of the first notice. Is the least likely to be performed, and the state in which the LED 2543 of the lower stage of the fourth movable character 254 at the ninth position emits light is most likely to be the effect of the first notice. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 20 described above, a certain state (for example, a state before the final display of the special figure (during symbol variation display), a state where the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, a state before the reach Etc.) in the state where only the upper LED 2541 lights up at the seventh position (hereinafter referred to as “expected weak state”), the effect of the first notice is most difficult to be executed, but on the other hand The expected weak state is the most likely to appear. Therefore, the expected weak state and the state in which the first preview effect is more likely to be executed than the expected weak state (for example, a certain state (for example, a state before the final display of the special figure (during symbol variation display), a variation display of the decorative symbol) In the state of being performed, the state before reaching, etc.), the player is made to misunderstand that the fourth movable role object 254 is in the eighth position and only the LED 2541 on the upper stage is lit: If it can be done, since the weak expectation state appears more frequently than the strong expectation state, it is possible to entertain the player by giving thanks to the weak expectation state without causing the player to get bored.

  In addition, in a certain state (for example, the state before the final display of the special figure (during symbol variation display), the state where the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the state before reach), etc. In the case where two LEDs are lit, the first notice is more easily performed than when only one LED is lit, and when three LEDs are lit, the two LEDs are two LEDs The effect of the first notice is easier to be executed than when only the light is on.

  In (d) of FIG. 22, only the upper LED 2541 of the fourth movable part 254 at the seventh position starts lighting in the second display mode. It can be seen that the light from the LED 2541 in the upper stage passes through the first decorative symbol display device 208L and emits light from the front side. In addition, not only lighting by a 2nd display mode but lighting by another display mode may be sufficient, and it may be blink.

  The fourth movable character 254 starts moving toward the eighth position with only the LED 2541 in the upper stage lit in the second display mode, and reaches the eighth position in FIG. 22 (e) and stops. ing. In the fourth movable part 254 shown in FIG. 22F, the middle stage LED 2542 also starts lighting in the second display mode at the eighth position, and the two LEDs 2541 and 2542 light. Next, the fourth movable part 254 starts moving toward the ninth position while keeping the two LEDs 2541 and 2542 lit in the second display mode, and in FIG. Reached and stopped. During the movement, the fourth movable part 254 may move the LED off or change the light emission mode. Also, in this example, the fourth movable part 254 temporarily stopped at the eighth position, but while moving (for example, when passing the eighth position) without temporarily stopping, the middle LED 2542 is the The lighting may be started in two display modes.

  In the fourth movable character 254 shown in FIG. 22H, the lower LED 2543 also starts lighting in the second display mode at the ninth position, and all three LEDs 2541 to 2543 light. The state in which all the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 are lit in the ninth position is the state in which the first notice is most easily performed. In this way, when the first preview effect is most easily executed, the display mode of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 changes (for example, changes to the red display mode) or the drive mode (light emission mode) It may change (for example, it may change to blinking). In addition, when the first preview effect is most likely to be executed, the LEDs 2541 2542 2543 do not light up in the second display mode, but a special drive mode (for example, red lighting or blinking) in advance. You may make it light-emit by. Furthermore, the light emission mode of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 may be changed even in the state where the first notice effect is performed with a very high probability or not necessarily the state in which the first notice effect is most easily performed. The LEDs 2541, 2542, and 2543 may emit light in a special light emission mode in advance, even when the first preview effect is to be performed with a very high probability or always performed.

  In FIG. 22I, the transmission effect is started. The display screen (entire display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 22 (i) includes an area overlapping from the front side with the fourth movable character 254 at the ninth position 5 Only the display area 208-5 is in the transparent state. That is, all of the fourth movable role objects 254 at the ninth position overlap the fifth display area 208-5 from the front side. Although the fifth display area 208-5 shown in FIG. 22 (i) is an area larger than the fourth movable part 254 at the ninth position, it is an area having the same size as the fourth movable part 254, It is also good. The fifth display area 208-5 is an area overlapping the entire fourth movable part 254 in the ninth position, but an area overlapping only a part of the fourth movable part 254 in the ninth position. May be That is, the region may be smaller than the fourth movable part 254 at the ninth position, or may be a region shifted from the front side of the fourth movable part 254. In the back of the fifth display area 208-5 changed to the transparent state, three LEDs 2541 to 2543 lit in the second display mode can be visually recognized. As described above, the fifth display area 208-5 changes to the transparent state when the first notice effect is most easily performed or when the first notice effect has a relatively high probability or It may be only when it is always executed, but it may be otherwise. For example, only the upper LED 2541 lights up, but the fourth movable combination 254 moves to the ninth position, or the lower row LED 2543 lights up regardless of the position of the fourth movable combination 254, or the fourth movable combination The fifth display area 208-5 may change to the transparent state also when all the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 light up regardless of the position of the object 254.

In FIG. 22 (j), the fifth display area 208-5 returns to the opaque state, and subsequently, in FIG. 22 (k), all the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 turn off. The fifth display area 208-5 may return to the opaque state, and all three LEDs 2541 to 2543 may be turned off at the same time, or may be turned off and then return to the opaque state. . In addition, all three of the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 may be turned off at the same time, or may be turned off in the order in which the lighting was started, or in the opposite order to the order in which the lighting was started. You may
Furthermore, the change of the fifth display area 208-5 to the opaque state may be such that the whole of the fifth display area 208-5 may be changed to the opaque state at once, or may be gradually changed to the opaque state partially. It is also good.

  In FIG. 22 (l), the fourth movable character 254 which has been at the ninth position until then returns to the initial position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. doing. When the dark turn effect is finished, the princess discovery reach effect is started as the super reach effect here as the effect of the first notice. As described above, the princess discovery reach production is a production with a higher expectation of a big hit than the overreach reach production. In addition, there may be a case in which the overreach reach effect may be started, but only the princess discovery reach effect may be started, or only the princess discovery reach effect may always be started.

  As shown in FIG. 22 (n), even in the princess discovery reach effect, the variation display of the decorative symbols performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c disappears. The display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the UI unit UI3 also disappears, the hold icons h11 and h12 become non-display, and only the change icon h0 continues the display. Furthermore, the number-of-holds display is additionally displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the background display changes also in princess discovery reach production.

  In FIG. 22 (o), the lord YM appears, and in FIG. 22 (p), the lord YM arrives in front of the coffin. The coffin is closed, but in FIG. 22 (q), the coffin begins to open, and it seems that something is in the back of the coffin.

  In FIG. 22 (r), the button effect is started. The button effect here corresponds to the final judge effect that reveals whether the princess appears from the back of the brow. When the button effect is started, the display mode of the chance button 136 which has been lit in the first display mode until then changes to the fourth display mode. In the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 22 (r), a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 lit in the fourth display mode and an operation (pressing) of the chance button 136 are performed. The display 136b of the arrow as the prompting display and the character display of "one blow" and the remaining period meter display 136c as the display regarding the period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as the effective one (operation effective period) are displayed. . In addition, these button images etc. 136a-c overlap with the image of a rose.

  FIG. 23 is a view showing the example or the modification following FIG. 22 in a stepwise manner.

  The left column of FIG. 23 shows an example continuing from FIG. In this example, the chance button 136 is not operated (pressed) within the operation valid period. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 23A, the button images etc. 136a to 136c disappear, and a state in which no one is present is displayed at the back of the bag. That is, princess discovery reach production has ended in failure. In FIG.23 (c), the combination ("decoration 6"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 6") of the decorative design of a loss is decidedly displayed on the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L. Even when the chance button 136 is operated (pressed) within the operation valid period, the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the same as the display in FIG. 23 (a) to FIG. 23 (c). is there.

  The right column in FIG. 23 shows an example in which the princess appears from the back of the brow. Although the button effect is started also in FIG. 23 (r-1) which is a modified example of FIG. 22 (r), in the button effect here, the button image 136a is displayed large. As described above, a plurality of display modes are prepared for the display (operation promotion display) displayed in the button effect, and the success rate of the effect (here, the success rate of finding a princess) or the big hit Expectations may change. Here again, although the chance button 136 was not operated (pressed) within the operation valid period, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 23 (r-2), the button images etc. 136a to 136c disappear and the upper left In the fifth pattern pd5 displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the combination of big hit ("6"-"6"-"6") is temporarily switched to the background display in which the characters "holiday" are displayed. Has started shaking. The background display in which the character of "holiday" is displayed on the upper left may be a background display for previewing a princess discovery or may be a background display for previewing a jackpot decision. Subsequently, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (a '), the princess HM appears from the back of the brow, and the princess discovery reach effect is successful. In FIG. 23 (b ′), the combination of the decorative symbols (“decor 6”-“decor 6”-“decor 6”) of the big hit is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the middle symbol display area 208b, a decoration symbol ("decor 6") overlaps the character image of the princess HM.

  FIG. 24: is a figure which shows gradually an example which the production | presentation of a transmission production and the production | generation of a timer advance notice was combined.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 24 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7”, which is a combination of chances, is stopped and displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a second display mode, which is one of display modes of the pre-reading advance notice.

  In FIG. 24 (b), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this stage, the first movable character 251 is at the initial position out of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 24 (b), an effect of timer notice is started. In the effect of the timer notice here, a timer notice display TM1 is displayed, which counts down the time (remaining time) until the start of the pseudo-series effect. The timer advance notice display TM1 is a display of the third display mode. In the effect of timer notice here, the timer notice display TM1 for displaying the remaining time as a countdown is displayed, and after the remaining time disappears, the pseudo continuous effect may be started but may not be started. The timer advance notice display TM1 is a display of the third display mode.

  In FIG. 24 (c), the first movable combination 251 located at the initial position moves to the second position. In FIG. 24C, the first movable part 251 at the second position is indicated by a dotted line. In FIG. 24D, in the state where the first movable combination 251 is in the second position, the transmission effect is started, and the second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state. The transparent effect here is also an effect for giving notice of the start of the pseudo-series effect. Therefore, whether it is the timer advance announcement or the transmission effect, it is the announcement about the pseudo-series effect, in other words, the announcement about the currently displayed symbol variation display. As is clear from FIG. 24D, a part of the second display area 208-2 and a part of the timer advance notice display TM1 overlap. The size of the second display area 208-2 is smaller than the size of the timer notice display TM1. The whole of the timer notice display TM1 and a part or all of the second display area 208-2 may overlap, or the timer notice display TM1 is made smaller or the second display area 208-2 is made larger. , Or the whole of the second display area 208-2 and part or all of the timer notice display TM1 may overlap. Further, as shown in FIG. 24D, when the second display area 208-2 and the timer notice display TM1 overlap, a part of the timer notice display TM1 is missing and can not be seen. That is, a part of the timer notice display TM1 is in the transparent state, and the first movable part 251 can be seen on the back side of the part in the transparent state. The first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 24 (c) is in the unlit state.

  Note that, in this example, the timer advance presentation is started earlier than the transmission presentation, but the transmission presentation may be started earlier than the timer announcement, or both are started simultaneously. May be

  In FIG. 24 (e), the first movable combination 251 lights up in the second display mode, and the part of the timer notice display TM1 lights up in the second display mode on the far side of the transparent state. The 1st movable role thing 251 which is seen is visible.

  In FIG. 24F, a part of the second display area 208-2 changes to the opaque state. That is, in the second display area 208-2, the portion overlapping the timer notice display TM1 changes to an opaque state, and the missing portion of the timer notice display TM1 is returned and displayed, and the entire timer notice display TM1 can be viewed. become. On the other hand, a part of the first movable role object 251 overlapping with the timer notice display TM1 disappears.

  In FIG. 24 (g), after the second display area 208-2 returns to the opaque state and becomes the opaque state, the first movable part 251 returns to the initial position (FIG. 7 (h)). In addition, after the second display area 208-2 returns to the opaque state, the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "0:00" indicating that the remaining time has run out. The timing at which the timer notice display TM1 becomes "0:00" may be simultaneous with the return of the second display area 208-2 to the opaque state, or the second display area 208-2 returns to the opaque state. It may be before. After the timer notice display TM1 becomes "0:00", in this example, as shown in FIG. 24 (i), the character display "Go!" Is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the pseudo-series effect starts Be done. In FIG. 24 (k), the decorative symbol of "continuation", which is a pseudo continuous symbol, is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation) in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a pseudo continuous effect is started. As described above, when the first movable combination 251 is in the second position, it is more difficult to start the pseudo-series effect than when it is in the first position, but the timer advance notice is also performed. The probability that the pseudo-series effect is started is high, and in this example, the pseudo-series effect is started. In addition, when the effect of the transparent effect and the timer advance notice is performed, the pseudo continuous effect may be started without fail.

  In FIG. 24 (l), the re-variation in the pseudo-series effect is started, and the character display “× 2” representing the number of pseudo-sequences is displayed in the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b.

  Here, although the effect of the timer advance notice relates to the pseudo-sequence effect, it may be related to whether or not the hold icon changes to the display mode of the advance notice. That is, it may be related to pre-reading advance notice.

  In addition, even in the effect of the timer advance notice, the pseudo continuous effect or the advance notice is started when the timer advance notice display TM1 is the display of the fourth display mode rather than the display of the third display manner as in this example. Cheap. Therefore, when the transmission effect is started in the state where the first movable role object 251 is at the second position, and the timer notice display TM1 of the fourth display mode is started thereafter, the timer notice display of the third display mode The pseudo-sequence effect and the advance notice may be easier to be started than when TM1 is started, and the transmission effect is started with the first movable role object 251 in the first position, and then the fourth display mode When the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, the pseudo continuous effect or the advance notice may be always started.

  Furthermore, in the above description, the explanation related to the pseudo-series effect (normal notice) and the start probability of the advance notice may be related to the expectation (reliability) of the big hit. For example, even if the transmission effect is started in the state where the first movable combination 251 is in the second position, the jackpot determination may be made as long as the timer advance notice display TM1 is also executed.

  The right column in FIG. 24 shows a modification of FIG. 24 (e).

  In FIG. 24 (e-1), the transmission effect is performed in a state where the first movable combination 251 is in the first position, and the whole of the timer notice display TM1 can be seen, and the first display area 208-1 in the transparent state is displayed. In addition, all of the first movable role objects 251 lit in the second display mode are also visible. That is, in this example, the first display area 208-1 and the timer advance notice display TM1 are completely shifted and do not overlap. As compared with the example shown in FIG. 24E, when the first movable combination 251 is in the second position where it is difficult to start the transmission effect, it overlaps with the timer notice display TM1, and the transmission effect tends to be started. If it is in the position, it does not overlap with the timer notice display TM1. Note that this relationship may be reversed, and when the first movable combination 251 is in the first position where transmission effect is likely to start, it overlaps with the timer advance notice display, and it is difficult to start the transmission effect. In some cases, it does not have to overlap with the timer advance notice display.

  FIG. 24 (e-2) is an example in which the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed at a position immediately above the tutorial display unit TT1. In this example, the timer advance notice display TM1 and the second display area 208-2 are separated and do not overlap each other.

  On the other hand, FIG. 24 (e-3) is an example in which another second timer notice display TM2 is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 displayed at a position immediately above the tutorial display section TT1. is there. The second timer notice display TM2 is a display related to an effect (for example, a button effect etc.) different from the timer notice display TM1, but in the second timer notice display TM2 shown in FIG. The display has not been started yet, and the characters being prepared are displayed. A part of the second timer announcement display TM2 and a part of the second display area 208-2 overlap, and a part of the second timer announcement display TM2 is in the transparent state and in the transparent state. At the back side, the first movable character 251 is visible. As shown in FIG. 24 (e-2), the second display area 208-2 does not overlap if only one timer announcement is displayed, but if a plurality of timer announcements are displayed, the second indication is displayed. It overlaps with the area 208-2. That is, only when a plurality of timer announcements are displayed, the second display area 208-2 is overlapped.

  FIG. 25: is a figure which shows the modification of the presentation shown in FIG. 22 in steps.

  In FIG. 25 (b) as in FIG. 22 (b), the darkening effect is started during the re-variation display in the pseudo-series effect. However, in the example illustrated in FIG. 25, even when the darkening effect is started, the UI unit UI3 does not disappear, and the display of the holding icons h11 and h12 and the fluctuation icon h0 continues. In the subsequent FIG. 25C, the fourth movable part 254 which has been at the initial position so far moves to the seventh position. Also in FIG. 25C, the fourth movable part 254 in the seventh position is represented by a dotted line, and all the LEDs 2541 to 2543 provided on the fourth movable part 254 are in the unlit state. In (d) of FIG. 25, only the LED 2541 at the upper stage of the fourth movable part 254 at the seventh position starts lighting in the second display mode. As mentioned above, this state is a weak expectation. In the expected weak state, the light from the upper LED 2541 does not overlap any of the UI unit UI3, the hold icons h11 and h12, and the change icon h0.

  In FIG. 25E, the fourth movable role object 254 starts moving toward the eighth position with only the upper LED 2541 lit in the second display mode. In this example, in a certain state (for example, a state before the final display of the special figure (during symbol variation display), a state where the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, a state before reach, etc.) As the 254 goes to the right, the first notice effect is more easily performed. Also, the hold represented by the hold icon displayed on the right is digested earlier. Therefore, the direction in which the first preview effect is likely to be executed is the same as the direction in which the pending icons representing the pending order of the pending are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 25F, the number of LEDs to be lit increases while the fourth movable character 254 moves. That is, before the fourth movable part 254 is in the eighth position, the middle LED 2542 also starts to light in the second display mode. Eventually, the fourth movable character 254 reaches the eighth position (FIG. 25 (g)). The light from the upper LED 2541 at the eighth position and the light from the middle LED 2542 do not overlap any of the UI unit UI3, the holding icons h11 and h12, and the fluctuation icon h0.

  In FIG. 25H, the LED 2543 at the lower stage of the fourth movable part 254 stopped at the eighth position also starts to light in the second display mode. The light from the lower LED 2543 overlaps with the variation icon h0, which is a display mode of the advance notice, and also overlaps with the first hold icon h11, which is a default display mode, and also overlaps with part of the UI unit UI3. As a result, at least the variation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are more difficult to view than before the lower LED 2543 lights. However, the light from the lower LED 2543 is blue, the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 25 (h) is white, and depending on the relationship between the color of the light from the LED and the color of the icon, the LED from the back side Sometimes the light illuminates the icon, making it easier to see the icon.

  The light from the lower LED 2543 may overlap only the change icon among the change icons and the hold icon, or may overlap only the hold icon. Further, the lower LED 2543 may be turned on only when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the display mode of the normal advance notice.

  In FIG. 25I, the transmission effect is started. The display screen (entire display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 25 (i), including the area overlapping from the front side to the fourth movable character 254 at the eighth position 6 Only the display area 208-6 is in the transparent state. That is, all of the fourth movable role objects 254 at the eighth position overlap the sixth display area 208-6 from the front side. The sixth display area 208-6 shown in FIG. 25 (i) is an area larger than the fourth movable part 254 at the eighth position, but is an area of the same size as the fourth movable part 254, It is also good. The sixth display area 208-6 is an area overlapping the entire fourth movable part 254 at the eighth position, but an area overlapping only a part of the fourth movable part 254 at the eighth position. May be That is, the area may be smaller than the fourth movable part 254 at the eighth position, or may be an area shifted from the front side of the fourth movable part 254. At the back of the sixth display area 208-6 changed to the transparent state, three LEDs 2541 to 2543 lit in the second display mode can be visually recognized. On the other hand, the fluctuation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are off. In a certain state shown in FIG. 25 (i) (for example, the state before the final display of the special drawing (during symbol variation display), the state where the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the state before reach) A certain state (e.g., a special view finalization display shown in FIG. 22 (i) earlier than the state in which all three LEDs 2541 to 2543 of the fourth movable character 254 at the eighth position are on. Before (in the symbol variation display), in the condition that the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed, the condition before reach, etc.), all three LEDs 2541-2543 of the fourth movable character 254 at the ninth position In the state where is lit, the first notice effect is more easily performed.

  The sixth display area 208-6 may overlap only with the change icon among the change icon and the hold icon, or may overlap with only the hold icon. Further, the sixth display area 208-6 may be in the transparent state only when the display mode of the variation icon h0 is the display mode of the normal advance notice.

  Subsequently, another modified example will be described.

  In FIG. 25 (b ') as in FIG. 25 (b), the darkening effect is started during the re-variation display in the pseudo-series effect, and here too, the UI unit UI3 does not disappear, and both the holding icons h11 and h12 and the fluctuation icon h0 Continue the display. In the subsequent FIG. 25 (c ′), as in the case of FIG. 25 (c), the fourth movable part 254 which has been at the initial position up to that point moves to the seventh position in the extinguished state. Also in FIG. 25 (c ′), the fourth movable part 254 at the seventh position is indicated by a dotted line, and all the LEDs 2541 to 2543 provided on the fourth movable part 254 are in the unlit state. In (d ′) of FIG. 25, only the lower LED 2543 of the fourth movable part 254 located at the seventh position starts lighting in the second display mode. As described above, in a certain state (for example, the state before the final display of the special figure (during symbol variation display), the state where the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the state before reach, etc.) The first preview effect is more easily performed in the case where the LED 2541 on the upper stage lights up. As described above, the light from the lower LED 2543 in which the first preview effect is easily performed overlaps the second holding icon h12 when the fourth movable role object 254 is in the seventh position. The position of the LED 2543 at the lower side of the fourth movable character 254 at the seventh position is a position where the fourth movable character 254 overlaps the holding icon displayed closest to the initial position of the fourth movable character 254. Although the second hold icon h12 is a default display mode, the lower LED 2543 may be turned on only when the display mode of the hold icon is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice.

  In (e ′) of FIG. 25, the fourth movable service object 254 starts moving toward the eighth position with only the lower LED 2543 lit in the second display mode. The light from the lower LED 2543 in the moving fourth movable character 254 overlaps the first holding icon h11 in addition to the second holding icon h12, and also starts to overlap the fluctuation icon h0. And as shown in FIG. 25 (f '), while moving, the number of LEDs to be lit increases in the fourth movable part 254. That is, before the fourth movable part 254 reaches the eighth position, the middle LED 2542 also starts to light in the second display mode. Eventually, the fourth movable character 254 reaches the eighth position (FIG. 25 (g ′)). The light from the lower LED 2543 at the eighth position overlaps a portion of the variation icon h0, a portion of the first hold icon h11, and a portion of the UI unit UI3.

  In FIG. 25 (h ′), the LED 2541 of the upper stage of the fourth movable character 254 stopped at the eighth position also starts to light in the second display mode, and all three LEDs 2541 to 2543 are lighted. become. This state is the same as the state shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 25 (i '), the same transmission effect as in FIG. 25 (i) is started, and in the back of the sixth display area 208-6 changed to the transparent state, the three LEDs 2541 lit in the second display mode. 2543 can be visually recognized. On the other hand, the fluctuation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are off.

  FIG. 26 is a view showing a further modified example of the example shown in FIG. 25 (b ′) to FIG. 25 (i ′).

  26 (b) to 26 (e) are the same as FIG. 25 (b ') to FIG. 25 (e'), and during the re-variation display in the pseudo-series effect, the fourth movable character 254 is the lower stage The LED 2543 moves toward the eighth position with only the LED 2543 lit in the second display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 26, while moving, the fourth movable character 254 turns on only the lower-stage LED 2543 in the second display mode in which the effect of the first notice is easily performed without increasing the number of LEDs to be turned on. While being allowed to move, the eighth position is reached (FIG. 26 (f)). The light from the lower LED 2543 at the eighth position overlaps a portion of the variation icon h0, a portion of the first hold icon h11, and a portion of the UI unit UI3. Even when the fourth movable character 254 reaches the eighth position, the transmission effect is started without increasing the number of LEDs to be lit. As a result, as shown in FIG. 26G, in the back of the sixth display area 208-6 changed to the transparent state, only the lower LED 2543 of the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 lights up in the second display mode. There is. The fluctuation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are off. In this example, the transmission effect is performed regardless of the number of lighted LEDs. However, since the lower stage LED 2543 on which the first preview effect is easily performed is lit, the transmission effect is executed, and only the upper LED 2541 on which the first preview effect is hard to be performed is transmitted. The presentation may not be performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 25 (i '), the transmission effect may be executed only when all the LEDs are on, or only when a plurality of LEDs are on. A transparent effect may be performed.

  FIG. 26 (f ') shows the same state as FIG. 26 (f), and the fourth movable character 254 turns on only the lower LED 2543 at the eighth position during the re-variation display in the pseudo-series effect There is. In the eighth position, only the lower LED 2543 is lit. The position of the LED 2543 at the bottom of the fourth movable part 254 in the eighth position corresponds to a certain position.

  In FIG. 26 (g ′), a seventh display including a region overlapping from the front side to the LED 2543 at the lower position in a certain position of the display screen (all display region) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Only the area 208-7 changes to the transparent state, and the area overlapping from the front side to the LEDs 2541 and 2542 that are turned off remains opaque. As described above, in the transmission effect, only the area overlapping the lit LED from the front side may be changed to the transparent state. Furthermore, only the area overlapping from the front side to the LED lit in a certain light emission mode may be changed to the transparent state. As shown in FIG. 26 (g '), the width of the seventh display area 208-7 is wider than the width of the fourth movable part 254.

  FIG. 26 (c ') is in the same state as FIG. 26 (c), and the fourth movable character 254 is in the seventh position during the re-variation display in the pseudo-series effect, and all the LEDs 2541-2543 are extinguished. It is a state. Further, two suspension icons are displayed, and the display mode (display mode of white color) of the defiling is the first suspension icon h11 or the second suspension icon h12. Here, the position of the LED 2543 at the lower side of the fourth movable part 254 in the seventh position corresponds to a certain position.

  In (d'-1) of FIG. 26, the display screen (entire display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L includes a region overlapping from the front side to the lower LED 2543 at a certain position. 8 Only the display area 208-8 changes to the transparent state. As a result, a part of the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the defiling, is cut off to be in the transparent state, and the lower LED 2543 lit in the second display mode is in the back of the eighth display area 208-8. appear. As shown in FIG. 26 (d'-1), the width of the eighth display area 208-8 is the same as the width of the fourth movable character 254, and the width shown in FIG. 7 narrower than the width of the display area 208-7.

  In (d′-2) of FIG. 26, the first hold icon h11 is a display mode (first display mode) of the default, but the second hold icon h12 is a display mode (second display mode) of the prefetch notice. Here, as in FIG. 26 (d′-1), only the eighth display area 208-8 changes to the transparent state. As a result, a part of the second hold icon h12, which is a display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, is cut off and is in a transparent state, and in the back of the eighth display area 208-8, the lower LED 2543 is lit in the second display mode. Is visible.

  In (d′-3) of FIG. 26, the second hold icon h12 is the display mode (first display mode) of the default, but the first hold icon h11 is the display mode (second display mode) of the prefetch notice. Here too, as in FIG. 26 (d′-1), only the eighth display area 208-8 changes to the transparent state, and a part of the second hold icon h12, which is the default display mode, is lost to become the transparent state. In the back of the eighth display area 208-8, the lower LED 2543 lit in the second display mode can be seen.

  In FIG. 26 (d ′ ′), the position of the LED 2542 in the middle of the fourth movable part 254 at the seventh position corresponds to a certain position, and the display screen (entire display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Among them, only the ninth display area 208-9 including the area overlapping from the front side to the middle LED 2542 at a certain position changes to the transparent state. In the central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 26 (d ′ ′), a display CIY of a cut-in notice, which is a kind of normal notice, is displayed from the left symbol display region 208a to the right symbol display region 208c. ing. The ninth display area 208-9 overlaps with the display CIY of the cut-in notice, and a part of the display CIY of the cut-in notice is missing to be in a transparent state, and in the back of the ninth display area 208-9, The lower LED 2543 lit in the second display mode can be seen. The display of the cut-in notice may be a kind of advance notice. On the other hand, the ninth display area 208-9 does not overlap the second hold icon h12 which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice shown in FIG. 26 (d ′ ′), and the entire second hold icon h12 is visible. There is.

  Note that the display CIY of the cut-in notice shown in FIG. 26 (d ′ ′) may be started in response to the operation of the operation means such as the chance button 136 or the like, or may be a display not displayed unless the operation is performed. Even if it is not operated, it may be a display displayed if the operation effective period in the button effect passes.

  Moreover, in this example, it is possible for the fourth movable character 254 to have three LEDs of the upper stage LED 2541, the middle stage LED 2542, and the lower stage LED 2543 in the seventh to ninth positions, respectively. The display area of the part can be changed to the transparent state. As described above, when a plurality of display areas can be changed to the transparent state, a selection effect (for example, roulette effect) may be performed to ask whether to change any one display area to the transparent state. . For example, at a certain position among the seventh position to the ninth position, the display area from the upper stage to the lower stage is sequentially changed to a transparent state every predetermined time, and then only a certain display area is changed to a transparent state The LED corresponding to the display area may be made to emit light. In other words, when the execution probability of the first notice effect changes or the expectation (reliability) that the big hit symbol is finally displayed changes depending on the position of the light emitting means to be issued, any issuing means issues Alternatively, an effect may be performed in which the transmission of the region on the front side of the light emitting means is used to indirectly perform the effect.

  Furthermore, if the number of lighting of the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 is large, the execution probability of the first notice effect increases, or in the configuration in which the expectation (reliability) in which the big hit symbol is finally displayed is increased. The size of the display area to be in the transparent state changes (for example, enlargement or reduction) in response to the operation of the operation means such as the chance button 136 etc. The number of lighted LEDs may be determined according to the size. In addition, if the operation of the operation means (for example, continuous hit operation or long press operation) is not performed, the LED does not emit any light, or the display area that becomes transparent after the button operation effective time ends is expanded at once. Only one or more LEDs located at the back of the enlarged display area may be lit.

  In addition, depending on the display mode of the LED, the execution probability of the first notice effect may be changed, or the expectation (reliability) at which the jackpot symbol is finally displayed may be changed.

  If the timing at which the display area changes to the transparent state is earlier than the lighting start timing of the LED located on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device described above, the display area changing to the transparent state itself is It corresponds to an insulting effect conscious of the lighting of the LED, and corresponds to an indirect effect. That is, since changing the display area to the transparent state is used as a precursor to the notice effect, the player who knows that the lighting of the LED, which is the notice effect, is started after the display area changes to the transparent state. It is easy to understand the timing that should have a big hit expectation.

  In a normal liquid crystal display device that does not transmit light, the light emitting means emits light after being covered by the display on the display screen, and the player needs to move his eyes from the display screen to the light emitting means, up to the display screen If it is necessary to move the light emitting means on purpose, other displays may be hidden by the light emitting means and the visibility may be reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after changing the display area to the transparent state, the light emitting means on the back side becomes a light emitting flow, and the player does not have to move the line of sight. There is an advantageous effect compared to the effect using a normal liquid crystal display device without concealing the

  FIG. 27 is a view showing a plurality of examples of other effects using the fourth movable character 254.

  An example is shown in the left column of FIG. 27 in which the second hold icon h12, which is a display mode of pre-reading advance notice, is displayed, and the explanation of the sword reach is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 in the UI unit UI3. ing. In FIG. 27 (b), the fourth movable role object 254 is located at the seventh position during the re-variation display in the pseudo-series effect. The position of each LED 2541-2543 of the fourth movable character 254 in the seventh position corresponds to a certain position, and is in a certain position of the display screen (entire display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. FIG. 26 (d ′ showing the fourth display area 208-4 (area corresponding to the LED 2541 in the upper stage) shown in three areas including the areas overlapping each other from the front side to the LEDs 2541 to 2543 (FIG. 20 (n)) The ninth display area 208-9 (area corresponding to the middle stage LED 2542) shown in '), and the eighth display area 208-8 (area corresponding to the lower stage LED 2543) shown in FIG. Change to the state. Further, a part of the second hold icon h12, which is a display mode of the pre-reading advance notice shown in FIG. 27 (b), is cut off to be in a transparent state, and in the back of the eighth display area 208-8, in the second display mode. The lower LED 2543 is visible.

  The fourth movable service object 254, which has been at the seventh position at the timing in FIG. 27B, starts moving toward the ninth position. When the movement of the fourth movable role item 254 is started, the transmission effect is temporarily ended.

  The fourth movable character 254 shown in FIG. 27D has reached the ninth position via the eighth position. The position of each LED 2541 to 2543 of the fourth movable character 254 at the ninth position corresponds to a certain position, and is at a certain position on the display screen (entire display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Three display areas 208-10 to 208-12 including the respective areas overlapping from the front side to the respective LEDs 2541 to 2543 change to the transparent state. As a result, a part of the explanation display of the sword reach in the tutorial display section TT1 is missing and is in a transparent state, and the lower LED 2543 lit in the second display mode can be seen in the back.

  The fourth movable character 254 may continue the transmission effect even while moving, and the area in the transparent state may move to the right in accordance with the movement of the fourth movable character 254. However, if it is a movable role that moves the front side more than the first decorative symbol display device 208L, even if it overlaps with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and looks into it, even the overlapping part Although it is possible to see, when the area to be in the transparent state moves to the right, the display itself of that part is not displayed, and there is a disadvantage that it can not be enjoyed. Moreover, it may be technically difficult to move the area to be in the transparent state in accordance with the movement of the movable part moving on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In the middle column of FIG. 27, the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the advance notice, is displayed, and the tutorial display section TT1 in the UI section UI3 displays not "explanatory display of effect" but "superheat", An example is shown in which a notice display (display of a normal notice) regarding a symbol variation display currently performed is displayed. In this example, when the fourth movable part 254 is in the seventh position, it is the same as the example shown in the left column, but when the fourth movable part 254 is in the ninth position, the lower LED 2543 is used. When the corresponding display area 208-12 changes to the transparent state, a part of the advance notice display in the tutorial display unit TT1 is missing and becomes transparent, and the lower LED 2543 lit in the second display mode is displayed in the back. Is visible.

  In the case where the advance notice is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, the lower LED 2543 is more likely to move to the back side and the transparent effect is more likely to be superimposed than when the explanatory display of the effect is displayed. Or, conversely, when the instruction display of the effect is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, the lower LED 2543 is more easily moved to the back side than when the advance notice is displayed, and the transmission effect is easily overlapped. Good.

  The right column in FIG. 27 shows an example in which the UI icon UI3 disappears and the reserved icons h11 and h12 as well as the variation icon h0 are hidden. In FIG. 27 (b ′ ′), the fourth movable part 254 is in the initial position. In (c ′ ′) of FIG. 27 (b ′ ′) continued to FIG. 27 (b ′ ′), an animation in which three arrows are swung in a vertical line is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b. In FIG. 27 (c ′ ′), although the fourth movable character 254 is in the initial position, when this animation is displayed, the fourth movable character 254 moves to the eighth position, and the first decorative symbol display device All the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 start lighting in the second display mode while the entire display screen of 208 L is in the opaque state. The fourth movable role object 254 may be in the eighth position before the animation is displayed. In this example, the display of the animation indicates in advance the lighting start of the three LEDs 2541 to 2543. In the conventional movable feature presentation, the player can detect the movement of the movable combination while moving to the presentation position of the movable combination, and can enjoy the presentation performed there from the beginning, but the first decorative symbol display In the movable character moving on the back side of the device 208L (here, the fourth movable character 254 in this case), it is difficult to make the player notice the movement of the movable character. And although the transmission effect is not performed, all the lighting of the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 in the eighth position corresponds to an effect that the effect of the first notice is easily performed to some extent. Therefore, starting from the animation of prior suggestion, the light emission effect on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L using the fourth movable character 254 is performed, and then the effect of the first notice is performed, and the final It becomes the flow whether or not to hit the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing in stages an example etc. in which the transmission effect and the effect using the sub window are combined.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28B, the UI unit UI3 is displayed, two reserved icons h11 and h12, and a variation icon h0 are displayed, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area In each of the right symbol display area 208c and the right symbol display area 208c, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. The two reserve icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes, while the variation icon h0 is a display mode of normal notice.

  In (c) of FIG. 28, a turning effect is started as a certain effect, and a character display of “find enemy by reach” is displayed, and an animation in which the lord YM is searching for an enemy is displayed. When this turning effect is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c disappears, and instead, the first decorative symbol display device 208L The display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started on the upper right of the symbol. In addition, the UI unit UI3 disappears, and both the hold icons h11 and h12 and the change icon h0 are not displayed. In addition, the number-of-holds display is additionally displayed on the left side of the fifth symbol pd5. Furthermore, the image which has been displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L until then is displayed in the sub-window SW provided below the fifth symbol pd5.

  In FIG. 28E, the transmission effect is executed, the second display area 208-2 is changed to the transparent state, and the first movable combination 251 at the second position is lit in the second display mode. A part of the second display area 208-2 and a part of the sub-window SW overlap, and a part of the sub-window SW is also transparent because the second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state. . However, a variable icon h0 in the sub-window SW representing a regular notice, and holding icons h11 and h12 which are the default display mode here but may represent a prefetch notice are visible. The second display area 208-2 may overlap with these icons h0, h11 and h12 of the sub window SW.

  Further, in this example, the case in which the transmission effect is performed is easier to be successful in beat-in effect (the lord YM discovers an enemy) than in the case where the transmission effect is not performed. Furthermore, in the state where the first movable role product 251 is in the first position, the direction when the transmission effect is performed is more successful than the case where the transmission effect is performed in the state where the second movable position is the second position. It becomes easy to do.

  In (g) of FIG. 28, the transmission effect is finished, and the hall-to-child YM is displayed somewhat large. In FIG. 28 (h), a merchant EG who escapes with an enemy character is found, and the beat production is successful. Although part of the character display of the merchant EG overlaps with part of the sub window SW, various icons h0, h11 and h12 are visible. However, there may be a case where these various icons h0, h11 and h12 are overlapped to hide them.

  When the beat effect is successful, reach effect (an example of the effect of the first notice) is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28 (i), the reach state is started.

  The turn effect may be an effect of finding a target character of super reach. That is, when the merchant EG is found, it develops into the overreach described with reference to FIG. Alternatively, the discovered character and the type of reach may be completely irrelevant. For example, even if the merchant EG is found, it may be developed into the swordsman reach described using FIG.

  The scribbling effect described above can be said to be a kind of mini game. Subsequently, an example in which another mini game and a transparent effect are combined will be described.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28 (A), re-variation is performed after two temporary stops (swing fluctuation) of the pseudo continuous symbol, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The image RDY is displayed during preparation. The image under preparation RDY is a display of the third display mode.

  In FIG. 28A, the transmission effect is executed, the first display area 208-1 is changed to the transparent state, and the first movable combination 251 at the first position is lit in the second display mode. A part of the first display area 208-1 and a part of the in-provision image RDY overlap, and a part of the in-provision image RDY is also made transparent by the first display area 208-1 changing to the transparent state. ing. As described above, in FIG. 28 (c), the sword reach is started by performing the transmission effect while the first movable role object 251 is in the first position. In addition, a part of the image RDY in preparation is overlapped with a part of the character display ("Ken great reach") of the start effect of the Ken great reach.

  In FIG. 28D, the mini game is started in the area where the image being prepared was displayed. When the mini game is started, the horizontally extending cylindrical drum DRM starts rotating with the horizontal axis as the rotation axis (not shown). A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the production of the swordsman reach, the main character of the main character, YM, and the swordsman KG of the enemy character are facing each other.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28 (E), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol displaying the character of “superheat” is derived, and it is suggested that the possibility of becoming a big hit is high There is. That is, a notice is usually given by the character "superheat" being derived from the drum DRM. In addition, in the direction of the swordsman reach, the state after the lord YM and the swordsman KG played a break, that is, the state after the game with each other by defeating the sword is displayed, but it is still unclear which was won There is no condition.

  In FIG. 28 (f), the display of the mini game (display of the drum DRM) disappears, and the button effect is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28 (f), a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 lit in the fourth display mode is displayed in a large size as in FIG. 15 (l-1). ing. When the button effect is started, the display mode of the chance button 136 which has been lit in the first display mode until then is changed to the fourth display mode.

  FIG. 29 is a view for explaining the relationship between the transmission effect and various displays.

  The left column of FIG. 29 shows the relationship between the transmission effect and the display of the ball removal notification that is notified when the tray full error occurs. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 29 (a), while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed, a discouragement error occurs, and a notice of removal of the sphere is displayed (“Please remove the sphere”) And so on are displayed from the left symbol display area 208a to the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the error on the fullness of the bowl is not resolved to the end, and the display of the ball removal notification is continuously displayed to the end. The first movable character 251 moves to the second position (FIG. 29 (b)), transmission effect is performed, and the second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state (FIG. 29 (c)), and so on In the second position, the first movable combination 251 is lighted in the second display mode ((d) in the figure). The second display area 208-2 overlaps with the display of the ball removal notification, and when the transmission effect is performed, a part of the ball removal notification display is lost and becomes transparent, and the second display area 208-2 is In the back, the 1st movable character article 251 lit in the 2nd display mode is visible.

  In FIG. 29D ', the transmission effect is performed in a state where the first movable combination 251 is in the first position, the first display area 208-1 is changed to the transparent state, and the first movable combination 251 is It is a figure which shows a mode that it is lighting by 2 display modes. As shown in this figure, even when the first movable role product 251 is in the first position, the first display area 208-1 overlaps the display of the ball removal notification, and when the transmission effect is performed, the ball removal notification is performed. A part of the display of is made transparent.

  In FIG. 29 (d ′ ′), in the state where the display of the ball removal notification is performed, the display CIY ′ of the cut-in notification which is a kind of normal notification is displayed, and further, the transmission effect is performed, and the second position It is a figure which shows a mode that the 1st movable role thing 251 in has been lighted by the 2nd display mode. The second display area 208-2 changed to the transparent state and the display CIY 'of the cut-in notice also overlap, and a part of the display CIY' of the cut-in notice is also transparent and can not be seen. In addition, although the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the display CIY 'of the cut-in notice, since it overlaps with the second display area 208-2 changed to the transparent state, part of the display of the ball removal notification is also transparent. It has been turned out of sight. Note that the display CIY 'of the cut-in notice may be displayed at the same time as the second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state, or may be displayed before changing to the transparent state, or transparent. It may be displayed after changing to the state.

  In addition, although the display of the ball removal alerting | reporting was mentioned as the example and demonstrated here, the same may be said of the display regarding another error regarding the error, and the display. The display related to other errors related to the main control unit 300 includes display of magnetic (magnet) detection error, display of external clock error, display of magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, display of switch level error, etc. Display of switch non-connection error, display of impact abnormal error, display of winning rate abnormal error, display of large winning opening excess winning display, display of large opening winning excess ejection error, display of solenoid abnormal error (big winning opening abnormal error) Etc. can be listed. In addition, an error display such as "the door is open" or a door open error display such as a warning message such as "please close the door" may be mentioned. That is, other error indications may be all the above listed ones. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied. In addition, as the warning / error display related to the first sub control unit 400 and / or the second sub control unit 500, display of impact warning, display of strike warning, display of movable part error, etc. can be listed. However, here as well, all of the above-listed items may be used, or some of the above-described items may not be applied.

  The middle row in FIG. 29 shows the relationship between the transmission effect and the display of the button effect. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 29A, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, and the button effect is started. When the button effect is started, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 lit in the fourth display mode and a prompt display prompting operation (pressing) of the chance button 136 are displayed on the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b. The display 136b of the arrow as and the remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as effective are displayed. Further, in the lower left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 29A, a character of Little Princess SH appears, and a habit is sought. When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the character of 爺 appears if the button effect is successful, and the character of 爺 does not appear if it is a failure. In addition, even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, a habit character may appear after the operation valid period has elapsed.

  The first movable character 251 moves to the first position (FIG. 29B), transmission effect is performed, and the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state (FIG. C), and so on. In the first position, the first movable part 251 lights up in the second display mode ((D) in the figure). The first display area 208-1 overlaps most of the remaining period meter display 136c, and also slightly overlaps the button image 136a. When the transmission effect is performed, the remaining period meter display 136c is in the transparent state with both end portions remaining, and the first movable combination illuminated in the second display mode in the back of the first display area 208-1 You can see 251.

  In the button image 136a shown here, the second display area 208-2 does not overlap, and overlaps only when the first movable combination 251 is in the first position where the first preview effect is easily performed. become. However, if the large button image 136a and the remaining period meter display 136c shown in FIG. 28 (f) overlap with the second display area 208-2, if the second display area 208-2 is subjected to transmission effect, the large button A part of the image 136a and the remaining period meter display 136c is made transparent.

  In FIG. 29D, the remaining time of the remaining period meter display 136c is unknown, but the chance button 136 is operated, and the lower right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The character of has appeared, and the button effect has been successful. In FIG. 29 (E), although the transmission effect is continued, the display of the character of the 台 GI and the display of the speech are displayed at a position away from the first display area 208-1, and the first display area It does not overlap 208-1.

  The right column of FIG. 29 shows the relationship between the transmission effect and the display of the mini character (mini character). On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 29A, a fluctuation icon h0 and two holding icons h11 and h12 are displayed. The display mode is the default display mode whether the change icon h0 or the two hold icons h11 and h12. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 29A, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, and the display of the mini character of the ninja NJA is displayed in the vicinity of the right symbol display area 208c. There is. In FIG. 29 (a), a stumbling effect is started in which the display mode of the hold icon may change. That is, the mini character of the ninja NJA throws a shuriken toward one of the two holding icons h11 and h12 displayed here. In addition, the first movable role object 251 moves to the second position.

  In FIG. 29C, the shuriken hits the second holding icon h12, and the second holding icon h12 is covered with the effect image EFG and disappears. In addition, the transmission effect is performed, and the second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state. Note that the first movable combination 251 at the second position is in the extinguished state. The second display area 208-2 overlaps the display of the mini character of the ninja NJA, and when the transparent effect is performed, a part of the display of the mini character of the ninja NJA (just the face portion) becomes transparent.

  In FIG. 29D, the effect image EFG covering the second hold icon h12 disappears, and the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a display mode (for example, a second display mode) of the prefetch notice. The second hold icon h12 changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice continues to be displayed in the display mode of the preview notice until the second hold is digested, and the preview notice is continued. The mini character of the ninja NJA can also be viewed as the character appearing at the beginning of the hold change animation, and corresponds to a part of the prefetching notice effect (more specifically, the hold change effect). In addition, there is a case where no change occurs because the shuriken hit the hold icon. Moreover, even if the hit icon hits the hold icon, the hold icon that was hit is not necessarily covered with the effect image EFG, and the display mode of the hold icon may end without any change. Although covered with the effect image EFG, there are cases where the display mode of the hold icon does not change. If the display mode of the hold icon does not change, it means that the hold change effect has failed.

  Although the display mode of the hold icon is changed here, the display mode of the change icon may be changed. That is, the shuriken thrown by the mini character of the ninja NJA hits the change icon h0 in the default display mode, and then the display mode of the change icon h0 changes to the display mode of the normal notice (for example, the second display mode) In some cases. In this case, the ninja NJA mini character usually corresponds to a part of the notice effect. Further, in the above description, the icon of the default display mode changes, but the icon of the display mode of the advance notice or the normal advance notice may change to a display mode with a higher expectation (reliability) of the big hit.

  Further, in FIG. 29 (D), the first movable part 251 at the second position starts lighting in the second display mode, and the appearance is seen through the second display area 208-2 changed to the transparent state. . Although the display mode of the reserve icon has changed, the mini character of the ninja NJA is still displayed, and the first movable character 251 which has started lighting in the second display mode without being able to see the face part Is visible. The display of the mini character of the ninja NJA may be a display that is displayed across multiple times of symbol variation display. Alternatively, it may be a display that is displayed during a part or all of the currently performed symbol variation display. For example, the display may be displayed until before the reach effect is started or before it is developed to the super reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the mini character of the ninja NJA may disappear when the display mode of the hold icon changes.

  FIG. 29 (D ') shows a modification, in which the transmission effect is executed, the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state, and the first movable combination 251 at the first position lights up in the second display mode doing. It is displayed in the vicinity of the symbol display area 208b corresponding to a part of the advance notice effect. The first display area 208-1 overlaps with the display of the ninja NJA mini character, and when the transparent effect is performed, the part of the ninja NJA mini character face becomes transparent, and the second display is performed in the back. The 1st movable character 251 which lights in a mode is visible. That is, a state in which a part of the first display area 208-1 is overlapped with a part of the area where the pre-reading preview effect is displayed, and the display of the pre-reading preview effect (here, the display of the mini character of the ninja NJA) is displayed. , The first display area 208-1 is in a transparent state. In this modification, only the first display area 208-1 may overlap with the display of the mini character of the ninja NJA, and the other display areas such as the second display area 208-2 display the mini character of the ninja NJA. There is no overlap with However, other display areas may overlap with the display of the mini character of the ninja NJA.

  In addition, the display of the mini character of the ninja NJA may be a display of a normal advance effect in addition to a display of a previewed advance effect, and whether or not a certain effect such as a super reach effect or a pseudo-series effect is started. There may be a case where it is a display of the effect that tells the story, or there may be a case where it is a display used for a tutorial (a presentation explanation), etc., and a dedicated display of each of these displays (for example, May be displayed.

  In the above, a number of presentation examples in the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) provided with the first movable character 251 and the fourth movable character 254 described with reference to FIG. The example is summarized and explained again.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram summarizing representative examples of the effects described so far.

  FIGS. 30 (a) to 30 (d) show an example in which the transmission effect is executed in the state where the first movable part 251 is at the second position, which has been described using FIG. That is, in FIG. 30B, the transmission effect is executed, the second display area 208-2 is changed to the transparent state, and the first movable combination 251 at the second position is lit in the second display mode. . In this example, the execution of the first notice effect such as the pseudo continuous effect and the reach effect is not started after the transmission effect, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 30 (d) There is.

  In FIG. 30 (A) to FIG. 30 (E), after the transmission effect is executed with the first movable character 251 in the first position described with reference to FIG. An example is shown. That is, in FIG. 30B, the transmission effect is executed, the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state, and the first movable combination 251 at the first position is lit in the second display mode. . When the transmission effect is executed in the state where the first movable role object 251 is at the first position, the execution of the effect of the first notice is performed as compared with the case where the transmission effect is performed in the state at the second position. It is easy to start, in FIG. 30 (D), the execution of the pseudo-sequence effect is started, and in the same figure (E), the re-variation in the pseudo-sequence effect is started. The character display "x 2" indicating the number of times is displayed.

  In (A) to (D) of FIG. 30, after the transmission effect is performed in the state where the first movable character 251 is at the first position described with reference to FIG. An example is shown in which super reach production is started. That is, in FIG. 30A, during the re-variation display in the pseudo-series effect, the transmission effect is executed, and the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state, and the first movable service object 251 in the first position. Is lit in the second display mode. When the transmission effect is performed in the state where the first movable role object 251 is in the first position, the effect of the first notice (for example, as compared to the case where the transmission effect is performed in the state where it is in the second position The pseudo series effect) may be continued easily, or the effect of the first notice (for example, super reach effect) may be started easily. In FIG. 30 (D), execution of the sword strike reach production, which is one of the super reach production, is started.

  FIGS. 30 (a) to (e) show an example of effects using the first movable character 251 and the fourth movable character 254 described with reference to FIGS. That is, although not shown here, as in FIG. 30 (b), the transmission effect is executed, and the second display area 208-2 is changed to the transparent state, and the first movable part at the second position After the light source 251 is lit in the second display mode, the pseudo connected effect is performed, and the dark transfer effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 30 (i), while the darkening effect is being executed, the upper stage of the fourth movable actor 254 at the seventh position while the entire display area including the fourth display area 208-4 is in the opaque state. Only the LED 2541 lights up in the second display mode. Such lighting condition of only the LED 2541 on the upper stage at the seventh position is expected to be weak when execution of the first preview effect is expected to start, but the dark transition effect is completed, as shown in FIG. In (E), the overreach reach effect, which is one of the effects of the first notice, has been started.

  FIG. 31 is a view showing a modified example of the configuration of the movable part. Hereinafter, the components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as the symbols used so far.

  The first movable part 251 shown in FIG. 31 (a) is different from the first movable part 251 shown in FIG. 14 in the initial position and the movement range. The first movable character 251 shown in FIG. 31A is at the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and moves along the diagonal of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, from the upper right of the initial position, it is movable toward the lower left, and the position in the right symbol display area 208c (the back side of the upper part of the right symbol display area 208c) becomes the tenth position. The position in the display area 208b (the position on the back side of the middle symbol display area 208b at the center in the vertical direction) is at the second position, and the position in the left pattern display area 208a (the position on the back side of the lower part of the left symbol display area 208a ) Is in the first position. In FIG. 31A, the first movable combination 251 in the tenth position is represented by a dotted line, and the first movable combination 251 in the second position is represented by a two-dot chain line, and the first movable combination in the first position is illustrated. The object 251 is represented by an alternate long and short dash line. The first position is the position farthest from the initial position. The tenth position may be set to the initial position. In a certain state (for example, the state before the final display of the special figure (during symbol change display), the state where the change display of the decorative symbol is performed, the state before reach, etc.) The effect of the first notice is easier to be executed in the case of the one position than in the case of the second position, and the case of the second position is the first notice rather than the case of the tenth position. It is easy to carry out the production of.

  In FIG. 31 (b-1), in the state where the first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 31 (a) is at the tenth position, the transmission effect is executed, and the first movable combination 251 is in the second display mode. It is a figure which shows a mode that it is lighting. In the display screen (full display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the area overlapping from the front side with the first movable combination 251 at the tenth position is the UI unit UI3, the hold icon, It does not overlap with the fluctuation icon.

  31 (b-2), in the state where the first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 31 (a) is at the first position, the transmission effect is executed, and the first movable combination 251 is in the second display mode. It is a figure which shows a mode that it is lighting. The first display area 208-1 here overlaps a part of the second hold icon h12, and the transparent effect causes the first display area 208-1 to be in a transparent state. The part is in the transparent state, and the first movable combination 251 lit in the second display mode is visible on the back side of the part in the transparent state.

  31 (b-3), in the state where the first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 31 (a) is at the first position, the transmission effect is executed, and the first movable combination 251 is in the fourth display mode. It is a figure which shows a mode that it is lighting. Also in this example, a part of the second hold icon h12 is in the transparent state, and the first movable combination 251 lit in the fourth display mode is visible on the back side of the part in the transparent state. In addition, in a certain state (for example, the state before the final display of the special figure (in the symbol fluctuation display), the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed variably, the state before the reach, etc.) In the case of the fourth display mode, the effect of the first notice is more easily performed than in the case of the second display mode.

  In this modification, only the first display area 208-1 may overlap with the display of the hold icon which may be a hold icon of the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, and the other display areas such as the second display area 208-2 The display area does not overlap with the display of the hold icon.

  The first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 31 (A) is the same as the first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 14, but the fourth movable combination 254 shown in FIG. 31 (B) is the same as FIG. It differs from the 4th movable character 254 shown. Here, a combination of the first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 31 (A) and the fourth movable combination 254 shown in FIG. 31 (B) will be described.

  In FIG. 31B, a fourth movable character 254 indicated by a solid line represents a fourth movable character in the initial position. The initial position of the fourth movable character 254 is a position to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth movable character 254 is movable from its initial position to a seventh position and an eighth position overlapping the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The seventh position is on the back side of the left symbol display area 208a in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the eighth position is on the back side of the middle symbol display area 208b in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 31B, the fourth movable part 254 in the seventh position is represented by a dotted line, and the fourth movable part 254 in the eighth position is represented by a dashed-dotted line. The fourth movable part 254 shown in FIG. 31 (B) is different from the fourth movable part 254 shown in FIG. 14 in that the eighth position is the maximum movement position from the initial position, up to the ninth position. It does not move.

  The fourth movable character 254 is provided with LEDs at the top and bottom. In the fourth movable character 254 shown in FIG. 31 (B), an LED corresponding to the middle stage LED 2542 provided on the fourth movable character 254 shown in FIG. 14 is provided at the upper side. An LED corresponding to the lower stage LED 2543 provided on the fourth movable character 254 shown in FIG. 14 is provided at the lower side, which is referred to as the middle stage LED 2542, and the lower LED is hereinafter referred to as the lower stage LED 2543. The LED contained in the first movable part 251 shown in FIG. 31A can play the role of the upper LED 2541 provided on the fourth movable part 254.

  Although the 4th movable character 254 shown in FIG. 31B and the first movable character 251 described above are arranged in line in the front-rear direction, the movement regions do not overlap, and both may interfere with each other. Absent.

  The first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 31A is in the first position, and the fourth movable combination 254 shown in FIG. 31B is in the eighth position. The LED that plays the role of the upper-stage LED 2541 and the two LEDs 2542 and 2543 provided in the fourth movable character 254 shown in FIG. This state is the state in which the effect of the first notice is most easily performed.

  In the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, only the area on the front side of each LED may be made transparent by the transmission effect, or the entire fourth movable part 254 shown in FIG. 31 (B) The area on the front side of may be transparent. However, with the first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 31A in the first position and the fourth movable combination 254 shown in FIG. 31B in the eighth position, the entire middle symbol display area 208b is In the transparent state, the division between the first movable character 251 and the fourth movable character 254 can be seen. In this state, the entire LED is turned on in the opaque state without being transparent. An effect may be performed.

  In the case of a conventional effect device, the movable combination can be moved to the front of the display screen to focus on a specific display, but other displays other than the specific display indicate that the movable combination is at the target position. There may be a disadvantage that the movable part will be disturbed by the arm or the like before it moves. On the other hand, according to the first embodiment described above, since the movable part moves on the back side, such a problem does not occur, and the display itself is partially transmitted (substantially extinguished) Therefore, the display may be emphasized more in some cases, or a part of the display may be made transparent to make the back side visible, thereby giving a sense of depth and making it possible to focus the back side more. That is, there is a case where the eyes can necessarily reach the transparent surroundings by partially transmitting them, and the display can be emphasized. In addition, although the display is two-dimensional, if a sense of depth is given, a three-dimensional effect that is difficult to reproduce only with the display becomes possible, making it easy to care about what is behind the display. There is a possibility.

  Subsequently, the configuration of the rendering device of the second embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, the components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as those used so far.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the configuration of the rendering device 206 of the second embodiment.

  In FIG. 32A, the front left side is the front side, and the rear right side is the rear side. Similar to the rendering device 206 of the first embodiment, a family crest article 224E is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (a). However, the initial position of the crest 224E of the second embodiment is a position above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The family crest 224E shown in FIG. 32 (b) is in the initial position. When the family crest product 224E starts its operation, it descends from the initial position to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the third position faces the front (the player side Overlapping from). In FIG. 32 (b), the family crest 224E in the third position is represented by a black solid line. The family crest 224E is further movable from the third position to the sixth position. In FIG. 32 (b), the family crest 224 E in the sixth position is represented by a gray solid line. At the sixth position, about 3/4 of the crest overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side, and the lower side of about 1/4 is below the display screen. It will be located. In the initial position, the family crest 224E is less visible to the player than in the third position. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect. The family crest 224E shown in FIG. 32 is lit in the second display mode.

  Moreover, the 1st movable role thing 251 is arrange | positioned rather than 1st decorative symbol display apparatus 208L shown to Fig.32 (a) at the back side. The first movable character 251 has a ring-shaped character divided into right and left parts, and includes a left arc 2511 and a right arc 2512. The left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. 32C are respectively at their initial positions. That is, the left circular arc portion 2511 sets the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L as the initial position, and the right circular arc portion 2512 sets the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L as the initial position. When the first movable character 251 starts its operation, the left arc 2511 moves from the initial position to the right, and the right arc 2512 moves from the initial position to the left, and both of them are household crests 224E. In the back side of the third position, that is, the circular area S3 'on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is surrounded so as to combine. Thus, the position of the ring-shaped first movable role object 251 is the first position. In FIG. 32C, the first movable part 251 at the first position is indicated by a dotted line. The area inside the first movable part 251 represented by the dotted line is a circular area S3 '.

  FIG. 32D shows the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device, in a state in which the family crest 224E is in the third position and the first movable character 251 is in the first position. When the first display area 208-1 including the area overlapping from the front side to the first movable actor 251 at the first position in the entire display area) is changed to the transparent state by FIG. Although there is a difference in the position in the front-rear direction (depth direction), the crest actor 224E on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the first movable symbol 251 on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is surrounded by That is, the left circular arc portion 2511 is positioned at the outer peripheral portion of the left half of the circular crest character 224E, and the right circular arc portion 2512 is positioned at the outer peripheral portion of the right half. Here, the first movable character 251 lights up in the second display mode, and for the player, the family crest 224E which lights up in the second display mode and the first movable character 251 which lights up in the second display mode as well. Appear to be combined in three dimensions. That is, a three-dimensional structure of a luxurious family crest has been completed. In addition, the first movable character 251 on the back side is used as a Japanese drum, and instead of the front crest 224, the character of the bee is made to appear, and the character of the Japanese drum and the character of the bet are combined. You may make it complete the Japanese drum while playing. That is, the back side character and the front side character may be combined into one and only one (a new thing which has never been done before) may be configured.

  In addition, on the back side of the first movable part 251, a third movable part 253 is disposed instead of the fourth movable part 254 of the first embodiment. The third movable character 253 is a character in which the face of the character of the lord is drawn. The initial position of the third movable character 253 is below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The third movable part 253 shown in FIG. 32 (e) is in the initial position (fourth position). When the third movable character 253 starts an operation, the third movable character 253 rises from an initial position and is movable to a fifth position overlapping the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 32E, the third movable part 253 at the fifth position is indicated by a dotted line. Although the fifth position of the third movable combination 253 and the first position of the first movable combination 251 deviate in the front-rear direction (Z-axis direction), they are substantially the same in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. In position. The effect using the first movable character 251 and the effect using the third movable character 253 may not be performed simultaneously. That is, when the first movable part 251 is in the first position, the third movable part 253 is overlapped with the first movable part 251 even if the third movable part 253 is in the fifth position. An effect is performed using the first movable combination 251 which is not visible and is in the first position. When the first movable combination 251 is at the initial position, an effect using the third movable combination 253 at the fifth position can be performed.

  Further, the transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the family crest 224E as in the first embodiment, and the player displays the display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate IL. The state is made visible. In the light guide plate IL in the second embodiment, a lens cut of a pattern in which the face of a character like a dovetail character is formed is applied to the transmission region. In the light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 32 (a), the light irradiated from the side is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, and a pattern shaped like the face of a maroon character emits light looks like.

  In FIG. 32F, the family crest 224E and the first movable character 251 are both at the initial position, the third movable character 253 is at the fifth position, and the light guide plate IL is emitting light. The third display area 208-3 including the area overlapping from the front side to the third movable character 253 at the fifth position in the display screen of the 1 decorative symbol display device 208L is in the transparent state by the transmission effect Is a diagram showing how it changes to. The pattern of the face of the character of the lord drawn on the third movable character 253 and the pattern of the face of the character of the lord emitting light by the light guide plate IL have the same size and are in the front-rear direction (Z-axis direction) Although there is a difference in position, they coincide with each other in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction and appear to overlap.

  Even if the first movable part 251 and the fourth movable part 254 of the first embodiment are provided at positions that do not interfere with the first movable part 251 and the third movable part 253 of the second embodiment, respectively. Good.

  FIG. 33 is a view showing in stages an example of a transmission effect using the effect device 206 of the second embodiment, FIG. 34 is a view showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 33, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown to.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7”, which is the combination of chances, is stopped and displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a second display mode, which is one of display modes of the pre-reading advance notice. The dotted line shown below the first decorative symbol display device 208L represents the upper end portion of the third movable part 253 located at the initial position (the fourth position).

  In FIG. 33 (b), the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the second display mode which is one of the display modes of the advance notice.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (c), the entire display screen is dark to the same degree as the dark effect, or to a certain degree of darkness even if it is not dark to that extent. This is to make the light emission of the light guide plate IL more visible. In FIG. 33C, a pattern appears on the transparent light guide plate IL disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, in the light guide plate shown in FIG. 33 (c), it looks as if a pattern in which the face of the character of the dovetail character is shaped emits light in the second display mode. Note that the timing at which the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L becomes dark and the timing at which the pattern appears on the light guide plate IL may be simultaneous, or the timing of the darkening may be earlier. Alternatively, the timing of darkening may be later. The appearance of a pattern on the light guide plate IL is a chance, and the execution of the first notice is started when the pattern appears on the light guide plate IL than in the case where the pattern does not appear on the light guide plate IL It is easy to be done. It should be noted that when a pattern appears on the light guide plate IL, the execution of the first preview effect may always be started, or even if the pattern appears on the light guide plate IL, the execution of the first preview effect may not be started. The execution of the first advance presentation may not be started unless the pattern appears.

  In FIG. 33 (e), the pseudo-series effect is started as the effect of the first notice. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (d), the transmission effect may be performed with the first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 32 in the first position. The pseudo-series effect started here may be an effect by the transmission effect being executed, and the effect of the light guide plate IL may be a notice effect that the transmission effect is performed. The effect may be completely unrelated to the transmission effect or the pseudo-sequence effect (the effect of the first notice). In FIG. 33 (f), re-variation in the pseudo-series effect is started.

  In FIG. 33 (g), during the re-variation in the pseudo-rendering effect, the effect by the light guide plate IL is performed again, and the face of the dumb-like character is cast before the darkened display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L There is a pattern that has appeared. The pattern here seems to be emitting light in the third display mode. It is a chance to see the pattern again on the light guide plate IL, and the effect of the first notice is continued when the pattern appears again on the light guide plate IL than in the case where the pattern does not appear on the light guide plate IL It is easy to be developed. In addition, when the design appears on the light guide plate IL again, the effect of the first notice may always be continued (developed), or even if the pattern appears on the light guide plate IL, the effect of the first notice may not be continued. If the pattern does not appear, the presentation of the first notice may not be continued.

  In FIG. 33 (i), the pseudo series effect is continued, and the second temporary stop is performed. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (h), in the state where the first movable combination 251 is in the first position, the transmission effect may be performed, and the continuation effect of the pseudo-series effect is that the transmission effect is performed. The effect may be by Further, the effect of the light guide plate IL in FIG. 33 (g) may be a notice effect that a transmission effect will be performed thereafter, or completely unrelated to the transmission effect or the pseudo-series effect (the effect of the first notice) It may be an effect. In FIG. 33 (j), the second re-variation in the pseudo-series effect is started.

  In FIG. 33 (k), during the second re-fluctuation in the pseudo-rendering effect, the effect by the light guide plate IL is performed three times, and the character of the maroon is displayed in front of the darkened display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L The pattern that appeared in the face of the has appeared. The pattern here seems to emit light in the fourth display mode.

  Soon, the pseudo-series effect is finished, and the effect (the turning effect) to start the development to the super reach is started. When the turning effect is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c disappears, and instead, the first decorative symbol display device 208L The display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started on the upper right. In addition, the UI unit UI3 disappears, and both the hold icons h11 and h12 and the change icon h0 are not displayed. In addition, the number-of-holds display is additionally displayed on the left side of the fifth symbol pd5. Furthermore, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L becomes dark. Note that this display screen may be dark continuously from the time when the effect by the light guide plate IL is performed. When the display screen becomes dark, the movement of the movable part disposed on the rear side of the display screen becomes less visible than before the darkening, and is suitable for the preparation movement.

  In FIG. 33 (m), the family crest 224E disposed on the front side of the display screen starts to move from the initial position. The family crest 224E that has started moving is lit in the fourth display mode. In FIG. 33 (n), the family crest 224E has reached the third position, and the first movable combination 251 has started to move from the initial position on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The first movable character 251 starts moving with the family crest 224E not at least at the initial position. Although the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is in an opaque state, depending on the color of the displayed image, the back side may be visible, but the display screen is dark, and the player Is distracted by the family crest 224E appearing in front of the eyes, and it becomes difficult to notice the movement of the first movable character 251 on the back side. In FIG. 33 (o), the first movable role object 251 reaches the first position. That is, the left circular arc portion 2511 and the right circular arc portion 2512 are united so as to surround the circular area S3 'shown in FIG. 32 (c).

  In FIG. 33 (p), the transmission effect is executed, the first display area 208-1 changes to a transparent state, and the first movable combination 251 can be seen in the back of the first display area 208-1. At this stage, the first movable combination 251 is in the off state. In FIG. 33 (q), the first movable character 251 lights up in the fourth display mode, and the player sees the family crest 224E which lights up in the fourth display mode, and the first lighted in the fourth display mode as well. The movable character 251 appears to be combined three-dimensionally. When such a collaboration effect by the first movable character 251 and the family crest item 224E is a kind of normal notice effect and is performed also in effects other than the scolding effect (representation before developing into super reach) (For example, it may be performed in the final judge effect during super reach described later, etc.), or may be performed only in the inclining effect. In addition, when this collaborative rendition is executed, it is easier to develop into super reach than when it is not executed. Here, the term “prone to develop” includes the case where it evolves. Further, even if this collaborative rendition is executed, it may not evolve, but it may not be evolve unless this collaborative rendition is executed. Furthermore, when the collaboration effect is executed, the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when it is not executed. In addition, the term “certainly displayed” as referred to herein includes the case where displayed definitely. In addition, even when this collaboration effect is executed, there may be a loss, but as long as this collaboration effect is not executed, a big hit may be avoided.

  Although the display modes of the first movable character 251 and the family crest 224E may be different, as in the example here, both may be the same, such as lighting in the fourth display mode. In addition, each of the first movable character 251 and the family crest 224E can be displayed in the above-described first to sixth display modes. Alternatively, the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot may be high.

  In FIG. 33 (r), the first movable combination 251 turns off, and in FIG. 34 (a) following FIG. 33 (r), the transmission effect ends, and the first display area 208-1 returns to the opaque state. In FIG. 34 (b), the first movable character 251 starts the return operation to the initial position on the back side, and in FIG. 34 (c) that follows, the household crest 224E is lit in the fourth display mode. The return operation to the initial position is started as it is. In FIG. 34 (d), although the family crest 224E disappears from the front of the display screen, the display screen remains dark.

  In (e) of FIG. 34, the display screen becomes bright and develops into a sword reach, which is one of super reach. It should be noted that when the sword strike is started, only the fluctuation icon h0 is returned and displayed.

  During the sword reach, as in the example shown in FIG. 15 (l-1), the button effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. 34 (g), the button image 136a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed in a large size, and an arrow display 136b, a character display of "one blow", and a remaining period meter display 136c are also displayed.

  In FIG. 34 (g), the chance button 136 lit in the fourth display mode is pressed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 6H, the button image 136a and the like disappear and the character display of the lord YM and the sword player KG also disappears, and the background display with the letter "holiday" displayed on the upper left And the same effect as the co-production by the first movable character 251 and the family crest 224E, which is executed in FIG. 33 (m) to FIG. But the same effect is executed again. However, the collaboration effect here emits light in the sixth display mode from the time when the family crest 224E starts to move, and the first movable role product 251 also emits light in the sixth display mode finally, As shown in FIG. 34L, the family crest 224E lit in the sixth display mode and the first movable prize 251 similarly lit in the sixth display mode appear to be combined in a three-dimensional manner. In addition, the background display in which the character of "holiday" is displayed on the upper left may be a background display for informing that the lady YM will win, or may be a background display for informing the jackpot decision. In addition, the letter "holiday" on the upper left is displayed while the first movable part 251 is moving or while the first display area 208-1 is in the opaque state, but the first movable part is displayed. The timing in FIG. 34 (j) when the object 251 reaches the first position, or the timing in FIG. 34 (k) when the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state (timing when transmission effect is started), or The 1 movable character 251 may be turned off at the timing shown in FIG. The word "holiday" is a display relating to a big hit, so it is easy to attract the player's attention. On the other hand, even in the opaque state, the movement of the first movable part 251 may be visible if the eyes are carefully focused. However, if the first movable character 251 is moved while paying attention to the character of “holiday”, it becomes difficult to notice the movement of the first movable character 251. The first movable combination 251, which has been lit in the sixth display mode, is extinguished at the timing of FIG. 34 (m), and in FIG. 34 (n), the transmission effect is ended, and the first display area 208-1 is Return to opacity. The letter "holiday" on the upper left may continue to be displayed, but may disappear at the timing of FIG. 34 (m) when the first movable role object 251 is extinguished, or in FIG. It may disappear at the timing. When the transparent effect is finished, the family crest 224E, which has been at the third position, starts moving toward the sixth position. That is, the household crest item 224E does not return to the initial position, unlike in the case of the inclining effect. It can be said that the third position is the effect position, and the role of the effect is already finished. In FIG. 34 (p), the family crest 224E reaches the sixth position, and part of the family crest 224E is from the front side to the upper end portion of the third movable combination 253 in the initial position (fourth position) It is overlapping. Note that the entire family crest 224E may overlap with part or all of the third movable part 253 from the front side.

  The third movable character 253 starts rising from the initial position (fourth position) with the family crest 224E remaining at the sixth position. The third movable character 253 is hidden by the family crest 224E remaining at the sixth position while emitting light in the sixth display mode between the initial position (fourth position) and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. , Makes it difficult to notice the movement of the third movable character 253. In FIG. 34 (q), the third movable character 253 is moving upward to the sixth position, and has already risen to the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 34 (r), the third movable role product 253 reaches the sixth position and stops at the sixth position. Even when the third movable character 253 reaches the sixth position, the family crest 224E remains in the sixth position while emitting light in the sixth display mode. In addition, the third movable part 253 may also be capable of emitting light so that the first movable part 251 is capable of emitting light, and even when the third display area 208-3 is in the opaque state, it is in the sixth position. When a certain third movable character 253 emits light, the light passes through the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in the same manner as the LED 2541 in the upper stage of the fourth movable character 254 shown in FIG. It can be seen that light is emitted from the front side.

  In FIG. 35 (a) following FIG. 34 (r), the transmission effect is executed, the third display area 208-3 is changed to the transparent state, and in the back of the third display area 208-3, A third movable character 253 on which a face is drawn is located. The effect by the light guide plate IL is started while the transmission effect is being performed, and in FIG. 35 (b), the face of the character of the lord drawn on the third movable character 253 and the light from the light guide plate IL. It looks like the pattern of the character's face is overlapped. That is, the cooperation effect by the light guide plate IL and the third movable product 253 is performed.

  Eventually, the effect of the light guide plate IL is temporarily ended, the pattern of the light guide plate IL disappears, and the third movable part 253 on which the face of the character of the lord is drawn has the third display area 208-3 in the transparent state over. It becomes visible (FIG. 35 (d)). Then, the effect of the light guide plate IL is started again, and in FIG. 35 (d), the face of the character of the lord drawn on the third movable character 253 and the face of the character of the lord who emits light on the light guide plate IL are molded. The patterns are visible again and again. Such an effect can be easily realized by repeating on / off of an irradiation unit (light emitter) such as an LED for irradiating light to the light guide plate.

  Eventually, in FIG. 35 (f), the transmission effect ends, the third display area 208-3 returns to the opaque state, and the third movable role object 253 disappears. In FIG. 35 (g), the family crest 224E, which has remained at the sixth position, starts rising toward the initial position while emitting light in the sixth display mode, and the third movable character 253 has On the back side of the decorative symbol display device 208L, the lowering is started toward the initial position (the fourth position). In FIG. 35 (h), the third movable character 253 is returned to the initial position (fourth position), but the family crest 224E continues to rise, and in FIG. It has returned to its initial position.

  As described above, the co-rendering effect by the first movable character 251 and the family crest character 224E, which is performed after the chance button 136 is pressed, and the transmission effect in which the third display area 208-3 changes to the transparent state, It can be said that it is a part of the final judge effect, and it can be said that it is a turning effect.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (j), a scene in which the sword master KG falls is displayed as a result of the final judge effect. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (k), the crown pattern YM is won, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit ("decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6") is finalized and displayed. ing.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, the same pattern is used as the pattern of the face of the character of the toussame drawn on the third movable part 253 and the face of the character of the toussame light emitting from the light guide plate IL. Although the third display area 208-3 is one size larger, the sense of depth may be easily understood by enlarging the third display area 208-3 as it is closer to the front. In the example shown in FIG. 35A, the pattern of light emitted by the light guide plate IL is the pattern of the outline of the face of the character of the maroon-like character drawn on the third movable character 253 and is made the largest size. The third display area 208-3 was made one size smaller than the pattern of its outline so as to be inside the pattern. The face of the character of the tounou character drawn on the third movable character 253 is made one size smaller than that of the third display area 208-3 so as to be inside the area. By doing this, it may be easy to understand that the light guide plate IL is on the most front side, the transmissive liquid crystal display device is on the back, and the third movable part 253 is on the back.

  FIG. 36 is a view showing a modified example of the transmission effect described with reference to FIGS.

  (B-1) in the left column of FIG. 36 is in the same state as FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 33, when the effect of the light guide plate IL is started, the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is darkened, but in this example, the effect of the light guide plate IL is started Before the darkening rendition is started (FIG. 36 (b-2)). The dark change production is a precursor production of the production of the light guide plate IL, a notice production, a precursor production of the transmission production (cooperative production by the first movable character 251 and the family crest product 224E), a notice production, or the light guide plate IL And it may be a precursor effect of the collaboration effect by the third movable role 253 or may be an advance notice effect. By using the dark transition production as a prognostic production or a preliminary production, it is possible to give expectation to the execution of the subsequent production, and the presentation may be effective even when the production is actually performed. In the light guide plate shown in FIG. 36 (c), the effect of the light guide plate IL is started, and it looks as if a pattern in which the face of the character of the maroon is shaped is emitting light in the sixth display mode. 36 (b'-1) to FIG. 36 (b'-2) in the middle row of FIG. 36 are the same as FIG. 36 (b-1) to FIG. 36 (b-2), and FIG. In '-2) the darkening effect is started. In (c-1) in FIG. 36, the effect of the light guide plate IL is not started, and on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first movable character 251 starts to move from the initial position, Has stopped at a different first position. That is, in this example, the back side of the left symbol display area 208a is at the first position (hereinafter referred to as "first position on the left") for the left arc portion 2511, and the right symbol is displayed for the right arc portion 2512. The back side of the area 208a is at the first position (hereinafter, referred to as "right first position"). In (d-1) in FIG. 36, the left circular arc portion 2511 at the first position on the left side of the display screen on which the dark effect of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is performed is overlapped from the front side. The first display area 208-1L on the left side including the area and the first display area 208-1R on the right side including the area overlapping from the front side to the right arc 2512 at the first position on the right side are both transparent. It turns into a transparent state by the effect, and the left arc part 2511 of the unlit state is visible on the back side of the first display area 208-1L on the left side, and the right side of the first display area 208-1R on the right side is unlit The arc part 2512 can be seen. The first display area 208-1L on the left side and the first display area 208-1R on the right side are semicircular areas.

  In FIG. 36 (e-1), both the left arc 2511 and the right arc 2512 emit light in the sixth display mode.

  In the modification in the middle row of FIG. 36 described above, the transmission effect is performed with the left arc portion 2511 at the first position on the left side and the right arc portion 2512 at the first position on the right side. This transparent effect is an effect that gives notice that the effect of the first notice such as a pseudo continuous effect is started thereafter.

  The first position on the left side may be the second position on the left side with respect to the first position described with reference to FIG. It may be the second position on the right side of the first position described.

  36 (b ''-1) to FIG. 36 (b ''-2) in the right column of FIG. 36 are the same as FIG. 36 (b-1) to FIG. 36 (b-2), and FIG. In (b ′ ′ − 2), the darkening effect is started. In (c′-1) of FIG. 36, the effect of the light guide plate IL is started, and it looks as if a pattern in which the face of the character of the maroon is shaped is emitting light in the second display mode. In addition, during the effect of the light guide plate IL, the third movable part 253 disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts to move, and from the initial position (the fourth position) to the fifth position It is rising. In this example, due to the darkening effect, it is easy to see the pattern of the light guide plate IL, and it is difficult to see the movement of the third movable character 253. As described above, the dark turn effect functions as a prognostic effect or a notice effect, but in this example, it also has a function of hiding the preparation operation of the effect to be started later. In FIG. 36 (d'-1), the third movable product 253 reaches the fifth position, and in FIG. 36 (e'-1), the third display is performed with the effect of the light guide plate IL continuing. The area 208-3 changes to a transparent state, and a pattern of a face of a character of the character of the character of the character of the character of the character of light that is illuminated by the light guide plate IL overlaps a face of the character of the character of the character . That is, although the collaboration effect by the light guide plate IL and the third movable role product 253 is executed, this collaboration effect announces that the first preview effect such as the pseudo-series effect is started after this. It is an effect.

  In the modification in the right-hand column of FIG. 36 described above, the effect of darkening makes it easy to see the pattern of the light guide plate IL, and the movement of the third movable character 253 is not realized, and the cooperation effect is started.

  FIG. 37 shows a further modification of the modification in the right-hand column of FIG.

  The example in the left column of FIG. 37 corresponds to a further modification of the modification in the right column of FIG. Hereinafter, differences will be mainly described, and redundant descriptions may be omitted.

  37 (b-1) to FIG. 37 (b-2) are the same as FIG. 36 (b ''-1) to FIG. 36 (b ''-2), and in FIG. 37 (b-2) The production has been started. In FIG. 37 (c-1), before the effect of the light guide plate IL is started, the third movable character 253 arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts to move, and the initial position ( It has been rising from the 4th position) to the 5th position. That is, in this example, unlike the modification in the right-hand column in FIG. 36, the third movable combination 253 starts to move after the start of the darkening effect and before the start of the effect of the light guide plate IL. In FIG. 37 (d-1), the third movable role object 253 has reached the fifth position. In addition, the effect of the light guide plate IL is started, and it looks as if a pattern in which the face of the character of the lord has been shaped is emitting light in the second display mode. The effect of the light guide plate IL may be started at the same time as the third movable part 253 reaches the fifth position, or may be started after the third movable part 253 reaches the fifth position. Alternatively, it may be started before the third movable part 253 reaches the fifth position. In (e-1) of FIG. 37, in the state where the effect of the light guide plate IL continues, the third display area 208-3 changes to the transparent state, and the figure-like character drawn on the third movable character 253 It is seen that the face and the pattern of the character of the character of the lord who emits light by the light guide plate IL overlap and appear.

  From the middle to the right in FIG. 37, an example is shown in which the operation of the first movable part shown in FIG. 32 is different from the above.

  In FIG. 37 (b'-1), the left circular arc portion 2511 constituting the first movable combination 251 is at the first position on the left side described with reference to FIG. 36 (c-1), and the first movable combination The right circular arc portion 2512 that constitutes 251 is at the first position on the right side described using FIG. 36 (c-1). In FIG. 37 (b'-2), the darkening effect is started in this state. When the dark transition effect is started, the left arc portion 2511 rotates around the left vertical axis (not shown) at the first position on the left side, and the right arc portion 2512 is not shown at the first position on the right side. Rotate around the right vertical axis of. In FIG. 37 (c′-1), the left circular arc 2511 and the right circular arc 2512 after rotation are shown by dotted lines. By performing the dark transition effect, it is difficult to notice the rotational operation of each of the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512. When the rotation of each of the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 is finished, as shown in FIG. 37 (d'-1), the effect of the light guide plate IL is started, and [2] It looks as if light is emitted in the display mode. Next, in FIG. 37 (e′-1), the left arc portion 2511 rotated at the first position on the left side of the display screen on which the dark effect of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is performed is over from the front side. A first display area 208-1L 'on the left side including the overlapping area and a first display area 208 on the right side including the area overlapping from the front side to the right arc 2512 rotated at the first position on the right side. Both -1R 'changes to the transparent state by the transmission effect, and the rotated left circular arc 2511 is seen behind the first display area 208-1L' on the left side, and the first display area 208-1R 'on the right side The rotated right arc 2512 can be seen on the far side of. It should be noted that although the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 have LEDs built in the surface (front surface) that was the front side before rotating, they become the front side after rotating. An example in which the LED is not built in the rear surface (back side) may be used, but in this example, the LEDs are built in both the front side and the back side, and in FIG. 37 (e′-1) In the unlit state, in the figure (f'-1), both the left arc 2511 and the right arc 2512 emit light in the fourth display mode.

  As described above, in this example, each of the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 performs the rotation operation, but the player is prevented from being aware of the rotation operation by the darkening effect. In addition, since the chance button 136 vibrates and the transmitting portion 191 vibrates, the rotation operation may be performed while the player's attention is drawn by these vibration operations, but these vibration operations may be performed. It may be possible to respond to the rotation operation only by the dark change effect without performing the dare.

  The position of the left arc portion 2511 rotated at the first position on the left side may be the second position on the left side, and the area overlapping from the front side may be the second display area on the left side. The position of the right circular arc portion 2512 rotated at the first position may be the second position on the right side, and the area overlapping from the front side may be the second display area on the right side.

  FIG. 38 is a view showing a modified example etc. of the effect of the light guide plate IL.

  FIG. 38 (b) shows the same situation as FIG. 33 (m), but in FIG. 38 (b) the darkening effect has not yet been started. Also, the family crest 224E remains at the initial position. In FIG. 38 (c), the darkening effect is started, and in FIG. 38 (d), the family crest 224E starts to move from the initial position. The family crest 224E that has started to move is lit in the fourth display mode also here. In (e) of FIG. 38, the family crest 224E reaches the third position, and on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first movable combination 251 starts moving from the initial position. In addition, even while the first movable combination 251 is moving, the effect of the light guide plate IL is not started, and the preparation operation of the first movable combination 251 is not noticed only by the dark transition effect. In (f) of FIG. 38, the first movable part 251 reaches the first position. That is, the left circular arc portion 2511 and the right circular arc portion 2512 are united so as to surround the circular area S3 'shown in FIG. 32 (c).

  In FIG. 38G, the transmission effect is executed, the first display area 208-1 is changed to the transparent state, and the first movable part 251 in the unlit state can be seen in the back of the first display area 208-1. . Then, the effect of the light guide plate IL is started at the timing shown in FIG. In the effect of the light guide plate IL here, it looks as if a pattern imitating an effect image is emitting light in the fourth display mode. Then, after the effect of the light guide plate IL is started, the first movable combination 251 at the first position temporarily emits light in the fourth display mode, and then is turned off (FIG. 38 (j)).

  In (k) of FIG. 38, although the transmission effect ends and the first display area 208-1 returns to the opaque state, the effect of the light guide plate IL continues. In FIG. 38L, the first movable part 251 starts the return operation to the initial position on the back side. The effect of the light guide plate IL continues at least until the first movable combination 251 completely returns to the initial position, so that the player does not notice the return movement of the first movable combination 251.

  The right column in FIG. 38 illustrates an example of adjusting the light amount of the LED contained in the family crest 224E and the LED contained in the first movable character 251.

  While the symbol is stopped or a demonstration is displayed, the menu screen is called by operating the chance button 136 or the OK button 181b of the operation key unit 181 or the like. During the demonstration display, the menu screen may be automatically switched. Further, even during symbol variation display, the menu screen may be able to be called up by performing a calling operation. A menu screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 38 (A). In this menu screen, various adjustments, customization, etc. can be performed, and selection operation (cursor movement) is performed using the up key or down key of the cross key 181a of the operation key unit 181, and the decision operation is performed by pressing the OK button 181b. Can do FIG. 38A shows a state in which light amount adjustment is selected. When the OK button 181 b is pressed in this state, the screen is switched to the light amount adjustment screen shown in FIG. 38B. On this light amount adjustment screen, an indicator showing the size of the light amount is displayed. The level of the indicator is increased or decreased using the left key or the right key of the cross key 181a, and the light amount is determined by pressing the OK button 181b. Do. Although the light amount adjustment screen shown in FIG. 38B is at level 6, the light amount adjustment screen shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, FIG. 38E shows an example of a display screen when the menu screen shown in FIG. 38A is called up and the light amount adjustment is selected in a state where the transmission effect is actually being executed. That is, it becomes the light quantity adjustment screen during presentation. Note that the state in which the transmission effect is actually executed is also the state in which the symbol variation display is performed. In FIG. 38E, the family crest 224E is at the third position on the front side of the display screen, and further, since the first display area 208-1 of the display screen is in a transparent state, The indicator showing the size is hardly visible, but conversely, the LED itself for adjusting the light quantity looks solid. That is, the family crest 224E lit in the fourth display mode and the first movable prize 251 also lit in the fourth display mode are firmly visible. Therefore, by operating the left key or the right key of the cross key 181a, the adjustment can be performed while confirming the actual light amount of the LED. However, in FIG. 38F, it is not clear whether the level of the indicator is 3 levels, 4 levels or 5 levels.

  In the light amount adjustment screen shown in FIG. 38 (B), since the level of the indicator is clearly seen, the light amount of the LED which is located at the initial position etc. and can not actually be recognized You can not, but you can adjust the level of the indicator. However, the light amount adjustment screen shown in FIG. 38 (B) may be limited to a screen in which the light amount can be adjusted by limiting the LEDs that can be visually recognized.

  Subsequently, the configuration of the rendering device of the third embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, the components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as those used so far.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the configuration of the rendering device 206 of the third embodiment and the configuration of a modification thereof.

  In FIG. 39 (a), the left front side is the front side, and the right rear side is the back side. On the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 39 (a), a movable character on which the face of the character of the lord is drawn is arranged. Although this prize has the same configuration as the third movable prize 253 in the rendering device 20 of the second embodiment, it is the first movable prize 251 in the rendering device 206 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. It is disposed at the position of the role, and is hereinafter referred to as a first movable role 251. In addition, on the rear side of the first movable part 251, a fixed part 255 is disposed. The fixed character 255 is a character on which the face of a shark character is drawn, and is a fixedly arranged character which does not move. This fixed combination 255 is fixedly arranged at the fifth position of the combination which was the third movable combination 253 in the rendering device 206 of the second embodiment.

  The initial position of the first movable part 251 in the third embodiment is a lower position than the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 39 (b) is in the initial position. When an operation is started, the first movable character object 251 rises from the initial position and is movable to a first position overlapping the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 39 (b), the first movable part 251 at the first position is indicated by a dotted line. Although the first position of the first movable character 251 and the position at which the fixed character 255 is fixedly disposed are displaced in the front-rear direction (Z-axis direction), they are substantially the same in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. is there. Therefore, the fixed role part 255 is located on the back side of the circle represented by the dotted line in FIG. 39 (b).

  Note that the first movable part 251 and the fourth movable part 254 of the first embodiment may be provided at positions that do not interfere with the first movable part 251 and the fixed part 255 of the third embodiment. In addition, the first movable combination 251 (left arc portion 2511 and right arc portion 2512) of the second embodiment is provided at a position not interfering with the first movable combination 251 and the fixed combination 255 of the third embodiment. May be Furthermore, the family crest 224E and the light guide plate IL disposed on the front side in the second embodiment are also provided in the rendering device 206 of the third embodiment. However, in the effect device 206 according to the third embodiment, the family crest 224E may be omitted, and the light guide plate IL may be omitted.

  FIG. 39 (c) is a view showing a modification of the effect device 206 of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 39 (a).

  Also in FIG. 39 (c), the front left side is the front side, and the rear right side is the rear side. On the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 39 (c), the movable first movable part is drawn with the face of the character of the lord on the upper side and the face of the bearded character on the lower side. An object 251 is arranged. In this modification, the first movable part 251 can move up and down. That is, as shown in FIG. 39 (d), the first movable combination is located between the position where the first movable combination 251 is on the upper side and the position where the first movable combination 251 is on the lower side. The character 251 is movable. The position at which the first movable part 251 is at the upper side is the initial position (second position) of the first movable part 251 and the position at which the first movable part 251 is on the lower side is Alternatively, the position at which the first movable part 251 is located at the lower side is the initial position (second position) of the first movable part 251, and the first position may be the first position. The position where the movable part 251 is at the upper side may be the first position. The dotted-line circle shown in FIG. 39 (d) is a partial area of the first movable combination 251 overlapping with the first display area 208-1 that is in the transparent state by the transmission effect from the front side. That is, even if it is the 1st movable character 251 displayed as Chance in 1st Embodiment, it is the 1st movable character 251 which consists of the left circular arc part 2511 and the right circular arc part 2512 in 2nd Embodiment, In the third embodiment, even in the case of the first movable combination 251 on which the face of the character of the lord is drawn, the whole is overlapped with the first display area 208-1 from the front side. Then, only a part of the first movable part 251 is overlapped. Also, the lower half of the first movable role 251 can be viewed as a first effect means, and the upper half of the first movable effect 251 can be viewed as a second effect. In this case, the effect using the first effect means in which the face of the wolf character is drawn and the effect using the second effect means in which the face of the Tonosama character is drawn are not simultaneously performed. become. Alternatively, the face of a wolf character may emit light, or the face of a royal character may emit light. In this case, even if the first display area 208-1 is in an opaque state, the light of the character located on the back side of the first display area 208-1 emits light, so that the light is the first decorative pattern. It can be seen that the light is transmitted from the display device 208L and light is emitted from the front side in the same manner as the LED 2541 at the upper stage of the fourth movable part 254 shown in FIG. 20 (o). Furthermore, if the face of the character of the lord is displayed, the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol form may be easier to be displayed than when the face of the dark character is displayed.

  In addition, the first movable combination 251 and the fourth movable combination 254 of the first embodiment may be provided at positions that do not interfere with the first movable combination 251 of this modification. In addition, the first movable combination 251 (left circular arc 2511 and right circular arc 2512) of the second embodiment may be provided at a position that does not interfere with the first movable combination 251 of this modification. Furthermore, the family crest 224E and the light guide plate IL disposed on the front side in the second embodiment are also provided in this modification. However, the family crest 224E may be omitted, and the light guide plate IL may be omitted.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of effects in the effect apparatus of the third embodiment and its modification.

  The example shown in the left column of FIG. 40 is a view showing an example of effects in the effect device of the third embodiment shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and (b).

  In FIG. 40 (b), the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Also, the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 40 (b) is displayed in the second display mode, which is one of the display modes of the advance notice. Also, the first movable part 251 is in the initial position, and the dotted line shown below the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 40 (b) represents the upper end portion of the first movable part 251 in the initial position. ing.

  In FIG. 40 (c), the transmission effect is started, and the display area 208-13 including the area overlapping the fixed part 255 from the front side in the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is transparent. Change to the state. As described above, since the fixed character 255 is fixedly arranged at the fifth position of the character that was the third movable character 253 in the rendering device of the second embodiment, this display area 208-13 Is the same display area as the third display area, and is also the same display area as the first display area 208-1 corresponding to the first movable service 251 at the first position, which is indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 39 (b) . Hereinafter, the display area 208-13 is referred to as a common display area 208-13. The common display area 208-13 may be slightly different from the third display area, may be slightly different in size, may be slightly different from the first display area, or slightly different in size. Good. That is, the common display area 208-13 at least partially overlaps the third display area, and it is sufficient that at least a portion also overlaps with the first display area, and only a portion overlaps with the third display area. The first display area may partially overlap, or the third display area may entirely overlap, and the first display area may entirely overlap. In the back of the common display area 208-13 in the transparent state, a fixed character 255 in which the face of the wolf character is drawn is visible. Even when the transmission effect is started, the first movable combination 251 remains at the initial position.

  In (d) of FIG. 40, the transmission effect is temporarily ended, and the fixed character 255 disappears. Once the transmission effect is finished, the first movable combination 251, which has been at the initial position (second position) until then, starts rising toward the first position, and in FIG. 251 has reached the first position. Note that although the dark transition effect is not started here, the dark transition effect may be started before or at the same time the first movable combination 251 starts moving from the initial position.

  When the first movable combination 251 reaches the first position, as shown in FIG. 40 (f), the transmission effect is started again, and the common display area 208-13 becomes transparent again. The fixed character 255 is overlapped from the front side by the first movable character 251 at the first position, and from the front side, the first on which the face of the character of the duvet is drawn through the common display area 208-13. The movable character 251 is more easily visible than the fixed character 255. That is, the term “visible” as used herein also includes the fact that the fixed character 255 has completely disappeared and the first movable character 251 has become visible.

  When the first movable character 251 on which the face of the Tonosama character is drawn, which is disposed on the front side of the fixed character 255 on which the face of the black character is drawn, is revealed by the transparent effect, the black character The presentation of the first notice is more likely to be started than when the fixed character 255 on which the face is drawn is visible. In addition, the jackpot symbol may be easily determined and displayed finally. As described above, in the rendering device of the third embodiment, after narrowing the viewable area of the common display area 208-13 to one place, the movable character with high expectation (reliability) is expected (reliability) ) Is placed closer to the player (front side) than the lower movable part, so that it looks larger.

  The example shown in the middle column of FIG. 40 is a modification of the example shown in the left column.

  As in FIG. 40 (b), in FIG. 40 (b ') in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the first movable character 251 is in the initial position, and the dotted line shown in FIG. 40 (b') is the initial The upper end portion of the first movable part 251 in the position is shown.

  In FIG. 40 (c '), the transmission effect is started, and the common display area 208-13 is changed to the transparent state. In this modification, at the same time as the transmission effect is started, the first movable combination 251, which has remained at the initial position, starts moving toward the first position, and thereafter in the left column of FIG. It is the same as the example shown. Note that the first movable role object 251 may start moving toward the first position before the transmission effect is started. Alternatively, after this, although the transmission effect is temporarily ended, the first movable combination 251 may start moving toward the first position before the transmission effect is ended after the transmission effect is started. By doing this, switching from the fixed character 255 to the first movable character 251, that is, to the face of the character with a high expectation, after causing the face of the character with a low expectation to appear once It is possible to quickly perform promotion effects such as switching of.

  The example shown in the column on the right side of FIG. 40 is a view showing an example of effects in a modification of the effect apparatus of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 39 (c).

  In FIG. 40 (B), variable display of a decorative symbol is performed. Also, the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 40 (B) is displayed in the second display mode which is one of the display modes of the normal advance notice. Here, the position where the first movable part 251 is at the upper side is the initial position of the first movable part 251 and the position at which the first movable part 251 is on the lower side is the first position. I will be in one position. In FIG. 40 (B), the first movable part 251 is in the initial position, and the dotted line shown above the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 40 (B) is the first movable part 251 in the initial position. Among them, the lower end portion of the portion 251Y on which the face of the character of the lord is drawn.

  In FIG. 40C, the transmission effect is started, and the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state. In the first movable combination 251 at the initial position, the portion overlapped with the first display area 208-1 is the portion 251G on which the face of the brow character is drawn, and in FIG. In the back of the first display area 208-1 which has been changed to, the face of the wolf character can be seen.

  In FIG. 40 (D), the transmission effect is temporarily ended, and the face of the brow character disappears. Once the transmission effect is finished, the first movable combination 251, which has been at the initial position, starts to descend toward the first position. In FIG. 40 (E), the first movable combination 251 is at the first position. Has reached. Note that although the dark transition effect is not started here, the dark transition effect may be started before or at the same time the first movable combination 251 starts moving from the initial position.

  When the first movable role object 251 reaches the first position, as shown in FIG. 40F, the transmission effect is started again, and the first display area 208-1 becomes transparent again. In the first movable character 251 at the first position, the portion overlapped with the first display area 208-1 is a portion 251Y on which the face of the character of the domino character is drawn, and in FIG. In the back of the first display area 208-1 changed to the state, the face of the character of the lord is seen. The dotted line shown below the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 40 (F) is a portion 251G of the first movable role product 251 at the first position, on which the face of the brow character is drawn. It represents the top part.

  Subsequently, the configuration of the rendering device of the fourth embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, the components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as those used so far.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the configuration of the rendering device 206 of the fourth embodiment.

  In FIG. 41 (a), the left front side is the front side, and the right rear side is the back side. A fixed combination 255 is disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 41 (a). The fixed character 255 in the fourth embodiment is a character in which the face of a character like a domino is drawn on the upper side, and the face of a dark character is drawn on the lower side, and is a fixedly arranged character that does not move. The face of the character of the Tonosama character and the face of the brow character drawn on the fixed character 255 appear by transparent effect, but if the face of the tow character appears, it is more than if the face of the brow character appears Also, the first notice is likely to be started. In addition, the jackpot symbol may be easily determined and displayed finally.

  On the other hand, the second movable character 2521 for weak effect is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second movable character 252 for strong effect is further on the front side than that. It is arranged.

  The second movable character 2521 for the weak effect is a character of the bowl constituting the bowl, and the initial position of the second movable character 2521 for the weak effect is above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It becomes a position. The second movable mobile object 2521 for weak effect shown in FIG. 41 (b) is in the initial position. When the second movable character 2521 for weak effect starts to move, it descends from the initial position, and the fixed character 255 is positioned on the head of the character of Tonosama, and it is covered on the head of the bearded character. Stop at the position where it looks like.

  The second movable character 2522 for high-level effect is a character other than a bowl (for example, a scroll, a whistle, a whistle, a bowl shape, etc.) constituting a bowl, and the second movable high-frequency portion The initial position 2522 is also above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second movable movable object 2522 for strong effect shown in FIG. 41 (c) is in the initial position. When the second movable mobile character 2522 for high-level effect starts to move, it descends from the initial position, to a position on the stationary character 255 that matches the face of the character of the lord and a position that matches the face of the crow character. Stop.

  In addition, although the movement direction from the initial position of the second movable combination 2521 for the weak effect and the second movable combination 252 for the strong effect was both downward directions, even if the movement directions of the both are different. Good, for example, the initial position of the second movable role 2522 for strong effect is located below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second movable object 2522 for strong effect rises from the initial position You may Alternatively, the initial position of the second movable role 2521 for weak effect is positioned below the first decorative symbol display device 208L so that the second movable portion 2521 for weak effect rises from the initial position. It is also good.

  Although the 2nd movable character 2521 for weak production and the 2nd movable character 2522 for strong production are shifted in the front-rear direction (Z-axis direction), they coincide in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. As shown in FIG. 41 (d), the second effect of the second movable role 2521 for the weak effect and the second effect of the second movable role 2522 for the strong effect combine to form a brow when viewed from the front side. 41 (b) and FIG. 41 (c), the circle indicated by the dotted line in the upper part looks like the second movable character 2521 for weak presentation is covered on the head of the character of the Tonosama character, Weak presentation when the second movable combination 2522 for strong presentation matches the face of the character of the Tonosama character, and the second movable combination 2521 for weak presentation and the second movable combination 2522 for high presentation are combined. It represents the position of the second movable role 2521 for the second role and the second movable role 2522 for the strong effect. Also, in FIG. 41 (b) and FIG. 41 (c), the circle indicated by the lower dotted line looks like the second movable combination 2521 for weak effect is put on the head of the brow character At the same time, when the second movable character 2522 for strong presentation matches the face of the character of the wolf, and the second movable character 2521 for weak presentation and the second movable character 2522 for strong presentation are combined, It represents the position of the second movable combination 2521 for weak effects and the second movable combination 252 for strong effects.

  In FIG. 41 (e), it appears that the second movable character 2521 for weak presentation is covered with the head of the character of the character of the fixed character 255, and the second movable character 2522 for strong presentation on its face. Is a diagram showing that the second movable character 2521 for the weak effect and the second movable character 2522 for the strong effect are combined, and it looks as if the character of the lord has worn a whistle.

  According to the fourth embodiment, a pattern (hereinafter referred to as a “first pattern”) in a position where the second movable role product 2521 for weak effect appears to be covered on the head of each character, and for strong effect Of the second movable combination 2522 of the same position as the face of each character (hereinafter referred to as "the second pattern"), and the second movable combination 2521 for the weak effect was put on the head of each character It is possible to execute three patterns of effects with the pattern (hereinafter referred to as the “third pattern”) in which the second movable combination 2522 for strong effect is also at a position that looks like this and is also in a position that matches the face of each character. is there. As the pattern is larger, the first notice is more likely to be produced. In addition, the jackpot symbol may be easily determined and displayed finally. Note that the second pattern may not be executed.

  In addition, the third pattern is executed when the character is given priority and the first pattern is executed and it looks as if the character of the you are covered with the second movable character 2521 for weak effect. The effect of the first notice is more likely to be started than in the case where it appears that a wolf character has worn a wolf. In addition, the jackpot symbol may be easily determined and displayed finally. Or, conversely, in the case where the second movable role is given priority and the third pattern is executed and it looks like the spider character is wearing a spider, the first pattern is executed and the character of the lord is The presentation of the first notice may be easier to start than when it looks as if the second movable character 2521 for weak presentation is covered on the head, and the big hit symbol may be easily displayed final.

  In addition, the effect of the first notice is more pronounced when the first pattern is executed with the appearance of the face of the character of the lord, than when the third pattern is executed with the appearance of the face of the bearded character. Is easy to get started. In addition, the jackpot symbol may be easily determined and displayed finally.

  Note that the first movable part 251 and the fourth movable part 254 of the first embodiment may be provided at positions that do not interfere with the fixed part 255 of the fourth embodiment. In addition, the first movable combination 251 (left circular arc 2511 and right circular arc 2512) of the second embodiment may be provided at a position that does not interfere with the fixed combination 255 of the fourth embodiment. Furthermore, the family crest 224E and the light guide plate IL disposed on the front side in the second embodiment are also provided in the rendering device 206 of the fourth embodiment. However, in the effect device 206 according to the fourth embodiment, in addition to the lens cut of the pattern of the face of the character of the crown, as described later, the lens cut of the pattern imitating the effect image is applied to the light guide plate IL. ing. In the effect device 206 of the fourth embodiment, the family crest 224E may be omitted. Furthermore, the first movable part 251 and the fixed part 255 in the third embodiment may be provided instead of the fixed part 255 in the fourth embodiment, or the first movable in the modification of the third embodiment. The accessory 251 may be provided instead of the fixed accessory 255 of the fourth embodiment.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of effects in the effect device of the fourth embodiment. The circle represented by the upper dotted line shown in FIG. 42 (b) and the like represents the position on the fixed character 255 at which the face of the character of the lord is drawn, and the circle represented by the dotted line below corresponds to the 固定 in the fixed character 255. Represents the position where the character's face was drawn.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 42 (b), the fifth symbol pd5 is displayed on the upper right, and variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 42, the darkening effect is performed. As described above, although the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is in the opaque state, the back side may be visible depending on the color of the displayed image, but the display screen is dark. The face of the character of the character of the character of the character of the character of the character of the character of the character of the character of the character drawn on the fixed character 255 is likely to be invisible.

  In FIG. 42 (c), the effect of the first pattern is executed, and the second effect of the second effect 2521 for the weak effect is lowered from the initial position to a position where it appears to be covered on the head of an eyebrow character. . However, the transparent effect has not been started, and the brow character is not visible.

  In (d) of FIG. 42, in the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the lower effect display area 208-U overlapping the face of the bearded character in the fixed character 255 is started. It becomes transparent, and in the lower part of the lower display area 208-U, the face of the brow character in the fixed character 255 can be seen, and the second movable portion 2521 for weak effect is on the head of the brow character It looks like it was covered.

  In (e) of FIG. 42, although the transparent effect is finished and the face of the brow character disappears, the second movable combination 2521 for weak effect is left as it is. In the subsequent FIG. 42 (f), the second movable part 2521 for weak effect starts rising toward the initial position, and in the same figure (g), the second movable part 2521 for weak effect is in the initial position. Once back, in the figure (h), the second movable actor for weak effect 2521 starts to descend from the initial position again, and this time it descends to a position where it appears to be covered on the head of the Tonosama character . Note that the second movable character 2521 for weak effects may start rising simultaneously with the end of the transparent effect, or it may appear to be covered on the head of the character of the Tonosama character without returning to the initial position. You may stop at that position if you climb up.

  In FIG. 42 (i), the second movable role 2522 for strong effect descends from the initial position to a position matching the face of the character of the Tonosama character, and the second movable portion 2521 for weak effect and for the strong effect The second movable role objects 2522 in combination form a brow when viewed from the front side. That is, the effects of the third pattern are performed.

  In (j) of FIG. 42, the transparent effect is started again, and this time, in the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the upper display area 208-in the fixed character 255 overlapping the face of the character of the lord. H becomes transparent, and in the back of the upper display area 208-H, the face of the character of Tonosama in fixed character 255 can be seen, and the character of Tonosama is the second movable character 2521 for weak presentation and strong It looks as if the second moveable role 2522 for presentation is wearing a combined bag. That is, the effect that the effect of the first notice is most easily started is performed. In some cases, it can be seen that an effect in which the jackpot symbol is most likely to be finally determined and displayed is finally executed.

  In FIG. 42 (k), the effect of the light guide plate IL is started with the state that it looks like the character of the lord is wearing the eyelid over the upper display area 208-H in the transparent state. In the effect of the light guide plate IL here, a pattern imitating an effect image appears to be emitted in the fourth display mode at a position on the front side of the lower display region 208-U in the opaque state. The lower display area 208-U is not in a transparent state, but is displayed darker, so that the effect of the light guide plate IL can be further enhanced, and the effect can be given a flashy effect, and the character of the lord wears a bag It is possible to appeal the first advance presentation or the high expectation for the big hit of the production that seems to be present.

  In this example, after the second movable combination first moves to the effect position, the transparent effect is executed and the face of each character appears, but the opposite may be applied, and the face of each character is After appearing, the second movable combination may move to the effect position. Alternatively, the timing at which the face of each character appears and the timing at which the rendering position of the second movable role is reached may be the same.

  In addition, the effect start timing of the light guide plate IL may be before FIG. 42 (i), may be before or at the same time as the completion of the eyebrow, or may be before or at the same time as the transmission effect start.

  FIG. 42 (d-1) shown above the right row of FIG. 42 is another example of effect following on from FIG. 42 (d), and the second movable role 2522 for strong effect is an eyebrow from the initial position It descends to a position matching the character's face, and it appears as if the brow character is wearing a brow over the lower display area 208-U in the transparent state.

  FIG. 42 (J) shown at the bottom of the right column of FIG. 42 is a diagram for explanation, and the fixed part 255 is omitted for the sake of clarity. In FIG. 42 (j), the entire area of the upper display area 208-H is in the transparent state by the transmission effect, but here, a part of the upper display area 208-H is also in the transparent state by the transmission effect. However, as shown in FIG. 42J, a star st is displayed as an example of the decoration display, and the periphery thereof becomes transparent. In addition, as a decoration display, it is not restricted to the display st of a star, Moreover, the position and magnitude | size of a decoration display are not limited, Furthermore, a decoration display is variable according to an effect or a condition. When this decoration display (the display of the star st) is displayed, the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol form is easier to be displayed than when it is not displayed. That is, the expectation of the big hit in the variable display of the decorative symbol which has been performed when the decorative display is displayed is increased. Alternatively, the decoration indication may be a prefetch notice. In FIG. 42 (j ') shown in the lower part of FIG. 42 (J), the star display st is located in front of the eyes of the face of the character of the lord drawn on the fixed character 255 and viewed from the front side And, in the eyes of the character of the lord, the display st of the stars overlap. It should be noted that if the face of the Tonosama character is displayed, the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol form may be easier to be displayed than the face of the wolf character is displayed. The decoration display (the display of the star st) may be displayed only on the character of the character of the character having a relatively high expectation of the jackpot among the characters of. Further, instead of the fixed part 255, the first movable part 251 of the modification of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 39 (c) may be used, and furthermore, the family crest shown in FIG. 32 (b) An object 224E may be provided. In addition, if the face of the character of the character is displayed, the confirmation display of the jackpot design may be easier to be displayed than when the face of the character of the wolf is displayed. In this case, the decoration display (display of the star is displayed The timing at which the display of st) is started may be before the face of the character is displayed. In addition to the sense of expectation of which character's face is displayed in the first movable combination 251 of the modification of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 39C, the decoration display (the display st of the star) is in front of that By being displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and enjoy even in a period before the character's face is displayed. In the effect shown in FIG. 42 (j '), the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device, and the rendering means (fixed character 255) disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, Cooperative rendering is performed by rendering means (second movable roles 2521 and 2522) disposed on the front side of the 1 decorative symbol display device 208L and the light guide plate IL. In particular, in addition to the overlapping of the rendering means disposed on the back side and the rendering means disposed on the front side, an advantage is that the decorative display can be varied with the transmissive liquid crystal display device located between them.

  According to the rendering device 206 of the fourth embodiment described above, the rendering means (fixed combination 255), whose rendering position can not be changed, is capable of changing the rendering position (the upper display area 208-H and The width of the number of patterns of effect can be expanded by utilizing the power of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) whose effect position can be changed with the lower display area 208-U. In the effect device 206 of the fourth embodiment, a plurality of display areas (upper display area 208-H, lower display area 208-U) and a plurality of effect means arranged on the front side of the effect display means It is one of the differences from the effects described so far that the effect is a combination of (the second movable roles 2521 and 2522). In addition, the first movable combination 251 and the fourth movable combination 254 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 14 etc. may be combined with the first movable combination 251 in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 32 etc. The third movable character 253 on which the face of the character of the character is drawn may be combined, or the family crest character 224E disposed on the front side may be combined. Further, the first movable part 251 and the fourth movable part 254 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 14 and the like, and the first movable part 251 of the modification of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 39 (c) are combined. May be In addition, the first movable combination 251 and the fourth movable combination 254 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 14 and the like, and the second movable combination 2521 for a weak effect disposed on the front side shown in FIG. The second movable combination 2522 for effect may be combined. Alternatively, the first movable character 251 in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 32 and the like, the third movable character 253 on which the face of the character of the character is depicted, and the family crest 224E disposed on the front side; The first movable combination 251 of the modification of the third embodiment shown in (c) may be combined, or the second movable combination 2521 for a weak effect arranged on the front side shown in FIG. The second movable part 2522 may be combined. Alternatively, the first movable combination 251 of the modification of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 39 (c), the second movable combination 2521 for weak effect disposed on the front side shown in FIG. The second movable part 2522 may be combined. Also, three embodiments of the first to fourth embodiments may be combined, or all four embodiments may be combined.

  Next, the configuration of the effect device of the fifth embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, the components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as those used so far.

  FIG. 43 is a view showing the configuration of a rendering device 206 of the fifth embodiment.

  In FIG. 43 (a), the front left side is the front side, and the rear right side is the rear side. The effect device according to the fifth embodiment includes a movable object 256 movable in the front-rear direction (Z-axis direction). That is, the movable part 256 can be moved across the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device, and in the state shown on the left side of FIG. 43 (a), the first movable symbol display device 208L. , And in the state shown on the right side, it is on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The movable part 256 is a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display, and may be referred to as a versa writer. More specifically, the movable part 256 has a single LED array 2561, a rotating shaft 2562 extending longitudinally in the longitudinal center of the LED array 2561, and a lifting arm (not shown). In the LED array 2561, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in the longitudinal direction. The LED array 2561 rotates about the rotation axis 2562, and a residual image of light is generated on the rotation locus of each of the plurality of LEDs, and a pattern is displayed. In addition, the LED array 2561 is attached to the tip portion of a lifting arm (not shown). The lifting arm performs lifting operation by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion.

  The initial position of the LED array 2561 is above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and on the front side or the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array 2561 corresponds to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The elevator arm descends to a position overlapping the display screen (hereinafter referred to as “effect position”), and rotates at the effect position (first position). The LED array 2561 shown on the left side of FIG. 43 (a) is rotated at the rendering position on the back side, and the LED array 2561 shown on the right side is rotated at the rendering position on the front side.

  The figure which looked at the rendering apparatus 206 of 5th Embodiment from the front side to the upper part of FIG.43 (b) is shown in steps from left to right, and the lower part of each figure is from the side A view is shown. In a view from the side, the right side is the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the left side is the front side, and on the left side, the eye eye of the player is shown.

  In the effect device 206 shown at the left end of FIG. 43 (b), the LED array 2561 rotates at a constant speed at the effect position on the rear side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and on the rear side, Is formed. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a transmission liquid crystal display device, does not perform transmission effect, and the entire display screen is in an opaque state. However, the effect of darkening is not performed, and an image of a white tint is displayed, and a pattern of the afterimage effect of light formed on the back side is viewed vaguely from the front side even over the display screen. In the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, there may be a case where an area overlapping the rotation area of the LED array 2561 is in a transparent state.

  In the effect device 206 shown second from the left in FIG. 43B, the LED array 2561 rotating at a constant speed on the back side stops rotating, and is in the horizontal attitude that is the initial attitude. For this reason, the image by the afterimage effect of light has disappeared. Moreover, the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array 2561 are all turned off, and no light emission on the back side can be seen from the front side.

  In the effect device 206 shown third from the left in FIG. 43 (b), the lifting and lowering arm (not shown) ascends to return the LED array 2561 to the initial position on the back side with the initial posture. It is preferable that the display screen be darkened to make it difficult to see the LED array 2561 in the initial posture after the LED array 2561 stops its rotation and returns to the initial position. Alternatively, the display screen may be darkened at the timing when the lift arm starts to rise, that is, the timing when the LED array 2561 starts to move, and it may be difficult to see how the LED array 2561 is moving.

  In the effect device 206 shown third from the right in FIG. 43B, the LED array 2561 is moved from the initial position on the back side to the initial position on the front side. Note that the LED array 2561 may not be visible from the front side, but may be visible from the front side or the initial position on the rear side.

  In the effect device 206 shown second from the right in FIG. 43 (b), the lowering and lowering of the lifting arm (not shown) causes the LED array 2561 that was at the initial position on the front side to remain the initial posture, the first decorative symbol It has moved to the rendering position on the front side of the display device 208L.

  In the effect device 206 shown at the right end of FIG. 43, the LED array 2561 rotates at a constant speed at the effect position on the front side, and a pattern due to the afterimage effect of light is formed on the front side. Differently, it looks clear.

  In the case where the LED array 2561 rotates at a constant speed at the rendering position on the back side, the area overlapping the rendering position on the back side on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is made transparent and It is also possible to see a pattern by the afterimage effect of light formed on the back side over the area. In addition, when the LED array 2561 rotates at a constant speed at the rendering position on the front side, the background is darkened by darkening the display screen to make it easy to see the design by the afterimage effect of the light formed on the front side. It is also good.

  FIG. 44 is a view showing a modification of the embodiment described above. In addition, the modified example referred to here may be an example in the case of replacing the embodiment described above, or may be an example performed in addition to the embodiment described above.

  The same figure (b)-the same figure (e) shown on the left end of Drawing 44 are modifications of an example shown in Drawing 40 (B)-Drawing 40 (F).

  In FIG. 44 (b), the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 44 (b) is displayed in the second display mode which is one of the display modes of the normal notice. Furthermore, in FIG. 44 (b), button effect is started. The button effect in this case corresponds to a judge effect for determining which of the face of the character of the character of the lord and the character of the beard appear. The appearance of the face of the Tonosama character is more likely to finally display the jackpot pattern form in the variable display of the decorative pattern currently performed than when the face of the rattan character appears. In the case where the face of the character of the lord has appeared, the jackpot design may be definitely displayed. Alternatively, it may be easier for a certain effect (for example, a super reach effect, a pseudo-series effect, etc.) to be started when the face of the character of the lord has appeared, rather than when the face of the brow character appears. It may be started. When the button effect is started, the display mode of the chance button 136 which has been lit in the first display mode until then changes to the fourth display mode. In the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (b), a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 lit in the fourth display mode and an operation (pressing) of the chance button 136 are performed. As the prompting display for prompting, the arrow display 136 b and the character display of “press” and the remaining period meter display 136 c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as effective one are displayed. . These button images etc. 136a-c etc. correspond to the operation promotion display. The button images and the like 136a to 136c overlap a part of the decorative symbol that is rapidly changing in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  The remaining period meter display 136c shown in FIG. 44 (b) is reduced by 1⁄5 or more, and at this timing, the chance button 136 lit in the fourth display mode is pressed, and the fourth period shown in FIG. In the 1 decorative symbol display device 208L, the button images and the like 136a to 136c disappear, transmission effect is started, and the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state. On the back side of the first display area 208-1 that has changed to the transparent state, a portion 251G on which the face of the bearded character is drawn is located, and the face of the bearded character appears. Also in FIG. 44 (c) where the face of the bearded character appears, the decorative symbol continues to fluctuate at high speed, and when the chance button 136 is operated, it returns to lighting according to the first display mode.

  In FIG. 44 (d), the transmission effect is ended, and the button effect is started again. That is, the first display area 208-1 returns to the opaque state, and the face of the dark character disappears. Instead, the button images etc. 136a to 136c are displayed again, and the remaining period meter display 136c shown in FIG. The chance button 136 is pressed again.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (e), the button images etc. 136a to 136c disappear, the second transmission effect is started, and the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state. At the back side of the first display area 208-1 that has changed to the transparent state, a portion 251Y on which the face of the character of the lord is drawn is located, and the face of the character of the lord has appeared. While the button effect shown in FIG. 44 (d) is being performed, that is, while the button images etc. are displayed, the first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) is moved. On the back side of the first display area 208-1, the portion 251Y on which the face of the character of the crown character is drawn is positioned. Also in FIG. 44 (e) in which the face of the character of the lord has appeared, the decorative symbol continues to fluctuate at high speed, and when the chance button 136 is operated, it returns to lighting according to the first display mode.

  In the example described above, although the button effect is performed twice in the variable display of one decoration symbol, the button effect may be performed only once in the variable display of the decoration symbol once. Good. That is, the button images etc. 136a to 136c are displayed before the effect that the face of the wolf character appears, and the button images etc. 136a to 136c are displayed before the effect that the face of the you character appears The button images etc. may be displayed only in one of the cases. In this case, if the face of either the character of the character of the lord character or the face of the character of the wolf appears once, the character's face is determined. In other words, in the example shown in FIGS. 44 (b) to (e), after the appearance of the face of the character with a low expectation of the big hit, the face of the character with a high degree of the expectation of the big hit appears, It corresponds to the step-up notice. In addition, when the face of a character with a high probability of having a big hit has appeared first, the second button effect may not be performed, and the second button effect may be performed, There may be a case in which the character is demolished to the face of the wolf character, and a case in which it is promoted to the face of a character like a tentacle character in a light emission mode (for example, a rainbow light emission mode) representing a big hit decision or a face of a different character.

  In addition, when there is no operation of the chance button 136 within the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136, the transmission effect may not be started. That is, the face of any character will not appear. Or, conversely, even if there is no operation of the chance button 136 within the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the transmission effect is started after the operation valid period has passed (at or after the lapse), and the character of the wolf The face of may appear. In other words, an effect in which the face of the hallmark character appears is an effect that may be started only when an operation is performed within the operation valid period.

  In addition, the presentation means of the face of the beard character and the face of the character of the toussame character provided on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal is not limited to the first movable character 251 shown in FIG. The drawn rendering means and the rendering means may be a rendering means in which the face of a separate character of the character of the hall is drawn. In this case, of the two effect means, both effect means may be movable means, or only one may be movable means. In addition, when both presentation means are movable means, a drive source may be one and may have another drive source. Moreover, when only one is a movable means, the rendering means fixed to the back side (the back side) of the first display area 208-1 is disposed and fixed to the first display area 208-1. A movable effect means is disposed between the effect means, and the fixed effect means disappears when they are overlapped by the movable effect means. Even in the case of the rendering means in which the face of the wolf character is drawn and the rendering means in which the face of the character of the character of the separate body is drawn separately from the effect means, the first movable role shown in FIG. 39 (c) Even in the case of the object 251, the effect that the face of the bearded character appears and the effect that the face of the touss character appear are not simultaneously performed.

  Furthermore, both of the two rendering means may have a light emitting means (for example, an LED). Alternatively, only one of the rendering means may have the light emitting means. That is, only the rendering means in which the face of the wolf character is drawn may be the rendering means including the light emitting means (for example, the LED is built in or disposed around), or the face of the character of the tounity is Only the rendering means depicted may be a rendering means including a light emitting means (e.g., LED built-in or disposed around).

  Furthermore, in a certain effect, it may be configured to be alternatively executed from among a plurality of options including at least an effect in which a face of a broom character appears and an effect in which a face of a character foreplay appears. In addition, before the start of the effect that the face of the character of the lord appears, the large button image 136a shown in FIG. 15 (l-1) may be displayed, or the large button image 136a is always displayed. May be That is, a plurality of display modes are prepared for the display (operation promotion display) displayed by the button effect, and the success rate of the effect (in this case, the execution of the effect that the face of the character of the lady of the lord appears) Or the expectation of the big hit may change.

  In addition, effects such as the appearance of the face of the brow character and the appearance of the face of the character of the majesty were performed by changing the first display area 208-1 to the transparent state, but the face using the light emission function It may be left in an opaque state so that the outline of can be seen. In this case, only one of the characters may be left in the opaque state, and the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state in a larger hit than in the opaque state. The degree of expectation of or the degree of expectation with which a certain effect (for example, a super reach effect, a pseudo-series effect, etc.) is started may be high.

  Further, a family crest 224E shown in FIG. 32 or the like may be provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. Furthermore, instead of the third movable part 253 shown in FIG. 34 (p) to FIG. 34 (r), the face of the character of the upper half of the first movable part 251 shown in FIG. A drawn part or a presentation means of the face of the character of the character of the crown may be arranged.

  The same figure (A)-the same figure (C) shown in the center of Drawing 44 show the 2nd movable character 2521 for weak production and the 2nd movable character 2522 for strong production shown in FIG. It is an example where a character is generically called and it may only be called the 2nd movable character 252. It is an example by which it is arranged on the back side rather than the 1st decoration symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 44 (A), the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is in an opaque state, and the second movable part 252 disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is indicated by a dotted line. It is done. The second movable combination 252 shown by a dotted line in FIG. 44 (A) is the first display area 208-in a state where the second movable combination 2521 for weak effect and the second movable combination 252 for strong effect are combined. It is located on the far side of 1. The second movable role 252 may be a combination of the second movable role 2521 for weak effects and the second movable role 2522 for strong effects, or the second movable role 2521 for weak effects and the high effect The second movable part 2522 is not limited to being separable from the second movable part 2522, but may be an integral part that can be combined from the beginning and can not be separated. The second movable part 252 is an initial part at a position deviated from the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and is movable to a position on the back side of the first display area 208-1.

  In FIG. 44 (B), the transmission effect is started, and the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state. On the back side of the first display area 208-1 that has changed to the transparent state, the rendering means 2510Y for the face of the character of the lord is located, and the face of the character of the lord appears. The presentation means 2510Y of the face of the character of the lord is also a character arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second movable role item 252 is disposed between the first display area 208-1 and the rendering means 2510Y for the face of the character of the lord. That is, the second movable role product 252 is disposed on the front side of the rendering means 2510Y of the face of the character of the lord, and is located at the initial position in FIG. 44 (B). Both the presentation means 2510Y for the face of the character and the second movable part 252 may be movable means, and in this case, there may be one or two separate drive sources. May be

  In addition to the rendering means 2510Y for the face of the character of the tomb character, a rendering means for the face of the bearded character may be provided. In addition, the size of the face of the tounity character in the example shown at the center of FIG. 44 is smaller than the example shown at the left end of FIG. 44, but may be the same size. Alternatively, a first movable part 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) may be provided. That is, the example shown at the center of FIG. 44 may be an example replacing the example shown at the left end of FIG. 44 or may be an example performed together with the example shown at the left end of FIG. Here, either in the case of the presentation means 2510Y of the face of the character of the crown character, or in the case of the presentation means of the face of the character of the rose, or in the case of the first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. The effect that the face of the character appears and the effect that the face of the character does appear are not performed at the same time.

  Also in FIG. 44 (C), the transmission effect is executed, and in this transmission effect, the presentation means 2510Y of the face of the character of the tounity character and the second movable combination 252 are combined. That is, the second movable role product 252 is disposed between the first display area 208-1 and the presentation means 2510Y of the face of the character of the tounity character, and the presentation means 2510Y of the face of the character of the toussame character and the second movable role article 252 In collaboration, it looks like the lord is wearing a coffin.

  In addition, the rendering means 2510Y of the face of the character of the lord is fixedly disposed at a position on the back side of the first display area 208-1, and the second movable combination 252 is from the initial position to the first display area 208-1. It may be made to move between the rendering means 2510Y of the face of the character of the lord. In this case, in the order of the state in which the face of the character does not appear, the state in which the face of the character with no eyelids appeared, and the state in which the face of the character with the eyelids appeared, The degree of expectation that a certain effect (for example, a super reach effect, a pseudo continuous effect, etc.) is started may be high.

  Furthermore, both of the rendering means 2510Y for the face of the character of the lord and the second movable part 252 may have light emitting means, or only one of them may have light emitting means. When the first display area 208-1 is transparent and the light emitting means emits light, the degree of expectation of the big hit or a certain effect (for example, super reach effect, pseudo-series effect, etc.) than when the light is not emitted. The degree of expectation to be started may be high. In addition, when the facial expression means of the eyebrow character is also provided, the facial expression means of the eyebrow character may also have a light emitting means, and the facial expression means of the eyebrow character is a light emission means You do not need to have

  The same figure (A) shown at the top of the right end of FIG. 44 is a figure which shows the shutter members 246L and 246R which are shielding means arrange | positioned rather than the 1st decorative symbol display apparatus 208L at the back side.

  In FIG. 44A, the first decorative symbol display device 208L is not shown, but on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the face rendering means 2510G of the face of the bearded character, or the lower half A first movable character 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) is also disposed, in which the face of the brow character is drawn. The shutter role products 246L and 246R are disposed between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the effect means 2510G of the face of the bearded character or the first movable role object 251. That is, it is disposed on the front side of the face rendering means 2510 G of the bearded character or the first movable combination 251. The shutter role objects 246L and 246M can be opened and closed, and in the fully closed state, even if the first display area 208-1 is in the transparent state, the face of the brow character can not be seen at all. On the other hand, in the fully open state of the shutter roles 246L and 246M, if only the first display area 208-1 is transparent on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shutter roles 246L and 246M can not be seen at all. The face of the bearded character can be seen in the back of the first display area 208-1 (see FIG. 44C). The shutter characters 246L and 246M shown in FIG. 44A are in a slightly opened state, and a part of the face of the brow character is visible between the left shutter character 246L and the right shutter character 246L. ing. According to the combination with the example shown at the left end of FIG. 44, the shutter role products 246L and 246M can be used for the effect that the face of the bearded character appears and the effect that the face of the you character appears. That is, although the effect that the face of the wolf character appears and the effect that the face of the character of the tounity appear are not performed simultaneously, the effect using the shutter role features 246L and 246M is used regardless of which effect it is. And may be executed simultaneously. Further, according to the combination with the example shown in the center of FIG. 44, the shutter role products 246L and 246M can be used to ask whether or not a spider character will appear with a spider attached.

  When the first display area 208-1 is in the transparent state, the shutter accessories 246L and 246M start to open from the fully closed state, and one of the faces of the bearded character is located between the left shutter accessory 246L and the right shutter accessory 246L. When the part starts to be seen, in the state immediately before the shutter roles 246L and 246M start to open (the fully closed state of the shutter roles 246L and 246M), the shutter role is placed at a position overlapping all of the rendering means 2510G of the face of the bearded character It means that 246L and 246M are located. When the windows are provided on the shutter combination 246L and 246M, the shutter combination 246L and 246M is positioned at a position overlapping a part of the rendering means 2510G of the face of the bearded character.

  Furthermore, the shutter combination 246L, 246R shown in FIG. 44 (a) is a combination (for example, the first to fifth embodiments and the like thereof) disposed on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display described above. It is an accessory which can be disposed between the accessory in the modification and the transmissive liquid crystal display device. For example, by the shutter members 246L and 246R in the fully closed state, movable movable objects moving on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device can be hidden, and the movement can be made difficult to notice, or transmission effects are started. The presence of the movable part itself can be made less noticeable until the

  The example of FIG. 44A to FIG. 44D shown at the bottom of FIG. 44A is an example in which an image of an eyelid is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. This example may be an example replacing the example shown in FIG. 44 (a), or may be an example performed together with the example shown in FIG. 44 (a). That is, on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, there are a presentation means 2510Y for the face of the character of the ladylike character and a presentation means 2510G for the face of the bearded character, or the first movable part 251 shown in FIG. It is arranged.

  On the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (A), an image of the eyelid in the fully closed state is displayed, and in FIG. 44 (B), a transmission effect is performed. That is, an animation in which the image of the eyelid in the totally closed state is gradually opened is displayed, and in the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the part where the eyelid image is opened becomes transparent, and A part of the face of the wolf character drawn on the rendering means 2510 G or the first movable character 251 is visible.

  In addition, the image of the eyelid in the fully closed state is also displayed on the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. In FIG. 44C, the eyelid may be closed from FIG. 44A, or after the eyelid image in the fully open state is once displayed (for example, after the face of the eyelid character is completely seen) ) May be closed. Also in FIG. 44 (d), the transmission effect is performed. That is, an animation in which the image of the eyelid in the totally closed state is gradually opened is displayed, and in the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the part where the eyelid image is opened becomes transparent, A part of the face of the character of the lord like drawn on the directing means 2510Y or the first movable character 251 is visible. While the fully-closed eyelid image shown in FIG. 44 (C) is displayed, the rendering means 2510Y or the first movable character 251 shown in FIG. It is located in the central part.

  Even in this example, a part of the character's face can be seen to produce a tumbling effect. In particular, when the face of the character seen in the back changes or the face of the character disappears even in the half-opened state by repeating the fully-closed state and the half-opened state, the amusement of the game may be improved. In addition, when the face of the character of the lord appears, the degree of expectation of the big hit or a certain effect (for example, super reach effect, pseudo-series effect, etc.) is started, rather than the case where the face of the bearded character Expectations may increase. Alternatively, as the number of times of repeating the fully closed state and the half-opened state increases, the degree of expectation of the big hit or the degree of expectation that a certain effect is started may be higher. Furthermore, the opening / closing speed may change, and the degree of opening may also change (1/5 opening, 1⁄3 opening).

  Here too, the effect that the face of the brow character appears and the effect that the face of the fame character does not appear are not executed simultaneously, but with any effect, the effect of displaying the brow image It may be executed at the same time.

  Further, a family crest 224E shown in FIG. 32 or the like may be provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. Furthermore, in place of the third movable part 253 shown in FIGS. 34 (p) to (r), presentation means 2510Y for the face of the character of the lord may be disposed.

  FIG. 45 is a view showing an example in which different accessories than before are arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device.

  The example shown at the left end of FIG. 45 is an example in which a ring-shaped accessory 251R is disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. The ring-shaped character 251R is used for the change icon change effect. That is, it is used for one variation icon change presentation among a plurality of kinds of variation icon change presentation.

  In FIG. 45 (a), the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is in an opaque state, and a ring-shaped accessory 251R arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is indicated by a dotted line. It is done. The ring-shaped accessory 251R is a movable means, but may be fixedly disposed.

  In FIG. 45 (b), the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. The fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 45 (b) is displayed in the second display mode, which is one of the display modes of the normal advance notice. On the other hand, both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode).

  In FIG. 45C, the ring-shaped region 208-R surrounding the periphery of the fluctuation icon h0 in the second display mode is changed to the transparent state. The ring-shaped area 208-R covers a part of the display area of the first hold icon h11, and a part of the first hold icon h11 is not visible. In the state shown in FIG. 45 (c), nothing is visible behind the ring-shaped area 208-R, but in the state shown in the same FIG. A ring-shaped character 251R emitting light is visible in the display mode. That is, the ring-shaped accessory 251R, which was located in the state shown in FIG. 45C outside the area on the back side of the ring-shaped area 208-R, starts to move, and the ring-shaped area It is located in the field which becomes the back side of 208-R in Drawing 45 (d). The size of the ring-shaped region 208-R corresponds to the size of the ring-shaped accessory 251R, and in FIG. 45 (d), the ring-shaped accessory 251R emitting light in the fourth display mode In the inside, the variation icon h0 of the second display mode is displayed. Although the position of the inner circular area of the ring-shaped character 251R shown in FIG. 45 (d) and the position of the display area of the fluctuation icon h0 are shifted in the depth direction (front and back direction), I do.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 45 (e), the variation icon h0 of the second display mode is changed to the same fourth display mode as the display mode of the ring-shaped accessory 251R that emits light. The ring-shaped accessory 251R may continue to emit light in the fourth display mode until the fluctuation icon h0 disappears (the state of FIG. 45 (e) may be continued), and changes after the fluctuation icon h0 changes. Before the icon h0 disappears, the transparent effect may end and the ring-shaped character 251R may not be visible. Alternatively, before the change icon h0 changes, the transmission effect may end, and the ring-shaped accessory 251R that emits light in the fourth display mode may not be visible.

  In this change icon change effect, before the change in the display mode of the change icon h0, the display mode of the ring-shaped character 251R that emits light suggests the display mode of the change icon h0 after the change. The fluctuation icon h0 is not necessarily changed to the same display mode as the light-emitting ring-shaped accessory 251R, and may be changed to a different display mode, or may not be changed. Good. However, the variation icon h0 may always change to the same display mode as the display mode of the ring-shaped accessory 251R that emits light, or a display mode in which the display mode of the ring-shaped accessory 251R is certain (for example, the sixth In the case of the display mode or the display mode of the fourth display mode or more), the same display mode may always be changed.

  When the ring-shaped accessory 251R is not positioned behind the ring-shaped area 208-R, the ring-shaped area 208-R changes to the transmission state as shown in FIG. 45 (c). You may not do that.

  In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may be changed simultaneously with the appearance of the ring-shaped character 251R that emits light, or the fluctuation icon h0 may occur before the timing of the appearance of the light-emitting ring 251R. The display mode of may be changed. In other words, it is sufficient if there is a period in which the variation icon h0 and the ring-shaped accessory 251R have the same display mode.

  Furthermore, the change icon h0 and the ring-shaped accessory 251R may not be the same display mode, but may be a display mode that corresponds or is related. For example, one of the fluctuation icon h0 and the ring-shaped character 251R is a blink of a certain color (red) and the other is a light of the same color (red) or a light of a certain light And the other may be the lighting of a certain color above.

  Also, between FIG. 45C and FIG. 45D, the ring-shaped accessory 251R emits light in the same display mode as the display mode before the change of the variation icon h0 or the display mode corresponding thereto, It may be made to emit light in the same display mode as the display mode after change or in the corresponding display mode. That is, in the case of this example, the ring-shaped accessory 251R may emit light in the fourth display mode after emitting light in the second display mode.

  In addition, there may be a failure pattern, and the display form may not change while the ring-shaped accessory 251R emits light in the same display mode as the display mode before the change of the variation icon h0 or the corresponding display mode. The display mode may be ranked down (for example, when the display mode changes to the first display mode) or may be turned off. In addition, the ring-shaped accessory 251R may emit light in the first display mode from the beginning or may not emit light at all from the beginning.

  The example shown from the center to the right end of FIG. 45 is an example in which a circular character 251C larger than the fluctuation icon h0 is disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. This circular character 251C is also used for the variation icon change effect. That is, it is used for one variation icon change presentation among a plurality of kinds of variation icon change presentation. In the variation icon change effect in which the circular character 251C is used, it is expressed that the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes only by the circular character 251C, or that the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes .

  In FIG. 45 (A), the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is in an opaque state as a whole, and a circular character 251C arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown by a dotted line. ing. The circular character 251C is a movable means, but may be fixedly disposed.

  In FIG. 45 (B), variable display of a decorative symbol is performed. Also, the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 45 (B) is displayed in the second display mode, which is one of the display modes of the advance notice. On the other hand, both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode).

  In FIG. 45 (C), an animation is displayed in which the variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal so far floats up and rises from the pedestal. In addition, in the tutorial display section TT1 in which nothing has been displayed until then, the text display "dodeca hold change" is displayed.

  In FIG. 45 (D), the circular central area 208-C completely including the decorative pattern that is rapidly changing in the rapidly changing middle symbol display area 208b is changed to the transparent state. The change of the circular central area 208-C to the transparent state makes it impossible to see the fluctuation icon h0 that has been lifted and raised from the pedestal. In other words, it seems that the fluctuation icon h0 that has been lifted and raised from the pedestal has once disappeared. In the state shown in FIG. 45 (D), nothing is seen behind the circular central area 208-C, but in the state shown in the same FIG. (E), it disappears behind the circular central area 208-C. The circular character 251C emitting light is visible in the same second display mode as the display mode of the previous variation icon h0. That is, the circular character 251C, which was located in the state shown in FIG. 45D outside the area on the far side of the circular central area 208-C, starts to move, and the circular central area 208 starts to move. It is located in the area | region which becomes the back side of-C in FIG. 45 (E). The size of the circular central area 208-C corresponds to the size of the circular feature 251C. The position of the circular character 251C shown in FIG. 45 (E) and the position of the circular central area 208-C are shifted in the depth direction (front-rear direction), but coincide in the vertical and horizontal directions. In the state of FIG. 45 (E), it looks as if the fluctuation icon h0 which has once disappeared disappears and is displayed on the back side.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 45F, the circular character 251C which has been emitting light in the second display mode is changed to emit light in the fourth display mode. This looks as if the display mode of the enlarged fluctuation icon h0 has changed to the fourth display mode.

  In FIG. 45 (G), the transmission effect is finished, and the circular central area 208-C returns to the opaque state, and the circular central area 208-C which has been in the transparent state is the variation icon of the fourth display mode. h0 is displayed. This looks as if the fluctuation icon h0, which has been enlarged and changed to the fourth display mode, has returned to its original size. However, the variation icon h0 changed to the fourth display mode is still floating from the pedestal, and the descending animation is displayed.

  In FIG. 45 (H), the variation icon h0 in the fourth display mode is returned to the pedestal and placed on the pedestal. Although the character display of "dodeca hold change" is still displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, the character display of "dodeca hold change" disappears even when the circular character 251C changes to the fourth display mode. Alternatively, it may disappear at the timing when the transmission effect ends, or it may disappear at the timing when the fluctuation icon h0 in the fourth display mode returns to the pedestal.

  In the example described above, after the fluctuation icon h0 moves to a certain position, an area (circular central area 208-C) including at least the area to which the fluctuation icon h0 has moved is changed to the transparent state, and the transparent state A circular character 251C is visible through the area (circular central area 208-C). In addition, even if the area (circular central area 208-C) is in the opaque state without becoming transparent, if the circular character 251C emits light, the light is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. , And the appearance (light emission mode) in which the circular character 251C emits light from the front side may be known. That is, even if it remains in the opaque state, if the light emission mode of the circular character 251C changes, it is known that it has changed, and it is notified that the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes, or as if it is the fluctuation icon h0 It should be expressed as the change of Then, after the circular character 251 C emits light in a certain light emission mode, it is configured to be in a display state as shown in FIG. 45 (H) through a predetermined effect operation.

  Further, a family crest 224E shown in FIG. 32 or the like may be provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. Furthermore, instead of the third movable part 253 shown in FIGS. 34 (p) to (r), a circular part 251C shown in FIG. 45 (E) or the like may be disposed.

  45 (a) to (e), the variable icon change effect using the ring-shaped character 251R and the circular character 251C shown in FIGS. 45 (A) to (H) are used. The change icon change effect that has been set is never executed at the same time. Moreover, although the fluctuation icon h0 changes to the 4th display mode also in any of the presentation examples, one of the fluctuation icon change effects of one of the big hit than the other fluctuation icon change effect of the other The degree of expectation of may be high. For example, the fluctuation icon change rendition using the circular character 251C may have a higher expectation of the big hit than the fluctuation icon change rendition using the ring character 251R.

  The example shown in FIG. 45 (1) is an example in which the display means 251D is disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. The display means 251D is a liquid crystal display device, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL display device or the like, and is movable but may be fixed. In FIG. 45 (1), the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is in an opaque state as a whole, and the display means 251D disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown by a dotted line. .

  The display means 251D shown in FIG. 45 (1) may be used for timer announcement effect. For example, in the case where a big hit probability is used relatively for a strong timer announcement effect or the timer announcement effect is used for a final judge effect, it is used when the remaining time reaches a certain time (for example, the remaining 3 seconds) . That is, the transmission effect is started, and the rectangular area including the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L becomes transparent, and the rectangular area At the back of the display means 251D is located, and displays a number indicating the remaining time.

  In the case where the display means 251D is an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device or the like, the presentation means 2510Y for the face of the character of the Tonosama character shown in FIG. The display means 251D can be used in place of the second moving part 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) or the second movable part 252 shown in FIG. 44 (C). In this case, even if the display means 251D is fixedly arranged, it is possible to move the face of the character of the character or move the image of the eyebrows by displaying the movement animation. Also, the present invention is not limited to the presentation means 2510 Y or the like of the face of the character of the lord, and the characters (for example, the first to fifth embodiments or their variations) disposed on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device described above The display means 251D can be used instead of the property in the example.

  The example shown in FIG. 45 (α) and FIG. 45 (β) is an example in which the movable means 251W is disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. The movable means 251W is movable as a whole, and the Yatsushiro character 251W1 and the general officer's goods 251W2 constituting the movable means 251W are movable individually. That is, the movable means 251W as a whole is movable in the first direction (here, the upper limit direction), and the Yatsushiro character 251W1 is independently movable in the second direction (here, the left direction). The 251W2 is independently movable in the thirty-second direction (here, the right direction).

  In FIG. 45 (α), transmission effect is started, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display in the first decorative symbol display device 208L as in the example of FIG. 45 (1) The rectangular area 208-S including the area 208c is in the transparent state. The movable means 251W is located at the back of the rectangular area 208-S in the transparent state. The movable means 251W shown in FIG. 45 (α) is located at a first position above the area on the back side of the rectangular area 208-S, and the Yatsushiro character 251W1 and the general character 251W2 are in contact with each other. There is.

  In FIG. 45 (β), the movable means 251W is lowered to the second position which is the lower side of the area on the back side of the rectangular area 208-S. In the movable means 251W, at the second position, the Yashiro character 251W1 moves in the second direction (left direction), and the general officer 251W2 moves in the third direction (third direction), and the Yatsushiro character 251W1 and The general character 251W2 is open, but in the meantime, a super character 251W3 appears. This super character 251W3 is located behind the Yatsushiro character 251W1 and the general war character 251W2 in FIG. 45 (α) and was not visible, but the Yatsushiro character 251W1 and the general war character 251W2 were opened. As a result, the vehicle moves forward from the back side, and is located on the front side of the Yatsushiro characters 251W1 and the general officers 251W2 beyond the Yatsushiro characters 251W1 and the general forces 251W2. That is, the super character 251W3 is disposed between the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 251W1 and the general character 251W2. The Yatsushiro character 251W1 and the general character 251W2 may start moving in the lateral direction after reaching the second position (at the time of arrival or after the arrival). Alternatively, Yatsushiro character 251W1 and general character 251W2 may start moving laterally while moving toward the second position, or moving laterally before moving toward the second position. You may start

  The position of the super character 251W3 in the front-rear direction may be the same position as the Yatsushiro character 251W1 and the general officer 251W2, or may be a position behind the Yatsushiro character 251W1 and the general officer 251W2. It is also good. The super character 251W3 is also movable in the vertical direction, and the moment when the space between Yatsushiro character 251W1 and general character 251W2 opens is above or below the area on the far side of rectangular area 208-S. , And may be moved between Yashiro character 251W1 and general character 251W2 after being opened.

  The Yatsushiro character 251W1, the general character 251W2, and the super character 251W3 are capable of emitting light, and may emit light in different display modes, or may emit light in the same display mode. Alternatively, the Yashiro character 251W1 and the general character 251W2 may emit light in the same display mode, and may emit light in a display mode different only from the super actor 251W3.

  Moreover, in each of the above presentation examples, the display displayed on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the second decorative symbol display device 208M or / and the third decorative symbol together with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be a mode displayed on the display device 208N, or a mode displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M or / and the third decorative symbol display device 208N instead of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. May be Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may also be transmissive liquid crystal display devices, or only one of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. May be a transmissive liquid crystal display device, and the transmissive effect may be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol You may carry out with three decoration symbol display devices, the display device 208M, and the third decoration symbol display device 208N.

  Next, another specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the effect display described below may be performed by animation. Further, it goes without saying that the embodiments shown below can be applied to any of the embodiments shown so far. That is, each effect shown in FIG. 46 to FIG. 79 is an effect performed in a non-transparent state on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and one effect capable of executing each effect shown in FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present invention, the effect that is entangled with the transmission effect and the rendering means on the back side is the effect described using FIG. 14 to FIG.

  FIG. 46 to FIG. 79 are diagrams showing in stages the modified examples of the effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 46 to 79, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and the general view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. Moreover, in FIG. 46-FIG. 79, the example which arranged three decorative symbol display apparatuses side by side in a row is shown. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N disposed on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The second decorative symbol display device The length in the width direction of the 208 M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208 L, and the height is slightly short. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right end side portion overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left end side portion 1) It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed as the decorative symbols are variably displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It should be added here that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol It is also possible to perform variable display of or perform multiple types of effect display. In the present embodiment, an example in which various images are displayed on each of a plurality of decorative symbol display devices is shown, but all of them may be displayed on one decorative symbol display device. . In addition, a transparent light guide plate is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission area. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to be able to look like In the embodiment shown in FIG. 46 to FIG. 79, the light guide plate is subjected to a lens cut of a pattern that imitates a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion that refracts light toward the player is smaller than the thickness of the portion that emits light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Also, the light guide plate may be movable. In addition, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 46 to 79 show the states of the fourth symbol display devices 284a1 and 284a2, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display device 284a1 corresponding to the special view 1 has a square shape. In the variable display of FIG. 1, it blinks, and in the stop display of the special view 1, it lights in the lighting mode of the lost or the lighting mode of the big hit. Also, the special figure 2 fourth symbol display device 284a2 corresponding to the special figure 2 has a circular shape, blinks during the variation display of the special figure 2, and the lighting mode of the lost during the stop display of the special figure 2 Or it lights in the lighting mode of the big hit. Also, in FIG. 46 to FIG. 79, the appearance of the speaker 120 and the effect buttons 136 and 136z is shown.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing in stages an example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a fluctuation icon is provided at the center The h0 is displayed in a manner of being placed on a pedestal, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (a), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 and the two suspension icons h11 and h12 are all default display modes (white circular display modes). In addition, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanatory display unit is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and various information related to games and effects are displayed (tutorial display), and the contents thereof are updated at appropriate timings. Be done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 46 (a), "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the grandchild's character is described. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not limited to the explanation display, and may be a notice display or a demonstration effect display, or may be hidden. Here, as the tutorial display, a description on the appearing character, a description on a notice (for example, a timer notice), and the like are displayed. In addition, you may be comprised so that alerting | reporting of a big hit expectation degree is possible by the display mode (For example, displaying in blue character, displaying in red, etc.) of tutorial display. In this case, this tutorial display may be used as a notice display of the position of the notice display. In the present specification, for the sake of convenience, the display being described will be described as a tutorial display. That is, the tutorial display unit TT1 in this presentation example can be said to be an area for displaying something. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Note that the UI unit UI3 is displayed in priority during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and is provided in a region not overlapping the display region of the decorative symbol, but may overlap the display region of the decorative symbol. As described above, the UI unit UI3 functions as a display frame that constitutes the hold icon display area, the variation icon display area, and the tutorial display section TT1. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 46A is in the default display mode displayed in blue, and the display mode may change according to the progress of the game.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen to display the stage name and reach name currently being used. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 46 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, an acceptance number display 850 indicating the number of acceptances of the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed at the central portion of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the example shown in FIG. 46 (a), the acceptance count display 850 of the "0 times after" character string image is displayed, and the acceptance count of the operation of the effect button 136 is 0 times. Further, below the acceptance number display 850, a stock button image 852 imitating the effect button 136 is displayed. The stock button image 852 has three lines drawn at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the stock button image 852 is divided into four regions. The stock button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to, for example, green. In the example shown in FIG. 46 (a), all four areas of the stock button image 852 are displayed in white, and the meter is zero.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. The character of this lord is sometimes called a navigation character. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. In addition, the character of the lord may be always displayed or may not be always displayed. Also, the stage name display unit ST1 or the character may be a display included in the Ui unit UI3, or may be configured such that at least a part thereof is displayed overlapping the front side of the UI unit UI3.

  In addition, a family crest 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and may move and rotate in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, and the general character 224Fb are disposed, and move vertically in accordance with the contents of the effect. It is configured to be able to In addition, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full color LED incorporated therein, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (b), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is performing the closing operation by the shutter image. That is, the display (display of the shutter image) before the other display (display of “under preparation”) is performed in place of the certain display (explanatory display) in a certain area (tutorial display unit TT1) It can be said. Note that at least a part of the character display displayed before the shutter image is displayed during the display of the shutter image may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (c), it is shown that the tutorial display section TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be an in-provision image preview display to be displayed before the display of the in-preparation image RDY described later is started. In addition, the shutter image may be displayed also when the preliminary display is performed on the tutorial display unit TT1. In addition, the shutter image may be configured to be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, and the big hit expectation may be configured to be different depending on the display mode of the shutter image. It may be configured such that it does not show the jackpot expectation by itself.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (d), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the in-provision image RDY in which the characters “in preparation” are displayed. In other words, the in-provision image RDY is displayed superimposed on the display area of the tutorial display unit TT1 and can be said to overlap the UI unit UI3. At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (d), the background color of the image in preparation RDY is green, that is, the display mode of the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 46 (d) is the default display mode. . Note that the in-preparation image RDY can be changed to a plurality of types of display modes, and is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the background color is red) when the display of the in-provision image RDY starts. After the display is started in the default display mode, the display mode may be changed to another display mode. Further, in the case of the configuration in which the above-described shutter image can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, the display mode of the image under preparation RDY may be associated with the display mode. For example, when the shutter image is red, the red in-provision image RDY may be displayed (probable). In this example of presentation, by displaying the image RDY being prepared, there is a case where a certain presentation (for example, a timer advance notice, a mini game, etc.) may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (e) shows that the UI unit UI3 changes from the blue display mode to the gold display mode. In this rendering example, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 is set to a gold display mode, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change. That is, the UI unit UI3 of this gold-colored display mode functions as a prefetch notice. As described above, when the UI unit UI3 is displayed in the gold display mode, the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than in the blue display mode. In addition, the UI unit UI3 of this gold display mode may function as a notice of the symbol variation display, and not as a notice of a change of the display mode of the hold icon, but as a direct prefetch notice display. You may have to. In addition, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 may be configured to become the default mode before the hold icon (the hold icon to be prefetched) whose display mode has changed is digested, or the result of success or failure of the prefetch change May be configured to be the default mode after the display indicating (for example, the display of a decorative symbol indicating a big hit or a loss) is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in (f) of FIG. 46, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed in the upper right portion of the tutorial display section TT1. The ninja character NJ4 is a character that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In this example, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display section TT1 with the preparing image RDY displayed, so that the preparing image RDY and the ninja character NJ4 can be noticed There is.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (g), the pending change animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the first pending icon h11, and the first It is shown that the hold icon h11 of has been hit. At this time, due to the effect EF4, the entire first reserved icon h11 is covered, and it is considered to be in a more difficult visual condition than in a state where it is not covered by the effect EF4. Note that this effect EF4 is also displayed on the hold icon next to the target hold icon, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 46 (g), the effect EF 4 is placed next to the first hold icon h11. A part of the first hold icon h12 is also overlapped with the effect EF4. In this effect example, it can be said that the on-hold change animation performed before the on-hold icon changes functions as the on-hold change advance effect display. In addition, the display of the ninja character NJ4 may be included in the hold change advance effect display, that is, a series of animation from the start of the display of the ninja character NJ4 to the change of the display mode of the hold icon. May be used as a pending change advance presentation display. In addition, the pending change advance effect display may be performed only by displaying the ninja character NJ4. In addition, the display of the ninja character NJ4 displayed after the hold change may or may not be included in the hold change advance effect display. In addition, even if the hold change animation is performed, the display mode of the hold icon may not change. In addition, the display of the image RDY being prepared may be started after the effect display on the ninja character NJ4. Conversely, the ninja character NJ4 may not be displayed to cause the image RDY to appear. Also, the arrangement may be such that the ready image RDY appears more easily when there is a pending icon displayed in the pre-reading mode than when there is no pending icon. According to this configuration, a state in which the holding icon changes after the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 is expected to appear in the preparation of the image RDY, so that the ninja character NJ4 displays a different type of advance notice (hold It may function as advance notification of an icon change and an object such as an image under preparation RDY, or an object change such as an advance notice and an advance notice.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (h), it is shown that the effect EF4 is deleted and the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a state where the display mode is changed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 46 (h) is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also emits red light in accordance with the display mode of the first hold icon h11. Note that the family crest 224E may emit light in red after the first reserved icon h11 starts to be displayed in the red display mode, or after the crest 224E emits light in red, the first one The hold icon h11 may start to display in the red display mode, or the family crest 224E may emit light in red at the timing when the first hold icon h11 starts to display in the red display mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the change-on-hold animation ends and the ninja character NJ4 is erased. Further, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and are stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7". Although the combination of the decoration patterns of this "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7" is a combination of losing, it is also a combination of chance eyes. That is, the advance notice is given by the derivation display of the combination of chances. Although the chance eye is easily derived and displayed when the hold icon is displayed in the read-ahead display mode, the chance eye is displayed with an appropriate probability regardless of the display mode of the hold icon. May be In addition, when the chance eye is displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the chance eye is not displayed. After the ninja character NJ4 is erased, stop display of the decorative symbol may be sequentially performed, or after the sequential stop display of the decorative symbol is started, the ninja character NJ4 may be deleted. In addition, sequential stop display of the decorative symbol may be started at the timing when the ninja character NJ4 is erased. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed at the timing shown to FIG. 46 (i), you may make it the fluctuation icon h0 erase | eliminate at the timing when the symbol was decidedly displayed.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 46 (j), the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed The hold icon at the position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to be the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11, respectively. , Move on the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (j), variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the tutorial display section TT1, it can be said that the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed, that is, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. On the other hand, the ninja character NJ4 displayed in the previous symbol variation display is a display not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, but may be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. . On the other hand, it can be said that the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is a character displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (k), it is shown that “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. The "decoration 4" displayed on the left and right is considered to be a swing fluctuation, and the middle symbol is displayed at a high speed. The display screen may be darkened as a notice effect before reaching the reach state, and the UI unit UI3 may be temporarily hidden, but basically, the UI unit UI3 performs the process until the super reach is started. It is designed not to be hidden.

  Thereafter, FIG. 46 (l) shows transition to super reach (sword reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the image RDY being prepared. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. Note that the movement of the household object 224E may be started after the super reach transition display is started, or the super reach transition display may be started after the operation of the household crest 224E is started, The movement of the household object 224E may be started at the timing when the reach transition display is started. Further, in this example of rendering, in case of transition to at least the sword reach of the super reach, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Hide. The UI unit UI3 may be hidden before the super reach transition display is started. Thus, in this presentation example, when transitioning to a specific super reach, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is hidden and at least the hold icon is hidden. Further, the reach name (title) of the SP reach may be displayed, and the UI unit UI3 may be hidden when at least the reach name of the SP reach is displayed. In addition, in the configuration in which a frame is displayed around the image RDY being prepared, the display of the frame may be part of the UI unit UI3. In this configuration, it can be said that not all of the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but part of the UI unit UI3 is hidden. Further, since the peripheral frame is not displayed when the image under preparation RDY is not displayed, it can be said that all of the UI unit UI3 is hidden in this case. That is, it can be said that the non-display range of the UI unit UI3 after the transition to the super reach is different depending on whether or not the image in preparation RDY is displayed in the state before the transition to the super reach. The display of the image RDY during preparation is not configured to make it possible to identify an aspect of a certain advance notice or an effect. Note that the UI unit UI3 does not have to be hidden even if the game is shifted to the sword reach.

  In FIG. 46 (m), it is shown that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In addition, when the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, the display of only the image RDY being prepared is maintained, and the tutorial display unit TT1 itself is framed out with the UI unit UI3. That is, the image under preparation RDY has the same display position in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed and the display position after the non-display. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position. Here, the family crest 224E may return to the initial position after the start of the sword strike, or the kana reach may begin after the family crest 224E returns to the initial position, or the family crest 224E. Swordsman reach may be started at the timing when it returns to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (n), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is considered to be more difficult to see than in the state not overlapped with the effect EF5. . That is, it can be said that notification is given that the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished, and also that display before the start of a certain advance notice display is started. Furthermore, it can be said that the display of the effect EF5 has started a certain preliminary display itself. Furthermore, in this example of presentation, the image under preparation RDY can be said to end (become non-displayed) when the hold icon is in the non-display state (the UI unit UI3 is in the display state).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (o), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the image under preparation RDY is displayed. Although this mini game is an example of the notice display started after the display of the image RDY being prepared is started, the mini game may be started without passing through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be more easily determined and displayed when the display of the image RDY is being made than when the display of the image RDY is not being made. In this example of rendering, the display of the image in preparation RDY is ended and the mini game is started, but the display of the image in preparation RDY is ended and the timer advance notice effect may be started. In addition, for example, the characters “iron plate” may be displayed without the mini game or the timer advance notice effect being displayed, or the result of the success or failure judgment may be displayed suddenly. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The target TGT is composed of four divided areas, and at least one of the four areas (the upper area in the example shown in FIG. 46 (o)) is the area of the hit. By hitting an arrow in the area of the hit, it is possible to give a highly reliable notice of the big hit. The number of hit regions is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit regions, or all regions may be hit regions, or all regions may be non-hit regions. Further, in a configuration in which there are multiple types of mini games and timer announcements, a type of mini game or timer announcement may be configured to always go through the display of the image RDY being prepared (Configuration 1). Conversely, another type of mini-game or timer advance notice may be configured (configuration 2) not to go through the display of the image RDY being prepared. Both configuration 1 and configuration 2 may be provided, or either one may be provided.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (p), it is shown that the arrow thrown by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. In other words, it is shown that a great success has been achieved as a result of the mini game as the advance notice. The display indicating the result of the mini game may be configured to be displayed as a cut different from the cut shown in FIG. Note that the display of another cut may be performed regardless of success or failure, or may be configured to be performed only in the case of a specific result. In this effect example, when a certain advance notice display is a mini game, a result display portion of the mini game may be a certain effect. The display of "iron plate" in the case where a certain advance notice display is a mini game may be a second certain effect, or may be configured such that a second certain effect is performed after a certain effect.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (q), the character "iron plate" is displayed on a square background, and an iron plate image TP inclined approximately 15 degrees counterclockwise is displayed. . This iron plate image TP is a notice display to notify that the big hit is confirmed. As described above, in this presentation example, it is possible to say that the advance notice display corresponding to the result of the mini game is performed, that is, the other advance notice display corresponding to the result of the advance notice display is performed. Further, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed instead of the mini game, it can be said that the advance notice display is performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0. Also, when the timer advance notice effect is performed, another advance notice may be displayed in the one cushion after the countdown is completed and becomes 0 (for example, the countdown is completed). (Including the start of another notice display immediately before the

  FIG. 47 is a view sequentially showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. Note that at least one of the plurality of other examples may be provided, and conversely, at least one example may not be provided. The same applies to the following figures.

  FIG. 47 (a1) shows an effect following FIG. 46 (l). In the description of the present embodiment, although it is illustrated as a continuation of the effect example of FIG. 46, effects may be performed in another scene, or effects may be performed only as a continuation of the effect example of FIG. It is also good. The same applies to the following figures. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 47 (a1) to FIG. 47 (a3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 46 (m) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (a4), it is shown that the arrow thrown by the miniature character MC1 of the domino is out of the target TGT and flies to a region different from the target TGT. That is, the situation in which the mini game as the advance notice has failed is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the iron plate image TP is not displayed, and it is shown that the sword strike is being performed continuously. In this effect example, in the case of only the difference between the failure of the mini game and the success, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the mini game is successful. In addition, instead of the mini game, a timer advance notice may be performed. For example, it may be a fake timer advance notice that nothing is displayed even if the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0, or the timer display When the countdown of is completed and becomes 0, an effect with low reliability (for example, the characters "chance" are displayed small somewhere, etc.) may be performed.

  FIG. 47 (b1) is also a presentation following FIG. 46 (l). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 47 (b1) to FIG. 47 (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 46 (m) to FIG. 46 (o), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (b4), the arrow thrown by the mini character MC1 of the tombstone hits the target TGT, but a state of being stuck in the non-hit area is shown. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that the mini game is successful but not very successful.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (b5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the cut-in image HCI of the princess in which the character of "chance" and the princess character are displayed on the background of the horizontal stripes. ing. In this demonstration example, in the comparison of whether the mini game was a success or a great success, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally displayed finally in the case of a great success than in the case of a success. .

  FIG. 47 (c1) is also an effect following FIG. 46 (l). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 47 (c1) to FIG. 47 (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 46 (m) to FIG. 46 (n), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (c3), there is a state where a mini game different from the mini game shown in FIG. 46 (o) is started in the area where the image RDY in preparation is displayed. It is shown. The mini game shown in FIG. 47 (c3) is also an example of the advance notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished. When the mini game is started, the laterally extending cylindrical drum DRM starts to rotate about the lateral direction as an axis of rotation. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed. In this effect example, the mini game shown in FIG. 47 (c3) is configured to be more successful when it is started than the mini game shown in FIG. 46 (o) is started. The mini game shown in (o) may be configured to be easier to succeed. In addition, it is configured that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed when the mini game shown in FIG. 47 (c3) is started rather than the mini game shown in FIG. 46 (o) is started. However, the mini game shown in FIG. 46 (o) may be configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (c4), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol with the character of "iron plate" is derived, and it is shown that the mini game is very successful.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (c5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the iron plate image TP is displayed, and it is shown that the notice effect of the big hit determination is performed.

  In addition, although the mini game was performed in the effect shown in FIG. 46 compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 46, in the effect example shown in FIG. 47, the timer notice effect may be performed, or vice versa . In addition, both timer announcement effects may be performed, and in this case, the background color and the time for counting down may be different.

  FIG. 48 is a view sequentially showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 48 (a1) shows that the sword strike is started. In this presentation example, unlike in FIG. 46 (m), the image under preparation RDY is not displayed. In FIG. 48 (a1), the fluctuation icon h0 is in the red display mode, and accordingly, the family crest 224E is also in the red light emission mode.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (a2), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this presentation example, it is shown that the mini game is started without passing through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be more easily determined and displayed when the display of the image RDY is being made than when the display of the image RDY is not being made.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (a3), it is shown that the arrow released by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. In other words, it is shown that a great success has been achieved as a result of the mini game as the advance notice.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (a4), the iron plate image TP as the advance notice is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided.

  Thus, in this example of rendering, an example is shown where the mini game is started without displaying the image RDY being prepared, but this may be executed only during super reach, It may be performed not only during the super reach, but also may be configured to be executable during the super reach or not. In addition, after the third display ends in the first state, there may be a pattern in which a certain advance display (a certain effect) is performed across the first state to the second state. It is also good. In addition, a certain advance notice (a certain effect) to be performed after the third display ends in the first state may cross the next change. Then, after the third display ends in the second state, a certain advance notice (particularly, a certain effect) may at least start and end in the second state.

  FIG. 48 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 46 (l). In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 48 (b1)-the same figure (b 2) is the same as the rendition shown to FIG. 46 (m)-the same figure (n), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (b3), it is shown that timer preview effect is started instead of the mini game in the area where the image under preparation RDY is displayed. This timer advance notice effect is also an example of the advance notice display which is started after the display of the image RDY being prepared. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY in preparation is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of counting down, when "0:00" indicating 0 seconds is reached, a certain advance notice display is started. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 48 (b 3), “10:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. It is to be noted that after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a false timer advance notice effect in which the timer advance notice effect ends is started before reaching "0:00". It should be noted that the big hit symbol may eventually be displayed more clearly when the timer advance notice effect is started than when the mini game is started, and the mini game may be easier than when the timer advance notice effect is started. If the game is started, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be finally displayed. Note that the timer advance notice effect in the present embodiment is an effect display (for example, in a display area different from the display area in which the timer display is performed after the timer becomes “0:00” indicating 0 seconds as a result of counting down) , And is configured to perform an iron plate image TP), but after “0:00” indicating 0 seconds, another effect display (for example, “iron plate”) is displayed in the display area in which the timer display is performed. Such as a display that can identify a certain effect display, or a display related to a certain effect display such as a “chance”, and then in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed. You may comprise so that presentation of effects (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed. Also, although the timer advance notice effect in this embodiment is configured to be displayed until "0:00" indicating 0 seconds as a result of counting down, it is displayed up to "1" indicating 1 second, or , "00: 01" may be displayed. Specifically, “10” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. Then, after “1” is displayed, another effect display (for example, a display capable of specifying a certain effect display such as “iron plate”, or “chance”) in the display area where the timer display was performed. After performing a display related to a certain effect display), an effect display (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed (for example, Here, the countdown display may be up to the display of “1”, may be up to immediately before another effect display is displayed, or may be up to the display of another effect display. ). The time from when the "1" is displayed to when the display of another effect display is started is the same as the time from when the "2" is displayed to when the display of "1" is started (almost the same) It may be different (that is, displayed at the timing of “0” in “2” → “1” → “0”). When a pseudo run symbol is displayed as a certain effect display, a display representing “NEXT” or “continue” may be displayed as another effect display. Also, although the timer display (for example, "10:00") is displayed immediately after the display of the image in preparation RDY is finished, other displays are displayed after the display of the image in preparation RDY is finished. The timer display is displayed after the display (for example, a display showing that the timer display is counting up from 0 or a display related to the timer display like “after next chance up”) is displayed. It may be configured such that no other display is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (b4), it is shown that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed as a result of the countdown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (b5), the iron plate image TP as the advance notice is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided. That is, the timer advance notice effect can be said to be a notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain advance notice display. In each of the effect examples shown in the present embodiment, effects other than the iron plate image TP may be performed as a certain effect.

  FIG. 48 (c1) to FIG. 48 (c3) are effects following FIG. 48 (b2). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (c1), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. In the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 48 (c1), in addition to the timer display, the remaining time display meter MT4 is displayed in an area different from the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. The display mode changes in such a manner that the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes gradually shorter corresponding to the remaining time of the timer display. Then, the remaining time display meter MT4 disappears at the timing when the timer display becomes "0:00". In this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed by the display by the numbers in the timer display and the display in other display modes other than the numbers. First, only the decrease display of the meter by the remaining time display meter MT4 is performed, and for example, the countdown by the timer display may be started when the remaining time becomes 3 seconds. In this case, the decrease speed of the remaining time display meter MT4 may change before and after the countdown by the timer display starts. Also, two or more remaining time display meters with different remaining times may be provided, and each may be displayed with a length corresponding to the remaining time, or two or more remaining time display meters with the same remaining time but different lengths. You may display it. In this case, for example, the decreasing speed of the longer remaining time display meter may be faster than the decreasing speed of the shorter remaining time display meter. In addition, when a plurality of remaining time display meters are displayed, different advance notice displays may be performed when the remaining time display meters disappear. Also, two or more remaining time display meters of the same length may be provided, and their reduction rates may be different.

  Further, in this presentation example, presentation may be performed in which the execution time of the timer advance presentation presentation is extended. For example, in the case of extension, the number of 0 may be deleted and the meter may be restored again. Also, the length of the meter may differ depending on the time of timer advance notice. In addition, the rate of decrease of the meter may not be constant, for example, may not decrease at a constant speed at a certain timing. Also, a plurality of meters may be displayed, and although the length of a certain meter may be long, for example, as a result of the decrease speed becoming faster from the middle, it may be shorter than the length of the other meter. Further, the rate of decrease of the meter does not have to be equal. For example, the decrease rate may be faster or slower in the state in which the numbers are also displayed.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing in stages an example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 49 (a1) shows that the sword strike is started. In this presentation example, unlike in FIG. 46 (m), the image under preparation RDY is not displayed. Thereafter, after the reach effect is performed as shown in FIG. 49 (a2) to FIG. 49 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 49 (a4), the united animation is performed and the display A pair of translucent button images 136 q are displayed from the upper left and right of the screen. Here, the combined animation may be referred to as an introduction animation of a button effect or a fade-in animation (IN animation). The semi-transparent button image 136 q informs that the button image 136 a is materialized and a button advance notice effect is started by uniting. Here, the introduction animation may also be included in the button preview effect. The pair of translucent button images 136 q move toward the center while being close to each other. In this example of rendering, an example in which two translucent button images 136q are merged has been described, for example, a rendering in which four translucent button images 136q are merged may be performed. In this case, two translucent buttons are used. The button image 136a is materialized and button preview effect is more easily started when the effect of combining the four translucent button images 136q is performed than when the effect of combining the image 136q is performed You may Note that while the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect button 136 has not been received yet. In addition, even when a deceased button image 136aL to be described later is displayed and a button preview effect is started, united animation may be performed using the same translucent button image 136q, or a translucent button image corresponding to the deceased button image 136aL Coalescing animation may be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 49 (a5), a state in which the pair of translucent button images 136q are further in proximity is shown.

  Then, when the combined animation is successful, as shown in FIG. 49 (a6), the button image 136a is materialized and a button advance notice effect is started. When the button preview effect is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is received, and an animation showing that the button image 136a is pressed is displayed with a character of "Press", and further, the remaining button image 136a The time meter MT is displayed to notify the remaining time of the operation reception period. In addition, the effect button lamp 138 provided on the effect button 136 also emits red light in response to the start of the operation effective period. Note that the button preview effect may be started after the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 may be started after the button preview effect is started.

  FIGS. 49 (b1) to (b6) show modifications of the effects shown in FIGS. 48 (b1) to (b5). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 49 (b1) to FIG. 49 (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 48 (b1) to FIG. 48 (b3), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 49 (b 4) shows a state in which the above-mentioned combined animation is started when the timer display countdown is performed in the timer advance presentation effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "2:00", and it is shown that a notice advance display corresponding to the timer advance notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here, the timing at which the translucent button image 136q is united by the united animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is "0:00" and the countdown is completed. It is shown that the start of the button preview effect is notified by the timer and the timer advance effect. In addition, even if the timer announcement effect is started and the timer display is displayed, the countdown may not be started immediately, and the countdown of the timer display may be started according to the start of the combined animation. According to this, there are cases where it is possible to easily specify the notice effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed. In addition, the timer announcement effect may be started by ending the display of the image RDY being prepared while the combined animation is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 49 (b 5), the pair of translucent button images 136 q are further in proximity, and a state immediately before the completion of the combination is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer advance display is "0:00", which shows that the countdown is completed. Note that the timer display may be set to "0:00" after the united animation is completed, or the timer display may be set to "0:00" at the timing when the united animation is completed.

  FIG. 49 (b 6) shows a state in which the combined animation has succeeded, the big button image 136 a L is materialized, a button advance notice effect is started, and an operation acceptance state is started. In this effect example, the deca-button image 136aL is more likely to be displayed when both the timer preview effect and the combined animation are performed than when only one of the timer preview effect and the combined animation is performed. It has become. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where the deca-button image 136aL is displayed, for example, an iron plate image TP is displayed.

  FIG. 49 (c1) is a modification of the effects shown in FIG. 49 (b3) to FIG. 49 (b6). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 49 (c1) to FIG. 49 (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 49 (b3) to FIG. 49 (b4), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 49 (c3), a state immediately before the pairing of the translucent button images 136q is close and the merging is completed is shown. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 49 (c3), when the pair of translucent button images 136q approaches, at least a part of the pair of translucent button images 136q overlaps due to the effect EF6, and this is more than the state where they do not overlap. The translucent button image 136 q is difficult to view. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful.

  Then, when the combined animation is successful, as shown in FIG. 49 (c4), a button advance notice effect by the deca-button image 136aL is started. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 49 (c4) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 49 (b6), detailed description will be omitted.

  Thus, the presentation example shown in FIG. 49 is also shown for the example in which the image RDY being prepared ends during execution of the super reach. Note that there may or may not be a pattern in which the display of the image RDY being prepared is ended and the timer advance notice is started while the introduced animation is displayed.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 50 (a), a UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 50A, one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, so that one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red, that is, the display mode of the advance notice of the fluctuation, and the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the image RDY being prepared is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (a). The image under preparation RDY has a red background color and is more likely to finally display the jackpot symbol than in the case of the green background color which is the default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 50A is in a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 50 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest product 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is set to a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 50 (b), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is considered to be more difficult to see than in the state not overlapped with the effect EF5. . That is, the end effect of the display of the image RDY being prepared is started. As described above, it can be said that this presentation example shows that the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished except for super reach.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50 (c), it is shown that the timer preview effect is started in the tutorial display section TT1 (that is, the area where the image RDY is being displayed) ing. When the timer advance presentation is started, the timer display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and then the countdown starts. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 50 (c), "90:00" is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. Further, the background color of the timer display is red following the background color of the image RDY being prepared. In this example of presentation, it is shown that timer advance presentation is started before developing into super reach. Then, the timer display displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started is a long time as "90:00", and it can be inferred that the symbol variation display time is long, and a sense of expectation for a big hit may be improved. As described above, in this effect example, a relatively short time such as "10:00" is displayed when the displayed time of the timer display is displayed in a long time (long time) such as "90:00". Finally, the big hit symbol is configured to be more easily displayed than when displayed in (short time). Further, in this rendering example, since the background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, the timer display is easily started to be long time in the timer preview rendering. Further, in this example of presentation, since the timer display is long time and the background is red, the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved.

  FIG. 50 (d) shows transition to super reach (swords reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered that the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) are difficult to be recognized by the family crest 224E being overlapped. In addition, the family crest item 224E also overlaps with a part of the timer notice display in the countdown display of the timer display. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. At the timing shown in FIG. 50 (d), the timer display is "30:00".

  FIG. 50 (e) shows that the above-mentioned combined animation is started when the timer display countdown is performed in the timer advance presentation effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "2:00", and it is shown that a notice advance display corresponding to the timer advance notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Also here, the timing at which the translucent button image 136q is united by the united animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is "0:00" and the countdown is completed. It is shown that the start of the button preview effect is notified by the timer and the timer advance effect.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 50 (f), the pair of translucent button images 136q are further in proximity, and a state immediately before the completion of the combination is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer advance display is "0:00", which shows that the countdown is completed. In this example of effect, the background color of the timer advance notice display is red, and the big hit symbol is more easily displayed than when the default background color is displayed, but it may be the same. In addition, the reliability of the big hit may be the same in the case where the timer advance notice display is the default background color and the case where it is the red background color.

  FIG. 50 (g) shows that the combined animation is successful, the deka button image 136aL is materialized, the button advance notice effect is started, the remaining time meter MT is displayed, and the operation reception state is started. There is. In this effect example, the longer the time for which the timer counts down in the timer display, the easier it will be for a big hit.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 51 (a1), a UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 51 (a1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red, that is, the display mode of the advance notice of the fluctuation, and the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Note that the family crest 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the image under preparation RDY is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 51 (a1). The image under preparation RDY has a green background color and is a default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 51 (a1) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 51 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a2), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is considered to be more difficult to see than in the state not overlapped with the effect EF5. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the image under preparation RDY is displayed. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The dynamic TGT is composed of four divided areas, and the upper one of the four areas is the hitting area, and hitting the hitting area with an arrow hits the big hit reliability. High notices are to be made. In this presentation example, it is shown that a mini game is being played prior to transition to super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a4), it is shown that an arrow released by a domino mini character MC1 is stuck in the area around the target TGT. In other words, it is shown that a great success has been achieved as a result of the mini game as the advance notice.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a5), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, that is, the fluctuation icon h0. It is shown that the preliminary announcement by is ranked up. In addition, the family crest 224E emits light in gold in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. It should be noted that after the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, the family character 224E may change from the red light emission mode to the gold light emission mode, or the family crest 224E may emit red light. After changing to the aspect or the golden light emission mode, the change icon h0 may change from the red display mode to the gold display mode, or the timing when the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode The family crest item 224E may be changed from the red light emission mode to the gold light emission mode. Then, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the closing operation by the shutter image is started, and the displayed display of the mini game is shifted to the state in which the shutter image can not be visually recognized. Note that the closing operation by the shutter image may be started after the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may change after the closing operation by the shutter image starts. The closing operation by the shutter image may be started at the timing when the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes. Moreover, although the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed as a result of the mini game in this presentation example, the hold icon may be changed.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a6), the shutter image shows that the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed. Thereby, the display of the mini game is completely erased by the shutter image.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a7), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the tutorial display section TT1 is in a non-display state where no display is performed. The tutorial display may be started when the shutter image is released, or another preview display, a timer preview display, or a mini game may be started. In addition, display may be performed to gray out after the shutter image is released.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51 (b1) to FIG. 51 (b8), an example showing a state where the mini game is started without displaying the image under preparation RDY will be described.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (b1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in red, and is displayed in advance. In addition, the hold icon h11 is a default display mode. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is the master of the temple”, and the relationship between the panda character and the temple character is described. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 51 (b1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (b2), it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is performing the closing operation by the shutter image. As a result, the explanation display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is made non-display.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (b3), it is shown that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a mini game preview display to be displayed before the display of the mini game described later is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (b4), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. In this effect example, when the shutter image is released, the mini game is started on the tutorial display unit TT1. That is, in this effect example, the mini game is shown to be started instead of the explanation display which has been performed until now. It can also be said that a mini game is shown starting without displaying the image RDY being prepared. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 51 (b4) to FIG. 51 (b8) are performed. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 51 (b4) to FIG. 51 (b8) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 51 (a3) to FIG. 51 (a7), the description will be omitted. In addition, after the mini game is over, the explanation display may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1, or the gray out display may be performed.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram gradually showing a display example in the tutorial display unit TT1 applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 52 (a1), a UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 52 (a1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red, that is, the display mode of the advance notice of the fluctuation, and the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Note that the family crest 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 52 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and a panda character The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 52 (a1) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 52 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state is shown in which the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is performing a closing operation using a shutter image. That is, it can be said that the display (display of the shutter image) before the other display (preliminary display) is performed instead of the certain display (explanatory display) in a certain area (tutorial display unit TT1) . Note that at least a part of the character display displayed before the shutter image is displayed during the display of the shutter image may be displayed.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (a3), it is shown that the tutorial display section TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a display before notice display displayed before a notice display to be described later is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (a4), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display unit TT1, when the shutter image is released, not the image RDY under preparation nor the mini game or the timer advance notice effect, but the notice display consisting of the letters “excessive heat” is displayed. The notice display of the "super heat" may be displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect being performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed when displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer announcement effect being performed than when displayed without the mini game or the timer announcement effect. Good. Further, the notice display of the "super heat" may not be displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect being performed. Further, in this effect example, it is not necessary to perform the effect of closing the tutorial display unit TT1 by the shutter image before performing the advance display such as “superheat”.

  FIG. 52 (b1) to FIG. 52 (b8) show an example of effect showing how the advance notice icon appears in the tutorial display section TT1. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 52 (b1) to FIG. 52 (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 52 (a1) to FIG. 52 (a3), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (b4), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display section TT1, it is shown that a timer notice icon I81 for timer notice appears for notifying that timer notice effect will be performed when the shutter image is released. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance presentation effect will be performed. Note that other notice icons may appear.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (b5), the timer advance notice icon I81 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 pops out from the tutorial display unit TT1 and moves upward while expanding. The situation is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (b6), the closing operation by the shutter image is started in the tutorial display unit TT1.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (b7), the shutter image shows that the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed. As a result, the display state in the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to visually recognize. In this example, until the shutter image is completely closed, the timer preview icon I81 is kept displayed, and it is notified that the timer preview icon I81 is stocked. Alternatively, they may be erased when the closing operation by the shutter image is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (b8), a state is shown in which the shutter image is opened in the tutorial display section TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the image RDY being prepared. At the timing shown in FIG. 52 (b8), the image under preparation RDY is set as the default display mode. The preparation image RDY is displayed by the timer notice icon I81 being stocked. That is, the start of the timer advance presentation is notified by the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this production example, the display mode of the image RDY in preparation for notifying of the start of the timer preview effect and the display mode of the image in preparation for notifying the start of the mini game are the same, but are different You may In addition, the mini game or the timer advance notice effect may be started without displaying the image RDY being prepared.

  FIG. 53: is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the preliminary announcement production | presentation in preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. Here, even if the end timing of the third display, the start and end timings of a certain advance notice display, and the start and end timings of a certain effect are different states among the states into which the second state is subdivided. It may be good or in the same state.

  FIG. 53 (a1) shows an effect following FIG. 46 (l). Since the effect shown in FIG. 47 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 46 (m), the description will be omitted. In the effect shown in FIG. 53 (a1), the display may be started after the image RDY being prepared has developed into a super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (a2), the animation of the duel scene continues, and then, as shown in FIG. 53 (a3), the main character of the hero wins over the swordsman of the enemy character, The combination of the decoration patterns of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "is derived and the fluctuation is started. At this time, the preparing image RDY is still displayed. That is, it can be said that the image RDY being prepared is displayed in a state where the display indicating that a big hit is made is made. In order to congratulate the player from becoming a big hit, the family crest 224E, the eight generations character 224Fa and the generals character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow display mode in which light is emitted in multiple colors.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (a4), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is made more difficult to recognize than the state not overlapped with the effect EF5. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the timer preview effect is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY in preparation is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of counting down, when "0:00" indicating 0 seconds is reached, a certain advance notice display is started. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 53 (a5), “3:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. It is to be noted that after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a false timer advance notice effect in which the timer advance notice effect ends is started before reaching "0:00".

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (a6), it is shown that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed as a result of the countdown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (a7), the character “Go” is displayed in the display area where the timer display was performed, and it is informed that a certain advance notice effect is started. There is. Note that the display of the characters "Go" may be performed or may not be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (a8), it is shown that the jackpot symbol promotion effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deca-button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and it is informed that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has been started. The display of the big button image 136aL corresponds to a certain advance notice effect, that is, corresponds to the notice effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed. Here, for example, when the timer advance notice effect is not performed, the promotion effect of the big hit symbol does not have to be started, and when the promotion effect of the big hit symbol is started, the default display is displayed instead of the deca button image 136aL. A button image 136a of an aspect may be displayed. Also, a mini game may be played instead of the timer advance notice effect. In addition, even when the timer advance notice effect or the mini game is not performed, the deca-button image 136aL may be displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 53 (a9), the combination of the decoration patterns of the big hit of the "decoration 4-decor 4-decor 4" wins the big hit of "decoration 7-decor 7-decor 7" It is changed to the combination of the decoration design of, and it is informed that the definite variation big hit is decided. That is, it is notified that the jackpot symbol has been promoted.

  FIG. 53 (b 1) to FIG. 53 (b 4) show that the countdown of the timer display by the timer advance presentation is started while the animation of the duel scene in the super reach is continued.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (b1) shows that animation of a duel scene continues. At this time, the timer advance notice effect is started, and the timer advance notice display is displayed in the display area where the tutorial display unit TT1 was displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 53 (b1), “10:00” is displayed as the timer display on the timer advance display, and thereafter, the countdown is started. In addition, the time when countdown is started may be before developing into super reach, may be after developing into super reach, or may be the timing when developed into super reach, reach It may be before the transition to the state, or may be after the transition to the reach state and before the development to the super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (b2), the button preview effect is started, and a state in which the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT . That is, it is shown that the final judge effect is started. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display, the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 53 (b2), the timer display indicates "9:00". That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display is counted down due to the timer advance production during the operation acceptance period of the production button 136. Here, the operation accepting period of the effect button 136 is longer between the length of the operation accepting period of the effect button 136 in the final judge effect and the length at which the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is performed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 53 (b3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (b4), the main character of the hero wins over the swordsman of the enemy character. -A combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4" is derived to start swing fluctuation. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display, it is suggested that the countdown of the timer display still continues, that is, there is a possibility that the jackpot symbol promotion effect will be performed thereafter. In this example of effect, even when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect, the timer display is configured not to be "0:00". This is because, for example, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is displayed in the final judge effect, and then the resurrection effect is performed at the timing when the timer display becomes “0:00”. Also, conversely, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect, the count may be zero.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing in stages an example of the timer advance presentation effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 54 (a) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 52 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (b), a state is shown in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the image RDY being prepared. In this preparation example, only one type of display mode is prepared for the image under preparation RDY, and change display to other display modes is not performed. As described above, in this presentation example, the reliability of the big hit is not known in the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of a certain advance notice and a certain effect, it is not possible to know which certain advance notice and a certain effect are to be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (c), the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the timer advance notice display, and a state is shown that the timer advance notice is started. . In this rendering example, one of a plurality of background colors in the timer advance notice display is selected, and the background color indicates the reliability of the big hit. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 54 (c), the background color of the timer advance notice display is blue, which is an aspect with low reliability. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is “10:00”, and it is notified that there is a possibility that a given advance notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts. Before or after the timer countdown starts, the background color of the timer advance notice may change, and an effect may be performed such that the reliability is improved halfway.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (d), it is shown that the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. In addition, it is shown that the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed on the left and right patterns, respectively, and the reach state is reached. In addition, after the timer display becomes "0:00", it may be in the reach state, or after reaching the reach state, the timer display may become "0:00", or the timer display is " It may be in the reach state at the timing when it becomes 0:00 ". In this example of presentation, when the countdown of the timer display becomes 0, there is a correspondence relationship with the display showing that it will be developed into the super reach, and it will always be developed into the super reach.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the character display "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (e). It is reported that it will be started.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (f), the button preview effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the display of "Go" is erased and is not displayed. In this production example, the start of the button preview production itself is not the preview display that is started as a result of the timer preview production being performed, but the preview displayed when the rendering button 136 is operated as a result of operating the button preview production. The display corresponds to the notice display started as a result of the timer notice effect being performed. Note that the tutorial display unit TT1 may be in the non-display state after the button preview effect is started, or the button preview effect may be started after the tutorial display unit TT1 is in the non-display state. The tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden at the timing when the button preview effect is started. By not displaying the tutorial display after the display of “Go”, an effect of concentrating on other effects (for example, button effects) may be exhibited.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (g), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button preview effect is started and the operation valid period is started. ing.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (h), it is determined that the button advance effect has been successful, and as shown in FIG. 54 (i), the process shifts to super reach. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. Further, in this example of rendering, in case of transition to at least the sword reach of the super reach, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Hide. That is, in this rendering example, it can be said that a certain preview display performed as a result of the timer preview rendering corresponds to the development to the super reach.

  FIG. 54 (j) shows that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, since the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed, no display is performed after the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out with the UI unit UI3. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (k), it is shown that a cut-in image HCI of a princess is displayed. The princess's cut-in image HCI is suddenly displayed without passing through the button announcement effect, the timer announcement effect, or the mini game, and the reliability is low. However, the button announcement effect or the timer announcement effect or It may be displayed as a result of the mini game being played. Moreover, it may change to the cut-in image HCI of a princess, for example, the iron plate image TP may be displayed.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 55 (a)-the same figure (c) is the same as FIG. 54 (a)-the same figure (c), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 55 (d) shows that an animation in which a character of a lord as a navy character is throwing a bomb is being performed. Specifically, the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N throws a bomb while shouting "It's still." This bomb is displayed on the first decorative symbol display from the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Move across device 208L. Then, the bomb travels to the tutorial display section TT1 in which the timer display is being counted down and bursts in the vicinity above the tutorial display section TT1.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (e), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted and the ready image RDY is displayed again. When this timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is "10:00", and the timing at which the button advance notice effect is started is notified, but that timer notice effect is interrupted. It may be recognized that it did not correspond to the button preview effect. It should be noted that the big hit symbol may be more easily displayed when the interruption presentation of the timer advance announcement production by the navigation character is performed than when the interruption presentation of the timer announcement production by the navigation character is not performed. It should be noted that if the effect of interrupting the countdown of the timer display is performed, instead of the display of the image RDY being prepared, the time of the timer display is increased and the time until the countup is extended is extended. Good, and the countdown speed may be slower. Also, for example, the timer advance notice has the advantage that it is easy to predict the timing of 0 because the countdown speed does not change, and that is why it is possible to know the future by the end timing of the image RDY under preparation There is a case.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (f), the button preview effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. It is shown. The tutorial display unit TT1 continues to display the image RDY being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (g), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button preview effect is started and the operation valid period is started. ing.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 55 (h), it is determined that the button advance effect has been successful, and as shown in FIG. 55 (i), the process shifts to super reach. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display section TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. Further, in this example of rendering, in case of transition to at least the sword reach of the super reach, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Hide.

  FIG. 55 (j) shows that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the image under preparation RDY continues to be maintained. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (k), it is shown that the image in preparation RDY is switched to the timer advance notice display, and the timer advance notice effect is resumed. Specifically, the timer notice display after resumption is changed to a gold background color, which indicates that the jackpot reliability has been improved. Further, in FIG. 55 (k), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "10:00", and it is informed that a given advance notice may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is resumed. It is done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display due to the timer advance presentation is being performed during the super reach (sword reach). In addition, start timing of timer notice production is taken as appropriate timing, for example, before start of super reach, after start of super reach, before reach state, after reach state, after super reach start Also, the timing may be started before. Further, the timer display when the timer advance presentation effect is resumed can be appropriately set to time, and for example, may be started from "9:00" indicating the time of interruption.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (l), it is shown that the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (m), the character "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display, and a certain advance notice display is started It is informing.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (n), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect corresponds to the advance notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain advance notice display. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 54, the notice display corresponding to the timer notice production is not the development to the super reach but the cut-in image displayed during the super reach as a result of the timer notice production being extended. As a result, the cut-in image has high reliability. As described above, in this example of the effect, the countdown is “0:00” at a good place in the super reach, and an example in which a good effect is performed is shown. In addition, as the end timing (the start timing of a certain advance notice display) of the image RDY being prepared is later in a certain fluctuation, the expectation of the big hit is higher.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. The effect shown in FIG. 56 (a) is the same as that in FIG. 54 (a), so the description will be omitted.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (b) shows a state where the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the image RDY being prepared. At this time, “TIMER × 2” is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 in which the image under preparation RDY is displayed, and it is shown that the timer announcement effect is performed twice. Note that the display of “TIMER × 2” may be displayed simultaneously with the display of the image RDY being prepared, or may be displayed after the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It may be assumed that it will be performed once, but actually it will be performed twice. Here, instead of the display of “TIMER × 2”, for example, two in-provision images RDY may be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (c), the in-provision image RDY displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched from the in-provision image RDY to the timer notice display, and the timer announcement effect is started. . The background color of the timer preview is blue, which is an aspect of low reliability. Here, the default display mode of the timer advance notice may be green. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is “10:00”, and it is notified that there is a possibility that a given advance notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (d), it is shown that the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed. In addition, it is shown that the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed on the left and right patterns, respectively, and the reach state is reached. In addition, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the display of “TIMER × 2” displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 is erased, and it is informed that the first timer announcement effect has been digested and ended. ing. Note that the display of “TIMER × 2” may be difficult to visually recognize by the display of the effect when the timer display becomes “0:00”. In addition, the display of "TIMER × 2" may be displayed without being erased. In addition, when a plurality of under-provisioning displays are displayed, a state may be provided in which the display regarding the under-provisioning display is once hidden after the first under-provisioning display ends.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the character display "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (e). It is reported that it will be started.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (f), the button preview effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time meter MT overlap the decorative pattern. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the display of "Go" is erased and is not displayed. Therefore, it may seem that there is no stock of the timer advance notice effect. In this production example, the start of the button preview production itself is not the preview display that is started as a result of the timer preview production being performed, but the preview displayed when the rendering button 136 is operated as a result of operating the button preview production. The display corresponds to the notice display started as a result of the timer notice effect being performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (g), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button preview effect is started and the operation valid period is started. ing. At this time, the in-preparation image RDY is displayed again in the tutorial display section TT1 to notify that the second timer announcement effect is started, but when the in-provision image RDY is displayed again, the first in-provision image RDY is displayed. Is displayed larger than when it is displayed. Therefore, a part of the fluctuation icon h0 or the decorative symbol may be overlapped by the image RDY during preparation. As described above, there may be an effect of causing more attention by temporarily non-displaying the image RDY during preparation and further overlapping.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 56 (h), it is determined that the button advance effect has succeeded, and as shown in FIG. 56 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, super reach shift Display takes place and develops into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach). In addition, the family crest 224E is raised and rotated to overlap the front side of the lower central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The family crest 224E also overlaps a part of the enlarged preparation image RDY, and is considered to be less visible than the state where it is not overlapped by the family crest 224E. Note that the image under preparation RDY may be overlapped with the family crest 224E only when enlarged and displayed, and may not be overlapped when not enlarged. In addition, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is not displayed. That is, in this rendering example, it can be said that a certain preview display performed as a result of the timer preview rendering corresponds to the development to the super reach.

  FIG. 56 (j) shows that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the image under preparation RDY continues to be maintained. In addition, since the image RDY being prepared is enlarged, a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is overlapped, and the character of swordsman in the reach effect display is also overlapped. In this way, the prepared image RDY enlarged and displayed may also be displayed during execution of the super reach. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (k), it is shown that the image in preparation RDY is switched to the timer notice display and the second timer notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display after the start is changed to a gold background color, which indicates that the jackpot reliability is improved. Also, in FIG. 56 (k), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "3:00", and it is informed that a given advance notice may be displayed 3 seconds after the countdown is started. It is done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display due to the timer advance presentation is being performed during the super reach (sword reach). Further, in this example of the effect, the size of the timer advance notice display is the same size as the size of the ready image RDY displayed in the enlarged view, and when the timer advance notice display is displayed in the enlarged view, the big hit The symbol is easily displayed. In addition, when the background color of the timer advance notice display is gold, the display may be always enlarged. In addition, even if the background color of the timer advance notice display is a color other than gold, the display may be enlarged. Further, in this rendering example, the background color of the second timer preview rendering is higher in reliability than the first timer preview rendering, but the timer display time is shorter. Note that the time displayed on the timer may be longer in the second timer announcement effect than in the first timer announcement effect.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (l), it is shown that the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (m), instead of the timer display, the character "Go" is displayed and a certain advance notice display is started It is informing.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (n), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided. That is, it can be said that the second timer advance notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, it may be possible to dramatically improve the expectation for the big hit by being notified in advance that the timer advance effect is performed twice.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when the number of clothes under preparation RDY is displayed, when one under preparation picture RDY is digested, all the preparation under image RDY is displayed on the same symbol variation display. It has been shown to be digested.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 57A1 and 57A2 are the same as those in FIGS. 53A1 and 53A2, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a3), it is shown that the long press effect by the long press effect display is started to be displayed. In the long-press effect display, an area in which a character of Tonosama is drawn is arranged at the upper side, an area in which a character of swordsman is drawn is arranged at the lower side. The size of both areas is displayed so as to relatively fluctuate. The image RDY is being displayed even when the long-press effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 57 (a3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is not started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a4), it is shown that the reception of the long press operation by the long press effect is started. That is, it is shown that the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 has been started. In this long press effect, although the remaining time gauge MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. In addition, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared is switched to the timer advance notice display, and the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display has been changed to a green background color, indicating that the reliability is not so high. Further, in FIG. 57 (a4), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates “5:00”, and it is informed that a given advance notice may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown is started. It is done. That is, in this example of presentation, the operation valid period and the time of the countdown of the timer display coincide with each other. Note that they do not have to match completely. Note that the timer advance notice may be started after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation valid period of the play button 136 may be started after the timer advance effect is started, The timer announcement effect may be started at the timing when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

  FIG. 57 (a5) shows that the player performs a long press operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 57 (a5), the timer display in the timer advance display is "4:00".

  FIG. 57 (a6) shows that the player continues to perform the long press operation of the effect button 136. At this time, in the long-press effect display, the area in which the character of the lord placed above is drawn is expanded, and the area in which the character of the sword superior placed below is drawn is reduced by that amount. Is shown to be dominant. It is suggested that this is likely to be an advantageous result. At the timing shown in FIG. 57 (a6), the timer display in the timer advance display is “3:00”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a7), the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed, and the character “Go” is displayed. Further, the long press effect is continuously performed, and the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is still continuing. That is, it can be said that the character display of "Go" is displayed in the operation effective period of the effect button 136. Moreover, in the long-press effect display, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn further expands, and the area where the character of the sword master placed below is drawn smaller accordingly. It is shown that your character is by far the dominant. Note that the long press effect may be ended after the “Go” character is displayed, or the “Go” character may be displayed after the long press effect is ended, “Go The long press effect may be ended at the timing when the character of “is displayed. Also, the operation effective period may end after the character “Go” is displayed, or the character “Go” may be displayed after the operation effective period ends, “Go The operation valid period may end at the timing when the character of “is displayed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a8), the characters “one blow” are displayed, and the deca-button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the button advance effect is started, and the operation is effective. It is shown that the period has been set again. That is, this button advance presentation effect can be said to be an example of button operation presentation performed subsequently to the long press presentation. In other words, it can be said that an example in which a plurality of (types) button effects are continuously performed is shown. Here, the operation effective period to be set may be set again after the operation effective period in the long press effect is once ended, or may be set continuously to the operation effective period in the long press effect May be

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a10), the main character of the main character wins over the swordsman of the enemy character. -A combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4" is derived to start swing fluctuation. At this time, the family crest item 224E, the eight generation character item 224Fa and the general character item 224Fb emit light in the light emission mode of the rainbow so as to congratulate being a big hit.

  Thus, in this example of rendering, the preparation display ends with the long press part and the countdown of the timer display is started, and the countdown is completed between the long press part and the next part or at the end of the long press part “0:00” is given, and an example is shown in which the button effect to be performed in the next part is good.

  In FIGS. 57 (b1) to (b5), it is shown that a long press effect is performed in the sword strike, but a timer advance effect is not performed.

  Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (b1), after the long press effect by the long press effect display is started, reception of the long press operation is started, and the effect button 136 is also started. It is shown that a long press operation is being performed. In this example of presentation, timer advance presentation is not performed.

  However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 57 (b2), the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, but in the effect display for long press, a character of a maroon placed above is drawn The area is reduced, and the area where the sword character placed below is drawn is enlarged, and it is shown that the Tonosama character is inferior (the character of the enemy character is dominated by the sword sword). . It is suggested that this is unlikely to be an advantageous result.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (b3), the characters “one shot” are displayed, and the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT. It is shown that the operation has been started and the operation effective period has been set again. As described above, when the timer announcement effect is not performed when the long press effect is performed, the deca-button image 136aL is difficult to be displayed, and the button image 136a of the default display mode is easily displayed. When the long-press effect is performed and the timer advance effect is not performed, the deca-button image 136aL may not be displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (b4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (b5), the main character of the main character loses the swordsman of the enemy character. The combination of the decorative patterns of the lost 5-decoration "4" is derived to start the fluctuation. In addition, it may be a flow which may be a case where it does not go through a mini game or a timer advance notice effect, and may be a big hit.

  FIG. 58 is a view showing in stages an example of button continuous hitting effect that is applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58A, the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 58 (a), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icon h11 both have default display modes. In addition, the tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 58 (a), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and a panda character The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (a), the button continuous hit production has been started, and the explanation of "Please turn the meter into MAX by pressing the button continuous hit in time" is performed. The button image 136a is displayed together with the characters "prepared", and the operation amount meter MT11 in which five memories are arranged vertically is displayed on the left side of the display screen. In addition, at the timing shown to Fig.58 (a), it is before the reception start of continuous hitting operation of the production button 136, ie, before the start of the operation effective period, and the production button lamp 138 is also lighted in white. In this effect example, it can be said that the display of "prepare" displayed above the button image 136a corresponds to the image RDY being prepared (preparation effect display of button continuous hit effects). It should be noted that, when the button continuous hit effect is started, the decorative symbol which has been variably displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved to the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 58A is in a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 58 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (b), it is shown that the reception of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 has been started. Specifically, the character "ready" displayed above the button image 136a switches to the character "start", and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, and the operation valid period is started. And the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. In this effect example, it can be said that the button continuous hit effect (main effect) is started at the timing when the operation effective period is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (c), the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is displayed to decrease in accordance with the passage of time from the operation valid period, and on the right side of the button image 136a A countdown display with numbers is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 58C, "5" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that the time until the end of the operation effective period is 5 seconds. Since a certain advance notice effect may be performed when the countdown in the countdown display is completed, it is possible to say that the effect of the countdown display by the countdown display corresponds to the timer advance notice effect.

  FIG. 58 (d) shows that the player has started the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 58 (d), "4" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that it is four seconds until the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 58 (e), the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, one memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is red in accordance with the number of times of the continuous hitting operation. It is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 58 (e), "3" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that it will be three seconds until the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 58 (f), the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that three memories of the operation amount meter MT11 are displayed in red. It is done. At the timing shown in FIG. 58 (f), “1” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that one second is left until the operation valid period ends.

  In (g) of FIG. 58, the countdown display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L becomes “0”, and the operation valid period ends, and the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is ended. The memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is displayed in red in three modes, that is, it indicates that the button continuous hit effect has failed. Although the effect button lamp 138 is lit in red, it may be switched from red to white at the end of the operation effective period, or before the operation effective period ends. The lighting state of the effect button lamp 138 may be switched from red to white.

  If the button continuous hit production fails, "Sorry ..." is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (h), and it is notified that the button continuous hit production has failed. In addition, in this demonstration example, in a pachinko machine capable of executing a countdown indication effect other than the timer advance notice, a certain advance notice display may not include this countdown indication display.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 59 (a), a UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 59 (a), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and a first preparation-in-provision image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 59 (a). The function of the first preparing image RDY is similar to that of the preparing image RDY described above. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 59A is in the default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in this rendering example, the second preparing image RDY is displayed above the first preparing image RDY1, and a plurality of preparing images are simultaneously displayed. For the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2, corresponding effects (timer announcement effect, mini game, etc.) are performed. Note that these in-provision images (the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2) all function as pre-reading notices. In addition, the background color of all the images in preparation is green, which is the default display mode. In addition, these images in preparation may be simultaneously started to be displayed, or one may be started to be displayed after the other is started to be displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 59 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  FIG. 59 (b) shows that the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 59 (a) is ended and the next symbol variation display is started. Specifically, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is It is placed on the pedestal on which the fluctuation icon is displayed and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the holding icon that was at the display position of the second holding icon h12 becomes the first holding icon h11, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal Do. In addition, the fluctuation display of the decoration design is started. It should be noted that the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2 are continuously displayed, that is, it can be said that these preparing images are displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (c), the first preparation-in-provision image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and it is shown that the timer notice effect is started. ing. The background color of the timer notice display corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is "5:00", and it is informed that there is a possibility that a notice notice may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown starts. In this rendering example, when one of the plurality of in-provision images is activated (digested) to start rendering, all the other in-provision images are also digested. In addition, although the image in preparation is completely digested in one symbol fluctuation display, the advance notice icon may be carried over and displayed until the next and subsequent symbol fluctuation display.

  In (d) of FIG. 59, the timer display in the timer preliminary display corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 is “0:00”, and the countdown is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (e), the word "Go" is displayed in the area where the timer advance notice corresponding to the first preparing image RDY1 was displayed, and the timer advance effect related to this timer notice is displayed. It is informed that a corresponding advance notice display is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (f), the characters "Go" are erased along with the display area, and the second ready image RDY2 slides downward and moves to the position of the tutorial display section TT1. An image movement animation is being performed during preparation. In addition, the notice effect (precedence start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 is started, and the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 is shown. It is done. The ninja character NJ4 displayed here is the same as the ninja character NJ4 which may be displayed when the display mode of the holding icon is changed as shown in FIG. It may be a character. In this effect, the image moving animation in preparation may be started after the leading start previewing effect is started, or the leading start previewing effect may be started after the image moving animation in preparation is started, The in-provision image moving animation may start at the timing when the preceding start preview effect starts. The ninja character NJ4 shown in FIG. 59 (f) overlaps the second preparing image RDY2, but may overlap the second preparing image RDY2.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (g), the change-on-hold animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a thuriken toward the change icon h0 and shows how it hit the change icon h0. It is done. At this time, the whole of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect EF4, and the visual recognition state is set as compared with the state where the fluctuation icon h0 is not covered by the effect EF4.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (h), as a result of the on-hold change animation being performed, the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change advance notice is started.

  In FIG. 59 (i), after “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and it is in the reach state, transition to super reach (sword reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps a part of the second ready image RDY2. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. Further, in this example of presentation, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is not displayed.

  In FIG. 59 (j), it is shown that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the second preparing image RDY2 is maintained. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (k), it is shown that the second under-provisioning image RDY2 is switched to the timer advance notice display, and the timer advance notice effect is started. The timer notice is displayed as a gold background color, which indicates that the jackpot reliability has been improved. Further, in FIG. 59 (k), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "10:00", and it is informed that a given advance notice may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is resumed. It is done. It should be noted that the timer advance notice display is a default display mode at the start of display and may be promoted display such as changing to a golden background color after start of display (for example, after the countdown is started). It is also good.

  After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (l), the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (m), the character "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display, and a certain advance notice display is started It is informing.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (n), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided. That is, it can be said that the timer preview effect corresponding to the second preparation image RDY2 corresponds to the preview display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain preview display. In this example of presentation, after one of the plurality of images in preparation is digested, a new image in preparation is not displayed, but after one of the plurality of images in preparation is digested, new preparation is performed. A middle image may be displayed.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram showing in stages an example of effects according to the explanation display applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 60 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 46 (a), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (a2), the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 shows that “Panda is the master of the lord” is changed to “the lord is the Yatsushiro general”. . In this effect example, when switching the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1, the above-described opening and closing display by the shutter image is not performed, and the switching display between the explanation displays is performed. In this effect example, it is shown that, in the symbol variation display of one, when switching the explanation display, the switching display between the explanation display is performed without performing the open / close display by the shutter image.

  FIGS. 60 (b1) to 60 (b3) show how opening and closing display is performed by the shutter image when switching the explanation display. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 60 (b1) to FIG. 60 (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 46 (a) to (b), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (b3), the shutter image is opened before the tutorial display section TT1 by the shutter image is completely closed, and the explanation display of "donately is Yatsushiro general" is displayed. It is shown that it is being done. That is, it is shown that the open / close display by the shutter image is not a precursor display in which a preliminary display is performed, but a false precursor display. Here, the shutter image may be opened after the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. By performing such an effect, it was expected that the advance notice display would be started, but by making the player disappointing that the advance notice display was not started and the explanation display was carried out, the shutter image was opened and closed. There are times when it can be made to have expectations.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. FIGS. 61 (a1) to 61 (a3) show another example of the effect following FIG. 46 (e). Note that the effects shown in FIG. 61 (a1) to FIG. 61 (a2) are the same as the effect examples shown in FIG. 46 (f) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 61 (a3), it is shown that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed from the default display mode although the effect EF4 is erased. . In this manner, a failure effect may be performed in which the display mode does not change even if the on-hold change animation described above with reference to FIG. 46 is performed. A plurality of types of characters appearing in the hold change animation may be prepared, and the rate at which the display mode of the hold icon changes may differ depending on the characters appearing in the hold change animation.

  Although the ninja character NJ4 is displayed overlapping the UI unit UI3 in the above-mentioned change-on-hold animation, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed above the UI unit UI3 to display the UI. It may be made not to overlap the part UI3. In this case, in the on-hold change animation, the ninja character NJ4 may or may not overlap the UI unit UI3.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (a1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icon h11 both have default display modes. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 62 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and a panda character The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. In addition, in this example of an effect, a decoration symbol moves above the 2nd decoration symbol display 208M, and is displayed by reduction. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 62 (a1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 62 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a2), it is shown that a roulette effect as a mini game is started. In this roulette effect, the roulette board RR formed in a circular shape is divided into three equal parts. An area of a rose is arranged above the three sections, an area of a princess is arranged at the lower left, and an area of a small princess is arranged at the lower right. When the roulette effect is started, the variable display is performed by blinking each of the areas in red, and a notice display corresponding to the area which is finally lit in red is prepared. In addition, the symbol variation display in which the roulette effect starts and the symbol variation display in which the in-provision display and the like end may be the same or different. In addition, in the configuration in which the display indicating that the roulette effect is started is performed, the symbol fluctuation display in which the symbol display is performed may be the same as the symbol fluctuation display in which the UW display etc. is finished. It may be. According to the combination described above, the display can be referred to as a pre-reading notice display.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a3), it is shown that all areas are lit in red as a result of the variable display of the roulette effect. That is, it has been notified that the advance notice display corresponding to the wolf character, the advance notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the advance notice display corresponding to the Chibi princess character are respectively prepared.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a4), the first in-provision image RDY1 is added to the upper right portion of the first preparing image RDY1 in the tutorial display section TT1 and displayed on the upper left of the display screen Is displayed so that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the black character GII, and the tiny baby character CHM is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. That is, when a character is caused to appear, each character appears at a position corresponding to the character, and when the display of the image in preparation is accompanied, the character is displayed at the position corresponding to the character. It can be said that the appearing character itself may correspond to the image being prepared. Further, the relationship between the appearing character and the effect to be executed may be 1: 1 or 1: N (N> 1). In addition, a certain effect may be executed by digesting a plurality of characters (the relationship between the character and the effect may be N (N> 1): 1).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a5), it is shown that the character CHM of Little Princess moves upward and overlaps the lower left corner portion of the third preparation image RDY3. That is, it can be said that one notice display overlaps another notice display. As a result, it is notified that the advance notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi starts.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a6) shows an animation in which the character CHM of Princess Little is throwing an object toward the variation icon h0. Then, when the object reaches the change icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the change icon h0 is made difficult to visually recognize. That is, the notice display corresponding to the character CMH of Princess Chibi is the notice display due to the change of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a7), the effect EF7 is erased, and the fluctuation icon h0 is in a state where it is easy to visually recognize. At this time, it is shown that the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change notice by the change icon h0 is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a8), display in a mode in which the brow character GII vibrates is started. As a result, it is informed that the advance notice display corresponding to the decoy character GII is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a9), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the third in-provision image RDY3 arranged adjacent to the beard character GII is displayed. It is done. When the mini game is started, the laterally extending cylindrical drum DRM starts to rotate about the lateral direction as an axis of rotation. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a10), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol displaying the character of "superheat" is derived, suggesting that the possibility of becoming a big hit is high There is. That is, the fluctuation notice is performed by deriving the character of "super heat" to the drum DRM. It can be said that this effect is not the effect of changing the display mode of something, but the effect of giving a big hit advance notice.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a11), display in a mode in which the princess character HME vibrates is started. As a result, it is notified that the advance notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is started. Since the princess character HME is displayed so as to be overlapped on the UI unit UI3, the display of the UI unit UI3 may be noticed by the vibration display of the princess character HME.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a12), it is shown that the timer preview effect is started in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is a timer notice effect. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed, and then the countdown is started. As a result of counting down, when "0:00" is reached, a certain advance notice display is started. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 62 (a12), “30:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a13), as a result of the countdown, the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed. Then, the princess character HME ascends and moves to a position different from the first preparing image RDY1 and notifies that the advance notice display corresponding to the timer advance notice effect is started. That is, it can be said that the same effect as the display of “Go” described above and shown in FIG. 59 (m) is performed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a14), super reach transition display is performed, and a state of developing into super reach (sword reach) is shown. The notice display corresponding to the character HME of the princess corresponds to the development to the swordsman reach. Also, although not shown, the family crest 224E is raised and rotated to overlap the front side of the lower central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Moreover, in this example of presentation, the background color of the super reach transition display is set to gold, and it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is high. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed because the countdown by the timer display is completed. In addition, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is not displayed.

  In this example, all the images in preparation are digested before the development of super reach, but at least one may be digested after the development of super reach, for example, iron plate image TP is displayed A mini game to be played or timer announcement effect may be performed.

  FIG. 62 (b1) shows that, in the roulette effect described above in FIG. 62 (a2), only the area of the eyebrows of the three areas is lit in red. That is, of the notice display corresponding to the wolf character, the notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the notice display corresponding to the Chibi princess character, only the notice display corresponding to the whale character is prepared. It has been informed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (b2), the third preparation-ready image RDY3 is displayed so as to be adjacent to the indigo character GII. That is, while the whale character GII appears at a position corresponding to the whale character GII, the image under preparation that appears along with the whale character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the whale character GII. Therefore, in this effect example, only the mini game by the drum DRM is played.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  The effect shown in FIG. 63 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 62 (a3), but "x 2" is displayed in the area of Princess Chibi, and the notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed. It will be prepared twice.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a2), the first under preparation image RDY1 is added to the upper right portion of the first preparing image RDY1 in the tutorial display section TT1 and displayed on the upper left of the display screen The third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the black character GII is adjacent, and two tiny princess characters CHM1 and CHM2 are displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. In the case where a plurality of effects are prepared by the insult character GII and the princess character HME, for example, two same characters can be displayed on one in-progress image. Specifically, when a plurality of effects by the princess character HME are prepared, one first in-provision image RDY1 is displayed, and two princess characters HME can be displayed. Conversely, a single character may display a plurality of images being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a3), the character CHM1 of one of the two princess princess characters moves upward and moves to the lower left corner of the third preparation image RDY3. An overlap is shown. As a result, it is notified that the first notice display among the two notice displays corresponding to the character CHM1 of Princess Chibi starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a4), it is shown that an animation in which the character CHM1 of Princess Little is thrown toward the fluctuation icon h0 is being performed. Then, when the object reaches the change icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the change icon h0 is made difficult to visually recognize. That is, it is notified that the advance notice display by the change of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH1 of Little Princess is started.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a5), the effect EF7 is erased and the fluctuation icon h0 is in a state in which the fluctuation icon h0 is easily visible. At this time, it is shown that the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change notice by the change icon h0 is started.

  Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a6), the other little princess character CHM2 of the two little princess characters moves upward, and the lower left corner of the third preparation image RDY3 It is shown that parts overlap. As a result, it is notified that the second advance notice display corresponding to the character CHM2 of Princess Chibi is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a7), it is shown that an animation is being performed in which the character CHM2 of Princess Chibi casts an object toward the fluctuation icon h0. Then, when the object reaches the change icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the change icon h0 is made difficult to visually recognize. That is, a change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH2 of Princess Chibi is notified that the preliminary display by the fluctuation icon is ranked up.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a8), the effect EF7 is erased, and the fluctuation icon h0 is in an easily visible state. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the display mode of the red advance notice to the display mode of the gold advance notice, and it is shown that the change notice by the change icon h0 is ranked up.

  FIGS. 63 (b1) to (b4) show another example of effect following FIG. 63 (a3). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 63 (b1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 63 (a4), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (b2), after the object thrown by the character CHM1 of the baby reaches the change icon h0 and the effect EF7 is displayed, the entire display screen is turned dark. Is performed, and the portion where the effect EF 7 is displayed glows white, and a display in which light is extended in the horizontal direction from there is performed. At this time, the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY3 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are not displayed. In addition, when another mini game is started while the change display of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is being performed, the mini game is also temporarily made non-displayed due to the darkening of the display screen. You may In addition, when a plurality of images in preparation are displayed, all the images in preparation may be temporarily hidden, or only a part of images in preparation is temporarily hidden. You may Thus, the state in which the dark display BL is displayed may be referred to as a fourth state. Then, in this presentation example, the first state in which the hold icon is displayed with the UI unit UI3 and the second state in which the hold icon is not displayed with the UI unit UI3 is the first state. The state may be changed to the fourth state, and the first state may be changed to the second state, or the first state may be changed to the second state. The first state may be changed to the fourth state, and then the second state may be set.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (b3), it is shown that the light of the portion where the effect EF7 was displayed is enlarged and displayed.

  After that, when the dark display is finished, as shown in FIG. 63 (b4), the fluctuation icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the effect is resumed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 63 (b4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 63 (a5), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 63 (c1) to FIG. 63 (c3) show another example of effect following FIG. 62 (a6). Since the effect shown in FIG. 63 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 62 (a7), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (c2), the display in a mode in which the indigo character GII vibrates is started, and in the area where the third preparation image RDY3 is displayed, “Go” is displayed. The characters are displayed to notify that the mini game is to be started. Note that the display of “Go” may be started after the キ ャ ラ ク タ character GII starts to vibrate, or the G character GII may start to vibrate after the display of “Go” is started, The display of “Go” may be started at the timing when the scarlet character GII starts to vibrate. As a result, it is informed that the advance notice display corresponding to the decoy character GII is started.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (c3) shows that the mini game is being started in the area where the third in-provision image RDY3 arranged adjacent to the beard character GII is displayed. It is done. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the area where the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed is enlarged and moved to approximately the center of the display screen, and the effect by the rotation of the drum DRM is started. That is, in this example of effect, it is shown that the area in which the mini game is performed is performed in an area different from the area in which the image under preparation is displayed. It should be noted that the case where the mini game is started after the "Go" display is made may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the mini game is started without the "Go" display. . In addition, the case where the mini game is enlarged may be more likely to be a big hit if the mini game is not enlarged and displayed. It should be noted that the display from the display of the image under preparation to the start of the mini game, timer advance notice effect, etc. may also be performed in another area. When the third display and a certain advance display (a certain effect) are performed in the same area, the places where the first display and the second display are performed are different, so the display of the third display system is easier to understand There is a case to play the effect.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. Here, the display device (display device 1) on which the effect display on the left side is performed and the display device (display device 2) on which the effect display on the right side is performed may be different display devices. In that case, a third display (some notice display) may be made on the display device 2 in some cases.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (a), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 64A, one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, so that one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice of the fluctuation notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the in-provision image RDY is displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 64 (a). In addition, in this example of an effect, a decoration symbol moves above the 2nd decoration symbol display 208M, and is displayed by reduction. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 64A is in the default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 64 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits light in red in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (b), a multi-chance up notice is started. When the multi-chance up notice is started, the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is divided into two on the left and right, and the left notice display area CUL and the right notice display area CUR are formed. In the left-hand notice display area CUL, the display of “Chibi princess is participating in SP reach participation in annihilation” is performed, and the Chibi princess has a mission of having Chibi princess to annihilate a large number of minions performed, and the right notice In the display area CUR, a display of "To win the victory in SP reach participation" is performed, and drinking comparison is performed between the coffin and the coffin, and the comparision of drinking is performed with a mission that the cowards win the drinking comparison. In this production example, the construction is such that transition to super reach is achieved when at least one of the mission in the Chibi Princess Musou rendering and the mission in the drinking and the rendering is achieved, and the reliability increases when both missions are achieved. It is done. It should be noted that after the Chibi princess musou rendition is started, the drinking and comparing performance may be started, or after the drinking comparison rendition is started, the Chibi princess and musk reversion may be started, and both of the renditions are started at the same time It may be done. Further, in this example of production, if at least one of the mission in the Chibi-Himeka Musou effect and the mission in the performance compared to the drink is achieved, it may be made a big hit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (c), it is shown that the mini game is started in the tutorial display area TT1 during execution of both the Chibi princess insane effect and the drink comparison effect. There is. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The strategic TGT is composed of four divided areas, and the upper one of the four areas is the hit area, and an arrow hitting the hit area gives a chance to announce a chance up It is supposed to be The number of hit regions is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit regions, or all regions may be hit regions, or all regions may be non-hit regions.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (d), it is shown that the arrow thrown by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. That is, it is shown that the mini game as the advance notice has succeeded.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI in which the character of "chance" is displayed in the left notice display area CUL in which Chibi Princess Musou rendition is performed is displayed Thus, it is reported that the mission in the little princess princess musou rendition corresponding to the area where the chance up cut-in image WCI is displayed is facilitated to be achieved. As described above, in this effect example, the area where the image RDY being displayed is displayed does not match the area where the advance display is performed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable and improve interest. . The chance-up cut-in image WCI may be displayed in the right notice display area CUR in which the effects are compared compared to drinking, or the chance is raised in both the left notice display area CUL and the right notice display area CUR. The cut-in image WUI may be displayed. The tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed because the mini game has ended.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (f), it is shown that a child is completely eliminated and a mission is achieved in the little princess princess musou rendition displayed in the left advance notice display area CUL.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (g), the letter “Annihilation” is displayed in the left notice display area CUL together with the indication of Princess Chibi up, and the mission in the Chibi Princess incomparable effect is achieved Is reported. In the right advance notice display area CUR, effects are continued compared to drinking.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (h), it is shown that the master has won the eyebrows and the mission has been achieved in the compared effect displayed on the right advance notice display area CUR.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (i), the character of "winning" is displayed together with the display of up in the window in the right notice display area CUR, and it is informed that the mission in the drinking comparison effect is achieved. It is done.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (j), it is shown that the sword strike is started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In this example, since the mission in the drink comparison production is achieved, the swordsman reach is started, and since the mission in the Chibi princess musou rendition is achieved, the Chibi princess has appeared as a friend of the lord. In addition, if the mission in the comparition to drink is achieved and the mission in Chibi princess musou rendition fails, it will shift to swordsman reach, but the chibi princess will not appear, the mission in chibi princess musou rendition will be achieved and the comparition will be compared If you fail in the mission in, transition to Super reach for Chibi princess. That is, in this rendition, the contents of rendition to be developed thereafter differ depending on the success or failure of each of the two missions.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (k), the cut-in image HCI of the princess, in which the characters "chance" and the princess character are displayed, is displayed on the background of the horizontal stripes. As a result, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is improved, but it is not the high reliability, not the notice display started from the mini game started from the image RDY under preparation or the timer notice effect. ing.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect shown in FIG. In addition, since the rendition shown to Fig.65 (a)-the same figure (b) is the same as the rendition shown to Fig.64 (a)-the same figure (b), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (c), a state is shown in which both the Chibi Princess Musou rendition and the drink compared to the rendition are performed. In this presentation example, the display of the image RDY being prepared continues, and the mini game has not been started yet. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the advance notice display corresponding to the image in preparation RDY is not started before the transition to the super reach. This effect continues from FIG. 65 (c) to FIG. 65 (e). In FIG. 65 (e), the chance up cut-in image WCI corresponding to the success of the mini game is not displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 65 (f) to FIG. 65 (j) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 65 (f) to FIG. 65 (j) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 64 (f) to FIG. 64 (j) in that the image RDY in preparation is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. The description is omitted because it is the same except for the above.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (k), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, the display of the image RDY being prepared ends, and the notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared It is notified that it is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (l), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the image under preparation RDY is displayed. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The strategic TGT is composed of four divided areas, and the upper one of the four areas is the hit area, and an arrow hitting the hit area gives a chance to announce a chance up It is supposed to be The number of hit regions is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit regions, or all regions may be hit regions, or all regions may be non-hit regions.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (m), it is shown that an arrow released by the mini character MC1 of the lord is stuck in the area around the target TGT. That is, it is shown that the mini game as the advance notice has succeeded.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (n), an iron plate image TP is displayed. This iron plate image TP is a notice display to notify that the big hit is confirmed. Thus, in this example, the mini game is started after the transition to the super reach, and the reliability is higher than the case where the mini game is started and the corresponding notice is displayed before the transition to the super reach. There is a high advance notice.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram gradually showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 66 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 62 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (a2), the message "reach when caught" is displayed, and it is shown that chasing effects are started, which is based on the mission of the lady to catch Echigoya. There is. When chase effect is started, sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and display related to the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 66 (a1) (main display) Is displayed. As described above, in this rendering example, it may be possible to grasp the situation of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain rendering is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (a3), a state is shown in which the lord has reduced the distance to Echigoya. On the other hand, in the subwindow WP3, the main display is continuously performed.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (a4) shows that the lord has caught Echigoya and the mission has been achieved. Thereby, it is notified that it will be reach. At this time, the in-preparation image RDY may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 to indicate that preparation for the reach occurrence is in progress. As a result, the player may be able to easily recognize that the reach as the advance notice is generated by stocking the advance notice corresponding to the result of the mission (mini game).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (a5), the chase effect is ended, and the main display displayed in the subwindow WP3 is displayed again on the entire display screen, and then the "decor 4" is reached The situation is shown. In this presentation example, it is shown that the reach has occurred due to the success of the mission in the chase presentation. When the main display is displayed on the full screen, the sub window WP3 may be enlarged (wipe display) or switched. Further, when the main display is full screen display, the image RDY being prepared may be displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  FIGS. 66 (b1) to 66 (b2) show another example of effect on the display of the sub-window during the execution of the chase effect shown in FIGS. 66 (a1) to 66 (a5).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (b1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of default. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and a first preparation-in-progress image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 66 (b1). In the upper left portion of the display screen, a third preparing image RDY3 is displayed. In addition, in this example of an effect, a decoration symbol moves above the 2nd decoration symbol display 208M, and is displayed by reduction. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 66 (b1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 64 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits light in red in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (b2), the chase effect described above is started. When chase effect is started, sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and display related to the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 66 (b1) (main display) Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two ready images RDY1 and RDY3 in the sub window WP3, only the first ready image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed in the sub window WP3 and the third ready image RDY3. Is not displayed in the subwindow WP3. As described above, even in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the situation of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain effect (chase effect) is performed. Although the subwindow WP3 and the image being prepared are displayed at positions not overlapping in this example, the image being prepared may overlap the subwindow WP3 and the image being prepared may overlap the subwindow WP3. It may be made to overlap.

  FIGS. 66 (c1) to (c2) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 66 (b1) to (b2). Since the effect shown in FIG. 66 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 66 (b1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (c2), the chase effect described above is started. When chase effect is started, sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and display related to the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 66 (c1) (main display) Is displayed. In this example, the third preparing image RDY3 of the first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 is continuously displayed without changing the display position, but the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed only in the sub window WP3 as the main display is displayed in the sub window WP3, and the first in-provision image RDY1 displayed in the position displayed so far is erased.

  FIG. 66 (d1) to FIG. 66 (d2) show display modes of the image in preparation when the background display is displayed in an inclined manner. In addition, since the example of an effect shown to FIG. 66 (d1) is the same as the example of an effect shown to Fig. 64 (a), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (d2), the background display is reduced to about 3⁄4 and shake vision effect is performed such that the reduced background image is inclined about 10 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Is shown. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared is not inclined along with the background display.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing in stages an example of step-up notice effects applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 67 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 62 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a2), the first step-up display unit SUA is uplifted from below the UI unit UI3, and a state in which the UI unit UI3 is lifted is shown. There is. Specifically, the first step-up display unit SUA has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter "A" indicating that it is the first step of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side. , A mini game display area for playing a mini game as a step-up notice is formed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a3), it is shown that a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the mini game is started, a message of "strike" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing that the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed. That is, this mini game is a bowling chance game whose mission is to take strikes in the bowling game.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a4), a state is shown in which a character like a tombstone throws a bowling ball and travels toward ten pins arranged in a pyramid.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a5), it is shown that the bowling ball collides with the pins, all ten pins fall and strike, and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a6), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and it is informed that the corresponding mini game or timer advance notice is started. . Note that the in-provision image RDY has a green background color and is a default display mode.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and is framed out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

  FIGS. 67 (b1) to (b8) illustrate another example of effect of the step-up notice. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 67 (b1) to FIG. 67 (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 67 (a1) to (a2), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b3), the second step-up display unit SUB is lifted from below the first step-up display unit SUA, and lifts the UI unit UI3 and the first step-up display unit SUA. It is shown that it is displayed in the same way. Specifically, the second step-up display unit SUB also has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter "B" indicating that it is the second step of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side. , A mini game display area for playing a mini game as a step-up notice is formed. In this presentation example, the mission is more likely to be successful if the mini game is played on the second step-up display unit SUB than on the mini game played on the first step-up display unit SUA. In addition, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed in the case where the mini game is successful in the second step up display unit SUB than when the mini game is successful in the first step up display unit SUA.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b4), it is shown that a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the mini game is started, in the mini game display area, a message of "CUP IN" is displayed, and a display showing how the character of the lord is putting is performed. That is, this mini game is a golf game whose mission is to cup in with a putt.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b5), it is shown that the character of the lord put on and the golf ball moves toward the cup.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b6), it is shown that the golf ball is cupped in and the mission is achieved.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b7), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and it is informed that the corresponding mini game or timer announcement effect is started . It should be noted that the image under preparation RDY has a red background color and is notified that the jackpot reliability is high.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b8), the first step-up display unit SUA and the second step-up display unit SUB move downward and frame out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

  In this example, although the bowling chance game and the golf game have been described as being successful, for example, in the bowling chance game, a message indicating that the pins did not fall down is displayed to notify of a mission failure. Alternatively, in the golf game, a message indicating that the player did not cup in may be displayed to notify of a mission failure. Also, in this example, the character of the lord appeared in the bowling chance game and the golf game, but another character may appear. For example, when the character of the princess appears, the character of the lord appeared It may indicate that the jackpot reliability is higher than in the case.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. Since the effect shown in FIG. 68 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 67 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a2), the first step-up display unit SUA is uplifted from below the UI unit UI3, and a state in which the UI unit UI3 is lifted up is shown. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 are deleted. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, something in the UI unit UI3 is not displayed. The explanation display may be deleted after the display of the first step-up display unit SUA starts, or the display of the first step-up display unit SUA may be started after the explanation display is deleted. The explanation display may be erased at the timing when the one-step up display unit SUA starts display. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 68 (a3) to FIG. 68 (a5) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 68 (a3) to (a5) are the effects shown in FIGS. 67 (a3) to (a5) and the instruction display is not performed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and The same is true except that the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed, so the description will be omitted.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a6) continues to show that the mission has been achieved.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and is framed out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position. The explanation display and the change icon h0 remain non-display.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a8), it is shown that the fluctuation icon h0 is redisplayed in a red display mode. That is, it is shown that the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the fluctuation advance notice and is redisplayed. Alternatively, the in-preparation image RDY may be displayed before the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes and is redisplayed, and a mini game, timer advance notice effect, or the like may be made.

  FIGS. 68 (b1) to 68 (b3) show another display mode of the step-up notice effect. The effect shown in FIG. 68 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 68 (a1), but differs in that four pedestals in the hold icon display area are not displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (b2), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed as if the UI unit UI3 is lifted. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 are deleted. Further, in this effect example, the display position is not changed despite the movement of the hold icon h11 to the upper side of the UI unit UI3, and therefore, it overlaps the mini game display area of the first step-up display unit SUA. Is shown. That is, it can be said that when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, a state in which a certain display (pending icon h11) is not moved is shown even if the UI unit UI3 is moved.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L of FIG. 68 (b3), it is shown that the bowling chance game is started in the mini game display area. As described above, since the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini game display area, a part of the character display of "strike" is hidden. That is, it can be said that a part of the mini game is hidden by the hold icon h11.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69A, the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 69A, one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, so that one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice of the fluctuation notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and is not displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 69 (a). The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 69 (a) is a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (a), transition to super reach (sword reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 69 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  The family crest 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  FIG. 69 (b) shows that the family crest 224E has returned to its initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69C, it is shown that an animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit UI3 is framed out below the display screen is started. When the UI unit FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is erased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (d) to FIG. 69 (f), the UI unit UI3 performs frame out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is not framed out with the UI unit UI3, and the display state is maintained with the display position lowered, as shown in FIG. 69 (f).

  FIG. 69 (g) shows that the sword strike is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (h), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA is uplifted and displayed so as to lift the fluctuation icon h0. That is, in this presentation example, since the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the change icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the change icon h0 is moved. Can.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (i), it is shown that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, a message of "strike" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display indicating that the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (j), a state is shown in which a character like a tombstone throws a bowling ball and travels toward ten pins arranged in a pyramid.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (k), it is shown that the bowling ball collides with the pins, all ten pins fall and strike, and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (l), the in-preparation image RDY appears in the lower right corner of the display screen, and it is informed that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started Be done. Note that the in-provision image RDY has a green background color and is a default display mode. Further, FIG. 69 (l) shows that the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and is framed out. At this time, the image under preparation RDY is overlapped with the first step-up display unit SUA, and as shown in FIG. 69 (m), at least one of the first step-up display unit SUA is completed until the frame out is completed. It is considered that the department is difficult to see.

  FIG. 70 shows, in a step-by-step manner, another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (a1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of default. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and a first preparation-in-provision image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 70 (a1). In the first preparation image RDY1, the background color is green, which is the default display mode. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 70 (a1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a1), a state of transition to super reach (sword reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. In this rendering example, an example is shown in which the first preparing image RDY1 is already displayed when shifting to the super reach.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 70 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  The family crest 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  FIG. 70 (a2) shows that the family crest 224E has returned to its initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a3), it is shown that an animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit UI3 is framed out below the display screen is started. When the UI unit FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is erased.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (a4) to FIG. 70 (a6), the UI unit UI3 performs frame out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 and the first preparing image RDY1 are not framed out together with the UI unit UI3, and as shown in FIG. 70 (a6), the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed with its display position lowered. As for the first preparing image RDY 1, the display state is maintained without changing the display position.

  FIG. 70 (a7) shows that the sword strike is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a8), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA is uplifted and displayed so as to lift the fluctuation icon h0. That is, in this presentation example, since the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the change icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the change icon h0 is moved. Can. Further, the first preparation image RDY1 is displayed overlapping the first step-up display SUA without changing the display position. The first preparation image RDY1 may be overlapped with the first step-up display SUA. The first step-up display unit SUA may be moved up, and the first preparation image RDY1 may also be moved upward.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a9) shows that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, a message of "strike" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display indicating that the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed. However, the mini game display area of the first step-up display SUA is overlapped with the first preparing image RDY 1 and is considered to be more difficult to view than in the non-overlapped state. The same applies to the following effects.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a10), a state is shown in which a character like a tombstone throws a bowling ball and travels toward ten pins arranged in a pyramid.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a11), it is shown that the bowling ball collides with the pins, all ten pins fall and strike, and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a12), the third preparing image RDY3 appears in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the corresponding mini game or timer advance notice is started. Is notified. That is, when a new in-progress image is displayed when a certain number of in-provision images are displayed in a certain area, the new in-progress image is displayed in another area. Can. The third in-provision image RDY3 has a green background color, which is a default display mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 70 (a12) to FIG. 70 (a13), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and out of the frame.

  FIGS. 70 (b1) to 70 (b2) are diagrams showing another display mode of the UI unit FO animation. FIG. 70 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 70 (a3). Moreover, since the effects shown in FIG. 66 (b1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 70 (a4), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (b2), it is shown that the sword strike is started after the UI unit FO animation is completed. In this presentation example, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, but it is shown that only the pedestal on which the fluctuation icon h0 is placed is maintained in a mode in which the display position is lowered. That is, it is shown that even when the UI unit UI3 is out of frame, a part of the UI unit UI3 is displayed.

  FIG. 71 is a view showing in stages an example of the pseudo-simulation effect that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the in-provision image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 71 (a1). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 71 (a1) is in the default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 64 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a2), the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, “decoration 6” in the left symbol and “decoration 7” in the right symbol. It is shown that the display is stopped. In addition, the middle symbol is in the display of variation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a3), the variation speed of the middle symbol is low, and it is shown that the pseudo-connected symbol composed of the pattern of the lord is scrolled in from above the display screen ing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a4), a state is shown in which the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a5), a pseudo run symbol stop animation for producing whether or not to start a pseudo run is started. When the pseudo continuous symbol stop animation is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, leaving the variation icon h0 and the image RDY being prepared. Here, the UI unit FO animation may be started after the pseudo run symbol stop animation is started, or the pseudo run symbol stop animation may be started after the UI unit FO animation is started, or the pseudo run symbol The UI unit FO animation may be started at the timing when the stop animation starts. In addition, the pseudo continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI unit FO animation is completed. As described above, in this example of rendering, the UI unit UI3 is shown as non-displayed in a certain state such as when performing pseudo rendering rendition or when pseudo rendering is established. When the pseudo run symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo run symbol expands in the lateral direction as shown in FIG. 71 (a5) to FIG. 71 (a7).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a6), the pseudo run symbol is further expanded and overlaps the left symbol and the right symbol, and the left symbol and the right symbol are hard to be recognized visually. ing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a7), the pseudo run symbol is further expanded, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is displayed over. At this time, the pseudo run pattern is also expanded in the vertical direction, and a part of the dummy run pattern is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared. In addition, the pseudo run pattern is overlapped also with stage name indicator ST1 which is indicated in 2nd decoration symbol display device 208M, acceptance frequency indication 850 and stock button picture 852, furthermore, 3rd decoration symbol display device It is also overlapped with the character of the lady displayed on 208N and the second number of reservations display. Also, at this time, the family crest 224E starts to rise, and overlaps a part of the pseudo-series symbols.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (a8), the family crest 224E rotates, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound of "Don", and it is informed that the pseudo-link will be performed.

  FIG. 71 (a9) shows that the pseudo run symbol stop animation is finished and the pseudo run symbol is displayed in the original display mode, and that the UI unit UI3 is frame-in with frame in animation (UI unit FI animation). It is done. Note that the UI unit FI animation may be started after the pseudo run symbol stop animation ends, or the UI unit FI animation may be started before the pseudo run symbol stop animation ends, or the pseudo run symbol stop The UI unit FI animation may be started at the timing when the animation ends. In addition, as for the decorative design, it is temporary stop state due to shaking fluctuation with the combination of the decorative design of “decoration 6-pseudo consecutive design-decoration 7”, after that, fluctuation indication of the decoration design of the second time by the pseudo ream is started Ru.

  FIGS. 71 (b1) to 71 (b3) show examples of display before and after the stage change effect performed at the time of mode transition or stage change. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 71 (b1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 71 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 71 (b2), the stage effect is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N perform dark display respectively, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. It is shown that the approximate center glows and the light rays extend from there in the left and right direction. At this time, the light beam is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this rendering example, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is not displayed at the time of dark display by the stage rendering. Further, in this example of rendering, it is also shown that the image RDY being prepared is not displayed at the time of dark display by the stage rendering. In addition, during the dark display, the image RDY being prepared may be ended, and a mini game or timer announcement effect may be started.

  FIG. 71 (b3) shows that the stage change effect has ended. In this effect example, after the completion of the stephen effect, the same display as that before the start of the stephen effect is performed. That is, it is shown that it is a false stephen effect that neither mode transition nor stage change is performed.

  FIG. 72 shows, in stages, an example of button preview effects that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 72 (a), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 72A, one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, so that one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice of the fluctuation notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and is not displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 72 (a). Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 72 (a) is set as a notice display mode displayed in gold. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 72 (a), it is shown that the sword strike is started. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". In this rendering example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed even during execution of a sword strike.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, all of the stage name display section ST1, the acceptance count display 850, and the stock button image 852 are erased, and the background display is also the background display of the sword reach.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed in the upper part of the display screen, but the character of the lord is not displayed. In addition, the background display is also considered to be the background display of Ken-Age reach.

  The family crest 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 72 (b), united animation is started, and a pair of translucent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the display screen, Are moving. Note that while the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect button 136 has not been received yet.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 72 (c), a state immediately before the pairing of semitransparent button images 136q is close and the merging is completed is shown. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 72 (c), when the pair of translucent button images 136q approaches, at least a part of the pair of translucent button images 136q overlaps with the effect EF6, and this is more than the state where they do not overlap. The translucent button image 136 q is difficult to view. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful. Further, FIG. 72 (c) shows that the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. Note that the effect EF6 may be displayed after the UI unit UI3 is framed out, the effect EF6 may be displayed before the UI unit UI3 is framed out, or the effect is performed at the timing when the UI unit UI3 is framed out. EF6 may be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 72 (d), the united animation is successful, the deca-button image 136aL is materialized and the button advance announcement is started, and the remaining time meter MT is also displayed, and the operation acceptance state is It is shown that it was started. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is not displayed at least during a period in which a button advance notice effect by the button image 136a (decay button image 136aL) is being performed.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing in stages an example of effects that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 73 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. In addition, the tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 73 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and a panda character The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a1), the first special view display device 212 displays stop with the lost symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L causes the loss of "department 3-decoration 5-decoration 6". The stop display is displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols. Also, the special figure 1 fourth pattern 284a1 is also lit in the display mode of losing. Note that the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 71 (a1) is in the advance notice display mode displayed in red.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 64 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In FIG. 73 (a2), the situation during stop display of the symbol is continuously shown. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is deleted in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 73 (a3) displays the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 covering the entire UI portion UI3. The character of the lord who got on the motorcycle is framed in from the left side of the UI wipe display portion WP4, and as shown in FIG. 73 (a3) to FIG. . That is, in this effect example, in order to return the display mode of the UI unit UI3 from the advance notice display mode to the default display mode, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is displayed, and effect display is performed by the UI unit wipe display unit WP4. There are cases where it is possible to naturally change the display mode in the UI unit UI3. Note that, for example, when returning to the original display due to a super reach effect, the entire display screen may be covered by the wipe display unit, and the effect display may be performed by the wipe display unit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 73 (a6), a state is shown in which the effect by the character of the lady in the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 is finished and the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 is erased. When the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is erased and the UI unit UI3 is displayed, the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and the change icon is displayed. The hold icon that has been h0 and the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In the tutorial display section TT1, a display of "Tomonashi is a general Yatsushiro" is performed, and the explanation display changes before and after the display of the UI section wipe display section WP4.

  In the example of the effect, the display of the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 may not be performed or may be performed in the state where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. If the display of the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is performed while the preparing image RDY is displayed, the preparing image RDY is not displayed during that time, and as a result, the displaying of the preparing image RDY is performed. The game may be ended and a mini game or timer announcement effect may be started.

  FIG. 73 (b1) to FIG. 73 (b4) show an example of display on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 73 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 73 (b1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in gold and is the display mode of the fluctuation advance notice, but the hold icon h11 is the default display mode. The family crest 224E also emits light in gold in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and is not displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 73 (b1). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Note that the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 73 (b1) is in the default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 73 (b1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 73 (b2) to FIG. 73 (b4), in the tutorial display section TT1, the character of the swordsman scrolls in from below and moves the line of sight continuously from the top of the head to the foot It is shown that the character of the swordsman is scrolled by. Also, as shown in FIG. 73 (b4), after the foot of the sword character is displayed, the sword character is scrolled in such a manner that the line of sight moves continuously from the foot to the top of the head. That is, the continuous scroll display between the top and the foot of the sword character is displayed in a reciprocating manner. In this effect example, an example of displaying the entire character by displaying a part of the character while continuously scrolling on the tutorial display unit TT1 is shown.

  In this effect example, for example, in a state in which the explanation display is not resumed or in a state in which only the hold icon is hidden (a state in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed), a certain display is performed using a certain portion of the UI unit UI3. It can be said that an example to do is shown.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the effects that can be applied to the present embodiment. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 to which the effect example shown in FIG. 74 can be applied can be divided into, for example, the first special view starting opening and the second special view starting opening per one starting opening, and the symbol in the normal gaming state There is a so-called MAX8 machine (sometimes referred to as an eight-in-one machine) that can hold eight variable displays. Here, the MAX8 machine will be described as an example.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 74 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and on the left side of the variation icon h0, a reserve icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged in a staggered arrangement and four pedestals are formed in a staggered arrangement so that eight reserve icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 74 (a1), a total of seven variable displays of Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 are held, so seven holding icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the holding icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h7 are all in the default display mode. Further, on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 74 (a1), "Panda is the master of the temple" is displayed and the explanation display is It is In addition, in this example of an effect, a decoration symbol moves above the 2nd decoration symbol display 208M, and is displayed by reduction. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 74 (a1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 74 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. According to the second number-of-holds display, at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (a1), four special figures 1 are reserved and it is reported that three special figures 2 are reserved.

  Further, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  FIG. 74 (a2) shows that the game ball has won a prize in the second special view starting opening and the number of reservations of special views 1 and 2 has reached eight in total. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed, the first hold icon h1 to 7th hold icon h7 and the fluctuation icon h0 which are already displayed are displayed. It is shown that the display mode of is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the eyelid that imitates the face of the eyelid. The UI unit UI3 also changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "pong" to notify that the hold is full. In this effect example, the UI unit UI3 and the effect example in which the change icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 are simultaneously changed are shown when the hold is full. In this presentation example, the number of symbol variation displays corresponding to the hold icon in which the display mode of the eyebrows is displayed may be notified.

  FIG. 74 (b1) shows that the sword strike is being performed. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 74 (b1), the second holding number display is displayed, and according to the second holding number display, the special figure 1 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (b1) Four are reserved, and it is notified that three special figures 2 are reserved.

  FIG. 74 (b2) shows that the game ball has won a prize at the second special view starting opening and the number of reservations of special views 1 and 2 has reached eight in total. Specifically, in the second number-of-holds display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is notified that four special views 1 are suspended and four special views 2 are suspended, and the speaker 120 Then, a voice "pong" is output to notify that the hold is full.

  In FIG. 74 (b3), it is shown that the game is lost in the super reach, and the presentation of the sword strike is finished and the display of the castle town stage is returned. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the reach by the sword is finished and the stage is returned to the castle town stage, a combination of the decorative symbols of the "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4" is displayed and shaken. Display of temporary stop by change is performed. In addition, since the display is full during execution of the sword strike, the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and all of the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 Changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the eyebrows. In this rendering example, when the display is full while the UI unit UI3 is hidden due to the super reach, when the UI unit UI3 is redisplayed, the UI unit UI3, the change icon, and the hold icon are displayed. It is shown about the example of presentation which changes a display mode.

  FIG. 74 (c1) to FIG. 74 (c4) are diagrams for explaining another aspect of the effect example shown in FIG. 74 (b1) to FIG. 74 (b3). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 74 (c1) to FIG. 74 (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 74 (b1) to FIG. 74 (b2), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 74 (c3) shows a state in which the super reach has become a loss, and the production of the sword strike has ended and the display of the castle town stage has returned. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the reach by the sword is finished and the stage is returned to the castle town stage, a combination of the decorative symbols of the "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4" is displayed and shaken. Display of temporary stop by change is performed. Also, in this example of rendering, the game was full during execution of the Swordsman reach effect, but the display mode of the UI unit UI3, the variation icon h0 and the suspension icons h1 to h8 is not changed, and the full suspension is achieved. The letter "MAX" indicating that the change is made is displayed at the top of the variation icon h0. Thereafter, the symbol is fixedly displayed in a state where the display mode of the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 does not change.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 74 (c4), the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold and changes All of the icons h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 change from the default display mode to the display mode of the eyebrows. Thereafter, the hold icons h1 to h8 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h1 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and becomes the change icon h0. The hold icons at the display positions of the second hold icon h2 to the eighth hold icon h8 become the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7, respectively, and move onto the corresponding pedestals. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 74 (c4), variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed and an explanatory display is performed.

  FIG. 75 is a view showing in stages the other example of the effects that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  75 (a1)-(A3) and 75 (b1)-(b2), the UI unit UI4 has a variable icon display area, a reserved icon display area, a tutorial display area TT4, and a stage name. The display unit ST2 is displayed integrally with the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, also in this demonstration example, when it becomes super reach, the UI unit is configured to frame out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but even if it becomes super reach, display is performed without frame out. You may leave it alone. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 or the stage name display section ST2 is erased. Further, in this presentation example, the image in preparation can be displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 or the stage name display section ST2.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit UI4 surrounded by a rectangular frame is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. A reserved icon display area is formed at the center of the UI unit UI4 shown in FIG. 75 (a1). The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the upper center of the UI unit UI4, and variation icons are displayed in a mode of being placed on a frame configured by the UI unit UI4. At the timing shown in FIG. 75 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the two suspension icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT4 as an explanation display unit is disposed on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display unit ST2 is disposed on the left side of the hold icon display area. The functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 75 (a1), "Preliminary icon digestion ..." is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, "Jojo town stage" is displayed, It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of Toku 1 and Toku 2 is also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224F and a general role item 224Fb is arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 75 (a2), a state is shown in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 is switched to the first preparing image RDY1. The first preparation image RDY1 has a green background color and is a default display mode.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 75 (a3), it is shown that the display of the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 is switched to the fourth preparation image RDY4. The fourth preparation image RDY 4 has a green background color and is a default display mode. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the image under preparation is displayed in each of the plurality of explanatory display parts.

  FIG. 75 (b1) to FIG. 75 (b2) are diagrams showing another rendering example following FIG. 75 (a1). Since the effect shown in FIG. 75 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 75 (a2), the description is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 75 (b2), the fourth preparation image RDY4 is displayed on the display frame of the stage name display unit ST2 while the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 is continuously displayed. It is shown that the image is displayed at a position shifted upward more than that. That is, it is shown that the image in preparation overlaps with a part of the area where the explanation display is displayed. It is also possible to apply such a display mode in the tutorial display unit TT4.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon TT3 as a third tutorial display unit (explanation display unit) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with the eyelid character GY1. ing. The whistle character GY1 and the balloon unit TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversational effect (or speech effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, and the like are performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 75 (c1), in response to the speech display by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi, the speech display of "here" is made on the balloon part TT3, and the conversational announcement continues. Here, the brow character GY1 and the blowout portion TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative pattern, but the brow character GY1 and the blowout portion TT3 may overlap with the first decorative pattern. In addition, the brow character GY1 and the blowout part TT3 may be arranged at a position not overlapping the first decorative pattern. Also, the spider character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, or the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed after the spider character GY1 is displayed, or the balloon portion TT3 is displayed. The brow character GY1 may be displayed later. Further, the conversation notice by the character CH1 of the princess of the little princess and the character GY1 of the beard may be performed by operating the effect button 136. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed. Note that the timing at which the tutorial display unit TT1 becomes non-display may be the timing after the crow character GY1 is displayed, or the timing before the crow character GY1 is displayed It is also good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased may be the same timing as the timing at which the decoy character GY1 is displayed. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case. Also, a plurality of arrows are displayed so as to pierce the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (c2), it is shown that the family crest 224E ascends from the initial position and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. More specifically, after moving, the family crest 224E completely covers the holding display frame FL1 and moves a part of the first holding icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and one part of the balloon part TT2. It covers each part.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (c3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, extended animation (extended animation) of the reserved display frame FL1 is performed, and the reserved display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and a family crest item 224E It is shown that it has appeared above than. That is, it can be said that a portion where the pending display frame FL1 is not overlapped with the family crest 224E appears. Further, although the suspension display frame FL1 after expansion overlaps with the blowout part TT2 and overlaps with the blowout part TT2, it does not overlap with the blowout part TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this example of presentation, there may be cases where the speech display preview (the blowout part TT3) displayed later does not overlap even if the holding display frame FL1 is expanded. Thus, the display mode of the hold display frame FL1 after expansion may be referred to as an expansion display mode. In this example of presentation, although the figure of reservation display frame FL1 before expansion and reservation display frame FL1 after expansion is expressed, that by which expansion display frame FL1 expands in a step-by-step manner is included in extended animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (c4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the appearance of the character NJ1 of the ninja is shown in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. It should be noted that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest 224E, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the part c is not overlapped with the family crest 224E.

  FIG. 75 (c5) shows how the family crest 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, the part of the ninja character NJ1 which is not overlapped with the family crest 224E is enlarged, and is easy to view. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, FIG. 75 (c6) shows that the family crest 224E is returned to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the tutorial display area TT1, and the display of the effect EF2 in which a part of the tutorial display area TT1 explodes is performed. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. As a result, in some cases, it may be possible for the player to have an expectation that the tutorial display section TT1 performs preliminary display and the reliability to the big hit may become high.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 75 (c7), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and it is informed that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started . The image under preparation RDY has a green background color and is considered to be the default display mode. In this effect, in place of the image RDY being prepared, the timer advance notice may be displayed and the timer advance notice may be started, the mini game may be started, or the advance notice may be displayed. .

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of the extension effect of the hold display frame in stages.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 76 (a1), the UI unit UI2 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the UI unit UI2 in this effect example, a reserved icon display area is formed on the left side. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, which respectively constitute a hold display frame, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 76 (a1), four pending icons are accommodated in each frame in the pending icon display area, and the second of the first pending icon h11 to the fourth pending icon h14 is displayed. The hold icon h12 is a display mode (for example, a display mode lit in blue) of the prefetch notice, and the other hold icons are set as the default display mode. Further, a variation icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is accommodated, and during the symbol variation display, the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area. Here, the area where the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed may be included in the UI unit UI2. Further, a tutorial display unit TT7 is disposed on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 76 (a1), the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT7. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, neither the fluctuation icon h0 nor the first holding icon h11 to the fourth holding icon h14 overlap the decorative symbol.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper part of the display screen. In this example of presentation, none of the stage name display section ST1, the acceptance count display 850, and the stock button image 852 are displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed in the upper part of the display screen, but the character of the lord is not displayed. In addition, the background display is also considered to be the background display of Ken-Age reach.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general officer item 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done. At the timing shown in FIG. 76 (a1), the family crest 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 76 (a2), a state in which the holding icon display area is enlarged and displayed is shown. The enlargement display of the hold icon display area can be performed, for example, by an animation display which is gradually enlarged. At the timing shown in FIG. 76 (a2), the hold display frame containing the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen. That is, in this presentation example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is accommodated is displayed in an expanded mode. Further, in the example of the effect, the tutorial display unit TT7 is out of the display screen due to the enlarged display of the holding display frame, but the image under preparation RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT7 does not change the display position. The tutorial display unit TT7 is separated and displayed on the lower right portion of the display screen. At this time, the image under preparation RDY may overlap a part of the holding display frame and the holding icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 76 (a2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 76 (a3), the luminescent color of the household object 224E emitting blue changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is predicted to change from blue to green.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the second hold icon h12 displayed in an enlarged manner is changed from blue to green. As a result, the player may be able to increase the sense of expectation to the jackpot for the symbol variation display required for the suspension corresponding to the second suspension icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced and the display mode is returned to the default. The reduction display of the hold icon display area can be performed, for example, by an animation display which is gradually reduced. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this manner, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed with the expanded hold display frame. Further, in this presentation example, the tutorial display unit TT7 that appears due to the reduced display of the reserved icon display area is displayed in such a manner that the image RDY being prepared is accommodated.

  FIGS. 76 (b1) to (b2) show another form of the effect example shown in FIGS. 76 (a1) to (a5). Since the effect shown in FIG. 76 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 76 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 76 (b2), a state is shown in which the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 76 (a2) and described above. At this time, the holding icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared together with the holding icon enlarged and displayed. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 76 (b2), the subwindow WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 76 (b1). Display (main display) is displayed. Although the UI unit UI2 is not displayed in the display in the sub-window WP3, it may be displayed. Further, the sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged display icon display area. As described above, in this rendering example, it may be possible to grasp the situation of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain rendering is performed.

  Subsequently, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error has occurred will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. Here, FIG. 77 is a view showing a display example of a ball removal error display, FIG. 78 is a view showing a display example of a ball removal error display, and FIG. 79 is a view showing a display example of the ball removal error display. FIG. In addition, although the display position of the warning display of the ball extraction error (hereinafter referred to as “ball extraction error display”) is taken as a fixed place, it can be appropriately set which position is used as the display position. is there. In the following description, a display example including variations of the display position of the ball removal error display is shown below. The ball removal error display is to be erased when the ball removal button 130 is operated to cancel the bottom plate full tank condition and the ball removal error is removed. Further, in the example of effect shown below, although the display example of the ball removal error display is shown, it is also applicable to, for example, a door opening error or the like that occurs when the front frame door 106 is opened. In addition, when the ball removal error display is performed, an error sound may be output together or may not be output.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 77 (a1) to (a2) show, for example, display examples of warning displays when a ball pulling error occurs in the effects shown in FIGS. 46 (c) to (d). It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (a1), a state is shown in which a ball extraction error display ERR1 is displayed overlapping a part of the tutorial display portion TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image. ing. In the ball removal error display ERR1, the message "Please remove the ball" is displayed to urge the player to produce the game balls stored in the lower tray and cancel the lower tray full-tank state.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (a2), a part of the unballooning error display ERR1 overlaps the tutorial display section TT1 in which the shutter image is released and the image RDY is displayed. It is shown that it is displayed. As a result, it may be possible to notice the image RDY being prepared by looking at the ball removal display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY in preparation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to withdraw the ball when the display of the image under preparation RDY is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the image under preparation RDY.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 77 (b1) to (b2) show, for example, display examples of warning displays when a ball pulling error occurs in the effects shown in FIGS. 48 (c1) to (c2). It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (b1), a state is shown in which a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the remaining time display meter MT4. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that one of the timer notices composed of a plurality of displays is overlapped by the ball pullout error display ERR1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (b2), when the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes shorter as the remaining time of the timer display decreases, the overlap state due to the ball removal error display ERR1 is eliminated, and the remaining time display meter The MT4 is in an easy-to-see state. As a result, it may be possible to notice the remaining time display meter MT4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the remaining time display meter MT4. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the remaining time meter MT4 is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the remaining time meter MT4.

  Examples of effects shown in FIG. 77 (c1) to FIG. 77 (c2) show, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 49 (b4) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (c1), the ball pullout error display ERR1 overlaps with the character of the main character swordsman, but overlaps with the translucent button image 136q related to the united animation. It is shown that there is no such thing. At this time, it is also possible for the ball removal error display ERR1 to overlap with the translucent button image 136q in the merging animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (c2), when the translucent button image 139q approaches, a part of the unballooning error display ERR1 overlaps. As a result, it may be possible to notice the united animation by looking at the ball removal display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the combined animation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the combined animation is finished by simultaneously viewing the removal error display ERR1 and the combined animation.

  Examples of effects shown in FIG. 77 (d1) to FIG. 77 (d2) show, for example, display examples of warning displays when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 56 (f) to FIG. 56 (g). It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (d1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed so as to overlap the right symbol of the decorative symbol and the remaining time meter MT. The UI unit UI3 including TT1 is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (d2), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed again on the tutorial display section TT1, and it is informed that the second timer preview effect is started, but the in-preparation image RDY is redisplayed. Sometimes, the first preparing image RDY is displayed enlarged compared to when it is displayed. Therefore, the image RDY being prepared is overlapped by a part of the ball extraction error display ERR1 which has not been overlapped in the tutorial display part TT1 until now. As a result, it may be possible to notice the magnified image RDY being prepared by looking at the ball removal display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY in preparation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to open the ball when the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball extraction error display ERR1 and the enlarged image RDY being prepared.

  Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 77 (e1) to (e2) show, for example, display examples of warning displays when a ball pulling error occurs in the effects shown in FIGS. 57 (a5) to (a6). It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (e1), a part of the ball pullout error display ERR1 partially overlaps the area where the sword character is drawn, but the character of the maroon is drawn Areas do not overlap.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (e2), as a result of the player performing a long press operation on the effect button 136, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn is expanded, and when A part of the ball out error display ERR1 is overlapped with the area where the character is drawn. As a result, it may be possible to notice the superiority or inferiority of the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman character of the enemy role by looking at the display without the ball. In addition, it may be possible to notice an error indication ERR1 of the open ball error by looking at the superiority or inferiority of the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman of the enemy character. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. At the same time, give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the character between the character of the lord and the character of the sword sword of the enemy is finished by simultaneously viewing the merits of the error ERR1 of the ball and the character of the sword sword of the character of the enemy. There are times when you can.

  Examples of effects shown in FIG. 77 (f1) to FIG. 77 (f2) show, for example, display examples of warning displays when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 59 (e) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (f1), it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the second ready image RDY2. On the other hand, it does not overlap with the display area where the character "Go" is displayed (the display area where the first preparing image RDY was displayed).

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (f2), the character "Go" is erased along with the display area, and the second ready image RDY2 slides downward, and the position of the tutorial display portion TT1. An image movement animation is being performed during preparation to move up. In addition, the notice effect (precedence start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 is started, and the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 is shown. It is done. At this time, the overlap state between the ball removal error display ERR1 and the second preparing image RDY2 is eliminated. On the other hand, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the ninja character NJ4. In addition, it is not necessary for the ball extraction error display ERR1 to overlap the ninja character NJ4. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the second ready image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it is possible to give an opportunity to pull out the ball when the display of the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 is finished by simultaneously looking at the ball removing error display ERR1 and the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4. There is a case.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 78 (a1) to (a2) show, for example, display examples of warning displays when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 62 (a3) to (a4). It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (a1), a ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (a2), the first character under preparation image RDY1 is added to the upper right portion of the first preparing image RDY1 and displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. Is displayed so that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the black character GII, and the tiny baby character CHM is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the character CHM of Princess Chibi. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that at least a part of the unballooning error display ERR1 is overlapped for a part of the plurality of images in preparation. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of at least one of the plurality of in-provision images (including characters) by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by viewing a plurality of images being prepared. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the image under preparation is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the plurality of images being prepared.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 78 (b1) to FIG. 78 (b2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 62 (b1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (b1), a ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (b2), the third preparation-ready image RDY3 is displayed so as to be adjacent to the indigo character GII. That is, while the whale character GII appears at a position corresponding to the whale character GII, the image under preparation that appears along with the whale character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the whale character GII. In this case, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 78 (a2), since the image under preparation (Chibi princess character CHM) corresponding to a certain effect is not displayed, the ball extraction error display ERR1 displays either It is not overlapped even against.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 78 (c1) to FIG. 78 (c2) show, for example, display examples of the warning display in the case where a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 64 (b) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (c1), in the effect shown in FIG. 64 (b), a state is shown in which the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed substantially at the center of the left advance notice display area CUL. There is. At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (c2), in the effect shown in FIG. 64 (e), a mini game to be executed based on the image under preparation RDY displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. As a result of success, it is shown that the chance up cut-in image WCI is displayed in the left advance notice display area CUL. At this time, it is shown that a part of the ball out error display ERR1 overlaps the chance up cut in image WCI. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the chance up cut-in image WCI. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to drop the ball when the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the chance-up cut-in image WCI.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 78 (d1) to FIG. 78 (d2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 66 (b1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (d1), in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 66 (b1), a state is shown in which the ball extraction error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1. . At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (d2), the chase effect described above is started. When the chase effect is started, a subwindow WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and the display related to the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 78 (d2) (main display) Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two ready images RDY1 and RDY3 in the sub window WP3, only the first ready image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed in the sub window WP3 and the third ready image RDY3. Is not displayed in the subwindow WP3. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and is continuously displayed without changing the display position. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be overlapped with the sub window WP3.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 78 (e1) to FIG. 78 (e2) show, for example, display examples of the warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 66 (d1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (e1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 66 (d1), a state is shown in which the ball extraction error display ERR1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. . At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (e2), the background display is reduced to about 3⁄4, and the reduced background image is inclined about 10 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. It is shown that it is being done. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared is not inclined along with the background display. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not change the display position even when the shake vision effect is performed, and does not tilt, and the display state is maintained. At this time, when the background image is inclined, the margin is black. Then, when a part of the ball out error display ERR1 overlaps with the margin, for example, when the ball out error display ERR1 is displayed in black characters, it is assimilated with the color of the margin and a part is It may be difficult to view.

  Examples of effects shown in FIG. 78 (f1) to FIG. 78 (f2) show, for example, display examples of warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 67 (a1) to FIG. 67 (a2) It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (f1), in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 67 (a1), it is shown that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1. . At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (f2), the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted from the lower side of the UI unit UI3, and a state in which the UI unit UI3 is lifted and displayed is shown. It is done. At this time, the at-a-glance error display ERR1 at least partially overlaps the tutorial display unit TT1 due to the UI unit UI3 rising. That is, as the display area of the UI unit UI3 is expanded, the ball out error display ERR1 overlaps the UI unit UI3. As a result, it may be possible to notice occurrence of effects in the first step-up display unit SUA by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by seeing that the UI unit UI3 lifts. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the first step-up display unit SUA is finished by simultaneously viewing the effect in the ball removal error display ERR1 and the first step-up display unit SUA.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 79 (a1) to (a2) show, for example, display examples of warning displays when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 69 (d) to (e). It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 79 (a1), in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 69 (d), a state in which a part of the ball out error display ERR1 is overlapped on the upper part of the tutorial display TT1 is It is shown. That is, in this example of rendering, it is shown that the unballooning error display ERR1 overlaps the UI unit UI3 before the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 79 (a2), it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. In this presentation example, it is shown that the overlap state of the unballoon error display ERR1 with the UI unit UI3 is canceled while the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward by the UI unit FO animation.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 79 (b1) to FIG. 79 (b2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 73 (a3) to FIG. 73 (a5) It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 79 (b1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 73 (a3), a state in which a part of the ball extraction error display ERR1 overlaps the UI wipe display WP4 is It is shown. At this time, the character on the motorcycle displayed on the UI wipe display unit WP4 does not overlap with the character of the lady.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 79 (b2), it is shown that the character of the lady on the bike is moved to the right end of the UI wipe display WP5. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the character on the motorcycle with the UI wipe display WP3. As a result, it may be possible to notice the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the effect display in the UI unit wipe display unit WP3. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the effect display on the UI wipe display unit WP3 is finished by simultaneously viewing the effect display on the ball removal error display ERR1 and the UI wipe display unit WP3.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 79 (c1) to FIG. 79 (c2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 76 (b1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 79 (c1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 76 (b1), the ball out error display ERR1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a part is over the decorative symbol. It is shown how to wrap. In addition, it does not overlap to other displays.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 79 (c2), a state in which the holding icon display area is enlarged and displayed is shown. At this time, the holding icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared together with the holding icon enlarged and displayed. Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 79 (c2), the subwindow WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 79 (c1). Display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the subwindow WP3, the UI unit UI2 is not displayed. Further, the sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged display icon display area. At this time, a part of the extraction error display ERR1 overlaps the subwindow WP3 and another part overlaps the reserved icon display area. The pop-up error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and the display position is maintained. As a result, it may be possible to notice a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area enlarged and displayed by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. Also, at the same time as watching the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the ball withdrawal error display ERR1 and the hold icon display area, give a trigger to open the ball when the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area is finished. There are times when you can.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 79 (d1) to FIG. 79 (d3) show variations of the display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1.

  In the removal-of-balls error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 79 (d1), the display of “Please remove the sphere” is surrounded by a rectangular frame, and the background is transparent. Therefore, even when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the display of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be made conspicuous and the influence of the visibility of the display on the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be reduced. There is a case.

  The removal-of-balls error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 79 (d2) is in the same mode as the removal-of-balls error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 79 (d1), but the background is opaque. Therefore, when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the visibility of the ball removal error display ERR1 is improved, but the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be considered to be difficult to view.

  The ball out error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 79 (d3) is another display mode of the ball out error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 79 (d2), and the white background display “Please pull out the ball” is displayed. It is considered as the aspect represented by.

  In the embodiment described above, the three decorative symbol display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 280M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have been described, but the decorative symbol display device It goes without saying that the invention is applicable even to a pachinko machine 100 provided with only one. Further, the present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with two decorative symbol display devices, or a pachinko machine provided with four or more decorative symbol display devices.

  As mentioned above, although the example which made the present invention apply to a pachinko machine (ball ball game machine) was explained in detail, the game stand of the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) The present invention is also applicable to a used gaming machine (slot machine). That is, although the pachinko machine 100 described so far is pachinko (one kind + one kind), other pachinko (eg one kind, two kinds, three kinds, one kind + two kinds etc.) may be used, a slot etc ( Parrots and balls can be used. More specifically, while inserting a medal (gaming medium) and operating the start lever to rotate the reel, internally determining the combination by internal lottery, and operating the stop button to stop the reel If a combination of symbols determined in advance is displayed on the symbol display window according to the internal determination, the combination is established, and if the combination with the payout of medals is established, the prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. The present invention may be a coin-operated game machine (slot machine) in which a player is given a benefit. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are sealed as a sealed ball, the sealed ball is fired to a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the fact that the sealed ball is won in a predetermined entry area. , And the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won may be fired again to the gaming area, and the enclosed ball game console may be used cyclically.

  As described above, the present invention is applicable to various types of game consoles, for example, an enclosed type pachinko machine shown in FIG. 266 described later and a slot machine shown in FIG.

In the above description,
It is a game console provided with “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The display of one of the plurality of types of display may be a first display [for example, a change effect display (display change of the display mode of the hold icon by the character NJ4 of the ninja shown in FIG. Advance effect display etc.]
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a second display [eg, a red display mode holding icon shown in FIG. 46 (h), etc.],
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG.
The first display is a display of a character associated with the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display is a display representing waiting for the start of display of a certain advance display [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 46 (o) to FIG. 46 (p), etc.]
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 46 (f) to FIG. 46 (h), the ninja character NJ4 The display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc., after the hold change prior presentation display due to
In the first state, the third display may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (d), under preparation in a state where the UI unit UI3 for displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed] Display of image RDY is started, etc.],
The display may end in the second state in the third state in which the display is started in the first state [e.g., as shown in FIG. 46 (d) to FIG. The image under preparation RDY whose display is started when the unit UI3 is displayed is such that display is ended when the UI unit UI3 is not displayed],
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain advance notice may be started in the second state [for example, FIG. As shown in (o), after the display of the image in preparation RDY is finished, the display of the mini game is started with the UI unit UI3 being in a non-display state, etc.]
After the certain advance notice is displayed, a certain effect [for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 46 (q), etc.] may be started [eg, for example, FIG. As shown in (q), when the display result of the mini game is a great success, an iron plate image TP is displayed, etc.],
The certain effect is a notice about a symbol change display being executed [for example, an iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 46 (q) is a notice display notifying that a big hit is confirmed, etc.]
It may become the second state after the first state [For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (l) to FIG. UI part UI3 is hidden, etc.],
The first state is one of states in which the hold icon can be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is not displayed in the sword reach].
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance before the advance notice, is the advance notice other than the hold icon, and concentrate on the change. May be entertaining.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is possible for the beginners to enjoy the notice or the pre-reading notice by the indication during preparation, and it is possible to enjoy it, and the indication during preparation is for the experienced person to a certain extent. In some cases, it may be easy to understand and make it possible to clarify expectations.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be easy to understand which notice is to be made depending on the timing of the end of the preparation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be a display of a character associated with only the second display, or may be a display of a character associated with a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is necessarily associated with the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

  In addition, only the third display may be started in the first state, and displays other than the third display may be started in the first state. In addition, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

  In addition, the third display may be started only in the first state, and the third display may be started in states other than the first state.

  In addition, the third display in which the display is started in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display in which the display is started in the first state However, the display may end in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display in which the display is started in the first state may always end in the second state, and the third display in which the display is started in the first state may be the second The display may not end in the state of.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, only the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state, or in the second state, the third display may be performed. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of displays other than a certain advance notice may be started in the second state. Moreover, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state In the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may not be started after the end of.

  In addition, the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state only after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, or the third state in the second state may be started. The display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state other than after the end of the display of.

  Moreover, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may be started only in the second state, or in the second state, the third display may be started. After completion of the display of the display of, the display of a certain advance notice may be started even in a state other than the second state.

  Moreover, after a certain advance notice display is displayed, only a certain effect may be started, or after a certain advance notice display is displayed, an effect other than a certain effect is also started There may be cases. Also, a certain effect may always be started after a certain advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain advance notice display is displayed.

  Also, a certain effect may be started only after a certain advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started except after a certain advance notice display is displayed. It may be.

  Also, a certain effect may be a notice about only the symbol change display being executed, or a notice regarding a display other than the symbol change display being performed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice that always relates to a symbol change display being executed, or may be a notice that is not related to a symbol change display that is being executed.

  In addition, the second state may occur only after the first state, or the second state may occur after the states other than the first state. In addition, after the first state, the second state may always be obtained, or after the first state, the second state may not be obtained.

  Further, the first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon can be displayed. . Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

  The second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed or one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon is not displayed. The second state may be one of the states where the hold icon is not necessarily displayed or one of the states where the hold icon may be displayed.

  Here, the first display may be a display of a character related to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in the calibration of a character (navi-character) constantly displayed. .

  In addition, the second display may be a display that changes from the default display mode of the hold icon to the pre-read notice display mode of the hold icon.

  In addition, the third display may be a character display in preparation, may be a display of a character, may be a display of a notice item, or may be a countdown of a timer display in a timer notice display. It may be a display in progress.

  In addition, a certain advance notice may be a display during execution of the countdown of the timer indication in the timer advance notice, may be a mini game, or may be a notice effect.

Further, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display [eg, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 46 (a)],”
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
While the sixth display is displayed, the hold icon is configured to be displayable [for example, the hold icon can be displayed in a state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc.],
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (m), when the UI unit UI3 is in the non-display state, the hold is not displayed. Icon is not displayed etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the hold icon may be made noticeable.

  Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back of only the hold icon, or a display of an image displayed on the back of the display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back of the hold icon, or may be display of an image that is not displayed on the back of at least the hold icon.

  Further, only the hold icon may be configured to be displayable when the sixth display is displayed, and a display other than the hold icon may be displayable when the sixth display is displayed. It may be Also, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed without fail when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. May be configured.

  In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayable even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be

  In addition, only the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the display other than the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. Also, the hold icon may be configured so as not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. May be configured.

  Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

Also, in the first state, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display [eg, FIG. As shown in d), the image RDY being prepared is displayed superimposed on the tutorial display unit TT1 in the UI unit UI3, etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [for example, the ready image RDY shown in FIG. And the display position of the image RDY being prepared shown in FIG. 46 (m), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the third display is displayed around the hold icon which is often seen normally, and it is strongly emphasized that the third display is not the pre-reading notice by the change of the display mode of the hold icon. In addition, in some cases, it may be possible to prevent missed notice by making it notice that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon has been made.

  Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped only with the third display, or in the first state, It may be configured that at least a part of the six displays may be overlapped and displayed on displays other than the third display. In addition, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display without fail. In the first state, the display of the sixth display It may be configured such that at least a portion of the display may be overlapped with the third display and not displayed.

  In addition, in the first state, only at least a portion of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display, or in the first state, the sixth state may be displayed. The display other than at least a part of the display of may be displayed so as to be overlapped and displayed on the third display.

Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the first embodiment [for example, a default display mode displayed in blue, etc. shown in FIG. 46 (a)],
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [for example, a display mode of gold shown in FIG. 46 (e), etc.],
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect In the symbol variation display, the big hit symbol is easy to be determined and displayed [for example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 46 (e) is displayed in the golden display mode, the display mode of the holding icon is likely to change. , Big hit symbol is easy to be decidedly displayed etc. in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of pre-reading, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be Further, the sixth display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

  In addition, the symbol variation display is better when the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol may be easily determined in the display, or the sixth indication may be from the first aspect to the second rather than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to an aspect, symbols other than the big hit symbol may be more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, the symbol variation display is better when the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol may be definitely displayed on the screen, or the sixth display may show the first to second aspects rather than the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Also, only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the big hit symbol may be displayed in the symbol variation display, or the sixth display may be the first aspect. Also in the case of changing to the second aspect from the second aspect, the big hit symbol may be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display.

Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the first embodiment [for example, a default display mode displayed in blue, etc. shown in FIG. 46 (a)],
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [for example, a display mode of gold shown in FIG. 46 (e), etc.],
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect The display of the second display is easily started [For example, when the UI unit UI3 is displayed in a gold display mode as shown in FIG. etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be Further, the sixth display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

  Also, the second display is more likely to be changed when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the indication of the indication may be easily started, or the sixth indication may be from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect In the case of changing to, the display other than the second display may be more easily started. Also, the second display is more likely to be changed when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The indication of the indication may always start, or the sixth indication may change from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared to the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of a change, the display of the second display may not start.

  Also, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display may be from the first aspect to the second The display of the second display may be easily started even when the mode is changed.

Also, at least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display [eg, as shown in FIG. Overlapping etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, if attention is paid to the sixth display, various information can be obtained, and it may be possible to make the game easy to understand.

  Here, at least a portion of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a portion of the first display may also overlap with displays other than the sixth display. It may be configured to Also, at least a portion of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, or at least a portion of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured.

  Also, only a portion of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or all of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. .

Also, “the first display and the sixth display are configured so as not to overlap. For example, as shown in FIG. 61 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 overlaps the UI unit UI3. Not etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, if focusing on the sixth display, the third display may seem like the display relating to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be understood that this is not the case.

  Here, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to overlap, or even if the displays other than the first display and the sixth display are not configured to overlap. Good. Also, the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to always overlap, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap each other. .

In addition, “a certain reach effect [for example, super reach (sword reach) shown in FIG. 46 (m) to FIG. 46 (q) etc.] can be executed,
The first state is one of the states before execution of the certain reach effect is started, and for example, the super reach shown in FIG. 46 (m) to FIG. And so on), etc.],
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being performed [for example, a state in which a super reach (sword reach) shown in FIG. 46 (m) to FIG. 46 (q) is being performed] ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to notice whether or not it is in a certain reach state.

  Here, only certain reach effects may be configured to be executable, and reach effects other than certain reach effects may also be configured to be executable. Also, it may be configured to always execute a certain reach effect, or it may be configured such that a certain reach effect may not be performed.

  Also, the first state may be one of the states before execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before execution of reach effects other than a certain reach effect is started It may be one of the states of In addition, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is necessarily started, or one of the states in which the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in the state.

  The second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is being performed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being performed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always performed or a state in which a certain reach effect is not performed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 46 (o) to FIG. 46 (p)],
One of the displays of the plurality of types is the fifth display [for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG.
The certain advance notice display is a notice for giving notice that the certain effect is to be started [for example, in the mini game shown in FIG. 46 (o) to FIG. 46 (p), an arrow released by the mini character MC1 of the lord. Notices the display of the steel plate image TP by sticking to the area around the target TGT, etc.],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain advance display.
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, a certain advance notice may give notice only that a certain effect is started, or may give notice of something other than the fact that a certain effect is started. In addition, a certain advance notice may always give notice that a certain effect will be started, or may not give notice of a certain effect being started.

  In addition, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain advance notice display, and a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain advance notice display. Also, the fourth display may be displayed as a certain advance notice, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain advance notice.

  Further, only the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or displays other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. Further, the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol change display may be continuously displayed even after the symbol change display to be started next is started [eg, FIG. i) As shown in (j) of the figure, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the third display can give expectation over a plurality of changes, and the goal can be easily understood, so the period for giving an expectation may be clear.

  Here, the third display in which the display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be continuously displayed only after the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, or The third display whose display has been started in the symbol variation display may be continuously displayed other than after the symbol variation display to be started next is started. In addition, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may always be continuously displayed after the symbol variation display to be started next is started, or in a certain symbol variation display The third display whose display has been started may not be displayed continuously even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, the first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display is erased before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started [eg, FIG. As shown in h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may be erased only before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, or the display in a certain symbol variation display may be The started first display may be erased other than before the start of the symbol variation display to be started next. In addition, the first display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may be erased before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, or the display may be started in a certain symbol fluctuation display. The first displayed display may not be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

Also, in the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed [eg, as shown in FIG. 52 (a4), the character of “superheat” in the tutorial display section TT1 Notice display consisting of may be displayed etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in the area where the third display is displayed, only a certain effect may be performed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, effects other than the certain effect are also performed. May be Also, in the area where the third display is displayed, a certain effect may be performed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, a certain effect may not be performed.

  In addition, a certain effect may be performed only in the area where the third display is displayed, and a certain effect is performed also in the area other than the area where the third display is displayed. May be

In addition, "the operation means which can be operated by the player [for example, effect button 136 and the like] is provided,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display [for example, the deca-button image 136aL shown in FIG. 49 (b6) and the like],
The seventh display is a display prompting the user to operate the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 49 (b1) to FIG. 49 (b6), the deca-button image 136aL is prepared) The display is started after the display of the image RDY is started, etc.],
When the operation means is operated during display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated during display of the deca-button image 136aL shown in FIG. 49 (b6), an iron plate Image TP is displayed, etc.],
The third display is a display whose display is terminated before the display of the seventh display is started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (b1) to FIG. (B6), the image RDY being prepared Is displayed before the display of the decal button image 136aL starts, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the operation means may be operable by only the player, or may be operable by persons other than the player. In addition, the operation means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that is not operated by the player.

  Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operation means, or may prompt other than the operation of the operation means. The seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operation means, or may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  Also, the seventh display may start being displayed only after the third display is started, or may be started other than after the third display is started. It may be. In addition, the seventh display may always start after the third display starts, or may not start after the third display starts. It is also good.

  Moreover, a certain effect may be started whenever the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, or a certain effect is not started when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may be started when the operation means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, or a certain effect may be obtained when the operation means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display. It may be started. In addition, when the operation means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, a certain effect may be started, or when the operation means is operated while the display other than the seventh display is also displayed, the certain effect May be started.

  In addition, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display may end other than before the display of the seventh display is started. It may be In addition, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display starts, or when the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts There may be

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIG. 49 (b4) to FIG. (B5), etc.]”,
The eighth display is a display for giving notice that the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (b 4) to FIG. Of the start of, that is, the display of the Deca button image 136aL etc.],
The third display is a display whose display is ended while the eighth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the eighth display may give notice that only the display of the seventh display is started, or may give notice of other than the display of the seventh display. It may be In addition, the eighth display may always give notice that the display of the seventh display will start, and may not give notice of the start of the display of the seventh display. It may be.

  The third display may end only during the display of the eighth display, or may end during the display of displays other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a ninth display [for example, the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 56 (a)],
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
Two of the third displays may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), two images RDY1 and RDY2 may be displayed during preparation, etc.,
The display mode of the other changes after the display of one of the two third displays is completed [for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (g), the image RDY being prepared is displayed enlarged. etc],
The third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps the ninth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (g), the in-provision image RDY enlarged and displayed overlaps the fluctuation icon h0. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to notice that the two third displays are displayed.

  Here, only two of the third displays may be displayed, or three or more of the third displays may be displayed, and only one third display may be displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, only one display mode of the two third displays may change after the display of one of the two third displays ends, or the other after the display of one of the two third displays ends. Display modes other than the display mode may be changed. Also, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the two third displays has ended, or the other of the two third displays may be changed The display mode of may not change.

  In addition, the display mode of the other may be changed only after the display of one of the two third displays is ended, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is ended. The other display mode may change.

  Also, the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or even if the third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with displays other than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, or the third display in which the display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. .

  Further, only the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, and displays other than the third display in which the display mode has changed may also overlap with the ninth display. .

In addition, when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is finished in one symbol variation display [for example, in FIG. 56 (b) to FIG. (K) As shown, the two ready images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when two third displays are displayed, only display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or two third displays are displayed. The display of displays other than all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display. Moreover, when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may always be ended in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, The display of all the third displays may not end in one of the symbol variation displays.

  In addition, when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may be ended only in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, The display of all the third displays may be ended also in the symbol fluctuation display other than the one symbol fluctuation display. Moreover, only when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, except when two third displays are displayed. Also in the case of, the display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display.

Also, “one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed as the tenth display [for example,“ Panda is the master of the hall ”displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 46 (a). Description display etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display that is displayed in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 46A, the instruction display is on the tutorial display unit TT1 Etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (d), the image under preparation RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or when the display is displayed, the first display area of the display means It may be displayed other than. Moreover, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, and when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be

  The third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in display areas other than the first display area. It is also good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
It is a game console provided with “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a character relating to the first display [the change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (display of the hold change advance effect display), for example, FIG. Character of ninja shown in), etc.],
One of the displays of the plurality of types is the second display [the hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice, for example, the hold icon of the red display mode shown in FIG. 46 (h), etc.]
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [in preparation display, for example, an preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 46 (d)],
The first display is a display of a character associated with the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display may be a notice display [mini game or timer notice, for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 46 (o) to FIG. 46 (p) or FIG. 48 (b3) to FIG. It is a display showing that it is waiting for the display start of the timer announcement effect etc. shown in
It is configured that the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started, and then the hold icon is displayed after the hold change advance effect display by the character is started. Is displayed in the display mode of the advance notice, for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (f) to FIG. 46 (h), the first hold icon after the hold change prior effect display by the ninja character NJ4 is performed The display mode of h11 is changing from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc.],
The third display may be started in the first state, and the display of the in-provision display is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed, for example, FIG. As shown in, when the UI unit UI3 displaying the suspension icons h11 and h12 is displayed, the display of the image RDY being prepared is started, etc.],
The third display whose display has been started in the first state is configured such that the display may end in the second state, and the display is started when the hold icon is displayed. In the preparation display, the display ends when the hold icon is not displayed. For example, as shown in (d) to (n) in FIG. 46, the display is started in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed. The display of the image under preparation RDY is terminated when the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, etc.],
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain advance notice may be started in the second state. After the display of the preparation display ends in the display state, a mini game or timer advance notice is started. For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (n) to the figure (o), the display of the preparation image RDY is After the completion, the display of the mini game is started with the UI unit UI3 being in the non-display state, or as shown in FIG. After the display is completed, the timer announcement effect is started in the state where the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, etc.],
After the certain advance notice display is displayed, a certain effect [the notice, for example, a display of an iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 46 (q), a button advance notice by a deca button 136aL shown in FIG. Is configured so that the notice is started when the display result of the mini game is a great success or the countdown is completed by the timer notice, for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (o) to FIG. (Q) As shown, when the display result of the mini game is very successful, the iron plate image TP is displayed. As shown in (c1) to (c4) of FIG. Button preview effect is started by Deca button 136aL, etc.],
The certain effect is a notice regarding a symbol change display being executed,
It is configured to be in the second state after the first state, and may shift to a state in which the hold icon can not be displayed from the state in which the hold icon can be displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in (l) to (m), when transitioning to swordsman reach, the displayed UI unit UI3 is made non-display, and transition from the state where the hold icon can be displayed to the non-display state Etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed [e.g., the state in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc., before the transition to the sword reach ”,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [eg, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is made non-displayed in the sword reach, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance before the advance notice, is the advance notice other than the hold icon, and concentrate on the change. May be entertaining.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is possible for the beginners to enjoy the notice or the pre-reading notice by the indication during preparation, and it is possible to enjoy it, and the indication during preparation is for the experienced person to a certain extent. In some cases, it may be easy to understand and make it possible to clarify expectations.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be easy to understand which notice is to be made depending on the timing of the end of the preparation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be a display of a character associated with only the second display, or may be a display of a character associated with a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is necessarily associated with the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

  In addition, only the third display may be started in the first state, and displays other than the third display may be started in the first state. In addition, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

  In addition, the third display may be started only in the first state, and the third display may be started in states other than the first state.

  In addition, the third display in which the display is started in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display in which the display is started in the first state However, the display may end in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display in which the display is started in the first state may always end in the second state, and the third display in which the display is started in the first state may be the second The display may not end in the state of.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, only the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state, or in the second state, the third display may be performed. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of displays other than a certain advance notice may be started in the second state. Moreover, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state In the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may not be started after the end of.

  In addition, the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state only after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, or the third state in the second state may be started. The display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state other than after the end of the display of.

  Moreover, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may be started only in the second state, or in the second state, the third display may be started. After completion of the display of the display of, the display of a certain advance notice may be started even in a state other than the second state.

  Moreover, after a certain advance notice display is displayed, only a certain effect may be started, or after a certain advance notice display is displayed, an effect other than a certain effect is also started There may be cases. Also, a certain effect may always be started after a certain advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain advance notice display is displayed.

  Also, a certain effect may be started only after a certain advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started except after a certain advance notice display is displayed. It may be.

  Also, a certain effect may be a notice about only the symbol change display being executed, or a notice regarding a display other than the symbol change display being performed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice that always relates to a symbol change display being executed, or may be a notice that is not related to a symbol change display that is being executed.

  In addition, the second state may occur only after the first state, or the second state may occur after the states other than the first state. In addition, after the first state, the second state may always be obtained, or after the first state, the second state may not be obtained.

  Further, the first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon can be displayed. . Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

  The second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed or one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon is not displayed. The second state may be one of the states where the hold icon is not necessarily displayed or one of the states where the hold icon may be displayed.

  Here, the first display may be a display of a character related to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in the calibration of a character (navi-character) constantly displayed. .

  In addition, the second display may be a display that changes from the default display mode of the hold icon to the pre-read notice display mode of the hold icon.

  In addition, the third display may be a character display in preparation, may be a display of a character, may be a display of a notice item, or may be a countdown of a timer display in a timer notice display. It may be a display in progress.

  In addition, a certain advance notice may be a display during execution of the countdown of the timer indication in the timer advance notice, may be a mini game, or may be a notice effect.

Note that the third state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed,
The fourth state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed,
The third state is a state different from the first state,
The fourth state is a state different from the second state.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also, the third display whose display has been started in the first state may end display in the first state,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

In addition, the third display whose display is started in the first state may end the display in the third state.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also, the third display whose display has been started in the first state may end display in the fourth state,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

  In addition, the first state may be a state including that the symbol variation display (decorative symbol, special symbol) is being executed.

Also, it is configured that a certain effect may be started after the certain advance notice is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

  In addition, a certain preliminary announcement display may not be a true preliminary announcement display, but may be a false preliminary announcement display in which a certain effect is not started.

  Also, when a certain advance notice display is a mini game, a certain effect may be a display indicating the result of the mini game.

  In addition, the character is not limited to a person, but may be a display of a mini item system such as a notice item.

  Also, "the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started", "the second display after the display of the first display is started. The display to start the display of may be made ". Here, the first display may or may not be displayed in another scene. In addition, the second display may or may not be displayed in another scene.

  Moreover, "it is comprised so that it may become the said 2nd state after the said 1st state" may be "the said 2nd state following the said 1st state." It may be configured as ".

  In addition, after the first state, there may be a transition to the second state without passing through another state (for example, the fourth state). Moreover, after passing through the other state (for example, the 3rd state or the 3rd state) after the 1st state, it may shift to the 2nd state. In addition, in a state where one symbol variation display is made, there may be a case where the first state shifts to the second state.

  Alternatively, a certain effect may fade in while a certain advance notice fades out.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the sixth display [display of an image including the hold icon display area, for example, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG.
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
In the state where the sixth display is displayed, the hold icon is configured to be displayable, and the hold icon may be displayed in a state where an image including the hold icon display area is displayed, for example, The hold icon can be displayed when the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc.],
The hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [The hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed, for example, FIG. As shown in), when the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, the hold icon is not displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the hold icon may be made noticeable.

  Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back of only the hold icon, or a display of an image displayed on the back of the display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back of the hold icon, or may be display of an image that is not displayed on the back of at least the hold icon.

  Further, only the hold icon may be configured to be displayable when the sixth display is displayed, and a display other than the hold icon may be displayable when the sixth display is displayed. It may be Also, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed without fail when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. May be configured.

  In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayable even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be

  In addition, only the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the display other than the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. Also, the hold icon may be configured so as not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. May be configured.

  Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Note that the sixth display may be a display that is not overlapped with the decorative symbol in change.

  In addition, in a configuration in which a part of the display of the sixth display is overlapped with a part of the display of the third display, a display of a part different from the part of the third display is overlapped with the decorative symbol May be

  The sixth display may also include the display of the pedestal of the hold icon.

  Also, the sixth display may include the display of the base of the variation icon.

  The sixth display may be a display different from the display of the background image.

In addition, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display, and the hold icon is displayed. In the above state, a part of the image including the reserved icon display area is overlapped with the display under preparation and displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (d), the image under preparation RDY is a tutorial in the UI unit UI3. It is displayed overlapping on the display unit TT1, etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [Display of the display under preparation in the state where the hold icon is displayed The display position of the display under preparation in the position and the non-display state of the hold icon is the same, for example, the display position of the image RDY under preparation shown in FIG. 46 (d) and the image under preparation shown in FIG. The display position of RDY is the same, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the third display is displayed around the hold icon which is often seen normally, and it is strongly emphasized that the third display is not the pre-reading notice by the change of the display mode of the hold icon. In addition, in some cases, it may be possible to prevent missed notice by making it notice that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon has been made.

  Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped only with the third display, or in the first state, It may be configured that at least a part of the six displays may be overlapped and displayed on displays other than the third display. In addition, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display without fail. In the first state, the display of the sixth display It may be configured such that at least a portion of the display may be overlapped with the third display and not displayed.

  In addition, in the first state, only at least a portion of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display, or in the first state, the sixth state may be displayed. The display other than at least a part of the display of may be displayed so as to be overlapped and displayed on the third display.

Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the first embodiment [default display mode, for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 46 (a), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [display mode of advance notice or advance notice, for example, a display mode of gold shown in FIG. 46 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect The display of the second display is configured to be easier to be started [The display of the hold icon is more than the case where the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the display mode of the prefetch notice. When the image including the area is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the prefetch notice, the hold icon of the display mode of the preview notice is more likely to be displayed. For example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. When displayed in the golden display mode, the red display mode hold icon is likely to be displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be Further, the sixth display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

  Also, the second display is more likely to be changed when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the indication of the indication may be easily started, or the sixth indication may be from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect In the case of changing to, the display other than the second display may be more easily started. Also, the second display is more likely to be changed when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The indication of the indication may always start, or the sixth indication may change from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared to the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of a change, the display of the second display may not start.

  Also, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display may be from the first aspect to the second The display of the second display may be easily started even when the mode is changed.

  “When the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, compared to the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect Is configured such that the display of the second display is more likely to start, "in a certain state, the sixth display is from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is configured to be more easily started when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when no change occurs. "" May be.

Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the first embodiment [default display mode, for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 46 (a), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [display mode of advance notice or advance notice, for example, a display mode of gold shown in FIG. 46 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect The symbol variation display is configured so that the big hit symbol is easily displayed in a fixed display [The hold icon display is displayed than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the display mode of the advance notice. If the image including the area is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the advance notice, the jackpot is likely to be a big hit. For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 46 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode , The display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, so it is easy to confirm the big hit symbol in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be Further, the sixth display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

  In addition, the symbol variation display is better when the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol may be easily determined in the display, or the sixth indication may be from the first aspect to the second rather than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to an aspect, symbols other than the big hit symbol may be more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, the symbol variation display is better when the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol may be definitely displayed on the screen, or the sixth display may show the first to second aspects rather than the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Also, only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the big hit symbol may be displayed in the symbol variation display, or the sixth display may be the first aspect. Also in the case of changing to the second aspect from the second aspect, the big hit symbol may be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display.

  “When the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, compared to the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect Is configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display, “in a certain state, the sixth display is from the first aspect to the second aspect. When the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display than when the sixth display does not change. "" May be.

Also, “at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the first display. [At least a part of the image including the reserved icon display area is For example, as shown in (f) of FIG. 46, a part of the UI unit UI3 is over the ninja character NJ4 as shown in FIG. Being wrapped etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, if attention is paid to the sixth display, various information can be obtained, and it may be possible to make the game easy to understand.

  Here, the display may be configured such that at least a portion of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping only the first display, or the display of at least a portion of the sixth display is It may be configured such that displays other than the first display may be displayed overlapping. In addition, the display may be configured such that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the display of the first display, or at least a part of the display of the sixth display It may be configured such that it may be overlapped and not displayed on one display.

  In addition, only at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the first display, or the display other than at least a part of the display of the sixth display The display may also be configured to be displayed overlapping with the first display.

  In addition, the display of a part of the sixth display may be configured to be displayed overlapping the first display, or all the displays of the sixth display may be displayed on the first display. It may be configured to be displayed overlapping.

  Also, at least a portion of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a portion of the first display may overlap with displays other than the sixth display. It may be configured as follows. Also, at least a portion of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, or at least a portion of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured.

  Also, only a portion of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or all of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. .

In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. The image including the pending icon display area is displayed in a state in which both the image relating to the image including the pending icon display area and the character relating to the change effect display (the pending change advance presentation display) of the pending icon display area is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 61 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is overlapped with the character NJ4 of the ninja, as shown in FIG. 61 (b1). Not etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, if focusing on the sixth display, the third display may seem like the display relating to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be understood that this is not the case.

  Here, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped only with the first display. In the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with any display other than the first display. May be configured. In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be configured to be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. When both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may not be displayed without being overlapped with the first display.

  Also, even if only the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, In the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the display other than the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. It may be done. Also, even if only the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. In a state other than the state in which both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. It may be configured.

  Further, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the displays other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. . Also, the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to always overlap, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap each other. .

In addition, “a certain reach effect [specific super reach effect, for example, super reach (swords reach) shown in FIG. 46 (m) to FIG. (Q), etc.] can be executed.
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [the state before the specific super reach effect is started, for example, FIG. It is a state etc. before the super reach (Swordsman reach) shown in figure (q) is started],
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [a state in which a specific super reach effect is being executed, for example, a super reach (wordsman shown in FIG. 46 (m) to FIG. 46 (q) Reach is being executed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to notice whether or not it is in a certain reach state.

  Here, only certain reach effects may be configured to be executable, and reach effects other than certain reach effects may also be configured to be executable. Also, it may be configured to always execute a certain reach effect, or it may be configured such that a certain reach effect may not be performed.

  Also, the first state may be one of the states before execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before execution of reach effects other than a certain reach effect is started It may be one of the states of In addition, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is necessarily started, or one of the states in which the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in the state.

  The second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is being performed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being performed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always performed or a state in which a certain reach effect is not performed.

  The first state may be a reach state before developing into an SP reach in a certain change, and the second state may be a state in which the SP reach is in progress in the certain change.

  Also, the first state is a state before developing into an SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and is a certain state before reaching a reaching state, and the second state is an SP in the certain fluctuation. It may be in a state of reach execution.

  That is, the first state and the second state may be one set.

In addition, “the certain advance notice display is a timer advance notice display [for example, a display of a timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 49 (b3) to FIG. 49 (b5), etc.]”.
A game stand that features. "
I also explained about

  The timer advance notice may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of types of timer advance notices, it may be a certain kind of timer advance notice.

In addition, “the certain advance notice display is a display of a mini game [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 46 (o) to FIG. 46 (q), etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The mini game may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

  Also, when there are multiple types of mini games, it may be a type of mini game.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the fourth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the button advance effect by the deca-button 136aL shown in FIG. 49 (b6), etc.],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be In addition, the fourth display may be necessarily displayed as a certain effect, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

Further, “one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG.
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only the fifth display may be displayed as an effect, or an indication other than the fifth display may be displayed as an effect. May be Further, the fifth display may be necessarily displayed as a certain effect, or may be configured so that the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

  The fourth display and the fifth display may be different displays. Here, the jackpot symbol may be more easily determined when the fifth display is displayed than when the fourth display is displayed, or when the fifth display is displayed. If the fourth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more easily displayed.

  Also, in the case where the fifth display appears only under special conditions, the case where at least one of the third display aspect and a certain advance display aspect is displayed only in a certain aspect There may be.

In addition, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol change display may be continuously displayed even after the symbol change display to be started next is started. [The preparation display in which the display is started in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started, for example, as shown in FIG. In preparation, the image RDY is being displayed across multiple symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game console, the third display can give expectation over a plurality of changes, and the goal can be easily understood, so the period for giving an expectation may be clear.

  Here, the third display in which the display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be continuously displayed only after the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, or The third display whose display has been started in the symbol variation display may be continuously displayed other than after the symbol variation display to be started next is started. In addition, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may always be continuously displayed after the symbol variation display to be started next is started, or in a certain symbol variation display The third display whose display has been started may not be displayed continuously even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, the first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be erased before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started [a certain symbol The character related to the change effect display (hold change prior effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon whose display has been started in the variable display is erased before the next symbol fluctuation display is started, for example, FIG. As shown in (h) through (h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display whose display has been started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be configured to be erased only before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, It may be configured that the first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be erased other than before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started. In addition, the first display whose display is started in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started, or a certain symbol variation The first display whose display is started in the display may be configured so that it may not be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

  Note that a certain advance notice and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the symbol variation display. In addition, a certain advance notice and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the first state to the second state (the second state to the first state).

In addition, in the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be performed [the notice is performed in the area where the preparation display is displayed, For example, as shown in FIG. 52 (a4), there may be a case where a notice display consisting of the letters “excessive heat” may be displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 where the image RDY in preparation is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in the area where the third display is displayed, only a certain effect may be performed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, effects other than the certain effect are also performed. May be Also, in the area where the third display is displayed, a certain effect may be performed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, a certain effect may not be performed.

  In addition, a certain effect may be performed only in the area where the third display is displayed, and a certain effect is performed also in the area other than the area where the third display is displayed. May be

In addition, "the operation means which can be operated by the player [a button or a lever, for example, effect button 136 etc.]" is provided,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a seventh display [display of an image of a button or a lever, for example, a deca-button image 136aL shown in FIG. 49 (b6)],
The seventh display is a display prompting the user to operate the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that starts to be displayed after the third display is started, and the display of images of buttons and levers is started to be displayed after the display in progress is started, For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (b1) to FIG. 49 (b6), the Deca button image 136aL is started to be displayed after the display of the image RDY being prepared, etc.],
When the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started, and when the button (or the lever is operated during the display of the image of the button or the lever, the notice is given) The iron plate image TP is displayed when the effect button 136 is operated during display of the deca-button image 136aL shown in FIG. 49 (b6), for example, to be started],
The third display is a display which is ended before the display of the seventh display is started. [In preparation display is ended before the display of the button or the lever is started, For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (b1) to FIG. 49 (b6), the image under preparation RDY is such that the display is terminated before the display of the Deca button image 136aL is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the operation means may be operable by only the player, or may be operable by persons other than the player. In addition, the operation means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that is not operated by the player.

  Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operation means, or may prompt other than the operation of the operation means. The seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operation means, or may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  Also, the seventh display may start being displayed only after the third display is started, or may be started other than after the third display is started. It may be. In addition, the seventh display may always start after the third display starts, or may not start after the third display starts. It is also good.

  Moreover, a certain effect may be started whenever the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, or a certain effect is not started when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may be started when the operation means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, or a certain effect may be obtained when the operation means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display. It may be started. In addition, when the operation means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, a certain effect may be started, or when the operation means is operated while the display other than the seventh display is also displayed, the certain effect May be started.

  In addition, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display may end other than before the display of the seventh display is started. It may be In addition, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display starts, or when the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts There may be

  The seventh display may be a big button image among the normal button image and the big button image. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and the case where the deca-button image is displayed, the big hit symbol may be more easily determined and displayed when the deca-button image is displayed.

  The seventh display may be a button image of a special color among the normal color of the button image and the special color of the button image. Here, when the button image of the normal color is displayed and when the button image of the special color is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more easily determined when the button image of the special color is displayed. Good.

  Further, the seventh display may be an image of another operation means among images of the operation means (second button, lever, etc.) different from the normal button image and the button. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and in the case where the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed, the big hit symbol is displayed when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed. It may be easy to be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIG. 49 (b4) to FIG. (B5), etc.]”,
The eighth display is a display for giving notice that the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (b 4) to FIG. Of the start of, that is, the display of the Deca button image 136aL etc.],
The third display is a display whose display is ended while the eighth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the eighth display may give notice that only the display of the seventh display is started, or may give notice of other than the display of the seventh display. It may be In addition, the eighth display may always give notice that the display of the seventh display will start, and may not give notice of the start of the display of the seventh display. It may be.

  The third display may end only during the display of the eighth display, or may end during the display of displays other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a ninth display [for example, the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 56 (a)],
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
Two of the above-mentioned third displays may be displayed. [The two in-provision displays may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. May be done etc],
After the display of one of the two third displays ends, the display mode of the other changes [the display of the display in progress of one of the two displays in progress The display mode of the display changes, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (g), the image RDY being prepared is displayed enlarged, etc.],
The third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [The in-provision display in which the display mode has changed overlaps the fluctuating icon, for example, as shown in FIG. The displayed preparation image RDY overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to notice that the two third displays are displayed.

  Here, only two of the third displays may be displayed, or three or more of the third displays may be displayed, and only one third display may be displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, only one display mode of the two third displays may change after the display of one of the two third displays ends, or the other after the display of one of the two third displays ends. Display modes other than the display mode may be changed. Also, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the two third displays has ended, or the other of the two third displays may be changed The display mode of may not change.

  In addition, the display mode of the other may be changed only after the display of one of the two third displays is ended, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is ended. The other display mode may change.

  Also, the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or even if the third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with displays other than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, or the third display in which the display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. .

  Further, only the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, and displays other than the third display in which the display mode has changed may also overlap with the ninth display. .

In addition, when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is finished in one symbol variation display [two in preparation displays are displayed. In this case, all are digested in the same symbol variation display. For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (b) to FIG. 56 (k), the two ready images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when two third displays are displayed, only display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or two third displays are displayed. The display of displays other than all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display. Moreover, when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may always be ended in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, The display of all the third displays may not end in one of the symbol variation displays.

  In addition, when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may be ended only in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, The display of all the third displays may be ended also in the symbol fluctuation display other than the one symbol fluctuation display. Moreover, only when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, except when two third displays are displayed. Also in the case of, the display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display.

Also, “one of the plural types of displays is the tenth display [explanatory display, for example,“ the panda is the master of the hall ”displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 46 (a). It is the displayed explanation etc.],
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display that is displayed in a first display area of the display means when displayed, and [an explanatory display is displayed in a specific display area when displayed, for example, , As shown in FIG. 46 (a), the instruction display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [in preparation display is displayed in a specific display area in which the explanation display is displayed, for example, FIG. As shown in), the in-provisioning image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, etc. where the explanation display is displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or when the display is displayed, the first display area of the display means It may be displayed other than. Moreover, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, and when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be

  The third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in display areas other than the first display area. It is also good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, “display indicating that the display start of a certain advance notice display is waiting” is “character display in preparation [for example,“ in preparation ”in preparation image RDY shown in FIG. Display of letters etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the eleventh display [ball-less display, for example, ball-extraction error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 77 (a1), etc.]”.
The eleventh display is a display prompting the player to eject the game ball [for example, in the ball extraction error display ERR1, the character display of "Please pull the ball" is prompted to open the ball, etc.,
In a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display of at least a part of the third display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display At least a part of the in-provision display is overlapped with the in-progress display in a state where both the in-provision display and the out-of-ball display are displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (a2) In preparation, the image RDY is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the eleventh display may be a display prompting only to eject the game ball, or a display prompting other than the game ball to be ejected. Further, the eleventh display may be a display that always prompts ejection of the game ball, or may be a display that may not prompt the ejection of the game ball.

  Further, the eleventh display may be a display prompting to discharge only the game balls, or a display prompting to discharge other than the game balls.

  In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping only with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped and displayed other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be In addition, in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display of at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display without fail May be displayed, and in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is displayed without being overlapped with the eleventh display It may be configured to be the case.

  In addition, in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, only at least a part of the display of the third display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, displays other than at least a part of the third display are overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. And in a state other than the state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

  Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display of a part of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the whole display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. May be

In addition, in a state in which both the certain advance notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain advance notice display is overlapped and displayed on the eleventh display. When at least a part of the mini game and the timer notice is overlapped with the ball withdrawal display in a state where both the mini game and the timer notice and the ball withdrawal display are displayed, for example, As shown in 77 (b1), the remaining time display meter MT4 is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in a state in which both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped only with the eleventh display. The display may be configured, and in a state in which both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the notice display overlaps the display other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, in a state in which both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the notice display is configured to be displayed so as to be overlapped with the display of the eleventh by all means. Or at least a part of the notice may be displayed without being overlapped with the eleventh in a state where both the notice and the eleventh display are displayed. It may be configured to be the case.

  In addition, in a state in which both of the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, only at least a part of the display of the notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, in a state in which both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state other than the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display overlaps with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

  Further, in a state in which both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the display of the notice display is configured to be displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. It is preferable that all the display of the notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the display of the eleventh when both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed. May be

[The above-mentioned gaming machine is a pachinko machine [ball-and-ball game machine, for example, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

[The above-mentioned gaming machine is a slot machine [rolling-type game machine],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Although the hold icon may be used as a display indicating that the start of a certain effect in the slot machine is held, this can be realized according to this game console.

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N Or two] and
First movable means [for example, as shown in FIG. 14 etc., the characters “Chance” are displayed, and the first movable part 251 having a built-in LED, from the left arc 2511 and the right arc 2512 shown in FIG. A first movable character 251 shown in FIG. 39 and the like, the first movable character 251 on which the face of a character of the lord is drawn, a movable character 256 which is a POV display shown in FIG.
A game console equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device,
The first movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means,
The first movable means is at a first position [e.g., a first position which is a position on the back side of the upper portion of the middle symbol display area 208b (FIG. 18 (d), FIG. 19 (c), FIG. 1), FIG. 28 (i), FIG. 29 (d ′), FIG. 29 (B), FIG. 29 (d ′), FIG. 30 (B)), The position of the back side of the lower part of the left symbol display area 208a A first position (see FIG. 31 (b-2) and FIG. 31 (b-3)), a first position (see FIG. 32 (c)) which is a position on the back side surrounding the circular area S3 ′; One position and the first position on the right side (see (c-1) and (e'-1) in FIG. 37), the first position in which the face of the character of the domino character is on the central back side (FIG. ), Movable means that can move to the rendering position on the back side (see FIG. 43 (a)),
At least a portion of the first movable means at the first position is a first display area of the display area of the display means [eg, FIG. 18 (e), FIG. 19 (d), FIG. (E-1), FIG. 28 (i), FIG. 29 (d '), FIG. 29 (C), FIG. 29 (d), FIG. 30 (B), FIG. 33), the first display area 208-1 in FIG. 33 (p), the first display area 208-1L on the left side and the first display area 208-1R on the right side in FIG. 36 (d-1), FIG. The first display area 208-1L 'on the left side and the first display area 208-1R' on the right side in '-1), the common display area 208-13 in FIG. 40 (f), and the rotation area of the LED array 2561 overlap Region is configured to be overlapped from the front side,
Configured such that the first display area may be in a first visual condition [eg, opaque (but not necessarily completely opaque, relatively low light transmission)] Yes,
The first display area may be in a second visible state [for example, a transparent state (however, the state may not be completely transparent and the amount of light transmission is relatively enhanced)] Is configured and
The second viewing state is configured such that the back side of the display area of the display means can be more easily viewed through the first display area than in the first viewing state [eg, FIG. e), FIG. 19 (d), FIG. 24 (e-1), FIG. 28 (a), FIG. 29 (d '), FIG. 29 (C), FIG. 31 (b-2) and FIG. 33 (p), FIG. 36 (d-1), FIG. 37 (e'-1), FIG.
The first movable means is configured to be at the first position in one state where the first display area is in the second visual recognition state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"). [E.g., FIG. 18 (e), FIG. 19 (d), FIG. 24 (e-1), FIG. 28 (i), FIG. 29 (d '), FIG. 29 (C), FIG. 30 (B), FIG. 31 (b-2) and FIG. 33 (b-3), FIG. 33 (p), FIG. 36 (d-1), FIG. 37 (e'-1), FIG. ),
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Here, as an example of the second visual recognition state, the temporary stop state of the decorative symbol, the finalized display state of the decorative symbol, the stop state of the decorative symbol (including the temporary stop state of the pseudo continuous symbol), the decorative symbol The state where the change is disclosed, the state where the reach effect is started, the state where the reach effect is executed, the state when the super reach effect is developed, the state where the super reach effect is executed, the power support state (time saving state) , Non-power support state (non-short time state), positive change state, non positive change state, big hit gaming state, demonstration display state, state displaying various setting screens, state executing a specific effect (for example, final judge A state in which an effect is being executed), a state in which a specific display is displayed (for example, a state in which a judgment result in the final judgment effect is being displayed) can be listed. That is, as the state not to be in the second visual recognition state, all of the above listed ones may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied. In other words, among the above-listed items, the state to be in the second visual recognition state may be included, and the state to be in the second visual recognition state is the total of the above-listed things. It may be or may be a part.

  As an example of the second visual recognition state, a variation display state of a decorative symbol, a state in which a specific effect is being executed (for example, a state in which a dark effect is being performed, a state in which a pseudo-continuous effect is being performed , Button presentation, timer announcement, specific reach presentation), specific display (for example, displaying a dark background) In the state of displaying a partially dark image, in the state of displaying a button symbol, in the state of displaying a ball drop notice, in the state of displaying a hold icon, and displaying a fluctuation icon A state, a state where a mini character is displayed, a state where the light guide plate emits light, and the like can be listed. That is, as the state to be in the second visual recognition state, all of the above listed ones may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied. In other words, among the above-listed items, the second non-visible state may be included, and the second non-visible state is the total of the above-listed items. It may be or may be a part.

  Further, at least a part of the first movable means which is not in the first position may be configured not to overlap the first display area from the front side. The first viewing state may be configured such that the back side of the display area of the display means is less likely to be viewed through the first display area than in the second viewing state. In a state different from the first state, the first movable means may be configured to be in the first position or may be configured not to be in the first position. Good.

  When the first movable means is in the first position, it may not be in the first state or may not be in the first state.

  When the first movable means is in the first position, it may be configured to be always in the first state.

  The phrase "the first movable means is movable to the first position" means that the first movable means may be movable from the initial position, or may be movable from the second position. It may be The second position may be the initial position.

  Note that the first visual recognition state may be one of the states in which the rear side of the display means can be visually recognized through the first display area. The second viewing state may be one of the states in which the back side of the display means can be viewed through the first display area. The first viewing state may be a state in which the back side of the display means is less likely to be viewed through the first display area than in the second viewing state. Before the first state is reached, the first movable means is in the first position, and after the first state is changed to another state, the first movable means is in the first position. May be moved to another position, in which case, in the first state, the first movable means will always be in the first position. The first movable means may be in the first state before reaching the first position, and before the first state is changed to the other state. The movement may be started to a position different from the one position. Or, conversely, the first movable means does not enter the first state until the first position is reached, but before the other state is changed from the first state. May not start moving to a position different from the first position.

  The first movable means may be means for moving to a first position. Only a part of the first movable means in the first position is configured to overlap from a front side to a part or all of the first display area of the display areas of the display means Or all of the first movable means in the first position may overlap from a front side to a part or all of the first display area of the display areas of the display means. May be configured. The first display area may be configured to be in the first viewing state. In addition, the first display area may be configured to be in the second viewing state. In the first viewing state, the back side of the display means may not be visible through the first display area, or even in the first viewing state, the display may be through the first display area. The rear side of the means may be configured to be visible. A state in which the transmission amount of light is different between the first visual recognition state and the second visual recognition state, and the second visual recognition state has a larger light transmission amount than the first visual recognition state It may be In the first state, the first movable means may be configured to be in the first position.

  An image can be displayed (reproduced) in the first display area in the first visible state, and an image can not be displayed (reproduced) in the first display area in the second visible state It may be

  The first movable means may be a movable means having a plurality of movable bodies.

Also,
"The first movable means is at a second position [for example, a second position which is a position on the back side of the upper portion of the right symbol display area 208c (FIGS. 16 (c), 17 (d), 19 (m) (C), (c), (c), (e), (b), (b), (b)), and in the middle of the middle symbol display area 208b. Movable means movable to the second position (see FIG. 31 (a)), which is the back side, and to the second position (see FIG. 40 (c)), which is the position where the face of the beard character is on the central back side. And
The second position is a position different from the first position,
At least a portion of the first movable means at the second position is a second display area of the display area of the display means [eg, FIG. 16 (d), FIG. 17 (e), FIG. (M), FIG. 20 (d), FIG. 24 (d), FIG. 28 (e), FIG. 29 (c), FIG. 29 (c), FIG. 30 (b); 40 (c) are configured to be overlapped from the front side to the common display area 208-13],
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
Configured such that the second display area may be in a third visual condition [eg, opaque (but not necessarily completely opaque, relatively low light transmission)] Yes,
The second display area may be in a fourth viewing state [for example, a transparent state (however, the state may not be completely transparent and the amount of light transmission is relatively enhanced)]. Is configured and
The fourth viewing state is configured so that the rear side of the display area of the display means can be more easily viewed through the second display area than in the third viewing state [eg, FIG. d), Fig. 17 (e), Fig. 19 (m), Fig. 20 (d), Fig. 24 (d), Fig. 28 (e), Fig. 29 (c), Fig. 29 (c), Fig. 30 (b) , FIG. 40 (c)],
The first movable means is configured to be at the second position in one state where the second display area is in the fourth visual recognition state (hereinafter referred to as "second state"). [E.g., FIG. 16 (d), FIG. 17 (e), FIG. 19 (m), FIG. 20 (d), FIG. 24 (d), FIG. 28 (e), FIG. 29 (c), FIG. C), FIG. 30 (b), FIG. 40 (c)],
In the first state, the second display area is configured to be in the third visible state [eg, FIG. 18 (e), FIG. 19 (d), FIG. 24 (e-1) 28 (a), 29 (d '), 29 (c), 29 (d), 30 (b), 31 (b-2) and FIG. 29 (b-3)],
In the second state, the first display area is configured to be in the first visible state [eg, FIG. 16 (d), FIG. 17 (e), FIG. 19 (m), FIG. 20 (d), FIG. 24 (d), FIG. 28 (e), FIG. 29 (c), FIG. 29 (c), FIG. 30 (b)],
After being in the first state, execution of the first notice effect [for example, the first notice effect (pseudo rendition effect, reach effect, super reach effect (swords reach effect), advance notice) is started [For example, it is always started] [for example, FIG. 19 (j), FIG. 28 (c), FIG. 30 (D)],
After the second state is reached, the execution of the first preview effect may be started [for example, it may not be started but it may be started] [e.g. 20 (j), 24 (j), 28 (i)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, at least a part of the first movable means not in the second position may be configured not to overlap the second display area from the front side. The third viewing state may be configured such that the back side of the display area of the display means is less likely to be viewed through the second display area than in the fourth viewing state. The first movable means may be configured to be at the second position in a state in which the second display area is not in the fourth visual recognition state, and the first movable means may be configured to It may be configured not to be in the first position. The second display area may be configured to be in the third viewing state in a state different from the first state, or the second display area may be in the third viewing state. It may be configured not to In a state different from the second state, the first display area may be configured to be in the first visual state, or is configured not to be in the first visual state. May be The execution of the first preview effect may be started before the first state is reached, or the first preview effect may be executed before the first state is reached. It may be configured not to start. The execution of the first preview effect may be started before the second state is reached, or before the second state is reached, the first It may be configured such that the execution of the advance presentation effect does not start.

  When the first movable means is in the second position, it may not be in the second state or may not be in the second state.

  When the first movable means is in the second position, it may be configured to be always in the second state. When the second display area is in the third visual recognition state, it may be configured to be always in the first state. When the first display area is in the first viewing state, it may be configured to be always in the second state.

  The phrase "the first movable means is movable to the second position" may mean that the first movable means is movable from the initial position, or may be movable from the first position. It may be

  It may transition to the second state through the first state. If it transfers to the said 2nd state through the said 1st state, it may correspond to a demotion effect. On the contrary, it may transition to the first state through the second state. When shifting to the first state after passing through the second state, it may correspond to a promotion effect. In one symbol variation display, only one state can be taken, and there may be a case where state transition is performed after the next symbol variation display is started. Alternatively, state transition may be performed in one symbol variation display.

  The probability that the first preliminary presentation effect is performed may be different depending on whether the first state or the second state is reached. The fourth viewing state may be one of the states in which the back side of the display means can be viewed through the second display area. The third visual recognition state may be a state in which the rear side of the display means is less likely to be visible through the second display area than the fourth visual recognition state. The third visible state may be an opaque state, and the first visible state may also be an opaque state. Further, the third visual recognition state and the first visual recognition state may have the same light transmission amount. Furthermore, the fourth visual recognition state and the second visual recognition state may have the same light transmission amount. The first movable means is in the second position before the second state is reached, and the first movable means is in the second position after the second state is changed to the other state May be moved to another position, in which case in the second state the first movable means will always be in the second position. The second movable state may be in the second state before the first movable means reaches the second position, and the first movable means is in the second state before the second state is changed to the other state. The movement may be started to a position different from the second position. Or, conversely, the second state is not reached until the first movable means reaches the second position, and before the other state is changed from the second state. May not start moving to a position different from the second position. The second position may be an initial position of the first movable means, the first movable means being movable from the second position to the first position, It may be returned from one position to the second position. Also, there may be an initial position of the first movable means separately from the second position and the first position. The execution of the first preview effect may be started may be that the execution of the first preview effect may be started in the second state, or the second Even if the first state is reached after becoming the state, the execution of the first preview effect is started in the first state when the first state is reached. Good. The former and the latter may both be included, or the former alone or the latter may be included.

  The first movable means may be means for moving to a second position. Only a part of the first movable means in the second position is configured to overlap from a front side to a part or all of a second display area of the display area of the display means All of the first movable means in the second position may be overlapped from the front side to a part or all of the second display area of the display areas of the display means. It may be configured as follows. The second display area may be configured to be in the third visual recognition state. The second display area may be configured to be in the fourth visual recognition state. In the third viewing state, the back side of the display means may not be visible through the second display area, or even in the third viewing state, the display may be performed through the second display area. The rear side of the means may be configured to be visible. A state in which the transmission amount of light is different between the third visual recognition state and the fourth visual recognition state, and the light transmission amount is larger in the fourth visual recognition state than in the third visual recognition state It may be In the second state, the first movable means may be configured to be in the second position. In the first state, the second display area may be configured to be necessarily in the third viewing state, or may be configured to be in the third viewing state. May be In the second state, the first display area may be configured to be always in the first viewing state, or may be configured to be in the first viewing state. May be After the first state is reached, the execution of the first preview effect may be always started. After the second state is reached, execution of the first preview effect may not be started, or may be started.

  An image can be displayed (reproduced) in the second display area in the third viewing state, and an image can not be displayed (reproduced) in the second display area in the fourth viewing state It may be

  The first preview effect may be performed more easily in the first state than in the second state. That is, when the first movable means is in the first position in the first state, it is more than when the first movable means is in the second position in the second state. , It is easy to perform the first preview effect. In the first state, when the first movable means is in the first position, it is more in the second state than when the first movable means is in the second position. Finally, the jackpot symbol aspect may be easily displayed in a definite manner [e.g. the jackpot expectation may be high).

Also,
It is configured to be able to display “first display [for example, display of a hold icon by display mode of pre-read notice, display of mini character of ninja NJA]”,
The first display is one of pre-reading notice display,
At least a part of the area where the first display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area overlap each other [for example, FIG. 29 (D), FIG. And FIG. (B-3)],
The area where the first display is displayed and the second display area do not overlap [for example, FIG. 29 (D), FIG. 31 (b-2) and FIG. ),
In the state where the first display is displayed, the first display area may be in the second visual recognition state [for example, it may not be or may not be displayed]. For example, FIG. 29 (D), FIG. 31 (b-2) and FIG. (B-3)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only the first display area overlaps the area where the first display is displayed. In addition, the area | region where the said 1st display is displayed is called "1st area | region." Further, at least a part of the first region is referred to as a "first partial region". Furthermore, at least a part of the first display area is referred to as a "first partial display area".

  At least a part of the area where the first display is not displayed and at least a part of the first display area may be configured to overlap or may not overlap. The area where the first display is not displayed and the second display area may overlap. In the state where the first display is not displayed, the first display area may be configured to be in the second viewing state, or in the second viewing state. It may be configured not to be the case.

  When the first display area is in the second viewing state, the first display may be displayed without fail.

  The timing when the display of the first display ends and the timing when the second viewing state of the first display area ends may be simultaneous, or the display of the first display ends. The timing may be earlier, or the timing at which the second viewing state of the first display area ends may be earlier.

  When only a part of the area in which the first display is displayed overlaps with a part or all of the first display area, the first display is displayed only in part. On the other hand, when the whole of the area where the first display is displayed overlaps with part or all of the first display area, the first display is not displayed (disappears) It will be. In addition, the first display area may or may not overlap at least a part of the area where the first display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area. The display of will be all displayed. As a case where both overlapping and nonoverlapping occur, there are cases where the display position of the first display changes. For example, when the first display is the hold icon of the pre-read notice mode, the display position of the hold icon changes every time the hold is digested (the hold icon is shifted), so the pre-read notice mode The hold icon may leave the first display area or approach the first display area.

Note that at least a part of the area where the first display is displayed and at least a part of the second display area overlap each other,
The second display area may be configured to be in the fourth visual recognition state when the first display is displayed.

  It may be configured to display the first display without fail. Only a part of the area where the first display is displayed and a part or all of the first display area may overlap, or the entire area where the first display is displayed And a part or all of the first display area may be configured to overlap. In the state where the first display is displayed, the first display area may be configured to be always in the second visual recognition state, and the first display area is the second display state. It may not be visible.

Also,
[The first preliminary rendering effect is one of the preliminary rendering effects on the symbol change during the fluctuation [eg, pseudo rendering, reach production, super reach production (Swords strike reach production)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
It is configured to be able to display “first display [for example, display of a hold icon by display mode of pre-read notice, display of mini character of ninja NJA]”,
The first display is one of pre-reading notice display,
At least a part of the area where the first display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area overlap each other [for example, FIG. 29 (D), FIG. And FIG. (B-3)],
In the state where the first display is displayed, the first display area may be in the second visual recognition state [for example, it may not be or may not be displayed]. For example, FIG. 29 (D), FIG. 31 (b-2) and FIG. (B-3)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in addition to the first display area, other display areas such as the second display area may overlap the first area.

  At least a part of the area where the first display is not displayed and at least a part of the first display area may be configured to overlap or may not overlap. The first display area may be configured to be in the second visual recognition state when the first display is not displayed, or may not be in the second visual recognition state May be configured to

  When the first display area is in the second viewing state, the first display may be displayed without fail.

  The timing when the display of the first display ends and the timing when the second viewing state of the first display area ends may be simultaneous, or the display of the first display ends. The timing may be earlier, or the timing at which the second viewing state of the first display area ends may be earlier.

  When only a part of the area in which the first display is displayed overlaps with a part or all of the first display area, the first display is displayed only in part. On the other hand, when the whole of the area where the first display is displayed overlaps with part or all of the first display area, the first display is not displayed (disappears) It will be. In addition, the first display area may or may not overlap at least a part of the area where the first display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area. The display of will be all displayed. As a case where both overlapping and nonoverlapping occur, there are cases where the display position of the first display changes. For example, when the first display is the hold icon of the pre-read notice mode, the display position of the hold icon changes every time the hold is digested (the hold icon is shifted), so the pre-read notice mode The hold icon may leave the first display area or approach the first display area.

Note that at least a part of the area where the first display is displayed and at least a part of the second display area overlap each other,
The second display area may be configured to be in the fourth visual recognition state when the first display is displayed.

  It may be configured to display the first display without fail. Only a part of the area where the first display is displayed and a part or all of the first display area may overlap, or the entire area where the first display is displayed And a part or all of the first display area may be configured to overlap. In the state where the first display is displayed, the first display area may be configured to be always in the second visual recognition state, and the first display area is the second display state. It may not be visible.

Also,
It is configured to be able to display “second display [for example, display of fluctuation icon according to display mode of pseudo-series production, reach production, super reach production (Kenou reach production), advance notice],
The second display is one of the notice displays regarding symbol variation during variation,
At least a part of the area in which the second display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area overlap (for example, FIG. 18 (e), FIG. 18 (m ′)),
The area in which the second display is displayed and the second display area do not overlap.
In the state where the second display is displayed, the first display area may be in the second visual recognition state [for example, it may not be or may not be displayed]. For example, FIG. 18 (e), FIG. 18 (m ')],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only the first display area overlaps the area in which the second display is displayed. In addition, the area | region where the said 2nd display is displayed is called "2nd area | region." Further, at least a part of the second region is referred to as a "second partial region". Furthermore, at least a part of the second display area is referred to as a "second partial display area".

  At least part of the area where the second display is not displayed and at least part of the first display area may be configured to overlap or may not overlap. The area where the second display is not displayed and the second display area may overlap. The first display area may be configured to be in the second visual recognition state when the second display is not displayed, or may not be in the second visual recognition state May be configured to

  When the first display area is in the second viewing state, the second display may be displayed without fail.

  In the case where the first preliminary effect is one of the preliminary effects on symbol variation during change, the first preliminary effect and the second display are the same "preceding" announcements. May be Here, “something” means, in a broad sense, a big hit in changing symbol patterns, but for example, a certain effect (a certain super reach effect or a certain pseudo-sequence effect) is performed It may be a pre-notification about whether or not it may be, more specifically, it may be a turning effect as to whether a certain effect is performed. Or, conversely, the first preview effect and the second display may be different "presence" announcements. For example, one of the first preview effect and the second display may be a super reach effect, and the other may be a pseudo continuous effect.

Note that at least a part of the area in which the display of the second display is displayed and at least a part of the second display area overlap.
The second display area may be configured to be in the fourth visual recognition state in a state where the display of the second display is displayed.

  Alternatively, only a part of the area in which the second display is displayed and a part or all of the first display area may overlap, or the entire area in which the second display is displayed And a part or all of the first display area may be configured to overlap. In the state where the second display is displayed, the first display area may be configured to be always in the second visible state, and the first display area is the second display. It may not be visible.

  The second display may be a display different from the display by the first preview effect.

Also,
It is configured to be able to display “second display [for example, display of fluctuation icon according to display mode of pseudo-series production, reach production, super reach production (Kenou reach production), advance notice],
The second display is one of the notice displays regarding symbol variation during variation,
At least a part of the area in which the second display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area overlap (for example, FIG. 18 (e), FIG. 18 (m ′)),
In the state where the second display is displayed, the first display area may be in the second visual recognition state [for example, it may not be or may not be displayed]. For example, FIG. 18 (e), FIG. 18 (m ')],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in addition to the first display area, other display areas such as the second display area may overlap with the second area.

  At least part of the area where the second display is not displayed and at least part of the first display area may be configured to overlap or may not overlap. The first display area may be configured to be in the second visual recognition state when the second display is not displayed, or in the second visual recognition state. It may be configured such that there is no

  When the first display area is in the second viewing state, the second display may be displayed without fail.

  In the case where the first preliminary effect is one of the preliminary effects on symbol variation during change, the first preliminary effect and the second display are the same "preceding" announcements. May be Here, “something” means, in a broad sense, a big hit in changing symbol patterns, but for example, a certain effect (a certain super reach effect or a certain pseudo-sequence effect) is performed It may be a pre-notification about whether or not it may be, more specifically, it may be a turning effect as to whether a certain effect is performed. Or, conversely, the first preview effect and the second display may be different "presence" announcements. For example, one of the first preview effect and the second display may be a super reach effect, and the other may be a pseudo continuous effect.

Note that at least a part of the area in which the display of the second display is displayed and at least a part of the second display area overlap.
The second display area may be configured to be in the fourth visual recognition state in a state where the display of the second display is displayed.

  Alternatively, only a part of the area in which the second display is displayed and a part or all of the first display area may overlap, or the entire area in which the second display is displayed And a part or all of the first display area may be configured to overlap. In the state where the second display is displayed, the first display area may be configured to be always in the second visible state, and the first display area is the second display. It may not be visible.

  The second display may be a display different from the display by the first preview effect.

Also,
[The second movable means [eg, family crest 224E],
The second movable means is a movable means provided on the front side of the display means,
The second movable means is movable means movable to a third position [e.g., a third position which is a position of a family crest 224E represented by a black solid line in FIG. 32 (b)],
It is configured to be able to execute the second preview effect,
The second announcement effect is performed when the first movable means is positioned at the first position [eg, FIG. 33 (o) to FIG. (R) to FIG. 34 (a) It is a normal notice effect which is a joint effect by the first movable character 251 and the family crest 224E.
The second notice effect is a notice effect performed when the second movable means is positioned at the third position,
In at least a part of the states where the first movable means is positioned at the first position in the second preview effect, the first display area becomes the second visual recognition state Are configured as [for example, FIG. 33 (p) to FIG. (R)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in at least a part of the states in which the first movable means is not positioned at the first position in the second preview effect, the first display area is the second display area. You may be comprised so that it may be in a visual recognition state, and you may be comprised so that it may not be in said 2nd visual recognition state.

  Even when the first display area is in the second visual recognition state, the first movable means is always positioned at the first position in the second preview effect. Good.

  The phrase "the second movable means is movable to the third position" may mean that the second movable means is movable from the initial position, or may be movable from the sixth position It may be

  It may be the second notice effect including the movement of the first movable means to the first position itself, or the movement itself may not be the second notice effect. In addition, it may be the second notice effect including the movement of the second movable means to the third position itself, or the movement itself may not be the second notice effect. Good.

  The second notice effect may be a notice effect including the effect that the first movable means is located at the first position, or the second notice effect may be the second movable means May be a preview effect including the effect located at the third position.

  The first display area is configured to be in the second visible state in at least a part of the states in which the second movable means is located at the third position. May be That is, in the state of only a part of the states in which the second movable means is positioned at the third position, or in all states in which the second movable means is positioned at the third position The first display area may be configured to be in the second viewing state. In addition, "state" said here can also be regarded as "period".

  The first display area may be configured to be in the second visible state in at least a part of the effect in which the first movable means is located at the first position. That is, the first display area only in a part of the effect where the first movable means is located at the first position or in all the effects where the first movable means is located at the first position May be configured to be in the second visual recognition state.

  It may be configured to execute the second preview effect. The second preview effect may be an effect including only the effect that the first movable means is at the first position, or the first movable means is at the first position. It may be an effect including an effect to be performed and other effects. The second preview effect may be an effect including only the effect that the second movable means is located at the third position, or the second movable means is located at the third position It may be an effect including an effect to be performed and other effects. In the state of only a part of the states where the first movable means is positioned at the first position in the second preview effect, the first display area must be in the second visual recognition state The first display area may not be in the second viewing state. Alternatively, in all states where the first movable means is positioned at the first position in the second preview effect, the first display area is always in the second visible state. The first display area may not be in the second visible state. In addition, "state" said here can also be regarded as "period".

Also,
[A third movable means [e.g., a third movable character 253],
The third movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means,
The third movable means has a fourth position [for example, an initial position (fourth position) which is a position of the third movable part 253 shown in FIG. 32 (e)] to a fifth position [for example, FIG. (E) movable means movable to the fifth position, which is the position of the third movable actor 253, represented by the dotted line in (e),
The second movable means is movable means movable to a sixth position [e.g., a sixth position, which is the position of a family crest 224E represented by a gray solid line in FIG. 32 (b)],
At least a portion of the third movable means at the fifth position is a third display area of the display areas of the display means [for example, a third display area 208 shown in FIG. 3) is configured to be overlapped from the front side,
It is configured to be able to execute the third preview effect,
The third advance notice effect is a notice effect performed when the third movable means is positioned at the fifth position [eg, a normal advance notice effect which is a transparent effect in FIG. 35A].
The third preliminary rendering is a preliminary rendering performed after the second preliminary rendering is performed,
At least a part of the states (hereinafter referred to as the “third state”) of the states after the execution of the second preliminary rendering and before the start of the third preliminary rendering (for example, “the third state”) In the state of FIG. 34 (p)], the second movable means is configured to be in the sixth position,
In the third state, the third movable means is configured to be at the fourth position [e.g., a third movable service 253 shown by a dotted line in FIG. 34 (p)],
At least a portion of the third movable means [for example, the third movable part 253 shown by a dotted line in FIG. 34 (p)] in the fourth position is the second movable in the sixth position It is configured to be overlapped from the front side with the means [for example, the family casket 224E shown in FIG. 34 (p)]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the third state may be one of the states after the execution of the second preliminary effect and before the start of the third preliminary effect. Moreover, after execution of said 2nd notice production, it may be in another one state from said 3rd state among the states before execution of said 3rd notice production is started. It may be configured as follows. The “another one state” referred to here may be a state before the third state or a state after the third state. Furthermore, "another one state" may be longer or shorter than the third state.

  At least a portion of the third movable means not in the fifth position may be configured not to overlap the third display area from the front side. In a state different from the third state, the second movable means may be configured to be in the sixth position or may be configured not to be in the sixth position. Good. In a state different from the third state, the third movable means may be configured to be in the fourth position, or may not be configured to be in the fourth position. Good. At least a portion of the third movable means not in the fourth position may be configured not to overlap the second movable means in the sixth position from the front side.

  When the second movable means is in the sixth position, it may not be in the third state or may not be in the third state.

  When the third movable means is in the fourth position, it may not be in the third state or may not be in the third state.

  When the second movable means is in the sixth position, it may be configured to be always in the third state.

  When the third movable means is in the fourth position, it may be configured to be always in the third state.

  The fourth position may be an initial position of the third movable means.

  "The second movable means can be moved to the sixth position" may mean that the second movable means can be moved from the initial position, or can be moved from the third position It may be

  The movement of the third movable means to the fifth position may be the third advance notice effect including itself, or the movement itself may not be the third advance effect.

  The third preliminary effect may be an effect including an effect in which the third movable means is located at the fifth position.

The third display area may be configured to be in the seventh visual recognition state,
The third display area may be configured to be in an eighth visual condition,
The eighth viewing state may be configured to be easier to view the back side of the display means through the third display area than the seventh viewing state.

  Furthermore, in a state where the third display area is in the eighth visual recognition state, the third movable means may be configured to be at the fifth position.

  The third movable means may be provided on the back side of the first movable means, or may be provided on the front side. Alternatively, the third movable means may be provided at the same position in the front-rear direction as the first movable means.

A light transmitting means having a light transmitting property;
An irradiation unit capable of irradiating the light transmitting unit with light;
Equipped with
The light transmitting means is a means provided on the front side of the second movable means,
The first region in the light transmitting means is a light emitting region,
The light emitting region is a region capable of emitting at least light toward the front side by the light irradiated from the irradiating unit.
The first area is an area in front of the third display area,
The third movable means is configured to be at the fifth position in a state where the third display area is in the eighth visual recognition state,
The light emitting area may be configured to emit light in a state in which the third display area is in the eighth visual recognition state.

  The third movable means may be means for moving from the fourth position to the fifth position. The second movable means may be means for moving to a sixth position. Only a part of the third movable means in the fifth position is configured to overlap from a front side to a part or all of a third display area of the display areas of the display means All of the third movable means in the fifth position may overlap from the front side to a part or all of the third display area of the display areas of the display means. It may be configured as follows. It may be configured to execute the third preview effect. The third preview effect may be an effect including only the effect that the third movable means is located at the fifth position, and the third preview effect may be the third movable means May be an effect including the effect located at the fifth position and other effects. The third preliminary effect may be an effect that is always performed after the execution of the second preliminary effect, or may be an effect that may or may not be performed. The third state may be a state of only a part of the state after the execution of the second preview effect and before the start of the third preview effect, or It may be all states after the execution of the second preview effect and before the start of the third preview effect. In addition, "state" said here can also be regarded as "period". In the third state, the second movable means may be configured to be in the sixth position. Only a part of the third movable means in the fourth position is configured to overlap from a front side to a part or all of the second movable means in the sixth position Or all of the third movable means in the fourth position may overlap from a front side to part or all of the second movable means in the sixth position. It may be configured.

Also,
[First light emitting means [for example, an LED built in the first movable part 251 shown in FIG. 14 etc.]]
Second light emitting means [for example, all of the upper LED 2541, the middle LED 2542 and the lower LED 2543 shown in FIG.
Equipped with
The first light emitting means is a light emitting means provided to the first movable means,
The second light emitting means is not provided in the first movable means [for example, provided in the fourth movable part 254],
The second light emitting means [e.g., the upper LED 2541] located at a certain position [e.g. It is configured to overlap from the front side with the fourth display area [for example, the fourth display area 208-4 shown in FIG. 20 (n)] in the display area of the display means,
The fourth display area is a display area different from the first display area,
The fourth display area is a display area different from the second display area,
The fourth display area may be in a fifth visual condition [eg, opaque (but not necessarily completely opaque, relatively low light transmission)] Yes,
As the fourth display area may be in a sixth visual recognition state [eg, a transparent state (however, it may not be completely transparent and the amount of light transmission is relatively enhanced)] Is configured and
The sixth viewing state is configured such that the back side of the display area of the display means can be more easily viewed through the fourth display area than in the fifth viewing state,
The second light emitting unit may be configured to emit light in a state in which the fourth display area is in the fifth visual recognition state (hereinafter referred to as "fourth state") [e.g. , FIG. 20 (o)],
In the fourth state, the first display area is configured to be in the first visible state [eg, the entire display screen is opaque as shown in FIG. 20 (o)].
In the fourth state, the second display area is configured to be in the third visual recognition state [eg, the entire display screen is opaque as shown in FIG. 20 (o)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the fourth state may be one of the states in which the fourth display area is in the fifth visible state. That is, even in one state other than the fourth state, the fourth display area may be configured to be in the fifth visual state.

  The second light emitting means which is not at a certain position may be configured not to overlap the fourth display area of the display areas of the display means from the front side. The fifth viewing state may be configured such that the rear side of the display area of the display means is less likely to be viewed through the fourth display area than the sixth viewing state. The second light emitting means may be configured to emit light in a state different from the fourth state, or may be configured to not emit light. The first display area may be configured to be in the first viewing state in a state different from the fourth state, or is configured to not be in the first viewing state. May be In a state different from the fourth state, the second display area may be configured to be in the third viewing state, or is configured not to be in the third viewing state. May be

  When the second light emitting means emits light, it may be configured to be always in the fourth state.

  When the first display area is in the first viewing state, it may be configured to be always in the fourth state.

  When the second display area is in the third visual recognition state, it may be configured to be always in the fourth state.

  The state may be shifted to the fourth state through the first state, or may be shifted to the fourth state through the second state. Alternatively, on the contrary, it may transition to the first state via the fourth state, or may transition to the second state via the fourth state.

Also,
"The third light emitting means,
The third light emitting means is not provided to the first movable means, and
The third light emitting means at a certain position is configured to overlap with the eleventh display area of the display areas of the display means from the front side.
The position of the second light emitting means at the certain position is different from the position of the third light emitting means at the certain position,
The eleventh display area is a display area different from the first display area,
The eleventh display area is a display area different from the second display area,
The eleventh display area is a display area different from the fourth display area,
The eleventh display area may be configured to be in a seventh visual recognition state,
The eleventh display area is configured to be in an eighth visual state.
The eighth viewing state is configured such that the rear side of the display area of the display means can be more easily viewed through the eleventh display area than in the seventh viewing state,
The third light emitting means may emit light in a state in which the eleventh display area is in the seventh visual recognition state (hereinafter referred to as "the eleventh state"). ,
In the eleventh state, the first display area is configured to be in the first visual state,
In the eleventh state, the second display area is configured to be in the third viewing state,
After the fourth state, it is configured to start the execution of a certain effect,
The execution of the certain effect may be started after the eleventh state is reached. "
Here, the certain effect may be a first reach effect (for example, an overreach effect).

  In the case of a configuration in which the second reach effect (for example, sword strike reach effect) has a higher expectation (reliability) in which the big hit symbol is finally displayed finalized than the first reach effect. The second reach effect may be configured to be started after the first state is reached. In addition, the first position and the position of the second light emitting means at the certain position are adjacent or close to each other, or the positional relationship is likely to be misidentified by the player. In the fourth state, when the second light emitting means emits light, the player misunderstands that the first light emitting means is emitting light, and it is expected that the second reach effect is started. May increase the interest of the game.

  The second light emitting means may be provided on a movable means different from the first movable means, and the position where the other movable means is moved may be the certain position, If the two light emitting means are not provided and fixed in any movable means, the fixed position may be the certain position. The fifth viewing state may be one of the states in which the back side of the display means can be viewed through the fourth display area. The sixth viewing state may be one of the states in which the back side of the display means can be viewed through the fourth display area. The sixth visual recognition state may be a state in which the rear side of the display means is less likely to be visible through the fourth display area than the fifth visual recognition state. In the fourth state, the first light emitting means may be configured not to emit light.

  Only a part of the second light emitting means at a certain position is configured to overlap from a front side to a part or all of a fourth display area of the display areas of the display means Alternatively, all of the second light emitting means at a certain position may be configured to overlap from a front side with part or all of a fourth display area of the display areas of the display means. It may be The fourth display area may be configured to be in the fifth visual condition. The fourth display area may be configured to be always in a sixth visual recognition state. In the fifth viewing state, the back side of the display means may not be visible through the fourth display area, or even in the fifth viewing state, the display may be performed through the fourth display area. The rear side of the means may be configured to be visible. In the fourth state, the second light emitting means may be configured to always emit light, or the second light emitting means may not emit light. In the fourth state, the first display area may be configured to be always in the first visual recognition state, or the first display area may be in the first visual recognition state. It may be configured as it is. In the fourth state, the second display area may be configured to be always in the third visual recognition state, or the second display area may be in the third visual recognition state. It may be configured as it is. In the fourth state, the first light emitting means may be configured not to always emit light, or the first light emitting means may be configured to emit light.

  An image can be displayed (reproduced) in the fourth display area in the fifth visible state, and an image can not be displayed (reproduced) in the fourth display area in the sixth visible state It may be

Also,
[Fourth movable means [for example, the fourth movable part 254 shown in FIG. 14 etc.]
The second light emitting means is a light emitting means provided to the fourth movable means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the fourth movable means may be provided on the back side of the display means. The second light emitting means may be a light emitting means having a plurality of light emitters. The moving direction of the fourth movable means may be different from or the same as the moving direction of the first movable means. The fourth movable means may be provided on the back side of the first movable means, or may be provided on the front side. Alternatively, the fourth movable means and the first movable means may be provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. In this case, the fourth movable means and the first movable means Move so as not to interfere with each other.

Also,
“Third display [for example, display“ Please pull out the sphere shown in FIG. 29 (a) etc. ”, button image 136 a shown in FIG. Period meter display 136c] can be displayed.
The third display is one of the displays prompting the player to operate.
At least a part of the area where the third display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area overlap each other [for example, FIG. 29 (d ′), FIG. 29 (C)],
The area where the third display is displayed and the second display area do not overlap [for example, FIG. 29 (C)],
In the state where the third display is displayed, the first display area may be in the second visual recognition state [for example, FIG. 29 (d ′), FIG. 29 (C) ),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only the first display area overlaps the area where the third display is displayed. In addition, the area | region where the said 3rd display is displayed is called "3rd area | region." Further, at least a part of the third region is referred to as a "third partial region". Furthermore, as described above, at least a part of the first display area is referred to as a "first partial display area".

  At least part of the area where the third display is not displayed and at least part of the first display area may be configured to overlap or may not overlap. The area where the third display is not displayed and the second display area may overlap. In the state where the third display is not displayed, the first display area may be configured to be in the second viewing state, or in the second viewing state. It may be configured not to be the case.

  When the first display area is in the second viewing state, the third display may be displayed without fail.

Also,
“Third display [for example, display“ Please pull out the sphere shown in FIG. 29 (a) etc. ”, button image 136 a shown in FIG. Period meter display 136c] can be displayed.
The third display is one of the displays prompting the player to operate.
At least a part of the area where the third display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area overlap each other [for example, FIG. 29 (d ′), FIG. 29 (C)],
In the state where the third display is displayed, the first display area may be in the second visual recognition state [for example, FIG. 29 (d ′), FIG. 29 (C) ),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in addition to the first display area, other display areas such as the second display area may overlap the third area.

  At least part of the area where the third display is not displayed and at least part of the first display area may be configured to overlap or may not overlap. In the state where the third display is not displayed, the first display area may be configured to be in the second viewing state, or in the second viewing state. It may be configured not to be the case.

  When the first display area is in the second viewing state, the third display may be displayed without fail.

  Note that the third display may be a display prompting a game ball discharge operation, or may be a display prompting an operation of the effect operation means. At least a part of the area where the third display is displayed and at least a part of the second display area may not overlap. Conversely, at least a part of the area in which the third display is displayed and at least a part of the second display area are configured to overlap, and the third display is displayed in the state where the third display is displayed. The second display area may be configured to be in the fourth viewing state.

  It may be configured to always display the third display. Only a part of the area where the third display is displayed and a part or all of the first display area may overlap, or the entire area where the third display is displayed And a part or all of the first display area may be configured to overlap. In the state where the third display is displayed, the first display area may be configured to be always in the second visual recognition state, and the first display area is the second display state. It may not be visible.

Also,
“The above-mentioned third display is a display prompting to eject the game ball [for example,“ a display of “Please pull the ball” shown in FIG. 29 (a) ”, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The player has an operation means [eg, a chance button 136] operable by the player,
The third display is a display including an image imitating the appearance of the operation means [for example, a button image 136a shown in FIG. 136b and remaining period meter display 136c],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, a second operation means (for example, a transparent portion 191, a second chance button, an operation lever, etc.) operable by the player is provided, and the third display imitates the appearance of the second operation means. It may be a display including an image.

  Furthermore, the third display is a display that can be displayed in one of a plurality of types of display modes, and one of the plurality of types of display modes is an image imitating the appearance of the operation means A second display mode including an image obtained by enlarging the appearance of the operation means, and one of the plurality of types of display modes is the third display mode. If it is displayed in the second display mode, it is easier to succeed in a certain effect or a certain effect is more likely to be started than in the first display mode, and the big hit symbol is finally determined display It may be easy to do. In the area in which the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the second display mode, and the third display is displayed in the first display mode. Also, the second display area may be easily overlapped. As described above, the area in which the third display is displayed is likely to overlap with the second display area, is difficult to overlap, or the overlapping area is wide or narrow depending on the display mode of the third display. You may

Also,
[The player has an operation means [eg, a chance button 136] operable by the player,
The third display [for example, a button image 136a shown in FIG. 29A, etc., an arrow display 136b as an operation prompting display, and a remaining period meter display 136c] can be displayed.
The third display is one of the displays prompting the player to operate.
The third display is a display including an image simulating the appearance of the operation means [for example, a button image 136a shown in FIG.
At least a part of the area where the third display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area overlap each other [eg, FIG. 29 (C)],
The area where the third display is displayed and the second display area do not overlap [eg, FIG. 29 (C)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only the first display area overlaps the area where the third display is displayed. In the same manner as described above, the area where the third display is displayed is referred to as a "third area". Further, at least a part of the third region is referred to as a "third partial region". Furthermore, at least a part of the first display area is referred to as a "first partial display area".

  At least part of the area where the third display is not displayed and at least part of the first display area may be configured to overlap or may not overlap. The area where the third display is not displayed and the second display area may overlap.

Also,
It is configured to be able to display “the fourth display [for example, the display of“ Please pull off the ball ”shown in FIG. 29 (a) etc.”, ”
The fourth display is one of the displays prompting the player to operate.
The fourth display is a display prompting to eject the game ball,
At least a part of the area where the fourth display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area overlap each other [eg, FIG. 29 (d ′)],
At least a part of the area where the fourth display is displayed and at least a part of the second display area overlap each other [for example, FIG. 29 (c)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, at least a part of the area where the fourth display is not displayed and at least a part of the first display area may be configured to overlap or may not overlap. . At least part of the area where the fourth display is not displayed and at least part of the second display area may be configured to overlap or may not overlap.

Also,
The second display area is the one other than the second state [eg, a part of the initial operation immediately after the power is turned on, part or all of the jackpot game] It is configured to be in four visual states.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The “another state” referred to here may be a state immediately after the power is turned on, or may be a part or all of the state in the jackpot game. In addition, it may be a state before the second state or may be a state after the second state. Furthermore, "another one state" may be longer than the second state. However, it may be a short period of time.

Also,
Even in one state other than the first state [e.g., a part of the initial operation immediately after the power is turned on, a part or all of the state in the big hit game], the first display area is the first display area It is configured to be in the second visible state,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The “another state” referred to here may be a state immediately after the power is turned on, or may be a part or all of the state in the jackpot game. In addition, it may be a state before the first state or may be a state after the first state. Furthermore, "another one state" may be longer than the first state. However, it may be a short period of time.

Also,
[The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The gaming machine is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above explanation,
“Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N Or two] and
A first movable means [for example, a first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 32 or the like, which comprises a left circular arc 2511 and a right circular arc 2512];
A second movable means [for example, a family crest 224E shown in FIG. 32 etc.];
A game console equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device,
The first movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means,
The second movable means is a movable means provided on the front side of the display means,
The first movable means is a movable means movable to a first position [for example, a first position (see FIG. 32 (c)) which is a position on the back side surrounding the circular area S3 ',
At least a part of the first movable means at the first position is the first display area of the display areas of the display means [eg, the first display area 208-1 in FIG. 33 (p)] Are configured to be overlapped from the front side,
Configured such that the first display area may be in a first visual condition [eg, opaque (but not necessarily completely opaque, relatively low light transmission)] Yes,
The first display area may be in a second visible state [for example, a transparent state (however, the state may not be completely transparent and the amount of light transmission is relatively enhanced)] Is configured and
The second viewing state is configured such that the back side of the display area of the display means can be more easily viewed through the first display area than in the first viewing state [eg, FIG. p) ~ Figure (r)],
The first movable means is configured to be at the first position in one state where the first display area is in the second visual recognition state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"). [Eg, FIG. 33 (p) to FIG. (R)],
The second movable means is movable means movable to a second position [e.g., a third position which is a position of a family crest 224E represented by a black solid line in FIG. 32B].
In the first state, the second movable means is configured to be at the second position [eg, FIG. 33 (p) to FIG. (R)],
The first effect is configured to be executed in the first state,
The first effect includes an effect to be performed by the first movable means in the first position and the second movable means in the second position working together [eg, The effect shown in FIG. 33 (p) to FIG. 33 (r)]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The second position is a position in an area overlapping with the first display area from the front side,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"Even when the second movable means is moved to the second position, the first display area does not enter the second visible state but remains in the first visible state There are also cases (hereinafter referred to as “if it exists”) [for example, “the case where the first display area does not become the second visible state” described in paragraph 1313],
In the said case, the said 1st presentation is not performed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The effect described above by“ the first movable means in the first position and the second movable means in the second position cooperate with each other ”means“ the first effect. An effect representing one [for example, a crest with a decorative member disposed on the outer periphery] by the first movable means at the position of and the second movable means at the second position.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The effect described above by“ the first movable means in the first position and the second movable means in the second position cooperate with each other ”means“ the first effect. And the second movable means in the second position appear to be combined in a three-dimensional manner.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[A third movable means [e.g., a third movable character 253],
The third movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means,
The third movable means has a third initial position [eg, an initial position (fourth position) of a third movable part 253 shown in FIG. 32 (e)] to a third position [eg, FIG. 32 (e) A movable means that can move to the fifth position, which is the position of the third movable
The second movable means is movable means movable to a fifth position [e.g., the sixth position, which is the position of the family crest 224E represented by a gray solid line in FIG. 32 (b)],
At least a portion of the third movable means at the third position is a third display area of the display areas of the display means [e.g., a third display area 208 shown in FIG. 3) is configured to be overlapped from the front side,
It is configured to be able to execute the second effect,
The second effect is a notice effect performed when the third movable means is positioned at the third position [e.g., a normal notice effect which is a transmission effect in FIG. 35 (a)].
The second effect is an effect to be executed after the execution of the first effect,
At least a part of the states after the execution of the first effect and before the execution of the second effect is started (hereinafter referred to as “the second state”) [eg, FIG. In the state of (p)], the second movable means is configured to be in the fifth position,
In the second state, the third movable means is configured to be at the third initial position [e.g., a third movable service 253 shown by a dotted line in FIG. 34 (p)],
At least a portion of the third movable means [for example, the third movable part 253 shown by a dotted line in FIG. 34 (p)] in the third initial position is the second one in the fifth position The movable means [for example, the household object 224E shown in FIG. 34 (p)] is configured to be overlapped from the front side,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[A fourth movable means [for example, a second movable character 2521 for weak effect shown in FIG. 41 or / and a second movable character 2522 for strong effect],
The fourth movable means is a movable means provided on the front side of the display means,
In the fourth movable means, the fourth position [for example, the position or / and figure of the second movable part 2521 represented by the upper dotted line in FIG. 41 (c) is a movable means that can move to a position where the second movable character 2522 represented by the upper dotted line coincides with the head of the character of
It is configured to be able to execute the second effect,
The second effect is an effect using the fourth movable means [e.g., an effect shown in FIG. 42 (j) to FIG. 42 (k)],
The second effect is an effect to be executed separately from the first effect.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
It is configured to be able to display “first display [for example, display of a hold icon by display mode of pre-read notice, display of mini character of ninja NJA]”,
The first display is one of pre-reading notice display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
It is configured to be able to display “second display [for example, display of fluctuation icon according to display mode of pseudo-series production, reach production, super reach production (Kenou reach production), advance notice],
The second display is one of the notice displays regarding symbol variation during variation.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“Third display [for example, display“ Please pull out the ball shown in FIG. 29 (a) etc. ”,” button image 136 a shown in FIG. Period meter display 136c] can be displayed.
The third display is one of the displays prompting the player to operate.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The player has the operation means that can be operated,
The third display is a display including an image [for example, a button image 136a shown in FIG. 34 (g)] imitating the appearance of the operation means,
At least a part of the area where the third display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area [for example, the first display area 208-1 shown in FIG. 34 (k)] are configured to overlap Yes,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The third display is a display prompting the player to eject the game ball [eg," Please pull the ball shown in FIG. 29 (a) etc. "],
The whole of the area where the third display is displayed and a part or all of the first display area are configured to overlap [for example, the description in paragraph 1353].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The first movable means [for example, the first movable part 251 including the left arc 2511 and the right arc 2512 shown in FIG. A movable means movable from the positions of the left circular arc 2511 and the right circular arc 2512 shown by solid lines to the first position,
The first initial position is an initial position shifted from an area overlapping with the display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L],
The first initial position is an initial position on the rear side of the display means,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The second movable means [for example, family crest 224E shown in FIG. 32 etc.] has a second initial position [for example, the Mobile means that can move to
The second initial position is an initial position shifted from an area overlapping with the display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L],
The second initial position is an initial position on the front side of the display means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The first light emitting means,
The first light emitting means is a light emitting means provided on the first movable means [e.g., a first movable part 251 lit in a fourth display mode as shown in FIG.
In the first effect, the first light emitting means is configured to be able to emit light [eg, FIG. 33 (q)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The second light emitting means,
The second light emitting means is a light emitting means provided on the second movable means [for example, a light emitting means such as a full color LED described in paragraph 0448].
In the first effect, the second light emitting means is configured to be able to emit light [eg, FIG. 33 (q)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
Even in one state other than the first state [e.g., a part of the initial operation immediately after the power is turned on, a part or all of the state in the big hit game], the first display area is the first display area It is configured to be in the second visible state,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The gaming machine is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
“Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N Or two] and
A first movable means [for example, a first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 32 or the like, which comprises a left circular arc 2511 and a right circular arc 2512];
A second movable means [for example, a family crest 224E shown in FIG. 32 etc.];
A third movable means [eg, a third movable character 253];
A game console equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device,
The first movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means,
The second movable means is a movable means provided on the front side of the display means,
The first movable means is a movable means movable to a first position [for example, a first position (see FIG. 32 (c)) which is a position on the back side surrounding the circular area S3 ',
At least a part of the first movable means at the first position is the first display area of the display areas of the display means [eg, the first display area 208-1 in FIG. 33 (p)] Are configured to be overlapped from the front side,
Configured such that the first display area may be in a first visual condition [eg, opaque (but not necessarily completely opaque, relatively low light transmission)] Yes,
The first display area may be in a second visible state [for example, a transparent state (however, the state may not be completely transparent and the amount of light transmission is relatively enhanced)] Is configured and
The second viewing state is configured such that the back side of the display area of the display means can be more easily viewed through the first display area than in the first viewing state [eg, FIG. p) ~ Figure (r)],
The first movable means is configured to be at the first position in one state where the first display area is in the second visual recognition state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"). [Eg, FIG. 33 (p) to FIG. (R)],
The second movable means is movable means movable to a second position [e.g., a third position which is a position of a family crest 224E represented by a black solid line in FIG. 32B].
In the first state, the second movable means is configured to be at the second position [eg, FIG. 33 (p) to FIG. (R)],
The first effect is configured to be executed in the first state,
The first effect includes an effect to be performed by the first movable means at the first position and the second movable means at the second position in cooperation [eg, It is an effect shown in FIG. 33 (p) to FIG. 33 (r)],
The third movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means,
The third movable means has a third initial position [eg, an initial position (fourth position) of a third movable part 253 shown in FIG. 32 (e)] to a third position [eg, FIG. 32 (e) A movable means that can move to the fifth position, which is the position of the third movable
The second movable means is movable means movable to a fifth position [e.g., the sixth position, which is the position of the family crest 224E represented by a gray solid line in FIG. 32 (b)],
At least a portion of the third movable means at the third position is a third display area of the display areas of the display means [e.g., a third display area 208 shown in FIG. 3) is configured to be overlapped from the front side,
It is configured to be able to execute the second effect,
The second effect is a notice effect performed when the third movable means is positioned at the third position [e.g., a normal notice effect which is a transmission effect in FIG. 35 (a)].
The second effect is an effect to be executed after the execution of the first effect,
At least a part of the states after the execution of the first effect and before the execution of the second effect is started (hereinafter referred to as “the second state”) [eg, FIG. In the states (p) to (q)], the second movable means is configured to be at the fifth position,
In the second state, the third movable means is configured not to reach the third position [e.g., a third indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 34 (p) to FIG. Movable character 253],
In the second state, at least a part of the third movable means [for example, the third movable part 253 shown by dotted lines in FIG. 34 (p) to FIG. The second movable means (for example, the household object 224E shown in FIG. 34 (p) to FIG. 34 (q)) being overlapped from the front side,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N Or two] and
First effect means [e.g., the first movable combination 251 consisting of a left circular arc 2511 and a right circular arc 2512 shown in FIG. 32 etc., and the lower half of the first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) etc. The part where the face of the wolf character is drawn],
Second effect means [for example, the third movable character 253 on which the face of the character of the tombstone shown in FIG. 32 etc. is drawn, the character on the upper half of the first movable character 251 shown in FIG. Part of the face of
A game console equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device,
The first effect means is effect means provided on the back side of the display means,
The second effect means is effect means provided on the back side of the display means,
Multiple types of effects can be performed,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is the first effect,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect using the first effect means [for example, the transmission effect shown in FIG. 34 (k) to FIG. 40 (m), the transmission effect shown in FIG. 40 (C)],
The second effect is an effect using the second effect means [for example, the transmission effect shown in FIG. 35 (a) to FIG. 35 (d), the transmission effect shown in FIG. 40 (F)],
Either one of the first effect and the second effect may be performed,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

Also,
“At least a part of the display area of the display means (hereinafter,“ a display area ”) is in the first visible state [eg, opaque state (not necessarily completely opaque, light Amount of light transmission is relatively low)).
The certain display area may be in a second visible state [eg, transparent state (but not necessarily completely transparent, and relatively high light transmission amount)].
An area on the back side of the display area of the display means can be more easily recognized through the certain display area in the second visual condition than in the first visual condition.
The second effect means is a movable means [for example, the third movable character 253 on which the face of the character of the lord is shown in FIG. 32 and the like, and the first movable character 251 shown in FIG. It is the part where the face of the character of the half lord is drawn],
The second effect is shown in the second position [for example, the position of the third movable combination 253 shown in FIG. 35 (a) to FIG. (D), FIG. 40 (F). It is an effect to be performed in the state of being the first movable character 251 position],
In the second effect, at least a part of the display area of the display area of the display means (hereinafter, "second display area" [for example, in the third display area 208-3 shown in FIG. 35, FIG. It is said that the display area 208-13] is performed in a state where the second visual recognition state is made [eg, the transparent effect shown in FIG. 35 (a) to FIG. 35 (d), FIG. 40 (F) Is a transparent effect shown in
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The display means may display a certain effect display [for example, the display st of the star shown in FIG. 42 (J), the upper left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 34 (h) to FIG. Means that can display
Among the states in which the second effect means is moving toward the second position (hereinafter, referred to as “second state”) [eg, FIG. 40 (D) to FIG. In the state E), the state of FIG. 34 (q)], the second display area is in the first visual state,
In the second state, the certain effect display is displayed [eg, FIG. 42 (J), FIG. 34 (q)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The first effect means is a movable means [for example, a first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 32 etc., including a left arc 2511 and a right arc 2512, a first movable combination shown in FIG. The part of the lower half of the object 251 where the face of the indigo character is drawn],
The first effect is indicated by the first position of the first effect means [e.g., the position of the first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 34 (k) to FIG. It is an effect to be performed in the state of being the first movable character 251 position],
In the first effect, at least a part of the display area of the display area of the display means (hereinafter referred to as “first display area” [eg, the first display area 208-1 shown in FIG. 34, FIG. It is said that the display area 208-13] is performed in a state where the second visual recognition state is made [eg, the transmission effect shown in FIG. 34 (k) to FIG. (M), FIG. 40 (C) It is a transparent effect shown in
The variation display of the decorative symbol in which the second effect is performed is more than the variation display of the decorative symbol in which only the first effect of the first effect and the second effect is performed, It is easy to be displayed the confirmation display of the jackpot design aspect,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The first position is a position in an area where the first display area overlaps from the front side,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[A third rendering means [for example, a family crest 224E shown in FIG. 32 etc.],
The third effect means is effect means provided on the front side of the display means,
The third effect means is a movable means,
In a state where the second effect means is not at the second position, the third effect means is located at a position overlapping at least a part of the second effect means [e.g. 34 (p) to the same figure (q)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The second position is a position in an area where the second display area overlaps from the front side,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[In the case of the variable display of one decorative symbol, the other effect may be performed after any one of the first effect and the second effect is performed [for example, FIG. B) to an example shown in FIG. 34F, an example shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The above-mentioned "of the decorative design where the second effect was performed rather than the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol where only the first effect of the first effect and the second effect was performed The variation display is easier to display the finalized display of the big hit symbol aspect, "is," the variation of the decorative symbol in which only the first effect of the first effect and the second effect is performed In the case of the variation display of the decorative symbol in which only the first effect and the second effect of the second effect are performed than the display, the finalized display of the big hit symbol aspect is more easily displayed. Is that
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The gaming machine is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N Or two] and
First effect means [e.g., the first movable combination 251 consisting of a left circular arc 2511 and a right circular arc 2512 shown in FIG. 32 etc., and the lower half of the first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) etc. The part where the face of the wolf character is drawn, the shutter roles 246L and 246R shown in FIG. 44 (a), the presentation means 2510G of the face of the wolf character shown in FIG. 44 (a), FIG. Ring character 251 R],
Second effect means [for example, the third movable character 253 on which the face of the character of the tombstone shown in FIG. 32 etc. is drawn, the character on the upper half of the first movable character 251 shown in FIG. Part of the face of the human being shown in FIG. 44 (a), the part 2510G of the face of the brow character shown in FIG. With circular character 251C] which shows,
A game console equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device,
The first effect means is effect means provided on the back side of the display means,
The second effect means is effect means provided on the back side of the display means,
Multiple types of effects can be performed,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is the first effect,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a second effect,
The first effect may be an effect using the first effect means [for example, the transmission effect shown in FIG. 34 (k) to the same figure (m), the transmission effect shown in FIG. 40 (C), (D) to (e) shown in FIG. 45 (d) to FIG.
The second effect is an effect using the second effect means [for example, the transmission effect shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to (d), the transmission effect shown in FIG. 40 (F), FIG. Transmission effect shown in Fig. 45 (E) to the same figure (F).
The first effect and the second effect are not simultaneously performed,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In this game stand, a plurality of types of effects may always be executed. In addition, “the first effect and the second effect are not simultaneously performed” means that there is no period in which the first effect and the second effect are simultaneously performed. May be

Also, in the above description,
“Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N Or two] and
First effect means [e.g., the first movable combination 251 consisting of a left circular arc 2511 and a right circular arc 2512 shown in FIG. 32 etc., and the lower half of the first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) etc. The part where the face of the wolf character is drawn, the shutter roles 246L and 246R shown in FIG. 44 (a), the presentation means 2510G of the face of the wolf character shown in FIG. 44 (a), FIG. Ring character 251 R],
Second effect means [for example, the third movable character 253 on which the face of the character of the tombstone shown in FIG. 32 etc. is drawn, the character on the upper half of the first movable character 251 shown in FIG. Part of the face of the human being shown in FIG. 44 (a), the part 2510G of the face of the brow character shown in FIG. With circular character 251C] which shows,
A game console equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device,
The first effect means is effect means provided on the back side of the display means,
The second effect means is effect means provided on the back side of the display means,
The second rendering unit is a rendering unit [for example, an LED is built in or is provided around it] including a light emitting unit [for example, an LED].
Multiple types of effects can be performed,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is the first effect,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a second effect,
The first effect may be an effect using the first effect means [for example, the transmission effect shown in FIG. 34 (k) to the same figure (m), the transmission effect shown in FIG. 40 (C), (D) to (e) shown in FIG. 45 (d) to FIG.
The second effect is an effect using the second effect means [for example, the transmission effect shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to (d), the transmission effect shown in FIG. 40 (F), FIG. Transmission effect shown in Fig. 45 (E) to the same figure (F).
The first effect and the second effect are not simultaneously performed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In this game stand, a plurality of types of effects may always be executed. In addition, “the first effect and the second effect are not simultaneously performed” means that there is no period in which the first effect and the second effect are simultaneously performed. May be

Also,
"At least a part of the display area of the display means (hereinafter referred to as" a display area ") is in a first visible state [eg, it may not be opaque (but not necessarily completely opaque) , The amount of light transmission is relatively low)],
The certain display area may be in a second visible state [eg, transparent state (but not necessarily completely transparent, and relatively high light transmission amount)].
An area on the back side of the display area of the display means can be more easily recognized through the certain display area in the second visual condition than in the first visual condition.
The second effect means is a movable means [for example, the third movable character 253 on which the face of the character of the lord is shown in FIG. 32 and the like, and the first movable character 251 shown in FIG. It is a portion where the face of a half of the character of the lord is drawn, means of directing 2510 Y of the face of the character of the lord shown in FIG. 44 (E), etc. circular feature 251 C shown in FIG.
The second effect is shown in the second position [for example, the position of the third movable combination 253 shown in FIG. 35 (a) to FIG. (D), FIG. 40 (F). The position of the first movable character 251, the position of the presentation means 2510Y of the face of the character of the lord like shown in FIG. 44 (E), etc., the position of the circular character 251 C shown in FIG. It is a production to be
In the second effect, at least a part of the display area of the display area of the display means (hereinafter, "second display area" [for example, in the third display area 208-3 shown in FIG. 35, FIG. An effect to be performed in a certain state in which the display area 208-13 shown, the area where the image of the eyebrow shown in FIG. 44 is open, and the central area 208-C of the circle shown in FIG. [For example, the transmission effect shown in FIG. 35 (a) to FIG. 40 (d), the transmission effect shown in FIG. 40 (F), the transmission effect shown in FIG. 44 (E), FIG. 45 (E) to FIG. Is a transparent effect shown in
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Note that the given display area may be the entire display area of the display areas of the display means, or may be the display area of only a part. Further, the certain display area may be always in the second visual recognition state.

  Also, the second display area may be the entire display area of the display areas of the display means or may be the display area of only a part.

Also,
“The display means may display a certain effect display [for example, a display st of a star shown in FIG. 42 (J), a symbol“ upper left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 34 (h) Means for displaying the button image etc. shown in FIG. 44 (d) and the display of the fully-closed eyelid image shown in FIG. 44 (c).
Among the states in which the second effect means is moving toward the second position (hereinafter, referred to as “second state”) [eg, FIG. 40 (D) to FIG. In the state of E), the state of FIG. 34 (q), the state of FIG. 44 (d), the state of FIG. 44 (C)], the second display area is in the first visual recognition state,
The certain effect display is displayed in the second state [eg, FIG. 42 (J), FIG. 34 (q), FIG. 44 (d), FIG. 44 (C)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display means may be means for displaying a certain effect display without fail. In addition, the second state may be a part of the state in which the second effect means is moving toward the second position, or may be the whole state. Good. Furthermore, the certain effect display may be a display that may be displayed even in a state other than the second state, or a display that is always displayed in a state other than the second state. May be Alternatively, the certain effect display may be a display that may be displayed only in the second state, or a display that is necessarily displayed only in the second state. May be

Also,
“The first effect means is a movable means [for example, a first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 32 etc., comprising a left arc 2511 and a right arc 2512, a first movable combination shown in FIG. 39 (c) etc. A portion of the lower half of the object 251 where the face of the eyebrow character is drawn, means for producing 2510 G of the face of the eyebrow character shown in FIG. 44 (A) or the like, ring-shaped character 251R shown in FIG. And
The first effect is indicated by the first position of the first effect means [e.g., the position of the first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 34 (k) to FIG. The position of the first movable character 251, the position of the rendering means 2510G of the face of the character of the eyebrow shown in FIG. 44 (e), etc., the position of the ring-shaped character 251R shown in FIG. It is a production to be performed,
In the first effect, at least a part of the display area of the display area of the display means (hereinafter referred to as “first display area” [eg, the first display area 208-1 shown in FIG. 34, FIG. The display area 208-13 shown, the portion where the image of the eyelid shown in FIG. 44A is open, and the ring-shaped area 208-R shown in FIG. The effect to be performed in a certain state [for example, the transmission effect shown in FIG. 34 (k) to FIG. 40 (m), the transmission effect shown in FIG. 40 (C), the transmission effect shown in FIG. ) To the transparent effect shown in FIG.
The variation display of the decorative symbol in which the second effect is performed is more than the variation display of the decorative symbol in which only the first effect of the first effect and the second effect is performed, It is easy to be displayed the confirmation display of the jackpot design aspect,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Note that the first effect may be an effect that may be performed in a state where the first effect means is at a first position, or an effect that is necessarily performed. The first display area may be the entire display area of the display areas of the display means, or may be a display area of only a part. Further, the certain state may be the whole state in which the first display area is in the second visual state, or may be a part of the state.

Also,
"The first position is a position in an area where the first display area overlaps from the front side,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The first rendering means is a rendering means provided on the front side of the second rendering means [for example, the rendering means 2510G for the face of the eyebrow character shown in FIG. 44 (A)] [for example, FIG. It is shutter role thing 246L, 246R shown in (A),
In a certain state before the second effect starts (for example, the fully closed state of the shutter accessories 246L and 246M), the second position overlaps with at least a part of the second effect means. One production means is located,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The first effect means may be located at a position overlapping with all of the second effect means, or the first effect means is at a position overlapping only a portion of the second effect means. It may be located.

Also,
[A third rendering means [for example, a family crest 224E shown in FIG. 32 etc.],
The third effect means is effect means provided on the front side of the display means,
The third effect means is a movable means,
In a state where the second effect means is not at the second position, the third effect means is located at a position overlapping at least a part of the second effect means [e.g. 34 (p) to the same figure (q)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The third effect means may be located at a position overlapping with all of the second effect means, or the third effect means is at a position overlapping only a portion of the second effect means. It may be located.

Also,
"The second position is a position in an area where the second display area overlaps from the front side,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[In the case of the variable display of one decorative symbol, the other effect may be performed after any one of the first effect and the second effect is performed [for example, FIG. B) to the example shown in FIG. 34 (F), the example shown in FIG. 34 to FIG. 35, the ray shown in FIG. 44 (b) to FIG. 44 (e), and the example shown in FIG. ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, in the change display of the decorative symbol of one time, after either one of the first effect and the second effect is performed, the other effect may be performed.

Also,
[The above-mentioned "of the decorative design where the second effect was performed rather than the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol where only the first effect of the first effect and the second effect was performed The variation display is easier to display the finalized display of the big hit symbol aspect, "is," the variation of the decorative symbol in which only the first effect of the first effect and the second effect is performed In the case of the variation display of the decorative symbol in which only the first effect and the second effect of the second effect are performed than the display, the finalized display of the big hit symbol aspect is more easily displayed. Is that
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The gaming machine is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 79],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The following is a supplementary note including the matters described so far.

(Supplementary Note 1)
An image display means,
Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
Means of notification that can execute multiple types of notifications,
A game console equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notice icons.
The said hold display is a display displayed on the hold display area in the said image display means,
The said pending | holding display is a display according to the number (henceforth "the pending | holding number") by which the action | operation of the said symbol fluctuation display is suspended,
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display unit,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying one or more notice icons.
The notice means is a means capable of executing the notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested.
The first preview icon among the plurality of types of preview icons is larger than the first number during the period during which one of the symbol variation display is being executed. It is configured to be more likely to be a big hit if two numbers are digested.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 2)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 3)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note 1 or 2,
The notice means is a means capable of executing false notice in the same manner as the notice mode,
The notice means is means capable of executing the false notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. ,
After the false announcement is executed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be disjointed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
A fourth number, wherein the number of preview icons to be displayed in the preview icon display area is larger than the third number during the period in which the one symbol variation display is executed. Is configured to be more likely to be a big hit,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
A hold display unit capable of executing display according to the number of holdings;
The hold display unit is a display unit different from the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 6)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 5,
The hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
Equipped with a pre-reading notice that can carry out pre-reading notice,
The pre-reading advance notice means is a means capable of executing the pre-reading advance notice by displaying the pre-notification icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 8)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 7,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") to be pre-read is executed, the notice icon may be digested a fifth number,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) to be executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is the sixth The number may be digested,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol change display is being held in a period during which the first symbol change display is being performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 8,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth symbol variation display") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed, the notice icon may be started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 10)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 9,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) to be executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed, the fourth symbol variation is performed The notice icon may be started to be displayed during the display period.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 10, wherein
The hold display area is an area capable of displaying the hold display up to a seventh number,
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icons can be displayed up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by

(Supplementary Note 12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
It has a production means that can execute multiple types of effects,
One of the multiple types of announcements is the first announcement,
One of the multiple types of announcements is a second announcement,
The first notice is a different notice from the second notice,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice notifying that the first effect is performed,
The second notice is a notice notifying that the second effect is to be performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 12,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always digested.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 13,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 15)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the display types is a notice icon,
During the display of the first symbol variation display, the display of the first notice icon may be started as the notice icon,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display,
In the symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as "the second symbol fluctuation display") displayed after the first symbol fluctuation display, the first symbol not displayed during the display of the first symbol fluctuation display The notice icon of is configured to be digestible,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 16)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 15,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 17)
It is a game console described in Appendix 15 or 16,
The first notice icon may be started to be displayed during display of the first symbol variation display as pre-reading notification of the second symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 18)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 17,
During the display of one symbol variation display, the jackpot is larger when the second number of the first preview icons are digested than when the first number of the first preview icons are digested. Easily
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 19)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 18,
A second notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit with the symbol variation display digested.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 20)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 19,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice may be displayed as the notice.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 21)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 20,
One of the display types is a fake notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first false notice may be displayed as the false notice.
The display mode of the first false preview display is the same display mode as the display mode of the first preview display,
In the symbol variation display where the first false notice display is displayed, it is configured to be a gap,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 22)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 21,
One of the plurality of types of display is pre-reading effect display,
A third notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
When the third notice icon is digested, the pre-reading effect display may be started.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 23)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 22,
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 24)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 23,
One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 25)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 24,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is configured to be digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 26)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 25,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the display unit,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 27)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 26,
Equipped with presentation control means,
The effect control means is means capable of executing control of the display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 28)
It is a game console described in Appendix 27,
Main control means,
Symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 29)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 28,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note 30)
First display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
Second display means,
A game console equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notices.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number (hereinafter referred to as the "number of reservations") in which the operation of the symbol variation display is suspended,
The symbol variation display is a display that is started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display unit,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations by the number displayed.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon digested when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested;
During a period in which one of the symbol variation display is being executed, the second number digest which is larger than the first number is a big hit when the notice icon is greater than the first number. It is configured to be easy to
The second display means is provided in the notice icon display area as a preview notice, prior to the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) which is the target of the prefetching. Display means capable of displaying the notice icon;
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 31)
It is a game stand described in appendix 30,
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 32)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note 30 or 31,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a false notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode,
The second display means can display the false notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is a good display means,
After the false advance notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol change display is configured to be uncovered.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 33)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 32,
The second display means is a display means configured of a plurality of display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 34)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 33,
One display unit of the plurality of display units is an image display unit,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a hold display means,
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the hold number on the hold display area,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon on the notice icon display area,
The game stand characterized in that the hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.

(Appendix 35)
It is a game console described in Appendix 34,
The hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note 36)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 32,
The second display means is an image display means.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the hold number.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 37)
30. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 36, wherein
The notice icon may be digested a fifth number during the period when the second symbol variation display is being executed,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) to be executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is the sixth The number may be digested,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of reservations is a display for informing that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during a period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 38)
30. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 36, wherein
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always digested before the end of the symbol variation display to be read.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 39)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 38, wherein
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth symbol variation display") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed, the notice icon may be started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 40)
It is a game console described in Appendix 39,
The notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed in the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed that is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed May be displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 41)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 40, wherein
The hold display area is an area capable of displaying a display according to the hold number up to a seventh number,
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icons can be displayed up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 42)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 41, wherein
It has a production means that can execute multiple types of effects,
As the notice icon, a first notice icon can be displayed,
A second notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon.
One of the plurality of types of preview displays is a first preview display,
One of the plurality of types of preview displays is a second preview display,
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display is displayed.
When the second notice icon is digested, the second notice display is displayed.
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first preliminary display is a preliminary display for notifying that the first effect is performed,
The game stand characterized in that the second notice display is a notice display notifying that the second effect is performed.

(Appendix 43)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 42, wherein
Main control means,
Effect control means,
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the first display means,
The effect control means is means capable of executing control of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 44)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 30 to 43, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 45)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
In the case where the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the second symbol variation display") which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the process ends, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "several notice icons") may be digested,
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. It may be displayed,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is effect display,
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon may be displayed.
One of the plurality of notice icons is a first notice icon,
One of the notice icons among the plurality of notice icons is a second notice icon,
The first effect display is displayed as the effect display by digesting the first number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as the "first number of notice icons") in one pattern variation display. Are configured to
The first number of notice icons are notice icons including the first notice icon,
The game console, wherein the first number of notice icons are notice icons including the second notice icon.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by display.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the first effect display may be displayed until one of the first number of icons is displayed and the first number of icons is consumed. In some cases, you can continue to have a sense of expectation for something.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation for a big hit by making the number of notice icons appear as a symbol change prior to the suspension to be read ahead.

  Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons or three or more notice icons.

  Further, when the first notice icon is digested, the effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be performed, or when the second notice icon is digested, the second notice icon may be displayed. A corresponding effect display B may be performed, or a effect display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are digested. You may

  Also, only one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be digested, or only one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be newly added. It may be displayed on the screen.

(Appendix 46)
It is a game console described in Appendix 45,
The first effect display is configured not to be displayed even if a second number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "the second number of notice icons") are digested in one pattern variation display. Yes,
The first number and the second number are different numbers,
The second number of notice icons are notice icons including the notice icon of one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon,
The second number of notice icons are notice icons not including the other notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon is displayed, and a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon in one symbol change display. Since the first effect display is not displayed if b is not digested, it may be possible to give a player a sense of superiority to the player who could see the first effect display.

  Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, or the second number may be larger than the first number.

  The first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Also, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number.

  In addition, there may be an effect display that is displayed when the second number of advance notice icons are digested.

  Moreover, even if the second number of notice icons are digested, a part of the first effect display may be displayed, or all of the first effect display may be displayed.

  In addition, the reliability of the big hit for the first effect display may be changed according to the number of the preview icons that have been digested, or the reliability of the big hit for the first effect display may be the same.

  In addition, when the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons may be always digested.

  In addition, even when the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons are not digested, and the second number of notice icons are digested. Alternatively, both the first notice icon and the second notice icon may not be deleted.

(Supplementary Note 47)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Notes 45 or 46,
One of the plurality of notice icons is a third notice icon,
By digesting the third notice icon, a third effect display is displayed as the effect display,
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to increase the variation of the effect and enhance the effect.

  The third notice icon may be one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

  Also, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

(Appendix 48)
It is a game stand as described in any one of appendixes 45 to 47,
In the case where the lost symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth symbol fluctuation display") which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended, the fourth symbol fluctuation display is started after the third symbol fluctuation display is started. The plurality of notice icons may be digested before termination.
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game console, even if the advance notice icon is displayed, it does not always result in a big hit, so it may be possible to enjoy it until the change of the pending for pre-reading is over.

  In addition, it is digested from the first symbol fluctuation display or the third symbol fluctuation display to the symbol fluctuation display of the object of prefetching in the case where the result of the symbol fluctuation display of the object of prefetching is a big hit and it is a loss The maximum number of preview icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, it is digested from the first symbol fluctuation display or the third symbol fluctuation display to the symbol fluctuation display of the object of prefetching when the result of the symbol fluctuation display of the object of prefetching is a big hit and it is a loss The minimum number of preview icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, one pattern which is performed before the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol fluctuation display) The maximum number of notice icons to be digested in the fluctuation display (for example, the first symbol fluctuation display, the third symbol fluctuation display) is when the result of the symbol fluctuation display of the target of the pre-reading is a big hit or when it is lost It may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, one pattern which is performed before the symbol variation display which is the object of pre-reading (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol fluctuation display) The minimum number of notice icons to be digested in the fluctuation display (for example, the first symbol fluctuation display, the third symbol fluctuation display) is when the result of the symbol fluctuation display of the target of pre-reading is a big hit or when it is lost It may be the same or different.

  In addition, the maximum number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display) to be prefetched in the state in which the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended The same may or may not be the case where the result of the symbol variation display of the object of pre-reading is a big hit and the case where it is lost.

  In addition, the minimum number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display) to be prefetched in the state in which the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended The same may or may not be the case where the result of the symbol variation display of the object of pre-reading is a big hit and the case where it is lost.

(Supplementary Note 49)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 48,
When the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of advance notice icons are displayed from the start of the third symbol variation display to the end of the fourth symbol variation display There is a case,
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, even if the advance notice icon is displayed, it does not always result in a lower jackpot, so it may be possible to enjoy it until the change of the reserve to be read ahead is over.

(Appendix 50)
It is a game stand as described in any one of appendixes 45 to 49,
Equipped with a hold display means,
The suspension display means is a means capable of displaying the number of suspension displays corresponding to the number of times the start of symbol variation display is suspended (hereinafter referred to as “the number of suspension”).
A game stand characterized by

  The hold display unit may be an image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting unit such as an LED, or a movable unit.

(Appendix 51)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 50,
It is configured not to display the number of holdings according to the number at which the notice icon is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to produce effects regardless of the number of reservations.

(Appendix 52)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes 45 to 51,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 53)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes 45 to 51,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 54)
It is a game console provided with a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays;
The display of one of a plurality of types of displays that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to a notice icon,
The display of one of a plurality of types of displays that can be displayed on the second display means is a display related to the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a preview notice.
In the case where the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the second symbol variation display") which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the process ends, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "several notice icons") may be digested,
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
A game stand characterized by

  The display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or the light guide plate may be lens cut and the pattern may appear by irradiating it from the side with a light source. , And may be configured by light emitting means such as an LED, or may be configured by 7 segments.

  In addition, the display related to the notice icon may be a display related to stocking of the notice icon, may be a display related to digesting the notice icon, or notice of stock of the notice icon It may be a display, or may be an effect display that is executed when the advance notice icon is digested.

  Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, or the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, or the display area of the second display means is larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small.

(Appendix 55)
It is a game console described in Appendix 54,
In the second display means, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed.
A game stand characterized by

  Note that one preview icon may be displayed anew.

  In addition, an effect that the notice icon is digested may be performed by the second display means.

(Appendix 56)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 54 or 55,
In the first display means, there may be a display indicating that the preview icon may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

  It should be noted that "a display indicating that the notice icon may be displayed" may be performed in the symbol change display performed before the symbol change display in which the notice icon is displayed, or the notice icon is displayed. May be performed in the symbol variation display.

(Appendix 57)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices 54 to 56, wherein
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 58)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices 54 to 56, wherein
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
An effect display corresponding to the advance notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note 59)
Display means,
Movable means,
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
In the case where the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the second symbol variation display") which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the process ends, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "several notice icons") may be digested,
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. It may be displayed,
When the notice icon is digested, an effect corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter, referred to as "notice icon digest effect") is performed,
There may be a case where an effect by the movable means (hereinafter referred to as "first movable means effect") is performed as the advance notice icon digestion effect.
A game stand characterized by

  In addition, although the effect by the movable means may be performed only for the first movable means effect, the movable means effect different from the first movable means effect may be performed. In this case, the corresponding notice icons may be displayed for each of the movable means effects, or the notice icons corresponding to the movable means for which the effects are performed may be displayed.

(Appendix 60)
It is a game console described in Appendix 59,
When the twenty-first notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect may be performed.
A game stand characterized by

  In addition, even if the twenty-first notice icon is digested, the first movable means effect may not be performed, or when the twenty-first notice icon is digested, the first movable means must be taken. Means presentation may be performed.

  In addition, when the twenty-first notice icon is digested, there may be a case where an effect different from the first moving means effect (effect different in operation) may be performed.

  In addition, when the twenty-first notice icon is digested, effects may be performed by movable means different from the first movable means, and the twenty-first notice icon is digested. And, the effect by the first movable means may always be performed.

(Supplementary Note 61)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Notes 59 or 60,
When the second notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect is not performed.
A game stand characterized by

  In addition, even if the 22nd notice icon is digested, the first movable means effect may be performed, and when the 22nd notice icon is digested, another effect (or effect display) May be performed.

(Supplementary Note 62)
It is a game stand according to any one of Appendices 59 to 61,
Equipped with operating means,
The movable means is the operation means,
The first movable means effect is an effect in which the mode of the operation means changes from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, "change" has a meaning including deformation, displacement, movement, and movement.

(Supplementary Note 63)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 59 to 62, wherein
A second movable means,
The movable means is a first movable means,
An effect by the second movable means (hereinafter referred to as "second movable means effect") may be performed as the advance notice icon consumption effect,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 64)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
In the case where the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the second symbol variation display") which is the object of pre-reading is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the process ends, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "several notice icons") may be digested,
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. It may be displayed,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a warning icon increase indication display,
The notice icon increase indication display is a indication indicating that the notice icon may be displayed,
The notice icon increase indication display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of times of symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by

  It should be noted that even when the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, the notice icon may not be displayed, or when the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, the notice icon may be always displayed.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed by only one symbol variation display, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed by only one symbol variation display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed.

(Appendix 65)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note 64,
In the symbol variation display performed prior to the second symbol variation display, the notice icon increase suggestion display is configured to end.
A game stand characterized by

  In addition, the change which the display of a prior art icon increase suggestion display complete | finish may be a 2nd symbol change display. In this way, it may be possible to expect that the notice icon may be displayed until the end.

(Appendix 66)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Notes 64 or 65,
The one of the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase indication may be displayed as the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by

  The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display that suggests that the notice icon is increased by one.

  Further, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon increase suggestion display may not be increased.

  Further, the notice icon increase indication display may be a notice of a case where the notice icon does not increase.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display that suggests that a plurality of notice icons are increased. In this case, for example, when the number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display is three, only two may be increased.

  Also, notice icons other than the notice icon suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be increased.

(Supplementary Note 67)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Notes 64 or 65,
The notice icon of a twelfth number of the notice icons of the eleventh number suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon. Stand.

(Appendix 68)
Display means,
Holding display means,
A game console equipped with
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of the hold,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
In the case where the hold display (hereinafter referred to as "second hold display") of the jackpot symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol change display") to be pre-read is displayed, the first Between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") may be digested,
When the second hold display is displayed, the plurality of notice icons are newly displayed from the start of the first symbol change display to the end of the second symbol change display. May be
The first symbol variation display is the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 69)
It is a game console described in Appendix 68,
The second hold display is a display that may be displayed in a prefetch display mode,
In the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed, the second hold display may be displayed in the prefetch display mode,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 70)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note 68 or 69,
In the case where the hold display (hereinafter referred to as the “fourth hold display”) of the lost symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as the “fourth symbol change display”) to be pre-read is displayed, the third The plurality of notice icons may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 71)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The second display is an explanatory display,
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area when it is displayed,
The second display is a display displayed in a second display area when displayed.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed.
A game stand characterized by

  The first display may be an explanatory display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanatory display.

  Further, the second display may be a display showing a current situation such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of an effect mode name of a selectable effect mode. Here, in the effect mode, for example, a mode for changing the change frequency of the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, and a generation frequency of one-shot notification effect change There is a mode to make it

  In addition, the display position of the preview icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the appearing animation performed when the preview icon is displayed, or the preview of the display position of the intermediate animation may be displayed. The display position of the icon may be closer to the second display area.

  In addition, here, "the notice icon" may be only one notice icon or may be only a part of notice icons among a plurality of notice icons, or all of a plurality of notice icons. It may be a notice icon of. Also, the "notice icon" may be only the notice icon displayed first of the notice icons, or a part of the notice icons including the notice icon displayed first. It may be an icon.

  Also, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may completely coincide, or even if a part of the display period of the first display overlaps with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, a part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not overlap.

  In addition, a notice icon may be displayed in the display period of the first display, or may not be displayed. Also, the notice icon may be displayed in the display period of the second display, or may not be displayed.

  Also, the second display and the advance notice icon do not necessarily have to be displayed simultaneously.

  In addition, the frequency at which the display is performed may be different between the first display and the second display. For example, when the display frequency of the second display is higher than the display frequency of the first display, gaze guidance of the notice icon May be easier. Further, the sizes may be different between the first display area and the second display area, or the roles may be different between the first display area and the second display area. For example, although advance notice display is not performed in the first display area, notice display may also be performed in the second display area.

(Appendix 72)
It is the gaming machine described in appendix 71,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 73)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note 71 or 72,
The first display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
The explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The preview icon may be displayed overlapping at least a part of the second display (hereinafter referred to as "first part"),
Once the preview icon is digested, the overlap of the second display to the first portion is resolved.
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game stand, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened by displaying it on the second display area where the explanation about the notice icon related to the present and the subsequent symbol fluctuation display is performed rather than the change icon. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is a loss, it may be possible to newly expect the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display is digested.

  The entire second display may be displayed by eliminating the overlap with the first part.

  In addition, during the period in which the variation icon is displayed, the variation icon may be capable of at least suggesting a sense of expectation for a big hit in the symbol variation display.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed as a pre-reading advance notice display, or may be digested in a symbol variation display which is an object of pre-reading.

  Further, the notice icon may be always digested in the symbol change display which is the target of the pre-reading, or the notice icon may not be digested in the symbol change display which is the target of the pre-reading.

  Also, the advance notice icon may be configured to be displayable only in a single manner, or may be configured to be capable of displaying a plurality of times. Here, when displaying a plurality of notice icons, the notice icons may be able to be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or even if the upper limit number is not set, the notice icons may be displayed without limitation. Good.

(Appendix 74)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
The display of the second display may be started while the preview icon is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 75)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the second display is not started.

(Supplementary Note 76)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 71 to 75, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The third display is a notice display,
When the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the second display area.

(Supplementary Note 77)
70. A game console according to any one of appendices 71 to 76, wherein
The second display area is an area divided by lines.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 78)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 77,
"The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed", as described in appendix 71, "the notice icon" Is displayed in the second display area when it is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 79)
70. A game console according to any one of appendices 71 to 78, wherein
In the case of the symbol variation display which is a big hit, the number of the notice icons is digested more than the symbol variation display which is a loss.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 80)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an explanatory display of a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
One of the description displays of the plurality of types of description displays is a first description display,
The first explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
In the case of the big hit change, the number of the notice icon is more digested than the lost change,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 81)
It is a game console described in appendix 80,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area (hereinafter referred to as “first display area”) in which the first explanation display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 82)
It is a game console described in appendix 81,
When the preview icon is displayed in the first display area, the first explanatory display is not displayed in the first explanatory display area.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 83)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 80 to 82, wherein
One of the description displays of the plurality of types of description displays is a second description display,
The second explanatory display is a display indicating the current stage of rendering,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area (hereinafter referred to as “second display area”) in which the second explanation display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 84)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 83,
Even when the preview icon is displayed in the second display area, the effect stage changes.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 85)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 80 to 84, wherein
The display unit is a unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of types of preview icons”) as the preview icons,
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a first notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a second notice icon,
The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first effect,
The second notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the second effect.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 86)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
The first display is an explanatory display,
The first display is a display displayed in a first display area of the display means,
The game console according to claim 1, wherein the notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when it is displayed.

(Appendix 87)
It is a game console described in Appendix 86,
The first display is not displayed when the preview icon is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 88)
It is a game console described in Appendix 87,
When the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 89)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 86 to 88, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed.
The explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 90)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 86 to 89, wherein
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display,
The third display means is a means capable of displaying a display in accordance with the display of the second display means,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a partial area of the third display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 91)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 86 to 90, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The third display is an explanatory display,
The third display is a display displayed in a second display area of the display means,
The above-mentioned notice icon is an icon which may be displayed also in the above-mentioned 2nd display field, A game stand characterized by things.

(Appendix 92)
It is the gaming machine described in appendix 91,
The third display is not displayed in a state where the advance notice icon is displayed in the second display area,
A game stand characterized by

  In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display for explaining the character displayed on the second display means.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to an effect display in progress.

  In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating a probability change expectation.

  In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display regarding the hit probability of reach.

  Also, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display regarding the jackpot expectation of the character.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display configured not to be displayed simultaneously with the first preview display.

(Supplementary note 93)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons;
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice.
The display area where the advance notice icon is displayed is a display area different from the display area where the hold icon is displayed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display including one notice icon (hereinafter referred to as "first notice icon") of the plurality of notice icons,
The second display is a display including a display in which the first preview icon is represented in a large size,
After the second indication is made, the first indication may be made,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the notice icon included in the second display may be an enlarged view of the first notice icon, or may be a notice icon different from the first notice icon.

(Appendix 94)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 93,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The third display is a variable display of a decorative symbol,
The first display is a display indicating that the first preview icon is stocked,
The first display is a display that is not overlapped with the third display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 95)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 93 or 94,
The third display is a display that can not be overlapped with the first display,
The third display is a display that may be overlapped to the second display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 96)
Appendices 93 to 95 according to any one of the game consoles, wherein
The first display is a display displayed in the hold display frame,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note 97)
Appendices 93 to 96 according to any one of the game consoles, wherein
The second display is a display performed when the first notice icon is acquired.
(Supplementary Note 98)
The gaming machine described in appendix 97,
The second display is a display that is also performed when the first preview icon is digested.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 99)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 97 or 98,
When the notice icon is obtained, the notice icon obtained along with at least a part of the already obtained notice icon is enlarged and displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 100)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The first display is a display of a hold display frame,
The second display is a display in which at least a part of the first display is expanded,
The third display is a display of a decoration pattern,
The first display is a display that is not overlapped with the third display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 101)
It is a game stand according to Supplementary Note 100,
The display of the position of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
The fourth display is configured to be displayable in a portion of the second display that is expanded from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as “extended portion”),
The extension part is a part not overlapped with the third display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 102)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 101,
The effect display is a prefetch notice display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 103)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note 101 or Supplementary Note 102,
One of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a notice display,
In the extended portion, the sixth display is configured to be displayable;
The fourth display and the fifth display are partially the same display,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 104)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 100 to 103, wherein
One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of speech notices,
The fifth display is a display that is not overlapped with the first display,
The fifth display is a display that may be overlapped with the second display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 105)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The first display is a display including an icon display frame,
The icon display frame is a display frame capable of displaying an icon related to symbol variation display,
The second display is a display in which at least a part of the first display is expanded,
The third display is a decorative symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that does not overlap the third display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 106)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 105,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
The fourth display is configured to be able to overlap and be displayed in a portion of the second display that is expanded from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as “extended portion”),
The extension portion is a portion which is not overlapped with the third display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 107)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 106,
The effect display is a display of a prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 108)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 106 or Supplementary Note 107,
The effect display is a display for changing the display mode of the icon,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 109)
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendixes 106 to 108, wherein
The third display is a display that may be overlapped with the extension portion.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 110)
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendixes 106 to 109, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of words,
The fifth display is a display that is not overlapped with the first display,
The fifth display is a display that may be overlapped with the extension.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 111)
It is a game console according to any one of Supplementary Notes 106 to 110, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a notice display,
In the extension portion, the sixth display is configured to be able to overlap and display;
The fourth display and the sixth display are partially the same display,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 112)
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 105 to 111, wherein
The icon is a hold icon,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 113)
It is the gaming machine described in appendix 112,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a number of the pending icons corresponding to the number of pending start of symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 114)
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 105 to 114, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a1)
Operation means,
The first area,
A game console equipped with
The first area is an area where game balls can enter.
The number of times of receiving the operation of the operation means in the first button effect (hereinafter referred to as "the number of times of acceptance") can be increased or decreased,
If the game ball enters the first area, the number of times of acceptance may increase.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a2)
The gaming machine described in the appendix a1,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "first display"),
In the first button effect, when the operation means is operated when the number of times of reception is one or more, the first display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a3)
The game console described in Appendix a2,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "second display"),
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
When the operation means is operated in the second button effect, the second display may be displayed,
Even if the number of times of acceptance is 0, the second display may be displayed,
The second display and the first display can be displayed in parallel.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a4)
The game console described in Appendix a3,
The first button effect and the second button effect can be performed in parallel,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a5)
It is a game console according to the a3 or a4.
The display means can display an image imitating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display”) in the first button effect.
The display means can display an image (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth display”) imitating the operation means in the second button effect.
The size of the third display is different from the size of the fourth display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a5, wherein
When the operation means is operated, the number of times of acceptance may be reduced.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a6, wherein
When a plurality of game balls enter the first area, the number of times of acceptance may increase.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a7, wherein
The first area is a general winning opening,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a8, wherein
With a second area,
The second area is an area through which game balls can pass,
The game ball having passed through the second area may enter the first area,
If the game ball enters the second area, the number of times of acceptance may increase.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix a10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a9, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b1)
The first area,
Display means,
A game console equipped with
The first area is an area where game balls can enter.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "first display"),
When the game ball enters the first area, the first display may be displayed,
The first indication is not overlapped with the fluctuating decorative pattern,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note b1,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "second display"),
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a wipe display,
The wipe indication does not overlap the second indication,
The first display is the wipe display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b3)
It is a game console described in Appendix b2,
The wipe display is displayed in a partial area of a display area of the display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b4)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b3,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”),
The display mode of the third display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
The first display is displayed as a display for changing the display mode of the third display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b5)
It is a game console described in Appendix b4,
The third display is a hold icon.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b6)
The game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b5, wherein
The display of the first display is not started during execution of the stop display of the decorative symbol,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b7)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b6, wherein
When the game ball enters the first area while the first display is displayed, the first display is continuously displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b8)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b7, wherein
The first area is a general winning opening,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b9)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b8,
With a second area,
The second area is an area through which game balls can pass,
The game ball having passed through the second area may enter the first area,
If the game ball enters the second area, the first display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b10)
The game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b9, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c1)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the next symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as "the second symbol fluctuation display") after symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as "first symbol fluctuation display"). Yes,
In the first symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the first symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "first variation icon") can be displayed,
The icon displayed as the first variation icon is configured to be able to be displayed as a notice icon in the second symbol variation display,
The area where the advance notice icon is displayed is an area different from the area where the first variation icon is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c2)
The game console described in the appendix c1,
In the second symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the second symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second variation icon") can be displayed,
Both the second fluctuation icon and the notice icon are configured to be displayable.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c3)
The gaming machine according to the appendix c1 or c2, wherein
The icon displayed as the hold icon can be displayed as a change icon,
The notice icon can be changed to one of a plurality of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode,
The notice icon of the first display mode is an icon associated with a change in display mode of the hold icon,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c4)
The game console described in appendix c3,
The notice icon of the first display mode is an icon associated with a change of the display mode of the variation icon,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c5)
It is a game console as described in appendix c3 or c4,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode,
The notice icon in the second display mode is an icon associated with a change in display mode of the hold icon,
The notice icon in the second display mode is an icon associated with a change in the display mode of the variation icon,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c6)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c5, wherein
The display mode of the advance notice icon is different from the display mode of the change icon,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices c1 to c6, wherein
It is possible to display an animation including the movement of the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c8)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c7, wherein
The display means is configured to include an image display device.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c9)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c8, wherein
In the non power saving state, the icon displayed as the first variation icon is displayed as the notice icon in the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix c10)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c9, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d1)
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
A game console equipped with
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The second display is a display different from the first display,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a display (hereinafter, referred to as a "third display") prompting the player to continuously hit the operation means.
The third display is a display displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be received (hereinafter referred to as “first state”).
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is continuously hit after the third display is started,
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operation means is pressed and held,
The second display is a display that is easier to be started when the operation means is continuously hit than when the operation means is long pressed.
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be received (hereinafter, referred to as “second state”).
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note d1,
Equipped with light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operation means,
The light emitting means is a means which is turned on in the first state;
The light emitting unit is a unit which is turned off in the second state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d3)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note d1,
Equipped with light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operation means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is a means which emits light in a first light emission mode,
In the second state, the light emitting means is a means that emits light in a second light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d3, wherein
It has symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d4, wherein
The second display is a display that is not started only by the long press on the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d5, wherein
When the operation means is pressed for a long time, the first display can be started on the assumption that the operation means is continuously hit.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d6, wherein
The long press is that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d8)
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
A game console equipped with
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a display in a first display mode (hereinafter referred to as "first display"),
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "second display"),
The second display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that can be started when the first number of operations is performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode,
The first display is a display that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode,
The second display is performed a second number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode than in the case where one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It is a display that is easier to start if you
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the period during which the operation is continued is longer than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number greater than one,
The second number is a number greater than one,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a display in a third display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "third display"),
The third display mode is a display mode for prompting the user to operate the operation means continuously in the first operation mode,
The third display is a display displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be received (hereinafter referred to as “first state”).
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be received (hereinafter, referred to as “second state”).
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d9)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d8,
Equipped with light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means which is in a light emitting state in the first state,
The light emitting means is a means which is in a non-light emitting state in the second state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d10)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d8,
Equipped with light emitting means,
In the first state, the light emitting means emits light in the first light emission mode,
In the second state, the light emitting means emits light in the second light emission mode,
The second light emission mode is a light emission mode different from the first light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d11)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note d9 or d10,
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d8 to d11, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during display of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that can be started during display of the symbol variation display,
The third display is a display that can be started during display of the symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d8 to d12,
The second display is a display that is not started only when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d8 to d13, wherein
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which a state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d15)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d14,
In the case where the operating state of the operating means is maintained for a second period of time, the operating means is artificially regarded as having undergone the first number of operations in the first operating mode. The display of is configured to be startable,
The second time is a time longer than the first time,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d16)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d8 to d15,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d17)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d8 to d16,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d18)
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Reproduction means capable of executing multiple kinds of renditions,
A game console equipped with
One of the effects of the plurality of types is the first effect,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a second effect,
The second effect is an effect different from the first effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the period during which the operation is continued is longer than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number greater than one,
In the second effect, a second number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode than when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It is a production that is more likely to be started if
The second number is a number greater than one,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d19)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d18,
It has symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that urges the operating means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations is performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode while the third effect is being executed.
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode while the third effect is being executed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d20)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note d18 or d19,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which a state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d21)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note d20,
When the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a second time, the first effect is assumed as the operation means is artificially operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode. It is configured to be startable,
The second time is a time longer than the first time,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d22)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d18 to d21,
The second effect is an effect that is not started only when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d23)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d18 to d22,
Equipped with light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means to be in a first state in a state where an operation for starting the first effect by the operation means can be received,
The light emitting means is a means to be in a second state in a state where an operation for starting the second effect by the operation means can be received,
The second state is a state different from the first state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d24)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d23,
The first state is a light emitting state,
The second state is a state in which light is not emitted,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d25)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d23,
The first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first mode,
The second state is a state of emitting light in a second mode,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d26)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d25,
The first aspect is a first color,
The second aspect is a second color,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d27)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d23 to d26, wherein
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d28)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d18 to d27,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d29)
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
A game console equipped with
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a display of a first display mode (hereinafter referred to as "first display"),
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a display of a fourth display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth display"),
The fourth display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that can be started when the first number of operations by the operation means is performed in the first operation mode,
The first display is a display that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode,
The first display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a selection display,
The fourth display is a display displayed when one of a plurality of types of images is selected according to the operation of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
The first image is the operating means in the first operation mode, compared to the case where one operation is performed by the operating means in the second operation mode during the execution of the fourth display. The image is more likely to be selected if the second number of operations is performed by
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the period during which the operation is continued is longer than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number greater than one,
The second number is a number greater than one,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d30)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d29,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display different from the first display,
The fifth display is a display that can be started when the first image is selected during execution of the fourth display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d31)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note d29 or d30,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a display of a third display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "third display"),
The third display mode is a display mode for prompting the user to operate the operation means continuously in the first operation mode,
The third display is a display displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be received (hereinafter, referred to as “first state”).
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d32)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d31,
Equipped with light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means which is in a light emitting state in the first state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d33)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d29 to d32, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during display of the symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d34)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d29 to d33, wherein
The first image is an image which is not selected only by performing one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d35)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d29 to d34, wherein
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which a state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d36)
In the game console described in Appendix d35,
In the case where the operating state of the operating means is maintained for a second period of time, the operating means is artificially regarded as having performed the first number of operations in the first operating mode. The first display is configured to be startable,
The second time is a time longer than the first time,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d37)
Supplementary note d29 to d36 of the game console according to any one of
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d38)
Supplementary note d29 to d36 of the game console according to any one of
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 39)
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Reproduction means capable of executing multiple kinds of renditions,
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
A game console equipped with
One of the effects of the plurality of types is the first effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the period during which the operation is continued is longer than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number greater than one,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first selection display,
The first selection display is a display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
The first image has the first operation mode in which the first selection mode is performed, compared with the case where one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode while the first selection display is performed. The image is more likely to be selected if the second number of operations is performed by the means.
The second number is a number greater than one,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d40)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d39,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a fourth effect,
The fourth effect is an effect different from the first effect,
The fourth effect is an effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d41)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note d39 or d40,
It has symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that urges the operating means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations is performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode while the third effect is being executed.
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode while the third effect is being executed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d42)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d39 to d41, wherein
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which a state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d43)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d42,
When the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a second time, the first effect is assumed as the operation means is artificially operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode. It is configured to be startable,
The second time is a time longer than the first time,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d44)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note d42 or d43,
During execution of the first selection display, even if the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for the first time or more, one operation is performed by the operation means Configured to be
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d45)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d39 to d44, wherein
The first image is an image which is not selected only by performing one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d46)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d39 to d45, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second selection display,
The second selection display is a selection display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images in accordance with the operation of the operation means,
The second selection display is a selection display different from the first selection display,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
The second image is an image that can be selected when a third number of operations are performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode while the second selection display is being performed.
The second image is an image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display,
The third number is a number greater than one,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d47)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d46,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is the fifth effect,
The fifth effect is an effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d48)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d39 to d47, wherein
Equipped with light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means to be in a first state in a state where an operation for starting the first effect by the operation means can be received,
The light emitting means is a means to be in a second state during execution of the first selection display,
The second state is a state different from the first state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 49)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d48,
The first state is a light emitting state,
The second state is a state in which light is not emitted,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d50)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d48,
The first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first mode,
The second state is a state of emitting light in a second mode,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d51)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note d50,
The first aspect is a first color,
The second aspect is a second color,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d52)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d39 to d51, wherein
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d53)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d39 to d51, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 54)
Symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays;
A game console equipped with
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a display in a first display mode (hereinafter referred to as "first display"),
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "second display"),
The second display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that may be started while the symbol variation display is displayed,
The second display is a display that may be started while the symbol variation display is displayed,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a display (hereinafter, referred to as a "third display") prompting the player to hit the operating means continuously.
The first display is a display that may be started when the operation means is continuously hit after the display of the third display is started,
The first display is a display that may be started even when the operation means is pressed for a long time after the display of the third display is started,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a display for prompting the player to operate the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth display”).
The fourth display is a display different from the third display,
The second display is a display that may be started when the operation means is operated two or more times after the display of the fourth display is started,
The second display is a display in which the display is not started only when the operation means is pressed once for a long time after the display of the fourth display is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 55)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d54,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of types of light emitting states
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operation means,
One of the plurality of light emission states is a first light emission state,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in the first light emitting state in a state of receiving an operation of the operation unit.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d56)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d55,
One of the plurality of types of light emitting states is a second light emitting state,
The first light emission state is a lighting state,
The second light emission state is a light off state,
The light emitting means being in the lighted state represents a state in which the operation of the operation means is received,
When the light emitting means is turned off, it indicates that the operation of the operation means is not received.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d57)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d55,
One of the plurality of types of light emitting states is a second light emitting state,
The first light emission state is a state in which light is emitted in the first light emission mode,
The second light emission state is a light emission state in a second light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d58)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d57, wherein
The first display is a notice display,
The second display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d59)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d58, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a display (hereinafter, referred to as “selection display”) instructing to select one of the plurality of options,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a display (hereinafter referred to as a “fifth display”) displayed when the first option among the plurality of options is selected,
The fifth display is a display that may be started when the operation means is operated two or more times after the display of the selection display is started,
The fifth display is a display in which the display is not started only when the operation means is pressed once for a long time after the display of the selection display is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d60)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d59,
The fifth display is a display in which the display is started when the number of operations of the operation means is the first number after the display of the selection display is started,
The first number is two or more.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d61)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d60, wherein
After the display of the third display is started, when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the display of the first display may be started on the assumption that the operation means is continuously hit. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d62)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d61, wherein
The long press means that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d63)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d62, wherein
One of the plurality of states for receiving the operation of the operation means is a first state,
One of the plurality of states for receiving the operation of the operation means is a second state,
The second state is a state different from the first state,
The third display is a display displayed in the first state,
The fourth display is a display displayed in the second state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d64)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d63,
The first state is a state in which an operation for starting display of the first display is received.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d65)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note d63 or d64,
The second state is a state in which an operation for starting display of the second display is received.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d66)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d63 to d65, wherein
The first state is a state that ends when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first state was reached,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d67)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d63 to d66, wherein
The second state is a state that ends when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d68)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d67, wherein
The second display is a display in which display is started when the number of operations of the operation means is a second number of times after the display of the fourth display is started,
The second number is two or more.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d69)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d68, wherein
The third display is a display including a first image,
The first image is an image including an image showing an appearance of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d70)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d69,
The fourth display is a display including a plurality of second images;
The second image is an image including an image showing an appearance of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d71)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d70,
The second image is an image having a display mode different from that of the first image.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d72)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d71, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d73)
The first operation means,
Second production means,
A game console equipped with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is the first effect,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The effect mode of the second effect is an effect mode different from the effect mode of the first effect,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started,
If the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started,
The second effect means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d74)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d73,
The “demonstration performed by the second rendering means” described in Appendix d73 is “a presentation performed by the second rendering means emitting light in the second light emission mode”.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d75)
It is a game console according to adjunct d73 or d74,
Equipped with first presentation means,
The first effect means is an image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 76)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d73 to d75, wherein
Equipped with a third presentation means,
The third effect means is a movable means,
The second effect means is means provided to the third effect means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d77)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d76,
The third effect means is an image display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 78)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d73 to d77, wherein
The second effect means is a means capable of emitting light in the first light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 79)
It is a game console provided with a first operation means,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The effect mode of the second effect is an effect mode different from the effect mode of the first effect,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started,
If the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started,
The second effect is an effect performed by a second effect means,
The second effect means is a light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d80)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d79,
"The effect performed by the second effect means" described in the supplementary note d79 is "the effect performed by the second effect means emitting light in the second light emission mode".
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d81)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d81,
The second effect means is a means capable of emitting light in the first light emission mode,
The first light emission mode is a light emission mode different from the second light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 82)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d79 to d81, wherein
Equipped with first presentation means,
The first effect means is a first image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 83)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d79 to d82, wherein
Equipped with a third presentation means,
The third effect means is a movable means,
The second effect means is means provided to the third effect means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 84)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d83,
Equipped with a fourth presentation means,
The fourth effect means is a second image display means,
The fourth effect means is means provided to the third effect means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 85)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 79 to 84, wherein
It has symbol display means that can display symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect that may be started during display of the symbol variation display,
The second effect is an effect that may be started during display of the symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d86)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d79 to d85, wherein
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 87)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d79 to d86, wherein
The “operation in the first operation mode” described in the supplementary note d79 is a “multiple operation”.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 88)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d79 to d87, wherein
The “operation in the second operation mode” described in the supplementary note d79 is a “long press operation”.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 89)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d88,
The long press operation is an operation in which the operating state is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 79)
It is a game console provided with a first operation means,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is the first effect,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The effect mode of the second effect is an effect mode different from the effect mode of the first effect,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started,
If the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started,
The second effect is a back button effect,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d80)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d79,
Equipped with first presentation means,
The first effect means is an image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d81)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d80,
The “demonstration performed by the first rendering means” described in the supplementary note d80 is “a rendering performed by displaying the first display by the first rendering means”.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 82)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d79 to d81, wherein
The second effect is an effect executed by the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 83)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 82,
The “effect performed by the first effect means” described in the additional statement 82 is “effect performed by the first effect means displaying the second display”.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 84)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d79 to d81, wherein
Equipped with a second presentation means,
The second effect means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d85)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d84,
The “demonstration performed by the second rendering means” described in the supplementary note d84 is “a presentation performed by the second rendering means emitting light in the second light emission mode”.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d86)
The first operation means,
Second operation means,
A game console equipped with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display that may be displayed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second display is a display that may be displayed in response to the second operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first display may be started,
When the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second display is not started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 87)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d86,
The second display is a display displayed on the setting screen.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix d 88)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note d86 or d87,
The second display is a display that is displayed when one of a plurality of options is selected.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e1)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying a mini game,
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
The effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first effect display”) is a display including a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation promotion display”). And
The effect display related to the mini game (hereinafter referred to as "second effect display") is a display including a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "the second operation promotion display"). ,
The first effect display is a display that may be displayed in a first period,
The second effect display is a display that may be displayed in a second period,
The first display and the second display are at least partially overlapping periods (hereinafter referred to as “third period”),
The result of the first effect display is to be carried out as a notice (hereinafter referred to as the "first notice"),
The result of the second effect display is to be given as a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter, referred to as “second notice”).
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e2)
The gaming machine described in the appendix e1,
When the operation means is operated in the third period, the first notice according to the second notice is performed after the second notice is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e3)
The gaming machine described in the appendix e1,
When the operation means is operated in the third period, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is performed,
The first notice may change according to the second notice after the second notice is made,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e4)
The game console according to any one of appendices e1 to e3, wherein
In the third period, the first effect display is overlapped with the second effect display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e5)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e4,
The second effect display is a display including a display of an effective period of the operation means related to the mini game.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e5, wherein
The first notice is a notice that can be performed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect,
In the case where the first notice is performed in the second mode than in the first mode, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed.
When the mini game is started, the first notice is more likely to be performed by the second mode than the first mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e7)
It is a game console described in appendix e6,
The second notice is a notice that can be implemented in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is the third aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is the fourth aspect,
When said 2nd notice is carried out in said 4th mode, it is constituted so that a big hit symbol may be finally displayed finally,
The second notice is configured to be performed in the fourth aspect when the first notice is performed in the second aspect,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e8)
It is a game console described in appendix e6,
The second notice is a notice that can be implemented in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is the third aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is the fourth aspect,
The second notice is configured so that the jackpot symbol may be finally clearly displayed when executed in the fourth mode than when executed in the third mode,
In the case of the first case than in the second case, the jackpot symbol is configured so as to be more likely to be finally displayed,
In the second case than in the third case, the jackpot symbol is configured so that it is likely to be finalized and displayed finally,
In the third case than in the fourth case, the jackpot symbol is configured so that it is easy to be finally displayed.
The first case is a case where the first notice is performed in the second mode, and the second notice is performed in the fourth mode.
The second case is a case where the first notice is performed in the second mode, and the second notice is performed in the third mode.
The third case is a case where the first notice is performed in the first mode, and the second notice is performed in the fourth mode.
The fourth case is a case where the first notice is performed in the first mode, and the second notice is performed in the third mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e9)
It is a game console described in appendix e6,
The second notice is a notice that can be implemented in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is the third aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is the fourth aspect,
The second notice is configured so that the jackpot symbol may be finally clearly displayed when executed in the fourth mode than when executed in the third mode,
In the first case and the second case, the probability that the big hit symbol is finally displayed is the same as in the case of the first case, or the first case is configured so that the big hit symbol may be finally displayed easily Has been
In the second case and the third case, the probability that the big hit symbol is finally displayed is the same, or the second case is configured so that the big hit symbol may be finally displayed. Has been
In the third case and the fourth case, the probability that the big hit symbol is finally displayed is the same, or the third case is configured so that the big hit symbol may be finally displayed. Has been
The first case is a case where the first notice is performed in the second mode, and the second notice is performed in the fourth mode.
The second case is a case where the first notice is performed in the second mode, and the second notice is performed in the third mode.
The third case is a case where the first notice is performed in the first mode, and the second notice is performed in the fourth mode.
The fourth case is a case where the first notice is performed in the first mode, and the second notice is performed in the third mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e9,
The number of times the operating means is operated for the result of the first effect display to be performed, and the number of times the operation means for the result of the second effect display to be operated is operated Is different,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e10,
In the case where the mini game is played and the first notice is given, it is likely that the big hit symbol is finally determined display than in the case where the mini game is not played and the first notice is given. Is configured to
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e12)
A gaming table provided with display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
Multiple types of mini games are configured to be executable,
One of the multiple types of mini games is a first mini game,
One of the plurality of mini games is a second mini game,
The first mini game is a mini game displayed using a display area,
The second mini game is a mini game displayed using the certain display area,
The first mini game and the second mini game are different mini games,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e13)
It is a game console described in appendix e12,
Equipped with a means of notice that can carry out multiple notices,
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice,
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the second notice is given than when the first notice is given,
One of the results of the first mini-game is a result suggesting that the second notice is to be made (hereinafter referred to as "the second result"),
One of the results of the second mini game is the second result,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e14)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note e12 or e13,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects during execution of the decorative symbol variation display,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
When the first mini game is performed, the first effect is more easily performed than the second effect,
When the second mini game is performed, the second effect is more easily performed than the first effect.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e15)
The game console according to any one of appendices e12 to e14,
The appearance rates of the plurality of mini games differ between the non-power support state and the power support state,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e16)
The game console according to any one of appendices e12 to e15, wherein
The first mini game is a mini game in which a first character appears and is played.
The second mini game is a mini game in which the first character is played.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e17)
The gaming machine described in the appendix e13,
The first mini game is a game that may be played with the appearance of a first character,
The second mini game is a mini game that may be played with the appearance of the first character,
The first mini game is a mini game that may be played with the appearance of a third character,
The second mini game is a mini game that may be played with the appearance of a fourth character,
In the first mini game, the second result is more easily derived when the third character appears than when the first character appears.
In the second mini game, the second result is more easily derived when the fourth character appears than when the first character appears.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e18)
The game console according to any one of appendices e12 to e17,
Another effect display (hereinafter referred to as "third effect display") is performed when the mini game is not displayed in the display area.
The third effect display is erased when the mini game is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e19)
The game console according to any one of appendices e12 to e18,
The display area is divided by a frame,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e20)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e12 to e19,
The certain display area is a display area set in advance.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e21)
The game console according to any one of appendices e12 to e20, wherein
The certain display area is formed by enlarging a display area preset in relation to the start of the mini game.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e22)
The game console according to any one of appendices e12 to e21,
The certain display area is an area provided in the display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e23)
The game console according to any one of appendices e12 to e21,
It has a display means (hereinafter referred to as "second display means") other than the display means, and
The certain display area is an area provided in the second display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e24)
A means of notice that can carry out multiple notices,
Display means capable of displaying a mini game,
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice,
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
In the case where the second notice is given rather than the first notice, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed.
The mini game is a game in which a plurality of results are prepared,
One of the plurality of results is a first result,
One of the plurality of results is a second result,
The notice is a notice that is executed according to the result of the mini game,
When the second result is derived, the second notice is more easily performed than when the first result is derived,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 25)
The gaming machine described in the appendix e24,
Before the result of the mini game is derived, the fact that the result of the mini game is the second result suggests that the second notice is likely to be made.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e26)
It is a game console according to the remarks e24 or e25,
Equipped with presentation means capable of executing the first presentation,
The effect means is display means,
The first effect is an effect to be performed in relation to the decorative symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect in which a plurality of effect results are prepared,
One of the plurality of rendering results is a first rendering result,
One of the plurality of rendering results is a second rendering result,
Before the result of the first effect is derived, it is suggested that the result of the first effect will be an advantageous development as it becomes the second effect result.
It is easier for the player to be given an advantage advantageous to the player in the second effect result than in the second result.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 27)
The game console described in appendix e26,
If the second rendering result is derived, a big hit is awarded,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 28)
It is a game console according to the remarks e26 or e27,
The mini game is a game that can be performed in a first period,
The first effect is an effect that can be performed in a second period,
The first period and the second period are at least partially overlapping periods,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 29)
The game console according to any one of appendices e26 to e28,
In the one decorative symbol variation display, the mini game is started earlier than the first effect,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e30)
The game console according to any one of appendices e24 to e29, wherein
And an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate;
When the operation means is operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived.
When the operation means is not operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is not derived.
If the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is easier to be given than the second notice,
When the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice is easier to be given than the first notice,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e31)
The game console according to any one of appendices e24 to e30, wherein
Even if the second advance notice is scheduled to be executed (hereinafter referred to as the “first case”), the first advance notice is executed if the result of the mini game is not derived.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e32)
It is a game console described in appendix e31,
It has hold icon display means that can display multiple types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The first notice is a notice that the first hold icon is displayed,
The second notice is a notice that the second hold icon is displayed,
The mini game is started while a certain symbol variation display is being performed, with the first hold icon being displayed,
In the first case, the first hold icon is not changed to the second hold icon if the result of the mini game is not derived.
In the first case, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon when the result of the mini game is derived.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e33)
It is a game console described in appendix e31,
It has hold icon display means that can display multiple types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The first notice is a notice that the first hold icon is displayed,
The second notice is a notice that the second hold icon is displayed,
The mini game is started while a certain symbol variation display is being performed, with the first hold icon being displayed,
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display,
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display, and the certain symbol Changing from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol change display started later than the change display
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e34)
The game console according to any one of appendices e24 to e29, wherein
And an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate;
In the mini game, the same result is derived when the operating means is operated and when the operating means is not operated.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 35)
The game console according to any one of appendices e24 to e34, wherein
The mini game is started before reaching
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 36)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means,
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a mini game,
The configuration is such that the result of the mini game is derived by operating the operation means,
The result of the mini game is changed according to the operation situation of the operation means,
The result of the mini game may include a result (hereinafter referred to as "first result") that is not related to the result of the pass / fail judgment.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 37)
The gaming machine described in Appendix e36,
The mini game is a game aiming to achieve a certain task,
Depending on the operation status of the operation means, whether or not the certain task is achieved changes.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 38)
It is a game console as described in appendix e36 or e37,
It has decorative symbol display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display,
The mini game is a game that is started in a first period (hereinafter referred to as "first case"),
The first period is a period in which the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended,
The first period is a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 39)
It is a game console described in appendix e38,
The automatic operation of the operation means is configured to be executable,
In the mini game in the first case, the auto operation is configured to be inexecutable.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e40)
It is a game console as described in appendix e38 or e39,
The mini game may be started in the second period (hereinafter referred to as "the second case"),
The second period is a period including execution of the decorative symbol variation display and execution of a big hit game,
The first result is more easily derived as a result of the mini game in the first case than in the second case.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 41)
It is a game console described in appendix e40,
The second period is a period not including the first period,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e42)
It is a game console according to the remarks e40 or e41,
In the second case, as a result of the mini game, a result related to the result of the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second result") is more easily derived than in the first case. A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 43)
The game console described in Appendix e42,
The second result when the mini game is started during execution of the decorative symbol variation display is a notice or a prefetch notice.
The second result in the case where the mini game is started during the execution of the big hit game is a prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 44)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices e40 to e43,
The types of mini games differ between the first case and the second case,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 45)
The game console according to any one of appendices e40 to e44, wherein
In the mini game of the first case, an effective period display of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “first effective period display”) is configured to be displayed,
In the mini game of the second case, an effective period display of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “second effective period display”) is displayed.
The first effective period display is a meter display,
The second effective period display is a meter display,
The rate at which the meter decreases is different between the first lifetime indication and the second lifetime period,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e46)
The game console according to any one of appendices e40 to e45,
In the mini game of the first case, a display for prompting the user to operate the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "first operation promotion display") is displayed.
In the mini game of the second case, a display for prompting the user to operate the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "second operation prompting display") is displayed.
The first operation prompting display comprises a first number of display patterns,
The second operation prompting display comprises a second number of display patterns,
In the first number and the second number, the second number is larger,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 47)
The game console according to any one of appendices e38 to e46,
In the first case, only the first result is derived as a result of the mini game,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 48)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display;
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of effect displays is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of effect displays is a second effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display,
The second effect display is an effect display of a mini game,
The first effect display is an effect display in which a big hit advance notice (hereinafter referred to as "first notice") may be executed,
The second effect display is an effect display in which a notice (hereinafter, referred to as “second notice”) related to the first notice may be derived.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 49)
The game console described in appendix e48,
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-indication,
The pseudo chain display is a display in which temporary stop display of a decorative symbol is displayed a plurality of times in one decorative symbol variation display,
The second notice is a notice that the number of temporary stop indications of the decorative symbol in the pseudo-series display increases.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e50)
The game console described in appendix e48,
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-indication,
The pseudo chain display is a display in which temporary stop display of a decorative symbol is displayed a plurality of times in one decorative symbol variation display,
The second notice is a notice that the pseudo continuous display is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix e 51)
The game console described in appendix e48,
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-indication,
The pseudo chain display is a display in which temporary stop display of a decorative symbol is displayed a plurality of times in one decorative symbol variation display,
The second notice is a notice of the number of temporary stop indications of the decorative symbol in the pseudo-series display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix f1)
The first operation means,
Second operation means,
A game console equipped with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is the first effect,
The first effect can be started in response to the operation of the first operation means,
The second operation means is configured to vibrate in at least a part of the states in which the first effect is being performed (hereinafter referred to as "first state"),
A game stand characterized by

  The first effect may be a preliminary effect. The second operation means may be an operation means larger than the first operation means or a small operation means.

(Appendix f2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note f1,
The first state is a state in an entire period in which the first effect is performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix f3)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note f1 or f2,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a second effect,
If the second effect is started when the second operation means is operated within a second period, and if the second effect is not started even if the second operation means is operated Is configured to be
The second operation means is an operation means that may vibrate when the second operation means is operated within the second period.
A game stand characterized by

  The second operation means may be an operation means that always vibrates when the second operation means is operated within the second period.

(Appendix f4)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note f3,
The second operation means is configured to vibrate also in at least a part of the states in which the second effect is being executed (hereinafter referred to as "second state"),
The first state is a state in which the second effect is not executed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix f5)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices f1 to f4,
When the first operation means is operated within a first period, the first effect is started, and when the first operation means is operated, the first effect is not started Is configured to be
The second operation means is an operation means that may vibrate when the second operation means is operated within the first period.
A game stand characterized by

  That is, even in a state where the first effect is not performed, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate or may be configured to vibrate.

(Appendix f6)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note f5,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notification,
One of the plurality of types of notifications is a first notification,
The first notification is a notification for prompting operation of the first operation means,
The first notification is configured to be performed within the first period,
A game stand characterized by

  That is, the second operation means may be an operation means that may vibrate when the second operation means is operated in a state where the first notification is being performed, or the vibration may be always generated. It may be an operating means.

(Appendix f7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f6, wherein
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a third effect,
According to the operation of the first operation means, any one of the first effect and the third effect can be started.
The second operation means is configured not to vibrate when the third effect is being executed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix f8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f7, wherein
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when the first operation means is not operated.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix f9)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices f1 to f8,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix f10)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices f1 to f8,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g1)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A game console equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display including a display related to an operation effective period of the operation means,
The second display is a display including a display related to an operation effective period of the operation means,
The second display is configured to start a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first notice display”) in response to the operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g2)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g1,
The first preliminary display is a display including a display including a display related to an operation effective period of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g3)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note g1 or g2,
The first preliminary display is a display that may be displayed during the execution of a certain effect,
The certain effect is configured to develop after the first preliminary display is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g4)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g3,
One of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The third display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation valid period,
The third display is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "third notice display"),
The certain effect is configured to develop after the third preliminary indication is started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g5)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g4,
The third preliminary display is a display that may be displayed even if the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period,
The first preliminary display is a display that is not displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g5,
The first display is a display on which the first preliminary display is performed after the operation means is operated,
The first display is a display on which another notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second notice display”) is performed before the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g7)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g6,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a first display mode,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode,
The second notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a second display mode,
The second notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a fourth display mode,
In the case where the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode than in the case where the second notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the method according to the third display mode is performed. The first notice display is configured to be easily displayed,
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finalized when the first preliminary display is displayed in the third display mode than when the first preliminary display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g6,
One of the plurality of displays is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an operation promotion display of the operation means,
The operation prompting display is a display that may be displayed in a fifth display mode,
The operation prompting display is a display that may be displayed in a sixth display mode,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a first display mode,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode,
The first notice by the third display mode is more likely to be displayed in the sixth display mode than the operation prompt display is displayed in the fifth display mode. The display is configured to be easily displayed,
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finalized when the first preliminary display is displayed in the third display mode than when the first preliminary display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g8,
The first notice display is a display displayed in at least a part of the remaining period of the operation effective period,
The period in which the first advance notice is displayed when the operation means is operated after the first period has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period is a third period,
The period during which the first advance notice is displayed when the operation means is operated after the second period has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period is a fourth period,
The second period is longer than the first period,
The fourth period is a shorter period than the third period,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g10)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g9,
The total length of the first period and the third period is the same length as the operation effective period or a length shorter than the operation effective period,
The total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same length as the operation effective period or a length shorter than the operation effective period.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g11)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying the first display;
A game console equipped with
The first display is a display including a display related to an operation effective period of the operation means,
The first display is configured to start a notice display (hereinafter referred to as "first notice display") in response to the operation of the operation means.
The first preliminary display is a display including a display regarding an operation effective period of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g12)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g11,
The first preliminary display is a display that may be displayed during the execution of a certain effect,
The certain effect is configured to develop after the first preliminary display is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g13)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g12,
One of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The third display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation valid period,
The third display is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "third notice display"),
The certain effect is configured to develop after the third preliminary indication is started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g14)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g13,
The third preliminary display is a display that may be displayed even if the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period,
The first preliminary display is a display that is not displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g11 to g14,
The first display is a display on which the first preliminary display is performed after the operation means is operated,
The first display is a display on which another notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "second display") is performed before the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g16)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g11 to g15,
One of the plurality of displays is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an operation promotion display of the operation means,
The operation prompting display is a notice display that may be displayed in a fifth display mode,
The operation prompting display is a notice display that may be displayed in a sixth display mode,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a first display mode,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode,
The case where the operation prompting display is displayed in the sixth display mode is more than the case where the operation prompting display is displayed in the fifth display mode is the first display using the third display body sulfur. It is configured to be easy to display the notice of
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finalized when the first preliminary display is displayed in the third display mode than when the first preliminary display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g17)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g11 to g16,
The first notice display is a display displayed in at least a part of the remaining period of the operation effective period,
The period in which the first advance notice is displayed when the operation means is operated after the first period has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period is a third period,
The period during which the first advance notice is displayed when the operation means is operated after the second period has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period is a fourth period,
The second period is longer than the first period,
The fourth period is a shorter period than the third period,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g18)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g17,
The total length of the first period and the third period is the same length as the operation effective period or a length shorter than the operation effective period,
The total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same length as the operation effective period or a length shorter than the operation effective period.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g19)
It is a game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display related to an effect,
The second display is a display related to the certain effect,
The first display is a display that may be displayed temporarily as a display constituting at least a part of a combination of decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that does not constitute a combination of the decorative symbols,
The first display and the second display are at least partially different,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g20)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g19,
The certain effect is an effect started after the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g21)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note g19 or g20,
The first display is a display provided with a first number of patterns,
The second display is a display provided with a second number of patterns,
The second number is a larger number than the first number,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g22)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g21,
The first number is one,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g23)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g22,
The combination of the decorative patterns is three,
The certain effect is an effect that is started when the three first displays are displayed once as a combination of the decorative symbols.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the display modes of the three first displays may be the same, or some or all of them may be different from each other.

(Appendix g24)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g22,
The combination of the decorative patterns is three,
The combination of the decorative symbols is configured to be displayed once in sequence,
The certain effect is a effect to be started when the first display is displayed as a decorative symbol to be displayed temporarily at the end of the combination of the decorative symbols.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g 25)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g24,
The display means is a means that may display a notice display for giving a notice that the first display may be once displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variation display,
The first display is configured to be more easily displayed when the preliminary display is displayed than when the preliminary display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g26)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g25,
The decorative symbol variation display is configured such that a combination of the decorative symbols according to the result of the judgment of acceptance is displayed after the variation of the decorative symbol is started,
The first display is a display that is not displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g27)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g26,
And an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate;
The certain effect is a effect using the operation means,
The first display is a display including a display imitating the operation means,
The second display is a display including a display imitating the operation means,
The first display is a display that does not include a display related to an operation effective period of the operation means,
The second display is a display including a display regarding an operation valid period of the operation means in the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g 28)
The gaming machine described in Appendix g27,
The first display is a display displayed before the operation effective period of the operation means in the certain effect is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix g 29)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g26,
And an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate;
The operation means is a means capable of taking any one of a plurality of states,
One of the plurality of states is a first state,
One of the plurality of states is a second state,
The first state and the second state are different states,
The first display is a display provided with a display pattern (hereinafter referred to as "first display pattern") corresponding to the operation means in the first state,
The second display is a display pattern (hereinafter referred to as “the display state corresponding to the operation means in the second state.
It is called "second display pattern". Is a display equipped with),
The second display is a display provided with the first display pattern,
The second display is a display provided with the second display pattern,
A case where the second display is displayed in the second display pattern in the certain effect after the first display is displayed in the first display pattern (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”). There is)
The operation means in the first case is configured to be more likely to be in the second state than in the first state.
A game stand characterized by

  The following is a supplementary note including the matters described so far.

(Appendix h1)
It is a game console provided with image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a display for notifying a time until a certain effect is performed,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The second display is a display that may give notice that the time until the certain effect is started changes.
The second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, "a certain effect" may be an effect by display or effect moving means (including an image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versa lighter, a light guide plate, etc.).

(Appendix h2)
It is a game stand described in appendix h1,
When the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is configured to change after the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change. Also, the display mode of the first display may be changed only when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix h3)
It is a game console according to the remarks h1 or h2,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
The second image display means is configured to be in front of the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h4)
It is a game console described in Appendix h3,
In the second image display means, the second display may be displayed,
The first image display means may be overlapped by the second image display means displaying the second display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h5)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h1 to h4,
Even when the second display is displayed, the time notified by the first display is advanced,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h5,
After the timer reaches 0, a different display than the second one is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h7)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h1 to h6,
If the second display is displayed, it is easier to hit a jackpot than if it is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h7,
The display of one of the multiple displays is the third display,
The certain effect is the third display displayed by the image display means,
The display of the above-mentioned substitute sign is the effect display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h7,
Equipped with presentation movable means,
The effect moving means is a means capable of performing a plurality of types of operations,
One of the plurality of types of motion is a rendering motion,
The certain effect is the effect operation by the effect movable means.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, operations other than the rendering operation may be executed, and there are, for example, an operation at the time of power on, an initial position returning operation, or a retraction operation as an operation other than the rendering operation. Also, the effect movable means is not limited to the one provided on the game board, and may be one provided on the frame (front door), for example.

(Appendix h10)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h1 to h9,
It is easier to make a big hit if the above-mentioned certain effect occurs than if it does not occur,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h10,
A hot effect display may be displayed between the display of the first display and the display of the second display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h11, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h11, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h14)
It is a game console provided with image display means,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The period display is a display displayed for a certain period during reach,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports the timing (henceforth a "1st timing") which there is a possibility that the said 1st presentation display may be displayed,
The period display may be erased before the first timing is reached,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the displayed period of the period display is not limited to reach, but may be during fluctuation or jackpot. Also, even during reach, it may be displayed in the first reach but not displayed in the second reach.

(Appendix h15)
It is a game console described in appendix h14,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a third effect display,
There may be cases where the timing at which the third effect display is displayed is not notified by the period display,
During the display of the third effect display, the period display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a discharge position, a notification other than an error such as a notification for preventing withdrawal of a prepaid card, light emission by an LED, a rendering operation by a character May be performed. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may be notified by a period display. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

(Appendix h16)
It is a game stand described in appendix h15,
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as "big hit symbol variation") in which the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h17)
It is a game console described in appendix h16,
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol change (hereinafter referred to as "a lost symbol change") in which the result of the pass / fail judgment is an off-state,
The big hit symbol variation is configured to have a higher frequency at which the third effect display is displayed than the lost symbol variation,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h18)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h15 to h17,
Equipped with presentation movable means,
The effect movable means is a means which may perform an effect operation,
While the display of the third effect display, the power-out movable means may perform the effect operation.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h19)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h14 to h18,
After the period display is not displayed, the period display is in an easily visible state,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h20)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h14 to h19,
The period display is hidden until the end of a certain period during the reach,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h21)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h14 to h19,
The period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period during the reach,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note h22)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h14 to h21,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports the timing (henceforth a "2nd timing") which displays a 2nd effect display.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more times. In addition, the location where the chance up is notified in response to the reach may be fixed, such as always reporting the chance up three times when a certain reach occurs and two times whenever another reach occurs, the same reach When it is, the part which reports a chance up may be made to fluctuate so that it may notify three times and may notify only once once. In that case, the case of "informing a lot of timing" may be more likely to be a big hit than in the case of "not giving much notification", or may be easy to lose. Also, the probability of a big hit may not change depending on the number of notified timings. Further, the larger the number of chances occurring, the easier it will be a big hit, and the smaller the number of chances occurring, the easier it will be a big hit.

(Appendix h23)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h14 to h22,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
The first image display means is an image display means which may display the period display,
The second image display means is an image display means which may perform a rendering operation.
At least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second image display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h24)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h14 to h23,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h25)
It is a game console provided with image display means,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The period display is a display displayed for a certain period during reach,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports the timing (henceforth a "1st timing") which there is a possibility that the said 1st presentation display may be displayed,
Before the first timing, at least a part of the first effect display may be overlapped by the third display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h26)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first display,
According to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the first display changes at a first speed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second display,
According to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the second display changes at a second speed,
The first speed and the second speed are different,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h27)
It is a game console described in Appendix h26,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a time display,
The time display is a display in which the display mode of at least a part of the time display changes according to the passage of time within a certain period,
One display of the time display is the first display,
One of the time displays is the second display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 28)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note h26 or h27,
The second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 29)
The game console according to any one of appendices h26 to h28,
The first display is a display in which the display mode changes until a first time elapses,
The second display is a display in which the display mode changes until a second time elapses,
When the first time has elapsed, a third display is displayed,
When the second time has elapsed, a fourth display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. Also, the third display may have a higher reliability than the fourth display, and the fourth display may have a higher reliability than the third display.

(Appendix h30)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h26 to h29,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a display of a first type,
The first type of display includes the first display and the second display,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of displays.

(Appendix h31)
It is a game console described in appendix h30,
The first type of display is a timer advance display,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The timer advance notice display is a notice for notifying a time until the first effect display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h32)
It is a game console described in appendix h30,
Equipped with operating means,
The display of the first type is the display of the operation effective period,
The said operation effective period display is a display which shows the period which makes operation of the said operation means effective,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h33)
It is a game console described in appendix h30,
The first type of display is a period display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The said period display is a display which may alert | report the timing (henceforth a "1st timing") which there is a possibility that the said 2nd effect display may be displayed in a 1st period,
The first timing is reported from the start to the end of the first period,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h34)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h26 to h33,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h35)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a countdown display,
The countdown display is an effect in which notification of a time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter referred to as “time notification”) may be performed,
When the time notification is executed by the countdown display, the display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in a first display mode,
When the time notification is executed by the count gown display, the countdown display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h36)
It is a game console described in Appendix h35,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a first display size,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a second display size,
The second display size is larger than the first display size;
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h37)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note h35 or h36,
When the display of the countdown display starts, the countdown display is displayed in a first display mode,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h38)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h35 to h37,
When the countdown display is displayed, the display mode always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 39)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 37, wherein
When the display mode is changed to the second display mode, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally displayed than when the first display mode is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 40)
It is a game stand as described in any one of appendixes 35 to 39, wherein
The start and end of the countdown display is performed within a period of one symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h41)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h35 to h40,
When the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the countdown display moves.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h42)
It is a game console described in appendix h41,
Even during the movement of the countdown display, the notification of the time by the countdown display is continued.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h43)
It is a game console described in appendix h41,
While the countdown display is moving, the time notification by the countdown display is interrupted,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h44)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h35 to h43,
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, a notification is given indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed by the countdown display is 0,
The countdown display is configured to be erased after the notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed is 0 is performed by the countdown display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 45)
It is a game console described in appendix h44,
When the time until the certain effect is performed is 0, the specific display is displayed and then hidden,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h46)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h35 to h45,
There is also a case where it does not change to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h47)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes h35 to h46,
The display means comprises a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
In some cases, the countdown display of the first display mode may be displayed by the first display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h48)
It is a game console described in Appendix h47,
The second display means may display a countdown display of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 49)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h35 to h48,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h50)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h35 to h48,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h51)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a period display,
The first display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The first display is a display for notifying a first timing,
The first timing is a timing at which the second display may start to be displayed.
The first display may be erased before the first timing after the display of the first display starts.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h52)
It is a game console described in appendix h51,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an effect display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display may be displayed before the first timing.
The first display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the display of the third display starts.
During display of the third display, the first display is erased,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h53)
It is a game console described in appendix h52,
The third display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h54)
It is a game console described in appendix h53,
In the case where the third display is displayed, it is easier to finally display the jackpot symbol finally than when the third display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 55)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h52 to h54,
It is equipped with effect moving means capable of performing multiple types of motions,
One of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation,
The first operation is a rendering operation,
The first operation may be performed while the third display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h56)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h51 to h55,
The first display is configured to be displayed again after the first display is erased,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 57)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h51 to h55,
After the first display is erased, the first display is not displayed until the certain period of time elapses.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h58)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h51 to h55,
The first display is configured to be redisplayed before the certain period of time elapses after the first display is erased.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h59)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h51 to h58,
The certain period is the period during which the super reach is in progress.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h60)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h51 to h59,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a display different from the second display,
The first display is a display that may also notify the second timing,
The second timing is timing at which the fourth display may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h61)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h51 to h60,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h62)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a display including a countdown display,
The countdown display is a display that may include timing notification,
The timing notification is a notification in which the timing at which a certain effect is performed is performed by updating the display of the countdown display.
The display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode while the countdown display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note h63)
The game console described in appendix h62,
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 64)
It is a game console described in appendix h63,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a first display size,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size,
The second display size is larger between the first display size and the second display size.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h65)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 64, wherein
When the display of the countdown display starts, the first display is displayed in the first display mode,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h66)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h62 to h65,
During the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h67)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h62 to h65,
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode It is easier for the final display of the big hit design,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h68)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h62 to h67,
The display of the first display is started and ended during execution of one pattern variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h69)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h62 to h68,
The first display is a display in which the display position may change.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h70)
It is a game console described in Appendix h69,
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at a first position, and the first display of the second display mode is displayed at a second position. It may be a game console.

(Appendix h71)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note h69 or h70,
The first display is a display that may be moved and displayed.
The display position of the first display is changed by the movement display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h72)
It is a game console described in appendix h71,
Even during the display of the movement display, the update display of the countdown display is continued,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h73)
It is a game console described in appendix h71,
While the movement display is being displayed, the update display of the countdown display is interrupted.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h74)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h62 to h73,
The countdown display is a display of a countdown of time,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h75)
It is a game console described in appendix h74,
The timing notification is a notification that indicates that the timing at which the certain effect is performed is reached by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 76)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note h74 or h75,
After the indication indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown indication, the countdown indication is configured to be erased.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h77)
The gaming machine described in appendix h76,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display not included in the certain effect,
When the indication indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown indication, the countdown indication is configured to be erased after the second indication is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note h78)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h62 to h77,
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 79)
It is a game console described in Appendix h78,
The first display of the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h80)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h62 to h79,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h81)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h62 to h79,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h82)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display including a time display,
It is configured that a certain effect may be started after the display of the timer display is started,
Even if the display of the timer display is started, the certain effect may not be started, and
The certain effect may be started in response to the display of the timer display being started and the time display becoming a certain time,
If the timer display is started and the certain effect is executed, the big hit symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display than when the timer display is started and the certain effect is not executed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h83)
It is a game console described in Appendix h82,
If the time display has reached the certain time after the timer display has been started, the certain effect is started,
If the time display does not reach the certain time after the timer display is started, the certain effect is not started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h84)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note h82 or h83,
The certain effect is at least one kind of notice among a plurality of kinds of notices,
One of the multiple types of announcements is the first announcement,
One of the multiple types of announcements is a second announcement,
One of the multiple types of announcements is the third announcement,
One of the multiple types of announcements is the fourth announcement,
The first notice is a prefetch notice.
The second notice is a notice that the execution time of the symbol variation display is longer when it is executed than when it is not executed,
The third notice is a notice that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finalized in the symbol variation display when executed than the case where it is not executed, and the fourth notice is a notice that can notify that the jackpot will occur. Is
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the first notice may be a hold change notice, a prefetch mode, or a continuous notice.

  Further, the second notice may be a pseudo-sequence or a notice effect by inserting a movie.

  Further, the third advance notice may be a notice of cut-in or may be a next notice.

  Also, the fourth advance notice may be a big hit notice.

(Appendix h85)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h82 to h84,
One of the display types is a mini game display,
The time display reaches the certain time according to the result of the display of the mini game, and the certain effect is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h86)
It is a game console described in Appendix h85,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice item,
The preview item may be displayed according to the result of the display of the mini game,
The notice item includes a display indicating that the timer display starts to be displayed.
The time display is configured to reach the certain time to start the certain effect after the preliminary item is displayed.
If the preview item is not displayed, the time display does not reach the certain time and the certain effect is not started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h87)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note h85 or h86,
It is configured such that the result of the display of the mini game is derived before the change of the time display is started and before the time display reaches the certain time.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 88)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note h85 or h86,
After the change of the time display is started and before the time display reaches the certain time, the result of the display of the mini game is derived.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 89)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h85 to h88,
As a result of the display of the mini game, a result unrelated to the certain effect may be derived.
The display of the mini game is configured to be started before the timer display is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h90)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h82 to h89,
The timer display when the certain effect is not started is configured such that the time display is erased without displaying the certain time.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note h91)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h82 to h90,
The timer display is a display started to be displayed in any of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
The certain effect is more easily started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 92)
It is a game stand described in appendix h91,
One of the plurality of aspects is the third aspect,
The third aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
The third aspect is an aspect different from the second aspect,
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot symbol is configured to be finalized,
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, it is different from the big hit game performed in response to the big hit symbol being displayed in a definite manner, and a state advantageous to the player is given. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h93)
It is a game console described in appendix h92,
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the timer display is configured to be erased before the big hit symbol is determined and displayed without changing the time display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h94)
It is a game console described in appendix h92,
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches the certain time, the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed without the certain effect being started. Is configured to
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h95)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h92 to h94,
The first aspect is an aspect in which a time display first displayed in the timer display is a first time,
The second aspect is an aspect in which a time display first displayed in the timer display is a second time,
The third aspect is an aspect in which a time display first displayed in the timer display is a third time,
The second time is longer than the first time and the second time,
The third time is different from the first time,
The third time is different from the second time,
The third time is the time displayed only if the advantageous condition is granted,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 96)
It is a game console described in Appendix h95,
The time display first displayed in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds and is also configured to be able to display a display following the decimal point,
The display of the first time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a time display in which the decimal part is 0,
The display of the second time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a time display in which the decimal part is 0,
The display of the third time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a time display in which the decimal part is other than 0.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h97)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note h95 or h96,
The display of the first time as the time display initially displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display of which the timer display gives notice.
The display of the second time as the time display initially displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives notice.
The display of the third time as the time display initially displayed in the timer display is a display of a time longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display of which the timer display gives notice.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h98)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h82 to h97,
Equipped with effect display means capable of executing effect display;
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the timer display,
There is a case where the timer display is displayed on any one of the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter referred to as "first case"),
There is a case where the timer display is displayed on both the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter referred to as "the second case"),
In the case of the first case, the certain effect may not be started.
In the second case, the certain effect is configured to be started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 99)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h82 to h98,
The timer display is a display on which time display is displayed,
The certain time is 0.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h100)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display,
The first display is one of display related to a notice,
The second display is a prefetch notice display performed by displaying the hold icon in a certain mode,
The third display is one of the displays for notifying that the execution of the effect will be started (display showing that the execution of the effect is waiting),
The fourth display is a notice display of one of notice displays different from the second display,
The display of the first display may start before the display of the second display starts,
In the second state, the display may end in the second state in which the third display in which the display is started in the first state may be ended.
After the display of the third display ends in the second state, the display of the fourth display is started in the second state,
It may be configured to be in the second state after the first state,
The first state is one of states in which a hold icon may be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h101)
It is a game stand described in appendix h100,
In the case of the next symbol variation display, the display may be ended in the next symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h102)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note h100 or h102,
The display of the position among the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of the background on the hold icon,
In the first state, the fifth display can be displayed;
The fifth display is configured not to be displayed in the second state,
The first state is a state in which a certain reach effect is not performed,
The second state is a state in which a certain reach effect is being performed,
At least a part of the area where the third display is displayed is configured to overlap the area where the fifth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h103)
The game console described in appendix h102,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display performed by displaying the fifth display in a certain mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h104)
It is a game console described in the remarks h102 or h103,
At least a part of the area where the first display is displayed is configured to overlap the area where the fifth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h105)
It is a game console described in the remarks h102 or h103,
The area in which the first display is displayed is configured not to overlap the area in which the fifth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h106)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h100 to h105,
The first display whose display is started in a certain symbol variation display may not be continuously displayed in the next symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 107)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h100 to h105,
In the area where the third display is displayed, the display of the fourth display is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h108)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display,
The first indication is an indication at least suggesting that the second indication may be initiated,
The second display is a display of a hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display is a display for informing that execution of a certain effect is started,
The fourth display is a notice display relating to the symbol variation display being executed,
The fifth display is a display indicating that at least a hold icon is displayed,
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started,
In the first state, the display of the third display may be started,
In the second state, the display may end in the second state, in which the third display whose display is started in the first state may end.
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the fourth display is started in the second state,
After the first state, the second state may occur.
The first state is a state in which a certain reach effect is not performed,
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being performed,
In the first state, the fifth display can be displayed together with the hold icon,
In the second state, the fifth display is configured not to be displayed together with the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 109)
The gaming machine described in appendix h108,
The third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be continuously displayed even after the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h110)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note h108 or h109,
At least a portion of the third display is configured to overlap the fifth display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 111)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h108 to h110,
The fifth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is a first embodiment,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment,
The case where the fifth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the fifth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect Big hit symbol is easy to be displayed in symbol change display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h112)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h108 to h110,
The fifth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is a first embodiment,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment,
The case where the fifth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the fifth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect , It is easy to start the display of the second display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 113)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h108 to h112,
At least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the fifth display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h114)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h108 to h112,
The first display and the fifth display are configured not to overlap.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h115)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h108 to h114,
The first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display is erased before the next started symbol fluctuation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h116)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h108 to h115,
The fourth display is displayed in an area where the third display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h117)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h108 to h115,
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a display prompting the user to operate the operation means,
The sixth display is a display that is started after the third display is started,
When the operation means is operated during the display of the sixth display, the display of the fourth display is started,
The third display is a display whose display is ended before the display of the sixth display is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h118)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note h117,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a seventh display,
The seventh display is a display for notifying that the display of the sixth display is started,
The third display is a display whose display is terminated while the seventh display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h119)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h108 to h118,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is an eighth display,
The eighth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
Two of the above third displays may be displayed.
The display mode of the other changes after the display of one of the two third displays is finished,
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps the eighth display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h120)
It is a game console described in appendix 119,
When two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is finished in one symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h121)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h108 to h120,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a ninth display,
The ninth display is an explanatory display,
The ninth display is a display displayed in a first display area of the display means when displayed.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h122)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices 108 to h121,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h123)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display,
The first display is a display of a character associated with the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display is a display indicating that the display start of a certain preliminary display is awaited.
The fourth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started,
In the first state, the third display may be started,
In the second state, the display may end in the second state, in which the third display whose display is started in the first state may end.
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain advance notice may be started in the second state,
After the certain advance notice is displayed, a certain effect may be started.
After the first state, the second state may occur.
While the sixth display is displayed, the hold icon is configured to be displayable.
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed,
The first state is one of states in which the sixth display can be displayed,
The second state is one of states in which the sixth display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 124)
It is a game console described in Appendix h123,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display,
The certain advance notice display is a notice to notice that the certain effect is started,
The certain effect is a notice regarding a symbol change display being executed,
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain advance display.
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 125)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note h123 or h124,
It is configured to be able to execute a certain reach effect,
The first state is one of the states before execution of the certain reach effect is started,
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h126)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h123 to h125,
The third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be continuously displayed even after the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h127)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h123 to h126,
At least a portion of the third display is configured to overlap the sixth display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 128)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h123 to h127,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is a first embodiment,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment,
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect Big hit symbol is easy to be displayed in symbol change display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 129)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h123 to h127,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is a first embodiment,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment,
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect , It is easy to start the display of the second display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h130)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h123 to h129,
At least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 131)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 123 to h130,
The first display and the sixth display are configured not to overlap.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h132)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h123 to h131,
The first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display is erased before the next started symbol fluctuation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note h133)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h123 to h132,
In the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 134)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h123 to h133,
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a seventh display,
The seventh display is a display prompting the user to operate the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started,
When the operation means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, the certain effect is started,
The third display is a display whose display ends before the display of the seventh display is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 135)
It is a game console described in appendix h134,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is an eighth display,
The eighth display is a display for predicting that the display of the seventh display is started,
The third display is a display whose display is ended while the eighth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h136)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h123 to h135,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a ninth display,
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
Two of the above third displays may be displayed.
The display mode of the other changes after the display of one of the two third displays is finished,
The third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps the ninth display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 137)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note h136,
When two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is finished in one symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 138)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h123 to h137,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a tenth display,
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display to be displayed in a first display area of the display means when displayed.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h139)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h123 to h138,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h140)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The first display is a display of a character associated with the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display is a display indicating that the display start of a certain preliminary display is awaited.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started,
In the first state, the third display may be started,
In the second state, the display may end in the second state, in which the third display whose display is started in the first state may end.
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain advance notice may be started in the second state,
After the certain advance notice is displayed, a certain effect may be started.
The certain effect is a notice regarding a symbol change display being executed,
After the first state, the second state may occur.
The first state is one of states in which the hold icon can be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 141)
It is a game console described in appendix h140,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
While the sixth display is displayed, the hold icon is configured to be displayable.
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note h142)
It is a game stand described in appendix h141,
In the first state, the display of at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display,
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note h143)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note h141 or h142,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is a first embodiment,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment,
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect Big hit symbol is easy to be displayed in symbol change display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 144)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note h141 or h142,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is a first embodiment,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment,
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect , It is easy to start the display of the second display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 145)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h141 to h144,
At least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h146)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h141 to h144,
The first display and the sixth display are configured not to overlap.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 147)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h140 to h146,
It is configured to be able to execute a certain reach effect,
The first state is one of the states before execution of the certain reach effect is started,
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note h148)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h140 to h147,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display,
The certain advance notice display is a notice to notice that the certain effect is started,
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain advance display.
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 149)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h140 to h148,
The third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be continuously displayed even after the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h150)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h140 to h149,
The first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display is erased before the next started symbol fluctuation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 151)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h140 to h150,
In the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note h152)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h140 to h151,
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a seventh display,
The seventh display is a display prompting the user to operate the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started,
When the operation means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, the certain effect is started,
The third display is a display whose display ends before the display of the seventh display is started.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note h153)
It is a game console described in appendix h152,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is an eighth display,
The eighth display is a display for predicting that the display of the seventh display is started,
The third display is a display whose display is ended while the eighth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 154)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices h140 to h153,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a ninth display,
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
Two of the above third displays may be displayed.
The display mode of the other changes after the display of one of the two third displays is finished,
The third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps the ninth display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 155)
The game console described in Appendix h154,
When two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is finished in one symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 156)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h140 to h155,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is a tenth display,
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display to be displayed in a first display area of the display means when displayed.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix h 157)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices h140 to h156,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix R0-1)
Display means,
The first movable means,
Second movable means,
The third movable means,
A game console equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device,
The first movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means,
The second movable means is a movable means provided on the front side of the display means,
The first movable means is movable means movable to a first position,
At least a portion of the first movable means in the first position is configured to overlap the first display area of the display areas of the display means from the front side.
The first display area may be configured to be in a first viewing state,
The first display area may be configured to be in a second viewing state,
The second viewing state is configured such that the back side of the display area of the display means can be more easily viewed through the first display area than in the first viewing state,
The first movable means is configured to be at the first position in one state where the first display area is in the second visual recognition state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"). Yes,
The second movable means is movable means movable to a second position,
In the first state, the second movable means is configured to be at the second position;
The first effect is configured to be executed in the first state,
The first effect is an effect including an effect performed by the first movable means at the first position and the second movable means at the second position in cooperation with each other.
The third movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means,
The third movable means is movable means movable from a third initial position to a third position,
The second movable means is a movable means movable to a fifth position,
At least a part of the third movable means in the third position is configured to overlap the third display area of the display areas of the display means from the front side.
It is configured to be able to execute the second effect,
The second effect is a notice effect performed when the third movable means is positioned at the third position,
The second effect is an effect to be executed after the execution of the first effect,
In the state (hereinafter referred to as "the second state") of at least a part of the states after the execution of the first effect and before the start of the execution of the second effect, the second The movable means of the lens in the fifth position;
In the second state, the third movable means is configured not to reach the third position;
The second state is a state in which at least a part of the third movable means is overlapped from the front side with the second movable means in the fifth position.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix R0-2)
It is a game console described in Appendix R0-1,
The second position is a position in an area overlapping with the first display area from the front side.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix R0-3)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note R0-2,
Even when the second movable means is moved to the second position, the first display area remains in the first visible state without being in the second visible state (Hereinafter referred to as "in some cases")
In the said case, the said 1st presentation is not performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix R0-4)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-3,
“The effect performed by the first movable unit at the first position and the second movable unit at the second position cooperating with each other” described in the additional statement R0-1, “the above-mentioned effect” An effect representing a thing by the first movable means in the first position and the second movable means in the second position.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix R0-5)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-3,
“The effect performed by the first movable unit at the first position and the second movable unit at the second position cooperating with each other” described in the additional statement R0-1, “the above-mentioned effect” An effect in which the first movable means in the first position and the second movable means in the second position appear to be combined in a three-dimensional manner,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix R0-6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-5,
The first movable means is movable means movable from a first initial position to the first position,
The first initial position is an initial position shifted from a region overlapping with the display means,
The first initial position is an initial position on the rear side of the display means,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix R0-7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-6,
The second movable means is movable means movable from a second initial position to the second position,
The second initial position is an initial position shifted from a region overlapping with the display means,
The second initial position is an initial position on the front side of the display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix R0-8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-7,
Even in a state other than the first state, the first display area may be configured to be in the second visible state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix R0-9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-8,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix R0-10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-8,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

  In the above, "there is a case" may be replaced by "always do", "always do", or "becomes always", etc. In the above, "○ possible" means It may be replaced by "must be xxx".

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiment of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiment of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if the constituent requirements included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, and supplementary notes described above, the constituent requirements are not limited to the other embodiments, examples, or examples. The present invention may be applied to modified examples, various examples, and supplementary notes.

  Next, the meter effect will be described.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of the meter effect in stages.

  In FIG. 80A, the first decorative symbol display device 208L is at the center, the second decorative symbol display device 208M is on the left side, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is on the right side.

  In addition, a family crest 224E (not shown in FIG. 3) is shown below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the family crest 224E shown in FIG. 80 (1) corresponds to the initial position. The family crest 224E is at the foremost position of the family crest 224E and the three decorative symbol displays 208L to N (the positional relationship in the depth direction). A second decorative symbol display device 208M and a third decorative symbol display device 208N are disposed between the family crest 224E and the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the rear side.

  In FIG. 80, it is executed in the symbol (special figure) of the variable display executed in the first special view display device 212 (see FIG. 1 etc.) and the second special view display device 214 (see FIG. 1 etc.). The symbol (special figure) of the variable display is the first symbol. Further, a symbol (common drawing) of the variable display executed in the common drawing display device 210 (see FIG. 1 and the like), which is also not shown, similarly corresponds to the second symbol. Then, the decorative symbol of the variable display executed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. That is, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 5B, which is variably displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, corresponds to the third symbol pd3. The third symbol pd3 is a rendering symbol that represents the first symbol (not shown) with enhanced decoration. The first symbol is display-controlled by the main control unit 300, and the third symbol pd3 is display-controlled by the sub control unit 400, 500 side. As described above, the sub control units 400 and 500 execute timer interrupt processing at predetermined intervals. For this reason, in the first symbol and the third symbol pd3, at least a time lag occurs for a predetermined period of the timer interrupt processing on the side of the sub control unit 400, 500, but when the first symbol starts fluctuating display, the third symbol The symbol pd3 also starts variable display, and when the first symbol is stopped, the third symbol pd3 is also stopped. Hereinafter, although it demonstrates using 3rd design pd3, and demonstrates on the basis of 3rd design pd3, it is the same thing even if it replaces 3rd design pd3 with a 1st design.

  Further, in FIG. 80, Yatsushiro character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are shown above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, a fourth symbol pd4 is shown on the right side of the general military item 224F. The fourth symbol pd4 has a square display and a circle display. The square display corresponds to the special figure 1 and the circle display corresponds to the special figure 2. Whether the display is a square or a circle, the gray display indicates that the stop symbol of loss is being displayed on the special view display device (212, 214), and the black display indicates the special view display device In (212, 214), it indicates that the stop symbol of the big hit is being displayed, and the white display indicates that symbol variation is being displayed in the special view display device (212, 214). The fourth symbol pd4 may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display It may be displayed on the device 208N, or may be displayed on other display means or dedicated display means. In addition, it may distinguish and display during fluctuation display and during stop display by lighting of the LED lamp etc. of the board. Furthermore, in the upper part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, a mini decorative symbol in which the third symbol pd3 is displayed in a reduced size is shown, and this mini decorative symbol corresponds to the fifth symbol pd5. The fifth symbol pd5 may have a display mode different from that of the third symbol pd3, and if the size is smaller than the size of the third pattern pd3, the display position is different, or the display position is different. Good. The fifth symbol pd5 also performs variable display and stop display, and similarly to the fourth symbol pd4, plays a role in representing in a variable display and stop display of the third symbol pd3 in an easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 are synchronized with each other. Each of the third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed in plurality. The third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 each correspond to a decorative symbol in a broad sense.

  In the state shown in FIG. 80 (1), both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 are stop display of the combination of the lost decorative symbol designs. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is a gray square display and a gray circle display, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 both indicate that the display is stopped.

  Further, in the effect display area 208d of the first special view display device 212 shown in FIG. 80 (1), a holding frame UI is shown. The holding frame UI can also be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area, and can also be viewed as a user interface providing various information to the player. Further, in the holding frame UI, the variation icon display area is disposed at the center, the holding icon display area is disposed on the left side, and the effect display area is disposed on the right side. In the reserved icon display area, four stages hs1 to hs4 corresponding to the maximum number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 are prepared, and one reserved icon is displayed for each stage. In addition, the stage corresponding to the number (for example, eight) which united the number of holding balls of the special figure 1 and the number of holding balls of the special figure 2 may be prepared. In the variation icon display area, a stage cs which is higher than the four stages hs1 to hs4 prepared in the hold icon display area is prepared, and the variation icon is displayed on the stage cs. In addition, the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 80 (1) is provided with a base icon UIb extending in the left and right with a pattern of vertical stripes, and four stages hs1 to hs4 prepared in the holding icon display area, Each of the stages cs prepared in the variation icon display area can also be viewed as a stage icon displayed superimposed on the base icon UIb from the front side. Further, a tutorial display ts is displayed in the effect display area shown in FIG. 80 (1). This tutorial display ts can also be viewed as a tutorial icon superimposed on the base icon UIb from the front side.

  One pending icon h1 is displayed in the pending icon display area 208f shown in FIG. 80 (1), and it is notified that the current number of pending special maps is one. That is, the holding icon is displayed for the number of holding balls in the special drawing, and the one with the earlier winning timing is displayed closer to the center (right side). The first hold pending icon (first hold icon) h1 shown in FIG. 80 (1) is a pending icon for the special view 1 and is displayed in a red display mode, which is a display mode of the prefetch notice. In addition to the white display mode, which is the default display mode, various display modes are prepared for the hold icon, and for each display mode, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the jackpot in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold Represents However, even if it is a display mode with a high degree of expectation of the big hit, it is not always a big hit in the symbol variation display corresponding to the suspension, and it may be lost. That is, the higher the expectation of the big hit, the more likely the big hit symbol form is finally displayed in the first symbol. In addition, after the hold icon starts to be displayed in the pre-read notice mode or starts to be displayed in the default display mode, the timing of changing to the pre-read notice mode is: change start, change, stop, pre-read target hold The time of winning will be raised.

  Further, on the stage cs of the variation icon display area shown in FIG. 80 (1), a variation icon c of a white display mode, which is a default display mode, is displayed. In FIG. 80 (1), as described above, both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 are in the stop display, and the fourth symbol pd4 is in the stop display, but in FIG. 80 (1), the stop display is in It is a state immediately after becoming, and the fluctuation icon c remains without disappearing. In FIG. 80 (2), the fixed display of the stop symbol is performed, and the fluctuation icon c is disappearing.

  In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 80 (1), a numerical value display hn of the number of reservations is displayed. The numerical value display hn of the number of reservations here indicates that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is “1” and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is “0”. Furthermore, a mini character display (hereinafter referred to as "mini character") is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This mini character is a display (so-called always display) which is displayed regardless of whether the third symbol pd3 (decorative symbol) is displayed in a variable display or in a stopped display, and is displayed across a plurality of times of the variable display of the third symbol pd3. Ru. In the example shown in FIG. 80, the display of the character cd of the hero, who is the main character, is displayed on the display stage ss. The posture of the character cd of the lord shown in FIG. 80 (1) is the initial posture.

  Further, an information display section ST1 is provided in the lower part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. 80 (1). In the example shown in FIG. 80, the information display unit ST1 displays the name of the background stage. Here, it is a castle town stage, and "information castle town" is displayed in the information display section ST1, and the townscape of the castle town is displayed in common on the background of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. In addition, the effect mode may be displayed on the information display unit ST1, the current control state (for example, in the middle of a definite change) may be displayed, or the advance notice may be displayed, and the symbol currently being performed A notice (usually a notice) for the variable display may be displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 80 (1), the speaker 120 is shown at the left corner, and the chance button 136 (corresponding to the first operation means) is also shown at the lower left. Further, a second chance button 137 (corresponding to a second operation means) is also shown to the right of the chance button 136. The second chance button 137 may be an OK button 181 b of the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 1 or may be an operation means newly provided separately from the chance button 136.

  The display position, size, and number of displayed various displays described with reference to FIG. 80 are not limited to those described here, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed with priority over other displays. For example, when movable means such as a family crest 224E, a Yatsuyo character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb overlap the fourth symbol pd4 or the fifth symbol pd5 from the front side, the fourth symbol pd4 or the fourth symbol pd4 or the fourth symbol pd5 A plurality of five symbols pd5 may be displayed, or the display position may be changed according to the movement of the movable means.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (2), after the final display of the stop symbol is performed and the fluctuation icon c disappears, in FIG. 80 (3), the first hold icon h1 of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 80 (2). The symbol variation display based on the hold of is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 80 (3), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, and the variable display of the fifth symbol pd5 is also started. The third symbol pd3 is a low speed fluctuation because the fluctuation display has just been started. White thick and short arrows indicate slow fluctuations (the same applies hereinafter). During low speed movement, it may be possible to recognize a changing symbol. Further, the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 80 (2) moves to the stage cs of the variation icon display area, and the variation icon c of the red display mode is displayed on the stage cs. Here, the display mode (red) of the icon when it was the hold icon until then and the display mode (red) of the icon after it became the fluctuating icon match. The display mode of the variation icon represents the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit in the symbol variation display being displayed. That is, the normal notice is executed according to the display mode of the variation icon. In addition, even if it is a display mode with a high expectation of big hit, it does not necessarily big hit in the symbol variation display under display, and it may become a loss. In FIG. 80 (3), the reserved icon disappears, and the numerical value display hn of the number of reservations displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side becomes "0" in both of the special figures 1 and 2. Further, in the fourth symbol pd4 shown in FIG. 80 (3), the display of the square corresponding to the special view 1 changes from gray to white, and the variation display of the special view 1 is shown. In FIG. 80 (3) in which the symbol variation display is started, the display contents of the tutorial display ts are not changed.

  The third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 80 (4) fluctuates at high speed. White thin and long arrows indicate high-speed fluctuations (the same applies hereinafter). When the speed changes, it becomes difficult to recognize the changing pattern. In FIG. 80 (4), a meter display appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Although the display position of the meter display is above the third symbol pd3, the display position is not limited to this position. In addition, although the display size of the meter display is larger than the hold icon and larger than the fluctuation icon c, the display size is not limited to this size. Furthermore, the appearance timing of the meter display is not only when the third symbol pd3 changes at high speed, but also when symbol movement starts, when movement of the fluctuation icon c is completed, and when winning a prize to the special figure starting port (at hold increase), At the start of advance notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the advance notice at the time of winning), at the success of a certain effect, at the first stop of the third symbol pd3, at the temporary stop of the third symbol pd3 in pseudo sequential effect Alternatively, it is possible to enumerate at the time of continuation (at the start of re-variation), at the start of reach state, at the start of super reach, during super reach, and the like. That is, as the appearance timing of the meter display, all of the above listed ones may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied. When the meter display appears, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed to be the display content regarding the meter display. The meter display shown in FIG. 80 (4) has a white meter frame mf and is hereinafter referred to as a white meter display MW. The white meter display MW corresponds to an example of the first meter display. Moreover, there are a meter display of an increase type, a decrease type, and an increase / decrease type. The meter display in the example shown in FIG. 80 is of the increase type, and is provided with five scales, and becomes full at the sixth stage. In the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 80 (4), the display is started in the empty state (the state of the meter is 0). This empty state corresponds to an example of the first state.

  In FIG. 80 (5), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 80 (6), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here “ 7)) becomes recognizable. Further, in FIG. 80 (6), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. And in the figure (7) following FIG. 80 (6), the left symbol is temporarily stopped and shake fluctuation is started (1st stop). In addition, the meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or before or after that. The meter rising item UpI corresponds to the first mini item or the first mini icon (the same applies hereinafter), and the display position of the meter rising item UpI is a decorative symbol that is fluctuating (temporarily stopped) Although it becomes a position which overlaps from the front side, a display position is not limited to this position. Moreover, although the display size of meter raising item UpI is smaller than the decoration pattern which is shaking (temporary stop), the display size is not limited to this size. Furthermore, the appearance timing of meter rising item UpI is to the special figure starting opening at the time of symbol fluctuation start, the movement completion of fluctuation icon c, when the third symbol pd3 becomes high speed fluctuation other than the timing of the first stop. At the time of winning (at the time of hold increase), at the start of advance notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the advance notice at the time of winning), at the success of a certain effect, at temporary suspension or continuation of the third symbol pd3 Time (at the start of re-variation), at the start of reach state, at the start of super reach, during super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, the appearance timing of the meter ascending item UpI may be all the above listed items. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied. The meter ascending item UpI is an item for raising the meter of the meter display. Although the meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 80 (7) is white, as described later, a plurality of types of meter rising items UpI are prepared, and the rate of increase of the meter varies depending on the type.

  In FIG. 80 (8), the moving animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI displayed at a position overlapping from the front side on the decorative pattern which is fluctuating (temporarily stopped) is displayed on the white meter display MW. Move to the overlapping position from the front side. In FIG. 80 (9), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 is further slowed, and the right symbol (here, “decor 6”) can be recognized. In addition, the meter ascending item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is increased (increased) by one division. In addition, although the color of the meter itself which increases / decreases is a color (here blue) different from meter frame mf, it may be the same color as meter frame mf. The timing at which the meter ascending item UpI disappears, that is, the timing at which the meter increases, is the timing of the second stop, when the third symbol pd3 changes rapidly, at the start of symbol fluctuation, at the completion of movement of the fluctuation icon c, At the time of winning to the starting opening (at the time of pending increase), at the start of advance notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the advance notice at the time of winning), at the time of success of a certain effect, provisional of the third symbol pd3 At the time of stop or continuation (at the start of re-variation), at the start of reach state, at the start of super reach, during super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, as the timing of meter increase, all of the above listed items may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied.

  In (80) of FIG. 80, the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 is temporarily stopped, swing fluctuation is started (second stop), and a second meter rising item UpI appears. The display position of the second meter ascending item UpI is a position overlapping from the front side with the right symbol which has started the swing fluctuation (temporary stop). In FIG. 80 (11), the moving animation of the second meter rising item UpI is started, and the second meter rising item UpI also moves to a position overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 80 (12), the meter ascending item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is again raised (increased) by one division. The white meter display MW meter has now risen to two divisions.

  In FIG. 80 (13), the variation of the middle symbol which has been changing at high speed with the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo continuous symbol ("continuation"), and in FIG. 80 (14), the pseudo continuous symbol shakes (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 ("decoration 7"-"continuation "-" "Decoration 6") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo connected effect is started. In FIG. 80 (15), the cut-in display of the pseudo continuous effect is performed so as to entirely overlap the third symbol pd3 from the front side. In the cut-in display here, the character of the main character has appeared, and the line "still" is displayed, saying that re-variation is likely to be started. In FIG. 80 (16), the cut-in display disappears, and the state in which the entire third symbol pd3 ("decoration 7"-"continuation"-"decoration 6") is temporarily stopped is displayed again and temporarily stopped. The character display of "x 2" which is a display of the number of continuations is displayed so that a part may overlap with the left symbol. In FIG. 80 (17), the re-variation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo sequential effect is started, and the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol each start high-speed variation. In FIG. 80 (18), the character display of “× 2” which is the display of the number of continuations is reduced and displayed at the lower left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 80 step by step.

  In FIG. 81 (19) continued from FIG. 80 (18), while the 3 symbols of the 3rd symbol pd3 continue to fluctuate at high speed, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left, a notice that a mini item appears is started . That is, the icon of the treasure box appears gradually from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 81 (20), the icon I1 of the treasure box in a closed state is displayed on the information display section ST1. The icon I1 of this treasure box becomes a notice icon about the appearance of the mini item. In FIG. 81 (21), the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, and the meter ascending item UpI appears from the inside of the treasure box. Here, a white meter rising item UpI appears.

  In addition, the icon I1 of the treasure box shown in FIG. 81 (20) is closed without being opened and disappears, nothing appears when opened, an item different from the meter rising item UpI (for example, an item of a question mark Items marked with an x or items marked with a disappointing character may appear. That is, even if the icon I1 of the treasure box is displayed, there may be a false notice as a notice that the mini item appears.

  Subsequently, the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI appearing on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves toward the white meter display MW displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Start. In FIG. 84 (22), the moving meter ascending item UpI is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it appears that the left half of the meter ascending item UpI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right half thereof is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, a frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M interferes, and a part of the meter ascending item UpI is not visible.

  In FIG. 81 (23), the meter ascending item UpI reaches the white meter display MW and is displayed on the white meter display MW so as to overlap from the front side. In FIG. 81 (24), the meter ascending item UpI disappears, the meter of the white meter display MW is further raised by one division, and the white meter display MW is increased by three divisions.

  When the meter ascending item UpI is displayed, the meter may always rise, but the meter may not rise. For example, the meter ascending item UpI may disappear without reaching the meter display, or the meter may not rise when reached.

  In FIG. 81 (25), the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 change at a low speed, and in the same figure (26), they reach a reach state. That is, "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and swing fluctuation is started. The speaker 120 shown in FIG. 81 (26) outputs a sound of "reach". In Fig. 81 (27), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has been changing at high speed with the third symbol pd3 becomes slow, and in the following Fig. (28), the left symbol that has been fluctuating fluctuates, the first decorative symbol display device It moves to the upper left corner of 208L, and the right symbol which is also swinging and moving moves to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (29), it has developed into super reach production (Kenou reach production), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it has changed from the background screen of the castle town to the screen of Ken Gosan. However, the white meter display MW is still displayed at the top. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N remain as the background screen of the castle town, and in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the display of the character cd on the display stage ss is still displayed The information display unit ST1 is still displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. However, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the icon I1 of the treasure box has disappeared.

  In addition, when progressing to super reach production, the holding frame UI disappears, and the tutorial display ts also disappears. In addition, although there is no hold icon here but the hold icon remains, the hold icon also disappears. However, the display of only the variation icon c corresponding to the symbol variation currently performed is continued. However, the fluctuation icon c may also disappear together. Alternatively, if the hold icon remains, the display of the hold icon may also be continued. In addition, the display of the tutorial display ts may be continued, and the display of the holding frame UI may also be continued.

  In FIG. 81 (30), all the backgrounds of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N switch to the background of the wilderness, and the display of the information display section ST1 disappears from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display From the device 208N, the display of the display stage ss and the character cd of the lord has disappeared. However, the fifth symbol pd5 is still displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the numerical value display hn of the number of reservations is still displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Also, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 81 (30), the character of the lord and the character of swordsman are displayed, and a duel scene of the two persons is started. However, the white meter indication MW is still displayed at the top here.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 81 (31), the white meter display MW is displayed in an enlarged manner, and the Tonosama character and the sword character are hidden by the displayed white meter display MW. The enlarged white meter display MW shown in FIG. 81 (31) is a state in which the meter has accumulated up to three graduations (corresponding to an example of the second state). Also, the word "power-up" is also displayed, which predicts that the main character will power up as much as the meter has accumulated. The meter is used from FIG. 81 (32) to FIG. (33), and the white meter display MW decreases, and in the same figure (33), the state of 0 (corresponding to an example of the first state) I'm back. In FIG. 81 (34), the white meter display MW which has been enlarged and returned to the state of 0 disappears, and a green aura icon OI1 is added behind the character of the main character. The color of the aura icon OI1 represents the degree of expectation for jackpotting in the currently displayed symbol variation display. For example, the green aura icon has a higher expectation for a big hit than the blue aura icon, the red aura icon has a higher expectation for a big hit than the green aura icon, and the gold aura icon has a high hit. The rainbow color aura icons that change to seven colors have the highest expectations for a big hit, corresponding to a higher level of big hit (eg, big hit confirmed).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 81 (35), a scene after the character of the lord and the character of swordsman have been cut is displayed, and in the case of (36), the scene in which the character of the lord is lost. Is displayed, and "Decoration 3" different from "Decoration 4" displayed in the upper left corner or the upper right corner is displayed as a large middle design. After this, the symbol variation display ends, and the third symbol pd3 of "decor 4"-"decor 3"-"decor 4" is finalized and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second decorative symbol display device The fifth pattern pd3 of "decoration 4"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on 208M. Super reach production here is that it was hadle pare reach production.

  The example shown in FIG. 80 and FIG. 81 described above is an example in which the white meter display MW does not change from the empty state (the meter is 0) to the full state and finally the big hit symbol is not displayed Become.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example in which a meter effect is performed and a big hit is made.

  Hereinafter, differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 81 will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted.

  In the state shown in FIG. 82 (1), as in the state shown in FIG. 80 (1), both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 are stop displays of the combination of the lost decorative symbols. However, it is a combination of "decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" here. Further, the first hold pending icon (first hold icon) h1 shown in FIG. 82 (1) is a pending icon for the special view 1 and is displayed in a green display mode that is a display mode of the prefetch notice. There is. The green display mode has lower jackpot expectation than the red display mode.

  In FIG. 82 (2), after the finalized display of the stop symbol is performed and the fluctuation icon c disappears, in FIG. 82 (3), the first reservation icon h1 of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 82 (2) is held. The symbol variation display based on is started. On the stage cs of the variation icon display area shown in FIG. 82 (3), the variation icon c of the green display mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 82 (4), the white meter display MW appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 82 (4) is also of the increase type, and the display is started in the empty state (the state of the meter is 0).

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 82 (5), a line of "Ikuzo" is displayed on the display of the character cd of the crown. The display of the line "Ikuzo" also corresponds to a notice that a mini item appears. In FIG. 82 (6), the change ball icon cI appears, and the character cd of the lord is carrying the change ball icon cI. In FIG. 82 (7), the character cd of the crown casts the change ball icon cI, and the moving animation of the change ball icon cI is displayed. In FIG. 82 (7), the change ball icon cI is moved from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 82 (8), the change ball icon cI is a white meter display MW And the white meter display MW is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. The display mode of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 82 (8) changes, and an effect display ed1 is added. In FIG. 82 (9), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed1 has been added disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to the red meter display MR while it is empty (the meter is at 0). That is, the color of the meter frame mf is replaced with the red meter display MR. The effect shown in FIGS. 82 (6) to (8), in which the character cd of the lord continues to appear corresponds to an example of the meter change effect. Further, the red meter display MR corresponds to an example of a fourth meter display. This red meter display MR is higher in rank (for example, the appearance rate is lower) than the white meter display MW, and the meter change effect shown in FIG. 82 (6) to FIG. 82 (8) is a kind of rank up effect. It corresponds to The red meter display MR shown in FIG. 82 (9) is also empty (the meter is at 0). Further, the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 82 (9) outputs a sound effect to notify of a change in meter display.

  In Fig. 82 (10), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in Fig. 82 (11), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here " 7)) becomes recognizable. In addition, the character cd of the lord is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N and is returned to the initial posture. In FIG. 82 (11), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. Then, in FIG. 82 (12), the left symbol is temporarily stopped, and fluctuation fluctuation is started (first stop). Further, similarly to FIG. 80 (7), the white meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or before or after that. In FIG. 82 (13), as in FIG. 80 (8), the moving animation of the meter ascending item UpI is started, and the meter ascending item UpI moves to a position overlapping the red meter display MR from the front side. In FIG. 82 (14), the meter ascending item UpI disappears, and the meter of the red meter display MR is rapidly raised (increased) by three divisions. This means that the meter can be stored more easily in the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 82 than in the white meter display MW shown in FIG. In other words, the probability that the red meter display RM displayed in the empty state changes to the full state is higher than the probability that the white meter display MW displayed in the empty state changes to the full state. It is configured to be This corresponds to a state change amount in red meter display MR (an increase amount by one meter increase item UpI) than a single state change amount in white meter display MW (an increase amount by one meter increase item UpI). There will be more. The color of the meter itself which is increased or decreased is a color different from the red color of the meter frame mf (here also blue), but may be the same color as the meter frame mf. The timing at which the meter rising item UpI disappears, that is, the timing at which the meter increases, is the same as the timing described variously in FIG. Moreover, in FIG. 82 (14), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 starts to be slow, and in FIG. 82 (15), the variation of the right symbol is even slower, and 7)) becomes recognizable, and eventually reaches a reach state. In FIG. 82 (16), in the reach state, the second meter rising item UpI appears so as to overlap the right symbol from the front side. In FIG. 82 (17), the moving animation of the second meter rising item UpI is started, and the second meter rising item UpI also moves from the front side to a position overlapping the red meter display MR. In FIG. 82 (18), the meter ascending item UpI disappears, the meter of the red meter indication MR rises (increases) by three divisions again, and the red meter indication MR is full. In addition, the audio | voice of "reach" is output from the speaker 120 shown to FIG. 82 (18) which meter raise item UpI went off, and the rise production of red meter display MR was complete | finished.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 82 step by step.

  In Fig. 83 (19) continued from Fig. 82 (18), the fluctuation of the middle symbol which has continued high-speed fluctuation in the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and in the following Fig. (20) , And moves to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol that is also swinging and moving moves to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (21), it develops into super reach effect (swords reach effect), and as in FIG. 80 (29), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the holding frame UI disappears, and the castle town Is changing from the background screen of the screen to the screen of the sword gossip. However, the full red meter display MR is still displayed at the top. In the super reach effect here, as shown in FIG. 83 (22), the background of only the first decorative symbol display device 208l among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N switches to the background of the wilderness, and the second decorative symbol The background of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is still the background of the castle town, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the display of the fifth symbol pd5 and the information display portion ST1 remains. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the display of the display stage ss and the character cd of the lord remains. Also, the full red meter display MR is still displayed at the top here. The super reach effect shown in FIG. 81 may be the same as the super reach effect shown in FIG. 83, and conversely, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 83 is the same as the super reach effect shown in FIG. It may be

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 83 (23), the red meter display MR in the full state is enlarged and displayed, and the character of the lord and swordsman is hidden by the enlarged red meter display MR. There is. Also, the word "power-up" is also displayed, which predicts that the main character will power up as much as the meter has accumulated. Here, because the meter is full, it is expected that you will greatly power up and win, that is, the expectation of the big hit. The meter is used from FIG. 83 (24) to FIG. (25), and the red meter indication MR decreases and passes through the fifth state, and the state of 0 in FIG. Equivalent to an example of the state). In FIG. 83 (26), the red meter display MR that has been enlarged and returned to the state of 0 disappears, and a golden aura icon OI2 is added behind the character of the main character. The color of the aura icon OI2 corresponds to a color that suggests a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display as described above. Note that the color of the aura icon OI2 may be a rainbow color corresponding to a further higher level of the jackpot (for example, jackpot confirmation).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 83 (27), a scene after the character of the lord and the character of swordsman have been cut is displayed, and in FIG. 28 (28), the scene where the character of the lord is victorious Is displayed, and the same "decoration 7" as the "decoration 7" displayed in the upper left corner or the upper right corner is displayed as a large middle symbol. And in FIG. 83 (29), three third designs pd3 of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" are aligned and swayed, and in FIG. 83 (30), those three third designs The pd3 is displayed in a definite manner, and it is notified that the jackpot has been won with a definite change.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 82 and 83 described above, the red meter display MR changes from an empty state (meter is 0) to a full state, and the big hit symbol is finally displayed. become. The big hit symbol is finally when the red meter display MR changes from empty to full rather than when the red meter display MR remains empty and does not change to full. It is easy to be displayed finalized. Furthermore, in the red meter display MR, when the empty state changes to the full state, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the empty state does not change to the full state. The super reach effect described with reference to FIG. 83 corresponds to an example of a notice display that is started when the red meter display MR changes to a full state.

  FIG. 84 shows, in stages, a modification of the effect by the change ball icon cI described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 84 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 82 (1) to (6), and in FIG. 84 (7), the character cd of the yourselves throws the change ball icon cI and changes it. A moving animation of the ball icon cI is displayed. In FIG. 84 (7), the change ball icon cI is moved from the third decorative symbol display device 208N toward the change icon c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 84 (8), the change ball icon cI is changed. The icon cI hits the fluctuation icon c, and a part of the fluctuation icon c is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. The display mode of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 84 (8) changes, and an effect display ed2 is added. The effect display ed2 here is the same effect display as the effect display ed1 when the meter display is hit as shown in FIG. 82 (8), but may be a different effect display. In FIG. 84 (9), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed2 is added disappears, and the change icon c which has been green until now changes to red. The red fluctuation icon has a higher probability of hitting a big on the symbol fluctuation display being displayed than the green fluctuation icon, and is ranked up here. The rank may be downed by the change ball icon cI. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 84, the change ball icon cI changes the display mode of the change icon c, but the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram for describing in detail various types of meter displays. The meter display described with reference to FIG. 85 is an increase type.

  The meter displays shown in FIGS. 85 (a) to (f) are equivalent to an example of the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 80 and 81 and FIGS. 82 (4) to (8) (first meter display ). That is, the meter frame mf is a white meter display. The white meter indication MW is a default meter indication. Further, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 85 (a) is an empty state (a state where the meter is 0), and corresponds to an example of a first state. Further, FIG. 85 (a) also shows a white meter ascending item UpI. The meter ascending item UpI is an item whose meter rising rate changes according to the type of meter indication, and the white meter ascending item UpI is an item for raising the meter of the meter indication by the first amount.

  FIG. 85 (b) shows a state in which the meter of the white meter display MW which has been empty is raised by one scale by the white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 85 (a). The white meter rising item UpI is an item to be raised by one scale with respect to the white meter display MW. The state of the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 85 (b) corresponds to an example of the second state which is a state between the full state and the empty state.

  FIG. 85 (c) shows a blue meter ascending item UpIb of the same color as the color of the meter itself to be increased or decreased. The blue meter ascending item UpIb is an item for raising the meter of the meter display by a second amount.

  FIG. 85 (d) shows a state (second state) in which the meter of the white meter display MW which has been empty is raised by two divisions by the blue meter rising item UpIb shown in FIG. 85 (c). It is done. The blue meter ascending item UpIb is an item to be raised by 2 divisions with respect to the white meter indication MW.

  In FIG. 85 (e), a red meter ascending item UpIr is shown. The red meter ascending item UpIr is an item that raises the meter of the meter display by a third amount.

  FIG. 85 (f) shows a state (second state) in which the meter of the white meter display MW which has been empty is raised by the red meter rising item UpIr shown in FIG. It is done. The red meter ascending item UpIr is an item to be raised by 4 divisions with respect to the white meter indication MW.

  In addition, a gold meter rising item may be displayed. The meter of the white meter indication MW which has been empty will be in a state of being raised by 5 divisions (second state) by a gold meter rising item or in a full state (state of being raised 6 divisions) . As described above, the rate of increase of the meter may not be constant but may change depending on the lottery result or the like.

  The meter displays shown in FIGS. 85 (g) to (l) are red meter displays MR (corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display) shown in FIGS. 82 (9) to (18). That is, the meter frame mf is a red meter display. The red meter display MR has more meters accumulated than the white meter display MW. In the increase type meter display, the closer to full the higher the expectation (reliability) of the big hit. Therefore, the expectation (reliability) of the big hit is higher in the state in which the red meter display MR is displayed than in the state in which the white meter display MW is displayed. The higher the expectation of the big hit, the more likely the big hit symbol form is finally displayed in the first symbol. In addition, in the state in which the red meter display MR is displayed, the expectation for winning in the advantageous big hit may be higher than in the state in which the white meter display MW is displayed. Here, the advantageous big hit is, for example, a big hit with a big hit with a certain variation and a large number of rounds with appearing balls.

  FIG. 85 (g) shows the default white meter ascending item UpI, and FIG. 85 (h) shows the meter of the red meter indication MR that has been empty, the white meter ascending item A state (fifth state) in which an increase by 3 ticks at once is shown by UpI. The white meter rising item UpI is an item to be raised by three divisions with respect to the red meter display MR.

  In FIG. 85 (i), a blue meter ascending item UpIb is shown, and in FIG. 85 (j), the meter of the red meter display MR which has been empty is displayed by the blue meter ascending item UpIb. It is shown that it has been rising at once by six divisions, that is, it has been filled up (sixth state). The blue meter ascending item UpIb is an item to be increased by 6 divisions (full divisions) with respect to the red meter display MR.

  As described above, in the state in which the red meter display MR is displayed, the rate of increase of the meter by the meter rising item UpI is tripled as compared to the state in which the white meter display MW is displayed.

  In FIG. 85 (k), a green meter ascending item UpIm is shown. The green meter ascending item UpIm is an item to be raised by 9 divisions with respect to the red meter indication MR. In the meter display, when the tank is full, the remaining scale (the overflowed scale) may be invalidated, but here, since the remaining scale is effectively handled, the empty meter display is additionally displayed Be done. The type of meter display to be additionally displayed may be the same type as the type of meter display that is full, or may be ranked up. That is, in FIG. 85 (l), the red meter display MR of the same type as the type of meter display that is full is additionally displayed below the full meter display. On the other hand, unlike in FIG. 85 (l), a meter display in which the meter frame mf is in gold may be displayed below the full red meter display MR. The additionally displayed red meter display MR shown in FIG. 85 (l) is raised to three divisions corresponding to the remaining divisions.

  In the meter display shown in FIG. 85 (m) and FIG. 85 (n), the meter frame mf is a rainbow meter display MN of rainbow color. The rainbow meter display MN also corresponds to an example of the fourth meter display. In the state where the rainbow meter display MN is displayed, the rainbow meter display MN is always full regardless of what color meter rising item is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 85 (m), even if the rainbow meter display MN is in the empty state and the white meter rising item UpI is shown, the rainbow meter display MN is full as shown in FIG. 85 (n). Become a tongue. In such a rainbow meter display MN, when the meter rises, it always becomes full, and furthermore, a big hit is confirmed.

  However, in the rainbow meter display MN, since it is a big hit determined even if there are remaining scale portions (overflow scale portions) when the tank is full, it is a new meter as shown in FIG. 85 (l). The display is not displayed additionally, and the remaining scale is invalidated.

  When one meter rising item is displayed regardless of the color, it may be set to increase only by the same scale (for example, one scale). In this case, the color of the meter rising item becomes the degree of expectation of the big hit.

  In addition, although the appearance timing of the meter rising item was mentioned above, if it supplements here, the meter rising item is temporary during super fluctuation during the symbol fluctuation which becomes the big hit, before super reach, during super reach, temporary of the decorative symbol It may be easy to appear when stopping.

  The meter display described above may be a big hit advance notice (so-called regular advance notice) in the symbol variation display (the corresponding variation) being displayed when the meter display starts to be displayed, and is started after the variation It may be a big hit notice (pre-reading notice) in the symbol variation display. That is, in the case of the expectation of the jackpot mentioned above, it may be the expectation of the jackpot in the change, or may be the expectation of the jackpot in the symbol variation display started thereafter.

  In addition, a white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 85 (a) to (f), a red meter display MR shown in FIGS. 85 (g) to (l), FIG. 85 (m) and FIG. The rainbow meter display MN shown in) may have different display sizes from one another, as well as different display positions, as well as different colors of the meter frame mf. Furthermore, in the white meter display MW, the red meter display MR, and the rainbow meter display MN, the color of the meter itself may be different to make all colors different.

  Furthermore, when viewed in a single meter display, the meter frame shown in FIG. 85 (a) etc. is white and the empty state is the first state, and FIG. 85 (b) or FIG. 85 (d) or FIG. The intermediate state in which the meter frame is neither white nor empty is shown in (f). The second state is shown in FIG. 85. The meter frame is white and the third state is not shown in FIG. The meter frame is red and the empty state is the fourth state shown in FIG. 85 (g) etc., and the meter frame is red and not empty or not full shown in FIG. 85 (h) Is the fifth state, and the meter frame shown in FIG. 85 (j) is red and the full state is the sixth state.

  Hereinafter, although description is continued about meter production | presentation, description may be abbreviate | omitted about the matter which overlaps with the matter demonstrated so far.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram gradually showing an example of the rank-up effect which tells whether the meter display changes.

  In the state shown in FIG. 86 (1), both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 are stop display of the combination of the lost decorative symbol designs. However, it is a combination of "decoration 5"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 3" here. In this state, there is no suspension of the special drawing, and the first symbol pd1 continues the stop display until the special drawing start port 230, 232 wins. Further, a white meter display MW is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 86 (1). The white meter display MW here is empty. The white meter display MW continues to be displayed from the stage prior to FIG. 86 (1), and may already be displayed across multiple variations.

  In FIG. 86 (2), there is one ball ball in the first special figure starting opening 230, and in the same figure (3), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 in accordance with the start of the symbol fluctuation display of the special drawing 1 is started On the stage cs of the variation icon display area, the display of the variation icon c of the white display manner, which is the default display manner, is started. Moreover, even if the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the white meter display MW in the empty state is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display of the white meter display MW in the empty state is displayed. Continue to FIG. 86 (18).

  Also in FIG. 86 (4) where the symbol of Special Drawing 1 is changing, there is a single ball entry ball in the first special view starting opening 230, and the first stage hs1 of the reserved icon display area shown in FIG. The display of the hold icon (first hold icon h1 of the special view 1) of the white display mode, which is the default display mode, is started. Continuing on, also in FIG. 86 (6), there is one ball ball in the first special view starting opening 230, and in the second stage hs2 of the reserved icon display area shown in FIG. 86 (7) The display of the green display mode holding icon (second holding icon h2 of the special figure 1) which is the above is started.

  In the third design pd3 shown in FIG. 86 (8), “decoration 7” — “decoration 1” — “decoration 1”, which is a combination of the decoration symbols of the lost design, is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The combination of the decorative symbols of the symbols is confirmed and displayed, and from the stage cs of the variation icon display area, the variation icon c of the white display mode disappears. Even if it is a period during stop display of the third symbol pd3 (including during definite display) in FIG. 86 (1) and FIG. 86 (8) to FIG. 86 (9), the white meter display MW continues to be displayed The meter display may also be displayed constantly. That is, the meter display may be displayed across a plurality of variable displays in the third symbol pd3.

  In FIG. 86 (10), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 by suspension of the special view 1 represented by the first suspension icon h1 which is the default display mode is started, and the first suspension icon h1 changes to the variation icon c. doing. The variation icon c shown in FIG. 86 (10) is the default display manner as in the case of the hold icon. In FIG. 86 (9), the hold icon which was the second hold icon h2 of the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice is shifted to the display mode as it is, and in FIG. 86 (10) it becomes the first hold icon h1. There is.

  In FIG. 86 (11), the rank-up effect to tell whether the meter display changes is started, and the change icon I2 appears gradually from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left, and in FIG. 86 (12), the information The change icon I2 is displayed on the display unit ST1. In the change icon I2, characters of "fake" are written.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 86 (13), the character cd of the crown draws a bow, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 86 (13), the tutorial display ts is “arrow If it hits, it is changed.

  In FIG. 86 (14), the character of the crown cd shoots an arrow, and an icon of an arrow representing an arrow is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side is displayed. Flying towards the displayed change icon I2. In FIG. 86 (15), the icon of the flying arrow is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it looks as if the left half of the arrow icon is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the right half thereof is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M interferes, and a part of the arrow icon disappears.

  In FIG. 86 (16), the arrow icon hits the change icon I2 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 86 (17), the hit arrow icon disappears, and the change icon The display mode of I2 is changed, and an effect display ed3 is added. The effect display ed3 here is also an effect display similar to the effect display ed1 shown in FIG. 82 (8), but may be a different effect display such as different colors. It is to be noted that the character cd of the lord as displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N changes the pose but has a posture different from the initial posture. In FIG. 86 (18), the change icon I2 to which the effect display ed3 is added is moved from the second decorative symbol display device 208M toward the white meter display MW displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and white The meter display MW is displayed so as to overlap from the front side.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram step-by-step showing an example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 86.

  In Fig. 87 (19) continued from Fig. 86 (18), the change icon I2 to which the effect display ed3 has been added disappears, and the white meter display MW is displayed on the red meter display MR while it is empty (the meter is 0). It is changing. That is, the color of the meter frame mf is replaced with the red meter display MR. The red meter display MR shown in FIG. 87 (19) is also empty (the meter is at 0). In the rank-up effect described above, the meter display succeeds in ranking up from the white meter display MW to the red meter display MR, but may fail. For example, an icon different from the change icon I2 (for example, an icon with a question mark) appears, and the character of the lord cd has the icon disappear without pulling the bow, or the arrow of the bowed one. If the icon disappears without hitting the icon, or even if the arrow icon hits, the icon disappears without adding the effect display, or even if the effect display is added up to the white meter display MW The icon may disappear without moving and the meter display may remain unchanged as the white meter display MW. Similarly, even with the change icon I2, the character of the lord cd does not draw a bow, does not hit an arrow icon, does not add an effect display, or does not move to a white meter display MW As a result, the change icon I2 may disappear and the meter display may remain unchanged as the white meter display MW. In addition, even if the effect display ed3 has the added change icon I2 or the non-added change icon I2 overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side, the meter display itself does not rank up, but the meter may rise. Or, conversely, the meter never needs to rise. Furthermore, the meter display itself may be ranked down (for example, changed from red meter display MR to white meter display MW).

  In FIG. 87 (20), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the "Holiday 5"-"Modification 6"-"Modification 3" is stopped and displayed. The character cd has returned to its initial attitude. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the special figure 1 is lost. In FIG. 87 (21), the finalized display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the fluctuation icon c disappears. The red meter display MR continues to be displayed even during the period when the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed. Here, the red meter display MR is empty.

  In FIG. 87 (22), symbol variation display based on suspension of the first suspension icon h1 of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 87 (21) is started, and low-speed variation is started in the third symbol pd3. Moreover, according to the start of the fluctuation display of 3rd design pd3, the display content of tutorial display ts is changed, and it is the display content regarding meter display. In FIG. 87 (23), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. 87 (24), a notice that a mini item appears is started. That is, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 81, the icon of the treasure box gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 87 (25), the icon of the treasure box in the closed state on the information display section ST1. I1 is displayed. In FIG. 87 (26), the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, and a white meter rising item UpI appears from the inside of the treasure box.

  Next, the movement animation of the meter ascending item UpI is started, and the meter ascending item UpI appearing on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moved toward the red meter display MR displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Start. In FIG. 87 (27), the moving meter ascending item UpI is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 87 (28), the meter ascending item UpI is red. It is displayed on the meter display MR so as to overlap from the front side. In FIG. 87 (29), the meter ascending item UpI disappears, and in the red meter display MR in which the meter is more easily accumulated than the white meter display MW, the meter rises by 3 divisions at a stretch.

  In FIG. 87 (30), the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 change at a low speed, and in FIG. 87 (31), they reach a reach state. That is, "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and swing fluctuation is started. In the following FIG. 87 (32), the left symbol moving sway moves to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol swaying also changes the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Move to the corner. Then, in FIG. 87 (33), as in the example shown in FIG. 81, it develops into super reach production (Kenou reach production), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, from the background screen of the castle town to the screen of Ken Gomi It is changing. However, the red meter display MR is still displayed in a state where three graduations have been stored.

  In FIG. 87 (34), all the backgrounds of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are switched to the background of the wilderness, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the character of the maroon and the character of the swordsman, The duel scene of has been started. Note that the red meter indication MR is still displayed in a state where three graduations have been accumulated.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 87 (35), the red meter display MR is enlarged and displayed as it is in a state of being stored for three divisions (corresponding to an example of the fifth state). Also, the word "power-up" is also displayed, which predicts that the main character will power up as much as the meter has accumulated.

  In addition, the meter of white meter display MW may rise between FIG. 86 (3)-the same figure (10) before a meter display changes.

  FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 87 step by step.

  The meter is used from FIG. 87 (36) to FIG. 88 (37), the red meter indication MR decreases, and in FIG. 88 (37), the state of 0 (corresponding to an example of the fourth state) I'm back. In FIG. 88 (38), the red meter display MR which has been enlarged and returned to the state of 0 disappears, and a golden aura icon OI2 indicating a big hit is added behind the main character of the main character.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 88 (39) displays a scene after the character of the lord and the character of the sword-master has cut off, and in FIG. (40), the scene in which the character of the lord has won. Is displayed, and the same "decoration 4" as the "decoration 4" displayed in the upper left corner or the upper right corner is displayed as a large middle figure. And in FIG. 88 (41), three third patterns pd3 of "decor 4"-"decor 4"-"decor 4" are aligned and swayed, and in FIG. 88 (42) these three third designs The pd3 is displayed in a definite manner, and it is notified that the jackpot with the time saving (power support) is won.

  In the example shown in FIG. 81 and in the examples shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, the meter display is in the state of being stored for the same three divisions, but in the example shown in FIG. In this example which was red meter indication MR to being it being, it is jackpot super reach production. As described above, the expectation of the big hit changes also in the meter display itself (here, the meter frame mf), separately from the storage condition of the meter. That is, if the meter storage condition (including the empty state) is the same, the red meter display MR has a higher expectation of a big hit than the white meter display MW.

  FIG. 89 shows, in stages, an example of the re-lottery that may continue from FIG. 88 (41).

  In the example shown in FIG. 88, the red meter display MR having a higher expectation of the jackpot than the white meter display MW is displayed, and the red meter display MR is not empty but is stored in three divisions. . Therefore, the degree of expectation for winning an advantageous jackpot is also high, and as shown in FIG. 89, a re-lottery may be performed. In other words, winning in a big hit (for example, a big hit with a big hit with a definite change or a big hit with a large number of rounds with appearing balls) is more advantageous when the red meter display MR stores 3 divisions more than the white meter display 3 stores Expectations are high.

  Here, FIG. 89 (42 ′) is a state in which three third symbols pd3 of “decor 4”-“decor 4”-“decor 4” shown in FIG. As shown, a button effect is started at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The button effects here are a button image 136a that imitates the chance button 136, an arrow display 136b as a prompting prompting operation (pressing) of the chance button 136, a character indication of “press”, and the chance button 136 Three remaining period meter displays 136c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting an operation as a valid one are displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136 c is a display indicating the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. The button image 136a is displayed in red, and the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red, prompting a press.

  In FIG. 89 (43 ') to FIG. (44'), there is no pressing of the chance button 136, the operation effective period decreases and the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing of FIG. (45 '). In response to the pressing of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 89 (46 '), the shaking display of "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" is "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-" The display changes to the display of "decoration 7", and in the same figure (47 '), the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is finalized, and notification of winning of the jackpot with definite variation is notified There is. That is, it is promoted to a big hit with probability change from a big hit with short time (electric support).

  In addition, even if the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation valid period, the shaking display of "decor 4"-"decor 4"-"decor 4" after the operation valid period is over, "decor 7"-"decoration" 7 "-changes to the display of" decoration 7 ", is displayed in a definite manner, and is promoted to a jackpot with a definite change.

  FIG. 90 is a view gradually showing an example of a mini game which tells whether or not a meter display appears.

  In FIG. 90 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the loss of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. . Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the special figure 1 is lost. In FIG. 90 (2), the finalized display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the fluctuation icon c disappears.

  In FIG. 90 (3), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first suspension icon h1 of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 90 (2) is started, and the low-speed variation is started in the third symbol pd3. In addition, in response to the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed, and the display content regarding the mini game such as "When the drink is compared" is displayed. In FIG. 90 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 90 (5), the third pattern pd3 disappears, and the background image which has been the town of the castle town until now changes to the background image of the mini game of drinking comparison between the lord and the wolf doing. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol pd5 continues to be displayed. In FIG. 90 (6), the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the background image of the mini game displays an explanation display indicating that the sword dance meter (meter display) will be displayed if the lord wins the mini game in a row. In Figure (7), a mini-game for drinking and drinking has been started. In FIG. 90 (8), the victory of the lord in the mini game is notified, and in FIG. 90 (9), it is displayed that the sword dance meter has been acquired.

  In FIG. 90 (10), on the display of the third symbol pd3 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display ed4 is displayed together with the sword dance meter. Here, it is difficult to visually recognize the color of the meter display by the effect display ed4 as to what kind of color meter display the sword dance meter is. In addition, in this specification, when it says "it is hard to visually recognize", it means becoming relatively hard to visually recognize compared with the state before and behind that. In FIG. 90 (11), the effect display ed4 disappears, and the white meter display MW which is a kana dance meter is clearly displayed.

  If you lose in the mini game, the sword dance meter will not be displayed. The effect by the mini game described using FIG. 90 also corresponds to the effect of obtaining a meter display.

  FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an example in which a big hit is determined due to the variation when the meter display is full, at interstages.

  Figures 91 (1) to (9) are the same as Figures 80 (1) to (9), and in Figure 91 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 is temporarily stopped, A rocking fluctuation starts (second stop), and a gold meter rising item UpIg appears. As described above, the gold meter rising item UpIg raises the white meter display MW meter by 5 or 6 divisions. In FIG. 91 (10), the white meter display MW stored for one scale is displayed, and the appearance of the golden meter ascending item UpIg means the jackpot confirmation in the variation. That is, when a meter rising item (gold in this case or red shown in FIG. 85 (e)) where a meter can easily be stored appears, it is more likely to be a big hit than when a meter rising item (eg, white) in which the meter is difficult to be stored appears. Expectations are high. In FIG. 91 (11), the gold meter ascending item UpIg moves to a position overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 91 (12), the gold meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the white meter display MW becomes full. In the case of a rise by six divisions, it is a state of leaving one division, but a big hit has been decided by the fluctuation, and the next fluctuation will be after the big hit game end, so the remaining one division is up to the next fluctuation It is not possible to carry over and is invalidated. Further, from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 91 (12), a voice of "Congratulations" is output. The voice output here corresponds to a big hit notification sound notifying that the meter is full and a big hit is determined.

  In FIG. 91 (13), the variation of the middle symbol which has been changing at high speed with the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and the middle symbol (here, “decor 7”) can be recognized. And in FIG. 91 (14), three third designs pd3 of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" are aligned and swayed, and in FIG. 91 (15), those three third designs The pd3 is displayed in a definite manner, and it is notified that the jackpot has been won with a definite change.

  The example shown in FIG. 91 described above is an example in the case where the white meter display MW changes from an empty state (a meter is 0) to a full state, and the big hit symbol is finally displayed. Big hit symbol in the case where the white meter display MW changes from empty to full rather than when the white meter display MW remains empty and does not change to full. Is easy to be displayed. Furthermore, also in the white meter display MW, the case where the empty state is changed to the full state is more than the case where the empty state is not changed to the full state, as in the example shown in FIGS. Also, the big hit symbol is likely to be displayed finally finally.

  FIG. 92 is a diagram gradually showing an example in which the meter display is displayed in the holding frame.

  The holding frame UI 'shown in FIG. 92 is also provided with a base icon UIb' extending in the left and right with vertical stripes, but the base icon UIb 'shown in FIG. 92 is the base icon UIb shown in FIG. It is taller than it is. Further, in the effect display area provided on the right side in the holding frame UI 'shown in FIG. 92, a white meter display MW in an empty state is displayed instead of the tutorial display ts. Since this white meter display MW is completely embedded in the holding frame UI 'and is integrated with the holding frame UI' because the base icon UIb 'shown in FIG. 92 is high, the meter display is a holding frame It only needs to have a part in UI '. In other words, the meter display only needs to partially or entirely overlap the holding frame UI ′, and the holding frame UI ′ corresponds to an example of the holding display area in a broad sense, and is also an example of the icon display area. Equivalent to. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 92, the meter display is always displayed in the holding frame UI '. That is, the meter display is also displayed while the holding frame UI 'is displayed, and the meter display also disappears when the holding frame UI' disappears. However, the tutorial display ts may always be displayed, and the meter display may be displayed instead of the tutorial display ts only at the time of meter presentation.

  In FIG. 92 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the loss of "decor 2"-"decor 5"-"decor 6" is stopped and displayed. . Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the special figure 1 is lost. In FIG. 92 (2), the finalized display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the fluctuation icon c disappears.

  In FIG. 92 (3), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first suspension icon h1 of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 92 (2) is started, and in the third symbol pd3, the low speed variation is started, FIG. Then, the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 92 (5), a dialogue of “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the character cd of the royal crown, and a mini item appearance notice is given. In FIG. 92 (6), the white meter rising item UpI appears, and the character cd of the your own bears the meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 92 (7), the character cd of the lord throws the meter ascending item UpI, and the meter ascending item UpI is displayed on the white meter display MW in the holding frame UI '. Although the meter ascending item UpI shown in FIG. 92 (7) does not overlap with the white meter display MW, and only partially overlaps with the base icon UIb ′, a part of the white meter display MW or All may be displayed so as to overlap.

  In FIG. 92 (8), the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to a state of being stored for one division. In the center portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 92 (9), a tutorial display such as “Continuous with full meter” is displayed.

  In FIG. 92 (10), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 92 (11), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here “ 7)) becomes recognizable. Further, in FIG. 92 (11), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. Then, in FIG. 92 (12), the left symbol is temporarily stopped and swing fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, a golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or before or after that. In FIG. 92 (13), the moving animation of the gold meter rising item UpIg is started, and the gold meter rising item UpIg is moved to above the white meter display MW in the holding frame UI '. In FIG. 92 (14), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 is slower, and the right symbol (here, “decor 6”) can be recognized. In addition, the gold meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the white meter display MW meter rises (increases) to full at a stretch.

  In FIG. 92 (15), the variation of the middle symbol which has been changing at high speed with the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo continuous symbol ("continuation"), and in Fig. 92 (16), the pseudo continuous symbol shakes (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 ("decoration 7"-"continuation "-" "Decoration 6") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo connected effect is started. In FIG. 92 (17), similar to FIG. 80 (15), the cut-in display of pseudo continuous effect is performed so as to entirely overlap the third symbol pd3 from the front side. In FIG. 92 (18), the cut-in display disappears, re-variation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo sequence effect is started, and the left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol each start low-speed variation, and part of the left symbol Is displayed, the character display of "x 2" which is the display of the number of continuations is displayed. Although the white meter indication MW which has been full continues to be displayed until the re-variation is started, the white meter indication MW returns to the empty state according to the start of the re-variation. Then, after the pseudo-series effect continues, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display currently being performed.

  In the pseudo-series effect described with reference to FIG. 92, the meter display (here, the white meter display is MW but other meter displays (for example, red meter display MR) may be full). It corresponds to an example of a notice display of which display is started when it changes.

  The white meter indication MW may continue to be displayed in the full state until the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the full white meter display MW may be displayed only until the temporary stop of the pseudo run symbol (start of the pseudo run effect) in FIG. 92 (16), and may return to the empty state.

  In addition, as for the timing when the meter display returns to the empty state, it is the symbol fluctuation display where the meter display display is started (including the symbol fluctuation display of the notice object when the meter display is normal notice) or the meter display If it is the advance notice, it is the symbol change display one before the symbol change display of the advance notice, or it is empty at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed on the advance notice target symbol change display. You may return to the state of For example, in each of the above-mentioned symbol variation display, it may return to the empty state when the symbol is stopped without being full. That is, the second state may return to the first state, or the fifth state may return to the fourth state. In the second or fifth state, it may be configured to always return to the empty state at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed. Alternatively, even in the third state or the sixth state, it may be configured to always return to the empty state at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed. Also, the meter display may return to the empty state, and the display of the empty state may be limited after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and there is no subsequent hold and the next symbol fluctuation display starts immediately If not, the meter display may disappear but may continue to be displayed in an empty state. Also, when there is a subsequent hold and the next symbol variation display starts immediately, the meter display may continue to be displayed in an empty state.

  In addition, the white meter display MW may change to the red meter display MR within the holding frame UI ', or the red meter display MR may be displayed from the beginning.

  FIG. 93 is a diagram gradually showing an example of acquiring and stocking mini items when the meter of the meter display is full.

  Figs. 93 (1) to (6) are the same as Figs. 80 (1) to (6), and in Fig. 93 (7), the left symbol (here, "decoration 7") is temporarily stopped. , Has started shaking (first stop). In addition, a red meter rising item UpIr appears at the same time as, or before or after the temporary stop of the left symbol. The red meter ascending item UpIr is displayed at a position overlapping the left symbol from the front.

  In FIG. 93 (8), the moving animation of the red meter rising item UpIr is started, and the red meter rising item UpIr moves to a position overlapping the empty white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 93 (9), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes slower, and the right symbol (here, “decor 7”) can be recognized. In addition, the red meter ascending item UpIr disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is increased (increased) by 4 divisions.

  In FIG. 93 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, starts swing fluctuation (second stop), and a reach state is formed. In addition, a gold meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as or before or after the formation of the reach state. In FIG. 93 (11), the gold meter rising item UpIg is moved to a position where it overlaps with the white meter display MW stored for 4 divisions from the front side. In FIG. 93 (12), the gold meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the white meter display MW becomes full. Here, the gold meter rising item UpIg is an item for raising the meter of the white meter display MW by 5 divisions, and in the case of the white meter display MW where 4 divisions are stored, 3 divisions are left (overflow) (overflow (12), nothing is displayed for the remaining scale, and in the figure (13), the mini item is displayed at the right end of the full white meter display MW. While the pseudo continuous notice item NI which is a kind appears, the character display of "GET" is displayed so that the right symbol etc. which are temporarily stopped among the 3rd symbol pd3 may be overlapped from the front side. The pseudo linked notice item NI is an icon for notifying that the simulated linked effect is to be started thereafter, and the character display of "GET" is a text display indicating that the pseudo linked notice item NI has been acquired.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 93 (14), the "decorative 7" is in the reach state. In the reach state, the white meter display MW which was full until then changes to the empty state, and the character display of "GET" disappears, and the pseudo linked notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M Are displayed on the information display section ST1. The second decorative symbol display device 208M functions as a means for displaying the stocked icon, and the pseudo linked notice item NI is stocked.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 93 (15), three blanks for the previously surplus scale are added to the white meter display MW in the empty state. That is, the display of the portion which is full and overflows is started at this timing. There is still a chance to increase the white meter indicated MW.

  The white meter display MW in FIGS. 93 (12) to (15) described above is not ranked down, and the portion that is full is replaced with the pseudo continuous notice item NI, and the remaining amount is left Is displayed again.

  In FIG. 93 (16), the pseudo run announcement item NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle design that continues high-speed fluctuation, and the pseudo run announcement item NI is digested. In addition, the character display of "Activated" is displayed under the pseudo-connected notice item NI displayed at the position of the middle symbol. The character display of “Activated” is a character display indicating that the simulated consecutive notice item NI is activated, and the simulated connected effect is started immediately thereafter.

  In FIG. 93 (17), the middle symbol which has continued high-speed variation with the third symbol pd3 is swinging (temporarily stopped). The middle symbol here is the pseudo continuous symbol ("continuation"), and the entire third symbol pd3 ("decoration 7"-"continuation"-"decoration 6") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo continuous rendering starts Be done.

  In the example described above, when the meter display is full, various mini items appear without being limited to the pseudo continuous notice item NI, and the appearing mini items can be stocked. If the mini item that appears is an item that is related to a big hit (for example, a pseudo linked notice item NI), filling the meter display is equivalent to the high expectation of the big hit, and by subtracting Eventually the jackpot symbol is likely to be finalized and displayed.

  FIG. 94 is a view gradually showing an example in which a plurality of items are stocked in one full tank on the meter display.

  Fig. 94 (1) to Fig. (6) are the same as Fig. 80 (1) to Fig. (6), and in Fig. 94 (7) the left symbol (here, "decoration 7") is temporarily stopped. , Has started shaking (first stop). Also, at the same time as or before or after the temporary stop of the left symbol, two meter rising items of a red meter rising item UpIr and a blue meter rising item UpIb appear. That is, a plurality of meter rising items appear simultaneously.

  In FIG. 94 (8), the animation of moving the two meter ascending items is started, and the red meter ascending item UpIr and the blue meter ascending item UpIb both move from the front to the empty white meter display MW. Do. As described above with reference to FIG. 85, the white meter indication MW is an item for raising the red meter rising item UpIr by 4 divisions, and the blue meter rising item UpIb is an item for raising 2 divisions. is there. In FIG. 94 (9), the meter ascending items of both the red meter ascending item UpIr and the blue meter ascending item UpIb disappear and the meter of the white meter indication MW which has been empty until now is the red meter ascending item It rises by four divisions as UpIr, and rises by two divisions as blue meter rising items UpIb, and the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 94 (9) is full.

  In FIG. 94 (10), two pseudo linked notice items NI, which are a type of mini item, appear at the right end of the white meter display MW in the full state, and “decoration 7” of the right symbol temporarily stopped One letter display of "GET" is displayed so that it may overlap from the front side. In the example shown in FIG. 93 above, the white meter display MW becomes full with one red meter rising item UpIr, but in this example, there are two red meter rising items UpIr and blue meter rising items UpIb. White meter indication MW became full with meter rise item. Whether it is red meter rising item UpIr or blue meter rising item UpIb, meter rising rate is higher than default white meter rising item UpI, red meter rising item UpIr or blue meter rising item UpIb , It can be said that it is an item which is easy to store a meter. From this, it can be said that it is highly possible that a plurality of items can be stocked if a meter rising item that easily stores the meter appears. The red meter indication MR may have a higher possibility of being able to stock a plurality of items than the white meter indication MW.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the reach state shown in FIG. 94 (11), the white meter display MW which has been full until then changes to the empty state, and the character display of “GET” disappears, 2 The two pseudo linked notice items NI are moved to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in the second decorative symbol display block 208M, two pseudo linked warning items NI are stocked.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 94 (12), the white meter display MW in the empty state is still displayed, and there is still a chance to increase the white meter display MW, but after this, If there is no chance or a big hit is confirmed on the contrary, the white meter display MW may be turned off when emptying, or may be turned off after returning to emptying. In addition, one of the two pseudo linked notice items NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol which continues the high speed fluctuation, and under the pseudo linked notice item NI The character display of "Activated" is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 94 (12), first, one pseudo continuous notice item NI is digested, and one temporary suspension of the entire third symbol pd3 and start of re-variation are performed. Then, the second temporary stop notice item NI being stocked performs the second temporary stop and start of re-variation.

  Of the items stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, there is also an item that can be carried over until the next symbol variation display (for example, an item of prefetching notice system), but it can not be carried over and is currently performed. There is also an item (for example, pseudo run notice item NI) which is digested during the symbol variation display.

  Also, as in the example shown in FIG. 94, multiple items may be stocked in one full meter tank, but on the other hand, there may be cases in which items are not stocked even if the meter is full. May be For example, in the case where the white meter indication MW is filled with the white meter rising item UpI, it may be mentioned that the pseudo continuous notice item NI itself does not appear or is not stocked even if it appears.

  FIG. 95 is a view showing in stages the example in which the full-time meter display may be carried over to the next symbol variation display.

  Fig. 95 (1) to Fig. (8) are the same as Fig. 94 (1) to Fig. (8), and in Fig. 94 (9), the variation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 is slow And the right pattern (here, "decoration 1") becomes recognizable. In addition, the meter ascending items of both the red meter ascending item UpIr and the blue meter ascending item UpIb disappear, and the white meter indication MW meter which has been empty until now is full in the example of FIG. It has become. However, as shown in FIG. 95 (10), in this example, items such as the pseudo continuous notice item NI do not appear, and the full state of the white meter display MW is maintained. Furthermore, in the third symbol pd3, "decoration 1" different from the left symbol of "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol, and swing fluctuation is started. That is, as in the example shown in FIG. 94, the reach state is not entered. Further, in FIG. 95 (10), the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in response to the white meter display MW being full, and the display content related to the advance notice such as “next chance” is displayed. .

  In FIG. 95 (11), the variation of the middle symbol which has been changing at high speed with the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and the middle symbol (here, “decor 1”) can be recognized. And in FIG. 95 (12), three 3rd designs pd3 of "decoration 7"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 1" are put together and displayed shaking. The combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 1" is a chance eye, and in FIG. 95 (13), according to the shaking display (temporary stop) of the chance eye, the first decorative symbol display device 208L The flash pattern fd is emitted by the transparent light guide plate disposed on the front side of the. A flash symbol may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L instead of the light guide plate.

  In FIG. 95 (14), the third symbol pd3 of the chance is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special view 1 is represented. In FIG. 95 (15), the third symbol pd3 of the chance is finalized and the fluctuation icon c disappears. In addition, in response to the final display of the third symbol pd3, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed again, and the display content suggests a chance of “such as 711 arrangement”. Even when the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed, the full white meter display MW is still displayed. In FIG. 95 (16), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first suspension icon h1 of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 95 (15), ie, the next symbol variation display is started, and the low speed variation is started in the third symbol pd3. It is done. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the full white meter display MW continues to be displayed as it is full, and is displayed across continuous symbol variation displays. The full white meter display MW in FIGS. 95 (9) to (15) corresponds to the advance notice, and the full white meter display MW in FIG. 95 (16) corresponds to the normal notice.

  FIG. 96 is a diagram gradually showing an example where the meter display is full and the item appears but is not stocked but is digested.

  FIGS. 96 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 80 (1) to (6), and in FIG. 96 (7), the left symbol (here, “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. , Has started shaking (first stop). In addition, a golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or before or after that. The gold meter ascending item UpIg is displayed at a position overlapping the left symbol from the front.

  In FIG. 96 (8), the moving animation of the gold meter rising item UpIg is started, and the gold meter rising item UpIg is moved from the front to a position where the empty white meter display MW is overlapped. In FIG. 96 (9), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes slower, and the right symbol (here, “decor 7”) can be recognized. In addition, the gold meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the white meter display MW is full.

  In FIG. 96 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, starts swing fluctuation (second stop), and a reach state is formed. At the same time as, or before or after the formation of the reach state, the operation means notice icon 136I, which is a type of mini item, appears at the right end of the full white meter display MW and the third symbol pd3 The character display of "GET" is displayed so that the right symbol etc. which are temporarily stopped may be overlapped from the front side. The operation means notice display icon 136I is an icon for notifying that the effect of the operation means notice (for example, button advance notice) is started thereafter, and the character display of "GET" has acquired the operation means notice display icon 136I. It is a character display that indicates that. The operation means notice display icon 136I is an icon imitating the operation means (here, the chance button 136), and the operation means notice display icon 136I shown in FIG. 96 (10) is a white icon. The white color here means that no change occurs when the operating means is operated. That is, the effect (for example, advance notice effect etc.) according to operation of the operation means is not started. Therefore, it can be said that the operation of the operation means has not been accepted, or that the operation has been invalidated. In the following description, it is assumed that the operation of the operation means is invalidated by combining the fact that the operation of the operation means is not accepted and that the operation is invalidated as accepted, and the white here is the operation means Is a color indicating that the operation of is invalid.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the reach state shown in FIG. 96 (11), the white meter display MW which has been full until then changes to the empty state, and the character display of "GET" disappears, and continues In (12) of the figure, the operation means notice display icon 136I displayed at the right end of the white meter display MW moves to the position of the middle symbol during high speed fluctuation, and changes the display mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 96 (13), in the middle symbol, the button effect is started. Also in the button effect here, as with the button effect shown in FIG. 89, there are one set of a button image 136a, an arrow display 136b and a letter display “press” as a prompt display, and a remaining period meter display 136c. It is displayed. Further, red is a color for prompting the operation of the operation means, the button image 136a is displayed in red, and the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red, prompting pressing.

  In FIG. 96 (14), there is no pressing of the chance button 136, and the operation effective period decreases, but the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing of the next figure (15). In response to the pressing of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 96 (16), a character display of "Genkiatsu" is displayed so as to overlap the third symbol pd3 from the front side. This letter display usually corresponds to a notice.

  In the example shown in FIG. 96 described above, the item acquired by the full meter is immediately used. That is, the acquired item is used without moving to a decorative symbol display device different from the decorative symbol display device whose display has been started. Moreover, it is used during the symbol variation display currently performed at the time of a display being started. However, it may be possible to stock until the operation effective period of the operation means comes, with the operation means notice display icon 136I displayed in white, and in some cases, it may be stocked up to the next and subsequent symbol variation display It is also good.

  Even when the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation valid period, after the operation valid period has elapsed, the character display of “Gekiatsu” is displayed, and a normal advance notice is executed.

  FIG. 97 is a diagram gradually showing an example in which two meter displays are displayed and both disappear.

  In FIG. 97 (1), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. The four symbols pd4 are also displayed as gray squares and gray circles, and the special figure 1 loss is shown. In FIG. 97 (2), the finalized display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the fluctuation icon c disappears.

  In FIG. 97 (3), symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first suspension icon h1 of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 97 (2) is started, and low-speed variation is started in the third symbol pd3. As shown in FIG. 97 (4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, after the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, an empty white meter display MW (for example, in the upper left of the third symbol pd3 (for example, , Corresponding to an example of the first meter display) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (5), an empty white meter display MW (for example, corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display) is displayed in the upper right of the third symbol pd3. Here, the two white meter displays MW are separately started to be displayed, but two displays may be started together.

  In Fig. 97 (7), the red meter ascending item UpIr appears in the left symbol of "temporarily stopped decoration 7", and in Fig. 97 (8), the red meter ascending item UpIr is displayed as the white meter MW on the left. Move to the position where it overlaps with the front side. In FIG. 97 (9), the red meter rising item UpIr disappears, and only the white meter display MW meter on the left side is raised by 4 divisions.

  In FIG. 97 (10), the golden meter ascending item UpIg appears in the right symbol of the temporarily stopped "decoration 7", and in the same figure (11), the golden meter ascending item UpIg is displayed as the white meter MW on the right. Move to the position where it overlaps with the front side. In FIG. 97 (12), the gold meter rising item UpIg disappears, and only the white meter display MW meter on the right side is raised by 5 divisions.

  In FIG. 97 (13), the fluctuation of the middle symbol which has been changing at high speed with the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and in FIG. 97 (14), the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo continuous symbol ("continuation"), and in Fig. 97 (15), the pseudo continuous symbol shakes (temporarily stops) and overlaps the pseudo continuous symbol from the front side, Three white meter rising items UpI are displayed. As for these three white meter ascending items UpI, as shown in FIG. 97 (16), two move to the white meter display MW on the left side, and one moves to the meter on the white meter display MW on the right side.

  In each of the two white meter displays MW shown in FIG. 97 (17), the meter is raised by the meter rising item UpI that has moved. That is, the white meter indication MW on the left side is increased by two divisions and becomes full, and the white meter indication MW on the right side is increased one division and also becomes full. Furthermore, by becoming full, with the white meter display MW on the left side, the chance up item CUI appears and the character display of “GET” is displayed, and in the white meter display MW on the right side As it appears, the character display of "GET" is displayed. The chance improvement item CUI that appears in the white meter display MW on the left side is an icon representing that the expectation of hitting a big hit in the symbol variation display currently being performed is increased, and a sword reach item that appears in the white meter display MW on the right side The RI is an icon for giving notice that it will be developed to reach a swordsman reach, which is a type of super reach production, with the symbol variation display currently performed.

  In FIG. 97 (18), each of the two white meter displays MW which were full disappears, and the character display of each “GET” also disappears, and both the chance up item CUI and the swordsman reach item RI also have the second decorative pattern It moves to the display device 208M and is stocked by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, although it may be changed to an empty state without erasing each of two white meter displays MW which were full, in the case where it is decided that it will be a big hit in the symbol variation display currently performed. As shown in FIG. 97 (18), the meter display may be turned off.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example in which two meter displays are displayed and only one disappears.

  In the third design pd3 shown in FIG. 98 (1), "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost design, are stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The combination of the decorative symbols of the symbols is confirmed and displayed, and from the stage cs of the variation icon display area, the variation icon c of the white display mode disappears.

  In FIG. 98 (3), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 by the suspension of the special view 1 represented by the first suspension icon h1 which is the default display mode is started, and the first suspension icon h1 changes to the variation icon c. doing. The variation icon c shown in FIG. 98 (3) is the default display mode as in the display mode when the hold icon is displayed. In FIG. 98 (2), the hold icon which was the second hold icon h2 of the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice is shifted to the display mode as it is, and in FIG. 98 (3) it becomes the first hold icon h1. There is.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (4), after the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, an empty white meter display MW (for example, the first symbol in the upper left of the third symbol pd3) (Equivalent to an example of the meter display of). Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (5), an empty white meter display MW (for example, equivalent to an example of a fourth meter display) is displayed on the upper right of the third symbol pd3.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 98 (6), a dialogue of “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the character cd of the royal crown, and a mini item appearance notice is given. In FIG. 98 (7), the change ball icon cI appears, and the character cd of the lord is carrying the change ball icon cI. In FIG. 98 (8), the character of the tombstone casts the change ball icon cI, and in FIG. 98 (9), the change ball icon cI hits the white meter display MW on the right and the white meter display MW on the right. It is displayed on the right end so as to overlap from the front side. The display mode of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 98 (9) changes, and the effect display ed1 is added. The change ball icon cI displayed with the effect display ed1 added at the right end of the white meter display MW on the right side is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There is. In FIG. 98 (10), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed1 has been added disappears, and only the white meter display MW on the right changes to the red meter display MR with the empty state (the meter is 0). There is. That is, this corresponds to an example in which the fourth meter display changes from the first state to the fourth state. A plurality of meter displays MW may change simultaneously. That is, according to this example, the white meter indication MW on the left side may also change to the red meter indication MR with the empty state (the state of the meter being 0) together with the white meter indication MW on the right side.

  In FIG. 98 (11), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 98 (12), the left symbol is temporarily stopped and starts fluctuation fluctuation (first Stop). In addition, a blue meter rising item UpIb appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or before or after that. That is, one blue meter ascending item UpIb is displayed so as to be superimposed on the left pattern of "decoration 7" from the front side.

  In FIG. 98 (13), the split animation of the blue meter ascending item UpIb is started, and one blue meter ascending item UpIb is split into two, and the white meter display MW in the empty state on the left side and the right side A blue meter ascending item UpIb is displayed on each of the red meter displays MR in the empty state. As described above, the blue meter ascending item UpIb is an item which is raised by 2 divisions for the white meter display MW and is increased by 6 divisions for the red meter display MR. In Fig. 98 (14), the left and right blue meter ascending items UpIb disappear, and the white meter indication MW meter on the left side has risen only by 2 divisions, while the right red meter indication MR meter It has risen to full at once. Then, on the right side of the full red meter display MR, a kana great reach item RI appears and a character display of "GET" is displayed. In addition, the item has not appeared on the white meter display MW on the left side which has not reached the full state.

  In FIG. 98 (17), of the two meter displays, only the right side red meter display MR which has been full disappears, and the character display of "GET" also disappears, and the Ken Osamu reach item RI is the second decorative symbol It moves to the display device 208M and is stocked by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, in FIG. 98 (17), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the special figure 1 is lost. In FIG. 98 (18), the third symbol pd3 is displayed for confirmation, and the fluctuation icon c disappears. After all, the stock sword reach item RI was not used in the symbol variation display at the time of appearance. Therefore, the sword great reach item RI here corresponds to a look-ahead system icon for predicting that it will develop into a sword great reach, which is a type of super reach production, in the next symbol variation display.

  FIG. 99 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 98 step by step.

  In FIG. 99 (19) continued from FIG. 98 (18), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the red first suspension icon h1 which is the prefetching notice mode of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 98 (18) is started 3 In the pattern pd3, low-speed fluctuation is started. The fluctuation icon c is also displayed in a red display mode and functions as a normal advance notice. In addition, the white meter display MW on the left side accumulated up to two divisions shown in FIG. 98 (18) is still displayed even when a new symbol variation display is started, and the next symbol variation display is carried over become. That is, in the state in which the meter is stored, it straddles continuous symbol fluctuation display.

  In FIG. 99 (20), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 99 (21), the left symbol in the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. 99 (22), the variation of the left symbol becomes slower, and the left symbol (here, “decoration 7”) becomes recognizable, and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high-speed to low-speed Has changed.

  In FIG. 99 (23), the left symbol is temporarily stopped and swing fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, the white meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or before or after that.

  In FIG. 99 (24), the moving animation of the white meter rising item UpI is started, and the white meter rising item UpI moves to a position overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 99 (25), the white meter ascending item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter indication MW is raised by one division. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (25), a reach state is entered, and the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 99 (25) outputs a voice of "reach".

  In FIG. 99 (26) after entering the reach state in this way, the sword achive reach item RI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M is activated, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M has the character display of "activated". Is displayed. In FIG. 99 (27), the left symbol moving sway moves to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol swaying also changes the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Move to The white meter display MW displayed at the upper left is also moved to the center position. Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (28), it has developed into super reach production (Kenou reach production), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it has changed from the background screen of the castle town to the screen of Ken Gosan. From the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 99 (28), the sword strike item RI disappears. In this way, the swordsman reach production started is the same as the swords fish reach production shown in Figure 83 (22) onwards, so a detailed explanation is omitted, but here the white meter display MW was only stored up to 3 divisions Nevertheless, in FIG. 99 (33), the golden aura icon OI2 is added behind the character of the lord. In the example shown in FIG. 81, at the power-up from the white meter display MW which has stored only up to three divisions, it is the green aura icon OI1 as shown in FIG. 81 (34). In the example, when multiple meter displays are displayed in the previous symbol fluctuation display, it is easier to hit a jackpot than when only one meter display is displayed, and the color of the aura icon is also a color with high expectation of the jackpot. It becomes easy to become. Moreover, even when a plurality of meter displays are displayed, a meter display different from the white meter display MW (for example, red meter display MR, etc.) than only the default white meter display MW is displayed When is displayed, it is easier to make a big hit, and the color of the aura icon also tends to be a color with a higher expectation of the big hit.

All previous meter displays were of the increase type, and the display was started in the empty state (the meter is in the state of 0), but the meter display is between the empty state and the full state. The display may be started in the state of (second state or fifth state).

  FIG. 100 is a diagram showing in stages the example in which the display is started with the incremental type meter display being accumulated halfway.

  In FIG. 100 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost of "decor 2"-"decor 5"-"decor 6" is stopped and displayed. . In FIG. 100 (2), the finalized display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the fluctuation icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the special figure 1 is lost.

  In FIG. 100 (3), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first suspension icon h1 of the special diagram 1 shown in FIG. 100 (2) is started, and the low-speed variation is started in the third symbol pd3. In addition, the display contents of the tutorial display ts are changed according to the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3. Here, a character string such as “When the meter appears slightly accumulated” is scrolled in the tutorial display ts Is displayed.

  In FIG. 100 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and on the third symbol pd3, the display is started in a state where the white meter display MW is stored from the beginning to the middle. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 100 (4) is in a state of being stored for one division, and corresponds to an example of the second state. Further, in accordance with the appearance of the meter display in the state where the meter has been stored halfway, the sound of “chance” is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 100 (4).

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 100 (5), a dialogue of "Ikuzo" is displayed on the display of the character cd of the royal crown and a mini item appearance notice is given. In FIG. 100 (6), the gold meter rising item UpIg appears, and the character cd of the maroon is carrying the gold meter rising item UpIg. In FIG. 100 (7), the character of the tombstone threw a gold meter rising item UpIg, and the gold meter rising item UpIg is positioned between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ing. In FIG. 100 (8), the gold meter ascending item UpIg hits the white meter display MW and is displayed on the white meter display MW so as to overlap from the front side. In FIG. 100 (9), the gold meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the white meter display MW changes from being stored for one division to being full. Since the gold meter rising item UpIg is an item that raises the meter for at least 5 divisions, when the display starts while the meter display is partially accumulated, when the gold meter rising item UpIg appears, Meter full will be confirmed.

  In the white meter indication MW, the big hit symbol is finally determined when changing from full storage to partial full storage than from when full storage from partial storage to full filling does not change. It is easy to be displayed. Furthermore, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the white meter display MW is started while the display is partially stored, as compared to when the display is started in the empty state. Moreover, these things are the same also in red meter display MR.

  In the state where the meter is stored halfway (second state), the rate of increase of the meter by the meter rising item is increased. For example, the rate of increase of the meter due to the meter rising item may be doubled as compared to the state where the meter is 0 (first state).

  So far, the bar type (gauge type) meter display has been described, but the meter display may be a display showing numerical values.

  FIG. 101 is a diagram showing in stages an example of meter effect display by meter display showing numerical values.

  In FIG. 101 (1), the third symbol pd3 is fluctuating in high-speed variation, and the tutorial display ts has display contents such as "Meter is red". In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 101 (2), a white numeric meter display DW appears, and from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 101 (2), an effect sound (appears according to the appearance) Sound is being output. The white numeric meter display DW shown in FIG. 101 (2) corresponds to an example of the first meter display, and the state is a state where the numerical value is 00%, and this state is an example of the first state. Equivalent to. Further, in FIG. 101 (2), the tutorial display ts changes, and the display content is "Meter MAX reached".

  In FIG. 101 (3), Yatsushiro character 224Fa, which is one of the movable means, falls from above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. According to the operation of the movable means, as shown in FIG. 101 (4), a white meter rising item UpI appears. However, on the front side of the white meter ascending item UpI, the dropped Yatsushiro character 224Fa is located, and a part of the white meter ascending item UpI is relatively difficult to visually recognize. In FIG. 101 (5), the white meter rising item UpI moves downward, the overlap with the dropped Yatsu character 224Fa is eliminated, and the visibility of the meter rising item UpI is improved. In FIG. 101 (6), the eight generation character 224Fa is raised and returned to the initial position, and the movement animation of the white meter rising item UpI is started. The white meter ascending item UpI moves to a position overlapping the white numeric meter display DW displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M from the front side. The white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 101 (6) is located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the white meter rising item shown in FIG. 101 (7). UpI is displayed at a position overlapping with the white numeric meter display DW. The white numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 101 (7) is temporarily difficult to view due to the white meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 101 (8), the white meter ascending item UpI disappears, the visibility of the numerical display of the white numerical meter display DW recovers, and the numerical display rises from 00% to 10%. There is. The state of the white numerical meter display DW performing the numerical display of 10% shown in FIG. 101 (8) corresponds to an example of the second state.

  In FIG. 101 (9), a general role item 224Fb falls from above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As shown in FIG. 101 (10), in response to the movement of the general character 224Fb, which is a movable means, a change ball icon cI appears at a position behind the general character 224Fb. A part of the change ball icon cI is relatively difficult to view. In FIG. 101 (11), the change ball icon cI moves downward, the overlap with the falling general military item 224Fb is eliminated, and the visibility of the change ball icon cI is improved. In FIG. 101 (12), the general character item 224Fb moves upward and returns to the initial position, and the change ball icon cI moves from the front to a position overlapping the white numeric meter display DW displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. doing. In FIG. 101 (13), the change ball icon cI disappears, and the white numerical meter display DW up to that point is changed to a red numerical meter display DR (corresponding to an example of the fourth meter display). That is, they are replaced by different types of meter displays. The change of the meter display here is not performed by the accumulated numerical value, but is performed by the change effect (here, the effect using the change ball icon cI). Also, depending on the relationship between the color of the numerical meter display and the color of the meter rising item, that is, the relationship between the type of the numerical meter display and the item, the rate of increase in numerical value changes as in the description using Do.

  In FIG. 101 (14), there is one ball entry ball in the first special figure starting opening 230, and the first reserved icon h1 of the special figure 1 is in the first stage hs1 of the reserved icon display area shown in FIG. The display of should be started. However, in FIG. 101 (15), the green meter up item UpIm is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h1, and it is difficult to confirm the presence of the first hold icon h1. . In FIG. 101 (16), the green meter ascending item UpIm moves to a position overlapping the red numerical meter display DR from the front side, and the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. 101 (16) is a white first The presence of the hold icon h1 can be confirmed. The hold icon may be displayed on the front side of the meter rising item.

  The appearance of the meter rising item here is triggered by the winning of the first special figure starting port 230, but it may be triggered by the winning of the common drawing starting port with a winning ball, or with the winning ball Regardless of whether or not it may be triggered by the game ball passing of the common view starting gate, it may be triggered by the winning of the second special view starting port 232 (electric chew), there is only a winning ball A winning on the general winning opening 226 may be used as a trigger, or an entrance to an out-port for presentation may be used as a trigger.

  Also, when the meter display is displayed, it is a prize or entry to the special view starting port 230, 232, etc. than when it is not displayed, the item (not limited to the meter rising item, for example, a chance improvement item It is easy for CUI and Ken-O-Kai reach item RI etc. to appear.

  In FIG. 101 (17), the green meter ascending item UpIm disappears, and the numerical display of the red numerical meter display DR is increased from 10% to the previous MAX. This MAX is a display that represents, for example, 100%. The state of the red numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 101 (17) corresponds to an example of the sixth state.

  In the meter effect shown in FIG. 101, when the numerical meter display is in the MAX display state, as shown in FIG. 101 (18), the character display of “Gekiatsu” is displayed on the numerical meter display so as to overlap from the front side. . The character display of "Gekiatsu" may be a display that indicates that the jackpot in the variation is rich or that the jackpot is finalized.

  FIG. 102 is a view gradually showing an example in which the numerical meter display shown in FIG. 101 changes in accordance with the operation of the operation means.

  In FIG. 102 (1), the third symbol pd3 is fluctuating at high speed, and in FIG. 102 (2), there is one ball entry ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and the reservation shown in FIG. In the first stage hs1 of the icon display area, the display of the first hold icon h1 of the special view 1 is started. A first reserve icon h1 shown in FIG. 102 (3) is a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 displayed in red on the screen, which prompts the user to operate, on the white circular icon. That is, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 is a so-called button hold display mode. Further, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 also lights up in red to prompt the operation, and in FIG. 102 (4), the chance button 136 is operated.

  In FIG. 102 (5), in response to the operation of the chance button 136, the white numerical meter display DW changes to a red numerical meter display DR. On the other hand, in the display mode of the first hold icon h1, the button image 136a disappears, and only the white round icon is in the default display mode. Here, when the chance button 136 is actually operated, although the first hold icon h1 is the display mode of the button hold, the first hold icon h1 does not change to the display mode of the prefetch notice. , The meter display has been replaced by a different type of meter display. This is an effect of giving a notice of a big hit in the variation, and in the case of a pre-reading notice giving a big hit in the subsequent change, the first hold icon h1 may be changed to the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Note that it is also possible to use a numerical meter display as a pre-reading advance notice (for example, carry over to the next fluctuation after becoming a MAX display).

  As described above, when the meter display is displayed, the hold icon of the button hold is more likely to be displayed when winning or entering the special view starting port 230, 232 or the like than when the meter display is not displayed.

  FIG. 103 is a diagram showing in stages an example of an effect different from the meter effect described so far.

  Although FIG. 103 shows that a display showing a certain amount or number is displayed in the same manner as the meter display described above, here, the appearance number of characters is used instead of the meter. The display using the appearance number of the character corresponds to an example of the first meter display or an example of the fourth meter display.

  In FIG. 103 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the loss of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. . In FIG. 103 (2), the finalized display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the fluctuation icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the special figure 1 is lost.

  In FIG. 103 (3), symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first suspension icon h1 of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 103 (2) is started, and low-speed variation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, in response to the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed, and the display content is "When a character appears". In FIG. 103 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 103 (5), the third symbol pd3 disappears, and the background image which has been the town of the castle town disappears so far, below the character display such as "all in group gathering chance". A silhouette of four characters is displayed in a horizontal row. In the state shown in FIG. 103 (5), no character display is displayed, and corresponds to an empty state (a state where the meter is 0) in the meter display, that is, a first state or a fourth state. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol pd5 continues to be displayed.

  In FIG. 103 (6), the character display cd1 of Princess Little appears at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character display changes to "3 more people". In FIG. 103 (7), a rose character display cd2 appears at the left end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character display changes to “two more people”. In FIG. 103 (8), the princess character display cd3 appears on the left side of the character display cd1 of Princess Chibi, and the character display changes to "one more person". Each of the state shown in FIG. 103 (6), the state shown in FIG. 103 (7), and the state shown in FIG. 103 (8) corresponds to a second state or a fifth state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 103, the character display of “failure” is displayed as shown in FIG. 103 (9) when all three are gathered, and the entire group can not be assembled, and the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. The display device 208L returns to the background image of the castle town, and the display of the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is also resumed. And in FIG. 103 (11), the variation display of the 3rd design pd3 and the 5th design pd5 is finished, and the combination of the decoration design of the loss of "decoration 5"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. ing. In FIG. 103 (12), the finalized display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the fluctuation icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the special figure 1 is lost.

  Although the color of the silhouette of the character is usually gray, the silhouette of the remaining character may be displayed in red when the remaining one is left. In this case, it is a decision of a set of all four people, and the display of the red silhouette corresponds to a notice of success. The state in which all four persons are gathered corresponds to the full state in the meter display, that is, the third state or the sixth state. In this example in which the characters are gathered, the expectation of the big hit is very high, and the big hit may be rich, or it may be a further high level of big hit (for example, big hit determination) when all four people are together. Moreover, even if all four people do not gather, it does not consider it as "failure", but may give the expectation of the big hit to some extent, even if only three people gather, even if there is a big hit in the said fluctuation. It may be good, and there may be a big hit in the symbol variation display started after the variation.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram showing in stages an example when an error occurs during display of a meter display.

  Fig. 104 (1) to Fig. (4) are the same as Fig. 98 (1) to Fig. (4). At the upper center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (immediately above the third symbol pd3), an error display ER1 such as "Please remove the ball" is displayed. The error display ER1 hides the right half or more of the empty white meter display MW displayed at the upper left of the third symbol pd3. That is, a part of the error display ER1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the white meter display MW from the front side. Note that at least a part (for example, all of them) of the error display ER1 may be displayed from the front side so as to overlap at least a part (for example, all of them) of the white meter display MW. Furthermore, the error display ER1 may be a display having transparency, and even if it overlaps the meter display or the like from the front side, the overlapping portion may be seen through.

  Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 104 (6), the left symbol in the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in the same drawing (7), the left symbol is temporarily stopped A part of the error display ER1 is displayed from the front side on a part of the left symbol (here, “decoration 7”) during temporary stop while the swing fluctuation has been started (first stop). Note that at least a part (for example, all of them) of the error display ER1 may be displayed from the front side so as to overlap at least a part (for example, all of them) of the decorative symbol. As described above, the error display ER1 is displayed preferentially over the meter display, and is displayed preferentially over the third symbol pd3.

  Further, in FIG. 104 (7), the red meter ascending item UpIr is displayed so as to overlap the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 from the front side, and in FIG. 104 (8), the red meter ascending item UpIr Is moved to a position overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side. However, a part of the error display ER1 also overlaps the part of the red meter ascending item UpIr from the front side. In Fig. 104 (9), the red meter up item UpIr disappears, and the white meter display MW should be up by 4 divisions, but the error display ER1 hides the right half or more of the white meter display MW. It is impossible to check how far the meter has risen. However, from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 104 (9), the sound of four notes is output here, with one note rising by one division. The storage condition of the meter (the rising condition) can be notified not only by the output sound from the speaker 120 but also by the light emission mode of the light emitting means such as a lamp or a frame lamp around the decorative symbol display device.

  In Fig. 104 (10), the fluctuation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 is slowed, and in Fig. 104 (11), the right symbol is temporarily stopped and fluctuation fluctuation is started (second stop), 2 A white meter rising item UpI, which is the second meter rising item, appears on the right pattern so as to overlap from the front side. The white meter rising item UpI also moves to a position overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side, as shown in FIG. 104 (12). However, a part of the error display ER1 also overlaps from a front side of a part of the white meter rising item UpI. In Fig. 104 (13), although the white meter rising item UpI has disappeared, the white meter display MW meter should have risen by one division, but the error display ER1 still overlaps, so the meter rises to where Although it can not be confirmed, the sound of one note is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 104 (13).

  In FIG. 104 (14), the white meter rising item UpI appears without notice of the mini item appearance shown in FIG. 92 (5) etc., and the character cd of the maroon is carrying the meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 104 (15), the character Adonis casts the white meter rising item UpI, and the white meter rising item UpI hits the white meter display MW and should be displayed above the white meter display MW. However, since the error displays ER1 overlap, it is difficult to confirm the white meter rising item UpI. In Fig. 104 (16), although the white meter indication MW should have been raised by one division by the white meter rising item UpI, the error indication ER1 still overlaps, so how far the meter has risen Can not be confirmed, but the sound of one note is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 104 (16). Although not shown in the figure, the white meter display MW partially shown in FIG. 104 (16) is full, and a full notification sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 17 (17). It has been output.

  In FIG. 104 (18), the pseudo continuous notice item NI, which is a type of mini item, appears at the right end of the white meter display MW in the full state, and at the middle symbol position continuing high speed fluctuation among the third symbol pd3. Although the character display of "GET" is displayed, the error display ER1 overlaps the character display of "GET" also with the pseudo continuous notice item NI, and it is difficult to recognize that the pseudo continuous notice item NI has been acquired .

  FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the error display ER1 shown in FIG. 104 step by step.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 105 (19) continued from FIG. 104 (18), the character display of “GET” disappears, and the pseudo run notification item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, The second decorative symbol display device 208M is stocked. Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 105 (20), the white meter display MW which has been full until then changes to an empty state. The white meter display MW continues to be displayed as it is empty. In FIG. 105 (21), the pseudo reannounced item NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol which continues high-speed fluctuation, and the pseudo linked contingent item NI is digested, but The error display ER1 is overlapped from the front side on the pseudo run notice item NI moved to the position of the symbol, and it is difficult to visually recognize. In FIG. 105 (22), the variation of the middle symbol which has been changing at high speed with the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and the middle symbol becomes recognizable. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo continuous symbol ("continuation"), and in Fig. 105 (23), the pseudo continuous symbol shakes (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 ("decoration 7"-"continuation “-” “Decorative 1”) is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-series effect is started. The error display ER1 also overlaps the pseudo run symbol ("continue") from the front side, and the error display ER1 is displayed with priority over the pseudo run symbol.

  In FIG. 105 (24), the error display ER1 is still displayed, and in this example, the ball pulling operation has not been performed until the end. That is, when the ball removing operation is performed, the error display ER1 such as "Please remove the ball" is automatically hidden. In other words, if the error is eliminated, the error display ER1 disappears automatically.

  In the example shown in FIG. 104 and FIG. 105, the player can not visually check the state of the meter display (for example, the storage condition etc.), so for the player who is concerned about the state of the meter display In some cases, the ball removal operation can be performed early by displaying the error display ER1 superimposed on the meter display. In addition, the meter display is likely to be good for the player when accumulated, so it is easy for the player's gaze to be always gathered, and the error display ER1 is made to be easy to notice by overlapping the error display ER1 on the meter display. It also plays an effect.

  Also, in this example, a prize-abnormality error that is more serious than a full-size error occurs, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 105 (24) has a display size larger than the display size of the previous error display ER1. Then, an error display ER2 is displayed to notify the occurrence of a winning prize error. The error display ER2 overlaps the error display ER1 from the front side as well as the third symbol pd3 and is displayed with priority over the third symbol pd3 and the error display ER1. By superimposing another error display ER2 on the error display ER1, it may be possible to convey that a serious error has occurred. The error displays do not have to overlap with each other, and in some cases, at least the display size may be larger for a serious error. In addition, as an example of a serious error said here, an error detected by the main control unit 300 or the payout control unit 600, an error which can not be resolved without calling a store clerk, an error display is automatically even if the error is resolved. You can list errors that do not disappear (do not disappear). That is, the serious errors may be all the above listed ones. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied. Alternatively, as described above in the list described in FIG. 190 described later, a serious error occurs. That is, the most serious error is a magnetic (magnet) detection error. On the contrary, as an example of a minor error, an error detected by the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500, an error that can be resolved by the player alone, an error display when the error is resolved It is possible to enumerate errors that are automatically hidden (disappeared), etc. That is, minor errors may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied. Further, among minor errors, there may be errors in which the meter display is displayed preferentially, or the third symbol pd3 is displayed preferentially.

  The error display in FIGS. 104 and 105 is the same as the display of various errors described in FIGS. 190 to 192 described later. In particular, the notification content described as "liquid crystal display" in the "embodiment" in FIG. 192 describing the notification mode of error notification of various errors can be replaced with the error display in FIG. 104 and FIG.

  Note that in the present specification, the statement that "a certain display overlaps with another display from the front" is read as a statement that "at least a part of one display overlaps with at least a part of another display". All of one display may overlap from the front to all of the other display, or all of one display may overlap from the front to part of the other display. The part may overlap from the front to all of the other displays, or part of one display may overlap from the front to part of the other display. Further, in the present specification, the statement that "a certain display overlaps with another display from the front side" can be read as the reverse, that is, "the other display overlaps with a certain display from the front side".

  In the above description, the meter display is of the increase type in which the display representing a certain amount or number only increases, but the meter display may be of the increase or decrease type in which the display representing a certain amount or number increases or decreases Well, it may be of the reduced type where the indication representing a certain amount or number is only reduced.

  In addition, the meter display includes white meter display MW shown in FIG. 85 etc., red meter display MR, rainbow meter display MN, white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and red numerical meter display DR, Although the display using the number of appearances of the character shown in 103 has been described, the present invention is not limited to these, and may be a display in which the needle indicates a certain amount or number, or a display using the number of displays of figures or symbols. It is also good.

  Furthermore, although the red meter display MR changes from the white meter display MW, the display of the red meter display MR itself may be started alone, not the change from the white meter display MW. Or, conversely, the red meter indication MR may be a meter indication which is not displayed unless it changes from the white meter indication MW.

  In addition, the red meter display MR may change in a state where the white meter display MW is stored halfway, and may take over the meter of the white meter display MW and display may be started in a state where it is stored halfway. Alternatively, the display of the red meter display MR itself in a partially accumulated state may be started alone. In these cases, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed in the case where the display is started in the state of being stored halfway, than in the case where the display is started in the empty state.

  Furthermore, the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed in the case where the red meter display MR is partially stored than when the white meter display MW is partially stored.

  In the above description, "~ it is easy for the jackpot symbol to be finalized and displayed." The statement of the effect is "It is easy to win a big hit that is more advantageous than a bad one." It can be replaced by the statement of the effect.

  The meter effect using the meter display described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 105 can be combined with the transparency effect described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 45. For example, an accessory (for example, a liquid crystal display device) for displaying a meter display is disposed on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L) as shown in display means 251D shown in FIG. Then, the meter effect described using FIGS. 80 to 105 may be made executable.

  Alternatively, on the contrary, the meter display is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L), and the meter effects described using FIGS. 80 to 105 are performed, while FIGS. It may be possible to execute the transparency effect described using.

  As mentioned above, although the example which made the present invention apply to a pachinko machine (ball ball game machine) was explained in detail, the game stand of the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) The present invention is also applicable to a used gaming machine (slot machine). That is, although the pachinko machine 100 described so far is pachinko (one kind + one kind), other pachinko (eg one kind, two kinds, three kinds, one kind + two kinds etc.) may be used, a slot etc ( Parrots and balls can be used. More specifically, while inserting a medal (gaming medium) and operating the start lever to rotate the reel, internally determining the combination by internal lottery, and operating the stop button to stop the reel If a combination of symbols determined in advance is displayed on the symbol display window according to the internal determination, the combination is established, and if the combination with the payout of medals is established, the prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. The present invention may be a coin-operated game machine (slot machine) in which a player is given a benefit. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are sealed as a sealed ball, the sealed ball is fired to a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the fact that the sealed ball is won in a predetermined entry area. , And the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won may be fired again to the gaming area, and the enclosed ball game console may be used cyclically.

  As described above, the present invention is applicable to various types of game consoles, and will be described more specifically below with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 106 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In the enclosed type pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 106, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game console. That is, the game medium ejected from the launching means 901 to the playing area 902 is ejected from the playing area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize ball, lent ball, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game console. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 1 are not provided.

  FIG. 107 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001, and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 107) are stored inside the center of the main body 1001. It is configured to be able to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by drive means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like members at equal intervals, and the belt-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute the respective reels 1010 to 1012. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed approximately three vertically from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of the symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reels, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be adopted as such display means. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A back light (not shown in FIG. 107) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is disposed on the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided near each of the reels 1010 to 1012. The light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotational direction of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the pay lines.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a pay line 1014 to be activated. The pay lines to be activated are determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line becomes effective, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. When three medals are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the right down pay line and the upper right pay line are added become valid as the pay lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right are selected. Five lines of the down pay line and the top right pay line may be made effective as a pay line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp for notifying the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery or that a bonus game is being played. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-playing lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is possible to be re-played (the insertion of medals is unnecessary) when winning in the re-playing which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for effect.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, up to three sheets are inserted one by one each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the bet button 1031 is pressed, and the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three sheets are to be inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights a lamp of the number according to the inserted medal number, and when there is a specified number of medals inserted, the game start is informed that it is possible to start the game. The lamp 1021 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 1034 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored sheet number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical values. The payout amount display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. An operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process is performed to perform a lottery to determine which one of a plurality of types of roles has been won or not. It is determined whether to make the player relatively advantageous or relatively disadvantageous.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the respective reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the operation of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is possible, the light emitter may be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing and removing the medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  Also, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal insertion slot 1034. ing. The operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Furthermore, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided on the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for boosting the game. At the upper part of the front door 1002, a rendering device 1080 is disposed. The effect device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right and left doors 1063a and 1063b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 disposed on the back side of the door member 1063 (shown in FIG. When the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is the front of the slot machine 1000 It has a structure that appears on the It should be noted that even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, for example, consisting of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole of the display screen can be viewed by the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks like an odd shape. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., as the operation means, the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means or the third operation means And effect buttons 1091 (an example of the second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, a display panel 1070 displaying a title or the like of a device can be protruded toward the front side. In addition, a light emitting diode (LED) is incorporated in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 107 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a pressing operation, and functions as an operating means (button) like the transmitting portion 191, and an example of the operating means (for example, It corresponds to one example of the operation means, and also corresponds to one example of the movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091 and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, each button of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
“The game console has display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N)],
The display means may display a plurality of types of meter displays [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 85 etc., a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, a white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 103 is a means capable of displaying a numerical meter display DR, a display using the appearance number of characters shown in FIG.
One meter display among the plurality of types of meter displays is a first meter display [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 85 etc., left meter display shown in FIG. 97 (4) to FIG. 98 (4) to (18), or the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 101 and 102.
One meter display of the plural types of meter displays is a fourth meter display [for example, red meter display MR shown in FIG. 85 etc., right meter display shown in FIG. 97 (5) to FIG. 97 (17) (5) to (15), the red numerical meter display DR shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, or the display using the appearance number of characters shown in FIG. ,
The first meter display is a display that may change from a first state [e.g., empty state (meter is 0)] to a third state [e.g., full state],
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from a fourth state [eg, empty state (meter is 0)] to a sixth state [eg, full state],
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state than when the first meter display does not change to the third state while the first state remains [For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 91 or in the example shown in FIG. 97], the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally displayed.
When the fourth meter indication changes from the fourth state to the sixth state than when the fourth meter indication does not change to the sixth state with the fourth state [For example, in the case of the example shown in FIGS. 82 and 83 or the example shown in FIG. 98], the big hit symbol is likely to be finally determined and displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Here, the first meter display may be an analog meter display or a digital meter display. The fourth meter display may be an analog meter display or a digital meter display. The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be meter displays having different display modes. Furthermore, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may have a period displayed simultaneously. That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be displays that are always displayed simultaneously, or may be displays that may be displayed simultaneously. Alternatively, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be displays displayed separately without the period.

  The display means may be means for displaying plural types of meter display without fail. The first meter display may be a display which always changes from the first state to the third state. Further, the fourth meter display may be a display which necessarily changes from the fourth state to the sixth state.

Also,
“The fourth meter display displayed in the fourth state is the sixth display, rather than the probability that the first meter display displayed in the first state changes to the third state Configured to have a higher probability of changing to the state of
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the one state change amount in the fourth meter display may be larger than the one state change amount in the first meter display.

  Further, when the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, the first meter display changes more than when the first state changes to the third state. Finally, the jackpot symbol may be easily displayed.

Also,
“The first meter display is a display that is displayed when the display is started in the first state [for example, in the case of FIG. 82 (4)],
The fourth meter display is a display in which the first meter display in the first state is changed [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 82 (9)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, the fourth meter display is a display that may start to be displayed in the fourth state, and the first meter display in the first state to the fourth in the fourth state The meter display may change, or the first meter display in the first state may change to the fourth meter display in the fifth state.

  Moreover, although there is no case where the first meter display of the third state changes to the fourth meter display, the change from the first meter display of the second state to the fourth meter display does not occur. If you do, you may.

  The first meter display may be a display that always starts in the first state. Further, the fourth meter display may be a display in which the display is necessarily started in the fourth state. When the first meter display changes to the fourth meter display, the first meter display in the first state always changes to the fourth meter display in the fourth state. Alternatively, the display may be changed from the first meter display of the first state to the fourth meter display of the fifth state.

Also,
"A fourth effect may be started in a state where the first meter display of the first state is displayed,
The fourth effect is an effect of changing the first meter display to the fourth meter display [for example, a meter using a change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 82 (6) to FIG. (8) Change production],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the fourth effect may be a so-called rank-up effect. More specifically, the operation means effect (button effect) may be used, and the first meter display may change to the fourth meter display in response to the operation of the operation means.

  Note that the fourth effect may always be started in a state where the first meter display in the first state is displayed.

  Here, the first meter display is a display whose display is ended by the fourth effect, and the fourth meter display is a display whose display is started by the fourth effect, It is also good. That is, the first meter display disappears and the display of the fourth meter display is started. For example, when the first effect is started in a state where the first meter display of the first state is displayed, and the first effect ends, the first meter display disappears, and The display of four meter displays may be configured to be started.

Also,
"The fourth effect is an effect using a fourth character,
In the case where the fourth character is displayed across the plurality of times of the variable display of the decorative symbol in succession by the display means [for example, FIG. 82 (1) and FIG. (2) and FIG. ] Is a certain character [e.g.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the "variation display of the decorative symbol" refers to the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and also includes the display of the variable display when the variable display is started again with the stop display in between. In addition, it is possible to view 1 change from the start of the change display to the final display. Furthermore, "to straddle" is to put the period of stop display of the decorative symbol (the change stop period) in between. Further, the fourth character may be a character continuously displayed during display of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be a character temporarily disappearing in the middle. The character may be a character that is continuously displayed while the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed, or may be a character that disappears halfway along the way, or continues to disappear while the display of the stop display is displayed. Characters may be present.

  The fourth character may be a character that is necessarily displayed across the continuous variable display of the decorative symbol.

Also,
“The first meter display may be displayed while the stop display of the decorative symbol by the display means is displayed [eg, FIG. 86 (1), FIG. 86 (8) White meter indication MW in) is
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first meter display may be a display that may be started during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the display is started during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The display may be continued until the stop display is displayed.

  The first meter display may be a display that is always displayed while the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

  Here, the first meter display is a display which may change in state during display of the variation display of the decorative symbol by the display means, and the fourth meter display is a display of the decorative symbol by the display means It may be a display that may change in state during display of the variable display. The first meter display may be a display which always changes in state during display of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the fourth meter display is necessarily during display of the variation display of the decorative symbol. The display may change state.

  Further, the fourth meter display is a display that may be started during display of the variable display of the decorative symbol by the display unit, and the fourth meter display is a display of the decorative symbol by the display unit. When the display is started during the display of the variable display, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended, the big hit symbol may be more easily stopped and displayed than the lost symbol. That is, the display of the fourth meter display is started during display of the variation display of the decorative symbol in which the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed rather than during display of the variation display of the decorative symbol in which the lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Cheap. In addition, when a display is started, the said 4th meter display may be a display by which a display is always started during the display of the fluctuation display of the said decorative symbol.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern a plurality of times, and
The variation display of one of the plurality of variations of the variation design of the variation design is the variation display of the first decoration pattern [for example, the variation display stopped and displayed in FIG. 86 (1)],
The variation display of one of the plural variations of the decoration symbol is the variation display of the second decoration symbol [for example, the variation display of FIG. 86 (3) to the same diagram (9)],
The variation display of one of the plural variations of the decoration symbol is the variation display of the fourth decoration symbol [for example, the variation display of FIG. 86 (10) to FIG. 87 (21),
The variation display of one of the plural variations of the decoration symbol is the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol [for example, the variation display of FIG. 87 (22) to FIG. 88 (42),
The variable display of the first decorative symbol and the variable display of the second decorative symbol are variable display of continuous decorative symbols,
In the case where the first meter display is in a state different between the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the variable display of the second decorative symbol [e.g., it is in the empty state at the timing of FIG. 86 (1) If the meter rises at the timing shown in Fig. 86 (7),
The variation display of the fourth decoration pattern and the variation display of the fifth decoration pattern are variation displays of the continuous decoration pattern,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may be different between the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol and the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol [e.g., at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (19) The meter is rising at the timing shown in Fig. 87 (29) while it is
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is ended, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started, and after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is ended, the fourth decorative symbol is displayed. After the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol is started, the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol is started, and after the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol is ended, the sixth The variable display of the decorative symbol of may be started. In this case, when the variation display of the fifth decorative symbol is finished, the big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed, or when the variation display of the sixth decorative symbol is finished, the big hit symbol is stopped It may be displayed.

  The first meter display may be a display in which the state is always different between the fluctuation display of the first decorative symbol and the fluctuation display of the second decorative symbol, and the fourth meter display may be The display may be always different in the state between the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol and the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol.

Also,
“The fourth meter display is a display whose display is started in the fourth state [for example, red meter display MR shown in FIG. 82 (9) and the like],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  As mentioned above, the fourth state may be empty.

  By doing this, it is possible to have an expectation for the change to the sixth state (for example, meter full) from the time of meter appearance or change.

  The fourth meter display may be a display that may start to be displayed in the fourth state, or may be a display that always starts to be displayed in the fourth state. .

Also,
"The fourth meter display is from the fourth state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 82 (9)] to the fifth state [for example, the state stored up to three divisions shown in FIG. 82 (14)] Is a display that may change to
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fifth state to the sixth state [for example, the full state shown in FIG. 82 (18)].
The fourth meter display is a display that may start to be displayed in the fourth state [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 82 (9) and the like],
The fourth meter display is a display that may start to be displayed in the fifth state,
If the display is started in the fifth state, the big hit symbol is likely to be finally determined and displayed when the display of the fourth meter display is started in the fourth state,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the fourth meter display is more likely to change to the sixth state when the display is started in the fifth state than when the display is started in the fourth state. It may be an aspect.

  Further, the fourth meter display may be a display that is not displayed when the display is started in the fifth state, or a display that may be displayed in the fifth state. It is also good.

  Furthermore, the fifth state may be a state representing a fifth quantity or number, and the fifth quantity or number may be a combination of the fourth quantity or number and the sixth quantity or number There may be an amount or a number between them.

  The fourth meter display may be a display that always starts to be displayed in the fourth state, or may be a display that changes from the fourth state to the fifth state. Furthermore, it may be a display that necessarily changes from the fifth state to the sixth state. Alternatively, the fourth meter display may be a display which always starts to be displayed in the fifth state, or may be a display which always changes from the fifth state to the sixth state. .

Also,
“The first meter display is from the first state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 91 (4)] to the second state [for example, the state stored up to one division shown in FIG. 91 (9)] Is a display that may change to
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state [for example, the full state shown in FIG. 91 (12)].
The first meter display is a display that may start to be displayed in the first state [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 91 (4) or the like],
The first meter display is a display that may start to be displayed in the second state [eg, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 100 (4)].
In the case where the display is started in the second state, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where the display of the first meter display is started in the first state,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first meter display is more likely to change to the third state when the display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state. It may be an aspect.

  The first meter display may be a display that is not displayed when the display is started in the third state, or a display that may be displayed in the third state. It is also good.

  Furthermore, the second state may be a state representing a second amount or number, the second amount or number being the first amount or number and the third amount or number There may be an amount or a number between them.

  The first meter display may be a display that always starts to be displayed in the first state, or may be a display that always changes from the first state to a second state, Furthermore, it may be a display that necessarily changes from the second state to the third state. Alternatively, the first meter display may be a display which always starts to be displayed in the second state, or may be a display which necessarily changes from the second state to the third state. .

Also,
“The first meter display is from the first state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 91 (4)] to the second state [for example, the state stored up to one division shown in FIG. 91 (9)] Is a display that may change to
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state [for example, the full state shown in FIG. 91 (12)].
The fourth meter display is in the fourth state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 82 (9)] to the fifth state [for example, the state stored up to three divisions shown in FIG. 82 (14)] It is a display that may change,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fifth state to the sixth state [for example, the full state shown in FIG. 82 (18)].
In the case where the fourth meter display is in the fifth state, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where the first meter display is in the second state,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first meter display may be a display that may start to be displayed in the first state, or the first meter display may start to be displayed in the second state. The fourth meter display may be a display that may be started in the fourth state, or the fourth meter display may be a display that may be displayed. The display may be started in the fifth state.

  In addition, when the display of the fourth meter display is started in the fifth state than in the case where the display of the first meter display is started in the second state, a big hit is finally obtained. The symbol may be easily displayed.

  Here, the display start patterns of the first meter display are summarized. The first meter display is a display that is started in the first state and may change to the second state, and the display is started in the first state, and the second state is displayed. Is a display that may change to the third state through the display, and a display is started in the first state, and a display that may change to the third state, and displayed in the second state Is the display that may be changed to the third state, the display is started in the first state, and the sixth state is further transmitted through the fourth state and the fifth state. The display may change to the fourth state, and the display may start to change to the fifth state. The display may start to change in the fourth state. In the fourth state, display is started, and the fifth state is followed by the fifth state. A display case is to change the state, the display state of said fifth is started, a display that may change the state of said six. The same applies to the display start pattern of the fourth meter display.

  The display may be started in the fourth state and may not be changed to the first state. Moreover, the display may be started in the second state and may not be changed to the first state.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One of the plurality of icons is a first icon,
The first meter display is performed by displaying the first icon [for example, the icon of the blue meter rising item UpIb shown in FIG. 85C] a first number of times [for example, three times]. It is a display that changes from the first state to the third state,
The fourth meter display is performed by displaying the first icon [for example, the icon of the blue meter rising item UpIb shown in FIG. 85 (i)] a fourth number of times [for example, once]. It is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state,
The fourth number is a number smaller than the first number.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, if the state changes with a small number of times, it means that one change amount is large.

Also,
“The first meter display is a display that may be started by a first effect [for example, an effect by a mini game shown in FIG. 90].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first effect may be an acquisition effect of the first meter display.

  The first meter display may be a display in which the display is necessarily started by the first effect.

Also,
“The display means can display a holding icon [for example, the first holding icon h1, the second holding icon h2, etc.] according to the number of holding balls in the holding display area [for example, holding frame UI ′ shown in FIG. 92] It is a means,
The first meter display is a display in which a part or all of the first meter display overlaps the hold display area,
The fourth meter display is a display in which a part or all of the fourth meter display overlaps the hold display area.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the hold display area may be an icon display area. Also, for example, the first meter display is a display displayed integrally with the hold display area, and the fourth meter display is also a display displayed integrally with the hold display area. It may be.

  The display means may be means for displaying a hold icon corresponding to the number of hold balls in the hold display area. Further, the display means may be means for certainly displaying the hold icon in the hold display area when the hold icon is displayed.

Also,
“One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is the seventh meter display [eg, rainbow meter display MN shown in FIGS. 85 (m) and (n)],
If the seventh meter display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, when the seventh meter display is displayed, it may be jackpot rich. When the seventh meter display changes from the seventh state [for example, empty state] to the ninth state [for example, full tank state], even if the big hit symbol is finally definitely displayed Good. Furthermore, the seventh meter display may be a display that necessarily changes from the seventh state to the ninth state.

  When the first meter display changes to the third state, the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the display means when the first meter display changes to the third state If the big hit symbol is definitely displayed on the screen and the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state, the display means is displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state Finally, the jackpot symbol may be definitely displayed in the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, when the said 7th meter display is displayed, a big hit symbol may be finally determined and displayed finally.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display,
The preliminary display is a display that may start when the first meter display changes to the third state [e.g., a pseudo-series effect shown in FIG. 92],
The preliminary announcement display may be a display that may start when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state [eg, super reach effect shown in FIG. 83].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, as the notice display, enumerate a pseudo-sequence effect display, an operation means related display, a notice display about a big hit (normal notice display or advance notice display), a notice display about an effect (for example, super reach effect), etc. Can. That is, all of the above listed items may be used as the advance notice. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied.

  Further, the display means may be means capable of displaying a pseudo continuous effect display, and the pseudo continuous effect display may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state. It may be a display, and the pseudo sequential effect display may be a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. Here, the pseudo connection effect display may be a display that is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the pseudo connection effect display may be the fourth meter The display may be started whenever the display changes to the sixth state.

  The notice display may be a display that is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the notice display may include the sixth meter display of the sixth state. The display may be started whenever it changes to the state of.

  Here also, the display device comprises an operation means provided at a position where the player can operate, the display means being a means capable of displaying an operation means related display, wherein the operation means related display is a display concerning the operation means The operation means related display is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the operation means related display is the fourth meter display May be a display that may start when the state changes to the sixth state. The operation means related display may be a display imitating the operation means, or may be a display prompting the operation of the operation means (operation promotion display), or the operation of the operation means The indication regarding the effective period (more specifically, the indication of the remaining period of the operation effective period (remaining period display)) may be displayed, or the indication reminding of the operation means may be displayed, or these indications Or a display including at least one of these displays. Further, the operation means related display may be a display which is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the operation means related display is the fourth meter display May be a display that is always started when the state changes to the sixth state.

  Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a normal notice display, and the normal notice display is a variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the display means when the display of the normal notice display is started. And the normal advance notice is a display that may be started when the first meter indication changes to the third state, and the normal advance notice is the first notice The display may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. Here, the normal advance notice may be, for example, a super reach effect display. Further, the normal advance notice display may be a display that is always started when the first meter indication changes to the third state, and the normal advance notice display may be the fourth meter indication The display may be started whenever it changes to the sixth state.

Also,
“The first state in the first meter display is a state representing a first amount or number [eg empty state or vice versa full state],
The third state in the first meter display is a state representing a third quantity or number [e.g., full or vice versa, empty]
The fourth state in the fourth meter indication is a state representing a fourth quantity or number [e.g. empty state or conversely full state],
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a state representing a sixth quantity or number [e.g., full or empty)]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first amount or number and the third amount or number are different amounts, and the fourth amount or number and the sixth amount or number are different amounts or numbers. May be

  Also, the third amount or number is an amount or number less than the first amount or number, and the sixth amount or number is less than the fourth amount or number, or It may be a number. That is, the case where the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state is the case where the first meter display decreases, and the fourth meter display The case of changing from the fourth state to the sixth state is the case where the fourth meter display decreases.

  Also, the third amount or number is an amount or number greater than the first amount or number, and the sixth amount or number is an amount or number greater than the fourth amount or number It may be a number. That is, the case where the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state is the case where the first meter display increases, and the fourth meter display The case where the fourth state is changed to the sixth state is a case where the fourth meter display is increased.

  The first state is full, the third state is empty, the fourth state is full, and the sixth state is empty. Or the opposite, the first state is empty, the third state is full, the fourth state is empty, and the sixth state is The state may be full.

  Furthermore, also when the first meter display changes from the fourth state [for example, the meter frame is red and empty] to the sixth state [for example, the meter frame is red and full]. There is also a case where the fourth meter display changes from the first state [for example, the meter frame is white and empty] to the third state [for example, the meter frame is white and full]. is there.

Also,
“The first meter display and the fourth meter display are partially [for example, only meter frame mf] or all colors are different [for example, white and red, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by the different colors. In addition, the color may be different continuously. Alternatively, the colors may be different only for a certain period of time. That is, the color may be changed, it may be different in the first state and the fourth state, or may be different in the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, it may be different in the second state and the fifth state described later. Also, the colors may be different from each other when the display is started. Alternatively, the colors when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

  The first meter display includes a frame display and an increase / decrease display to increase or decrease in the frame display, and the fourth meter display increases or decreases in the frame display and the frame display. The first meter display and the fourth meter display may differ only in the color of the frame display, or may differ only in the color of the increase / decrease display. The color of both the frame display and the increase / decrease display may be different. The frame display may be circular or rectangular, and the shape is not limited.

  The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be different in color only in part.

Also,
"The first meter display and the fourth meter display are different in size,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, when the size (display size) is different, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished. Note that the sizes may be continuously different. Alternatively, the sizes may be different only for a certain period. That is, the size may be changed, it may be different between the first state and the fourth state, or may be different between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, it may be different in the second state and the fifth state described later. Moreover, the sizes when the display is started may be different from each other. Alternatively, the sizes when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

Also,
"The first meter display and the fourth meter display have different display positions,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by the difference in display position. Note that the display position may be continuously different. Alternatively, the display position may be different only for a certain period. That is, the display position may be changed, as long as the first state and the fourth state are different, or the third state and the sixth state may be different. Furthermore, it may be different in the second state and the fifth state described later. Moreover, the display positions when the display is started may be different from each other. Alternatively, the display positions when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

  The “meter display” in the above description may be replaced with “display representing a certain amount or number”, “first meter display” is “first display” and “fourth meter display” is “ It may be replaced by the fourth display.

In the above description,
“The game console has display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N)],
The display means includes a plurality of types of meter displays [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 86 etc., red meter display MR, rainbow meter display MN, white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 103 is a means capable of displaying a numerical meter display DR, a display using the appearance number of characters shown in FIG.
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a first meter display [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 82, FIG. 86, etc., left side shown in FIG. 97 (4) to FIG. Meter display, the left meter display shown in FIG. 98 (4) to FIG. 18 (18), or the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 101 and FIG.
One meter display of the plural types of meter displays is a fourth meter display [for example, red meter display MR shown in FIG. 86 etc., right meter display shown in FIG. 97 (5) to FIG. 97 (17) (5) to (15), the red numerical meter display DR shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, or the display using the appearance number of characters shown in FIG. ,
When the first meter display changes from empty to full rather than when the first meter display does not change from empty to full, for example, as shown in FIG. 91 In the case of the example shown in FIG. 97 and FIG. 97], the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally displayed.
The case where the fourth meter display changes from the empty state to the full state than when the fourth meter display does not change from the empty state to the full state [e.g. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 83 or the example shown in FIG. 98], the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally displayed.
The fourth meter display displayed in the empty state is configured to be more easily changed to the full state than the first meter display displayed in the empty state.
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

Also,
“The fourth meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state has changed [eg, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 82 (9)],
The first meter display and the fourth meter display have the same size and display position [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 82 (4) and red meter display MR shown in FIG. (9) ],
The first meter display and the fourth meter display may differ in some or all colors,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The display means is a means capable of displaying the first meter display on a certain background screen [for example, the background of the castle town] [for example, FIG. 82 (4)],
The display means is a means capable of displaying the fourth meter display on the certain background screen [eg, FIG. 82 (9)],
The certain background screen is a background screen in a certain stage (for example, a castle town stage),
In the case where the fourth meter display is displayed if the first meter display is not displayed on the certain effect stage [for example, the cases shown in FIG. 82 (9) to FIG. 83 (25)] If the first meter display is displayed if the fourth meter display is not displayed [for example, the case shown in FIG. 82 (4) to the same figure (8)] is configured. ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The first meter display in the empty state may change, and the fourth meter display in the empty state may be displayed [for example, FIG. 82 (6) to FIG. (9)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One of the icons of the plurality of types is a first icon [for example, an icon of a white meter rising item UpI].
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to ascend at a first rate of increase [for example, a rate of increase by one division],
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to ascend at a fourth rate of increase [for example, a rate of increase of three divisions],
The fourth rate of increase is a rate of increase higher than the first rate of increase,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[When the game ball wins to the winning opening [for example, the first special view starting opening 230, the second special view starting opening 232, the common drawing starting opening, the general winning opening 226], the first icon may be displayed. Configured to be
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“One of the icons of the plurality of types is a second icon [for example, an icon of a blue meter rising item UpIb],
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to ascend at a second rate of increase [for example, a rate of increase by two divisions],
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to ascend at a fifth rate of increase [for example, a rate of increase of six divisions],
The fifth rate of increase is a rate of increase higher than the second rate of increase,
The second increase rate [for example, the increase rate for two divisions] is a increase rate higher than the first increase rate [for example, the increase ratio for one scale].
The fifth increase rate [e.g., an increase rate of six divisions] is an increase rate higher than the fourth increase rate [e.g., an increase ratio of three scales].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The fourth effect may be started while the first meter display is displayed,
In the fourth effect, an effect in which a fourth character [for example, a character cd] changes the first meter display to the fourth meter display [for example, FIG. 82 (6) to FIG. 9) a meter change effect using the change ball icon cI]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The fourth character may be displayed across the variable display of a plurality of consecutive decorative symbols [for example, FIG. 82 (1) and FIG. (2), and FIG. ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The first icon is an icon that may appear at the display position of the fourth character [for example, a white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 92 (6)],
The first icon displayed at the display position of the fourth character may be used by the fourth character to raise the meter of the first meter display [eg, FIG. 92 (8)],
The fourth icon may raise the meter of the fourth meter display using the first icon appearing at the display position of the fourth character.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a pending icon for symbol variation display,
The second effect may be started while the hold icon is displayed,
The second effect is an effect [for example, the example shown in FIG. 84] in which the fourth character changes the display mode of the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The display means can display a holding icon [for example, the first holding icon h1, the second holding icon h2, etc.] according to the number of holding balls in the holding display area [for example, holding frame UI ′ shown in FIG. 92] It is a means,
The first meter display is a display in which a part or all of the first meter display overlaps the hold display area,
The fourth meter display is a display in which a part or all of the fourth meter display overlaps the hold display area.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is the seventh meter display [eg, rainbow meter display MN shown in FIGS. 86 (m) and (n)],
The seventh meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state has changed,
When the seventh meter display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of error displays [for example, display of various errors and display of warning],
Among the plurality of types of error indications, a certain error indication [for example, a full error indication] is a indication that may partially or entirely overlap a part or all of the first meter indication.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The above-mentioned certain error display is a display which may overlap with the portion showing the accumulation condition of the above-mentioned first meter display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"Having a storage tray that can store gaming balls,
The above-mentioned certain error display is a counter full error display,
The above-mentioned tray full error display is a display for prompting the player to eject the game ball from the storage tray [for example, a character display such as "Please pull the ball"]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The first meter display may be displayed while the stop display of the decorative symbol by the display means is displayed [eg, FIG. 86 (1), FIG. 86 (8) White meter indication MW in) is
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern a plurality of times, and
The fluctuation display of one of the decoration symbols among the fluctuation display of the decoration symbols a plurality of times is the fluctuation display of the first decoration symbol [for example, the fluctuation display stopped and displayed in FIG. 86 (1)],
The variation display of one of the decoration symbols among the variation displays of the decoration symbol of a plurality of times is the variation display of the second decoration symbol [for example, the variation display of FIG. 86 (3) to FIG.
The fluctuation display of one decoration pattern among the fluctuation display of a plurality of decoration patterns is the fluctuation display of the fourth decoration pattern [for example, the fluctuation display of Figure 86 (10)-Figure (21),
One of the variation display of the decoration symbols of the plural times is the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol [for example, the variation display of FIG. 87 (22) to FIG. 88 (42),
The variable display of the first decorative symbol and the variable display of the second decorative symbol are variable display of continuous decorative symbols,
In the case where the first meter display is in a state different between the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the variable display of the second decorative symbol [e.g., it is in the empty state at the timing of FIG. 86 (1) If the meter rises at the timing shown in Fig. 86 (7),
The variation display of the fourth decoration pattern and the variation display of the fifth decoration pattern are variation displays of the continuous decoration pattern,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may be different between the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol and the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol [e.g., at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (19) The meter is rising at the timing shown in Fig. 87 (29) while it is
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The first meter display is a display that may be started by a first effect [for example, an effect by a mini game shown in FIG. 90].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display,
The advance notice display is a display that may start when the first meter display changes to the full state [for example, a pseudo series effect shown in FIG. 92],
The preliminary display is a display that may start when the fourth meter display changes to the full state [for example, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 83].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The following is a supplementary note including the matters described so far.

(Appendix 2-1)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays.
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a first meter display,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a fourth meter display,
The first meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is a first state,
One of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is a third state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state,
The fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is a fourth state,
One of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is a sixth state,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state,
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state. , High expectations of the jackpot,
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, it is more than when the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state , High expectations of the jackpot,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note 2-2)
In the game console described in Appendix 2-1,
The degree of expectation that the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state is more than the degree of expectation that the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state high,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 2-3)
It is a game stand described in Supplementary Note 2-1 or 2-2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol, and
The game console characterized in that the first meter display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative symbol is stopped.

(Appendix 2-4)
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices 2-1 to 2-3,
The fourth meter display is a display started to be displayed in the fourth state,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 2-5)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 2-1 to 2-4, wherein
One of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state,
The first meter display is a display that may start being displayed in the first state,
The first meter display is a display that may start being displayed in the second state,
The expectation of the jackpot is higher in the case where the display is started in the second state than in the case where the display of the first meter is started in the first state,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 2-6)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 2-1 to 2-5, wherein
Among the plurality of types of display, one display is a first icon,
The first meter display is a display that changes from the first state to the third state by the first icon being displayed a first number of times,
The fourth meter display is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state by the first icon being displayed a second number of times,
The second number is a number less than the first number.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 2-7)
It is a game stand according to any one of Appendices 2-1 to 2-6,
One of the plurality of displays is a big hit display,
The third state in the first meter display is a state of display indicating that the big hit display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the third state is displayed,
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a state of display showing that the big hit display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the sixth state is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 2-8)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 2-7,
The second state of the first meter display is a state of display indicating that the big hit display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the second state is displayed,
The fifth state of the fourth meter display is a state of display showing that the big hit display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the fifth state is displayed,
The big hit display is easier to be displayed when the fifth state is displayed than the second state,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 2-9)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 2-1 to 2-8,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a pseudo-sequence effect,
The pseudo-series advance notice is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The pseudo continuous notice is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 2-10)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 2-1 to 2-9,
One display of the plurality of types of displays is an operation prompting display of the operation means,
The operation prompting display is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The operation prompting display is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 2-11)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 2-1 to 2-10,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects, and
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a certain effect,
The certain effect is a effect in which the big hit display is likely to be displayed in the variation of the decorative pattern in which the certain effect is displayed,
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2-1)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays.
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a first meter display,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a fourth meter display,
If the first meter display changes from empty to full, the jackpot will eventually hit the jackpot more than if the first meter does not change from empty to full. It is configured to be easy to display the symbol,
If the fourth meter display changes from empty to full, the jackpot will eventually hit the jackpot more than if the fourth meter does not change from empty to full. It is configured to be easy to display the symbol,
The fourth meter display displayed in the empty state is configured to be more easily changed to the full state than the first meter display displayed in the empty state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2-2)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note A2-1,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state has changed,
The first meter display and the fourth meter display have the same size and display position,
The first meter display and the fourth meter display may differ in some or all colors,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2-3)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note A2-1 or A2-2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first meter display on a background screen,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the fourth meter display on the certain background screen,
The certain background screen is a background screen in a certain staging stage,
The fourth meter display may be displayed if the first meter display is not displayed on the certain effect stage, and the first meter is displayed if the fourth meter display is not displayed. The display is configured so that it may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2-4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-3,
The first meter display in an empty state may change, and the fourth meter display in an empty state may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2-5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-4,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One of the plurality of icons is a first icon,
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to ascend at a first rate of increase;
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to ascend at a fourth rate of increase;
The fourth rate of increase is a rate of increase higher than the first rate of increase,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2-6)
It is a game console described in Appendix A2-5,
When the gaming ball wins the winning opening, the first icon may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2-7)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note A2-5 or A2-6,
One of the plurality of icons is a second icon,
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to ascend at a second rate of increase;
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to ascend at a fifth rate of increase;
The fifth rate of increase is a rate of increase higher than the second rate of increase,
The second rate of increase is a rate of increase higher than the first rate of increase,
The fifth rate of increase is a rate of increase higher than the fourth rate of increase,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2-8)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices A2-5 to A2-7,
When the first meter display is displayed, the fourth effect may be started,
The fourth effect is an effect in which a fourth character changes the first meter display to the fourth meter display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2-9)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A2-8,
The fourth character is a character that may be displayed across the variable display of a plurality of consecutive decorative symbols,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2-10)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note A2-8 or A2-9,
The first icon is an icon that may appear at the display position of the fourth character,
The fourth icon may use the first icon appearing at the display position of the fourth character to raise the meter of the first meter display,
The fourth icon may raise the meter of the fourth meter display using the first icon appearing at the display position of the fourth character.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2-11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-8 to A2-10,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a pending icon for symbol variation display,
The second effect may be started while the hold icon is displayed,
The second effect is an effect in which the fourth character changes the display mode of the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2-12)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-10,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon corresponding to the number of hold balls in the hold display area,
The first meter display is a display in which a part or all of the first meter display overlaps the hold display area,
The fourth meter display is a display in which a part or all of the fourth meter display overlaps the hold display area.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2-13)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-12,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a seventh meter display,
The seventh meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state has changed,
When the seventh meter display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2-14)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-13,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of error displays,
Among the plurality of types of error indications, an error indication is an indication that may partially or entirely overlap a part or all of the first meter indication.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2-15)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A2-14,
The certain error display is a display that may overlap with a portion indicating the accumulation condition of the first meter display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2-16)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note A2-14 or A2-15,
Equipped with a storage tray capable of storing gaming balls,
The above-mentioned certain error display is a counter full error display,
The counter full error display is a display prompting the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2-17)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-16,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol by the display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2-18)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-17,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern a plurality of times,
The fluctuation display of one of the decoration patterns of the fluctuation display of the decoration patterns of multiple times is the fluctuation display of the first decoration pattern,
The variation display of one decoration pattern among the variation displays of the decoration pattern of multiple times is the variation display of the second decoration pattern,
The fluctuation display of one of the decoration patterns of the fluctuation display of the decoration patterns of multiple times is the fluctuation display of the fourth decoration pattern,
The variation display of one decoration pattern among the variation displays of the decoration pattern of multiple times is the variation display of the fifth decoration pattern,
The variable display of the first decorative symbol and the variable display of the second decorative symbol are variable display of continuous decorative symbols,
The first meter display is a display in which the state may be different between the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the variable display of the second decorative symbol,
The variation display of the fourth decoration pattern and the variation display of the fifth decoration pattern are variation displays of the continuous decoration pattern,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may be different between the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol and the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2-19)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-18,
The first meter display is a display that may be started by a first effect,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2-20)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-19,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display.
The preliminary display is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the full state,
The preliminary display is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the full state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix AA 2-1)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays.
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a first meter display,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a fourth meter display,
If the first meter display changes from empty to full, the jackpot will eventually hit the jackpot more than if the first meter does not change from empty to full. It is configured to be easy to display the symbol,
If the fourth meter display changes from empty to full, the jackpot will eventually hit the jackpot more than if the fourth meter does not change from empty to full. It is configured to be easy to display the symbol,
The fourth meter display that is displayed in the empty state is configured to be more easily changed to the full state than the first meter display that is displayed in the empty state,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One of the plurality of icons is a first icon,
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to ascend by a first amount,
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to ascend by a fourth amount;
The fourth amount is an amount greater than the first amount,
When the first meter display is displayed, the fourth effect may be started,
The fourth effect is an effect in which a fourth display (for example, character display, icon display, character display, symbol display, etc.) changes the first meter display to the fourth meter display. ,
A game stand characterized by

  It should be noted that what is described as the variation display of the decorative symbol in the above may be the variation display of the symbol (more specifically, the special figure), and the description that the stop symbol of the decoration symbol is described is the symbol (more Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

  In addition, "may be" may be replaced with "always", "always be", or "always become", etc., and "○ possible" in the above is It may be replaced by "must be xxx".

  In addition, even if the constituent requirements included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, and supplementary notes described above, the constituent requirements are not limited to the other embodiments, examples, or examples. The present invention may be applied to modified examples, various examples, and supplementary notes. That is, as long as there is no factor that hinders application, the constituent features included only in the description of the embodiment, the examples, the modification, the various examples, the supplementary notes, etc. are other embodiments, examples, or modifications. Even if applied to examples and various examples and appendices, it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

  Hereinafter, other gaming machines (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine and a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) which can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 108 to 192. Note that the symbols shown in FIG. 108 to FIG. 192 are basically used only for the description using FIG. 108 to FIG. 192, and even when overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, FIG. In the description using FIG. 192, the reference numerals shown in FIG. 108 to FIG.

  As the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIG. 108 to FIG. 192 to the technical idea shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 105 and FIG. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 1 to 105 and FIGS. 193 to 265 to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 108 to 192. In that case, what attaches | subjects the same code | symbol may be handled as the same component, and may be able to be substituted.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game console which allows the player to earn a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the outer frame 102, the main body 104, the front frame door 106, the door 108 with a ball storage tray, The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front side (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. A speaker 120 (a bass speaker from which a low frequency sound is output) is attached to the outer frame 102, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, it is electrically connected (the main frame 104 and the outer frame 102). A pair of floating connectors are provided, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, the connector of the main body 104 and the connector of the outer frame 102 are in a connected state); Become.

  The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102 and having a locking function and serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112. . Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. A store clerk in a store (game arcade) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor is provided for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge 112 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable, and is configured in a frame shape to be inside Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at the game arcade can open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 (a high sound speaker outputting high sound) and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. It is done. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In the present embodiment, a light source that is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a fluorescent lamp, a cold cathode tube, etc. may be referred to as a lamp if it emits light. It corresponds to

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be capable of opening and closing with a locking function. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pushing an unillustrated opening lever which can be operated in a state where the front frame door 106 is opened. In addition, you may provide the door with a ball storage plate which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage plate was opened. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board Ball launch handle 134 to launch into the game area 124 of the game, a chance button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 110) by the operation of the player, and the chance button 136 And the ball lending operation button 140 for instructing to lend a ball to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game shop, and the player to It has a return operation button 142 for giving an instruction to return the balance, and a ball rental display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 108 is provided with a lower bowl full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower tray 128 is full by the game balls. Furthermore, an operation key unit 137 is also provided. In this operation key unit 137, the up and down keys of the up and down keys and the left and right keys of the left and right keys are arranged as the cross key, and the decision key is arranged at the center of the cross key. There is. In addition, a cancel key is also disposed below and to the right of the cross key. The pachinko machine 100 does not have the door 108 with a ball storage tray, and the upper plate 126, the lower plate 128, the ball extraction button 130, the ball ejection lever 132, the ball emission handle 134, the chance button 136, the chance button on the front frame door 106. All or a part of the lamp 138, the ball lending operation button 140, the return operation button 142, the ball lending display unit, the bottom plate full detection sensor and the operation key unit 137 may be provided.

  The front frame door 106 and the main body 104 are connected by a harness (not shown), and the front frame door 106 (which may include the door 108 with a ball storage plate) is in an open state with respect to the main body 104 If the various control circuits of the front frame door 106 and the various control circuits of the main body 104 are connected by the harness, rendering means (in this example, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122 and the chance) provided on the front frame door 106 Button lamp 138. Including the effect movable body when the front frame door 106 is provided with the effect movable body), display of the ball rental display unit, chance button 136, ball rental operation button 140, return operation button 142 and The operation of the operation key unit 137 and the detection of the bottom plate full detection sensor can be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the power supply substrate case 184 containing the power supply substrate 182 constituting the power supply control unit 660 described later is attached to the main body 104, the outer frame 102 and the front frame door 106 (with ball storage plate The door 108 may be included, and the game board 200 is configured to be supplied with a power supply voltage from the main body 104.

The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And. While the ball firing handle 134 is continuously fired by the player, the launch device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every lapse of a predetermined launch period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It shoots toward and corresponds to an example of a launcher. The ball release handle 134 is a release stop switch (not shown) for disabling the release (injection) of the game ball by the operation of the ball release handle 134 and the player touching the ball release handle 134. And a touch sensor capable of detecting In addition, it may be provided with a right-handed button which can maximize the emission intensity by being depressed in a state where the ball emission handle 134 is operated. In addition, when the touch sensor detects that the ball shooting handle 134 has been operated from the unoperated state while the demonstration screen is displayed, a dedicated effect may be performed. . For example, effect display by display means, effect sound by sound output means, and light emission effects by various decoration LEDs and light guide plates, effect movable bodies (provided on a game board or a frame) may be mentioned. An effect may be performed by four types of effect means, and may be performed by one or more effect means. Moreover, even if it is a production | presentation means of the same kind, there may be a production | presentation means which performs exclusive production | presentation, and a production | presentation means which is not performed. (For example, the effect movable body of the frame performs exclusive effect, but the effect movable body of the game board does not perform dedicated effect, the effect movable body A of the game board performs dedicated effect, but the effect movable body B of the game board There is no dedicated presentation, etc. This example is also applicable to other presentation means.)
The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. The specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 108, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 109 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG.

  A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and having an opening opened upward at the upper rear of the main body 104 of the pachinko machine 100, and located below the ball tank 150, the ball tank 150 A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole formed at the bottom of the container to the dispensing device 152 positioned on the right side in a rear view.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The dispensing device 152 is provided on the main body 104, is detachable from the main body 104, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed into the payout device 152 after passing through the tank rail 154, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device for giving a driving force to the gaming ball and transporting the gaming ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided Based on the establishment of the condition, the game value (game ball) of an amount according to the provision condition is awarded (payout) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 111) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 A first sub-board case 162 for storing a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 111) that performs control processing relating to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 Second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-substrate 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 111) that performs control processing relating to the effect, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the game ball payout 111) and a payout substrate case 172 for housing a payout substrate 170 provided with an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk; A launch board case 176 that houses a launch substrate 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 111) that performs control processing relating to the launch of a ball, and a power control unit 660 that provides power to various electrical gaming devices (see FIG. 111) The power supply housing 182 includes a power supply substrate 182 including a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated at power on. A substrate case 184 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are provided. The main board case 158 containing the main board 156, the first sub board case 162 containing the first sub board 160, and the second sub board case 166 containing the second sub board 164 are the game board 200. A discharge substrate case 172 containing a discharge substrate 170 provided with an error release switch 168, a launch substrate case 176 containing a launch substrate 174, a power supply switch 178, and a RAM clear switch 180 are provided. A power supply substrate case 184 for housing the substrate 182 and a CR interface unit 186 are provided in the main body 104.

  FIG. 110 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In the following, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "common figure", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a seven-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven segment LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 in the form of enhanced effect, and the decorative symbol is displayed. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (generally called common drawing fluctuation games to be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined number of common drawing fluctuation games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4).

  The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second change games (special game change games to be described later in detail) being held. In the mode, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure for a special figure variation game). The term "pending" as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (lottery process etc.) based on start information described later is suspended.

  The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for giving a notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-probability-in-progress lamp 222 provides notification of the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter is configured not to indicate the current symbol control state There is. Also, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state is restored immediately before the power is shut off. Although this symbol control state will be described later, the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a short time state (power support state), and a positive change state, and a state with special view positive change and It may be one of the states without special figure probability change.

  In this specification, although the term "control state" is used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100), the term "control state" includes the concept of so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are disposed around the effect device 206 ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 If the player wins a prize, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 109 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls as a winning ball onto the upper tray 126 shown in FIG. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning may be called a "winning ball", and a ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "rental ball". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special view start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special view start opening 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters is not changed. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 109 is driven to drive a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as a prize ball. While discharging to 126, the special figure fluctuation game by the 1st special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special drawing start port 230 is one of the start areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed start area whose size does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special drawing start opening 232 is disposed below the first special drawing start opening 230. A pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid is provided in the vicinity of the second special view start opening 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special view start opening 232 is It corresponds to a variable start means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the degree of difficulty of winning to the second special view start opening 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special view start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode that is difficult to win. On the other hand, when it is elected to the common drawing fluctuating game and the common drawing display device 210 hits and displays the stop symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and to the second special drawing start opening 232 The ball can enter the ball (in a state where winning is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state in which winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special view starting opening 232 is either small size (corresponding to the first size) or large size (corresponding to the second size). This is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball is variable from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special view start port 230. When the pair of wing members 2321 is open, the game ball entering the game area 124 is the second special feature which is a variable start area than the game ball entering the first special view start port 230 which is a fixed start area. There are more gaming balls entering the figure starting opening 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In addition, in this embodiment, although two 1st special figure starting ports 230 and 2nd special figure starting ports 232 are provided, three starting ports may be provided. Here, when there are three starting openings, two first special drawing starting openings may be provided and one second special drawing starting opening may be provided. Conversely, one first special drawing starting opening is provided. It is provided, and two 2nd special figure starting ports may be provided. In addition, when there is only one special view display device, the three starting ports may be configured to correspond to the same special view display device. Moreover, four or more starting openings may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 which can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from either one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening than the closed state, to the other state. The closed state and the open state are both stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. In the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the gaming board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the face. On the other hand, the open state is the predetermined second stationary state, and the open state of the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until a big hit game to be described later is started, and repeats the state change between the open state and the closed state when the big hit game is started. In the closed state, in addition to a state in which the game ball is completely closed, a state in which the game ball is slightly open to a substantially impossible level may be used. In addition, the variable winning opening may be any winning combination of game balls as game balls pass or enter, etc., and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. When the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening is provided, but two variable winning openings may be provided. Here, when two variable winning openings are provided, the other variable winning opening is always closed while one of the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening is open. However, both variable winning openings may be open. Also, three or more variable winning openings may be provided.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The ball contained in the upper tray 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the firing motor is driven with the strength according to the amount of operation of the ball firing handle 134 of the player, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the shooting rod 146 and the shooting rod 148 to the game area 124 Launch. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach. The game board may be provided with an out sensor. Out sensor is a game ball that has passed the sensor of the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234), a game that has passed the sensor of the starting opening (first special view starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232) It is a sensor configured to be able to detect a game ball that has entered the ball and the out port. The sensor may be configured to detect only a part of the winning opening, the starting opening, and the out opening.

<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball riding up by the game nail 238, etc. The passed ball enters the first special view starting opening 230 at the center of the stage 244. There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to hit the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

  The decorative lamp such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 108, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Corresponds to an example of the decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec seal 290 representing the specs of the game stand is attached at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command sent from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main according to the command that the main control unit 300 sends. And a power control section 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing, and a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit assumes that two counters are built in) Is mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock. Further, the random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316 a is received. Although the random value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including predetermined ball detection sensors, for example, sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, and variable winning opening, and lower dish full tank sensors. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 and the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special display device 212 or the first 2) A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special view display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common view display device 210, various status display units 328 (for example, Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the general drawing holding lamp 216, the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, the high probability middle lamp 222, etc., and Moving members, for example, drive means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the second special view starting port 232 as a normal electric part, drive means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric part, etc. And a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including the above. Although the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are separately provided in this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value corresponds to the built-in counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Store in value storage register. Also, even when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special view start opening 232, similarly, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special view start opening 232 The latched and latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special view start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal plate (not shown). The game information (for example, a game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 with which etc. is provided.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured such that the first sub control unit 400 can not transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. doing. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by two-way communication. Furthermore, although the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, it is configured such that signals such as commands can not be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. It is also good.

Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Further, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450.

  In addition, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 and the like. The sensor circuit 428 and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 includes various movable body sensors 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, etc., and a button sensor 426 for detecting depression of various buttons constituting the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 137. The detection signal is output to the basic circuit 402.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like, and the CPU 504. The image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 is read based on the signal from the VDP 518, and a display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 518 to display the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. And is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, connected to the basic circuit 502 is a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a winning ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout of. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 performs payout ball information indicating that payout of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been performed and payout of a predetermined number (for example, 25) of balls It outputs to the information input circuit 350 through the external terminal board which does not illustrate the rental ball information etc. which show that. Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. When open, these sensors detect and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs an open signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door open information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 632 which drives the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 which feeds the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, the power control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 discharges the main control unit 300 and the second sub control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 (a) to 112 (d), the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the common view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped. The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described.

  Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor which is the ball detection sensor detects that the ball entered the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, the ball is inserted into special drawing 2 starting opening 232 A special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor which is a ball | bowl detection sensor detected that it was having a ball. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "the variation display of the special figure 1" (special figure Play the fluctuation game). Also, when the special figure 2 change game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment, "the variation display of the special figure 2" ( Perform special feature variation game). Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special view display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 As the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this “variable display of special view 1 or 2” to the stop display of the stop symbol form of special view 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of special view. The variable display of this special drawing may be performed several times continuously.

  FIG. 112 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view 1. In FIG. 112 (a), nine types of special drawings of "special drawing A" to "special drawing I" are shown. In FIG. 112 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

In the present embodiment, seven types of big hit symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special view. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) jackpot symbol, and it is a 15R definite variation big hit symbol that can be expected to get out balls in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special figure B" is a 15R big hit symbol There is a real 5R probability variation big hit design that can not be expected to get out balls in the remaining rounds, while "Can be expected to get out balls in 5 of 15 rounds,""Special figure C" is a 15R big hit symbol Yes, it is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) symbol that you can expect to get out balls in all the 15 of the 15 rounds, and the "special figure D" is the 15R big hit symbol and 8 of the 15 rounds. It is real 8R-RUB which can not expect the acquisition of the balls in the remaining rounds while the acquisition of the balls can be expected in the two rounds, and the "special figure E" is the pattern of the 15R big hit, 15 In the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that can not expect to get out balls, while "special figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot symbol. Fig. G "is a 2R big hit symbol, and is a 2R positive variation hit symbol called a latent probability variation or hidden probability variation which can not be expected to be obtained in any round in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a jackpot that makes it difficult for the player to identify to the player how many rounds that can be expected to be won at the start of the jackpot, and the specific round (for example, five rounds). It is a big hit which is directed in a manner of asking the player whether or not the round which can be expected to be won will continue when the eyes and the ninth round are reached.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination as to whether or not the special big hit is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between a normal big hit and a definite change big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (probably big hit) or low (usually a big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the big hit is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure definite change" or simply "positive change"), and the state in which the probability is low is special figure It is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the end of the big hit game, it may shift to the time saving state (power support state). Here, the power support state is a predetermined condition in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-power support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit, etc. It means the state. The time saving state will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a map view high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "flat map probability variation"), and the state not a time saving state is referred to as a map view low probability state. Thus, the power support state (time saving state) is started on condition of the end of the big hit game. Strictly speaking, the "power support state" is a state of a general view, and the "time-short state" is a state of a special view or a general view and a special view. The short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the power support state and in the general drawing high probability state. It is easier to win the popular map fluctuating game in the popular drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state (general drawing positive change). For example, the winning probability of the common drawing fluctuation game is 1/100 in the common drawing low probability state (non-power support state), and increases to 99/100 in the common drawing high probability state (power support state). In addition, in the power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-power support state (general drawing change short). For example, in the non-power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the power support state. Also, in the power-on state, the open time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special view 2 start port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-power-on state (power-tw open period extension). For example, in the non-power-supply state, the power-chw open period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the power-supply state. Furthermore, in the power-on state, the blade members 2321 open more easily than in the non-power-on state. For example, the blade member 2321 which opens only once in the non-power support state per one winning to the common drawing start port 228 opens twice in the power support state (open for 2 seconds and close for 1 second, and also for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is increased due to the extension of the power chewing open period and the increase in the number of power chewing open. In addition, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-power support state is maintained. This is particularly likely to occur to the player if the game ball is picked up by the electric chew having a small number of balls in a big hit game, and the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is reduced. It is because there is. In the present embodiment, in the power support state (time reduction state), all of the generalization probability change, the generalization change short period, the power chew open period extension, and the increase in the number of power chew open times are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's degree of advantage is high, and may be set to the power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if any one of the electric cho open period extension and the electric cho open number increase is performed, the probability of entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is increased, it may be set as the electric support state (short time state). In the non-power-supporting state, it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the special view 2 start opening 232 than in the power-supporting state. As described above, the special view 2 start port 232 is changed to a winning difficult state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter. In the special figure 2 start port 232, the entrance is in the easy-to-winning state in the power-supply state over a longer period than in the non-power-supply state. In the present embodiment, when “special figure A” to “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, the power support state (common figure high probability state until the next big hit game is started) ) Is maintained, and when the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the power support state is maintained while the special figure fluctuation game is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, and the 101st non-power Transition to the support state (generally low probability state). On the other hand, when the jackpot ("special figure G") without power support is won, it does not shift to the power support state after the end of the jackpot game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when “special figure A” to “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the big hit game is finished. In addition, when “special figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes special figure low probability spread figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. In addition, when “special figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes special figure high probability general drawing low probability state after the big hit game is over.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, one kind of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol besides the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for only 0.1 seconds at the maximum per one operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) in the first opening, or obtain a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls) If it does, the second and subsequent opening will not be performed. During the small hit game, transition to the special figure low probability spread map low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the small hit game starts after the small hit game is over. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 112 (a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening and closing mode (number of opening and closing times and opening time) of the variable winning opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening and closing mode of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game Although the number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, they may be different, for example, the number of opening times and / or the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost design.

  FIG. 112 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view 2. In this FIG. 112 (b), six types of special drawings of "special drawing a" to "special drawing f" are shown, and five kinds of special drawings are big hit symbols ("special Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 15R big hit design, and it is a 15R probability variation big hit design that can be expected to get out balls in all of the 15 rounds, and "special figure b" is a 15R big hit design, 15 It is a 15R-RUB design that can be expected to get out balls in all rounds of the round, "Special figure c" is a 15R jackpot pattern, and it is expected to get out balls in 8 of 15 rounds On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB which can not expect to get out balls in the remaining rounds, and "Special figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol and can be expected to get out balls in 4 out of 15 rounds On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB which can not be expected to obtain the balls, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal big hit symbol.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost design.

  FIG. 112 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, "deterioration" is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... Perform “variable display of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214. Then, the stop symbol form which is the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

In the case of notifying 5R probability variation big hit (“Special figure B”), 5R normal big hit (“Special figure F”), 2R normal big hit (“Special figure e”), “decorate” in symbol display areas 208a to 208c A combination of three or more decorative designs of the same number other than 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "(for example," decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1 "or" Stop the display of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 etc.). In addition, when notifying 15R definite variation big hit ("special figure A" and "special figure a"), "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Stop display of decoration 7 ". Furthermore, when 15R-RUB, substantial 8R-RUB and substantial 4R-RUB are to be notified, the left figure display area 208a and the right figure display area 208c are the decorative figures of the same number, and the middle figure display area 208b is The combination of the decorative designs which are the decorative designs (for example, "decorative 1-majesty-decorative 1", "decorative 4-majesty-decorative 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the case of notifying a hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or a small hit (“special figure H”) that is a big hit of 2R, “decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop the display of the combination of decorative symbols such as 3 ". A combination of decorative designs such as "decoration 1-decor 2-decor 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the lost design of “special figure I” and “special figure f”, a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols explained so far (for example, loose) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop displaying the eyes).

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, display from the start of the “variation display of the decorative symbol” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by the control of the first sub control unit 400.

  FIG. 112 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a detached symbol. Based on the fact that the ball sensor has detected that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228, the drawing display device 210 detects that all seven segments are lit and one central segment. Repeat “Lighting” “variable display of common drawing” (common drawing fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols of the "common figure A", which is a deviation from the "common figure A", which is a hit symbol, is displayed in a stopped state. Also in FIG. 112 (d), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variation display of the common drawing” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the common drawing may be referred to as the fluctuation display of the common drawing.

  Next, the main control unit power-on process performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 (a) is a flowchart of the main control unit power-on process, FIG. 113 (b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and FIG. 113 (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  First, in step S101, stack pointer initialization is performed. In this stack pointer initial setting, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 is performed.

  Subsequently, in step S102, whether the low voltage signal is on or not, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value In the example, it is determined whether or not it is 9 V or more. If the voltage value of the power supply is less than the predetermined value (step S102: No), wait until the voltage value of the power supply is equal to or more than the predetermined value, and if it is equal to or more than the predetermined value (step S102: Yes) The process proceeds to step S103.

  In step S103, internal register initialization is performed. In this internal register initialization, processing of setting values for starting of WDT 314, access permission of RAM 308, and a numerical value for determining an execution cycle of main control unit timer interrupt processing described later to each register of timer circuit 312, main control unit 300 After performing processing such as initial setting of serial communication between the and the payout control unit 600 and setting of the maximum value of hardware random numbers, the processing proceeds to step S104.

  In step S104, it is determined whether a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game arcade operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is on (indicating that an operation has been made). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary) (step S104: Yes), the process proceeds to step S108 in order to initialize the basic circuit 302. Proceed to execute an initial startup process described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary) (step S104: No), the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, the power supply status information stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and it is determined whether the power supply status information is information indicating suspension. Then, if the information on the power supply status is not the information indicating the suspend (step S105: No), the process proceeds to step S108 to initialize the basic circuit 302, and an initial activation process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the information of the power supply status is the information indicating the suspend (step S105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S106.

  In step S106, the checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated check sum It is determined whether the result of the sum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal) (step S106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S107 to return to the state before power interruption and return Execute startup processing. On the other hand, if the result of the checksum is other than the specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal) (step S106: No), the process proceeds to step S108 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Proceed to execute an initial startup process described later.

  Here, the return activation processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the return activation process is started, in step S201, initialization at return activation is performed. Specifically, a process of setting information indicating "restoration start" to the information of the power supply status, a process of setting the magnetic detection abnormality flag to OFF, and a device error (flag of an error due to magnetic detection or prize abnormality) It performs a process of clearing, a process of clearing the previous device error status, and a process of clearing the device error status for security signal.

  Subsequently, in step S202, after setting the addresses after the storage area for which the initial setting has been performed in step S201 as an address to start the RAM clear, the return activation process is ended.

  In addition, in the return activation process, for example, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command representing that the power has been restored, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in a sub-command transmission process in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113 (c), the initial activation process will be described. When the initial activation process is started, in step S301, initialization of soft random numbers is performed. Specifically, initial setting of soft random numbers used in a drawing of a special drawing or a drawing is performed.

  Subsequently, in step S302, the address after the storage area for which initialization has been performed in step S301 is set as an address to start RAM clearing, and then the initial activation process is ended.

  In addition, in the initial activation process, for example, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to a stack pointer (main setting), and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initial startup process of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the command setting transmission process (step S405) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , And sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (a), after the return activation process or the initial activation process is executed, the RAM clear process is performed in step SS109. In this RAM clear process, the storage area of the RAM 308 after the RAM clear start address set as described above is cleared (initialized).

  Subsequently, in step S110, the sub control related activation setting is performed. In this sub control related activation setting, the setting for the activation waiting counter of the first sub control unit 400 is performed, and in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 transmits a sub command to the first sub control unit 400 three times. Therefore, processing for setting the initial value of the sub control command continuous transmission counter stored in the RAM 308 is also performed.

  In step S111, output port setting is performed. In this output port setting, symbol data, firing position designation signal, error status signal, winning ball signal, blowout signal, common motorized part (second special view starting port 232, electric chow) in operation signal, blowout operation Medium signal, easy-to-win status signal, special signal per signal, special figure small hit signal (but limited to small hit models only), special figure fluctuating signal, special figure fluctuation time shortening status signal, special electric character (variable prize) Port 234, attacker) operating signal, condition device operating signal, character continuous operating device operating signal, big winning port solenoid signal, ordinary electric character solenoid signal, symbol LED data, external terminal board signal etc. are set Set the output port etc. Further, after the process of step S111 is finished, the process proceeds to the main control unit main loop process. Here, the easy-to-win state may indicate a power support state.

  Next, main control unit main loop processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. It is a flowchart of main control part main loop processing.

  When the main control unit 300 completes the execution of the main control power-on process described above, next, in step S401 of the main control unit main loop processing that starts the execution of the main control unit main loop processing, After setting, in step S402, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted (restarted). In step S403, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed (step S403). In this basic random number initial value update processing, processing is performed to update the initial value of the special drawing determination random number counter and the initial value generation random number counter for generating the initial value of the common drawing determination random number counter. For updating the initial value generation random number counter, for example, assuming that a numerical value range that can be taken as a basic random number value is 0 to 20, acquire a value from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 and add 1 to the acquired value. Are stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 21, then 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  In step S404, after setting of the interruption permission is performed, in step S405, a subcommand transmission process is performed). In this sub-command transmission process, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and if there is a command to be transmitted, processing such as transmitting the command is performed. In step S406, the other determination random number update process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S407. In the other determination random number update processing, processing such as updating of the random number for special map fluctuation time determination and the random number for common drawing fluctuation time determination is performed.

  In step S407, it is determined whether or not the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 9 V). Yes: return to step S401 to continue the main control unit main loop processing, and if less than the predetermined value (step S407: No), proceed to step S408. In step S408, power-off processing is performed. In this power-off process, the power supply status information is set to "suspend" after being set to interrupt prohibition. Further, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the predetermined storage of the RAM 308 Store in the area. Thereafter, after setting for prohibiting access to the RAM 308, the HALT state is established.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart of a main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by the timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S501, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In steps S502 and S503, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S403 is updated, and then the special control number random number counter used by the main control unit 300 , And the random number counter for determining the special drawing fluctuation time and the random number counter for determining the common fluctuation period. For example, assuming that a numerical value range that can be taken as a random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number value, and 1 is added to the acquired value. In the random number counter storage area of At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a previously obtained initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308 as a result of acquiring a value from a random number counter which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and adding 1 to the acquired value If the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is obtained as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, and is set in the random number counter, and the random number counter next turns In order to determine that, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 2 may be separately provided.

  In step S504, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function limitation is in progress (whether or not the first sub control unit 400 is activated), and in the interrupt function limitation (first sub control unit 400 is not activated). (Step S504: YES), the process proceeds to step S519, and if the interrupt function is not limited (if the first sub control unit 400 is activated) (step S504: No), the process proceeds to step S505. move on. Here, interrupt function limitation means that the start waiting counter of the first sub control unit 400 set in step S110 of the power-on process is not 0, that is, in step S504, If it is determined that the activation waiting counter of the sub control unit 400 is 0, it is determined that the first sub control unit 400 has been activated, and the process proceeds to step S505. If the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to be capable of bi-directional communication, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a command for confirming whether it is activated or not, and the first sub-control unit 400 If a confirmation command is returned from 400, it may be determined that the first sub control unit 400 has been activated. In step S505, it is determined whether or not a specific error (in the present embodiment, a magnetic detection error) is occurring. If a specific error is occurring (step S505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520. If the specific error is not occurring (step S505: No), the process proceeds to step S506.

  In step S506, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common drawing display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the design on the common drawing display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the first special drawing display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the fluctuation / stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined open period And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S507, processing such as input port status update is performed. In this input port status update process, the special view start port (first special view start port 230, second special view start port 232), the common view start port 228, the out port 240 via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence or absence of signal input related to switches such as the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 and the winning opening (general winning opening 226) is monitored, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

  Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area. Further, when it is determined that the winning to the starting opening and the winning opening is abnormal, the information stored in the signal state storage area is erased as the winning is invalid.

  In step S508, a winning opening winning process is performed. In this winning a prize winning process, the information of the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous second detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information.

  The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-mentioned step S507, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a winning when detection is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 100 μs) after the detection signal is input. In the case where the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal, it may be determined that there is a winning.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal). In this step S507, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal last before, presence of previous detection signal, present detection signal present) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228.

  For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  Further, in the winning opening winning processing of step S508, the winning opening counter updating processing is also performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning on the winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special view 1 starting opening 230, and the special view 2 starting opening 232, the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening The value of the award ball number storage area provided for each is read out, 1 is added, and the value is set in the original award ball number storage area.

  Further, in the winning opening winning process of step S508, a winning reception process is also performed. In this winning reception process, whether or not there is a winning to the first special view starting port 230, the second special view starting port 232, the common drawing starting port 228 and the variable winning port 234 matches the winning determination pattern information It makes a decision using the decision result of When there is a winning on the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 random number value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. The value is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

  Also, when there is a winning on the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 2 winning value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. While obtaining as a random number value, a value is obtained as a special figure 2 random number value from a random number counter for special figure 2 random number value generation and stored in a corresponding random number value storage area. If the common drawing start port 228 has a prize and the corresponding storage number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a common drawing selection random value from a random number counter for common drawing selection random number generation. Store in the corresponding random number storage area. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening. In addition, when the random number of the special drawing is acquired, the special drawing pre-reading process (the pass / fail judgment, the symbol, the pre-reading lottery of the fluctuation time) is also performed. The details of the special view prefetching process will be described later.

  In step S509, a prize related error check process is performed. In this prize-related error check process, a prize-related abnormality is confirmed and monitored, and a process of setting an anomaly according to the processing result is performed. Note that some switches may not detect an abnormality. In step S510, out switch input update processing is performed. In this out switch input updating process, the number of gaming balls that have passed through the sensor provided in the out port 240 is detected and updated. The input result of this out switch is mainly used for presentation.

  In step S511, serial command management processing is performed. In this serial command management process, a process of receiving a command from the payout control unit 600, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed. Note that, as a command that the main control unit 300 transmits to the payout control unit 600, a communication confirmation command (communication state with the payout control unit 600) transmitted after the start waiting time of the first sub-control unit 400 after power on has elapsed. , And a winning ball number command instructing payout of gaming balls for a designated winning ball.

  In addition, as a command received by the main control unit 300 from the payout control unit 600, a communication confirmation return command (a response command indicating that the payout control unit 600 has received a command from the main control unit 300), a test shot test signal Commands (including award ball signal output request) and commands including information on the occurrence status of a payout error (including no error), and prize ball payout operation status commands (prize ball payout operation in progress / non-operation There is a command to indicate, or an indication (indicating lighting or non-lighting such as an LED) to the first sub control unit 400 to indicate that dispensing is in progress.

  Next, in step S512, a special figure status update process is performed on the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. The special figure state update process executes one of the following eight processes according to the process state of the special figure. The special view state update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S513, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that it becomes an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to become the display pattern of the detached symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED.

  Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs finalized display of either one of the hit symbol and the off symbol. After that, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 while setting predetermined opening period (for example 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to a solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating a closing period is set in a storage area of a blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is out, the common drawing deviation flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for drawing out is set to ON, the normal drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update process in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S514 without doing anything.

  Also, in step S513, a common drawing related lottery process is also performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  In step S514, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S507 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, and when a predetermined error is detected, the first sub-control unit 400 is notified. Device information indicating the presence or absence of an error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, or through the display circuits 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S515, external output signal management processing is performed. In this external output signal management process, a process of preparing to transmit an external terminal board signal is performed. In step S516, a subcommand management process is performed. In this subcommand management process, preparation for transmitting various commands to the first secondary control unit 400 is performed. The output schedule information (subcommand) to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, and bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), Bits 11 to 14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, big hit start command, big hit round number specification command, power recovery command, Information which can specify the type of command such as a RAM clear command) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is the symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special drawing related lottery process, etc. In the case of the change stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special view probability change flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the prize effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special view probability change flag etc. In the case of the jackpot round number specification command, the value of the special symbol probability fluctuation flag, the jackpot round number, and the like are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning of the variable winning opening 234 Including presence or absence. In the present embodiment, when there is a winning on the variable winning opening 234, a special winning opening winning command is set.

  In the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process stored in the command data in the RAM 308 are selected. The information which shows the number of the made timer number, the 1st special figure fluctuation game or 2nd special figure fluctuation game etc which are kept is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described prize effect setting transmission process, the symbol data stored in the RAM 308 as command data is outputted to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game stand frame lamp 452, the speaker 120 during the prize effect period. Information indicating the control information, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set.

  Further, in the above-mentioned termination effect setting transmission processing, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 and outputted to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game stand frame lamp 452 and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period Information indicating the effect control information to be played, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. In the special winning opening closing setting transmission process described above, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. At step S516, general command special view reserve increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S517, display display setting processing is performed. In this indicator display setting process, for displays such as “number of holding balls, symbol combination”, status (during power support or non power support), right-handed status, etc. (lighting pattern of LED) Perform processing such as setting data to be output. In step S518, an output management process is performed. In this output management process, a process of outputting a control signal set in each process to a solenoid or an LED, and a process of transmitting a prepared command to the first sub control unit 400 or the payout control unit 600 are performed.

  In step S519, a sub control start wait process is performed. In this sub control start wait wait process, the start wait counter of the sub control is decremented by 1 and this start wait counter becomes 0 in order to wait for the first sub control unit 400 to be started and to be in the communicable state. If it does, prepare to send a predetermined command. Note that as the predetermined command, any one or more commands of a power on command and a command related to the payout control unit 600 (for example, a command indicating that all errors have been cleared, a bottom error has occurred) There is a command that indicates that there is an error that indicates that the payout ball number error is in an occurrence state, a main control communication error command (a command that indicates that the communication with the payout control unit 600 is abnormal), a CR unit disconnection error Is a generation state, and a firing position command (a command for notifying the firing position according to the state).

  In step S520, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the respective registers temporarily saved in step S501 are set to the original registers, and the interrupt permission setting is performed, and then the process returns to the main control unit main loop process. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the special figure state update process (step S512) in the main control unit timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart of the special figure state update process.

  In step S601, acquisition and storage of the special view processing state address are performed, and in the next step S602, processing corresponding to the value indicated by the special view processing state stored in the RAM 308 is executed. Specifically, here, based on the value that the special view processing state indicates, the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 117 (a), which will be described later, the process during symbol variation shown in FIG. 118, the special figure shown in FIG. Display determination weight processing, hit start weight processing shown in FIG. 120 (a), special electric power combination operation processing shown in FIG. 121, special electric power combination residual ball detection processing shown in FIG. 124, special electric power combination operation end processing shown in FIG. One of the processes shown is executed.

  In step S603, the winning a prize status is set to ON. In step S604, the state change of the special drawing processing state is determined, and in the next step S605, the presence or absence of the state change of the special drawing processing state (change of the value indicated by the special drawing processing state) is determined. If there is no state change of the state (if the value indicated by the special view processing state does not change) (step S605: No), the special view state update processing is ended, and there is a state change of the special view processing state. If it is determined that the value indicated by the special view processing state is changing (step S605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, it is determined whether the special processing state is set to "variation waiting state". If it is applicable (step S606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if it is not applicable (step S606) : No), it progresses to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether the special view processing state is set to "hit start display wait state", and if applicable (step S607: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and does not correspond (No Step S607: No), the special figure state update process is ended.

  In step S608, the transmission request for the sub-command is set (in the present embodiment, after setting the transmission request for the gaming state command including the gaming state for the special drawing and the drawing), the firing position including information on whether or not the right hitting state After setting the transmission request of the command), the special figure state update processing is ended. Note that the order of transmission requests for sub-commands is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission requests may be reversed, or transmission requests for a plurality of commands may be performed at once in one process.

  Subsequently, the special figure state update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (a). FIG. 117 (a) is a flowchart of the special figure related lottery process executed in the special figure state update process.

  The special figure related lottery process is a process which is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "variation waiting state" in step S602 of the special figure state update processing.

  In step S701 of the special drawing related lottery process, the special figure 2 holding ball number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S702, it is determined whether the acquired special figure 2 holding ball number is 0 or not (If there is no suspension of the special figure 2 change game) (step S702: Yes), proceed to step S703, and if other than 0 (if there is a suspension of the special figure 2 change game) (step S702: No) In order to execute the process relating to the special figure 2, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S703, the special figure 1 holding ball number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S704, it is determined whether the acquired special figure 1 holding ball number is 0 or not, and in the case of 0 (special figure 1 When there is no suspension of the change game (step S704: Yes), the special drawing related lottery process is ended, and when it is other than 0 (when there is a suspension of the special view 1 change game) (step S704: No) In order to execute the process relating to Special Figure 1, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S 705, when the process relating to the special figure 2 is executed, the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by 1 and when the process relating to the special figure 1 is executed, The value of the special figure 1 reservation ball number memorized is subtracted one. In step S706, special figure random number migration processing is executed. In this special figure random number transfer process, when the process relating to the special figure 2 is executed, the random numbers stored in the random number storage area corresponding to the holds 2 to 4 of the special figure 2 When shifting to the random number storage area corresponding to 3 and clearing the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 of the special figure 2 and executing the processing related to the special figure 1, it corresponds to the hold 2 to 4 of the special figure 1 The random number value stored in the random number storage area is shifted to the random number storage area corresponding to the retentions 1 to 3 of the special figure 1, and the random number storage area corresponding to the retention 4 of the special figure 1 is cleared. Thus, the game console (pachinko machine) in the present embodiment is a special view 2 priority variable machine. In addition, each of Toku 2 and Toku 1 can store up to four reservations.

  In step S 707, a lottery process is performed per special image. Although the details will be described later, in the lottery process per special drawing, the success or failure judgment of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game (or special drawing 1 fluctuation game) is performed. In step S708, a display symbol lottery process is performed. In this display symbol lottery process, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table (or the special figure 1 symbol determination table), based on the result of the special figure lottery process in step S 707 and the random number value, the second special figure The lottery of the special view display symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214 (or the first special view display device 212) is performed.

  Fig. 128 (a) is a view showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and Fig. 128 (b) is a view showing an example of the special figure 2 symbol determination table. When the display symbol data of the special figure 1 is determined in the display symbol lottery process of step S708, the special figure 1 per symbol drawing process of step S707 is referred to with reference to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. The display symbol data of the special figure 1 is selected based on the result of success or failure of FIG. 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure result of the special view 1 is a big hit, any one of the special view A to the special view G is selected, and when the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 is a small hit, When the special view H is selected and the success or failure result of the special view 1 is lost, the special view I is selected.

  When the display symbol data of the special figure 2 is determined in the display symbol lottery process of step S708, the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 128 (b) is referred to, and the lottery process per special figure of step S707 is performed. The display symbol data of the special figure 2 is drawn based on the result of the special figure 2 and the numerical value range of the random number. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure result of the special view 2 is a big hit, any one of the special views a to e is selected, and when the success or failure result of the special view 2 is a loss, the special view f is selected. After the symbol to be displayed is determined, symbol data to be displayed on the special view display device is set. The symbol data set here is acquired again in display display setting processing (step S517) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing, and control to display on the special image display device is performed. After the symbol data is set, the determined symbol (symbol type information) is determined, and if there is a loss, the present process ends.

  When the determined symbol (pattern type information) is a symbol of a big hit or a small hit, a process of setting data to be set to the hit end (data setting process after the hit end) is performed. The post-hit data setting process is a process of setting a gaming state to be set after the hit according to the symbol determined by the lottery.

  Referring back to FIG. 117 (a), in step S709, a special figure fluctuation time lottery process is performed. In this special figure fluctuation time lottery process, referring to a fluctuation time table (not shown), based on the success or failure result of the special figure 2 (or special figure 1) by the lottery process per special figure in step S707, and the numerical value range of random numbers. After the timer for the special figure fluctuation time is selected, the special figure related lottery process is ended.

<Lottery processing per special feature>
Next, with reference to FIG. 117 (b), the drawing-per-lot drawing process (step S707) will be described. FIG. 117 (b) is a flowchart of a lottery process (step S707) per special drawing in the special drawing related lottery process.

  In step S801 of the lottery process per special drawing, a lottery per special drawing is performed with reference to the success / failure determination table. In the present embodiment, the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 both perform lottery per special drawing using the same judgment table, but different special judgment tables for the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are used. It may be prepared.

  FIG. 127 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for acceptance determination, and FIG. 127 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for acceptance determination. In the case of the special figure high probability state in the special figure 1 in the lottery process per special figure per step S801, the special figure high probability state shown in FIG. 127 (a) is referred to in the special figure high probability state. In the case of the low probability state, the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. 127 (b) is referred to. And based on the numerical value range which the table for the propriety determination referred to and the acquired random number value, the propriety determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the big hit, the small hit or the loss is selected as the result of the pass / fail judgment.

  Further, also in the case of performing the success or failure judgment of the special drawing 2 in the lottery processing per special drawing in the step S801, similarly, in the special drawing height probability state, refer to the high probability table for the judgment of acceptance shown in FIG. In the case of the special figure low probability state, the probability determination low probability table shown in FIG. 127 (b) is referred to. And based on the numerical value range which the table for the propriety determination referred to and the acquired random number value, the propriety determination result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special view 2 change game, a big hit or a loss is selected as a result of the pass / fail determination.

  Referring back to FIG. 117 (b), in step S802, it is determined whether or not the lottery result (lottery result) of lottery per special drawing in step S801 is other than "big hit", and in the case other than "big hit" (step S802 : Yes), the process proceeds to step S803, and in the case of a "big hit" (step S802: No), the process proceeds to step S804. In step S803, the small hit determination process is performed using the small hit determination table.

  FIG. 127 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the small hitting determination table. In the special figure small hitting lottery process of step S803, referring to the small hitting determination table shown in FIG. 127 (c), the special drawing is performed based on the numerical range indicated by the referred small hitting determination table and the acquired random number value. Select the success or failure judgment result of the small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure judgment result (lottery result) of the lottery per special drawing is special drawing 1, the small hit is selected with the probability of 2000/65536 as the success or failure judgment result, and the loss is lost with the probability of 63536/65536. Although it is selected, in the case where the determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special drawing is special drawing 2, no small hit is selected.

  Referring back to FIG. 117 (b), in step S804, the RAM 308 is selected based on the special result per unit drawing determination result (lottery result) of step S801 and the special result per unit drawing determination result (lottery result) of step S803. The information on any one of "big hit", "small hit" and "lost" is set in the success / failure determination type stored in. In the next step S805, information indicating "during special figure variation" is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the process during symbol variation shown in FIG. 118 is called and executed.

  In step S806, the value of the special figure determination random number stored in RAM 308 is cleared, and in the next step S807, a transmission request for a sub command (special figure variation start command) is set, and in the next step S808, the special figure After setting basic signal information (for test) indicating that 2 (or special figure 1) is moving, the lottery process per special figure is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the symbol variation in-progress process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart of symbol fluctuation processing which is executed in the special figure state update processing. The symbol changing process is a process which is called and executed when the information set in the special view processing state indicates “special figure changing” in step 602 of the special view state update process.

  In step S901 of the symbol change processing, the special view operation type (special view 1 or special view 2) stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and the address of the RAM to be updated is calculated according to the special view operation type. .

  In step S902, by referring to the address destination calculated in step S901, the timer for the special drawing fluctuation time set in step S709 of the special drawing related lottery process is acquired, and is it 0? It is determined whether or not. As a result of the determination, when the timer for the special figure fluctuation time is 0 (when the set special figure fluctuation time has elapsed) (step S902: Yes), the process proceeds to step S905, and when it is not 0 (the special figure fluctuation time set If (1) has not passed (step S902: No), the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether it is not the update timing of the special figure display symbol, and if it is not the update timing (step S903: Yes), the processing during symbol variation is ended, and the case of the update timing (step S903: No) ), Go to step S904. In step S904, the special figure display symbol data is updated, and then the symbol change processing is ended.

  By this special view display symbol data update processing, in the case of the special view 1, using the first special view display device 212, all the seven segments and all the lighting of one central segment are repeated. The variable display of the special figure 1 is performed, and in the case of the special figure 2, the second special symbol display device 214 is used to repeat lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. The variable display of the special figure 2 is performed.

  In step S905, the special figure display symbol data selected in step S708 of the special figure related lottery process is acquired and set, and in the next step S906, information indicating "special figure display weight state" is set in the special figure processing state. Do. Thus, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure display finalization wait process shown in FIG. 119 is called and executed.

  In step S 907, the display symbol update data is cleared, and in the next step S 908, basic signal information (for test) indicating that the variation stop of special figure 2 (or special figure 1) is set is set, and the next step In S909, the symbol determination frequency information signal stored in the RAM 308 is set to ON, and the symbol determination frequency information signal is output from the external terminal board 349.

  In step S910, a transmission request for a sub-command (special figure fluctuation stop command) is set, and in the next step S911, symbol type information stored in the RAM 308 (symbol of special figure 1 shown in FIG. 112 (a) or 112 (b), and after setting the special view display confirmation timer showing the time for maintaining the stop display of the special view based on the symbol type information, the symbol Finish the process during fluctuation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the special view display determination weight process executed in the special view status update process will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the special chart display determination weight process executed in the special chart state update process. This special view display determination wait process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special view process state indicates “the special view display wait state” in step S602 of the special view state update process. It is.

  In step S1001 of the special view display determination weight process, it is determined whether or not the special view display determination timer set in step S911 of the symbol variation processing is larger than 0, and is larger than 0 (special view display determination time If it has not elapsed (step S1001: Yes), the special view display determination weight process is ended, otherwise (when the special view display determination time has elapsed) (step S1001: No), step S1002 Go to

  In step S1002, the symbol determination number information signal set in step S909 of the symbol variation processing is cleared (set to OFF), and in the next step S1003, the special figure variation time shortening status (special figure variation game at symbol stop) The status (in the present embodiment, a status indicating a normal gaming state, a probability variation gaming state, or a short game state gaming state) is stored in the RAM 308 as a storage special view fluctuation time shortening status described later.

  In step S1004, the yes or no determination type set in step S804 of the special drawing-related lottery process is acquired, and in the next step S1005, it is determined whether the acquired yes or no determination type is "big hit". As a result of this determination, if the success or failure determination type is "big hit" (step S1005: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010, and if the success or failure determination type is other than "big hit" (step S1005: No), the procedure proceeds to step S1006. The process advances, and the time saving number of the special figure stored in the RAM 308 is updated (one time saving number is subtracted).

  In step S1007, the win determination type set in step S804 of the special drawing related lottery process is acquired, and in the next step S1008, it is determined whether the obtained win determination type is "small hit". As a result of this determination, if the success or failure determination type is "small hit" (step S1008: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010, and if the success or failure determination type is other than "small hit" (step S1008: No), step The process advances to step S1009 to set information indicating the "variation waiting state" in the special view processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 117 (a) is called and executed.

  In step S1010, basic signal information (for a test) indicating a special drawing compliance type or a symbol type is set, and in the next step S1011, the RAM clear of the designated range is executed. Here, the type of success, the number of times of operation of special electric combination, the number of winnings of the special winning opening (variable winning opening 234), the operation pattern of special electric combination, the operating status of special electric combination, the total number of winnings, the flag regarding winning abnormality of the special opening, In addition to clearing the information such as the hit end display timer type, and at the time of a big hit, it further clears the status of easy-to-win prizes and the status of special-purpose chart.

  In step S1012, information indicating "hit start display wait state" is set in the special view processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the hit start wait process shown in FIG. 120 (a) is called and executed. In step S1013, the hit total winning number is set to 0, and in the next step S1014, a transmission request for a sub command (hit start command) is set.

  In step S1015, symbol type information is set, in step S1016 a hit start display timer is set according to the symbol type information set in step S1015, and in step S1017 according to the symbol type information set in step S1015, After setting the other information signal setting type, the special view display finalizing weight process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 120 (a), the hit start weight process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 120 (a) is a flowchart of the hit start wait process executed in the special figure state update process. The hit start wait process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special view process state indicates "hit start display wait state" in step S602 of the special view state update process. .

  In step S1101 of hit start wait processing, it is determined whether or not the hit start display timer set in step S1016 of the special view display confirmed wait process is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0 (the special view display fixed time has elapsed If not (step S1101: YES), the hit start weight processing is ended, and if not (if the special view display determination time has elapsed) (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1102.

  In step S1102, a hit start wait process is ended after executing a special electric power set release process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 120 (b), the special electric power release processing (step S1102) in the hit start weight processing will be described. FIG. 120 (b) is a flowchart of a special electric power open processing (step S1102) in the hit start weight processing.

  In step S1201 of the special electric power officer release process, information indicating the "special electric power special role operating state" is set in the special view processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric wire combination actuation process shown in FIG. 121 is called and executed.

  In step S1202, the value of the winning number of the special winning opening in the RAM 308 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "main control portion winning counter") and the operation status of the special electric combination are cleared, and in the next step S1203, the sub command ( Set the transmission request of the role release command). Thereby, the first secondary control unit 400 can recognize that the round has started. In step S1204, the symbol type information set in step S1015 of the special view display finalizing weight process is acquired, and in the next step S1205, the electric power combination operation pattern data table is set based on the acquired symbol type information. For example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a-1) to FIG. 123 (a-3), the special electric power combination operation pattern data tables are prepared for the number of types of special figures to be a big hit and a small hit. FIG. 123 exemplarily shows only a part of them. In the special command operation pattern data table, special command operation data indicating an open / close pattern of the variable winning opening 234 for each round is stored. As shown in FIG. 123 (b-1) to FIG. 123 (b-3), the special power role operation data is information indicating the open / close state of the variable winning opening 234 (open timer pattern, closed timer pattern) and open state or One or more pieces of timer pattern data consisting of information on the time to maintain the closed state (SEP / CR open / close timer) is stored. As a result, various variations can be given to the opening and closing operation of the variable winning opening 234 in one round.

  For example, in the big hit game at the time of big hit in the special figure A, as shown in FIG. 123 (a-1), in the 1Rth to 15Rth, the special electric charge operation data 1 shown in FIG. 123 (b-1) is referred After the variable winning opening 234 is opened for 29500 ms by the release timer pattern 2, the variable winning opening 234 is controlled to be closed by the closing timer pattern 3 so that the operation is ended.

  Moreover, in the big hit game at the time of big hit in the special figure C, as shown in FIG. 123 (a-2), in the 1Rth to 4Rth eyes, the 6Rth to 8Rth eyes, and the 10Rth to 15Rth, the above-mentioned special power role function While the data 1 is referred to and the operation as described above is performed, in the 5th and 9th eyes, the special service combination operation data 4 shown in FIG. 123 (b-3) is referred to, and the opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening 234 is It is controlled. That is, at the 5th and 9th eyes, the variable winning opening 234 is first opened for 180 ms by the opening timer pattern 1, and then the variable winning opening 234 is maintained closed for only 2820 ms by the closing timer pattern 1 four times After that, the variable winning opening 234 is opened for 17500 ms by the opening timer pattern 3, and thereafter, the variable winning opening 234 is controlled by the closing timer pattern 3 so as to end the operation.

  Moreover, in the big hit game at the time of big hit in the special figure E, as shown in FIG. 123 (a-3), in the 1R to 4R eyes, the above-mentioned operation is performed with reference to the special power combination operation data 1 described above. On the other hand, at the 5th to 15th eyes, the open / close operation of the variable winning opening 234 is controlled with reference to the special electric power comb operation data 2 shown in FIG. 123 (b-2). That is, in the fifth to fifteenth eyes, the variable winning opening 234 is first opened for 180 ms by the opening timer pattern 1, and then the variable winning opening 234 is maintained closed for 2820 ms by the closing timer pattern 1, and then the closing timer pattern 3 controls the variable winning opening 234 to be maintained in the closed state as it is and to end the operation. Note that another closure pattern timer (for example, the closure pattern timer 1 or the like) may be set before the closure pattern timer 3 is set.

  In step S1206, the number of times of operation (number of rounds) of the special electric combination is acquired, and in the next step S1207, the number of times of operation (number of rounds) of the acquired special electric combination is updated. Subsequently, in step S1208, the special power combination operation data corresponding to the number of times of operation (round number) of the special power combination after updating is read out to set the operation pattern of the special power combination. Then, in step S1209, a special electric power control process (details will be described later) is performed, and in the next step S1210, the special electric power combination release process is ended after clearing the winning detection timer of the special electric power combination.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a special electric power set operation process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 121 is a flow chart of a special electric power operating process performed in the special view state update process. This special electric power comb operation processing is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special drawing processing state indicates the “special electric power comb operational state” in step S602 of the special view state update processing.

  In step S1301 of the special electric power winning process, the maximum winning number stored in the RAM 308 is obtained, and in step S1302, the winning number stored in the RAM 308 is obtained. In step S1303, the acquired maximum winning number is compared with the winning number, and it is determined whether the winning number is smaller than the maximum winning number, and if smaller (if the number of winnings <maximum winning number) (step S1303) The processing proceeds to step S1304, and otherwise (if the number of winnings> = the maximum number of winnings) (No at step S1303), the processing proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the special on / off timer corresponding to the on / off timer pattern being executed or the on / off timer pattern set in step S1208 of the on board special processing is larger than 0 (if it is greater If the open / close timer has not elapsed (step S1304: YES), the special electric power combination operation processing is ended, otherwise (if the special electric power combination open / close timer has elapsed) (step S1304: No), step S1305 Go to In step S1305, a special power control control process (details will be described later) is performed, and in the next step S1306, a special power combination open / close timer pattern is acquired, and in the next step S1307, a closed timer pattern of the acquired special power combination open / close timer patterns. It is determined whether the special electric power combination is in operation (whether the closing timer pattern is not set to the information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)) or not.

  As a result of the determination, if the special electric power combination is in operation (when the closing timer pattern is not set to the information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)) (step S1307: Yes), the special electric power combination activation process is ended, When the special power combination is not in operation (when the closing timer pattern is set to the information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)) (step S1307: No), the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, information indicating the "remaining sphere detection state" is set in the special view processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special battery remaining ball detection process shown in FIG. 124 is called and executed.

  In step S1309, the special charge operating interval timer stored in RAM 308 is set, in step S1310, the other information signal transmission determination timer is cleared, and in step S1311, the transmission request for the sub command (big winning opening closing command) Set

  In step S1312, the special service winning combination detection timer stored in the RAM 308 is set. Here, the special electric power winning combination detection timer is a timer for effectively detecting the game ball remaining inside the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234) after closing the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234). It is. In step S1313, the drive signal (big winning opening solenoid signal) for driving the solenoid (332) of the big winning opening (variable winning opening 234) is set to OFF, and the special electric power charging process is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable winning opening 234 changes into the entry difficulty state when there is a passage of the game balls of the maximum winning number to the passing area after entering the entry easy state. It functions as an example of the variable winning means.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, a special electric power person control process (steps S1209 and S1305) executed in the special electric power hand-off process and the special electric power hand-off process will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of a special electric power control process executed in the special electric power hand-off process and the special electric power hand-off process.

  In step S1401, the special power control data stored in the ROM 306 is acquired. Specifically, the control data of the operation pattern to be executed this time is acquired among the operation patterns of the special electric combination to be executed, which is set and the special electric wire operating data is read out and set in step S1208 of the special electric wire release processing. Do. For example, the operation pattern of the special electric combination shown in the special electric combination operation data 1 is set, and if it is the start of the round, “open timer pattern 2 shown in“ (1) ”of FIG. "" Control data will be acquired. Further, after the operation pattern indicated by the control data indicated by “(1)” in FIG. 123 (b-1) is ended, the “closing timer indicated by“ (2) ”in FIG. 123 (b-1) is completed. The control data of “pattern 3” will be acquired.

  Subsequently, in step S1402, open / close information indicating whether to open or close the variable winning opening 234 is acquired based on the acquired control data of the operation pattern of the special electric combination. For example, if the "opening timer pattern", data (opening information) for opening the variable winning opening 234 is obtained, and if the "closing timer pattern", data (closing the variable winning opening 234 (closing) Get information).

  Then, in step S1403, based on the control data of the operation pattern of the special electric combination obtained in step S1401 and the open / close information acquired in step S1402, the open / close timer of the special electric combination is acquired. For example, when the "open timer pattern 2" is acquired and the open / close information is "open information", a 29500 ms open timer is acquired. Also, when “closing timer pattern 1” is acquired and the opening / closing information is “closing information”, a closing timer of 2820 ms is acquired.

  In step S 1404, information indicating acceptance of the special service winning or not allowed state stored in the RAM 308 is set. It is possible to accept that the game ball has passed the ball detection sensor (count switch SW1 of the variable winning opening 234) provided in the variable winning opening when the information indicating that the special electric power winning combination state is acceptable is set. If the information indicating that the game is not accepted is set, the game ball is invalidated even if it passes through the ball detection sensor (count switch SW1) provided in the variable winning opening. In step S1405, special electric power combination signal information (signal for test) is set, and in step S1406, update preparation of the special winning opening solenoid signal is performed. In this process, preparation for driving the special winning opening solenoid is performed, and a drive signal is output in the output management process (step S518) in the timer interrupt process described above. In step S1407, after setting the special power combination open timer or special power combination closing timer of the special power combination open / close timer, the special power combination control process is ended. That is, in this process, the open timer or the close timer acquired in step S1403 is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the special electric power remaining ball detection process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 124 is a flow chart of the special electric power remaining ball detection process executed in the special view state update process. This special electric wire remaining ball detection process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special view processing state indicates the “remaining ball detection state” in step S602 of the special view state update processing. is there.

  In step S1501 of the special battery residual ball detection process, it is determined whether or not the special battery operation interval timer set in step S1309 of the special battery operation process is in operation. If it is not (step S1501: Yes), the processing for detecting the special electric power remaining ball is ended, otherwise (when the special electric power operating interval time has elapsed) (step S1501: No), to step S1502 move on.

  In step S1502, a special electric power combination operation delay timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, and in step S1503, information indicating the special electric power combination operation end state is set in the special view processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special service combination operation end process shown in FIG. 125 is called and executed. That is, it becomes the state of the interval between rounds.

  In step S1504, after the special electric power combination signal information (signal for test) is cleared, the special electric power combination residual ball detection process is ended. Note that a sub-command transmission request (for example, an inter-round interval start command) may be set after clearing the special electric power combination signal information.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the special electric power combination operation end process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart of a special electric power role operation end process executed in the special view state update process. This special electric power role operation end process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special electric power processing state indicates the “special electric power role operation end state” in step S602 of the special figure state update processing. is there.

  In step S1601 of the special service operator operation end process, it is determined whether the special battery operator operation delay timer set in step S1502 of the special electric battery remaining ball detection process is operating or not (step S1601: Yes) , And ends the special service operation termination process, and if not (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, the symbol type information is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol hit / not type is a small hit, and if it is a small hit (step S1602: Yes), corresponds to the small hit in step S1603. After obtaining the hit end display timer, the process proceeds to step S1608. On the other hand, when the special design compliance type is not a small hit (step S1602: No), the process proceeds to step S1604, and a predetermined number of times is set to the number of large winning opening opening maximum stored in the RAM 308. In step S1605, the special winning opening maximum opening frequency is compared with the special electric power officer opening frequency, and it is determined whether the special electric power opening number is less than the special winning opening maximum opening number, that is, whether the hit is not ended. . If the hit has not ended (step S1605: YES), the process proceeds to step S1606 to execute the above-mentioned special power release processing, and the special power termination control process is finished. That is, processing for starting the next round is performed. On the other hand, if the hit has ended (step S1605: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607.

  In step S1607, a hit end display timer corresponding to the symbol type information is acquired, and in step S1608, the hit end display timer acquired in step S1603 or step S1607 is set. In step S1609, information indicating "hit end display wait state" is set in the special view processing state. Accordingly, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the hit end display wait process shown in FIG. 126 is called and executed. In step S1610, after setting the transmission request of the sub command (hit end command), the special electric power comb operation end processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the hit end display weight process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart of a hit end display wait process executed in the special figure state update process. The hit end display wait process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special view process state indicates "hit end display wait state" in step S602 of the special view state update process. is there.

  In step S1701 of the hit end display weight process, it is determined whether or not the hit end display timer set in step S1608 of the special power role operation end process is operating, and if it is operating (step S1701: Yes), The hit end display weight process is ended, and if not (step S1701: NO), the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, the symbol type information stored in the predetermined area of RAM 308 is saved in the stack area, and in step S1703 the basic signal information (for test) is cleared, and in step S1704 the "special variation processing state" Set information indicating "waiting status". As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 117 (a) is called and executed.

  In step S1705 to step S1707, the display symbol data, the symbol type information, and the hit total winning number are cleared. In step S1708, the saved symbol type information is reset, and in step S1709, it is determined whether or not the small hit has ended. If the small hit has ended (step S1709: Yes), the hit end display wait process If it ends and ends other than a small hit (if it ends in a big hit) (step S1709: No), the process proceeds to step S1710.

  In step S1710, setting data (certain variation, short time, hiding probability variation) is acquired after hitting, and in step S1711, data according to setting data after hitting (probable change status (special map probability status status, general drawing probability status status) Time reduction number (special figure fluctuation time shortening fluctuation number, fluctuation time correction fluctuation number, easy winning state fluctuation number), time saving status (special figure fluctuation time shortening status, general drawing fluctuation time shortening status, open extension status), fluctuation time lottery The state (information for determining the fluctuation time lottery table, etc.) is set, and after the hit and finish setting data is cleared, the hit end display weight process is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 functions as an example of game control means capable of executing a big hit game.

  Next, the special view prefetching process in the winning opening winning process of step S508 shown in FIG. 115 will be described.

  FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of special drawing prefetching processing. In the special view look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and determines in advance the stop symbol prior to the success or failure determination process. The figure prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit (see FIGS. 130 (a) to (c)) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 1 and the number of the special view 1 pre-read result stored in the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as 1 pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 1 pre-read result data of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special view 1 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special view 1 pre-read result It is processed so that the order of the data of is advanced one by one. Also, every time the number of special views 1 prefetching increases, data of new special views 1 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of special view 1 prefetch results with the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 2 and the number of special view 2 pre-read results stored in the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area to be stored as a number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 2 pre-read result data of the highest rank is erased every time the number of special view 2 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special figure 2 pre-read result data ranking Are processed one by one. Further, every time the number of special views 2 prefetching increases, data of new special views 2 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of the special views 2 prefetch results of the lowest rank.

  In the special view prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether the start information in the special view 2 is increasing (step S508a). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special view 2 is increased is stored, for example, in the special view 2 pending count stored in the special view 2 pending count storage area and in the special view 2 prefetch count count storage area This is done by comparing with the special figure 2 pre-reading number. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing when the special view 2 hold count is larger than the special view 2 look-ahead count, and the special view 2 hold count is the special view 2 look-ahead count and If equal, it is determined that the start information of Special Figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S508b, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is not increased, the process proceeds to step S508d.

  In step S508b, the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value set) is added to the special figure 2 random value storage area prior to the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. Read ahead from. Then, using the prefetched special view 2 start information, the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 127, and the special symbol symbol determination table shown in FIG. 128, the stop symbol of the special view 2 change game according to the start information It is previously determined prior to the display symbol lottery process S 708 in the special drawing related lottery process shown in 117. Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S508c following step S508b, the stop symbol information as the special view 2 prefetching result obtained by the prior determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S508d.

  In step S508 d, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information in the special view 1 is increasing. As in the case of, for example, the special figure 2, the determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increased is the special figure 1 pending number stored in the special figure 1 pending number storage area This is done by comparing with the special view 1 pre-reading number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S508 e. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is not increased, the special view prefetching process is ended and the main control unit Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S508 e, based on various flags in the RAM 308, it is determined whether or not non-power-up. If it is determined that it is not in the non-power-supply mode, the process proceeds to step S508f, and if it is determined that it is not in the non-power-supply mode (that is, it is in the power-supply mode), Although it is determined in the present example whether or not power is not being supplied, it may be determined whether the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance warning notification are satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance notice and notification include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  At step S508f, the special figure 1 start information (special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value pair) is added to the special figure 1 random value storage area prior to the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. Read ahead from. Then, using the prefetched special view 1 start information, the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 127, and the special symbol symbol determination table shown in FIG. 128, the stop symbol of the special view 1 change game according to the start information It is previously determined prior to the display symbol lottery process S 708 in the special drawing related lottery process shown in 117. Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S508g following step S508f, stop symbol information as the special view 1 prefetching result obtained by the prior determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S508h, without pre-reading the special view 1 start information that has been increased, “not determined” information indicating that the start information is not read ahead is replaced with the stop symbol information and the special view 1 read-ahead result storage in the RAM 308 Store in the first vacant area of the department. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and determined in advance, but all the start information may be pre-read and determined in advance. In addition, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S405), only the pre-reading result of the start information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the special-purpose 1 and special-purpose 2 pre-reading result storage All the pre-read results in the unit may be sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 129, prefetching is always performed for the start information of the special figure 2 that has increased, and prefetching is always performed for the start information of the special figure 1 that has increased, except during power support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to look forward to the start information of the increased special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, for example, whether or not to execute pre-reading notification every holding may be determined by drawing. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not it is in non-power support) etc., when start information is increased, pre-reading is always executed and pre-reading results are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit, and the pre-reading The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to perform the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result.

  FIG. 130 exemplifies a state in which prefetching result information and the like are stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 130 (a) shows an example of a state in which the special view 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 130 (a), the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 1 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 130 (a), “special figure I” (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “pending 1”, and “special figure I as the stopping symbol information in the storage area“ pending 2 ” Is stored, and "special map A" (15R probability variation big hit) is stored in storage area "hold 3" as stop symbol information, and "special figure I as stop symbol information in storage area" hold 4 ". "" Is stored.

  FIG. 130 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special view 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 130 (b), the special view 2 look-ahead result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 2 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. The stop symbol information of the special view 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 130 (b), “special figure f” (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and stop symbols in the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4 Information is not stored. In FIG. 130 (b), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as "none".

  FIG. 130 (c) shows an example of the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit in power support. As shown in FIG. 130 (c), in the storage area "pending 1", "not determined" information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. In the storage areas "pending 2" to "pending 4", neither stop symbol information nor "not determined" information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the propriety determination result and the special map fluctuation time are determined in advance, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and as the prefetch result information in the first sub control unit 400 Can be sent.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 131A is a flowchart of the main process performed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S4001 of FIG. 131 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S4001, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S4003 following step S4001, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4005. . In step S4005, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S4007 following step S4005, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S4009 following step S4007, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S4007, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S4011 following step S4009, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the chance button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S4009 according to the detection result is the effect data according to the operation of the chance button 136 or the operation key unit 137 Perform processing to change to.

  In step S4013 following step S4011, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S4009, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S4015 following step S4013, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 442 or the game stand frame lamp 452 among the effect data read out in the step S4009, the command is applied to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game board It outputs to the lamp drive circuit 450 for the frame.

  In step S4017 following step S4015, movable body control processing is performed. For example, when there is an instruction to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in the step S4009, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S4019 following step S4017, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S4009, the setting to output this control command is performed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S4003.

  FIG. 131B is a flowchart of a first secondary control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process performed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S4031 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 131 (c) is a flowchart of a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of In step S4041 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S4003 of the first secondary control unit main process and the original timer variable storage area is stored Do. Therefore, in step S4003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S4043 following step S4041, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S4019) of the first sub-control unit main process, and update processing of random values for other effects Etc.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 132A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU (not shown) of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S5001 of FIG. 132 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S5001, an initialization process is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S5003 following step S5001, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S5005. . In step S5005, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S5007 following step S5005, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S5009 following step S5007, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S5007, processing such as reading out effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from a ROM (not shown) is performed, and the effect data is updated If it is necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S5011 following step S5009, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is an instruction to the VDP 516 in the effect data read out in the step S5009, this instruction is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process returns to step S5003.

  FIG. 132 (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second secondary control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first secondary control unit 400. In step S5031 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 132C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second secondary control unit 500. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered when the timer interrupt is triggered. Execute in the cycle of In step S5041 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S5003 of the second sub control unit main process and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S5003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S5043 following step S5041, other processing for updating the effect random number is performed.

  FIG. 132 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S5011 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S5051, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S5053 following step S5051, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 516 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S5053: Yes), the process proceeds to step S5055. If not (step S5053: NO), the process waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S5055, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table, the attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S5051, the CPU 504 information of image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.). The VDP 516 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S5057 following step S5055, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

  In step S5059 following step S5057, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S5059: Yes), The process proceeds to step S5061. If not (step S5059: NO), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S5061, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  Next, an example of the configuration of the rendering device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 133 (a) is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the rendering device 206, and FIG. 133 (b) is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the rendering device 206.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a), the front side of the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the decorative member constituting the effect device 206, and a part is not visible. . In addition, a decoration member may be comprised by transparency and the outer peripheral part of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 may also be comprised so that visual recognition is possible. Also, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. The first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, and the general view hold lamp 216 are illustrated. It is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right of the lower part of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left thereof. Hereinafter, a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. In the first UI unit 280, a variation icon display area is provided on the left side, and a pedestal h0s is disposed in the variation icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 can be displayed in a mode in which the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal h0s. When the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed, it is informed that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed. When the symbol determination display is in progress, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed. Further, on the right side of the variation icon h0, a navigation character YM consisting of a character of the lord is displayed. The navigation character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and for example, performs advance notice display or pre-reading notice display by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game. In the second UI unit 281, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In addition, the navigation character YM may not always be displayed, and a specific advance notice or effect using the navigation character YM (for example, advance notice, advance notice in the symbol change display, N suspension of the symbol change display are stored) It may be displayed at the time of the effect etc. displayed at the time, or may be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 133 (a), since four variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, four suspension icons h11, h12, h13 and h14 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 and the four suspension icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-pattern and white display mode), the display mode according to the progress of the game May change. By this, it is possible to perform advance notice display and advance notice display.

  The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure fluctuation game, which is displayed after the suspension is digested and the special figure fluctuation game is started, in other words, an icon related to a symbol fluctuation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More strictly, when the first hold icon with the oldest start winning moves from the hold icon display area to the change icon display area, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon or it is expressed that the change icon moves. Good. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variation icon display area is completed may be referred to as a variation icon. The variation icon is displayed in a display size different from the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may facilitate identification of the change icon and the hold icon, but may be the same size. Also, the change icon may be a display mode associated with the display mode of the hold icon. The fluctuation icon can be notified of the success or failure of the fluctuation according to the display mode (the fluctuation prediction), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the fluctuation is notified. Therefore, the fluctuation icon can be viewed as an icon related to holding, and can also be considered as a kind of holding icon in the sense that notification of the success or failure result of the special figure fluctuation game is held. The erase timing may be a timing before, a same timing, or a timing after the timing at which the success or failure result of the change is notified. The variation icon h0 may not be displayed.

  At the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second decorative symbol (FIG. 5) smaller than the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is displayed stopped. Note that the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and may be displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol Some or all of the symbol combinations (one or two decorative symbols match) may be unmatched. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display (here, "4" and "0") of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.) It is also good. In addition, the second number-of-holds display may display the number of holdings of only one of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 and displays the number of holdings of both the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 It is also good.

  In addition, a background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (normal game state, positive change state, hidden positive change state, short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates the background display corresponding to the mode that can be set by the user, the background display performed as the advance notice or the advance notice in the symbol variation display, and the background display not related to the result of the determination. In addition, the background display may be displayed in a plurality of types in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a positive change state, a hidden positive change state, and a short time state). In this case, it may be changed with a rule (for example, it changes in order like background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A → ... etc. Here, the rule is In the case of collapse, it may be made a notice (premiere notice) of a big hit decision.) The order may be changed randomly.

  In addition, a household crest 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it can be vertically moved or rotated according to the contents of the effect. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 133 (a), the family crest 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest 224E is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an appropriate position. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  In addition, on the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, one of the effect movable bodies, a first large-scale behavior character 224Ga on which the characters of "large" are applied, and a second on which the characters of "panel" are applied A large-scale behavior character item 224 Gb, a third large-scale behavior character item 224 Gc to which the characters “振” are given, and a fourth large-scale behavior character object 224 G d to which the characters “to dance” are given are arranged. Each of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd can be rotated about the center and can be moved toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large-scale behavior character item 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character article 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can be overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. . In addition, light emitting means such as a full color LED is internally incorporated in the first large screen behavior character object 224 Ga to the fourth large screen behavior character article 224 Gd, and light can be emitted in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  Also, above the decorative symbol display device 208, a one-handed box character 224H which is one of the effect movable bodies is disposed, and is configured to be able to move up and down according to the contents of the effect . The one thousand box character article 224H is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can be overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the one-man box product 224H, light emitting means such as a full color LED is built in, and light can be emitted in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  A transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the family crest 224E, the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd, and the one-sided box character 224H, The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body through the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion to emit light in a predetermined pattern in the transmission region. It is configured to be able to look like In the embodiment shown in FIG. 133 (a), the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion that refracts light toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that emits light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Also, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol according to the light emission mode of the LED, for example. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is drive-controlled by the first sub control unit 400. The LED is lit and displayed while the special drawing symbol is stopped, but is blinked or turned off while the special drawing symbol is changing. The preview notice may be made by changing the display mode, the lighting mode or the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. In addition, the fourth symbol may be lighted and displayed during symbol fluctuation, and may be extinguished and displayed while symbol stopping.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b), three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N disposed on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The second decorative symbol display device The length in the width direction of the 208 M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208 L, and the height of the display area is slightly short. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right end side portion overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left end side portion 1) It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are also configured to be able to slide in the vertical direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the rendering operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above does not have to be configured to be able to be all performed, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to In addition, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the rendering operation (that is, they may be fixed). In addition, the rendering operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M may be different from the rendering operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N. For example, the number of rendering operations that can be performed is different. Or, the rendering operation itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can move and rotate in the right direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can move in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured to be able to perform rendering operation. Specifically, while the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs rendering operation, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate, or Only one decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. In addition, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily indicate the decorative symbols in the display devices in a variable manner, and are named for convenience. It should be added here that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol It is also possible to perform variable display of or perform multiple types of effect display. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered by the decorative member constituting the rendering device 206, and a portion thereof can not be viewed. In addition, a decoration member may be comprised by transparency and the outer peripheral part of 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L may also be comprised so that visual recognition is possible. Also, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. The first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, and the general view hold lamp 216 are illustrated. It is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side of the lower part of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. On the left side of the first UI unit 280, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in a mode in which the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal hs0, and notifies that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed. Further, on the right side of the variation icon h0, a navigation character YM consisting of a character of the lord is displayed. In the second UI unit 281, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 133 (b), since four variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, four suspension icons h11, h12, h13 and h14 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In FIG. 133 (b), the variation icon h0 and the four suspension icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-pattern and white display mode), but the game progressed Depending on the display mode may change. By this, it is possible to perform advance notice display and advance notice display.

  In the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". And in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" It is displayed stopped by the combination. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and may be displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol Some or all of the symbol combinations (one or two decorative symbols match) may be unmatched. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. In addition, the second reserved number display may be divided and displayed in different decorative symbol display devices in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.) It may be done. In addition, the second number-of-holds display may display the number of holdings of only one of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 and displays the number of holdings of both the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 It is also good.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability changing state, a hiding probability changing state, a time saving state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates the background display corresponding to the mode that can be set by the user, the background display performed as the advance notice or the advance notice in the symbol variation display, and the background display not related to the result of the determination. In addition, the background display may be displayed in a plurality of types in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a positive change state, a hidden positive change state, and a short time state). In this case, it may be changed with a rule (for example, it changes in order like background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A → ... etc. Here, the rule is In the case of collapse, it may be made a notice (premiere notice) of a big hit decision.) The order may be changed randomly. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be a frameless form. Also, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

  In addition, the above-described family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move or rotate vertically according to the contents of the effect. . In the example shown in FIG. 133 (b), although the family crest 224E is located at the initial position, the initial position of the family crest 224E shown in FIG. 133 (b) is the upper end of the family crest 224E. Although the portion is at a position slightly overlapping the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set at an appropriate position.

  Also, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned one-handed box character 224H is disposed, and can be moved up and down according to the contents of the effect. The one thousand box character article 224H is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps on the front side of these decorative symbol display devices It is made possible.

  The light guide plate IL described above is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device, the family crest 224E and the one-piece box character 224H, and the player can display the display state of each decorative symbol display device via the light guide plate. The action of each effect movable body is made visible.

  Further, in FIG. 133 (b), a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Next, an example of effects using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a) or FIG. 133 (b) will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 134 is a view for explaining an example of an effect that can be applied in the present embodiment.

  FIGS. 134 (A1) to (A2) show the operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a). That is, when the first to fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd and the one-and-two-box character 224H operate from the state shown in FIG. 134 (A1), the embodiment shown in FIG. 134 (A2) is obtained. Specifically, the first large-screen behavior character set 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior graphic object 224 Gd are such that the characters of "large", "panel", "shou", and "mai" are first turned to the front Each rotates and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the one-man box character item 224H is moved from the initial position to a position where it overlaps substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this case, the one thousand box box character object 224H is disposed on the front side of the first large box movement character article 224Ga to the fourth large box movement character article 224Gd, and the first large box movement character article 224Ga to the fourth large box movement box object 224Gd is a one thousand box box product It is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where it is not overlapped with 224H. The one thousand box character article 224H may be configured not to overlap with the front side of the first large board behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character article 224Gd. In addition, the first large-screen behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd may be disposed on the front side of the one thousand box character article 224H and configured to overlap the one thousand box character article 224H.

  In FIG. 134 (B1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a), light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 or various lamps may be lowered to make the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL more visible. .

  FIGS. 134 (C1) to (C4) show the operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a). Here, in the example shown in FIG. 134 (C1) to FIG. (C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as an effect movable body is provided instead of the family crest 224E. The POV display 224I is also referred to as a versa writer, and is movable in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set at an arbitrary position. The POV display 280 has a lift arm and an LED array rotatably mounted on the tip of the lift arm. The raising and lowering arm can perform raising and lowering operations by, for example, a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. In the LED array, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row, and the horizontally extending attitude is the initial attitude of the LED array. The LEDs provided in the LED array may be full color LEDs or single color LEDs. A motor is built in the tip of the lift arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the extension direction. The first sub control unit 400 (or the second sub control unit 500) controls lighting of each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array one by one based on Versa data which is a kind of effect data. Do. By doing this, the light emission aspect of the plurality of LEDs changes while the LED array is rotating, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated on the rotation locus of each LED, and a picture is displayed. Moreover, although POV display 224I is arrange | positioned more front side than the 1st large board behavior character thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior character thing 224Gd and the one-man box goods thing 224H, the anteroposterior relation of these production movable bodies is suitably It can be set.

  FIG. 134 (C1) shows a state where the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial attitude.

  FIG. 134 (C2) shows that the POV display 224I lifts the LED array by the lift arm and the LED array overlaps the front side substantially in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display screen is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the POV display 224I is not in an overlapping state.

  FIG. 134 (C3) shows that the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. The LED array is accelerating its rotation from low speed to high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts to rotate, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. In addition, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbol, and it is considered that they are difficult to visually recognize while the LED array is rotating.

  FIG. 134 (C4) shows that the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the word "heat" is displayed, and a notice display or a prefetch notice display is performed. The image displayed by the POV display 224I is not limited to the one described above, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative pattern, a background image, or the like. In addition, while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I, the light emission luminance of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps is reduced to improve the visibility of the image displayed by the POV display 224I. It is also good. Further, while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be displayed in dark.

  In FIG. 134 (D1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b), light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner Is shown. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the brightness of the backlights and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced, The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made more visible.

  FIGS. 134 (E1) to (E2) show how the family crest 224E is operated in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 134 (E1), the family crest 224E moves from the initial position to a position where it has risen, and overlaps the change icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14, and the navi character YM. The visual recognition is made more difficult than in the case where at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14 and the navigation character YM do not overlap. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134 (E2), the family crest 224E rotates clockwise (CW direction). The family crest 224E may be rotated at the initial position. Also, the household crest 224E may vibrate with or instead of rotation. Also, it is possible to raise only and not to rotate and vibrate. In addition, it is applicable also to the presentation apparatus 206 shown by FIG. 133 (a).

  In FIG. 134 (F1), in the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b), a state is shown in which the one-hundred-box character 224H is operating. Specifically, it is shown that the one-handed box character 224H is moved from the initial position to a position where it overlaps the front side substantially at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 134 (F1), the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the one-hundred box character article 224H, which makes visual recognition more difficult than in the non-overlapped state. In this rendering example, when the one-and-two box character 224H operates, the family crest 224E is not operated so that the two-and-one box character 224H and the family crest 224E do not interfere with each other. In addition, there may be a case where both the one thousand box character article 224H and the family crest article 224E are in operation. In addition, when the one-man box character item 224H operates, a retraction operation may be performed to move the household crest item 224E further downward.

  In FIG. 134 (G1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slide-moved so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The scroll display is done together. That is, in the background image, an area which is not displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide is configured to be visually recognized by sliding. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Thereby, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. It is possible to display the no. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward, or the second decorative symbol display tail device 208M slides upward, The third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, or the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

  In FIG. 134 (H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display A state of being displayed across the device 208N is shown. That is, the left symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The enlarged first decorative symbol may not be displayed across two display devices. For example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. Only the enlarged middle symbol may be displayed, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, the variation icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

  FIGS. 134 (I1) to (I2) show the operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b). Here, in the example shown in FIG. 134 (I1) to FIG. (I2), the POV display 224I described above is provided in place of the family crest 224E. In the timing shown in FIG. 134 (I1), the state where the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial attitude is shown.

  In FIG. 134 (I2), after the POV display 224I is moved from the initial position to a position where the LED array overlaps the front side substantially at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array is rotated and a fixed rotation is performed. It is shown that the speed is reached and the constant speed rotation is performed, and the word "heat" is displayed.

  In FIG. 134 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display is performed. A state in which the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281 is shown. That is, the navigation character YM and the variation icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the holding icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shown to be displayed differently from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIGS. 134 (K1) to (K4) show operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b). In the example shown in FIGS. 134 (K1) to (K4), the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the area is configured to be visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 134 (K1) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are at initial positions.

  FIG. 134 (K2) shows how the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M slide to a position where they approach each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L It is done. At this time, the displays of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are scrolled along with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the slide movement. It is displayed. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are the images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the images of the overlapping portions are matched to the slide movement. By performing the scroll display, it is possible to perform display with a sense of unity by the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As shown in FIG. 134 (K2), the family crest 224E is moved downward from the initial position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 134 (K2 '), the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid without being scrolled. In addition, the family crest 224E may rotate or vibrate at the initial position while the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are being operated. You may vibrate while rotating.

  134 (K3) to (K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in proximity to each other, along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown that it is integrally rotating in the direction (CCW direction). FIG. 134 (K4) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated by 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration are arranged such that the images respectively displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are aligned with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Display is performed in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N rotate in the direction opposite to the rotation direction about the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N. As a result, the player may see that the displayed image is not rotating although the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotating.

  FIG. 134 (L1) shows a modification of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 134 (L1), the sub display device 208S is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S It overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion. In the sub display device 208S, the respective displays in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (pending frame) described above are displayed. That is, in the sub display device 208S, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the right side below the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is walking from the right to the left, but a part is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and the sub It is considered to be more difficult to view than in the case where the display device 208S is not overlapped. In addition, as shown in FIG. 134 (L1 '), a display image (a background image, a character SBH of Sabohani, etc.) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

  FIG. 134 (M1) shows the operation modes of the sub display device 208S and the first large-screen behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior part 224Gd. That is, the sub display device 208S is moved from the initial position to a position on the front side substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to overlap at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. 1 large behavior character objects 224 Ga ~ 4 nd large behavior character objects 224 Gd, after rotating each of the characters of "large", "panel", "振", "mai" to the front, decorative symbol display device 208 The sub display device 208S has moved to a position near the left and right ends of the sub display device 208S that has moved to a position on the front side substantially at the center of the. At this time, cut-in display is performed on the sub display device 208S, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, which shows that a predetermined advance notice effect or a prefetch advance notice effect is performed. ing.

  Next, a specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 138. Here, FIG. 135 is a view showing stepwise an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 136 shows a stage following the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 136 in a step-by-step manner, and FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the effect shown in FIG. .

  In FIG. 135, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special view 1 hold lamp 218, the special view 2 hold lamp 220, the general view hold A lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display 284 are shown. In addition, although it demonstrates by applying the presentation apparatus 206 shown by FIG. 133 (a) below, it is also possible to apply the presentation apparatus 206 shown by FIG. 133 (b). Moreover, below, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the family crest item 224E, the 1st large board behavior character article 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior character article 224Gd, the one-man box character article 224H, and the light-guide plate IL.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image (a background image of a coast) as shown in FIG. 133 (a) is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed. Also, a second number-on-hold display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 4-decorative 1-decorative 7" in accordance with the stop display of the first decorative symbol. In the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 135 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 135 is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the second UI unit 281 displays the reserve icon of the special view 1. In addition, the pending | holding icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in the predetermined area (for example, right end of a display screen) of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 in a non-electric support state.

  The second UI unit 281 displays a holding icon indicating holding of the special view 1. The number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is also indicated by the number of pending icons in Special Figure 1 and the second number of reservations display, in addition to the number of lights in Special Figure 1 suspension lamp 218. In addition to the number of lights of the holding lamp 220, the number of holding icons in the special view 2 and the display of the second number of holdings are also shown. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon whose winning is older.

  In FIG. 135 (1), two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the second UI unit 281, and the reserved icons h11 and h12 of these two special figures 1 are both default display modes. It is displayed in (Round-shaped non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 135 (1), in order to make it easy to understand that four reserved icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the reserved icons which are not actually displayed are indicated by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 135 (1), the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are divided by broken lines to facilitate the description, but the broken lines are not actually displayed.

  On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 135 is in the non-power support state (non-short time state), so it is difficult for the power chute to open and the special figure 2 start opening 232 has difficulty in winning This is because

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon for the special figure that is easy to win is displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 according to the control state (playing state), and the reserve icon for the other special figure is displayed. It is made not to be displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power-supply state, as shown in FIG. 135 (1), the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281, and the hold icon of the special view 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is not displayed. In the non-power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 2 may be displayed, or in the power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is the start of variation on the special view display device → the start of blinking of the fourth symbol or the extinguishment → the start of variation of the second decorative symbol → the movement animation start or deletion of the holding icon → decoration Although it is carried out in the order of the start of fluctuation of the symbols, this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 135 (2), the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon or decoration is performed. There has been no change in the design yet. In addition, the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started simultaneously, or after the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 starts, the variation display of the fourth symbol The symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 may start after the variation display of the fourth symbol starts.

  In FIG. 135 (3), the second number-of-retentions display is updated from 2 to 1, and it is shown that the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. In addition, the update display of the second number-of-holds display and the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol may be simultaneously performed, or the change of the second decorative symbol after the update display of the second number-of-holds display is performed The display may be started, or the update display of the second number-of-holds display may be performed after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 135 (4), the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 is started. In the movement (reduction) animation here, the holding icon (the target holding icon for the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved toward the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon in the first UI unit 280 At the same time as the start, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special view 1 (see the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. 133) . At this stage, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not started.

  In FIG. 135 (5), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 135 (6), the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the pedestal hs0 of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h0. And the hold icon which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, and then the change of the first decorative symbol Display starts. In addition, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, the hold icon which has been the first hold icon h11 may be regarded as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon so far The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the end of the movement animation and the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be started after the movement animation is ended, or The moving animation may end after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  FIG. 135 (7) shows that the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (8), it is shown that the navigation character preview by the navigation character YM is performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character advance notice starts, a balloon in which the character of “good opportunity” is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the expectation to the big hit is high.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (9), it is shown that conversation announcement is started while navigation character announcement is being performed. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. In addition, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped. Further, in the navigation character preview, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of "good opportunity" to the character display of "no", and it is informed that the expectation to the big hit is further increased. In addition, the timing when the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed may be the same as the timing when the display in the balloon is updated to "No", or the display in the balloon after the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed May be updated to "No", or the display of the balloon may be updated to "No", and the conversation image CI1 of the lady may be displayed. In addition, the effect (for example, "no") to be promoted to the notice (for example, "super heat") displayed after the notice (for example, "good opportunity") displayed first may be performed in some cases. . In addition, navigation character notices are not only notices in the symbol variation display, but also pre-reading notices, notices that give notice that a given notice is to be made, and explanation displays (characters that appear in various notices, game states, and pachinko machine 100 effects An explanation of the stage of the effect or the like, also referred to as a tutorial display), etc. may be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the preannouncement of conversation, the conversational image CI1 of the lady is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversational image CI2 of the eyebrow on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the eyebrow character. The operation promotion notification image is an image prompting to press the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT representing the remaining time of the operation valid period It is composed of Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (10), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display according to this is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of a whistle, it is possible for the player to recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol, etc. There is a possibility. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow and the conversation image CI1 of the temple so as not to hide the decorative symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 135 (10), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the other's conversation image CI2, and the Tonosama's conversation is more than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. Further, in the advance notice of the navigation character, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of "no" to the character display of "superheat", and reports that the expectation to the big hit is considerably high. In addition, the display of the balloon overlaps a part of the conversation image CI2 of the user. Note that the timing at which the conversation image CI2 of a whistle is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "superheating", or after the conversation image CI2 of a whistle is displayed, The display may be updated to "superheat", or the dialog image CI2 of a whistle may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "superheat". As described above, in this example of the effect, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. In addition, the conversational image CI1 may not be displayed in a reduced size when the speech advance notice is updated (for example, while the display of the same size as FIG. 135 (9) is displayed), the conversational image CI1 It may be erased. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the previously displayed conversation image, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is this conversation It may be different in size (large or small) from the conversation notice B having a lower expectation of a big hit than the notice A.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (11). The player may be able to view an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the chance button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 135 (11).

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 135 (12) is shown in the display mode when the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (13), It is shown that the person presses the chance button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 135 (12), the advance notice of the navigation character is ended, and the display of the balloon is deleted. When the chance button 136 is pressed within the above-mentioned operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 135 (14), in the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows, the character of "It is intense heat" is displayed instead of the operation promotion notification image. May be Thereby, it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is quite high. In addition, the letter display of the notice such as “It is extremely heat” may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation effective period is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed even if it has elapsed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (15), the state of the first decorative symbol being made easy to recognize is that the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the spear have been erased and the conversation announcement has ended. It is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (16), after “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 135 (17), “right The 7 "stop display is made and the reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to produce an indication that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 135 (17) to FIG. 19 (19), when the reach state is formed, the decoration symbol display device 208 performs animation at the start of reach. In the reach start animation in this presentation example, when the reach state is formed, animation display is performed in which the left symbol and the right symbol are enlarged or reduced. In addition, an appropriate thing can be adopted as a display mode of the animation at the time of reach start. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by viewing this reach start animation.

  When reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 135 (20) to FIG. (21), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are respectively moved and displayed upward and downward, and the first UI unit 280 changes. The frame is out under the display area leaving the icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 (in the example shown in FIG. 135 (20), the hold icon h11) displayed in the second UI unit 281 are also framed out. . In addition, the start of the movement display of the left pattern and the right pattern of the first decorative symbol may be the same timing as the start of the frame out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281, or the first The frame out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started after the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol is started, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 After frame-out display of each image in is started, movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may start.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 135 (22), the first large-screen behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth large-surface behavior character article 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character 224 Ga and the second large-size behavior character 224 Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. In addition, only a part of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd may operate, or all of the first large-scale behavior character 224Gd may be operated, for example The reliability may be made to differ depending on the number of the four large-scale behavior characters 224Gd operating. In addition, there may be a case where the first large-scale behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character objects 224Gd do not operate.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135 (23), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easy-to-see manner. In addition, light emission of light-guide plate IL may not be performed. For example, there may be a case where both the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224 Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed, or the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large screen behavior Only the operation of the character 224Gd may be performed, and light emission of the light guide plate IL may not be performed, or only light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. The movement of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il may not be performed either. Good.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 135 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, as shown in FIG. Return to position. The light emission of the light guide plate IL may be ended after the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd return to their initial positions, or the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to fourth The movement start to the initial position of the four large-screen behavior part 224Gd and the end of the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be simultaneously performed. Here, in FIG. 135 (22) to FIG. (24), a series of effects performed by the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224 Gd and the light guide plate IL is a series of It may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than when the effect is not performed.

  In FIG. 136 (26), it is shown that it has developed into a super reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (26), the image of the sword sword master of the enemy character is displayed large, and in the subsequent decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (27), the battle between the hero of the main character and the sword sword of the enemy character The animation of is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (28), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the button effect is started. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (29), it becomes possible to receive the operation of the chance button 136 by the player.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 136 (30), the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced. After that, the player at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (31) It is shown that the chance button 136 is pressed. When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 136 (32), the cut-in image CI3 of the Tonosama is displayed, and a notice effect of notifying that the big hit reliability is high is performed . The Tonosama's cut-in image CI3 overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the Tonosama's cut-in image CI3 is not displayed. In addition, the cut-in image C13 of the lord may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (33), it is shown that the cut-in image CI3 of the lord has been erased and the animation display of the duel scene is continued.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the second button effect is started after developing into the super reach. ing. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (35), when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts, it becomes possible to receive the operation of the chance button 136 by the player.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 136 (36), it is shown that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (37), the player It is shown that the chance button 136 is pressed. In addition, the operation effective period in the second button production after developing into the super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button rendering after the development into the super reach, and in this case, the development into the super reach The rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the second button effect may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect. In addition, the operation effective period in the first button production after developing into the super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the second button rendering after the development into the super reach, or after developing into the super reach The operation effective period in the first button effect and the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing to the super reach may be the same length.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed within the above operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 136 (38), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image, and The behavior role object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior role object 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left graphic and the right graphic of the effect image and the first decorative design are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224 Gd, respectively, and the first large-scale behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article It is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state by 224 Gd. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. In addition, only a part of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd may operate, or all of the first large-scale behavior character 224Gd may be operated, for example The reliability may be made to differ depending on the number of the four large-scale behavior characters 224Gd operating. Further, the effect shown in FIG. 136 (38) may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed as well. In addition, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd is performed. Also, in the case where both the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd are performed, after the effect image is displayed, the first large-size behavior character article 224Ga to fourth is performed. The operation of the large-screen behavior character item 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operations of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd are started, or the effect image And the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd may be simultaneously started. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the effect display for losing may be performed without performing the effect shown in FIG. 136 (38), and further, the effect display for losing is After being performed, a resurrection effect may be displayed to be displayed as a big hit effect display. When the effect shown in FIG. 136 (38) is started, the displayed variation icon h0 is not displayed, but may be displayed continuously.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 136 (39), the one-handed box character 224H operates and moves downward, and overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character 224Gd. Is shown. Further, thereafter, FIG. 136 (40) shows that light is emitted from the light guide plate IL. The display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-surface behavior character 224 Gd, the operation of the one-man box character 224 H, and the order of starting light emission of the light guide plate IL are limited to those described above. It can be set appropriately. In addition, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-surface behavior character 224Gd, the operation of the one-man box character 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where no parting takes place.

  FIG. 136 (41) shows that the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 136 (42), the one-hundred box character article 224H starts rising toward the initial position. Thereafter, in FIG. 136 (43), the effect image is faded out, and then, as shown in FIG. 136 (44), the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-pattern behavior character 224 Gd move toward the initial position. Have started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is resumed while being faded in. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues to FIG. 136 (46). In FIG. 136 (46), the protagonist's lord wins over the swordsman of the enemy role, and in FIG. 136 (47), “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (48), the animation display of the duel scene is faded out, and as shown in FIG. 137 (49), the first decorative symbol is "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7". Shake fluctuation is started by the combination of the decoration pattern of. In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The background here may be non-display, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, although the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 are not displayed, the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 may be displayed. In addition, although display of the navigation character YM is not performed, display of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Thereafter, the first special view display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special view A at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (50). At the timing shown in FIG. 137 (50), the first special view display device 212 is stopped and displayed, but the first sub control unit 400 does not receive the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol is determined to be stopped, the swing fluctuation continues in the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still in the variable display.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 137 (51), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are respectively "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" decoration The stop display is performed in combination of the symbols, and in the fourth symbol display device 284, display is performed in a mode that the symbols have stopped.

  After that, when the big hit game starts and the prize production start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, as shown in FIG. Display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7", "special bonus" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game It is informed to the person that it is 15R probability variation big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (52), mini-right-handed display instructing right-handed is performed at the upper left corner of the display area. The mini right display may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (53), a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to hit the right is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 137 (54), the first round is started. When the first round is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a round effect display is performed, and the display of "decorative 7" showing the combination of the decorative symbols when the big hit occurs in the lower right corner of the display screen is It has been done. In the upper left corner of the display screen, mini-right-handed display is performed, and in the upper right corner, display of “1R”, which is the current round, is performed. The number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game or the total number of prize balls acquired during the series may be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 137 (55), in the decorative symbol display device 208, round effect display is performed and in the upper right corner of the display area, Display of "15R" which is the current round is performed.

  FIG. 137 (56) shows that the big hit game is over and the big hit end effect display is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Since this big hit game is a big hit game that has been started as a 15R certainty big hit, after the big hit game is over, the gaming state becomes a special figure high probability regular drawing high probability state (with power support). Therefore, in the big hit end effect display, the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush" indicating that is performed, and it is informed that the power supply support is shifted to the definite change state.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (57), a display (alert display) is displayed to call attention to the forgetting of the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 111). In addition, this alerting display may be displayed only when the big hit game in the first big hit that became a big hit in the gaming state which is not in power support is finished, regardless of the situation where the big hit has become a big hit It may be displayed whenever the game is over.

  FIG. 137 (58) shows a state before the first variation display of symbols is started after the big hit game is over and the power support is changed to the definite change state. In the support variable probability state, the background image is a background image for the power support probability state, and the decoration pattern is also a display mode different from the normal gaming state (special figure low probability general view low probability state) . Further, a reserved icon display area 282 of Special Figure 2 is formed at the lower center of the display screen, and the number of reserved special views 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 2 is a rectangular non-patterned and white display mode, and the reserve mode (shape in this case) is different from the reserve icon of the special view 1. It is possible to make a decision at first glance. In addition, the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 1 and the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 2 may be the same. In FIG. 137 (58) to FIG. (63), in order to make it easy to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special view 2, the hold is not actually displayed. The icon is shown in dashed lines. Also, in FIG. 137 (58) to FIG. (63), the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is divided and shown by a broken line for ease of explanation, but this broken line is actually displayed I will not. Also, in the case of the power supply-added definite variation state, although the reserve icon of the special view 1 is not displayed, it may be displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (58), a mini-right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a character of "bonus x ○" indicating the number of consecutive loafings is displayed below it. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 137 (58), since the first-time big hit game is over, “bonus × 1” indicating that is displayed.

  Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (60) instructs the player to hit the right. A right-hand notice is displayed. The right-handed notification is displayed in a mode in which the characters "Please hit right" are displayed on the semi-transparent band image. The right-handed notification overlaps the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapping state. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the power support state where the first big hit game ended and shifted, but may also be displayed in the power support state where big hit games other than the first big hit game ended and shifted For example, it may be displayed each time the jackpot game is over and it shifts to the power support state. Moreover, after shifting to the power support state, the right-handed notification may be displayed also when it is detected that the player is hitting the left, for example, it is detected that the first special view starting port 230 has won a prize. In this case, it may be determined that a left hit has been made and a right hit notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (60), the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (61), it is shown that variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-hand notice is displayed, the right-hand notice is not displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (62). In addition, the mini-right-handed display is performed continuously.

  In FIG. 137 (63), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 has been suspended by four. That is, in the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220, all the four lamps are turned on to indicate that the special figure 2 has four reserves, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserve icon h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 Four are displayed. Moreover, also in the second number-of-holds display, a display of “4” is performed, which indicates that the number of holdings in the special view 2 is four.

  FIG. 138 (49a) shows another example of presentation following FIG. 136 (48). In FIGS. 135 to 136, the case has been described where the "decorative 7" is in the reach state and the "decorative 7" is displayed in the middle pattern, but here, the "decorative 6" is in the reach state The case in which "decoration 6" is displayed on the design will be described. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (49a), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is fluctuating with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6". In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The background here may be non-display, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, although the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 are not displayed, the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 may be displayed. In addition, although display of the navigation character YM is not performed, display of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Thereafter, the first special view display device 212 is displayed in the special view B display mode at the timing shown in FIG. 138 (50a). In the timing shown in FIG. 138 (50a), since the first sub control unit 400 has not received the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300, it is not determined to be the symbol determination stop, so The first decorative symbol continues to shake and fluctuation is still displayed on the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 138 (51a), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are respectively "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" The stop display is performed in combination of the symbols, and in the fourth symbol display device 284, display is performed in a mode that the symbols have stopped. By looking at this, the player may be able to recognize that it has become a big hit of either a substantial 5R probability big hit, a 5R normal big hit, or a 2R normal big hit.

  After that, when the big hit game starts, and the prize production start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 138 (52a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit start production Display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit with the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", "bonus" is displayed in the decoration symbol display device 208, and the player In fact, it is reported that it is either 5R certainty big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (52a), the mini-right-handed display is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 138 (38 b) shows another example of effect following FIG. 136 (37). FIG. 138 (38b) shows that the chance button 136 has been pressed within the operation effective period, but the result of losing is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is informed that it will be lost. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out, and the animation display of the duel scene is resumed. Here, the main character of the hero is defeated by the enemy character swordsman, and then the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 137 (40b), the fluctuation icon h0, the second reserved number display and the second decorative symbol are displayed. It will be left hidden.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (41 b) to FIG. 42 (42 b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (hold frame) scroll in from below the display area, and the hold icon And the navigation character YM are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol starts with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”. In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 138 (43b), the first special view display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special view I. In the timing shown in FIG. 138 (43b), the first sub control unit 400 has not received the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300, so it is not determined to be the symbol determination stop. The first decorative symbol is continuously subjected to the swing fluctuation, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still in a variable display.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 138 (44b), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are respectively "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" The stop display is performed in combination of the symbols, and in the fourth symbol display device 284, display is performed in a mode that the symbols have stopped.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (45b), the display of the variation icon erasing animation is performed. In the fluctuation icon erasing animation display, the fluctuation icon h0 gradually becomes smaller, and finally, as shown in FIG. 138 (46b), an animation display in which the fluctuation icon h0 disappears is performed. Note that the variation icon deletion animation may be started before the special drawing is stopped.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, various customizations can be performed.

  FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the contents of customization that can be performed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, if the symbol variation display is not started even if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the symbol variation display is stopped, the decorative symbol display device 208 transitions to the demonstration mode. It becomes a demonstration screen. Note that the combination of stop symbols of the decorative symbol continues to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the transition to the demonstration mode after the symbol variation display of the special drawing is stopped and the operation means such as the chance button 136 etc. When operated, a dedicated animation may be displayed. In the demo screen, a dedicated animation is displayed, or in the case of the combination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (if the decorative symbol is composed of an image such as a character and a character image (including numbers), the image such as a character Only the character image may be displayed, or the character image may be hidden, or both an image such as a character and a character image may be displayed, or a movie including a model title In addition to displaying a presentation introduction movie in which a high-level notice or a high expected reach is introduced, a menu icon, a volume adjustment icon, and a brightness adjustment icon may be displayed. . In addition, the state in which the combination of the stop display of a decorative symbol was displayed may be included in demonstration mode.

  When the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 108 is operated with the menu icon, the volume adjustment icon, and the brightness adjustment icon displayed, an option menu is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, by operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 108, a volume adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is possible to increase or decrease the volume of the speaker 120 shown in FIG. Furthermore, by operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137, the brightness adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game board lamp 442 and / or the game stand frame lamp 452 shown in FIG. The light amount of the LED can be increased or decreased. Here, the game board lamp 442 may or may not include the light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 133 and the like. When the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 are operated in the state where the volume adjustment window is displayed, the brightness adjustment window is displayed, and conversely, while the brightness adjustment window is displayed, the operation key unit 137 By operating the left and right keys, the volume control window is displayed.

  Although the details will be described later, in the option menu, an icon for “return to demo screen” is prepared, and when the cursor is placed on this icon, the chance button 136 is operated to return to the demo screen. be able to. Further, when the symbol variation display of the special view is started, the option menu is automatically ended, and the variation display of the decoration symbol is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208. Furthermore, if the operation is not performed for a certain period (for example, one minute) with the option menu displayed, the screen automatically returns to the demo screen.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137, the volume is determined, and the demo screen is returned from the volume adjustment window, and the chance button 136 is operated after operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137. When the button is pressed, the light amount is determined, and the brightness adjustment window returns to the demonstration screen. Furthermore, even if the chance button 136 is not pressed, the screen automatically returns to the demo screen after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after operation of the left and right keys or the up and down keys. In addition, when the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, the volume adjustment window and the brightness adjustment window disappear automatically, and the variation display of the decoration symbol is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208 here.

  FIG. 139 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the option menu.

  In the option menu, it is possible to roughly divide and perform "effect customization", "character selection", "holding frame selection", "holding display selection", and "background display selection".

  In the “auto button mode” of “representation customization”, even if the operation means such as the chance button 136 is not operated, the same response effect as when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated may be performed. It is a mode. In addition, ON / OFF described in the "option" of FIG. 139 (b) means setting / non-setting or valid / invalid. "Long press auto repeat" means that the press of the operation button such as the chance button 136 etc. is repeated at high speed only while long press is being performed (the press is repeated). ) A function that performs the same response effects as at time, and can select the speed of continuous hitting. The "group notice" is a type of normal notice (prediction of the change), and in this option menu, the player can select the reliability (expected degree) of the big hit of the group notice. For example, there is a possibility that the fluctuation in which the group notice is displayed becomes a big hit is 100% reliability! ? If you want to increase the frequency with which group notices appear as a notice of the change, set the reliability to 50%, and if the frequency with which group notices appear as a notice of the change is set to a confidence of 50% Even if it is low, you want 100% confidence if you want it to be displayed as a warning of a big hit (big hit confirmed)! ? Set to "Push sound notice" is a type of pre-reading notice when a prize is increased at the special drawing start opening and the hold increases. Note that the winning sound advance notice may be a notice of the change. The back button means that the operation valid period of the operation means such as the chance button 136 or the like is started and / or that it is not during the operation valid period of the operation means but “the back button When "Navi" is turned ON (setting), for example, the chance button lamp 138 lights up during the operation effective period of the operation means, or a character display such as "you may operate the operation means" is displayed. Will be "No advance notice" is not performed for all advance notices other than the advance notice by the display mode of the hold icon (for example, advance notice by the moving means (production movable body or read advance notice other than the hold icon by the display means) Setting corresponding to “ON”. "Premier up" is a setting to increase the appearance frequency of the jackpot rich or jackpot finalization effect (corresponding to "ON"). “No hold change” is a setting for not giving advance notice (by “ON”) according to the display mode of the hold icon. "One-shot notification" is a specific notice about big hit richness or big hit determination (for example, production operation by the production movable body, big hit thick (big hit confirmation) sound by sound output means, frame or game board The announcement by the lighting production by some or all decoration LED is mentioned.).

  In the present specification, “big hit finalization” refers to a symbol variation in which a big hit finalization notice is displayed or a symbol variation of a prefetch target hold when the big hit finalization notice and / or pre-reading advance notice is displayed. It is indicated that when the pre-reading notice of the big hit determination is displayed, the change or the pre-reading target reserve will always be a big hit (the same applies to the following description).

  Moreover, "big hit rich" in this specification refers to a state in which the expectation to the big hit is high, and even if the notice and / or the advance notice of the big hit are displayed, the big hit rich notice is displayed. It indicates that even if the big pre-read notice of the big hit is displayed for the symbol change of the symbol change or the symbol change of the pre-reading object hold, it may become a loss (the same also in the following explanation). Also, the jackpot rich may indicate that the jackpot is finalized (the same applies to the following description).

  Furthermore, the description "hot" in the present specification is also a state of high expectation to the big hit, but even if the notice of the hot and / or the prefetch notice is displayed, the symbol variation showing the hot notice is displayed. Or, it has been shown that even if a hot pre-reading notice is displayed for the symbol change of pre-reading target retention, it may become a loss (the same also in the following explanation). In addition, "hot" may indicate that the expectation of the big hit is lower than that of the big hit, and "superheat" may indicate that the big hit or the big hit is determined (the explanation below) The same is true for

  In addition, “Daitomo” described in FIG. 139 (b) is a member service that performs member registration and accesses to a web server through the Internet line, and the level (lv) is obtained by accumulating experience values. Is a service where you can gain various benefits according to your level. When executing the member service of "Daitomo", the pachinko machine 100 is set to the user mode. Some of the pachinko machines 100 have specifications that do not correspond to the member service of "Daitomo". For models with specifications that support the member service of "Daitomo", if the user mode is set and the level of the Daitomo reaches 15 levels, the back button navigation setting is released as a type of effect customization. Also, in FIG. 139 (b), the item described as “Deat Tomo setting” is released only by performing member registration and setting to the user mode. Therefore, even if the level is 0 when joining Daitomo, it is possible to use the holding frame B, for example, in the case of holding frame selection only by setting the user mode. Here, the holding frame corresponds to a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 shown in FIG. Note that “initial setting” means that the user mode is automatically selected when the user mode is not set. In addition, “Daitomo” can experience joining as a member before formal membership registration, and for the joining experiencer, a decoy character can be used in the character selection as a trial play.

  Moreover, there is an item which can not be selected unless the level of the Daitomo is raised as one of the above-mentioned privileges of the Daitomo. That is, among the items "character selection", "holding frame selection", "holding display selection", and "background display selection", the item for which the level of the Dytomo is displayed in the "opening condition" is the displayed level. It is an item that can be selected only after reaching (lv).

  FIG. 140 is a transition diagram of the option menu screen in the state where the member service is not used.

  By operating the upper key or the lower key of the operation key unit 137, the cursor moves up and down on the option menu screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Of the items "customize effect", "character selection", "hold frame selection", "hold display selection", "background display selection", "initialization" and "return to demo screen" The cursor is moved by operating the up key or the down key of the operation key unit 137, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor was displayed is displayed. That is, when the cursor is placed on the item of “production customization” and the chance button 136 is pressed, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the option menu screen is switched to the presentation customization screen. In addition, when the cursor is placed on the item of “return to demo screen” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the demo screen.

  On the other hand, the "return" icon is displayed on each of the "effect customization screen", "character selection screen", "pending frame selection screen", "pending display selection screen", "background display selection screen", and "initialization confirmation screen". Is displayed, and if the user places the cursor on the "Return" icon and presses the chance button 136, the user can return to the option menu screen. In addition, even if the cursor is not placed on the "RETURN" icon, even if the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 is pressed, the screen may return to the option menu screen.

  In addition, although it is not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize in special drawing starting port 212, 214 and symbol variation display of special drawing is started, even if it is an option menu screen, “effect customization screen” Even in the case of the "character selection screen", the "pending frame selection screen", the "pending display selection screen", the "background display selection screen", and the "initialization confirmation screen", the display shifts to the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  Subsequently, the matters described with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140 will be specifically described using a display example in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 141 is a diagram showing an example of calling an option menu screen, a volume adjustment window, and a brightness adjustment window from the demonstration screen. The example described here is an example for the pachinko machine 100 of the specification that does not correspond to the member service of "Daitomo", the open condition in FIG. 139 (b) is ignored, and any item is selected from the beginning It is possible. In the following embodiments, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an icon indicating the appearance of the cross key (for up key, down key, left key, right key) of the operation key unit and an icon indicating the appearance of the chance button. In this case, the colorless and non-patterned icon indicates the operation means which can not be operated, and the icon displayed in the other mode (colored or / and with the pattern) indicates the operable operation means.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (1), a holding frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Moreover, the combination ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") of the loss of the decoration design is displayed also to the 1st decoration design (the 3rd design) and the 2nd decoration design (the 5th design) The symbol variation display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second number-of-holds display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reservations of the special figure 1 and the number of special views of the special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no suspension, and symbol variation display is not started after the finalized display of the stop symbol of the special drawing is performed. In this state, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the luminance adjustment icon BI shown in FIG. 141 (1) is started. In addition, even before a certain time has passed, the finalized display period of the stop symbol of the special figure ends, and the next symbol fluctuation display is not started (for example, the decision of the special symbol stop figure in the state without suspension) If it is immediately after the display period has elapsed, these icons MI, VI, and BI may be displayed by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 or the cross key of the operation unit). In addition to the condition that a certain fixed period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the finalized display period of the stop figure of the special drawing is over, these icons MI, VI, BI may be displayed Good. Alternatively, even if the display of these icons MI, VI, and BI is started, the option menu screen or the volume adjustment is made even if the chance button 136 and the cross key of the operation key unit 137 are operated for a fixed period (for example, 3 seconds) The window or the brightness adjustment window may not be displayed.

  Further, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI may include a display (text display or image display) of the content being customized. For example, if it is the menu icon MI, character display or icon display for effect customization, if it is the volume control icon VI, display of a gauge showing the level of volume, if it is the brightness adjustment icon BI, display of the gauge showing the level of light amount It may be included. Furthermore, the menu icon MI may include the display of major items shown in FIG. 139 (b) (for example, “character selection” etc.), but is not included as shown in FIG. 141 (1). It is also good.

  In FIG. 141 (2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit is operated. The same applies to the operation of the upper key 137u. Although the cross key lights in white when no operation is performed, the pressed key changes to red light, but the cross lamp may not have the decoration lamp.

  As the lower key 137d is operated, the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (3). The brightness adjustment window BW is displayed larger than the brightness adjustment icon BI, and the menu icon MI disappears and the volume adjustment icon VI shifts to the position of the menu icon MI in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (3). Thus, a brightness adjustment window BW about four times as large as the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, it is possible to adjust the light quantity of the LED such as the game board lamp 442 and / or the game stand frame lamp 45 in five stages, and the initial value is the brightest 5 levels.

  In FIG. 141 (4), the lower key 137d is operated again, and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 141 (6), the upper key 137u of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 141 (7), the level is raised by one step and returned to 5 levels. Even if the upper key 137u is operated in the state of five levels, the light amount does not increase any more. Further, even if the down key 137d is operated in the state of one level, the light amount does not decrease any further. Also, if no operation is performed for a fixed period (for example, 10 seconds), the screen returns to the demonstration screen on which the three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed, but if the up key 137d or the down key 137u is operated, The count start can be updated. That is, the period until returning to the demo screen can be extended. It may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At this zero level, the LED will remain off.

  In FIG. 141 (8), the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated. The same is true even if the left key 137l is operated.

  By operating the right key, a volume adjustment window VW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (9). The volume adjustment window VW is a display larger than the volume adjustment icon VI. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (9), the volume adjustment window VW is on the side of the menu icon MI and about four times the volume adjustment icon VI. The menu icon MI is removed and the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, the volume from the speaker 120 can be adjusted in five steps, and the initial value is three levels of middle volume.

  In FIG. 141 (10), the right key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again, and the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. Note that even if the right key is operated in the state of the five loudest sounds, the volume does not rise any further. Also, in the state of one level, even if the left key is operated, the volume does not decrease further. Also, if you do not operate for a fixed period (for example, 10 seconds), you will return to the demo screen with the three icons MI, VI, and BI displayed, but if you operate the left key or the right key, The period can be extended. It may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At this zero level, the speaker 120 will remain muted.

  Since a certain period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the last operation, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (13) displays three icons MI, VI, and BI on the demonstration screen. I'm back.

  In FIG. 141 (14), when the chance button 136 is operated and the chance button 136 is operated, an option menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (15). Although the chance button 136 emits light in red when the built-in chance button lamp 138 is pressed, the chance button 136 may be lighted in red before being pressed. In this option menu screen, the background display, the holding frame UI, the navigation character YM, the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol) all disappear, and under the character display of "menu" In order from top to bottom in a row, there are seven types of icons such as presentation customization icon, character selection icon, holding frame selection icon, hold display selection icon, background display selection icon, initialization icon, and return icon for returning to the demo screen It is displayed. A cursor icon cs that can be moved up and down with the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 141 (14), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the other icons are displayed in white, whereas the effect customization icon is red. Further, in the option menu screen, a picture of operation means that can be used for a selection operation or a determination operation is displayed at the lower right. That is, in the operation key unit 137, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. Furthermore, among the chance button 136 and the cross key, the cursor icon cs and the patterns of the up and down keys 137 u and d used for moving the cursor display are displayed in red. Note that for the determination operation, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

  Here, although the option menu screen is not displayed, it may be displayed even if the chance button 136 is operated during brightness adjustment or volume adjustment as shown in FIG. 141 (2) to FIG. 141 (12). . In addition, the initial position of the cursor icon cs at the start of displaying the option menu screen may be the top effect customization icon, may be a back icon, or may be another icon. Alternatively, it may be an icon of an item currently being customized.

  In FIG. 141 (16), with the cursor icon cs displayed on the effect customization icon, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 141 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect customization screen. Is displayed. A five-line list is displayed on the effect customization screen, and the list shows five lines from the top of the display of the small items in the effect customization shown in FIG. 139 (b) (“01 auto button mode” to “05 back "Button navigation" and each option (for example, "OFF ON" etc.) are displayed. That is, one item is displayed for one line of the five-line list. Furthermore, below that, a confirmation icon for saving the setting change, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, and an initialization icon for collectively returning the settings to the initial value are arranged in a row from the left side sequentially ing. Also, in the effect customization screen, cursor display is used instead of the cursor icon. The initial position of the cursor display at the start of the effect customization screen display is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen. The back icon in which the cursor display is displayed is highlighted in a frame and further displayed in red. Further, among the displayed options, options currently set are also displayed in red. For example, in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 (17), the auto button mode is not set (OFF). Furthermore, the pattern of the cross key used for the selection operation and the pattern of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed on the lower right of the effect customization screen. In the effect customization screen, the patterns of all the keys 137u, d, l, r of the cross key are displayed in red.

  In FIG. 141 (18), the down key 137 d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item of the auto button mode. That is, in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 (19), the frame of the item of the auto button mode is highlighted, and further, the balloon display is added, and the explanation of the auto button mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 141 (20), the right key 137r is operated in a state where the cursor display is displayed in the item of the auto button mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 141 (21), the currently set option in the auto button mode changes to ON. That is, it was switched from OFF to ON. When the left key 1371 is operated in a state where the currently set option is OFF, the key operation is invalidated, but the same result may be obtained as when the right key 137r is operated.

  In FIG. 141 (22), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to an item (long press auto continuous hit) one item below the auto button mode. That is, in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 (23), the frame of the item of the long press auto consecutive hit is highlighted, and further, the balloon display is added, and the explanation about this item is displayed. When the up key 137u is operated instead of the down key 137d, the cursor display moves to the confirmation icon when the setting is changed, and moves to the back icon when the setting is not changed. However, even if there is no setting change, it may move to the confirmation icon, or may move to the back icon.

  Thereafter, the lower key 137d is operated three times, and the cursor display moves to the item of the bottom back button navigation. That is, in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 (25), the frame of the item of the back button navigation is highlighted, and further, the balloon display is added, and the explanation regarding this item is displayed.

  In FIG. 141 (26), the lower key 137d is operated one more time, and as shown in FIG. 141 (27), the 5-line list is updated, and in FIG. 139 (b), the auto is 01. The item of the button mode disappears, and instead, the cursor display moves to the newly added item without prefetching notice which was 06 in FIG. 139 (b).

  In FIG. 141 (28), the lower key 137d continues to be operated.

  FIG. 142 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  The list is updated according to the operation of the down key 137d, and on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 142 (29) following FIG. 141 (28), the last small item of the effect customization in FIG. 139 (b) is 09 The cursor is moved to the item of one-shot notification.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (30), when the lower key 137d is operated once more, as shown in FIG. 142 (31), the cursor display moves to the confirmation icon, and the confirmation icon has a frame highlighted. Furthermore, it is displayed in red.

  In FIG. 142 (32a), the chance button 136 is operated as the determination operation, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 142 (33a), the notification screen notifying that setting of effect customization is superimposed on the effect customization screen from the front side Is displayed. Note that a confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting for effect customization is updated may be displayed. In the notification screen shown in FIG. 142 (33a), a return icon for returning to the option menu screen is displayed, and the cursor display is displayed on the icon.

  In FIG. 142 (34), the chance button 136 is operated, and as shown in FIG. 142 (35), the screen returns to the option menu screen.

  Note that the return icon in the notification screen shown in FIG. 142 (33a) may be an icon for returning to the effect customization screen, and by operating the return icon arranged on the effect customization screen, the option menu screen is displayed. It may be possible to return.

  After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again in the state where the option menu screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 142 (36) (see FIG. 37 (37)), FIG. As shown in), the cursor icon cs displayed so far in the effect customization icon moves down by one, and this time the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the character selection icon, and the character selection icon is red. Lights up.

  142 (39), with the cursor icon cs displayed on the character selection icon, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 142 (40), the character selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. A five-line list is also displayed on the character selection screen, and the list shows five options ("01 Yoshimune" to "05 Hani") from the top of the display of the options in the character selection shown in FIG. It is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for one line of the five-line list. In FIG. 142 (40), the cursor display is displayed in the item of Yoshimune, and on the left side of the character selection screen, the pattern of the character of the item for which the cursor display is displayed (here, the pattern of Yoshimune) is previewed. It is done. As shown in 73 (b), although the initial setting of character selection is Yoshimune, this initial setting itself may be eliminated. In the lower right corner of the character selection screen, there is a back icon for returning to the option menu screen, a pattern of a cross key (red for up and down keys 137u and d only) used for the selection operation, and a red chance for the determination operation. The pattern of the button 136 is also displayed.

  The character set by the character selection here is to be displayed at all times, to always appear at the time of presentation, or to appear more frequently than other characters.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (41), when the lower key 137d is operated once, the cursor display moves to the side of the item below the one of Yoshimune, as shown in FIG. 142 (42). The picture is previewed.

  In FIG. 142 (43), the lower key 137d is operated five more times, the list is updated in accordance with the operation of the lower key 137d, and in the character selection screen shown in FIG. 142 (44), FIG. The cursor is moved to the 07 copanda item of the final choice of the character selection.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (45), when the down key 137d is operated one more time, as shown in FIG. 142 (46), the cursor display moves to the back icon, and the back icon has a frame highlighted. Furthermore, it is displayed in red.

  Here, when the down key 137d is operated only once instead of the chance button 136 (FIG. 142 (47)), the list is updated, and as shown in FIG. 142 (48), the Yoshimune of 01 is Returning to the first list at the top, the cursor display is moved to that Yoshimune item. Then, in FIG. 142 (49), the chance button 136 is operated. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 142 (50), animation display indicating determination of a character is performed in the area where preview display has been performed. Although a confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting of the character is updated may be displayed, in this example, an animation display indicating that the character is determined is displayed. When finished, the setting of the selected character is automatically updated, and as shown in FIG. 142 (51), the screen returns to the option menu screen.

  Even if the animation display showing that the character is determined is ended, the character selection screen remains as it is, and it is possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the character selection screen. Good.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated again (see FIG. 142 (52)) while the option menu screen is displayed, characters are displayed as shown in FIG. 142 (53). The cursor icon cs displayed in the selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the holding frame selection icon, and the holding frame selection icon lights in red.

  In FIG. 142 (54), with the cursor icon cs displayed on the holding frame selection icon, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 142 (55), the decoration symbol display device 208 holds the holding frame. The selection screen is displayed. A five-line list is also displayed on the holding frame selection screen, and the list displays five options from the top of the options displayed in the holding frame selection shown in FIG. 139 (b) (“01 holding frame A” to “05 The holding space E ") is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for one line of the five-line list. In FIG. 142 (55), the cursor display is displayed in the item of the holding frame A, and in the window on the left side of the holding frame selection screen, the holding frame of the item for which the cursor display is displayed is the holding icon and the change icon It is displayed with a preview. In addition, as shown in 73 (b), the initial setting of the holding frame selection is the holding frame A, but this initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated holding that can not be selected here You may prepare a frame. In the lower right of the holding frame selection screen, a back icon for returning to the option menu screen, a pattern of a cross key used for selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and a red used for determination operation The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

  The holding frame set by the holding frame selection here is displayed as a first UI unit 280 and a second UI unit 281 in the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 142 (56), the lower key 137d is operated once.

  FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (57) in response to one operation of the lower key 137d shown in FIG. 142 (55) continued from FIG. 142 (55), the cursor display is one of the holding frame A The item is moved to the holding frame B of the next lower item, and the holding frame B is previewed in the left window.

  In FIG. 143 (58), the determination operation by the chance button 136 is performed. In the holding frame selection screen shown in FIG. 143 (59), when the effect display Ed1 occurs so as to surround the left window in which the preview display is performed, and the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected holding frame is updated. Is automatically performed, and returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 143 (60). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting of the holding frame is to be updated may be displayed. In addition, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the holding frame selection screen remains, and it may be possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the holding frame selection screen.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated again (see FIG. 143 (61)) while the option menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 143 (62), it is held until then. The cursor icon cs displayed in the frame selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the hold display selection icon, and the hold display selection icon lights in red. In this state, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 143 (63), a hold display selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A five-line list is also displayed on the hold display selection screen, and the list displays five options from the top of the display of the options in the hold display selection shown in FIG. 139 (b) (“01 Icon A” to “05 Icon E ") is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for one line of the five-line list. In FIG. 143 (63), the cursor display is displayed in the item of the icon A, and in the window on the left side of the hold display selection screen, the icon of the item for which the cursor display is displayed is previewed with the holding frame There is. In addition, as shown in 73 (b), although the initial setting of the hold display selection is the icon A, this initial setting itself may be eliminated or a dedicated icon which can not be selected here may be used. You may prepare. In the lower right of the hold display selection screen, a back icon for returning to the option menu screen, a pattern of a cross key used for selection operation (only up and down keys 137u and d are red), and a red used for determination operation The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

  The icons set in the hold display selection here are displayed as the hold icons h1 to h4 or the fluctuation icon h0 in the hold frame UI.

  Thereafter, the down key 137d is operated twice, the cursor display moves to the icon C, and the icon C is previewed in the left window. In this state, the determination operation by the chance button 136 is performed, and on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 143 (65), the effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window in which the preview display is performed is generated again. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected icon is automatically updated, and as shown in FIG. 143 (66), the screen returns to the option menu screen. A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting of the icon is updated may be displayed. In addition, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the on-hold display selection screen remains, and it is possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the on-hold display selection screen.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 143 (67)), as shown in FIG. 143 (68), it is held until then. The cursor icon cs displayed on the display selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the background display selection icon, and the background display selection icon lights in red.

  In FIG. 143 (69), with the cursor icon cs displayed on the background display selection icon, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 143 (70), the background display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The selection screen is displayed. A five-line list is also displayed on the background display selection screen, and all five options (“01 background A” to “05 background E”) in the background display selection shown in FIG. 139 (b) are displayed in the list. It is done. That is, one item is displayed for one line of the five-line list. In FIG. 143 (70), the cursor display is displayed on the item of background A, and the background of the item on which the cursor display is displayed is previewed in the window on the left side of the background display selection screen. In addition, as shown in 73 (b), although the initial setting of background display selection is background A, this initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated background which can not be selected here may be selected. You may prepare. In the lower right of the background display selection screen, a back icon for returning to the option menu screen, a pattern of a cross key (red for up and down keys 137u and d only) used for selection operation, and a red for determination operation The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

  The background set in the background display selection here is displayed as the background display in the normal state in the decorative symbol display device 208. The background display in the normal state referred to here does not include the background display in the prefetch mode, the background display as a notice of the big hit of the variation, and the background display in the power support state. However, only the background display in the power support state may be included.

  Thereafter, the down key 137d is operated four times, the cursor display moves to the background E, and the background E (sky background) is previewed in the left window. In this state, the determination operation by the chance button 136 is performed, and on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 143 (72), an effect display Ed1 that surrounds the left window in which the preview display is performed is also generated. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected background is automatically updated, and as shown in FIG. 143 (73), the screen returns to the option menu screen. A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting of the background is updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the background display selection screen remains, and the operation may return to the option menu screen by operating the back icon arranged on the background display selection screen.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated twice (see FIG. 143 (74a)) while the option menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 143 (75), The cursor icon cs displayed on the hold display selection icon moves to the bottom, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the back icon for returning to the demo screen, and the back icon lights in red.

  In FIG. 143 (76), with the cursor icon cs displayed on the back icon, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 143 (77), a demonstration screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 Be done. The demo screen here reflects the customized result. That is, the background is changed to an empty background, the holding frame UI is different from the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 141 (1), and in the frame RW at the upper right of the screen, it is set to ON in effect customization. The mode name (in this case, the auto button mode) is displayed. When the two modes are set to ON, they are alternately displayed in ascending order of the customization number. For example, if the auto button mode of 01 and back button navigation of 05 are turned on, the auto button mode and back button navigation are alternately displayed in a frame RW at the upper right of the screen. When the setting is the same as the default setting, it may not be displayed in the frame RW, but may be displayed even if it is the same. In addition, when no setting is made, OFF may be displayed in the frame RW, or nothing may be displayed. In addition, group prediction of setting of reliability and long press auto continuous hitting of setting of speed of continuous hitting may be set so as not to be displayed in the frame RW. Furthermore, the set mode may not be displayed in detail, for example, it may be displayed only as "during effect customization".

  In FIG. 143 (79), the normal symbol display device 210, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and 4th symbol display 284 are also shown. All of the normal symbol display device 210, the first special view display device 212, and the second special view display device 214 shown in FIG. 143 (79) are in the stop display mode. In addition, both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (79) are being stopped, and the fourth symbol shown in FIG. 143 (79) is displayed. The symbol display device 284 also represents a stop display. Furthermore, the normal symbol holding lamp 216, the first special view holding lamp 218, and the second special view holding lamp 220 shown in FIG. 143 (79) are all turned off, and the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. Even in the displayed second number-of-holds display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 are both zero. Therefore, there is no suspension, and it is in the state where symbol fluctuation display is not started after finalized display of a stop symbol is performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 143 (80), there is one ball ball in the first special view starting opening 230, and the first special view display device 212 shown in FIG. 143 (80) starts the symbol variation display. However, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the sub control unit 400, 500 shown in FIG. 143 (80) are also decorative symbols. The variation display is not started, and the fourth symbol display device 284 similarly controlled by the sub control unit 400, 500 also shows the stop display. In the fourth symbol display device 284 shown in FIG. 143 (80), black squares represent the stop indication of the first decorative symbol (the third symbol), and gray circles represent the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol). A white square indicates that the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) is in the variation display, and a white circle indicates that the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol) is in the variation display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (81), the first decorative symbol is still stopped and displayed, but the second decorative symbol starts variable display, and the second number of reservations displayed in the upper right corner In the display, the number of reservations of the special view 1 is displayed as “1” for a moment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (82), the number of reservations of the special view 1 which is displayed as "1" for a moment in the second number of reservations display is "0". It should be noted that since the first special figure starting port 230 wins after being won, the second holding number display may not be displayed as "1" even if it is for a moment, and may remain "0".

  In FIG. 143 (83), the increase animation of the first hold icon h11 is started.

  FIG. 144 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 144 (84) continued from FIG. 143 (83), the increase animation is ended, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 144 (84) is an icon newly set in the hold display selection of effect customization, and is displayed in the default display mode (a diamond non-pattern and white display mode) There is.

  In FIG. 144 (85), the variation display of the first decorative symbol is not yet started, but the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the delay of the start of the symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 Erasing of three icons such as the brightness adjustment icon BI is started, and it is displayed in transparent form. Although the deletion here may be animation-made, it does not necessarily have to be the deletion animation, and in FIG. 144 (86), the deletion of these three icons MI, VI and BI is completed.

  In FIG. 144 (87), the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area, and in FIG. 144 (88), the movement of the first hold icon h11 is completed. On the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area, a variation icon h0 of a default display mode (a diamond non-pattern and white display mode) is displayed. Then, in FIG. 144 (89), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is finally started, and the first decorative symbol is in low speed fluctuation. In addition, in the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, the left symbol starts the variable display first, then the middle symbol starts the variable display, and the right symbol starts the variable display. However, the order of the variable display start of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol is not limited to this order, and these three left symbols, the middle symbol and the right symbol may simultaneously start the variable display. In addition, before the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, an animation by the decorative symbol (for example, an animation that the decorative symbol is once displayed large and then return to the original size, an image and characters of the character etc) is displayed. When it is configured from an image (including numbers), an image such as a character may be animated before the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 144 (91), the first decorative symbol is in high speed fluctuation. Even after the symbol variation display on special view display devices 212 and 214 is started, if left key 137l or right key 137r of operation key unit 137 is operated (see FIG. 144 (92)), FIG. 144 (93) As shown in, the bar display VB for volume control is displayed above the holding frame UI. The bar display VB for volume control is displayed so as to overlap with at least a portion of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), at least a portion of the variation icon h0, and at least a portion of the navigation character YM from the front side. . When the volume adjustment bar display VB is displayed, operating the left key 137l reduces the bar display by one level to make the sound smaller, and operating the right key 137r increases the bar display by one level to make the sound larger. , Volume adjustable.

  In the present embodiment, even after symbol variation display on special view display devices 212 and 214 is started, only volume adjustment can always be performed. In addition, even if the volume adjustment can always be performed, the bar display VB for volume adjustment may not be displayed. Also, even during a big hit game, only volume adjustment is always possible. However, it may be regulated only for a certain period. For example, during the start effect of the big hit game, during the interval between rounds, during the end effect of the big hit game, during the execution of the super reach effect, during the final display of the symbols on the special view display devices 212 and 214, of the decorative symbol During the final display, during the final display of the lost symbol, during the final display of the big hit symbol, or at the end of the power support (short time) state (for example, at the end of ST) (for example, the number of balls or / and During display of a screen displaying the number of consecutive houses, etc., and a period of time in which the left and right keys 137l and 137r are used for effect may be restricted. In addition, when super reach production is a game production, it is controlled until a result of victory or defeat is informed, and after that it is good also as adjustment possible, and adjustment is performed after three decoration symbols gather and start shaking display. It may be possible, or all the period from the super reach presentation to the stop display may be regulated.

  In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment after the symbol variation display on the special view display devices 212 and 214 is started may be possible only in the special view low probability diagram low probability state. In addition, although the light amount adjustment can not be performed even if the up key 137u or the down key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated after the symbol variation display on the special view display devices 212 and 214 is started, the bar for light amount adjustment The display may be performed similarly to the bar display VB for volume adjustment, and the light amount may be adjustable, or the light amount may be adjustable without performing the bar display. Furthermore, even after symbol variation display on special view display devices 212 and 214 is started, effect customization, character selection, etc. may be set.

  Further, when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated while the volume adjustment icon VI or the like is off, that is, while the symbol is changing, the bar display VB for volume adjustment is not displayed as in the present embodiment. Volume adjustment may be possible. The bar display VB for volume adjustment is configured to be erased if not operated for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), but when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated again before the certain period elapses May be configured to be able to update the count start of that fixed period (ie, to extend the period until returning to the demo screen). If there is an operation on the left key 137l or the right key 137r during the execution of the animation in which the volume adjustment icon VI or the like is erased by the start of the variation of the symbol, the erasure animation is canceled halfway and immediately The volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be erased, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed instead. Alternatively, the volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be displayed again without canceling the deletion animation, or the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed after the deletion animation has been performed to the end.

  Furthermore, even after the symbol variation display on the special view display devices 212 and 214 is started, the presence or absence of the display of the three icons MI, VI, and BI is until the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started. Regardless of the light amount, the light amount may be adjusted, and the effect customization, the character selection and the like may be set.

  In addition, even when the volume adjustment and / or the brightness adjustment can be performed while the symbol is changing, the adjustment bar display may not be displayed.

  FIG. 145 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example described using FIG.

  When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 145 (32b) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 142 (32a), the cursor display returns as shown in FIG. 145 (33b1) The back icon is highlighted with a frame and is displayed in red. In this state, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 145 (33b2)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to return to the option menu screen is displayed superimposed on the effect customization screen from the front (FIG. 145 (33b3) ). On the confirmation screen, a return icon for accepting return to the option menu screen and a cancel icon for canceling return to the option menu screen are displayed. In FIG. 145 (33b2), the cursor display is a cancel icon. It is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 145 (33b4-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the icon to return (FIG. 145 (33b5-1), or the cursor display is displayed on the cancel icon). Then, as shown in FIG. 145 (33b4-2), the chance button 136 can be operated to return to the effect customization screen (FIG. 145 (33b5-2)).

  When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 145 (32c) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 142 (32a), the cursor display returns as shown in FIG. 145 (33c1) When the right key 137r is operated one more time (FIG. 145 (33c2)), the cursor display moves to the initialization icon as shown in FIG. 145 (33c3). In this state, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 145 (33c4)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize the effect customization is displayed superimposed on the effect customization screen from the front (FIG. 145 (33c5) )). On this confirmation screen, a "Yes icon" for accepting initialization and a "No icon" for canceling initialization are displayed. In FIG. 145 (33c5), the cursor display is "No icon". It is displayed in ". Then, when the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 145 (33c6-1), the cursor display moves to the “Yes icon” (FIG. 145 (33c7-1), and in this state, FIG. 145 (33c8-1) As shown in, when the chance button 136 is operated, the initialization of the effect customization is executed.The initialization here is returned to the initial value for everything the player has set in the effect customization. Even if it is not set, it is possible to perform initialization, but it may not be possible.When initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is displayed superimposed on the effect customization screen from the front side (FIG. 145 (33c9-1)) Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 145 (33c6-2)), the effect customization image on which the initialization is reflected There appears. In this example, did not specifically set anything, all the items are turned OFF of the initial value.

  FIG. 146 is a view showing another modification.

  When the lower key 137d is operated only once as shown in FIG. 146 (74b1) instead of twice operating the lower key 137d shown in FIG. 143 (74a), as shown in FIG. 146 (74b2), The cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the initialization icon, and the initialization icon lights in red.

  In FIG. 146 (74b3), with the cursor icon cs displayed on the initialization icon, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 146 (74b4), all settings are made in the decorative symbol display device 208. The confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize is displayed superimposed on the option menu screen from the front side. On this confirmation screen, a "Yes icon" for accepting initialization and a "No icon" for canceling initialization are displayed. In FIG. 146 (74b4), the cursor display is "No icon". It is displayed in ".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 146 (74b5-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the “Yes icon” (FIG. 146 (74b6-1) or the cursor display is displayed on the “No icon”) In the state where it is in, it is possible to return to the option menu screen (FIG. 146 (74b6-2)) by operating the chance button 136 as shown in FIG. 146 (74b5-2).

  When the chance button 136 is operated in the state where the cursor display is displayed on the “Yes icon” as shown in FIG. 146 (74b6-1) (FIG. 146 (74b7-1)), initialization of all settings is executed. Ru. In this initialization, everything set by the player is returned to the initial value. Although initialization is possible even when nothing is set in particular, it may be possible to disable initialization. When the initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is displayed superimposed on the option menu screen from the front side (FIG. 146 (74b8-1)). Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 146 (74b9-1)), the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 146 (74b10-1).

  When the player performs various customizations and then does not return to the option menu screen, and does not operate the chance button 136 or the operation key unit 137 or the ball emission handle 134 for a certain period of time (for example, 5 minutes). May initialize various settings. Also, instead of the confirmation screen of FIG. 146 (74b6-1), the confirmation screen of FIG. 145 (33c5) may be displayed. Alternatively, the “Yes icon” may be removed from the confirmation screen, and may be initialized after a certain period of time has elapsed since the confirmation screen was displayed. In addition, even if there is a “Yes icon”, in the case of no operation, it may be configured to be initialized after a certain period has passed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Alternatively, it may be initialized only when “initialize” is selected on the confirmation screen (here, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the cursor display is displayed as “Yes icon”) .

  In addition, with regard to volume adjustment and luminance adjustment, initialization may be the same, and furthermore, initialization of various settings and initialization of volume and / or luminance may be performed at the same timing. One may be initialized earlier than the other. In addition, when initializing the volume and initializing the brightness at the same timing as the initialization settings of various settings, the initialization confirmation screen is not displayed for initializing the volume and initializing the luminance. Alternatively, a confirmation screen may be displayed to initialize all settings, volume, and brightness settings.

  Furthermore, a display for confirming whether the settings for effect customization are to be initialized may be automatically displayed during symbol variation. For example, it is always displayed when 100 variations are displayed once, or a fixed number of variations have been made since the last display, or when a fixed number of variations have been made since the first started variation. It may be displayed randomly (for example, when winning by display lottery).

  FIGS. 146 (I) to (V ') show examples where customization can be performed during a big hit round.

  In this example, for example, the player can make a music selection in the first round or the second round, reach a certain round after the second round, and can perform customization from the next round. A certain round here is a round which can be won by a V-attacker, specifically, five rounds. In FIG. 146 (I), the decorative symbol display device 208 for the fifth round is shown, and the letter V for winning a prize for the V-attacker is displayed. Also, the title of the music selected by the music selection is displayed at the lower left of the screen.

  FIG. 146 (II) is a period corresponding to the inter-round interval with the V-attacker closed. Even in the interval between rounds of 5 rounds and 6 rounds, the decorative symbol display device 208 still displays 5 rounds. Also, although the attacker is closed, right-handed notification is continued.

In FIG. 146 (III), the attacker starts opening, and the sixth round is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (III), a character display notifying that the effect customization can be performed and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed. That is, in this example, the effect customization can be performed in the sixth round, which is the next round of the five rounds that can be won by the V attacker. Note that it may be executable only in the sixth round, or may be executable over a plurality of rounds after the sixth round.

  In FIG. 146 (IV), the chance button 136 is depressed and the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 etc. is reduced and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. There is.

  Also, in FIG. 146 (V) shown as a modification of FIG. 146 (V), a display (here, a display related to the auto button mode) related to only one line (only one item) of the five line list is displayed There is. In this modification, it is possible to change all effect customizations by scrolling the items with the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching ON / OFF of the items displayed by the left and right keys 137l and 137r. .

  Note that, either of the example of FIG. 146 (V) and the example of FIG. 146 (V ′), only part of the effect customization may be changeable.

  In the example described above, customization can be performed from the next round of a certain round (for example, a round in which a V winning game is performed with a so-called V machine). In addition, you may customize not only from a V machine but from a certain round.

  Further, the period during which the music selection can be made during the big hit game can not be customized, and the customization may be performed from the round in which the selected music is output. The music selection may be completed in the middle of the round, and the music selected in the middle of the round may be output. In this case, even if it is the round for which the music selection is performed, the selected music is output , Can be customized within the round.

  Also, the music may be determined at the end of the specific round, and in this case, customization can be performed after the specific round is ended. In detail, customization may be performed from the same time as the end of a specific round, or may be performed from the start of the next round to a specific round, and may be performed between a specific round and its next round Customization may be possible from the inter-round interval.

  Furthermore, customization may be feasible anytime during the big hit round. Also, customization may be performed anytime during the jackpot game. The term "during a big hit" as used herein refers to a period between the start of the big hit and the end of the big hit including the middle of the round.

  In addition, the period from when the big hit symbol is displayed and started until the first round is started is, from the viewpoint of the main control unit 300, the special electric character (from the turn-on of the character continuous actuation device to the turn-on) It is a period of time from the off state to the on state of the attacker, but includes a period in which a big hit game start effect is being executed. In addition, although the display (for example, display of a special bonus) displayed by the big hit game start effect may continue to be displayed even if one round is started, it is one round until the attacker starts the first opening. It is a period until the eyes are started. Further, the determination display of the jackpot symbol is not based on the determination display of the decoration symbol but on the basis of the determination display of the symbol on the special view display device 212, 214. In addition, right-handed notification is given before the attacker is opened (for example, in the case of the first hit of special figure 1 and every big hit) If it is a game console, the timing when this right-handed notification is started is a big hit symbol Is included in the period from the final display to the start of the first round.

  During the period from the final display of the jackpot symbol to the start of the first round, customization may not be performed, or vice versa.

  In addition, customization may not be performed in a period from the end of the last round to the start of symbol variation at the shortest. For example, during the jackpot end effect, customization may not be performed.

  Furthermore, during the prepaid card removal warning display, customization may not be performed, or vice versa.

  In addition, during a specific effect (for example, V winning effect, music selection, probability change suggestive effect, and the like), customization may not be performed. Furthermore, customization may not be performed in a period in which effect selection (for example, music selection, effect mode selection, etc.) can be performed. Furthermore, during the execution period of the effect using the operation means used for customization, customization may not be performed, or the customization may be restricted before the effect is started. In this way, the regulation of customization functions as a notice of the effect.

  Furthermore, contrary to the example shown in FIGS. 146 (I) to (V '), customization may not be performed when a certain round is reached. For example, although 1 R to 14 R can be customized, it may not be possible when it becomes 15 R. Alternatively, although customization can be performed from 5R to 12R, 13R or later may not be possible.

  In addition, while the two-dimensional code is displayed, customization may not be performed. For example, when a two-dimensional code is displayed for a certain period in a big hit game, or when a two-dimensional code is displayed by a player's operation (for example, "press a button to display a two-dimensional code" is displayed In the case where a two-dimensional code is output by a button operation when the button is pressed, customization may not be performed. Alternatively, customization may be performed even while displaying a two-dimensional code. The two-dimensional code and the display related to customization may be displayed at overlapping positions or may be displayed at overlapping positions. That is, part or all of the two-dimensional code may be displayed so as to overlap from the front side to part or all of the display related to customization, and conversely, part or all of the display related to customization corresponds to two-dimensional It may be displayed on part or all of the code so as to overlap from the front side.

  In FIGS. 146 (I) to (V '), the jackpot effect of a pachinko machine having a variable winning opening having a definite variation area has been described, but the big hit of a pachinko machine having a variable winning opening having no definite variation area It is applicable also to the big hit of so-called 1 type and 2 types of models in which a big hit starts by winning V.

  FIGS. 146 (VI) to (VIII) are diagrams showing examples in which customization can be performed during symbol variation display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (VI), both the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and three decorative symbols are in high speed variation. is there. In addition, in the frame RW on the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (VI), it is displayed that the custom button mode is currently set to customize, and the effect customization is performed below that. A character display notifying that it is possible and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  In FIG. 146 (VII), the chance button 136 is depressed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (VII), the frame RW at the upper right of the screen disappears, and instead, one line shown in FIG. The display related to only (one item only) (here, the display related to the auto button mode) is displayed. Also in this example, all the effect customization can be changed by scrolling the items with the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching ON / OFF the items displayed by the left and right keys 137l and 137r.

  FIGS. 146 (IX) to (XI) are diagrams showing other examples in which customization can be performed during symbol variation display.

  Even in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (IX), both the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and the three decorative symbols are in high speed variation. is there. Further, in FIG. 146 (IX), the second display device 208P is disposed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (corresponding to the first display device). The second display device 208P has a smaller display screen than the decorative symbol display device 208. The second display device 208P is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 146 (IX) is at an initial position and can be moved up and down. Even in the initial position, a part of the second display device 208P overlaps a part of the decorative symbol display device 208, and when the second display device 208P descends from the initial position, the degree of overlapping with the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes large.

  A model title is displayed on the second display device 208P, and a display RW 'indicating that the eater button mode is currently set to customize is displayed so as to overlap the model title from the front side. . Further, below the display RW ', a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be performed and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  In FIG. 146 (X), the chance button 136 is pressed, and in the second display device 208P shown in FIG. (XI), the entire screen is switched to the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 and the like. In addition, the content (for example, customization display in process of execution) of a part of the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 etc. may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the remaining content may be displayed on the second display device 208P. Also, the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 and the like may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the second display device 208P. Furthermore, the display using the second display device 208P is also applicable to the display related to customization during the big hit game.

  Note that customization may be performed anytime during symbol variation display. For example, even during display of the super reach effect, customization may be performed. Or, conversely, during display of the super reach effect, customization may not be performed. The super reach production referred to here includes the production and the prognostic production of the insulting part until the judgment production such as the duel production starts after reaching the reach state. For example, an effect of changing the display position of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol assumed to be reached by entering the reach state, and an effect before the character display indicating the development to the super reach is performed are included. In addition, when switching from the judgment effect such as duel effect to the display screen of the decorative symbol, it is included in the super reach effect until it is switched to the display screen of the decorative symbol.

  It should be noted that customization may be performed even for the rendering of the roving part or the prognostic rendering, or may not be performed. Further, after switching from the judgment effect display screen or the judgment effect to the display screen of the decorative symbol, customization may be performed or may not be performed.

  In addition, customization may be performed even during simultaneous rendering performed on a plurality of game machines, or may not be performed during simultaneous rendering. Furthermore, customization may be performed during temporary stop of the decorative symbol, or may not be performed in the opposite direction. Furthermore, during the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, it may be possible to customize only when it is a big hit in the end, or it may not be possible to do the opposite, and it is finally lost Customization may or may not be possible only in certain cases. Furthermore, customization may be performed or may not be performed between the end of the symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display in a state where there is a hold. Further, during the execution of a specific effect during symbol variation display (for example, in the pre-reading mode), customization may be performed or may not be performed.

  Furthermore, when customization is performed during symbol fluctuation display, setting change may be applied from the symbol fluctuation display, or setting change may be applied from the next symbol fluctuation display. Good.

  In addition, while setting the user mode (Daitomo) player list (for example, display with the chance button, switching with the arrow key, etc.), the list of missions achieved and game history (number of revolutions, number of balls, number of mission clears) , It is configured to be able to display the number of big wins of the current play, the maximum number of consecutive runs of the current play, etc.), or to be able to change the character or background set by the user, the holding frame, the holding display, etc. It may be done. Furthermore, while setting the user mode (Daitomo), while setting the user mode (Daitomo), a list of missions and game histories achieved by the player operation (for example, display with a chance button, switching with an arrow key, etc.) It is configured to be able to display (number of rotations, number of balls, number of mission clears, number of big wins for current play, maximum number of consecutive runs for current play, etc.), or a character or background set by the user, holding frame , And may be configured to be able to change the pending display and the like.

  In addition, during the setting of the user mode, when the mission is achieved, an icon may be displayed to notify that the mission is achieved.

  Next, an example of the pachinko machine 100 of the specification corresponding to the member service of "Daitomo" will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of this specification, the open condition of FIG. 139 (b) is adopted. Moreover, the top menu is prepared for the pachinko machine 100 of this specification. This top menu can be called up by operating the chance button 136 while the demo screen is displayed. The top menu may be able to be called by merely operating the chance button 136 without passing through the demo screen. Alternatively, even if the chance button 136 is not operated, the screen may be automatically switched and displayed from the demonstration screen. Furthermore, the demo screen may be replaced with this top menu.

  On the top menu, there is a Daitomo icon, a model customization icon, an initialization icon, and a back icon.

  FIG. 147 (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen.

  Even on the top menu screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the cursor moves up and down by operating the upper key 137u or the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Of the items "Daitomo", "Customize model", "Initialize", and "Return to demo screen", the arrows connected with the arrows are operated by operating the upper key or the lower key of the operation key unit 137. The cursor moves, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor was displayed is displayed. That is, when the cursor is placed on the item of "DAITOMO" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the DAITOMO screen. In addition, when the cursor is placed on the item “return to demo screen” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the demo screen.

  On the other hand, the "Return" icon is displayed on each of the "Daitomo screen", "Model customize screen", and "Initialization confirmation screen", and the cursor is placed on the "Return" icon and the chance button 136 is pressed. If you do, you can return to the top menu screen. In addition, even if the cursor is not placed on the "RETURN" icon, the screen may return to the top menu screen even if the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 is pressed.

  In addition, although it is not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize in special figure starting port 212, 214 and symbol variation display of special figure is started, even if it is the top menu screen, “Daitomo screen”, “ Even in the case of "model customization screen" and "initialization confirmation screen", the screen is shifted to the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 147 (2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen.

  The transition diagram of the model customization screen shown in FIG. 147 (2) is the same as the transition diagram of the option menu screen shown in FIG. 140 except for “Return to top menu” at the bottom and “Top menu screen” on the right of it. Therefore, duplicate explanations are omitted. When the cursor is placed on the item “return to top menu” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the model customization screen to the top menu screen.

  FIG. 148 is a transition diagram of the display screen.

  Even on the Daitomo screen, the cursor moves up and down by operating the upper key 137 u or the lower key 137 d of the operation key unit 137. Among the items of "trial play", "enter password", "save data", "clear data", "quick start" and "return to top menu screen", the operation key unit is connected to each other by arrows The cursor moves by operating the up key or the down key of 137, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor was displayed is displayed. That is, when the cursor is placed on the item of “trial play” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the test screen to the trial play screen. From the trial play screen, move to the new registration screen by moving the cursor by the selection operation of the cross key 137u, d, l, r and the decision operation of the chance button 136, or the top menu screen to start trial play You can go back to Furthermore, from the new registration screen, it is possible to shift to the password input screen or return to the Daitomo screen by moving the cursor by the selection operation of the cross key 137u, d, l, r and determining operation of the chance button 136. .

  If the cursor is placed on the item of “password input” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the password screen to the password input screen. In the password entry screen, the display is repeated until the correct password is entered, and if the entered password is correct, the screen switches to the demonstration screen set to the Daitomo mode after a certain period of time.

  If the cursor is placed on the item of "data storage" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the display screen to the data storage confirmation screen. On the data storage confirmation screen, when “Yes” is determined by the cursor movement by the selection operation of the cross key 137 u, d, l, r and the determination operation of the chance button 136, the screen shifts to a two-dimensional code issuance screen. However, if "Yes" is determined in the same manner, a two-dimensional code is issued, and it is possible to shift to a demo screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set. On the other hand, in both the data storage confirmation screen and the two-dimensional code issuance screen, "No" is determined by the movement of the cursor by the selection operation of the cross key 137u, d, l, r and the determination operation of the chance button 136 If so, each display is repeated.

  If the cursor is placed on the item of "data clear" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data clear confirmation screen.

  If the cursor is placed on the item of “quick start” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the quick start start screen. In the quick start start screen, after a certain period of time elapses, the display switches to the demonstration screen set to the Daitomo mode.

  On the other hand, an icon of "Return" is displayed on each of the "trial play screen", "password input screen", "data save confirmation screen", "data clear confirmation screen", and "quick start start screen", If the cursor is placed on the “return” icon and the chance button 136 is pressed, the screen can be returned to the screen. Also, even if the cursor is not placed on the "RETURN" icon, the screen may be returned to the display screen even if the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 is pressed.

  In addition, although it is not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize in special drawing starting port 212, 214 and symbol variation display of the special drawing is started, even if it is the Daitomo screen, "trial trial screen" Even if it is, it shifts to the screen of the fluctuation display of the decoration design.

  Also, reference numerals in parentheses shown in FIG. 148 correspond to reference numerals in parentheses in FIG.

  FIG. 149 shows a top menu screen and a display screen.

  A top menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 (a). In this top menu screen, background display, holding frame UI, navigation character YM, first decorative symbol (third symbol) and second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) all disappear, and under the character display of "menu", Four types of icons are displayed in order from top to bottom in a row, such as a Daitomo icon, a model customization icon, an initialization icon, and a return icon for returning to the demo screen. Also, in FIG. 148 (a), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the bottom back icon, and the back icon is red while the other icons are displayed in white. The initial position of the cursor icon cs when the display of the top menu screen is started is a back icon. Further, also in the top menu screen, a pattern of a cross key (red only for the up and down keys 137u, d) used for the selection operation and a pattern of the red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed on the lower right.

  In the screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 (b1), the chance button 136 is displayed in a state where the cursor icon cs is displayed on the Daitomo icon on the top menu screen shown in FIG. It is a Daitomo screen displayed by being pressed. In order to return to the trial play icon, password input icon, data storage icon, data clear icon, quick start icon, and top menu screen, in the vertical row below the character display of "Daitomo" on the screen of this Daitomo. Six kinds of icons such as the back icon of are displayed. Also, in FIG. 148 (b1), the cursor display is displayed on the trial play icon at the top, and the frame of the trial play icon is highlighted and further displayed in red. In addition, a character of Yoshimune appears on the right side of the six types of icons arranged in a vertical row, and an explanation about trial play is displayed. Further, below the display of the description, a pattern of a cross key (red only for the up and down keys 137u and d) used for the selection operation and a pattern of the red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, a trial play screen shown in FIG. 149 (b1-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the trial play screen shown in FIG. 149 (b1-1), options which can be selected in various customizations are displayed as benefits of the joining experience of Daitomo. Below the display, there is a confirmation icon for saving the setting change, a back icon for returning to the Daitomo screen, a "starting icon" to start trial play, and a new registration for newly registering a member. The icons are arranged in a horizontal row sequentially from the left side. The cursor display is displayed on the "start icon", and this position is the initial position. In this state, when the right key 137r is operated once, the cursor display moves to the “newly registered icon”, and when the chance button 136 is pressed there and the determination operation is performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in FIG. The new registration screen shown in (b1-2) is displayed.

  In the new registration screen shown in FIG. 149 (b1-2), the two-dimensional code QR1 is largely displayed on the left, and the two-dimensional code is read by the communication terminal with the photographing function on the right. A sentence is displayed that recommends accessing the website of the embedded URL (Daitomo site) and obtaining a password from it. Further, below the display of the text, a password input icon and a back icon for returning to the Daitomo screen are displayed. In this example, the new registration screen is displayed via the trial play screen, but may be displayed without passing through the trial play screen. For example, when a newly registered icon is provided on the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 149 (b1) separately from the trial play icon etc. and this newly registered icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, FIG. The new registration screen shown in 2) may be displayed.

  In the screen of FIG. 149 (b2), the cursor display is displayed on the password input icon, and on the right side, the explanation of the password input is displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, a password input screen shown in FIG. 149 (b2-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the password input screen shown in FIG. 149 (b2-1), an 8-digit password input area pw and a dial kw of alphabets, symbols and numbers are displayed below the password input area pw. The person who inputs the password moves the cursor (displayed in gray, while T is being specified in FIG. 149 (b2-1-1)) using the cross key 137u, d, l, r, and the character specified by the cursor An operation of inputting in the password input area pw by the determination operation by the chance button 136 is performed one by one in accordance with the password acquired from the Daitomo site (see FIG. 149 (b2-1-1)). Under the dial kw, a back icon for returning to the Daitomo screen, an erase icon for erasing the input characters of the password input area pw, and a completion icon indicating completion of password input are arranged in a line from the left side sequentially It is done.

  When the input operation of the password is completed, the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the cursor display is displayed on the completion icon. If the password input is incorrect, the window of the input error shown in FIG. 149 (b2-1-2) is displayed, and if this window disappears, the password input operation becomes possible again. The previously input password may be cleared from the password input area pw or may remain as it is. If the input of the password is correct, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the input complete window shown in FIG. 149 (b2-1-3) for a certain period, and then switches to the demonstration screen set to the Daitomo mode. .

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 149 (b3), a cursor display is displayed on the data storage icon, and on the right side, an explanation of data storage is displayed. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 149 (b3-1). In addition, when trial play or quick start is being performed, or when password input is not performed, the data storage icon can not be selected, or the data storage confirmation screen is not displayed. However, conversely, it may be selectable or displayable.

  On the data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 149 (b3-1), a "Yes" icon for accepting saving of data and a "No" icon for not storing data are displayed. When the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, a two-dimensional code QR2 is generated by the pachinko machine 100 and issued (Fig. 149 (b3-2)). In this two-dimensional code QR2, in addition to the URL of the Daitomo site, the player's ID, the current game history information (for example, the number of games, the number of balls, the number of big hits, the number of consecutive homes, the Daitomo mode level, experience Value, including mission achievement information etc.), etc. is read, this two-dimensional code QR2 is read by a communication terminal with a photographing function, and the website of the URL embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2 (Daitomo site Data is stored on the server of Daitomo site when accessing. An end icon is displayed at the lower right of the data storage confirmation screen, and when reading of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, the end confirmation screen is selected when the end icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated. Is displayed.

  In FIG. 149 (b3-2-1), the end confirmation screen is displayed, and a “Yes” icon for accepting the end and a “No” icon for not ending are displayed. When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to a demo screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set.

  The data embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2 may be deleted from the pachinko machine when the generation of the two-dimensional code QR2 ends, such as data of the game history information of this time, as shown in FIG. 149 (b3-2-1) The “Yes” icon may be selected and the chance button 136 may be operated to erase the pachinko machine 100 from the pachinko machine 100 or may not be erased until data clear described later is performed.

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 149 (b4), the cursor display is displayed on the data clear icon, and the explanation on the data clear is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 149 (b4-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. If the trial play or quick start is being performed, or if the password is not input, the data clear icon can not be selected, or the data clear confirmation screen is not displayed. However, conversely, it may be selectable or displayable.

  On the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 149 (b4-1), a “Yes” icon for accepting deletion of data such as current game history information and a “No” icon for not deleting data are displayed. There is. When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the data is erased from the pachinko machine, and an erasure complete screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 149 (b4-1-1), the deletion completion screen is displayed, and the deletion completion screen disappears when it is displayed for a certain period, and the screen is returned to the Dytomo screen.

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 149 (b5), the cursor display is displayed on the quick start icon, and the explanation about the quick start is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a quick start start screen shown in FIG. 149 (b5-1). This quick start start screen disappears when it is displayed for a certain period, and the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to the demonstration screen set to the Daitomo mode.

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 149 (b6), the cursor display is displayed on the return icon, and on the right side, the return to the top menu screen is displayed. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to the top menu screen.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a model customization screen.

  When the second model customization icon is selected from the top of the top menu screen shown in FIG. 149 (a) and the chance button 136 is operated, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the model customization screen shown in FIG. 150 (c). Is displayed. On this model customization screen, under the character display of "model customization", in order from top to bottom in a row, the effect customization icon, the character selection icon, the holding frame selection icon, the holding display selection icon, the background display selection icon, and initialization Seven types of icons are displayed, such as an icon and a back icon for returning to the top menu screen. A cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 150 (c), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the other icons are displayed in white, whereas the effect customization icon is red. Further, in the model customization screen, the pattern of the cross key used for the selection operation and the pattern of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed at the lower right. Furthermore, among the chance button 136 and the cross key, the cursor icon cs and the patterns of the up and down keys 137 u and d used for moving the cursor display are displayed in red. Note that for the determination operation, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

  Although the effect customization screen is displayed in FIG. 150 (c1), the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 (17) is that the options for the input sound preview and the option for back button navigation are not yet released. It is different. When the password of Daitomo is not input or the level satisfying the release condition is not reached, a screen as shown in FIG. 150 (c1) is displayed.

  Although a character selection screen is displayed in FIG. 150 (c2), with the character selection screen shown in FIG. 142 (40), all other options are unreleased except for the option of Yoshimune, and the other is not The difference is that the option does not even indicate what character it is. In addition, even if it is an unreleased option, a part or all of a character image may be displayed, or a silhouette image in the shape of a character may be displayed, and a display mode in which selectable characters can be recognized ( For example, a display may be displayed that includes “Dai tomo Lv. 20 with princess open” and the like. Here, with regard to the display regarding the unreleased option, the present invention is also applicable to other customized displays (in this example, a holding frame, a hold display, and a background display). If the password of Daitomo is not input, a screen as shown in FIG. 150 (c2) is displayed. Only Yoshimune can be selected on this screen.

  On the other hand, in the character selection screen shown in FIG. 150 (c2 '), since the password is input or the trial play is selected, the 爺 character can also be selected. However, after 03, it can not be selected because it has not reached a level that satisfies the open condition.

  Although the holding frame selection screen is displayed in FIG. 150 (c3), with the holding frame selection screen shown in FIG. There is a difference that the other options are not even displayed what sort of holding box is. If the password of Daitomo is not input, the screen shown in FIG. 150 (c3) is displayed. In this screen, only the holding frame A can be selected.

  On the other hand, in the holding frame selection screen shown in FIG. 150 (c3 '), since the password is being input, the holding frame B can also be selected. However, after 03, it can not be selected because it has not reached a level that satisfies the open condition.

  Although the hold display selection screen is displayed in FIG. 150 (c4), all other options are unreleased except for the option of the icon A in the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 143 (63). The other option is different in that it is not displayed even what is the name of the pending display. If the password of Daitomo is not input, a screen as shown in FIG. 150 (c4) is displayed. Only the icon A can be selected on this screen.

  On the other hand, on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 150 (c4 '), since the password is being input, the icon B can also be selected. However, here as well, 03 and later can not be selected because they have not reached a level that satisfies the open condition.

  Although a background display selection screen is displayed in FIG. 150 (c5), all other options are unreleased except for the background A option with the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 143 (70). The other option is different in that it is not displayed even what background name it is. If the password of Daitomo is not input, the screen shown in FIG. 150 (c5) is displayed. Only background A can be selected on this screen.

  On the other hand, in the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 150 (c5 '), since the password is input, the background B can also be selected. However, here as well, 03 and later can not be selected because they have not reached a level that satisfies the open condition.

  Although a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize all the settings is displayed in FIG. 150 (d1), since it is the same as the confirmation screen shown in FIG. 146 (74b6-1), the description will be omitted. Moreover, although the initialization completion screen is displayed in FIG. 150 (d2), since it is the same as the initialization completion screen shown in FIG. 146 (74b8-1), the description is omitted.

  FIG. 150 (e1) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration screen set in the Daitomo mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 (e1), the holding frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Moreover, the combination ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") of the loss of the decoration design is displayed also to the 1st decoration design (the 3rd design) and the 2nd decoration design (the 5th design) The symbol variation display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second number-of-holds display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reservations of the special figure 1 and the number of special views of the special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no suspension, and symbol variation display is not started after the finalized display of the stop symbol of the special drawing is performed. Furthermore, below the second number-of-retentions display, the current level of the tone mode (here, level 1) and the experience value (EXP) (here, 0) are displayed. That is, the demo screen set in the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 150 (e1) corresponds to, for example, a screen immediately after newly registering and transitioning to the demo screen.

  Further, from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 150 (e1), the corresponding sound effect is output. For example, when the Quick Start is set and this demo screen is displayed, the voice of “Start of Daitomo” is output, and when the trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, “Trial When the voice of "play start" is output and the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed, the voice of "DAITOMO start. Let's keep trying today" is output. It should be noted that different sound effects are output depending on whether the corresponding sound effects are started by Daitomo by trial play, when Daitomo is started by quick start, and when Daitomo is started by password input. The same effect sound may be output, or the same effect sound may be output in two cases. Further, the sound effects may be changed depending on the level of Daitomo, the previous game situation, and the like. In addition, when returning to the demonstration screen set in the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 150 (e1) after model customization, the sound effects may not be output, and dedicated sound effects may be output. Also, an animation may be displayed together with or instead of the corresponding sound effect. When the start of symbol variation is started while a sound effect or animation is being performed, the corresponding sound effect or animation may be interrupted (cancelled) on the way, but may be output as it is until the end.

  Also, when the Quick Start is set and this demo screen is displayed, or when the trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, or when the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed. In the case of at least one of them, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 149 (a) or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 150 (c) may not be called for a certain period, or the certain period may be The top menu screen shown in FIG. 149 (a) or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 150 (c) may be called without waiting. Alternatively, in all of the above cases, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 149 (a) or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 150 (c) may not be called for a predetermined period.

  FIG. 150 (e1-1) shows that the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are additionally displayed when a certain period has elapsed since the demonstration screen shown in FIG. 150 (e1) was displayed. FIG.

  Note that after the top menu screen shown in FIG. 149 (a) is displayed, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are restricted so as not to be additionally displayed for a predetermined period (for example, one minute) It is also good. When the operation of the chance button 136 or the operation of the cross keys 137u, d, l, r is performed during this fixed period, the operation is invalidated. However, it may be effective.

  In addition, even while the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are not displayed (for example, immediately after or immediately after the symbol variation display stops with no hold), The volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in 141 can be called. When the volume adjustment window VW or the brightness adjustment window BW is called and there is no operation for a predetermined period, the screen may return to the screen shown in FIG. 150 (e1-1).

  Moreover, when the stop symbol is displayed in the state where there is no hold, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are not displayed for a certain period, and the certain period is shown in FIG. The model customization screen shown in) may not be called.

  Also, even when the top menu screen shown in FIG. 149 (a) or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 150 (c) can not be called, the volume adjustment window VW or the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. May be possible.

  Furthermore, at the time of switching between the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 141 and the screen shown in FIG. 150 (e1-1), these windows VW and BW are also shown in FIG. 150 (e1-1) There is a state in which neither is displayed, and even in this state, the adjustment operation of the volume and the brightness may be executable or may be restricted so as not to be executable.

  FIG. 150 (e2) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration screen displayed via FIG. 149 (b3-2-1) after the two-dimensional code is issued in FIG. 149 (b3-2). As an output sound from the speaker 120 here, a voice saying "Thank you for your patience" is output. Also, depending on the state before the demonstration screen is displayed, the outputted sound effects may change.

  FIG. 151 is a diagram showing an example of the effect using the fluctuation icon.

  Here, the fluctuation icon h0 is summarized again. The variation icon h0 is an icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, which is displayed after the suspension of the special figure variation game is started, in other words, an icon related to a symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon changes to the change icon h0 simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More strictly speaking, when the first hold icon h11 with the oldest start winning moves from the hold icon display area HIS to the change icon display area CIS, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon or expressed as the change icon moves. You may Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variation icon display area CIS is completed may be referred to as a variation icon. The variation icon h0 is displayed in a display size different from the hold icon h11 (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). Although this may facilitate identification of the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11, it may have the same size. In addition, the variation icon h0 may be a display mode associated with the display mode of the hold icon h11. The fluctuation icon h0 can be notified of the success or failure of the fluctuation (the fluctuation notification) according to the display mode, and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the fluctuation is notified. Therefore, the fluctuation icon h0 can be viewed as an icon related to holding, and can also be considered as a kind of holding icon in the sense that the notification of the success or failure result of the special drawing fluctuation game is held. The erase timing may be a timing before, a same timing, or a timing after the timing at which the success or failure result of the change is notified. In addition to the default display mode (for example, a round non-pattern and white display mode), a plurality of types of display modes of the variation icon h0 are prepared as a display mode of normal notice, depending on the display mode. The big hit reliability (expected degree) is different. The higher the jackpot reliability, the more likely the jackpot symbol will be displayed finally. In the following description, the color represents the level of expectation of the big hit. The default white is a case where “no change” is selected in the effect drawing for the display mode of the variation icon h0. The default white fluctuation icon does not predict the jackpot expectation, but may predict the jackpot expectation (in that case, the color of the icon with the lowest jackpot expectation). The white blink is the lowest in the jackpot expectation (0% or 0% or more and less than 1%). The color of the display mode of the normal notice is so-called rainbow color (rainbow color) that changes to white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, and seven colors in descending order of the expectation of the big hit. Gold is rich in big hit, and rainbow color has higher expectation of big hit than that, for example, it may be possible to say up to big hit determination. In addition, the relationship of this color is the same also in the color of the display mode of the advance notice by the hold icon. Below, when it is said that it is red or more, it becomes red, gold, and rainbow colors.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) performs variable display. In addition, a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A1). The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and on the right base icon bIr, in FIG. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items are performed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 151 (A1) is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol variation displays. For example, the display may be started simultaneously with the start of a certain symbol variation display, and may be continuously displayed during the symbol variation display, may disappear temporarily, or disappear from view. Further, the symbol variation display may be ended, and the symbol display may be continuously displayed while the stop display is displayed, or may be temporarily erased or invisible. And during the display of the next symbol variation display started continuously, it may be displayed continuously, may disappear temporarily, or may become invisible. Alternatively, the display may end while the next symbol variation display is displayed. Moreover, it may be displayed only in a part or all of the whole period during display of one symbol variation display, and may not be displayed while the next symbol variation display is displayed. This navigation character YM may be a so-called always-displayed character, but may not be continuously displayed in any case. Furthermore, the display mode may change while the navigation character YM continues to be displayed. Details of this point will be described later.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A1), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a default display mode (round non-pattern and white display mode). In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of this variation icon h0 is also the default display mode (round non-pattern and white display mode).

  In FIG. 151 (A2-1), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The change notice display corresponds to a notice indicating that when the display is made, another icon or the like may change. As another icon etc., it is a navigation character YM, it is a reserved icon h11, it is a fluctuation icon h0, it is a decoration pattern, etc. That is, the icon or the like displayed before the start of the display of the change preview display is the target to be changed. However, it may be an object to be changed even if the display is started at the same time as the start of the display of the change advance display or the display is started later. The player may or may not know what is to be changed when the display of the change preview display is started. Also, there may be suggestions on what to change. Furthermore, even if the change advance notice display is displayed, there may be a case where it is a false notice that nothing changes depending on the change advance notice display. In addition, the target change display may be determined to be one, or it may be determined to be changed.

  The icon I1 of the treasure box shown in FIG. 151 (2-1) appears on the icon I2 of the carpet. The carpet icon I2 is displayed only at the time of appearance, and when the icon I1 of the treasure box reaches the display position of the effect icon display area DIS, it disappears on the spot or flies off the screen. As the appearance timing of the icon of this change notice display, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the movement of the change icon h0 is completed, when the winning to the special figure starting opening (when the hold increases) At the start of advance notice of winning prize, at the success of a certain effect, at the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the time of temporary stop or continuation in pseudo-sequence effect (at the start of re-variation), at the start of reach state, super reach At the start, you can list the super reach and so on. That is, as the appearance timing of the icon of the change preview display, all of the above listed ones may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied. In addition, there may be a plurality of display modes of the icon I1 of the treasure box, for example, the ease of change of the navigation character YM or the like changes depending on the display mode (difference in size, color, animation) of the treasure box or carpet. It is also good. In addition, with regard to the effect display that is displayed only at the time of appearance or exit, such as the carpet icon I2, if the display mode is different from the normal display mode, the probability of changing is high, or a state advantageous to the player The probability of changing to the display mode may be high. For example, the probability of changing the display mode to a high expectation of the big hit may be high. In addition, the change notice may be a display for changing only the navigation character, but there may be a case where the effect display (the hold icon, the change icon, the notice of the change, the advance notice, etc.) other than the navigation character is changed. It may be. In addition, among effects other than the navigation character (hold icon, change icon, notice display of the change (timer notice, talk notice, chance up meter, etc.), prefetch notice display (timer notice, background display for look-ahead mode etc.), etc. The navigation character may be configured not to be changed by the advance notice display in which one effect display, a plurality of effect displays, or all the effect displays) is changed, but the navigation character may be changed. Good. In addition, the change advance notice display may be configured to change the navigation character more frequently than to change the effect display other than the navigation character, but conversely, the frequency to change the navigation character is the effect other than the navigation character It may be less than the frequency of changing the display, and two frequencies may be performed with the same frequency. Here, the effect display (navigation character, effect display other than navigation character) is displayed by "notice to change the effect display (change notice display, notice display to change the effect display other than the navigation character; hereinafter referred to as notice A)." In the case of being changed, when the less frequent effect display changed by the notice A is changed by the notice A, than when the effect display changed frequently by the notice A is changed by the notice A Also, it may or may not be configured to be easily hit.

  In FIG. 151 (3-1), the carpet icon I2 disappears, and the treasure chest icon I1 remains. The icon I1 of this treasure box is displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM. In FIG. 151 (A4-1), the display mode of the icon I1 of the treasure box changes. That is, a change animation is displayed, a treasure box is opened, a smoke image of an effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image hides a part or all of the navigation character YM and is more obvious than before the smoke image appears. It becomes difficult to see In the case where icons other than the navigation character YM are displayed, the smoke image may cover part or all of the display of the icons other than the navigation character YM from the front side. Also, the treasure box may not be opened. Furthermore, even if the treasure box is opened, another advance notice may be given. In FIG. 151 (A 5-1), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the navigation character YM changes. That is, the indigo (default color) kimono which the character of the navy character YM has been wearing is changed to a red kimono. The state in which it is suggested that the fluctuation icon h0 is likely to change to red due to the change is that the change of the character of the character of the navy character YM has changed to a red kimono. It should be noted that when the icon I1 of the treasure box is displayed, it may be determined that the display mode of the navigation character YM changes. In addition to the red kimono, it may be changed to a golden kimono or a rainbow kimono. In addition, it may be blinking white, blue or green. Also, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed corresponding to the color of the holding icon and / or the variation icon (for example, when green holding is displayed on the holding 2, the navigation character YM is green) Change into kimono, etc.). Here, if the color of the navigation character corresponds to the color of the variation icon and / or the hold icon, and if the display mode of the hold icon and / or the variation icon changes more than one, it is digested first. The color of the holding icon or the variation icon may be configured to correspond to the color of the navigation character, or the color of the holding icon to be digested later may be configured to correspond to the color of the navigation character. The color with high expectation for big hit may be displayed preferentially, and conversely, the color with low expectation for big hit may be displayed preferentially, and the degree of expectation for big hit regardless of the color of the reserved icon or the variation icon itself The high hold icon or the color of the change icon may be displayed, regardless of the color of the hold icon or the change icon itself, the hold icon or the low expectation of the big hit is low The color of the moving icon may be displayed, the color of the changing holding icon and / or the changing icon may all be reflected in the color of the navigation character, and the color of the navigation character is changing the holding icon It may be displayed at random among the colors of the variation icons and / or. In addition, the icon I1 of the treasure box whose lid is still open is still displayed next to the navigation character YM whose display mode has been changed. The icon I1 of the treasure box may disappear simultaneously with the appearance of the smoke image, or may disappear together with the smoke image. At the timing shown in FIG. 151 (A6-1), the icon I1 of the treasure box disappears, and in the effect icon display area DIS, only the navi character YM of the lady wearing a red kimono is displayed. Up to this point, the first decorative symbol continues to display at high speed.

  In FIG. 151 (A7), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and “decoration 7” is swayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol. In addition, in the 2nd decoration symbol, temporary stop is not performed but three decoration symbols continue the change display. In FIG. 151 (A8), it is developed into super reach production (Kenou reach production), the background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to the background screen of the wilderness, and the left symbol temporarily stopped is the decorative symbol display device It moves to the upper left of 208, and the right symbol which is also temporarily stopped moves to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the background screen h of the wilderness, a duel scene in which the main character of the hero and the swordsman of the enemy character are facing is displayed. Further, in the holding frame UI, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 of the holding icon display area HIS disappear and the first holding icon h11 also disappears. Further, although the height of the pedestal of the variation icon display area CIS is lowered, the lowered pedestal hs0 'is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also displayed thereon. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navi character YM of the lord like wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr. During the super reach effect, the entire holding frame UI may be hidden. That is, the base hs0 'of the variation icon display area CIS and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS may also be hidden. Furthermore, during the super reach effect, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM may also be hidden. In addition, during the super reach effect, any one or two of the navi character YM, the hold icon, and the change icon h0 may be hidden. Furthermore, during super reach production, the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and all the variation icons h0 are hidden, and the hold frame UI (left base icon bIl, four stages hs1 to hs4, pedestal hs0 (hs0 ')) The right base icon bIr) may be displayed, or conversely, all of the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the change icon h0 may be displayed to hide the hold frame UI.

  In FIG. 151 (A9), the lord-like navigation character YM, which has been facing the front, turns to the variation icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is held. In FIG. 151 (A10), the wave oscillates from the sword of the domino-like navigation character YM, and in FIG. 151 (A11), the fluctuation icon h0 which has been white is changed to red. As described above, the fluctuation icon of the red display mode has a considerably high expectation of the jackpot in the symbol fluctuation display which is currently performed. In FIG. 151 (A12), the main character of the navigation character YM has returned to the standing posture facing the front. The Toho-sama navigation character YM shown in FIG. 151 (A12) remains the display mode of the red kimono, but may return to the default display mode (display mode of the amber kimono).

  Although not shown in FIG. 151 (13), the button effect is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, it becomes possible to receive the operation of the chance button 136 by the player. In the remaining time display meter, the operation effective period starts and the gauge decreases. After that, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, a cut-in image of Tonosama is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a notice effect is performed to notify that the big hit reliability is high. The cut-in image of Tonosama overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and it is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the cut-in image of Tonosama is not displayed. In addition, the cut-in image of the lady may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or is displayed even when the operation effective period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the cut-in image of the lord is deleted, the animation display of the duel scene continues, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and the button effect is produced for the second time after developing into super reach. Is started. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts, the player can receive the operation of the chance button 136.

  In the remaining time display meter, the operation effective period starts and the gauge decreases. In addition, the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing into the super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button effect after developing into the super reach, and in this case, it develops into the super reach The rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter in the second button effect may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter in the first button effect. In addition, the operation effective period in the first button production after developing into the super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the second button rendering after the development into the super reach, or after developing into the super reach The operation effective period in the first button effect and the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing to the super reach may be the same length.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image, and the first large-screen behavior character shown in FIG. 224 Ga to a fourth large-scale behavior character 224 Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left graphic and the right graphic of the effect image and the first decorative design are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224 Gd, respectively, and the first large-scale behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article It is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state by 224 Gd. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. In addition, only a part of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd may operate, or all of the first large-scale behavior character 224Gd may be operated, for example The reliability may be made to differ depending on the number of the four large-scale behavior characters 224Gd operating. The effects of the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. It may be displayed also when the operation effective period has passed without any error. In addition, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd is performed. Also, in the case where both the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd are performed, after the effect image is displayed, the first large-size behavior character article 224Ga to fourth is performed. The operation of the large-screen behavior character item 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operations of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd are started, or the effect image And the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd may be simultaneously started. In addition, even when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, the effect display where the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd is not performed is performed but the loss display is performed. It is also possible to display a resurrection effect after a rendition effect display is performed, and to perform a big hit effect display. In addition, when the effect that the 1st large board behavior character thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavioral goods thing GDd are started, although the fluctuation icon h0 currently displayed becomes non-display, you may continue to display.

  Thereafter, the one-handed box character 224H shown in FIG. 133 (a) operates to move downward, and overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd. . Further, thereafter, light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed. The display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-surface behavior character 224 Gd, the operation of the one-man box character 224 H, and the order of starting light emission of the light guide plate IL are limited to those described above. It can be set appropriately. In addition, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-surface behavior character 224Gd, the operation of the one-man box character 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where no parting takes place.

  After the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, the one-hundred box character article 224H starts rising toward the initial position. After that, the effect image fades out, and subsequently, the first to fourth large-screen behavior characters 224 Ga to 24 Gd start moving toward the initial position. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted is resumed while being faded in. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 151 (A 14-1). In FIG. 151 (A 14-1), a scene after the lord and the swordsman have cut each other is displayed.

  The animation of the navigation character YM in FIG. 151 (A9) to FIG. (A12) corresponds to an effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 (hereinafter referred to as “change effect”). Although this change presentation can be viewed as part of the super reach presentation, it can also be viewed as another presentation different from the super reach presentation started with the start of the super reach presentation. As for the start timing of the change effect, other than during super reach effect, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when symbol fluctuation starts, when movement of the fluctuation icon h0 is completed, when winning to the special figure starting opening (hold At the start of advance notice of winning at winning), success of a certain effect, at the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at temporary stop or continuation in pseudo-series effect (at the start of re-variation), at the start of reach state , Can be listed at the start of the super reach. That is, as the start timing of the change effect, all of the above listed items may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied.

  In addition, also when the variation icon h0 changes, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed other than during the super reach effect, when the symbol variation starts, when the movement of the variation icon h0 is completed, the winnings to the special figure starting opening At the time (hold increase), at the start of advance notice at the time of winning, at the success of a certain effect, at the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo sequence effect (at the start of revariation), reach At the start of the state, the start of the super reach etc. can be listed. That is, as the timing at which the fluctuation icon h0 changes, all of the above listed ones may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied. Furthermore, the timing at which the change icon h0 changes may overlap with the button valid period in the button effect described above. Note that the display mode of the fluctuation icon may not be changed after a certain period during the super reach effect. The super reach effect described here is also a game effect, and includes a button effect, and is a type of so-called final judge effect in which either the main character or the enemy wins. After the final judgment effect result is displayed, the display mode of the fluctuation icon may not change. In addition, when an animation for changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is performed by the navigation character YM, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may be always changed or a failure may be made. May be That is, the change effect may be an effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 must be changed or when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed (if it succeeds) and when it is not changed (if it fails) There may be.

  In addition, the change animation of the change icon by the navigation character YM may not be performed. In that case, the display mode of the change icon h0 may change after the end screen of the super reach effect and the screen on which the decorative symbol is displayed are switched by the wipe at the end of the super reach effect. In addition, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be switched back to the default display mode (display mode of an amber kimono) after being switched by the wipe, and the navigation character YM is used as a preview notice of the next symbol variation display The display mode as it is (display mode of red kimono) may be maintained.

  In FIG. 151 (A 15-1), a scene where the enemy character swordsman has fallen and the hero of the lord has won is displayed, and the lord of the world navigation character YM is also posing for victory. However, although the middle design is not displayed yet, the middle design of "decoration 7" is displayed in the same drawing (A 16-1), but the red variation icon h0 is still displayed, and the second decoration is displayed. The symbol is also being displayed in a variable manner. Moreover, at the stage of FIG. 16A, each symbol (left middle right symbol) of the first decorative symbol is in temporary stop (swing fluctuation). In FIG. 151 (15-1), a big hit animation by the main character may be executed.

Here, up to Figure 151 (A 15-1) before the middle symbol is displayed can be viewed as a super reach effect, but the middle symbol is displayed and it appears as if the victory has been decided (A 16-1 ) Can be viewed as super reach effect, or can be further advanced and viewed as super reach effect until just before stop display is performed. Further, as described above, the super reach effect here corresponds to an example of the final judge effect, and it is assumed that the super reach effect is being performed until the result of the final judge effect is determined (for example, immediately before the stop display is performed). It is also good.
After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and the first decorative symbol starts fluctuation fluctuation with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The background here may be non-display, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, although the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 are not displayed, the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 may be displayed. In addition, although display of the navigation character YM is not performed, display of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Thereafter, the first special view display device 212 (not shown) is displayed in the display mode of the special view A. In addition, although the first special view display device 212 is stopped and displayed, the first sub control unit 400 is in a state of not receiving the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300, so it is determined to be the symbol determination stop Since it is not present, the fluctuation fluctuation continues in the first decorative symbol, and the fluctuation display is still in progress in the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284.

  After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", and In the 4 symbol display device, display is performed in a mode that the symbol has stopped.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is started and a winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the big hit start effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  During the super reach, both the fluctuation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Here, when the button effect that is the final judge effect is started, a part or all of the holding frame UI may be configured to be hidden or disappear. For example, although the right base icon bIr has been displayed until then, the right base icon bIr may be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judgment effect is started. In addition, when the final judge effect is started, the variable icon h0 may be configured to be hidden or disappear, or the navigation character YM may be configured to be hidden or not displayed. Both of the characters YM may be configured to be hidden or disappear. In addition, when the hold icon is displayed so far, the hold icon may be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started. Furthermore, the other icons and mini characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may also be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started, when the icons are displayed until then.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (A-2) instead of FIG. 151 (A 2-1), there may be a case where a balloon display such as “Change !?” As shown in (2-3), a balloon display such as "in preparation for change" may be added. Thereafter, the processing returns to FIG. 151 (A3-1), and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display is displayed. The balloon display of the navigation character YM corresponds to the notice effect (precursor effect) of the start of the change notice display. That is, it is a notice that suggests that the navigation character itself may change, such as "Change !?" Within the fluctuation or “following the next fluctuation of the fluctuation indicated by“ in preparation for change ”).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 151 (A 3-1) instead of FIG. 151 (A 3-1), while the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display is temporarily displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, In some cases, a carpet icon I2 appears and a treasure chest icon I1 flies away on the carpet icon I2. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change, which corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 151 (A4-2) instead of FIG. 151 (A4-1), the smoke image may be red. Depending on the type of change animation in the change advance notice display, it may give notice of the changing mode or change ease of the navigation character YM. In the case of FIG. 151 (A4-2), it is predicted that the navigation character YM may change to a display mode in which a kimono of the same color as smoke is worn. In addition, depending on the type of change animation in the change advance notice display, the expectation of the jackpot in the change or the hold may be announced.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 151 (A) 5-2 instead of FIG. 151 (A. 5-1), the color of the kimono of the navigation character YM does not change, and the navigation character YM itself may become large. . As described above, the change in the display mode of the navigation character YM may be, in addition to the change in color, a change in size or a change in shape (e.g., pose). Note that the color of the kimono of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 151 (5-2) may be amber (default color), or may be changed to red. A part of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 151 (5-2) overlaps a part of the icon I1 of the treasure box from the front side. Note that a part of the navigation character YM may overlap with the entire icon I1 of the treasure box from the front side. Alternatively, at least a part of the icon I1 of the treasure chest may overlap at least a part of the enlarged navigation character YM from the front side.

  In addition, as the probability of changing the variation icon h0, that is, the degree of expectation of the big hit, the default display mode is larger than the default display mode, the larger display mode with the default color is higher than the small display mode with red. The red and large display mode may be higher. In addition, as far as the size and the color are concerned, the color may be prioritized. For example, the display mode in red and small may be higher than the display mode in large by the default color. Or, conversely, the size may be prioritized, for example, the large display mode with the default color may be higher than the small display mode with red. Furthermore, as for the size (display size) of the navigation character YM, in addition to the large size and the small size, there may be a plurality of sizes such as intermediate sizes.

  When the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the variation icon h0 changes to red, and when it is a display mode wearing a golden kimono, the variation icon h0 changes to gold, and a rainbow When the display mode is a color kimono, the variation icon h0 may change to a rainbow color. In addition, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode in which a red kimono is worn, the fluctuation icon h0 may be easily changed to a color (red, gold, rainbow) whose expectation of the jackpot is red or more. That is, if the change of the change icon h0 is successful, it may be determined that the color changes to red or more, or the color may be determined to be red or more. However, even if the navigation character YM is in a display mode in which a red kimono is worn, the expectation of the big hit may change to a color lower than red (green, blue, white blinking, white). Furthermore, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode in which a rainbow-colored kimono, which is a premier color, is displayed, the color of the variation icon h0 may also be changed to the rainbow. That is, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, the display mode of the navigation character YM directly notifies that a big hit is made, and the navigation character YM is in another color. In the case of the display mode wearing a kimono (for example, red), if the display mode of the variation icon changes, it will be easy to make a big hit as a result, and the ease of big hit will be It can be notified indirectly.

  In addition, even when the display mode is not changed, the navigation character YM may change the fluctuation icon h0. Alternatively, the change icon h0 may be changed only when the display mode changes. Furthermore, although the character of the protagonist is a so-called always-displayed character, the navigation character YM for changing the fluctuation icon h0 may be a character displayed only when changing the fluctuation icon h0. Also, the character may be displayed only when giving a notice. Furthermore, the character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above may be used as a character for changing the fluctuation icon h0, or only the character set by the player in the character selection in customization is the fluctuation icon It may be possible to use it as a character to change h0.

  FIG. 152 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG.

  Following FIG. 151 (A 6-1), a change notice display is made so as to return to FIG. 151 (A 7) through FIG. 152 (A 6-2-1) and the same figure (A 6-2-3). The navigation character YM may change a plurality of times until the icon I1 of the treasure box is hidden. The navi character YM shown in FIG. 152 (A 6-2-1) is a red kimono, but the navi character YM shown in FIG. 152 (A 6-2-2) is a golden kimono. The treasure box icon I1 may disappear once and be displayed anew. Further, the change advance notice may be displayed over a plurality of changes. In this case, the icon I1 of the treasure chest repeats opening and closing.

  Also, following the FIG. 151 (A 6-1), change animations as shown in FIG. 152 (A 6-3-1) to FIG. 152 (A 6-3-2) may be displayed. That is, the navigation character YM may be further promoted by a notice (here, a UFO icon UFI) different from the change notice display. In the same figure (A 6-3-3a) continued from FIG. 152 (A 6-3-2), the gold beam from the flying UFO icon UFI is emitted toward the navi-character YM wearing a red kimono As shown in FIG. 152 (A 6-3-4a), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode in which a golden kimono is worn. Alternatively, in the same figure (A 6-3-3b) continuing from FIG. 152 (A 6-3-2), the gray beam from the flying UFO icon UFI is directed to the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono It is irradiated, and as shown in FIG. 152 (A 6-3-4b), the navigation character YM is enlarged while wearing a red kimono.

  Although the promotion has been described here, the navigation character YM may have no change even when the beam is irradiated (a so-called failure pattern), or when the beam is irradiated, the default display mode or There may be a display mode in which a blue kimono is worn or a case where it becomes smaller (when it is demoted).

In addition, FIG. 152 (A 14-2-1) may be displayed following FIG. 151 (A 14-1), which is a scene after the majesty and the swordsman have cut each other in the super reach production. That is, as the middle design, the "decoration 6" different from the left and right design ("decoration 7") is displayed (shaved) largely, and in the same figure (A 14-2-2), the left design, the middle design, the right All decorative symbols of the symbol are once displayed thinner than usual. Also, in the same figure, a scene in which the majesty falls is displayed. In FIG. 152 (A 14-2-3), all the decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols are again displayed in normal density, and in the same (A 14-2-4), the wipe effect is This is done, and switching between a super reach presentation scene (display presentation) and a normal background (a background before the start of the super reach presentation shown in FIG. 151 (A1) etc.) is performed. In the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 152 (A 14-2-5), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily becomes a wipe display of a non-pattern same color. In this wipe display, the fluctuation icon h0 and the navigation character YM disappear, and the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. Also, the model title is displayed at the left corner. The variation icon h0 or the navigation character YM may also be displayed. In FIG. 152 (A 14-2-6), the wipe-out is performed, and the background returns to the background normally, and the display mode of the navigation character YM also returns to the default display mode. In addition, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be returned to the default display mode at the start of the wipe effect (the timing of FIG. 152 (A 14-2-4)). In FIG. 152 (A 14-2-7), the wipe effect ends, and the decoration symbol display device 208 shakes and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" which is a combination of losing. There is. Further, the holding frame UI is also displayed, and the variation icon h0 and the first holding icon h11 are also displayed. Although the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 152 (A 14-2-7) remains in the red display mode, it may return to the default display mode, or even if the fluctuation icon h0 itself is erased. Good. On the other hand, the display mode of the navigation character YM may remain the display mode in which a red kimono is worn. In this example, although the display to return to the default state from the state in which the display mode of the navigation character has changed is not visible because the navigation character is not displayed, the display to return to the default state from the state in which the display mode of the navigation character is changed May be visible. (For example, the display may switch from a state in which the display mode of the navigation character has changed to a default state, or an animation display in which the state of the display mode of the navigation character may change to a default state.
In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 and / or the navigation character YM are displayed on wipe out (FIG. 152 (A 14-2-6) to FIG. (A 14-2-7)), they are not displayed. There may be a case, and when it is displayed, the resurrection effect may be more easily performed than when it is not displayed. Alternatively, when displayed, the arrangement may be such that the resurrection effect is always performed, and when it is not displayed, the resurrection effect may or may not be performed.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 152 (A 14-2-1) to FIG. (A 14-2-3), a part of the holding frame UI (the pedestal hs0 ′ and the right base icon bIr) is displayed, but the holding frame The entire UI may be hidden, or only part of it may be hidden. The variation icon h0 may be hidden or the navigation character YM may be hidden. Alternatively, both the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be hidden. Also, if the hold icon has been displayed so far, the hold icon may also be hidden. Furthermore, the other icons and mini characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may also be hidden if they have been displayed so far.

  FIG. 153 is a view showing another modification of the example shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to FIG. 151 (A 16-1), displays as shown in FIG. 153 (A 16-2-1) to the same figure (A 16-2-2) may be performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (A16-2-2), the entire screen starts to be thinned. After this, it will disappear once in the re-lottery effect, and the screen shown in FIG. 153 (A 16-2-1) may be displayed again (the screen of the medal of victory), or FIG. 151 (A 14-2-3). The screen shown in) may be displayed (the screen of a martial arts defeat), or a combination of decorative symbols (in the case of a combination of big hit or lost) with a normal background as shown in the same figure (A 16-2-3) A screen may be displayed in which a combination is displayed).

  In addition, even on the redisplayed screen, the navigation character YM and the fluctuation icon h0 are displayed, and if the display mode of the navigation character YM and / or the fluctuation icon h0 is a red display mode, an advantageous big hit confirmation (for example, a definite variation) A big hit or a large number of rounds may be determined. Alternatively, if the display mode is not changed, an advantageous jackpot is not determined, but if the display mode is promoted, the advantageous jackpot may be determined, and the display mode is a gold or rainbow premium If so, an advantageous jackpot may be finalized.

  Further, FIG. 153 (1) to FIG. 15 (12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM is displayed across a plurality of changes and also functions as a prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 153 (i), the navigation character YM in a display mode in which a red kimono is worn is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of the special view 1 are stored, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes.

  In FIG. 153 (2), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost design. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 153 (3), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM of the display mode wearing the red kimono remains displayed.

  In FIG. 153 (4-1), change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started. That is, the navy character YM of the lord who had been in a posture (initial posture) standing up to that time turns to the variation icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is held. In FIG. 153 (15), the wave oscillates from the sword of the domino navigation character YM, but in FIG. 153 (i), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 remains the default, and the change effect ends in failure. There is. In FIG. 153 (7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost design. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono is again displayed in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 153 (i), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started again. Even when the third symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM of the display mode wearing the red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 153 (9), the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started again. In FIG. 153 (11), the fluctuation icon h0 which has been white until now has changed to red, and the normal notice is started. In FIG. 12 (i), the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture in the display mode in which the red kimono is worn. After that, although not shown, the jackpot symbol is finalized and displayed in the symbol variation display currently performed.

  Also, in FIG. 153 (FIG. 4-2-1) instead of FIG. 153 (FIG. 4-1), the navigation character YM moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the hold icon display area HIS while symbol variation display is performed. In the same figure (4-2-2), the change animation for the hold icon is started. The movement of the navigation character YM may be animation, or the display position may be switched instantaneously. Also, when the navigation character YM goes out of the effect icon display area DIS, another display (for example, a business trip to the signboard at the position (initial position) where the navigation character YM was displayed in the effect icon display area DIS The icon display described as "inside" may be displayed.

  Note that the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change), or conversely, even if it is always successful (the display mode of the hold icon changes) Good. In addition, the change effect may be performed only on the pre-read target hold icon. For example, the first holding icon h11 may be performed only when the number of holdings is one, or a plurality of holding icons (which may include a variation icon) may be performed. Furthermore, the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may be performed any number of times until the display mode changes for the pre-read target hold (until it succeeds), and may not be performed again if it fails once. .

  Further, the change presentation may be performed again on the hold icon whose display mode has once changed by the change presentation. This applies not only to the hold icon but also to the change icon h0.

  Furthermore, the navigation character YM may move from the effect icon display area DIS even in the change effect with respect to the change icon h0. Further, the navigation character YM may not move out of the effect icon display area DIS, or may move within the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, the navigation character YM may be movable only within the holding frame UI, or may be movable out of the holding frame UI.

  In this example, the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is performed every change from the next change of the change of the navigation character YM to red to the change of suspension of the prefetch target, There may be a change that does not perform change animation between the next change of the change in which the color of the navigation character YM turns red and the change of the prefetch target. Moreover, the change animation may be performed also for the change in which the navigation character YM turns red.

  FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of the change effect of the hold icon by the navigation character YM and the change effect of the change icon.

  In FIG. 154 (1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of the special view 1 are stored, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes.

  In FIG. 154 (2), the effect icon (here, the UFO icon UFI) appears outside the holding frame UI and approaches the holding frame UI. The effect icon may appear in the holding frame UI. As shown in FIG. 154 (3), a white beam is emitted from the UFO icon UFI to the second holding icon h12, and as shown in FIG. 154 (4), the display mode of the second holding icon h12 is The display mode changes from the default display mode to the white display mode. In other words, he has succeeded in promoting. Note that there are multiple types of effect icons, and the success probability of the promotion effect may change depending on the effect icon that appears. For example, when the first effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be always succeeded, and when the second effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be 80% or more. If the third effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be less than 50% successful. In FIG. 154 (4), the UFO icon UFI has disappeared. In FIG. 154 (5), the three decorative symbols are in the temporary stop state. In FIG. 154 (U6), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost design. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 154 (G7), the holding of the first held icon h11 is digested, and symbol variation display is started, and in FIG. 154 (G8), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture.

  In (U9) of FIG. 154, the navigation character YM in the default display mode changes to a bow-draw pose, and a promotion effect of the holding icon by the navigation character YM is started. The promotion effect here is also an animation display. In FIG. 154 (Fig. 10), the arrow is fired, the arrow flies over the fluctuating icon h0, and in the same figure ((11)), the first holding icon h11 which is a display mode of white blinking is hit. In FIG. 12 (U), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from white blinking to blue display mode, and the promotion effect succeeds. The promotion effect here may also fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change) or, conversely, may succeed (the display mode of the hold icon changes). In addition, the first hold icon h11 may be performed only when the number of holds is 1, or a plurality of hold icons (which may include a variation icon) may be performed. Furthermore, the promotion effect may be performed any number of times until the display mode changes with respect to the prefetch target hold (until success), and may not be performed again if it fails once. Further, the promotion effect may be performed again on the hold icon whose display mode has been changed once by the promotion effect. In addition, even if a plurality of suspension icons are displayed, the promotion effect by the navigation character may be an effect performed only for one of the suspension icons (that is, the position of suspension icon A moves with reduction of suspension) Even in this case, the promotion effect by the navigation character is performed only for the holding icon A.), and the effects may be performed on a plurality of holding icons and / or variation icons displayed in the holding icon display area. . In FIG. 154 (う 13), the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture, and in the same figure (う 14), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the lost decoration symbols stopped. It is done. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 154 (15), the hold of the first reserve icon h11 is digested, and symbol variation display is started, and in FIG. 154 (16), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed variation. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture. The fluctuation icon h0 is an icon changed from the first holding icon h11 that has been changed to the blue display mode in the previous promotion effect, and is similarly displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the blue display mode.

  In FIG. 154 (U17), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display appears on the icon I2 of the carpet in the effect icon display area DIS, and in FIG. Icon I1 remains. In FIG. 154 (Fig. 19), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image hides a part or all of the navigation character YM Is clearly less visible than before the appearance of the smoke image. In FIG. 154 ((20-1), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes from the default display mode to the display mode wearing a red kimono. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (で 21), the icon I1 of the treasure box disappears, and only the navi character YM of the lady wearing red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The color of the display mode of the navigation character YM indicates the reliability (expected degree) of the big hit of the symbol variation display currently performed. Alternatively, it may represent the ease of change (promotion) of the display mode of the variation icon. Furthermore, although the hold icon is not displayed here, when the hold icon is displayed, it may indicate the ease of change (promotion) of the display mode of the hold icon.

  In FIG. 154 (う 23), the state reaches the reach state, and in the same figure (う 24), it develops into the super reach effect. In the super reach presentation, of the holding frame UI, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 of the holding icon display area HIS disappear, and when the holding icon remains, the holding icon also disappears. In addition, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 154 (2424), the right base icon bIr disappears, and the foot portion of the navy character YM wearing the red kimono disappears. Also, although the pedestal in the variation icon display area CIS is sunk, the variation icon h0 of the blue display mode is displayed. In FIG. 154 (d) in the super reach, the navigation character YM completely disappears, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the blue display mode is displayed on the lowered pedestal hs0 '. Here, although the navigation character YM has disappeared, it may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. Also, both the pedestal hs0 'and the variation icon h0 may disappear, or only one may disappear.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (U 27-1), as a continuation of the super reach effect, a duel scene in which the main character of the hero and the swordsman of the enemy character are facing is displayed . Here too, both the pedestal hs0 'and the fluctuation icon h0 are displayed.

  FIG. 155 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 154 and modified examples.

  In (155) of FIG. 155, all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed thinner than usual, and a scene in which the crown is fallen is displayed. Here too, both the pedestal hs0 'and the fluctuation icon h0 are displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (No. 30), the super reach effect is finished, the background is returned to normal, and the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display, the pedestal hs0 'and the fluctuation icon h0 are displayed. There is. In FIG. 155 (31), the display of the left symbol and the right symbol is restored, and the pedestal which has been sunk so far is starting to rise while carrying the fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (32), the combination of decorative symbols is displayed swaying, and the holding frame UI is also displayed again. Also, the navigation character YM is displayed in the default display mode.

  Also, in FIG. 155 (FIG. 20-2), instead of FIG. 154 (FIG. 20-1), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode in which a premier rainbow kimono is worn. In this case, regardless of the display mode (color) of the variation icon h0, since the display mode of the navigation character YM is rainbow color, it is a big hit decision. Note that the display mode of the variation icon may be changed to a display mode of red or more, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color. In addition, when the navigation character YM functions as a pre-reading advance notice, the display mode of the pre-reading target reserved icon may also be changed to a red or higher display mode, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color.

  Also, instead of FIG. 154 (う 27-1), in FIG. 155 (う 27-2), the right base icon bIr is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the navigation of the display mode wearing a red kimono is further performed. Character YM is displayed. The navigation character YM displayed here does not have to do anything, just being displayed. Alternatively, the navigation character YM itself may promote its own display mode or change the display mode of the variation icon. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may be changed by another notice display.

  Here, the notice by the presentation icon (here UFO icon UFI) and / or the change notice (here the treasure box icon I1) is a row before one decorative symbol (for example, left symbol) becomes a temporary stop indication Although it is configured such that no advance notice is given by the effect icon and / or change notice display after one decorative symbol has become temporary stop display, one decorative symbol has been temporarily stopped. The presentation icon and / or the change notice may be displayed afterward. In addition, although it described as one decorative symbol, it may be a plurality of decorative symbols, and may be all the decorative symbols. Further, in the state where the symbol (the variation display by the special symbol display device) is completely stopped, the notice by the effect icon and / or the change notice display is not performed, but may be performed.

  FIGS. 155 (E1) to (E4-1) are examples in which the navigation character YM itself changes the display mode of itself.

  In FIG. 155 (No. 1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  In FIG. 155 (E2), the pose of the navigation character YM changes, and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 155 (e.g. 3-1), the navigation character YM itself is encased in a gray smoke image and becomes difficult to visually recognize, and in the same diagram (e.e. 4-1), the display mode changes to a red kimono ing.

  Also, in FIG. 155 (E 3-2) instead of FIG. 155 (E 3-1), the navigation character YM itself is encased in a red smoke image, and thereafter, the navigation character YM is a red kimono It changes to the display mode which wore. Thus, the change animation itself may give notice of the display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes. Further, the red smoke image may be a notice display for giving notice that the display mode is changed to red or more if the change of the navigation character is successful, and it is determined that the display mode is changed to red or more It may be a notice display.

  Also, instead of FIG. 155 (E 3-1), in FIG. E (E 3-3), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in an iridescent smoke image, and a symbol variation display currently performed, or It becomes big hit decision (may be big hit rich) with the symbol fluctuation indication which is started after this. As described above, the change animation itself may be used to give a normal notice or a prefetch notice. The rainbow smoke image may be a display for giving notice that the display mode is changed to the rainbow color if the change of the navigation character is successful. In this case, the rainbow smoke image may be displayed even if the rainbow smoke image is displayed. It is not necessary for the color variation image and / or the inside of the displayed symbol variation and / or retention to be a big hit (which may be big hit).

  Also, in FIG. 155 (E 4-2) instead of FIG. 155 (E 4-1), the navigation character is changed to another navigation character. Here, it has been changed to the princess's navigation character. The type of the changing character may be a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above, or may be only a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization.

  Further, in FIG. 155 (E4-3) instead of FIG. 155 (E 4-2), the navi character is changed to a navy character (for example, a bancho character) which can not be selected by the player. In addition, the navigation character of the Bancho may be configured so that the promotion effect of the holding icon and / or the variation icon may be more easily performed than the navigation character YM, or the symbol variation and / or the holding in which the navigation character is changed It may be configured to have a high expectation of the inner jackpot.

  In addition, the navigation character of the princess (bancho) may be configured to be more likely to perform the promotion effect of the holding icon and / or the fluctuation icon than the navigation character YM, or the symbol fluctuation and the navigation character changed. And / or may be configured to have a high expectation of a jackpot in the hold, or is configured to be prone (or necessarily generated) to be a notice and / or a super reach effect in which a princess (bancho) appears It may be

  In addition, when the navigation character YM changes to another navigation character, it may be configured to change only to the navigation character selectable by the player, so that the player is changed to the navigation character which can not be selected. It may be configured, and there may be both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and cases where the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character. When the player is changed to a selectable navy character and when the player is changed to a non-selectable navy character, the player can select more than the selectable navy character. The impossible navigation character may be configured to be more easily effective in promoting the holding icon and / or the fluctuation icon, or the symbol fluctuation in which the navigation character is changed and / or the expectation of the jackpot within the holding is high. It may be configured as follows. Conversely, when the player is changed to a selectable navy character and when the player is changed to a non-selectable navi character, there are cases in which the player can play a game rather than the non-selectable navy character. The navigation character selectable by the person may be configured to facilitate promotion of the holding icon and / or the variation icon, or the symbol variation in which the navigation character is changed and / or the expectation of the jackpot within the holding It may be configured to have a high degree.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 155 (E4-4) instead of FIG. 155 (E4-1), the character does not change, and its own change presentation has failed.

  In this example, the navigation character YM itself is an example of changing the display mode of itself alone, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice is not involved, but the color of the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice is displayed. The display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes may be notified in advance. For example, when the icon I1 of the red treasure box appears, the navigation character YM may be determined to change to a red, or a display mode of red or more.

  Furthermore, the color of the icon I1 of the treasure box may give notice of the expectation of the jackpot in the currently displayed symbol variation display or the symbol variation display to be started thereafter. That is, depending on the color of the icon I1 of the treasure chest, a normal notice or a advance notice may be given.

  FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in which the holding frame is temporarily not visible.

  The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (one). Also, the navigation character YM in the initial attitude shown in FIG. 156 (O) is a default display mode. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of the special view 1 are stored, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes.

  In FIG. 156 (2), the hold of the special view 1 is increased, and the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. This third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

  In FIG. 156 (O), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost design. The navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture. Moreover, the background of the sea is still displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (O).

  In FIG. 156 (5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and the sea background is still displayed.

  In FIG. 156 (6), a background change notice, which is a type of pre-reading notice, is started. The target of the background change notice (prefetching target hold) here is the hold (second hold at this timing) increased at the timing of (2) in FIG. In the background change notice, an image of a brow appears from the left and right, and an animation in which the brow is closed turns the entire display screen into a brow image (see FIG. 156 (7)). Therefore, both the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0, and the navi character YM are overlapped from the front side by the image of the eyelid and become invisible. It should be noted that, instead of the image of the eyebrow, an image overlapping from the front may appear on a part of the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM. Alternatively, the image may not be overlapped with the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0, and the navigation character YM.

  It should be noted that the background change notice may be started at the time of pre-reading target hold winning (FIG. 156 (2) timing). In this example, although it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started before the fluctuation of the prefetch target hold. For example, the same background as the background change notice may be displayed at the start of the change of the prefetch target hold.

  In addition, in the background change notice, the big hit expectation of the pre-reading target hold may be expressed by the appearance image (here, the image of 襖), or if the navigation character YM of the same color as the 襖 color is appearing The navigation character YM functions as a notice of change and corresponds to a change notice display. In addition, it may also function as a notice of the background itself that the color of a rose changes to the background of a mountain if it is green. Furthermore, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

  In FIG. 156 (8), the eyelids open, the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the fluctuation icon h0, and the navigation character YM begin to appear, and in FIG. It is gone. By the background change notice, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the night background. Further, the navigation character YM after the background change is changed to a character dependent on the changed background. Here, the character of the robot is changed from the character of the lord. In this example, one kind of character corresponds to one kind of background, but plural kinds of characters may correspond to one kind of background.

  In FIG. 156 (11), it has entered the reach state. In addition, the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode from FIG. 156 (9-1) to FIG. 156 (11). The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may change from the default display mode to the red display mode in response to the reach state rush. Although the holding frame UI is displayed, all the holding icons h11 and h12 have disappeared. Then, it develops into super reach production and changes to the background of super reach production (here the background of the wilderness). On the background of the wilderness, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (O13) displays a scene where the lord has been defeated. The fallen character of the robot, the navigation character YM of the robot, overlaps and is difficult to view.

  In FIG. 156 (14), the wipe effect is started, and by the wipe-in, the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the wipe display. As shown in FIG. 156 (15), in the wipe display here, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM also disappear, and also the second decorative symbol and the second number-on-hold display disappear, and the model title is displayed at the left corner Is only displayed. In FIG. 156 (16), the user wipes out and the background returns to the background of the night, and the navigation character YM also begins to be visible.

  In FIG. 156 (17), the wipe effect is finished, and the decoration symbol display device 208 shakes and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" which is a combination of losing. In addition, the holding frame UI is also displayed, and the display of the variation icon h0 in the red display mode and the holding icons h11 and h12 are resumed.

  In FIG. 156 (18), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7” which is a combination of losing.

  Thereafter, the first suspension is digested and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and then the next symbol variation display is started as shown in FIG. 156 (20-1). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and the symbol change of the pre-reading target hold is ended, but the background remains the background of the night.

  In FIG. 156 (21), the background change notice is started again, the image of the eyebrow appears from the left and right, and the eyelid is closed, the whole display screen becomes an eyebrow image here (FIG. 156 (22)) reference). In FIG. 156 (23), the eyelids are open, the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the fluctuation icon h0, and the navigation character YM start to be seen, and in FIG. It is gone. As shown in FIG. 156 (24), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is returned to the background of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also returned to the character of the lord.

  Also, in FIG. 156 (9-2) instead of FIG. 156 (9-1), the display mode of the navigation character YM of the robot is changed to a display mode different from the default. The display mode (for example, color, shape, size, etc.) of the background dependent character may also change according to the reliability of the big hit. Or, it may be originally changed.

  The navigation character YM may change depending on the presentation background regardless of the background of the advance notice. For example, when a beach background, a castle town background, and a castle background appear in order, the navigation character may be changed to the navigation character YM depending on each background. The appearance order of the plurality of types of backgrounds may be random. When the player changes the effect mode, the navigation character YM may change depending on the background change. In addition, a navigation character different from the navigation character depending on the effect background may be displayed. For example, when the navigation character A is displayed on the effect background A and the navigation character B is displayed on the effect background B, the navigation character B may be displayed on the effect background A. Here, when a navigation character that does not match the effect background is displayed, it is configured that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the fluctuation icon is more easily performed than when the navigation character that matches the effect background is displayed. It may be configured such that the expectation of jackpot in symbol variation and / or retention with which the navigation character has changed is high (or jackpot confirmation (may be jackpot rich)), The notification and / or the super reach presentation may be configured to occur frequently (or occur necessarily) when a navigation character that does not match the background appears.

  Alternatively, the type of the navigation character YM may not change even if the background change is performed, or may not change absolutely.

  FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example of an effect that a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 157 (or 1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  In FIG. 157 (or 2-1), a balloon of a line calling a friend is additionally displayed on the navigation character YM. The display of the balloon corresponds to the notification that the other character (爺 or princess) is displayed, which is performed by the currently-displayed Tonosama's navigation character YM. In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 157 (or 3-1), the display of the navi character YM1 of the princess in addition to the domino character YM is added, and the princess is successfully called. The appearance of the princess character may be animation display, or may be an appearance appearing instantaneously. In the case of the animation display, it may be an animation in which the character is not visible initially by the smoke image, or may be an animation appearing by walking from the right end of the screen. This princess's navigation character YM1 is also a default display mode.

  In FIG. 157 (or 4), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost design. Both of the default display modes, the Tonosama's navigation character YM and the princess's navigation character YM1 are displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 157 (or 5), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. Even if the next symbol variation display is started, the two navigation characters YM and YM1 remain displayed. Thus, the display of a plurality of navigation characters may span multiple variations. However, in the symbol variation display in which the navigation character YM1 appears, the appearing navigation character YM1 may disappear. Even in this case, the navi character (here, the navi character YM here) previously displayed is displayed across a plurality of changes.

  In FIG. 157 (or 5), a balloon of a line calling a whistle is additionally displayed to the two navigation characters YM and YM1 in this case, and the effect icon display area DIS shown in the same figure (or 6-1) is displayed. In addition to the two navigation characters YM and YM1, a display of a navy navigation character YM2 is added, and it succeeds in calling a whistle. In other words, this means that all three people are all ready. In this effect, the more the navi characters gather, the higher the probability that the fluctuation icon h0 changes, the higher the probability of changing to a premiere or a color close to the premiere, and the higher the expectation for a big hit with the fluctuation. Or, the expectation to hit the jackpot may increase after the next change. In addition, if all three of them are gathered, the rainbow color of the premiere may be determined or the big hit may be determined. In FIG. 157 (or 7-1), in a state in which all three persons are aligned, the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and “decoration 7” is displayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol.

Also, in place of FIG. 157 (or 2-1), in FIG. 157 (or 2-2-1), a notice other than the navigation character YM itself is given. That is, in FIG. 157 (or 2-1), the navigation character YM
In this example, the roulette display icon RI is additionally displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the roulette advance is started. The roulette advance notice here may be dedicated to the advance notice of the appearance of another navi character, or may be another advance notice (such as a hold change advance notice). In FIG. 157 (or 2-2), the character of a princess is displayed on the roulette display icon RI. After this, the princess's navigation character YM1 may appear, but there may be cases where no navigation character appears (in the case of a so-called failure), or different navigation characters (for example, the navy navigation character YM2) May appear. Although the roulette display icon RI is configured not to display the characters of the characters that have already appeared, the characters of the characters that have already appeared may appear. In that case, the same character may be displayed more than once depending on the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, when the princess character is stopped and displayed three times on the roulette display icon RI, the princess's Three characters may be displayed, etc., or a promotion effect may be performed on a character that has already appeared according to the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, 3 characters of a princess on the roulette display icon RI) If the display is stopped once, the princess appears at the first time, the kimono of the princess turns red at the second time, the kimono of the princess turns gold at the third time, etc.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 157 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG. 157 (or 3-2), there may be a case where no navigation character appears and fails.

  Also, in place of FIG. 157 (or 3-1), in FIG. (Or 3-3), a navy character YM2 of a frog appears instead of the navy character YM1 of a princess. As described above, the order of appearance is not determined, and different animation may be performed depending on the navi character displayed next. For example, in FIG. 157 (or 3-1), even though it was thought that the character navigation character YM of the princess would come, the navi character YM2 of the spider is coming, and the animation surprised is displayed The princess may come in the premiere stage before the princess. In addition, depending on the appearance order of the character, the probability of changing the fluctuation icon h0 changes, the probability of changing to the premiere or color close to the color changes, the expectation of hitting the big with the change changes, or the big hit occurs after the next change. The degree of expectation may change or not affect them at all.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 157 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG. 157 (or 3-4-1), the display position may be determined in advance by the character. That is, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 157 (or 3-4-1), the domino-like navi character YM is displayed at the left end, and the princess navi character YM1 is displayed with a gap of one. Then, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 157 (or 3-4-3), the navy navigation character YM2 is displayed at a position which has been opened by one person. As described above, even when the order of display positions (don't, mochi, princess) is fixed, there may be cases (might, princess, mochi) when the order is broken. It may be (big hit finalization effect) or big hit.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 157 (or 3-5-1) instead of FIG. 157 (or 3-1), when the number of navi characters increases, notification of the increase is given by character display (here, “Hime Stock” Or may be notified by sound from a speaker, or may be notified by blinking of a lamp or the like. Also, in FIG. 157 (or 3-5-3), the fact that all the members have been gathered is notified by character display. In addition, when all members set successfully, the character display of "all members set" is always displayed, but different character display (for example, "super hot" or "all members set reach", etc.) is displayed. In the case, it may be a premiere effect (big hit finalized effect) or a big hit, or a specific reach mode may always be started. Also here, in addition to the notification of the character display, or in place of the notification of the character display, the notification may be made by voice from the speaker, or may be performed by blinking the lamp or the like.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 157 (or 6-2) instead of FIG. 157 (or 6-1), characters other than the lord, princess, and nephew (here, the character YM3 of the mince flower imitating a cactus) increase When it is, it may be premier production (big hit finalized production) or big hit.

  In addition, even though "hime" is specified and called, if "爺" is displayed, it may be the premier effect (big hit finalized presentation) or it may be a big hit, and "hime" is called If “爺” is displayed more often, if the character (“Hime”) as it is called appears, it may be jackpot rich (or jackpot determined). In addition, depending on the display mode of the navigation character (in this example, the lord) calling another navigation character, the other navigation character may be easy to appear (stock) or hard to appear (stock). Also, depending on the type of navigation character calling another navigation character, it may be easy for another navigation character to appear (stock) or hard to appear (stock). For example, it may be easier for another navigation character to appear (stock) if the princess's navigation character calls than the lord's navigation character. Also, the appearing (stock) characters are not limited to different types of characters, and may be the same type of navigation characters. For example, there may be a case where a plurality of the Toho-sama's navigation character YM may be displayed, or there may be a case where it is expressed as Tonosama × 3. Moreover, even if it is the same kind of navigation character, the display modes (color, shape, pose, size) may be different. Furthermore, depending on the character, the effect to be performed after being displayed may be different. For example, when an effect is performed in which the character is released from the effect icon display area DIS, the pseudo-series effect start may be released when releasing the lord, the suspension may be promoted when the princess is released, and the timer advance may be started when the bag is released. . Also, a plurality of characters may be released. Furthermore, when a plurality of characters are discharged at the same time, effects different from single discharge may be performed. For example, simultaneous release of the princess and the princess may start a pseudo-series effect that is hotter than the single princess.

  FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a modification etc. shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 158 (1), the default display form of the lord-like navigation character YM is displayed in the initial posture, and to the right of it, the default display form of the princess navigation character YM1 is displayed in the initial posture. ing. Further, on the right side of the princess's navigation character YM1, a treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  In FIG. 158 (2-1), the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, and a smoke image appears from the inside, and only the princess's navigation character YM1 is the smoke among the characters of the character Namy YM and princess's navigation character YM1. It is wrapped in an image. In other words, the smoke image does not reach the navi character YM of the lord. In FIG. 158 (4), the smoke image disappears, and the princess's navigation character YM1 changes to the display mode in which a red kimono is worn. In FIG. 158 (5), the icon I1 of the treasure box has disappeared.

  In FIG. 158 ((2-1)), the pose of the domino-like navigation character YM changes, and the hand with a fan is raised. In FIG. 158 (2 2-2-2), the Tomonado navigation character YM causes a smoke image to appear, and only the princess navigation character YM1 is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 158 (2-2-3), the smoke image disappears, and the princess's navigation character YM1 changes to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn. In addition, you, the navigation character YM of the lord has returned to the initial posture.

  In Fig. 158 (3-1), the smoke image appearing from the icon I1 of the treasure box in place of Fig. 158 (3-1) is both the domino character YM and the princess character YM1. It wraps the navi character. Then, in FIG. 158 (3-2-2), the smoke image disappears, and the domino character navigation character YM and the princess navigation character YM1 both change to the display mode in which the red kimono is worn. That is, the display mode is changing for both of them. Here, both of them change to the same color, but may change to different colors. For example, one may be red and the other may be gold. Alternatively, both may be enveloped in the smoke image, but only one may change, the other may remain default.

  When a plurality of navigation characters are displayed, one navigation character (for example, princess) may be promoted, and the other navigation character (for example, Yoshimune) may not be promoted. Also, both navigation characters may be promoted. In that case, changing one of the characters (for example, princess) may be hotter than when changing the other character (for example, Yoshimune), and the jackpot expectation may be the same. Also, the change of both characters may be hotter than the change of one character. Also, it may be hotter to change one character depending on the change mode than to change both characters. For example, a combination of the default display form of the lord-like navi character YM and the combination of the princess navi-character YM1 of the display aspect in the iridescent kimono and the display modi The combination of the former and the combination of the princess's navigation character YM1 of the display mode in which the kimono is worn may be more likely to make a big hit than the combination of the latter. Also, both characters may be required to change. In that case, it may be configured to change to the same color, or may be configured to change to a different color. Also, depending on the changing character, the meaning of the changed character may change. For example, in the case of the display manner of the display manner in the red kimono, the variation is hot, and in the case of the princess of the display manner of the red kimono of the display manner, the navigation character of YM1 is likely to develop into super reach. It is also good. In addition, if it is a big hit determined if it is a display character like a kimono with rainbow color, it is a big hit, and if it is a princess navigation character YM with a rainbow colored clothes, it will be a big hit with definite variation ( May be an advantageous jackpot).

  In this example, the navigation character YM is displayed when one navigation character is always displayed and another navigation character is newly called by the navigation character or when a plurality of navigation characters are always displayed. The present embodiment is also applicable to the case where one or more navigation characters are displayed at a specific timing because there is a period of time that is not set.

  FIGS. 158 (1-1) to (15) show examples of effects in which a button effect is associated with the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 158 (G 1-1), the navigation character YM of the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  A button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. The button display icon 136D is a display mode of a balloon and corresponds to a notice by the navigation character YM itself. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT that indicates the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In FIG. 158 (3), the operation effective period is started, and in FIG. 158 (4), the remaining period meter is slightly reduced. In FIG. 158 (5), the chance button 136 is operated, and in FIG. ((6)), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started in response to the operation of the chance button 136, and the character of the lord looks visible by the effect image. It is difficult. In (158) of FIG. 158, the character changes to a lord-like navi character in a display manner in which a red kimono is worn.

  In FIG. 158 ((1-2-1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture, but the button display icon 136D is not displayed here. In other words, when the back button effect is performed and the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 158 (1-2-2), the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in FIG. In response, the change animation of the navigation character YM is started. Thus, the display mode of the navigation character may be changed by the back button effect.

  Note that when both the back button effect and another button effect (with a button display) overlap, both may change, the back button effect may be prioritized, and another button effect may be prioritized. The same may be applied to back button duplication.

  In addition, when the prefetch button advance notice and the button advance notice of the change (normal advance notice) overlap, the prefetch button advance notice may be prioritized, or the button advance notice of the change may be prioritized.

  Also, in FIG. ((2-2) in place of FIG. 158 ((2-1)), the button display icon 136D is not added to the navigation character YM, but at a position away from the navigation character YM The button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT are displayed at positions outside the effect icon display area DIS and also outside the holding frame UI. The display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT here is a notice different from the notice by the navigation character YM itself, and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed also by this different notice. The display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT may be always displayed, or may be displayed before the effective period is started.

  FIG. 159 shows an example of effect in which the effect of the button hold icon is associated with the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 159 (G-3-1), the navigation character YM of the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. A first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 159 (G-3-1) is a button hold icon, and the button image 136a is displayed on the white circle display. Although the remaining period meter MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. The operation effective period of the chance button 136 here is within the period of the change. When the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 159 (1-3), as shown in FIG. 159 (1-3-3a), a smoke image of the effect appears, and the smoke image causes navigation Part or all of the character YM is hidden, and is clearly less visible than before the appearance of the smoke image. Here, the button image 136a displayed on the first hold icon h11 is deleted, and no change (for example, change in display mode) occurs in the first hold icon h11. That is, when the chance button 136 is displayed while the button hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, and the navigation character YM is changed. is there. In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated outside the operation effective period, the navigation character and / or the button hold icon itself are configured not to change. However, it may be possible to shift to FIG. ((1-3-4) described later via the state shown in FIG. 159 ((1-3-3a)).

  When the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 159 (1-3-3a), the button image 136a disappears with respect to the button holding icon, as shown in FIG. An effect image may be applied to the first hold icon h11, and change animation may be started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 159 (1-3-3b2), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the white circle display to the blue circle display mode. In addition, there may be a case where the display form of the white circle display remains (after all, a failed pattern). Also, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 159 (1-3-3a), the processing shown in FIG. 159 (31-3-3b2) is not performed via (FIG. 1-3-3b1). As shown, the icon that was the button hold icon may change to a display mode of blue circle display without changing animation.

  Alternatively, as shown in Fig. 159 (く 1-3-3b1) and as shown in Fig. (く 1-3-4), although the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change with the white circle display, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn. Here, the change of the display mode of the navigation character YM is not the change animation when it passes through FIG. 159 (く 1-3-3b1), but the display mode is instantaneously switched, and the same figure ((1-3 In the case of passing 3a), it is displayed after the change animation by the effect of the smoke image is executed. However, when passing through FIG. 159 (1-3-3b1), change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed. The change may occur immediately after the chance button 136 is operated, or may change with a slight delay. Also, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 159 (1-2-3a), it is shown in FIG. 159 (1-3-3) without passing through the same diagram (1-3-3b1). Thus, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change.

  In addition, even if the button hold icon is displayed, when the next change is started without operating the chance button (Fig. 159 (1−31-3-2b1)) (the change of the first decorative symbol still starts) In the case where the variation of the second decorative symbol is started (but not shown), the variation icon h0 may be a button holding icon, as shown in FIG. In this case, the button effect is carried over to the next change, and when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the button image 136a disappears as shown in FIG. 159 ((1-3-2b3 '). The white circle display in which the button image 136a is displayed may change to the display mode of the blue circle display (success pattern). At the time of change, change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed. In addition, although the display mode of the navigation character YM is not changed, it may be changed. On the other hand, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the button image 136a disappears with respect to the fluctuation icon h0, and any change (for example, change in display mode) also occurs in the white circle display where the button image 136a was displayed. It may not occur. That is, it is a pattern in which the change presentation from the button holding icon has failed. Although the display mode of the navigation character YM has not changed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change. Even if the button hold icon is displayed, the button hold icon may not be changed if the next change is started without operating the chance button, the button hold icon may be a chance. It may be configured to be automatically changed after the next change is started without operating the button.

  In addition, even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the next change is started without operating the chance button (Fig. 159 (1−31-3-2b1)), the same figure (く 1-3 As shown in −2 b 2 ′), the change icon h 0 may be affected by the effect image, and the change animation may be started. In this case, there may be a case where the process proceeds to FIG. 159 (1-3-3b '), or a case may be a transition to FIG. 159 (1-3-2b3).

  The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 159 (G-3-1) is the default display mode, but the same is true for the navigation character YM in the promoted display mode. That is, the second promotion is performed in FIG. 159 (1-3). If there are a plurality of hold icons, icons other than the button hold icon may be changed. Also, the hold icon, which has already changed, may be changed by the operation of the button due to the button hold icon being displayed.

  In addition, when eight pending icons are displayed, for example, when N are saved, the pending icon changes to a partial or all button pending icon, and the pending icon, the variation icon, and the navigation character YM are changed according to the button operation. It may be configured to change. This is also applicable when only four pending icons are displayed.

  FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example in which there is a period in which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (one), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of the special view 1 are stored, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In (160) of FIG. 160, the suspension of the special view 1 is increased, and the third suspension icon h13 is additionally displayed. This third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

  In FIG. 160 (3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decoration symbols. Even during this stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 160 ((4)), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. In addition, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 is changed to the blue display mode according to the start of the symbol variation display. In addition, even if the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 160 (step 5-1), and the smoke image disappears in FIG. 160 (step 6-1), and a domino character is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. YM is displayed. The character of the navigation character YM of Tonosama shown in FIG. 160 (6-1) is a default display mode. Here, the navigation character YM is a notice corresponding to the prefetch target hold (prefetch notice and / or notice of the change).

  It should be noted that the appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of the pre-reading target hold winning (FIG. 160 (timing 2)). In this example, although it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started before the fluctuation of the prefetch target hold. Further, the navigation character YM may be always displayed when there is a prefetch target hold, or may be displayed only when an effect lottery is won.

  In FIG. 160 (7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decoration symbols. The navigation character YM in the default display mode whose display is started during the symbol variation display stopped and displayed here is still displayed in the initial posture.

  Next, the next symbol variation display is started, and in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 160 (9-1), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display is displayed next to the navigation character YM of the default display mode. It is displayed. In the navigation character YM, the display mode is changed to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn by the same change animation as the change animation shown in FIG. 151 (FIG. 4-1 (FIG. 160 (step 11)). In addition, even if the change animation is executed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be the default display mode. In addition, the icon I1 of the treasure box may not appear, and the display mode of the navigation character YM may change. That is, there may be a case where no change advance display is performed.

  In FIG. 160 (13), the change of the prefetch target hold is started, and the change icon h0 of the blue display mode is displayed. In addition, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is also displayed during this change. Therefore, although the navigation character YM was not initially displayed, after being displayed, it is always displayed across multiple variations.

  It should be noted that the navigation character YM may disappear when the currently held change of the pre-reading target hold is finished. In this case, the navigation character YM may disappear between the three symbols or the temporary stop (swing display) and the symbol stop in the variation of the decoration symbols of the pre-read target hold, and one or two decoration symbols May disappear after temporary stop (first stop or second stop).

  Further, the navigation character YM may disappear at the timing of the stop display in FIG. 160 (7) and may not be displayed across the variation.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 160 (step 5-2) instead of FIG. 160 (step 5-1), the place where the navigation character YM is displayed is not limited to only the effect icon display area DIS, but a hold icon It may be displayed in the display area HIS. Further, there may be a plurality of places where the navigation character YM is displayed, and the navigation character YM may be displayed also in the variable icon display area CIS. Furthermore, the navigation character YM may perform different effects depending on the displayed position. For example, when displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, the hold icon may be changed, and when displayed in the change icon display area CIS, the change icon may be changed. Further, the probability of changing the fluctuation icon may be different depending on the display position, and the reliability of the big hit may be different. The navigation character YM may be displayed only in one display area (for example, the effect icon display area DIS, the hold icon display area HIS, the variation icon display area CIS, etc.).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 160 (No. 5-1), as shown in FIG. 160 (No. 5-1), the navigation character YM can be moved within the reserved icon display area HIS (within the left base icon bIl). If the hold icon is displayed, the front side of the hold icon may be moved. That is, it is displayed on the hold icon so as to overlap from the front side.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 160 (No. 5-1), the navigation character YM may move behind the hold icon as shown in FIG. 160 (No. 5-1). That is, this time, the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap the navigation character YM from the front side.

  The navigation character may perform an animation of moving a plurality of display areas (for example, the effect icon display area DIS, the hold icon display area HIS, the variation icon display area CIS, etc.).

  FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an example in which there is another period in which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (6-2-1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of the special view 1 are stored, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes.

  After that, the reserve digesting continues, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (6-2-3a), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost version is swayed and displayed with no reserve. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (6-2-4), the combination of the decorative symbols in the lost state is stopped and displayed in a state where there is no hold. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed.

  In FIG. 161 (6-2-6), there is a prize in the first special view starting port 230 in a state where there is no suspension, and symbol variation display is started, and the first decorative symbol has not yet begun variation. , The second decorative pattern has begun to change. At this time, the default display mode navigation character YM is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (6-2-7), an increase animation of a hold icon indicating a hold that has already been digested (hold of the started symbol variation display) is displayed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 161 (6-2-7) is lightly displayed, and the deletion animation of the navigation character YM is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (6-2-8), the first decorative symbol does not yet start to change, and the hold icon h11 increased by the hold increase animation is displayed on the first stage hs1. There is. At this stage, the navigation character YM has completely disappeared. In fact, although FIG. 161 (6-2-6) to FIG. 161 ((6-2-8)) are events during a moment, the deletion animation of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Although there is a time lag in the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM disappears at the start of the symbol variation display from the state where there is no hold. The disappearing timing here may be before the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or may be simultaneous with the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol It may be after the start of the In addition, when the hold increase animation is performed, it may be before the start of the hold increase animation, simultaneously with the start of the hold increase animation, or even after the start of the hold increase animation. Good.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 161 (6-2 3 b 1) instead of FIG. 161 (6-2 3 a 1), the reach state may be entered, and the display mode of the navigation character YM is the reach state. Some may be configured to not change, or conversely, they may change during reach conditions. Also, the display mode of the variation icon may be configured not to change during the reach state by the navigation character YM, or conversely, may change during the reach state.

  In FIG. 161 (6-2-3b2), the game is developed to produce a super reach, and in the figure (6-2-3b3), a duel scene in which the lord and the swordsman of the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. Also in FIG. 161 (6-2-3b3), the navigation character YM is displayed with the default display mode.

  In addition, when the navigation character YM develops into super reach, the display mode may be promoted, and conversely, the display mode is configured not to promote into the super reach and in the case of normal reach, the display mode is not promoted. May be Alternatively, the navigation character YM may be promoted in the display mode even in the normal reach. For example, it may be promoted as a prefetch notice after the next change. In addition, when the "Navi-character promotion" symbol stops in the middle symbol at the time of normal reach, the display mode is promoted. Furthermore, the display mode may be promoted as a notice (normal notice) of the change.

  After that, in FIG. 161 (D6-2-3b4), the wipe effect and the like described using FIG. 152 (A 14-2-4) to FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Fig. 6-2-3b5), "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of losing, is displayed shaking. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM remains the default display mode. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (6-2-3b6), “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7” which is a combination of losing is stopped and displayed, and the navigation character YM is also default. It is displayed as it is.

  When Fig. 161 (1 6-2-1) to (け 6-2-8) and (け 6-2-3b1) to (3 6-2-3b6) are put together, symbol variation of the pre-reading target suspension is finished. Even when the hold becomes 0, the navigation character displayed as a notice corresponding to the pre-read target hold (pre-read notice and / or notice of the change) is not hidden and the next change is started It is erased when. In addition, the navigation character is before the symbol variation of the pre-reading target suspension ends (for example, before the decoration symbol becomes one or a plurality of temporary stop display, at the same time as temporary stop or temporary stop, or the decorative symbol All of them (three in this example, left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol) become temporary stop display and at the same time as temporary stop becomes temporary stop, symbol (special figure) becomes stop display The symbol may be erased before (e.g.) or may be erased after the symbol variation of the pre-reading target suspension is finished (simultaneously with the symbol (special figure) becoming the stop display or after the stop display).

  FIG. 162 shows an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed.

  In the holding frame UI of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162, the variation icon display area CIS is provided at the left end, and the pedestal hs0 is disposed. Further, at the right end, a presentation icon display area DIS is provided. The reserved icon display area HIS is located between the variation icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS, and the base icon bIm extends. Eight stages are arranged on this base icon bIm, and a hold icon is displayed on each stage. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (a1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, it is displayed that the number of reservations for Special Figure 1 is "3" and the number of reservations for Special Figure 2 is "2" in the second number of reservations display, and a total of five suspension icons are displayed. There is. These five hold icons are all default display modes.

  In the holding frame UI illustrated in FIG. 162, when the number of holdings is five, the stage corresponding to the sixth holding is displayed in the same display mode (for example, white) as the first to fifth stages, and the seventh The eighth stages hs7 and hs8 are displayed in different display modes (for example, gray). In addition, until the 3rd reserve is stored, it is white until the 4th stage, the 5th and subsequent stages are gray, and when the 4th reserve is stored, it is white until the 5th stage and the 6th and later Stage turns gray. Thus, although the display mode of the stage changes according to the number of reservations, the stage may always be the same display mode regardless of the number of reservations.

  Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (this item a1).

  In Fig. 162 (this a2), the suspension of the special figure 2 increases by one, and in the same diagram (this a3), the suspension increase animation is performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same diagram (this a4), the suspension icon Six are displayed. The added sixth hold icon h6 is also the default display mode. Also, the seventh stage hs7 turns white, and the gray stage is the eighth stage hs8 only.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (this section a5), the navi character YM of the default display mode appears, and a balloon of "full with 2 more" is added. The navigation character YM appears when the number of reservations is N or more (6 or more in this example).

  In FIG. 162 (this a6), the suspension of the special figure 1 is increased by one, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same diagram (this a7), seven suspension icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM of the default display mode is displayed. There is a balloon that says "One more to fill". The seventh hold icon h7 added is also the default display mode. In addition, the final eighth stage hs8 also turns white, and the gray stage has disappeared.

  In FIG. 162 (this a8), the suspension of the special view 2 is increased by one, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same diagram (this a9), eight suspension icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM of the default display mode is displayed. The balloon "full tank" is added to. Note that the added eighth hold icon h8 is also the default display mode. Note that, in this example, the navigation character YM uses a balloon to notify the number of reservations, but this may not be performed.

  In this example, when eight reservations are stored (when full), the navigation character YM may change. In FIG. 162 (here a10), the navigation character YM is encased in a smoke image. The smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM changes. However, even if the navigation character YM is encased in a smoke image, it does not necessarily change, and may not change. In addition, the smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may always appear. Alternatively, when the hold is full, the navigation character YM may always change. In addition, the navigation character YM may be configured to be changed whenever it is wrapped in a smoke image.

  In FIG. 162 (here a11), the navigation character YM changes to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn, and a balloon such as “Hold inside the reservation is hot” is added to the navigation character YM, and the advance notice is executed. . The notice displayed in the balloon may be a notice of the change. In addition, by the notice displayed on the balloon, the degree of expectation to the big hit in the hold may be announced. Further, in this example, the navigation character changes due to the symbol variation in which the suspension is full, but the navigation character may change in the next variation of the symbol variation in which the suspension is full. Also, the navigation character may change for each symbol variation, and the symbol variation may be notified by changing the navigation character.

  The change of the navigation character YM is not limited to the color, but may be a display size, a pose, or a shape. Also, there may be multiple types of appearing characters, and the heat may be different depending on the character. For example, even if the princess navigation character in the display mode wearing a red kimono is hotter than the navigation character in the red kimono mannering in the display mode, or even if the navy character in the head length is hotter than the lord animation character Good.

  FIG. 163 shows an example of effect in which the decorative symbol of the common drawing is entangled with the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 163 (this b1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, a special figure 1 first reserve icon h11 of a circle representing the reserve of the special figure 1 is displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 1st hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, in FIG. 163 (b1), the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the roulette display icon RI is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The roulette display icon RI here is for displaying the variation display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing, and as the outcome, "○", "×", and "super" as a big hit notice of the special figure of the variation. "Atsu" is also included. In FIG. 163 (here b2), “o” is displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and it is informed that the popular drawing lottery has been won.

  In FIG. 163 (b3), the navigation character YM appears in the effect icon display area DIS. The navigation character YM is a default display mode, and appears at the moment of winning the common drawing lottery. In the subsequent FIG. 163 (this b4), since the winning drawing lottery is won, the electric chew is released, and the navigation character YM reports that the electric chow is being released. In FIG. 163 (this b5-1), there is a winning after the special figure 2 start opening 232 because the electric chew is open, and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 increases to four full. In FIG. 163 (this b6-1), it is displayed that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is “1” and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is “4” in the second number of reservations display. Four rhombic suspension icons are displayed, each of which represents 2 suspension (special figure 2 first suspension icon h21 to special figure 2 fourth suspension icon h24). Note that the four special figure 2 suspension icons h21 to h24 are all default display modes. The pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority variable machine, and the reserve icon of the reserve icon is displayed with priority over the reserve icon of the special figure 1 with the reserve icon, and the reserve icon of the special figure 2 is the special figure 1 It is displayed so that it may overlap from a front on a part of pending icon of.

  In FIG. 163 (this b7), the notification during the opening of the electric chew by the navigation character YM is ended, and in the subsequent figure (this b8), the opening time of the electric chew has ended, so the roulette display icon RI itself disappears downward. It is being In addition, the roulette display icon RI may be displayed until the symbol variation display of suspension of special drawing 2 is all finished. In FIG. 163 (b9), the roulette display icon RI has completely disappeared.

  After that, in FIG. 163 (here b11), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decoration symbols. The navigation character YM, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the initial attitude. In FIG. 163 (this b12), the suspension of the special figure 2 first suspension icon h21 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (this b13), the variation icon of the special figure 2 As rhombus fluctuation icon is displayed on pedestal hs0.

  In FIG. 163 (b14), the navigation character YM is encased in the smoke image. The smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM changes. However, even if the navigation character YM is encased in a smoke image, it does not necessarily change, and may not change. In addition, the smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may always appear. Alternatively, when the hold is full, the navigation character YM may always change. Also, the navigation character YM may be configured to be changed whenever it is wrapped in a smoke image, or may be wrapped in a smoke image or may not change.

  In FIG. 163 (this b15-1), the navigation character YM changes to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn, and a balloon "This variation is hot" is added to the navigation character YM, and a normal advance notice is executed. There is. Further, the advance notice is also executed depending on the display mode of the navigation character YM.

  Also, in FIG. 163 (here b15-2-1), instead of FIG. 163 (here b15-1), the navigation character YM is still in the default display mode, and the change effect has failed. In addition, a balloon "this variation is" is added to the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, the reserve digestion of the special view 2 proceeds, and the symbol variation display of the final special view 2 is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (here b15-2-3). Here too, the balloon character "this variation is" is added to the navigation character YM, and effects by the navigation character YM are performed continuously from the previous FIG. 163 (this b15-2-1). In FIG. 163 (here b15-2-4), the balloon character “farewell” is added to the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the effect by the navigation character YM is ended. The navigation character YM has disappeared from the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (here b15-2-5). When the navigation character YM is hot, the navigation character YM may not disappear, and the effect by the navigation character YM may further continue, but the navigation character YM may always disappear. Even when super reach effect is started between FIG. 163 (this b15-2-1) and the same figure (this b15-2-4), the effect by the navigation character YM continues and the navigation character YM is displayed. Alternatively, the effect by the navigation character YM may end, and the navigation character YM may disappear.

  The navigation character YM described in FIG. 163 (b1) to FIG. (B15-1) and in FIG. 163 (b15-2-1) to FIG. The pre-reading advance notice is not made, but the pre-reading advance notice may be made.

  FIG. 164 is a diagram showing an example in which a change preview is displayed on standby.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of the special view 1 are stored, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (1), the navigation character YM is not displayed.

  In FIG. 164 (2), the hold of the special view 1 is increased, and the third hold icon h13 and the fourth hold icon h14 are additionally displayed. The third hold icon h13 and the fourth hold icon h14 are also default display modes. Here, in the present example, the hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 is a prefetch target hold.

  In FIG. 164 (3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decoration symbols. Even during this stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 164 (S4), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. In addition, even if the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 164 (5), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display appears on the carpet icon I2. Although the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display is a preview display for changing the display mode of the navigation character YM, in this example, the navigation character YM itself is not displayed. However, by the appearance of the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display, it is notified (predicted) that the navigation character YM may also appear in the future. The icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display is a standby display until the navigation character YM appears. The standby display of the treasure chest icon I1 is displayed as it is on the carpet icon I2.

  In FIG. 164 (Sa), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost design. The navigation character YM has not appeared yet, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display is kept on standby.

  In FIG. 164 (S8), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display is kept on standby.

  In FIG. 164 (Sa 9-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost design. The navigation character YM has not appeared yet, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display is kept on standby.

  In FIG. 164 (10-1), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display is kept on standby. Thus, the icon I1 of the treasure chest may be displayed across multiple changes.

  In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 164 (11-1), a smoke image is displayed. In the figure (12), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM of the maroon is in the effect icon display area DIS. It is displayed. The navigation character YM of Tonosama shown in FIG. 164 (12) is a default display mode. The smoke image here corresponds to the advance notice that the navigation character YM appears. However, even if the smoke image is displayed, the navigation character YM does not necessarily appear, and may not appear. In addition, the smoke image itself may not be displayed, or the smoke image may be displayed without fail. In addition, when the smoke image is displayed, the navigation character YM may be configured to appear without fail.

  It should be noted that the appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of pre-reading target hold winning (FIG. 164 (2) timing). In this example, although it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started before the fluctuation of the prefetch target hold. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed as long as it is reserved for the pre-reading object, or may be displayed only when the effect lottery is won. In this example, the icon of the treasure box of the change advance notice display and the navigation character YM are pre-read notices performed on the same pre-reading target hold (in the present example, hold 4) represented by the fourth hold icon h14 shown in FIG. Although the icon of the treasure box of the change notice display may differ from the pre-read target hold of the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 164 (12), when the domino-like navigation character YM appears, only the carpet icon I2 disappears thereafter, and the treasure chest icon I1 remains in the effect icon display area DIS. That is, the standby display of the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display is ended.

  In (b) of FIG. 164, the change of the prefetch target hold is started. The change animation using the treasure box icon I1 is performed during the change of the prefetch target hold. In FIG. 164 (15-1), the treasure box is opened, and a smoke image comes out from the inside, and it wraps around the navy character YM. In FIG. 164 (Sa 16), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the nama character navigation character YM changes from the default display mode to the display mode wearing a red kimono. The navigation character YM changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono functions as a notice of the change (normal notice).

  Note that the change effect of the navigation character YM using the icon I1 of the treasure box may be started at the time of the pre-reading target hold winning (FIG. 164 (2) timing). Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed as long as it is reserved for the pre-reading object, or may be displayed only when the effect lottery is won.

  Also, instead of FIG. 164 (10-1), in the same figure (10-2-1), the Toho-sama navigation character YM does not appear, but the carpet icon I2 disappears, and the treasure box of the change notice is displayed. The standby display of the icon I1 has ended. A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 164 (10-2-2), and the smoke image here extends beyond the display position of the navigation character YM to the fluctuation icon h0, and the navigation character The display position of YM and the fluctuation icon h0 are covered from the front side by the smoke image. In FIG. 164 (10-2-3), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM does not appear, but the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes to the red display mode. Here, the navigation character YM may appear and the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may not change, or the navigation character YM may also appear and the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may also change. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may not appear and the display mode of the variation icon h0 may not change.

  Also, in place of FIG. 164 (11-1), although the smoke image is displayed in FIG. (11-2), the icon I2 of the carpet disappears without the navigation character YM being visible again. The waiting display of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is ended. Thus, the timing at which the standby display ends may be before the navigation character YM appears. Further, the timing at which the standby display ends may be simultaneous with the appearance of the navigation character YM. Furthermore, it may be timing of temporary stop of the decorative symbol, timing of stop display of the decorative symbol, or timing of start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. Although the navigation character is not displayed for the same prefetch target hold after the standby display of the change preview display is finished, the navigation character is displayed for the same prefetch target hold even after the standby display of the change preview display is finished. (For example, the fluctuation after the next fluctuation of the fluctuation at which the standby display is ended, and the fluctuation at the end of the standby display may be mentioned). In addition, although the change preview display is not displayed for the same prefetch target hold even after the standby display of the change preview display ends, the change preview display may be displayed again for the same prefetch target hold (for example, the standby display The change after the next change of the change of which the was finished, and the change in which the standby display is finished are included).

  Furthermore, instead of FIG. 164 (13), the icon I2 of the carpet disappears and the icon I1 of the treasure box and the navigation character YM are displayed in FIG. 13-2-2), neither the treasure box is opened nor the navigation character YM is changed nor the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed, and both the icon I1 of the treasure box and the navigation character YM Is gone. As such, although the navigation character YM appears, nothing happens and both icons may disappear. In this case, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is a false notice. Among the icon I1 of the treasure box and the icon of the navigation character YM, only the icon I1 of the treasure box may disappear, or only the navigation character YM may disappear. Also, when both icons disappear, both may disappear simultaneously, the icon I1 of the treasure box may disappear first, and the navigation character YM may disappear first.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of effect using a holding frame different from the holding frame described above.

  The holding frame UI shown in FIG. 165 (1) is a closed type which is expanded over the entire effect display area 208d. That is, although the holding frame UI described so far is the same as the component (the pedestal hs0 etc.), in the state of FIG. 165 (S1), with the area of the holding frame UI in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 The other area is firmly distinguished by the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2 and the right frame UIf3, the sea background is displayed in the other area, and the sea background is displayed in the holding frame UI. Is not shown. In the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 165 (1), the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIf3, and the left base icon bIl and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in white, and the holding frame UI is displayed. Is promoted by changing these colors.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Here, the holding frame UI is displayed on the front side of the first decorative symbol, and the lowermost end of the decorative symbol changing at high speed is overlapped from the front by the upper frame UIf2 of the holding frame UI. However, on the contrary, the decorative symbol may overlap the holding frame UI from the front side. Furthermore, the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. Also, the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In Figure 165 (2-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2, and in the figure (3), only the carpet icon I2 disappears, and the treasure box icon I1 is , Remains in the effect icon display area DIS. In FIG. 165 (4), the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, and an icon displaying a character display of "frame promotion" appears from the inside, and notification (promotion) of promotion of the holding frame UI is made. In FIG. 165 (5), the holding frame UI is promoted, and the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIf3, the left base icon bIl, and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in red. In addition, even if the icon of "frame promotion" appears, the holding frame UI may not be promoted. In addition, when the "frame promotion" icon appears, the holding frame UI may always be promoted.

  Also, in place of FIG. 165 (or 2-1), in the same portion (or 2-2-1), the lower body of the giant panda is displayed in the area where the background of the sea is displayed. The lower body of this huge panda causes the variable display of the first decorative pattern to be overlapped from the front side. However, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number indication are displayed in front of the lower body of the panda. This giant panda is passing from top to bottom, and eventually enters the area of the holding frame UI, and part or all of the holding frame UI is overlapped from the front by the giant panda, as shown in FIG. In the state shown in (S-2-2), a small part of each of the upper left and upper right of the holding frame UI is not yet overlapped with the image of the panda, but the state shown in the same figure (S B-2-3) Now, the entire pending pool UI is overlapped with the image of the panda. The appearance of a giant panda covering almost the entire screen is a kind of change notice. Although the holding frame UI is entirely overlapped by a huge panda, the huge panda may be displayed in a size that does not overlap the entire holding box UI.

  One aspect of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the giant panda passes through is shown in FIG. 165 (or 2-2-4), and the first hold icon h11 changes to a blue display mode ( The navigation character YM is also changed (promoted) to a display mode wearing a red kimono, and the holding frame UI is also promoted to red display. In addition, the display mode of the variation icon may be changed (promoted). Further, all of the left frame UIf1 etc., the hold icon, the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM may change, or only a part may change. For example, only the left frame UIf1 or the like may change to red and only the holding frame UI may be promoted. Alternatively, as described later, a change may occur outside the holding frame UI.

  FIG. 165 (see 2-2-4 ′) shows another aspect of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the giant panda passes through, and in addition to the change in the holding frame UI, A change has occurred even outside the reserve window UI. That is, the level of the level indication Lv attached to each of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is rising. When this level rises, reach effect is likely to be started, pseudo-sequence effect is likely to be started, or the symbol aspect is switched to a symbol of an aspect appearing at the time of big change with a definite change. In addition, when reach production is started with this level high, the expectation of the big hit becomes high. Note that the background may change.

  In the case of a big hit notice, the appearance of a giant panda may be displayed in front of the image of the panda, and the first decorative symbol may overlap the image of the passing panda from the front, or the big hit Even if it is a notice, the first decorative pattern may be overlapped with the passing panda image.

  Also, instead of FIG. 165 (2-1), an overhead image for wipe effect is added to the holding frame UI in FIG. (2-2-1), and FIG. The state shown in 1) is a state in which the bird's-eye image is completely closed (wipe-in state). On the other hand, the state shown in FIG. 6 (2-3-2) is a state where the overhead image is fully open (wipe-out state).

  FIG. 166 is a diagram showing an example in which the icon I1 of the treasure box, which has been used as the icon of the change advance notice, appears as the hold icon.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (S1-1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Also, the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, the icon of the treasure box is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

  In FIG. 166 (S2-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the lost decoration symbols stopped. In FIG. 166 (S3), the icon of the treasure box is displayed. The suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. The first reserve icon h11 of the icon of the treasure chest is displayed on the pedestal hs0 as the fluctuation icon h0, but the icon of the treasure chest is also displayed as the fluctuation icon h0 here.

  In FIG. 166 (S4), the treasure box of the icon of the treasure box which is the variation icon h0 is opened, a smoke image appears from inside, and the smoke image is displayed from the front side of the navigation character YM displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Cover and change animation is being performed. In FIG. 166 (5), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn. In this example, the navigation character YM is changed by the change icon h0. Although the smoke image corresponds to the change notice, the smoke image may not overlap with the change icon h0 which is the change candidate, or the smoke image may not appear.

  In addition, in FIG. 166 (see 1-2-1), the second hold icon h12 of the default display mode is also displayed instead of FIG. 166 (see 1-1). The second hold icon h12 is overlapped by the first hold icon h11 of the icon of the treasure box. That is, at least a portion of the hold icon having a relatively high jackpot expectation degree overlaps at least a portion of the relatively low hold icon. Note that at least a part of the pending icon in the prefetching notice mode may overlap at least a part of the default icon in the display mode from the front side. Alternatively, regardless of the jackpot expectation, at least a portion of the previously stored retention icon may overlap from at least a portion of the later stored retention icon. In (166) of FIG. 166, the treasure chest of the icon of the treasure chest, which is the first hold icon h11, is opened, and the change animation is executed. That is, a smoke image appears, and the smoke image overlaps the second hold icon h12. In (166) of FIG. 166, the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 in which the smoke images overlap is changed.

  Also, instead of FIG. 166 (S 2-1), in FIG. S (S 2-2-1), the treasure box of the icon of the treasure box which is the first reserved icon h11 is opened, and the change animation is executed. In the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM, and the smoke image disappears in the figure (S 2-2-2), and both the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Aspects are changing. Here, both change to the same red, but may change to different colors. For example, one may be red and the other may be gold. Alternatively, both may be enveloped in the smoke image, but only one may change, the other may remain default.

  Also, instead of FIG. 166 (S2-1), in FIG. (S 2-3-1), the treasure box of the icon of the treasure box which is the first reserved icon h11 is opened, and the change animation is also executed here. However, in the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps only the change icon h0 among the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM. In (166) of FIG. 166, the smoke image disappears, and only the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 in which the smoke images overlap is changed.

  Furthermore, icons that are not overlapped by the smoke image (hold icon, change icon) and / or navi characters are also icons that are overlapped by the smoke image after the smoke image disappears (hold icon, change icon) and / or The display mode may change with the change of the display mode of the character (which may be simultaneous with the change of the display mode or after the change of the display mode).

  FIG. 167 shows an example of rendering in which meter rendering is involved in the navigation character YM.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (set 1-1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of Special Figure 1 are stored, and a first suspension icon h11 and a second suspension icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes. Furthermore, the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and a white meter display MW in which the meter frame mf is white is displayed next to the navigation character YM. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 167 (see 1-1) is empty. This meter display promotes the navigation character YM when it is full. In addition, when the display mode (for example, the color, the shape of the frame, and the like) of the meter frame mf changes, the ease of storage of the meter may be notified, or the advance notice and / or the change may be notified.

  In FIG. 167 (set 2), temporary stop (first stop) of the left symbol in the first decorative symbol is performed, and "decoration 4" is displayed with shaking. A white meter rising item UpI is added to the symbol of this "decor 4", and in Fig. 167 (3), the meter rising item UpI moves to the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW It is displayed overlapping. As shown in FIG. 167 (set 4), the meter ascending item UpI moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) in the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW rises by one level. In addition, the meter rising item changes the degree of rising of the meter depending on the color. The white meter rising item UpI is raised by one level with respect to the white meter display MW.

  In FIG. 167 (set 4), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and in the decoration symbol display device 208, the combination of the decoration symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 167 (set 5-1), the first hold icon h11 Is suspended and symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 167 (set 7-1), the roulette display icon RI appears above the white meter display MW, and the roulette effect is started. The roulette effect here is either when something happens (if there is no loss) or when something does not occur (if it is lost). As an example of this, there may be a pending icon change, a regular notice (a notice of the change), and the like. Also, for example, when there is a character-based super reach including a super low reach, a princess super reach, and a super low reach as one type of super reach, as an example of the above, the type of the super reach to be developed (for example, For example, a notice of a character-based super reach), a notice of a specific super reach (for example, a super reach), etc. may be mentioned.

  In FIG. 167 (step 8), the blue meter rising item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and in FIG. 167 (step 9), the blue meter rising item UpIb moves to the white meter display MW and white It is displayed overlapping with the meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 167 (see 10), the blue meter ascending item UpIb moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) in the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW rises by two levels. The blue meter ascending item UpIb is raised by two levels with respect to the white meter display MW. As a result, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 167 (step 10) is at three levels.

  In FIG. 167 (set 11), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and in the decoration symbol display device 208, the combination of the decoration symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 167 (set 12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Is digested and symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 167 (set 11), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and in the decoration symbol display device 208, the combination of the decoration symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 167 (set 12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Is digested and symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

  A button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 167 (case 13). The button display icon 136D is a display mode of a balloon and corresponds to a notice by the navigation character YM itself. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT that indicates the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A part of the button display icon 136D overlaps a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf). The button display icon 136D may overlap with the entire meter display, or may be displayed at a position not overlapping with the meter display.

  In FIG. 167 (set 14), the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started, and in FIG. 167 (set 15), the remaining period meter is decreased. In FIG. 167 (set 16), the chance button 136 is operated, and in the figure (set 17), in response to the operation of the chance button 136, a meter rising icon MUI as a response display is added to the navigation character YM. A meter rising icon MUI is a display mode of a balloon, and a green meter rising item UpIm is displayed on the meter rising icon MUI shown in FIG. 167 (case 17). The meter rising icon MUI also overlaps a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf) as in the case of the button display icon 136D. Note that the meter rising icon MUI may overlap with the entire meter display or may be displayed at a position not overlapping with the meter display.

  Note that, even when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the response display may or may not be displayed. In addition, the response display includes displays other than the meter rising icon MUI, and when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the response display is not displayed, but a specific effect (for example, display of the meter rising icon MUI) ) May be displayed as a response display. In addition, even if the response display is not displayed, the meter may be configured to increase, or the meter may increase only when the response display is displayed, and the meter may not increase when the response display is not displayed. It may be configured in the same manner.

  In FIG. 167 (see 18), the green meter rising item UpIm in the meter rising icon MUI is moved to the white meter display MW, and displayed so as to overlap the white meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 167 (set 19), the green meter ascending item UpIm moved to the white meter display MW is taken into the white meter display MW (stocked), and the white meter display MW rises by three levels, and FIG. The white meter indication MW shown in (Set 19) is full. In FIG. 167 (set 20-1), the white meter display MW changes to the character display of "promotion", and a change animation not shown is started, and in the same set (set 21), the display mode of the navigation character YM is red. It has been changed (promoted) to the appearance of wearing a kimono. The color of the kimono of the navigation character YM changed here matches the background color of the character display "promotion" shown in FIG. 167 (set 20-1), and at the stage of FIG. 167 (set 20-1) The display mode in which the navigation character YM changes is notified. Note that the change animation may be omitted. Further, the white meter display shown in FIG. 21 ((21)) is returned to the empty state, but may be full. In addition, when the meter display is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM may always change (promotion) or may not change (promotion) (in the case of failure).

  The meter display may not always be displayed as shown in (1-2-1) of FIG. 167 instead of FIG. As shown in FIG. 167 (see 1-2-2), the meter ascending item UpI may appear even when the meter display is not displayed. Also in this case, the meter rising item UpI moves to a fixed position in the effect icon display area DIS as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 167 (step 1-2-4), after the movement of the meter ascending item UpI is completed, the meter display (here, white meter display MW) appears. In this case, the appearance of the meter rising item UpI is a notice that the meter display is displayed. Also, the meter display may be displayed in response to the appearance of the meter rising item UpI. For example, it may be simultaneous with the appearance of the meter ascending item UpI, or may be displayed at the timing between FIG. 167 (Tse 1-2-2) and FIG. (Tse 1-2-3).

  In FIG. 167 (step 1-2-5), the white meter display MW is raised by one level by the meter ascending item UpI. In the example shown in FIG. 167, if the meter display is displayed, then the meter always rises, but even if the meter display is displayed, the meter may not rise (even if false). It may be good or the meter rising item may not appear. Furthermore, even if the meter rising item appears, the meter may not rise.

  Also, the meter display may be displayed from the symbol variation display prior to the symbol variation display in which the meter rising item appears, and in this case, the meter display is a prefetch notice that the meter may be accumulated. become. Alternatively, the meter display may be displayed at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display when the meter rising item appears, or during the symbol variation, in which case the meter display may accumulate the meter within the variation. It is a notice that there is.

  FIG. 168 is a diagram showing a modification of the example described using FIG.

  In FIG. 168 (see 1-3-1) instead of FIG. 167 (see 1-1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed variation with no hold, and the white meter display MW in the empty state is in the empty state. It is displayed. While the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 167 (set 1-1) was full at six levels, the white meter display shown in FIG. 168 (set 1-3-1) MW is full at 5 levels.

  In FIG. 168 (No. 1-3-3a), a meter rising icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM. A gold meter rising item UpIg is displayed on the meter rising icon MUI shown in FIG. 168 (No. 1-3-3a). The white meter indication MW shown in FIG. 168 (せ 1-3-4a) is filled at once due to the gold meter rising item UpIg. After this, an animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At this time, the meter may be empty or may be stored. In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge mg) that increases in the meter frame mf is blue, but if it is in the stored state, even if it is full with the blue gauge It is good, and it may be full with a golden gauge by having been filled up at once by the gold meter rising item UpIg.

  On the other hand, also in FIG. 168 (step 1-3-3 b), the meter rising icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM, and here, the rainbow-colored meter rising item UpIn is displayed. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 168 (see 1-3-4b) is also filled at once by the rainbow-colored meter rising item UpIn. After this, an animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At this time, the meter may be empty or may be stored. In addition, when it is in the accumulated state, it may be full with a blue gauge, or it may be full with a rainbow gauge because it was full with a rainbow meter rising item UpIn at once. It may be tongue-shaped.

  As meter rising items, white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow items are prepared. Among these items, only the rainbow meter rising item UpIn and the gold meter rising item UpIg are items that raise the meter by 5 levels at once. The white meter rising item UpI is increased by one level, the blue meter rising item UpIb is increased by 2 levels, the green meter rising item UpIm is increased by 3 levels, and the red meter rising item UpIr is increased by 4 levels.

  In addition, the iridescent meter up item UpIn also functions as a big hit finalization notice. On the other hand, the gold meter rising item UpIg does not have such a function. Therefore, when the meter is filled with one rainbow meter rising item UpIn, when the meter is filled with one gold meter rising item UpIn, or in other colors (white, blue, green, red) The meaning is different when the meter is filled with a combination of meter rising items.

  In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge) that increases in the meter frame mf is a white, blue, green, red meter rising item, and when the meter rises or becomes full, It may be a blue gauge.

  The color of the meter rising item may have a function as a normal notice or a advance notice. Also, the color may indicate the degree of expectation of the big hit.

  Moreover, the color of the meter rising item and the color of the display mode of the navigation character YM may be linked, or they may be linked. For example, when a gold meter rising item UpIg appears, the navigation character YM is also easily changed to a display mode wearing a golden kimono, or always changes, or conversely, a display where the navigation character YM wears a golden kimono In the aspect, the gold meter ascending item UpIg may easily appear or may appear.

  Furthermore, the order of appearance of meter rising items and the combination of colors may function as a pre-reading advance notice, and may function as a normal advance notice. Also, the order of appearance of the meter rising items and the combination of colors may represent the degree of expectation of the big hit. Or, conversely, the order of appearance of metered items and the combination of colors may be completely unrelated to the jackpot expectation.

  Also, in this example, the meter stores 15 (the meter is full 3 times). In the meter display which is full at the 6th level in FIG. 167, the meter stores 18 (this is also 3 times when the meter is full). Here, when the meter overflows by displaying the meter rising item (for example, when the red Up icon is displayed when three meters are stored), the meter is set to 0 while promoting the navigation character. You may make it save the amount which is not stored. For example, when a red meter up item UpIt is displayed when three meters are stored, the meter is full once, and two more levels of meters are stored.

  If the meter overflows after the meter is full twice, the meter may be full and the meter may indicate the amount that has not been stored. For example, the meter may be returned to 0 when the pre-reading subject change or the change ends, or may be displayed regardless of the pre-reading subject change or the change. In addition, it may be cut off because it did not accumulate. For example, a meter may be stored, and the meter at that time may be in the state of 0, may be full, may be a special display, or may not be displayed. Good. Furthermore, it may be configured not to overflow. For example, when three are already stored, only two white meter up items UpI or only one blue meter up items UpIb are displayed.

  In the example beginning with FIG. 168 (Sei 1-4-1) instead of FIG. 167 (Sei 1-1), in FIG. (Se 1-4-2), the red beam from the flying UFO icon UFI The navi character YM is illuminated toward the default display mode navigation character YM, and changes to the display mode wearing a red kimono as shown in FIG. The balloon is attached. It is reported by this "Up high certainty" that the meter rising item is easily stored.

  It should be noted that, depending on the display mode of the advance notice for changing the navigation character YM, a notification of "Up High Probability" may occur or may be generated. In addition, when the navigation character YM changes, notification of "Up High Probability" may be performed by all means, and multiple types of effect display (notice display) including notification of "Up High Probability" may be performed. The effect display including the notification of “Up High certainty” may not be performed.

  Further, the effect to be performed by the navigation character YM may be different depending on the display mode (color) of the navigation character YM. For example, in the case of a red navigation character YM, notification of “Up High Probability” is performed, in the case of a gold navigation character YM, a superheat display is displayed, and in a rainbow navigation character YM, an iron plate display is displayed. It may be done. The navigation characters YM having different display modes may give the same notice (the same kind of notice).

  In Fig. 168 (set 5-1), in Fig. 168 (set 5-2-1), the gauge of the white meter display MW is white blinking and 1 level, and the kimono of the navigation character YM is also white blinking. There is. After that, once the meter is full and returns to the empty state, the display mode of the navigation character YM changes to a display mode in which a green kimono is worn in FIG. 168 (5-2-3), The gauge of the white meter display MW also turns green and rises to 3 levels. Thereafter, after the meter becomes full again and returns to the empty state, in FIG. 168 (set 5-2-5), the display mode of the navigation character YM changes to a display mode in which the rainbow-colored kimono is worn. The gauge of the white meter display MW also changes to rainbow color and is full. As described above, the storage condition of the meter and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be configured to coincide with each other. Also, the color of the gauge may correspond to the color of the navigation character YM.

  In addition, when all the meters are stored, a pattern in which the jackpot confirmation or the expectation of the jackpot is high, and a pattern in which the meters are stored and discharged may be separately prepared. As an example of the latter, for example, if it is released when the meter is stored up to 2 levels, effects equivalent to blue will be performed, and if released when the meter is saved up to 4 levels, effects equivalent to red Is done.

  FIG. 169 is a diagram showing still another modified example of the example described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 169 (set 6-2), the roulette display icon RI and the meter increase icon MUI are displayed on the white blinking meter display MW ′ in which the meter frame mf blinks in white instead of FIG. 167 (set 6-1). Is displayed, but a part of the meter rising icon MUI overlaps with a part of the roulette display icon RI from the front side, and the roulette display icon RI shown in FIG. It is more difficult to view than the roulette display icon RI shown in Section 7-1). On the other hand, a green meter rising item UpIm is displayed on the meter rising icon MUI shown in FIG. 167 (Set 7-1). Note that the meter rising icon MUI may overlap from the front side to all the roulette display icons RI, and conversely, at least a portion of the roulette display icon RI overlaps from the front side to at least a portion of the meter rising icons MUI. You may In addition, as a priority displayed on the front side, the icon added to the navigation character YM may be higher than the other icons. In this example, when a notice that a meter rising icon may be displayed, such as the display of a roulette display icon, is made, the meter rising icon is displayed by displaying a white blink meter that blinks the meter frame in white. Although it has been informed that there is a possibility that it will be displayed, it may not be notified by the meter frame even if there is a notice that there is a possibility that the meter rising icon will be displayed. You may be comprised so that it may not be alert | reported that a meter raise icon may be displayed. In addition, the advance notice for notifying that the meter rising icon may be displayed may be performed not only by the meter frame but also by other display or rendering means.

  In place of FIG. 167 (set 7-1), in FIG. 169 (set 7-2), the blue meter ascending item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI. However, it is difficult to view because the meter rising icons MUI still overlap. Thus, the meter rising icons may overlap with each other. When the meter rising icons overlap, the priority displayed on the front side may be the display order of the meter rising icons, or the higher meter rising degree may be prioritized, or the meter rising degree Lower may be prioritized. Also, in the navigation character YM, the meter rising icons may not overlap from the front side, but may overlap.

  Also, instead of FIG. 167 (set 7-1), in FIG. 169 (set 7-3-1), an image up for notifying (predicting) that the meter rising icon is displayed in the roulette display icon RI 'Is displayed. However, at this stage, it is unclear what color meter rising icon is displayed, and thereafter, several colors of meter rising icons are displayed in the roulette display icon RI. In this manner, when it is notified that the meter rising icon is displayed by the roulette effect although it is unknown what color it is, as shown in FIG. 169 (set 7-3-2), the roulette display icon RI is displayed. The effect display Ed1 to which the aura is applied is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the following FIG. 169 (set 7-3-3), the effect display Ed1 changes, and the blue meter rising icon is displayed as if it were enlarged. At this stage, it is not known in which color meter rising icon is displayed in the roulette display icon RI. At this stage, a blue meter rising icon may be displayed also in the roulette display icon RI.

  In Fig. 169 (set 7-3-4), the blue meter rising icon UpIb that resembles the enlarged blue meter rising icon, which was overlapping the roulette display icon RI, becomes the white blinking meter display MW Move to 'White Flashing Meter Display MW' is displayed overlapping. Also, the roulette display icon RI fades out and the display becomes dim and gradually disappears. In addition, the meter rising item displayed in the roulette display icon RI may remain unknown as to what color. Thereafter, the blue meter ascending item UpIb is taken in (stocked) in the white blinking meter indication MW ', and the white blinking meter indication MW' is leveled up.

  A blue meter ascending item UpIb may appear in the roulette display icon RI and be taken into the white blinking meter display MW '. In this case, in the roulette display icon RI, the blue meter ascending item UpIb may be displayed before the effect display Ed1 is displayed, or may be displayed at the same time as it is displayed. It may be displayed after being done. Alternatively, in the roulette display icon RI, the blue meter rising item UpIb may be displayed before or at the same time as the blue meter rising icon is enlarged. It may be displayed or may be displayed after being displayed.

  In FIG. 169 (see -20-2-1), the white meter indication MW in the full state is temporarily changed to the letter indication “stock” in FIG. When returning to the white meter display MW, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. In this example, although the meter is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change until the treasure box is opened, and the change of the display mode of the navigation character YM is delayed. In addition, when the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, only the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed, and icons other than the navigation character (pending icon, fluctuation icon) or other effect display may be changed.

  As described above, the description related to the meter display described using FIGS. 80 to 105 can be applied to the description using FIGS. That is, all the statements including the statement that the rate of increase of the meter is different when the color of the meter frame is different can be applied. Alternatively, the matters described using FIGS. 167 to 169 can be applied to the description using FIGS. 80 to 105.

  FIG. 170 shows an example of presentation in which a telop effect is associated with the navigation character YM.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 170 (part 1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of Special Figure 1 are stored, and a first suspension icon h11 and a second suspension icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 170 (about 2-1), a telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, it is displayed that the navigation character YM may change, which corresponds to an example of the change advance display. For example, a display such as "Navi character change high certainty" and a character display such as "Navi character change high certain preparation" are flowed from right to left on the screen. In addition to this, in the telop display trp, no character is displayed in plain color, and by the telop display, “○○ high confidence”, “×× & ○ high confidence”, “○○ high accuracy” In preparation, it may be notified in advance that there is a possibility that "In preparation for xx or xxx high preparation", "Under preparation for high accuracy", etc. may be displayed. Even if a plain telop display trp is displayed here, "○○ high resolution middle", "×× & ○○ high resolution middle", "○○ high resolution right now", "XX or high resolution ready" "" And "High preparation in progress" may not be displayed. In addition, "○○ high sure preparation in progress", "XX or ○ high precision prepare in progress", "high precision preparation in progress", etc. may be displayed, and a high probability state may occur from this onwards of the effect displayed in telop It may be notified in advance. The “XX” and “○○” described here are various effects (eg, hold (hold icon and / or change icon) change, pseudo-link, notice with high expectation color, high expectation for big hit) It shows the name of the notice (so-called "super heat" notice).

  The high-probability state of the effects described here means that the notice notified that the high-probability state was indicated by the telop display, and the notice notified by the telop than when the high-probability state was not notified by the telop display. It shows a state where the frequency of occurrence is high. That is, in FIG. 170 (1) to (14), (14), (2-2), (2-3), and (8-2) in FIG. “” Indicates a state in which the display mode of the navigation character is more likely to change than in the case where it is not notified that “the navigation character change high probability is in progress” in the telop display. In addition, “Highly under preparation in progress” included in “○ × Highly under preparation”, “XX or 高 High with preparation”, “Highly under preparation”, etc. is notified by ticker display. It is from now on that the effect being displayed is in high probability state (The fluctuation after the next fluctuation of the fluctuation when the display of the telop including “Highly prepared is started” or the fluctuation after the display of the telop including “Highly prepared” is started Informing) (or being likely to be in a high probability state)

  In FIG. 170 (part 3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decoration symbols. The telop display trp is displayed in front of the second decorative symbol, and the lower end of the second decorative symbol is overlapped from the front by the telop display trp. However, on the contrary, the second decorative symbol may overlap the telop display trp from the front side.

  In FIG. 170 (4), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. After that, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and also in FIG. 170 (part 6), the symbol variation display is started. The telop display trp is continuing.

  In FIG. 170 (7), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 170 (# 8-1), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn. Even if the change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is continuing. Thereafter, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol variation display is started also in FIG. 170 (part 10), and the telop display trp is still continuing in the same figure (part 11).

  In addition, the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display may appear, the change animation may be started, the treasure box of the icon I1 of the treasure box may be opened, and the navigation character YM may change. In this case, it can be said that the display such as "Navi character change high probability" in the telop display trp indicates the appearance of the icon I1 of the treasure box or the start of the change animation.

  In FIG. 170 (12), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started again, and the navigation character YM is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 170 (# 13), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes to a display mode in which a golden kimono is worn. Even if the second change presentation of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is continuing.

  While displaying the telop display trp, it is possible to perform the change effect of the navigation character YM any number of times, but if the navigation character YM changes once during the display of the telop display trp, then the navigation character YM changes. It may be configured not to.

  In FIG. 170 (step 14), the reach state is entered, but the telop display trp is still continuing. As the timing at which the display of the telop display trp disappears, at the start of super reach (for example, Fig. 154 ((24)), at the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (for example, at the first stop, the second stop, the third stop) , Symbol stop letters, start of the next change, etc.

  In this example, although the change effect is performed by the navigation character itself, the navigation character may be changed by the change preview display, and the navigation character is changed only by the change preview display. It may be configured such that only the change effect by the navigation character itself is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 170 (part 2-2), the telop display trp may be performed in upper and lower two stages, instead of FIG. 170 (part 2-1). Then, different contents may be displayed in the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp.

  In addition, in the telop display, the high-prediction middle display may be displayed for other notices. As to the same prefetch target hold, the timing to be displayed may be the same or one may be later than the other. In addition, when one telop display of “○○ high sure middle” is shown, the telop display may not be displayed for another prefetch target hold, or may be displayed. In that case, the telop display (for example, "Navichara high accuracy middle") about the same notice may be displayed separately, and it may be constituted so that the display period of the same telop display may be extended. Further, the display position of the telop display may be determined in the order of display start, or the display position for each telop may be fixed.

  Also, instead of FIG. 170 (part 2-1), as shown in FIG. 170 (part 2-3), the same contents may be displayed by the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp. That is, a plurality of the same telop display may be displayed. In some cases, it may be possible to show that the expectation of the big hit is higher than when only one is displayed. However, even if a plurality of displays are made, the expectation of the big hit may be the same as in the case where only one display is made. Also, displaying the same telop display plural times may be repeated. That is, each time display of telop display is started, plural telop displays of the same content may be displayed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 170 (step 8-2) instead of FIG. 170 (step 8-1), when the navigation character YM has been changed (one or more times), no further change is made. May be notified by the telop display trp. In this example, a character display of "Done" is displayed. However, even if this notification is performed, the navigation character YM may be further changed.

  FIG. 171 is a diagram showing an example of effects in which the navigation character YM is entangled by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b).

  A first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, and a third decorative symbol display device 208N are shown in FIG. 171 (or 1a-1). In addition, the 2nd decoration symbol and the 2nd reservation number display are performed by the 3rd decoration symbol display device 208N of the right side.

  In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 171 (or 1a-1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four reservations of Special Figure 1 are stored, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. These four hold icons h11 to h14 are all default display modes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 171 (at 2a-1), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and “decoration 7” is swayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol, and in FIG. It shifts to reach production, and all displays have disappeared from the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the first decorative symbol, the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 to h14, the variation icon h0, and the navigation character YM are off.

  In FIG. 171 (T4a), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the pattern of the swordsman of the enemy character on the entire screen. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays the first decorative symbol, the variation icon h0, and the navigation character YM which are displayed in a reduced size. The variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be displayed on different decoration symbol display devices.

  In FIG. 171 (or 5a), the background of the wilderness, which is the background display of the super reach effect, is displayed over the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a duel scene in which the main character of the main character and the swordsman of the enemy character are facing each other.

  Here, instead of FIG. 171 (c), a part of the holding frame UI is displayed enlarged in FIG. C (c), and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display are displayed. It is displayed across the device 208L. That is, the reserved icon display area HIS is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon display region CIS is displayed at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. The first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are enlarged and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the fourth hold icon h14 is enlarged and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third hold icon h13 is enlarged and displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Furthermore, the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, since the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a frame surrounding the display screen, the frame disturbs and the image displayed straddling is divided.

  In addition, although the right base icon bIr is not displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N in which the navigation character YM is displayed in an enlarged manner, the right base icon bIr may be displayed in an enlarged manner together with the navigation character YM.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 171 (or 1a-2), even if the display is not enlarged, a plurality of display devices may be straddled. For example, a pattern which is spanned from the beginning of display, a pattern which is moved from the original position and displayed across, a pattern which is changed and displayed over an image, an image is expanded and displayed over And a pattern in which the image is reduced and displayed across the screen. In addition, as shown in FIG. 171 (1a-2), when the display is enlarged, the expectation of the big hit becomes high, the reserve icon becomes easy to change, the change icon becomes easy to change, or the navigation character YM May change easily. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed across a plurality of display devices. Here, when the effect display is displayed across a plurality of display devices, and a part of the display area of the display device B is overlapped by the display device A in the front, the display device B A part of the image displayed in the display area of the display device B may be displayed in the display area overlapped by the display device A in FIG.

  The items described above with reference to FIG. 171 (to 1a-2) are also applicable to the example of effect described above, and are also applicable to the example of effect to be described later.

  Also, instead of FIG. 171 (1a-1), in FIG. 1 (1a-3), a part of the holding frame UI is moved and displayed. That is, the effect icon display area DIS is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the right base icon bIr is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The navigation character YM is also displayed on the right base icon bIr.

  As described above, when the navigation character YM moves to another display device, the navigation character YM may be easily changed, or the expectation of the big hit may be increased, or the change of other effects (for example, suspension) It may be easy to perform icon and change icon changes etc.). In addition, depending on the destination of the navigation character YM, the ease of change of the navigation character YM, the degree of expectation of the big hit, and the ease of change of other effects (for example, change of pending icon or change icon) It may be different or it may be the same without any impact. For example, the probability that the navigation character YM changes may be higher when moving to the third decorative symbol display device 208N than when moving to the second decorative symbol display device 208L. Although the movement of the navigation character YM has been described above, the same applies to the case where the hold icon moves to another display device or the change icon moves to another display device.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 171 (1a-3), it can also be seen that the holding frame Ui is divided (broken). That is, although the effect icon display area DIS is broken and moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be moved to another place of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  The items described above with reference to FIG. 171 (to 1a-3) are also applicable to the example of effect described above, and are also applicable to the example of effect to be described later.

  Also, instead of FIG. 171 (1a-1), in FIG. 1 (1a-4), the navigation character YM is divided when it moves. That is, when moving from the first decorative symbol display device 208L to another display device, it is split into two, and is displayed on both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This can also be viewed as an increase in the navigation character YM.

  As described above, when the navigation character YM is split (increased), the navigation character YM may be easily changed, or the expectation of the big hit may be increased, or another change in presentation (for example, a reserved icon or The change of the change icon, etc.) may be facilitated.

  Further, since the right base icon bIr is also displayed at the location where the navigation character YM is displayed, it can be said that the effect icon display area DIS is also divided (increased).

  The items described above with reference to FIG. 171 (to 1a-4) are applicable to the example of effect described above, and are also applicable to the example of effect to be described later. That is, even in the other presentation examples, the navigation character YM may be split (increased), and may always be split (increased).

  FIG. 172 is a diagram showing an example of another effect obtained by entanglement of the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b).

  In FIG. 172 (or 1b), the background of the sea is displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. Further, in the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 171 (or 1a-1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four reservations of Special Figure 1 are stored, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. These four hold icons h11 to h14 are all default display modes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 172 (2b), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image. In addition, the background display of the sea disappears in the left and right second decorative symbol display devices 208M and the third decorative symbol display devices 208N shown in FIG. 172 (or 2b).

  In FIG. 172 (3b), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM disappears from the effect icon display area DIS, and instead, an icon of a signboard "searching" is displayed. In addition, on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side where the background display of the sea has disappeared, the same character (a lady) YM 'as the navigation character YM is displayed and running. In addition, a text display of "searching" is displayed on it. Similarly, a silhouette display slt is displayed together with the image of the question mark on the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side where the background display of the sea has disappeared.

  The icon of the signboard “in search” may be a notification indicating that there is a high possibility of success in the change presentation (promotion presentation) of the navigation character YM. In addition, the probability of success is higher when the color of the sign is blue than white, and the probability of success is higher when the sign is red than blue. In addition, if it is red, promotion confirmation may be sufficient. In addition, the signboard may be changed in color, display character or the like but may not be changed. In addition, the display mode of the signboard may suggest a display mode in which the navigation character YM may change. For example, if the signboard is blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode in which a blue kimono is worn.

  In FIG. 172 (or 4b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which have been in the fully open state (initial state) so far, are in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so that they approach each other. Will move. Note that this period corresponds to a period of roaring effect.

  In FIG. 172 ((5b-1)), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position and stop. Here, it moves to the fully closed position (maximum movement position) in contact with each other and stops, but it may be a position before contact.

  Fig. 172 (Fig. 6b-1) shows an example of the promotion success pattern. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the running character (dominant) YM 'takes a pose with the thumb raised The character display showing the level up is displayed on. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to a real display, and a two-car box is displayed. In addition, the display mode in which the navigation character YM may be changed may be suggested depending on the display mode of the one and two box. For example, if the one thousand box is blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a blue kimono. In addition, although the color, the open / close state, and the like may change in this thousand box, it may not change. In FIG. 172 (or 7b), the character (ten-like) YM 'displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn.

  Then, in FIG. 172 (or 8b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to be separated from each other, and return to the initial state . When each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is restored to the initial state, the wipe effect is performed by the respective decorative symbol display devices 208M and N. The second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 172 (9b) and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in the middle of wipe-in, and the wipe-in is completed in the same figure (c) 10b, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M Also in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a wipe display in which only the model title is displayed is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 172 (or 10b), a smoke image is displayed at the position where the icon of the signboard was displayed until then.

  In the effect icon display area DIS of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 172 (or 11b), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, wipe out is started in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this example, the animation of wipe-in (animation that closes from the left and right) and the animation of wipe-out (animation that opens from the inside to the outside) are different but may be the same animation. In FIG. 172 (12b), the wipe out is completed, and the sea background is displayed across the three decoration symbol display devices 208L to N. In one decorative symbol display device, the effect display displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices of this embodiment may be performed. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be replaced by one or more effect movable bodies not including the liquid crystal display device (for example, the effect movable body performs the effect operation) And the navi character is promoted.

  The change effect (promotional effect) of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 172 is applicable to the effect examples described so far, and is also applicable to the effect example described later.

  FIG. 173 is a diagram showing an example of still another effect in which the navigation character YM is entangled by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b).

  In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 173 (at 1a-3-1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four reservations of Special Figure 1 are stored, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. These four hold icons h11 to h14 are all default display modes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 173 ((1a-3-2)), a moving animation in which the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed. In FIG. 173 (1a-3-2), the navigation character YM is exactly located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Also in this case, since there is a frame surrounding the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, this frame disturbs the navigation character YM displayed across the frame. On the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 173 (at 1a-3-3), the navigation character YM having the same display size as that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 173 (1a-3-2 ′), the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the third decorative symbol display device An example of enlarged display is shown at 208N. Although only the right hand and the right toe of the navigation character YM are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 173 (1a-3-2 ′), the right toe of the right hand and the right foot is enlarged and displayed. The navigation character YM is immediately enlarged and displayed from the part which has entered the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 173 (1a-3-3 ′), the navigation character YM having a display size larger than that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. . As described above, when the navigation character YM is displayed in an enlarged manner, the navigation character YM may be more likely to change, or the expectation of the jackpot may be higher than in the case where the navigation character YM is not displayed in an enlarged manner. A change in the effect of (for example, a change in the hold icon or the change icon) may be facilitated, or may be the same without any influence at all. In addition, when the navigation character YM is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be always displayed enlarged or may not be displayed enlarged.

  The moving animation of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 173 is applicable to the example of the effects described above, and is also applicable to the example of effects described later.

  Also, instead of FIG. 172 (8 b), FIG. 173 (5 b-2) shows a pattern in which the change effect (promotional effect) of the navigation character YM has failed. In FIG. 172 (or 4b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving closer to each other, and both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position. Is a failure. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are stopped halfway, also return to the initial state, but notification of a change effect (promotional effect) failure is performed after returning to the initial state. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 173 (or 5b-2), the character (tendon) YM 'takes a pose of being depressed backward. Note that notification of failure may be started while returning to the initial state. Alternatively, notification of failure may be started when the vehicle has stopped before reaching a certain position.

  When both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position, it may fail without fail, but the navigation character YM may be promoted. Further, even if this change effect (promotional effect) fails, the navigation character YM may be promoted by another effect. This is also true for the effects divided into success and failure described so far.

  In addition, when the change effect (promotional effect) fails here, the navigation character YM is for the time being (for example, until the background display changes, or until N times of variations end from promotion failure, The change may be regulated until the change of the prefetch target hold related to the promotion failure ends).

  Also, instead of FIG. 172 (6b-1), FIG. 173 (6b-2) shows the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol up to a certain position (for example, the fully closed position). A pattern in which the change rendering (promotional rendering) has failed despite the display device 208N moving is shown. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 173 ((6b-2)), as in the case described above, a character (a lady) YM 'of a pose facing downward and falling behind is displayed. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to the real display, and the orange box is displayed there.

  Thus, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the promotion effect may fail. Alternatively, on the contrary, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the navigation character YM may be promoted without fail. Further, even in the state shown in FIG. 173 (t6b-2), the navigation character YM may be promoted in some cases, or conversely, in this state, the failure may be determined.

  FIG. 174 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the navigation character YM is entangled by the effect device 206 in which the second display device is provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device).

  The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (or 1c). On the other hand, the background of the sea is not displayed on the second display device 208S provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device), and the holding frame UI is displayed on the second display device 208S. ing. That is, the reserved icon display area HIS, the variation icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS are provided, and the pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. In the reserved icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the base icon bIn. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. The second display device 208S may be fixed or capable of moving up and down.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (or 1c), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the second display device 208S. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is also displayed on the second display device 208S.

  In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (or 2c), the bird's-eye view image for the wipe effect is displayed, and in the state shown in FIG. 174 (or 3c), the bird's-eye view image is completely closed (wipe-in state) It is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (T4), wipe out starts, and in the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (T5), the bird's-eye view image is fully open (wipe out state). On the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (5c) after the wipe effect is finished, neither the holding frame UI nor the holding icon h11 nor the variation icon h0 nor the navigation character YM is displayed, but instead, The animation of the mini game by is displayed. That is, by the wipe effect, the holding frame UI, the holding icon h11, the changing icon h0, and the navi character YM also become non-displayed, and a bet of change (promotion) of the display mode of the navi character YM The game has been started. Even in the same mini game, there may be a mini game in which a successful super reach effect is started. In the stage of FIG. 174 (T4c), although it can be understood that the mini game is started on the second display device 208S, it does not know what the bet (diving) is the mini game, and it is shown in FIG. I do not understand until it becomes a stage. For this reason, at least the second display device 208S may be able to be focused on until the explanation about the mini game (here, "If you enter the cup, you are promoted to Yoshimune") is performed.

  In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (at 6c-1), the cup-in succeeds. When the cup-in is successful, the wipe effect is started again, and the bird's-eye view image begins to close again in FIG. 174 (to 7 c), and the state shown in FIG. is there. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (at 9c), wipeout starts, and in the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (at 10c), the overhead image is fully open (wipeout state). In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (or 10c) wiped out again, the holding frame UI, the holding icon h11, the variation icon h0, and the navigation character YM are displayed. Thus, after the wipe-out is completed, a change animation of the navigation character YM is displayed on the second display device 208S (FIG. 174 (11c)). In the change animation here, the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image, and in FIG. 174 (12c), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes to the display mode of the red kimono.

  Further, in FIG. 174 (6c-2) instead of FIG. 174 (6c-1), the cup-in fails. Thus, when the mini game fails to bet the change (promotion) of the display mode of the navigation character YM, the navigation character YM may not be absolutely promoted, but may be promoted. . Further, as shown in FIG. 174 (6c-1), when the mini game succeeds, the navigation character YM may be absolutely promoted, but may not be promoted.

  Note that when wiped out from FIG. 174 (or 8c), it may be a wipe effect that can suggest to the player the possibility that the navigation character YM will be promoted, or a display mode in which the navigation character YM changes. It may be a wipe effect that can be suggested.

  Further, when wiped out in FIG. 174 (or 10c), the navigation character YM may already be changed (promoted).

  In addition, the second display device 208S may perform the rendering operation while the mini game is being executed. In addition, success (in the case of this example (Fig. 174 (To 6c-1)) and failure (in the case of Fig. 174 (To 6c-2) in the case of this example). Different rendering operations may be performed. In addition, the rendering operation by the rendering movable body may be performed instead of the second display device 208S.

  The mini game described with reference to FIG. 174 is applicable to the effect examples described above, and is also applicable to the effect examples described later.

  FIG. 175 is a diagram showing an example when another effect is performed while the effect selected by the player is being performed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 in this description, the above-described customization setting is performed. That is, in the "character selection" shown in FIG. 139 (b), the "copanda" of 07 is set, the "pending frame B" of 02 is set in the "holding frame selection", and the "holding display selection" is The "icon C" of 03 is set, and the "background E" of 05 is set in the background display selection.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (a1), the holding frame UI of the holding frame B is displayed, and in the effect icon display area DIS, a copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM. In addition, one suspension of the special view 1 is stored, and a first suspension icon h11, which is a default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (A1), the background (sky background) of the background E is displayed.

  In FIG. 175 (a2), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, the first decorative symbol is in high-speed variation, and the variation icon h0 which is the default display mode of the icon C is displayed. In addition, the navigation character YM of the copanda is also displayed.

  In FIG. 175 (Aa3-1), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in the same figure (Aa4-1), the icon I2 of the carpet Disappear, and the icon I1 of the treasure chest is left. In FIG. 175 (Aa5), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, and the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image hides part or all of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM Is clearly less visible than before the appearance of the smoke image. Note that the change animation may be started by the operation of the chance button 136. In this case, a back button may be used, or an operation promotion notification may be performed. In FIG. 175 (Aa6), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes from the copanda to the bancho. As shown in FIG. 139 (b), the game's character in the navigation character YM is a character that can not be selected by the player. Note that the character may be changed to a character (for example, a princess or a princess) selectable by the player, or may be changed to a character which can not be selected by the player.

  In FIG. 175 (Aa7), the icon I1 of the treasure box disappears, and in FIG. 175A (A8), the reach state is entered. A balloon icon of “NEXT” indicating a pseudo-series effect is added to the navigation character YM of the group leader shown in FIG. 175 (Aa8).

  In FIG. 175 (Aa9), the pseudo continuous symbol (the symbol of the character of Toten-sama) temporarily stops at the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol, and in FIG. Cut-in display is performed. In this embodiment, in this way, the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the pseudo run is to be performed. Here, the pseudo-link is a variation display mode of the decoration symbol which executes the variation start and temporary stop display of the decoration symbol a plurality of times in the variation display of one special figure. In this embodiment, the larger the number of times the pseudo run is performed, the easier it is to be a big hit.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 175 (Aa11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started again. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started is largely displayed so as to overlap the first decorative symbol. Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (a12), the display of “× 2” is shrunk and moved to the lower side of the second decorative symbol.

  A balloon icon "NEXT" indicating pseudo-series effect is again added to the navigation character YM of the group leader shown in FIG. 175 (Aa13), and the continuation of the pseudo-series is still expected. Thereafter, after the temporary stop display is performed 0 times or once or a plurality of times, the reach state is entered, and further, it is developed into the super reach production (Kenou reach production). The background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (Aa15) changes to the background of the wilderness, which is the background display of the sword master reach effect, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hero of the protagonist and the sword player of the enemy character The confrontation duel scene is displayed. Further, in the holding frame UI, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 of the holding icon display area HIS disappear. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also displayed thereon. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navy character YM of the group leader is displayed above the right base icon bIr.

  A balloon icon of “chance” for hitting a big hit is added to the navigation character YM of the bank leader shown in FIG. 175 (Aa 16), and the navigation character YM of the bank leader is executing a honing effect.

  Figure 175 (Aa18) shows a scene after the majesty and the swordsman have cut each other in the super reach production on the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the majesty falls, and as the middle symbol, "Decoration 6" different from the design ("decoration 7") is displayed (swinged) largely. Although the height of the pedestal of the variation icon display area CIS is lowered, the lowered pedestal hs0 'is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also displayed thereon. In addition, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM of the bank leader is also displayed. Thereafter, the wipe effect is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (Aa19), the wipe is in the middle, and in the same figure (Aa20), the wipe in is completed and then the wipe out is started. In the diagram (a 21), as the background (the background of the sky) of the background E is returned, the navy character YM of the copanda is beginning to be visible. In FIG. 175 (Aa22), the wipe effect is finished, and the decoration symbol display device 208 shakes and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" which is a combination of losing. Further, the holding frame UI of the holding frame B is also displayed, and the display of the variation icon h0, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is also resumed. In addition, a blue hold icon (pre-reading hold icon) is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (E2) to FIG. (E4-1), there are also cases where the navigation character YM itself changes the display mode of itself. In this example, although the change animation using the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display is executed, it is missed, but the display mode of the navigation character YM is changed by the effect using the icon I1 of the treasure box It may be easier for the player to eventually shift to a state advantageous to the player than when changing (for example, changing by oneself) without using the icon I1 of the treasure chest. Here, the advantageous state includes the transition to the jackpot gaming state, the transition to the jackpot gaming state with a large number of balls, and the transition to the probability change state or the electric support state.

  In this example, even if the hold increases while the hold icon is not displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased while the hold icon is not displayed when the hold icon is changed from the hide to the display. Pre-reading notice may be given. In addition, if the hold increases while the hold icon is not displayed, the hold is digested until the hold is digested (it may be displayed in the variable icon display area, or until it is deleted from the variable icon display area). May be configured to restrict the advance notice and / or the notice of the change by the hold icon corresponding to the increase of the hold while the hold icon is not displayed, the target of the change in the increase of the hold It may be configured such that the preview notice by the hold icon is regulated, and the preview notice and / or the notice of the change may be issued from the next change of the change of the increase of the hold.

  In this example, while the prefetch notice by the one hold icon is being executed, the prefetch notice by the other hold icon may be performed, but the prefetch notice by the other hold icon is performed while the prefetch notice by the one hold icon is performed. The restriction is imposed until the holding corresponding to the one holding icon is digested (may be displayed in the variation icon display area or may be deleted from the variation icon display area) It is also good.

  In this example, the advance notice and / or the advance notice of the change may be given by the navi character selected by the player, but the advance notice and / or the advance notice of the change may be performed by the navigation character selected by the player. You may not want to In addition, the tutorial display may be performed by the navigation character selected by the player (for example, the tutorial display is performed by the balloon icon), but the tutorial display is displayed by the navigation character selected by the player. You may not want to Further, in this example, a notice of advance and / or advance notice of the change may be given by a navi character which can not be selected by the player, but advance notice and / or advance notice of the change may not be given. In addition, the navigation character that can not be selected by the player may be configured to be more likely to perform the promotion effect of the holding icon and / or the fluctuation icon than the navigation character that can be selected by the player, and the navigation character changes It may be configured to have high expectation (or big hit confirmation (or big hit may be heavy)) of the jackpot variation within the selected symbol and / or the hold, and the notice and / or the announcement that the navigation character appears The super-reach effect may be configured to be generated frequently (or generated).

  FIG. 176 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 176 (FIG. 176 (a3-2)), the notice of change is displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate IL, instead of the icon I1 of the treasure box. That is, the change of the navigation character YM may be notified by a different presentation means than the presentation means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) on which the navigation character YM is displayed.

  Also, instead of FIG. 175 (Aa3-1), in FIG. 176 (Aa3-3), in place of the icon I1 of the treasure box, a change notice display due to the rendering operation of the movable means (here, family crest item It is carried out. That is, the family crest 224E moves from the initial position to a position where it has risen, and overlaps the fluctuation icon h0 and the navigation character YM. Here, although there is no hold icon, if there is a hold icon, the hold icon is also overlapped. Thereafter, the family crest 224E rotates clockwise (see the arrow in the figure). The family crest 224E may be rotated at the initial position. Also, the household crest 224E may vibrate with or instead of rotation. Also, it is possible to raise only and not to rotate and vibrate. In addition, the navigation character YM may be changed during the overlap, or may be changed after the rendering operation of the family crest 224E, that is, after the family crest 224E returns to the initial position. Further, the easiness of change to the navigation character YM or the color of the display mode after the change may be notified by the light emission effect by the LED provided on the household crest item 224E.

  Also, in FIG. 176 (Aa3-4) instead of FIG. 175 (Aa3-1), a change advance display is performed by sound output from the speaker 120 in place of the icon I1 of the treasure box. Note that the change notice may be displayed by the game board lamp 442 or the game stand frame lamp 452.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 176 (a a 4-2) instead of FIG. 175 (a a 4-1), while the icon I 1 of the treasure box of the change notice is temporarily displayed in the effect icon display area DIS In some cases, the icon I1 may fly away on the carpet icon I2. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change, which corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

  Also, instead of FIG. 175 (Aa6-1), in FIG. 176 (Aa6-2), the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change although the treasure box of the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened Also corresponds to so-called failure patterns.

  Also, instead of FIG. 175 (Aa 6-1), in FIG. 176 (A a 6-3), a copanda navy character YM is the same copanda but the color of the clothes is different (here, red clothes) Copanda), and has succeeded in the change production (promotional production) of the navigation character YM.

  Also, instead of FIG. 175 (A a3-1), in FIG. 176 (A b1), as in the example shown in FIG. 174, the second display device 208S below the decorative symbol display device 208 (the first display device) Are arranged, the second display device 208S is provided with the reserved icon display area HIS, the variation icon display area CIS, the effect icon display area DIS, and the pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. . In the reserve icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the base icon bIn. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navy character YM of the copanda is displayed. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (Ab1), a conversation notice is made by the notice of the character display of the rose character and the "Navichara change", and the change notice display is made by this conversation notice. It is That is, the fact that the navigation character YM changes is notified by means of another presentation means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) different from the presentation means (here, the second display device 208S) where the navigation character YM is displayed. There is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 176 (b2), the navi character YM is changed from the copanda to a bancho that is a character that can not be selected by the player.

  Further, in place of FIG. 175 (Aa2), a speaker 120 is shown in FIG. 176 (Ac1). Also, the volume level set by the player in the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. 141 (9) and the brightness (light quantity) level set in the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 141 (3) It is noted at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example both are three levels. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 in this example, the volume and brightness set by the player are forcibly changed at the time of execution to be output from the speaker 120, or for the game board lamp 442 and / or game frame Since an LED such as the lamp 452 may emit light, it is described in the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the “actual setting value”. This is the same in the following examples. In FIG. 176 (A c2), that the “superheat” notice may be given is notified by the speaker 120 which is a presentation means different from the presentation means having the possibility that the “hot heat” notice may be given. ing. The volume (actual setting value) of the speaker 120 at this time matches the user setting value. After that, in FIG. 176 (A c3), the notice of “extensive heat” is executed, the character “excessive heat” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 large, and the sound is output from the speaker 120. The lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emit light. The volume (actual setting value) at the time of the "superheating" advance execution exceeds the user setting value and is level 5, and the luminance (actual setting value) is also level 5 exceeding the user setting value. That is, the sound is output at a volume higher than the volume level set by the player, and the light is emitted at a brightness higher than the brightness level set by the player. In addition, at the time of effect execution, there are cases where the volume and brightness exceed the user setting value and are forcibly below the user setting value (the same applies hereinafter). Further, the timing at which the volume and the luminance forcibly change is not limited to this example, for example, the luminance may also change at the timing at which the sound in the heat close approach is output, or the sound in the heat close approach The volume and brightness may change while the signal is output. In addition, when a certain effect is performed, only the volume among the volume and the luminance may be output exceeding the user setting value, or only the luminance may emit light exceeding the user setting value. There are also cases where both go beyond.

  It should be noted that the user setting of the volume and the brightness may be possible even in a game console where the convenient volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW are not prepared as described with reference to FIG. 141, and the player It may be any game console that can set the volume and brightness. In addition, the technical idea can be applied to the case where the player can set (adjust) the resolution of the image, the color tone of the image, and the like referred to here (the same applies hereinafter).

  The various technical ideas described above with reference to FIG. 176 can be applied to the example of effects described above, and can also be applied to the example of effects described later.

  FIG. 177 is a table summarizing music that can be output from the speaker 120.

  In the gaming stand in this example, the user may be able to select the music output from the speaker 120. The serial numbers 1 to 11 in the table of FIG. 177 are music pieces that can be selected by the user according to the number of consecutive jackpots. For example, if you do not have 15 jackpots, you can not select the song "Dumping behavior". Also, multiple songs may be selectable. For example, when 15 jackpots are hit, all songs of serial numbers 1 to 11 can be selected.

  In addition, the 12 songs with serial numbers are songs that can be selected when the chance button 136 is operated 5 times during the big hit start interval (during big hit start effect execution), and when the back button navigation mode is set During the start interval, guidance on operating the chance button 136 is notified, but not notified in the case of back button navigation mode non-setting. Note that the guidance may not be notified even when the back button navigation mode is set, or the guidance may be notified also when the back button navigation mode is not set.

  Also, the songs of serial numbers 13 and 14 are songs that can be selected on the condition of a big hit with a specific reach. The "collaboration SP" mentioned here refers to super reach production in which a plurality of characters perform in parallel (for example, super reach production in which Yoshimune and a panda perform in parallel with Kagoshima reach). A "big hit" is a cut-in image during super reach, in which the "楓" of the premier character appeared and hit a big hit.

  FIG. 178 is a diagram showing an example where the music selection described using FIG. 177 is performed.

  In FIG. 178 (i), it is a definite change state (special drawing high probability common drawing high probability state), and is in the process of high speed fluctuation of the first decorative symbol. The second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (A1), and the number of holds of Special Figure 1 is 3, and the number of holds of Special Figure 2 is also It is three. Further, this pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority change machine, and only the reserved icons h21 to h23 of the special figure 2 are shown in FIG. These three hold icons h21 to h23 are all default display modes. In addition, it is the jackpot third consecutive class. Furthermore, in the music title display area MN at the upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (B1), the music title of the currently output music (here, the default “may be there”) Is displayed, and the music of the music title is output from the speaker 120. That is, the music being output here is the music being output in the definite variation state. Furthermore, the icons of the up and down keys 137u and d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed on the left side of the music title display unit MN, and it is informed that music selection is possible by operating the up and down keys 137u and d. In addition, a background screen of the space is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the background screen of the space is a background screen for a probability variation state.

  In FIG. 178 (b), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in FIG. 178 (b), the song title of the song title display portion MN is changed to “Mega giga summer”. Note that since the music is output from the speaker 120 slightly after the music selection operation (for example, 500 ms), there is a period in which the music title of the music name display unit MN and the music actually output from the speaker 120 are different. Note that the music title of the music title display unit MN may be configured to match the music actually output from the speaker 120. In FIG. 178 (b), the music of “Mega giga summer” is also output from the speaker 120. When the music change is performed, the music is output from the beginning, but for example, the timing or time when the music flows is determined by power on or RTC (Real Time Clock) effect, or the output from the continuation of the previous output. If it is, it may be output halfway.

  In FIG. 178 (B5), the reserve of the special figure 2 increases, and the special 2 becomes full (the reserve number display displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol event device 208 is updated to 4). The start of the display of the fourth hold icon is slightly later than the hold number display is updated to 4, and the fourth hold icon 24 of the display mode (blinking white) of the prefetch notice is displayed in FIG. It is done. After that, the suspension of Special Figure 2 is digested three, and the symbol stop of Special Figure 2 is performed in Figure 178 (A8), and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols. There is. In addition, the number of remaining reservations of the special figure 2 is 1, and the 1st reservation icon h21 is changing into the display mode of red.

  In FIG. 178 (b), the last hold of the special figure 2 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Even in the state of FIG. 178 (B10), the selected music is still “Mega Giga Summer”, and in FIG. 178B (B), the character C11 of the Bancho appears, and a music change notice is given. The music change notice is a jackpot notice including an effect of forcibly changing the music selected by the player to another music, and may be a normal notice or may be applied to a prefetch notice. . In this example, by displaying the music change notice, the big change confirmation (or big hit rich) is notified about the symbol change for which the music change notice is displayed, but the symbol change displayed with the music change notice is removed There may be cases. For example, if "Make DREAM", which is the theme song of the character who has appeared, is output (it is a high hit expectation, or a big hit decision (it may be a big hit)), it is successful. "" Is not output, it may be a failure, and the symbol change on which the music change notice is displayed may be removed. In addition, even if "make DREAM" is not output and the music change advance notice fails, it may be notified that the big hit has been determined by another effect (for example, resurrection effect). In addition, since the music change notice is displayed, the jackpot confirmation (or the big hit rich) / or the expectation of the big hit than when the notice other than the music change notice is performed for the next change of the symbol change displayed the music change notice It is possible to give a pre-reading notice to give notice that the degree is high. In addition, even when the music change advance notice fails, it may be configured to be notified that the big hit is definitely determined by another effect (for example, resurrection effect). However, since the music change notice may cause an annoying effect for the player in some cases that the music selected by the player is forced to be replaced, if the music change notice is started as a compensation, the jackpot It may be decided.

  The song change effect sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 178 (12). Moreover, although the output of the music of "mega giga summer" output by the speaker 120 is not performed, the music of "mega giga summer" may be output. In addition, the character C11 of the bank leader who appeared in the music change notice raises one hand, and the hand overlaps a part of the music title display portion MN.

  In FIG. 178 (13), the song title of the song title display section MN is changed to "Distance", but no song is output from the speaker 120. Even if the output of the music of "Mega Giga Summer" is continuously output as it is in Fig. 178 (B12) to Fig. 178B (B15-1). The output may be started from the speaker 120 as "Distance" changed by the music change notice. Here, as shown in FIG. 177, “Distance” is not a music released next to “Mega Giga Summer”, but is a music different from “Burning DREAM”. However, "Distance" is the music that precedes "Bake DREAM" in the open order. In the music change notice here, such a music of "Distance" is sandwiched, and finally, "make DREAM" is output. It should be noted that "open DREAM" may be displayed on the song title display section MN at the stage of FIG. 178 (b).

  In FIG. 178 (i), again, the song change effect sound is output from the speaker 120, and the character C11 of the master has raised one hand. Even if a certain period of time has passed since the song title of the song title display section MN has been changed to "Distance", the song "Distance" may not be output from the speaker 120, but may be output.

  In FIG. 178 (i), the song title of the song title display portion MN is changed to "speaking DREAM", and the speaker 120 outputs a song change effect sound again. The music change notice may be a success at the stage when "speaking DREAM" is displayed on the song title display section MN, and in FIG. 178 (i16), the music of "songing DREAM" is output from the speaker 120. That is, when "speaking DREAM" is displayed on the song title display unit MN, the music of "songing DREAM" is always output from the speaker 120. It should be noted that even when “Denage DREAM” is displayed, there may be provided a case where the music of “Denage DREAM” is not output from the speaker 120 and a failure occurs.

  Also, in the present example, when the music change notice is displayed, "Bringing DREAM" is always output, but in Fig. 178 (B15), the original "Mega giga summer" is displayed on the music name display section MN. In this case, it is a failure (deterioration), and then “mega giga summer” may be output from the speaker 120 as well. Alternatively, if “Distance” is still displayed on the song name display unit MN at the timing shown in FIG. 178 (i), it is also a failure (or failure), and then “Distance” may be output from the speaker 120 as well. The original "mega giga summer" may be displayed on the song name display section MN which the player has selected, and output of the "mega giga summer" song may be started.

  Depending on whether "Distance" is displayed on the song title display section MN at the timing shown in FIG. 178 (B13) or "Your tears" opened next to "Mega Giga Summer" is displayed. The jackpot expectation may be expressed for symbol variation within the variation and / or hold. That is, when "Distance" is displayed, the degree of expectation of the jackpot may be higher than when "your mind" is displayed.

  In addition, you may express the big hit expectation about the said fluctuation | variation and / or the symbol fluctuation in suspension by the change frequency of the music by music change advance notice. For example, when the music is changed twice due to the music change notice, it may be configured to be more likely to make a big hit with respect to the fluctuation and / or the symbol fluctuation within the hold when the music is changed twice. . In addition, when the music has changed a specific number of times (for example, seven times) due to the music change notice, the change and / or the symbol change in the hold may be a big hit decision (or a big hit rich). Conversely, if the music has changed a specific number of times (for example, once) due to a music change advance notice, it may be a lost decision.

  In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (A16), an animation of "Bright DREAM" is also displayed. And in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (B), “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” which is a combination of big hit with probability change is displayed in a wavering manner (FIG. In 20), the combination is confirmed and displayed. In this example, when the music change notice is displayed, the music is always changed to "Make DREAM", and then the music of "Make DREAM" is outputted from the speaker 120, and the decoration symbol display device 208 outputs "Make DREAM". An animation (including the lyrics display) is displayed and becomes a big hit. In addition, even if the music change notice is displayed and the music becomes "Bake DREAM", the music of "Bake DREAM" is outputted from the speaker 120, and / or the decoration symbol display device 208 has "Bake DREAM" It may be configured such that the animation may not be displayed. That is, even if the music change notice is displayed and changed to a specific music, there may be a case where the next time there is no effect display corresponding to the music, there may be a loss.

  FIG. 179 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  The start screen of the big hit game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (i 21), and the big hit start BGM is output from the speaker 120 during the big hit start interval (during big hit start effect execution) It is.

  The timing in FIG. 179 (b) is the timing immediately after the first round is started. In the jackpot game effect in this example, the first round and the second round become the music selection period. When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 automatically displays a music selection screen. Note that the music selection may be started by the player's intention, and in this case, the music selection screen may be called by operating the chance button 136 or the like. In addition, even if it is a music selection period, if selection of a music is complete | finished, a music selection screen will disappear and round production will be started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a display ("1R") indicating that it is the first round and a display (0 pt) of the number of balls (the number of winning balls) are also performed.

  The music selection list GR is displayed on the music selection screen. As we have achieved 4 consecutive homes in this big hit, "Kiseki's Universe" is newly added to the music release list GR and is selectable. The display of "the universe of Kiseki" is marked with "New". Note that in this example, the newly added music is configured to be displayed on the second row of the music release list GR, so "may be there" and "Mega Giga Summer" are already open. "Is hidden. Here, the newly opened “Kiseki universe” is selected, and the speaker 120 outputs the rust part of the “Kiseki universe”. In the music release list GR, the previous "Daake DREAM" is not displayed, and "Daake DREAM" can not be selected. However, in the case where the effect of "Bakee DREAM" is executed, "Bakee DREAM" may be released. In this case, the display position in the music release list GR of "Makeru DREAM" may be a position immediately below the song ("Your Scarecrow") released by the previous time, or "Kishikino's released this time" It may be located directly below the universe. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 179, since the opening order is the sixth music, it may be the position of the sixth music counting from the leading music, but in this case, three question marks are displayed in a row. It will be caught. In addition, when the production of "Makeru DREAM" is executed, "Makeru DREAM" among the music released in response to the number of consecutive houses ("Kiseki's Universe") and the music of "Makeru DREAM" Only the song may be released, or both songs may be released.

  In FIG. 179 (b), the cursor csd is aligned with the display in which three question marks under the display of "Kiseki's Universe" are arranged in the music release list GR by operating the down key 137d. The display in which three question marks are arranged is an unreleased display, and the song title is also unknown. That is, in the music release list GR, it is unclear what music is scheduled to be released in the future. At the timing shown in FIG. 179 (b), the gaming ball has begun to win the attacker.

  When the cursor csd is placed on the display where three question marks are arranged, the downward scroll is automatically started (Fig. 179 (a 25)), and the cursor csd goes to the end and the leading "there is It may be back to ". It should be noted that the scrolling may be performed by the player's own operation instead of the scrolling directed downward automatically. Also, instead of displaying three question marks in a row, the name of the song scheduled to be released in the future may be displayed dimmed. Or conversely, it is not necessary to notify that there is a song that is not open. That is, the display itself in which three question marks are arranged may not be displayed in the music open list GR, and only the open music titles may be displayed.

  Also in FIG. 179 (i), the automatic scrolling does not end, and the rust part of "Kiseki's universe" is repeatedly output from the speaker 120. Note that during music selection, a part (in this example, the chorus part) of each music is output so as to loop, but it does not have to be looped. For example, when output for a certain period is completed, the next music Automatically, or the music may not be output until the next is selected. In addition, all may be output from the beginning of each music, or all may be output from the middle of the music (for example, a portion of rust).

  Even in FIG. 179 (b 28), the automatic scrolling has not ended, and the cursor csd has not returned to the top "may be there", but from the speaker 120, "the universe of Kiseki" is substituted for " The output of the part of the chorus of "may be there" has been started. Note that it may be configured such that the music of "may be there" may not be output until the cursor csd is set to "may be there". FIG. 179 (b 30) shows that the cursor csd has reached the end of the music release list GR by automatic scrolling, and in the same figure (b 31), the cursor csd may be located at the top of the list. "I'm back", and automatic scrolling has ended. Basically, the cursor csd corresponds to the display of music from the speaker 120 after the cursor is placed on the display of the target music (it may be at the same time as or before the cursor is set). Although the output of the music is started, since “it may be there” is output in the middle of the automatic scrolling, the music which was output at the time of FIG. The continuation of is output as it is. Furthermore, after the cursor csd is adjusted to "may be there" (may be simultaneous with or before being adjusted), it may be "newly there" The music of "" may be newly started from the beginning of the portion of the chorus of "may be there" (that is, the beginning of the music outputted by the music selection).

  After that, the lower key 137d is operated once, and the cursor csd is adjusted to the display of "mega giga summer" as shown in FIG. 179 (b). In this state, as shown in FIG. 179 (b), the chance button 136 is operated, and it is determined to be "Mega Giga Summer". In the music release list GR shown in FIG. 179 (b), the display of the determined "mega giga summer" is displayed in red, and the speaker 120 outputs the music determination sound.

  When the music is determined in this way, the music selection screen is switched to the round effect screen. The second round of the round effect screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (b 36), and the title of the selected music "Mega Giga Summer" is displayed at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is done. Also, the music of “Mega giga summer” is outputted from the speaker 120. The selected music is output from the beginning at the start of the round effect. In addition, when all is output from the beginning of not only the chorus part but the music at the time of music selection, you may make it be output from the continuation at the time of a round production start.

  Also, instead of FIG. 178 (i), in FIG. 179 (i), the song name "CREA" is displayed on the song name display section MN of the decorative symbol display device 208. The music of this song name is a music not included in the table shown in FIG. That is, the music can not be selected by the player. The music of "CREA" is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 178 (i. 15-2-2), and the animation of the character of "CREA" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, The lyrics for the song "CREA" are also displayed. As described above, when music that can not be selected by the player is output, the degree of expectation of the big hit may be high or the big hit may be confirmed. However, the case of losing may be included. Also, in the subsequent music selection by the player, since the music of "CREA" is output once, it may be added as one of the selectable musics in the music open list GR, or vice versa. , May be prohibited to add. Also, it is possible to select in the song selection during the big hit game and not selectable in the song selection during the symbol variation, and conversely, in the song selection during the big hit game, it is not selectable and select in the song variation during the symbol variation It may be possible.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram showing an example of effects by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (A1), the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, one reserve of special figure 1 is stored, and the first reserve icon h11 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

  Further, in this FIG. 180, similarly to FIG. 176 (c1), the “user setting value” of “volume” and “brightness” is described at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 of each figure, and “volume” at the lower right. And the "actual setting value" of the "brightness". In addition, the types of "BGM", "SE (sound effect)", and "light emission" among the effects actually executed are also described.

  In FIG. 180 (a1), the symbol variation BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set values, and the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 are in accordance with the symbol variation lamp pattern. It emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user setting value.

  In addition, in order to forcibly set the volume and the luminance to the actual setting value, the effect control data may ignore the user setting value and instruct to execute with the value defined by the effect data, or the user setting The sub control units 400 and 500 may self-manage according to a table in which effects ignoring the value are summarized, or may be managed based on a command from the main control unit 300.

  In FIG. 180 (Wa3), it is developed into super reach production (Kenou reach production), and the left symbol temporarily stopped by the decoration symbol display device 208 moves to the upper left of the decoration symbol display device 208 and is temporarily stopped similarly. The right symbol is moved to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 180 (Wa3), the BGM for super reach development is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set values, and the lamp 442 for game board and the lamp 452 for game frame according to the lamp pattern for super reach development. However, light is emitted at the same three levels of luminance as the user set value.

  In FIG. 180 (Wa4), the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd operate and advance from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively, to the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps from the front side. In this state, light is emitted from the light guide plate IL, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In FIG. 180 (Wa4), the BGM disappears, and the super reach development feature character movement effect sound is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user setting value, and the super reach development feature film turning lamp According to the pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emit light with the same three levels of brightness as the user set values. As described above, although the first large-screen behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224 Gd and characters such as the light guide plate IL perform the rendering operation, the volume and the luminance remain at the user setting values.

  In addition, the 1st large board behavior character thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior character thing 224Gd return once to an initial position at an appropriate timing.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (Wa6) shows a scene after the main character of the main character and the swordsman of the enemy character perform a duel on the background screen of the wilderness and the lord and the swordsman cut each other. In FIG. 180 (b6), BGM for super reach is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user setting value, and the lamp 442 for game board and the lamp 452 for game frame according to the lamp pattern for super reach It emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user setting value.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (A7-1), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the button effect is started. In FIG. 180 (A8), the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started, and in the same figure (A9), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, and thereafter, as shown in the same figure (A10). , Chance button 136 is operated at the timing within the operation effective period. During this time (Fig. 180 (ウ a 7-1) to Fig. 180 (ウ a 11-1), the super reach BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user setting value, and the super reach result turning sound effect Are also output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emit light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value according to the symbol variation lamp pattern. In addition, the button effect may correspond to the suggestion that the effect of changing the setting of the volume and the brightness may start.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (Wa11-1) in response to the operation of the chance button 136 in FIG. 180 (Wa10), the effect image is displayed from the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman have cut each other It is switched to the display of Ed2. In FIG. 180 (A11-1) in response to the chance button 136 being operated, the BGM disappears, and the jackpot confirmation effect sound is output from the speaker 120 at five levels exceeding the user setting value, and it is for jackpot confirmation According to the lamp pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 also emit light with five levels of luminance exceeding the user setting value. That is, both the volume and the luminance are forcibly raised.

  Note that even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the effect described in FIG. 180 (Wa11-1) is executed. However, if there is no operation of the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, the lost symbol may be temporarily stopped to perform the resurrection effect.

  In FIG. 180 (Wa12), the first large-screen behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character article 224Gd operate again, and each advance from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device It is overlapped from the front side at 208. Then, in FIG. 180 (Wa13), the one-handed box character 224H operates to move downward from the initial position, and the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large-area behavior figure 224GA to the fourth large-area behavior article 224Gd The light guide plate IL emits light again, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. During this time (Fig. 180 (ウ a12) to Fig. 180 (ウ a14)), as with Fig. 180 (ウ a11-1), from the speaker 120, the jackpot confirmation sound output is output at five levels beyond the user setting value. The game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emit light with five levels of luminance exceeding the user set value according to the big hit determination lamp pattern.

  In addition, even when the special effects fail and the rendering operation is not performed, the volume and brightness may be changed from the user setting value, or in this case, the user setting value may be left unchanged.

  Also, when the button image 136 is displayed, such as in FIG. 180 (a 7-1), the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed. That is, the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed before the effect that the special effects operate is performed. The change here becomes a notice (withdrawal a big hit notice) as a result of the button effect, and such a pre-change may be treated as one of the big hit finalization effects.

  In addition, here, the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed according to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect, but the operation start of an object such as a one-man box character 224H or the like, or the movement of the character to the effect position is completed In accordance with the above, the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed, or the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed at timings other than the operation timing of the accessory. In addition, the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed a plurality of times by one pattern change, or the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed only once at the maximum by one pattern change. Furthermore, here, the volume and the luminance are aligned and changed, but only the volume may change, and only the luminance may change (the same applies to the following).

  Finally, in FIG. 180 (Fa15), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the sub control unit 400, 500 side receives the command to return the one hundred boxes role 224H to the initial position. Start moving toward and return to the initial position. Here, the brightness of the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emitting light according to the big hit confirmation lamp pattern is lowered to the user set value and the brightness of the big hit confirmation sound from the speaker 120 is also up to the user set value. It has been pulled down. This is because the sub control unit 400, 500 side returns to the user setting value by receiving the command to return the one-to-two box character 224H to the initial position.

  Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (Fa16), the effect image Ed2 fades out and becomes thinner and gradually disappears, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (Fa17), The display of the scene after the swordsman defeated fades in. Further, at this timing, the first large-scale behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character objects 224Gd are beginning to return to their initial positions. During this time (Fig. 180 (ウ a16) to Fig. 180 (ウ a17)), as in Fig. 180 (ウ a15), the speaker 120 outputs a big hit definite sound effect at the volume of the user setting value. The game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emitting light in accordance with the determination lamp pattern also emit light with the brightness of the user setting value.

  In the period of the same sound data and / or light emission data as in FIG. 180 ((a11-1) to the same figure ((a17), the volume and / or the brightness change from the user setting value, and another sound data The volume and / or brightness may be configured to return to user settings when switching to light emission data and / or. Conversely, the volume and / or luminance may change from the user setting value across the period in which the sound data and / or the light emission data changes one or more times.

  FIG. 181 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 180.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (Wa18), the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman have cut each other is completely restored. Further, at this timing, the first large-scale behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character objects 224Gd stop at the initial position. In FIG. 181 (Wa18), BGM for super reach victory is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user setting value, and the lamp 442 for game board or the lamp 452 for a game stand frame according to the lamp pattern for super reach victory. However, light is emitted at the same three levels of luminance as the user set value. Note that the timing at which the volume and brightness return to their original state is not limited to the timing shown in FIG. 180 (A a15) (the timing at which the character (Senior Box character 224H) starts to return from the rendering position to the initial position), but this timing (background) It may be the display switching timing) or may be the timing at which the victory of the duel scene is determined (the timing shown in FIG. 181 (Wa19-1)), or the timing at which the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is stopped and displayed It may be

  In FIG. 181 (Wa19-1), a scene in which the enemy character swordmaster has fallen and the main character, the lord, has won is displayed, and the lord, the navigation character YM, is also posing for victory. In FIG. 181 (Wa19-1), the BGM for super reach victory is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user setting value, and the voice of the main character “I'm done” is also the same as the user setting value 3 A level is output from the speaker 120, and the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emit light with the same three levels of luminance as the user set values in accordance with the super reach victory lamp pattern.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is stopped and displayed, and the finalized display is performed.

  Also, in place of FIG. 180 (Cal 11-1), in FIG. 181 (Cal 11-2), after the chances and swordsman cut off in response to the chance button 136 being operated in FIG. 180 (Cal 10) The display of the scene of is switched to a display in which a symbol ("decoration 6") different from the left / right symbol ("decoration 7") is largely displayed (swing display) as a middle symbol. This is a display that suggests button production failure. At this time, BGM for super reach defeat is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the lamp 442 for game board according to the lamp pattern for super reach defeat The game stand frame lamp 452 emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user set value. In this manner, when the rendering fails, or when there is a loss of concentration or a determination of loss, the volume and / or brightness may not be changed from the user setting value, but the volume and / or brightness may be changed from the user setting value. It is also good.

  In addition, the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (Wa11-2 ') instead of FIG. 180 (Wa11-1) is the same as the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Although the display screen is the same as the display screen in this example, in this example, the volume is lower than the user setting value, and the luminance is also lower than the user setting value. Thus, when the rendering fails, or when there is a loss of concentration or a determination of loss, the volume and / or luminance may be reduced. Also, the volume and / or brightness may be reduced when the rendering is successful, or when the jackpot is rich or jackpot determined.

  In FIG. 181 (A 7-2-1), instead of FIG. 180 (A a 7-2-1), the button effect is not started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The enlarged display of the character of the main character, Tonosama, is displayed to notify that the player has won. As described above, even when the effect using the operation means such as the chance button 136 and the like (moving means) such as the one and two box character product 224H is not involved, when the specific effect display is displayed, The volume and / or brightness may be forced to change. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (Wa7-2-3), the display returns to the display of the scene after the majesty and the swordsman break, and the volume and brightness also return to the same level as the user setting value. ing.

  Note that the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed according to the effect by other effect means, not limited to the feature or display. Examples of other effects referred to here include a light guide plate IL, a Versa Lighter (POV display), a light emitting means (for example, various lamps), a second display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device), etc. The volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed depending on the winning on the winning opening (for example, the general winning opening, the starting opening, the attacker) or the passage of a specific gate. Furthermore, the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed also in the effect performed when the game ball enters the effect sensor.

  Also, in the example continued from FIG. (Wa19-2-1) instead of FIG. 181 (Wa19-1), it is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. The display of the scene won by the hero of the main character fades out as shown in the figure (Wa19-2-3), and then, as shown in the figure (Wa19-2-4), the first decorative symbol is displayed. The display is swayed by the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". In this example, after the sound volume and the luminance are forcibly changed in FIG. 180 (Wa11-1), the state is continued until FIG. 181 (Wa19-2-3), and thereafter, returns to the user setting value. That is, the state in which the volume and the luminance are forcibly changed continues until the super reach effect is finished or until the same display of three same decorative symbols is started. Also, the display may be continued until the display of the shake ends. Also, the state in which the volume and the luminance are forcibly changed may be continued until the final judgment effect is finished.

  In addition, although the volume or / and the luminance are forcibly increased at the time of the bonus item operation or the like, the volume or / and the luminance may be reduced. Also, when the user setting value is the maximum value or the minimum value, the volume or / and the brightness may not change. Alternatively, the player prepares a volume and brightness which can not be set, and in this case, it is changed to a value larger than the maximum value which is the user set value or smaller than the minimum value which is the user set value. Good.

  Also, the luminance may be high and the volume may be low, and conversely, the volume may be high and the luminance may be low. In addition, the luminance may change and the volume may not change. Conversely, the volume may change and the luminance may not change. In addition, when the volume or luminance adjustment (setting) screen is displayed at the time of volume or luminance change, the value set by the player may be left as it is, or the value being forcibly changed is displayed. May be In addition, the player may be able to adjust the volume or the brightness when the volume or the brightness changes, or may not be adjustable when the volume or the brightness changes.

  FIG. 180 (b) is an example in which the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed when the display mode of the hold icon changes. In this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon may be changed. Note that there may be a change in the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon, in which the volume or / and the luminance is not forcibly changed. For example, in the case of changing to a display mode in which the degree of expectation of the big hit is not so high, the volume or / and the brightness may not be forcedly changed. For example, if the expectation of the big hit is going up in the order of white flashing, blue, green, red, gold and iridescent, the volume or / and the luminance will not be forcedly changed unless it changes more than red. It is also good. Or, conversely, when the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes, the volume or / and the brightness may be forcedly changed.

  FIG. 180 (c) is an example in which the volume or / and the luminance may be forcedly changed when the effect (hot effect) having a high expectation of the big hit appears. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (c), a conversation notice surrounded by a red frame appears. The hot effects are red, gold and iridescent effects. In this case, the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed. Also, the amount of change may differ between red (for example, one level up), gold (for example, two level up), and rainbow color (for example, up to the maximum level), or the same. It may be.

  FIG. 180 (c) is an example in which the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed once the resurrection effect is started after the lost design symbol is temporarily stopped. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (c d-2), a resurrection effect accompanied by a wipe effect is executed. In this case, the volume or / and the luminance may be changed prior to the result display. That is, the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed simultaneously with the start of the resurrection effect.

  FIG. 182 is a diagram showing an example in which the holding frame selected by the player is changed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, the above-described customization setting is performed. That is, in the "character selection" shown in FIG. 139 (b), the "copanda" of 07 is set, and in the "holding frame selection", the 04 "holding frame D" to which the overhead image for the wipe effect is added is The "icon C" of 03 is set in the "hold display selection", and the "background E" of 05 is set in the background display selection.

  In the description herein, the color used in the effect represents the level of the expectation of the big hit, and the expectation of the big hit increases in the order of white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors. For example, a color as a display mode of the hold icon or the change icon may be mentioned. Hereinafter, the change in color in the direction in which the expectation of the big hit becomes higher may be referred to as promotion. This is the same in the following description. This is also applicable to the above explanation.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (D1), the holding frame UI of the holding frame D is displayed, and in the effect icon display area DIS, a copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM. In addition, one suspension of the special view 1 is stored, and a first suspension icon h11, which is a default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (D1), the background (sky background) of the background E is displayed.

  Thereafter, the suspension of the special view 1 is increased by two, and three suspension icons h11 to h13 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during stop display shown in FIG. 182 (D3). Here, the hold of the prefetching notice target is the hold of the second hold icon h12.

  In FIG. 182 (D4), one hold is digested and symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (D4), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, but the second decorative symbol has started to change. In addition, the movement of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement of the hold icons h12 and h13 have not been started yet.

  In the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 182 (D5), the moving animation of the first holding icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift moving animation of the holding icons h12 and h13 are started, but the whistle for wipe effect Images appear from the left and right. Note that the movement animation of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement animation of the hold icons h12 and h13 may not be performed during the appearance of the overhead image for the wipe effect. In FIG. 182 (d6), the bird's-eye view image is completely closed (wipe-in state), and the holding frame UI is not visible. In FIG. 182 (D7), the first decorative symbol also starts variable display, and in FIG. 182 (D), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation. Also in FIG. 182 (d), the holding frame UI is in the wipe-in state).

  In FIG. 182 (D9-1), the wipe out is started, the overhead image for the wipe effect starts to open, and in FIG. 182 (d), the overhead image is fully open (wipe out state). In the wipe effect here, the holding frame is changing. That is, the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 182 (D10) is a “holding frame R” different from the “holding frame D” selected by the player in the customization setting, and the holding is surrounded by a red frame around It becomes a frame. Although “holding frame R” is a holding frame that can not be selected in the customization setting, it may be selectable. Note that the leg of the navigation character YM is not visible due to this red frame. The "holding frame R" is a holding frame having a function to notify that the display mode of the holding icon is in a state of change easily, and it is called "hold change !? time" next to the copanda of the navigation character YM. Text display is displayed. Note that with the suspension of the prefetching advance notification target, the first suspension icon h11 is suspended because one suspension is digested in FIG. 182 (D4). Here, "hold change !? time" corresponds to the above-mentioned "high probability state of effect".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (D12), the bomber icon I3 appears from the right end and passes over the holding frame UI. The bomber icon I3 shoots a missile toward the hold icon, and the missile hits the first hold icon h11 for hold of the previewed preview target. The display mode changes for the first hold icon h11 hit by the missile, and the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 182 (D13) changes to the blue display mode, and the promotion effect is successful. Even if the bomber icon I3 appears, no missile is fired, or any pending icon or fluctuation icon does not hit the missile, or the display does not change even if the missile hits. There may be. These all correspond to the failure of the promotion effect.

  In FIG. 182 (D15), it is in the reach state, and in FIG. (D16), the pending change symbol is temporarily stopped at the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. The pending change symbol has a red symbol and a blue symbol. When the red pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, the display mode of the pending icon is promoted to two levels, and when the blue pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, the pending icon is The display mode is promoted to one level. In FIG. 182 (D16), the red hold change symbol is temporarily stopped, and in FIG. 182 (D17), the hold change animation is started. That is, the first reserve icon h11 shown in FIG. 182 (D17) is overlapped from the front side by the effect image Ed3, and in the figure (D18), the effect image Ed3 disappears, and the first reserve icon h11 is It has changed to the red display mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (D19), the middle symbol, which has been the red hold change symbol, changes to “decoration 2”, and “decoration 1” − “decoration 2” − “decoration 1” Is displayed in a variable manner (temporary stop). In FIG. 182 (D20), the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the losing is decided.

  In FIG. 182 (D22), the red reserve icon, which has been the first reserve icon 11 so far, is moved to the pedestal hs0 and is displayed as the variation icon h0 of the red display mode. Even if the pending notice target pending is digested, the pending mark UI continues to display the text "pending change !? time". In FIG. 182 (D23), a golden light beam is emitted from the navigation character YM toward the fluctuation icon h0, and in the figure (D24), the fluctuation icon which has been red is changed to gold.

  In FIG. 182 (D26), it is in the reach state, and in the figure (D28), it is developed into the super reach effect. In Super Reach production, the background of the sky changes to the background of the wilderness, and a duel scene is displayed. In the super reach state, the holding frame UI has all remaining rests of the pedestal hs0, and the holding icon also disappears. However, the fluctuation icon h0 has not disappeared, and the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0. A pedestal hs0 shown in FIG. 182 (D28) is a pedestal of the “holding frame D” before changing in the wipe effect. That is, it is the original pedestal. However, it may be a pedestal of "holding frame R" after changing in the wipe effect. Alternatively, the pedestal hs0 or the variation icon h0 may not be displayed during super reach or in the normal reach state (FIG. 182 (D26)). In addition, all the holding frame UI and the holding icon may not be displayed. Furthermore, when the super reach effect ends, items such as the holding frame UI and the holding icon that have been hidden may be displayed, or after the end of the super reach effect, the holding frame R is displayed, and the next symbol change is performed. The holding frame D may be displayed from the start of the display.

  In this example, even if the reach state is reached, the color of the frame of the holding frame UI remains red, but if the color of the frame of the holding frame UI also changes, the expectation of the big hit is increased It is also good.

  It should be noted that the holding frame not selected by the player (for example, “holding frame R”) is more than the case where the prefetch holding icon is displayed on the holding frame (for example, “holding frame D”) selected by the player. If the pre-reading suspension icon is displayed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol form may be more easily displayed in the symbol variation corresponding to the pre-reading suspension icon, or the holding frame selected by the player (For example, in the case where the prefetching icon is displayed in the holding frame (for example, "pending frame R") not selected by the player than in the case where the prefetching icon is displayed in (for example, "pending frame D") However, even if it is the display mode of the same pre-reading reservation icon, it is constituted in the symbol fluctuation which corresponds to that pre-reading reservation icon so that it is easy to be displayed the big hit design feature finally It may be.

  FIG. 183 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG.

  Instead of FIG. 182 (D 9-1), in FIG. 183 (D 9-2-1), both the holding icon and the change icon are temporarily changed to the special mode (character). Also, the navigation character YM is also changed to a panda. In this example, after that, the display mode of each color is changed to reflect the degree of expectation of the big hit. Here, the ease of change to the color with high expectation of the jackpot is determined by the mode of the character once displayed.

  In FIG. 183 (D9-2-2), the mini game with the panda of the navigation character YM is performed. The character that has won the mini game changes to a big hit expected color icon (hold icon or change icon). The wolf character wins with a probability of 50%, the princess character wins with a probability of 75%, and the princess character wins with a probability of 100%. In addition to the character of the lord, a premier character may be provided. The premier character changes to a big hit finalized color icon (here, rainbow color).

  In FIG. 183 (D9-2-3), the Janken game was played as a mini game, and everyone played Janken all at once. As a result, both of the characters of the nephew lost and the character of the lord won. In addition, a plurality of characters may win.

  In FIG. 183 (D9-2-4), the wipe effect is started again, and the bird's-eye view image in FIG. (D9-2-5) is completely closed (wipe-in state), and then wiped out (FIG. (D9-2-6) In the holding frame UI shown in FIG. (D9-2-7), the second holding icon h12 is changed to a blue holding icon. Note that the holding amount UI remains as “holding amount D”.

  FIGS. 183 (1) to (12) show an example in which the navigation character YM and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display are displayed across a plurality of changes.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183 (A1), the holding frame UI of the holding frame D is displayed, and in the effect icon display area DIS, a copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM. In addition, two reservations of Special Figure 1 are stored, and a first suspension icon h11 and a second suspension icon h12, which are the default display mode of the icon C, are displayed. Further, the background (sky background) of the background E is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 183 (2), the hold of the special view 1 is increased by one, and the third hold icon h13 is increased. Here, the hold of the prefetching notice target is the hold of the third hold icon h13. In (183) of FIG. 183, the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth diagram, one hold is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. , The fluctuation display of the decoration pattern is started. In FIG. 183 (5), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS. In this example, the icon I1 of the treasure chest of the change notice is displayed on standby. After that, one hold is consumed, and the hold of the pre-reading notice object is put on hold of the first hold icon h11. In (183) of FIG. 183, the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost is stopped and displayed, and in the effect icon display area DIS, the icon I1 of the treasure box continues to be displayed on the carpet icon I2.

  In FIG. 183 (O9), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11, which is the suspension of the prefetched advance notice object, is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. ing. In the effect icon display area DIS, the icon I1 of the treasure box is still displayed while riding on the icon I2 of the carpet, and the icon I1 of this treasure box is displayed across a plurality of changes. In (183) of FIG. 183, the carpet icon I2 disappears, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 ends, and the change animation is started. That is, in FIG. 183 (11), the treasure box of the icon I1 of the treasure box is wide, and a smoke image appears from the inside, and the navigation character YM is covered with the smoke image from the front side. In FIG. 183 (12), the smoke image disappears, and the navy character YM of the copanda selected by the player in the above-described customization setting is changed to the navy character YM of the main character. Although the navi-cap character YM is a character that can not be selected in the customization setting, it may be selectable.

  In addition, in this example, the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice is displayed in addition to the navigation character YM over the true symbol change display such as the special drawing symbol change display. The navigation character YM or the change notice may be displayed across the re-variation. For example, the change notice display (the icon I1 of the treasure box, the icon I2 of the carpet) is displayed due to the change, and the navigation character YM constantly displayed changes due to the change notice display in the third pseudo ream. The change notice is displayed due to change (treasure box icon I1 and carpet icon I2), and the change notice display continues to be displayed until the second pseudo run, and the navigation letter YM constantly displayed by the change notice display at the third pseudo run. It may change.

  FIG. 184 is a diagram showing an example of effect in a pachinko machine set to the auto button mode.

  The pachinko machine 100 in this example is set to the auto button mode, and on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is displayed that the auto button mode is set.

  In FIG. 184 (A1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed on the background of the sea. In addition, one suspension of the special view 1 is stored, and a first suspension icon h11 which is a default display mode is displayed. The navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS of the holding frame UI. Further, at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, a chance button 136 is shown. The chance button shown in FIG. 184 (A1) performs normal white lighting. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 is always on even when the chance button operation is out of operation, but the chance button lamp is always off outside the chance button's operation valid period. It may be

  In FIG. 184 (A2), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, the symbol variation display is started, and then the conversation announcement is started. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184 (A5-1), the speech notice is updated, and the speech image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative pattern, And a conversation image CI2 of a whistle on which a button effect image is displayed. The button effect image is an image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and the button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is configured. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 184 (A5-1), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to this is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of a whistle, it is possible for the player to recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol, etc. There is a possibility. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow and the conversation image CI1 of the temple so as not to hide the decorative symbol. Also, as shown in FIG. 184 (A5-1), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the rabbit, and is more than the case where it is not overlapped. The display mode of the conversation image CI1 is difficult to view. In this example, it is more likely that the conversation announcement will be a big hit if the conversation announcement is not given. In addition, when the speech advance notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord may not be displayed in a reduced size, and the conversation image CI1 of the fond may be deleted. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the previously displayed conversation image, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is this conversation It may be different in size (large or small) from the conversation notice B having a lower expectation of a big hit than the notice A.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 184 (A6). By operating the chance button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 184 (A6), the player may be able to view an effect corresponding to the operation. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 184 (A6) starts blinking in white.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 184 (A7), the suspension of the special figure 1 increases. However, the hold icon has not started to appear at this time. Moreover, since time has passed since the operation effective period started, the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced. In FIG. 184 (A8-1), the first hold icon is displayed. The first hold icon shown in FIG. 184 (A8-1) is a button hold icon, and a red button image 136a is displayed above the white circle. Although the remaining period meter MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 184 (A8-1) changes to blue lighting and starts to vibrate in response to the appearance of the button holding icon.

  In FIG. 184 (A10), a fixed period of time elapses after the operation effective period of the button effect in the conversation announcement is started. Then, the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the preannouncement of conversation, and as shown in FIG. 184 (A11), the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows is updated, and “Summer vacation still ~” as a response display for the auto button. Text display is displayed. As for the button holding icon, the automatic button mode is not functioning, and the response display is not displayed unless the player actually operates the chance button 136. As shown in FIG. 184 (A12) to FIG. 184 (A13), the chance button 136 continues to vibrate while being lit in blue as an operation promoting mode with respect to the button holding icon.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184 (A15), the combination of the decorative symbols of lost is stopped and displayed. The vibration of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 184 (A15) is ended, and the blue button is returned to the normal white button. More specifically, at a certain timing in FIG. 184 (A14), the chance button 136 has ended its vibration and returned to white lighting. This is because the operation period of the button hold icon has ended. The operation valid period of the button holding icon may end, for example, when a predetermined valid period has elapsed, or the decorative symbol may end when the first stop is performed, or the decorative symbol of The process may end upon confirmation display. However, the first hold icon h11 is still the display mode of the button hold icon. Then, in FIG. 184 (A16), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 which is the button suspension icon is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184 (A16), the second decorative symbol has started variable display, but the first decorative symbol has not yet started variable display, and the button hold icon is displayed The first hold icon h11 is also still displayed.

  In FIG. 184 (A17), the hold reduction animation is started, and the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the button hold icon starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, and in FIG. Reaches the top of the pedestal hs0 with the display mode of the button holding icon, and the change animation is started on the pedestal hs0 in the figure (A19), and in the figure (A20), it changes to the variation icon h0 of the blue display mode It is changing.

  FIG. 185 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 185 (A22), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in FIG. 185 (A23), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation.

  In this example, although the auto button mode has been set all the time, the chance button 136 is not operated until the symbol variation display changed to the button holding icon is confirmed regardless of the setting of the auto button mode. In the case of the hold reduction animation, the display mode automatically changes. That is, while it is the hold icon of the display mode of the button hold icon, it changes to the hold icon of the blue display mode according to the operation of the chance button 136, but when the hold decrease animation is started (the fluctuation icon h0 It can also be seen that the display mode does not change in response to the operation of the chance button 136).

  Further, the automatic button mode may be ended by operating the chance button 136 during the automatic button mode. In that case, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the auto button mode may not be ended while the remaining period meter MT is displayed, or the chance button is displayed even while the remaining period meter MT is displayed. Operating the button 136 may end the auto button mode.

  Also, when the chance button 136 is not operated, the variation icon h0 may be displayed in the same manner as the button holding icon, or may not be changed to the variation icon h0 of the blue display mode, or default. It may change to the change icon h0 of the display mode of. In addition, even if the chance button 136 ends the vibration and returns to white lighting, the operation valid period may not be finished. Furthermore, that the change icon h0 of the blue display mode is not changed when the chance button 136 is not operated is the same whether in the auto button mode or in the non-auto button mode. However, it may be changed, and furthermore, it may change during the auto button mode but not during the non-auto button mode or vice versa.

  Furthermore, in the state where the auto button mode is not set, if there is no operation of the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 184 (A11), the text of “Summer vacation still ~” is displayed. The conversation image CI2 is not updated. However, it may be updated.

  Also, in place of FIG. 184 (A5-1), a button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM in FIG. 185 (Aa5-2-1). The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT that indicates the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Further, in FIG. 185 (Aa5-2-1), a meter display MW 'is also displayed. The button display icon 136D is a notice that does not change unless the chance button 136 is operated, and may be a notice of the change. In FIG. 185 (Aa5-2-2), a button display icon 136D is displayed together with a dialog image CI2 of a whistle on which a button effect image is displayed. As described above, the button display icon 136D shown in FIG. 185 (Aa5-2-2) overlaps with the notice that changes even if the button is not operated since the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the talk notice There is.

  Also, instead of FIG. 184 (A5-1), a plurality of button effect images (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) are displayed in FIG. 185 (Aa5-3). In this case, there is a need to operate the chance button 136 multiple times, and the auto button function does not have to work even when the effect requires the chance button 136 to be operated multiple times. It should be noted that, when operated a specific number of times (for example, once), the auto button function may be activated for the remaining button effect images.

  Also, instead of FIG. 184 (A5-1), in FIG. 185 (Aa5-4), a button effect image (button is displayed on the second display device 208S disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device) An image 136a and a remaining time display meter MT) are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 185 (Aa5-4), although there is one button effect image displayed on the second display device 208S, one or more button effect images displayed on the second display device 208S can The button function may not function.

  Further, instead of FIG. 184 (A5-1), in FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-1), a notification for urging the decorative symbol display device 208 to continuously hit the chance button 136 is performed. In FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-2), the button continuous hit effect is started, and the button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) and the continuous hit meter RHM are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 . The automatic button function does not work for the button continuous hitting effect, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-2) starts to vibrate and changes to blue lighting to prompt the operation. Eventually, in FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-5), the continuous hitting of the chance button 136 is started, the continuous hitting meter RHM shown in FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-6) rises, and the response display is performed. In FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-5), the continuous hitting of the chance button 136 is started, and the response display such as the rising of the continuous hitting meter RHM is also performed, but the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-6) is The vibration continues and the blue light continues. In the previous examples, it was sufficient to operate the chance button 136 once, but in this example, since the batting is required, the vibration and blue lighting of the chance button 136 are continued. Also in the case of long press, the operation of the chance button 136 is long as in the case of the continuous hit, so the technical idea here can be applied. The timing shown in FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-7) is the moment when the operation effective period has passed and the remaining time display meter MT becomes zero. The vibration and blue lighting of the chance button 136 continue until the remaining time display meter MT becomes zero. After this, the chance button 136 immediately stops the vibration and returns to white light. Note that the auto button function may be configured to operate when operated one or more times. Also, in this example, the auto button function does not work, but the long press auto continuous hit function is configured to work, and by performing the long press for a certain period, the same response display as performing continuous press operation is performed. However, if the auto button function does not work, it may be configured such that the long press auto continuous hitting function does not work either.

  FIG. 186 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG.

  In the example continued from FIG. 186 (A8-2-1) instead of FIG. 184 (A8-1), it is after the start of the operation effective period of the button hold icon, to the button effect in the conversation notice This is an example in which the chance button 136 is operated once before the auto button function of. In this case, both the response presentation of the button hold icon and the response presentation of the button presentation in the conversation announcement are displayed. That is, the button hold icon changes as the response effect of the button hold icon, and the dialog image CI2 of the bag is updated as the response effect of the button effect in the conversation advance notice. The change of the button holding icon corresponds to the pre-reading notice, and the update of the speech image CI2 of the whistle in the pre-reading speech also corresponds to the pre-reading notice. Note that the conversation announcement may be a normal announcement. Further, the change of the button fluctuation icon in FIG. 184 (A20) corresponds to the normal notice.

  It should be noted that only the response effect of the one in which the auto button function does not work may be displayed. That is, only the change animation of the button holding icon may be displayed, and the dialog image CI2 may not be updated. Alternatively, on the other hand, only the response effect of the auto button function may be displayed.

  In addition, in one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the one in which the auto button function does not work may be displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the one in which the auto button function works may be displayed. And, conversely, in one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the person with the auto button function is displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the person without the auto button function is displayed You may

  Furthermore, although the above description using FIG. 186 (A 8-2-1) to FIG. 186 (A 8-2-4) has been described during the setting of the auto button mode, the auto button mode is not set yet. The same is true for

  Also, instead of FIG. 184 (A8-1), in FIG. 186 (Aa8-3), even when the auto button mode is not set, the chance button 136 vibrates and emits light in a special color (here, blue). Indicates Note that different notifications may be performed when the auto button is not set and when the auto button is set.

  Also, instead of FIG. 184 (A8-1), in FIG. 186 (Aa8-3 ′), when the auto button mode is not set, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and emits light in the normal color (here, it blinks white) An example is shown.

  Further, as another example, in FIG. 186 (Ab1), a notification that prompts the decorative symbol display device 208 to continuously hit the chance button 136 is made during the big hit game. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (Ab2), a button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) is displayed together with the display of the third round, but during the big hit game, the auto button function May be disabled or, conversely, the auto button function may be enabled.

  FIG. 186 (Ba1-1) to FIG. 186 (Ba5) are diagrams showing an example of effects on the back button. When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 186 (Ba1-1), an effect by the navigation character YM is started. However, the chance button 136 is a normal white light, is not vibrated, and the back button is not notified. In FIG. 186 (Ba2), the appearance of the button hold icon (first hold icon h11) at which the auto button function does not work causes the chance button 136 to start vibrating and change to blue and prompt the operation. In FIG. 186 (Ba3), the chance button 136 is operated, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11, which is the button hold icon, is changed (see FIG. 186 (Ba1-5)).

  FIG. 186 (Ba1-2) is the same state as the state shown in FIG. 186 (Ba1-1), but the only difference is that in FIG. 186 (Ba1-2), the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. The light turns blue and the back button is notified.

  The remaining period meter MT, which represents the remaining period of the operation effective period described above, will be described in more detail. The description here is applicable to any of the examples of effects in which the remaining period meter MT described above is displayed. In the remaining period meter MT, the display mode changes in accordance with the passage of time (in the present example, the decrease display is performed) and in the back of the remaining time display region, the display mode is displayed according to the passage of time Is composed of two of the elapsed time display area MT2 (in this example, the increase display is performed). Here, the display mode (for example, color, shape, etc.) of the remaining time display area MT1 and / or the elapsed time display area MT2 may be displayed in a special display mode different from the default display mode. For example, when the display mode of the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in red instead of the default color (in this example, blue) or the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is not in the default color (white in this example) When displayed in, etc. In the case where the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in a special display mode, and the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed to decrease as time passes, it is displayed in a special display mode as time passes. May be displayed on the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208). Conversely, if the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is displayed in a special display mode, and if the display area of the elapsed time display area MT2 is increased and displayed with the passage of time, Since the area displayed in the special display mode increases accordingly, the player who wants to see the special display mode by the elapsed time display area MT2 does not immediately operate the operation means (chance button 136 etc. in this example), etc. There are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of the way of enjoyment and improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. The display mode of the remaining time display area MT1 and / or the elapsed time display area MT2 is displayed when the remaining period meter is first displayed (in the case of the remaining time display area MT1, the remaining time meter is displayed first). In the case of the elapsed time display area MT2, it may be the time when the remaining time display area MT1 decreases and the elapsed time display area MT2 becomes visible for the first time) special The display mode may be displayed, or the display mode may be changed from the default display mode to a special display mode when a certain period of time has elapsed after the operation effective period has elapsed.

  Further, the navigation character YM described above is further supplemented. The description herein can be applied to any of the effect examples in which the navigation character YM described above is displayed. First, various advance notices may not be given by the navigation character. In addition, while the navigation character (hereinafter, “navi character A”) is displayed, another navigation character (hereinafter, “navi character B”) may be displayed. In such a case, the navigation character B displayed earlier may be configured to overlap the navigation character B displayed first, and conversely, the navigation character B displayed later is first. The displayed navigation character A may be overlapped, or the navigation character A and the navigation character B may be displayed at positions not overlapping each other. For example, the navigation character YM that is always displayed may be overlapped by a navigation character that gives a notice of the change and / or a preview of the change during one or a plurality of changes. Furthermore, the change preview may be displayed by the effect display indicating that the change preview may be displayed by the navigation character.

  FIG. 187 is a diagram for explaining the overlapping relationship between the display of the ball removal notification notified by the occurrence of the counter-full error and the other displays of the luminance adjustment windows BW.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α1), the holding frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Moreover, the combination ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") of the loss of the decoration design is displayed also to the 1st decoration design (the 3rd design) and the 2nd decoration design (the 5th design) The symbol variation display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second number-of-holds display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reservations of the special figure 1 and the number of special views of the special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no suspension, and the symbol variation display is not started after the final display of the stop symbol of the special figure is performed, and the menu icon MI is overlapped with the lower part of the first decorative symbol from the front side. The volume adjustment icon VI and the brightness adjustment icon BI are displayed. In addition, a ball removal notification such as “Please pull off the ball” is displayed at the lower part of the first decorative pattern so as to overlap from the front side. The display of the ball removal notification is a slightly transparent display, and when the display of the ball removal notification is displayed so as to overlap from the front side, the display on the rear side is in a state of being slightly visible. Hereinafter, displaying being displayed so as to overlap from the front side or being displayed in the front layer may be simply expressed as “overlap”. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification may be a display such that the display on the rear side can not be seen at all. Furthermore, a sound such as "Please pull the ball" is also output from the speaker 120.

  The display of the ball removal notification is shifted from the display position of the second decorative pattern on the upper left and the second display of the number of reservations on the upper right, and these displays are not overlapped. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the second decorative symbol and / or the second number-of-retentions display, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification also has a shifted display position with respect to the frame RW at the upper right of the screen for notifying the current setting state, and the frame RW does not overlap either. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to be absolutely overlapped with the frame RW, or may be overlapped. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is shifted in the display position with the holding frame UI, and is not overlapped with the holding UI. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the holding frame UI absolutely, or may overlap.

  In FIG. 187 (α2), the lower key of the operation key unit is operated, and the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed. The brightness adjustment window BW is displayed later than the display of the ball removal notification, but the display of the ball removal notification has priority, and the brightness adjustment window BW is a layer behind the display of the ball removal notification. It is displayed. That is, the display of the ball removal notification overlaps the brightness adjustment window BW.

  Eventually, the symbol variation display is started, the brightness adjustment window BW, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are also hidden, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. (1) Fluctuation indication of the decoration pattern is done. However, the ball removal operation has not been performed yet, and the display of the ball removal notification is continued. It is to be noted that although the ball removal operation is performed, once the plate filling error is eliminated, the plate filling error occurs again, and the same is true when the display of the ball removal notification is newly displayed. The display of the ball removal notification overlaps the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 187 (α3), the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed above the holding frame UI. The bar display VB for volume control is displayed from the front side so as to overlap at least a portion of the first decorative symbol, at least a portion of the variation icon h0, and at least a portion of the navigation character YM. In the following description, when the bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed, it is assumed that the left and right keys are operated and displayed each time. In addition, by operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit, it is possible to display a bar display for brightness adjustment, and this bar display for brightness adjustment is displayed at the same position as the bar display VB for volume adjustment The following description of the bar display VB for volume adjustment can be applied to the bar display for luminance adjustment. However, the bar display for brightness adjustment and the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be simultaneously displayed. Further, the bar display VB for volume adjustment or the bar display for luminance adjustment may be always displayable or may be displayable for a predetermined period. Also, display may be possible only while operating the left and right keys or the up and down keys.

  Further, the bar display VB for volume adjustment and the display of the ball removal notification are displayed at positions not overlapping. The indication of the removal of the ball may be displayed so as not to overlap with the bar display VB for volume adjustment, or may overlap.

  Furthermore, the display of the ball removal notification is shifted in the display position for both the hold icon and the change icon, and these icons do not overlap. The indication of the ball out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the hold icon and / or the change icon, or may overlap. Further, the display of the notice of removal of the ball is deviated also in the display position of the display of the navigation character YM, and does not overlap the display of the navigation character YM. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the display of the navigation character YM, or may overlap.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α4), super reach effect is performed, and a duel scene in the background of the wilderness is displayed. Here too, the display of the ball removal notification is displayed, and the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with each of the left symbol of "decorative 7" moved to the upper left and the right symbol of "decorative 7" moved to the upper right. ing. In addition, the indication of the ball out notification is displayed overlapping with the display of the duel scene in the background of the wilderness. Note that volume adjustment is possible even during super reach, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α 4). The bar display VB for volume control also overlaps the display of the duel scene in the background of the wilderness.

  The start screen of the big hit game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α5), but the display of the ball pulling out notification also overlaps with the big hit start effect display here. Further, even during the big hit game, volume adjustment is possible, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α5). The bar display VB for volume control also overlaps the jackpot start effect display. On the other hand, the display of the ball removal notification is shifted from the right-handed suggestion display on the upper left of the screen (display different from the right-handed warning. Equivalent to the mini right-handed display in FIG. 137 (52) above). It does not overlap to the right strike indication indication. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the right-handed suggestion display, or may overlap. The right strike indication may not be displayed on the big hit game start screen.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α6), a right strike instruction screen for instructing the player to hit the right is displayed. In this example, the right-handed instruction screen is from the jackpot state in the first jackpot (normal state (special figure low probability map low definite state) to the first hit (first train) jackpot, but the latent probability change state The first (first series) jackpot from (Toku figure high probability drawing low certainty) and the first (first series) jackpot from sudden definite change state (special figure high certainty drawing high probability) In addition, the latent positive change state and / or the sudden positive change state described above indicate only the state shifted from the normal state, excluding those that occur in the positive change state or the short time state). However, a right-handed instruction screen may be displayed for each big hit. In the right-handed instruction screen here, the display of the ball removal notification is overlapped, but on the other hand, the right-handed suggestion display is not overlapped by the display of the ball removal notification. In this example, a right-handed warning display (corresponding to a right-handed notification in FIG. 136 (60) described above and a liquid crystal display when the right-handed warning in FIG. 192 described later) is displayed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed. Although not performed, a right strike warning may be displayed while the right strike instruction screen is displayed. Further, while the left-handed warning display (corresponding to the liquid crystal display at the time of the left-handed hitting warning in FIG. 192 described later) is not displayed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed, it may be displayed. In addition, although the right strike suggestion display is performed while the right strike designation screen is displayed, the right strike suggestion display may not be performed while the right strike designation screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 187 (α7), the first round is started, and the round effect is displayed. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap the display of the round effect. Note that the display of the ball removal notification is not in the same display as the display of the number of rounds at the upper right of the screen, and the display of the number of rounds is not overlapped. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the number of rounds display, or may overlap. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification is also deviated in the display position of the number-of-balls display (0 pt) at the lower right of the screen, and the display of the number-of-balls display does not overlap. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the number-of-balls display absolutely, or may overlap.

  In Fig. 187 (α8) of the fourth round, a promotion effect is performed that suggests whether a large chance of coming into a state in which the second variable winning opening is open for a long time and is easy to pass in the fifth round will come As a result, a success effect representing that the promotion effect is successful is executed. That is, it is notified that it is a big hit game in which the probability change transition condition is easily established. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap the display of this success effect. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α8), the display of “V chance GET” of the star mark is also started. The display of the ball out notification is not in the same display position as the display of “V chance GET” of this star mark, and this display is not overlapped. The indication of the ball out notification may be displayed so as not to completely overlap with the indication of “V chance GET” of the star mark, or may overlap.

  In FIG. 187 (α 9), the fifth round is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display indicating that it is the fifth round of the big hit game is performed, and it is promoted to promote V passage in this round. The message "Aim for V" is displayed. As a result, there are cases where it is possible to make the player reliably perform the V-pass. The display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the display of "Aim for V".

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 187 (α10), there is a passage (V passage) of the gaming ball to the probability variation operation area in the second variable winning prize opening, and the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that the probability variation gain is decided. The display of "V" which is is displayed large. That is, the display of "V" which is a notification that the definite variation acquisition has been determined is displayed based on the V passage. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap the display of “V”. At the timing shown in FIG. 187 (α10), the display of “V chance GET” of the star may be hidden.

  When the fifth round is over, the end effect of the big hit game is performed in a mode as shown in FIG. 187 (α11). In the big hit game mentioned above, the probability change transition condition is established by passing V in the 5th round, so while the symbol change display of the fixed number of times is performed after the end of the big hit game, the positive change state (special figure high probability popular figure Transition to the high probability state). Therefore, in the end effect of the big hit game, a display of "Yoshimune RUSH plunging" indicating that it shifts to a probability change state (provisional change effect) is performed. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap the display of this "Yoshimune RUSH plunging". In addition, even in the end effect of the big hit game, although the right-handed suggestion display is displayed, it may not be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α12), a warning message for removing a prepaid card (corresponding to the warning display in FIG. 137 (57) described above) is displayed. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap the prepaid card removal warning display. Even in the end effect of the prepaid card removal warning display, although the right-handed suggestion display is displayed, it may not be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α13), a display (BONUS × 3) of the number of big hit consecutive villas is displayed immediately below the right hitting suggestion notification on the upper left of the screen. Further, at the upper right of the screen, a music title display portion MN is displayed, and on the left side, icons of upper and lower keys of the operation key unit are displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the screen.

  The display of the ball out notification is not in the same display position as the display of the number of big hit consecutive houses, and does not overlap this display. The indication of the ball out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the indication of the number of big hit consecutive houses, or may be overlapped. Further, the display of the notification of removal of the ball is deviated in the display position of the music title display section MN, and is not overlapped with the music title display section MN. The indication of the removal of the ball may be displayed so as not to be absolutely overlapped on the music title display unit MN, or may be overlapped. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is shifted in the display position with the icons of the up and down keys, and does not overlap with the icons of the up and down keys. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the icons of the up and down keys, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is also deviated in the display position with the second hold number display at the lower right of the screen, and is not overlapped with the second hold number display. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the second number-of-holds display, or may overlap.

  Further, the bar display VB for volume adjustment shown in FIG. 187 (α13) overlaps a part of the hold icon, but may be displayed at a position not overlapping.

  Also, in FIG. 187 (α14), the start screen of the big hit game is displayed, and on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α15), the music selection screen shown in FIG. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap the music release list GR.

  Further, in FIG. 187 (α16), the music selection is finished, and the round effect is started. At the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α16), the song title of the currently selected song is displayed. The display of the ball removal notification does not overlap with the display of the music title because the display position is not the same as the display of the music title. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the song title indication, or may overlap.

  In addition, in the fourth round of FIG. 187 (α17), the display “Aim for V with next R” is displayed on the right side of the screen, and in the fifth round of FIG. 187 (α18) The indication "Aim for V" is displayed, and the indication of the ball removal notification overlaps with the indications displayed on the right side of the screen. Here, FIG. 187 (α17) may correspond to the end of the remaining sphere detection period of the main control unit 300 at the end of the fourth round. Also, FIG. 187 (α 18) is at the start of the fifth round, and may correspond to the time when the special control in-progress signal of the main control unit 300 is turned on from off. In this case, the period between FIG. 187 (α17) and FIG. 187 (α18) corresponds to the interval period between rounds from the end of the fourth round to the start of the fifth round, and the special control combination signal of the main control unit 300 is It is a period that is on from off.

  Further, in FIG. 187 (α 19), the display of “V” based on the presence of V passage is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the display of the ball removal notification overlaps the display of “V”. ing. However, the bar display VB for volume adjustment does not overlap the display of this "V".

  Note that FIG. 187 (α 20) may be in a state in which a certain period of time has elapsed since 5 R is in progress and V has passed, or at the end of five rounds (for example, the remaining sphere detection period of the main control unit It may be in the state corresponding to the end).

  After that, the big hit game proceeds to 15 rounds (Figure 187 (α21)-Figure (23)), and in Figure 187 (α 24), as in Figure (α 11), "Yoshimune RUS H plunging" display (provisional change during production ) Is displayed, and a bar display VB for displaying a ball out notification and adjusting the volume is overlapped with the display of “Yoshimune RUSH plunging”. In FIG. 187 (α24), the big hit end display period is started and displayed after the end of the inter-round interval.

  In addition, since the command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 and received by the first sub-control unit 400 and various controls are performed, a time lag occurs between the timing in the main control unit 300 and the actual timing.

  Also, in FIG. 187, the previous round display is displayed as it is during the inter-round interval. For example, "5R" may be displayed during the inter-round interval between the 5th and 6th rounds, but all or part of the round display may be hidden during the inter-round interval. For example, only the R may be displayed to hide the numeric part.

  The same applies to the end of the fifteenth round, and the interval between rounds may or may not be displayed in a round display.

  In this example, the right-handed warning display may be displayed during a big hit, but the left-handed warning display may not be displayed, but the left-handed warning display may be displayed. You may be comprised so that the alerting | reporting regarding a warning may not be performed.

  In the above, the display of the ball removal notification has been described as an example, but the description here is not limited to the display of the ball removal notification, and other errors (for example, various errors listed in the list of FIG. 190 and FIG. 191) It is applicable to the display of the notice regarding.

  FIG. 188 is a diagram showing a display example of the ball removal notification.

  The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 188 (β) is a display such that the display on the rear side of the display of the ball removal notification disappears at all.

  The display of the sphere removal notification shown in FIG. 188 (γ1) overlaps with the volume adjustment icon VI in addition to the brightness adjustment window BW. That is, the display of the sphere removal notification shown in FIG. 188 (γ1) overlaps a part of the luminance adjustment window BW and a part of the volume adjustment icon VI. Note that the display of the sphere removal notification may overlap with the entire brightness adjustment window BW, or may overlap with the entire volume adjustment icon VI. Further, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 188 (γ1) is a slightly transparent display like the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 187, and the display on the rear side is in a state where it can be seen a little. However, it may be a display such that the display on the rear side can not be seen at all, as in the display of the ball out notification shown in FIG. 188 (β).

  The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 188 (γ2) overlaps with the bar display VB for volume adjustment displayed during the symbol variation display. Although the display of the notice of removal of the sphere does not overlap the navigation character YM, the navigation character YM overlaps the bar display VB for adjusting the volume. Further, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 188 (γ1) may also be a display such that the display on the rear side can not be seen at all as in the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. ,the same.). In addition, not only the bar for volume control but also the display relating to the function that can be set by the player during symbol fluctuation and the above-mentioned Daitomo etc. (the effect customization screen shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 141 (V) and (V ') etc. A list of missions achieved by the player's operation regardless of the fluctuation state of the symbol while setting the music title display area MN, the bar for adjusting the brightness, and the user mode (Daitomo) shown in FIG. Display the game history (number of rotations, number of balls, number of mission clears, number of big wins for this play, maximum number of consecutive runs for this play, etc.), characters or background set by the user, holding frame, etc. It is applicable also to the display etc. which can be set and changed.

  The display of the balloon removal notification shown in FIG. 188 (γ3-1) overlaps with each of the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM. Then, when the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated in the state shown in FIG. 188 (γ3-1), a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed, but as shown in FIG. 188 (γ3-2), In the display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment, the display of the ball removal notification has priority, and is displayed on the front side. Note that the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed on the front side with priority. Also, in any case, the bar display VB for volume adjustment also overlaps the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM, and may overlap the hold icon h11.

  In FIG. 188 (γ4), contrary to FIG. 188 (γ3-2), the display of the ball removal notification is overlapped with the bar display VB for volume adjustment.

  In FIG. 188 (δ3-1), the navigation character YM is displayed on the effect icon display area DIS, and in the figure (δ3-2), the navigation character YM jumps by animation to inform that the ball is removed. Overlapping the display of. Here, although the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the navigation character YM, the navigation character YM may overlap with a part of the display of the ball removal notification. In addition, the navigation character YM may not perform animation so as to overlap with all or part of the display of the ball removal notification. This technical idea is also applicable to the display regarding other errors described later.

  In FIG. 188 (ε), the display of the ball removal notification is displayed not by a frame but by only characters.

  FIG. 188 (ζ 1) shows an example in which the display of the ball removal notification is composed of a character display and a peripheral image display 132G around the ball discharge lever 132 (see FIG. 108). By the peripheral image display 132G, the first decorative symbol and a part of each of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are overlapped.

  In FIG. 188 (ζ2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the same character display as the character display of “Aim for V” shown in FIG. 187 (α9) and hides the character display.

  In FIG. 188 (ζ3), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the same display as the display of “Aim for V with next R” on the right side shown in FIG. 187 (α17).

  In FIG. 188 (η1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the character display of “Aim for V” and the display of “V chance GET” of the star.

  In FIG. 188 (η 2), the peripheral image display 132 G does not overlap the display of “Aim for V with next R” displayed on the right.

  In FIG. 188 (θ1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the bar display VB for volume adjustment, and hides a part of the bar display VB for volume adjustment. That is, in this example, only the entire gauge portion is hidden. However, the peripheral image display 132G may overlap all of the bar display VB for volume adjustment. In this example, the peripheral image display 132 G does not overlap with the display of the characters “Aim for V” and the display of “V chance GET” of the star mark.

  In FIG. 188 (θ2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the entire gauge portion of the bar display VB for volume adjustment and a part of “Aim for V with next R” on the right.

  FIG. 189 is a diagram showing an example in which a plurality of types of error displays are displayed.

  An example of the errors A to E shown in FIG. 189 will be described later. These error A to error E may or may not include the ball out notification.

  In FIG. 189 (ι 1), the transparency display of the error A notification is displayed, and the speaker 120 outputs a warning sound of the error A notification.

  In FIG. 189 ('1'), the opaque display of the error A notification is displayed.

  In FIG. 189 (ι2), the transparency display of the error A notification overlaps each of the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM in the same manner as FIG. 188 (γ3-1). Is the same as the description in FIG. 188 (γ3-1).

  In FIG. 189 (ι3-1), a plurality of types of error display (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification) are displayed in the order of error occurrence. That is, the newly generated error is displayed below, and in this example, the first error generated is error A. The speaker 120 outputs a warning sound of the newest error E. The warning sound may be output in the order of occurrence of all the displayed errors.

  In FIG. 189 (ι3-2), since the error E is eliminated, the transparency display of the error E notification disappears, and the warning sound of the error D is output from the speaker 120. That is, when the last occurring error is canceled, the warning sound of the previous error is output.

  In FIG. 189 (“3-2”), the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps a part of a plurality of types of error displays (transparency displays of error A notification to error E notification). Here, the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps the transparent display of the lowermost error E notification, and the character display of the error E is hidden. A plurality of types of error displays may overlap the bar display VB for volume adjustment.

  In FIG. 189 (ι4-1), when an error occurs in the order of the error ABCDE, an error with high priority to be notified is displayed on the upper side, and the speaker 120 outputs a warning sound of the error with the highest priority. Be done. Errors with high priority are errors with high importance (for example, serious errors for the game arcade), and more specifically, are the order of the list shown in FIG. In FIG. 189 (ι4-1), the error B is the highest priority error.

  In FIG. 189 (ι4-2), since the error B is eliminated, the transparency display of the error B notification disappears, and the alarm sound of the error E, which has been the second one so far, is output from the speaker 120.

  In FIG. 189 (ι 5-1), the error A occurs, the transparency display of the error A notification is displayed, and the speaker 120 outputs a warning sound of the error A notification. In this state, an error Z occurs. The error Z is an error for stopping the game, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 189 (ι5-2) has a blue screen, and all the displays are not displayed except for the display relating to the error Z ing. The error for stopping the game referred to here is an error (for example, a magnetic (magnet) detection error) in which the main control unit 300 does not perform various lottery. That is, it is an error that the main control unit 300 can not or can not perform various types of lottery. The error displayed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 like the error Z is not limited to the error for stopping the game, but is, for example, an error of the effect movable means described later, an error for stopping the payout operation, etc. It is also good. Also, some or all of various errors described in the list of FIG. 192 described later may be error Z, but conversely, some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. 192 May not be displayed in the display mode of the error Z. In addition, when the main control unit 300 does not perform various lottery, the command is not transmitted to the side of the secondary control unit 400, 500, so that the secondary control unit 400, 500 side eventually does not perform the various lottery.

  In FIG. 189 (κ1), the position of the error display is changed. That is, at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, a plurality of types of error displays (error A notification to error E notification non-transparency display) are displayed in the order of error occurrence. Note that although the error display in FIG. 189 () 1) is a display such that the display on the rear side of the error display disappears at all, it is a slightly transparent display, and the display of the ball pull out notification overlaps from the front When displayed on the back, the display on the back may be in a state of being slightly visible.

  In FIG. 189 (κ2), in the state shown in FIG. 189 (κ1), the display of the ball removal notification is added. Here, the error of ball removal notification (sink full error) is not included in multiple types of errors (error A to error E), but is included in multiple types of errors (error A to error E) It is also good. It should be noted that, instead of the error of the ball removal notification, an error with a high frequency of occurrence may be displayed separately from a plurality of types of errors (error A to error E).

  A part of the error of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 189 (κ2) is overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end. In addition, all the errors of the ball removal notification may be overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

  On the other hand, the error of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 189 (κ2) overlaps with a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

  Note that the error notification display regarding the control on the side of the sub control unit 400, 500 may be overlapped by the error notification display regarding the control of the main control unit 300, or vice versa. For example, the batting warning display may be overlapped by the display of the ball pulling out notification, and conversely, the display of the ball pulling out notification may be overlapped by the batting warning display. In addition, both error notification displays are displayed such that the error notification display related to the control of the sub control unit 400 and 500 and the error notification display related to the control of the main control unit 300 do not overlap each other. It is also good.

  In FIG. 189 (λ1-1), symbol variation display is being performed, and in the middle of the symbol variation display, a simultaneous effect to be executed on a plurality of game machines is started. FIG. 189 (λ1-2) shows an example of a display screen of simultaneous effect at normal time (error not generated and before the first stop). As shown in FIG. 189 (λ1-2), the background display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is replaced with the background display of the simultaneous effect at the normal time. Note that the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed overlapping the background display of the simultaneous effect. However, the opposite may be applied. Moreover, about an error display, although there is an example shown in FIG. 189 ((lambda) 2 ') mentioned later, it may overlap and be displayed on the background display of simultaneous presentation. However, the opposite may be applied.

  FIG. 189 (λ 2) shows an example when simultaneous rendering occurs during super reach rendering. During the super reach effect, the simultaneous effect display is displayed on the separate frame display section OFD in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can enjoy the super reach effect and also see the simultaneous effect be able to. In the case of a game console provided with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, displays of simultaneous effects are displayed on the display devices 208S, 208M, and 208N. May be

  FIG. 189 (λ 2 ′) shows an example of the case where simultaneous effects occur during the error notification display. Here, the situation of super reach effect is also overlapped, but it may be before the first stop of the decorative symbol, or in the normal reach state, or may be the same. The simultaneous effect display is displayed on the separate frame display unit OFD, and a plurality of types of error displays (error notification of error A to error E notification) are displayed without any change before the simultaneous effect occurrence, and the separate frame display unit The display of simultaneous effects in the OFD is overlapped with a plurality of types of error displays.

  Note that the bar display VB for volume adjustment may overlap the display of simultaneous rendering on the separate frame display unit OFD. Or conversely, the display of simultaneous rendering in the separate frame display unit OFD may overlap with the bar display VB for volume adjustment.

  In addition, in the gaming table provided with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, those display devices 208S, 208M, 208N (hereinafter referred to as "second display means" ) Overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208 or the first decorative symbol display device 208L (hereinafter referred to as “first display means”), the first display according to the movement of the second display means A part of the display on the means may be displayed on the second display means. In this case, an error display may be displayed on the second display means, or only the error display may not be displayed.

  As mentioned above, although the word "error" or the word "warning" is used in the description using FIGS. 187 to 189, it is not necessary to distinguish between the two, and it is notified that an error has occurred. It may be a notification that there is an instruction to cancel an error that has occurred or has occurred. Moreover, what is described as an error may be set to have a higher priority than that described as a warning.

<Error notification / error detectable by main control unit>
Next, an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described using FIG. FIG. 190 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100.

  Errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example include a magnetic (magnet) detection error, a switch (sensor) non-connection error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch (sensor) level error, and winning Rate (general winning opening, starting opening 2 (electric chew), special winning opening (attacker)) abnormal error, large winning opening exhaust excess error, large winning opening winning excess error, impact abnormal error, solenoid abnormal error and the like.

  A magnetism (magnet) detection error occurs when the magnetism detection signal changes from off to on in the power on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) and the state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms), and the power is turned on again. It is an error to return if it happens. Switch (sensor) not connected error is the power on state (PW_WATCH signal is ON). Special figure 1 · 2 start port, general drawing start port (gate), or attacker is not connected (harness disconnected or connector missing) Occurs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 4 ms), and a power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) and an unconnected device (special figure 1 · 2 start port, common view start port, attacker) are connected It is an error to return when it is detected that A magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is an error generated when a magnetic field (radio wave) is detected by a magnetic field (radio wave) detection sensor.

  The switch (sensor) level abnormal error is an error that occurs when a big ball is suspected. Among the winning percentage abnormal errors, the error of the general winning opening is an error that occurs when the number of winnings to the general winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 226 shown in FIG. 110) is an abnormal value. The error is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of gaming balls are detected when the normal motorized role (for example, the second special view starting opening 232 shown in FIG. 110) is not activated, and the error of the special winning opening Is an error that occurs when the number of winnings on the special winning opening (for example, the variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 110) is an abnormal value.

  The large winning opening overrun error occurs when the number of balls discharged exceeds the number of ball entry during the definite variation area validity period and out of the definite variation area valid period, and the next main control timer that the large winning opening excess passing error occurs This error is returned when interrupt processing occurs.

  The big winning opening winning excess error occurs when the number of ball entry> the number of discharge after the remaining ball detection time has elapsed (when the special battery operation interval timer is 0), the number of ball entry = the number of discharge Is an error that returns when the power is turned on again. In return processing of the large winning a prize winning excess error, the probability variable area related number of passes is set to zero.

  In the impact abnormality error, the level of the impact sensor changes from OFF to ON and the state is ON while the switch power supply confirmation signal is OFF (= power is ON) and during the definite variation area (specific area) effective period. This error occurs when the time (for example, 12 ms) continues, and returns when the shock sensor level changes from ON to OFF or when it changes from during the definite change area validity period to outside the definite change area validity period.

  A solenoid error error occurs when the photosensor does not perform an operation that changes from OFF to ON or an operation that changes from ON to OFF at least during the probability change region effective period, and the next solenoid error error occurs. This error is returned when timer interrupt processing occurs.

  In this example, the top row (magnetic (magnet) detection error) in FIG. 190 is the highest priority error because the main control unit 300 is not allowed to operate (no game), and the errors are sequentially prioritized toward the bottom row below. Although the degree is lower, another error may be the top priority error, and the priority level may not be in the order of the list shown in FIG. The details of the conditions under which each error occurs, the recovery conditions, the detection operation in the main control unit 300, and the recovery operation in the main control unit 300 are as shown in FIG. It should be noted that "when the hit end display period ends" of the return condition of the winning rate abnormal error of the special winning opening (attacker) is when the big hit or small hit end display period is finished.

<Error that can be detected by the error notification / delivery control unit>
Next, an error that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described using FIG. FIG. 191 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100.

  The errors that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example include lower tray full error (lower full tray error, full tray error), number-of-dispenses error, number-of-dispenses switch error, fraudulent delivery error, excess payout Error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (error when the communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 can not be received for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example), CR unit not connected error, glass frame open error In addition to the inner frame opening error and the door opening error, the magnetic error error, the external clock error, the magnetic field error, the switch level error, the switch disconnection error, the impact sensor error, etc., are not shown.

  Further, the occurrence condition of each error, the return condition, the payout operation in the payout device 152, and the launch operation in the launch device 110 are as shown in FIG. 191 (a). Note that "stop" described in the item "stop emission" shown in the figure is synonymous with turning off the release permission signal.

  FIG. 191 (b) is a view showing a combination of a glass frame opening error and an inner frame opening error which is a condition for generating a door opening error. The door open error is generated when at least one of the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error is generated, and is released when both the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error are released. It is an error.

<Error notification / Other examples>
Note that the above-mentioned magnetic (magnet) detection error may be another error (for example, magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, switch non-connection error (error related to connector disconnection or disconnection of the device controlled by the main control unit), impact abnormality error, The error may be a higher priority than the payout control communication error, the switch level abnormal error, the winning rate abnormal error, the door open error, the upper limit error, or the same priority.

  Also, for example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error and an error with a low priority occur simultaneously, if the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error satisfies the output condition first, the operation for the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is After execution, the operation of the magnetic (magnet) detection error may be performed. In that case, all devices in which notification by the decorative symbol display device 208, the lamps 418, 532, 542, and the speaker 120 performs notification from magnetic field (radio wave) detection error to magnetic (magnet) detection error (decorative symbol display device 208, lamps 418, 532, 542, and the speaker 120) may be switched (data is overwritten), and only one or more partial devices (eg, the speaker 120) may be overwritten, One or more devices may continue to notify for magnetic field (radio wave) detection errors.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode>
Next, a specific example of the notification mode of the error notification will be described using FIG. FIG. 192 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG.

  The liquid crystal display shown in FIG. 192 indicates an error display by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208), and displays the character display described in “”. Here, the error display by the display means is displayed until the error is released, and is configured to be non-displayed when the error is released, but after the error is released for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds) The display may be configured to be displayed, or may be configured to disappear when a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the error occurrence even if the error is not canceled. The display by the display means is not limited to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be an error display by lighting of a segment or various lamps, a light emission display by a light guide plate, or a display by a POV display.

  The sound effect described in FIG. 192 may be a notification by a sound output means (in this example, the speaker 120), and the portion in “” is repeatedly output as sound. Here, the notification by voice is configured to be repeatedly output until the error is canceled, but even if the error is not canceled, a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the error occurs. Then, it may be configured not to output voice, or may be configured to output voice for a certain period (for example, 15 seconds) after the error is canceled.

  The error illumination LED shown in FIG. 192 is an LED provided on the front side of the front frame door 106 (a position where the player can see), and is configured to light up only when an error related to payout occurs. However, it may be configured to light up with some or all of various errors related to the power supply, main control, sub control (sub control), or even if it is configured not to light up with some or all of them. Good. Further, in the warning regarding the sub control (in this example, the shock warning and the strike warning), the error illumination LED is configured not to be lit, but may be lit. The error illumination LED may be always on, and may be turned off when an error occurs to notify that an error has occurred. The payout illumination LED described in FIG. 192 is an LED provided on the front side of the front frame door 106 (a position at which the player can visually recognize), and lights up during a period in which payout by the payout device 152 is being performed. The light is turned off during a period in which the payout device 152 has not paid out. Moreover, although the payout lighting LED is turned on also when a partial error related to the payout (in this example, the number-of-payouts error occurs), it may be lit only during a period in which the payout device 152 is making a payout. It may be configured to light up when an error regarding dispensing occurs. In the decorative LED shown in FIG. 192, the game board 200 and the frame (in this example, the frame lamp 122 of the front frame door 106. The decorative LED is provided on the main body 104 (inner frame) and / or the outer frame 102. It is the lamp provided in (it may be comprised so that it may not be provided) and performs light-emitting production according to various production. In addition, even if the decoration LED illustrated in FIG. 192 performs the light emission effect at the time of occurrence of an error, the light emission effect may be stopped and the light emission pattern for the error may be lit. (As an example at the time of return, the light emission effect may be progressed in another layer even during an error, and the light emission effect at the time of error return may be restored when the error is recovered, but Also, it may be configured not to perform the light emission effect until the timing when it is easy to return (for example, at the start of a new light emission effect), even if it is configured to return from the effect data at the time the error occurred. Good) Here, the error notification by turning on the various LEDs lights up or flashes until the error is released, and is turned off when the error is released, but even after the error is released It may be configured to light up or blink for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), or a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the error occurrence even if the error is not canceled. Then it may be configured to turn off.

  The errors that can be detected by the pachinko machine 100 of this example are (1) an error related to the payout (the payout control unit 600), (2) an error related to the power supply (the power control unit 660), and (3) the main control (main control unit 300). Etc., and (4) Warning about sub-control (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500). Each of these will be described below.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / error regarding payment>
First, we will explain the errors related to the payout. As the “error related to the payout (delivery control unit 600)” in this example, a lower receiving plate full error (hereinafter, also referred to as a full tray error), a glass frame opening error, a payout number shortage error, a payout excess error, a fraud payout error, There may be a delivery switch error, a main control communication error, a CR unit non-connection error, a CR unit communication error, and a door open error. Here, the 7-segment LED for dispensing error display is provided on the dispensing control substrate (dispensing substrate 170), and can be viewed only when the main body 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102 (transparent or high transmittance) It is visible through the delivery board case 172 made of resin.

  In this example, when the lower pan error occurs, the number “2” is added to the light emitting means (in this example, the 7-segment LED for dispensing error display provided on the dispensing control board (dispensing board 170)). The notification by the light emitting means is performed by displaying, the notification by the display means (in the present example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in the present example, the display of characters indicating that the lower receiving tray full error has occurred), and the sound output means (In this example, notification by the speaker 120) (In this example, the sound of the effect sound indicating that the lower receiving tray full error has occurred is output). In this example, in the pachinko machine 100 having the upper tray 126 and the lower tray 128, the case where the lower receiving tray full tank error occurs when the lower tray 128 is full is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of the pachinko machine 100 having only the upper tray 126 (one storage tray), this error (full tray error) may occur when the upper tray 126 is full. .

  Also, when a glass frame opening error occurs, the number “1” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, 7-segment LED for dispensing error display provided on the dispensing control substrate (dispensing substrate 170)). And the second light emitting means (in this example, the decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) notifies the second light emitting means (in this example, the decorative LED (in this example)). A frame lamp or a board lamp), notification by a display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, an indication that a glass frame opening error has occurred), and a sound output means (this example) Then, the notification (in this example, sound output of the effect sound indicating that the glass frame opening error has occurred) by the speaker 120) is performed.

  When a door opening error occurs, the first light emitting means (in this example, 7-segment LED for dispensing error display provided on the dispensing control substrate (dispensing substrate 170)) has a number "1". The notification by the first light emitting means is performed by displaying, and the notification (in this example, the decorative LED (frame in the present example) by the second light emitting means (in the present example, the decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) ) And notification by a display means (in the present example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, an indication that a door opening error has occurred), and a sound output means (in the present example) The notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the output of the sound effect that the door opening error has occurred) is performed.

  In addition, notification of a door opening error may be notification of a glass frame opening error, and different notification modes (for example, notification by a display means) of a glass frame opening error and a part of an inner frame opening error are made different. The other notification may be the same, or all the notification modes may be different. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the payout of the game balls may be interrupted, and the payout of the game balls may be continued when the inner frame is opened.

  In addition, when the number-of-payouts error occurs, the number “3” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the 7-segment LED for displaying the dispensing error provided on the dispensing control board (dispensing board 170)). Is displayed by the first light emitting means, and a notification (lighting of the LED for payout lighting in the present example) by the third light emitting means (in this example, the LED for payout lighting) is performed. Note that other notification modes of error notification regarding payout, causes of each error, states of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and measures are as shown in FIG.

<Example of error notification / information notification mode / error related to power supply>
Next, errors related to the power supply will be described. As the “error related to the power supply (power control unit 660)” in this example, there are a fuse blow 1, a fuse blow 2, and a fuse blow 3. In this example, when an error related to the power supply occurs, the error notification is not performed. The cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the action are as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, no notification is given as to an error related to the power supply, but notification using a display means, a sound output means, or various LEDs may be performed. In addition, a power supply status confirmation LED may be provided on the power supply substrate. Here, the power status confirmation LED is always on from the power on, and may be configured to be turned off when an error occurs. Conversely, the power status confirmation LED is from the power on to off and an error occurs. It may be configured to be turned on.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / error concerning main control etc.>
Next, errors relating to the main control and the like will be described. The “error related to main control (main control unit 300) etc.” in this example includes a magnetic (magnet) detection error, an external clock abnormality error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch level abnormality error, a switch non-connection error, a shock abnormality Errors, winning rate abnormal error, large winning opening excess winning error, large winning opening excess ejection error, solenoid abnormal error (large winning opening abnormal error) may be mentioned.

  In this example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs, a notification (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp) by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) And a panel lamp), notification by a display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters to the effect that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred), and a sound output means (in In this example, notification (in this example, sound output of the effect sound indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred) by the speaker 120) is performed.

Also, when a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occurs, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board) Flashing), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred), and sound output means (this example) In this case, notification (in this example, sound output of a sound effect that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred) by the speaker 120) is performed. Also, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  Also, when an impact abnormality error occurs, a notification (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (Flashing), notification by display means (in this example, decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters to the effect that an impact abnormal error has occurred), and by sound output means (in this example, speaker 120) Informing (in this example, sounding of a sound effect that an impact abnormal error has occurred) is performed. Also, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  Also, when a big winning opening winning excess error occurs, a notification (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board) by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) Flashing), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters to the effect that a large winning opening overrun error has occurred), and sound output means (this example) Then, notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, sounding of a sound effect indicating that a special winning opening winning excess error has occurred) is performed.

  In addition, when a special winning opening exhaust excess error occurs, the error notification is not performed. In addition, notification by error notification (light emitting means (in this example, LED for decoration (frame lamp and panel lamp)) (in this example, blinking of LED for decoration (frame lamp and panel lamp)) and display means ( In this example, notification by the decorative symbol display device 208 (in the present example, display of characters to the effect that a large winning opening overrun error has occurred) and notification by the sound output means (the speaker 120 in the present example) Then, a sound of the effect sound indicating that a special winning opening overrun error has occurred may be output).

  Also, when a solenoid abnormality error (large winning opening abnormality error) occurs, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED ( A frame lamp or a board lamp), notification by a display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters to the effect that a solenoid abnormal error has occurred), and a sound output means (this In the example, notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, sound output of the effect sound indicating that a solenoid abnormality error has occurred) is performed. Also, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  In addition, the prize rate abnormal error, general winning a prize opening (in this example, general winning a prize opening 226), starting opening 2 (this example 2nd special figure starting opening 232) and large winning a prize opening (this example, variable winning a prize opening Although the same error notification is performed for 234), different error notifications may be performed depending on the winning opening in which an error has occurred. Further, as another error corresponding to the winning rate error, there is an abnormal winning error. An abnormal winning error means that the target winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 226, the second special view starting opening 232, the variable winning opening 234, etc.) under a specific condition (for example, at N-ball launch, during a big hit) Other than this, it is an error that occurs when a specific number or more of winnings is detected on a computer support (except during normal condition). When an abnormal winning error occurs, the state, notification, or measure of the gaming machine may be the same as the winning rate abnormal error.

  The error regarding the main control or the like may include a door open error. In that case, when a door opening error occurs, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) Blinks, notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, an indication that a door opening error has occurred), and notification by the sound output means (in the present example, the speaker 120) (In this example, the sound of the effect sound indicating that the door opening error has occurred is output). Note that other notification modes of error notification regarding the main control and the like, causes of each error, states of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and measures are as shown in FIG.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / Warning / error concerning sub control>
Next, warnings and errors related to sub control will be described. Examples of “warning / error regarding sub control (first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500)” in the present example include impact warning, strike warning, and effect movable means error. In this example, when an impact warning is generated, notification (in this example, display of a character indicating that an impact warning has been generated) is performed by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208). There is no notification by.

  In addition, when a warning is generated, a notification (in this example, display of characters to the effect that a warning has been generated) is displayed by a display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208), and a sound output means (in In this example, although notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, sound output of the effect sound indicating that the strike warning has been generated) is performed, notification by the light emitting means is not performed.

  The effect movable means error means various effect movable means (in the present example, the effect movable body 224, the shielding means 246, the house crest role item 224E, the first large-area behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd and one-seven box Effect movable means provided on the game board such as the character 224 H. (In this example, the front frame door 106. It may be provided on the main body 104 or the outer frame 102) Note that the effect movable means is provided on the frame In the case where there is a frame, the effect moving means is included, but it does not have to be included. It is determined that there was an abnormality when the initial operation of the frame) does not have to be provided. It is an error that occurs in the case. The abnormality referred to here indicates the case where the initial operation is not normally performed, but for example, the sensor at the initial position of each effect moving means (ON when in the initial position) is in the OFF state The case where it does not become ON even if the retry operation is performed one or more times, or the case where it is determined that the sensor is in the ON state may be shown. Further, the initial operation may be composed of all or any one or two operations of a home position return operation, a sensor check operation, and a full stroke operation. Here, the origin return operation is an operation of confirming the state of the sensor at the initial position and returning only the effect movable means whose sensor at the initial position is OFF (not at the initial position) to the initial position. Further, the sensor check operation is an operation for confirming a failure of the sensor, and is an operation for performing a minimum operation in which the sensor is switched from ON to OFF. The full stroke operation is an operation in which the effect moving means moves to the maximum position where it can operate and returns to the initial position. The home position return operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. (For example, the effect movable means which is not at the origin position is returned to the initial position, and the full stroke operation is performed as it is) Further, the sensor check operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. In addition, after the origin return operation is performed for all of the effect movable means, the sensor check operation and / or the full stroke operation may be performed in a predetermined order. (For example, when the initial operation is performed in the order of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body B → the effect movable body C and the effect movable body B is not at the initial position, the origin of the effect movable bodies A to C After the return operation is performed (appearingly, the operation is performed for the effect movable body B), the sensor check operation and / or the full stroke operation are performed in the order of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body B → the effect movable body C Furthermore, the initial operation may be performed for the other effect movable means after being performed in the initial operation for the effect movable means that is not at the origin position. (For example, when the initial operation is performed in the order of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body B → the effect movable body C and the sensor of the initial position of the effect movable body B is OFF, the initial effect of the effect movable body B is The operation is performed, and then the initial operation of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body C is performed.) If it is determined that the plurality of effect movable means are not at the initial position, the effect movable means having higher priority is used. The operation (initial position return operation or initial operation including the origin return operation) may be configured to be performed.

  Also, for the effect movable means error, when the connector of the effect movable means is not properly connected, disconnection of the harness of the effect movable means or damage to the connector, etc., the effect movable means has various circuits (for example, the drive circuit 422 in FIG. 111) This error occurs even when not properly connected to In addition, “error related to connection failure (wiring failure) of the production moving means” and “error generated when it is determined that there is abnormality when performing the initial operation of the various production moving means at the time of power on” are different errors. It may be divided and reported.

  Further, the effect movable means error is an error that may be displayed during display of the return-in-progress display described later, but may be configured not to be displayed during display of the return-in-progress display.

  The error related to the sub control may be displayed in the same display mode (display area, font size, color, shape of image, display position, etc.) as the error related to the main control or payout, and a different display mode An error display may be displayed at. Further, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the sub control, but may be displayed in the same display mode. Also, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the main control, but may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a different display mode from the error display regarding the payout control, but may be displayed in the same display mode.

  In addition to the error display by the display means, the frame and the decoration LED provided on the game board 200 are configured to light or blink in an error related to the sub control (in this example, the effect movable means error). The sound output means may be configured to notify an error, or both may be performed.

Further, the error notification regarding the sub liquid crystal may be configured such that a part or all of the error notification is ended by the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 136 (chance button)) by the player. (When a part of the error notification ends, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated during occurrence of the effect movable means error, the error display is displayed as it is, but the error notification by the sound output means ends, the game The blinking display by the decoration LED of the board is finished, a part of the decoration LED of the frame is also turned off, the blinking by the other part continues as it is, etc. The notification may be continued, the error notification by the effect means B may be terminated, a part of the effect means C may be terminated, and the other portions may be continued as they are. Decoration LED etc. correspond.)
When the liquid crystal loading display is displayed when the power is turned on, the error display may not be displayed during the liquid crystal loading display, or may be displayed. Here, the liquid crystal loading display is a display showing a state in which data stored in the ROM 506 of the second sub control unit 500 is being read. When reading of the data stored in the RON 506 of the second sub control unit 500 is completed, the symbol stop display (symbol stop display displayed between the demo screen or the symbol variation display) or the return display (in preparation display) is displayed. Ru. The display during return is a display that is displayed when game control returns during a symbol change or a big hit, and if a symbol change is in progress, until the symbol stops (until the special display display determination timer reaches 0), If the jackpot is in progress, it is displayed until the jackpot ends (until the hit end display timer becomes 0). In addition, you may be comprised so that it may return to a symbol change display from the display in return during specific timing (for example, the start of a super reach effect, temporary stop display of three decoration symbols, etc.) during symbol change. In addition, various big hit displays may be displayed from the returning display at a specific timing during the big hit (for example, start or end of a specific round, start or end of a big hit start effect, start or end of a big hit end display). Here, while the display of the indication during recovery may be displayed also for all or part of the above-mentioned error display, it is configured not to be displayed for all or part of other error displays. May be In addition, while all the above error displays are not displayed during the liquid crystal loading display, some or all of the error displays may be displayed during the liquid crystal loading display. .

  The change effect display may be a change advance display.

  When the display mode of the hold icon is selected to the icon A by the player, the icon A is forcibly changed to an icon B to an icon G selectable by the player when the hold pre-reading notice is started. There may be a case where the icon A may change to the form of the icon which can not be selected by the player when the pre-hold notice is started.

  In addition, multiple operation means regarding an effect may be provided. Here, when the operation means A (for example, the chance button 136) and the operation means B (lever) are provided, an image (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means A or an “operation means A character display such as “press A”, etc. Hereinafter, an image (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means B or “image showing the appearance of the operation means B” is more prompting the user to operate the operation means B) Character display such as “press operation means B.” Hereinafter, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol form may be more easily displayed finally than when “operation means image B” is displayed. The image relating to the operation means in which the big hit symbol aspect is likely to be determined and displayed may be reversed, and the ease with which the big hit symbol aspect is definitely displayed may not be changed. Here, the auto button function works for the operation means A, but the auto button function may not work for the operation means B, and the operation means for the auto button function may be reversed. The function may work, and the auto button function may not work for both operation means. In addition, it may be configured that changing the display mode of the navigation character is more likely to be successful when the operation means image B is displayed than when the operation means image A is displayed, but it may be reversed. It may be configured such that the success degree of the change of the display mode of the navigation character does not differ depending on the displayed operation means image. (In other words, it may be the same.) Also, when the operation means image B is displayed, the display mode of the navigation character changes to a display mode with a high probability of big hit than when the operation means image A is displayed. Although it may be configured to be easy to do, it may be reversed, and it may be configured such that the display mode in which the navigation character is likely to change does not differ depending on the displayed operation means image. (In other words, it may be the same.) Also, the frequency at which the operation means image A is displayed is higher than the frequency at which the operation means image B is displayed, but may be reversed or the same. Good. In addition, there may be a case where an effect (a promotion effect or a demotion effect) in which the operation means image A changes to the operation means image B is performed. Here, the period during which the operation means image A is promoted to the operation means image B may be outside the effective period of the operation effective period of the operation means A and before the operation effective period of the operation means B is started. It may be outside the period of the operation effective period of A and during the operation effective period of the operation means B, during the period of the operation effective period of the operation means A, and outside the effective period of the operation effective period of the operation means B Alternatively, it may be during the operation effective period of the operation means A and during the operation effective period of the operation means B. The same applies to the case where the operation means image B is changed to the operation means image A. As described above, in the description herein, the two operation means of the operation means A and the operation means B have been described as an example, but the same applies to three or more operation means.

  In addition, effects that can be selected by the player, special drawing starting port, common drawing starting port, general winning a prize opening and / or gate for effect (enter into the gate, even if the sensor is detected no winning balls are performed, only the effect It may increase depending on the points obtained by passing through the gate). Here, the number of points obtained by passing and the effect to be acquired may have a one-to-one relationship, and when the points obtained by passing become a specific point, for example, on the decorative symbol display device 208 A “display for performing an effect to draw an effect to be acquired from now on (Gacha effect)” may be performed, and an effect selected by the effect lottery by the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be acquired.

  The player may be configured to be able to switch between displaying and non-displaying the navigation character by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136). Switching between displaying and non-displaying the navi character may always be possible, or may be possible only while the navi character is being displayed, until one period or more elapses from the start of the symbol variation (for example, one or more, or All decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped, etc.), and it may be configured so that switching of display / non-display of the navigation character can not be performed during execution of the super reach effect, while the super reach effect is being executed. The navigation character may be configured to be switched between display and non-display, or may be configured to be switched between display and non-display only while the symbol is stopped (during stop of the special view).

  The effects using the navigation character described using FIGS. 108 to 192 can be combined with the transparency effects described using FIGS. 14 to 45. For example, the character on which the navigation character YM is drawn is disposed on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L), and the navigation character described using FIGS. 108 to 192 is used. An effect may be made executable. In this case, the navigation character YM may continue to appear by continuing the transmission effect across a plurality of continuous variable displays, and the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed and the number of reservations is 0. (For example, in the state of a symbol demo in which a decorative symbol is displayed, or in the state of an animation demo started after the symbol demo), the transmission effect is executed, and the navigation character YM appears on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device. May be

  Alternatively, on the contrary, the navigation character YM is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L), and effects using the navigation character described using FIGS. 108 to 192 are executed, The transparency effect described with reference to 14 to 45 may be made executable.

  As mentioned above, although the example which made the present invention apply to a pachinko machine (ball ball game machine) was explained in detail, the game stand of the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) The present invention is also applicable to a used gaming machine (slot machine). That is, although the pachinko machine 100 described so far is pachinko (one kind + one kind), other pachinko (eg one kind, two kinds, three kinds, one kind + two kinds etc.) may be used, a slot etc ( Parrots and balls can be used. More specifically, while inserting a medal (gaming medium) and operating the start lever to rotate the reel, internally determining the combination by internal lottery, and operating the stop button to stop the reel If a combination of symbols determined in advance is displayed on the symbol display window according to the internal determination, the combination is established, and if the combination with the payout of medals is established, the prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. The present invention may be a coin-operated game machine (slot machine) in which a player is given a benefit. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are sealed as a sealed ball, the sealed ball is fired to a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the fact that the sealed ball is won in a predetermined entry area. , And the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won may be fired again to the gaming area, and the enclosed ball game console may be used cyclically.

  As described above, the present invention is applicable to various types of game consoles, and is also applicable to, for example, an enclosed type pachinko machine shown in FIG. 919 described later and a slot machine shown in FIG.

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208 S, etc.], and
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first icon [for example, a change icon h0],
The first icon is an icon (hereinafter referred to as a "variation icon") related to a symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display in progress].
The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [eg, a default (white) display mode],
The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a white flash, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color display mode, etc.],
In the case where the variation icon of the second display mode is displayed, the big hit symbol mode is finally determined and displayed more easily than when the variation icon of the first display mode is displayed [e.g. , The high expectation of the jackpot]],
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a second icon [eg, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.],
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across consecutive symbol variation displays [eg, FIG. 153 (i) to FIG. (I), etc.],
The second icon is an effect of changing the variation icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [eg, effects shown in FIG. 153 (i-9) to FIG. 11 (i)]. Icon that may be used for
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a crown-like lady wearing a kimono of a default color, a display mode of a crown-like fashion, a display mode of a copanda],
The second icon is a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a princess wearing white kimono, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color kimono, a display mode of a princess, a display mode of a Icon that may be displayed in
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Here, the variation icon may be an icon that may be displayed in an icon display area in the display unit, and the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area. . Further, the variation icon and the second icon may be icons that may be simultaneously displayed in the icon display area. That is, the second icon may be an icon simultaneously displayed with the change icon in the icon display area during a first period. Furthermore, the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed outside the icon display area. Alternatively, the icon display area may be a movable display area, or may be a display area that may be divided and moved to different positions.

  Moreover, "crossing" is to put a period of stop display of symbols (a change stop period) in between. Further, the second icon may be an icon continuously displayed during display of the symbol variation display, or may be an icon which disappears in the middle. In addition, the icon may be displayed continuously while the stop display of the symbol is displayed, or it may be an icon which disappears in the middle, or the icon which continues to disappear while the stop display is displayed. It may be

  In addition, "an icon that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation display" is an "an icon that is always displayed, and an icon that may be once erased and re-displayed". .

  In addition, the second icon may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

  The display means may be means for displaying plural types of display without fail.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only for one symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the second icon may be an icon displayed when a certain condition is satisfied. As an example of certain conditions referred to here, there are at least n pendings, that there is a pending with pre-reading advance notice, that customization by a player is being performed, a certain advance notice (eg timer notice, That a conversation notice etc. is displayed, that the second icon is a notice display of a prefetch notice, that the second icon is stocked, and the degree of expectation of the jackpot in the symbol variation display being executed is It is possible to enumerate that the game is high and that the advance lottery has been won. That is, as the certain condition, all the items listed above may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon different from the change icon,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The display of one of the above-mentioned plurality of types of display is a change effect display [for example, icon I1 of a treasure box, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, icon of meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, eagle character Conversational notice including the character display “Navi character has changed”, an image of an eyebrow, an eyebrow image for a wipe effect, etc.],
The change effect display is an effect that changes the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 151 (A 3-1) to FIG. (A 6), FIG. 152 (A 6-3-2) to the same figure (A 6-3-4a), FIG. 159 (G 1-3-1) to the same drawing (G 1-3-4), the meter effect shown in FIG. 165 (C2 2-2-1) to the same figure (C2 2-2-3), FIG. 176 (Ab1) to (Ab 2), FIG. 156 (A6) to FIG. 9-2-1) Etc.] is a display that may be used
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, the change effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the second icon is displayed in the third display mode, and the change effect display is a display of the second icon It is a notice display about a mode changing from the said 3rd display mode to the said 4th display mode.

  Further, the change effect display may be an icon that may be used for an effect of changing the display mode of the change icon. Alternatively, the change effect display may be an icon not used for the effect of changing the display mode of the change icon, and in this case, the change effect display is a display of the second icon The icon may be used only for the effect of changing the mode.

  The second icon may be an icon that changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode when the change effect display is displayed.

  The change effect display may be a display that may be displayed even when the second icon is not displayed.

Also,
“If the display mode does not change even when the change effect display is displayed, the second icon [eg, FIG. 151 (3-2-1) to FIG. (3-2-2), FIG. 159 ( Icon (1-3-2), FIG. 176 (a 4-2), and FIG. 176 (a 6-2)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"When the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, finally the big hit symbol pattern mode when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed Is likely to be displayed finalized [for example, the expectation of the big hit is high],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed" means that the second icon of the third display mode is displayed and the second icon is displayed. In the case of not changing to the fourth display mode, it may be ".

  Moreover, in the state in which the second icon is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol form is finally obtained as compared to the state in which the second icon is displayed in the fourth display mode. It may be difficult to confirm display.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon which may be a notice display for a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed [for example, Fig. 154 (う 20-1), Fig. 163 (こ b 15-1)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "the second icon may be a notice display about the big hit in the symbol variation display being executed," means that "the notice of the big hit in the symbol variation display being executed is the second icon It may be done by

  Here, the third display mode may be a default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode of a notice about a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon which may be a notice display for previewing notice [for example, FIG. 159 (No. 5-1) to FIG. (No. 13), FIG. 162 (No.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "the second icon may be a notice display of a prefetch notice" may be "a prefetch notice is given by a second icon".

  Here, the third display mode may be a default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode of pre-reading advance notice.

  The second icon may be an icon that also functions as the change icon. That is, in this case, two types of variation icons are displayed by the first icon and the second icon.

  In addition, in the case where both icons of the variation icon in the second display mode and the second icon in the fourth display mode are displayed, the case where both the icons are not displayed is more effective. Finally, the jackpot design may be easily displayed.

  Further, in the case where both the change icon of the second display mode and the icon of the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, either one of the both icons is displayed. It may be easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol form than when only the icon is displayed.

  Further, when any one of the variation icon of the second display mode and the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, no icon is displayed either. It may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form finally than in the case.

  In addition, in the case where both icons of the variation icon in the second display mode and the second icon in the fourth display mode are displayed, the case where both the icons are not displayed is more effective. Finally, the jackpot design may be easily displayed.

  In addition, the variable icon of a display mode (for example, the second display mode) different from the default display mode and the second icon of the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) are displayed. The second state of the display mode (e.g., the fourth display mode) is different from the default display mode (e.g., the first display mode) and the second display mode (e.g., the fourth display mode). It may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form finalized than the state in which both icons are displayed.

  Alternatively, conversely, the variable icon of a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the second display mode) and the second icon of the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) In the display mode (for example, the fourth display mode), the variation icon of the default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the display mode (for example, the fourth display mode) are different from the default display mode. It may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form finalized than the state in which both the second icons are displayed.

  In addition, the fluctuation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth display mode, and when the fluctuation icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the big hit symbol mode is finally definitely displayed. May be In addition, the second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a sixth display mode, and when the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the big hit symbol form is finally displayed. It may be definitely displayed. Although the variation icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the second icon may be displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode. Good. In addition, although the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the variable icon may be displayed in the one display mode or the second display mode. Good.

  Furthermore, the variation icon may be displayed in the fifth display mode, and the second icon may be displayed in the sixth display mode. In this case, for example, an advantageous big hit is decided (for example, definite variation with big hit decision, long round big hit decision), a rare reach (for example, full turn reach etc.) tends to appear, or other premiere effects appear It may be easy to do, or it may be easy to hit a revival. Or, conversely, it may be difficult to revive the jackpot. In addition, the mode of the operation means may be changed (for example, the button may pop out, rotate, or be recessed, or the built-in lamp may emit light in a rare light emission mode (for example, rainbow light emission mode changing to seven colors)) . In addition, special effects can be obtained, special super reach is started, special super reach is started, and the number of special super reach is available (for example, the second attacker is open). Round) may be started.

  In addition, the combination of the display mode of the variation icon and the display mode of the second icon may suggest the type of effect (for example, the type of super reach, etc.). For example, in the case where the display mode of the variation icon is a lord and the display mode of the second icon is a sword auspicious, it may be suggested to develop into a sword alive reach where the lord and the sword alive make a battle. Alternatively, when the display mode of the variation icon is 兜 and the display mode of the second icon is a hallmark, the two icons are displayed for the first time to function as a notice (normal notice) of the change. May be configured.

  Moreover, the reliability (expected degree) of the big hit may differ depending on the combination of the display mode of the variation icon and the display mode of the second icon. For example, the combination of the change icon of the first display mode, the combination of the second icon of the fourth display mode, the change icon of the second display mode, and the change of the third display mode In the second combination of icons, the jackpot reliability (expected degree) may be different.

Also,
“When the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the variation icon is larger than when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. It is easy to change from one display mode to the second display mode
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the probability that the change icon of the first display mode changes to the second display mode is determined by the second icon of the fourth display mode. The case of changing to the second display mode is more than the case of changing the fluctuating icon of the first display mode to the second display mode by the second icon of the third display mode. It may be high.

  Here, "more than the case where the second icon of the third display mode is displayed" means that "the variation icon is changed from the first display mode by the second icon of the third display mode". It may be "" rather than the case where the production | presentation which changes to two display modes was performed.

  In addition, when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the change icon may change from the first display mode to the second display mode. Further, when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed, the change icon may not necessarily change from the first display mode to the second display mode. It may change.

  In addition, the variation icon is the fifth one when the second icon of the sixth display mode is displayed than when the second icon is the fourth display mode. It may be easy to change to the display mode of.

  As described above, when the display mode of the second icon is changed, the display mode of the variable icon may be easily changed, and the display mode of the variable icon is always changed. It is also good.

  Furthermore, the change icons of the display modes that are easy to change may be different depending on the display mode of the second icon. Further, the notices that are likely to appear (a pseudo continuous notice, a timer notice, a prefetch notice) may change depending on the display mode of the second icon.

Also,
“When a plurality of the second icons are displayed [eg, the example shown in FIG. 157, the example shown in FIG. 158 (1) to FIG. (5), etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, by displaying a plurality of the second icons, it may be easy to make a big hit, or the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon may be easily changed.

  In addition, depending on the combination of the plurality of second icons (combination of the second icons in the same display mode or combination of the second icons in different display modes), it is easy to make a big hit, the hold icon or the fluctuation icon The display mode may be changed easily, or the notices that are easy to appear (pseudo linked notices, timer notices, advance notices) may be changed.

Also,
[An operation means provided at a position where the player can operate, for example, a chance button 136 etc.]
The second icon is an icon whose display mode changes when the operation means is operated [for example, an example shown in FIGS. 158 (1-1) to 158 (7)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, for example, the third display mode may be changed to the fourth display mode in accordance with the operation of the operation means.

  Further, the second icon is a display mode regarding the operation means, and the display mode may be changed according to the operation of the operation means. The display mode relating to the operation means may be a display mode imitating the operation means, or may be a display mode (operation promotion display mode) for prompting the user to operate the operation means. The display mode related to the operation valid period of the operation means (more specifically, the display mode of the remaining period of the operation valid period (remaining period display mode)) may be displayed, or the display mode reminding of the operation means It may be present, may be a combination of these display aspects, or may be a display aspect including at least one of these display aspects.

  Further, the display means is means capable of displaying a meter display, and when the operation of the operation means is accepted according to the state of the meter display and the operation of the operation means is accepted, the second icon The display mode of may be changed.

  Furthermore, the display mode of the second icon is displayed when the operation means is operated in a so-called back button state in which a notification to operate the operation means is not issued even during the operation valid period of the operation means. May change.

  In addition, the display mode of the second icon may change according to the change of the effect mode.

  The second icon may be an icon whose display mode can be changed by a customization operation by the player.

Also,
“The third display mode is a display mode selected by the player [eg, character selection of 73 (b)],
The fourth display mode is a display mode that is not selected by the player [for example, a display mode of the screen leader shown in FIG. 155 (E4-3)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the third display mode may be a display mode that can be selected by the player, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode that can not be selected by the player, or the game It may be a display mode that can be selected by the person.

Also,
“When the display mode changes without the effect by the other display, the second icon [eg, FIG. 155 (E1) to FIG. (E 3-1), FIG. ) To the same figure (7)]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "the display mode may change without the effect by the other display and the second icon" may be "the display mode of the second icon according to the effect by the second icon" May change ".

Also,
“The variation icon is an icon having a case where the display mode changes [eg, FIG. 166 (S3) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "the display mode may change without the effect by the other display, and the display mode of the change icon may change depending on the effect by the change icon". It may be ".

Also,
“The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a third icon [eg, hold icons h11 to h14, etc.],
The third icon is an icon according to the number of holding balls (hereinafter referred to as a "holding icon"),
The hold icon has a plurality of types of display modes [eg, icons A to G in the hold display selection of FIG. 139 (b), FIG. 154 (う 2), FIG. (う 3), FIG. (う 12), An icon that may be displayed in the default display mode, blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, etc.,
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode, and the hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode. May be

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208 S, etc.], and
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a first icon,
The first icon is an icon related to the hold display [for example, the hold icons h11 to h14 and h21 to h24 and the fluctuation icon h0 and the like],
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [eg, default (white) display mode],
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a white flash, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color display mode, etc.],
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a second icon [eg, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.],
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across consecutive symbol variation displays [eg, FIG. 153 (i) to FIG. (I), etc.],
The second icon is an effect that changes the first icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, effects shown in FIG. 153 (i-9) to FIG. Etc.] is an icon that may be used
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a statue wearing a kimono of a default color, a display mode of a statue, a display mode of a copanda],
The second icon is a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a princess wearing white kimono, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color kimono, a display mode of a princess, a display mode of a Icon that may be displayed in
The second icon is an icon that may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“When the display mode changes without the effect by the other display, the second icon [eg, FIG. 155 (E1) to FIG. (E 3-1), FIG. ) To the same figure (7)]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only for one symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The second icon is an icon different from the first icon,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The display of one of the above-mentioned plurality of types of display is a change effect display [for example, icon I1 of a treasure box, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, icon of meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, eagle character Conversational notice including the character display “Navi character has changed”, an image of an eyebrow, an eyebrow image for a wipe effect, etc.],
The change effect display is an effect that changes the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 151 (A 3-1) to FIG. (A 6), FIG. 152 (A 6-3-2) to the same figure (A 6-3-4a), FIG. 159 (G 1-3-1) to the same drawing (G 1-3-4), the meter effect shown in FIG. 165 (C2 2-2-1) to the same figure (C2 2-2-3), FIG. 176 (Ab1) to (Ab 2), FIG. 156 (A6) to FIG. 9-2-1) Etc.] is a display that may be used
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“If the display mode does not change even when the change effect display is displayed, the second icon [eg, FIG. 151 (3-2-1) to FIG. (3-2-2), FIG. 159 ( 1-3-1 to 1-3 (1-3-3 b 2, FIG. 176 (a 4-2), FIG. 176 (a 6-2))] are also icons,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The second icon is an icon which may be a notice display for a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed [for example, Fig. 154 (う 20-1), Fig. 163 (こ b 15-1)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The second icon is an icon which may be as shown in FIG. 159 (step 5-1) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“When a plurality of the second icons are displayed [eg, the example shown in FIG. 157, the example shown in FIG. 158 (1) to FIG. (5), etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[An operation means provided at a position where the player can operate, for example, a chance button 136 etc.]
The second icon is an icon whose display mode changes when the operation means is operated [for example, an example shown in FIGS. 158 (1-1) to 158 (7)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The first icon is an icon having a case where the display mode changes [eg, FIG. 166 (S3) to FIG. (S4)] without effect by the other display.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "the first icon may change the display mode without effect by the other display," means "the display mode of the first icon according to the notice by the first icon. May change ".

Also,
"The icon regarding the hold display described above is the" concept icon that includes both the hold icon and the change icon ".
The hold icon is an icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24] representing an unheld hold.
The fluctuation icon is an icon [for example, fluctuation icon h0] representing a digested hold.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The" on hold display icon "mentioned above refers to the" on hold icon "
The hold icon is an icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24] representing an unheld hold.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Note that "the icon relating to the suspension display" described above is a "variation icon", and the variation icon is an icon [for example, a variation icon h0] representing a digested suspension. Good.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
"Presentation means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L-N, the second display device 208S, speaker 120, game board lamp 442, game stand frame lamp 452, one thousand two box character article 224H, etc.],
Operation means [eg, chance button 136, operation key unit 137, second chance button, lever type operation means, etc.];
Equipped with
The effect means is a means capable of executing a plurality of effects.
The effect of one of the plurality of effects is the first effect,
One of the effects of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
If the operation means is operated during the first period [for example, the effective period of operation] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect [for example, “summer vacation is not yet shown in FIG. 184 (A11) There may be a response display of "~"
In the auto button mode, when the first time [for example, the auto button function activation time (FIG. 184 (A6) to the time immediately before (A11)) elapses since the start of the first period] The first effect may be performed,
When the operation means is operated during a second period in the non-auto button mode [for example, a period of operation valid period (period of FIG. 184 (A8-1) to FIG. (A14))] [For example, a response icon in which the suspension icon changes to a blue display mode, a response display in which the continuous hitting meter RHM in FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-6) to FIG. There is a case,
In the auto button mode, the second effect is not executed even if a second time [for example, auto button function activation time] elapses after the second period is started [for example, FIG. 184 Example, the state of the continuous hitting meter RHM of FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-2) and FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-4)],
In the auto button mode, when the operation means is operated before the second time elapses after the second period is started, the second effect is executed. Yes,
The state of the operation means is configured to be changeable from one of the first state and the second state (for example, white lighting) to the other state (for example, special color (blue) lighting),
In the case where the state of the operation means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the auto button mode [eg, FIG. 184 (A8-1) to FIG. 184 ( In the case of A14), etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the invention of this description, it is possible to realize the game stand which features the operation means. More specifically, since the state of the operation means may change during the second period in the auto button mode, a line of sight is induced in the operation means to urge the operation of the operation means. There are times when you can.

  Here, the auto button mode is a mode in which an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means may be performed even without the operation of the operation means. The non-auto button mode is a state in which the auto button mode is not set.

  Even in the auto button mode, the operation of the operation means may be accepted (not invalidated), or may be accepted or not accepted, or may not be accepted at all. The case of acceptance and the case of non-acceptance may be accepted in the effect of A and not accepted in the effect of B, or may not be accepted in the period of A and accepted in the period of B. Furthermore, the operation of the A operation means (for example, the chance button 136) is accepted, and the operation of the B operation means (for example, the operation key unit 137, the second chance button, the lever type operation means, etc.) is not accepted. It is also good.

  In addition, during the second period, rendering means (for example, display by display means, movable means, light emitting means, etc.) other than the operation means may be configured to change.

Also,
[When the state of the operation means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the non-auto button mode [eg, in the case of FIG. 186 (Aa8-3) There is]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  By doing this, the state of the operation means may change during the second period in the non-auto button mode, so that the operation means can be induced to look at the line of sight to urge the operation of the operation means. There is a possibility. In addition, regardless of the setting of the auto button mode, to notice that the second effect will not be executed unless the operation means is operated during the second period, and improve the operation desire of the operation means There are times when you can.

Also,
At least a part of the first period may overlap with at least a part of the second period [eg, immediately before FIG. 184 (A8-1) to FIG. (Aa5-2-2), FIG. 186 (Aa8-2-1)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
A period in which at least a portion of the first period and at least a portion of the second period overlap in the auto button mode [eg, FIG. 184 (A8-1) to FIG. (A11) 185 (Aa5-2-2), 186 (Aa8-2-1)] in the period up to immediately before, when the operation means is operated, the first effect and the second effect are At least one of the effects is executed [for example, FIG. 186 (Aa8-2-3) to FIG. (Aa8-2-4)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, both effects of the first effect and the second effect may be executed, or only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect is executed. It is also good.

  In addition, when the operation means is operated before the first time elapses after the first period starts, effects of both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. Or only the first effect may be performed, or only the second effect may be performed.

  For example, when two button displays are displayed in the auto button mode, the function of the auto button mode works for one button display, the response display is displayed according to the button operation, and the other button display is auto. The function of the button mode does not work, and the user may feel uncomfortable to operate the button by himself, which may improve the interest of the game.

Also,
In the period in which at least a portion of the first period and the at least a portion of the second period overlap in the non-auto button mode, the first operation is performed when the operation means is operated; And at least one of the second effect is executed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, both effects of the first effect and the second effect may be executed, or only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect is executed. It is also good.

Also,
“If the operation means is not operated during the first period [for example, the operation effective period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect is not performed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, even if there is no operation until the said 1st period complete | finish, the said 1st presentation may be performed.

Also,
“If the operation means is not operated during the second period [for example, the operation effective period] in the non-auto button mode, the second effect is not performed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Note that the second effect may be performed even if there is no operation before the second period ends.
"The effect means is an image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N (all The second display device 208S etc.],
The plural types of effects are plural types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a response display,
The response display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated,
The first effect is a first response display of the response effects [for example, a response display of “Summer vacation is still ~ of FIG. 184 (A11)”.
The second effect is a second response display of the response effects [for example, an effect that the holding icon changes to a blue display mode].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is an operation display,
The operation display is a display related to the operation of the operation means,
When the display of the first operation display [for example, the button effect image (the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 184 (A5-1) or the like) is performed as the operation display] When the operation means is operated, the first response display may be displayed,
When the second operation display [for example, the button image 136a shown in FIG. 184 (A8-1) or the like] is displayed as the operation display, when the operation means is operated, the second operation display is performed. 2 response display may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The operation display may be an image representing the appearance of the operation means [for example, a button image 136a] or a display prompting the operation of the operation means [for example, the remaining time display meter MT, PUSH The display may include a character display of, a character display of "press", a display of an arrow indicating an operation direction, and the like.

Also,
[At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect [for example, a notice effect for a big hit in the symbol change display (normal advance notice)] for a symbol change display being executed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, both of the first effect and the second effect may be so, or only the first effect may be so, or only the second effect is so. May be

Also,
"At least one of the first effect and the second effect is the end of the symbol variation display in progress, and an effect on the symbol variation display to be started thereafter [for example, the symbol variation to be started next] It is a display, a symbol variation display to be started next to the next, or a notice effect about a big hit in a symbol variation display to be started next to the next (prereading notice)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, both of the first effect and the second effect may be so, or only the first effect may be so, or only the second effect is so. May be

Also,
"The first period is a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective (hereinafter referred to as" first operation effective period ").
The second period is a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective (hereinafter, referred to as “second operation effective period”).
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  A meter display showing at least one of the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period, for example, a display of the remaining period meter MT shown in FIG. 184 (A5-1) ] May also be displayed during the auto button mode. The display of the remaining period meter MT may be added to the button hold icon shown in FIG. 184 (A8-1).

  Further, as the meter display, a display by a gauge (a bar display that increases or decreases) may be used, or the display color may change with the passage of time, for example, a display that grays out when the remaining period disappears Good.

  Or, conversely, the meter indicating the operation valid period may be displayed only in the non-auto button mode and may not be displayed in the auto button mode. For example, the remaining period meter MT is omitted in the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow shown in FIG. 184 (A5-1) in the auto button mode, and the button shown in FIG. 186 (Aa8-3) in the non-auto button mode. The remaining period meter MT may be added to the hold icon.

  In addition, regardless of whether or not the auto button mode, if the meter indicating the operation valid period is displayed [for example, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 184 to FIG. 186] is not made [for example, FIG. There may be a button fluctuation icon or a button hold icon shown at 186.

Also,
"The operation means is a means that may perform a rendering operation [eg, light emission, vibration, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Further, the first state is a state in which the rendering operation is not performed [for example, a light-off state, a white lighting state, a vibration stop state], and the second state is a state in which the rendering operation is being performed [for example Lighting state, blue lighting state, vibration state].

  The first state may be a state in which the operation means is stopped.

  Further, the effect means is an effect movable means [for example, a vibrator] provided inside, and the effect operation is an operation for which the effect movable means operates [for example, vibration]. Good.

  Further, the second state is a state in which deformation (for example, protrusion or depression) or the effect moving means is in operation (for example, advanced state, retracted state, vibrating state, rotating state, hardened state) Etc.].

  The operation means may be a means provided with a light emitting means.

The light emitting means is a means capable of executing a drive operation such as lighting, blinking or extinguishing,
The first state is a state in which the light emitting means performs the driving operation in a first mode,
The second state is a state in which the light emitting means performs the driving operation in a second mode,
The first aspect and the second aspect may be different aspects.

  The first aspect may be an extinguished aspect, and the second aspect may be an luminant aspect.

  The first aspect may be an aspect lit in a first color, and the second aspect may be an aspect lit in a second color.

  The second aspect may be a blinking aspect.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
The gaming machine is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
[Presentation means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L-N, the second display device 208S, speaker 120, lamp for game board 442, lamp for game stand frame 452, one thousand and two box characters 224H, etc.], and
The effect means is a means capable of at least performing a plurality of effects.
The effect of one of the plurality of effects is the first effect,
The first effect is the effect selected by the player [e.g., the effect of each option of character selection in (b) of FIG. 139 (b), the effect of each option of (c) reservation frame selection, e) Effects by each option of hold display selection, (f) Effects by each option of background display selection, music output effect of the song name shown in FIG. 177],
The one type of effect among the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect by the navigation character YM, a music output effect, a hold frame UI effect, a hold effect, a background effect, etc.]
If a third effect [for example, a notice of a change by a treasure box icon I1, a notice of changing a music, a wipe effect, a notice of a background change, etc.] is executed during execution of the first effect, the first effect is When the effect is changed to the second effect [eg, as shown in FIG. 175 (a a3-1) to FIG. (A a6-1), FIG. 178 (a 11) to FIG. (A 15-1), FIG. For example, when background A is selected by the player in FIG. 156 (1), the background change notice of FIG. (6) to (7) (wipe-in and wipe-out of the overhead image for wipe effect) ), And changes to the background of the prefetch notice shown in (8) to (21).
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Here, the third effect may be an effect of one type among the plurality of types of effects, and may be an effect executed by the effect means. Alternatively, the third effect may not be executed by the effect means (for example, the display means), but may be effect performed by another effect means (for example, the sound output means) different from the effect means .

  Further, the first effect may be an effect of a customization system that can be selected in a demonstration mode in which the symbol variation display does not start for a predetermined time, or an effect that can be selected even during execution of the symbol variation display It is also good. Furthermore, the first effect may be a super reach effect or a round effect in a big hit game that can be selected by the player.

  Further, the third effect may be, for example, an effect of notifying the remaining time until simultaneous effects such as island simultaneous effects are started.

  Display means (for example, liquid crystal display device, dot matrix display device, 7-segment display device, organic EL display device, reel (drum) display device, leaf display device, plasma display, projector, etc.) as an example of the effect means , Light emitting means, sound output means, movable means etc. can be listed. A light guide plate that emits light from the side and emits light forward, and a POV display capable of displaying a pattern by an afterimage effect can also be listed as an example. As the effect means, all of the items listed above may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied.

  Further, the effect means may be a device that performs light emission effect, and in this case, the light emission mode (color, lighting pattern, light emission display displayed by light emission color, etc.) may be different depending on the mode. .

Also,
"The effect means is an image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N (including all , Second display device 208S, etc.],
The first effect is a first effect display [for example, effect display by each option of character selection in (b) of FIG. 139 (b) or effect display by each option of (c) holding frame selection, (e) Effect display according to each option of hold display selection, (f) effect display according to each option of background display selection, song title shown in FIG. 177 displayed in song title display portion MN in FIG.
The second effect is the second effect display [for example, the effect display by the navigation character YM, the effect display by the holding frame UI, the music title display portion MN “Distance in FIG. 178 (B13) to FIG. ", The song title display section MN" 轟 DREAM "shown in FIG. 178 (i).
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the effect means may be a plurality of image display means.

Also,
[The third effect is a third effect display [eg icon of treasure box I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, icon of meter display MW, MG, icon of giant panda, giant panda character The notice of the conversation including the character display of “change”, the image of the eyebrow, the eyebrow image for the wipe effect, and the characters C11 and the like of the chainmasters of FIG. 178 (a 11) to FIG.
The third effect display may be performed by the image display means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, at least a part of the third effect display may overlap with at least a part of the first effect display. That is, there may be a case where only a part of the third effect display overlaps with a part of the first effect display, or only a part of the third effect display and the first effect display May overlap, or all of the third effect display may overlap with only a portion of the first effect display. With all of the third effect display. The entire first effect display may overlap. In addition, at least a part of the third effect display may overlap with at least a part of the first effect display from the front side (player side), or conversely, the first effect display At least a part of may overlap from the front side (player's side) to at least a part of the third effect display.

  In addition, the image display device displays a variation display of a decorative symbol, a stop display of a decorative symbol, an icon (hold icon) according to the number of holding balls, and an icon (variation icon) relating to a symbol variation display under execution May be The third effect display may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the variation display of the decorative symbol, or is closer to the first effect display than the stop display of the decorative symbol. May be displayed, or may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the hold icon, or displayed closer to the first effect display than the variation icon It may be done.

Also,
“Even if the third effect is not executed, the first effect may be changed to the second effect [eg, FIG. 155 (E1) to FIG. (E 3-1), Fig. 158 (2 2-1) to Fig. (く 7)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the player may be provided with operation means provided at a position where the player can operate, and the first effect may be changed to the second effect when the operation means is operated. .

  The change from the first effect to the second effect may be a change in the effect mode, the first effect corresponds to the effect mode set by the player, and the change in the effect mode is: Even if there is a change in response to the operation of the operation means, or even if there is a change in response to the start of the pre-reading notice (for example, a rush to a pre-read mode (corresponding to a second effect display)). Good.

Also,
[When the third effect is executed and the first effect is changed to the second effect [eg, in the case of FIG. 175 (A a4-1) to FIG. (A a6-1) ] When the third effect is not executed and the first effect is changed to the second effect [eg, FIG. 155 (E2) to FIG. (E4-1) In the case where it is easier for the player to finally shift to a state advantageous to the player [eg, a big hit game state, a big hit game state with a large number of ball appearances, a definite change state, a power support state] rather than
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Here, when the third effect is executed, it may be configured to shift to an advantageous state for the player without fail. Or, conversely, even if the third effect is executed, the player may not shift to the advantageous state.
Further, if the symbol variation display is being displayed as the advantageous state, a big hit gaming state is raised. In addition, it may be in the super reach state or may be in the pseudo connected state. On the other hand, as the above-mentioned advantageous state, if the big hit game is being executed, there is a probability change state or a power support state after the end of the big hit game. In addition, the number of rounds may be in the state of round promotion in which the appearance is increased.

Also,
[An operation means provided at a position where the player can operate, for example, a chance button 136 etc.]
When the first effect is selected when the operation means is operated [for example, there are cases of FIG. 142 (37) to FIG. (50)],
The third effect may be executed when the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“When the first effect is not changed from the first effect to the second effect even when the third effect is executed during execution of the first effect [eg, FIG. In the same figure (3-2-2), FIG. 159 (く 1-3-1) to the same figure (1−31-3-3b2), FIG. If there is]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  For example, when the effect means is a display means, even if the third effect is executed, the first effect display may not be changed to the second effect display. When the means is a light emitting means, even if the third effect is executed, the first light effect may not be changed to the second light effect, and the effect means may output a sound. In the case of means, even if the third effect is executed, the first sound output effect may not be changed to the second sound output effect, and the effect means may be movable means. In some cases, even if the third effect is performed, the first operation effect may not be changed to the second operation effect.

  Alternatively, conversely, when the third effect is performed during execution of the first effect, the first effect may be changed to the second effect.

Also,
"The second effect is one of the effects selectable by the player.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Alternatively, the second effect may be an effect that can not be selected by the player.

Also,
[The sound output means [for example, speaker 120] which can output a music,
The effect means may be a display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, The second display device 208S, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a music display [e.g., the music title display portion MN in FIG. 178 (a 15-1) and the same figure (a 16) to the same figure (a 18), etc.]
The music display is a display related to music output by the sound output means [for example, display of music name and lyrics],
The first effect is the first music display [eg, "mega giga summer"],
The second effect is a second music display [for example, "Make up DREAM"],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The first effect is an effect in which a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM] is displayed in a third display mode [for example, a default display mode],
The second effect is an effect in which the second icon is displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of blinking with white, blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow kimono]. And that
The second icon is an icon having a case where it is displayed across continuous symbol variation display [for example, in the case of FIG.
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "to straddle" is to put a period of stop display of symbols (a change stop period) in between. Further, the second icon may be an icon continuously displayed during display of the symbol variation display, or may be an icon which disappears in the middle. In addition, the icon may be displayed continuously while the stop display of the symbol is displayed, or it may be an icon which disappears in the middle, or the icon which continues to disappear while the stop display is displayed. It may be

Also,
"The effect means is a display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all of them) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L-N , The second display device 208S, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
The icon of one of the plurality of icons is a first icon,
One of the plurality of icons is a second icon,
One of the icons of the plurality of icons is a third icon,
The first icon is an icon [hereinafter, referred to as "variation icon"] relating to a symbol variation display being executed [for example, variation icon h0],
The second icon is an icon [eg, an icon of the navigation character YM] that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation display,
The third icon is an icon according to the number of holding balls (hereinafter, referred to as “holding icon”) [for example, holding icon h11].
The second icon is an icon different from the fluctuation icon,
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The fluctuation icon is displayed in an icon display area [for example, the fluctuation icon display area CIS of the holding frame UI having the hold icon display area HIS, the fluctuation icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS] in the display means. If it is an icon,
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [for example, the effect icon display area DIS of the holding frame UI],
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [eg, the hold icon display area HIS of the hold frame UI],
The first effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in a first mode [for example, "pending frame D"],
The second effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in a second mode [for example, "pending frame R"],
The first aspect and the second aspect are different,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the icon display area may be an area in which an area icon is displayed, an area in which a holding frame is displayed, or an area in which a user interface (UI) is displayed. It may be The area icon may be a base icon, a stage icon, or a frame icon. Also, the area icon may be composed of a plurality of icons. Further, the icon display area may be an area including a reserved icon display area, a variable icon display area, and a second icon (for example, a navigation character icon) display area.

  Further, the third effect may be an effect of switching an aspect of the icon display area. Further, the third effect may be an effect in which a display overlapping the icon display area from the front side is displayed.

Also,
"One of the effects of the plurality of effects is the fourth effect,
The fourth effect is a notice effect [for example, the telop display trp shown in FIG. 170] about the third effect being executed before the third effect is executed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The third effect is a notice effect for a big hit in the symbol variation display in progress [eg, a normal notice effect by the color of a treasure box icon, a big hit confirmation (or a big hit heavy notice by a character C11 of a game leader]) ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The third effect is an effect of pre-reading notice [eg, pre-reading notice by color of treasure box icon].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  It should be noted that what is described as the variation display of the decorative symbol in the above may be the variation display of the symbol (more specifically, the special figure), and the description that the stop symbol of the decoration symbol is described is the symbol (more Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

  In addition, "may be" may be replaced with "always", "always be", or "always become", etc., and "○ possible" in the above is It may be replaced by "must be xxx".

  In addition, even if the constituent requirements included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, and supplementary notes described above, the constituent requirements are not limited to the other embodiments, examples, or examples. The present invention may be applied to modified examples, various examples, and supplementary notes. That is, as long as there is no factor that hinders application, the constituent features included only in the description of the embodiment, the examples, the modification, the various examples, the supplementary notes, etc. are other embodiments, examples, or modifications. Even if applied to examples and various examples and appendices, it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

  Subsequently, other gaming machines that can be applied to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) that can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail using FIGS. . Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 193 to 243 are basically used only for the description using FIGS. 193 to 243, and even when overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, FIGS. In the description using FIG. 243, the reference numerals shown in FIG.

  As the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 193 to 243 to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 1 to 105, 108 to 192, and 251 to 265. On the contrary, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 1 to 105, 108 to 192, and 251 to 265 can also be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. In that case, what attaches | subjects the same code | symbol may be handled as the same component, and may be able to be substituted.

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launch device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured in a frame shape Is a door member having an opening 116. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  Further, the front frame door 106 can store a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "balls") in a portion below the opening 116 and guides the gaming balls to the launch device 110. The upper plate 126 provided with the passage, the lower plate 128 for storing game balls which can not be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the operation of the player are discharged to the lower plate 128 And a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player to the gaming ball collecting container (commonly called a dollar box), and the launcher 110 by the operation of the player. A ball emission handle 134 for launching the gaming ball guided to the gaming area 124 of the gaming board 200, and a change for the rendering mode of the various rendering devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 193) by the operation of the player For the setting operation unit 137 which can make various settings etc. by the operation of the setter (for example, a player or a game clerk), the card unit (CR unit), and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 A ball rental operation button 140 for instructing a ball rental, a return operation button 142 for instructing a card unit to return the player's balance, a ball rental display unit for displaying the player's balance and the status of the card unit Not shown). Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and the confirmation (OK) button, the upper button located above the confirmation button, the lower button located below the confirmation button, and the confirmation It has a right button located to the right of the button, a left button located to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button located to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 also includes an operation unit sensor that detects pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which each button and an operation unit sensor are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 195) by the operation of the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 194 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 193 viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, and is located below the ball tank 150 and formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed into the payout device 152 after passing through the tank rail 154, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, and the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 196). The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and effects related to processing based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 A first sub-board housing a first sub-board 160 that comprises a first sub-control unit 400 that performs control processing and a rotary-type volume adjustment switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of a game clerk A second sub-board case 166 for housing a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control part 500 that performs control processing relating to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub-control part 400 and a substrate case 162; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls and that releases an error by an operation of a game clerk 68. A payout substrate case 172 housing the payout substrate 170, a launch substrate case 176 housing the launch substrate 174 constituting the launch control unit 630 for performing control processing on launch of the game ball, and various electric gaming machines And a RWM clear switch 180 for outputting an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 accommodating the power supply board 182, a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like. 156 and the first sub substrate 160 etc. and the hall computer etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164, etc. are provided on the back of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the firing board 174, the power board 182 etc. It is provided in the outer frame 102 because it is commonly used by a plurality of models.

  FIG. 195 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 195 is a so-called game board of a right-handed machine. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined. In a game board of a generally known right-handed game machine, changing the strength to launch the game ball by the operation of the player allows the general drawing start port 228 and the second special view start port 232, which will be described later, and It can be divided into 1 special figure starting port 230. Specifically, with respect to the game area 124, the game ball rolling on the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special view start port 230 by the arrangement of the game nail 238 or the like is the second The game ball rolling on the second area (right side in the game area) provided with the second special view start opening 232 is configured such that entering the special view start opening 232 is difficult or impossible, and vice versa 1) It is difficult or impossible to enter the ball into the special figure starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 equipped with a right-handed game board, and can be widely applied to pachinko machines equipped with a general game board.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In the effect device 206, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N disposed on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The second decorative symbol display device The length in the width direction of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height thereof is also short. However, the display screen of each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be smaller than the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the length and height in the width direction are shown in FIG. It is not limited to the embodiment. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 195 has the right end side portion overlapping the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and similarly the third decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. The left end side of the portion 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 195 may be the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Also, the position of the third decorative symbol display 208N shown in FIG. 195 may be the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M does not partially overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (the first decorative symbol display device 208L Position away from the left side). In addition, the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208M does not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (rightward toward the first decorative symbol display device 208L (A position away from). Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions of coming close to or separating from each other along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed as the decorative symbols are variably displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It should be added here that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol It is also possible to perform variable display of or perform multiple types of effect display. Furthermore, the number of decorative symbol display devices is not limited, and the decorative symbol display device may be a pachinko machine provided with only one, or may be a pachinko machine provided with only two, 4 It may be a pachinko machine provided with one or more. Further, the positional relationship between the plurality of decorative symbol display devices is not limited to the positional relationship shown in FIG.

  In addition, a transparent light guide plate is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission area. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to be able to look like For example, a lens cut of a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is applied to the light guide plate. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion that refracts light toward the player is smaller than the thickness of the portion that emits light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Also, the light guide plate may be movable. In addition, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Below the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to M, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, and the first special symbol The hold lamp 218, the second special symbol hold lamp 220, and the high-probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol". Details of the rendering device 206 will be described later.

  The three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and are configured by liquid crystal display devices here. The display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix Other display devices including display devices, 7-segment display devices, organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display devices, reel (drum) type display devices, leaf type display devices, plasma displays, and projectors may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in this case, is configured of a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven-segment LEDs here. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are symbol display means. In addition, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 in a form with enhanced effect The first decorative symbol display device 208L is also a kind of symbol display means.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later). Here, holding a common drawing fluctuation game up to a predetermined number (for example, two) Is possible. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) which are being held, and here, the predetermined number of special view fluctuation games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a second special drawing starting opening 232, around the rendering device 206, A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  A plurality of general winning openings 226 are disposed on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entry into the general winning openings 226 (when winning in the general winning openings 226) The payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls into the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. Hereinafter, the ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be referred to as being distinguished as the "prize ball", and the ball to be lent to the player may be distinguished from the "rental ball". It may be called a ball (game ball).

  The general drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. Here, one on the right side of the game board 200 It is arranged. For this reason, the common view starting opening 228 is expected to enter the game ball by hitting the right. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  Only one first special view start port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. The first special view start opening 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters is not changed. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 194 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper dish. While discharging to 126, the special figure fluctuation game by the 1st special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special drawing start port 230 is one of the start areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed start area whose size does not change.

  Only one second special drawing start port 232 is disposed below the common drawing start port 228. That is, the second special view starting opening 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and entering the ball is expected by hitting the right. A pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid is provided in the vicinity of the second special view start opening 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special view start opening 232 is It corresponds to a variable start means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the degree of difficulty of winning to the second special view start opening 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special view start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode that is difficult to win. On the other hand, when it is elected to the common drawing fluctuating game and the common drawing display device 210 hits and displays the stop symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and to the second special drawing start opening 232 The ball can enter the ball (in a state where winning is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state in which winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special view starting opening 232 is either small size (corresponding to the first size) or large size (corresponding to the second size). This is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball is variable from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special view start port 230. When the pair of wing members 2321 is open, the game ball entering the game area 124 is the second special feature which is a variable start area than the game ball entering the first special view start port 230 which is a fixed start area. There are more gaming balls entering the figure starting opening 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 193 is provided with two variable winning openings. A central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to a first variable winning opening) provided at the center of the game board 200 is disposed below the first special view start opening 230. In addition, the right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to the second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is disposed below the second special view starting opening 232, and entering the ball by hitting the right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 also has a winning opening and door members 2341 and 2351 which can be opened and closed by the solenoid. The winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234, 235 may be called an attacker. The central variable winning opening 234 maintains the closed state until the big hit game is started when the big hit in the non-electric support state is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state changes between the open state and the closed state repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 maintains a closed state until a big hit game is started when a big hit occurs in the power support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state change between the open state and the closed state repeat. That is, in any of the variable winning openings 234, 235, the second open / close state (here, open) in which the game ball is easier to win than in the predetermined first open / close state (here, closed state) and the first open / close state. The variable winning means capable of changing the open / close state from one of the states) to the other, winning the special figure fluctuation game in the non-power support state, and the first special view display device 212 stops and displays the big hit symbol The door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol in the power support state, the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 has a predetermined time interval, a predetermined number of times. Open and close. The closed state does not necessarily have to be completely closed in any of the variable winning openings 234 and 235, and it may be a state in which the game ball can not enter or is difficult even if it is slightly open. . When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the center variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a winning ball for the upper dish Discharge to 126. The ball entering the central variable winning hole 234 and the ball entering the right variable winning hole 235 are also guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the gaming island side.

  According to the arrangement of the common drawing start opening 228, the first special view start opening 230, the second special view start opening 232, the central variable winning opening 234, and the right variable winning opening 235 described above, in the power support state, the right A hit is a hit that is advantageous to the player, and in the non-power support state, a left hit is a hit that is advantageous to the player.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 Then, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, central variable winning opening 234, right variable) Whether to win in the winning opening 235) or the starting opening (first special view starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232) or without winning in any winning opening or starting opening, or Only by passing through, it reaches the out port 240.

<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the rendering device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the gaming ball. In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N described above are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center of the stage 244 is the first special view starting opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the

  In a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely opened (fully open), the player can view a part or all of the display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Also, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be stopped at any positions, for example, which decorative symbol is the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L To the extent that the player can identify, it is possible to shield only a part of the decoration pattern. In addition, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed (fully closed), the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Shield all of the Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are effect display means, are also a shielding means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and also an effect movable means.

  In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, and the general character 224Fb are disposed, and move vertically in accordance with the contents of the effect. It is configured to be able to In addition, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full color LED incorporated therein, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  Further, as the effect moving means, a not-shown family crest 224E (see FIG. 206 etc.) is prepared here. The family crest 224E is disposed at an initial position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the family crest 224E starts its operation, it rises from the initial position to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (the player side). In the initial position, the family crest 224E is less visible to the player than in the state where it is overlapped with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  Note that the fourth symbol may be displayed on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or a separate display such as a dedicated fourth symbol lamp etc. Means may be provided.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  Here, although the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 are each formed of different circuit boards, these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. It may be one circuit board, or the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 may be one common circuit board other than the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is controlled by control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub-control means (400), second sub-control means (500). ), Or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as the control means, and the main control unit 300 is used as the first control means. One combination of the 1 sub-control unit 400 and the 2nd sub-control unit 500 can also be regarded as a second control means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 (two random number generation circuits are incorporated in this circuit) that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. ), And predetermined ball detection sensors, for example, sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and door opening such as front frame door opening sensor and inner frame opening sensor A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including the sensor and the bottom plate full-tank sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a common view display device 21 Drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the various status display unit 328 (for example, general drawing hold lamp 216, first special view holding lamp 218, second special view holding lamp 220, high probability middle lamp 222, etc.) Drive circuit 330 for performing display control, a predetermined movable member such as blade member 2321 of second special view starting port 232, door member 2341 of central variable winning hole 234, door member 2351 of right variable winning hole 235, etc. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 which are driven to open and close is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value to be used in the basic circuit 302. The generation of random numbers in the random number generation circuit 318 can be roughly classified into two types, a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value to be counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a random number seed to perform an operation with a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derives this operation result as a random number. In the second method, numerical values are read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical values are derived as random numbers.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the thus obtained value as the initial value of the counter to count up (down) in the counter mode, as the seed of the random number, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special drawing start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random number generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random number generation circuit 318, It is stored in the random number storage register corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Also, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special drawing start opening 232 has a ball, the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the second special drawing start opening 232 is the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random number storage register corresponding to second special drawing start port 232, which is built in random number generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302, which indicates that the voltage has dropped if the voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 v).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit and receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, and the main control unit 300 constantly transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information, Both can communicate in both directions. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400 The first sub control unit 400 can not transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is stored in the ROM 406 is connected.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a second decorative symbol Drive circuit 432 for performing drive control of display device 208M and third decorative symbol display device 208N, and position detection sensor 430 detecting the current position of each of second decorative symbol display device 208M and third decorative symbol display device 208N And a detection signal from a setting operation unit sensor 425 for detecting an operation of the detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 is pressed, the detection unit 710 for the position detection sensor 430 or the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137. Based on the signal from the CPU 404 and the sensor circuit 428 that outputs the VDP 434 (Video Display Processor) which reads out the image data etc stored in the ROM 406 and generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 and displays the image on each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N And are connected.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for driving and controlling various movable means (Yatsushiro character 224Fa, general character 224Fb, and family crest character 224E), and various kinds of movable means 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E. Various movable means sensors 424 for detecting the current position and a sensor circuit 518 for outputting detection signals from the various movable means sensors 424 to the basic circuit 502 are connected. The basic circuit 502 further includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game board frame lamp 542; A serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 193, the first auxiliary control unit 400 controls the image display of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, and the second auxiliary control unit 500 controls various movable means 224Fa, 224Fb, Although the control of 224 E is performed, the second sub-control unit 500 controls the image display of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, and the first sub-control unit 400 controls the various movable means 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E. Control may be performed, or any one sub-control unit may perform both control.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the payout control unit 600, and the door opening command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. In addition, even when there is a payout error or the like, the payout control unit 600 transmits an error command to the main control unit 300.

  As for the door open command, the detection signal of the door open sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without passing through the payout control unit 600, or the payout control unit 600 may be used as a relay board. Alternatively, the door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the firing control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage directly from the power control unit 660. The second sub-control unit 500 may be supplied with a voltage after the predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second auxiliary control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first auxiliary control unit 400. The emission control unit 630 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage directly from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via the other control units (main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, etc.) and respective devices. The first auxiliary control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via each of the other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and each device. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage substantially simultaneously from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power control unit 660 earlier than both or at least one of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400. The main control unit 300 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power control unit 660 earlier than both of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400 or at least one of them. The first auxiliary control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300 or at least one of them.

  Further, the second sub-control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured to supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be The second auxiliary control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage directly from the power supply control unit 660.

  In the island facility provided in the game machine installation sales office, the 100 V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24 V, and the pachinko machine 100 is supplied with 24 V AC current. The 24V AC current is converted by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300 into a 12V DC voltage. Although not shown in FIG. 196, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit, and the DC voltage of 12 V is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (5 V in this case) by the voltage conversion circuit. Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the 12 V supply current falls below a predetermined value (9 V in this example). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply line connecting the power supply control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338, through which a 12 V DC current flows, and this power supply line is an example of a predetermined power supply line. It corresponds to Note that the low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. Further, the power management unit 660 outputs the inputted 24 V AC current as it is or converts it into a 36 V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, a current of an operating voltage (here, 5 V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  Further, the start signal output circuit 340 outputs a start signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 reaches the voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate when the power is turned on. Furthermore, when the WDT 314 times out, the CPU 304 outputs a reset signal from the WDT 314. When the WDT 3141 times out, there may be a runaway state due to a program error, or a case where the CPU 304 can not perform the originally designed operation due to a voltage drop due to a lightning strike, a fraud, or the like. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 193, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 3141 as an initial value. The start signal from the start signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The start signal output from the start signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined start signal.

  In the case of an instantaneous power failure and immediate recovery, ie, automatic recovery without turning on the power switch 178, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, first, it is determined whether the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations performed by the basic circuit 302, a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is performed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in registers are initialized. Subsequently, security check processing is performed. The security check process recalculates whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct or not. If the authentication code is correct, extension processing is performed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time or a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, the main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in registers are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained at the state before reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

  Next, the special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the common view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. The types of figures and figures will be described. Fig. 197 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and Fig. 197 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the fact that the ball has entered the special figure 2 starting opening 232 (2) Special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation game is started, the special figure 2 display 214 does “the fluctuation indication of the special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all the segments of 7 segments and lighting of one center segment . These "variation display of the special figure 1" and "variation display of the special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variation display of the symbol said in this embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When it passes, the special figure 2 display 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 The process until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol change stop display according to the present embodiment, and the stop symbol form of the special view 1 or 2 is displayed after the start of the “variable view of the special view 1 or 2”. A series of display until it is done is called symbol fluctuation stop display. The symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 197A, seven types of special views, "special view A" to "special view G", are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display of the special view 1. In FIG. 197 (a), the white part in the figure shows the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part shows the location of the segment to be lit. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "special figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "special figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether or not a special big hit and the number of rounds are performed by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is a difference in whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the special figure fluctuation game after the end of the big hit game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the big hit is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure definite change" or simply "positive change"), and the state in which the probability is low is special figure It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game, after the end of the 7R special big hit game and after the end of the 7R big hit game, all transition to the time saving state (power support state). The time saving state will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a map view high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "flat map probability variation"), and the state not a time saving state is referred to as a map view low probability state. 15R special big hit symbol "Special figure A" and 7R special big hit symbol "Special figure B" is a symbol which becomes special figure high probability popular figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game and is 7R big hit symbol "Special figure C" is a symbol which becomes a special figure low probability common figure high probability state after the end of a big hit game. These "special drawing A", "special drawing B", and "special drawing C" are symbols whose advantage relative to the player is relatively large.

  "Special figure D" is a 2R big hit symbol called sudden change, and it is a symbol which becomes special figure high probability popular figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R, and "special figure B" which is 7R.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R big hit design called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when "special view E" is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability regular view low probability state, the special view high probability regular view low probability state (so-called so-called high probability game after the open time 100 ms × 2 R) Transition to the latent probability change state, and when “Special figure E” is stopped and displayed in a state other than the special figure low probability regularity figure low probability state, the special figure high probability regularity popularity after the big hit game (opening time 29000ms × 2R) ends The state is shifted to the drawing high probability state (see FIGS. 203A and 203B). That is, the "special figure E" is an operation during the big hit game and the gaming state which is shifted thereafter by the gaming state when the stop display is displayed (in this example, whether it is the special figure low probability general drawing low probability state) It is a different pattern.

  "Special figure F" is a small hit design, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. In addition, “special figure G” is a removal symbol, and is a symbol that the degree of advantage to the player becomes relatively small.

  In FIG. 197 (b), four types of special views “special view a” to “special view d” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation stop display of the special view 2. "Special figure a" is a 15R special jackpot symbol, "special figure b" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, "special figure c" is a 7R jackpot symbol, and "special figure d" is a detached symbol. In the present embodiment, as the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, while seven special figures (of which five are the big hit) of "special figure A" to "special figure G" are used, As the stop symbol form of the four special figures of “special figure a” to “special figure d” (of which three kinds are big hit) are used. By configuring in this way, it may be possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of becoming a big hit and the probability of becoming a definite change in the big hit. In this example, the jackpot of Toku-zu 1 contains a sudden definite change or latent definite change which can hardly be obtained, while the jackpot of Toku-zu 2 does not contain a definite change or latent definite change. The advantage of the special figure 2 is higher than the advantage of the special figure 1.

  FIG. 197 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. “Decoration 1” to “decoration 9” and “decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, “decoration” is switched in the order of “decoration 1” “decoration 2” “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. Perform “variable display of symbols”.

  And 15R special jackpot of "special figure A", 7R special jackpot of "special figure B", 7R jackpot of "special figure C", 15R special jackpot of "special figure a", 7R special jackpot of "special figure b" When notifying the 7R big hit of "special figure c", the symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative 1" or "decor 2-" Stop display of decoration 2-decoration 2 etc.). When explicitly notifying 15R special big hit of "Special figure A" or 15R special big hit of "Special figure a", the symbol combination (for example, "decor 3-decor 3- Stop display of decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "and the like.

  In addition, when notifying a 2R big hit called "Tokuku E" (hidden probability change) or a small hit of "Toku F", "Decoration 1-Decor 2-Decor 3" is stopped and displayed. Do. In the case of notifying 2R big hit called sudden definite variation of “special figure D”, “decoration 1 – decoration 3 – decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the release of "special figure G" and "special figure d", the symbol display areas 208a to 208c stop display symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 197 (c).

  FIG. 197 (d) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common figure. There are three types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" and "general drawing B" which are hit symbols, and "common drawing C" which is a detached pattern. Based on the fact that the above-described gate sensor detects that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228, the drawing display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Perform "Variable display of common map". And, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general diagram A" or the "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, and when the notification of the spread diagram fluctuating game is notified, the "general diagram C" is stopped and displayed. Do. Also in FIG. 197 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 198. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Perform operation permission and set the initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, it is determined whether the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. If it is less than (in this example, 9 V), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In initialization 2, a process of setting a value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, 1) A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109 following step S107, a determination is made as to whether or not the state before power shutoff (before power interruption) is restored, and when the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 In the case of the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the store clerk or the like of the game store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate 182 is ON (indicating that there is an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. If the power supply status information is not information indicating suspension, the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power supply status information is information indicating suspension, all 1 byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to the 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100.

  In step S111, a power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a transmission information storage area is provided. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command representing that the power has been restored, and is described later. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The normal recovery command is a command that indicates that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) In step S233), it is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S115 following step S113, after setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, initial values of four random number counters for generating a common drawing win random value, a common drawing random value, a special drawing 1 random value, and a special drawing 2 random value are generated. The four initial value generation random number counters and the two random number counters for generating the random number value for determining the common drawing fluctuation time and the random value for determining the special drawing fluctuation time are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a random value for determining a common drawing fluctuation time is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for common drawing fluctuation time determination provided in the RAM 308 1 is added to the above value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated by a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

  Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 199. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 which generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this example), and the main control unit timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Start at a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is periodically set so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process abnormality is not detected) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this example). In this case (in this example, restart is performed once in about 2 ms which is a cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 following step S203, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal, in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal). In step S205, information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal before last, detection signal from last time, presence of current detection signal Information to indicate that the general prize opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, 235, the special view 1 start opening 230, and the special view 2 start opening 232, or the common view start opening 228 It is determined that there was a pass at That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234, and 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

  Further, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal immediately before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 following step S205, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed, and in the next step S209, basic random number updating processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the common control winning random value and the general drawing are used in the main control unit 300. The four random number counters for generating the random number value, the special figure 1 random value value, and the special figure 2 random value value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the storage area of the random number counter Set to

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round is next next while setting it in the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. Also, apart from the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value next makes one round, the random number counter for generating the common drawing random value, Special figure 1 random number value generation The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that each of the random number counter for and the random number counter for generating a special number 2 random number value has made one rotation. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random number value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random number value are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common drawing display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the design on the common drawing display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the special drawing 1 display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for special, 2 special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the fluctuation / stop display on special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined The various timers are updated, including timers for clocking the closing time, predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215 following step S213, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning openings 226, 234, 235 and starting openings 230, 232, 228 have a winning, the RAM 308 stores the number of winning balls provided for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value of the area is read out, 1 is added, and it is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning reception process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning to the special figure 1 start port 230, the special figure 2 start port 232, the common drawing start port 228 and the variable winning ports 234, 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When there is a prize in the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 start opening 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 The special figure 1 winning random number value generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 1 from the special figure 1 random number value generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (1) Obtain a random number value and store it in the special order 1 random number value storage area in order of acquisition. A set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area is stored by the same number as the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. In the special figure 1 random number value storage area, each time the number of special figure 1 holdings decreases, the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair of the holding order is the highest (first) is deleted. And the holding order of the data of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value value set is processed to be advanced by one each. In addition, every time the number of special figure 1 reservations increases, the special order 1 is new to the next pending order of the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair in the lowest order (last). Data of a combination of the winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value is written.

  When there is a prize in special drawing 2 starting opening 232 and the corresponding special drawing 2 reservation number storage area provided in RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to special drawing 2 starting opening 232 of random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random number value generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308 Then, it is stored in the acquisition order in the special figure 2 random value storage area. A set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in the same number as the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area. In the special figure 2 random number value storage area, the special order 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value pair data are deleted each time the number of special figure 2 holding numbers decreases by one, and the remaining data It is processed such that the holding order of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value set is advanced by one each. In addition, every time the number of special figure 2 reservations increases, the special figure 2 winning random number value is new to the next pending order of the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value with the lowest pending order. And, the data of the special figure 2 random number value set is written.

  In addition, special figure 1 start information (set of special figure 1 winning random number and special figure 1 random number value) or special figure 2 start information (set of special figure 2 winning random number and special figure 2 random value) was newly acquired. In the case, the special drawing prefetch process is executed using the start information. Details of the special view prefetching process will be described later.

  When the common drawing start port 228 has a prize and the corresponding common drawing reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a common drawing win random value from the random number counter for common drawing winning random number generation. The common drawing random number value is obtained from the common drawing random number value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308 and stored in the common drawing random number value storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of the common drawing win random number value and the common drawing random number value in the common drawing random number storage area is stored by the same number as the common drawing reservation number stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area. In the common drawing random number storage area, every time the common drawing reservation number decreases by one, the data of the combination of the common drawing random number and the common drawing random value of the highest rank (first) is erased and It is processed such that the holding order of the data of the common drawing win random number value and the common drawing random value set is incremented by one. In addition, whenever the number of popular drawing reservations increases by one, a new common drawing winning random value and the next pending order of the data of the combination of the lowest drawing (last) common drawing winning random value and the common drawing random value Data of a set of common-mode random number values is written. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening 234. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 235, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 235 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221 following step S219, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the common drawing display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the common drawing display device 210 performs variable display of common drawing (common drawing fluctuation game).

  In addition, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the common drawing hit flag is on, the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the common view display device 210 is turned on / off to control the common view display mode, and when the common view hit flag is off, the common view display so as to become the display mode of the out-of-round symbol The on / off driving control of the 7-segment LED constituting the device 210 is performed. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the common-diagram display device 210 is any one of a hit symbol (a common symbol A shown in FIG. 197 (d) or a common symbol B) and a dislocated symbol (a common symbol C shown in FIG. 197 (d)). Make a final display of the symbol of. After that, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for maintaining a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Also, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while the general drawing operation is being set, the predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), the opening and closing solenoids (parts of various solenoids 332) of the blade member 232a of the special view 2 start port 232 A signal for holding 232 a in an open state is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms) A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is lost, the common drawing hit flag is turned off. When the flag for the drawing is off, the drawing state updating process is also performed at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the special drawing 2 start / stop control of the starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the number of common drawing fluctuation games held It is executed using the combination of the first common drawing win random value and the common drawing random value in the common drawing random number storage area as a start condition that is 1 or more.

  The main control unit 300 acquires common drawing start information (a pair of common drawing win random value and common drawing random value) from the earliest (most stored) reservation position in the common drawing random value storage area, A table for adjudication determination stored in the ROM 306 based on the common drawing win random number value in the common drawing start information acquired and the value of the common drawing probability fluctuation flag in the RAM 308 (FIGS. 201 (a) and (b) described later) Use the reference) to decide whether to win or lose. Next, main control unit 300 determines the common drawing determination table (FIG. 201 (c) shown in FIG. 201 (c) stored in ROM 306 based on the common drawing random number value in the acquired common drawing start information and the determined success or failure determination result. Use the hour movement table (see table) to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the variable display of the common drawing. Next, the main control unit 300 uses, for example, various tables (for example, timer number selection not shown) stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, and the acquired random number value for common drawing fluctuation time determination. The variable display time (timer number) of the common drawing is determined using the table), and the variable display time is stored in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the common drawing fluctuation display time.

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first drawing-up start information from the drawing random number storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the first drawing-general drawing start information from the drawing random number storage area and stores the common drawing reserve number. Subtract 1 from the number of general drawing reservations for the area. At this time, the general drawing start information extracted from the general drawing random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the general drawing start information stored in the temporary area. It is also good.

  The main control unit 300 sets a common drawing per shot flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON if the result of judgment is hit (winning), and sets a common drawing per shot flag to off when the result of judgment is non-winning.

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special view 2 state update process, one process out of the next plurality of processes is performed according to the state of the special view 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is turned on and off Repeat the on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (special view 2 variation game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as 15R big hit flag, 7R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag, out flag, special figure probability change flag, and common drawing probability change flag. . These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on The special figure a shown in FIG. 197 (b), the 7R big hit flag is on, the special figure b if the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure b, 7R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is off If the special figure c, the off flag is on, the 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on / off drive control so as to become the respective special figure d modes, Fig. 2 Make settings to indicate that stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs finalized display of any one of the special view a to special view d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display of the predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 2 displayed in a fixed manner is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If not, the short time flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, if the number of probability variations stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of probability variations, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability fluctuation flag Turn off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of special figure 2 fluctuation game is big hit, big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set a special figure 2 in action in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit In the storage area of the special view 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or Solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, 235 (until the game ball of predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234, 235) A signal for holding the door member in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to the solenoids (parts of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, 235, and a timer for door closing time management provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating a closed period is set in the storage area. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the door member opening and closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2 in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1). In the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing, it waits for the period which is displaying the image which notifies the player that the big hit by the decoration symbol display device 208 is finished In the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating an effect waiting period is set. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the time saving number (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308 Turn on the short time flag. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not set on.

  The term "time saving" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a common drawing high probability state (common drawing definite change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 start port 232 tends to be long (electric Chu open and spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. The state in which any of these common drawing positive change, common drawing change short, and electric Chu diversion is set is called electric support (starting hole winning support by electric tulip).

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234, 235 during the big hit game, a lot of special figure 2 start hole 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be obtained during a big hit as game balls enter and there is a large number of game balls and the euphorism is increased, and this is to solve this.

  In addition, if the special figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the number of probability variations (for example, 10000) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol form of the special figure 2, the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the timing shown is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 status update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 7R big hit flag shown in FIG. If the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, 7R big hit flag is on, if the special figure probability change flag is off, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, When the chart probability change flag is on, the special view D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special view probability change flag is on, the common view probability change flag is off, the special view E, the small hit flag is on In the special figure F, when the off flag is on, the 7 segment LED which configures the special figure 1 display device 212 is controlled to turn on / off the control so that it becomes each aspect of the special figure G, the setting area of the RAM 308 Special figure 1 stop To set indicating that it is being displayed. By performing this control in the special view 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special view 1 display device 212 performs final display of any one of the special view A to special view G symbols. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). The special figure 2 related lottery process does not perform the variable game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 2 is pending. It is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 1 is suspended. It is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition.

  With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 1 or more, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the first sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start opening 232 is The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start port 230. In the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 2 fluctuation game in this example) with high degree of advantage is performed prior to the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 1 fluctuation game in this example) with low degree of advantage. . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference to the degree of advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process of step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information from the earliest (most stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number value storage area. Figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 (random number value pair) is acquired, ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308 etc Or a small hit (in the present example, a small hit can be selected only in the special figure 1) using the hit / fail determination table (see FIGS. 202 (a) to (d) described later) stored in Make a decision (whether or not to accept or reject). Next, the main control unit 300 determines a special figure determination table (FIG. 203 (a) stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 start information acquired and the determined success or failure determination result). Determination of the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special view 2 is performed using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 204 (a)). Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 reserved at the time of the success / failure determination, the acquired random number value for special drawing fluctuation time determination, etc. The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table not shown).

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, it deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area and Fig. 2 Special number of reserved numbers storage area Subtract 1 the number of reserved areas. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the reserve of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the reserve of the special figure 1 Although the special figure 2 priority change was mentioned as an example, the special figure 1 change game with a low degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 2 change game with a high degree of priority, and the suspension of the special figure 1 is special figure 2 It may be a special figure 1 preferential variation that is digested prior to holding. In addition, without prioritizing any of Special figure 2 fluctuation game and Special figure 1 fluctuation game, starting mouth winning a prize which starts special figure fluctuation game which depends on the special figure 1 and special figure 2 each reservation in starting point the winning opening It may be forward variation. In the start-up opening winning order variation, the upper limit number of reservations is 8 regardless of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 and therefore, it is compared with the priority variation in which the upper limit number of reservations is 4 in each of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 And you may be able to raise the practical upper limit of the number of reservations.

  In the above description, although it is assumed that the lottery process and the fluctuation game for holding the other special drawing are not performed according to the state of one special drawing, it is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special drawing state update The processing and the special drawing related lottery processing may be performed independently in each of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, so that a plurality of special drawings may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when changing a plurality of special figures at this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special figures, or the lottery results of the respective special figures are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display each lottery result separately, or may be configured to display a plurality of special drawing lottery results in one area. Moreover, when the change regarding several special figures is performed simultaneously, you may influence the lottery result of the special figure which stops a fluctuation | variation by the lottery result of the special drawing which stopped the fluctuation | variation previously.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In the command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in the present embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Etc. and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, as a command type, a symbol fluctuation start command and a symbol fluctuation stop command concerning a common drawing are also included.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission process. Also, if the command type is a special figure start symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlying flags, values such as special figure probability change flags, special drawing related lottery processing In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, it contains information indicating the timer number etc. selected in and includes various jackpot flags, small hit flags, outliers flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, etc. In the case of the start command and end effect start command, information including the value of the special figure probability variation flag etc., and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value indicating the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. I have included it. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, presence or absence of winning to special figure 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to special figure 2 starting opening 232, winning of variable winning openings 234, 235 It includes information indicating presence or absence. In the case of the pre-reading result information command, command data indicating the types of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the pre-reading number stored in the pre-reading number storage area described later, the stop symbol etc stored in the pre-reading result storage unit Included in

  If the command type is a symbol drawing start (rotation start) command of a common drawing, the command data is a per common drawing flag, a common drawing departure flag, a common drawing probability fluctuation flag, etc., and a common drawing related lottery process. Information including the information on the determined stop symbol and fluctuation time, and in the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command of the common drawing, information indicating the value of the common drawing per-flag, the common drawing deviation flag, the common drawing probability fluctuation flag, etc. To be included.

  Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special figure probability fluctuation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 as command data, special figure 1 related lottery process and special value 2 setting information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are held. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various jackpot flags, small hit flags, lost flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc.

  Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate full error. . When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 start opening 232 and the variable winning openings 234 and 235, and the common view display device 210 and special figure 1 display through the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special view 2 display device 214, the various status display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S 219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 198 is performed. Return to On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 198.

  FIG. 200 (a) is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the special view prefetching process executed in the winning a prize accepting process (step S217). In the special view pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information (newly acquired start information) increased in each of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol prior to the success or failure determination process. The determination is made, and the preliminary determination result (the special-figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit (see FIGS. 200 (b) to 200 (e)) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 1 and the number of the special view 1 pre-read result stored in the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as 1 pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 1 pre-read result data of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special view 1 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special view 1 pre-read result It is processed so that the order of the data of is advanced one by one. Also, every time the number of special views 1 prefetching increases, data of new special views 1 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of special view 1 prefetch results with the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 2 and the number of special view 2 pre-read results stored in the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area to be stored as a number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 2 pre-read result data of the highest rank is erased every time the number of special view 2 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special figure 2 pre-read result data ranking Are processed one by one. Further, every time the number of special views 2 prefetching increases, data of new special views 2 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of the special views 2 prefetch results of the lowest rank.

  In the special view prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether the start information of the special view 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special view 2 has increased is, for example, the special view 2 pending number stored in the special view 2 pending count storage area and the special view 2 reserved count count storage area. Figure 2 compare with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special view 2 has increased when the special view 2 hold count is larger than the special view 2 look-ahead count, and the special view 2 hold count is equal to the special view 2 look-ahead count It is determined that the start information of Special Figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the success / failure determination process. Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the prefetched special view 2 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special view determination table used at the time of pass / fail determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special view 2 variation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special view 2 prefetch result obtained by the prior determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information of the special view 1 has increased. The determination as to whether the start information of the special view 1 has increased is, as in the case of the special view 2, for example, the special view 1 reserve count stored in the special view 1 reserve count storage area and the special view 1 prefetch count count storage area This is done by comparing with the special view 1 pre-reading number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 has not increased, the special view prefetching process is ended and the main control unit timer division is completed. The processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the loading process.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-power support is in progress. If it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state, the process proceeds to step S311, and if it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state (it is in the power support), the process proceeds to step S315. Although it is determined in the present example whether or not non-power-supply is in progress, it may be determined in step S309 whether the execution condition of the special view 1 advance warning notification is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance notice and notification include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  In step S311, the special figure 1 start information (the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) prior to the acceptance determination process. Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of pass / fail judgment, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 fluctuation game according to the start information It is previously determined prior to the success or failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special view 1 look-ahead result obtained in advance determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special drawing prefetching process is ended, and the processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, without pre-reading the special figure 1 start information which has been increased, "not determined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-read, instead of the stop symbol information, special figure 1 read-ahead result storage in RAM 308 Store in the first vacant area of the department. Thereafter, the special drawing prefetching process is ended, and the processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and determined in advance, but all the start information may be pre-read and determined in advance. In addition, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the start information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the special-purpose 1 and special-purpose 2 pre-read result storage. All the pre-read results in the unit may be sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the present embodiment, prefetching is always performed on the increased startup information of Toku-zu 2, and pre-reading is always performed on the increased startup information of Toku-zu 1 except during power supply. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to look forward to the start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 that have been increased. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, for example, whether or not to execute pre-reading notification every holding may be determined by drawing. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not it is in non-power support) etc., when start information is increased, pre-reading is always executed and pre-reading results are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit, and the pre-reading The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether to execute the lottery and the effect using the pre-read result.

  FIGS. 200 (b) to 200 (e) illustrate a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. FIG. 200 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special view 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 200 (b), the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of the special view 1 fluctuation game . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 200 (b), "special figure G" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "pending 1", and "special figure G" as the stopping symbol information in the storage area "pending 2". Is stored, and "special figure F" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in storage area "hold 3", and "special figure A" as stop symbol information in storage area "hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 200C shows an example of a state in which the special view 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 200 (c), the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of the special view 2 change game . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. The stop symbol information of the special view 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 200 (c), "special figure d" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and stop symbols in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". Information is not stored. In addition, in FIG. 200 (c), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as "none".

  FIG. 200 (d) shows an example of the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit during power support. As shown in FIG. 200 (d), "not determined" information is stored in the storage area "pending 1" instead of the stop symbol information. In the storage areas "pending 2" to "pending 4", neither stop symbol information nor "not determined" information is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 200 (e), in each storage area of the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the “timer number” indicating the fluctuation time of the special view 1 fluctuation game is not the stop pattern information but the pre-reading result It may be stored as In the example shown in FIG. 200 (e), "Timer 3" is stored as timer number information in the storage area "pending 1", and "timer 5" is stored as timer number information in the storage area "pending 2". The timer number information is not stored in the storage areas "pending 3" and "pending 4". In FIG. 200 (e), the state in which the timer number information is not stored is described as "none". When timer number information is stored in each storage area of the special view 1 pre-fetch result storage unit, the timer number may be set to correspond to the pass / fail result.

  In the above description, the stop symbol and the timer number are determined in advance, and the stop symbol information and the timer number information are stored in the prefetch result storage unit. However, the pass / fail determination result is determined in advance and the information is prefetched It may be stored in the result storage unit and may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 as pre-reading result information.

  Next, various tables used by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Various tables shown in FIGS. 201 to 204 are stored in, for example, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  FIGS. 201 (a) and 201 (b) show an example of a success / failure determination table used when making a success / failure determination in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223). The success / failure determination tables shown in FIGS. 201 (a) and 201 (b) are configured by the items of “general drawing probability”, “random number range”, and “success or failure result”. The item “common drawing probability” indicates a common drawing probability (common drawing low probability or common drawing high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item "random number range" indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired common drawing winning random value. Here, the possible range of the common drawing winning random value of this example is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical range is 100).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 201 (a) is a success / failure determination table for common use, which is used when the common drawing probability at the time of the success / failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 201 (a), when this validity determination table is used, the probability of hitting is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of losing is 99/100.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 201 (b) is a success / failure determination table for general drawing, which is used when the drawing probability at the time of the success / failure determination is a high probability. As shown in FIG. 201 (b), when this validity determination table is used, the probability of hitting is approximately 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of losing is 0%. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 201A, the hit probability is 100 times. As described above, it may be designed such that only the hit is selected in the general drawing high probability state (during time reduction operation). Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% in the short-time operation, but in the short-time operation, the probability that the hit is selected is higher than that in the short-time non-operation state (generally low probability state).

  FIG. 201 (c) shows a table of symbol distribution and hit operation for common use. The numerical value in the "sorting" column in the table is compared with the common drawing random number value when determining the stop symbol in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223), the distribution ratio of random number range for each design (ie Shows the selection probability). As shown in FIG. 201 (c), the distribution ratio of each symbol in the case where the success or failure determination result of the common drawing fluctuation game is a hit is 50% for the common drawing A and 50% for the common drawing B. The common drawings A and B are symbols for which the electric thu open operation is executed after the common drawing fluctuation game. In addition, since the disappointing symbol selected when the success or failure judgment result is disassembly is only one of the map C, the map C is selected with a probability of 100% in the case of the disassembly. When the drawing C is selected, the electric chow opening operation is not executed after the drawing fluctuation game.

  As shown in FIG. 201 (c), the opening operation of the special view 2 start port (electric chew) 232 is executed after the normal view A is stopped and displayed. When the gaming state at the stop display of the drawing A is not active, the wing member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for 100 ms, then closed for 5000 to 10000 ms, and then opened for 5400 ms. Do. When the gaming state at the stop display of the drawing A is a short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for only 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened again for only 1800 ms, and then It closes only for about 2000 ms and opens again for about 1800 ms.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 201 (c), the opening operation of the special figure 2 start port (electric chow) 232 is executed after the ordinary figure B is stopped and displayed. When the gaming state at the time of the stop display in the general view B is not short, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is opened only for 100 ms only once. When the gaming state at the stop display of the common figure B is short time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for only 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, and then opened for only 1450 ms, again It closes only for about 2000 ms and opens again for about 1450 ms.

  FIGS. 202 (a) to 202 (d) show an example of a success / failure determination table used when performing a success / failure determination in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). There is. The success or failure determination tables shown in FIGS. 202 (a) to 202 (d) are configured by items of “special drawing probability”, “random number range”, and “success or failure determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates the special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of the success or failure determination. The item of “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible ranges of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 1 winning random number value of this example are 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65,536).

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 202 (a) is a success or failure determination table for special view 1 used when the special view probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 202 (a), when this qualification table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/299 (= 219/65536) and the probability of small hit is about 1/399 (= 165 /). 65536).

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 202 (b) is a success or failure determination table for special view 1 used when the special view probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a high probability. As shown in FIG. 202 (b), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the probability of small hit is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 202 (a), the probability of big hit is about 10 times, and the probability of small hit is the same.

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 202 (c) is a success or failure determination table for special view 2 used when the special view probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 202 (c), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/299, and the probability of a small hit is zero.

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 202 (d) is a success or failure determination table for special view 2 used when the special view probability at the time of success or failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 202 (d), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/30, and the probability of small hit is zero. When this success or failure judgment table is compared with the success or failure judgment table shown in FIG. 202 (c), the probability of the big hit is about 10 times.

  FIG. 203 (a) shows a symbol sorting table for the special view 1. FIG. The numerical values in the "sorting" column in the table are compared with the special figure 1 random number value when determining the stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), the distribution ratio of random number range for each pattern (ie each Shows the selection probability of the symbol). As shown in FIG. 203 (a), the distribution rate of each big hit symbol when the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit is 30% for the special figure A (15R special big hit), and the special figure B 25% for (7R special big hit), 25% for special figure C (7R big hit), 10% for special figure D (sudden probability variation big hit), 10% for special figure E (latency probability variation big hit) is there. Special views A, B, D, E excluding special view C are symbols for which positive change is activated after the end of the big hit game. The ratio of the probability variation big hits (special figures A, B, D, E) in the big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, that is, the probability of probability variation is 75%.

  The special figures A, B and D indicate the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, spread figure high probability (during time reduction operation), spread figure low probability (due time not working) at the time of success / failure determination (when symbol stop display) Regardless of time)), it is a symbol that the time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the end of the big hit game. The special view C is a symbol in which time saving (100 times saving time) is activated after the end of the big hit game regardless of the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination. The special view E is a symbol in which time saving is activated after the end of the big hit game only when the gaming state at the time of success or failure determination is the special figure high probability state or the general drawing high probability state. That is, when the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state, time saving does not operate after the end of the big hit game. For example, when the special figure E is displayed several times in succession as a big hit symbol from the special figure low probability common figure low probability state, time saving does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability common figure) However, after the second and subsequent stop display, the time saving function is activated (it is a special drawing high probability general drawing high probability state). The probability that time saving is given in the big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is 90% in the special figure low probability spread figure low probability state, 100% in the other game state.

  In this example, the small hit symbol and the detached symbol in the special figure 1 fluctuation game are only one type each. Therefore, when the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random number value, and the success judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is In the case of outliers, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random number value. However, a small hit symbol or an off symbol may be provided in a plurality of types similarly to the large hit symbol, and may be determined by lottery using a special figure 1 random value.

  FIG. 203 (b) shows an example of the big hit operation in each symbol of the special view 1. As shown in FIG. 203 (b), in the big hit game after the special view A is stopped and displayed, the attacker opens 15R with 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the big hit game after special image B or special image C is stopped and displayed, 7R is performed with 29000 ms per 1R, and in big hit game after special image D is displayed and stopped, the open of attacker Is performed 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for the special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the gaming state at the time of symbol stop display. In the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state, the attacker is opened for 2Rs in 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter the game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the gaming state other than the special view low probability general view low probability state, 2R is performed at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, since the opening time is relatively long, it is easy to enter the game ball.

  In the small hit game after the special view F is stopped and displayed, 100 ms of attacker opening is performed twice in one opening opportunity. That is, in the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state and the small hit game after the special view F is stopped and displayed, the attacker operates in the same manner.

  FIG. 204 (a) shows a symbol sort table for Special Figure 2. FIG. The numerical value in the "sorting" column in the table is the sorting percentage of the random number range for each symbol (ie, each is compared with the special figure 2 random number value when determining the stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) Shows the selection probability of the symbol). As shown in FIG. 204 (a), the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol in the case where the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the special figure a (15R special big hit) is 70%, and the special figure b. (7R special jackpot) is 5%, and special figure c (7R jackpot) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols for which positive change is activated after the big hit game is over. The ratio of the probability change big hit (Toku figure a, b) in the big hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation game, that is, the probability change probability is the same 75% as the probability change probability of the special figure 1 fluctuation game.

  The special figures a and b show the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, spread figure high probability (time reduction operation time), spread figure low probability (time reduction time not active) at the time of success / failure determination (when symbol stop display) Regardless of), it is a symbol that the time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the end of the big hit game. The special view c is a symbol in which time saving (100 times saving time) is activated after the end of the big hit game regardless of the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination. The probability that time saving is given in the big hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of out pattern in the special figure 2 fluctuation game. Therefore, when the success or failure determination result of the special figure 2 variation game is a loss, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 2 random number value. However, a plurality of types of off symbols may be provided similarly to the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using a special figure 2 random number value.

  FIG. 204 (b) shows an example of the jackpot operation in each symbol of the special view 2. As shown in FIG. 204 (b), in the big hit game after the special view a is stopped and displayed, the attacker opens 15R for 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special view b or special view c is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game, 7Rs are performed with 29000 ms per 1R to open the attacker.

  As shown in FIG. 203 and FIG. 204, Special Figure 2 has a high probability of being given time reduction compared to Special Figure 1, and the release time of the attacker is long (or the number of R is large). Therefore, it can be considered that Special Figure 2 has a higher degree of advantage than Special Figure 1.

  Next, processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIGS. 205 and 206. FIG. FIG. 205 (a) is a flow chart showing the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 205 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S401, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed. Among the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric power long open effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when pressing of the chance button 136 has been detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S409 into effect data corresponding to pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 following step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S409, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, when there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S409, the control command is set to be output. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 205 (b) is a flowchart showing a flow of a first secondary control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process performed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 205C is a flowchart showing the flow of a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S601 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first secondary control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step S403, it is every 20 ms (2 ms × 10) that the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more.

  In step S603 following step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S421), and other processing for updating random numbers for effect Etc.

  FIG. 205 (d) is a flowchart showing a flow of image control processing (step S413) of the first sub control unit main processing. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 has been input or not. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705, otherwise transfer end ratio Wait for incoming signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S 701, the CPU 404 information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S 707 following step S 705, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711, otherwise Waits for a generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  FIG. 206 (a) shows the flow of electric power long open effect processing that is executed in the effect control processing of the main processing in the first auxiliary control unit 400. FIG. 206 (b) shows an example of the electric tuong open effect in the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric Chu Long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during the common drawing fluctuation game, and the special drawing 2 starting opening (electric Chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times for a common drawing fluctuation game and won , It may be referred to as long open)) It is an effect to ask whether or not to. It should be noted that, even after the regular drawing fluctuation stop, the electric tune long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as "during the electric cheer opening!") May be continued based on the regular drawing stop symbol.

  The electric chulong opening effect processing shown in FIG. 206 (a) is the start of symbol variation from the main control unit 300 in the command processing (step S407) of the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 in FIG. (Start of rotation) It is executed when a command is received.

  The first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether the power-on long open effect execution regulation flag that restricts the execution of the power-on long open effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the power-long open effect execution regulation flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408, and determines whether the execution of the power-long open effect is restricted. For example, during the dark display where the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is completely black, the player can not visually recognize the effect even if the effect of the effect of the effect of the effect of the effect of electric power Tyuulong is not obtained . Therefore, in such a case, the electric power long open effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game during display dark rotation. In addition, if the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not darkened, and the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric Chu-long opening effect, the game It is possible to carry out an electric Chu-long opening effect that can entertain people. Therefore, in such a case, the electric power long long open effect execution regulation flag is turned off based on the effect based on the success or failure determination result of the special figure change game and the demonstration effect.

  In step S801, when the electric Chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is on, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the execution of the electric Chu-long opening effect is restricted, and for the restriction of the electric Chu-long opening effect. Other control processing is executed to end the present processing, and the process returns to the effect control processing (step S409) of the main processing.

  In step S801, if the power-on long open effect execution restriction flag is off, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the power-on long open effect can be performed, and proceeds to step S803 to start symbol variation (start of rotation) It is determined from the command data of the command whether or not the success / failure determination result of the general drawing fluctuation game is hit with reference to the information regarding the common drawing per game flag and the general drawing disengaging flag.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the success / failure determination result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the process proceeds to step S805, and the common drawing is generated from the command data of the symbol change start (rotation start) command. With reference to the information on the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the common drawing change game is the common drawing A.

  If the first sub control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the common drawing fluctuating game is the common drawing A, the process proceeds to step S807, the effect type selects the effect of "success pattern", and the power is open Set as an effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809 to execute other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “success pattern”, and ends this processing to effect control of the main process. It returns to a process (step S409).

  If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the stop symbol of the common drawing fluctuating game is not the common drawing A in step S805, the processing proceeds to step S811, and the effect type selects the effect of "failure pattern A" Set as an effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809, executes other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “failure pattern A”, terminates the present processing, and performs the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If it is determined in step S803 that the regularity determination result of the general drawing fluctuation game is not a hit, the first sub control unit 400 proceeds to step S815, and executes electric power long open false (gasse) effect execution lottery processing. In the electric chew long opening false effect execution lottery process, the electric chew long open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406 by taking out a random number value from the random number counter for the electric tune long open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408 It is judged whether or not the random number value corresponds to a hit using

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric power long open false effect based on the result of the determination of success or failure in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines to execute the electric power long open false effect in step S 817, the process proceeds to step S 821, and the effect type “failure pattern B” is selected and set as electric power long open effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809, executes other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “failure pattern B”, terminates the present processing, and performs the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 not to execute the electric power long open false effect, it executes other control processing for not executing the electric power long open effect, and ends the present processing to execute the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the processing of the electric Chu-long opening effect shown in FIG. 206, when the electric Chu-long opening effect execution regulation flag is off, the electric Chu-long opening effect is always performed if it is a hit, but it is a hit An execution lottery may be performed in the same manner as at the time of moat-off, and the effect may be executed only when the lottery is won. Moreover, in this example, the effect of "failure pattern A" is set in the hit (open view B) when the turn off is open for a short time (short open), and the turn off does not open the turn off (outline C). Although the effect of "B" is set, the same effect may be performed with a hit (general view B) and a shift (general view C).

  FIG. 206 (b) shows an example of the electric tuong open effect. FIG. 206 (b) shows display effects being performed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire surface of the image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named "land stage" is executed. At the front of the background effect, the variation display of the decorative symbol in which “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” sequentially move from the top to the bottom in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) Is running. A fluctuation icon display area a is disposed on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a fluctuation icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the variation icon display area a, a special view reserve display area c for displaying a reserve for special view is arranged, and a reserve icon b of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. At the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, a power long open effect area d is disposed. The common drawing change game is started by the common drawing display device 210 (not shown), and the execution of the electric Chu-long opening effect is not regulated, and the electric Chu-long opening effect is executed in the electric Chu-long opening effect area d. An image of a samurai character operating a lottery machine is displayed together with the display of "during a helping chance lottery" as an electric Chu-long opening effect, and the special drawing 2 starting port 232 A scruffy effect is being performed which causes the player to expect that the game may be released long. As shown in FIG. 206 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the effect of opening electric power long. In addition, the right side area of the special view hold display area c is also partially hidden. Thus, if there is a case that the electric Chu-long opening effect makes it difficult to confirm at least a part of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol makes at least a part of the electric Chu-long opening effect difficult to confirm There may be.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 207A is a flowchart of the main process performed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, various initial settings are performed in step S901 in FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S901, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S 903 following step S 901, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S 905. . In step S905, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S 907 following step S 905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first secondary control unit 400 or not.

  In step S909 following step S907, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 907, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 following step S911, movable body control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body (224Fa, 224Fb, 224E), this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S903.

  FIG. 207B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first secondary control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 207C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, processing for updating the effect random number value is performed.

  Next, a specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 208 to 228 will be described with reference to FIG. 208 (a). As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment uses the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 195 as display means. Have. Hereinafter, although there is a point which overlaps with the explanation so far, it explains.

  Similarly to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are disposed in the effect device 206 of the game board 200 shown in FIG. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are display regions smaller than the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and have vertically long rectangular display regions. If the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a main display device, it can be said that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N correspond to sub display devices. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but various effects and various game information can be displayed without using a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and other projectors may be used. May be adopted.

  Here, the positional relationship between the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N will be described. After that, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed, for example, on an island facility, the player facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as "front" (forward, front, etc.), and the reverse is "rear" (back, rear) I assume. In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed, for example, on an island facility, the vertical upper side as viewed from the player is "upper" (upper, upper, upper, upper end, etc.), and the reverse is "lower" (lower, lower, Lower end, etc.). Also, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on an island facility, for example, the left side (left side, left side, left end, etc.) of the player is viewed from the player, and the reverse is right side (right side, right side, etc.) And the right edge).

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L is disposed substantially at the center of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 195, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is disposed to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The symbol display device 208N is disposed to the right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are disposed in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The positions of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the front-rear direction are the same. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are driven by, for example, a stepping motor etc., and are in front of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and in a plane parallel to the display screen. It is movable in the left and right direction. In the state shown in FIG. 208 (a), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are located at the initial position, and when viewed in the front-rear direction, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third A part of the decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps a part of the left and right ends of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  The display control of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is executed by the first auxiliary control unit 400 shown in FIG. A control unit (for example, a liquid crystal control unit) that executes display control of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be separately provided.

  In the example shown in FIG. 208 (a), "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIGS. 208 to 228, the decorative pattern is displayed surrounded by a rectangular frame display. The display color in the frame display surrounding the odd decoration pattern ("decoration 1", "decoration 3", "decoration 5", "decoration 7", "decoration 9") is red, and the even decoration pattern ("decoration" Display color in the frame display surrounding 2 "," decoration 4 "," decoration 6 "," decoration 8 "," decoration 10 ") is blue. The pachinko machine 100 displays the inside of the frame display surrounding the three decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in red or blue, thereby making the success or failure of the special figure fluctuation game with a predetermined big hit reliability (expected degree) It is possible to carry out pre-reading notices. In the example shown in FIG. 208 (a), the inside of the frame display that encloses “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1” is displayed in red (shown by lattice hatching in FIG. 208 to FIG. 228). The display of the pre-reading notice in which the inside of the frame display surrounding the three decorative symbols is displayed in red is the display of the pre-reading notice of the red chance eye. The big hit reliability in the advance notice of the chance eyes is set higher in red than in blue. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may display the decoration pattern itself in red or blue and execute the advance notice of the chance eye.

  A variation icon display area e is provided at the lower center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fluctuation icon is displayed so as to be placed on the upper surface of the cylindrical stage (base image) displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e. The fluctuation icon is an icon displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e when the suspension is digested and the special figure fluctuation game is started. By changing the mode (display mode) of the variation icon, it is possible to execute the notice of the variation with a predetermined big hit reliability of the success or failure of the special view variation game. In the example shown in FIG. 208 (a), the fluctuation icon e1 is displayed in a white (indicated by dot hatching in FIGS. 208 to 228) circular shape. The white circle aspect is the default aspect and is the one with the lowest big hit reliability among the plurality of aspects.

  A special figure 1 reserved icon display area f is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area e. In the special figure 1 pending icon display area f, the number of pending icons of the special figure 1 corresponding to the number of pendings of the special figure 1 can be displayed. The pachinko machine 100 can notify the special drawing 1 pending icon display area f by the number of holding icons of the special view 1 according to the number of pending icons of the special drawing 1 and the pending state of each special icon It is possible to execute pre-reading notice with predetermined big hit reliability with the success or failure of the special figure 1 fluctuation game which relates. The special figure 1 reserved icon display area f is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from right to left. At the lower part of each of the first to fourth areas, an elliptical stage (a pedestal image) indicating the display position of the reserved icon of the special view 1 is displayed. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding orders, respectively. In the first area, the hold icon of Special Figure 1 corresponding to the earliest (most stored) hold is displayed, and in the same way, the second to fourth areas correspond to the second to fourth hold. The hold icons in FIG. 1 are displayed respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 208 (a), the number of reservations of the special view 1 is two, and the suspension icons f1 and f2 are displayed in the first area and the second area of the special view 1 suspension icon display area f, respectively. . The hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed overlapping at the upper end of the pedestal image. Further, the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a white circle. The white circle aspect is the default aspect and is the aspect with the lowest big hit reliability among the plurality of aspects. In addition, the special figure 1 reservation icon corresponding to the reserve whose special figure 1 prefetch result is "not determined" may be displayed in the default mode. The default aspect reliability in this case is not set.

  As shown in FIG. 208 (a), the hold icon is displayed at a smaller display size than the change icon. This may facilitate identification of the hold icon and the change icon.

  As shown in FIG. 208 (a), a special figure 2 pending icon display area g is provided on the right of the variable icon display area e. In the special figure 2 pending icon display area g, the number of pending icons of the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of pendings of the special figure 2 can be displayed. In the special figure 2 reserve icon display area g, it is possible to report the number of reserve for special figure 2 variable game by the number of reserve icons in the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 pertaining to the reserve according to the mode of each reserve icon. It is possible to give advance notice of advance read of the success or failure of the fluctuation game with a predetermined big hit reliability. In the example shown in FIG. 208 (a), since the number of reservations of the special view 2 is 0, the special icon of the special view 2 is not displayed in the special view 2 suspension icon display area g. When the number of reservations of the special figure 2 is 0, as shown in FIG. 208 (a), a horizontally long rectangular display area h is provided to overlap a part of the special figure 2 reservation icon display area g. Be In the display area h, it is possible to display a tutorial display such as how to play a game or an explanation of the contents of an effect or an explanation of a character or a notice display as a character image.

  A fifth symbol is displayed above the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The fifth symbol is displayed by combining three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. During execution of the special figure 1 or special figure 2 variation game, each left right middle symbol of the fifth symbol is "1" → "2" → "3" → ... → "9" → "0" → " The variable display of the fifth symbol which is switched in the order of 1 "→ ... is executed. In each figure, the variation display of the fifth symbol is represented by a downward arrow. In the fifth symbol, three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to notify the success / failure determination result of the special figure fluctuation game.

  In the lower part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a horizontally long rectangular frame image is displayed, and in the frame image, information on the current rendering stage is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 208 (a), since the effect stage is the castle town stage, a character string image of "castle town" is displayed in the frame image.

  In the upper left portion of the display area of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a number indicating the number of reserved special views is displayed. The number displayed on the left indicates the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 and the number on the right indicates the number of reservations of Special Figure 2. In the example shown in FIG. 208 (a), since the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0, the upper left part of the display area of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is "2 The numbers “0” and “0” are displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 208 (a), the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb. The Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb are disposed in the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. The Yatsushiro character 224Fa is disposed on the upper left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the general military item 224Fb is disposed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The right end of the Yatsushiro character 224Fa is It is disposed adjacent to the left end of the general military item 224Fb. The positions of the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb in the front-rear direction are the same, and are the front sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The Yatsushiro character 224Fa has a horizontally long rectangular flat plate on which a part of the model name of the pachinko machine 100 etc. (in this example, "Yatsushiro") is written, and the general officer's article 224Fb is of the pachinko machine 100 It has a horizontally long rectangular flat plate on which a part of the model name and the like (in this example, "general") is written. The Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general military item 224Fb have full-color LEDs, and can emit light in a plurality of colors. In the state shown in FIG. 208 (a), the eight generation character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb emit light in white (shown by dot hatching in FIGS. 208 to 228).

  The Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb are driven by, for example, a stepping motor etc., and can be vertically moved in a plane parallel to the display screen in front of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is there. In the state shown in FIG. 208 (a), Yatsushiro character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are located at the initial position.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 208 (a), the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a family crest 224E. The family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The family crest 224E is disposed in the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. The position of the family crest 224E in the front-rear direction is the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The family crest 224E has a circular flat plate on which a crest pattern is written. The family crest 224E has a full color LED and can emit light in a plurality of colors. In the state shown in FIG. 208 (a), the family crest 224E emits blue light (indicated by hatching in the upper right in FIGS. 208 to 228).

  The family crest 224E is driven by, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and can move vertically in a plane parallel to the display screen in front of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the state shown in FIG. 208 (a), the family crest 224E is located at the initial position.

  Driving control (movement control) of the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, the general character 224Fb, and the family crest 224E is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. The light emission control of the LEDs provided on the Yashiro character 224Fa, the general character 224Fb, and the family crest 224E is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG.

Further, in FIG. 208A and each of the subsequent drawings, the configuration necessary for describing the embodiment of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 is extracted and illustrated in the region on the paper surface divided by the dashed dotted line. As shown in FIG. 208 (a) and the subsequent figures, the speaker 120 is schematically illustrated at the upper left in the figure, and the lower left in the figure is the chance button 136 and the operation button 710 such as the second chance button. Is schematically shown, and the fourth symbol lamps i1 and i2 are schematically shown at the upper right in the drawing. A predetermined BGM (background music) is output from the speaker 120 during the game. The operation button 710 is an operation means that can be operated by the player disposed on the front side of the front frame door 106. The fourth symbol lamps i1 and i2 are lamps for notifying the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not the special figure variation game is being executed. The fourth symbol lamp i1 has a square-shaped external shape, and reports the fourth symbol for Special Figure 1. The fourth symbol lamp i2 has a circular external shape, and reports the fourth symbol for Special Figure 2. The fourth symbol lamp i1 blinks in white when lit during execution of the special figure 1 variation game, and is turned off during non-execution of the special figure 1 variation game. Similarly, the fourth symbol lamp i2 blinks when it is lit during execution of the special figure 2 variation game, and turns off during non-execution of the special figure 2 variation game. The fourth symbol may be displayed on a display device such as the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N.
Example 1
Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 (a) to 208 (r). FIGS. 208 (a) to 208 (r) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 208 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the special game 1 variation game result of the success or failure judgment is a disconnection. "Is displayed stopped (confirmed display, main stopped display). Further, the fifth symbol of the “7-7-1” combination is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The inside of the frame display surrounding each decoration pattern of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1" is displayed in red, and a preview of the red chance eye is read. In this embodiment, during the execution of the advance notice for the chance eye, the character string image of "Stop with the same color symbol ..." is displayed in the display area h, and the advance notice for the opportunity eye is executed. It is suggested. In the present example, the target of the advance notice of the chance eye glance is the hold 2 of the special view 1.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 208 (a), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 2 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0, so the suspension icons f1 and f2 are displayed in the special view 1 suspension icon display area f. The reserve icon is not displayed in the special view 2 reserve icon display area g, and the number of reservations is displayed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N by the numbers "2" and "0." The aspect of the hold icons f1 and f2 is a white circle. In addition, a fluctuation icon e1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e. The aspect of the variation icon e1 is white and circular.

  In the present embodiment, a castle town stage is set as the effect stage. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a background image of the castle town corresponding to the castle town stage is displayed. In the lower part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a character string image of "jojocho" is displayed, and the current presentation stage name is notified.

  FIG. 208 (b) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon e1 is erased. In the present embodiment, the variation icon is erased during stop display of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol and the fifth symbol. The fluctuation icon e1 may be deleted simultaneously with the end of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, or may be deleted simultaneously with the fluctuation stop of the fourth and fifth symbols, or the fluctuation display of the next decoration symbol It may be deleted simultaneously with the start.

  In (c) of FIG. 208, when the special figure 1 variation game is started by the special figure 1 display device (not shown), the variation indication of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the variation indication of the fifth symbol are started Show the situation. In FIG. 208 (c), the downward white arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display devices 208La to 208c display the fluctuation display at such a speed that the player can recognize the decorative symbol. Represents the state of being In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the hold icon decrease animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the fluctuation icon e2 and the change icon Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. Each of the arrows in the figure represents the locus of the change icon e2 and the locus of the holding icon f2. At the time point shown in FIG. 208 (c), the on-hold icon decrease animation is finished, and the movement of the change icon e2 and the on-hold icon f2 is complete.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, tutorial display is started in the display area h. In this example, a character string image of "Hold on hold change" is displayed in the display area h.

  FIG. 208 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In FIG. 208 (d), the downward white arrows illustrated in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L display the variation display at such a speed that the player can not recognize the decorative symbol. Represents the state of The variation display of the decorative symbol is initially displayed as a low-speed variation display, and is displayed as a high-speed variation display after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation.

  FIG. 208 (e) shows a state in which the change preview display has been started. The change notice j in this embodiment is a pattern of a treasure box, and the display is started in such a manner as to gradually move downward to the right from the left end of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change notice display j in this example is a display for giving a notice that the mode of the hold icon changes. In this case, the change notice display j may be a prefetch notice display. Note that the change advance notice j may be a notice for giving notice that the form of the change icon is changed. The change notice j in this case may be a notice of the change.

  FIG. 208 (f) shows a state in which the movement of the change annunciation display j is stopped and the display start of the change annunciation display j is completed. A change notice j is displayed at the center of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated at the upper left of the change notice display j represents the locus of the change notice display j.

  FIG. 208 (g) shows a state in which the treasure box change notice display j is opened and an animation in which a blue circular change candidate display (change candidate icon) k appears from the treasure box is displayed. In the figure, the upward arrow illustrated below the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k. The change notice icon k in this example is a display for giving a notice that the mode of the hold icon changes. In this case, the change notice icon k may be a prefetch notice. The change notice icon k may be a display for giving a notice that the aspect of the change icon changes. The change notice display jj in this case may be a notice display of the change.

  FIG. 208 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation in which the change notice icon k moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k moves toward the hold icon corresponding to the hold to be the target of the prefetch notice. The target of the advance notice is the hold 1 of the special view 1, and the change notice icon k moves toward the hold icon f2 corresponding to the hold 1 of the special view 1. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k. In the state at the time point shown in FIG. 208 (h), the change notice icon k is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. When the change notice icon k is display of the notice of the change, an animation in which the change notice icon k moves toward the change icon is displayed.

  FIG. 208 (i) shows a state in which the change notice icon k has moved to a position where it overlaps a part of the hold icon f2. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k.

  FIG. 208 (j) shows a state in which the change notice icon k is deleted and the effect image m is displayed overlapping the entire hold icon f2. When the change notice icon k is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f2, the change notice icon k is erased and the effect image m is displayed instead. By the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f2 changes is displayed. When the change notice icon k is overlapped on the entire hold icon f2, the change notice icon k may be erased and the effect image m may be displayed instead. In addition, when the change notice icon k is overlapped with at least a part of the hold icon f2, the effect image m may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the change notice icon k and the hold icon f2. Further, the effect image m may be displayed overlapping with a part of the hold icon f2.

  FIG. 208 (k) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the state of the hold icon f2 changes from a white circle to a blue circle because the hold change display is performed. In this example, the hold icon f2 corresponding to the hold of the target of the prefetch notice changes to the same blue as the change notice icon k. A plurality of types of change candidate displays are provided, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display of the plurality of types of change candidate displays. When the pending change display is performed by the blue change candidate display, the mode of the pending icon may be changed to either a green circle or a red circle instead of the blue circle. In addition, when the holding change display is performed by the green change candidate display, the mode of the holding icon may be changed to any one of a green circle, a red circle, and a gold circle. Further, when the hold change display is performed by the blue change candidate display, the mode of the hold icon may not be changed to a golden circle. In addition, when the red hold icon is displayed, a green change candidate display or a blue change candidate display may be displayed. In this case, in addition to the red holding icon, a white circular holding icon may be displayed, or a white circular holding icon may not be displayed. In addition, when a green change candidate display or a blue change candidate display is displayed, an aspect (for example, a red circle) having a big hit reliability than the aspect of the hold icon corresponding to the change candidate supplementary display The hold icon does not change. When the green change candidate display or the blue change candidate display is displayed, if the hold change display is performed in which the hold icon of the aspect having a high hit probability such as red circle or gold circle changes, the hold is performed. The icons may change to the aspect of the premier aspect (e.g., an iridescent circle).

  FIG. 208 (l) shows a state in which the change annunciation display j is erased. When the change advance notice display j is erased, the hold change display by the change candidate display for the hold icon f2 is not performed any more.

  FIG. 208 (m) shows a state immediately before the speed of the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a becomes slow and “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. In the figure, a downward arrow shown below "decoration 7" indicates that a low-speed variable display is displayed so that the player can recognize the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 208 (n) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is displayed on the left symbol display area 208a in a temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) in a mode of slightly swinging up and down. In the drawing, two wavy lines illustrated at the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 7" indicate that the "decoration 7" is slightly swaying up and down. In addition, the variation display of the decorative symbol in the right symbol display area 208c is changed to the low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 208 (o) shows a state immediately before the speed of the variable display in the right symbol display area 208 c becomes slower and “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208 c. In the figure, a downward arrow shown below "decoration 6" indicates that a low-speed variable display in which the player can recognize the decorative symbol is displayed. In addition, the variation display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is changed to the low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 208 (p) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c in a temporary stop manner in a mode of slightly swinging up and down. In the drawing, two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down. Further, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the speed of the variable display is further reduced, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, "decoration 6" is in a state immediately before temporary stop display. In the figure, a downward arrow shown below "decoration 6" indicates that a low-speed variable display which allows the player to recognize the decorative symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 208 (q) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle symbol display area 208b in a temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) in a mode in which it slightly shakes up and down. In the drawing, two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down. As a result, the "decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 6", which is a shifted pattern aspect, is temporarily stopped and displayed on the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 208 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 6" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. In addition, the fifth symbol of the “7-6-6” combination is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can change the aspect of the holding icon to the aspect corresponding to the change candidate display. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to suggest an aspect after the change of the hold icon depending on the aspect of the change candidate display.
(Example 2)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 209 (a) to 209 (p), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present embodiment will be described. Each of FIGS. 209 (a) to 209 (p) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 209 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the variation display of the fifth symbol in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Has been done. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 209 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0, so the reserve icon f1 is displayed in the special icon 1 reserve icon display area f. The reserve icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 reserve icon display area g, and the number of reservations is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N by the numbers "1" and "0". The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a fluctuation icon e1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e. The aspect of the variation icon e1 is white and circular.

  In the present embodiment, a castle town stage is set as the effect stage. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a background image of the castle town corresponding to the castle town stage is displayed. In the lower part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a character string image of "jojocho" is displayed, and the current presentation stage name is notified. In addition, in the display area for displaying the effect stage name, it may be notified that the possibility of changing the mode of the hold icon is high.

  FIG. 209 (b) shows a state in which the change preview display j has been started. The change notice j in this embodiment is a pattern of a treasure box, and the display is started in such a manner as to gradually move downward to the right from the left end of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change notice display j in this example is a display for giving a notice that the mode of the hold icon changes.

  FIG. 209C shows a state in which the movement of the change annunciation display j is stopped and the display start of the change annunciation display j is completed. A change notice j is displayed at the lower center of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated at the upper left of the change notice display j represents the locus of the change notice display j.

  FIG. 209 (d) shows a state in which the treasure box change notice display j is opened and an animation in which a blue circular change notice icon k appears from the treasure box is displayed. In the figure, the upward arrow illustrated below the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k. The change notice icon k in this example is a display for giving a notice that the mode of the hold icon changes. Note that the change notice display j is a display for causing the change notice icon k to appear, and may be deleted after the change notice icon k appears. While the change advance notice display j is not displayed, a new change candidate display is not displayed.

  FIG. 209 (e) shows a state where a character display n of Yoshimune (hereinafter referred to as "Yoshimune n") is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Yoshimune n is a display that suggests changing the type of change candidate display.

  FIG. 209 (f) shows a state in which a display in which Yoshimune n has a change item display (hereinafter referred to as "change item") o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is a display that suggests changing the type of change candidate display.

  FIG. 209 (g) shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws a change item o toward a change notice icon k is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is flying toward the change notice icon k, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 209 (g). In the figure, the left upward arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 209 (h) shows a state in which a display in which the change item o collides with the change notice icon k is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change item o is displayed overlapping a part of the change notice icon k.

  FIG. 209 (i) shows a state in which the change item o is erased and the effect image m is displayed overlapping the entire change notice icon k. When the change item o is overlapped with a part of the change notice icon k, the change item o is erased and the effect image m is displayed instead. The display of the effect image m displays a change display in which the type of the change notice icon k changes.

  FIG. 209 (j) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display causes the type of the change notice icon k to change from blue to green (shown by cross hatching in FIGS. 208 to 228). There is. A plurality of types of change candidate displays are provided, and one of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a blue circular change candidate display, and one of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is green. It is a circular change candidate display. In the case where the green circular change candidate display is displayed, the hold icon is set to be more easily changed to a mode of high big hit reliability than when the blue circular change candidate display is displayed. As described above, there may be a case where the blue circular change candidate display changes to a green circular change candidate display.

  FIG. 209 (k) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is erased. When Yoshimune n is deleted, the change display for the change notice icon k is not performed any more. In addition, when Yoshimune n is continuously displayed, the change display for the change notice icon k may be displayed again.

  FIG. 209 (l) shows a state in which the moving animation in which the change notice icon k moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k moves toward the hold icon corresponding to the hold to be the target of the prefetch notice. Since the target of the prefetch notice is the hold 1 of the special view 1, the change notice icon k moves toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold 1 of the special view 1. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k. In the state shown in FIG. 209 (l), the change notice icon k is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 209 (m) shows a state in which the change notice icon k has moved to a position where it overlaps a part of the hold icon f1. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k.

  FIG. 209 (n) shows a state in which the change notice icon k is deleted and the effect image m is displayed overlapping the entire hold icon f2. When the change notice icon k is overlapped with part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k is erased and the effect image m is displayed instead. By the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 209 (o) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the state of the hold icon f1 changes from a white circle to a green circle due to the hold change display. In this example, the aspect of the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the prefetch notice changes to the same green circle as the change notice icon k. A plurality of types of change candidate displays are provided, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display of the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 209 (p) shows a state in which the change annunciation display j is erased. When the change advance notice display j is erased, the hold change display by the change candidate display for the hold icon f1 is not performed any more.

  The display means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a plurality of types of change candidate display, blue The circular change candidate display may change to a green circular change candidate display. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the change candidate display may change, it may be possible to enjoy the change candidate display until the change candidate display is erased.

  As for the mode of the retention icon, the big hit reliability is set in the order of white circle, blue circle, green circle, red circle, gold circle, and iridescent circle. In addition, the big hit reliability of the change candidate display may be set similarly. In addition, when the aspect changes, the pending icon always changes to an aspect having a higher hit probability than the aspect before the change.

  The type of the change candidate display is set to have high expectation in the order of white circle, blue circle, green circle, red circle, golden circle, and iridescent circle. As the degree of expectation here is higher, the mode of the hold icon or the change icon, which is the change display object, is set so as to change more easily. In addition, in the case of the aspect of the pending icon or the variation icon, the aspect may be set to always change to the aspect corresponding to the change candidate display, or the aspect may change to an aspect different from the aspect corresponding to the change candidate display. It is also good. In addition, when the change candidate display changes, the change candidate display mode always has a higher expectation than before the change.

In addition, when the green circular change candidate display is displayed, the white circular reserved icon is configured to be easily changed to the green circular form by the blue circular form. The big hit reliability of the retention icon is set to increase in the order of the white circle aspect, the blue circle aspect, and the green circle aspect. For this reason, the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the blue circular mode is digested, rather than the variation display of the decorative symbol that is started when the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the white circular mode is digested and started The variation display of the decorative symbol to be started is configured so that the big hit symbol form can be finally clearly displayed, and the holding corresponding to the holding icon displayed in the blue circular shape is digested and started The big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally confirmed in the variation display of the decoration symbol which is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the holding icon displayed in the green circle form than the variation display of the decoration symbol Is configured as.
(Example 3)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 210 (a) to 210 (m), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present embodiment will be described. Each of FIGS. 210 (a) to 210 (m) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 210 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the variation display of the fifth symbol in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Has been done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 210 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0, so the reserve icon f1 is displayed in the special view 1 reserve icon display area f. The reserve icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 reserve icon display area g, and the number of reservations is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N by the numbers "1" and "0". The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a fluctuation icon e1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e. The aspect of the variation icon e1 is white and circular. Further, in FIG. 210 (a), a change notice j is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change notice display j in this example is a display for giving a notice that the mode of the hold icon changes.

  In the present embodiment, a castle town stage is set as the effect stage. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a background image of the castle town corresponding to the castle town stage is displayed. In the lower part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a character string image of "jojocho" is displayed, and the current presentation stage name is notified.

  FIG. 210 (b) shows a state in which the treasure box change notice display j is opened and an animation in which a blue circular change notice icon k1 appears from the treasure box is displayed. In the figure, the upward arrow illustrated below the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k. The change notice icon k1 in this example is a display for giving a notice that the mode of the hold icon changes.

  FIG. 210C shows a state in which an animation in which a green circular change notice icon k2 appears from the change notice display j is displayed. In the drawing, a right upward arrow illustrated below the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k. The change notice icon k2 in this example is a display for giving a notice that the mode of the hold icon changes. As in this example, the display of the change notice icon k1 may be started, and then the display of the change notice icon k2 may be started, or the display of the change notice icons k1 and k2 may be started simultaneously. Note that when display of a plurality of change candidate displays is started, display may be started in order from the change candidate display with the low degree of expectation.

  FIG. 210 (d) shows a state in which the change notice icons k1 and k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The blue circular change notice icon k1 and the green circular change notice icon k2 are different types of change candidate displays. Thus, a plurality of different types of change candidate displays may be displayed. A plurality of blue circular change candidate displays may be displayed, or a plurality of green circular change candidate displays may be displayed. A plurality of change candidate displays of the same type may be displayed.

  FIG. 210 (e) shows a state in which the moving animation in which the change notice icon k1 moves is started. In this example, the change notice icon k1 starts moving toward the hold icon f1. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k1. In the state at the time point shown in FIG. 210 (e), the change notice icon k1 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the change notice icon A part of k1 is displayed overlapping a part of the change notice icon k2.

  FIG. 210 (f) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 approaches the hold icon f1. The change notice icon k1 of this example passes the left side of the hold icon f1 without colliding with the hold icon f1.

  FIG. 210 (g) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 disappears out of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The change notice icon k1 of this example is erased by passing the left side of the hold icon f1 without colliding with the hold icon f1. As described above, the change notice icon k1 of this example is not displayed before the start of the hold change display but is displayed as a garbled effect display of the hold change display.

  FIG. 210 (h) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 is deleted. The change notice icon k1 is completely erased in such a manner as to disappear out of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 210 (i) shows a state in which the moving animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon corresponding to the hold targeted for the advance notice. Since the target of the pre-reading notice is the hold 1 of the special view 1, the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold 1 of the special view 1. In the drawing, the right-pointing arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2. In the state at the time point shown in FIG. 210 (i), the change notice icon k2 is displayed across two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 210 (j) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the hold icon f1. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

  FIG. 210 (k) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed overlapping the entire hold icon f1. When the change notice icon k2 is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k2 is erased and the effect image m is displayed instead. By the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 210 (l) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the state of the hold icon f1 changes from a white circle to a green circle due to the hold change display. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the prefetch notice changes to the same green as the change notice icon k2. A plurality of types of change candidate displays are provided, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display of the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 210 (m) shows a state in which the change annunciation display j is erased. When the change advance notice display j is erased, the hold change display by the change candidate display for the hold icon f1 is not performed any more.

The display means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a plurality of change candidate displays. In the present embodiment, the change notice icon k1 is not displayed before the start of the hold change display but is displayed as a garbled effect display of the hold change display, and the change notice icon k2 is displayed before the start of the hold change display, The icon f1 changes to a mode corresponding to the change notice icon k2. Thus, when a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one of the plurality of change candidate displays. The state where only one change candidate display shown in FIG. 210 (b) is displayed is referred to as a first display, and the change candidate display shown in FIG. 210 (d) is a change annotate icon k1. , K2 may be displayed as the second display. Further, the change notice icon k1 may be the first change candidate display, and the change notice icon k2 may be the second change candidate display.
(Example 4)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 211 (a) to 211 (m), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described. Each of FIGS. 211 (a) to 211 (m) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 211 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the variation display of the fifth symbol in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Has been done. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 211 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0, so the suspension icon f1 is displayed in the special icon 1 suspension icon display area f. The reserve icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 reserve icon display area g, and the number of reservations is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N by the numbers "1" and "0". The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a fluctuation icon e1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e. The aspect of the variation icon e1 is white and circular. In addition, a blue circular change notice icon k1 and a green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the present embodiment, a castle town stage is set as the effect stage. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a background image of the castle town corresponding to the castle town stage is displayed. In the lower part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a character string image of "jojocho" is displayed, and the current presentation stage name is notified.

  FIG. 211 (b) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208 N. Yoshimune n is a display that suggests changing the type of change candidate display.

  FIG. 211 (c) shows a state in which a display in which Yoshimune n has a change item o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is a display that suggests changing the type of change candidate display.

  FIG. 211 (d) shows a state in which, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, an animation in which Yoshimune n throws a change item o toward the change notice icons k1 and k2 is displayed. The change item o is flying toward the change notice icons k1 and k2, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 211 (d). In the figure, the left upward arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 211 (e) shows a state in which the change item o is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the state shown in FIG. 211 (e), a part of the change item o is displayed overlapping with a part of the change notice icon k2. In this example, the change item o is an effect display for changing the type of the change notification icon k1 and not an effect display for changing the type of the change notification icon k2, so the change item o passes through the change notification icon k2 Do. If the change item o is effect display for changing the type of the change notice icon k2, change display of the change notice icon k2 may be started immediately after the time point shown in FIG. 211 (e). The change item o passes through the change notice icon k2 by shading. By displaying an animation in which the change item o passes through the change notice icon k 2, it may be determined which of the change notice icons k 1 and k 2 changes until the change display is started.

  FIG. 211 (f) shows a state in which the display in which the change item o collides with the change notice icon k1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change item o is displayed overlapping a part of the change notice icon k1. As in the present example, when the change item o passes by the change notice icon k2 on the right side, the change notice icon k1 on the left side is likely to change. Even when the change item o is displayed, there may be a case where neither of the change notice icons k1 and k2 changes.

  FIG. 211 (g) shows a state in which the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed overlapping the entire change notice icon k1. When the change item o is overlapped with a part of the change notice icon k1, the change item o is erased and the effect image m is displayed instead. By the display of the effect image m, a change display in which the type of the change notice icon k1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 211 (h) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display causes the type of the change notice icon k1 to change from the blue circle to the red circle. One of the plurality of change candidate displays is a red circular change candidate display.

  FIG. 211 (i) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is erased. When Yoshimune n is deleted, the change display for the change notice icon k1 is not performed any more. In addition, when Yoshimune n is continuously displayed, the change display for the change notice icon k1 is displayed again.

  FIG. 211 (j) shows a state in which the moving animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon corresponding to the hold targeted for the advance notice. Since the target of the pre-reading notice is the hold 1 of the special view 1, the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold 1 of the special view 1. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k. In the state shown in FIG. 211 (j), the change notice icon k2 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 211 (k) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps a part of the hold icon f1. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

  FIG. 211 (l) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed overlapping the entire hold icon f2. When the change notice icon k2 is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k2 is erased and the effect image m is displayed instead. By the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 211 (m) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the state of the hold icon f1 changes from a white circle to a green circle due to the hold change display. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the prefetch notice changes to the same green as the change notice icon k2. A plurality of types of change candidate displays are provided, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display of the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

FIG. 211 (n) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 and the change notice display j are erased. When the change notice icon k1 is deleted, the hold change display of the hold icon using the change notice icon k1 and the change display of the change icon are not displayed. In addition, when the change notice display j is erased, the change display by the change candidate display for the pending icon f1 or the change icon e1 is not performed any more. In the case where the change notice icon k1 and the change notice display j continue to be displayed, there is a possibility that change display on the hold icon or the change icon may be performed using the change notice icon k1. In addition, in the case where a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the change candidate display corresponding to the mode of the hold icon having a low jackpot expectation (big hit reliability) among the plurality of change candidate displays is changed. Here, the jackpot expectation is the jackpot expectation of the hold icon after the change. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 211 (f) and (g), when the blue change candidate display and the green change candidate display are displayed, the blue change candidate display is changed. The green change display may also change after the blue change candidate display changes.
(Example 5)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 212 (a) to 212 (e), a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described. Each of FIGS. 212 (a) to 212 (e) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 212, illustration of the family crest 224E and the operation button 710 is omitted.

  FIG. 212 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the variation display of the fifth symbol in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Has been done. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 212 (a), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0, so the reserve icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f. The reserve icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 reserve icon display area g, and the number of reservations is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N by the numbers "1" and "0". The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a fluctuation icon e1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e. The aspect of the variation icon e1 is white and circular. In addition, a blue circular change notice icon k1 and a green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, Yoshimune n with the change item o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, the production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 212 (b) shows a state in which, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, an animation in which Yoshimune n throws a change item o toward the change notice icons k1 and k2 is displayed. The change item o is flying toward the change notice icons k1 and k2, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 212 (b). In the figure, the left upward arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 212 (d) shows a state in which the change item o is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In this example, even when the change item o is displayed, the change display for changing the change notice icons k1 and k2 is not performed, and the change item o is directed downward of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Move and do not overlap the change notice icons k1 and k2.

  FIG. 212 (d) shows a state in which the change item o has been erased. The change item o is erased in such a manner as to move downward on the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The third decorative symbol display device 208N displays a disappointing Yoshimune n, which suggests that a failure effect of not performing the effect of changing the change notice icons k1 and k2 has been performed.

  FIG. 212 (e) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is erased. When Yoshimune n is deleted, the effect display for changing the change notification icons k1 and k2 according to the change item o is not performed any more.

In the present embodiment, even when the change item o is displayed, failure presentation is performed in which the change notice icons k1 and k2 do not change. In addition, the failure effect of this example may be performed when only one change candidate display is displayed, or may be performed when three or more change candidate displays of different types are displayed. And when two or more change candidate displays of the same type are displayed.
(Example 6)
Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth example of the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 212 (f) to 212 (i). Each of FIGS. 212 (f) to 212 (i) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 212, illustration of the family crest 224E and the operation button 710 is omitted.

  FIG. 212 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the variation display of the fifth symbol in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Has been done. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 212 (f), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 2 is 0, so the holding icon f1 is displayed in the special icon 1 holding icon display area f. The reserve icon is displayed, and the reserve icon is not displayed in the special view 2 reserve icon display area g, and the number of reservations is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N by the numbers “1” and “0”. The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a fluctuation icon e1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e. The aspect of the variation icon e1 is white and circular. In addition, the production stage is the castle town stage.

  In addition, a blue circular change notice icon k1 and a green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Before the state shown in FIG. 212 (f), an animation in which Yoshimune n throws a change icon o is displayed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and a change icon o changes a part of the change item o. A part of the notice icon k2 is displayed overlapping. In the drawing, the left-pointing arrow illustrated on the right side of the change icon o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 212 (g) shows a state in which a display in which the change item o is stopped between the change notice icons k1 and k2 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The targets of the change display by the change item o in this example are the change notice icons k1 and k2.

  FIG. 212 (h) shows a state in which the change item o is deleted and the effect image M is displayed overlapping the entire change notice icons k1 and k2. When the change item o stops between the change notice icons k1 and k2, the change item o is erased and the effect image M is displayed instead. By the display of the effect image M, a change display in which the type of the change notice icon k1 changes is displayed. The effect image M may be displayed so as to overlap with part of the change notice icons k1 and k2.

  FIG. 212 (i) shows a state in which the effect image M is erased. Since the deletion of the effect image M is the end of the change display and the change display is performed, the type of the change notice icon k1 changes from blue to red, and the type of the change notice icon k1 is from green to gold ( In FIG. 208 to FIG. 228, it changes to a circular shape (indicated by vertical hatching).

In this embodiment, the two change notification icons k1 and k2 change in one change display. Even when the effect image M is displayed overlapping both of the change notice icons k1 and k2 as in this example, only the change candidate display of any one of the change notice icons k1 and k2 changes. You may
(Example 7)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 212 (j) to 212 (o) and FIGS. 213 (a) to 213 (c), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described. Each of FIGS. 212 (j) to 213 (c) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 212 and 213, illustration of the family crest 224E and the operation button 710 is omitted.

  FIG. 212 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the variation display of the fifth symbol in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Has been done. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 212 (f), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 2 is 0, so the holding icon f1 is displayed in the special icon 1 holding icon display area f. The reserve icon is displayed, and the reserve icon is not displayed in the special view 2 reserve icon display area g, and the number of reservations is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N by the numbers “1” and “0”. The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a fluctuation icon e1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e. The aspect of the variation icon e1 is white and circular. In addition, the production stage is the castle town stage.

  Also, before the state shown in FIG. 212 (j), the display of the second circular change display icon k1 of blue circle and the display of the green circle change notice icon k2 are started on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the state shown in (j), movement animation in which the change notice icon k1 moves is started. In this example, since the pre-read notice object is the hold 1 of the special view 1, the change notice icon k1 starts moving toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold 1 of the special view 1. In the drawing, the right-pointing arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k1. The change notice icon k1 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and a part of the change notice icon k1 is a part of the change notice icon k2 It is displayed overlapping.

  FIG. 212 (k) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 has moved to a position where it overlaps a part of the hold icon f1. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k1.

  FIG. 212 (l) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed overlapping the entire hold icon f1. When the change notice icon k1 is overlapped with part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k1 is erased and the effect image m is displayed instead. By the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 212 (m) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the state of the hold icon f2 changes from a white circle to a blue circle because the hold change display is performed. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the prefetch notice changes to the same blue as the change notice icon k1. A plurality of types of change candidate displays are provided, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display of the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 212 (n) shows the state in which the moving animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold to be the prefetch notice target. In the drawing, the right-pointing arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2. The change notice icon k2 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 212 (o) shows a state in which the change notice icon k 2 has moved to a position where it overlaps a part of the hold icon f 1. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

  FIG. 213 (a) shows the state continuing from FIG. 212 (o). In FIG. 213 (a), the change notice icon k2 is deleted, and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon f1. When the change notice icon k2 is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k2 is erased and the effect image m is displayed instead. By the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 213 (b) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the state of the hold icon f1 changes from blue to green because the hold change display is performed. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target changes to the same green as the change notice icon k2. A plurality of types of change candidate displays are provided, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display of the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 213 (c) shows a state in which the change annunciation display j is erased. When the change advance notice display j is erased, the hold change display by the change candidate display for the hold icon f1 is not performed any more.

In the present embodiment, the mode of the hold icon f1 changes twice. Thus, the aspect of one holding icon may change a plurality of times.
(Example 8)
Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to (d) to (o) in FIG. Each of FIGS. 213 (d) to (o) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 213, illustration of the family crest 224E and the operation button 710 is omitted.

  FIG. 213 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the variation display of the fifth symbol in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Has been done. Also, in the state shown in FIG. 213 (d), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 2 is 0, so the holding icon f1 is displayed in the special icon 1 holding icon display area f. The reserve icon is displayed, and the reserve icon is not displayed in the special view 2 reserve icon display area g, and the number of reservations is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N by the numbers “1” and “0”. The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a fluctuation icon e1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e. The aspect of the variation icon e1 is white and circular. In addition, a blue circular change notice icon k1 and a green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, the production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 213 (e) shows a state in which the display of a rose character display (hereinafter, referred to as a "rose") p is started in the center of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.轟 p is displayed overlapping almost all over the change notice j. Even during the display of 轟 p, the change notice j becomes less visible but continues to be displayed. In this example, an animation in which the change candidate display is crushed using 轟 p is displayed.

  FIG. 213 (f) shows a state in which the animation in which the change candidate display is crushed is started.轟 p is posing when shattering the change candidate display.

  FIG. 213 (g) shows a state in which the animation in which the change notice icon k1 is cracked is displayed. In this example, the blue change notification icon k2 whose degree of expectation is lower than that of the green change notification icon k2 is erased. As described above, when one change candidate display among the plurality of change candidate displays is deleted, the change candidate display having a low degree of expectation is likely to be deleted. Note that when one change candidate display among the plurality of change candidate displays is deleted, the change candidate display having a low degree of expectation may always be deleted. In addition, when the change candidate display having a low degree of expectation is deleted, the expectation for the success of the pending change display due to the remaining high expectation change display may be high.

  FIG. 213 (h) shows a state in which the animation in which the change notice icon k1 is broken into pieces is displayed. In this example, the change notice icon k1 is erased in such a manner as to be crushed.

  FIG. 213 (i) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 has been deleted. Note that the state in which only one of the change candidate displays shown in FIG. 213 (i) is displayed is referred to as a second display, and the change candidate displays shown in FIGS. 213 (d) to (h) are displayed. A case in which two change notice icons k1 and k2 are displayed may be used as the first display.

  FIG. 213 (j) shows a state in which 轟 p is erased. When さ れ る p is deleted, no animation is performed in which the change notice icon k2 is deleted. Note that, in the case where ず p continues to be displayed without being deleted, an animation may be displayed in which the change notification icon k2 is deleted as in the case of the change notification icon k1.

  FIG. 213 (k) shows a state in which the moving animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, since the change notice icon k2 is displayed for effect display to change the aspect of the change icon, an animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves toward the change icon e1 is displayed. In the drawing, the right-pointing arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2. The change notice icon k2 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 213 (l) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps a part of the change icon e1. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

  FIG. 213 (m) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed overlapping the entire fluctuation icon e1. When the change notice icon k2 is overlapped with part of the change icon e1, the change notice icon k2 is erased and the effect image m is displayed instead. By the display of the effect image m, a change display in which the aspect of the change icon e1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 213 (n) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display is performed, whereby the aspect of the change icon e1 changes from a white circle to a green circle. In this example, the change icon e1 changes to the same green as the change notice icon k2. A plurality of types of change candidate displays are provided, and the aspect of the variation icon may change to an aspect corresponding to one of the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 213 (o) shows a state in which the change annunciation display j is erased. When the change advance notice display j is erased, the change display by the change candidate display for the change icon e1 is not performed any more.

In the present embodiment, when a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, one change candidate display of the plurality of change candidate displays is erased. A plurality of change candidate displays may be deleted. In addition, after the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (a) to 212 (j) are performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 213 (e) to (i) may be performed, and FIGS. 213 (e) to (i) After the effect to be shown is performed, change display may be performed in which the type of the change candidate display changes. In the present embodiment, although the change display of the change icon is performed in FIGS. 213 (j) to (n), even if the hold change display in which the hold icon changes is performed instead of the change display of the change icon. Good.
(Example 9)
Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 (a) to 214 (o). Each of FIGS. 214 (a) to 214 (o) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 214, illustration of the family crest 224E and the operation button 710 is omitted.

  FIG. 214 (a) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the variation display of the fifth symbol in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Has been done. Also, in the state shown in FIG. 214 (a), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 2 is 0. Therefore, the holding icon f1 is displayed in the special icon 1 holding icon display area f. The reserve icon is displayed, and the reserve icon is not displayed in the special view 2 reserve icon display area g, and the number of reservations is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N by the numbers “1” and “0”. The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a fluctuation icon e1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e. The aspect of the variation icon e1 is white and circular. In addition, a blue circular change notice icon k1 and a green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, the production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 214 (b) shows the state in which the moving animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, the change notice icon k2 starts moving toward the hold icon f1. In the drawing, a right upward arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents a locus of the change notice icon k2. The change notice icon k2 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 214 (c) shows a state in which the moving animation in which the change notice icon k1 moves is started. In this example, the change notice icon k1 starts moving toward the change icon e1. In the drawing, a right upward arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k1 represents a locus of the change notice icon k1.

  FIG. 214 (d) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps a part of the hold icon f1. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

  FIG. 214 (e) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m1 is displayed overlapping the entire hold icon f1. When the change notice icon k2 is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k2 is erased and the effect image m1 is displayed instead. The display of the effect image m1 displays a held change display in which the mode of the held icon f1 changes.

  Also, FIG. 214 (e) shows a state in which the change noticing icon k1 has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the fluctuation icon e1. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k1.

  FIG. 214 (f) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 is deleted and the effect image m2 is displayed overlapping the entire change icon e1. When the change notice icon k1 is overlapped with a part of the change icon e1, the change notice icon k1 is erased and the effect image m2 is displayed instead. By the display of the effect image m2, a change display in which the aspect of the change icon e1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 214 (g) shows a state in which the effect image m1 is erased. The deletion of the effect image m1 is the end of the hold change display, and the state of the hold icon f1 changes from a white circle to a green circle because the hold change display is performed. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the prefetch notice changes to the same green as the change notice icon k2. A plurality of types of change candidate displays are provided, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display of the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 214 (h) shows a state in which the effect image m2 is erased. The deletion of the effect image m2 is the end of the change display of the change icon, and the change display is performed, whereby the aspect of the change icon e1 changes from a white circle to a blue circle. In this example, the change icon e1 changes to the same blue as the change notice icon k1. A plurality of types of change candidate displays are provided, and the aspect of the variation icon may change to an aspect corresponding to one of the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 214 (i) shows a state in which an animation in which a red circular change notice icon k3 appears from the change notice display j is displayed. In the figure, the upward arrow illustrated below the change notice icon k3 represents the locus of the change notice icon k3. In this embodiment, even after the change presentation of the reserve icon f1 and the change icon e1 shown in FIGS. 214 (e) to (g) is completed, the change notice display j is not erased but the change notice is additionally displayed from the change notice j1. An animation is displayed.

  FIG. 214 (j) shows a state in which the animation in which the change notice icon k3 appears has ended. The still start of the change notice icon k3 is the end of the animation.

  FIG. 214 (k) shows a state in which the moving animation in which the change notice icon k3 moves is started. The change notice icons k, 3 are displayed across two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k3 moves toward between the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1. As a result, it is difficult to tell whether the change target is the hold icon f1 or the change icon e1, or both of the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1, and makes the player pay attention to the change target icon. There are times when you can.

  FIG. 214 (l) shows a state in which the change notice icon k3 has moved between the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1. The change notice icon k3 overlaps a part of the hold icon f1 and a part of the change icon e1. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k.

  FIG. 214 (m) shows a state in which the effect images m1, m2 and m3 are displayed. The effect image m1 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon f1, the effect image m2 is displayed overlapping with the change notice icon k3, and the effect image m3 is displayed overlapping with the variation icon e1. With the effect images m1, m2, and m3, the hold icon f1, the change icon e1, and the change notice icon k3 can not be visually recognized. When the display of the effect images m1, m2 and m3 is started, the change notice icon k3 may be deleted.

  FIG. 214 (n) shows a state in which the effect images m1, m2 and m3 are erased. Note that, before the effect images m1, m2, and m3 are erased, the change notice icon k3 is erased. The deletion of the effect images m1, m2 and m3 is the end of the change display, and the change display is performed, so in this example, the aspect of the change icon e1 changes from the blue circle to the red circle, and the hold icon f1 Aspect remains green and circular. In this example, the change notice icon k3 is a display used for change display for changing the aspect of the change icon e1, and the change icon e1 changes to the same red as the change notice icon k3. Note that the change notice icon k3 may be a display used for a hold change display for changing the mode of the hold icon f1, and the change notice icon k3 is used for a change display for changing the modes of the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1. It may be done.

  FIG. 214 (o) shows a state in which the change annunciation display j is erased. When the change annunciation display j is erased, the change display by the change candidate display for the pending icon f1 and the change icon e1 is not performed any more.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 214 (c), the moving animation of the change notice icon k1 is started before the result of the change display by the change notice icon k2 is displayed. The change display by the change notice icon k2 targets the hold icon f1, and the change display by the change notice icon k1 targets the change icon e1. When a plurality of hold icons are displayed, the change display by the change notice icon k1 may target the hold icons other than the hold icon f1. Also, as shown in FIG. 214 (i), even after the change notice icons k1 and k2 are deleted, a new change notice icon k3 appears without the change notice display being deleted. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to make the player pay attention to the target and the result of the change display by making it difficult to understand which icon the change display by the change candidate display targets.
(Example 10)
Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. Each of FIGS. 215 (a) to 215 (n) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 215, illustration of the family crest 224E and the operation button 710 is omitted.

  FIG. 215 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the variation display of the fifth symbol in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Has been done. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 215 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0, so the suspension icon f1 is displayed in the special icon 1 suspension icon display area f. The reserve icon is displayed, and the reserve icon is not displayed in the special view 2 reserve icon display area g, and the number of reservations is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N by the numbers “1” and “0”. The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a fluctuation icon e1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e. The aspect of the variation icon e1 is white and circular. In addition, a blue circular change notice icon k1 and a green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, the production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 215 (b) shows a state immediately before the speed of the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a becomes slow and "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the figure, a downward arrow shown below "decoration 7" indicates that a low-speed variable display is displayed so that the player can recognize the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 215 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode of slightly swinging up and down in the left symbol display area 208a. In the drawing, two wavy lines illustrated at the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 7" indicate that the "decoration 7" is slightly swaying up and down. In addition, the variation display of the decorative symbol in the right symbol display area 208c is changed to the low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 215 (d) shows a state immediately before the speed of the variable display in the right symbol display area 208c becomes slower and "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. In the figure, a downward arrow shown below "decoration 6" indicates that a low-speed variable display in which the player can recognize the decorative symbol is displayed. In addition, the variation display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is changed to the low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 215 (e) shows a state in which "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode of slightly swinging up and down in the right symbol display area 208c. In the drawing, two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down. Further, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the speed of the variable display is further reduced, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, "decoration 6" is in a state immediately before temporary stop display. In the figure, a downward arrow shown below "decoration 6" indicates that a low-speed variable display which allows the player to recognize the decorative symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 215 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol display area 208b in a temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) in a mode of slightly shaking up and down. In the drawing, two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down. As a result, the "decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 6", which is a shifted pattern aspect, is temporarily stopped and displayed on the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 215 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 6" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. In addition, the fifth symbol of the “7-6-6” combination is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, during the stop display of the decorative symbol (during symbol stop display), the change notification display j and the change notification icons k1 and k2 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 215 (h) shows a state in which the variation icon erasing animation has been started. The fluctuation icon e1 is erased in a manner of moving downward and moving out of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the figure, the downward arrow illustrated above the fluctuation icon e1 represents the locus of the fluctuation icon e1. The variation icon erasing animation of this example is executed while the decoration symbol is stopped. In addition, the fluctuation icon elimination animation may be started during the fluctuation display of the decoration design and may be ended during the fluctuation display of the decoration design, or after the end of the fluctuation display of the decoration design, the stop display of the decoration design You may finish in the middle.

  FIG. 215 (i) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon deletion animation is displayed. The fluctuation icon e1 moves downward and is gradually erased.

  FIG. 215 (j) shows a state in which the variation icon erasing animation has ended. The erasing completion of the fluctuation icon e1 is the end of the fluctuation icon erasing animation.

  In the case of FIG. 215 (k), the variation display of the decoration symbol, the fourth design, and the variation display of the fifth design are started along with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display 212 not shown. Show the situation. The variation display of the decorative symbol is initially displayed as a low-speed variation display, and is displayed as a high-speed variation display after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation. The number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is zero.

  FIG. 215 (l) shows a state in which the hold icon decrease animation has been started. In the on-hold icon decrease animation, the on-hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special view 1 on-hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e2, and the movement is started toward the change icon display area e. In the figure, a right upward arrow illustrated on the lower left of the fluctuation icon e2 represents the locus of the fluctuation icon e2.

  FIG. 215 (m) shows a state in which the on-hold icon reduction animation is completed. The completion of moving the fluctuation icon e2 to the fluctuation icon display area e is the end of the pending icon decrease animation.

  FIG. 215 (n) shows a state in which the display size of the fluctuation icon e2 is enlarged. The display size of the fluctuation icon is enlarged after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area e is completed. Note that the display size of the change icon may be enlarged during movement display (during a hold icon decrease animation display).

In the present embodiment, the change notice icons k1 and k2 and the change notice display are displayed over a plurality of special figure change games. The change notice icons k1 and k2 and the change notice display are displayed over a plurality of special view change games more than when the change notice icons k1 and k2 and the change notice display are displayed during one special view change game. In the case of the symbol variation display corresponding to the pending icon or the variation icon targeted for the change display, the big hit symbol aspect is easily determined and displayed.
(Example 11)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 216 (a) to (j), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described. Each of FIGS. 216 (a), (c) to (e) and (g) to (j) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 216 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the variation display of the fifth symbol in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Has been done. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 216 (a), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0, so the reserve icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f. The reserve icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 reserve icon display area g, and the number of reservations is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N by the numbers "1" and "0". The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a fluctuation icon e1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e. The aspect of the variation icon e1 is white and circular. In addition, the production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 216 (b) shows a state immediately before the gaming ball wins in the special view 1 start opening 230. In this example, one special game ball is won in the special figure 1 start opening 230 during the special figure 1 change game, and the reserve of the special figure 1 is increased by one.

  FIG. 216 (c) shows the state of effect display immediately after one game ball has won in the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a numeral image of "2" is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by one to two. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the pending icon increase animation is started. In the on-hold icon increase animation, a on-hold icon f2 corresponding to the increased on-hold appears to be gradually moved from the bottom toward the second area of the special view 1 on-hold icon display area f. The display start of "2" which is the number of reservations of the special figure 1 in the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the display start of the suspension icon increase animation are simultaneous, Almost at the same time. The mode of the hold icon f2 is a blue circle.

  FIG. 216 (d) shows a state in which the on-hold icon increase animation has ended. The completion of moving the special icon 1 reserved icon display area f of the reserved icon f2 to the second area is the end of the pending icon increase animation. In addition, after the end of the pending icon increase animation, the display of the button image q1 and the gauge image q2 is started on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The button image q1 is an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136. The gauge image q2 displays the remaining time of the operation valid period (operation acceptance period) of the chance button 136 by the length of a blue portion (indicated by hatching in the upper right). The operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started at the same time as the button image q1 and the gauge image q2 are displayed. The button image q1 is displayed in red, and the chance button 136 is illuminated in red during the operation valid period. The button image q1 and the gauge image q2 are displays prompting the player to operate (press) the chance button 136. Note that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 may be started prior to the button image q1 gauge image q2 being displayed, or may be started after the button image q1 and the gauge image q2 are started to be displayed. Good. In addition, the display start of the button image q1 and the gauge image q2 and the start of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 are simultaneous with the start of the suspension icon increase animation (almost simultaneously with the winning of the game ball to the special figure 1 start opening 230). It may be.

  FIG. 216 (e) shows the state during the operation valid period. The length of the blue portion of the gauge image q2 is shortened, and it is informed that the remaining time of the button acceptance period is shorter than the initial time. In the gauge image q2, the blue portion becomes shorter toward the left as the operation effective period passes.

  FIG. 216 (f) shows the state immediately before the player operates the chance button 136. FIG. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation valid period.

  FIG. 216 (g) shows the state of effect display immediately after the player operates the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is operated and the operation is accepted, the button image q1 and the gauge image q2 are erased, and instead, the effect image m4 is started to be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated once, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and the red light emission of the chance button 136 ends.

  FIG. 216 (h) shows the state in which the effect image m4 is erased. A change notice j is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M in place of the effect image m4.

  FIG. 216 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 6" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. In addition, the fifth symbol of the “7-6-6” combination is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In FIG. 216 (j), when the special figure 1 variation game is started by the special figure 1 display device (not shown), the variation indication of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the variation indication of the fifth symbol are started Show the situation. With the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve icon decrease animation is executed, and the reserve icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e2 and the variation icon display area Moving to e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. At the time point shown in FIG. 216 (j), the on-hold icon decrease animation is finished, and the movement of the variation icon e2 and the on-hold icon f2 is complete.

In the present embodiment, a change notice display is displayed as an operation response display of the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is not operated during the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136, the change preview display and the change candidate display may not be displayed.
(Example 12)
Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 12 of the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 217 (a) to 217 (o). Each of FIGS. 217 (a) and (c) to (o) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 217 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the variation display of the fifth symbol in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Has been done. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 217 (a), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0, so the reserve icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f. The reserve icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 reserve icon display area g, and the number of reservations is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N by the numbers "1" and "0". The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a fluctuation icon e1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e. The aspect of the variation icon e1 is white and circular. In addition, the production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 217 (b) shows a state immediately before the gaming ball wins in the special figure 1 starting opening 230. In this example, one special game ball is won in the special figure 1 start opening 230 during the special figure 1 change game, and the reserve of the special figure 1 is increased by one.

  FIG. 217 (c) shows the state of effect display immediately after one game ball has won a special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a numeral image of "2" is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by one to two. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the pending icon increase animation is started. In the on-hold icon increase animation, a on-hold icon f2 corresponding to the increased on-hold appears to be gradually moved from the bottom toward the second area of the special view 1 on-hold icon display area f. The display start of "2" which is the number of reservations of the special figure 1 in the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the display start of the suspension icon increase animation are simultaneous, Almost at the same time. The reserve icon f2 is displayed in a circular shape (hereinafter referred to as a “white flickering circular shape” (indicated by vertical hatching of thin vertical lines in FIG. 217) that becomes white when lit. The white flickering circular aspect is an aspect which is more easily changed to a blue circular, a green circular, a red circular, or an iridescent circular aspect than the white circular aspect.

  FIG. 217 (d) shows a state in which the on-hold icon increase animation has ended. The move of the hold icon f2 to the second area of the special view 1 hold icon display area f is completed, and the move completion of the hold icon f2 to the second area is the end of the hold icon increase animation. Further, after the end of the pending icon increase animation, the change notice r1 is displayed on the left side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The change notice display r1 is displayed overlapping the change display of the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a. The change notice display r1 is a display including a character display of Yoshimune (hereinafter referred to as "Yoshimune") and a display imitating a sign (hereinafter referred to as a "signboard"). Is displayed in the signboard, and it is suggested that the mode of the holding icon changes during the next special drawing movement game. Similar to the change notice display j shown in FIG. 208 and the like, the change notice display r1 of the present example is a display for giving a notice that the mode of the hold icon changes. In this example, the change notice display r1 is a display for giving notice that the hold icon f2 in the form of white blinking changes. Note that the hold icon for the change notice of the change notice r1 may be in the form of white blinking. The change notice display r1 may be started during the hold icon increase animation or may be started simultaneously with the end of the hold icon increase animation.

  FIG. 217 (e) shows a state in which the character string image in the signboard of the change notice display r1 is erased. The character string image in the signboard is erased during the final stage of the special figure change game and the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol. Note that the change notice display r1 is displayed overlapping the decorative symbol in the temporary stop display also during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 217 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 6" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. In addition, the fifth symbol of the “7-6-6” combination is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. During the stop display of the decorative symbol, the change notice display r1 is displayed overlapping with the “decoration 7” displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the frame display surrounding it.

  In FIG. 217 (g), when the special figure 1 variation game is started by the special figure 1 display device (not shown), the variation indication of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the variation indication of the fifth symbol are started Show the situation. With the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve icon decrease animation is executed, and the reserve icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f becomes the variation icon e2 and the variation icon display area Moving to e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon decrease animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icon f2 is completed. After the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, the change notice display r1 is displayed overlapping with the variation display of the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a. As described above, except during stop display of the decorative symbol, the change notice display r1 is displayed overlapping with the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, the character string image of “Hear 1! Blue!” Is displayed in the sign of the change notice display r 1, and it is suggested that the hold icon f 2 corresponding to the hold 1 may change to a blue circle. There is. The character string image in the signboard of the change notice display r1 after FIG. 217 (g) is a display of a change candidate display. The pending icon f2 may change to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display indicated by the character string image in the signboard.

  FIG. 217 (h) shows a state where Yoshimune r2 with a bow and arrow is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Yoshimune r2 is a display corresponding to Yoshimune n and the change item o shown in FIG. 209 and the like, and is a display for changing the change preview display r1.

  FIG. 217 (i) shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune r2 shoots an arrow is displayed. The arrow is flying toward the sign of the change notice r1.

  FIG. 217 (j) shows a state in which the display of the effect image m4 is started so as to overlap substantially the entire signboard of the change notice display r1. When an arrow is stuck on the signboard of the change notice display r1, the display of the effect image m4 is started. A display is performed in which the mode of the change notice display r1 changes according to the effect image m4.

  FIG. 217 (k) shows a state in which the effect image m4 is erased. After the effect image m4 is erased, a change notification display r1 is displayed in which the character string image in the signboard has changed to "H01! Red !!!". The character string image in the signboard of the change notice display r1 suggests that the hold icon f2 corresponding to the hold 1 may be changed to a red circle.

  FIG. 217 (l) shows a state in which Yoshimune r2 is erased. When Yoshimune r2 is erased, the change display for the preliminary change display r1 is not performed any more. In addition, when Yoshimune r2 is continuously displayed, there may be a case where the change display intended for the change preview display r1 is displayed again.

  FIG. 217 (m) shows a state in which the hold change display has been started. In the hold change display of this example, the effect image m5 is displayed around the hold icon f2 which is the change target. The display start of the effect image m5 is the display start of the hold change display.

  FIG. 217 (n) shows a state in which the hold change display has ended. The deletion of the effect image m5 is the end of the hold change display, and after the hold change display, the mode of the hold icon f2 changes to a red circle. As described above, the hold icon f2 changes to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display indicated by the character string image in the signboard. The mode of the hold icon f2 may change during the hold change display, or may change simultaneously with the end of the hold change display.

  FIG. 217 (o) shows a state in which the change annunciation display r 1 has been erased. When the change notice display r1 is erased, the hold change display for the hold icon f2 is not performed any more. In addition, the pending | holding change display which makes object for pending | holding icon f2 the object display different from the production | presentation display shown in FIG. 217 may be performed also after erasure | elimination of the change alerting display r1.

In the present embodiment, the change candidate display is displayed in the change preview display r3. The degree of expectation of the change candidate display is set for each color in the same manner as the change notice icon k etc., and is set to be higher in the order of “blue”, “green”, “red”, “gold”, and “rainbow”. ing. The change candidate display including the character image of “blue” shown in FIGS. 217 (g) to (i) is the first display, and the change including the character image of “red” shown in FIGS. 217 (k) to (n) The candidate display may be a second display.
(Example 13)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 218 (a) to (r) and 219 (a) to (r), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described. Drawing 218 (a)-(r) and Drawing 219 (a)-(r) are figures showing the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example in time series. FIG. 218 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the special game 1 variation game result of the success or failure judgment is a disconnection. "Is displayed stopped (confirmed display, main stopped display). Further, the fifth symbol of the “7-7-1” combination is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The inside of the frame display surrounding each decoration pattern of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1" is displayed in red, and a preview of the red chance eye is read. In this embodiment, during the execution of the advance notice for the chance eye, the character string image of "Stop with the same color symbol ..." is displayed in the display area h, and the advance notice for the opportunity eye is executed. It is suggested. In the present example, the target of the advance notice of the chance eye glance is the reserve 1 of the special figure 1. In addition, since the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0, the reserve icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f, and the special figure 2 reserve icon display area g is displayed. The holding icon is not displayed, and the number of holdings is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N by the numbers “1” and “0”. The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a red circle. In addition, a fluctuation icon e1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e. The aspect of the variation icon e1 is white and circular. In addition, Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In the present embodiment, Yoshimune n is a character display that is always displayed. In addition, the production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 218 (b) shows the state in which the fluctuation icon e1 is erased. In the present embodiment, the variation icon is erased during stop display of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol and the fifth symbol.

  In FIG. 218 (c), when the special figure 1 variation game is started by the special figure 1 display device (not shown), the variation indication of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the variation indication of the fifth symbol are started Show the situation. In FIG. 218 (c), the downward white arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display devices 208La to 208c display the fluctuation display at a speed that allows the player to recognize the decorative symbol. Represents the state of being In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the hold icon decrease animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the fluctuation icon e2 and the change icon Move to the display area e. The arrow in the figure represents the trajectory of the fluctuation icon e2. At the time point shown in FIG. 218 (c), the hold icon decrease animation has ended, and the movement of the variation icon e2 has been completed.

  FIG. 218 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, after the variation display is displayed at such a speed that the player can not recognize the decorative symbol, the variation of the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a The display is changing to a low speed fluctuation display.

  FIG. 218 (e) shows a state immediately before the speed of the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a becomes slow and “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. In the figure, a downward arrow shown below "decoration 7" indicates that a low-speed variable display is displayed so that the player can recognize the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 218 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode of slightly swinging up and down in the left symbol display area 208a. In the drawing, two wavy lines illustrated at the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 7" indicate that the "decoration 7" is slightly swaying up and down. In addition, the variation display of the decorative symbol in the right symbol display area 208c is changed to the low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 218 (g) shows a state immediately before the speed of the variable display in the right symbol display area 208c is further reduced, and “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. In the figure, a downward arrow shown below "decoration 6" indicates that a low-speed variable display in which the player can recognize the decorative symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 218 (h) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode of being slightly shaken up and down in the right symbol display area 208c. In the drawing, two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the "decoration 6" indicate that the "decoration 6" is slightly swaying up and down.

  FIG. 218 (i) shows a state where the speed of the variable display has been changed so that the player can recognize the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decoration symbol of "CONTINUED" including the character string image of "CONTINUED" is displayed just before temporary stop display. The downward arrow illustrated below the "continuation" decorative symbol in the drawing indicates that a low-speed variable display that allows the player to recognize the decorative symbol is displayed. The decorative symbol of "CONTINUED" is displayed when the pseudo rendition display is performed. The pseudo ream is an effect of performing pseudo fluctuation as if variable display of a decorative symbol has been performed a plurality of times during one special figure fluctuation game, and is a notice effect of the fluctuation. The variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIGS. 218 (c) to (j) is the first pseudo variation. It is comprised so that a big hit design aspect may be easy to be stopped and displayed in design change display, so that the number of continuations of the pseudo run of the pseudo change is large.

  FIG. 218 (j) shows a state in which the decorative symbol of "CONTINUED" is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a temporary stop manner in a mode of slightly swinging up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated at the upper left and lower right of the "continuation" decorative symbol indicate that the "continuation" decorative symbol is slightly swaying up and down. The decorative symbol of "decoration 7-continuation-decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 218 (k) shows a state in which the cut-in display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this example, the cut-in display is displayed before the second pseudo fluctuation is started. The cut-in indication is displayed overlapping with the decoration pattern of "decoration 7-continuation-decoration 6".

  FIG. 218 (l) shows the state immediately before the second pseudo fluctuation is started. The cut-in display has been erased, and an image of “× 2” is displayed at the lower left of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is reported that the second pseudo fluctuation is to be started. The image of “× 2” is displayed overlapping with a part of “decoration 7”.

  FIG. 218 (m) shows a state where the second pseudo fluctuation has been started. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variable display is performed at such a speed that the player can not recognize the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 218 (n) shows a state in which the “x 2” image is reduced.

  FIG. 218 (o) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol in the left and right symbol display areas 208 a and 208 c is changed to the low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 218 (p) shows a state in which “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. By the temporary stop display of the "decoration 4", the reach effect display in which the "decoration 4" is displayed is started in the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, a character string image of "if SP stops ..." is displayed in the display area h, and it is suggested that SP (super) reach is started when the decoration pattern of "SP" is displayed. ing.

  FIG. 218 (q) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b has changed to the low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 218 (q) shows a state in which the decorative symbol of "SP" including the character string image of "SP" is displayed on the middle symbol display area 208b temporarily. The decorative design of "SP" is displayed when SP reach is started.

  FIG. 219 (a) shows a state following on from FIG. 218 (q). In FIG. 219 (a), SP reach is started, the left symbol display area 208a is reduced to the upper left corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol display area 208c is displayed as the first decorative symbol display. It is reduced to the upper right corner of the display area of the device 208L. During SP reach, the frame display surrounding the decoration pattern is hidden.

  FIG. 219 (b) shows a state where candidates for the development destination of the SP reach are displayed. A character string image of "What is your development destination?" Is displayed at the top of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a candidate display s1 is displayed on the left of the display area, and a candidate display is on the right of the display area. s2 is displayed. The candidate display s1 includes a character string image of “compare with drink”, and the candidate display s2 reports that the candidate of the development destination is the effect of the comparison with drink. Further, the candidate display s2 includes a character string image of "Bowling", and the candidate display s2 reports that the candidate of the development destination is the effect of the bowling. The number of “★” images included in the candidate displays s1 and s2 is a display that indicates the jackpot reliability of each of the effects. In this example, one image of “★” is included in the candidate display s1, and two images of “★” are included in the candidate display s2. The big hit reliability is set high. In addition, roulette display is displayed between the candidate displays s1 and s2.

  FIG. 219 (c) shows a state in which roulette display is started. During roulette display, the arrow in the roulette display is rotated clockwise. In the figure, the arrows illustrated at the upper and lower sides of the roulette display indicate that the arrows in the roulette display are rotating clockwise. Moreover, the character string image of "Iku" is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The character string image is a display that suggests that the change display of the candidate display is started.

  FIG. 219 (d) shows a state in which the change item o is started to be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In the present embodiment, the change item o is used for the change display in which the aspect of the candidate display s1, s2 changes.

  FIG. 219 (e) shows a state in which the animation in which the change item o is thrown by Yoshimune n is displayed. In this example, the target of the change display is the candidate display s1, and the change item o is flying toward the candidate display s1. In the figure, the left-pointing arrow illustrated to the right of the change item o represents the trajectory of the change item o.

  FIG. 219 (f) shows a state in which the change item o is displayed overlapping with the candidate display s1. After the change item o is displayed overlapping with the candidate display s1, the change display in which the mode of the candidate display s1 changes is started.

  FIG. 219 (g) shows a state in which the change item o is deleted and the display of the effect image m6 is started instead. The effect image m6 is displayed so as to overlap the character of the candidate display s1 and the entire “★” portion. By the display of the effect image m6, a change display in which the mode of the candidate display s1 changes is performed.

  FIG. 219 (h) shows a state in which the change display has ended. The deletion of the effect image m6 is the end of the change display. In the candidate display s1, three character string images of “Kenou” and “★” are displayed, and the mode of the candidate display s1 is changed. The candidate display s1 after the change display is informed that the candidate for the development destination is an effect of a sword-austral confrontation. Further, three “★” s are displayed in the candidate display s1, and the direction of the sword-aurage confrontation is set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the effect of the bowling.

  FIG. 219 (i) shows a state where the blessing effect that succeeded in the change display is being executed. The aspect of Yoshimune n displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to an aspect where a guts pose is performed, and the blessing effect is performed by Yoshimune n which has a guts pose. In addition, the effect of the change display of the candidate display s1 may be provided with the effect of the failure pattern in which the aspect of the candidate display s1 does not change. When the effect of the change display of the candidate display is a success pattern, the effect indicated by the candidate display after the change display is higher in the jackpot reliability than the effect shown by the candidate display before the change display. Further, the effect indicated by the candidate display (candidate display s1) after the change display may have a higher jackpot expectation than the effect shown by the candidate display (candidate display s2) that is not the target of the change display.

  FIG. 219 (j) shows a state in which it is reported that the development destination is an effect of a swordsman confrontation. The arrow in the roulette display is stopped in the direction (left direction) pointing to the candidate display s1, and it is informed that the development destination is an effect of the sword-austral confrontation.

  FIG. 219 (k) shows a state in which it is reported that the development destination is an effect of a swordsman confrontation. The effect image m7 is displayed so as to surround the candidate display s1, and it is informed that the development destination is an effect of a sword-austral confrontation.

  FIG. 219 (l) shows a state immediately before the staging of the sword match is started. Prior to the start of the presentation of the swords-masters confrontation, the character string image of "Development destination?", Candidate displays s1 and s2, roulette display, and Yoshimune n are erased.

  FIG. 219 (m) shows a state in which the presentation of the sword-austral showdown has been started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation in which a sword player appears is displayed.

  FIG. 219 (n) shows a state where the confrontation between Yoshimune and the swordsman has been started. The direction of the sword-austral confrontation is a direction in which an animation in which Yoshimune and a swordsman make a duel is displayed. A character display of Yoshimune is displayed on the left side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a character display of a swordsman is displayed on the right side of the display area. Further, in the present example, the fluctuation icon e2 is displayed also during the production of the sword-master confrontation. Note that the pedestal display in the variation icon display area e may be displayed also during the production of the sword-master confrontation.

  FIG. 219 (o) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which Yoshimune and Ken-ai have cut each other is displayed.

  FIG. 219 (p) shows a state in which an animation of a scene where Yoshimune has won the confrontation is displayed. While the scene is displayed, Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 219 (q) shows a state in which the effect of the sword match is ended and “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The end of the presentation of the sword battle is the end of the SP reach, and after the end of the SP reach, temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” is started. The fluctuation icon e2 is erased during the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". Note that the fluctuation icon e2 may be displayed while the temporary stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" is performed.

  FIG. 219 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The decision result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit ("special figure C"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" which is a big hit symbol aspect indicating that the success / failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game has been a big hit is stopped and displayed. Further, the fifth symbol of the "4-4-4" combination is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Moreover, when the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 fluctuation game is a big hit, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is lighted in a big hit light emission mode.

In this embodiment, the candidate display of the development destination changes. The candidate display changes to a display showing an effect display that is higher in big hit reliability than before the change. Note that the effect display shown in FIG. 218 and FIG. 219 can be performed after the change display of the holding icon, the fluctuation icon, and the change candidate display shown in FIGS. 208 to 217 is performed.
(Example 14)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 220 (a) to (p) and FIGS. 221 (a) to (h), a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a fourteenth example of the present embodiment will be described. Each of FIGS. 220 (a), (c), (d), (f) to (p) and FIGS. 221 (a), (b), (d) to (h) is a pachinko machine according to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows 100 by a time series. FIG. 220 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the variation display of the fifth symbol in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Has been done. In addition, since the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0, the reserve icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f, and the special figure 2 reserve icon display area g is displayed. The holding icon is not displayed, and the number of holdings is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N by the numbers “1” and “0”. The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a fluctuation icon e1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e. The aspect of the variation icon e1 is white and circular. In addition, the production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 220 (b) shows a state immediately before the gaming ball wins in the special view 1 start opening 230. In this example, one special game ball is won in the special figure 1 start opening 230 during the special figure 1 change game, and the reserve of the special figure 1 is increased by one.

  FIG. 220 (c) shows the state of effect display immediately after one game ball has won in the special figure 1 start opening 230. FIG. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a numeral image of "2" is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by one to two. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the pending icon increase animation is started. In the on-hold icon increase animation, a on-hold icon f2 corresponding to the increased on-hold appears to be gradually moved from the bottom toward the second area of the special view 1 on-hold icon display area f. The display start of "2" which is the number of reservations of the special figure 1 in the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the display start of the suspension icon increase animation are simultaneous, Almost at the same time. The aspect of the hold icon f2 is white and circular. Further, in the present embodiment, the button icon t1 is started to be displayed together with the hold icon f2 by the hold icon increase animation. The button icon t1 is a display imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and is displayed in red. The button icon t1 is displayed above the hold icon f2 and moves upward with the hold icon f2. The button icon t1 may be part of the hold icon f2, or the button icon t1 may be displayed as the hold icon f2.

  FIG. 220 (d) shows a state in which the on-hold icon increase animation has ended. The hold icon f2 has been moved to the second area of the special view 1 hold icon display area f, and the button icon t1 has been moved. The movement completion of the hold icon f2 to the second area and the movement completion of the button icon t1 are the end of the hold icon increase animation. When the button icon t1 completes the movement, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. After this, while the button icon t1 is being displayed, it is the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The button icon t1 is a display prompting the player to operate the chance button 136. In addition, the chance button 136 is illuminated in red when the operation valid period starts.

  FIG. 220 (e) shows the state immediately before the player operates the chance button 136. FIG. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation valid period.

  FIG. 220 (f) shows the state of effect display immediately after the player operates the chance button 136. FIG. When the chance button 136 is operated and the operation is accepted, the button icon t1 is deleted, and instead, the change notice display r3 of the image imitating the signboard is started to be displayed above the hold icon f2. Thus, the display of the change notice may be started when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the hold icon in the form of the button icon is displayed. The change advance notice r3 is displayed in contact with the hold icon f2 which is the target of the hold change display. Further, the change notice display r3 is displayed overlapping with the change display of the decorative symbol. A character string image of "blue or red" is displayed in the change notice display r3, and the character string image is a change candidate display. As such, the change advance notice may include a change candidate indication. In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated once, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and the red light emission of the chance button 136 ends.

  In FIG. 220 (g), the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the decorative symbol in the left symbol display region 208a, and "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle right symbol display regions 208b and 208c. The state of temporary stop display is shown. The change notice display r3 is displayed overlapping the change display of the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 220 (h) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a. The change advance notice r3 is displayed overlapping with the "decor 7" in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 220 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 6" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. In addition, the fifth symbol of the “7-6-6” combination is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. During the stop display of the decorative symbol, the change notice display r3 is displayed overlapping the “decoration 7” displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the frame display surrounding it.

  In the case of FIG. 220 (j), the variation display of the decoration symbol, the fourth design, and the variation display of the fifth design are started in conjunction with the special figure 1 variation game being started by the special figure 1 display 212 not shown. Show the situation. In addition, illustration of the fluctuation icon deletion animation displayed during non-execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is omitted. The fluctuation icon e1 is erased by the fluctuation icon erasing animation. Further, in the change display of the decorative symbol, the change notice display r3 is displayed overlapping the change display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 220 (k) shows a state in which the hold icon decrease animation has been started. Due to the pending icon decrease animation, the pending icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 pending icon display area f becomes the variation icon e2 and moves to the variation icon display area e, and the special figure 1 pending icon display area f The hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of (2) moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The change notice display r3 moves along with the hold icon f2.

  FIG. 220 (l) shows a state in which the hold icon decrease animation has ended. The movement of the change icon e2 and the hold icon f2 is complete. After the end of the pending icon decrease animation, the display of a princess character (hereinafter referred to as "princess") r4 is started on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The princess r4 is a display that suggests that the change candidate display changes. Note that the princess r4 may be started to be displayed simultaneously with the start of variation of the decorative symbol, may be started to be displayed during the hold icon reduction animation, or may be started to be displayed simultaneously with the end of the hold icon reduction animation. .

  FIG. 220 (m) shows a state in which it is notified that the change display of the change candidate display is started. A character string image of "change" is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and it is informed that the change display is to be started.

  FIG. 220 (n) shows a state in which change display of the change candidate display is started. In the change display, an animation in which the change preview display r3 rotates is displayed. The start of the animation in which the change notice display r3 rotates is the start of the change display. It should be noted that the player may be able to recognize the character string image (“blue or red” or “green or red”) of the change candidate display at the time of the change display.

  FIG. 220 (o) shows a state in which the change display of the change candidate display has ended. The change candidate display included in the change preview display r3 changes from “blue or red” to “green or red” character string image. The end of the animation in which the change advance notice r3 rotates is the end of the change display.

  FIG. 220 (p) shows a state in which the princess r4 is erased. Even after the deletion of the princess r4, the change display of the change candidate display may be performed by another effect display different from the effect display shown in FIG.

  FIG. 221 (a) shows the state following FIG. 220 (p). In FIG. 221 (a), the button image and the gauge image are displayed overlapping the change candidate display in the change preview display r3. The operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started as soon as the button image and the gauge image are displayed. The button image is displayed in red, and the chance button 136 is illuminated in red during the operation valid period.

  FIG. 221 (b) shows the state during the operation valid period. The length of the blue portion of the gauge image q2 is shortened, and it is informed that the remaining time of the button acceptance period is shorter than the initial time. In the gauge image q2, the blue portion becomes shorter toward the left as the operation effective period passes.

  FIG. 221 (c) shows the state immediately before the player operates the chance button 136. FIG. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation valid period.

  FIG. 221 (d) shows the state of effect display immediately after the player operates the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is operated and the operation is accepted, the button image and the gauge image are erased, and instead, the effect image m6 is started to be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change display of the change candidate display is performed by the display of the effect image m6.

  FIG. 221 (e) shows a state in which the change candidate display has ended. The deletion of the effect image m6 is the end of the change display of the change candidate display. The change candidate display is changed to the “red” character image. The change candidate display is a display that suggests that the pending icon f2 changes to a red circle.

  FIG. 221 (f) shows a state in which the hold change display has been started. In the hold change display of this example, the effect image m5 is displayed around the hold icon f2 which is the change target. The display start of the effect image m5 is the display start of the hold change display.

  FIG. 221 (g) shows a state in which the hold change display has ended. The deletion of the effect image m5 is the end of the hold change display, and after the hold change display, the mode of the hold icon f2 changes to a red circle. Thus, the hold icon f2 changes to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display indicated by the character image in the signboard. The mode of the hold icon f2 may change during the hold change display, or may change simultaneously with the end of the hold change display.

  FIG. 221 (h) shows a state in which the change annunciation display r3 has been erased. When the change notice display r3 is erased, the hold change display for the hold icon f2 is not performed any more. Note that, even after the change advance notice display r3 is erased, a hold change display targeting the hold icon f2 may be performed by an effect display different from the effect display shown in FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 (i) to 221 (k), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment will be described. Each figure of FIG. 221 (i)-(k) is a figure which shows the pachinko machine 100 by this modification in a time series. FIGS. 221 (i) to 221 (k) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 220 (g) to 220 (i), respectively, except that the ball removal display er1 is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 221 (i) to 221 (k), the ball removal display er1 is displayed overlapping with the decorative symbol and the change notice display r3. The ball removal indication er1 is displayed when the lower plate 128 is filled with gaming balls and a lower plate full error has occurred. The ball removal display er1 is a display for notifying the lower tray full error, and is a display for prompting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. As described above, the error display such as the ball removal display er1 etc. is displayed overlapping the decorative symbol, the change notice display r3, and the change candidate display. In addition, error displays other than the ball removal display er1, for example, a door release error display for notifying a door release error, an error display for notifying abnormal winning or unfair winning, an error display for notifying magnetic detection or magnetic field detection, etc. It may be displayed overlapping with the symbol, the change notice display r3, and the change candidate display. In addition, the ball omission display er1 and these error displays may be displayed overlapping with all the effect displays other than the decoration symbol, the change notice display r3, and the change candidate display.
(Example 15)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 222 (a) to 222 (e), a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described. Each of FIGS. 222 (a) to 222 (e) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 222 (a) shows a state in which a display in which Yoshimune n has a change item display o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o in this example is a display used for the hold change display of the hold icon f1. In addition, a blue circular change notice icon k is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 222 (b) shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws a change item o toward the hold icon f1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is flying toward the hold icon f1, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 222 (b). In the figure, the left upward arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 222 (c) shows a state in which the display in which the change item o collides with the hold icon f1 is displayed. The change item o is displayed overlapping a part of the hold icon f1.

  FIG. 222 (d) shows a state in which the change item o is erased and the effect image m is displayed overlapping the entire reserve icon f1. When the change item o is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change item o is erased and the effect image m is displayed instead. By the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 222 (e) shows the state in which the effect image m is erased. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the state of the hold icon f1 changes from a white circle to a blue circle because the hold change display is performed. In this example, the mode of the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the prefetch notice changes to the same blue circle as the change notice icon k. A plurality of types of change candidate displays are provided, and the aspect of the variation icon may change to an aspect corresponding to one of the plurality of types of change candidate displays. In addition, since the change notice icon k is blue, the hold icon f1 is also blue, and the mode of the change notice icon k and the mode of the hold icon f1 are the same, the hold change display using the change notice icon k is a hold icon Although it is not used for the pending | holding change display which makes f1 object, it may be used for the change display which makes the white circular fluctuation icon e1 object.

As in the present embodiment, the change item o may be used for the change display of the hold icon. The aspect of the hold icon changes to an aspect corresponding to the change candidate display.
(Example 16)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 222 (f) to 222 (j), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described. Each of FIGS. 222 (f) to 222 (j) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 222 (f) shows a state in which a display in which Yoshimune n has a change item display o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o in this example is a display used for the change display of the change icon e1. In addition, a blue circular change notice icon k is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 222 (g) shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws a change item o toward the hold icon f1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is flying toward the change icon e1, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 222 (g). In the figure, the left upward arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 222 (h) shows a state in which the display in which the change item o collides with the change icon e1 is displayed. The change item o is displayed overlapping a part of the change icon e1.

  FIG. 222 (i) shows a state in which the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed overlapping the entire change icon e1. When the change item o is overlapped with part of the change icon e1, the change item o is erased and the effect image m is displayed instead. By the display of the effect image m, a change display in which the aspect of the change icon e1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 222 (j) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display is performed, whereby the aspect of the change icon e1 changes from a white circle to a blue circle. In this example, the aspect of the change icon e1 changes to the same blue circle as the change notice icon k. A plurality of types of change candidate displays are provided, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display of the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

As in the present embodiment, the change item o may be used for the change display of the change icon. The aspect of the variation icon changes to the aspect corresponding to the change candidate display. Although the change notice icon k is displayed in the present embodiment, the effect display shown in FIGS. 222 (f) to 222 (j) may be performed even when the change notice icon k is not displayed.
(Example 17)
Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each of FIGS. 222 (k) to 222 (o) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 222 (k) shows a state in which a display in which Yoshimune n has a change item o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 222 (l) shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws a change item o toward a change notice icon k is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is flying toward the change notice icon k, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 222 (g). In the figure, the left upward arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 222 (m) shows a state in which the change item o is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the present embodiment, the change item o passes the change notice icon k without colliding with the change notice icon k.

  FIG. 222 (n) shows a state in which the display in which the change item o has passed the change notice icon k without colliding with the change notice icon k is displayed. In the case of the effect of the failure pattern in which the change display of the change notice icon k is not performed, the change item o passes the change notice icon k without colliding with the change notice icon k.

FIG. 222 (o) shows a state in which the change item o has been erased. The change item o moves to the left and is erased in a manner of disappearing out of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. As in the present embodiment, the change display of the change candidate display may be provided with a failure pattern in which the change candidate display does not change. In addition, also about the change display of a pending | holding icon and a fluctuation icon, the failure pattern which an aspect does not change may be provided.
(Example 18)
Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the example 18 of the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 223 (a) to 223 (o). Each of FIGS. 223 (a) to 223 (o) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 223 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the variation display of the fifth symbol in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Has been done. In addition, at the time shown in FIG. 223 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0, so the reserve icon f1 is displayed in the special view 1 reserve icon display area f. The reserve icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 reserve icon display area g, and the number of reservations is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N by the numbers "1" and "0". The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a fluctuation icon e1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e. The aspect of the variation icon e1 is white and circular. In addition, a change notice icon k is displayed on the sub surface device 700, and a princess n1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The princess n1 is a display that suggests changing the type of the change candidate display. In addition, the production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 223 (b) shows a state in which a display in which the princess n1 has a change item display o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is a display that suggests changing the type of change candidate display.

  FIG. 223 (c) shows a state in which an animation in which the princess n1 throws a change item o toward the change notice icon k is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is flying toward the change notice icon k, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 223 (c). In the figure, the left upward arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 223 (d) shows a state in which the change item o is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 223 (e) shows a state in which a display in which the change item o collides with the change notice icon k is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change item o is displayed overlapping a part of the change notice icon k.

  FIG. 223 (f) shows a state in which the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed overlapping the entire change notice icon k. When the change item o is overlapped with a part of the change notice icon k, the change item o is erased and the effect image m is displayed instead. The display of the effect image m displays a change display in which the type of the change notice icon k changes.

  FIG. 223 (g) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display causes the type of the change notice icon k to change from blue to red. As described above, there is a case where the change candidate display of the blue circle is changed to the change candidate display of the red circle.

  FIG. 223 (h) shows a state where the princess n1 is displayed even after the change display of the change candidate display. When the princess n1 is continuously displayed, the change display of the change candidate display is performed again.

  Since the effect display shown in FIGS. 223 (i) to 223 (m) is the same effect display as the effect display shown in FIGS. 223 (b) to 223 (g), the description thereof is omitted. In this embodiment, the change display of the change candidate display is performed again.

  FIG. 223 (n) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the type of the change notice icon k changes from a red circle to a gold circle due to the change display. As described above, there are cases where the red circle change candidate display changes to the golden circle change candidate display.

  FIG. 223 (o) shows a state in which the princess n1 is erased. When the princess n1 is erased, the change display for the change notice icon k is not performed any more.

In the present embodiment, the princess n1 is displayed when the change display of the change candidate display is performed. In this case, the change display of the change candidate display is always performed, and the change candidate display changes to a type with a high degree of expectation. When change display of the change candidate display is performed, change candidate display is expected when the change display of the change candidate display is performed, rather than when the change display of the change candidate display is performed. There is a tendency to change to a higher type. For example, when change display of the change candidate display is performed, the change display of the change candidate display is performed rather than the case where Yoshimune n is displayed, and when the princess n1 is displayed, the blue change candidate is displayed. The display is likely to change to a green change candidate display. The same applies to the case where change display of the hold icon or the change icon is performed, and the change of the hold icon or the change icon when change display of the hold icon or the change icon is performed than in the case where Yoshimune n is displayed. In the case where the princess n1 is displayed when the display is performed, the hold icon or the change icon is more likely to change to a mode in which the degree of expectation is high. In addition, when the princess n1 is erased, the change display by the princess n1 is not performed during the special figure 1 fluctuation game, and when the princess n1 continues to be displayed, the change display using the princess n1 may be performed again. There is. When the change display is performed twice or more, the target of the change display may be different for each change display.
(Example 19)
Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 (a) to 224 (g). FIGS. 224 (a) to 224 (g) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 224 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in the fourth symbol lamp i1, and the variation display of the fifth symbol in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Has been done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 224 (a), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 0, so the reserve icon f1 is displayed in the special view 1 reserve icon display area f. The reserve icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 reserve icon display area g, and the number of reservations is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N by the numbers "1" and "0". The aspect of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a fluctuation icon e1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area e. The aspect of the variation icon e1 is white and circular. In addition, the display of the treasure box u1 is started on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, the production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 224 (b) shows a state in which the treasure box u1 is opened and an animation in which the pseudo link icon u2 appears from the treasure box u1 is displayed. In the figure, the upward arrow illustrated below the pseudo link icon u2 represents the locus of the pseudo link icon u2. The pseudo link icon u2 in this example is a display that suggests that pseudo link effect display is performed. The aspect of the pseudo run icon u2 is the aspect of a white square including the letter "N". The aspect of the pseudo run icon u2 is provided with a white square, a blue square, a green square, a red square, a gold square, and an iridescent square. The expectation of the pseudo run icon is set to be higher in the order of white square, blue square, green square, red square, gold square, and iridescent square.

  FIG. 224 (c) shows a state in which the treasure box u1 is erased. The treasure box u1 is a display for causing the pseudo link icon u2 to appear, and is deleted after the pseudo link icon u2 appears. While the treasure chest u1 is not displayed, new icons (except for the hold icon and the change icon) are not displayed.

  FIG. 224 (d) shows a state where activation display of the pseudo link icon u2 is started. The pseudo link icon u2 moves upward and to the right. In the drawing, a right upward arrow illustrated on the left side of the pseudo link icon u2 represents a locus of the pseudo link icon u2.

  FIG. 224 (e) shows a state in which the activation display of the pseudo link icon u2 is displayed. In the activation display of this example, an effect image m5 is displayed around the pseudo link icon u2. The activation display of the pseudo link icon u2 is a display that suggests that the effect display of the pseudo link is performed during the special map change game.

  FIG. 224 (f) shows a state in which the pseudo link icon u2 is erased. When activation display of the pseudo link icon u2 ends, the pseudo link icon u2 is deleted.

  FIG. 224 (g) shows a state in which the decorative symbol of "decoration 7-continuation-decoration 6" is temporarily stopped in symbol display areas 208a to 208 c, and in the same state as the state shown in Fig. 218 (j) is there. The temporary stop indication of the "continuation" decorative symbol suggests that the second pseudo-variation of the pseudo-run is started. After the process shown in FIG. 224 (g), the second pseudo-variation shown in FIG. 218 (k) is performed. In the present embodiment, unlike the embodiment 13 shown in FIG. 218, Yoshimune n is not displayed.

  When the activation display of the pseudo link icon u2 is displayed during the special figure change game, the decorative symbol of “continue” is temporarily stopped during the special figure change game. In addition, when the activation display of the pseudo link icon u2 is displayed during the second pseudo change, the third pseudo change is always performed. In addition, when the activation display of the pseudo run icon u2 is displayed during the third pseudo change, the jackpot symbol aspect may be definitely displayed in the special view change game.

  Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the nineteenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 (h) to (l) and 225 (a) to (o). 224 (h) to (l) and 224 (a) to (o) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 224 (h) shows the same state as FIG. 224 (c).

  FIG. 224 (i) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Yoshimune n in this example is a display that suggests changing the mode of the pseudo link icon u2.

  FIG. 224 (j) shows a state in which a display in which Yoshimune n has a change item display o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is a display that suggests changing the form of the pseudo link icon u2 of this example.

  FIG. 224 (k) shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws a change item o toward the pseudo link icon u2 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is flying toward the pseudo link icon u2 and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the figure, the left upward arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 224 (l) shows a state in which a display in which the change item o collides with the pseudo link icon u2 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change item o is displayed overlapping a part of the pseudo link icon u2.

  FIG. 225 (a) shows the state continuing from FIG. 224 (l). In the eyelid state shown in FIG. 225 (a), the change item o is deleted, and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire pseudo link icon u2. When the change item o is overlapped with a part of the pseudo run icon u2, the change item o is erased and the effect image m is displayed instead. By the display of the effect image m, a change display in which the mode of the pseudo link icon u2 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 225 (b) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the display of the change display changes the aspect of the pseudo run icon u2 from a white square to a red square. The red square of the pseudo run icon is a display for giving notice that the decorative symbol of "continue" is temporarily stopped twice or more after the activation display, and during the second simulation, the red square pseudo run icon is activated. When the display is displayed, it is possible that the fourth pseudo fluctuation is always executed or the big hit symbol form is definitely displayed by the entire rotation reach. In the case where the activation display of the red square pseudo connected icon is displayed during the third pseudo change, the big hit symbol aspect may be definitely displayed in the special view change game. In addition, when not the Yoshimune n but the princess n1 is displayed, the aspect of the pseudo run icon may be changed without fail.

  FIG. 225 (c) shows a state where activation display of the pseudo link icon u2 is started. The pseudo link icon u2 moves upward and to the right. In the drawing, a right upward arrow illustrated on the left side of the pseudo link icon u2 represents a locus of the pseudo link icon u2.

  FIG. 225 (d) shows a state where the activation display of the pseudo link icon u2 is displayed. In the activation display of this example, an effect image m5 is displayed around the pseudo link icon u2. The activation display of the pseudo link icon u2 is a display that suggests that the effect display of the pseudo link is performed during the special map change game.

  FIG. 225 (e) shows a state in which the pseudo link icon u2 is erased. When activation display of the pseudo link icon u2 ends, the pseudo link icon u2 is deleted.

  FIG. 225 (f) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is erased. The same effect display as the effect display shown in FIG. 218 (d) to (m) is displayed after FIG. 225 (f). The illustration and description of the same effect display as the effect display shown in FIGS. 218 (d) to 218 (m) will be omitted.

  FIG. 225 (g) shows a state where the second pseudo fluctuation is being performed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display is displayed at such a speed that the player can not recognize the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 225 (h) shows a state in which the speed of the variable display in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c has become slow.

  FIG. 225 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a and "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 225 (j) shows a state where the speed of the variable display has been changed so that the player can recognize the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decoration symbol of "CONTINUED" including the character string image of "CONTINUED" is displayed just before temporary stop display.

  FIG. 225 (k) shows a state in which the decorative symbol of "CONTINUED" is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b as temporary stop in a mode of slightly swinging up and down. The decorative symbol of "decoration 7-continuation-decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 225 (l) shows a state in which the cut-in display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this example, the cut-in display is displayed before the third pseudo fluctuation is started. The cut-in indication is displayed overlapping with the decoration pattern of "decoration 7-continuation-decoration 6".

  FIG. 225 (m) shows a state immediately before the third pseudo fluctuation is started. The cut-in display has been erased, and an image of “× 3” is displayed at the lower left of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is reported that the second pseudo fluctuation is to be started. The image of “× 3” is displayed so as to overlap with a part of “decoration 7”.

  FIG. 225 (n) shows a state where the third pseudo fluctuation has been started. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variable display is performed at such a speed that the player can not recognize the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 225 (o) shows a state in which the “× 3” image is reduced.

In the present variation, the mode of the pseudo run icon is changed. When the third pseudo fluctuation starts, the SP reach may be developed. In addition, as the number of times of pseudo fluctuation is large, it is easy to be decided and displayed the big hit design feature.
Example 20
Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 20 of the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 226 (a) to 226 (h). FIGS. 226 (a) to 226 (h) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 226 (a) shows the same state as FIG. 211 (f). The change item o is displayed overlapping a part of the change notice icon k1.

  FIG. 226 (b) shows a state in which the change item o has been deleted and the effect image m has been displayed overlapping the entire change notice icon k1. When the change item o is overlapped with a part of the change notice icon k1, the change item o is erased and the effect image m is displayed instead. By the display of the effect image m, a change display in which the type of the change notice icon k1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 226 (c) shows the state in which the effect image m is erased. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display causes the type of the change notification icon k1 to change from blue to green.

  FIG. 226 (d) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is erased. When Yoshimune n is deleted, the change display for the change notice icon k1 is not performed any more. In addition, when Yoshimune n is continuously displayed, the change display for the change notice icon k1 is displayed again.

  FIG. 226 (e) shows the state in which the moving animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon corresponding to the hold targeted for the advance notice. Since the target of the pre-reading notice is the hold 1 of the special view 1, the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold 1 of the special view 1. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k. The change notice icon k2 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 226 (f) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps a part of the hold icon f1. In the drawing, the right downward arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

  FIG. 226 (g) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed overlapping the entire hold icon f2. When the change notice icon k2 is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k2 is erased and the effect image m is displayed instead. By the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 226 (h) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the state of the hold icon f1 changes from a white circle to a green circle due to the hold change display. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the prefetch notice changes to the same green as the change candidate display 2.

  In the present embodiment, change notice icons k1 and k2 of the same type (green circle) are displayed. If the displayed change candidate displays are all of the same type, the aspect of the hold icon or the change icon may change. For example, when the change display of the hold icon or the change icon by the change notice icon k2 is the effect display of failure, the change display of the hold icon or the change icon by the change notice icon k1 becomes the effect display of the success and the hold icon or The aspect of the change icon may change.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 226 (i) to 226 (k), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the example 20 of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 226 (i) to 226 (k) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 226 (i) shows the same state as FIG. 226 (a), and FIG. 226 (j) shows the same state as FIG. 226 (b), so the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 226 (j) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display is performed, so that the type of the change notice icon k1 changes from blue circular to iridescent (indicated by white dot hatching on a black background in FIGS. 208 to 228) It has changed to a circle. In the symbol variation display in which the suspension corresponding to the rainbow colored circular suspension icon is digested and started, the big hit symbol mode is definitely displayed. In addition, when the change display is performed by the rainbow-colored circular change candidate display, the hold icon or the change icon to be changed always becomes the rainbow circular. When the change display is performed by the rainbow circular change candidate display, the pending icon or the change icon that is the change display object is a rainbow, rather than when the change display is performed by the change candidate display other than the rainbow circular change candidate display It is easy to change to the color circular aspect. In addition, at the stage when the iridescent circular change candidate display is displayed, the big hit symbol form may be definitely displayed in the symbol change display during the change or on hold. In addition, the display when the princess n1 is displayed is more likely to change to the rainbow-colored circular change candidate display than when the Yoshimune n is displayed. A character display may be provided that is displayed only when changing the change candidate display to a rainbow circular change candidate display. Note that after the effects are performed in FIGS. 226 (a) and 226 (b), the effects illustrated in FIGS. 213 (e) to (i) may be performed, and the effects illustrated in FIGS. 213 (e) to (i) After the effect is performed, a change display in which the type of the change candidate display changes may be performed.
(Example 21)
Next, a rendering example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the twenty-first embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 227 (a), (c) and (h) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 227 (a) shows the same state as FIG. 220 (d), so the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 227 (b) shows a state immediately before the player operates the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation valid period.

  FIG. 227 (c) shows the state of effect display immediately after the player operates the chance button 136. FIG. When the chance button 136 is operated and the operation is accepted, the button icon t1 is erased, and the effect image m is displayed so as to be overlapped with the hold icon f2. In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated once, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and the red light emission of the chance button 136 ends.

  FIG. 227 (d) shows a state in which the effect image m is erased. The hold change display is performed by the display of the effect image m, and the mode of the hold icon f2 changes from a white circle to a blue circle.

The big hit reliability of the effect display by the change notice display r3 shown in FIG. 220 and FIG. 221 is set higher than the big hit reliability of the hold change display according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that the effect display by the change preview display r3 shown in FIG. 220 and FIG. 221 is more likely to change the hold icon and the fluctuation icon to a high hit reliability mode than the big hit reliability of the hold change display according to this embodiment. In addition, the effect display by the change notice display r3 shown in FIG. 220 and FIG. 221 is more likely to be successful rendering in which the mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes than the big hit reliability of the hold change display according to the present embodiment.
(Example 22)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 227 (e) to (n) and 228 (a) to (h), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the example 22 of the present embodiment will be described. 227 (e) to (l), (n and FIGS. 228 (a) to (h) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. Since the same state as d) is shown, the description is omitted.

  In this example, it is assumed that the chance button 136 is not operated during the special figure 1 change game. In addition, the illustration and the description of the process until “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6” is temporarily stopped will be omitted from FIG. 227 (e). FIG. 227 (f) shows a state in which “decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 6”, which is a misaligned symbol form, is displayed on the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c as a temporary stop.

  FIG. 227 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 6" which is an out-of-pattern aspect indicating that the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 variation game is out is stopped and displayed. In addition, the fifth symbol of the “7-6-6” combination is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is interrupted at the same time as the change stop display of the decorative symbol. Outside the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the button icon t1 is displayed in a white manner and does not emit red light of the chance button 136. In the present embodiment, even while the button icon t1 is being displayed, it is outside the operation valid period of the chance button 136 while the symbol is being displayed (during the change stop). When the next symbol variation display is started, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started again.

  FIG. 227 (h) shows a state in which the variation icon deletion animation has been started. The fluctuation icon e1 is erased in a manner of moving downward and moving out of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 227 (i) shows a state in which the variation icon erasing animation has ended. The erasing completion of the fluctuation icon e1 is the end of the fluctuation icon erasing animation.

  In FIG. 227 (j), as the special figure 1 variation game is started by the special figure 1 display device (not shown), the variation indication of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the variation indication of the fifth symbol are started Show the situation. The number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is one. Also, in FIG. 227 (k), the hold icon decrease animation is started. In the hold icon decrease animation, the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e2 and is moved toward the change icon display area e, and the special figure 1 hold icon display The hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the area f is moved toward the first area of the special view 1 hold icon display area f. In the figure, a right upward arrow illustrated on the lower left of the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icon f2 represents the locus of the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icon f2. In addition, the button icon t1 moves to the right together with the hold icon f2.

  FIG. 227 (k) shows a state in which the on-hold icon reduction animation is completed. The movement completion of the fluctuation icon e2 to the fluctuation icon display area e and the movement completion of the hold icon f2 to the first area are the end of the hold icon reduction animation.

  FIG. 227 (l) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is resumed. During the operation period of the chance button 136, the button icon t1 is displayed in red, and the chance button 136 is illuminated in red.

  FIG. 227 (m) shows a state immediately before the player operates the chance button 136. FIG. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation valid period.

  FIG. 227 (n) shows the state of effect display immediately after the player operates the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is operated and the operation is accepted, the button icon t1 is deleted, and instead, the change notice display r3 of the image imitating the signboard is started to be displayed above the hold icon f2. The change advance notice r3 is displayed in contact with the hold icon f2 which is the target of the hold change display. Further, the change notice display r3 is displayed overlapping with the change display of the decorative symbol. A character string image of "blue or red" is displayed in the change notice display r3, and the character string image is a change candidate display. As such, the change advance notice may include a change candidate indication. In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated once, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and the red light emission of the chance button 136 ends.

  FIG. 228 (a) shows the state following FIG. 227 (n). In FIG. 227 (a), the button image and the gauge image are displayed overlapping the change candidate display in the change preview display r3. The operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started as soon as the button image and the gauge image are displayed. The button image is displayed in red, and the chance button 136 is illuminated in red during the operation valid period.

  FIG. 228 (b) shows the state during the operation effective period. The length of the blue portion of the gauge image q2 is shortened, and it is informed that the remaining time of the button acceptance period is shorter than the initial time. In the gauge image q2, the blue portion becomes shorter toward the left as the operation effective period passes.

  FIG. 228 (c) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has ended. In this example, it is assumed that the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation effective period.

  FIG. 228 (d) shows the state of effect display immediately after the effective period of operation of the chance button 136 ends. When the operation period of the chance button 136 ends, the button image and the gauge image are erased.

  FIG. 228 (e) shows that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is continuing.

  FIG. 228 (f) shows a state in which the hold change display has been started. In the hold change display of this example, the effect image m5 is displayed around the hold icon f2 which is the change target. The display start of the effect image m5 is the display start of the hold change display.

  FIG. 228G shows a state in which the hold change display has ended. The deletion of the effect image m5 is the end of the hold change display, and after the hold change display, the mode of the hold icon f2 changes to a red circle. Thus, the hold icon f2 changes to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display indicated by the character image in the signboard. The mode of the hold icon f2 changes during the hold change display, but may change simultaneously with the end of the hold change display.

  FIG. 228 (h) shows a state in which the change annunciation display r3 has been erased. When the change notice display r3 is erased, the hold change display for the hold icon f2 is not performed any more. Note that, even after the change advance notice display r3 is erased, a hold change display targeting the hold icon f2 may be performed by an effect display different from the effect display shown in FIG.

  When the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation effective period shown in FIGS. 228 (a) and 228 (b), “red” change candidate display is displayed as shown in FIG. 220 (e). It is also possible that the change notice display r3 may be erased without holding change display, or the change icon having the lowest expectation among the plurality of change candidate displays (in this example, green or red) It may be decided to change to an aspect (in this example, green) corresponding to the display.

  Note that, even during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, it is not necessary to display a gauge image (meter image) indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. In this case, the operation valid period may be notified by a button image indicative of an operation suggestion, a mode of an operation suggestion display (such as red display), or a lamp color of an operation means (red light emission). In addition, after the effects shown in FIGS. 227 (e) to (n) are performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 220 (l) to (o) may be performed, and in FIGS. 220 (l) to (o) After the effects shown are performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 228 (a) to (n) may be performed.

  The icon change effect described using FIGS. 193 to 228 can be combined with the transparency effect described using FIGS. 14 to 45. For example, a change candidate display representing a candidate for changing the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon may be displayed by a circular character 251C shown in FIG.

  Alternatively, on the other hand, the transmission liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L) displays the icon change effect described with reference to FIGS. It may be possible to execute the transparentization effect.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 193 to 228.

(1)
Display means (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N);
Storage means capable of storing start information as a hold (for example, a special figure 1 random number value storage area, a special figure 1 hold number storage area, a special figure 2 random number value storage area or a special figure 2 hold number storage area); It is a game console,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of pending icons;
The number of displayed pending icons is configured to notify the number of pendings,
The hold icon can be displayed in a plurality of modes (for example, white circle, blue circle, green circle, red circle, golden circle, rainbow circle).
The hold icon may change from one aspect of the plurality of aspects to another aspect,
The display means displays a plurality of types of change candidate displays (for example, blue circular change candidate display, green circular change candidate display, red circular change candidate display, golden circular change candidate display, iridescent circular Means for displaying change candidate display),
The mode of the hold icon may change to the corresponding mode of one of the plurality of change candidate displays being displayed, one of the change candidate displays,
One of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a first display (for example, a blue circular change notice icon k1),
One of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a second display (for example, a green circular change notice icon k2),
The first display may change to the second display,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table provided with the configuration, the change candidate display may change, and the player may be able to enjoy the effect display by the change candidate display until the change candidate display is erased.

(2)
The gaming machine according to (1) above,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect (for example, a white circle),
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect (for example, blue circle),
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect (for example, a green circle),
The hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second mode is digested, rather than the variable display of the decorative symbol that is started when the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first mode is digested and started The display of the variation of the decorative symbol started to be performed is configured so that the big hit symbol form can be finally determined and displayed,
The hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third mode is digested, rather than the variable display of the decorative symbol that is started when the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second mode is digested and started The display of the variation of the decorative symbol started to be performed is configured so that the big hit symbol form can be finally determined and displayed,
When the second display is displayed, the hold icon displayed in the first mode is configured to be easily changed to the third mode according to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by

(3)
The gaming machine according to (2) above,
When the first display (for example, blue circular change notice icon k1) is displayed, the mode of the reserved icon displayed in the first mode (for example, white circular) changes The aspect of the retention icon is configured to change to the second aspect (for example, a blue circle),
When the second display (for example, green circular change notice icon k2) is displayed, the mode of the reserved icon displayed in the first mode (for example, white circular) changes The aspect of the holding icon is configured to change to the third aspect (for example, a green circle),
A game stand characterized by

(4)
The game console according to (2) or (3) above,
In the case where the second display (for example, a green circle change candidate display) is displayed, the mode of the holding icon displayed in the second mode (for example, a blue circle) changes: The aspect of the retention icon is configured to change to the third aspect (for example, a green circle),
A game stand characterized by

(5)
The game console according to any one of the above (1) to (4),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first character display (for example, Yoshimune n),
The first character display is a display different from the change candidate display,
The first character display is a display different from the hold icon,
The first display is configured to be more easily changed to the second display when the first character display is displayed than when the first character display is not displayed. ing,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the game console having the configuration, it may be possible to expect whether the first character is displayed.

(6)
The gaming machine according to (5) above,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second character display (for example, princess n1),
The second character display is a display different from the change candidate display,
The second character display is a display different from the hold icon,
The first display is configured to be more easily changed to the second display when the second character display is displayed than when the first character display is displayed. ing,
A game stand characterized by

(7)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The display means may display a plurality of the change candidate displays.
A game stand characterized by

(8)
The gaming machine according to (7) above,
When a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to any one of a plurality of the change candidate displays.
A game stand characterized by

(9)
The gaming machine according to (8) above,
One of the plurality of change candidate displays is a first change candidate display (for example, a blue circular change notice icon k1),
One of the plurality of change candidate displays is a second change candidate display (for example, a green circular change notice icon k2),
When the first change candidate display is displayed, the second change candidate display may be started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(10)
The gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (9) above,
When a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the plurality of change candidate displays may change by one change display,
A game stand characterized by

(11)
The gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (10) above,
When a plurality of the change candidate displays are displayed, it is configured to change from the change candidate display corresponding to the aspect of the hold icon having a low jackpot expectation among the plurality of change candidate displays,
The big hit expectation is the big hit expectation of the hold icon after the change,
A game stand characterized by

(12)
The gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (11) above,
When a plurality of the change candidate displays are displayed, one of the plurality of change candidate displays (for example, a blue circular change notice icon k1) is one of the plurality of the change candidate displays. May change to the same type of change candidate display as the change candidate display (for example, the green circular change notice icon k2)
When the plurality of change candidate displays of the same type are displayed more than one when the plurality of change candidate displays of the same type are not displayed, the pending icon changes to an aspect corresponding to the change candidate displays. Configured to be easy to use,
A game stand characterized by

(13)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above (7) to (12),
When a plurality of the change candidate displays are displayed, when the number of displayed change candidate displays decreases, the mode changes to the mode of the hold icon to the mode corresponding to the remaining change candidate displays,
A game stand characterized by

(14)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (13), wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying a change notice (for example, a change notice j).
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the change advance notice display is a notice for giving notice that the change candidate indication is displayed.

(15)
The gaming machine according to (14) above,
The said change notice display is a display displayed over the variable display of the said decorative symbol in two or more successive times,
A game stand characterized by

(16)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (15) above,
Operation means (eg, chance button 136)
The change preview display is started by the operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(17)
The gaming machine according to (16) above,
One of the plurality of aspects is the fourth aspect (for example, the aspect of a button icon),
The fourth aspect is an aspect imitating the operation means,
The display of the change advance notice is started when the operation means is operated in a state where the hold icon of the fourth aspect is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(18)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (17),
The second display does not change to the first display.

(19)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (18),
One of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a third display (for example, rainbow color change candidate display),
When the third display is displayed, the jackpot symbol aspect is determined in the variation display of either one of the variation display of the decoration symbol being executed and the variation display of the decoration symbol being held. A game console characterized in that it is configured to be displayed.

(20)
The gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (19),
A game stand characterized in that the display means is a means including a display device (for example, a third decorative symbol display device 208N) which does not display the variable display of the decorative symbol.

(21)
It is a game console according to any one of the above (1) to (20),
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

  Note that the hold change display of the hold icon, the change display of the change icon, and the change display of the change candidate display illustrated in FIGS. 208 to 228 may be performed by effect display other than the effect display by the effect image, It may be performed instantaneously without effect display.

  In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not be provided, and the effect display shown in FIGS. 208 to 228 may be displayed only with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. , And only one sub display device is provided, the effect display shown in FIG. 208 to FIG. 228 may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the sub display device, or the first decorative symbol display device The effect display shown in FIG. 208 to FIG. 228 may be displayed by 208 L and three or more sub display devices. Note that the effect display shown in FIGS. 208 to 228 may be displayable on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. .

  Here, what has been referred to as a lamp or illumination is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced as long as it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube (the same applies hereinafter).

  For example, the above-described embodiment is also applicable to an enclosed type gaming machine that cyclically uses gaming balls enclosed in a gaming machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and uses the enclosed sphere in circulation in the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The dispensing of the ball may be performed by an electronic display.

  The items described in the above detailed description, in particular, the items described in Embodiments 1 to 22 and the modification may be combined.

  As mentioned above, although the example about a pachinko machine (ball-ball game machine) was mentioned in the above description, the game stand of this invention is not limited to this, For example, the pachinko type pachinko machine shown in FIG. It may be a slot machine shown in FIG. 267, which will also be described later.

  The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.

(Supplementary Note 1)
Display means,
Holding means capable of storing start information as a hold;
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of pending icons;
The number of displayed pending icons is configured to notify the number of pendings,
The hold icon can be displayed in a plurality of ways,
The hold icon may change from one aspect of the plurality of aspects to another aspect,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of change candidate displays,
The mode of the hold icon may change to the corresponding mode of one of the plurality of change candidate displays being displayed, one of the change candidate displays,
One of the plurality of change candidate displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a second display,
The game machine may be characterized in that the first display may change to the second display.
(Supplementary Note 2)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is the third aspect,
The hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second mode is digested, rather than the variable display of the decorative symbol that is started when the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first mode is digested and started The display of the variation of the decorative symbol started to be performed is configured so that the big hit symbol form can be finally determined and displayed,
The hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third mode is digested, rather than the variable display of the decorative symbol that is started when the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second mode is digested and started The display of the variation of the decorative symbol started to be performed is configured so that the big hit symbol form can be finally determined and displayed,
When the second display is displayed, the hold icon displayed in the first mode is configured to be easily changed to the third mode according to the second mode. A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 3)
It is a game stand described in Appendix 2,
In the case where the first display is displayed, if the mode of the hold icon displayed in the first mode changes, the mode of the hold icon changes to the second mode. Is configured and
When the second display is displayed, if the mode of the hold icon displayed in the first mode changes, the mode of the hold icon changes to the third mode. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 4)
It is a game console described in Appendix 2 or 3,
In the case where the second display is displayed, if the mode of the hold icon displayed in the second mode changes, the mode of the hold icon changes to the third mode. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 5)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 4,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first character display,
The first character display is a display different from the change candidate display,
The first character display is a display different from the hold icon,
The first display is configured to be more easily changed to the second display when the first character display is displayed than when the first character display is not displayed. ing,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 6)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 5,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second character display,
The second character display is a display different from the change candidate display,
The second character display is a display different from the hold icon,
The first display is configured to be more easily changed to the second display when the second character display is displayed than when the first character display is displayed. ing,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 7)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 6,
The display means may display a plurality of the change candidate displays.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 8)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 7,
When a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to any one of a plurality of the change candidate displays.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 9)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 8,
One of the plurality of change candidate displays is a first change candidate display,
One of the plurality of change candidate displays is a second change candidate display,
When the first change candidate display is displayed, the second change candidate display may be started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 10)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices 7 to 9,
When a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the plurality of change candidate displays may change by one change display,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 7 to 10, wherein
When a plurality of the change candidate displays are displayed, it is configured to change from the change candidate display corresponding to the aspect of the hold icon having a low jackpot expectation among the plurality of change candidate displays,
The big hit expectation is the big hit expectation of the hold icon after the change,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 7 to 11,
When a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, one change candidate display among the plurality of change candidate displays is the same type of change candidate display as another change candidate display among the plurality of change candidate displays. May change to
When the plurality of change candidate displays of the same type are displayed more than one when the plurality of change candidate displays of the same type are not displayed, the pending icon changes to an aspect corresponding to the change candidate displays. Configured to be easy to use,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 7 to 12,
When a plurality of the change candidate displays are displayed, when the number of displayed change candidate displays decreases, the mode changes to the mode of the hold icon to the mode corresponding to the remaining change candidate displays,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 14)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices 1 to 13,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a change notice display,
The change advance notice display is a display for giving notice that the change candidate indication is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 15)
It is the gaming machine described in the supplementary note 14,
The said change notice display is a display displayed over the variable display of the said decorative symbol in two or more successive times,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 16)
It is a game console described in Appendix 14 or 15,
Equipped with operating means,
The change preview display is started by the operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 17)
It is a game console described in Appendix 16,
One of the plurality of aspects is the fourth aspect,
The fourth aspect is an aspect imitating the operation means,
The display of the change advance notice is started when the operation means is operated in a state where the hold icon of the fourth aspect is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 18)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 17, wherein
The second display may not change to the first display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 19)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 18, wherein
The display of one of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a third display,
When the third display is displayed, the jackpot symbol aspect is determined in the variation display of either one of the variation display of the decoration symbol being executed and the variation display of the decoration symbol being held. Configured to be displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 20)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices 1 to 19,
The display means is a means that includes a display device that does not display the variable display of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 21)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 20, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

  Subsequently, a specific example of the on-hold change effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the effects described using FIGS. 208 to 228 will be described in detail using FIGS. 229 to 243. Reference numerals shown in FIG. 229 to FIG. 243 indicate common components when the same reference numerals as those used heretofore are used. Also, even when different codes are used, they may be common as technical ideas. That is, as the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in FIG. 208 to FIG. 228 to the technical ideas shown in FIG. 229 to FIG. 243, and conversely, FIG. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown to the technical ideas shown in FIG. 208 to FIG. In that case, what attaches | subjects the same code | symbol may be handled as the same component, and may be able to be substituted.

  In the configuration of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIGS. 229 to 243, the point that the holding frame UI is provided in the effect display area 208d is that in the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIGS. Different from the display screen configuration. The holding frame UI can also be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area, and can also be viewed as a user interface providing various information to the player. Further, in the holding frame UI, the variation icon display area e is arranged at the left end, and the holding icon display area is arranged at the right side thereof. In the example shown in FIGS. 229 to 243, only the special view 1 reserve icon display area f is displayed as the reserve icon display area in the non-power-up state, but the special view 2 reserve is displayed together with the special view 1 reserve icon display area f. An icon display area may be displayed. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f, four areas corresponding to the maximum reserve sphere number of the special figure 1 are prepared, and one reserve icon is displayed for each area. In the variation icon display area e, the hold icon display area is higher than the stage provided in each area of the special icon 1 reserve icon display area f and a large stage is prepared, and the variation icon is on this stage Is displayed.

  Here, let us summarize the variation icons again. The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure fluctuation game, which is displayed after the suspension is digested and the special figure fluctuation game is started, in other words, an icon related to a symbol fluctuation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More strictly speaking, when the first hold icon with the oldest start winning moves from the hold icon display area (for example, special figure 1 hold icon display area f) to the change icon display area e, the moving icon is changed to the change icon It may be expressed that the fluctuation icon moves. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variation icon display area e is completed may be referred to as a variation icon. The variation icon is displayed in a display size different from the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may facilitate identification of the change icon and the hold icon, but may be the same size. Also, the change icon may be a display mode associated with the display mode of the hold icon. The fluctuation icon can be notified of the success or failure of the fluctuation according to the display mode (a normal advance notice of the fluctuation), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the fluctuation is notified. Therefore, the fluctuation icon can be viewed as an icon related to holding, and can also be considered as a kind of holding icon in the sense that notification of the success or failure result of the special figure fluctuation game is held. The erase timing may be a timing before, a same timing, or a timing after the timing at which the success or failure result of the change is notified.

  On the other hand, it is possible to make a notice (prefetch notice) as to whether or not the suspension icon corresponding to the suspension icon is digested and started depending on the display mode.

  Also, the holding frame UI is provided with a base icon UIb extending left and right, and the four areas prepared in the holding icon display area should be viewed as an area icon displayed overlapping the base icon UIb from the front side The stage prepared in the variation icon display area can also be viewed as a stage icon displayed superimposed on the base icon UIb from the front side.

  Furthermore, a chan-throughlet display CR is displayed above the holding frame UI. The through-throughlet display CR shown in FIG. 229 (a) is displayed in a closed state, and the upper and lower frame portions CRf are in contact with each other. On the other hand, the through-throughlet display CR shown in FIG. 229 (r) and the like is displayed in an open state, and the upper and lower frame portions CRf are separated, and a display space CRs is provided therebetween. In the punch through display CR, a variable display is performed in the display space CRs (see (s) in the same drawing), and a tutorial display, a notice display, and the like are displayed in the display space CRs.

  A pattern may be attached to the base icon UIb or the frame portion CRf of the punch through display CR. This pattern may be attached to various icons such as a hold icon and a change icon. Also, it may be attached to various displays described later. The pattern may be attached to the whole, or may be attached to only a part. That is, a pattern is attached to at least a part of various icons such as the base icon UIb, the frame portion CRf of the punch-through display CR, the hold icon, and the change icon. In addition to the default display mode, a plurality of patterns are prepared as other display modes. As other display modes, it is a display mode of a prior notice, a display mode of a normal notice, or a display mode of a notice that a notice (prefetch notice, a normal notice) about these jackpots is performed. . If it is a display mode of the notice about the big hit, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit differs according to the display mode. The higher the expectation of the big hit, the more likely the big hit symbol is finally displayed. In the following description, the pattern indicates the level of expectation of the big hit. The default pattern is a dot pattern, which is a display mode when “no change” is selected in the effect drawing for the display mode. The default pattern does not predict the jackpot expectation, but you may also predict the jackpot expectation. In that case, it becomes the pattern of the icon with the lowest (0% or 0% or more and less than 1%) expectation of the big hit. As a pattern of the display mode of the notice about the big hit, it becomes an oblique line pattern, a diamond pattern, a lattice pattern, a vertical line pattern, and a horizontal line pattern in the descending order of the degree of expectation of the big hit. The hatched pattern has a jackpot expectation higher than 0%. On the other hand, the vertical line pattern is a big hit, and the horizontal line pattern may have a higher expectation (for example, 100%) of the big hit than that, and it may be possible to say, for example, a big hit decision. In the following description, in the case of the grid pattern or more, the grid pattern, the vertical line pattern, and the horizontal line pattern are used.

  In addition, although the expectation of the big hit is represented by the pattern here, you may represent the expectation of the big hit by color instead of the pattern. For example, the default dot pattern may blink white, the diagonal pattern may be blue, the diamond pattern may be green, the grid pattern may be red, the vertical line pattern may be gold, and the horizontal line pattern may be rainbow color. In addition, the color may be attached to the whole, or may be attached to only a part. That is, at least a part of various icons such as the base icon UIb, the frame portion CRf of the punch through display CR, and the hold icon and the change icon are colored.

  Moreover, the pattern of the display mode of the advance notice that the advance notice for the big hit is performed is the same, and the degree of expectation (reliability) that the advance notice for the big hit is performed differs depending on the display mode.

  FIG. 229 is a diagram showing an example of the on-hold change effect.

  The background of the castle town is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 229 (a), and the effect mode display provided below the second decorative symbol display device 208M In the area, a "castle town" indicating a castle town mode is displayed. Further, although the stage SG is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, nothing is displayed on the stage SG. In this FIG. 229 (a), the decorative pattern which has been continued to change display in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stopped by the combination of "decoration 7-decor 7-decor 1". Is displayed. On the stage in the variation icon display area e shown in FIG. 229 (a), the variation icon e1 in the default mode is still displayed. Also, two pending icons f1 and f2 are displayed in the default mode.

  In FIG. 229 (b), the finalized display of the decorative symbol is performed. When the finalized display of the decorative symbol is started, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon e1 is started, and the fluctuation icon e1 is considerably small on the stage in the fluctuation icon display area e shown in FIG. 229 (b). At 229 (c), the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon e1 is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the fluctuation icon display area e.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and in FIG. 229 (d), the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed in the first decoration symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variation display of the fifth symbol is performed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special figure 1 is lit in white. Furthermore, the number indicating the number of reservations of the special view 1 displayed at the top of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced from "2" to "1". However, two hold icons are displayed.

  In FIG. 229 (e), the animation of moving the hold icon is started, and the hold icon (the first area (closest to the variation icon display area e) in the special view 1 hold icon display area f) is displayed. Hold icon f1 has started to move toward the variation icon display area e, and is displayed in the second area of the special icon 1 reserve icon display area f (the second area closest to the variation icon display area e) The hold icon (second hold icon) f2 that has been moving is moving toward the first area.

  In FIG. 229 (f), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon e1 in the default mode is displayed on the stage in the change icon display area e, and the special icon 1 hold icon display area f is displayed in the first area. The first hold icon f1 in the default mode is displayed. That is, there is no change in the display mode before and after the start of the movement animation. However, during the movement of the icon or after the movement is completed, there may be a case where it changes to the notice mode or the advance notice mode.

  In FIG. 229 (g), the character NJ for holding change effect jumps down on the stage SG in the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the upright posture. There are many types of on-hold change effects prepared, and the on-hold change effect here is referred to as “on-hold change first effect” when it is distinguished from other on-hold change effects. In the following FIG. 229 (h), the character NJ decides a pose, and furthermore, a display of a balloon of "Iku" is displayed above the character NJ. In FIG. 229 (i), the character NJ holds a shuriken in his hand, and in the next FIG. 229 (j), the shuriken is thrown. It may be considered that the hold change first effect is started from the timing when the character NJ of FIG. 229 (g) appears, or the timing when the character NJ of FIG. 2 (h) decides the pause and the balloon is displayed. It may be viewed as starting from the beginning, or it may be viewed as starting from the timing when the character NJ in (i) holds the shuriken, or the character NJ in FIG. (J) shows the shuriken You may think that it is started from the timing of throwing.

  In FIG. 229 (k), the shuriken thrown by the character NJ overlaps the first reserve icon f1, and in FIG. 2 (l), the first reserve icon f1 and the shuriken are covered with the effect image mf and can not be seen. When the shuriken overlaps the icon, it can be seen that the shuriken hit the icon (the same applies to the following). The on-hold change first effect may be viewed as being started from the timing at which the display of the effect image mf is started. In the following FIG. 229 (m), the effect image mf becomes smaller, and the first hold icon f1 starts to be seen. That is, the effect image mf becomes smaller than the first suspension icon f1, and the first suspension icon f1 changed to the form of the diagonal line pattern is beginning to be seen. Eventually, the effect image mf disappears, and in FIG. 229 (n), the first suspension icon f1 in the form of the oblique line pattern is displayed in the first area of the special view 1 suspension icon display area f. The character NJ shown in FIG. 229 (n) takes a success pose which is taken when the display mode change of the icon is successful. In FIG. 229 (o), the deletion animation of the character NJ is started, and the character NJ is covered by the smoke image and disappears. In FIG. 229 (p), the smoke image disappears and the character NJ disappears, and nothing is displayed on the stage SG. The pending change first effect may be viewed as ending when the effect image mf in FIG. 229 (n) disappears, ie, completion of the mode change of the pending icon, or at timing when the character NJ in FIG. 2 (p) disappears. You can see it as the end.

  Further, in FIG. 229 (p), the closed state through-hole display CR starts to vibrate, and the roulette effect is started. In the following FIG. 229 (q), the upper and lower frame portions CRf start to open, and the display space CRs begins to be seen, and in FIG. 2 (r), the chan-throughlet display CR becomes fully open, and the display space CRs A display of a tumbling effect is displayed. This turning effect corresponds to an effect of giving notice that the variable display is started in the chan-throughlet display CR, and can be said to be a precursor effect. Then, in FIG. 229 (s), the variable display is started in the display space CRs. In addition, even if the turning effect is performed, the variable display may not be started. In addition, there is a case where the display is not performed in the first place, and the variable display is not started. Alternatively, there may be a case where the fluctuation presentation is not started and the fluctuation display is suddenly started. In this case, the expectation (reliability) of the big hit is higher than the case where the fluctuation presentation is started and the fluctuation display is started However, the opposite may be lower. In FIG. 229 (t), the fluctuation display in the chan-throughlet display CR is ended, the character display of “next expectation” is displayed, and the pre-reading notice for the next fluctuation is performed. In FIG. 229 (u), the channel through-let display CR is beginning to close, and in FIG. 2 (v), the channel through-let display CR returns to the closed state. The chan-throughlet effect may be viewed from FIG. 229 (p) to FIG. 2 (v) or may be viewed from FIG. 2 (p) to FIG. 2 (t).

  In FIG. 229 (w), among the decorative symbols of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, which have been changing display at high speed so far, decoration in the left symbol display area 208a The fluctuation speed of the symbol falls to the extent that the symbol can be recognized, and in the figure (x), the first stop (temporary stop) is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, and this time the decorative symbol in the right symbol display area 208c The rate of change of has fallen to such an extent that the symbol can be recognized. In FIG. 229 (y), although the second stop (temporary stop) is performed in the right symbol display area 208c, the reach state is not set, and the variation speed of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b recognizes the symbol It has fallen to the extent possible. In FIG. 229 (z), the temporary stop is performed in the remaining middle symbol display area 208b, and the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” fluctuates (temporarily displays). And in FIG. 229 (END), the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. As in FIG. 229 (a), immediately after the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, the variation icon e1 remains displayed.

  FIG. 230 is a diagram showing an example in which the on-hold change second effect is performed together with the on-hold change first effect. This figure 230 shows two examples, one in the left half and one in the right half.

  First, an example of the left half will be described. FIG. 230 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), in which the moving animation of the holding icon is completed, and the variation of the decorative pattern is performed in a state where one holding icon f1 of the default dot pattern aspect is displayed. The display is being done. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 230 (a), a part of the pattern of the treasure box displayed as the change notice j in FIG. 208 (f) or the like is shown. That is, an appearance animation in which the treasure box TB appears gradually from the right end of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed. In the case of distinguishing the on-hold change effect related to the treasure box TB displayed as the change advance notice display from other on-hold change effects, it is referred to as “on-hold change second effect”. In FIG. 230 (b), the appearance animation is completed, and the entire treasure box TB in a closed state is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in the same figure (c) that follows, the treasure box TB is opened. The change candidate icon HKI appears. The change candidate icon HKI is a circular icon having a hatched pattern, and is displayed above the treasure box TB. Note that the treasure box TB shown in FIG. 230 is displayed in the form of a dot pattern which is the default aspect, and has nothing to do with the form of the change candidate icon HKI appearing from inside, but the form of the treasure box TB and May coincide with the aspect of the change candidate icon HKI appearing from. For example, a change candidate icon HKI in the form of a horizontal line pattern may appear from the treasure box TB in the form of a horizontal line pattern. Alternatively, the change candidate icon HKI does not always appear from the treasure box TB in any case, and the aspect of the treasure box TB may represent the ease of appearance of the change candidate icon HKI. That is, there is a high possibility that the change candidate icon HKI appears in the order of the dot pattern, the diagonal line pattern, the diamond pattern, the lattice pattern, the vertical line pattern, and the horizontal line pattern, and if it is a horizontal line pattern, the change candidate icon HKI always appears You may do so.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 230 (d), the character NJ for holding change first effect appears on the stage SG. In the following FIG. 230 (e), the character NJ decides a pose and a balloon of "is" is displayed, and in the same figure (f), the character NJ gets a shuriken. Then, in FIG. 230 (g), the character NJ throws a shuriken. Further, in FIG. 230 (g), the movement animation of the change candidate icon HKI is started. The change candidate icon HKI which has been stopped and displayed on the treasure box TB starts moving, and the change candidate icon HKI is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . That is, the left end portion of the change candidate icon HKI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right side portion of the change candidate icon HKI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M disturbs the central portion of the change candidate icon HKI.

  The pending change second effect may be viewed as being started from the timing when the appearance animation of the treasure box TB is started, or as shown in FIG. 230 (b), it is started from the timing when the appearance animation is completed (C) may be started from the timing when the change candidate icon HKI appears, or may be started from the timing when the movement animation of the change candidate icon HKI is started You can look at it.

  In FIG. 230 (h), the shuriken thrown by the character NJ overlaps the fluctuation icon e1 in the default mode (point pattern mode). On the other hand, the change candidate icon HKI moved to the first decorative symbol display device 208L passes above the change icon e1. In the following FIG. 230 (i), the fluctuation icon e1 and the shuriken are covered by the effect image me and are not visible. In FIG. 230 (j), the effect image me becomes smaller, and the fluctuation icon e1 starts to be seen. That is, the effect image me becomes smaller than the variation icon e1, and the variation icon e1 changed to the form of the oblique line pattern starts to be seen. Further, in FIG. 230 (j), a part of the change candidate icon HKI overlaps a part of the first hold icon f1. In FIG. 230 (k), the effect image me covering the fluctuation icon e1 is lost, but this time, the first reserved icon f1 and the change candidate icon HKI are covered by the effect image mf and become invisible. Between FIG. 230 (j) and FIG. 230 (k), both the effect image me covering the variation icon e1 and the effect image mf covering the first suspension icon f1 and the change candidate icon HKI are displayed. There may be a period of In the subsequent FIG. 230 (l), the effect image mf is smaller than the first reserve icon f1, and the first reserve icon f1 changed to the same oblique pattern as the change candidate icon HKI is beginning to be seen. Eventually, the effect image mf disappears, and in FIG. 230 (m), the first suspension icon f1 in the form of the diagonal line pattern is displayed in the first area of the special image 1 suspension icon display region f, and the character NJ poses successfully. I am taking After this, the treasure box TB displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M disappears. Further, the continuation of FIG. 230 (m) is connected to FIG. 229 (o).

  The pending change second effect may be viewed as ending when the effect image mf in FIG. 230 (m) disappears, that is, when the aspect change of the pending icon is completed, or when the treasure box TB disappears. It is also good.

  In the example of the left half described above, the change icon e1 changes from the default mode to the normal notice mode (hatched pattern mode) by the hold change first effect by the ninja character NJ, and the first hold icon f1 is changed from the default mode to the mode (presence of diagonal line pattern) of the pre-reading notice by the hold change second effect by the change candidate icon HKI. That is, the aspect of different icons is changing.

  The change candidate icon HKI in the hold change second effect suggests the candidate of the mode to be changed from the time of appearance according to the mode of the user, and corresponds to the display of the change mode candidate. That is, in this example, the change candidate icon HKI is in the form of a diagonal pattern from the point of appearance, and the first hold icon f1 is also finally changed to the form of a diagonal pattern. Note that the change candidate icon HKI may be changed to a candidate candidate aspect to be changed after appearance, instead of a candidate aspect to be changed at the present time. Further, the change candidate icon HKI indicates the icon of the candidate for change at the timing of FIG. 230 (j), and corresponds to the display of the candidate for change. Therefore, at the time of appearance, it is unclear which icon (which holding icon if the fluctuating icon or the plurality of holding icons are displayed) is a candidate for change.

  In addition, the shuriken thrown by the character NJ of the ninja in the pending change first effect also suggests the icon of the candidate for change at the timing of FIG. 230 (h), and corresponds to the display of the candidate for change. As in the case of the change candidate icon HKI, it is also possible to suggest a candidate of a mode to be changed according to the mode (pattern) of the shuriken according to the mode of the user. In addition, it is possible to suggest a candidate of the mode to be changed not by the mode (pattern) of the shuriken but by the mode (pattern) of the kimono of the ninja character NJ.

  Then, although the example of the right half is explained, the explanation which overlaps with the explanation in the example of the left half may be omitted.

  FIG. 230 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 230 (c), and the change candidate icon HKI in the form of the hatched pattern is displayed on the treasure box TB, and the hold change No. The character NJ for one effect is also displayed. In FIG. 230 (2), the movement animation of the change candidate icon HKI in the hold change second effect is started, and in FIG. 230 (3), the character NJ of the ninja in the hold change first effect decides the pose The balloon is displayed. In FIG. 230 (4), a part of the change candidate icon HKI overlaps a part of the first hold icon f1. Also, a shuriken is thrown from the character NJ. In FIG. 230 (5), the first hold icon f1 and the change candidate icon HKI are covered with the effect image mf and are invisible. On the other hand, the shuriken thrown by the character NJ has not yet hit any icon. In the subsequent FIG. 230 (6), the effect image mf becomes smaller than the first reserve icon f1, and the first reserve icon f1 changed to the same oblique line pattern as the change candidate icon HKI is beginning to be seen. Further, a part of the shuriken thrown by the character NJ overlaps a part of the first reserved icon f1. Here, although the state (pattern) of the first reserved icon f1 after change is visible because the effect image mf has become smaller, the case where the invisible state due to the effect image mf or the like is maintained There may be. For example, when a part of the shuriken is overlapped, the size of the effect image mf may not be reduced and the size may be maintained, and the effect image mf by the shuriken hit may be taken over as it is. In FIG. 230 (7), the first hold icon f1 is covered again by the effect image mf and disappears. In addition, the shuriken is covered with the effect image mf and disappears. Note that the next effect image mf shown in FIG. 230 (7) may be displayed before the effect image mf which is reduced in FIG. 230 (6) disappears, or the effect image mf may disappear once. The following effect image mf may be displayed. In FIG. 230 (8), the effect image mf is smaller than the first reserve icon f1, and the first reserve icon f1 changed to the form of the diamond pattern is beginning to be seen. Eventually, the effect image mf disappears, and in FIG. 230 (9), the first reserved icon f1 in the form of a diamond pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserved icon display area f, and the character NJ poses successfully I am taking The continuation of FIG. 230 (9) leads to FIG. 229 (o). Although the ninja character NJ in the hold change first effect and the treasure box TB in the hold change second effect also disappear after this, either may disappear first or may disappear simultaneously.

  In the example of the right half described above, both the pending change first effect by the ninja character NJ and the pending change second effect by the change candidate icon HKI both have the first pending icon f1 as the change target icon, and are default. The first reserved icon f1 which has been the aspect is finally changed to the aspect of the diamond pattern in which the reliability of the big hit in the pre-reading notice is increased by two steps. However, in this example, the timing of the mode change of the hold icon is shifted, but may be simultaneous. Moreover, in the example of the right half, the mode change due to the hold change second effect was earlier than the mode change due to the hold change first effect, but conversely, the mode change due to the hold change first effect is The hold change may be preceded by a mode change due to the second effect.

  FIG. 231 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the hold change first effect and the hold change second effect are combined in the left half, and an example of the hold change third effect in the right half.

  First, although the example of the left half will be described, the description overlapping with the explanation in the example shown in FIG. 230 may be omitted.

  FIG. 231 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 230 (c), and the change candidate icon HKI in the form of the hatched pattern is displayed on the treasure box TB, and the pending change no. The character NJ for one effect is also displayed. In FIG. 231 (b), the moving animation of the change candidate icon HKI in the hold change second effect is started, and in FIG. 231 (c), the character NJ of the ninja in the hold change first effect decides the pose and The balloon is displayed. In FIG. 231 (e), the shuriken thrown by the character NJ overlaps the change candidate icon HKI. In other words, the change key icon HKI hits the shuriken, and the change candidate icon HKI that acts on the final change target icon, not the change icon or the hold icon to be the final change target, is the change target It has become. In the following FIG. 231 (f), the change candidate icon HKI is covered by the effect image mh along with the shuriken and becomes invisible. In FIG. 231 (g), the effect image mh is smaller than the change candidate icon HKI, and the change candidate icon HKI which has not changed to the form of the oblique line pattern but changed to the form of the diamond pattern on one more level is beginning to appear. In FIG. 231 (h), the effect image mh completely disappears, and a part of the change candidate icon HKI changed to the form of a diamond pattern overlaps a part of the first suspension icon f1. The change candidate icon HKI changed to the form of the rhombus pattern corresponds to the change form candidate display, and the change candidate icon HKI overlapping a part of the first reserved icon f1 corresponds to the change target candidate display. In FIG. 231 (i), the first hold icon f1 is covered by the effect image mf together with the change candidate icon HKI and becomes invisible. In FIG. 231 (j), the effect image mf is smaller than the first reserve icon f1, and the first reserve icon f1 that has changed to the shape of the diamond pattern is beginning to be seen. Eventually, the effect image mf disappears, and in FIG. 231 (k), the first reserved icon f1 in the form of a diamond pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserved icon display area f, and the character NJ poses successfully I am taking The continuation of FIG. 231 (k) leads to FIG. 229 (o). Also here, the character NJ of the ninja in the hold change first effect and the treasure box TB in the hold change second effect also disappear after this, but either may disappear first or may disappear simultaneously.

  In the example of the left half described above, the first holding change effect by the ninja character NJ and the second holding change effect by the change candidate icon HKI are combined, and the mode change of the holding icon increases by two steps at a time. It is changing to the aspect of. It should be noted that the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ did not hit the change candidate icon HKI and the change candidate icon HKI remained in the form of a diagonal pattern, or the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ hit the change candidate icon HKI. Nevertheless, if the change candidate icon HKI remains in the form of a diagonal line, the first reserved icon f1 changes only to the form of a diagonal line whose expectation of jackpot is lower than that of the diamond pattern.

  Subsequently, an example of the right half will be described.

  FIG. 231 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), and there is a winning of one ball in the first special view starting opening 230. In FIG. 231 (2), in the second area of the special figure 1 pending icon display area f, the pending icon increasing animation is started, and the pending icon gradually increases. In FIG. 231 (3), the increase animation of the hold icon is finished, and the second hold icon f 2 is displayed in the second area of the special view 1 hold icon display area f.

  In FIG. 231 (4), the first hold icon f1 starts to vibrate, and in the subsequent FIG. (5), the enlarged display of the first hold icon f1 is started. The first hold icon f1 is enlarged until it exceeds the first area of the special view 1 hold icon display area f. This enlarged aspect corresponds to an aspect for informing that the on-hold change presentation is started. The first hold icon f1 displayed in an enlarged manner and the second hold icon f2 next to each other may or may not overlap. Note that the on-hold change effect to be started after this is referred to as “on-hold change third effect” in order to distinguish it from other on-hold change effects.

  In FIG. 231 (6), the character BC of the game change leader for the hold change third effect appears on the hold frame UI, and in the case (7) of FIG. Then, the first hold icon f1 displayed in an enlarged manner is covered with the effect image mf '(Fig. 231 (8)). Although this effect image mf 'covers up to a part of the second reserved icon f2 next to it, it may cover the whole of the second reserved icon f2 next to it, and it does not cover the second reserved icon f2 next to it You may

  The hold change third effect may be viewed as starting from the timing at which the character BC of the program leader of FIG. 231 (6) appears, or from the timing at which the character BC of the program leader of FIG. It may be viewed as being started, or may be viewed as being started from the timing when the effect image mf 'of FIG. 8 (8) is displayed.

  In FIG. 231 (9), the effect image mf 'becomes smaller than the enlarged first display icon f1 and the first display icon f1 which has changed to the diamond pattern starts to be seen. Eventually, the effect image mf 'disappears completely, and in FIG. 231 (10), the first reserved icon f1 in the form of the diamond pattern displayed in an enlarged manner is displayed. In the subsequent FIG. 231 (11), the size of the first hold icon f1 returns to the original size, and in FIG. 231 (12), the character BC for the hold change third effect disappears. In addition, the change display of the decoration pattern is still continuing.

  The pending change third effect may be viewed as ending when the effect image mf 'in FIG. 231 (10) disappears, ie, the mode change completion of the pending icon, or the first pending icon f1 in FIG. It may be considered as the end at the timing when the size returns to the original, or may be considered as the end at the timing when the program leader character BC in the figure (12) disappears.

  Note that the hold icon whose state is likely to change due to the hold change third effect is the first hold icon f1 rather than the second hold icon f2, and the first hold icon f1 is most likely to be changed among all the hold icons. It may be easy to be changed as soon as it is put on hold. Alternatively, only the first hold icon f1 may be changed among all the hold icons. In addition, it is easier to change the hold change third effect to a mode in which the expectation (reliability) of the big hit is higher than the hold change first effect. That is, the aspect of the icon is increased by only one step in the hold change first effect, but is increased by two steps in the hold change third effect. Similarly, the hold change third effect is easier to change to a mode in which the expectation (reliability) of the big hit is higher than the hold change second effect.

  FIG. 232 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the character BC of the bankmaster of the hold change third effect appears. This FIG. 232 also shows two examples of the left half and the right half.

  First, although the example of the left half will be described, the description overlapping with the explanation in the example shown in the right half of FIG. 231 may be omitted.

  FIG. 232 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), and the character BC of the game change leader for the hold change third effect appears on the hold frame UI. In FIG. 232 (b), the first suspension icon f1 in the default mode starts vibrating, and in the same diagram (c) that follows, the special diagram 1 suspension icon display area f in which the first suspension icon f1 has been displayed so far By jumping out of the first area of and moving to the center of the display screen, it overlaps with the character BC who is sitting guarding and sitting. In the first area of the special view 1 reserved icon display area f in which the first reserved icon f1 has been displayed until then, the trace of the first reserved icon f1 popped out is displayed as a silhouette display Sil. Here, the silhouette display Sil is represented by a dotted line, but the silhouette display Sil may also be displayed in the same mode as the mode of the first reserved icon f1 (in this example, the mode of the dot pattern). Further, with regard to the color of the first hold icon f1, regardless of the color of the first hold icon f1, it may be displayed in gray in the silhouette display Sil, for example, the color of the first hold icon f1 When the icon is blue, the color of the first reserved icon f1 and the color of the silhouette display Sil may be unified in the same color system by displaying in dark blue in the silhouette display Sil.

  In FIG. 232 (d), it is seen that the Bancho character BC determines a pose, and the Bancho character BC has the first hold icon f1. In the subsequent FIG. 232 (e), the first hold icon f1 is covered by the effect image mb, and in FIG. 232 (f), the effect image mb is smaller than the first hold icon f1 and changed to a diagonal pattern. The first hold icon f1 is beginning to be visible. In FIG. 232 (g), it appears that the effect image mb disappears completely, and the bancho character BC has the first suspension icon f1 changed to a diagonal pattern. When the first hold icon f1 shown in FIG. 232 (g) changes to blue, the silhouette display Sil shown in FIG. 232 (g) may also change to dark blue. In FIG. 232 (h), the bancho character BC disappears, and the first hold icon f1 changed to the form of a hatched pattern remains at the center of the display screen. The movement animation is eventually started, and the first hold icon f1 in the form of this oblique line pattern starts to move toward the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f (FIG. 232 (i)), FIG. In j), a first reserved icon f1 in a hatched pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserved icon display area f.

  Subsequently, an example of the right half will be described. The example of the right half is an example in which the hold change first effect by the ninja character NJ and the hold change third effect by the game leader character BC are performed.

FIG. 232 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), in which the character BC of the game change leader for the hold change third effect is displayed on the hold frame UI, and the hold change is on the stage SG. A ninja character NJ for the first effect is displayed. Either the timing at which the character BC of the long head appears or the timing at which the character NJ of the ninja appears may be the same or may be the same in FIG. 232 (2), the second of the default mode (point pattern mode) [1] The reserve icon f1 pops out the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f that has been displayed so far, and moves to the center of the display screen to overlap with the character BC who is sitting guarding and sitting . In the first area of the special view 1 reserved icon display area f where the first reserved icon f1 has been displayed until then, as in the example of the left half, a trace of the first reserved icon f1 popped out is displayed as a silhouette It is displayed as. In FIG. 232 (3), the ninja character NJ in the first holding change presentation determines a pose, and a balloon of "Iku" is displayed. In the next FIG. 232 (4), the ninja character NJ throws a shuriken, and in the same figure (5), the shuriken overlaps the first reserved icon f1 moved to the center of the display screen. In FIG. 232 (6), the first reserved icon f1 is covered by the effect image mf together with the shuriken and becomes invisible. In FIG. 232 (7), the effect image mf becomes smaller than the first suspension icon f1, and the change candidate icon HKI which has been changed to the form of the oblique line pattern starts to be seen. In FIG. 232 (8), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to the form of the diagonal line pattern overlaps with the bancho character BC. The change of the mode of the first hold icon f1 here is due to the hold change first effect, and the character NJ shown in FIG. 232 (8) has taken a successful pose. The character NJ continues to pose a success until it disappears.

  In FIG. 232 (9), it is seen that the bancho character BC decides a pose, and the just bancho character BC has the first hold icon f1. In the subsequent FIG. 232 (10), the first hold icon f1 is covered by the effect image mb, and in the same figure (11), the effect image mb is smaller than the first hold icon f1 and changed to a diamond pattern. The first hold icon f1 is beginning to be visible. In FIG. 232 (12), the effect image mb disappears completely, and it appears that the bancho character BC has the first reserved icon f1 changed to the form of the diamond pattern. The mode change of the first hold icon f1 here is due to the hold change third effect. In FIG. 232 (13), the bancho character BC disappears, and the first suspension icon f1 changed to the form of the diamond pattern remains in the center of the display screen. Although the ninja character NJ also disappears, either the timing at which the leader character BC disappears or the timing at which the ninja character NJ disappears may be earlier or may be the same.

  FIG. 233 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example in the right half of FIG. 232 and a diagram showing the hold change fourth effect.

  In Fig. 233 (14) continued from Fig. 232 (13), the moving animation of the first storage icon f1 is started, and the first storage icon f1 changed to the form of the diamond pattern is the first of the special icon 1 storage icon display area f. The movement is started toward the area of (1), and in FIG. 233 (15), the first reserved icon f1 in the form of a diamond pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserved icon display area f.

  In the example of the right half of FIG. 232 described above, the first holding icon f1 is set as the change target icon for both the holding change first effect by the ninja character NJ and the holding change third effect by the Bancho character BC. Finally, the first reserved icon f1 which has been the default mode is changed to the diamond pattern aspect in which the reliability of the big hit in the pre-reading notice is increased by two levels. However, in this example, the timing of the mode change of the hold icon is shifted, but may be simultaneous. Also, the mode change due to the hold change first effect was earlier than the mode change due to the hold change third effect, but conversely, the mode change due to the hold change third effect is the hold change first effect It may be earlier than the mode change by.

  Subsequently, the on-hold change fourth effect will be described.

  FIG. 233 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), and there is a winning of one ball in the first special figure starting port 230. FIG. In FIG. 233 (b), the second hold icon f2 is newly displayed in the second area of the special view 1 hold icon display area f. The second hold icon is a roulette icon of the hold change fourth effect, and the roulette icon which is the second hold icon f2 shown in FIG. The roulette icon in the variation display mode corresponds to the change target candidate display. That is, this is an aspect in which it is predicted that the player will change after winning (when appearing). In FIG. 233 (b), the on-hold increase sound is output from the speaker 120.

  In FIG. 233 (c), the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in FIG. 233 (b) is ended, and the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Immediately after the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, the variation icon e1 remains displayed. Also, the roulette icon, which is the second hold icon f2 shown in FIG. In FIG. 233 (d), the confirmation display of the decorative symbol is performed. When the finalized display of the decorative symbol is started, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon e1 is started, and the fluctuation icon e1 is considerably small on the stage in the fluctuation icon display area e shown in FIG. In 233 (e), the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon e1 is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the fluctuation icon display area e. The roulette icon, which is the second hold icon f2, remains in the variation display mode even during the finalized display.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and in FIG. 233 (f), the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed in the first decoration symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variation display of the fifth symbol is performed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special figure 1 is lit in white. Furthermore, the number indicating the number of reservations of the special view 1 displayed at the top of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced from "2" to "1". However, two hold icons are displayed, and the roulette icon, which is the second hold icon f2, remains in the state of the variable display.

  In FIG. 233 (g), the move animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special view 1 hold icon display area f moves toward the change icon display area e The roulette icon, which is the second hold icon f2 that has been started and is displayed in the second area of the special view 1 hold icon display area f, moves toward the first Have started.

  In FIG. 233 (h), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon e1 in the default mode is displayed on the stage in the change icon display area e, and the special icon 1 hold icon display area f is displayed in the first area. The roulette icon of the aspect in the variation display is displayed as a special figure 1 reservation icon f1. In this example, the roulette icon of the aspect in the variation display is continuously displayed across the variation display of the decorative symbol (also referred to as the symbol variation display of the special figure), but during super reach effect or finalization display In the middle, the roulette icon (pending icon) may disappear once, and the roulette icon (pending icon) may be displayed when the next variable pattern display (also referred to as special pattern symbol variation display) is started.

  In FIG. 233 (i), the roulette icon, which has been in the form of the variable display so far, ends the variable display, and changes to a form in which the characters “grid” are stopped and displayed. The roulette icon of the aspect in which the character of "lattice" is stopped and displayed corresponds to the change aspect candidate display. That is, this is an aspect that predicts that the user will later change to a lattice pattern.

  In the following FIG. 233 (j), the roulette icon, which is the first hold icon f1, is covered with the effect image mf and becomes invisible. In FIG. 233 (k), the effect image mf is smaller than the first reserve icon f1, and the first reserve icon f1 changed to the form of the lattice pattern is beginning to be seen. In FIG. 233 (l), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first suspension icon f1 changed to the form of the lattice pattern is displayed in the first area of the special view 1 suspension icon display region f. That is, the mode change of the hold icon is completed, and the hold change fourth effect ends at the timing of FIG. 233 (l). Note that the hold change fourth effect may be viewed as starting from the timing when the roulette icon appears as shown in FIG. 233 (b), and as shown in FIG. 233 (i), the roulette icon is stopped. It may be viewed as starting from the timing changed to the displayed mode.

  As described above, the roulette icon corresponds to the pending change notice display about itself.

  FIG. 233 (i ') is a diagram showing an example different from FIG. 233 (i). In FIG. 233 (i '), the roulette icon, which was in the variable display mode, ends the variable display, and changes to a mode in which the character of "grid" is stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the base icon UIb and the channel through-let display The pattern of the frame portion CRf of CR is changed to a lattice pattern. Furthermore, the word "chance up" is displayed above the first hold icon f1. Even if the roulette icon changes to a mode in which the characters “grid” are stopped and displayed, in fact, the roulette icon itself does not necessarily change to a grid pattern. However, as described above, when the patterns of the base icon UIb and the frame portion CRf of the through-throughlet display CR change to a grid pattern, the roulette icon itself is a grid pattern as compared with the case where it does not change (see FIG. 233 (i)). It becomes easy to change to the aspect. Alternatively, it may be always changed.

  Further, the timing at which the pattern of the frame portion CRf of the base icon UIb and the through-throughlet display CR changes to a lattice pattern may be after the roulette icon changes to a mode in which the characters “lattice” are stopped and displayed. Alternatively, when the pattern of the roulette icon changes in the variable display mode and the pattern of the frame portion CRf of the base icon UIb and the through-throughlet display CR changes, the character representing the pattern tends to be stopped and displayed on the roulette icon You may

  In addition, the pattern of only one of the pattern of the base icon UIb and the pattern of the frame portion CRf of the through-throughlet display CR may change, and in this case, the roulette is more than the case of changing both. The icon itself may be less likely to change to a grid pattern. Alternatively, if the change occurs earlier than the stop display of the roulette icon, the character representing the pattern is stopped and displayed on the roulette icon when the pattern of only one of them changes, rather than the case where both change. It may be difficult.

  FIG. 233 (l ') is a diagram showing an example different from FIG. 233 (l). This FIG. 233 (l ') is an example that continues from the previous FIG. 233 (i'), and the roulette pattern is displayed despite the fact that the patterns of the base icon UIb and the frame portion CRf of the through-throughlet display CR change to a grid pattern. This is an example in which the icon itself has become the default mode without changing to the grid mode. However, as described above, when the patterns of the base icon UIb and the frame portion CRf of the through-throughlet display CR change to a grid pattern, the roulette icon itself may also be changed to a grid pattern. In addition, the roulette icon has changed to the form in which the character of "lattice" is stopped and displayed, not to predict the change in the form of itself, but to other displays or icons (here, the base icon UIb and the through-throughlet) It may be predicted that the aspect of at least one of the frame portions CRf of the display CR changes.

  Note that when the roulette icon changes to a mode in which the characters “grid” are stopped and displayed, the roulette icon itself may always change to a grid pattern.

  FIG. 234 is a diagram illustrating an example of the on-hold change fifth effect.

  In FIG. 234 (1), the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in a state where two reserved icons f1 and f2 of the default mode are displayed. In FIG. 234 (2), the appearance animation of the target icon TI is started, and a part of the target icon TI is beginning to be visible at the center upper end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this appearance animation, the target icon TI gradually descends, and in FIG. 234 (3), the target icon TI passes through the central portion of the display screen. Eventually, the target icon TI is attached to the second hold icon f2, and the appearance animation ends (FIG. 234 (4)). The hold icon with the dynamic icon TI is more likely to undergo a mode change than the hold icon without the dynamic icon TI. In addition, even with the hold icon with the target icon TI, the change of the aspect does not necessarily occur, and may not occur. Alternatively, the pending icon with the target icon TI may be configured such that a change in aspect always occurs. The target icon TI attached to the icon corresponds to the change target candidate display.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 234 (5), the character YM of Yoshimune, which is the character of the hold change fifth effect, appears, and in the subsequent FIG. (6), the character YM of Yoshimune has a bow I am ready. In FIG. 234 (6), an arrow icon YI indicating that the character YM of Yoshimune is aiming at the target icon TI is displayed. The rear end of the arrow icon YI slightly overlaps the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the arrow icon YI is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Also, the tip of the arrow icon YI may or may not be in contact with the target (in this case, the target icon YI), but it may be determined that it is determined as a target. The arrow icon YI is one type of aiming icon or designation icon, and the aiming icon or designation icon is not limited to the arrow, and may be in the form of light irradiation. Further, the aiming icon or the designated icon such as the arrow icon YI corresponds to the change target candidate display. Furthermore, an aiming icon such as an arrow icon YI or a designated icon may be displayed in the form of a pattern in which the aiming or designating icon changes after this. That is, the display itself of the aiming icon such as the arrow icon YI or the designated icon may correspond to the change mode candidate display.

  Eventually, the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in FIG. 234 (1) ends, and the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in FIG. 234 (7), and in FIG. Finalized display of decorative symbols has been started. When the finalized display of the decorative symbol is started, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon e1 is started, and the fluctuation icon e1 is considerably small on the stage in the fluctuation icon display area e shown in FIG. At 234 (9), the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon e1 is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the fluctuation icon display area e. Even when the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished, the target icon TI remains attached to the second hold icon f2, and the same applies to the final display. Also, the character YM of Yoshimune continues to hold a bow, and the arrow icon YI continues to be displayed, and the same is true during finalized display.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and in FIG. 234 (10), the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed in the first decoration symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variation display of the fifth symbol is performed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special figure 1 is lit in white. Furthermore, the number indicating the number of reservations of the special view 1 displayed at the top of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced from "2" to "1". However, two pending icons are displayed, the second pending icon f2 remains with the target icon TI, the character YM of Yoshimune continues to hold a bow, and the arrow icon YI continues to be displayed.

  In FIG. 234 (11), the move animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special view 1 hold icon display area f moves toward the change icon display area e. The second hold icon f2 that has been displayed in the second area of the special icon 1 hold icon display area f starts moving toward the first area with the target icon TI still attached. ing.

  In FIG. 234 (12), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon e1 in the default mode is displayed on the stage in the change icon display area e, and the special icon 1 hold icon display area f is displayed in the first area. The special icon 1 holding icon f1 is displayed as a default icon holding icon with the target icon TI still attached. In addition, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the character YM of Yoshimune is still holding a bow, and the arrow icon YI is also displayed. However, as the target icon TI moves along with the hold icon, the direction of the arrow icon YI slightly changes, and the length is also slightly shortened.

  After the movement animation of the holding icon is completed, as shown in FIG. 234 (13), the character YM of Yoshimune holds a bow, but the display of the arrow icon YI disappears. The disappearance of the display of the arrow icon YI can also be viewed as a preparatory movement of the hold change presentation. Then, when the display of the arrow icon YI disappears, an arrow is fired from the character YM of Yoshimune, and in FIG. 234 (14), the fired arrow indicates the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is displayed straddling.

  The pending change fifth effect may be viewed as starting from the timing when the character YM of Yoshimune in FIG. 234 (5) appears, or starting from the timing when the display of the arrow icon YI disappears in FIG. It may be viewed as being done, or it may be viewed as being started from the timing when an arrow is fired from the character YM of Yoshimune.

  In FIG. 234 (15), the arrow hits the target icon TI attached to the first hold icon f1, and in the same figure (16) that follows, the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf and disappears. There is. Note that the target icon TI and the arrow hitting the target icon TI are not covered by the effect image mf and are visible. However, the target icon TI or the arrow hitting the target icon TI may be covered by the effect image mf.

  In FIG. 234 (17), the effect image mf becomes smaller than the first reserve icon f1, and the first reserve icon f1 changed to the form of the diamond pattern starts to be seen. In FIG. 234 (18), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first reserve icon f1 changed to the form of the diamond pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f. In addition, the character YM of Yoshimune, which is the character of the holding change fifth effect, changes the pose, raises the thumb, and takes a successful pose to be taken when the display mode change of the icon succeeds. Next, in FIG. 234 (19), the character YM of Yoshimune has disappeared, but the first hold icon f1 that has finished changing the form still has the target icon TI, and the target icon TI has an arrow hit It remains as it is. The pending change fifth effect may be regarded as ending when the effect image mf in FIG. 234 (18) disappears, ie, the mode change completion of the pending icon, or the character YM of Yoshimune in FIG. 234 (19) disappears. You may see it as ending at the timing.

  Eventually, the variation display of the decoration pattern started in FIG. 234 (10) ends, and the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in FIG. 234 (20), and decoration in FIG. The finalized display of the symbol has been started. When the finalized display of the decorative symbol is started, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon e1 is started, and the fluctuation icon e1 is considerably small on the stage in the fluctuation icon display area e shown in FIG. At 234 (22), the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon e1 is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the fluctuation icon display area e. Even when the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished, the target icon TI hit by the arrow remains attached to the first reserved icon f1 of the diamond pattern aspect, and the same is true during the final display.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and in FIG. 234 (23), the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed in the first decoration symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variation display of the fifth symbol is performed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special figure 1 is lit in white. Furthermore, the number indicating the number of reservations in the special view 1 displayed at the top of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced from the previous “1” to “0”. However, the first hold icon is displayed, and the first hit icon f1 remains with the target icon TI hit by the arrow.

  In FIG. 234 (24), the moving icon of the holding icon is started, and the first holding icon f1 with the target icon TI left the arrow hit is displayed in the change icon display area e while the target icon TI is added. It has started moving towards.

  In FIG. 234 (25), the movement animation of the holding icon is completed, and the variation icon e1 in the form of a diamond pattern is displayed on the stage in the variation icon display area e with the target icon TI hit by the arrow. ing. The arrow hitting the target icon TI shown in FIG. 234 (25) is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  As described above, the hit icon TI hit by the arrow does not disappear even after the aspect of the retention icon changes, and remains attached to the aspect-changed retention icon. By doing this, it also becomes a history display of what kind of hold change presentation has been performed. For example, even when the aspect of the icon changes to the same aspect, if the change is caused by the hold change fifth effect, the expectation (reliability) of the big hit is higher than the case where the change is caused by another hold change effect. In the case where the arrow is hit low, the display of the target icon TI hit by the arrow remains useful information.

  Also, even if the icon whose aspect has changed, that is, the icon with the target icon TI for which the arrow was hit changes from the hold icon f1 to the change icon e1, the target icon TI for which the arrow is hit is attached to the change icon e1. Yes. In this case as well, the hit icon TI which is hit by the arrow becomes a history display, and it also becomes information notifying that a big hit is approaching.

  Note that the arrow may be extinguished when the aspect of the target icon TI changes when the arrow is hit (for example, when changing from white to red or when a large hole is open). Also, there may be a case where the target icon TI which the arrow hits may disappear, and in this case, if the target icon TI which the arrow hits remains, the expectation of the jackpot is better than the case where the target icon disappears. The degree (reliability) may be high, or if a hit icon TI left by an arrow remains, it may be a big hit decision. For example, even if it changes to the fluctuation icon e1, the symbol fluctuation display currently performed may be a big hit confirmation as long as the target icon TI which the arrow hit is attached.

  Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted about FIG. 234 (25) and after, you may develop to super reach production after this. For example, even if it changes to the fluctuation icon e1, as long as the hit icon TI hit by the arrow remains, it may be easier to develop into a super reach effect than when it is not attached, and it is essential to the super reach effect It may be developed. Furthermore, the target icon TI hit by the arrow may disappear with the fluctuating icon during the final display, or may disappear before the final display. For example, it may disappear when the reach state is reached, or may disappear when the super reach effect is started. Note that, when the super reach effect is started, the fluctuation icon e1 may also disappear and the fluctuation icon e1 may not disappear.

  FIG. 235 is a diagram illustrating an example regarding the pending change fifth effect.

  FIG. 235 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 234 (15), and the first hold icon f1 with the target icon TI hit by the arrow is covered with the effect image mf and becomes invisible. In this example, the effect image mf is enlarged, and in FIG. 235 (b), the target icon TI is also covered by the effect image mf and disappears, and a part of the arrows is also covered by the effect image mf ing.

  In FIG. 235 (c), the effect image mf becomes smaller, and the first hold icon f1 changed to the form of the diamond pattern starts to be seen. Further, at the same time as the effect image mf disappears, the target icon TI and the arrow hitting the target icon TI also disappear. In FIG. 235 (c), the target icon TI and the arrow that hit the target icon TI have already disappeared.

  In FIG. 235 (d), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first reserved icon f1 changed to the form of the diamond pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserved icon display area f, and the second decorative symbol is displayed. In the display device 208M, the character YM of Yoshimune, who is the character of the fifth change of the holding change, changes the pose and takes a successful pose with the thumb raised. In the following FIG. 235 (e), the character YM of Yoshimune has disappeared.

  The pending change fifth effect in FIG. 235 may be regarded as ending when the target icon TI in FIG. 235 (c) and the arrow hitting the target icon TI disappear, or the effect image mf in FIG. 235 (d). It may be viewed as the end when the symbol disappears, that is, when the mode change of the holding icon is completed, or when the character YM of Yoshimune shown in (e) in the figure disappears.

  Subsequently, an example in which the hold change first effect is performed along with the hold change fifth effect will be described.

  FIG. 235 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 234 (12), and in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the ninja character NJ for holding change first effect appears on the stage SG. Furthermore, in this example, although it appears in order of the iconic icon TI, the character YM of Yoshimune, and the character NJ of the ninja, it may appear in order of the character NJ of ninja, the iconic icon TI and the character YM of Yoshimune It may appear in the order of the true icon TI, the ninja character NJ, and the Yoshimune character YM, or may appear simultaneously.

  In FIG. 235 (2), the ninja character NJ decides a pose and a balloon of "is" is displayed, and in FIG. 235 (3), the character NJ throws a shuriken. This shuriken hits the first hold icon f1, and in FIG. 235 (4), the first hold icon f1 hit by the shuriken is covered with the effect image mf and can not be seen. In FIG. 235 (5), the effect image mf becomes smaller than the first reserve icon f1, and the first reserve icon f1 changed to the form of the diagonal line pattern is beginning to be seen. In FIG. 235 (6), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first reserve icon f1 changed to the form of the diagonal line is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f. Thus, although the target icon TI is displayed, in the hold change first effect, the hold icon itself is directly changed without aiming for the target icon TI. The ninja character NJ shown in FIG. 235 (6) is in a successful pose. In FIG. 235 (7), the ninja character NJ has disappeared, but so far the Yoshimune character YM keeps holding a bow, and the arrow icon YI continues to be displayed.

  Soon, the display of the arrow icon YI disappears, and an arrow is fired from the character YM of Yoshimune. The fired arrow hits the target icon TI attached to the first hold icon f1. In FIG. 235 (8), the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf and is invisible.

  In FIG. 235 (9), the effect image mf becomes smaller than the first reserve icon f1, and the first reserve icon f1 changed to the form of the lattice pattern starts to be seen. In FIG. 235 (10), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first suspension icon f1 changed to the form of the lattice pattern is displayed in the first area of the special view 1 suspension icon display region f. In addition, the character YM of Yoshimune, which is the character of the fifth change of presentation, changes the pose and takes a successful pose with the thumb raised. After this, the process continues to FIG. 234 (19).

  In the example described above, both the pending change first effect by the ninja character NJ and the pending change fifth effect by the Yoshimune character YM both have the first pending icon f1 as the change target icon, which is a default mode. Finally, the first reserve icon f1 is changed to a lattice pattern in which the reliability of the big hit in the advance notice is raised not by two but by three. However, in this example, the timing of the mode change of the hold icon is shifted, but may be simultaneous. In this manner, when a plurality of hold change effects are performed in combination for the same object, the state changes to a mode higher than when hold change effects are performed separately (a mode in which three steps are raised instead of two steps). . In addition, although it was a combination of the pending change fifth effect and the pending change first effect here, it may be a combination of the pending change fifth effect and the pending change second effect, and the pending change fifth effect and the pending change It may be a combination of the third effect, a combination of the on-hold change fifth effect and the on-hold change fourth effect, or any other combination.

  FIG. 236 is a diagram illustrating another example in which the on-hold change first effect is performed together with the on-hold change fifth effect.

  FIG. 236 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 235 (1), and the ninja character NJ for holding change first effect appearing on the stage SG of the third decorative symbol display device 208N determines the pose and A balloon of "Go!" Is displayed, and in the same figure (2), the character NJ throws a shuriken. In FIG. 236 (3), this shuriken overlaps the target icon TI attached to the first reserved icon f1 instead of the first reserved icon f1, and in FIG. 236 (4), the target icon TI hit by the shuriken is The first hold icon f1 attached is obscured by the effect image mf. In FIG. 236 (5), the effect image mf is smaller than the first reserve icon f1, and the first reserve icon f1 which has been changed to the hatched pattern starts to be seen. In FIG. 236 (6), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first reserve icon f1 changed to the form of the diagonal line pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f, and the ninja character NJ Is posing a success. As described above, even with the pending change first effect, there may be a case where the shuriken hits the target icon TI.

  In FIG. 236 (7), the ninja character NJ has disappeared, but until now, the Yoshimune character YM keeps holding a bow, and the arrow icon YI also continues to be displayed. In addition, the first reserved icon f1 that has finished changing the form still has the target icon TI, and the target icon TI is still hit by the shuriken.

  Soon, the display of the arrow icon YI disappears, and an arrow is fired from the character YM of Yoshimune. The fired arrow hits the target icon TI attached to the first hold icon f1. That is, the arrow also hits the icon TI that the shuriken hit earlier. In FIG. 236 (8), the first hold icon f1 is covered by the effect image mf and is invisible.

  In FIG. 236 (9), the effect image mf becomes smaller than the first reserve icon f1, and the first reserve icon f1 changed to the form of the lattice pattern starts to be seen. In FIG. 236 (10), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first suspension icon f1 changed to the form of the lattice pattern is displayed in the first area of the special view 1 suspension icon display region f. In addition, the character YM of Yoshimune, which is the character of the fifth change of presentation, changes the pose and takes a successful pose with the thumb raised.

  Continuing on, in FIG. 236 (11), the character YM of Yoshimune has disappeared, but the first reserved icon f1 that has finished changing its form still has the target icon TI, and the target icon TI has a shuriken and arrow Remains hit. By doing this, it also becomes a history display of what kind of hold change presentation has been performed. That is, it becomes the history display in which the hold change first effect is performed by the shuriken, and becomes the history display in which the hold change fifth effect is performed by the arrow.

  Eventually, the variation display of the decorative pattern which has been performed up to now is finished, and the combination of “decorative 7-decorative 1-decorative 1” is stopped and displayed in FIG. 236 (12), and the decorative symbol is determined in FIG. The display has been started. When the finalized display of the decorative symbol is started, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon e1 is started, and at the stage in the fluctuation icon display area e shown in FIG. 236 (13), the fluctuation icon e1 is considerably small, and the subsequent figures At 236 (14), the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon e1 is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the fluctuation icon display area e. Even if the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished, the target icon TI hit by the shuriken and the arrow remains attached to the first reserved icon f1 of the lattice pattern aspect, and the same is true during the final display.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and in FIG. 236 (15), the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed in the first decoration symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variation display of the fifth symbol is performed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special figure 1 is lit in white. Furthermore, the number indicating the number of reservations in the special view 1 displayed at the top of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced from the previous “1” to “0”. However, the first holding icon is displayed, and the first holding icon f1 remains with the target icon TI hit by the shuriken and the arrow.

  In FIG. 236 (16), the movement animation of the holding icon is started, and the first holding icon f1 with the target icon TI left hit by the shuriken and the arrow remains in the moving icon display area with the target icon TI attached. Movement has begun towards e.

  In FIG. 236 (17), the movement animation of the holding icon is completed, and the fluctuation icon e1 in the form of the lattice pattern is attached to the stage in the fluctuation icon display area e with the target icon TI hit by the shuriken and the arrow. It is displayed. The arrow hitting the target icon TI shown in FIG. 235 (17) is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In the example described above, the shuriken and arrow hit the target icon TI at different timings, but may hit at the same timing. In addition, only one of the shuriken and the arrow may hit, and the other may come off.

  FIG. 237 is a diagram showing another example of the hold changing fourth effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 237 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), and the movement of the holding icon is completed, and the variation of the decorative pattern is performed in a state where one holding icon f1 of the default dot pattern aspect is displayed. The display is being done. In FIG. 237 (2), there is a winning of one ball in the first special view starting opening 230, and in the following FIG. 237 (3), in the second area of the special view 1 reserved icon display area f The hold icon is gradually getting larger. The hold icon, which gradually increases due to the increase animation, is a roulette icon of the hold change fourth effect, and is increased in a mode during variable display. In addition, the on-hold increase sound is output from the speaker 120. In FIG. 237 (4), the animation for increasing the hold icon is finished, and the second hold icon f2 is displayed in the second area of the special view 1 hold icon display area f. The roulette icon, which is the second hold icon f2 shown in FIG. 237 (4), is a mode during variable display, and corresponds to display of a change target candidate. In addition, in the increase animation of the holding icon, the enlargement may be performed in the default mode, and may be changed to the roulette icon of the mode in which the variation display is performed simultaneously with the completion of the enlargement or after the enlargement is completed.

  Thereafter, the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished, the next hold is digested, and the movement animation of the hold icon is performed. In FIG. 237 (5), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon e1 in the default mode is displayed on the stage in the change icon display area e, and the special icon 1 hold icon display area f is displayed in the first area. The roulette icon of the aspect in the variation display is displayed as a special figure 1 reservation icon f1. Also in this example, the roulette icon of the aspect during the variable display is continuously displayed across the continuous variable display of the decorative symbol (also referred to as the symbol variable display of the special figure).

  In this example, the roulette icon in the variation display mode is covered with the effect image mf and disappears without changing from the mode in the variation display mode to the mode in which the character representing the pattern is stopped and displayed (FIG. 237). (6)). In FIG. 237 (7), the effect image mf becomes smaller than the first reserve icon f1, and the first reserve icon f1 changed to the form of the lattice pattern starts to be seen. In FIG. 237 (8), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first reserve icon f1 changed to the form of the diamond pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f. In this example, the mode of the first hold icon f1 is changed without displaying the change mode candidate display.

  Subsequently, an example in which the hold change first effect is performed along with the hold change fourth effect will be described.

  FIG. 237 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 237 (3), and the increase animation of the suspension icon is ended, and the roulette icon of the mode in which the variation display is performed in the second area of the special view 1 suspension icon display area f. Is displayed as the second hold icon f2.

  In FIG. 237 (b), the ninja character NJ for holding change first effect appears on the stage SG of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and in the following FIG. I decided the pose and the balloon of "Ikuzo" is displayed. In FIG. 237 (d), the ninja character NJ throws a shuriken. In FIG. 237 (e), the shuriken overlaps the second reserved icon f2. That is, the shuriken is hit on the roulette icon of the aspect in which the variable display is shown. In FIG. 237 (f), the second reserve icon f2 hit by the shuriken is covered with the effect image mf and is invisible. In FIG. 237 (g), the effect image mf becomes smaller than the first reserved icon f1, and the roulette icon in the variation display mode changed to the diamond pattern starts to be seen. In FIG. 237 (h), the effect image mf completely disappears, and the second icon of the roulette icon in the variation display changed to the form of the diamond pattern is the second reserve icon in the second area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f. It is displayed as f2. Also, the character NJ shown in FIG. 237 (h) takes a success pose that is taken when the display mode change of the icon succeeds.

  In FIG. 237 (i), the ninja character NJ has disappeared. Also in this example, the roulette icon does not change from the aspect in the variable display to the other aspect, and the roulette icon in the aspect in the variable display is covered with the effect image mf and becomes invisible (FIG. 237 (j )). In FIG. 237 (k), the effect image mf becomes smaller than the second reserve icon f2, and the second reserve icon f2 which has changed to the form of the vertical line pattern starts to be seen. In FIG. 237 (l), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the second reserve icon f2 changed to the form of the vertical line pattern is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f. The frequency of the change to the vertical line pattern is low, and the change to the vertical line pattern is more likely to change from the roulette icon than from the normal hold icon.

  In this example, the roulette icon in the variation display mode changed to the diamond pattern mode shown in FIG. 237 (h) corresponds to the change target candidate display, but as a result, the second hold icon f2 has the diamond pattern The roulette icon shown in FIG. 237 (h) does not correspond to the change mode candidate display because the mode has not changed. The roulette icon of the aspect in the variation display changed to the aspect of the rhombus pattern only predicts that it will change to the aspect of the rhombus pattern by the retention change first effect, and the aspect changing with the retention change fourth effect It is because it does not represent. Therefore, when the hold change fourth effect is a false effect, finally, the second hold icon f2 changes to a diamond pattern. In addition, the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ does not hit the roulette icon which is the second reserved icon f2 and the mode of the second held icon f2 (roulette icon) does not change, or the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ When the mode of the second reserve icon f2 does not change despite hitting the second reserve icon f2 (roulette icon), the second reserve icon f2 is more likely to be expected of a big hit than the mode of the vertical line pattern May change only in a low aspect (a lattice aspect, a diamond aspect, or a diagonal aspect), or the aspect may not change.

  In this example, the hold change first effect is performed first, and the hold change fourth effect is performed later. Conversely, the hold change fourth effect is performed first, and the hold change first is performed later. An effect may be performed, or the hold change first effect and the hold change fourth effect may be performed simultaneously. In addition, the on-hold change second effect may be performed together with the on-hold change fourth effect, and the on-hold change third effect may be performed together with the on-hold change fourth effect.

  Further, after the second holding icon f2 which is a roulette icon changes to a holding icon in the form of a diamond pattern at a certain timing in FIGS. 237 (b) to (d), the second holding icon in the form of the diamond pattern There may be a case where the second drag icon f2 is changed to a hold icon in the form of a vertical line pattern when the shuriken hit by the ninja character NJ for hold change first effect is hit at f2. That is, the aspect may change in two stages.

  FIG. 238 is a diagram showing an example in which the on-hold change fifth effect is performed together with the on-hold change fourth effect and an example of the on-hold change sixth effect.

  FIG. 238 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 237 (5), and in the first area of the special view 1 suspension icon display area f, a roulette icon in a variation display mode as the special view 1 suspension icon f1. Is displayed. In addition, the appearance animation of the target icon TI is started, and a part of the target icon TI is beginning to be visible at the center upper end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 238 (2), the appearance animation continues, and the target icon TI continues to descend, and eventually the target icon TI is attached to the first hold icon f1 which is a roulette icon of a mode during variable display, and the appearance animation ends. (Fig. 238 (3)).

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 238 (4), the character YM of Yoshimune, which is the character of the fifth effect of the holding change, appears, and in the subsequent FIG. Holding, arrow icon YI is displayed. Thereafter, the arrow icon YI disappears, and an arrow is fired from the Yoshimune character YM.

  In FIG. 238 (6), the arrow hits the target icon TI attached to the first hold icon f 1, and in the following FIG. (7), the first hold icon f 1 is covered with the effect image mf and disappears. There is. In FIG. 238 (8), the effect image mf becomes smaller than the first hold icon f1, and in FIG. 238 (9), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the special image 1 hold icon display area f is displayed in the first area. The roulette icon in the variation display mode changed to the diamond pattern mode is displayed as the first hold icon f1. In addition, the character YM of Yoshimune, which is the character of the fifth change of presentation, changes the pose and takes a successful pose with the thumb raised. Subsequently, in FIG. 238 (10), the character YM of Yoshimune has disappeared, but the first hold icon f1 still has the target icon TI, and the target icon TI is still hit by an arrow.

  Also in this example, the roulette icon does not change from the aspect in the variable display to the other aspect, and in FIG. 238 (11), the roulette icon in the aspect in the variable display is covered by the effect image mf and disappears ing. In addition, due to the effect image mf, the target icon TI and part of the arrow are covered and can not be seen. In FIG. 238 (12), the effect image mf is smaller than the first reserve icon f1, and the first reserve icon f1 changed to the form of the vertical line pattern is beginning to be seen. In FIG. 238 (13), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first reserve icon f1 changed to the form of the vertical line pattern is displayed in the first area of the special view 1 reserve icon display area f.

  In addition, the arrow fired by the character YM of Yoshimune does not hit the iconic icon TI, the mode of the first reserved icon f1 with the iconic icon TI does not change, or the arrow fired by the character YM of Yoshimune is the iconic icon In the case where the aspect of the first suspension icon f1 with the target icon TI does not change despite having hit a TI, the first suspension icon f1 is expected to be more jackpot than the aspect of the vertical line pattern It may change only to a low degree aspect (a lattice aspect, a diamond aspect, or a diagonal aspect) or the aspect may not change.

  Next, the pending change sixth effect will be described.

  FIG. 238 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), and in the state in which one reserved icon f1 in the form of the default dot pattern is displayed and the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, In the figure 238 (b), the increase animation of the hold icon is started in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the hold icon of the default mode is started. Will gradually increase. Before the increase animation ends, there is a winning of one ball at the first special figure starting port 230 again (Fig. 238 (c)), and in the following figure 238 (d), the special figure 1 reserved icon display area f In the third area, the countdown icon is displayed as a third hold icon f3. This countdown icon is due to the hold change sixth effect, and if the increase animation is not performed or is performed, the increase animation of the countdown icon has a shorter time than the increase animation of the default mode hold icon. Become an animation. Therefore, in FIG. 238 (d), the second hold icon f2 of the default mode that has won first is still on the way to the increase animation, but the countdown icon that has won later has completed the display. The countdown icon is a non-patterned gray aspect in which a number is written down as time passes. In the countdown icon at the appearance of FIG. 238 (d), the number "3" is described. In addition, from the speaker 120, the hold increase sound for the third hold icon f3 is output.

  In FIG. 238 (e), the increase animation of the second hold icon f2 ends, the display of the second hold icon f2 is completed, and the speaker 120 outputs a hold increase sound for the second hold icon f2. In the following FIG. 238 (f), the number of the countdown icon is “2”. Further, in FIG. 238 (g), the number is “1”, and in FIG. 238 (h), the number is finally “0”. Then, the countdown icon as the third hold icon f3 is covered with the effect image mf and disappears (FIG. 238 (i)). In FIG. 238 (j), the effect image mf becomes smaller than the third reserve icon f3, and the third reserve icon f3 which has changed to the form of the diamond pattern starts to be seen. In FIG. 238 (k), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the third reserve icon f3 changed to the diamond pattern is displayed in the third area of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area f.

  Although the timing at which the number of the countdown icon becomes “0” is various, the interval of the countdown (the decrease of the number according to the passage of time) is constant. However, the interval may be limited to exactly one second, but it may not be limited, and in some cases it is uniform at 2 seconds, and in some cases it is uniform at 0.5 seconds. It may be done. In addition, the number of the countdown icon does not change to “0” in the variation display of the decoration symbol performed when the countdown icon appears, and the number of the countdown icon is “while displaying the variation display of the decoration symbol from next onwards. It may be 0 ", but the number does not decrease with the start of the new variable display of the decorative symbol. Furthermore, the hold icon of the countdown icon corresponds to the change target candidate display. In addition, the hold icon of the countdown icon also corresponds to the hold icon in the form of the advance notice, and before the symbol variation display which is the target of the advance notice is started, the number is always "0". However, there may be cases where the number does not become “0” (for example, the case of changing to a default mode before becoming “0”, etc.). In addition, when the above-mentioned number becomes “0”, the form change of the holding icon may occur without fail, or even when the above-mentioned number becomes “0”, the form change of the holding icon You may make it not occur.

  FIG. 239 is a diagram illustrating another example of the on-hold change sixth effect. This figure 239 shows three examples.

  First, the first example will be described. The first example is an example in which the on-hold change first effect is performed together with the on-hold change sixth effect. FIG. 239 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 238 (d), and in the state in which the display of the countdown icon as the third hold icon f3 is completed first, the increase animation of the second hold icon f2 ends, The display of the second hold icon f2 is completed, and the speaker 120 outputs a hold increase sound for the second hold icon f2. In FIG. 239 (2), the ninja character NJ for the holding change first effect appears on the stage SG of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and in the following FIG. 3 (3), the ninja character NJ is I decided the pose and the balloon of "Ikuzo" is displayed. In FIG. 239 (4), the ninja character NJ throws a shuriken. In addition, the number of the countdown icon of the third hold icon is “2”. In FIG. 239 (5), the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ overlaps the third reserved icon f3. In FIG. 239 (6), the third reserved icon f3 is covered with the effect image mf and can not be seen. There is.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 229 and the subsequent figures, a number of effect images are displayed, but all of these effect images have no pattern. However, the effect image described so far may be displayed in the form of a pattern of an icon that changes thereafter. That is, the display itself of the effect image may correspond to the change mode candidate display. Alternatively, the effect image described above may be displayed in a pattern of the size (reliability) of the possibility that the aspect of the icon may change after this. That is, there is a high possibility that the aspect of the icon changes in the order of the dot pattern, the oblique line pattern, the rhombus pattern, the lattice pattern, the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern. You may do so.

  In FIG. 239 (7), the effect image mf becomes smaller than the third reserve icon f3, and the third reserve icon f3 which has been changed to the lattice pattern starts to be seen. In this example, the aspect of the target holding icon changes before the countdown icon number becomes “0”. In FIG. 239 (8), the effect image mf completely disappears, and the third reserve icon f3 changed to the form of the lattice pattern is displayed in the third area of the special view 1 reserve icon display area f. Also, the character NJ shown in FIG. 239 (8) takes a success pose to be taken when the display mode change of the icon succeeds. Although the number of the countdown icon disappears, the mode of the third hold icon f3 may change once again when the number becomes “0” in the normal case, but in this example, FIG. 239 ( At the timing of 7), the change for the hold change sixth effect is also performed. Therefore, the mode of the third hold icon f3 does not change any more. As described above, when the mode of the target holding icon changes by the two types of hold change effects of the hold change first effect and the hold change sixth effect, the mode is changed by one type of hold change effect It is easy to change to a mode with high expectation of big hit (for example, mode by 3 steps instead of 2 steps), or it may be made to always change into a mode with high expectation of big hit. . That is, if the mode of the pending icon that was the countdown icon changes before the number of the countdown icon changes to "0", it is likely to change to a mode in which the expectation of the big hit is high, or the expectation of the big hit is You may make it change to a high aspect certainly.

  In addition, although it was a combination of the pending change sixth effect and the pending change first effect here, it may be a combination of the pending change sixth effect and the pending change second effect, and the pending change sixth effect and the pending change It may be a combination of the third effect, a combination of the hold change sixth effect and the hold change fourth effect, or a combination of the hold change sixth effect and the hold change fifth effect, It may be a combination other than.

  Next, the second example will be described. This second example is an example of simultaneous change presentation. FIG. 239 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 238 (d), and in the state where the display of the countdown icon as the third hold icon f3 is completed first, the increase animation of the second hold icon f2 ends, The display of the second hold icon f2 is completed, and the speaker 120 outputs a hold increase sound for the second hold icon f2. In the following FIG. 239 (b), the number of the countdown icon is “2”. Furthermore, in FIG. 239 (c), the number becomes “1”, and in FIG. 2 (d), it becomes “0” at last. Then, the simultaneous change presentation is started, and the effect image mfn covering all the reserved icons displayed at this stage is displayed (FIG. 239 (e)). The effect image mfn here is a group of a plurality of effect images, and is an effect image which covers all of the special figure 1 suspension icon display area f. It may be one large effect image. In addition, simultaneous change production here is started according to the number of the countdown icon becoming “0”, but there may be cases where simultaneous change production is started when the hold is accumulated up to a certain number of hold May be That is, there may be a case where the simultaneous change presentation is started according to the winning on the special view starting opening. For example, for winning a special figure starting opening where the reserve is accumulated up to the fourth reserve which is the third reserve or the maximum reserve number, or the eighth reserve which is the maximum reserve number obtained by combining special figure 1 and special figure 2 In response, simultaneous change presentation may be started. In addition, if the number of times of variation display of the decorative symbol reaches a certain number of times, if there is a reserve, simultaneous change production may be started, and the number of times of variation display of the decorative symbol is a certain number of times The simultaneous change presentation may be started if n or more reservations are stored when reaching. For example, simultaneous change production may be started every 15 changes, and more specifically, when simultaneous change production is started according to the display start of the change display of the decorative symbol which becomes the 15th change. The simultaneous change effect may be started after the start of the display of the change display of the decorative symbol which is the 15th change. In FIG. 239 (f), each of the effect images mfn becomes smaller, and in FIG. 2 (g), the effect image mfn disappears completely, and three reserved icons f1, f2 and f3 are displayed in the special figure 1 reserved icon display area f. Is displayed. Among the three pending icons f1, f2 and f3, the second pending icon f2 is still in the default mode, but the first pending icon f1 is changed to the diagonal pattern, and the second pending icon f1 is the countdown icon The 3 reserve icon f3 is changed to a lattice pattern. In addition, in the simultaneous change effect, there may be cases where the modes of all the pending icons that were displayed change, there may be cases where only the pending icon that was the countdown icon changes, and one pending icon also has an aspect It may not change.

  Finally, the third example will be described. FIG. 239 (d ′) shows the state of FIG. 2 (d), that is, three pending icons are displayed, and the number of one countdown icon among them is “0”, this number At the same time as the value of “0” becomes “0”, there is a winning of one ball in the first special view starting opening 230. It is to be noted that the same is true even if there is a winning of one ball at the first special figure starting port 230 immediately before the number of the countdown icon becomes “0”. Also in the same figure (e ') following FIG. 239 (d'), the simultaneous change presentation is started, and the effect image mnf covering all of the special figure 1 reserved icon display area f is displayed, and the fourth reserved icon f4 is increased The animation is not visible. Eventually, in the figure (f '), the effect image mfn disappears, and the four reserved icons f1 to f4 are displayed in the special figure 1 reserved icon display area f. In this example, the increase animation of the fourth hold icon f4 is canceled from the beginning and is not executed. However, as shown in FIG. 239 (f ′), the speaker 120 outputs the hold increase sound of the fourth hold icon f4. If the number of the countdown icon becomes “0” while the increase animation of the hold icon is displayed, the increase animation is canceled halfway or disappears due to the effect image mnf even if it is not canceled. If the increase animation is not canceled on the way, after the effect image mnf disappears, if the remaining scene of the increase animation remains, that scene is displayed. Of the four pending icons f1 to f4 shown in FIG. 239 (f '), the first pending icon f1 to the third pending icon f3 are the same as those pending icons f1 to f3 shown in FIG. 239 (f), The fourth hold icon f4 shown only in FIG. 239 (f ′) is displayed in a hatched pattern. That is, the increased fourth hold icon f4 is displayed in a mode changed by the simultaneous change effect. Note that the fourth hold icon f4 may be displayed in the default mode even if simultaneous change presentation is performed.

  FIG. 240 is a diagram showing an example in which the hold change first effect is performed in a state where the curtain effect is being performed.

  The curtain effect is an effect executed by the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is one of the overlap effects overlapping the display that has been displayed so far, among the displays that have been displayed so far At least a part of the display changes to a silhouette display by the curtain effect, and the existence and the outer shape can be understood, but the pattern and the color can not be understood.

  FIG. 240 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), in which the moving animation of the holding icon is completed, and the variation of the decorative pattern is performed in a state where one holding icon f1 of the default dot pattern aspect is displayed. The display is being done. Further, in FIG. 240 (a), the curtain effect is started, and the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH appears at the lower end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The upper edge portion CHu overlaps the base icon UIb from the front side, and in the form of a diagonal line, just below the stage prepared in the variation icon display area e and the four areas prepared in the reserved icon display area f. It is displayed.

  In FIG. 240 (b), the curtain display CH is rising, and the stage prepared in the variation icon display area e and the lower portion of the hold icon (here, the first hold icon f1) overlap the curtain portion CHc, It is a silhouette display. The silhouette display in the curtain effect is displayed in a solid black color. In addition, although the frames of the four areas prepared in the reserved icon display area f are not displayed as silhouettes but are not visible, these frames may also be displayed as silhouettes.

  In FIG. 240 (c), the curtain display CH rises to the upper end of the base icon UIb, and the entire variation icon e1 overlaps the curtain portion CHc and the entire first reserved icon f1 also overlaps the curtain portion CHc. The both icons e1 and f1 are displayed in silhouette. In addition, the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH overlaps from a front side a part of the lower frame portion CRf in the closed through-hole display CR.

  In FIG. 240 (d), the curtain display CH has risen to a height exceeding the channel throught display CR, and a part of the channel throught display CR (frame portion CRf) in a closed state is overlapped with the curtain portion CHc. However, the silhouette is not displayed and part of it is invisible.

  In FIG. 240 (e), the ninja character NJ for holding change first effect appears on the stage SG of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and in the same figure (f), the ninja character NJ is I decided the pose and the balloon of "Ikuzo" is displayed. In FIG. 240 (g), the ninja character NJ throws a shuriken. In FIG. 240 (h), the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ is displayed behind the curtain portion CHc, and the shuriken is displayed as a silhouette. In addition, three lines representing the momentum of the shuriken are displayed across the curtain portion CHc. In FIG. 240 (i), the shuriken has flew to a position where it contacts the first holding icon f1s displayed in silhouette, and in the following FIG. 240 (j), the first holding icon f1s is visible but the shuriken is I can not see it. However, three lines representing the momentum of the shuriken are shown in silhouette and are visible. In FIG. 240 (j), the shuriken that is displayed as a silhouette overlaps the first reserved icon f1s that is also displayed as a silhouette. That is, as in the case shown in FIG. 229 (k), the shuriken hit the first reserved icon f1. In FIG. 240 (k), the silhouette display of the effect image mf is displayed at the position where the first hold icon f1s was displayed until then, and in FIG. 240 (l), the effect image mfs displayed in the silhouette becomes slightly smaller ing. In the subsequent FIG. 240 (m), the effect image mfs displayed in a silhouette is not visible, and instead, a first suspension icon f1s displayed in a silhouette is displayed. In FIG. 240 (m), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, as shown in FIG. 229 (m). In FIG. 240 (n), no change is seen in the first reserved icon f1s displayed in silhouette, but the character NJ shown in FIG. 240 (n) takes a successful pose when it succeeds in changing the display mode of the icon. I am taking

  In FIG. 240 (o), the deletion animation of the character NJ is started, and the character NJ is covered by the smoke image and disappears. In FIG. 240 (p), the smoke image disappears and the character NJ disappears, and nothing is displayed on the stage SG.

  After the character NJ disappears, the curtain display CH starts to descend, and in FIG. 240 (q), the curtain display CH descends to the upper end of the base icon UIb. However, at this stage, it is not possible to confirm the mode of the first hold icon f1. In FIG. 240 (r), the curtain display CH is lowered to a position where the upper portion of the first reserved icon f1 can be seen, and the mode of the first reserved icon f1 changes from the default dot pattern to the diagonal pattern It can confirm that it is changing. That is, before the descent of the curtain display CH is completed (before the curtain effect ends), it is possible to confirm the mode of the hold icon or the change icon. In FIG. 240 (s), the curtain display CH is completely lowered and the curtain display CH is extinguished. In this example, the curtain effect is performed from immediately before FIG. 240 (a) to immediately before FIG. 240 (s). Note that the timing when the curtain icon CHc starts overlapping the entire reserved icon and the entire fluctuating icon may be the timing at which the character NJ threw a shuriken, or may be the timing shown in FIG. 240 (h). The timing may be the same as (i). Further, the timing when a part of the overlapped icon and the part of the fluctuating icon start to appear may be the timing shown in FIG. 240 (n) or the timing shown in FIG. 240 (o). It may be the timing shown in FIG.

  In the curtain effect described above, although the pattern and the color are not known, it can be understood which hold icon is subjected to the hold change effect. In addition, when the curtain effect is being performed, the on-hold change effect may be more easily performed or may be always performed as compared to the case where the curtain effect is not being performed.

  FIG. 240 (p ′) is a diagram showing an example different from FIG. 240 (p). In FIG. 233 (p '), the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH is displayed in a lattice pattern. The upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH may be displayed in the form of a pattern representing the size (reliability) of the possibility that the aspect of the icon is changing. That is, there is a high possibility that the aspect of the icon changes in the order of the dot pattern, the diagonal line pattern, the diamond pattern, the lattice pattern, the vertical line pattern, and the horizontal line pattern. It may be changed. The aspect of the upper edge CHu may continue to be displayed in the same manner from the appearance time shown in FIG. 240 (a). Alternatively, the aspect of the upper edge portion CHu may be the aspect of the default dot pattern when the appearance of FIG. 240 (a), and the aspect may change at the timing of FIG. 240 (n). That is, the mode of the upper edge portion CHu may also change to a mode representing the possibility that the mode of the icon has changed, at the timing when the mode of the first reserved icon f1 may have changed. In this case, the character NJ may not take a successful pose, or the form of the icon may not change even when the successful pose is taken. Also, the aspect of the upper edge CHu may change at a timing immediately before the icon can be seen, as shown in FIG. 240 (q). In addition, the aspect of the upper edge CHu may be displayed in the form of a pattern of changing icons. That is, the display itself of the upper edge portion CHu may correspond to the change mode candidate display. Also in this case, the aspect of the upper edge CHu may continue to be displayed in the same manner from the appearance time shown in FIG. 240 (a), and the character NJ takes a successful pose and the aspect of the first hold icon f1 changes The mode may change at the timing of FIG. 240 (n), or the mode may change at the timing immediately before the icon can be seen, as shown in FIG. 240 (q). The mode of the upper edge portion CHu shown in FIG. 240 (a) to FIG. 240 (q) is a mode of a diagonal line pattern, and the mode of the first reserved icon f1 which starts to be visible from FIG. is there. Further, since the aspect of the upper edge portion CHu shown in FIG. 240 (p ′) is the aspect of the lattice pattern, the aspect of the first reserved icon f1 which begins to appear thereafter is also the aspect of the lattice pattern.

  FIG. 241 is a diagram showing another example in which the curtain effect and the hold change first effect are combined.

  The example of FIGS. 241 (a) to (e) shown at the left end of FIG. 241 is an example in which a portion overlapped with the curtain portion CHc is displayed as a silhouette in the through-through display CR. In this manner, at least a part (or all) of the through-throughlet display CR may be displayed in a silhouette, such that the roulette effect may be started (the through-throughlet display CR may open). It corresponds to However, just because the silhouette is displayed does not necessarily mean that the roulette effect is started, and it may not be started, or the roulette effect is always started when the silhouette is displayed. May be FIG. 241 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (c), and in FIG. 241 (b), the curtain display CH has risen to a height exceeding the chan- nellet display CR, and the chan- nellet display CR in a closed state. A part of the (frame part CRf) is overlapped with the curtain part CHc, and a part thereof is in a silhouette display. In this example, as shown in FIG. 241 (b), the curtain display CH is further raised, and the upper edge CHu reaches a position to hide the lower end of the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 241 (c), the closed channel through-let display CR starts to vibrate, and the roulette effect is started. In the next FIG. 241 (d), the upper and lower frame parts CRf start to open and the display space CRs starts to be seen, but the part overlapped with the curtain part CHc is a silhouette display and the displayed content is unknown. In FIG. 241 (d), only the question mark at the right end is visible. In FIG. 241 (e), the through-throughlet display CR is fully open, and the upper frame portion CRf is displayed at a position beyond the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH. Here too, the part overlapped with the curtain part CHc is still a silhouette display, and only the question mark on the right end is visible. After this, as in FIG. 229 (s), the variable display is started in the display space CRs. Eventually, as in Figure 229 (t), the variable display in the chan-throughlet display CR ends, and character display such as pre-reading notice is displayed in the display space CRs, but the variable display also displays the right end portion of the character display such as pre-reading notice. The removed part can not be seen by the silhouette display. Thereafter, as in FIG. 229 (v), the channel through display CR returns to the closed state.

  The example of FIG. 241 (1) to the same figure (5) is an example in which the success history display of the on-hold change effect is displayed. FIG. 241 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (j), and in FIG. 241 (1), the silhouette display of the effect image mf is displayed at the position where the first hold icon f1 was displayed until then In FIG. 2B, the effect image mfs displayed in the silhouette is slightly smaller. In the subsequent FIG. 241 (3), the effect image mfs displayed in silhouette is not visible, and instead, the first suspension icon f1s displayed in silhouette is displayed. In FIG. 241 (3), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, as shown in FIG. 229 (m). In FIG. 241 (4), although no change is seen in the first reserved icon f 1 s displayed in silhouette, the character NJ shown in FIG. 241 (4) takes a successful pose when it succeeds in changing the display mode of the icon. It may be assumed that the on-hold change effect has been confirmed and displayed by the display on the character NJ of the successful pose. Next, in FIG. 241 (5), on the curtain display CH, a success history display SRH indicating that the on-hold change presentation has succeeded is displayed. This success history display SRH is a display in which the character "Success" is displayed on a non-patterned background, and is not directly above the first hold icon f1s displayed as a silhouette whose mode is supposed to be changed, but as a silhouette display. It is displayed directly above between the changed fluctuation icon e1s and the first reserved icon f1s displayed in silhouette.

  The example of FIG. 241 (A)-the figure (H) is an example in which the pending change presentation was performed one more time while the success history display SRH of the pending change presentation is displayed. FIG. 241 (A) is a continuation from the state after the ninja character NJ displayed in FIG. 241 (5) disappears, and in FIG. 241 (A), the success history display SRH is displayed on the curtain display CH. Is displayed.

  In FIG. 241 (B), the ninja character NJ for holding change first effect reappears on the stage SG of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and in the same FIG. (C), the ninja character NJ follows. Decides the pose and a balloon of "Ikuzo" is displayed. Thereafter, although not shown, the ninja character NJ throws a shuriken in the same manner as in FIGS. 240 (g) to 240 (j) and hits the first reserved icon f1s in the silhouette display, as shown in FIG. In D), the silhouette display of the effect image mf is displayed at the position where the first reserved icon f1s was displayed until then, and in FIG. 241 (E), the effect image mfs displayed in the silhouette is slightly smaller. In the subsequent FIG. 241 (F), the effect image mfs displayed in a silhouette is not visible, and instead, a first suspension icon f1s displayed in a silhouette is displayed. In FIG. 241 (F), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, as shown in FIG. 229 (m). In FIG. 241 (G), no change is seen in the first reserved icon f1s displayed in silhouette, but the character NJ shown in FIG. 241 (G) takes a successful pose when it succeeds in changing the display mode of the icon. It is clearly displayed that the pending change production has succeeded again. Next, in FIG. 241 (H), another success history display SRH is displayed above the success history display SRH that has been displayed so far, and two success history displays SRH in total are displayed. That is, the success history display SRH of the number according to the number of successes of the pending change presentation is displayed.

  In addition, the display number of success history display SRH may be displayed more than once by success of one holding change presentation. In this case, the number of displayed success history displays SRH represents the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the changing aspect of the icon. For example, when the icon of the default dot pattern (in this case, the first reserved icon f1) is targeted, if one success history display SRH is displayed, one step of change is performed once and the icon is hatched If two success history displays SRH are displayed, a change in one step is performed twice or a change in two steps is performed at one time, and the icon changes in the shape of a diamond pattern. If three success history displays SRH are displayed, one change is performed three times or change for three steps is performed at one time, and the icon changes to a grid pattern, If four success history displays SRH are displayed, one change is performed four times or a change for four steps is performed at one time, and the icon changes to a vertical line pattern, and the success history display is displayed. If five SRHs are displayed, one step change is Once done by icon is either out content changes once performed is changed to an aspect of the horizontal line pattern.

  FIG. 241 (H-1) is a diagram illustrating another example in which the success history display SRH is displayed. In this example, the success history display SRH is displayed directly above the corresponding icon. That is, two success history displays SRH indicating that the aspect change of the fluctuation icon e1 is successful are displayed directly above the fluctuation icon e1, and a success history indicating that the aspect change of the first hold icon f1 is successful One display SRH is displayed immediately above the first hold icon f1. The display mode is the same for all the success history displays SRH, and the display is such that the characters “success” are displayed on the non-patterned background.

  FIG. 241 (H-2) is a diagram showing still another example in which the success history display SRH is displayed. In this example, one success history display SRH4 indicating that the aspect change of the fluctuation icon e1 is successful is displayed directly above the fluctuation icon e1, and indicates that the aspect change of the first suspension icon f1 is successful. One success history display SRH2 is displayed immediately above the first hold icon f1. The success history display SRH4 indicating that the form change of the fluctuation icon e1 is successful is a display in which the character “success” is displayed on the background of the lattice pattern, and the fluctuation icon e1 is displayed in the same lattice pattern as the background pattern. It may be a definite display indicating that it is changing. Alternatively, it may be a definite display indicating that the display mode is changed to four or more stages. For example, in the case where the fluctuation icon e1 before change is a default dot pattern icon, it may be a definite display indicating that the change is in the form of a vertical line pattern or a horizontal line pattern, and the change before change is In the case where the icon e1 is a hatched icon, it may be a finalized display indicating that the icon e1 has been changed to a horizontal line pattern. Further, the success history display SRH2 indicating that the form change of the first hold icon f1 is successful is a display in which the character “success” is displayed on the background of the diagonal line pattern, and the first hold icon f1 is a background pattern It may be a definite display indicating that the same oblique pattern has been changed. Alternatively, the display may be a definite display indicating that the mode is changed to two or more stages. For example, if the first reserved icon f1 before the change is a default dotted pattern icon, it may be a definite display indicating that it has changed to a mode more than a diamond pattern, and the first before the change In the case where the reserved icon f1 is a hatched icon, it may be a finalized display indicating that it has been changed to a grid pattern or more.

  FIG. 242 is a diagram illustrating an example of a combination of a curtain effect and a hold change effect.

  FIGS. 242 (a) to (e) show examples in which the appearance animation of the target icon TI described using FIG. 234 is performed during execution of the curtain effect. FIG. 242 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (c), and in FIG. 242 (a), the curtain indication CH has risen to a height exceeding the channel through-let indication CR. Note that, in this example, a portion of the chan-throughlet display CR overlapped with the curtain portion CHc is not displayed as a silhouette and is not visible. In the subsequent FIG. 242 (b), the appearance animation of the target icon TI is started, and a part of the target icon TI is beginning to be visible at the upper center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this appearance animation, the target icon TI gradually descends, and in FIG. 242 (c), the target icon TI is very close to the curtain display CH. In FIG. 242 (d), the target icon TI is displayed across the curtain display CH, and the lower end portion of the target icon TI is overlapped with the curtain portion CHc to be a silhouette display, while the upper end portion of the target icon TI is displayed. Is displayed normally. Note that the middle part of the target icon TI is overlapped with the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH and becomes invisible. In FIG. 242 (e), the target icon TIs, which is also displayed in a silhouette, is attached to the first hold icon f1s that is displayed in a silhouette. In the silhouette display, it can be judged from the outer shape when the shape is changed by attaching another icon such as the target icon TIs or the shape of the icon itself is changed, but it is possible to judge from the outer shape. If the etc. (for example, the mode of roulette display) changes, it can not be determined.

  FIGS. 242 (1) to (5) show examples in which the display of the countdown icon described using FIG. 238 is performed during execution of the curtain effect. FIG. 242 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (c), and in FIG. 242 (1), the curtain display CH is elevated to a height exceeding the channel through-let display CR. In FIG. 242 (2), there is a winning of one ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and the increase animation of the reserved icon in the second area of the special figure 1 reserved icon display area f is not performed, FIG. 242 (3) Then, the hold increase sound for the second hold icon f2 is output from the speaker 120, and the second hold icon f2s displayed in a silhouette manner is displayed. The hold increase sound here may be a dedicated hold increase sound that is output only when the countdown icon is displayed due to the hold increase. In the second hold icon f2s displayed as a silhouette, although a pattern, color, character or symbol or the like is unknown, a dedicated hold increase sound is output from the speaker 120 or a hold icon increase animation is not performed. From this, it can be inferred that the countdown icon is displayed due to the hold increase. In fact, although the second hold icon f2 is displayed as a countdown icon here, the countdown display is omitted because the number representing the countdown can not be seen at all. Those who can guess that the countdown icon has been displayed can wait for when the second hold icon f2 changes, which may improve the interest of the game. Eventually, when the number of the countdown icon, which is the second hold icon f2, becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 242 (4), the silhouette of the effect image mf at the position where the second hold icon f2s was displayed. The display is displayed, and in the following FIG. 242 (5), the effect image mfs displayed in the silhouette is a little smaller.

  FIGS. 242 (A) to (H) are examples in which the curtain effect is executed across the variable display of the decorative symbol which is continuous. FIG. 242 (A) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (c), and in FIG. 242 (A), the curtain display CH is elevated to a height exceeding the through-throughlet display CR. After that, as long as the silhouette display is viewed through the curtain portion CHc, although not shown, the first change (temporary stop) is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then the right symbol display area 208c is performed. A second stop (temporary stop) is performed, and as shown in FIG. 242 (B), a temporary stop is also performed in the last remaining middle symbol display area 208b, and a combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” Shakes (temporary display). Then, in FIG. 242 (C), the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed, and the confirmation display is started. In FIG. 242 (D), the finalized display of the decorative symbol is performed, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon e1s is started in the silhouette display, and the silhouette is displayed on the stage in the fluctuation icon display area e shown in FIG. 242 (D). The fluctuation icon e1s on the display is considerably small, and in FIG. 242 (E), the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon e1s that was the silhouette display is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the fluctuation icon display area e. Absent.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and in FIG. 242 (F), the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed in the first decoration symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variation display of the fifth symbol is performed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special figure 1 is lit in white. Furthermore, the number indicating the number of reservations in the special view 1 displayed at the top of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced from the previous “1” to “0”. However, one hold icon is displayed as a silhouette display, and nothing is displayed yet on the stage in the variation icon display area e. The curtain rendition is still continued, and will be executed across the fluctuating display of the continuous decorative symbols. Subsequently, the move animation of the hold icon is started, but illustration is omitted here, and in FIG. 242 (G), the move animation of the hold icon is completed, and no hold icon is displayed, and the change icon is displayed. On the stage of silhouette display in the display area e, the fluctuation icon e1s of the silhouette display is also displayed. Further, the curtain display CH starts to descend, and the curtain display CH descends to the upper end of the base icon UIb. However, at this stage, it is not possible to confirm the form of the fluctuation icon e1. In FIG. 242 (H), the curtain display CH has fallen to a position where all of the fluctuation icon e1 can be seen, and the aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is changed from the aspect of the default dot pattern to the aspect of the lattice pattern You can check that. As described above, as long as the silhouette display is viewed through the curtain portion CHc, the on-hold change effect is not started but the aspect of the change icon e1 changes. In this example, the curtain effect itself corresponds to the on-hold change effect. As described above, since the change icon e1 can also be considered as a type of the hold icon, it is referred to as the hold change effect including the change effect of the change icon. When the hold change effect is performed by the curtain effect itself, any one or more of the hold change first effect to the hold change sixth effect or any one or more of the hold change effects or all the hold changes You may be comprised so that it may change easily to the aspect with high expectation of big hit compared with presentation.

  FIG. 243 is a view showing another example of the curtain effect.

  FIGS. 243 (a) to (b) show an example in which the curtain display CH rises to the vicinity of the upper end portion of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. FIG. 243 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (d), and in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, variation display of decorative symbols is performed. In FIG. 243 (a), the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH rises to the vicinity of the upper end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol The display area 208c is completely covered by the curtain part CHc. The variation display of the decorative symbols performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is in a state where no silhouette is displayed and nothing is visible.

  Thereafter, although not shown, the first stop (temporary stop) is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then the second stop (temporary stop) is performed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the last remaining middle symbol A temporary stop is performed also in the display area 208b, and the combination of the decorative symbols shakes (provisionally displays). Then, in FIG. 243 (b), the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the finalized display of the combination of the decorative symbols is started. When the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, the combination of the decorative symbols which has not been seen until then is displayed on the curtain part CHc. That is, not the silhouette display but the decorative pattern displayed on the back side of the curtain portion CHc is preferentially displayed on the front side. In FIG. 243 (b), the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed on the curtain portion CHc. Therefore, the player can know whether the jackpot or the loss has occurred by the combination of the decorative symbols. The fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icon f1 remain in the silhouette display.

  FIGS. 243 (1) to (3) show an example in which the curtain effect and the meter effect described using FIGS. 80 to 92 are combined. FIG. 243 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (c), in which the curtain display CH is elevated to the upper end of the base icon UIb and the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH is closed. It overlaps with a part of lower frame part CRf in CR from the front side. In FIG. 243 (1), the meter display appears at the upper left of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The meter display here is one in which the meter frame mf is white, and is hereinafter referred to as a white meter display MW. In the following description, white is treated as a dot pattern, blue is a diagonal pattern, green is a diamond pattern, red is a grid pattern, gold is a vertical line pattern, and iridescent is the same as a horizontal line pattern. The white meter indication MW shown in FIG. 243 (1) is of the increase type, and is provided with five scales, and becomes full at the sixth stage. The white meter indicated MW meter has risen to two graduations. Note that the appearance timing of the meter display is various as described in detail with reference to FIGS. 80 to 92. For example, in the variable display of the decorative symbol performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is When it becomes high speed fluctuation, the time when the design fluctuation starts etc are raised. In addition, the meter display may start when the display is empty (the meter is at 0), or the meter may be stored halfway as shown by the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 243 (1). The display may be started in the state.

  The effect by the meter display here may be a type of pending change effect in which the aspect of the pending icon or the changing icon changes when the meter is full. The color (pattern) of the meter frame mf or the color (pattern) of the meter may indicate the ease of success in changing the form of the hold icon or the change icon. That is, it is easy to succeed in changing the form in the order of white (dot pattern), blue (hatched pattern), green (diamond pattern), red (grid pattern), gold (vertical pattern), iridescent (horizontal pattern), rainbow If it is a color (horizontal line pattern), it may be successful if the meter is full. Alternatively, the color (pattern) of the meter frame mf or the color (pattern) of the meter may represent a color (pattern) in which the aspect of the holding icon or the variation icon changes. For example, in the case where the meter frame mf or the meter is red (grid pattern), the aspect of the holding icon or the variation icon may be changed to red (grid pattern) when the meter is full. Furthermore, when the meter is full, if the meter frame mf or the meter is white (dot pattern), the aspect of the holding icon or the variation icon changes to the aspect above by one step, and blue (hatched pattern) If it changes to a two-step aspect, it changes to a three-step aspect if it is green (diamond pattern), it changes to a four-step aspect if it is red (grid pattern), gold (vertical line If it is a pattern), it may change to an aspect in five steps, and if it is rainbow color (horizontal line pattern), it may change to an aspect in six steps.

  In FIG. 243 (2), the curtain display CH continues to ascend, and in FIG. 243 (3), the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH ascends to the vicinity of the upper end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. doing. The upper half of the white meter display MW is not seen overlapped by the upper edge CHu, but the lower half of the white meter display MW is covered by the curtain portion CHc, and the silhouette display is plain black color It is displayed. That is, the meter frame mf, the portion filled with the meter, and the portion not filled with the meter are displayed in a single black color without any pattern. Therefore, the player can not know how far the meter has been stored. On the other hand, even in the same silhouette display, as shown in FIG. 243 (3 ′), it is possible to distinguish and display the part filled with the meter and the part not filled with the meter. In such a case, The player can know how far the meter has been stored. In addition, although the white meter display MWs displayed in a silhouette as shown in FIG. 243 (3 ') is displayed up to the scale, the scale may not be displayed.

  FIGS. 243 (A) to (E) show examples in which the curtain effect is executed by the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The curtain effect may be executed by the display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any two of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be executed by the display on the symbol display device, or may be executed by the display on all three decorative symbol display devices.

  FIG. 243 (A) is a continuation from FIG. 230 (c), and a change candidate icon HKI in the form of a hatched pattern is displayed above the treasure box TB. In FIG. 243 (B), the curtain effect is started, and the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH appears at the lower end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The upper edge portion CHu is displayed in the form of a hatched pattern overlapping with the character display of "Castle town" representing the castle town mode from the front side.

  In FIG. 243 (C), the curtain display CH is rising, and the character display of "jojocho" is overlapped with the curtain part CHc, and a silhouette display of only black with no pattern is made and the characters can not be read.

  In FIG. 243 (D), the curtain display CH rises until it exceeds the treasure box TB, and the whole treasure box TB is overlapped with the curtain part CHc, and the whole treasure box TB is a silhouette display of only black without pattern.

  In FIG. 243 (E), the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH rises to the upper end of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the change candidate icon HKI displayed above the treasure box TB is the curtain portion CHc. Even the change candidate icon HKI is overlapped and the silhouette display of a solid black color with no pattern is displayed. For this reason, it is impossible to confirm the form of the change candidate icon HKI. In the state in which the change candidate icon HKI is displayed in silhouette, it may be configured to be more easily changed to a mode in which the expectation of the big hit is high compared to the state in which the silhouette is not displayed. The change candidate icon HKI, which has been displayed in the form of a diagonal pattern, may be changed to a mode more than a rhombus pattern when the curtain effect is finished, or may be changed to a mode more than a rhombus pattern. May be On the other hand, the variation display of the fifth symbol displayed at the upper end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed at the upper edge CHu. That is, instead of the silhouette display, the fifth symbol to be variably displayed which has been displayed just behind the upper edge CHu is preferentially displayed on the front side.

  Note that the display start timing of the curtain display CH may be before the treasure box TB is displayed, and in this case, it is not possible to grasp an aspect such as the pattern or color of the treasure box TB from the beginning. In addition, the display start timing of the curtain display CH may be after the treasure box TB is displayed and before the appearance of the change candidate icon HKI from the treasure box TB, in this case, the change candidate Aspects such as the pattern and color of the icon HKI can not be grasped from the beginning.

  In the example shown in FIG. 229 to FIG. 243 described above, an example in which the shuriken and the arrow come off is not illustrated, but the shuriken and the arrow may come off without hitting the icon or go off without hitting the target icon TI. There are also times when Moreover, even if it hits, the aspect of an icon may not change. Alternatively, even if the Bancho character BC appears to have an icon, the aspect of the icon may not change, or even if the roulette icon changes to an aspect in which the character representing the pattern is stopped and displayed, The form of the roulette icon may not change. On the other hand, when a shuriken or an arrow hits, the form of the icon may be changed without fail, the case in which the Bancho character BC appears to have an icon, or the roulette icon represents a pattern. Even when the character changes to the stop display mode, the icon mode may change.

  Next, an example of the configuration of the rendering device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 described in the present specification will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 244 (a) is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the rendering device 206, and FIG. 244 (b) is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the rendering device 206.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 244 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the front surface side of the outer peripheral portion is covered by the decoration members constituting the effect device 206, and a part can not be seen visually. . In addition, a decoration member may be comprised by transparency and the outer peripheral part of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 may also be comprised so that visual recognition is possible. Also, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. The first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, and the general view hold lamp 216 are illustrated. It is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right of the lower part of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left thereof. Hereinafter, a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. In the first UI unit 280, a variation icon display area is provided on the left side, and a pedestal h0s is disposed in the variation icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 can be displayed in a mode in which the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal h0s. When the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed, it is informed that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed. In addition, in the case of symbol determination display (during symbol suspension), the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed. Further, the navigation character NC is displayed on the right side of the change icon h0. The navigation character NC shown in FIG. 244 (a) is a raised Yoshimune character. The navigation character NC is a character that is always displayed at the normal time, and for example, performs advance notice display or pre-reading notice display by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game. In the second UI unit 281, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. The stage may indicate the pedestal of the holding icon. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In addition, the navigation character NC does not have to be displayed at all times, and a specific advance notice or effect using the advance character NC (for example, advance notice, advance notice in the symbol change display, and N suspension of symbol change display are stored) It may be displayed at the time of the effect etc. which are displayed at the time, or when the navigation character NC is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 244 (a), since four variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, four suspension icons h11, h12, h13 and h14 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 and the four suspension icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-pattern and white display mode), the display mode according to the progress of the game May change. By this, it is possible to perform advance notice display and advance notice display. Here, the variation icon may indicate an icon corresponding to the symbol variation display. In addition, the change icon h0 may indicate a hold (the hold) corresponding to the symbol change display. The variation icon h0 may not be displayed.

  The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure fluctuation game, which is displayed after the suspension is digested and the special figure fluctuation game is started, in other words, an icon related to a symbol fluctuation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More strictly, when the first hold icon with the oldest start winning moves from the hold icon display area to the change icon display area, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon or it is expressed that the change icon moves. Good. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variation icon display area is completed may be referred to as a variation icon. The variation icon is displayed in a display size different from the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may facilitate identification of the change icon and the hold icon, but may be the same size. Also, the change icon may be a display mode associated with the display mode of the hold icon. The fluctuation icon can be notified of the success or failure of the fluctuation according to the display mode (the fluctuation prediction), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the fluctuation is notified. Therefore, the fluctuation icon can be viewed as an icon related to holding, and can also be considered as a kind of holding icon in the sense that notification of the success or failure result of the special figure fluctuation game is held. The erase timing may be a timing before, a same timing, or a timing after the timing at which the success or failure result of the change is notified. The variation icon h0 may not be displayed.

  At the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second decorative symbol (FIG. 5) smaller than the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is displayed stopped. Note that the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and may be displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol Some or all of the symbol combinations (one or two decorative symbols match) may be unmatched. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display (here, "4" and "0") of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.) It is also good. In addition, the second number-of-holds display may display the number of holdings of only one of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 and displays the number of holdings of both the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 It is also good.

  In addition, a background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (normal game state, positive change state, hidden positive change state, short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates the background display corresponding to the mode that can be set by the user, the background display performed as the advance notice or the advance notice in the symbol variation display, and the background display not related to the result of the determination. In addition, the background display may be displayed in a plurality of types in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a positive change state, a hidden positive change state, and a short time state). In this case, it may be changed with a rule (for example, it changes in order like background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A → ... etc. Here, the rule is In the case of collapse, it may be made a notice (premiere notice) of a big hit decision.) The order may be changed randomly.

  In addition, a household crest 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it can be vertically moved or rotated according to the contents of the effect. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 244 (a), the family crest 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest 224E is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an appropriate position. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  In addition, on the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, one of the effect movable bodies, a first large-scale behavior character 224Ga on which the characters of "large" are applied, and a second on which the characters of "panel" are applied A large-scale behavior character item 224 Gb, a third large-scale behavior character item 224 Gc to which the characters “振” are given, and a fourth large-scale behavior character object 224 G d to which the characters “to dance” are given are arranged. Each of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd can be rotated about the center and can be moved toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large-scale behavior character item 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character article 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can be overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. . In addition, light emitting means such as a full color LED is internally incorporated in the first large screen behavior character object 224 Ga to the fourth large screen behavior character article 224 Gd, and light can be emitted in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  Also, above the decorative symbol display device 208, a one-handed box character 224H which is one of the effect movable bodies is disposed, and is configured to be able to move up and down according to the contents of the effect . The one thousand box character article 224H is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can be overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the one-man box product 224H, light emitting means such as a full color LED is built in, and light can be emitted in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  A transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the family crest 224E, the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd, and the one-sided box character 224H, The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body through the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion to emit light in a predetermined pattern in the transmission region. It is configured to be able to look like In the embodiment shown in FIG. 244 (a), the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion that refracts light toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that emits light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Also, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol according to the light emission mode of the LED, for example. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is drive-controlled by the first sub control unit 400. The LED is lit and displayed while the special drawing symbol is stopped, but is blinked or turned off while the special drawing symbol is changing. The preview notice may be made by changing the display mode, the lighting mode or the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. In addition, the fourth symbol may be lighted and displayed during symbol fluctuation, and may be extinguished and displayed while symbol stopping.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 244 (b), three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N disposed on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The configuration of these decorative symbol display devices is the same as the configuration of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The second decorative symbol display device The length in the width direction of the 208 M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208 L, and the height of the display area is slightly short. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right end side portion overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left end side portion 1) It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are also configured to be able to slide in the vertical direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the rendering operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above does not have to be configured to be able to be all performed, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to In addition, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the rendering operation (that is, they may be fixed). In addition, the rendering operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M may be different from the rendering operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N. For example, the number of rendering operations that can be performed is different. Or, the rendering operation itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can move and rotate in the right direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can move in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured to be able to perform rendering operation. Specifically, while the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs rendering operation, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate, or Only one decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. In addition, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily indicate the decorative symbols in the display devices in a variable manner, and are named for convenience. It should be added here that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol It is also possible to perform variable display of or perform multiple types of effect display. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered by the decorative member constituting the rendering device 206, and a portion thereof can not be viewed. In addition, a decoration member may be comprised by transparency and the outer peripheral part of 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L may also be comprised so that visual recognition is possible. Also, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. The first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, and the general view hold lamp 216 are illustrated. It is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side of the lower part of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. On the left side of the first UI unit 280, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in a mode in which the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on a pedestal, and notifies that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed. Further, on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, a navi character NC which is a raised Yoshimune character is displayed. In the second UI unit 281, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 244 (b), since four variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, four suspension icons h 11, h 12, h 13 and h 14 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In FIG. 244 (b), the variation icon h0 and the four suspension icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-pattern and white display mode), but the game progressed Depending on the display mode may change. By this, it is possible to perform advance notice display and advance notice display.

  In the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". And in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" It is displayed stopped by the combination. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and may be displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol Some or all of the symbol combinations (one or two decorative symbols match) may be unmatched. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. In addition, the second reserved number display may be divided and displayed in different decorative symbol display devices in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.) It may be done. In addition, the second number-of-holds display may display the number of holdings of only one of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 and displays the number of holdings of both the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 It is also good.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability changing state, a hiding probability changing state, a time saving state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates the background display corresponding to the mode that can be set by the user, the background display performed as the advance notice or the advance notice in the symbol variation display, and the background display not related to the result of the determination. In addition, the background display may be displayed in a plurality of types in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a positive change state, a hidden positive change state, and a short time state). In this case, it may be changed with a rule (for example, it changes in order like background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A → ... etc. Here, the rule is In the case of collapse, it may be made a notice (premiere notice) of a big hit decision.) The order may be changed randomly. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be a frameless form. Also, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

  In addition, the above-described family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move or rotate vertically according to the contents of the effect. . In the example shown in FIG. 244 (b), although the family crest 224E is located at the initial position, the initial position of the family crest 224E shown in FIG. 244 (b) is the upper end of the family crest 224E. Although the portion is at a position slightly overlapping the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set at an appropriate position.

  Also, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned one-handed box character 224H is disposed, and can be moved up and down according to the contents of the effect. The one thousand box character article 224H is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps on the front side of these decorative symbol display devices It is made possible.

  The light guide plate IL described above is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device, the family crest 224E and the one-piece box character 224H, and the player can display the display state of each decorative symbol display device via the light guide plate. The action of each effect movable body is made visible.

  Further, in FIG. 244 (b), a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 245 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of variation display of the decorative symbol executed in the present embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 7B is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the variation display of the decorative symbol which is a big hit or a loss after reaching the reach state.

  In FIG. 245 (a), after the start of variation display of the decoration symbol (variation start), the decoration symbol stops being decided after the first stop of the decoration symbol, the second stop of the decoration symbol, and the third stop of the decoration symbol. It shows the flow. In addition, in the following description, although the stop order of a decorative symbol is made in order of a left symbol, a right symbol, and a middle symbol in principle, it is not limited to this. In addition, there may be cases where the first stop and the second stop may be performed simultaneously according to the notice (the change notice and the advance notice), the mini game and the effect of the dummy game, etc., or the first stop. , The second stop and the third stop may be performed simultaneously. Here, the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop, the period from the first stop to the second stop, the period from the second stop to the third stop, and the period from the third stop to the finalized stop 11) can be expressed in some cases. In the following description, with regard to the effects to be performed in the example of rendering that will be out without reaching the reach state, “Figure XX (11) -1”, “Figure XX (11) -2” ... as branch numbers in the drawings. Etc. may be used, and these branched numbers can be mutually replaced. Further, there are cases where effects that can be combined as various effects in the timing chart shown in FIG. 245 (a) can be performed in a period indicated by "(11)" (for example, a Gasse notice, etc.). In addition, during the period from the second stop to the third stop, or from the third stop to the decision stop, perform false eye announcement (preceeding notice) by pseudo-gaze effect, same color (same kind) symbol stop, etc. There are also cases where you can do it. This is a concept that is also applicable to each effect example of the embodiments described above.

  Figure 245 (b), after the start of variation display of the decorative symbol (variation start), through the formation of reach state, transition to the super reach (SP reach), derived results of reach effect, the decorative symbol is removed or big hit It shows the flow until it is decided and stopped in the aspect of, and then the big hit game is over. Here, a period from the start of fluctuation to the formation of the reach state is represented by a period of “(1)”, and a period from the formation of the reach state to the transition to the SP reach is the period of “(2)” The period from the transition to SP reach to the derivation of the result of reach production is represented by the period of "(3)", and the period from the result of the reach production to derivation is from "(4) In some cases, it may be possible to represent the period from the decision stop to the end of the big hit game by the period "(5)". In the following description, with regard to the effects to be performed in the example of an effect that becomes a big hit or lose after reaching the reach state, “Figure XX (2) -1” and “Figure XX (2) -2” as branch numbers in the drawings. There are cases where “Figure XX (3) -1”, “Figure XX (3) -2”, etc. are used, and the examples with these branch numbers can be replaced with each other. Further, in the description of the present embodiment, various notices including mini games and advance notices may be performed in the period of “(1)”, and effects such as pseudo-links may be performed in the period of “(2)”. If a notice or group notice may be made by the display of a normal reach or a cut-in image, or if there is a chance up notice during SP reach or a notice by a cut-in image displayed in the period of (3). In the period of "(4)", there may be swing fluctuation, revival big hit effect, wipe display, etc. In the period of "(5)", the effect during the big hit game is performed, and the big hit There may be a case in which a probability change notification or a hold sequence notification etc. is performed during the game. In the embodiment described above and the embodiments described below, each executed notice or effect may be configured to be performed in a period other than the period in which the notice or effect is performed. In addition, these notices and effects may be combined and performed, and in this case, even if one notice (effect) is overlapped with the other notice (effect). Good. Further, in the embodiments described above and the embodiments described below, portions described with the same branch numbers can be replaced as appropriate.

  FIGS. 246 to 250 are diagrams showing in a step-by-step manner the change effect centering on the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. A change effect said here is an effect which changes aspects, such as a pending | holding icon (for example, 1st pending | holding icon h1), the fluctuation icon h0, and a character icon. Also, the change effects shown in FIGS. 246 to 250 are effects performed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the change effects shown in FIGS. 246 to 250 is shown in the other drawings. Various effects are also feasible. Furthermore, although the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are also provided in FIGS. 246 to 250, these are not illustrated, but the effect example shown in FIGS. 246 to 250 is The effect example in the pachinko machine 100 in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not provided may be used. Also, in FIG. 246 to FIG. 250, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and the general view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. In addition, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Reference numerals shown in FIGS. 246 to 250 represent common components when the same reference numerals as those used heretofore are used. Also, even when different codes are used, they may be common as technical ideas. That is, as the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 229 to 243 and the technical ideas shown in the other drawings to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 246 to 250, and Conversely, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 246 to 250 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 229 to 243 and the technical ideas shown in the other drawings. In that case, what attaches | subjects the same code | symbol may be handled as the same component, and may be able to be substituted.

  FIG. 246 is a diagram showing an example of a change effect including a pending icon change effect, and FIG. 247 shows a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 246 up to FIG. These are figures which show an example of the change production including a timer advance production.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -1, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. That is, the situation before the start of fluctuation is shown. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed. Further, a second number-of-holds display is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Furthermore, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, on the lower right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a navi character NC, which is a character of Yoshimune that has stood up, is displayed. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (11) -1, since the symbol is fixedly displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 246 is a special figure low probability general drawing low probability state (non-power-supplying state). On the lower left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in this non-electric support state, the reserved icon of the special view 1 is displayed. In addition, the pending | holding icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in the predetermined area | region (for example, right end of a display screen) of 1st decorative symbol display apparatus 208L in a non-electric support state.

  In the holding icon display area formed on the lower left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a holding icon indicating holding of the special view 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is also indicated by the number of pending icons in Special Figure 1 and the second number of reservations display, in addition to the number of lights in Special Figure 1 suspension lamp 218. In addition to the number of lights of the holding lamp 220, the number of holding icons in the special view 2 and the display of the second number of holdings are also shown. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes the old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 246 (11) -1, three suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the suspension icon display area, and these three suspension icons h11, h12 and h13 are all Is also displayed in the default display mode (round no-pattern and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 246 is in the non-power support state (non-short time state), so it is difficult for the power chute to open and the special figure 2 start opening 232 has difficulty in winning This is because

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon for the special figure that is easy to win is displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 according to the control state (playing state), and the reserve icon for the other special figure is displayed. It is made not to be displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 246 (11) -1, the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed. I will not. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is not displayed. In the non-power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 2 may be displayed, or in the power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed in the order of the variation start in the special figure display device → the movement animation start or deletion of the hold icon → the variation start of the decorative symbol. It is also good. The same applies to the following description.

  When the reserve (first reserve) of Special Figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 (not shown) is started, as shown in FIG. 246 (11) -2, the first decorative symbol is displayed. In the display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icon h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device 208 The second holding icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first holding icon h11 as a first holding icon h11. As displayed, the third hold icon h13 is moved to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different. Furthermore, among the second number-of-holds display displayed in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display representing the number of holdings of the special view 1 is changed to the display of “2”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -3, the variable display of the decorative symbol is continued. After that, the variation display of the decorative symbol started at the timing of FIG. 246 (11) -2 continues to FIG. 246 (11) -17.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -4, a character YM of Yoshimune holding a bow appears in the upper left corner. The character YM of Yoshimune corresponds to the character of the change effect. More specifically, it corresponds to a character that may change the display mode of the broad holding icon, which is a generic name of the holding icon and the variation icon.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -5, the ninja character NJ appears in the upper right corner. This ninja character NJ also corresponds to the character of the change effect. More specifically, the ninja character NJ may change the display mode of the holding icon in a broad sense, or may change the display mode of another character (for example, the character YM of Yoshimune holding a bow). It corresponds to a certain character. Note that the Yoshimune character YM that has appeared in FIG. 246 (11) -4 may also be a character that may change the display mode of another character (for example, the ninja character NJ). In FIG. 246 (11) -5, both the Yoshimune character YM who held the bow and the ninja character NJ are displayed.

  In addition, when one display (for example, display of one character) changes the display of the other (for example, display of one character), the one displayed first is the one displayed later. May be changed, or, conversely, there may be a case where the one displayed first is changed, even if the one displayed later. Alternatively, the one displayed later may not change the one displayed first, and when displayed simultaneously, one may change the other, or at the same time. Even when displayed, one may not change the other. Furthermore, the larger display may change the smaller display, and conversely, the smaller display may change the larger display. Moreover, the display with the higher reliability of the big hit may change the display with the lower reliability of the big hit, and conversely, the display with the lower reliability is higher than the display with the higher reliability. It may be changed. The jackpot reliability may be a player's advantage (the same throughout the specification), and is represented by a color, a pattern, a size, a difference in number, or the like.

  In FIG. 246 (11) -6, the character YM of Yoshimune who holds the bow has not started the movement, but the character NJ of the ninja starts the movement and throws a shuriken. Note that the operation “start the operation” mentioned here does not include the repetitive operation or the standby operation, and means a new operation different from the previous one (the same applies to the following). On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -6, a scene is displayed in which a shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -7, the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ suddenly turns to fly toward the Yoshimune character YM holding a bow. The scene that looks like is displayed. The character YM of Yoshimune who held the bow still has not started operation, and the Shuriken eventually hits the character YM of Yoshimune, and in FIG. 246 (11) -8, at least a part of the character YM of Yoshimune is an effect image Covered by mα, the character YM of Yoshimune is less visible than before covered by the effect image mα. The effect image mα may cover only a part of the Yoshimune character YM, or may cover the whole.

  In FIG. 246 (11) -9, the effect image mα disappears, and a character YM of Yoshimune to be boring appears. That is, the character YM of Yoshimune has changed from the display mode with bow and arrow to the display mode for boring. The character YM of Yoshimune who does this bowling also corresponds to the character of the change effect. More specifically, it corresponds to a character that may change the display mode of the broad holding icon, which is a generic name of the holding icon and the variation icon. The change of the display mode of the character YM of Yoshimune is that the effect has changed, more specifically speaking, the type of the effect is the same but the mode is changed. That is, although the change presentation is continued, it can be considered that the aspect of the change presentation has changed and another presentation has been made. Note that the change effect may be interrupted once. For example, while the effect image mα is displayed, it can be seen that the change effect is temporarily interrupted. In addition, before and after the change of the effect, for example, the type of the effect may be different, such as the change effect and the feature operation effect.

  During a period when it is considered that a change effect using YM, a character of Yoshimune holding a bow, in other words, a character YM of Yoshimune holding a bow, is being executed, the start timing and the end timing shown below are It can be represented by all combinations where the start is first and the end is later. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the character YM of Yoshimune who holds the bow appears (FIG. 246 (11) -4), or the timing when the ninja character NJ starts the operation (Shuriken Timing) or timing at which the effect image mα appears. On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing at which the shuriken hit, or may be the timing at which the effect image mα appears (FIG. 246 (11) -8), or the effect image mα disappears. The timing may be the timing when the display mode of the character YM of Yoshimune has changed.

  In FIG. 246 (11) -10, the ninja character NJ which has been displayed so far disappears. In a period when it is considered that a change effect using a ninja character NJ, in other words, a change effect in which a ninja character NJ is displayed, the start timing and end timing of the start timing and end timing shown below are before the end Can be represented by all combinations of That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the ninja character NJ appears (FIG. 246 (11) -5), or the timing when the ninja character NJ starts the operation (the timing when the shuriken is thrown) The timing may be the timing at which the shuriken hit, or the timing at which the effect image mα appears (FIG. 246 (11) -8). On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing at which the ninja character NJ disappears (FIG. 246 (11) -10), or the timing at which the ninja character NJ ends the operation (timing at the end of throwing the shuriken) ), It may be the timing when the shuriken hit, it may be the timing when the effect image mα appears (FIG. 246 (11) -8), or the timing when the effect image mα disappears. (The timing when the display mode of the character YM of Yoshimune has changed) may be used.

  Moreover, in this example, the change effect using the ninja character NJ fails in changing the display mode of the reserved icon in a broad sense, and instead, it succeeds in changing other effects. . However, changing the display mode of the reserved icon in a broad sense may also fail in changing other effects, or both may be successful. Alternatively, among the changing of the display mode of the broad reserve icon and the changing of other effects, it may be successful to change either one or both. You may make sure to succeed.

  At the same time as or after the ninja character NJ disappears, a Yoshimune character YM with a bowling ball starts to move and throws out the bowling ball. In addition, the character YM of Yoshimune may start to operate before the ninja character NJ disappears. Furthermore, the ninja character NJ may remain displayed without disappearing. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -12 displays a scene in which the bowling ball thrown out by the character YM of Yoshimune appears to be rolling toward the hold icon or the change icon. There is. The bowling ball eventually hits the first holding icon h11, and in FIG. 246 (11) -13, the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image mβ and the first holding icon h11 is before being covered by the effect image mβ It is also difficult to see. Note that the effect image mβ may cover only a part of the first hold icon h11 or may cover the whole. Alternatively, the effect image mβ may cover all the displayed reserve icons, or may cover up to the fluctuation icon h0. That is, the second UI unit 281 may be covered, or the entire or a part of the holding frame (the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281) may be covered. When the first UI unit 280 is covered, the navigation character NC may be covered.

  In FIG. 246 (11) -14, the effect image mβ disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the display mode of the character (here, the character of Sabohani). A plurality of types of display modes of the holding icon are prepared, and may change to display modes of other characters (for example, Yoshimune or Sakai), or may change to red or rainbow display modes. The display mode different from the default display mode is the display mode of the prefetch notice, and the reliability of the jackpot varies depending on the display mode. For example, the display mode of the Yoshimune character is higher in the reliability of the jackpot than the display mode of the Sabohan character, and the jackpot determination may be made in the rainbow display mode. The jackpot reliability represents the ease with which the jackpot symbol is displayed. Moreover, in FIG. 246 (11) -14, the character YM of Yoshimune to be boring has disappeared.

  During the period when it is considered that the change presentation using Yomune character YM to be bowled, in other words, the change presentation to display Yomune character YM to be boring, the start timing and end timing shown below start It can be represented by all combinations that end first. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing at which the shuriken hit, or may be the timing at which the effect image mα appears (FIG. 246 (11) -8). It may be the timing when the character YM appears (FIG. 246 (11) -9), or it may be the timing when the character YM of Yoshimune who starts boring starts operation (timing when the bowling ball is thrown out). The timing may be when the bowling ball hits, or may be when the effect image mβ appears (FIG. 246 (11) -13). On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing at which the character YM of Yoshimune who is boring disappears (FIG. 246 (11) -14) or the timing at which the character YM of Yoshimune who is boring has ended the operation It may be the timing at which the bowling ball has been thrown), the timing at which the bowling ball has hit, or the timing at which the effect image mβ appears (FIG. 246 (11) -13). The timing may be the timing when the effect image mβ disappears (the timing when the display mode of the hold icon changes).

  Moreover, in this example, the change presentation using the character YM of Yoshimune who is boring succeeds in changing the display mode of the holding icon in a broad sense, but may fail. Furthermore, in this example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, but the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change, and the display mode of the third hold icon h13 changes The display mode of a plurality of hold icons (which may be all the hold icons displayed) may change. Alternatively, the display mode of the change icon h0 may change, or the display mode of both the hold icon and the change icon may change. In addition, when the display mode of the character YM of Yoshimune changes, it may be determined that the display mode of the holding icon or the change icon changes at the change stage. That is, in this example, it may be determined that the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes in the stage of FIG. 246 (11) -9.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -15, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -16, the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -17, the third stop is performed and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and “decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 2” is lost The temporary stop by the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative designs, and in the same figure (11) -18, the combination of the decorative designs of the loss of "decoration 7-decor 2-decor 2" is finalized and displayed. The fluctuation icon h0 is erased at the timing of the finalized display.

  Subsequently, the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -1, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon of the display mode of Sabohani which is the target of the symbol variation of this time) at the display position of the first It moves to the fluctuation icon display area and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Furthermore, among the second number-of-holds display displayed in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display representing the number of holdings of the special view 1 is changed to the display of “1”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -2, the character YM of Yoshimune who holds the bow corresponding to the character of the change effect appears in the upper left corner.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -3, the ninja character NJ corresponding to the change effect character appears in the upper right corner.

  In FIG. 246 (1) -4, the Yoshimune character YM holding the bow has not started operation, but the ninja character NJ starts operation and throws a shuriken. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -4, a scene is displayed in which a shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -5, a scene in which a shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ is likely to hit the variation icon h0 in the display mode of the sabothani is displayed. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -6, a scene in which the shuriken turns suddenly and does not hit the fluctuation icon h0, but passes over the first reserved icon h11. Is displayed, and in the figure (1) -7, the shuriken disappears and the ninja character NJ also disappears. After all, the change presentation here has failed, and neither the holding icon nor the change icon changes the display mode. The timing at which the shuriken disappears and the timing at which the ninja character NJ disappears may be earlier than the timing at which the shuriken disappears or earlier than the timing at which the ninja character NJ disappears.

  The period during which it is considered that the change effect using the ninja character NJ is executed can be represented by all combinations of the start timing and the end timing shown below, in which the start is first and the end is later. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the ninja character NJ appears (FIG. 246 (1) -3), or the timing when the ninja character NJ starts the operation (the timing when the shuriken is thrown) ) May be. On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing at which the ninja character NJ disappears (FIG. 246 (1) -7), or the timing at which the ninja character NJ ends the operation (timing at the end of throwing the shuriken) The timing may be such that the shuriken is not hit and the shuriken has disappeared.

  Also, from the appearance of the ninja character NJ (FIG. 246 (1) -3) to the scene where the shuriken appears to fly towards the hold icon or the change icon (FIG. 246 (1) -4) Then, after the appearance of the ninja character NJ in FIG. 246 (11) -5, the scene in which the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon (FIG. 246 (11) -6) It is the same. That is, in the case where the change production fails and the case where the change production is successful, a part including the first part is the same aspect, and the aspect is different from the middle. In other words, the first partial scene of the animation of the change effect using the ninja character NJ is the same in the case where the change effect fails and the case where the change effect succeeds, and the scene is different from the middle . In this way, if the introduced part is the same, it is difficult at first to decide which player will develop, but eventually it becomes clear that it is likely to fail or succeed, and even after the presentation is started In some cases, it can be noticed. In addition, in the case where the change production has failed and the change production has succeeded, a scene in which the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon after the ninja character NJ starts operating Can be said to be the same. That is, it can be said that at least a part of the way is the same in the case where the change production fails and the case where the change production is successful. Even in this case, it may be possible to pay attention to the branch of the effect.

  At the same time as or after the ninja character NJ disappears, the Yomune character YM holding the bow, which has not been activated, starts to operate and shoots an arrow. In addition, the character YM of Yoshimune may start to operate before the ninja character NJ disappears. Furthermore, the ninja character NJ may remain displayed without disappearing. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -8, a scene is assumed in which an arrow fired by the character YM of Yoshimune is likely to hit the variation icon h0 in the display mode of Sabohani. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -9, the arrow hits the fluctuation icon h0, the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image mβ, and the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image mβ It is more difficult to see than before. Note that the effect image mβ may cover only a part of the variation icon h0 or may cover the whole. Alternatively, the effect image mβ may be covered including a part or all of the displayed reserve icon. That is, the second UI unit 281 may be covered, or the entire or a part of the holding frame (the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281) may be covered. When the first UI unit 280 is covered, the navigation character NC may be covered.

  In FIG. 246 (1) -10, the effect image mβ disappears, but there is no change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0. That is, as with the hold icon, a plurality of types of display modes of the variation icon h0 are prepared, and display modes of other characters (for example, Yoshimune and Zen) and red and rainbow colors are facilitated. The display mode different from the default display mode is a so-called display mode of a normal advance notice in which the currently displayed variable display is a target of notice, and the reliability of the jackpot varies depending on the display mode. For example, the display mode of the Yoshimune character is higher in the reliability of the jackpot than the display mode of the Sabohan character, and the jackpot determination may be made in the rainbow display mode. After all, the change presentation here has failed, and neither the holding icon nor the change icon changes the display mode. As described above, the display mode may not change even if the arrow is hit. However, when the arrow is hit, the display mode may always be changed (successful) or the arrow may be hit. The display mode may or may not be changed depending on whether or not the effect image mβ appears. That is, even if the effect image mβ does not appear, the display mode does not always change (fail), and when the effect image mβ appears, the display mode always changes (success). Good. In addition, if the display mode of the variation icon changes (if it succeeds), the jackpot may be determined. Furthermore, although the change icon h0 is the target here, the hold icon may be the target.

  In FIG. 246 (1) -11, the character YM of Yoshimune with a bow and arrow has disappeared.

  The period during which it is considered that the change effect using the Yom Soo character YM is executed can be represented by any combination of the start timing and the end timing shown below starting and ending later. . That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the character YM of Yoshimune appears (FIG. 246 (1) -2), or the timing when the character YM of Yoshimune starts the operation (timing when the arrow is fired The timing may be the timing at which the arrow was hit, or the timing at which the effect image mβ appears (FIG. 246 (1) -9). On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing at which the character YM of Yoshimune disappears (Fig. 246 (1) -11), or the timing at which the character YM of Yoshimune ended its operation (the arrow ended The timing may be the timing at which the arrow was hit, the timing at which the effect image mβ appears (FIG. 246 (1) -9), or the effect image mβ may disappear. It may be timing (Fig. 246 (1)-10).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -12, the first stop is performed, and the "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -13, the second stop is performed, and the “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 246 (2) -1, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navi character NC, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (2) -2, advance notice of the sabo hani group is started, display of “SP evolution” is performed in the vicinity of the navi character NC, and development to super reach is possible. It has been informed. It should be noted that when the advance notice of the sabothani group is started, the display of the hold icon disappears together with the four stages (the first stage hs1 to the fourth stage hs4) prepared in the second UI unit 281, and is prepared in the first UI unit 280. The fluctuation icon h0 also disappears with the pedestal hs0. Although the display of the navigation character NC is left, the display of the navigation character NC may disappear. In addition, the display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed below the second hold number display.

  Subsequently, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (3) -1, the screen is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which the main character Yoshimune and the hostess swordsman confront each other is displayed. In addition, in the vicinity of the navi character NC, the characters "Kenou reach" are displayed, and it is informed that the game has developed into the Kenou reach. Subsequently, in FIG. 246 (3)-2, the button effect is started in a state where the sword reach reaches, and a button image 136 a imitating the chance button 136 is displayed. This button image 136a overlaps at least a part of the opposing Yoshimune and the swordsman. In addition, the characters "push" for promoting the operation are displayed. In FIG. 246 (3) -3, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 247 (3) -4, the weak cut-in image CIw is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the characters “Ken-Age Reach” are still displayed near the navigation character NC, but the characters “Weak cut-in” may be displayed in place of the characters “Ken-Age Reach”.

  In addition, normally, the operation effective period which receives operation of the chance button 136 is provided, and only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the response effect (here, the display of the weak cut-in image CIw ) May be performed, or even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the same effect as the response effect or an effect different from the response effect will be performed after the operation effective period has elapsed. You may

  After that, as shown in FIG. 247 (3) -5, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the scene where the main character Yoshimune fell is displayed together with the character "losing", and the first decorative symbol display device 208L In the approximate center of, "Decoration 3" to be stopped and displayed in the middle pattern is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 2-decor 3-decor 2" .

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (4) -1, the display of the decorative symbol that has been reduced and displayed below the second number-of-retentions display is returned and displayed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is displayed in a state of temporary stop due to swing fluctuation. . At this time, the character of "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, and it is notified that it will be lost. In addition, the four stages (the first stage hs1 to the fourth stage hs4) and the hold icon in the second UI unit 281 and the variation icons h0 in the display mode of the pedestal hs0 and the safari in the first UI unit 280 are also restored. It is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (4) -2, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is displayed in a final manner. At the timing of this finalized display, the variation icon h0 of the display mode of Sabohani is erased.

  In the example described above, the change effect using the character YM of Yoshimune who does boring shown in FIG. 246 (11) -9 is a change effect for the holding icon, and the bow and arrow shown in FIG. 246 (1) -2. The change presentation using the character YM of Yoshimune having a change presentation directed to a variation icon. Further, the change effect using the character NJ of the ninja shown in FIG. 246 (1) -3 was a failure effect, but even if it is a change effect intended for a change icon, a change effect intended for the hold icon It may be Furthermore, the change production using the character YM of Yoshimune who does boring shown in FIG. 246 (11) -9 may be a change production targeting a fluctuation icon, and the change production performed in this example is all fluctuation It may be unified to the change presentation for the icon. Alternatively, the change effect using the character YM of Yoshimune with the bow and arrow shown in FIG. 246 (1) -2 may be a change effect for the hold icon, and all the change effects performed in this example are It may be unified to the change production for the pending icon.

  In addition, the character YM of Yoshimune appears earlier in the character YM of Yoshimune and the character NJ of ninja, but the character YM of Yoshimune and the character NJ of ninja may appear simultaneously at the same time, Conversely, the ninja character NJ may appear earlier. That is, in the case of the change production using the character YM of Yoshimune and the change production using the character NJ of the ninja, there is a case where the change production using the character YM of Yoshimune is started at the same time other than when it is started first. Alternatively, the change effect using the ninja character NJ may be started first.

  In the example described above, the character YM of Yoshimune with a bow and arrow is used for the change icon h0 changed from the first holding icon h11 whose display mode is changed by the change effect using the character YM of Yoshimune who is boring The change production was executed, but it ended in a failure, and eventually it has been lost, but the character YM of Yoshimune who does boring than when the change production using the character YM of Yoshimune with a bow and arrow is performed It is easy for the player to be more advantageously deployed if the change presentation used is performed. Here, the tendency to be an advantageous development means being easy to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a positive change state or / and a short time state), being easy to start premiere rendering, or having a big hit finalization effect It may be that it is easy to be started, and it may be that the big hit symbol is easy to be finally displayed. For example, the character YM of Yoshimune with a bow and arrow changes the display mode of the variation icon h0 in the default display mode to the display mode of the Sabohani character, but eventually it is lost in the variation display, The character YM of Yoshimune who appears first appears from the beginning, and the character YM of Yoshimune who does the boring changes the display mode of the variation icon h0 of the default display mode to the display mode of the character of Yoshimune, Become. The same is true even when the display mode of the hold icon changes. In this case, the pre-reading notice is executed, and the change display of the pre-reading notice object becomes a big hit. In this way, the boring Y. Yoshimune character YM may appear from the beginning instead of appearing only when the Yoshimune character YM having the bow and arrow does not change. Further, in this case, the character YM of Boring Yoshimune, which has appeared from the beginning, is not likely to be a favorable development for the player, but is limited to the character YM of Boring Yoshimune, whose appearance has changed and appeared. It may be easy for the player to have an advantageous development. Or, conversely, the character YM of Yoshimune who does bowling may be an aspect (representation) that appears only in the change from the character YM of Yoshimune with a bow and arrow, or is limited to the character YM of Yoshimune with a bow and arrow It may be an aspect (rendering) that does not appear and appears only in a change from some rendition.

  In the case where the effect using the ninja character NJ is started first, and then the change effect using the character YM of Yoshimune, which performs the change effect using the character YM of Yoshimune with the bow and arrow, and the bowling is started. There may be. In this case, the effect using the ninja character NJ does not change the effect using the Yoshimune character YM. In addition, even after the effect using the ninja character NJ is ended, the change effect using the character YM of Yoshimune with a bow and arrow or the change effect using the character YM of Yoshimune performing a bowling may be executed. Good.

  In addition, the effect using the character YM of Yoshimune with the bow and arrow appearing in FIG. 246 (1) -2 and the effect using the character NJ of the ninja appearing in FIG. It can be seen that it was a failure production (Gasse production) among the common types of productions such as the change production aimed at. Note that both effects may be a change effect directed to the hold icon, which is another type of effect different from the change effect directed to the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, only the effect using the character YM of Yoshimune of the two effects may be a success effect that succeeds in changing the display mode of the icon, or only the effect using the character NJ of the ninja is a success effect It may be, and both effects may be success effects. If both effects are successful effects, the display mode of the icon changes twice, or if it changes simultaneously, the display mode changes to a display mode in which the player's degree of interest rises by two or more.

  Subsequently, an example in which the effect using the timer display and the change effect are performed will be described.

  247 (11) -1 and FIG. 2 (11) -2 are the same as FIG. 246 (11) -1 and FIG. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -3 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the timer display TMα appears at the upper left. “03:00” is displayed on the timer display TMα shown in FIG. 247 (11) -3, which suggests that a certain effect is started three seconds after the countdown is started. . That is, the timer display TMα displayed as “03:00” is a timer announcement effect in which the countdown is started from 3.00 seconds. In the timer display in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform display below the decimal point less than one second. Further, under the timer display TMα shown in FIG. 247 (11) -3, the characters “during timer preparation” are displayed, and it is notified that the countdown has not yet started. Even when the timer display appears, while this "timer preparation in progress" is displayed, the timer advance notice is not yet started, and the advance notice effect during preparation is executed to notice that the timer advance effect is started. Although it can be viewed as being in the on state, it can also be viewed as the timer advance announcement being started when the timer display appears. Furthermore, an icon of a character may be attached to the timer display TMα, and the same applies to other timer displays described below.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -4, the ninja character NJ corresponding to the change effect character appears in the upper right corner. This ninja character NJ is equivalent to a character which may change the display mode of the holding icon in a broad sense or change other effects (for example, when changing the effect mode or the content of the effect). . In FIG. 247 (11) -4, both the timer display TMα and the ninja character NJ are displayed.

  In FIG. 247 (11) -5, the characters “ready for timer” remain displayed, and the countdown has not yet started on the timer display TMα, but the character NJ of the ninja starts to move and throws a shuriken. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -5, a scene in which a shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon is displayed. Here, a scene in which the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon after the appearance of the ninja character NJ (FIG. 247 (11)-4 (11)-5) is A scene where the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon after the appearance of the ninja character NJ described above (FIG. 246 (11) -5 to FIG. (11) -6, FIG. It is the same as 246 (1)-3 to the figure (1)-4).

  On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -6, a scene is displayed in which a shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ is likely to hit the first reserved icon h11 in the default display mode. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -7, the shuriken hit the first holding icon h11, the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image mβ, and the first holding icon h11 is , It is more difficult to see than before it is covered by the effect image mβ. Note that the effect image mβ may cover only a part of the first hold icon h11 or may cover the whole. Alternatively, the effect image mβ may cover all the displayed reserve icons, or may cover up to the fluctuation icon h0. That is, the second UI unit 281 may be covered, or the entire or a part of the holding frame (the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281) may be covered. When the first UI unit 280 is covered, the navigation character NC may be covered.

  In FIG. 247 (11) -8, the effect image mβ disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes to the display mode of the character (here, the character of Sabohani). As described above, as the display mode of the holding icon, display modes of a plurality of pre-read notices having different degrees of reliability of the big hit are prepared, and are changed to the display modes of other characters (for example, Yoshimune or Sakai) It may change to a red or iridescent display mode. Also, in FIG. 247 (11) -9, the ninja character NJ has disappeared.

  A period in which it is considered that the change effect using the ninja character NJ is executed can also be represented by all combinations of the start timing and the end timing described above, in which the start is first and the end is later.

  Further, in this example, the change effect using the ninja character NJ succeeds in changing the display mode of the holding icon in a broad sense, but may fail. Furthermore, in this example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, but the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change, and the display mode of the third hold icon h13 changes The display mode of a plurality of hold icons (which may be all the hold icons displayed) may change. Alternatively, the display mode of the change icon h0 may change, or the display mode of both the hold icon and the change icon may change. In addition, when the ninja character NJ appears, it may be determined that the display mode of the holding icon or the variation icon changes at the appearance stage. That is, in this example, it may be determined that the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes in the stage of FIG. 247 (11) -4.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -10, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -11, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -12, the third stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the “decorative 7-decorative 2-decorative 2” is lost The temporary stop by swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of decorative symbols, and in the same figure (11) -13, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 2" is finalized and displayed. The fluctuation icon h0 is erased at the timing of the finalized display. Although the display of the timer display TMα is continued even when the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished, the characters “during timer preparation” are displayed, and the countdown has not yet started on the timer display TMα.

  Subsequently, the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (1) -1, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon of the display mode of Sabohani which is the target of the symbol variation of this time) at the display position of the first It moves to the fluctuation icon display area and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Furthermore, among the second number-of-holds display displayed in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display representing the number of holdings of the special view 1 is changed to the display of “1”. On the other hand, although the variable display of the decorative symbol is newly started, the display of the timer display TMα is continued, but the characters “under preparation for timer” are still displayed, and the timer display TMα starts the countdown. Not. The timer display TM.alpha. Whose display has been started in FIG. 247 (11) -3 is displayed astride "03:00" while straddling a plurality of continuous variable symbol display of the decorative symbol. Although the change effect using the ninja character NJ has ended, this change effect may be performed across a plurality of consecutive change patterns of the decorative symbol, and further, There may be a case where both the timer display TMα (timer notice effect) and the display (change effect) of the ninja character NJ are displayed (executed) across the variable display of a plurality of consecutive decorative symbols. In addition, the display (characteristic of change) of Yomune character YM with a bow and arrow, and the display (characteristic of change) of character YM of Yoshimune who is bowling are also displayed (executed) across a plurality of times of changing display of decorative symbols. It may be done. In addition, with "display over the fluctuation | variation display of the several times of a decorative symbol continuous", while the fluctuation display of a decorative symbol may exist, it may once disappear.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (1) -2, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (1) -3, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 247 (2)-1, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 L, “reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (2) -2, the advance notice of the sabothani group is started, and at least a part of each of the character display of "timer preparing" and the character display of reach and navi characters NC. Sabohani overlaps. The navigation character NC may overlap with at least a portion of the sabot hani without the sabot hani overlapping. In addition, with regard to character display, character display may overlap with at least a part of Sabohani similarly. In FIG. 247 (2) -3 that follows, “SP Evolution” is displayed in the vicinity of the navi character NC, and it is reported that it will develop into a super reach. It should be noted that when the advance notice of the sabothani group is started, the display of the hold icon disappears together with the four stages (the first stage hs1 to the fourth stage hs4) prepared in the second UI unit 281, and is prepared in the first UI unit 280. The fluctuation icon h0 also disappears with the pedestal hs0. Although the display of the navigation character NC is left, the display of the navigation character NC may disappear. In addition, the display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed below the second hold number display.

  Subsequently, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (3) -1, it is developed into a super reach (Ken-go reach), and a screen where the main character Yoshimune and the hostess Ken-ou are confronted is displayed. In addition, in the vicinity of the navi character NC, the characters "Kenou reach" are displayed, and it is informed that the game has developed into the Kenou reach. In response to the development to the super reach, the character display of "in preparation for timer" disappears, and the countdown of the timer display TMα is started. That is, the countdown of the timer display TMα is started simultaneously with the start of the super reach effect, but the countdown of the timer display TMα may be started after the start of the super reach effect. In the timer display TMα shown in FIG. 247 (3) -2, “02:67” is displayed, and it is reported that 0.33 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 247 (3) -3, “00:00” is displayed on the timer display TMα, and when the countdown is completed, a large image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A certain big button image 136ab is displayed. This big button image 136ab overlaps with all of the opposing Yoshimune and the swordsman, which are displayed as a super reach effect display, so that the Yoshimune and the swordsman can not be seen. In addition, characters of “push” for promoting the operation are displayed large according to the size of the large button image 136ab. Furthermore, in the vicinity of the navi character NC, the characters "deka button" are displayed in place of the characters "swords reach". The timer display TMα here implies that the button effect is started. Note that when the countdown of the timer display TMα is completed, the button effect may always be started, or effects other than the button effect may be started.

  In FIG. 247 (3) -4, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 247 (3) -5, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decabutton image 136ab disappears, and the timer display TMα of “00:00” which has been displayed so far disappears, and the strong It switches to the display of cut-in image CIs. Further, in the vicinity of the navi character NC, the characters "Ken-A-go reach" are displayed again in place of the characters "Deca button", but the characters "strong cut-in" may be displayed.

  In addition, normally, the operation effective period which receives operation of the chance button 136 is provided, and only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the response effect (here, the display of the strong cut-in image CIs ) May be performed, or even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the same effect as the response effect or an effect different from the response effect will be performed after the operation effective period has elapsed. You may

  Further, in this example, the timer display TMα is displayed until the chance button 136 is operated, but may disappear when “00:00” is reached, and disappear when the decabutton image 136ab appears. It is also good.

  The period during which it is considered that the effect (timer notice effect) using the timer display TMα can be represented by all combinations of the start timing and the end timing shown below, in which the start is first and the end is later. That is, the start timing of the change effect is the timing at which the timer display TMα appears (FIG. 247 (11) -3). However, it may be the timing at which the countdown is started (immediately after FIG. 247 (3) -1). On the other hand, the end timing of the timer advance notice effect may be the timing when the timer display TMα becomes “00:00” (FIG. 247 (3) -3) or the timing when the decabutton image 136ab appears (FIG. 247) It may be (3) -3, or it may be the timing when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 247 (3) -4), or the timing when the timer display TMα disappears (FIG. 247 (3) -4).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 247 (3) -6, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a scene in which the main character Yoshimune defeated the enemy player swordsman is displayed with the word “win”, and the first decoration In the approximate center of the symbol display device 208L, the "decorative 2" to be displayed stopped in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2" Is notified.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (4) -1, the display of the decorative symbol that has been reduced and displayed below the second number-of-retentions display is returned and displayed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in a state of temporary stop due to swing fluctuation. . At this time, the character of "big hit" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, and it is notified that it will be a big hit. In addition, the four stages (the first stage hs1 to the fourth stage hs4) and the hold icon in the second UI unit 281 and the variation icons h0 in the display mode of the pedestal hs0 and the safari in the first UI unit 280 are also restored. It is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (4) -2, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in a definite manner. At the timing of this finalized display, the variation icon h0 of the display mode of Sabohani is erased.

  In the example described above, the effect using the timer display TMα and the change effect using the ninja character NJ are effects performed separately and independently, and the effects are different types, but the timer display TMα appears The two effects are common in that they are the effects relating to the advance notice for the variable display which was the first suspension of the special drawing 1 at the stage. That is, the change effect using the ninja character NJ is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon representing the first hold of the special view 1 to the display mode of the advance notice, at the stage when the timer display TMα appears. TMα is a notice display of a button effect, which is a notice effect, which is performed with a variation display being performed by digesting the hold that is the first hold of the special view 1 when the timer display TMα appears.

  FIG. 248 is a diagram showing an example in which the effect using the timer display and the change effect are combined.

  Figures 248 (11) -1 to (11) -5 are the same as Figures 247 (11) -1 to (11) -5 described above, so a description thereof will be omitted here. The scene in which the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon after the appearance of the ninja character NJ (FIG. 248 (11) -4 to (11) -5) has been described. A scene in which the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon after the appearance of the ninja character NJ (FIG. 246 (11) -5 to FIG. (11) -6, FIG. 246 (1 2), and FIG. 247 (11) -4 to FIG. 2 (11) -5).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (11) -6, the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ suddenly changes its direction, and the word "ready for timer" is displayed, and the countdown A scene that appears to fly toward the timer display TMα that has not been started yet is displayed. “03:00” is still displayed on the timer display TMα, and the shuriken eventually hits the timer display TMα displayed as “03:00”, and in FIG. 248 (11) -7, the timer display At least a portion of TMα is covered by the plurality of effect images mα, and the timer display TMα is less visible than before being covered by the effect image mα. The effect image mα may cover only a part of the timer display TMα, or may cover the whole.

  In FIG. 248 (11) -8, the effect image mα disappears, and the timer display TMβ in which “07: 77” is displayed appears. That is, the timer display is changed from the mode (contents) of "03:00" to the mode (contents) of "07: 77". The timer display TMβ displayed as “07:77” is a timer announcement effect in which the countdown is started from 7.77 seconds. However, on the timer display TMβ in which “07: 77” is displayed as shown in FIG. 248 (11) -8, the characters “ready for timer” are still displayed, and the countdown has not been started yet.

  The change in the mode (content) of the timer display means that the effect has changed, more specifically, the type of the effect is the same but the mode (content) has changed. That is, although the effect is continued as the effect using the timer display, the aspect (content) of the effect changes, and it can be seen that another effect is obtained. The timer display may eventually be more likely to be a big hit as the displayed time is greater. For example, the timer display is a display for giving notice that the button effect is started, and in the button effect which is started after the countdown is completed, the effect that the reliability of the big hit is different according to the button operation is executed. The effect that the reliability of the big hit is different is associated with the time displayed on the timer display, and the larger the time displayed, the higher the reliability of the big hit will be performed . For example, the time of "07: 77" is associated with the premiere presentation, and when "07: 77" is displayed on the timer display, it may be jackpot rich or jackpot confirmation. In addition, between the button image 136a shown in FIG. 246 (3) -2 and the deca-button image 136ab shown in FIG. 247 (3) -3, the deca-button image 136 ab has a higher reliability in the big hit, and is shown in FIG. In the example, when an effect using a timer display is executed instead of an effect using a character YM of Yoshimune, a time “01:00” may be displayed as a timer display. In addition to "size", "color", "pattern" and "number" may also indicate the level of the reliability of the big hit. For example, the reliability of the jackpot may be lowest in "white", increased in the order of "blue", "green", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" may be the highest, or "dot pattern Is highest in the order of “hatched pattern”, “diamond pattern”, “grid pattern”, “vertical pattern”, “horizontal pattern” may be the highest, and the higher the number, the higher May be.

  The period during which it is considered that the effect using the timer display TMα of “03:00” is being executed can be represented by all combinations of the start timing and the end timing shown below, in which the start is first and the end is later . That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the timer display TMα of “03:00” appears (FIG. 248 (11) -3), or the timing when the ninja character NJ starts the operation ( It may be the timing at which the shuriken is thrown), or it may be the timing at which the effect image mα appears. On the other hand, the end timing of the effect using the timer display TMα may be the timing at which the shuriken hit, or may be the timing at which the effect image mα appears (FIG. 248 (11) -7), or the effect It may be timing when the image mα disappears (timing when the mode of timer display changes).

  In FIG. 248 (11) -9, the ninja character NJ displayed until then disappears. A period in which it is considered that the change effect using the ninja character NJ is executed can also be represented by all combinations of the start timing and the end timing described above, in which the start is first and the end is later.

  Moreover, in this example, the change effect using the ninja character NJ fails in changing the display mode of the reserved icon in a broad sense, and instead, it succeeds in changing other effects. . However, changing the display mode of the reserved icon in a broad sense may also fail in changing other effects, or both may be successful. Alternatively, among the changing of the display mode of the broad reserve icon and the changing of other effects, it may be successful to change either one or both. You may make sure to succeed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (11) -10, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues. In addition, the first hold icon h11, which has been the default display mode so far, has changed to the display mode of Sabohani by the advance notice effect after the next change that changes to the prefetch notice mode during the fluctuation display started after winning. . After the next change here, in the preview advance notice effect, the display mode is changed at the first stop to start the prefetch notice, but the timing to change the display mode (the timing to start the prefetch notice) is changed It may be simultaneous with the start, or may be at any timing during variable display. As described above, the display mode of the holding icon may change other than the change effect using the character YM of Yoshimune or the change effect using the character NJ of the ninja, and the same applies to the change icon h0.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (11) -11, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (11) -12, the third stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the “decorative 7-decorative 2-decorative 2” is lost The temporary stop by swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of decorative symbols, and in the same figure (11) -13, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 2" is finalized and displayed. The fluctuation icon h0 is erased at the timing of the finalized display. Although the display of the timer display TMβ continues even when the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished, the characters “during timer preparation” are displayed, and the countdown has not yet been started in the timer display TMβ.

  Subsequently, the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (1) -1, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon of the display mode of Sabohani which is the target of the symbol variation of this time) at the display position of the first It moves to the fluctuation icon display area and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Furthermore, among the second number-of-holds display displayed in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display representing the number of holdings of the special view 1 is changed to the display of “1”. On the other hand, even if the variation display of the decorative symbol is newly started, the display of the timer display TMβ continues, but the characters “in preparation for timer” are still displayed, and the countdown is started in the timer display TMβ Not. The timer display TM.beta. Whose display has been started in FIG. 248 (11) -8 is displayed astride "07: 77" and is displayed across a plurality of consecutive variable symbol displays of the decorative symbol.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (1) -2, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (1) -3, the second stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 248 (2)-1, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 L, “reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navi character NC, and it is informed that it is in the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variation display of the decoration design continues.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (2) -2, advance notice of the sabo hani group is started, and in the subsequent FIG. 248 (2)-3, the display of "SP evolution" is displayed near the navigation character NC. It has been announced that it will be developed and developed into a super reach. The display of "SP development" is performed, and in response to notification of the development to the super reach, the character display of "under timer preparation" disappears, and the countdown of the timer display TMβ is started. In the timer display TMβ shown in FIG. 248 (2) -3, “07: 40” is displayed. That is, it is reported that 0.37 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts.

  In this example, before the super reach effect is actually started, in other words, before the display of the effect display of the super reach effect is started, the countdown of the timer display TMβ is started. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 247, the countdown of the timer display TMβ is started according to the start of the super reach effect, but in this example, the timer display is performed at the stage when the notification to announce the development to the super reach is started. The countdown of TMβ is started. In other words, the countdown of the timer display TMβ is started from the start of the normal reach (after entering the reach state) to the start of the super reach effect.

  Also in this example, when the advance notice of the sabothani group is started, the display of the hold icon disappears together with the four stages (the first stage hs1 to the fourth stage hs4) prepared in the second UI unit 281, and the first UI unit 280 is displayed. The fluctuation icon h0 disappears together with the pedestal hs0 prepared. Although the display of the navigation character NC is left, the display of the navigation character NC may disappear. In addition, the display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed below the second hold number display.

  Subsequently, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (3) -1, it is developed into a super reach (a sword reach), and a screen in which the main character Yoshimune and the hostess swordsman confront is displayed. In addition, in the vicinity of the navi character NC, the characters "Kenou reach" are displayed, and it is informed that the game has developed into the Kenou reach. The timer display TMβ is “05:45” in FIG. 248 (3) -1 and “02:67” in FIG. 248 (3) -2 in which the super reach effect is continuing, and the countdown is proceeding. .

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 248 (3) -3, “00:00” is displayed on the timer display TMα, and when the countdown is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts displaying the premier button effect display. Ru. That is, the button image 136as is displayed together with the image of the character on the motorcycle, and overlaps with at least a part of the opposing Yoshimune and the swordsman. Also in the button image 136 as here, characters of “push” for promoting the operation are displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navi character NC, the characters of "premium" are displayed in place of the characters of "Swordsman reach". The term "premium effect" refers to an effect having an extremely low rate of appearance of the effect, and when this premiere effect is executed, it may be a big hit or a big hit with a definite change.

  Note that, in this example, the timer display TMβ disappears in response to the start of the premiere button effect, but may disappear when “00:00” is reached, and the start of the premiere button effect It may disappear at the same time.

  In FIG. 248 (3) -4, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 248 (3) -5, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the premiere button effect is switched to the display of the strong cut-in image CIs. Further, in place of the character of "premium", the characters "Kengo reach" are displayed again in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, but the characters of "strong cut-in" may be displayed.

  Also in this example, the response effect (here, the display of the strong cut-in image CIs) may be performed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. Even when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the same effect as the response effect or an effect different from the response effect may be performed after the operation effective period elapses.

  The example of (3) -6 and subsequent figures following FIG. 248 (3) -5 is the same as the example of (3) -6 and subsequent figures shown in FIG.

  The period during which it is considered that the effect (timer notice effect) using the timer display TMβ can be represented by all combinations of the start timing and the end timing shown below, in which the start is first and the end is later. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing at which the shuriken hit, or may be the timing at which the effect image mα appears (FIG. 248 (11) -7), “07: 77”. It may be timing when the timer display TMβ appears (FIG. 248 (11) -8). Alternatively, it may be the timing at which the countdown is started (immediately after FIG. 248 (2) -2). On the other hand, the end timing of the timer advance notice effect may be the timing when the timer display TMβ becomes “00:00” (FIG. 248 (3) -3) or the timing when the button image 136 as appears (FIG. 248). (3) -3) may be the timing when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 248 (3) -4), or the timing when the timer display TMβ disappears (FIG. 248 (3) -4).

  Comparing the example shown in (11) -1 and after in FIG. 247 with the example shown in FIG. 248, both are making a big hit, but in the example in which the timer notice effect is shown in (11) -1 and after in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 248, the timer announcement effect appeared in the form of "03:00" changes to "07: 77", while the timer announcement effect appeared in the form of "03:00". The timer announcement effect appeared in the manner of In the case where the timer announcement effect appeared in the manner of "07: 77" is more advantageous for the player than in the case where the timer announcement effect appeared in the manner of "03:00" is performed. Prone. Here, the tendency to be an advantageous development means being easy to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a positive change state or / and a short time state), being easy to start premiere rendering, or having a big hit finalization effect It may be that it is easy to be started, and it may be that the big hit symbol is easy to be finally displayed. For example, when the timer announcement effect appearing in the form of "03:00" becomes "00:00", the button effect is started, and eventually it is "07: 77" while it is a loss in the fluctuation display. When the timer announcement effect which appears from the beginning in the mode becomes "00:00", the button effect is started, and it becomes a big hit in its fluctuation display. The same is true even in the case where the button effect is the advance notice, and in this case, the change display of the advance notice object becomes a big hit. Thus, the timer preview effect of the aspect of “07: 77” may not appear unless the timer preview of the aspect of “03:00” changes, but may appear from the beginning. In this case, the timer preview effect of the aspect of "07:77", which appeared from the beginning, is not likely to be a favorable development for the player, and the aspect of "07:77" appears that the presentation changes. It may be easy to become an advantageous development for the player only in the timer announcement effect of. Or, conversely, the timer announcement effect of the aspect of “07: 77” may be an aspect (effect) that appears only in the change of the timer announcement effect of the aspect of “03:00”, or “03:00” It is not limited to the timer advance notice effect of the aspect of, and may be an aspect (effect) that appears only in a change from some effect.

  FIG. 249 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 248 in which the effect using the timer display and the change effect are combined.

  FIG. 249 (11) -1 to FIG. 3 (3) -1 are the same as FIG. 248 (11) -1 to FIG. However, the mode (content) of the effect using the timer display is changed by the change effect using the ninja character NJ. That is, the effect which is the aspect of "03:00" is changed to the effect of the aspect of "07: 77". In addition, the timer display TMβ of “07: 77” after the change is displayed across a plurality of changes (FIG. 249 (11) 13 to FIG. 249 (1) -1). Then, the countdown of the timer display TMβ is started at the stage when the notification to announce the development to the super reach is started, and the timer display TMβ shown in FIG. 249 (2) -3 is subtracted to “07:40”. . In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 249 (3) -1, it has developed into a super reach (Ken-go reach), and the character of “Ken-go reach” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC. The timer display TM β continues subtraction during the super reach effect, and is “05: 45” in FIG. 249 (3) -1 and “04: 37” in FIG. 3) -3 is "00:50". In the previous example shown in FIG. 248, when the timer display TMβ becomes “00:00”, the premier button effect is started (FIG. 248 (3) -3), but in this example, the timer display TMβ is “00: Even if it becomes "00", the button effect is not started, but the premier effect is started. It is "04: 37" in FIG. 249 (3) -2, and is "00: 50" in the following Fig. 249 (3) -3. The timer display TMβ which continues to count down in this manner eventually becomes "00:00" during super reach production. When the timer display TM β becomes “00:00”, a display of the premier effect in which four indigo characters are arranged in a V shape is displayed, and in the vicinity of the navi character NC, the character of “Kengo reach” is substituted. The letters "Premier" are displayed. The premiere effect here is also an effect with an extremely low rate of appearance of the effect, and when this premiere effect is executed, it is a big hit decision or a definite variation with a big hit decision. It is to be noted that the display of the premier effect in which the four characters of the nephew character are arranged in a V shape overlaps at least a part of the timer display TMβ which has become "00:00".

  The example of (3) -6 and subsequent figures following FIG. 249 (3) -5 is the same as the example of (3) -6 and subsequent figures shown in FIG.

  When the example shown in FIG. 249 described above is compared with the example shown in (11) -1 or later in FIG. 247, the effect (effect to be developed) continuing from the effect using the timer display (timer preview effect) is In the example shown in FIG. 249, in the example shown in FIG. 249, the button effect is an effect whose type is different, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 247, the effect is the same until the effect using the timer display changes. However, the types of effects to be started in connection with the effects using the timer display after that are different.

  In addition, the change effect using the character YM of Yoshimune with a bow and arrow, which appeared in FIG. 246 (11) -5, is a change using the character YM of Yoshimune that performs boring as shown in FIG. 246 (11) -9. In addition to the change to the effect, there may be a case where the timer advance notice effect using the timer display TMβ displayed as “07: 77” may be changed. In this case, although it changes from the kind of effect, the timer announcement effect of “07: 77” tends to be more advantageous development for the player than the change effect of the character YM of Yoshimune. . In addition, the timer advance notice using the timer display TMα displayed as “03:00” may change to a change play using the character YM of Yoshimune who is boring, in this case “ The change presentation of the character YM of Yoshimune tends to be more advantageous development for the player than the timer advance presentation of 03:00 ". Here, the tendency to be an advantageous development is the same as the above, and is a tendency to be easily in an advantageous control state (for example, a positive change state or / and a short time state), or that a premier rendition is easily started. Alternatively, the jackpot determination effect may be easily started, or the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. Furthermore, the change effect using the character YM of Yoshimune with a bow and arrow may change to the timer advance notice effect using the timer display TM α displayed as “03:00”, and conversely, The timer announcement effect "03:00" may be changed to the change effect of the character YM of Yoshimune, in which case the effect after the change is more advantageous for the player than before the change. It is easy to be developed. In addition, the change presentation using the character YM of Yoshimune who is boring may change to the timer announcement presentation using the timer display TMβ displayed as “07: 77”, or conversely, “07: 77”. The timer announcement effect of “77:” may be changed to the change effect of the character YM of Yoshimune. In this case also, the effect after the change is more advantageous for the player than the change before. Prone. Note that the change presentation of the character YM of Yoshimune is one of the presentation effects of pre-reading notice when the pending icon is targeted, and the one of the normal notice presentation when the variation icon is targeted. In addition, although the timer advance presentation described so far has been production related to normal announcement, it may be presentation based on normal announcement, may be presentation on advance announcement, or may be presentation on advance announcement. The effect of the normal notice referred to here is the effect that a normal notice image of a cut-in appears without pinching the button effect when the countdown is completed, and the effect regarding the advance notice is the button effect when the countdown is completed. The previewed preview image of the cut-in is an effect that appears, and the presentation of the previewed preview is an effect that the previewed preview image of the cut-in appears without the button effect when the countdown is completed.

  In addition, the effect using the ninja character NJ may be started first, and then the timer advance effect may be started. In this case, the effect using the ninja character NJ does not change the timer advance effect.

  FIG. 250 is a diagram showing an example in which the change effect using the ninja character NJ is performed in a different mode.

  Since FIG. 250 (11) -1 to FIG. (11) -6 are the same as FIG. 246 (11) -1 to FIG. The scene in which the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon after the appearance of the ninja character NJ (FIG. 250 (11) -5 to FIG. A scene in which the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon after the appearance of the ninja character NJ (FIG. 246 (11) -5 to FIG. (11) -6, FIG. 246 (1 247 (11) -4, FIG. 248 (11) -4, and FIG. 248 (11) -5). 4 The same as (11) -5).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -7, a scene in which the Shuriken has passed above the hold icons h11 and h12 without hitting the change icon h0 is displayed. 11) At -8, as the shuriken disappears, the ninja character NJ also disappears. After all, the change presentation here has failed, and neither the character YM of Yoshimune nor the icon for holding or the icon for changing has changed the display mode. The timing at which the shuriken disappears and the timing at which the ninja character NJ disappears may be earlier than the timing at which the shuriken disappears or earlier than the timing at which the ninja character NJ disappears.

  A period in which it is considered that the change effect using the ninja character NJ is executed is also the same as the period described in the change effect using the ninja character NJ appearing in FIG. 246 (11) -5.

  On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -9, an arrow is fired from the character YM of Yoshimune, and the arrow indicates a scene which is likely to hit the first reserved icon h11 or the variation icon h0. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -10, the arrow hits neither the first reserved icon h11 nor the fluctuating icon h0, and the same figure (11) -11. Then, as the arrow disappears, Yoshimune character YM also disappears. As a result, the change presentation here is also unsuccessful, and the display mode has not changed either the holding icon or the change icon. The timing at which the arrow disappears and the timing at which the character YM of Yoshimune disappears may be earlier than the timing at which the arrow disappears, or may be earlier than the timing at which the character YM of Yoshimune disappears.

  The period during which it is considered that the change effect is displayed, in which the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM is displayed, is represented by all combinations of the start timing and the end timing shown below, where the start is first and the end is later. Can. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the character YM of Yoshimune appears (FIG. 250 (11) -4), or the timing when the character YM of Yoshimune starts operation (the timing of firing the arrow ) May be. On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing at which the character YM of Yoshimune disappears (Fig. 250 (11)-11), or the timing at which the character YM of Yoshimune ends its operation (the arrow has ended It may be the timing) or the timing when the arrow is not hit (Fig. 250 (11)-10).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -12, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -13, the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -14, the third stop is performed, and the “decorative 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the “decorative 7-decorative 2-decorative 2” is lost The temporary stop by swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of decorative symbols, and in the same figure (11) -15, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 2" is finalized and displayed. The fluctuation icon h0 is erased at the timing of the finalized display.

  Subsequently, the change effect by the ninja character NJ and the change of the ninja character NJ will be described using an example shown on the right side of FIG.

  250 (11) -1 to FIG. 250 (11) -5 shown on the right side of FIG. 250 are the same as FIG. 250 (11) -1 to FIG. 250 (11) -5 shown on the left side; However, also in FIG. 250 (11) -5 shown on the right side of FIG. 250, one ninja character NJ appears in the upper right.

  In FIG. 250 (11) -6, the ninja character NJ is divided and two ninja characters NJ appear, and both ninja characters NJ throw a shuriken, as shown in FIG. 250 (11) -6. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 8 displays a scene in which two shurikens appear to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -7, one of the two shurikens suddenly turns its direction so that it flies toward the character YM of Yoshimune who holds the bow. The visible scene is displayed. Also, a scene is likely to be hit by the first hold icon h11, which is the second shuriken on the fluctuation icon h0.

  After that, one of the Shuriken hits the character YM of Yoshimune, and the other Shuriken hits the first holding icon h11. In FIG. 250 (11) -8, at least a part of the character YM of Yoshimune is covered by the effect image mα, and the character YM of Yoshimune is less visible than before being covered by the effect image mα. Further, at least a part of the first hold icon h1 is also covered by the effect image mβ, and the first hold icon h11 is more difficult to see than before being covered by the effect image mβ.

  In the subsequent FIG. 250 (11) -9, the effect image mα covering the character YM of Yoshimune disappears, and the character YM of Yoshimune who is boring appears. That is, the character YM of Yoshimune has changed from the display mode with bow and arrow to the display mode for boring. Further, the effect image mβ covering the first hold icon h11 also disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes to the display mode of the character (here, a scary panda character). In this display mode of the scary panda character, the reliability of the jackpot is lower than the display mode of the Sabohan character.

  The timing at which the Shuriken hits the character YM of Yoshimune and the timing at which the other Shuriken hits the first holding icon h11 may be simultaneous, or the timing of hitting the character YM of Yoshimune is earlier. The timing of hitting the first hold icon h11 may be earlier. In addition, after the display mode of the character YM of Yoshimune has changed, a Shuriken may hit the first hold icon h11, and after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed, the character YM of Yoshimune has a Shuriken May hit.

  In FIG. 250 (11) -10, the two ninja characters NJ that have been displayed so far disappear. Note that the two ninja characters NJ may disappear at different timings, or may return to one person's form and then disappear.

  The period during which it is considered that the change effect using the ninja character NJ is executed can be represented by all combinations of the start timing and the end timing shown below, in which the start is first and the end is later. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing at which the character NJ of one ninja appears (FIG. 250 (11) -5), or the timing at which the character NJ of the ninja splits (two ninjas It may be the timing when the character NJ appears (FIG. 250 (11) -6), or it may be the timing when the character NJ of one of the two ninjas starts the operation (the timing when the shuriken is thrown) The timing may be the timing when both ninja characters NJ started to move (the timing when throwing a shuriken), the timing when one shuriken was hit, or the timing when both shurikens hit Or when one effect image appears or when both effect images appear. Timing may be a (FIG. 250 (11) -8). On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing at which the character NJ of one of the two ninjas has disappeared, or the timing at which the characters NJ of both ninjas have disappeared (FIG. 246 (11) -10) It may be the timing when the character NJ of one of the two ninjas has finished the operation (the timing when the throwing of the shuriken has finished) or the timing when the characters NJ of both ninjas have finished the motion (The timing at which the throwing of the shuriken ended) may be the timing at which one of the shurikens was hit, or it may be the timing at which both shurikens hit, and one effect image appeared It may be the timing, or it may be the timing when both effect images appear (FIG. 250 (11) -8), or one of the effects. May be a timing at which the image disappears, the timing at which both effect image disappears may be (Fig. 250 (11) -9).

  As soon as or after the two ninja characters NJ disappear, the Yoshimune character YM with the bowling ball starts to move and throws out the bowling ball. In addition, the character YM of Yoshimune may start to operate before the two characters of the ninja character NJ disappear. Furthermore, the two ninja characters NJ may not disappear and may be displayed as they are, or only the ninja character NJ of the two ninja characters NJ who changed the holding icon. Disappears, and the character NJ of the ninja who changed the character YM of Yoshimune may continue to be displayed, and conversely, only the character NJ of the ninja who changed the character YM of Yoshimune disappears, and the hold icon The ninja character NJ who has changed the character may continue to be displayed.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -12 displays a scene in which the bowling ball thrown out by the character YM of Yoshimune appears to be rolling toward the hold icon or the change icon. There is. The bowling ball eventually hits the first holding icon h11 which is a display mode of the scary panda character, and in FIG. 250 (11) -13, the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image mβ, and the first holding icon h11 is , It is more difficult to see than before it is covered by the effect image mβ.

  In FIG. 250 (11) -14, the effect image mβ disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the scary panda character to the display mode of the sabothani character. That is, the change presentation here is successful and corresponds to the promotion presentation. Further, in FIG. 250 (11) -14, the character YM of Yoshimune to be boring has disappeared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -15, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variation display of the decorative symbol continues.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -16, the second stop is performed, and the "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variation display of the decoration pattern continues.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -17, the third stop is performed, and the “decorative 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the “decorative 7-decorative 2-decorative 2” is lost The temporary stop by the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative designs, and in the same figure (11) -18, the combination of the decorative designs of the loss of "decoration 7-decor 2-decor 2" is finalized and displayed. The fluctuation icon h0 is erased at the timing of the finalized display.

  As described above, in the example of the example shown on the right side of FIG. 250, the pattern of the change effect using the divided characters Ninja of two ninjas changes the display mode of the character YM of Yoshimune and the display mode of the holding icon Other than "A pattern"), the display mode of the character YM of Yoshimune is changed, but the display mode of the holding icon is not changed (hereinafter referred to as "B pattern"), the display mode of the character YM of Yoshimune is A pattern that does not change, but changes the display mode of the hold icon (hereinafter referred to as "C pattern"), a pattern that neither changes the display mode of the character YM of Yoshimune nor the display mode of the hold icon (hereinafter referred to as "D pattern") There is. Note that changing the display mode of the character YM of Yoshimune means that the shuriken thrown by the character NJ of one of the two ninja characters NJ hits the character YM of Yoshimune and changes the display mode. To change the display mode of the hold icon means that the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ of the two ninja characters NJ changes the display mode by hitting the hold icon. It is. The Shuriken thrown by the character NJ of one of the two ninja characters NJ may change the display mode of the character YM of Yoshimune and the display mode of the holding icon, or vice versa. In such a case, it may not be. Here, the A pattern is more likely to be a more advantageous development for the player than the D pattern. Also, the A pattern is more likely to be an advantageous development for the player than the B pattern, and the A pattern is more likely to be an advantageous development for the player than the C pattern. Also, the B pattern is more likely to be an advantageous development for the player than the D pattern, and the C pattern is more likely to be an advantageous development for the player than the D pattern. Furthermore, the C pattern may be more likely to be an advantageous development for the player than the B pattern, or conversely, the B pattern may be more likely to be an advantageous development for the player than the C pattern. Here, the tendency to be an advantageous development is the same as the above, and is a tendency to be easily in an advantageous control state (for example, a positive change state or / and a short time state), or that a premier rendition is easily started. Alternatively, the jackpot determination effect may be easily started, or the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. In addition, although each of the above-described patterns is a pattern intended for the hold icon, the same applies to a change icon instead of the hold icon. Furthermore, when not changing, it includes the case where it does not change even if hit, as well as the case where the arrow and the shuriken are detached.

  In addition, part of the effects using the character YM of Yoshimune who performs bowling and the effects using the character NJ of the two ninjas who share his body both share a common type such as a change effect directed to the first hold icon h11. It can be seen that it was a successful stage of the stage. Note that both effects may be a change effect for the variation icon h0, which is a different type of effect from the change effect for the first hold icon h11, or for the second hold icon h12. It may be a change effect. In addition, only the effect using the character YM of Yoshimune of the two effects may be a success effect that succeeds in changing the display mode of the icon, or only the effect using the character NJ of the ninja is a success effect It may be, and both effects may be failure effects.

  In the above, as the change effects using the ninja character NJ, the change effects in two modes such as an example shown on the left side of FIG. 250 and an example shown on the right side of FIG. 250 have been described. In the change production of an aspect in which only one ninja character NJ appears as shown on the left side of FIG. 250, the change production of the character YM of Yoshimune has failed, while in the case shown in the right of FIG. In the change production of the aspect in which the character ninja of the ninja appears, the game production of the Yoshimune character YM has succeeded, and the change production using the character YM of the Yoshimune who is boring is started. That is, rather than the change effect of the aspect in which only one ninja character NJ appears, the change effect of the aspect in which the two ninja characters NJ appear in a divided manner is the other effect (here, the character YM of Yoshimune It is easy to change the change effect used.

  In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 250, the change presentation of the first holding icon h11 using the Yom of Yomjong has failed, whereas in the example shown on the right side of FIG. Has successfully succeeded in changing the first hold icon h11 using the character YM of Yoshimune, and the hold represented by the first hold icon, which is the default display mode shown in FIG. 250 (11) -15 on the left, is digested The variation display started on the other hand is lost. On the right, as shown in FIG. 250 (11) -18, the variation represented by the first suspension icon, which is the display mode of the character of Sabohani, is digested and started. It will be a big hit on the display.

  In addition, the effect of changing the effect was only the effect using the character NJ of the ninja, but as the effect of changing the effect, an effect (wipe effect) in which the display screen is switched or a stage change effect in which the background image is switched Or the like. In addition, the effect of changing the effect may be an effect that may make the Yomese character YM with the bow and arrow disappear, and while the Yimjong character YM is not visible, the Yomune character YM that bowls , And the effect may change.

  Also, instead of the timer advance notice effect, a notice regarding a mini item may be made. More specifically, the mini item may be stocked, or the stocked mini item may be increased or changed, and depending on the number, mode, and type of the mini item, a general notice may be made, or a read ahead notice may be made. It will be. The notice about this mini-item may change the stock situation of the mini-item by the change production. For example, the number of mini items stocked may change (for example, increase), the type may change, or the aspect may change.

  The example in which a plurality of effects described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 250 are combined can be combined with the transparency effect described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 45. For example, the character YM of Yoshimune who holds the bow displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 234 etc., or the character of the ninja character NJ displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. Objects on the back side of a transmissive liquid crystal display (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N), A combination of multiple icon change effects described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 250 may be executable.

  Alternatively, on the contrary, in the transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N) may be used, as shown in FIG. While the effect which combined the several effects demonstrated using FIG. 14-45 is performed, you may enable execution of the transparency effect demonstrated using FIGS. 14-45.

  As mentioned above, although the example about a pachinko machine (ball-ball game machine) was mentioned in the above description, the game stand of this invention is not limited to this, For example, the pachinko type pachinko machine shown in FIG. It may be a slot machine shown in FIG. 267, which will also be described later.

In the above explanation,
“Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N Game console equipped with one or two
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons [eg, the first hold icon f1 to the fourth hold icon f4].
The number of pending icons displayed is configured to notify the number of pending,
The hold icon has a plurality of modes [for example, a default dot pattern (flashing white), a diagonal line pattern (blue color) in the pre-reading notice mode, a diamond pattern (green) in the pre-reading notice mode, a lattice pattern (red) in the pre-reading notice mode , An icon that can be displayed with a vertical line pattern (gold color) in the advance notice mode and a horizontal line pattern (rainbow color) in the advance notice mode,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of effects,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect [eg, any one of the pending change first effect to the pending change sixth effect],
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect different from the first effect of the on-hold change first effect to the on-hold change sixth effect],
The first effect is an effect that may change the mode of the hold icon,
The second effect is an effect that may change the mode of the hold icon,
One of the effects of the first effect and the second effect is an effect that may start being displayed while the other effect is being displayed [eg, in FIG. 230 or FIG. 231 While displaying the on-hold change second effect in which the treasure box TB and the change candidate icon HKI are displayed, the on-off change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed is started to be displayed. During the display of the hold change third effect in which the BC is displayed, the display of the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed is started to be displayed, or the character YM of Yoshimune shown in FIG. 235 or 236 is displayed. During the display of the hold change fifth effect, the display of the hold change first effect in which the character NJ of the ninja is displayed is started, or the display of the hold change fourth effect in which the roulette icon is displayed as shown in FIG. On the other hand, the holding change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed starts being displayed, or the Yomune character YM is displayed while the holding change fourth effect in which the roulette icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 238 is displayed. While the display of the hold change fifth effect is started or the display of the hold change sixth effect in which the countdown icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 239, the display of the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed is started ],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Here, the second effect may be an effect that may be started during the display of the first effect, or the first effect may be during the display of the second effect. It may be an effect that may start to be displayed.

  Further, the first effect may be an effect that may be performed when changing the mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect that always changes the mode of the hold icon. In addition, the second effect may be an effect that may be performed when changing the mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect that always changes the mode of the hold icon.

  Note that the first effect may be an effect in which the mode of the hold icon must be changed or an effect in which the mode of the hold icon may not be changed. In addition, the second effect may be an effect in which the mode of the hold icon must be changed or an effect in which the mode of the hold icon may not be changed. Furthermore, any one effect of the first effect and the second effect may be an effect that must be started while the other effect is displayed, or the display may not be started. There may be an effect.

Also,
“When the first effect and the second effect are effects for the same reserved icon [eg, the example shown on the right side of FIG. 230, the example shown on the right side of FIG. 232, or the example shown on the right side of FIG. And the example shown on the right side of FIG. 237, the example shown on the left side of FIG. 238, and the example shown on the left side of FIG. 239].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, one of the plurality of pending icons may be a first pending icon, and the first effect may be an effect on the first pending icon. May be an effect on the first hold icon.

  The first effect and the second effect may be effects for the same hold icon or may be effects for different hold icons.

Also,
"The first effect is an effect that a change notice may be displayed,
The said change advance notice display is a display [for example, a change object candidate display or a change mode candidate display] for giving a notice of the change of the form of the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[One of the plurality of pending icons is the first pending icon [eg, the second pending icon f2 in the example shown on the right of FIG.
The first effect [for example, the hold change fourth effect] may be an effect on the first hold icon,
The second effect [for example, the hold change first effect] may be the effect for the first hold icon,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the aspect during the variable display of the roulette icon],
The hold icon displayed in the first mode is an icon for predicting that the mode of the hold icon changes,
There is a case where the first hold icon is displayed in the first mode as the change preview display [for example, FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The first hold icon may always be displayed in the first mode as the change notice display, or the first hold icon may not be displayed in the first mode. .

Also,
"The second effect may be started to be displayed for the first hold icon displayed in the first mode,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the mode of the first hold icon displayed in the first mode [for example, the second hold icon f2 in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 237] changes as the notice according to the first mode [For example, the mode of the second hold icon f2 changes as the change target is unknown but the change of the mode of the second hold icon f2], the mode of the first It may be configured such that there is a case where it changes again according to the first effect], for example, when it changes to the form of the vertical stripe pattern.

  In addition, with respect to the said 1st pending | holding icon currently displayed by the said 1st aspect, you may be comprised so that a said 2nd production | presentation will always be a display start, and a said 2nd production | presentation starts a display It may be configured such that it may not be done.

Also,
"The change target candidate display may be displayed as the above-mentioned change advance display,
The change target candidate display is a display indicating that the hold icon whose mode may change is any hold icon [eg, a shuriken hit by the ninja character NJ and hit the icon overlaps the icon Change candidate icon HKI, target icon TI attached to the icon, arrow icon YI, roulette icon hold icon, countdown icon hold icon],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
The change target candidate display is a display that may be displayed across the variable display of a plurality of consecutive decorative symbols [eg, FIG. 233 (b) to FIG. (H), FIG. 234 (6) )-Figure (2),],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Note that the change target candidate display may be a display that is necessarily displayed across the variable displays of a plurality of consecutive decorative symbols, or across the variable displays of a plurality of continuous decorative symbols. It may be a display that may not be displayed.

Also,
While the display of the change target candidate display, the second effect [for example, the hold change first effect that the ninja character NJ is displayed] on the hold icon suggested in the change target candidate display is started The case [for example, FIG. 235 (2) to FIG. (6)] is configured to be present,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, during the display of the change target candidate display, the second effect on the hold icon suggested in the change target candidate display may be necessarily started, or the change target candidate display may be displayed. It may be configured such that the second effect on the suggested holding icon may not be started.

Also,
"The change mode candidate display may be displayed as the change advance display,
The said change mode candidate display is a display which suggests which mode the possibility of change of the pending icon is. [For example, the change candidate icon HKI, the “grid” shown in FIG. 233 (i) It is the roulette icon] of the aspect where the character was stopped and displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the display of one of the effects is started during the display of the other of the effects than when only the one of the effects is displayed. ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, once collectively described, as a combination of the first effect and the second effect, the hold change first effect and the hold change second effect, the hold change first effect and the hold change third effect, the hold change second One effect and hold change fourth effect, hold change first effect and hold change fifth effect, hold change first effect and hold change sixth effect, hold change second effect and hold change third effect, hold change second effect And hold change fourth effect, hold change second effect and hold change fifth effect, hold change second effect and hold change sixth effect, hold change third effect and hold change fourth effect, hold change third effect and hold Change fifth effect, hold change third effect and hold change sixth effect, hold change fourth effect and hold change fifth effect, hold change fourth effect and hold change sixth effect, hold change fifth effect and hold change fifth There are six productions. And even if it is any combination among these combinations, it is easier to finally display the jackpot symbol finally when one of the effects is started to be displayed during the display of the other effect. It may be done. That is, when two types of effects are combined (overlapping), it is easier for the player to hit the jackpot more than when not combined (when not overlapping).

Also,
[The above-mentioned one effect [for example, the hold change first effect that the ninja character NJ is displayed in FIG. 235 and FIG. 236, the hold change fifth effect that the Yoshimune character YM is displayed in FIG. 238] is the other [For example, the fifth on hold change where the character YM of Yoshimune in FIG. 235 and FIG. 236 is displayed, the fourth on hold change where the roulette icon in FIG. 237 is displayed, the on hold change where the roulette icon in FIG. This is an effect in which the display may end earlier than the other effect despite the fact that the display is started after the display of the fourth effect] [eg, FIG. 235 (7) or FIG. 236 (7 237 (i) and 238 (10)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, although one display is started after the display of the other effect, the one effect may be an effect in which the display is always ended before the other effect, or the other It may be an effect that the display may not end earlier than the effect of.

Also,
"Even if the aspect of the hold icon does not change due to the one effect started being displayed while the other effect is displayed, the one effect is not started to be displayed while the other effect is displayed The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the display of the one of the effects is started during the display of the other, rather than the case where the other effect is displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, even in the example of any combination of the combination of the first effect and the second effect described above, the mode of the hold icon did not change due to the one effect started during the display of the other effect Even if this is the case, the one of the effects is started while the other effect is displayed, rather than the case where the one effect is not started while the other effect is displayed. The jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be clearly displayed. That is, when two types of effects are combined (when overlapping), even if the aspect of the holding icon does not change, a big hit is achieved than when not combining (when not overlapping). Cheap.

Also,
"The other effect [for example, the second effect of the holding change in which the treasure box TB is displayed in FIG. 231 is displayed] The display of the one effect started [for example, the ninja character NJ in FIG. 231 is displayed] Depending on the change first effect, the aspect of the holding icon [for example, the first holding icon f1] may be changed to the third aspect [for example, the aspect of the diamond pattern],
When the display of the other effect is not started while the display of the other effect is not started, the mode of the holding icon may be changed to a second mode [for example, a mode of a diamond pattern] by the other effect. ,
The third aspect is an aspect in which the expectation of the jackpot is higher than the second aspect.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The other effect [for example, the second holding effect for displaying the treasure box TB in FIG. 231, the fourth holding effect for displaying the roulette icon in FIG. 237, the second holding effect for displaying the roulette icon in FIG. The first change of presentation that has been started during the display of the fourth effect [for example, the first change of hold on which the character NJ of the ninja in FIG. 231 is displayed, the first change of delay on which the character NJ of the ninja in FIG. Depending on the effect, the pending change fifth effect in which the character YM of Yoshimune in FIG. 238 is displayed, the other effect of changing the mode of the pending icon may change even though the mode of the pending icon does not change. [For example, FIG. 231 (h), FIG. 237 (h), FIG. 238 (10)],
The other effect described above is an effect that is more likely to change the mode of the holding icon to a mode in which the degree of expectation of the big hit is high, after being changed than before changing.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N Game console equipped with one or two
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons [eg, the first hold icon f1 to the fourth hold icon f4].
The number of pending icons displayed is configured to notify the number of pending,
The hold icon has a plurality of modes [for example, a default dot pattern (flashing white), a diagonal line pattern (blue color) in the pre-reading notice mode, a diamond pattern (green) in the pre-reading notice mode, a lattice pattern (red) in the pre-reading notice mode , An icon that can be displayed with a vertical line pattern (gold color) in the advance notice mode and a horizontal line pattern (rainbow color) in the advance notice mode,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of effects,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect [eg, any one of the pending change first effect to the pending change sixth effect],
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect different from the first effect of the on-hold change first effect to the on-hold change sixth effect],
The first effect is an effect that may change the mode of the hold icon,
The second effect is an effect that may change the mode of the hold icon,
Either of the first effect and the second effect is an effect that may start being displayed while the other effect is being displayed [eg, in FIG. 230 or FIG. 231 While displaying the pending change second effect in which the treasure box TB or the change candidate icon HKI is displayed, the ninja character NJ is displayed and the first change in pending change is started to be displayed, or the roulette icon shown in FIG. During the display of the hold change fourth effect displayed, the display of the hold change first effect in which the character NJ of the ninja is displayed starts being displayed, or the display of the hold change fourth effect in which a roulette icon is displayed as shown in FIG. The display of the fifth pending change is started when the character YM of Yoshimune is displayed.],
The other effect [for example, the hold change second effect in which the treasure box TB in FIG. 231 is displayed, the hold change fourth effect in which the roulette icon in FIG. 237 is displayed, the hold change fourth in which the roulette icon in FIG. The above-mentioned one effect [for example, the ninja character NJ in FIG. 231 is displayed being displayed during the display of the effect] [Pending change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed, the holding change first effect in which the ninja character NJ in FIG. 238, the other effect of changing the mode of the hold icon may change even if the mode of the hold icon does not change due to the hold change fifth effect in which the character YM of Yoshimune shown in FIG. 238 is displayed [eg 231 (h), 237 (h), 238 (9)],
The other effect described above is an effect that is more likely to change the mode of the holding icon to a mode in which the degree of expectation of the big hit is high, after being changed than before changing.
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

Also,
"The one of the effects is an effect using a character [eg, the ninja character NJ or the Yoshimune character YM],
The one effect is an effect started by the display start of the character [for example, FIG. 230 (1), FIG. 231 (a), FIG. 237 (b) and FIG. 238 (4)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The one of the effects is an effect using a character [eg, the ninja character NJ or the Yoshimune character YM],
The one effect is an effect started by the start of the action of the character [eg, FIG. 230 (3), FIG. 231 (c), FIG. 237 (c), FIG. 238 (5)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The one effect is an effect that is ended by the display end of the character [for example, FIG. 229 (p), FIG. 237 (i), FIG. 238 (10)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The above one effect is displayed by the first effect image [eg, effect image mf shown in FIG. 230 (7), effect image mh shown in FIG. 231 (f), effect image mf shown in FIG. 237 (f)] It is a directed
The one effect is an effect started by the display start of the first effect image [for example, FIG. 230 (7), FIG. 231 (f), and FIG. 237 (f)],
The one effect is an effect that is ended by the display end of the first effect image [for example, FIG. 230 (9), FIG. 231 (h), and FIG. 237 (h)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The other effect is an effect that an icon [eg, icon of treasure box TB, roulette icon] is displayed,
The other effect is an effect started by the display start of the icon [for example, FIG. 230 (1), FIG. 230 (b), FIG. 237 (a), FIG. 237 (4)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The other effect is an effect that is ended by the end of display of the icon [eg, FIG. 229 (o)]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The other effect is a second effect image [eg, effect image mf shown in FIG. 230 (5), effect image mf shown in FIG. 231 (i), effect image mf shown in FIG. 237 (j), FIG. An effect image mf shown in (11) is displayed,
The other effect is the end of the display of the second effect image [for example, between FIG. 230 (6) and FIG. (7), FIG. 231 (k), FIG. 237 (l), FIG. 238 (13) ] Is an effect that ends with
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
[A game console equipped with effect means capable of executing a plurality of effects,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect [for example, a timer notification effect whose countdown is started from 3.00 seconds shown in FIG. 247],
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect using the ninja character NJ shown in FIG. 247 or the like],
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, a timer notification effect whose countdown is started from 7.77 seconds shown in FIG. 248],
The second effect is an effect that has a case where the first effect is changed (hereinafter referred to as “first case”) [for example, in the case of FIG. 248 (11) -7],
In the first case, the first effect is changed and the third effect is performed [for example, from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to immediately before FIG. (3) -3,
The case where the third effect is performed is more likely to be advantageous development for the player than when the first effect is performed [for example, determination of the jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 248 (4) -2 display],
At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect to be executed in a plurality of symbol variation displays [eg, from FIG. 247 (11) -3 to FIG. Just before],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand characterized by the effect means. In addition, there are cases where it can be expected that the second effect returns the first effect to the third effect.

  Here, “probable development is likely to be” is that it is likely to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a positive change state or / and a short time state), that premier presentation is easily started, or a big hit is decided It may be that presentation is easily started. Moreover, even if it does not directly connect to the big hit, it is included that the rendition indirectly connected to the big hit is executed. For example, a big hit credible SP reach production may be started, or another big hit credible announcement may be likely to appear.

  In addition, the second effect may be an effect which may change an aspect of the effect with respect to the first effect, or an effect which may change the type of the effect. .

  The first effect and the third effect may be effects of different types. Furthermore, the first effect and the second effect may be effects different in type, and the third effect and the second effect may be effects different in type.

  In addition, after the first effect is started earlier, the second effect may be started.

  Furthermore, the second effect may be an effect that includes an effect that hides the display of the first effect, or an effect that includes an effect that hides the display of the first effect. It may be. In other words, there may be a period in which the display of the first effect is not visible due to the second effect, or there may be a period in which the display of the first effect is not displayed.

  The first effect is, for example, from FIG. 247 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. 2 (3) -3, or from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. It may be from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to FIG. (11) -7 and from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to FIG. (3)-4 ((until there is a button operation or until the operation effective period has elapsed) may be from -3 to (3)-4 of the same figure, including effects corresponding to the button operation Fig. (3) -5 may be sufficient. Also, from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to immediately before the same figure (11) -8, from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to the same figure (11) -8, and from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to the same figure (11) It may be until just before −9).

  The second effect may be, for example, FIG. 247 (11) -4 to FIG. 11 (11) -8 from the appearance to the disappearance of the ninja character NJ, or the ninja character NJ is It may be immediately after FIG. 247 (11) -4 until the end of the operation from the start of the operation to FIG. (11)-7 in FIG. 247, or a period during which the effect image mf is displayed (FIG. 247 (7) ) May be.

  The third effect may be, for example, from FIG. 248 (11) -7 to immediately before FIG. (3) -3, or from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to FIG. (3)-. It may be just before 3 and may include button effects as shown in FIG. 248 (11) -8 to (3)-4 (until there is a button operation or until the operation effective period has elapsed). 248 (11)-8 to (3)-5 may be included, including effects corresponding to button operations. Also, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to immediately before the same figure (11) -13, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to the same figure (11) -13 and from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to the same figure (11) It may be a period during which the effect image mf is displayed (FIG. 246 (11)-13) until immediately before −14.

  The effect means may be means for executing a plurality of effects.

  In addition, the second effect may be an effect that always changes the first effect.

  Further, the effects of both the first effect and the second effect may be effects executed in a plurality of symbol variation displays, or only the first effects are executed in a plurality of symbol variation displays It may be an effect, or an effect to be executed in a plurality of symbol variation displays may be only the second effect.

Also,
“The first effect has one of the effects [eg, FIG. 246 (1) -2 to FIG. (1) -10) of a certain type of effect [eg, variation icon change effect]] It is a presentation using the character YM of Tayoshimune],
When the second effect does not change the first effect (hereinafter referred to as “the second case”), there is an effect [eg, in FIG. 246 (1) -3 to FIG. (1) -6 It is an effect using the ninja character NJ shown]
As one of the second effects in the second case, one of the effects of the certain type [for example, an effect that fails to change the fluctuation icon h0 (Gaze effect)] may be performed ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since a plurality of effects (for example, a fourth effect, a fifth effect) are performed as the certain types of effects, there may be expectations.

  Here, one of the certain types of effects performed as the second effect in the second case may be the same effect as the first effect, or may be different from the first effect. It may be.

  Further, the effect of the certain type may be an effect of changing an aspect of an icon (for example, a hold icon or a change icon), and is performed as the second effect in the second case, or One of the effects of the second type may be an effect of changing the aspect of any one of the hold icon and the change icon, and the first effect may be an effect of the hold icon and the change icon. It may be an effect of changing any of the other modes. Further, one of the certain types of effects performed as the second effect in the second case and the first effect are effects for changing the aspect of the fluctuation icon, It may be an effect of changing the aspect of the same hold icon, or an effect of changing the aspect of a different hold icon.

  In addition, the second effect may be an effect in which the aspect of the effect may not be changed with respect to the first effect, or an effect in which the type of the effect may not be changed. .

  Furthermore, the above-mentioned certain type of effect may be a notice regarding a mini item. More specifically, the mini item may be stocked, or the stocked mini item may be increased or changed, and depending on the number, mode, and type of the mini item, a general notice may be made, or a read ahead notice may be made. It will be.

  Note that, as the second effect in the second case, one of the effects of the certain type may be performed.

Also,
“As the second effect in the second case, one of the effects [for example, the pending icon change effect] different from the certain type of effect [for example, FIG. 247 (11) − 4) The effect shown in FIG. 247 (11) -8 using the ninja character NJ may be performed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  For example, the certain kind of effect is a notice effect that a certain effect is started (for example, a timer notice effect in which a certain effect is started when the remaining time display becomes 0, or a button effect is started May be a button effect previewing effect for anticipating the event, and the other type of effect may be an effect for changing the aspect of the icon.

  Note that, as the second effect in the second case, one effect of the other types of effects may be performed without fail.

In the above description,
[A game console equipped with effect means capable of executing a plurality of effects,
One of the plurality of effects is the first effect [for example, an effect using a character YM of Yoshimune with a bow and arrow from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to FIG. 11-8). Yes,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, effects using the character NJ of the ninja from FIG. 246 (11) -5 to FIG. (11) -9, or FIG. 246 (1) It is an effect using the character NJ of the ninja from -3 to (1) -6 in the same figure],
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, an effect using Yoshimune character YM for boring, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to immediately before (FIG. (11) -14). And
The second effect is an effect that has a case of changing the first effect (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”),
In the first case, the first effect is changed and the third effect is performed.
The case where the third effect is performed is more likely to be advantageous development for the player than when the first effect is performed,
The second effect is an effect that does not change the first effect (hereinafter referred to as “the second case”),
The second effect in the first case and the second effect in the second case are partially performed in the same manner [for example, FIG. 246 (11) -5 to FIG. 6 and FIGS. 246 (1) -3 to (1) -4],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand characterized by the effect means. In addition, there are cases where it can be expected that the second effect returns the first effect to the third effect. Furthermore, it may be possible to expect which of the effects will be performed by the second effect.

  Here, “probable development is likely to be” is that it is likely to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a positive change state or / and a short time state), that premier presentation is easily started, or a big hit is decided It may be that presentation is easily started. Moreover, even if it does not directly connect to the big hit, it is included that the rendition indirectly connected to the big hit is executed. For example, a big hit credible SP reach production may be started, or another big hit credible announcement may be likely to appear.

  In addition, the second effect may be an effect which may change an aspect of the effect with respect to the first effect, or an effect which may change the type of the effect. .

  In addition, the second effect may be an effect in which the aspect of the effect may not be changed with respect to the first effect, or an effect in which the type of the effect may not be changed. .

  In addition, “a part is the same as the aspect” means, for example, that a certain period part of the animation is the same, etc., and the second effect and the second effect in the first case in the certain period part. It means that it can not be distinguished from the second effect in the second case, or that it is difficult to distinguish.

  In the second case, the first effect may not be started, or the first effect may not be performed.

  Furthermore, the start timing of the first effect and the start timing of the second effect may be earlier than the start timing of the first effect, or the start timing of the second effect. The timing may be earlier or both may be at the same timing.

  The first effect is, for example, from FIG. 247 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. 2 (3) -3, or from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. It may be from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to FIG. (11) -7 and from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to FIG. (3)-4 ((until there is a button operation or until the operation effective period has elapsed) may be from -3 to (3)-4 of the same figure, including effects corresponding to the button operation Fig. (3) -5 may be sufficient. Also, from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to immediately before the same figure (11) -8, from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to the same figure (11) -8, and from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to the same figure (11) It may be until just before −9).

  The second effect may be, for example, FIG. 247 (11) -4 to FIG. 11 (11) -8 from the appearance to the disappearance of the ninja character NJ, or the ninja character NJ is It may be immediately after FIG. 247 (11) -4 until the end of the operation from the start of the operation to FIG. (11)-7 in FIG. 247, or a period during which the effect image mf is displayed (FIG. 247 (7) ) May be.

  The third effect may be, for example, from FIG. 248 (11) -7 to immediately before FIG. (3) -3, or from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to FIG. (3)-. It may be just before 3 and may include button effects as shown in FIG. 248 (11) -8 to (3)-4 (until there is a button operation or until the operation effective period has elapsed). 248 (11)-8 to (3)-5 may be included, including effects corresponding to button operations. Also, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to immediately before the same figure (11) -13, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to the same figure (11) -13 and from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to the same figure (11) It may be a period during which the effect image mf is displayed (FIG. 246 (11)-13) until immediately before −14.

  The effect means may be means for executing a plurality of effects.

Also,
“The second effect in the first case and the second effect in the second case are partially performed in the same manner including the first portion [eg, FIG. 246 (11) -5 ~ (11)-6 and Figure 246 (1)-3-Figure (1)-4],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the introduced part is the same, there is a time when it is difficult for the player to determine which way to develop, and in some cases, it may be possible to have an interest in the effect.

  Here, the first part may be performed in the same manner, the next part may be performed in a different manner, and the last part may be performed in the same manner, and the same manner and the different manner may be repeated multiple times alternately. May be

Also,
“The first effect has one of the effects [eg, FIG. 246 (1) -2 to FIG. (1) -10) of a certain type of effect [eg, variation icon change effect]] It is a presentation using the character YM of Tayoshimune],
As one of the second effects in the second case, one of the effects of the certain type [for example, an effect that fails to change the fluctuation icon h0 (Gaze effect)] may be performed ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since a plurality of effects (for example, a fourth effect, a fifth effect) are performed as the certain types of effects, there may be expectations.

  Here, one of the certain types of effects performed as the second effect in the second case may be the same effect as the first effect, or may be different from the first effect. It may be.

  Further, the effect of the certain type may be an effect of changing an aspect of an icon (for example, a hold icon or a change icon), and is performed as the second effect in the second case, or One of the effects of the second type may be an effect of changing the aspect of any one of the hold icon and the change icon, and the first effect may be an effect of the hold icon and the change icon. It may be an effect of changing any of the other modes. Further, one of the certain types of effects performed as the second effect in the second case and the first effect are effects for changing the aspect of the fluctuation icon, It may be an effect of changing the aspect of the same hold icon, or an effect of changing the aspect of a different hold icon.

  In addition, the second effect may be an effect in which the aspect of the effect may not be changed with respect to the first effect, or an effect in which the type of the effect may not be changed. .

  Note that, as the second effect in the second case, one of the effects of the certain type may be performed.

Also,
“As the second effect in the second case, one of the effects [for example, the pending icon change effect] different from the certain type of effect [for example, FIG. 247 (11) − 4) The effect shown in FIG. 247 (11) -8 using the ninja character NJ may be performed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  For example, the certain kind of effect is a notice effect that a certain effect is started (for example, a timer notice effect in which a certain effect is started when the remaining time display becomes 0, or a button effect is started May be a button effect previewing effect for anticipating the event, and the other type of effect may be an effect for changing the aspect of the icon.

  Note that, as the second effect in the second case, one effect of the other types of effects may be performed without fail.

Also,
"The second effect in the first case and the second effect in the second case are performed in a partially different manner,
The second effect [for example, the effect using the ninja character NJ] in the first case is the first mode [for example, the mode shown in FIG. 246 (11) -5 to FIG. ], And
The second effect [for example, the effect using the ninja character NJ] in the second case is the second mode [for example, the mode shown in FIG. 246 (1) -3 to FIG. ], And
The first aspect and the second aspect are parts including the first part [for example, FIG. 246 (11) -5 to FIG. (11) -6 and FIG. 246 (1) -3 to FIG. 1) -4] is the same mode,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different from each other in the middle [for example, FIG. 246 (11) -7 to FIG. (11) -9 and FIG. 246 (1) -5 to FIG. 6],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to pay attention to the divergence of the effect. That is, even if it is unclear whether it will be the first case or the second case at the start of the effect, it will be understood whether the first case or the second case will be eventually, and the effect will be Even after being started, it may be possible to draw attention to the effect.

  Moreover, "it is an aspect which is different from the middle" may be an aspect which is different from the middle to the end, or an aspect which differs only in the middle, and the end may be the same aspect again.

In the above description,
[A game console equipped with effect means capable of executing a plurality of effects,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect [for example, a character YJ of Yoshimune having a bow and arrow shown in FIG. (11) -4 to FIG. 250 (11) -10 on the left side of FIG. It is an effect using the character YJ of Yoshimune having the bow and arrow shown in the same figure (11) -4 to the same figure (11) -7 on the right side of FIG. 250.
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect using the character NJ of one ninja shown in FIG. (11) -5 to FIG. , (11) -6 to the same figure (11) -9 on the right side of FIG. 250, using the character NJ of the two ninjas].
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, the character YJ of Yoshimune, who does the boring shown in the same figure (11) -9 to the same figure (11) -13 on the right side of the figure 250 Production],
The second effect is an effect that has a case of changing the first effect (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”),
In the first case, the first effect is changed and the third effect is performed.
The case where the third effect is performed is more likely to be advantageous development for the player than when the first effect is performed,
The second effect is an effect that can be performed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is the first mode [for example, the mode in which only the character NJ of one ninja shown in FIG. (11) -5 to FIG. (11) -7 on the left side of FIG. ],
One of the plurality of modes is a second mode [for example, the characters NJ of two ninjas who are divided and shown in the same figure (11) -6 to the same figure (11) -9 on the right side of the figure 250. The manner in which
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
The case where the second effect is started in the second mode is more likely to be in the first case than when the second effect is started in the first mode,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand characterized by the effect means. In addition, there are cases where it can be expected that the second effect returns the first effect to the third effect. Furthermore, it may be possible to expect which of the effects will be performed by the aspect of the second effect.

  Here, “probable development is likely to be” is that it is likely to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a positive change state or / and a short time state), that premier presentation is easily started, or a big hit is decided It may be that presentation is easily started. Moreover, even if it does not directly connect to the big hit, it is included that the rendition indirectly connected to the big hit is executed. For example, a big hit credible SP reach production may be started, or another big hit credible announcement may be likely to appear.

  In addition, the second effect may be an effect which may change an aspect of the effect with respect to the first effect, or an effect which may change the type of the effect. .

  The first effect is, for example, from FIG. 247 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. 2 (3) -3, or from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. It may be from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to FIG. (11) -7 and from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to FIG. (3)-4 ((until there is a button operation or until the operation effective period has elapsed) may be from -3 to (3)-4 of the same figure, including effects corresponding to the button operation Fig. (3) -5 may be sufficient. Also, from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to immediately before the same figure (11) -8, from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to the same figure (11) -8, and from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to the same figure (11) It may be until just before −9).

  The second effect may be, for example, FIG. 247 (11) -4 to FIG. 11 (11) -8 from the appearance to the disappearance of the ninja character NJ, or the ninja character NJ is It may be immediately after FIG. 247 (11) -4 until the end of the operation from the start of the operation to FIG. (11)-7 in FIG. 247, or a period during which the effect image mf is displayed (FIG. 247 (7) ) May be.

  The third effect may be, for example, from FIG. 248 (11) -7 to immediately before FIG. (3) -3, or from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to FIG. (3)-. It may be just before 3 and may include button effects as shown in FIG. 248 (11) -8 to (3)-4 (until there is a button operation or until the operation effective period has elapsed). 248 (11)-8 to (3)-5 may be included, including effects corresponding to button operations. Also, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to immediately before the same figure (11) -13, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to the same figure (11) -13 and from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to the same figure (11) It may be a period during which the effect image mf is displayed (FIG. 246 (11)-13) until immediately before −14.

  The effect means may be means for executing a plurality of effects.

  In addition, the second effect may be an effect that always changes the first effect.

  In addition, the second effect may be an effect that is necessarily performed in a plurality of modes.

Also,
"The first effect is one of the effects of a certain type of effect [eg, pending icon change effect] [eg, (11) -4 to (11) -10 on the left side of FIG. 250] It is an effect (Gasse effect) which fails to change the first suspension icon h1 using the character YJ of Yoshimune with the bow and arrow shown in
The second effect is an effect that does not change the first effect (hereinafter referred to as “the second case”),
As one of the second effects in the second case, one of the effects of the certain type [eg, (11) -5 to (11) -7 on the left side of FIG. 250] An effect (Gasse effect) that fails to change the first hold icon h1 may be performed using the character NJ of one ninja.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since a plurality of effects (for example, a fourth effect, a fifth effect) are performed as the certain types of effects, there may be expectations.

  Here, one of the certain types of effects performed as the second effect in the second case may be the same effect as the first effect, or may be different from the first effect. It may be.

  Further, the effect of the certain type may be an effect of changing an aspect of an icon (for example, a hold icon or a change icon), and is performed as the second effect in the second case, or One of the effects of the second type may be an effect of changing the aspect of any one of the hold icon and the change icon, and the first effect may be an effect of the hold icon and the change icon. It may be an effect of changing any of the other modes. Further, one of the certain types of effects performed as the second effect in the second case and the first effect are effects for changing the aspect of the fluctuation icon, It may be an effect of changing the aspect of the same hold icon, or an effect of changing the aspect of a different hold icon.

  In addition, the second effect may be an effect in which the aspect of the effect may not be changed with respect to the first effect, or an effect in which the type of the effect may not be changed. .

  Note that, as the second effect in the second case, one of the effects of the certain type may be performed.

Also,
As one of the second effects in the second case, one of the effects [for example, a variation icon change effect] of a type different from the one of the certain type of effects may be performed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  For example, the certain kind of effect is a notice effect that a certain effect is started (for example, a timer notice effect in which a certain effect is started when the remaining time display becomes 0, or a button effect is started May be a button effect previewing effect for anticipating the event, and the other type of effect may be an effect for changing the aspect of the icon.

  Note that, as the second effect in the second case, one effect of the other types of effects may be performed without fail.

Also,
“The second effect according to the second aspect [for example, the effect of an aspect in which two ninja characters NJ appear in the split shown in FIG. 250 (11) -6 to the same figure (11) -9] It is an effect that can be performed with multiple patterns,
One of the plurality of patterns is a first pattern [for example, a shuriken thrown by the character Ninja of one ninja does not hit the character YM of Yoshimune, and a shuriken thrown by the character NJ of the other ninja is a holding icon It is a pattern that does not hit h1,
One of the plurality of patterns is a second pattern [for example, a shuriken thrown by the character Ninja of one ninja hits the character YM of Yoshimune, and a shuriken thrown by the character NJ of the other ninja hits the hold icon h1 Pattern] and
If the second effect according to the second aspect is performed according to the second pattern than when the second effect is performed according to the first pattern, the player is more likely to be in an advantageous development.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  As a result, the second effect performed in the second mode is more likely to be performed in the second pattern than the second effect performed in the first mode.

  Note that the second effect according to the second aspect may be an effect necessarily performed by a plurality of patterns.

Also,
[One of the multiple patterns is a third pattern [for example, the hurricane thrown by the character Ninja of one ninja does not hit the character YM of Yoshimune, and the shuriken thrown by the character ninja of the other ninja is suspended A pattern corresponding to the icon h1],
One of the plurality of patterns is a fourth pattern [for example, the shuriken thrown by the character Ninja of one ninja hits the character YM of Yoshimune, and the shuriken thrown by the character ninja of the other ninja the holding icon h1 It is a pattern that does not hit],
If the second effect according to the second aspect is performed according to the fourth pattern than when the second effect is performed according to the third pattern, the player is more likely to be in an advantageous development.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  As a result, the second effect performed in the second aspect is more likely to be performed with the fourth pattern than the second effect performed in the first aspect.

  Note that the second pattern is a pattern in which a shuriken thrown by the character Ninja of one of the ninjas hits the character YM of Yoshimune, and a shuriken thrown by the character NJ of the other ninja hits the hold icon h1. The pattern may be a pattern in which the Shuriken thrown by the character Ninja of one ninja does not hit the YM character of Yoshimune, and the Shuriken thrown by the character NJ of the other ninja hits the hold icon h1, or the character NJ of one ninja It may be a pattern in which the thrashed toss hit the Yomune character YM, and the thrashed tossed by the other ninja character NJ does not hit the hold icon h1. The third pattern is a pattern in which a shuriken thrown by character Ninja of one of the ninjas hits character YM of Yoshimune, and a shuriken thrown by character Ninja of the other ninja does not hit the hold icon h1, the fourth pattern The pattern may be a pattern in which a hurricane thrown by the character Ninja of one ninja does not hit the character YM of Yoshimune, and a hurricane thrown by the character NJ of the other ninja hits the hold icon h1.

Further, the second effect according to the second aspect in the second case is an effect that can be performed with a plurality of patterns,
One of the plurality of patterns is a fifth pattern [for example, a shuriken thrown by the character Ninja of one ninja does not hit the character YM of Yoshimune, and a shuriken thrown by the character NJ of the other ninja is a holding icon It is a pattern that does not hit h1,
One of the plurality of patterns is a sixth pattern [e.g., the shuriken thrown by the character Ninja of one ninja does not hit the character YM of Yoshimune, and the shuriken thrown by the character NJ of the other ninja is a holding icon The pattern corresponding to h1],
The case where the second effect according to the second aspect in the second case is performed in the sixth pattern is more advantageous development for the player than in the case where the fifth pattern is performed. It may be easy.

  Note that the fifth pattern is a pattern in which the shuriken thrown by the character NJ of one ninja does not hit the character YM of Yoshimune, and the shuriken threw by the character NJ of the other ninja does not hit the fluctuation icon h0] The sixth pattern may be a pattern in which a shuriken thrown by character Ninja of one ninja does not hit character YM of Yoshimune, and a shuriken thrown by character of other ninja NJ hits fluctuation icon h0.

  In addition, the second effect according to the second aspect in the second case may be an effect that is necessarily performed in a plurality of patterns.

In the above description,
[A game console equipped with effect means capable of executing a plurality of effects,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect [for example, an icon change effect using a character YM of Yoshimune with a bow and arrow from FIG. 246 (1) -2 to FIG. ],
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect using the ninja character NJ shown in FIG. 247 or the like],
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, a timer notification effect whose countdown is started from 7.77 seconds shown in FIG. 248],
The second effect is the case where the first effect is changed (hereinafter referred to as “first case”) [for example, when the effect image mα shown in FIG. 248 (11) -7 is displayed] It is a certain production,
In the first case, the first effect is changed and the third effect is performed [for example, from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to immediately before FIG. (3) -3,
The case where the third effect is performed is more likely to be advantageous development for the player than when the first effect is performed,
The first effect is a kind of effect [for example, an icon change effect that is a pending icon change effect or a change icon change effect],
The third effect may be another type of effect [for example, timer advance effect] other than the certain type of effect.
In the first case, the other type of effect may be executed as the third effect.
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand characterized by the effect means. In addition, there are cases where it can be expected that the second effect returns the first effect to the third effect. Furthermore, in some cases, it may be possible to expect which type of effect will be performed.

  Here, “probable development is likely to be” is that it is likely to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a positive change state or / and a short time state), that premier presentation is easily started, or a big hit is decided It may be that presentation is easily started. Moreover, even if it does not directly connect to the big hit, it is included that the rendition indirectly connected to the big hit is executed. For example, a big hit credible SP reach production may be started, or another big hit credible announcement may be likely to appear.

  In addition, the second effect may be an effect which may change an aspect of the effect with respect to the first effect, or an effect which may change the type of the effect. .

  The first effect is, for example, from FIG. 247 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. 2 (3) -3, or from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. It may be from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to FIG. (11) -7 and from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to FIG. (3)-4 ((until there is a button operation or until the operation effective period has elapsed) may be from -3 to (3)-4 of the same figure, including effects corresponding to the button operation Fig. (3) -5 may be sufficient. Also, from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to immediately before the same figure (11) -8, from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to the same figure (11) -8, and from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to the same figure (11) It may be until just before −9).

  The second effect may be, for example, FIG. 247 (11) -4 to FIG. 11 (11) -8 from the appearance to the disappearance of the ninja character NJ, or the ninja character NJ is It may be immediately after FIG. 247 (11) -4 until the end of the operation from the start of the operation to FIG. (11)-7 in FIG. 247, or a period during which the effect image mf is displayed (FIG. 247 (7) ) May be.

  The third effect may be, for example, from FIG. 248 (11) -7 to immediately before FIG. (3) -3, or from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to FIG. (3)-. It may be just before 3 and may include button effects as shown in FIG. 248 (11) -8 to (3)-4 (until there is a button operation or until the operation effective period has elapsed). 248 (11)-8 to (3)-5 may be included, including effects corresponding to button operations. Also, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to immediately before the same figure (11) -13, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to the same figure (11) -13 and from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to the same figure (11) It may be a period during which the effect image mf is displayed (FIG. 246 (11)-13) until immediately before −14.

  The effect means may be means for executing a plurality of effects.

  In addition, the second effect may be an effect that always changes the first effect.

  In addition, the third effect may be a different type of effect from the certain type of effect, and in the first case, the other type of effect must be the third effect. It may be performed.

Also,
"The third effect may be the certain type of effect,
In the first case, the certain type of effect may be executed as the third effect [for example, boring from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to immediately before FIG. (11) -14. Icon change production using YM character YM
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“At least one of the effects of the certain type [for example, pending icon change effect] and the other type of effects [for example, timer advance effect] [for example, the pending icon change effect] It is the production of
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the pre-reading notice also includes the case of losing (false pre-reading notice).

  In addition, both of the one type of effect and the other type of effect may be the effect of the advance notice, or the one type of effect is the effect of the advance notice, Another type of effect may be an effect of normal notice.

  In addition, as an example of the above-mentioned another type of effect, it is possible to cite timer notice effect. Here, the timer advance notice effect may be an action to notice that a certain effect (for example, a button effect, a super reach effect, a pseudo link effect) is started.

Also,
“At least one of the effects of the certain type [for example, the variation icon change production] and the other type of effects [for example, the timer advance presentation effect] [for example, the fluctuation icon change presentation] It is the production of
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The normal notice referred to here is an effect for giving a notice that a big hit will be made with the change display of the decorative symbol performed when the normal notice starts. In addition, the normal notice also includes the case of losing (false false notice).

  In addition, both of the one type of effect and the other type of effect may be the effect of the normal notice, or the certain type of the effect is the normal notice, and Another type of effect may be an effect of pre-reading notice.

  In addition, as an example of the other type of effect, a series of effects from timer advance effect → button effect → strong cut-in display effect can also be mentioned. The display effect of the strong cut-in is usually a notice of advance notice, a notice of development into super reach, or a advance notice.

Also,
"The first effect is an effect that an icon [for example, the first hold icon h1] may be displayed,
The third effect is also an effect that an icon [for example, the first hold icon h1] may be displayed,
If the icon is displayed in the second display mode [for example, the display mode of the character (Sabohani)] rather than the icon is displayed in the first display mode [for example, the default display mode], the big hit symbol Is easy to be displayed
The third effect [e.g., FIG. 246] than the first effect [e.g., the effect using the character YM of Yoshimune with the bow and arrow shown in FIG. 246 (11) -4 to FIG. 11- (10)]. (11) -9 to 11- (13), the icon of the second display mode is more likely to be displayed when the effect using the character YM of Yoshimune to be boring is performed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the icon may be a hold icon or a change icon. In the broad sense, the hold icon also includes a change icon. Further, the icon may be a small display that can be distinguished from other displays, and may be a mini item icon or a character icon.

  The first effect may be an effect in which the icon is always displayed, and the third effect may be an effect in which the icon is always displayed.

Also,
"The second effect is also an effect that an icon may be displayed,
The first effect and the second effect are effects for the same icon [for example, the first hold icon h1].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, even if the first effect and the second effect are effects for different icons [for example, the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2 or the first hold icon h1 and the change icon h0]. Good.

  The second effect may also be an effect in which the icon is always displayed.

Also,
"The first effect is an effect that may change the display mode of the icon [for example, the hold icon h1],
The third effect is also an effect that may change the display mode of the icon [for example, the hold icon h1],
If the icon is displayed in the second display mode [for example, the display mode of the character (Sabohani)] rather than the icon is displayed in the first display mode [for example, the default display mode], the big hit symbol Is easy to be displayed
The third effect [e.g., FIG. 246] than the first effect [e.g., the effect using the character YM of Yoshimune with the bow and arrow shown in FIG. 246 (11) -4 to FIG. 11- (10)]. (11) -9 to 11- (13), it is easier to change the icon to the second display mode when the effect is performed using the character YM of Yoshimune who performs boring shown in FIG. 11- (13).
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the icon may be a hold icon or a change icon. In the broad sense, the hold icon also includes a change icon. The icon may be a mini item icon or a character icon.

  In addition, the first effect may be an effect for changing the display mode of the icon without fail, and the third effect may be an effect for changing the display mode of the icon without fail.

Also,
"The second effect is also an effect that may change the display mode of the icon,
The first effect and the second effect are effects for the same icon [for example, the first hold icon h1].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, even if the first effect and the second effect are effects for different icons [for example, the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2 or the first hold icon h1 and the change icon h0]. Good.

  The second effect may also be an effect of changing the display mode of the icon without fail.

Also,
"One of the first effect and the second effect [for example, the effect using the ninja character NJ] is the other effect [for example, the effect using the character YM of Yoshimune with a bow and arrow] Can be started during the execution of],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first effect may be an effect that may be started during the execution of the second effect, or the second effect is started during the execution of the first effect. It may be an effect that may be played. Alternatively, the first effect and the second effect may be effects that may be started at the time of movement.

  In addition, after the second effect is finished, the first effect or the third effect may be started or performed.

Also,
“The case where the third effect is performed is more likely to be an advantageous development for the player than the case where the first effect is performed as described above” is “the first When the third effect is performed rather than when the effect is performed, the jackpot symbol [for example, decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 or shown in FIG. 197 (a) or FIG. (B) Big hit design] is easy to be displayed finalized, is that,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The first effect is an effect including the display of the first character [eg YM character YM],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display of the first character can be viewed as the display of an icon.

Also,
"The second effect is an effect including the display of a second character [eg, the ninja character NJ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display of the second character can also be viewed as the display of an icon.

  Further, the second character may be a different character or the same character as the first character.

Also,
“The effect means is display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a combination (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N)]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Subsequently, an effect in which the operation means display is displayed will be described. The gaming machine used for the explanation here is the same pachinko machine 100 as the pachinko machine 100 described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 13, and as the technical idea, the technical idea shown in FIGS. It is possible to apply to the technical ideas shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 105, FIG. 108 to FIG. 192, FIG. 193 to FIG. 243, and conversely, FIG. It is also possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIG. 243 to the technical idea shown in FIGS. In that case, what attaches | subjects the same code | symbol may be handled as the same component, and may be able to be substituted.

  FIG. 251 is a diagram gradually showing an example in which the operation means display is displayed straddling continuous symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 251A, the first decorative symbol display device 208L is at the center, the second decorative symbol display device 208M is on the left side, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is on the right side.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 251, a family crest that has been arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a size larger than the first decorative symbol display device 208L at a position overlapping with the upper part It is arranged by. That is, the lower half of the family crest 224E 'shown in FIG. 251 overlaps the top of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side), and this position corresponds to the initial position. The family crest 224E 'shown in FIG. 251 can be dropped from the initial position, and when the fall motion is performed, the entire family crest 224E' overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. The family crest 224E 'is on the foremost side in the anteroposterior relationship (positional relationship in the depth direction) between the family crest 224E' and the three decoration symbol display devices 208L to N, and the first decoration symbol display device 208L Is the rearmost side, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are disposed between the family crest 224E 'and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 251, it is executed in the symbol (special figure) of the variable display executed in the first special view display device 212 (see FIG. 193 etc.) and in the second special view display device 214 (see FIG. 193 etc.). The symbol (special figure) of the variable display is the first symbol. Further, a symbol (common drawing) of the variable display executed in the common drawing display device 210 (see FIG. 193 and the like) (not shown) also corresponds to the second symbol. Then, the decorative symbol of the variable display executed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. That is, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 197 (b), which is variably displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, corresponds to the third symbol pd3. The third symbol pd3 is a rendering symbol that represents the first symbol (not shown) with enhanced decoration. The first symbol is display-controlled by the main control unit 300, and the third symbol pd3 is display-controlled by the sub control unit 400, 500 side. As described above, the sub control units 400 and 500 execute timer interrupt processing at predetermined intervals. For this reason, in the first symbol and the third symbol pd3, at least a time lag occurs for a predetermined period of the timer interrupt processing on the side of the sub control unit 400, 500, but when the first symbol starts fluctuating display, the third symbol The symbol pd3 also starts variable display, and when the first symbol is stopped, the third symbol pd3 is also stopped. Hereinafter, although it demonstrates using 3rd design pd3, and demonstrates on the basis of 3rd design pd3, it is the same thing even if it replaces 3rd design pd3 with a 1st design.

  A fourth symbol pd4 is displayed at the upper left corner of the left second decorative symbol display device 208M. The display pattern of the combination of the white square and the black circle represents the variation display of the third pattern pd3 (decoration symbol), and the display pattern of the combination of the black square and the white circle is the third pattern pd3. Indicates that the stop display of. In addition, it may distinguish and display during fluctuation display and during stop display by lighting of the LED lamp etc. of the board. Furthermore, at the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a mini decorative symbol in which the third symbol pd3 is displayed in a reduced size is shown, and this mini decorative symbol corresponds to the fifth symbol pd5. The fifth symbol pd5 may have a display mode different from that of the third symbol pd3, and if the size is smaller than the size of the third pattern pd3, the display position is different, or the display position is different. Good. The fifth symbol pd5 also performs variable display and stop display, and similarly to the fourth symbol pd4, plays a role in representing in a variable display and stop display of the third symbol pd3 in an easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 are synchronized with each other. Each of the third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed in plurality.

  In the state shown in FIG. 251 (1), the third symbol pd3 is in the display of variable display, and the fourth symbol pd4 is a display mode of the combination of the white square and the black circle, and the fifth symbol pd5 is also in the variable display It is being displayed.

  Also, in the effect display area 208d of the first special view display device 212 shown in FIG. 251 (1), two suspension icons h1 and h2 are displayed, and it is informed that the number of the current special view for suspension is two. It is done. That is, the holding icon is displayed for the number of holding balls in the special drawing. The first pending hold icon (first pending icon) h1 with the old winning timing being displayed in a white display mode which is the default display mode, but the second pending holding icon with a new winning timing (second pending icon H2 is displayed in a red display mode, which is a display mode of the preview preview. In addition to this, the hold icon may be displayed in a display mode of a character or a pattern, and represents the degree of expectation of the jackpot in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold for each display mode. However, even if it is a display mode with a high degree of expectation of the big hit, it is not always a big hit in the symbol variation display corresponding to the suspension, and it may be lost. That is, the higher the expectation of the big hit, the more likely the big hit symbol form is finally displayed in the first symbol. Further, the timing at which the hold icon starts to be displayed in the pre-reading notice mode or changes to the pre-reading notice mode may be at the start of fluctuation, during fluctuation, at stop, and at the time of winning for pre-reading target hold. In the example shown in FIG. 251, although only four areas hs for displaying the suspension icon are prepared, the number (for example, eight) obtained by combining the number of reserved balls in Special figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in Special figure 2 It may be prepared. Further, on the left side of the effect display area 208d, an area cs for displaying the variation icon is prepared, and this area cs is a stage one step higher than the area hs for displaying the hold icon. The variation icon c is an icon displayed as an icon corresponding to the symbol variation after the symbol variation corresponding to the hold icon is started. The fluctuation icon c shown in FIG. 251 (1) is displayed in a white display mode which is a default display mode. The fluctuation icon c may also be displayed in a display mode different in color, or a display mode of a character or a pattern, and each display mode represents the expectation of the jackpot in the symbol fluctuation display being executed. However, even if it is a display mode with a high expectation of the big hit, it is not always a big hit in the symbol variation display under execution, and it may be lost.

  Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. 251 (1), a mini character display (hereinafter referred to as "mini character") is displayed. This mini character is a display that is displayed regardless of whether the third symbol (decorative symbol) is displayed in a variable manner or in a stopped state. In the example shown in FIG. 251, the display Cd of the pattern of the main character and the character It consists of a combination of a character indication Lv indicating a name and a level (here, Lv3) and a gauge indication Gm. Among these displays, the character display Lv and the gauge display Gm are displayed to the cooperation service user of the Internet. That is, it is a service for members registered on the Web, and the gauge increases according to the number of times of symbol variation display and the number of big hits, and when the gauge is full, the level is improved. In addition, there may be a case where a notice effect using a mini character is performed. For example, the big hit expectation degree (here, the big hit expectation degree in the symbol variation display currently performed) may be indicated by the movement or line of the character of the lord. In addition, it is possible to indicate the big hit expectation within the retention with the change of the method of increase of gauge in gauge display Gm, and the color of gauge (that is, it corresponds to the advance notice). Further, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed or the display mode of the operation means display described later may be changed by the animation using the character of the lord.

  Furthermore, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 251 (1), the wipe display Wd is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 251, the wipe display Wd displays the name of the background stage. Here, it is a castle town stage, and "wipe town" is displayed on the wipe display Wd, and the townscape of the castle town is displayed in common on the background of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. In addition, the effect mode may be displayed on the wipe display Wd, the current control state (for example, in the middle of a definite change) may be displayed, or the pre-reading notice may be displayed, and the symbol variation currently performed is performed. A notice for a display (normal notice) may be displayed.

  In addition, below the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 251 (1), an operation means display is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 251, the display imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 193 is displayed regardless of whether the third symbol (decorative symbol) is being changed or displayed while being stopped. There are four types of displays in the operation means display, and hereinafter, they are referred to as a first operation means display, a second operation means display, a third operation means display, and a fourth operation means display. The first operation means display Od1 is displayed in FIG. 251 (1). The first operation means display Od1 is a display imitating the chance button 136 emitting white light with the PUSH character added, for example, a display imitating the chance button 136 turned off, etc. The display may be such that the letters PUSH are omitted. The first operation means display Od1 may be a default operation means display among a plurality of types of operation means displays. Also, the operation means display may be any operation means that can be operated by the player, and is not limited to the chance button 136, and the transparent portion 191 shown in FIG. 202 etc. and the operation key unit shown in FIG. It may be each key in 181, a second chance button or the like. Further, the operation means display may be any display relating to the operation means, for example, a display showing the operation means, a display reminding the operation means, for example, an operation such as a PUSH character display or an arrow showing the operation direction Display for prompting the user to operate the means (hereinafter referred to as “operation prompting display”), for example, display of the remaining period of the operation effective period of the operating means such as meter display, numerical display, number display (hereinafter referred to as “remaining period display And so on can be listed. That is, the display of the operation means may be all of those listed above, or may be appropriately combined. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 251, the operation means display is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M , Or may be displayed on a plurality of decorative symbol display devices, or may be displayed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Further, the number of display of the operation means display is not limited to one, and may be plural.

  The button image 136a and the button meter also correspond to an example of the operation means display. The first operation means display to fourth operation means, which will be described in the following, to which of the first operation means display to the fourth operation means display the button image 136a and the button meter in each figure are classified It is appropriately classified according to the features of the display.

  Further, the display position, size, and the number of displayed various displays described here are not limited to those described here, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed with priority over other displays. For example, when the movable means such as a family crest 224E 'overlaps the fourth symbol pd4 or the fifth symbol pd5 from the front side, a plurality of the fourth symbol pd4 or the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed from the beginning. Alternatively, the display position may be changed in accordance with the movement of the movable means.

  In FIG. 251 (2), the first operation means display Od 1 displayed in FIG. 251 (1) changes to a second operation means display Od 2. The second operation means display Od2 may be a display developed from the first operation means display Od1, or may be a display switched from the first operation means display Od1. The second operation means display Od2 is a display different from the first operation means display Od1. The different display referred to here may be a display in which the display mode is changed. That is, the display may be the same in shape and different in at least one of color, size, pattern and the like, and the shape, color, size, pattern and the like may be the same. It may be a display in which operation modes such as vibration and rotation are different. In these cases, there is no change in the operation means itself, and the first operation means display Od1 and the second operation means display Od2 are displays for the common operation means (here, the chance button 136). Also, the display may be different in shape. When the shape is different, the operation means is common, but when the operation means itself is deformed (for example, an advanced display, a backward display, an open display, a closed display, a display deformed by being operated, etc. Or may be changed to a character display called PUSH as an operation prompting display from a display imitating an operation means, or a meter display representing a remaining period as a remaining period display. It may be changed. Furthermore, when the operation means itself is replaced (for example, when the display imitating the chance button 136 is changed to the display imitating the second chance button) may be used. For example, the matters described in this paragraph are the same in the following description.

  However, the second operation means display Od2 may have the same display mode as the first operation means display Od1. In this case, the difference between the second operation means indication Od2 and the first operation means indication Od1 is that the second operation means indication Od2 is displayed as described later. In the state, when the corresponding operation means is operated, the display mode is changed, while the first operation means display Od1 is the corresponding operation means while the first operation means display Od1 is displayed. Even if is operated, the display mode does not change. In addition, while the operation of the corresponding operation means in the display state is enabled, the operation of the corresponding operation means in the display state is disabled for the second operation means display Od2 There may be such differences.

  The second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 251 (2) is a display imitating the chance button 136 emitting light in red, with the PUSH character added as the operation prompting display.

  The timing at which the first operation means display Od1 changes to the second operation means display Od2 is during the display of the variation display of the third symbol pd3. This change timing is that the display of the first operation means display Od1 has been determined from the stage determined by the effect drawing etc. The third symbol whose display of the first operation means display Od1 is started The variation display of pd3 may end, and it may change during the display of the variation display of the third symbol pd3 to be started next. In this case, the first operation means display Od1 continues to be displayed during the stop display of the third symbol pd3 (during main stop), and the second operation means simultaneously with the start of the fluctuation display of the next third symbol pd3. The first operation means display Od1 continues to be displayed at the time of the change to the display Od2 or the start of the next variable display of the third symbol pd3 and the second display after the next variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started It may be changed to the operation means display Od2. That is, the first operation means display Od1 may be displayed across a plurality of times of the variable display of the third symbol pd3. Further, the timing at which the first operation means display Od1 changes to the second operation means display Od2 may be during stop display of the third symbol pd3 (during main stop).

  Further, a speaker 120 is shown in FIG. 251 (2), and a sound effect is output from the speaker 120 in order to notify that the display mode of the second operation means display Od 2 has changed. Furthermore, the actual chance button 136 itself also changes from the white light emission state to the red light emission state. The output of the sound effect, the change to the second operation means display Od2, and the change of the chance button 136 itself may be simultaneous, or any one may be started first, or any one of them. One may be started later. In addition to the output of the sound effects, the change to the second operation means display Od2 may be notified by turning on or blinking the LED lamp on the board, the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 251 (3), the third symbol pd3 is swayed (temporarily stopped) by the combination of the lost of the decorative symbol ("decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1"). On the other hand, the fifth symbol pd5 displays the state of variation, and the fourth symbol pd4 remains the display mode of the combination of the white square and the black circle indicating that the variable display is in progress.

  In FIG. 251 (4), the third symbol pd3 is stop-displayed (full stop) in the combination of the loss of the decorative symbol. In addition, the 5th design pd5, like the 3rd design pd3, displays stop combination of the loss of the decoration design (this stop), and the display pattern of the combination of black square and white circle that the 4th design pd4 represents during stop display Has been switched to The period from FIG. 251 (4) to FIG. 6 (6) is a period for confirming display of the first symbol (special figure) not shown, and the same display continues for the third symbol pd 3 to the fifth symbol pd 5. It is displayed. In addition, the second operation means display Od2 is also displayed continuously. That is, the display is continued without returning to the first operation means display Od1 before the change. In addition, in FIG. 251 (5), the number of times of symbol fluctuation display increases because the symbol fluctuation display is finished (the main stop of the third symbol pd3 is performed), and the gauge in the gauge display Gm increases (See the arrow pointing to the right shown in FIG. 251 (5)). However, gauge may increase by temporary stop of the 3rd design pd3. Further, in FIG. 251 (6), the variation icon c disappears from the area cs displaying the variation icon.

  In FIG. 251 (7), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed also in the fifth symbol pd5, similarly to the third symbol pd3, and the fourth symbol pd4 is a variation display It has switched to the display mode of the combination of the white square and black circle which represent inside. However, the shift movement of the hold icon is not started, and the change icon is not displayed in the area cs where the change icon is displayed. Moreover, even if the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, the second operation means display Od2 is continuously displayed, and the second operation means display Od2 straddles the variable display of the continuous third symbol pd3. Is displayed. Furthermore, in FIG. 251 (8), the shift movement of the hold icon has been started, and the hold icon h1 that has been displayed in the area hs displaying the first hold icon until now is in the area cs where the change icon is displayed. While the movement is started, the hold icon h2 displayed in the area hs displaying the second hold icon is moving toward the area hs displaying the first hold icon. The start order of the shift movement of the holding icon, the start of the fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3, the switching of the display mode of the fourth design pd4 at the start of the fluctuation of the first symbol, and the start of the fluctuation display of the fifth symbol pd5, It may be simultaneous or either may be first. However, the timing of the switching of the display mode of the fourth symbol pd4 and the timing of the start of the variable display of the fifth symbol pd5 coincide with each other.

  In FIG. 251 (9), the shift movement of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon c of the display mode of white, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the area cs displaying the change icon. In the area hs to be displayed, a red hold icon h1 which is a display mode of the pre-reading advance notice is displayed.

  Also in FIG. 251 (10), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 continues, and the display of the second operation means display Od2 also continues. Here, the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 changes, and a meter display Tm representing the remaining period, which is the remaining period display, is added. That is, the second operation means display Od2 is a display combining the display in which the character of PUSH is added to the display imitating the chance button 136 emitting light in red and the meter display Tm. Further, in order to notify that the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 has changed, a sound effect is output from the speaker 120. Either of the change in the display mode and the output of the sound effects may precede or be simultaneous. The meter display Tm is a display different from the second operation means display Od2, and the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 does not change, and it can be said that the meter display Tm is added. Further, instead of adding the meter display Tm, or together with the addition of the meter display Tm, the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 may be changed. For example, it may be blinked, changed in color, or enlarged.

  Also in FIG. 251 (11), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 continues, and the meter of the meter display Tm decreases a little, and in FIG. 251 (12), it is the operation means corresponding to the second operation means display Od2. The chance button 136 is operated. When the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 changes. In this example, as shown in FIG. 251 (13), the display is returned to the first operation means display Od1. That is, from the display mode in which the character of PUSH is added to the display imitating the chance button 136 emitting light in red, the display mode in which the character PUSH is added to the display imitating the chance button 136 emitting white is changed There is. Also, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, there may be a case where a preview notice (corresponding to a first notice effect) is started. That is, in the wipe display Wd in which "jojo town" as the name of the background stage was displayed until now, the letters "Heat" are displayed as the display of the advance notice, and the wipe is performed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. An effect image Ed is added to the display Wd. The effect image Ed is an effect for making it clear that the advance notice is started, but here again, the advance notice is started by the output of the effect sound from the speaker 120, the light emission of various lamps, and other displays. It may be informed of the event. Note that the output of sound effects, the light emission of various lamps, and other displays can also be viewed as one of the preview notices (corresponding to the first notice effect). In the state of FIG. 251 (13), there is only one suspension of the special drawing, so the object of the prefetch notice by the character of “heat” displayed on the wipe display Wd is the suspension icon h1 shown in FIG. 251 (13) It becomes the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the 1st suspension which it represents. Since the hold icon h1 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice, two types of pre-reading notices such as the pre-reading notice by the wipe display Wd and the pre-reading notice by the display mode of the hold icon are executed. Become. In addition, the change of the display mode of the second operation means display Od2, the switching to the display of the advance notice in the wipe display Wd, and the addition of the effect image Ed shown in FIG. 251 (13) may be simultaneous. One of them may be started first, or any one may be started later. The effect image Ed may be light emission of a pattern of the effect image by the light guide plate.

  Here, other possible examples will be described in detail. First, when the first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 251 (1) is displayed, nothing changes even if the chance button 136 which is the operation means corresponding to the first operation means display Od1 is operated. Does not happen. That is, the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 does not change, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed as it is, and effects (for example, advance notice effect etc.) corresponding to the chance button 136 being operated are started I will not. Therefore, the operation of the chance button 136 at this timing can be said to be invalidated, or the first operation means display Od1 is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalidated. it can. In the following description, it is assumed that the operation of the operation means is invalid by combining the fact that the operation of the operation means is not accepted and the fact that the operation is accepted as being invalidated.

  Next, during the period during which the third symbol pd3 is fluctuatingly displayed (FIG. 251 (2) to FIG. (3)) which is being executed when the first operation means display Od 1 changes to the second operation means display Od 2 Also when the chance button 136 which is the operation means corresponding to the second operation means display Od2 is operated, the "heat" which is the advance notice to the wipe display Wd as described using FIG. 13 (13) Is displayed, the effect image Ed is added, and the advance notice is started. Further, the second operation means display Od2 returns to the first operation means display Od1. In this case, the second operation means display Od2 of the display mode in which the character PUSH is added to the display imitating the chance button 136 emitting red light is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective. It can be said.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading notice may not be started. That is, until the meter display Tm to which the display is added in FIG. 251 (10) is displayed, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the same as the state where the first operation means display Od1 described above is displayed, Nothing may change. In this case, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 including the meter display Tm is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective, as shown in FIG. 251 (2) to FIG. It can be said that the second operation means display Od2 without the meter display Tm shown in is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid. Also, it can be said that the meter display Tm itself is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective. Furthermore, if the stop display of the third symbol pd3 is not passed after changing to the second operation means display Od2, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the advance notice may not be started. That is, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIGS. 251 (2) to (6) is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid. In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated only during the change display of the third symbol pd3 being executed when the second operation means display Od2 is changed, the preview notice may be started. . That is, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIGS. 251 (2) to (3) is a display showing that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective, and the chance button 136 is operated. If not, the second operation means display Od2 may return to the first operation means display Od1 at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (4). Alternatively, the preview notice may not be started unless the chance button 136 is operated prior to the swing display (temporary stop) of the third symbol pd3 after the second operation means display Od2 is displayed. If the chance button 136 is not operated, the second operation means display Od2 returns to the first operation means display Od1 at the timing of the shaking display (temporary stop) shown in FIG. 251 (3). It is also good. Further, even in the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the pre-reading advance notice is started It may be.

  Also, when there is no operation of the chance button 136, the meter of the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 251 (10) becomes 0 at the timing of FIG. 251 (14), for example. That is, it becomes 0 by the time the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading advance notice is started. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, it is assumed that the operation was performed, and after the meter of the meter display Tm becomes 0, the character of "heat" which is the advance notice in the wipe display Wd Is displayed, the effect image Ed is added, and the advance notice is started. In addition, when there is no operation, you may change the aspect of production of advance notice. For example, when the effect image Ed is not displayed or an operation is performed, sound output such as a sound effect is also performed. However, when no operation is performed, the sound output may not be performed.

  As mentioned above, although various aspects were demonstrated, when pre-reading advance notice is started, 2nd operation means display Od2 returns to 1st operation means display Od1. However, it may not return. When the chance button 136 is operated, the second operation means display Od2 may return to the first operation means display Od1 even if the pre-reading advance notice is not started. However, as long as the pre-reading notice is not started, the pre-reading notice may be started by accepting the operation of the chance button 136 after that. In this case, the second operation is performed until the pre-reading notice is started. The means display Od2 may continue to be displayed as the second operation means display Od2 without returning to the first operation means display Od1.

  In addition, the second operation means display Od2 itself corresponds to the display of the advance notice (third advance notice effect) that the advance notice may be executed after the second operation means display Od2 is displayed. You can say that.

  In FIG. 251 (14), the third symbol pd3 is swayed (temporarily stopped) with a combination of lost decorative symbols, but as in the case of FIG. The fourth symbol pd4 remains in the display mode representing that the variable display is being performed. Further, although the effect image Ed has disappeared, the display of the pre-reading advance notice (the character display of “Heat”) in the wipe display Wd is continued.

  In FIG. 251 (15), the third symbol pd3 displays stop (full stop) with a combination of lost decorative symbols, and the fifth symbol pd5 also displays stop (full stop) combination of lost decorative symbols, The 4 symbol pd4 is switched to a display mode representing stop display, and a period (FIG. 251 (15) to FIG. (17)) of finalized display of the first symbol (special figure) not shown is started. The first operation means display Od1 is continuously displayed also during the period of the final display (during the final stop of the third symbol pd3). In addition, in FIG. 251 (16), the number of times of the symbol variation display is increased by the completion of the symbol variation display, and the gauge in the gauge display Gm is increasing (see the arrow pointing to the right in FIG. 251 (16) ). Further, in FIG. 251 (17), the variation icon c disappears from the area cs displaying the variation icon.

  In Fig. 251 (18), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started again, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed also in the fifth symbol pd5 as in the third symbol pd3, and the fourth symbol pd4 is the variation It has switched to the display mode which represents displaying. However, shift movement of the hold icon has not been started. In addition, even if the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, the first operation means display Od1 is continuously displayed, and the first operation means display Od1 is also a variable display of the third symbol pd3 a plurality of times. It is displayed across the.

  FIG. 252 is a diagram gradually showing an example in which the operation means display is displayed, continuing from FIG. 251.

  In Fig. 252 (19) following Fig. 251 (18), shift movement of the hold icon is started, and movement of the hold icon h1 in the display mode of the prefetch notice is started toward the area cs displaying the fluctuation icon, In FIG. 252 (20), the shift movement of the hold icon is completed and the display of the hold icon disappears, but the change icon c of the red display mode is displayed in the area cs where the change icon is displayed. The symbol variation display started in FIG. 251 (18) is the symbol variation display to be the target of the above-mentioned two types of pre-reading notices (pre-reading notice with the wipe display Wd and pre-reading notice with the display mode of the hold icon h1). Even if the symbol variation display that was the target of the pre-reading notice is started, the character of "heat" is displayed on the wipe display Wd, but the symbol variation display that was the target of the pre-reading notice is started Thus, the character of "Heat" on the wipe display Wd is a so-called normal notice (the change advance notice) for the symbol change display currently being performed. Further, the variation icon c of the red display mode is also displayed in the display mode of the normal notice (the change advance notice). That is, the preview notice is switched to the normal notice at the start of the symbol variation display which is the target of the prefetch notice. By switching from the advance notice to the normal notice and continuing the normal notice, it may be possible to make many players notice that the started symbol variation display is hot.

  In (252) of FIG. 252, in the variable display of the third symbol pd 3, the reach effect of “decoration 7” is started, and in FIG. 252 (22), the sound of “reach” is output from the speaker 120. It should be noted that in addition to the sound, it may be notified that the reach effect has been started by light emission or display of various lamps. In this state, the reach effect is a normal reach effect, but the reach effect of “decorative 7” may be a reach effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than reach effects by other numbers. In FIG. 252 (23), the display of the balloon is added to the display Cd of the design of the character displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The display of the balloon is a character display of "Development" which indicates or announces the development to the super reach, and is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the display of the balloon overlaps the fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3 in the reach state displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third symbol pd3 is difficult to visually recognize. In addition, it is a relative thing that it is difficult to visually recognize compared with the state before it, and the said "visibility is difficult" (following, the same).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, display of the area cs displaying the fluctuation icon, display of the fluctuation icon c, display of the area hs displaying the hold icon, display Cd of the character pattern in the second decoration symbol display device 208M , Character display Lv, gauge display Gm, character display of "heat" of wipe display Wd in third decorative symbol display device 208N, and first operation means display Od1 are all being displayed until FIG. 252 (23). There is, however, that the display of the balloon "Development" has disappeared in FIG. 252 (24), the display Cd of the character pattern, the character display Lv and the gauge display Gm in the second decorative symbol display device 208M are together with the display of the balloon. All disappear, and also in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, all the display of the area hs for displaying the hold icon disappears. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the area cs displaying the fluctuation icon and the display of the fluctuation icon c are continuously displayed because they represent the degree of expectation of the symbol fluctuation display currently being performed. ing. Further, the character display of the "heat" of the wipe display Wd and the first operation means display Od1 in the third decorative symbol display device 208N are still being displayed, and the third symbol pd3 is also being displayed visibly, 4 symbols pd4 and 5 symbols pd5 are also being displayed. If the hold icon is displayed in FIG. 252 (23), the display of the hold icon also disappears. The display of the balloon display, the display of the character pattern Cd, the character display Lv, the gauge display Gm, and the display of the area hs for displaying the hold icon may disappear at the same time, or the disappearing timings are different. May be Alternatively, some displays (for example, a balloon display, a character pattern display Cd, a character display Lv, and a gauge display Gm) disappear at the same time, and the remaining displays (display of the area hs displaying the hold icon, display of the hold icon) ) May disappear at different times.

  In FIG. 252 (25), an animation in which the display of the area cs displaying the fluctuating icon and the display of the fluctuating icon c, which were displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 L, move toward the second decorative symbol display device 208 M Is displayed, and in FIG. 252 (26), the animation ends and the display of the area cs displaying the fluctuating icon and the display of the fluctuating icon c are displayed so far by the mini character in the second decorative symbol display device 208M It is displayed in the position where it had been. By doing this, it is possible to widely use the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to perform rendering with a high hit probability (here, super reach rendering). Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 252 (26), dark display is displayed except for the display area of the fifth symbol pd5, and the third symbol pd3 and the background display of the castle town are not visible. However, the fifth symbol pd5 is always displayed so that it can be understood that the variable display is being performed. The fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed surrounded by a frame. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 252 (26), the wipe display Wd changes from the character of "heat" to the character of "Kengo" representing the name of the super reach effect (Kengo reach). ing. Therefore, it can be said that the normal notice by the wipe display Wd is ended here. On the other hand, the fluctuation icon c moved to the second decorative symbol display device 208M continues to be displayed in a red display mode which is a display mode of a normal advance notice (the change advance notice). In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a reduced display pd3 'of the third symbol pd3 is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 252 (27), the sword reach reach production of the super reach production is started, and the main character of the hero is displayed in full screen, but the fifth pattern pd5 can be viewed without being hidden It is. In Fig. 252 (28), the background display of the wilderness is switched to, the main character of the main character and the swordsman of the enemy player start confrontation, and the scene after cutting is continued to be displayed from FIG. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 252 (30) to FIG. 32 (32), the first operation means display Od 1 which has been continuously displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208 N until now is the third decorative symbol display An animation popping out of the device 208N and moving to the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. In FIG. 252 (32), the first operation means display Od1 is displayed at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Subsequently, in FIG. 252 (33) in which sword reach effect is continuing, the first operation means display Od1 changes to the fourth operation means display Od4. That is, it changes to the 4th operation means display Od4 during the fluctuation display of 3rd design pd3. The fourth operation means display Od4 may be a display developed from the first operation means display Od1, or may be a display switched from the first operation means display Od1. The fourth operation means display Od4 is a display different from the first operation means display Od1. The fourth operation means display Od4 shown in FIG. 252 (33) is a display in which enlargement display, change of the display mode, and addition of a meter display representing a remaining period which is a remaining period display are performed. That is, a display imitating the chance button 136 emitting red light is enlarged and displayed with the PUSH character added, and a large meter display Tm 'is additionally displayed below it. Thus, as the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 changes, the size of the fourth operation means display Od4 also changes, and the display position also changes. The large meter display Tm 'can also be viewed as a display different from the fourth operation means display Od4. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 252 (33), the wipe display Wd is changed from the character of "Kenou" to the character of "press" which is the operation promotion display.

  In Fig. 252 (34), the sword reach production continues, the meter of the meter display Tm 'decreases slightly, and in the figure (35), the meter further decreases, and in the figure (36), the meter Decrease to the remaining 1/4. In the meter display Tm ', the display of the chance up (the character display of "chance") is hidden, and the display gradually appears as the meter decreases. The chance improvement here means that the degree of expectation to hit the jackpot in the symbol variation display currently performed is increased.

  FIG. 253 is a diagram gradually showing an example in which the operation means display is displayed, continuing from FIG.

  In FIG. 253 (37) following FIG. 252 (36), the chance button 136 which is the operating means corresponding to the fourth operating means display Od4 is operated. When the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed, a normal advance notice (corresponding to a second notice effect) for announcing a big hit in the symbol variation display currently being performed is started. Ru. In addition, the fourth operation means display Od4 returns to the first operation means display Od1. In FIG. 253 (38), the family crest 224E 'which has been at the initial position so far executes the falling motion, and the whole family crest 224E' overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side, and further the first decor The effect image Ed1 is displayed large on the symbol display device 208L. This effect image Ed1 is displayed so as to almost hide the scene after the cutting of the lord and swordsmen in the background image of the wilderness, and both the temples and swordsmen are difficult to see. In addition, the leading end portion of the effect image Ed1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the effect image Ed1 here is displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. It is done. In addition, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the first operation means display Od1 returned from the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed again, and on that, the wipe display Wd is a character of "press" The character of the effect image Ed1 is superimposed on the wipe display Wd. However, the character of "winning" is visible, and the tip portion of the effect image Ed1 makes the character of "winning" in the wipe display Wd more conspicuous. In addition, the effect image Ed1 does not overlap with the fifth symbol pd5 continuously indicating that the variable display is being performed, and it is clear that the variable display is continued with the fourth symbol pd4 as well as the fifth symbol pd5. It is displayed. As described above, in this example, as an effect of normal notice, the family crest product 224E 'executes the falling operation and the effect image Ed1 is displayed, and the wipe display Wd is changed to the character of "winning". Here, the normal advance presentation is a presentation where the expectation of the big hit is high, and when the expectation of the big hit is low, the household crest item 224E 'does not fall or the effect image Ed1 is not displayed even if it falls Or, the wipe display Wd changes to the character of "defeat", or changes to the question mark. Further, simultaneously with the falling of the family crest 224E ', in the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 253 (38), the reduction display pd3' of the third symbol pd3 is a combination of the big hit of the decorative symbol -Shake display (temporary stop) is started with "decoration 7"-"decoration 7".

  In FIG. 253 (39), although the family crest 224E 'at the falling position is elevated to the initial position, the effect image Ed1 is still displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N.

  Then, in FIG. 253 (40), the effect image Ed1 disappears, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the result of the sword strike reach effect which is the super reach effect. Here, a scene where the main character of the hero has won is displayed. Therefore, the super reach effect is an effect from FIG. 252 (26) to FIG. 253 (40). The scene won by the protagonist, shown in FIG. 253 (40), is viewed as part of a normal notice started by the chance button 136 being operated in a state where the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed. It can also be done.

  In FIG. 253 (41), the reduced display pd3 'of the third symbol pd3 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is returned to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the reduced symbol d1 on the first decorative symbol display device 208L "Decoration 7" is displayed in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Here, although any "decoration 7" is sway display (temporary stop), the variation display is continued in the fifth symbol pd5, and the display pattern representing the fourth symbol pd4 remains during variation display. . In addition, the display of the normal notice (the character display of “winning”) in the wipe display Wd is continued.

  In FIG. 253 (42), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed (full stop) in the combination of the big hit of the decorative symbols ("decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7"), and the fifth symbol pd5 is also The combination of the big hit of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (full stop), the fourth symbol pd4 is switched to the display mode representing that the stop is being displayed, and the finalized display of the first symbol (special figure) not shown is started. During this final display period (during the final stop of the third symbol pd3), the first operation means display Od1 and the display of the normal notice in the wipe display Wd (the character display of "winning") are continuously displayed. There is.

  Here, other possible examples will be described in detail. First, in FIGS. 251 (13) to 252 (32) after returning to the first operation means display Od1, even if the chance button 136 which is the operation means corresponding to the first operation means display Od1 is operated, No change occurs as in the state of FIG. 251 (1). That is, the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 does not change, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed as it is, and effects (for example, advance notice effect etc.) corresponding to the chance button 136 being operated are started I will not.

  On the other hand, when the first operation means display Od1 changes to the fourth operation means display Od4, as described above, the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, and a normal advance notice is started. Here, including the display of the fourth operation means display Od4, a series of effects shown in FIG. 252 (33) to FIG. 253 (40) is the last one to tell whether or not a big hit will be made in the symbol variation display currently being performed. It can be said that it corresponds to the production of (the so-called final judge production). Moreover, after the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed, the fact that the normal advance notice may be executed means that the fourth operation means display Od4 itself corresponds to the display of the normal advance notice (second advance notice effect) You can say that.

  Moreover, in this example, although the first operation means display Od1 is changed and the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed, the fourth operation means is displayed in a state where the first operation means display Od1 is not displayed. The display Od4 may begin to be displayed alone, or even if the first operation means display Od1 is displayed, the fourth operation means display Od4 is independent rather than the first operation means display Od1 changing. You may begin to be displayed in. However, when the first operation means display Od1 changes and the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the fourth operation means display Od4 starts to be displayed alone. .

  Furthermore, when the chance button 136 is operated, the fourth operation means display Od4 returns to the first operation means display Od1 in FIG. 253 (38), but the fourth operation means display Od4 disappears, Nothing is displayed on the operation means display, and redisplay of the first operation means display Od1 may be started after the end of the big hit game or at the time of the disclosure of the next variation display of the third symbol pd3. . Or, conversely, the first operation means display Od1 may not be displayed even if the big hit game is over, and the first operation means display Od1 may be displayed even if the next variation display of the third symbol pd3 is disclosed. It may not be displayed.

  Also, even if the chance button 136 is not operated until the meter of the meter display Tm 'shown in FIG. 252 (33) becomes 0, the meter of the meter display Tm' is assumed to have been operated. After becoming 0, the effect of the normal advance notice in FIG. 253 (38) to FIG. (40) may be executed.

  In the example described with reference to FIG. 251, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state in which the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the prefetch notice is started, but the chance button 136 is operated. A normal advance notice for symbol variation display being performed at the moment may be started instead of the advance notice.

  FIG. 254 shows, in stages, an example in which a first operation means display Od1 in a pachinko machine provided with a game board having a configuration different from that of the game board shown in FIG. 195 changes to a second operation means display Od2. It is.

  The description here will be made focusing on differences from the example shown in FIGS. 251 to 253, and the same points as the example shown in FIGS. 251 to 253 may be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 254, the lower side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the left and right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is disposed on the Like the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is also movable means, and the size of the display screen is smaller than that of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The upper part of the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O shown in FIG. 254 (a) overlaps with the central part of the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side), and this position is at the initial position. The fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is a display device capable of moving up and down. In the example shown in FIG. 254, the background image of the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is also a town of the castle town, and four areas hs for displaying the reserve icon are displayed. In FIG. 254 (a), all the areas hs , A white display mode holding icon h1 to h4 which is a default display mode is displayed.

  An area cs for displaying a variation icon is prepared at the left end of the effect display area 208d in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the area cs is the same low stage as the area hs for displaying the hold icon. In FIG. 254 (a), the variation icon c of the display mode of white which is the default display mode is displayed in the area cs, and the variation display is performed in each of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. . Further, in this example, the fourth symbol pd4 is displayed on the upper left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 254 (a), the fourth symbol pd4 is a display mode that indicates that variation display is in progress.

  Furthermore, a first operation means display Od1 is displayed at the right end of the effect display area 208d in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 254 (b), the display Cd1 of the character pattern of the character of the protagonist appears on the fluctuation icon c, and in FIG. 254 (c), the character of the lord descends behind the fluctuation icon c and changes. The icon is displayed in the upright posture above the area cs displaying the icon. Then, an animation is displayed in which the main character of the main character carries the fluctuation icon c (FIG. 254 (d)) and throws the carried fluctuation icon c (FIG. 254 (e)). That is, the animation here is a moving animation of the fluctuation icon c. The thrown variation icon c crosses the third symbol pd3 in the variation display (FIG. 254 (f)) and hits the first operation means display Od1 (FIG. 254 (g)). Then, as shown in FIG. 254 (h), the effect image Ed2 appears so as to hide a part of the fluctuation icon c and the first operation means display Od1, and the fluctuation icon c disappears in the following FIG. 254 (i) The first operation means display Od1 changes, and in FIG. 254 (j), the effect image Ed2 disappears, and the second operation means display Od2 is displayed at the position where the first operation means display Od1 was displayed. ing. Here, the second operation means display Od2 is a display mode in which the letters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 emitting blue light. The actual chance button 136 itself also changes from the white light emission state to the blue light emission state. As a light emission mode of the chance button 136 itself or a display mode of the second operation means display Od2, the expectation of the jackpot is higher in the red mode than in the white mode and in the blue mode than in the red mode. As shown in FIGS. 251 (1) to (2), the character is involved as in this example as compared to the case where the first operation means display Od1 changes to the second operation means display Od2 alone. When one operation means display Od1 changes to the second operation means display Od2, the degree of expectation of the jackpot is higher. In addition, the character of the lord after throwing away the fluctuation icon c continues the same pose until FIG. 254 (j), and in FIG. 254 (k), it is displayed in an upright posture above the area cs displaying the fluctuation icon There is.

  In FIG. 254 (k), a display of a balloon of "chance is" is added to the display Cd1 of the character pattern. It can be said that the display of the balloon "This is a chance" is a kind of operation promotion display, and it can be said that it is a kind of advance notice. Also in this example, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 itself corresponds to the display of the prefetch notice (third preview effect).

  In FIG. 254 (l), the chance button 136 which is an operating means corresponding to the second operating means display Od2 is operated. When the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 also changes in this example, as shown in FIG. 254 (m). It returns to the first operation means display Od1. Also, pre-reading advance notice (corresponding to the first notice effect) is started. In FIG. 254 (m), the change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O changes to the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice is started, and a part or all of the second hold icon h2 The effect image Ed3 appears so as to be hidden, and in the subsequent FIG. 254 (n), the second hold icon h2 changed to the display pattern of the fan pattern is displayed on the front side of the effect image Ed3. Then, in FIG. 254 (o), the effect image Ed3 disappears, and the second hold icon h2 of the display mode of the fan pattern that is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice is displayed. Will continue to be displayed until the second hold is digested.

  Other possible examples will be described in detail. First, in this example, after the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the chance button 136 is operated early, but even if the operation timing is delayed, if it is within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. m) The effect of the pre-reading notice in the figure (o) is executed. In addition, when the display of the second operation means display Od2 is started, the fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3 being executed is ended, and the chance button 136 is displayed until the next fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3 is started. When not operated, the second operation means display Od2 is continuously displayed. That is, when the display of the second operation means display Od2 is started, the variation display of the third symbol pd3 being executed is ended, and the second operation means display Od2 is continuously displayed even during the stop display, Even if the next variable display of 3 symbols pd3 is started, the second operation means display Od2 is continuously displayed, and the second operation means display Od2 is displayed across the variable displays of the continuous third symbol pd3. Ru. Furthermore, if the chance button 136 is not operated, the second operation means display Od2 may continue to be displayed at the longest until the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 254 is ended.

  In addition, a display imitating the chance button 136 emitting blue light may be equivalent to an example of the third operation means display. The third operation means display referred to here is the operation means display of a mode different from the first operation means display Od1 and the third operation means is displayed in a state where the third operation means display is displayed. Even when the operation means (here, the chance button 136) corresponding to the display is operated, the display means does not change the display mode. In the state where the third operation means display is displayed, when the operation means corresponding to the third operation means display is operated, the notice effect may be started or may not be started. . Hereinafter, the display imitating the chance button 136 emitting blue light will be referred to as a blue third operation means display, and the description will be continued. For example, the operation of the chance button 136 is disabled until the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 251 (10) is added to the blue third operation means display, or until the PUSH character is added, and the meter display If there is an operation on the chance button 136 after Tm is added or after the PUSH character is added, there may be cases where the effect of the prefetch notice in FIG. 254 (m) to FIG. (O) is executed. May be That is, there may be a case where the period of disabling the operation of the chance button 136 is switched to the period of enabling. In this case, when the chance button 136 is operated after the meter display Tm is added or the letter PUSH is added to the blue third operation means display, as shown in FIG. 254 (m), If the meter display Tm is added or the letter PUSH is added to the blue third operation means display because the operation means display Od1 of is returned, the third operation means display performs the second operation It can be said that it has changed to means display. Also, the blue third operation means display may change to the first operation means display Od1. In this case, the operation of the chance button 136 is always invalid. When the player does not start the pre-reading notice even when operating the chance button 136 while the blue third operation means display is displayed, when the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively switched, Alternatively, whether to return to the first operation means display Od1 without switching is to be waited while expecting to be effectively switched. The degree of expectation to be effectively switched may be represented by the light emission mode of the chance button 136 itself or the display mode of the third operation means display. For example, in the blue mode than in the red mode, and in the seven-color changing mode (rainbow mode) than the blue mode, the degree of expectation may be higher. If the operation of the chance button 136 is switched effectively, the pre-reading advance notice is executed, and the degree of expectation of the big hit becomes higher than the case where it returns to the first operation means display Od1 without switching. In addition, the display mode of the third operation means display may be changed during a period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is invalidated to increase or decrease the degree of expectation to be effectively switched.

  Further, in this example, although the remaining period display of the chance button 136 is not displayed, even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period of the chance button 136, it is assumed that the operation has been performed. After the expiration of the effective period, the effect of the prefetch notice in FIG. 254 (m) to FIG. (O) may be executed.

  Further, in FIG. 254 (j), the second operation means display Od2 is changed, but the fourth operation means display Od4 may be changed. In this case, the operation of the chance button 136 is invalidated until the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h2 which is the notice target is started, and the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h2 is started. If there is an operation on the button 136, a normal advance notice may be started.

  FIG. 255 shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 254 step by step.

  The description here will be made focusing on differences from the example shown in FIG. 254, and the description of the same points as the example shown in FIG. 254 may be omitted.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 255, the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Four reserved icons h1 to h4 are displayed on the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O shown in FIG. 255 (a), and any of the reserved icons h1 to h4 are also displayed in white, which is the default display mode. is there. In addition, at the left end of the effect display area 208d in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 255 (a), the variation icon c of the white display mode, which is the default display mode, is displayed. , The first operation means display Od1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 255 (b), a display Cd1 of the character of the character of the main character appears on the first operation means display Od1, and in FIG. 255 (c), the character of the lord is the first operation means display. It descends behind Od1 and is displayed in the upright posture. Then, an animation is displayed in which the main character of the main character carries the first operation means display Od1 (FIG. 255 (d)) and throws off the carried first operation means display Od1 (FIG. 255 (e)). That is, the animation here is a moving animation of the first operation means display Od. The thrown first operation means display Od1 passes in front of the third symbol pd3 in the variable display, and in FIG. 255 (f), the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O. It is just displayed on the border. That is, the upper half of the first operation means display Od1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the lower half of the first operation means display Od1 is displayed on the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O. The first operation means display Od1 drops into the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O as it is (see the arrow extending downward from the first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 255 (f)), FIG. In g), four are displayed above the hold icons h1 to h4 displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 255 (h), the first operation means display Od1 changes to a second operation means display Od2 at that location. That is, the display changes to a display mode in which the letters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 emitting blue light. The actual chance button 136 itself also changes to the blue light emission state.

  In FIG. 255 (i), the display Cd1 of the character of the lord is displayed at the position where the first operation means display Od1 was displayed, and the display Cd1 of the character of the character is called "press the button". The display of the balloon is added. It can be said that the display of the balloon "I'm pressing a button" is a type of operation promotion display, and it can also be said that it is a type of pre-reading notice. Also in this example, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 itself corresponds to the display of the prefetch notice (third preview effect).

  The subsequent steps are the same as those in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 255, the reaching point of the thrown first operating means display Od1 is in the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O, but may be in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . Also, in the example shown in FIG. 255, the operation means display moves (is being thrown) with the operation of the chance button 136 disabled, but the operation means display with the operation of the chance button 136 enabled. You may move. That is, the display itself may be moved after being changed to the second operation means display Od2 which is also the display of the preview advance notice (third notice effect). However, even if the chance button 136 is operated during movement, the advance notice is not started. Also, as to other conceivable examples, various examples described as the other examples considered in FIG. 254 are applicable.

  FIG. 256 shows, in stages, an example of changing from the first operation means display Od1 to the third operation means display Od3 and further from the third operation means display Od3 to the second operation means display Od2 is there.

  The example in FIG. 256 or later is an example in the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 shown in FIG. 195, and in the explanation of FIG. 256 or later, points different from the example shown in FIGS. The description may be omitted about the same point as the example shown in FIG.

  The state of FIG. 256 (a) is the same as the state of FIG. 251 (a), and variable display is performed on each of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. In addition, the fourth symbol pd4 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is a display mode indicating that the variable display is being performed. Furthermore, below the wipe display Wd displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a first operation means display Od1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 256 (b), the first operation means display Od1 changes to the third operation means display Od3. The third operation means display Od3 may be a display developed from the first operation means display Od1, or may be a display switched from the first operation means display Od1. The third operation means display Od3 is a display different from the first operation means display Od1. The third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. 256 (b) is a display mode in which the character PUSH is added to the display simulating the situation where the chance button 136 emitting white light vibrates. In addition to changing to the display of different colors, the display may be changed to a display in which the operation mode such as vibration is different. The actual chance button 136 itself also vibrates while emitting white light. Furthermore, the characters "under preparation" are displayed on the wipe display Wd in which "jojomachi" as the name of the background stage has been displayed. The character in preparation here is a character indicating that it is a waiting period until the operation of the chance button 136 becomes effective. That is, the character represents that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid (the same applies hereinafter). Therefore, no change occurs even if the chance button 136 is operated while the third operation means display Od3 is displayed. That is, the display mode of the third operation means display Od3 does not change, the third operation means display Od3 is displayed as it is, and effects (for example, advance notice effects etc.) corresponding to the chance button 136 being operated are started I will not. When the character "under preparation" is displayed, the third operation means display Od3 is displayed (the same applies hereinafter). By displaying the characters “under preparation” on the wipe display Wd, it may be possible to pay attention to the change of the third operation means display Od3 and the future development.

  In FIG. 256 (c), the third symbol pd3 is swayed (temporarily stopped) by the combination of the lost of the decorative symbol (“decoration 7” − “decoration 7” − “decoration 1”), and FIG. In the), the third symbol pd3 displays stop (full stop) with a combination of lost of the decorative symbol, and this full stop continues until the figure (f). And in FIG. 256 (g), the fluctuation display of 3rd design pd3 is started. The third operation means display Od3 is continuously displayed from FIG. 256 (b), is also displayed during the stop display of the third symbol pd3, and is displayed across the continuous variation display of the third symbol pd3. There is.

  In (h) of FIG. 256, shift movement of the hold icon is started, and in (i) of the next figure, the shift movement is completed. As a result, the first hold icon h1 is a red display mode hold icon which is a display mode of the pre-reading advance notice. The third operation means display Od3 continues to be displayed from the start to the end of the shift movement of the hold icon. In addition, the character "in preparation" continues being displayed also on wipe display Wd from FIG. 256 (b) to the same figure (i).

  Also in FIG. 256 (j), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 continues. Here, the third operation means display Od3 changes to a second operation means display Od2. The second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 256 (j) is a display combining the display in which the letters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 emitting light in red and the meter display Tm. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 256 (j), the wipe display Wd is changed from the character of "in preparation" to the character of "press" which is the operation promotion display.

  Even in FIG. 256 (k), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 continues, and the meter of the meter display Tm decreases a little, and in FIG. 256 (l), it is the operation means corresponding to the second operation means display Od2. The chance button 136 is operated. When the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 changes. In this example, as shown in FIG. 256 (m), the display is changed to the first operation means display Od1. In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 256 (m), a change in which the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of the advance notice. The animation is started, and the effect image Ed4 appears so as to hide all of the first hold icon h1 which has been the red display mode so far, and in the following FIG. 256 (n), the effect image Ed4 disappears and the first hold icon h1 is changed to the hold icon of the seven color change mode (rainbow mode). In the display mode of the hold icon, the expectation of the jackpot is higher in the rainbow mode than in the red display mode. Therefore, by operating the chance button 136 in a state where the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the pre-reading notice performed so far is changed to the pre-reading notice having a high expectation of the big hit.

  In the example of FIG. 256 described above, the third operation means display Od3 is changed to the second operation means display Od2, and when the chance button 136 is operated, the prefetch notice is started, so the second operation is performed. The means display Od2 itself is also a display of the preview advance notice (third preview effect), and after the third operation means display Od3 is displayed, the prefetch notice may be executed in a third operation. It can be said that the means display Od3 itself corresponds to the display of the pre-reading advance notice (third advance notice effect).

  Even if the chance button 136 is not operated until the meter of the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 256 (j) becomes 0, the meter of the meter display Tm is set to 0 as if the operation was performed. After becoming, the effect of the pre-reading notice in FIG. 256 (m) to FIG. 256 (n) may be executed.

  FIG. 257 is a diagram gradually showing an example in which there is a period during which two types of operation means displays are displayed simultaneously.

  The first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 257 (b) changes to the second operation means display Od2 in FIG. 257 (c), and sound effects are output from the speaker 120. In FIG. 257 (d), in the third symbol pd3 that was being displayed in a variable manner, the reach effect of “decor 4” is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 257 (e), the third symbol pd3. Reach character image is displayed to hide the. However, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 are not hidden, and it is well understood that the variable display is still continued.

  Next, in FIG. 257 (f), the button effect is started, and a display imitating the chance button 136 emitting red light is displayed large at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Below it, the meter display Tm 'showing the remaining period which is a remaining period display is also displayed. These displays are a part of the display of the button effect, but correspond to the fourth operation means display Od4. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second operation means display Od2 displayed from FIG. 257 (c) is continuously displayed, and at the timing of FIG. 257 (f), the fourth operation means The display Od4 and the second operation means display Od2 are simultaneously displayed. Note that being displayed at the same time does not have to be simultaneous until the start time of the display, in other words, it means that it is displayed overlapping in time (in parallel in time) (below) Also the same).

  Also in FIG. 257 (g), the fourth operation means display Od4 and the second operation means display Od2 are simultaneously displayed. In FIG. 257 (g), as in FIG. 252 (35), the meter of the meter display Tm 'is reduced to some extent, but in FIG. 257 (g), unlike in FIG. 252 (35) I can not see it.

  In FIG. 257 (h), the chance button 136 is operated. Although the chance button 136 is an operation means corresponding to the second operation means display Od2 and the fourth operation means display Od4, here, the fourth operation means display Od4 is given priority, as shown in FIG. 257. As shown in (i), the fourth operation means display Od4 disappears, and a decorative symbol "continuation" which is a pseudo continuous symbol appears in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the third symbol pd3 is the first in the pseudo serial effect A temporary suspension of The pseudo series effect is a notice effect (normal notice effect) for the symbol variation display currently performed, and corresponds to a second notice effect. On the other hand, the second operation means display Od2 continues to be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N without any change.

  The chance button 136 is operated again with almost no gap from the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing of the previous FIG. 257 (h) (FIG. 257 (j)). As the operation of the chance button 136 here is as shown in FIG. 257 (k), the second operation means display Od2 is changed to the first operation means display Od1 as in the case of FIG. 251 (13). In the wipe display Wd displayed on the first operation means display Od1, the letter "Heat" is displayed as the display of the preview advance notice (first notice effect), and further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N The effect image Ed is added to the wipe display Wd. In the third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 257 (k), the first temporary stop in the pseudo continuous effect is continued.

  In FIG. 257 (l), the re-variation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-series effect is started, and the effect image Ed disappears in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but the display of the prefetch notice in the wipe display Wd (The letter "Heat" is displayed) is continuing.

  In the example described above, among the effects of the normal notice and the effects of the advance notice, the direction of the normal notice is prioritized. The normal notice is associated with the fourth operation means display Od4 in which the meter display Tm 'for displaying the remaining period of the operation effective period is displayed, and the operation effective period is the period of the symbol variation display currently performed Limited to On the other hand, pre-reading advance notice is matched with the 2nd operation means display Od2 which can be displayed straddling continuous fluctuation display of the 3rd design pd3, and there is a leeway in time. For this reason, the normal notice associated with the fourth operation means display Od4 is started with priority. As in this example, by providing the start order (precedence order) of the notice effects, it is possible to clearly inform the player of what happened without plural notice effects being performed at once. There is an advantage.

  When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 257 (d), the effect of the pre-notice notice as shown in FIG. 257 (k) is immediately started, and the second operation means display Od2 The display changes to display operation means Od1. Therefore, in this case, in FIG. 257 (f), the fourth operation means display Od4 and the first operation means display Od1 are simultaneously displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 257, the second operation means display Od2 is changed in FIG. 257 (c), but the third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. 256 (b) or the like is changed. The third operation means display Od3 may be changed to the second operation means display Od2 at the timing of (g) or at the timing of FIG. In this case, in FIG. 257 (f), the fourth operation means display Od4 and the third operation means display Od3 are simultaneously displayed.

  Further, even if the chance button 136 is not operated until the meter of the meter display Tm 'shown in FIG. 257 (f) becomes 0, the meter of the meter display Tm's 0 is assumed to have been operated. After becoming, it may be made to start a false continuation effect. In addition, although the remaining period display is not displayed on the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period of the chance button 136 Even if it is a case, the effect of the prefetch notice in FIG. 257 (k) may be performed after the operation effective period has elapsed, assuming that the operation has been performed.

  Further, even when the operation of the chance button 136 in FIG. 257 (h) is not a normal operation called single press or short push, but a so-called long press operation, a normal advance presentation by pseudo-series effect Only by starting the operation, the operation of the chance button 136 is temporarily stopped, and by performing the operation again, the advance display effect by the character display of “heat” and the effect image Ed in the wipe display Wd is started.

  Furthermore, for one operation of the chance button 136, only one of the effect of the normal notice by the pseudo continuous effect and the effect of the character display of "heat" in the wipe display Wd and the advance notice effect by the effect image Ed. Instead of being started, both effects may be started or may be always started.

  FIG. 258 is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 256 and is a view gradually showing an example in which there is a period during which a display imitating the operation means is simultaneously displayed.

  Similarly to the example shown in FIG. 256, the first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 258 (a) changes to the third operation means display Od3 in FIG. 258 (b), and is displayed above the third operation means display Od3. In the wipe display Wd, the characters "under preparation" are displayed.

  Also in FIG. 258 (i), the third operation means display Od3 is displayed, and there is a one-ball winning at the first special figure starting opening 230 at the timing of the next FIG. (J). Two pending icons that were only displayed will be displayed. In FIG. 258 (k), the second hold icon h2 is increasing. This second hold icon h2 is a so-called button hold icon in which a mini item MI in which the character of PUSH is added to the display imitating the red chance button 136 is added to the hold icon hd in the white display mode. is there. The button hold icon referred to here means a hold icon whose display mode changes when the corresponding operation means is operated, and the display does not necessarily have to mimic the operation means, but is only a mode of operation promotion display It may be an aspect of displaying the remaining period only, or an aspect combining these. The corresponding operation means may be displayed as a pattern on the icon, and here is the chance button 136. The button hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 258 (k) is different from the first operation means display Od1, the second operation means display Od2, the third operation means display Od3, and the fourth operation means display Od4. That is, although the display is different from the operation means display, the mini item MI is a reduced display of the operation means display (here, the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N). ing. That is, the display mode of the second hold icon (button hold icon) h2 shown in FIG. 258 (k) is a display mode in which the second operation means display Od2 is reduced. In addition, the size of the mini item MI may change according to the degree of expectation of the big hit, or depending on the size of the display of the operation means to be displayed, the display mode of the button holding icon displays the operation means (for example, It may be a display mode in which the second operation means display Od2) is enlarged. In addition, the button hold icon is displayed only for the operation valid period of the chance button 136. That is, while the button hold icon is displayed, the operation of the chance button 136 is treated as valid. However, when the button hold icon is displayed at the same time as the operation means display, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the effect on the operation means display is performed first, and when the chance button 136 is operated again, the button An effect relating to the hold icon may be performed. Also in the following examples, the explanation here can be applied to the button hold icon, and the explanation here can be applied to the button fluctuation icon. In addition, as the display mode which changes, it is the display mode of the pre-reading notice which differs according to the height of expectation of the big hit, and as the display mode where the expectation of the big hit is low, the display mode of default is included The display mode of the symbol is also included. The button hold icon itself can also be viewed as the display of the advance notice. In addition, the button hold icon is a display different from the operation means display. A third operation symbol display Od3 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N of FIG. 258 (k), and the chance button 136 emitting white light in the third operation symbol display Od3 vibrates. A display imitating a state of being displayed and a display imitating the chance button 136 emitting red light in the second hold icon h2 (button hold icon) are simultaneously displayed. Note that the hold icon in the white display mode may be omitted, and only the mini item MI may be the hold icon. Alternatively, although the second hold icon h2 is only a white hold icon and can be viewed as a mode in which the mini item MI is added to the second hold icon h2, in any case, it emits white light. A display imitating a state in which the chance button 136 is vibrating and a display imitating the chance button 136 emitting red light are simultaneously displayed.

  In FIG. 258 (l), as in FIG. 256 (j), the third operation means display Od3 changes to the second operation means display Od2. The second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 257 (j) is also a display combining the display in which the letters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 emitting light in red and the meter display Tm. In addition, the wipe display Wd is also changed from the character of "under preparation" to the character of "press" which is the operation promotion display. In FIGS. 258 (l) to (n), two displays imitating the chance button 136 emitting light in red are simultaneously displayed. Here, the suspension of the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading advance notice of the second operation means display Od2 is the suspension represented by the first suspension icon h1.

  In FIG. 258 (o), the chance button 136 is operated in a state in which two displays imitating the chance button 136 emitting light in red are simultaneously displayed. The chance button 136 is an operation means corresponding to both the second operation means display Od2 and the second hold icon h2 which is a button hold icon, and here, the advance notice for both is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 258 (p), the effect image Ed4 appears so as to hide all of the second hold icon h2 which is the button hold icon, and the symbol to be the target of the advance notice of the second operation means display Od2 The effect image Ed5 also appears so as to hide all of the first suspension icon h1 representing suspension of the variable display, and in the following FIG. 258 (q), the respective effect images Ed4 and Ed5 disappear, and the first suspension icon h1 is 7 It is changed to the hold icon of the color change mode (rainbow mode). In addition, the second hold icon h2 is changed from the button hold icon to the hold icon of the display mode representing the face of the character of the lord. Therefore, the mini item MI in which the character of PUSH is added to the display imitating the chance button 136 emitting red light has disappeared. On the other hand, at the stage of FIG. 258 (p), the second operation means display Od2 is changed to the first operation means display Od1. In the display mode of the hold icon, the display mode representing the face of the character of the character of Tonosama is higher in the expectation of the big hit than the rainbow mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 258, a period in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 related to the button holding icon overlaps the operation valid period of the chance button 136 related to the second operation means display Od2 (FIG. In this overlapping period, one operation of the chance button 136 makes it possible to see how the hold icon changes at once, which may surprise the player. Also, in this example, two preliminary effects are performed simultaneously, but three or more preliminary effects may be performed simultaneously. For example, when a plurality of button hold icons appear due to winning of a plurality of balls, or when a plurality of second operation means displays Od2 are displayed (for example, one changes from the first operation means display Od1, another one One may change from the third operation means display Od3). The greater the number of preview effects performed simultaneously, the higher the expectation of the jackpot may be. If the preview effect performed simultaneously is the effect of the preview preview, the targets of the preview preview may be different or the same. Alternatively, the fourth operation means display Od4 may be displayed at the same time, and different from the example shown in FIG. In addition, a plurality of fourth operation means displays Od4 may be displayed, and a plurality of normal notices may be simultaneously made by one operation. In this case, the larger the number of normal announcements being made at the same time, the higher the probability of a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display may be.

  In this example, the appearance timing of the button holding icon is as shown in FIG. 258 (k), which is earlier than the change timing to the second operation means display Od2. Therefore, when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 258 (k) before changing from the third operation means display Od3 to the second operation means display Od2, a button which is the second hold icon h2 first When only the hold icon changes and then the second operation means display Od2 is displayed and the chance button 136 is operated again, only the first hold icon h1 will change this time. Also, contrary to this example, the change timing to the second operation means display Od2 may be earlier than the appearance timing of the button hold icon. In this case, when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing when the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, only the first hold icon h1 changes first, and then the button hold icon appears and then the chance When the button 136 is operated again, only the button hold icon will change this time. Thus, if the player can wait for the appearance of the button hold icon and choose to change two hold icons at one time or one at a time, and can entertain the player There is.

  In addition, even when the second operation means display Od2 and the button hold icon are simultaneously displayed, only the button hold icon which is the second hold icon h2 changes by the first operation of the chance button 136, Only the first hold icon h1 may change in the second operation, or conversely, only the first hold icon h1 changes in the first operation, and the second hold icon h2 changes in the second operation. Only certain button hold icons may change.

  Furthermore, in this example, although the suspension of the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading notice of the second operation means display Od2 is the suspension represented by the first suspension icon h1, the table is displayed by the second suspension icon h2. It may be put on hold. In this case, although it is overlapped with the pre-reading notice by the button hold icon, when the chance button 136 is operated once, the second hold icon h2 is hidden by the effect image and then changes to the rainbow mode hold icon. When the chance button 136 is operated once again, the second hold icon h2 is hidden again by the effect image, and then changes to a hold icon of a display mode representing the face of the character of the you character, and so on. It may be a change of In this case, the two operations here may be a normal hitting operation in which the normal operation is performed at intervals, or may be a continuous hitting operation, and may be limited to an operation in which the normal operation is performed twice at an interval, or only in the continuous hitting operation. May be Alternatively, the above-described two-step change may be performed by operating the chance button 136 only once. The one-time operation here may be a normal operation or a long press operation, may be limited to the normal operation, or may be limited to the long press operation.

  In addition, even if the chance button 136 is not operated until the meter of the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 258 (l) becomes 0, the meter of the meter display Tm is set to 0 assuming that the operation was performed. After becoming, the effect of the pre-reading notice in FIG. 258 (p) to FIG. (Q) may be executed.

  FIG. 259 is a view gradually showing an example in which the display of the operation means is displayed on each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  The example shown in FIG. 259 is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 256, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. The mini character consisting of a combination of the symbol display Cd, the character display Lv, and the gauge display Gm is not displayed, and instead, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed. Further, the first operation means display Od1 is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 259 (a).

  In FIG. 259 (b), the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N changes to the third operation means display Od3, and the wipe display on the third operation means display Od3 The word "under preparation" is displayed on Wd. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 259 (b), the first operation means display Od1 is displayed, and the first operation means display Od1 and the third operation means display Od3 are simultaneously displayed. It will be done. Both the first operation means display Od1 and the third operation means display Od3 continue to be displayed until the next variable display of the third symbol pd3 and are displayed across the continuous variable display of the third symbol pd3.

  In FIG. 259 (i), the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M changes to a second operation means display Od2. On the other hand, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 259 (i), the third operation means display Od3 is still displayed, and the second operation means display Od2 and the third operation means display Od3 are simultaneously performed. It will be displayed.

  In FIG. 259 (j), the third operation means display Od3 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N changes to the second operation means display Od2, and the third decorative symbol display device 208M also receives the third operation. The second operation means display Od2 is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is only a display imitating the chance button 136 emitting red light, with the addition of the PUSH character, The second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is a display in which the meter display Tm is added to the same display as the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the display between the two The aspect is different. However, the display mode may be the same.

  In FIG. 259 (k), the chance button 136 is operated. The chance button 136 is an operation means corresponding to any second operation means display Od2, and in FIG. 259 (l), the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is The display mode is changed, and the display mode imitating the chance button 136 emitting white light is a display mode in which the fan pattern Fd is overlapped. The fan pattern Fd is a display of the advance notice and is a pattern with a high expectation of the jackpot. Here, since there is only one hold, it is known that the target of the pre-reading notice is the symbol change display of the first hold, but if there are two or more holds, the pre-read by the fan pattern Fd In advance notice, the symbol variation display of the notice object is unknown. It should be noted that instead of the advance notice by the fan pattern Fd, a normal notice by the fan pattern Fd may be used. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 259 (l), the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N changes to the first operation means display Od1, and all of the first hold icon h1 The effect image Ed4 appears to hide. The appearance timing of the fan pattern Fd in the second decorative symbol display device 208M after operating the chance button 136 may coincide with the appearance timing of the effect image Ed4 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be offset. For example, in this example, since they are both pre-reading notices and common notice targets are common, the appearance timing is simultaneous, and when the pre-reading notices are different targets, the one with higher expectation of the big hit appears first. Alternatively, they may appear later. Also, if one is a pre-reading notice and the other is a normal notice, as in the example shown in FIG. 257, the normal notice may be prioritized and may appear first, or conversely, the pre-reading notice is first. May appear. Furthermore, the priority may be determined by the decorative symbol display device on which the operation means display is displayed. For example, the operation means display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M may be started earlier than the operation means display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Or vice versa.

  In FIG. 259 (m), the design Fd of the fan appearing in the second decorative symbol display device 208M is raised (see the upward arrow shown in FIG. 259 (m)), and the first operation means display Od1 is visible. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect image Ed4 disappears, and the first hold icon h1 is changed to a display mode representing the face of the character of the lady.

  In FIG. 259 (n), the effect image Ed is applied to the pattern Fd of the fan on the first operation means display Od1, and thereafter the pattern Fd of the fan disappears with the effect image Ed (FIG. 259 (o)). That is, before the symbol variation display which is the target of the advance notice is started, the fan pattern Fd disappears, and the advance notice with the fan pattern Fd is completed in a short time. On the other hand, also in FIG. 259 (n) and in FIG. 2 (o), the first hold icon h1 continues to be displayed in a display mode representing the face of the character of the lord. The fan's design Fd may be continuously displayed until the symbol variation display which is the target of the advance notice is started, or may be continued until the symbol change display which is the target of the advance notice.

  In this example, as in the example of FIG. 258, two types of notices are started by one operation of the chance button 136, but there is a case where only one notice is started by one operation of the chance button 136. If there are two types of notices started in one operation, the jackpot expectation may be higher than in the case where only one notice is started in one operation. In addition, the period in which the operation means display is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the period in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed may not overlap or may deviate from each other. The size of the degree of expectation of the big hit may be determined on the decorative symbol display device on which the operation means display is displayed. For example, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the operation means display is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the state where the operation means display is displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N The expectation of the jackpot may be higher than when the chance button 136 is operated, or vice versa.

  Further, even if the chance button 136 is not operated until the meter of the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 259 (j) becomes 0, the meter of the meter display Tm is set to 0 assuming that the operation was performed. The preview effect shown in FIG. 259 (l) to FIG. 259 (o) may be executed after it becomes.

  FIG. 260 is a diagram step by step showing an example of the case where effects are different before and after the change of the display of the operation means.

  In the example shown in FIG. 260, as shown in FIG. 260 (c), the chance button 136 which is the operating means corresponding to the first operating means display Od1 in the state where the first operating means display Od1 is displayed. Is operated, the operation sound such as "pico" is output from the speaker 120. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 at this timing is not accepted, or even if accepted, the operation is not invalidated, and the operation is accepted as valid, and as a result, the operation sound is output. There is. Although the operation of the chance button 136 is effective, the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 does not change according to the operation of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 260 (d), the first operation means display Od1 changes to the third operation means display Od3 regardless of the operation of the chance button 136 in FIG. 260 (b). The third operation means display Od3 is a display mode in which the letters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 emitting light in red, and is the same as the display mode of the second operation means display Od2. Therefore, the player can not distinguish between the second operation means display Od2 and the third operation means display Od3, but when the operation means (here, the chance button 136) is operated, the second operation means display Od2 If it is, the display mode changes, and if it is the third operation means display Od3, the display mode does not change.

  After changing to the third operation means display Od3, as shown in FIG. 260 (e), when the chance button 136 is operated again, a sound such as "Pico Pico" is output from the speaker 120 this time. Although this sound is different from the operation sound output in the previous FIG. 260 (c), it may be an operation sound corresponding to the third operation means display Od3, or it is an effect sound of the advance notice. May be Also in this case, the display mode of the third operation means display Od3 does not change according to the operation of the chance button 136. The third operation means display Od3 continues to be displayed until the next variation display of the third symbol pd3 and is displayed across continuous variation displays of the third symbol pd3.

  When the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the third operation means display Od3 is displayed, the third operation means display Od3 itself is read ahead when the effect sound of the advance notice is output. It can be said that it corresponds to the display of the notice (the fourth notice effect).

  In FIG. 260 (n), the third operation means display Od3 changes to a second operation means display Od2. That is, the display in which the character of PUSH is added is enlarged and displayed on the display imitating the chance button 136 emitting light in red, and a large meter display Tm is additionally displayed below it. However, the display position is not changed, and the second operation means display Od2 is also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, in order to notify that there has been a change in the display of the operation means, the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect.

  In FIG. 260 (o), the meter of the meter display Tm is slightly decreased, and in the following FIG. 260 (p), the chance button 136 is operated. In the operation of the chance button 136 here, as shown in FIG. 260 (q), the second operation means display Od2 changes to the first operation means display Od1, and the changed first operation means display Od1 is changed. In the wipe display Wd displayed on the screen, the letter "Heat" is displayed as a pre-reading notice display (first notice effect), and in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the effect image Ed is displayed on the wipe display Wd. Has been added. The prefetch notice in FIG. 260 (q) is a notice with a high probability of a big hit. In this example, the output sound from the speaker 120 in FIG. 260 (f) is different from the output sound from the speaker 120 in FIG. 260 (c). That is, the operation sound is a kind of effect, and the effect is different before the change of the display of the operation means (FIG. 260 (c)) and after the change (FIG. 260 (f)). If the effect after the change of the operation means display is different from the effect before the change, then, through the output of the sound effect in FIG. 260 (n), the expectation of the big hit in FIG. 260 (q) is High notice may be performed. The player does not know the output timing of the above-mentioned sound effects, and the player can pay attention to the output of the sound effects and the change of the display of the operation means, and the loses up to that point (for example, loses in FIG. It may be possible to diminish the sense of disappointment in

  In addition, even if the effects are different before and after the change of the display of the operation means, there may be a case where a notice with low expectation of the big hit may be executed, but a notice with high expectation of the big hit is easier to be executed.

  Further, even if the chance button 136 is operated again during the period from FIG. 260 (g) to FIG. 260 (m), the display mode of the third operation means display Od3 does not change, and a sound such as “picopico” from the speaker 120 Is only output again.

  Furthermore, even if the chance button 136 is not operated until the meter of the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 260 (n) becomes 0, the meter of the meter display Tm is set to 0 as if the operation was performed. After becoming, the effect of the pre-reading advance notice of FIG. 260 (q) may be executed.

  FIG. 261 is a diagram showing in stages an example of the case where the effects are the same before and after the change of the display of the operation means. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 260 will be mainly described.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 261, in FIG. 261 (c), with the first operation means display Od1 displayed, the chance button 136 which is the operation means corresponding to the first operation means display Od1 is operated. As a result, an operation sound such as "pico" is output from the speaker 120.

  Further, in FIG. 261 (f), when the third operation means display Od3 in which the first operation means display Od1 is changed is displayed, the “pico” is generated from the speaker 120 by operating the chance button 136. The sound is being output. That is, the same sound is output before and after the change of the display of the operation means.

  In FIG. 261 (n), the third operation means display Od3 changes to a second operation means display Od2. In the second operation means display Od2 here, as in the case of FIG. 260 (n), the display imitating the chance button 136 emitting red light also includes the display with the PUSH character added. This display is not a magnified display, but a normal size. In addition, a meter display Tm of a normal size is also included. Furthermore, in order to notify that there has been a change in the display of the operation means, the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect.

  In FIG. 261 (o), when the chance button 136 is operated, the operation means display which has been the second operation means display Od 2 is changed to the first operation means display Od 1, and the first operation means changed. In the wipe display Wd displayed above the display Od1, the characters "slight heat" are displayed as a display of a pre-reading advance notice (first notice effect). Here, the effect image Ed as shown in FIG. 260 (q) is not added, and the pre-reading notice of “slight heat” in FIG. 261 (p) is the pre-reading notice of “heat” shown in FIG. Compared to the big hit, the expectation is lower. In this example, the effect (in this case, the output sound from the speaker 120) is the same before (FIG. 261 (c)) and after (FIG. 261 (f)) the display of the operation means display. In this case, after the output of the sound effects in FIG. 261 (n), there may be a case where a notice that the expectation of the jackpot in FIG. 261 (p) is low is executed. In addition, even if the effects are the same before and after the change of the display of the operation means, the notice with high expectation of the big hit (notice shown in FIG. 260 (q)) There may be a notice with a very high expectation of the jackpot, such as "", but a notice with a low expectation of the jackpot is easier to be executed.

  Incidentally, even if the chance button 136 is operated again during the period from FIG. 261 (g) to FIG. (M), the display mode of the third operation means display Od3 does not change, and a sound such as “pico” from the speaker 120 Is only output again.

  FIG. 262 is a diagram progressively illustrating an example in which the chance button 136 has been operated during execution of the variation display of the third symbol pd3 performed at the timing when the suspension increased.

  In FIG. 262 (a), the third symbol pd3 is variably displayed in a state where there is no hold, and a first operation means display Od1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Then, at the timing of the next figure (b), there is a one-ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the first reserve icon h1 is displayed in the figure (c). This first hold icon h1 is a so-called button hold icon in which a mini item MI 'is added to the white icon display mode hd with a PUSH character added to the display imitating the chance button 136 emitting white light. It is. The display mode of the mini item MI 'here is the same as the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Even if the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (c), no change occurs. That is, the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 does not change, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed as it is, and the effect according to the chance button 136 being operated is not started. The effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 includes the change animation of the button hold icon, and the display mode of the button hold icon does not change at all.

  In FIG. 262 (d), the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N changes to the second operation means display Od2, and the chance button 136 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (e1). Operated. That is, the chance button 136 is operated before the third symbol pd3 which has been performed at the timing shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 262 (f1), the second operation means display Od2 changes to the first operation means display Od1, and the wipe display Wd displayed on the changed first operation means display Od1. In the display of the pre-reading advance notice (the first notice effect), the characters "Next" are displayed, and in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the effect image Ed is added to the wipe display Wd. On the other hand, the first hold icon h1 is a display mode including the mini item MI 'and does not change at all.

  In FIG. 262 (g1), the third symbol pd3 is in the stop display (full stop). Even if the chance button 136 has not been operated by the time of the main stop, it is assumed that the operation has been made, and prior to or at the time of the main stop, the prefetch notice shown in FIG. 262 (f1) is executed. You may

  In FIG. 262 (h1), the first suspension represented by the first suspension icon h1 is digested, and the third symbol pd3 starts variable display. In the wipe display Wd, the characters "Next" which were displayed as the display of the advance notice, disappear, and "Jomachimachi" as the name of the background stage is displayed. Also, the button pending icon, which was the first pending icon h1 until then, starts moving toward the area cs displaying the fluctuating icon while including the mini item MI ′, and in FIG. 262 (i1), the fluctuating icon Reaches the area cs, and is displayed as a variation icon c while including the mini item MI '. It should be noted that the icon which has been the first hold icon h1 until then is considered to become the fluctuation icon when reaching the area cs displaying the fluctuation icon, and at the time when the first symbol (special figure) starts the fluctuation display It may be considered as becoming a fluctuating icon, or it may be considered as becoming a fluctuating icon at a point away from the area hs displaying the hold icon.

  In (262) of FIG. 262, the mini item MI 'included in the variation icon c changes to a mini item MI of a display mode in which the character PUSH is added to the display imitating the chance button 136 emitting red light. The display mode of the mini item MI here is the same as the display mode of the second operation means display Od2.

  When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 262 (k1), as shown in FIG. 262 (l1), the effect image Ed6 appears so as to hide all of the fluctuation icon c, and in FIG. 262 (m1) The effect image Ed6 disappears, and the variation icon c is changed to a display mode representing the face of the character of the lord. The display mode representing the face of the Tonosama character corresponds to the display mode of the normal notice having a high expectation of the big hit, and the normal notice using the variation icon c is started.

  In this example, although the remaining period display of the chance button 136 is not displayed on the mini item MI, there is an operation even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period of the chance button 136 Alternatively, a normal advance notice using the variation icon c may be started after the operation effective period has elapsed.

  FIG. 263 is a diagram progressively showing an example in the case where the operation of the chance button is delayed in the example shown in FIG. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 262 will be described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 263, the chance button 136 is not operated while the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is being performed at the timing when the suspension increases, and the next variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started Then, the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 263 (i2)). That is, a state in which the second operation means display Od2 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the variation icon c includes the mini item MI of the same display mode as the display mode of the second operation means display Od2. Then, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 263 (j2), the second operation means display Od2 changes to the first operation means display Od1, and the wipe display Wd displayed on the changed first operation means display Od1 The characters “Hot” are displayed as the display of the normal notice (second notice effect), and the effect image Ed is added to the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the character symbol "CHANCE" is displayed large so as to overlap the third symbol pd3 in the variable display from the front side. On the other hand, in the area cs displaying the fluctuation icon, the effect image Ed6 appears so as to hide all of the fluctuation icon c.

  In FIG. 263 (k2), the effect image Ed6 disappears, and the variation icon c is changed to a display mode representing the face of the character of the lord. In addition, the effect image Ed in the wipe display Wd is also disappeared.

  In FIG. 263 (l2), the fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3 started in the same drawing (f2) is continued, and the fluctuation icon c continues to be displayed in the display mode representing the face of the character of the lord and the wipe display The display of the regular notice in Wd (“hot” character display) continues to be displayed. In addition, the character pattern of "CHANCE" currently displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L disappears, and the third symbol pd3 in the variable display is visible. In addition, the display of the normal notice in the wipe display Wd (the letter display of "hot") is also changed to "jojocho" as the name of the background stage, and the normal notice corresponding to the second operation means display Od2 is ended earlier. May be After this, the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is ended, and the stop display (main stop) is performed in the combination of the big hit. In addition, even if a normal advance notice is executed, there may be a case where the stop display (full stop) is performed by a combination of losing.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 262 and 263 described above, the operation of the chance button 136 can be accepted from the time it changes to the second operation means display Od2, and in the sub control unit 400, 500, the symbol variation of the advance notice target When the operation of the chance button 136 is detected before the display is started, the effect data of the advance notice before reading corresponding to the second operation means display Od2 is used, as shown in FIG. 262 (f1) to FIG. 262 (g1). When the operation of the chance button 136 is detected after the prefetch notice shown in is executed and symbol variation display of the notice object is started (for example, after receiving the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300), On the control unit 400, 500 side, while using the effect data of the normal notice corresponding to the second operation means display Od2, effect data to change the display mode of the fluctuation icon c Using performs normal notice shown in FIG. 263 (j2) or later. As a result, the player may be able to be given fun choosing when to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 264 is a diagram gradually showing an example in which the display of the operating means once disappears after the chance button 136 is operated.

  The first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 264 (a) changes to the second operation means display Od2 in FIG. 264 (b), and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect. The second operation means display Od2 here is a display combining the display in which the character of PUSH is added to the display imitating the chance button 136 emitting light in red and the meter display Tm.

  When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 264 (d) during the variable display of the third symbol pd3, as shown in FIG. 26 (e), the wipe display Wd displays the advance notice (the first notice) The letter "next" is displayed as the notice effect of (1), and the effect image Ed is added to the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, the second operation means display Od2 displayed below the wipe display Wd disappears, and no operation means display is displayed below the wipe display Wd.

  In FIG. 264 (f), the effect image Ed disappears, but the character of “next” continues to be displayed on the wipe display Wd. After the fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3 continues for a while, the third symbol pd3 is swayed (temporarily stopped) by the combination of the lost of the decorative symbol in FIG. 264 (i), and in FIG. [3] The symbol pd3 displays stop (final stop) by the combination of the loss of the decorative symbol. The stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3 continues until FIG. 264 (m). During this stop display (this stop), as shown in FIG. 264 (k), the wipe display Wd is changed from the character of “next” as the display of the pre-reading advance notice to “jojomachi” as the name of the background stage . The display of the operation means is not displayed until the time point of FIG. 264 (k).

  While the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3 continues, as shown in FIGS. 264 (l) to (m), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the first operation means display Od1 is from the bottom An animation (display start animation) that appears gradually is displayed, and finally, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed under the wipe display Wd during the stop display (the main stop) of the third symbol pd3. Be done.

  As described above, the second operation means display Od2 does not have to be switched to the first operation means display Od1 immediately after the corresponding operation means (here, the chance button 136) is operated. The first operation means display Od1 may be displayed.

  In addition, when the second operation means display Od2 disappears during the fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3, the timing when the first operation means display Od1 is displayed may be during the fluctuation display, It may be at the start of the next change display of the third symbol pd3 or may be during the next change display. In addition, when the second operation means display Od2 disappears during the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3, the above-mentioned timing may be during the stop display (main stop) or the third It may be at the start of the next variable display of the symbol pd3 or during the next variable display.

  Further, in this example, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed, but the third operation means display Od3 may be displayed, or the fourth operation means display Od4 may be displayed. The second operation means display Od2 may be different from the displayed second operation means display Od2.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 253 (38), the fourth operation means display Od4 does not immediately switch to the first operation means display Od1 when the corresponding operation means (here, the chance button 136) is operated. Alternatively, it may be displayed once as the first operation means display Od1 after disappearing. Further, when the corresponding operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed, operation means displays other than the first operation means display Od1 may be displayed.

  In addition, the various operation means displays Od1 to Od4 may be hidden during the big hit game, and may be displayed suddenly without the display start animation when the display is started after the big hit game is over.

  In addition, various operation means displays Od1 to Od4 may disappear once during display and may be displayed again. For example, it may disappear once during the fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3, and may be redisplayed during the fluctuation display, or may be redisplayed at the start of the next fluctuation display, or redisplayed during the next fluctuation display It may be done. Alternatively, it may disappear once during the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3, and may be displayed again during the stop display (main stop), or may be displayed again at the start of the next variable display, It may be redisplayed during the next variable display.

  FIG. 265 is a view showing a modified example of how to display the operation means display.

  In FIG. 265 (a), the reduced display pd3 of the third symbol pd3 and the area cs for displaying the fluctuation icon and the fluctuation icon c are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, A first operation means display Od1 is displayed on the three decoration symbol display device 208N. In addition, the super reach production is performed, and the scene after the cutting of the lord and the swordsman is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 265 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts moving to the right, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N starts moving to the left. That is, both 208M and 208N start moving in the direction in which they approach each other.

  FIG. 265 (c) shows the moment when the right end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the left end of the third decorative symbol display device 208N abut on the central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the moment when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed is shown. At this stage, neither the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M nor the display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N changes. In the state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed, the lower portion of the household pattern accessory 224E 'is the upper right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration It overlaps with the upper left end portion of the symbol display device 208N from the front side. Also, both the lord and the sword displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the fifth symbol pd5 is not hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and is visible.

  In FIG. 265 (d), the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is in a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed. The second operation means display Od2 has been changed. That is, as the second operation means display Od2, the display imitating the chance button 136 emitting red light with the PUSH character added is straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N As described above, a large meter display Tm 'is also displayed below the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the first operation means display Od1 disappears from the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, in order to make the first operation means display Od1 stand out, the area cs for displaying the fluctuation icon and the fluctuation icon c disappear.

  In this example, the second operation means display Od2 is enlarged so as to straddle two decorative symbol display devices, but may be enlarged so as to straddle three decorative symbol display devices. Also, the size is not limited to the enlarged display, and may be the same as the size of the display before the change (here, the first operation means display Od1). Furthermore, the same applies to other operation means displays other than the second operation means display Od2. That is, the operation means display may be displayed so as to straddle a plurality of decorative symbol display devices.

  As described above, in the example described with reference to FIGS. 251 to 265, the display of the operation means is displayed even during the stop display (the main stop) of the third symbol pd3 so that the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is still It can make the player think as if it has not ended.

  In the example described with reference to FIGS. 251 to 265, the operation means display is a display corresponding to the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 193 and is an example in which the chance button 136 is operated. The means display may be a display corresponding to other operation means such as the second chance button, the transmitting portion 191, the operation key unit 181 and the like.

  In addition, the operation of the chance button 136 may be a normal operation called single pressing or short pressing or one pressing, may be a long pressing operation, or may be a continuous hitting operation, usually The operation may be performed a plurality of times at intervals.

  In addition, the above-described advance notice such as the pre-reading advance notice and the normal advance notice is not necessarily a big hit even if the advance notice is executed, and there may be a case where it is lost. That is, the higher the expectation of the jackpot, the lower the possibility of losing, and the higher the chance of jackpot.

  Also, in FIG. 252 (26) to FIG. 253 (40), the first operation means display Od1 and the fourth operation means display Od4 are displayed during the execution of the super reach effect, but the execution of the super reach effect In some cases, at least one of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 may or may not be displayed. May be displayed. When there are multiple types of super reach effects, only one or more types of certain super reach effects may be hidden or may not be displayed. Further, in FIG. 257 (i), the second operation means display Od2 is displayed during the execution of the pseudo-series effect, but the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth are also displayed during the pseudo-series effect execution. The display of at least one of the operation means or the display of all the operation means of the operation means display Od4 may be hidden or may not be displayed. Furthermore, at least one operation means display or all operation means displays of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 are executed during execution of the specific effect, not limited to the super reach effect or the pseudo-series effect. , May be hidden, may be hidden by all means.

  In addition, during execution of the big hit game where the attacker opens, when at least one operation means display or all the operation means display among the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 becomes non-display There may be, or it may be hidden by all means. On the other hand, all the operation means displays Od1 to Od4 can be displayed during a non-big hit game that is not in execution of a big hit game. However, even in the non-big hit game, at least one of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 in the definite change state (special figure high probability state), or all the operation display The means display may be hidden or may not be hidden. In addition, even during the non-big hit game, at least one of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 or all of them in the power support state (general drawing high probability state). The operation means display may be hidden or may not be displayed.

  Further, the second operation means display Od2 may be a display mode in which the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 is different from at least one of the color and the size. For example, the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIGS. 251 (2) to (9) is different only in the display mode and the color of the first operation means display Od1, but the color is the same and only the size is different. May be On the other hand, the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 260 (n) to FIG. 260 (o) is different in color and size from the display mode of the first operation means display Od1, and a meter display Tm is further added. There is.

  Furthermore, the third operation means display Od3 may also be a display mode in which the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 is different from the display mode of at least one of the color and the size. For example, the third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. 260 (d) to FIG. 260 (m) differs only in the display mode and color of the first operation means display Od1, but the color is the same and only the size is different. The color and the size may both be different, and the pattern and the shape may be different.

  In addition, all the operation means displays of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 are the display including the display imitating the corresponding operation means (here, the chance button 136). It is not necessary to include the display imitating the button 136, and all the operation means displays may not include, or only some of the operation means displays (for example, the second operation means indication Od2). It does not have to be.

  In addition, as effects to be started when the operation means is operated in a state where the operation means display is displayed, effects concerning symbol fluctuation currently being performed, effects concerning pre-reading, effects during fluctuation stop (for example, fluctuation It is possible to enumerate effects (which may or may not include demonstration effects) and the like in a state of being stopped and not being put on hold. That is, as the effects to be started when the operation means is operated, all of the items listed above may be used, or among the items listed above, some items may not be applied.

  Also, in FIG. 258 (k) and FIG. 1 (l) etc., the button hold icon which is different from the operation means display and the operation means display of the display regarding the operation means is displayed together, but the operation means Other than the button hold icon, the button display in the judgment effect, the button display in the pseudo continuous effect, the button display in the conversation announcement, and the like can be mentioned as the display other than the operation means display Od1 to Od4. These displays may also be displayed together with the operation means displays Od1 to Od4. Moreover, although the display related to the hold icon such as the button hold icon is different, the button display in the judgment effect, the button display in the pseudo continuous turn effect, the button display in the conversation notice, etc. can be viewed as a kind of operation means display. There is also. For example, the fourth operation means display Od4 shown in FIG. 252 (33) to FIG. 252 (36) can also be viewed as a button display in the judgment effect.

  The button effects described using FIGS. 251 to 265 can be combined with the transparency effects described using FIGS. 14 to 45. For example, the characters of various operation means displays shown in FIGS. 251 to 265 are disposed on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L), using FIGS. The described button effect may be executable. In addition, even in this case, the effect of the operation means display may continue to appear by continuation of the transmission effect across a plurality of continuous variable displays, and stop display of the decorative symbol is performed. Even in a state where the number of reservations is 0 (for example, the state of a symbol demo in which a decorative symbol is displayed or the state of an animation demo started after the symbol A feature of the operation means display may appear on the back side.

  Or, conversely, while displaying the operation means display on the transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L) and executing the button effect described using FIG. 251 to FIG. 265, FIG. It may be possible to execute the transparency effect described using FIG.

  As mentioned above, although the example which made the present invention apply to a pachinko machine (ball ball game machine) was explained in detail, the game stand of the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) The present invention is also applicable to a used gaming machine (slot machine). That is, although the pachinko machine 100 described so far is pachinko (one kind + one kind), other pachinko (eg one kind, two kinds, three kinds, one kind + two kinds etc.) may be used, a slot etc ( Parrots and balls can be used. More specifically, while inserting a medal (gaming medium) and operating the start lever to rotate the reel, internally determining the combination by internal lottery, and operating the stop button to stop the reel If a combination of symbols determined in advance is displayed on the symbol display window according to the internal determination, the combination is established, and if the combination with the payout of medals is established, the prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. The present invention may be a coin-operated game machine (slot machine) in which a player is given a benefit. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are sealed as a sealed ball, the sealed ball is fired to a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the fact that the sealed ball is won in a predetermined entry area. , And the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won may be fired again to the gaming area, and the enclosed ball game console may be used cyclically.

  As described above, the present invention is applicable to various types of game consoles, and will be described more specifically below with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 266 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In the enclosed type pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 266, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game console. That is, the game medium ejected from the launching means 901 to the playing area 902 is ejected from the playing area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize ball, lent ball, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game console. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown at 193 are not provided.

  FIG. 267 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001, and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of kinds of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 267) are stored inside the center of the main body 1001. It is configured to be able to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by drive means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like members at equal intervals, and the belt-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to configure the reels 1010 to 1012. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed approximately three vertically from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of the symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reels, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be adopted as such display means. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A back light (not shown in FIG. 267) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is disposed on the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided near each of the reels 1010 to 1012. The light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotational direction of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the pay lines.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a pay line 1014 to be activated. The pay lines to be activated are determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line becomes effective, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. When three medals are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the right down pay line and the upper right pay line are added become valid as the pay lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right are selected. Five lines of the down pay line and the top right pay line may be made effective as a pay line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp for notifying the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery or that a bonus game is being played. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-playing lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is possible to be re-played (the insertion of medals is unnecessary) when winning in the re-playing which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for effect.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267, up to three sheets are inserted one by one each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the bet button 1031 is pressed, and the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three sheets are to be inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights a lamp of the number according to the inserted medal number, and when there is a specified number of medals inserted, the game start is informed that it is possible to start the game. The lamp 1021 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 1034 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored sheet number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical values. The payout amount display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. An operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process is performed to perform a lottery to determine which one of a plurality of types of roles has been won or not. It is determined whether to make the player relatively advantageous or relatively disadvantageous.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the respective reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the operation of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is possible, the light emitter may be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing and removing the medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  Also, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 193 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal insertion slot 1034. ing. The operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Furthermore, next to the operation key unit 1090, there is provided the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided on the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for boosting the game. At the upper part of the front door 1002, a rendering device 1080 is disposed. The effect device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right and left doors 1063a and 1063b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 disposed on the back side of the door member 1063 (shown in FIG. When the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is the front of the slot machine 1000 It has a structure that appears on the It should be noted that even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, for example, consisting of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole of the display screen can be viewed by the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but it may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks like an odd shape. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., as the operation means, the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means or the third operation means And effect buttons 1091 (an example of the second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267, the display panel 1070 displaying a title or the like of the device can be protruded toward the front side. In addition, a light emitting diode (LED) is incorporated in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 267 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a pressing operation, and functions as an operating means (button) like the transmitting portion 191, and an example of the operating means (for example, It corresponds to one example of the operation means, and also corresponds to one example of the movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091 and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, each button of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
[Display means [for example, any one of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O, etc. One or more],
Operation means (for example, any one or more of the chance button 136, the second chance button, the transparent portion 191, the operation key unit 181, etc.) provided at a position where the player can operate;
A game console equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of operation means displays;
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol [for example, the decorative symbol (third symbol pd3), the fourth symbol pd4, or the fifth symbol pd5 shown in FIG. 197 (b),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display [eg, hold icons h1 to h4, button hold icons MI and hd] according to the number of held balls,
One of the display of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a first operation means display [for example, a first operation means display Od1],
One of the display of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a second operation means display [for example, a second operation means display Od2],
The second operation means display is a display different from the first operation means display [for example, a display having the same shape but different in color, size, pattern, etc., shape, color, size, Display with the same pattern etc. but different operation modes such as vibration, rotation etc., display with different shape (the operation means itself is deformed, the display imitating the operation means, the operation promotion display, the remaining period display etc. Different types of displays, displays that the operation means itself has been replaced, etc.],
The first operation means display is a display different from the hold display.
The second operation means display is a display different from the hold display.
The first operation means display may be a display [for example, FIG. 251 (13) to FIG. 252 (29)] that may be displayed across the variable display of the decorative symbol a plurality of times in succession.
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Here, the "variation display of the decorative symbol" refers to the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and also includes the display of the variation display when the fluctuation display is started with the stop display in between. In addition, it is possible to view 1 change from the start of the change display to the final display. Furthermore, "to straddle" is to put the period of stop display of the decorative symbol (the change stop period) in between.

  Further, the second operation means display may be a display obtained by developing the first operation means display, or may be a display obtained by switching from the first operation means display.

  The display of the operation means is a display related to the operation means, for example, a display for prompting the user to operate the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "operation prompting display") or an operation effective period of the operation means The display may be a display of the remaining period of (hereinafter referred to as a “remaining period display”) or a display reminiscent of the operation means.

  Note that the first operation means display may be a display that is necessarily displayed across the variable display of the decorative symbol a plurality of times. Further, the second operation means display may be a display which is always displayed across the variable display of the decorative symbol a plurality of times.

  Further, the first operation means display may be a display which is continuously displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may be a display which temporarily disappears in the middle. In addition, while the stop display of the decorative symbol is being displayed, it may be a display that is continuously displayed, may be a display that temporarily disappears halfway, or continues to disappear while the display of the stop display is displayed. May be displayed. Further, the first operation means display may end during the display of the stop display, or may not be the end.

  Further, the second operation means display may be a display that is continuously displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may be a display that disappears in the middle. In addition, while the stop display of the decorative symbol is being displayed, it may be a display that is continuously displayed, may be a display that temporarily disappears halfway, or continues to disappear while the display of the stop display is displayed. May be displayed. Further, the second operation means display may end during the display of the stop display, but may be a display which does not end.

  In addition, the second operation means display may be the same display mode as the first operation means display or may be a different display mode.

  The operation means may be a means that is always operated by the player. In addition, the display means may be means for displaying plural types of operation means display, or may be means for displaying a decorative symbol, and always displays a suspension display according to the number of balls to be reserved. May be used.

Also,
"The first operation means display is a display that does not change even when the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 260 (b)] [for example, the first operation means display as shown in FIG. 260 (c) Od1 has not changed],
When the operation means is operated in a state in which the first operation means display is displayed, a response operation corresponding to the operation of the operation means [eg, as shown in FIG. 260 (c) Output of operation sound such as "Pico" may be performed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this aspect, even though the operation means display does not change even when the operation means is operated (the first operation means display), the response operation is performed to give the player a sense of discomfort and interest. There are times when you can.

  Here, the first operation means display may be a default operation means display among the plurality of types of operation means displays.

The response operation may be any display other than the output from the speaker, may be light emission of the light emitting means, operation of the movable means, etc., or a combination of these (the same applies hereinafter) .)
When the operation means is operated in a state in which the first operation means display is displayed, a response operation corresponding to the operation of the operation means may be performed.

Also,
“One of the displays of the plurality of types of operation means is a third operation means display [eg, third operation means display Od3],
The third operation means display is a display different from the first operation means display [for example, a display mode including a display imitating the chance button 136 emitting light in white] [for example, the chance button 136 emitting light in red Display mode including simulated display],
The third operation means display is a display different from the hold display.
The third operation means display is a display which does not change even when the operation means is operated [eg, the third operation means display Od3 is not changed as shown in FIG. 260 (f)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this aspect, since the third operation means display different from the first operation means display is displayed, the player operates the operation means to change the third operation means display However, since nothing changes, it may be possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and bring interest.

  Further, the third operation means display may be a display which is continuously displayed during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be a display which temporarily disappears in the middle. In addition, while the stop display of the decorative symbol is being displayed, it may be a display that is continuously displayed, may be a display that temporarily disappears halfway, or continues to disappear while the display of the stop display is displayed. May be displayed. Further, the display of the third operation means may be a display that may end during the display of the stop display, but may not end.

  Further, the third operation means display may be a display obtained by developing the first operation means display, or may be a display obtained by switching from the first operation means display, or the first operation means display. The display of the operation means may be changed.

  The third operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display is changed, and the first operation means display is the third operation means during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol. The display may change.

  Further, the third operation means display may be the same display mode as the second operation means display, or may be a different display mode.

Also,
“When the operation means is operated in a state where the third operation means display is displayed, a response operation corresponding to the operation of the operation means [eg, as shown in FIG. 260 (f) Output of operation sound such as "Pico Pico" may be performed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, when the said operation means is operated in the state in which the said 3rd operation means display is displayed, the response operation | movement according to operation of this operation means may be performed by all means.

Also,
"The third operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display has changed,
There may be a case where the first operation means display changes to the third operation means display [for example, the case shown in FIG. 260 (d)] during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display of the first operation means may always change to the display of the third operation means during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol.

Also,
"The third operation means display is a display that may be displayed across the variable display of the decorative symbol a plurality of times [for example, FIG. 260 (d) to FIG. (M)],
The third operation means display is a display having a case where it continues to be displayed even while the stop display of the decorative symbol is being displayed [for example, the case shown in FIG. 260 (h) to the same figure (j)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display of the third operation means may be a display which is always displayed across the variable display of the decorative symbol a plurality of times. In addition, the third operation means display may be a display that is always displayed even while the stop display of the decorative symbol is being displayed.

Also,
“When the operation means is operated in the state where the third operation means display is displayed [eg, FIG. 260 (e)], when the first preview effect is started [eg, FIG. 260 (f In the case where the output of the advance notice sound such as "Pico Pico" starts as shown in
The first preview effect is a preview effect of the advance notice.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, when the said operation means is operated in the state in which the said 3rd operation means display is displayed, a 1st notice presentation may be started by all means.

  Here, the third operation means display itself may be a display of a preview notice (fourth notice effect).

Also,
"The display means is a first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L] and one or more second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208 N, any one or more of fourth decorative symbol display device 208 O] and
The second display means is a means having a smaller display screen than the first display means.
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed on the second display means [eg, FIG. 251 (1)],
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed on the second display means [for example, FIG. 251 (2) to FIG. (11)],
The third operation means display is a display that may be displayed on the second display means [for example, FIG. 256 (b) to FIG. (I)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the fourth operation means display may be a display that may be displayed on the first display means, or a display that may be displayed on the second display means. It is also good.

  Note that the first operation means display may be a display that is necessarily displayed on the second display means, and the second operation means display is a display that is always displayed on the second display means The third operation means display may be a display that is necessarily displayed on the second display means.

  The display means may be means including only the first display means and one or more second display means, or may be means including the third display means.

Also,
"It is configured to be able to execute a big hit game that an attacker [eg, variable winning opening 234, 235] opens,
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed in a non-big hit game [for example, a normal gaming state in which variation display of a decorative symbol can be executed],
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed in the non-big hit game,
The third operation means display is a display that may be displayed in the non-big hit game,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the fourth operation means display may be a display that may be displayed in the non-big hit game.

  In addition, you may be comprised so that the big hit game which an attacker opens may be performed by all means.

Also,
[The above first operation means display may not be displayed during the execution of a certain effect [for example, a super reach effect or a pseudo-series effect etc.] even while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being displayed. Is a display,
The second operation means display is a display that may be hidden during the execution of the certain effect even while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being displayed,
The third operation means display is a display that may be hidden during the execution of the certain effect even while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the certain effect may be a super reach effect or a pseudo continuous effect. That is, as the certain effect, both of the super reach effect and the pseudo connected effect may be used, or only one of them may be used. Here, the super reach effect means various reach effects other than the normal reach effect (including, for example, special reach such as special multi line reach, full turn reach, special full turn reach, etc.). In addition, the pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed, which is different from the stop display of the decorative symbol. In addition, when the said operation means is operated in the state in which the said 4th operation means display is displayed, this 4th operation means display may disappear and the said 2nd notice production may be started. The second preliminary rendering effect may be a pseudo continuous rendering, and the pseudo continuous rendering may be a rendering for displaying a temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, which is different from the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, the first operation means display may be a display that may be hidden during the big hit game, and the second operation means display may be hidden during the big hit game The third operation means display may be a display that may not be displayed during the big hit game.

  In addition, the first operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the definite change state, and the second operation means display is a display that may be hidden in the positive change state. The third operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the positive change state.

  In addition, the first operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the power support state, and the second operation means display is a display that may be hidden in the power support state. The third operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the power support state.

  The first operation means display may be a display which is always hidden during super reach even while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being displayed, and the second operation means display is Even during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol, it may be a display which is always hidden during the super reach, and the third operation means display is a display of the variation display of the decorative symbol. Even if it exists, it may be a display which will always be hidden during the super reach.

  Further, the first operation means display may be a display which is always hidden during the big hit game, and the second operation means display is a display which is always hidden during the big hit game. Preferably, the third operation means display may be a display which is always hidden during the big hit game.

  In addition, the first operation means display may be a display which is always hidden in the definite change state, and the second operation means display may be a display which is always hidden in the positive change state. The display of the third operation means may be a display which is always hidden in the positive variation state.

  Further, the first operation means display may be a display which is always hidden in the power support state, and the second operation means display is a display which is always hidden in the power support state. Preferably, the third operation means display may be a display which is always hidden in the power support state.

Also,
“The second operation means display is a display mode different from at least one of the display mode of the first operation means display and the color or the size [eg, FIG. 251 (2) to FIG. A second operation means display Od2 shown in Fig. 260 (n) to a second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG.
The third operation means display is a display mode different from at least one of the display mode of the first operation means display and at least one of color and size [eg, from FIG. 260 (d) to FIG. A third operation means display Od3] shown in
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the second operation means display may be the same display manner as the display manner of the third operation means display, or the display manner of the third operation means display, and the color or size. At least one of them may be a display of a different display mode.

  Further, the fourth operation means display may be a display manner in which the display manner of the first operation means display is different from at least one of the color and the size.

  Further, the fourth operation means display may be a display of the same display manner as the display manner of the second operation means display, or the display manner of the second operation means display, and the color or size thereof. At least one of may be a display of a different display mode.

  Further, the fourth operation means display may be the same display manner as the display manner of the third operation means display, or the display manner of the third operation means display, and the color or size thereof. At least one of may be a display of a different display mode.

  The second operation means display may be a display mode different from the display mode of the first operation means display, both in color and size, or only in color, or only in size. The third operation means display may be a display manner of the first operation means display and a display manner different from both the color and the size or only the color or the size.

  In addition, the second operation means display may be a display mode of the third operation means display and a display mode different in both color and size, or only in color, or only in size. The fourth operation means display may be a display manner of the first operation means display and a display manner different from both the color and the size or only the color or the size.

  In addition, the fourth operation means display may be a display mode of the second operation means display and a display mode different in both color and size, or only in color, or only in size. The display mode of the third operation means display may be a display mode different in both color and size, or only in color, or only in size.

Also,
“One of the displays of the plurality of types of operation means is a fourth operation means display [eg, fourth operation means display Od4],
The fourth operation means display is a display different from the hold display.
The fourth operation means display is a display [for example, FIG. 252 (33) to FIG. (36)] which may be displayed during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol,
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed while the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed,
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed across the variable display of the decorative symbol a plurality of times,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 253 (37)], a second preview effect may be started,
The second notice effect is a notice effect relating to making a big hit with the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed when the second notice effect is started. Directed notice with the operation of 224 E 'etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the fourth operation means display may be a display obtained by developing the first operation means display, or may be a display obtained by switching from the first operation means display. The display of one operation means may be changed.

  Further, the fourth operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display has changed, and the first operation means display is the fourth operation means during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol. The display may change.

  Further, the fourth operation means display may be a display in which the display is started irrespective of other types of operation means display (for example, the first operation means display).

  The fourth operation means display may be a display mode different from the first operation means display. Further, the fourth operation means display may be a display displayed at a display position different from the display position of the first operation means display, or is larger than the size of the first operation means display. The display may be displayed, or may be displayed smaller than the size of the first operation means display.

  Further, the fourth operation means display may be the same display mode as the second operation means display or may be a different display mode. Further, the fourth operation means display may be a display displayed at a display position different from the display position of the second operation means display, or larger than the size of the second operation means display. The display may be displayed, or the display may be displayed smaller than the size of the second operation means display.

  The fourth operation means display may be the same display mode as the third operation means display or may be a different display mode. Further, the fourth operation means display may be a display displayed at a display position different from the display position of the third operation means display, or is larger than the size of the third operation means display. The display may be displayed or the display may be displayed smaller than the size of the third operation means display.

  In addition, when the said operation means is operated in the state in which the said 4th operation means display is displayed, 2nd preliminary announcement production may be started by all means.

Also,
“The fourth operation means display is a display that is displayed at the same time as the second operation means display [e.g., the case shown in 40 (f) to the same figure (g)],
When the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are simultaneously displayed, the second operation means display does not change [for example, FIG. 257 (i Leave the second operation means display Od2 as shown in)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display may have different display start timings.

  The fourth operation means display may be a display that may be displayed in parallel with the second operation means display.

  Further, when the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are simultaneously displayed, the fourth operation means [for example, FIG. 257 (h)] Of the second preliminary rendering corresponding to the display and the first preliminary rendering corresponding to the second operation means display, the second preliminary rendering [for example, by the pseudo-series rendering shown in FIG. 257 (i) Only the effect of the normal notice may be started, or only the second notice effect may be started.

  In addition, when the operation means is operated again after the second preliminary announcement effect is started, the first preliminary announcement effect [for example, shown in FIG. 257 (k) corresponding to the display of the second operation means] In the wipe display Wd, there may be a case where the character display of “heat” and the pre-reading advance notice effect by the effect image Ed may be started, or the first notice effect may be always started, and further, The second operation means display may change [for example, as shown in FIG. 257 (k), change to the first operation means display Od1].

  Here, when the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are simultaneously displayed, the second operation mode corresponding to the fourth operation means display. Both of the advance notice effect and the first advance notice effect corresponding to the second operation means display may be started, or may be always started. Also, in this case, the second operation means display changes.

Also,
“One of the displays of the plurality of types of operation means is a fourth operation means display [eg, fourth operation means display Od4],
The fourth operation means display is a display different from the hold display.
The fourth operation means display is a display [for example, FIG. 252 (33) to FIG. (36)] which may be displayed during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol,
The fourth operation means display is a display not displayed while the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed,
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed across the variable display of the decorative symbol a plurality of times,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 253 (37)], a second preview effect may be started,
The second notice effect is a notice effect relating to making a big hit with the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed when the second notice effect is started [for example, a family crest item shown in FIG. 253 (38) to FIG. (40) Directed notice with the operation of 224 E 'etc.]
When the fourth operation means display is displayed simultaneously with the first operation means display [e.g., the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 257 (d) and the second operation means display Od2 is first 257 (f) to (g) after changing to the operation means display Od1 of
The fourth operation means display is a display that is displayed at the same time as the second operation means display [for example, the case shown in FIG. 257 (f) to the same figure (g)],
When the fourth operation means display is displayed simultaneously with the third operation means display [For example, in FIG. 257 (f) to FIG. (G), the second operation means display Od2 is the third In the case of the operation means display Od3]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the fourth operation means display and the first operation means display may have different display start timings, and the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display may be displayed The start timing may be different, or the fourth operation means display and the third operation means display may be different in display start timing.

  The fourth operation means display may be displayed in parallel with the first operation means display, and the fourth operation means display may be parallel with the second operation means display. The fourth operation means display may be a display that may be displayed in parallel with the third operation means display.

  In addition, when the said operation means is operated in the state in which the said 4th operation means display is displayed, 2nd preliminary announcement production may be started by all means.

Also,
"Even if the operation means is operated while the first operation means display is displayed, the first preview effect is not started [For example, as shown in FIG. 260 (c), the operation sound is output However, the advance production is not started],
The first preview effect is a preview effect of the advance notice,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the second operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 251 (12)], the first preview effect is started [for example, FIG. 13) when the display of the character of "heat" in the wipe display Wd, the display of the effect image Ed, the output of the sound effects, etc. are started],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the second operation means display itself may be a display of a preview notice (third notice effect).

  In addition, when the said operation means is operated in the state in which the said 2nd operation means display is displayed, the said 1st notice presentation may be started by all means.

Also,
"The second operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display has changed,
There is a case where the first operation means display changes to the second operation means display [for example, the case shown in FIG. 251 (2)] during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display of the first operation means may always change to the display of the second operation means during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol.

Also,
“When the operation means is operated in the state where the second operation means display is displayed [eg, FIG. 251 (12)], the second operation means display may change [eg, As shown in FIG. 251 (13), there may be a change to the first operation means display Od1],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, when the said operation means is operated in the state in which the said 2nd operation means display is displayed, you may change this 2nd operation means display by all means.

Also,
“When the display of the second operation means changes as described above” means when the display of the second operation means changes to the display of the first operation means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display of the second operation means may always be changed to the display of the first operation means.

Also,
“When the display mode of the second operation means display changes as described above,” the second operation means display disappears once [eg, FIG. 264 (e) to FIG. (K) After that, when the first operation means display is displayed [for example, in the case of FIG. 264 (l) to the same diagram (m)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The first operation means display may be displayed after the second operation means display disappears.

Also,
"The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed across the variable display of the decorative symbol a plurality of times [for example, FIG. 251 (2) to FIG. 251 (11)],
The first operation means display is a display having a case where it continues to be displayed even while the stop display of the decorative symbol is being displayed [for example, the case shown in FIG. 251 (15) to the same figure (17)]
The second operation means display is a display having a case where it is continuously displayed even while the stop display of the decorative symbol is being displayed [for example, the case shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Note that the first operation means display may be a display that is always displayed even while the stop display of the decorative symbol is being displayed,
The second operation means display may be a display that is always displayed even while the stop display of the decorative symbol is being displayed.

Also,
"The first operation means display is a display which may be displayed even when the hold display is not displayed [eg, the first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 263 (a)]. A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
At least one of the display of the plurality of types of operation means is a display imitating the operation means [eg, the first operation means display Od1 or the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 251, A fourth operation means display Od4 shown in 252, and a third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Note that all of the display of the plurality of types of operation means may be a display including a display imitating the operation means, or only a portion of the display of the plurality of types of operation means may be displayed. May be a display including a display imitating the operation means.

Also,
“The display means is a display mode for displaying the hold display [for example, the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 258 (k)] in an operation means display mode [for example, a white display mode, and has a chance button 136 for emitting red light. This is a means that can be displayed in a display mode in which the mini item MI in which the characters of PUSH are added to the simulated display is added,
A display mode obtained by enlarging or reducing the second operation means display [for example, the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. 258 (l)]. Is
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display mode of the operation means may be a display mode obtained by enlarging or reducing the display of the second operation means only during the operation effective period of the operation means.

  In addition, the operation means display mode is not limited to the second operation means display, and other operation means display (for example, the first operation means display, the third operation means display, the fourth operation means The display mode may be enlarged or reduced. Alternatively, the operation means display mode may be a display mode in which part or all of the operation means display is enlarged or reduced. In addition, the display mode of the operation means may be different in color or pattern from the display of the operation means. Furthermore, depending on the case, the operation means display mode may be the same size as the operation means display, or the shape may be different from the operation means display, or the operation means display. If it is a display mode regarding the same operation means, it may differ from the display mode of the operation means display.

  In addition, the hold display of the operation means display mode may be displayed at a time different from the operation effective period of the operation means, and while it is displayed, the operation effective period of the operation means is always displayed It may be

  Furthermore, when the operation means is operated in a state where the hold display is displayed in the operation means display mode, the hold display displayed in the operation means display mode may change. It may change by all means. For example, it may change to a display mode (including a default display mode in which the degree of expectation is 0) representing the degree of expectation of the big hit, or may always change.

  In addition, various limitations described below are recognized.

  The fourth operation means display may be a display that is displayed closer to the hold display (hold icon) than the first operation means display, or the hold is performed than the second operation means display. The display may be displayed near the display (hold icon) or may be displayed near the hold display (hold icon) than the third operation means display.

  The display means is a display means capable of displaying the hold display as a fluctuation icon corresponding to the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol after the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol is started, and the fourth operation means display is The display may be displayed closer to the fluctuation icon than the first operation means display, or may be displayed near the fluctuation icon than the second operation means display. Alternatively, the display may be displayed closer to the fluctuation icon than the third operation means display.

  The first operation means display may be a display displayed near the specific display than the fourth operation means display, and the second operation means display may be the fourth operation means display The display may be displayed closer to the specific display than the specific display, and the third operation means display may be a display displayed closer to the specific display than the fourth operation means display. . As an example of the specific display said here, the display of the production mode, the display of the stage name, the display of the preview notice (the display of the first preview effect), the display of the notice of the change (the display of the second preview effect) ), Display of special effects such as super reach, display related to operation means (the above operation prompt display, display of operation invalid (for example, display in preparation), etc.) display of control state (for example, display of positive change etc.) Display etc. can be listed. That is, as the specific display, all of the items listed above may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied.

  The first operation means display and the second operation means display may be displayed at the same display position or may be displayed at different display positions. The first operation means display and the third operation means display may be displayed at the same display position or may be displayed at different display positions. The second operation means display and the third operation means display may be displayed at the same display position or may be displayed at different display positions.

  The hold display may be displayed in an operation means display mode related to the operation means, and the first operation means display is displayed simultaneously with the hold display of the operation means display mode over the entire period or a partial period. The second operation means display may be displayed simultaneously with the hold display of the operation means display mode and over the entire period or a part of the period, or the second operation means display may be displayed simultaneously. The third operation means display may be displayed simultaneously with the hold display of the operation means display mode and over the entire period or a part of the period.

  The variation icon may be displayed in an operation means display mode related to the operation means, and the fourth operation means display is displayed simultaneously with the variation icon of the operation means display mode over the entire period or a part of the period It may be done.

  Note that to be displayed in the operation means display mode said here means that the hold display itself is displayed in a display mode imitating the operation means, or an icon (for example, a display mode icon imitating the operation means on the hold display) , And may be displayed as a mini item), the hold display itself may be displayed in the operation promotion display, or the operation promotion display on the hold display (for example, as a mini item) May be displayed, the hold display itself may be displayed in the above-mentioned remaining period display, or the above-mentioned remaining period display (for example, display as a mini item) in the hold display may be displayed. It may be added and displayed, or it may be a combination of two or all of the display imitating the operation means, the operation prompt display, and the remaining period display.

  The first operation means display, the second operation means display, the third operation means display, the fourth operation means display, and the display of the hold display or the fluctuation icon as a display imitating the operation means When displayed, the remaining period display may be displayed at intervals (for example, displayed at intervals below) with each display (display imitating the operation means), or each display (the operation means And the remaining period display may be integrally displayed.

  Although the first operation means display, the second operation means display, and the third operation means display may be displayed while the stop display of the decorative symbol is being displayed, the stop display of the decorative symbol may be displayed. During the display of, there may be a notification that can be changed in setting, or a specific effect may be executed. In addition, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the number of holding balls is 0, when the operation means is operated, a certain animation display, a certain sound output, or a certain light emission may be performed. Although these animation display, sound output and light emission are performed during display of the stop display of the decorative symbol, more specifically, may be performed during display of so-called demonstration display, It may be performed after the decorative design is stopped and displayed until the demonstration display is started.

  The operation means may be changeable in aspect. As an example of the change of the aspect, a change of color, a change of light emission mode, a change of movement of the operation surface (for example, a change of projection amount), rotation of a frame surrounding the operation surface, and the like can be listed. That is, as the change of the mode of the operation means, all of the above listed items may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied. The operation means may be a button type or a lever type. If it is a button type, the operation surface may be movable in the vertical direction or in the front-rear direction. Moreover, as long as it is a lever type, it may be able to be turned in one or more directions.

  When the first operation means display changes and changes to the fourth operation means display, the first operation means display displayed on the second display means is displayed on the first display means The movement may be started to be displayed as the fourth operation means display on the first display means. The movement here may be started while displaying the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  When the first operation means display changes to change to the second operation means display, the first operation means display displayed on the second display means is displayed on the first display means The movement may be started to be displayed as the second operation means display on the first display means, or the first operation means display displayed on the first display means may be displayed. The movement may be started toward the second display means and displayed as the second operation means display on the second display means.

  In addition, when the first operation means display changes to change to the third operation means display, the first operation means display displayed on the second display means is the first display. The movement may be started toward the means, and the first display means may be displayed as the third operation means display, or the first operation means display displayed on the first display means may be displayed. The movement may be started toward the second display means, and displayed as the third operation means display on the second display means.

  The first operation means display and the second operation means display may be simultaneously displayed when the notice object (for example, a certain symbol variation display) is the same or the mode of the corresponding notice effect is the same. The display of the first operation means and the display of the third operation means are not simultaneously displayed, and the display of the second operation means and the third operation means are simultaneously displayed. You may not do this. On the other hand, when the notice object (for example, a certain symbol variation display) is different or the mode of the corresponding notice effect is different, the first operation means display and the second operation means display are There may be simultaneous display over the entire period or a part of the period, or the first operation means display and the third operation means display may be simultaneously displayed over the entire period or a part of the period, The second operation means display and the third operation means display may be simultaneously displayed over the entire period or a part of the period.

  In addition, the first operation means display and the fourth operation means display may be simultaneously displayed over the entire period or a part of the period, and the second operation means display and the fourth operation means display may also be displayed. The display may be simultaneously displayed over the entire period or a partial period, and the third operation means display and the fourth operation means display may also be simultaneously displayed over the entire period or a partial period.

  The following is a supplementary note including the matters described so far.

(Appendix 3-1)
Display means,
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
A game console equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of operation means displays;
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative pattern,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a pending display according to the number of pending balls,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice effects.
One display of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a first operation unit display,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a second operation unit display,
The second operation unit display is a display different from the first operation unit display,
The first operation unit display and the second operation unit display are displays different from the hold display,
The display means is means capable of displaying a display for changing the display of the first operation means to the display of the second operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “first change display”).
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative symbol is stopped changing (hereinafter referred to as "first state"),
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative symbol is moving (hereinafter, referred to as "second state"),
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed in the first state,
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed in the second state,
The first change display is a display that may start to be displayed in the second state,
The first operation means display is a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is invalid,
The second operation means display is a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is effective.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in Supplementary Note 3-1, it may be possible to make the user think that the change has not stopped yet by performing the effect by the display of the display means even while the change is stopped.

(Appendix 3-2)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 3-1,
The first operation means display is a display that may not end the display even when transitioning from any one of the first state and the second state to the other,
The second operation means display is a display that may not end the display even when transitioning from any one of the first state and the second state to the other.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 3-3)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 3-1 or 3-2,
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed even when the hold display is not performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 3-4)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 3-1 to 3-3,
An effect can be displayed by an operation of the operation means of the player
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 3-5)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 3-1 to 3-4, wherein
One of the preview effects of the plurality of types of preview effects is the first preview effect,
The display means is a means capable of starting display of the first preview effect by the operation of the operation means of the player.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 3-6)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 3-1 to 3-5,
The display means is a means capable of displaying preview advance notice effects,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a third operation means display,
The third operation means display is a display different from the hold display.
The display means is means capable of displaying a display for changing the first operation means display to the third operation means display (hereinafter referred to as "second change display"),
The third operation means display is a display that may be displayed as the prefetch notice.
The third operation means display is a display that may not end the display even when transitioning from any one of the first state and the second state to the other.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 3-7)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 3-6,
The third operation means display is a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is invalid,
The third operation means display is a display different from the first operation means display.
A game stand characterized by

  Although the third operation means display is a display in which the operation means is invalid as in the first operation means display, the second operation means display may have the same mode. In addition, the third operation means display may be different from the second operation means display.

(Appendix 3-8)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 3-6 or 3-7,
The first operation means display is a display that may not be displayed in parallel with the second operation means display,
The first operation means display is a display that can not be displayed in parallel with the third operation means display,
The second operation means display is a display that can not be displayed in parallel with the third operation means display.
A game stand characterized by

  In one display means, two operation means displays (first, second and third) may not be displayed simultaneously. In addition, an operation means display related to the operation of another operation means may be displayed at the same time.

  In addition, when the operation of the operation means is executed while the second operation means display is displayed, the second operation means display may return to the first operation means display, or until immediately before the change stop. It may completely disappear.

(Appendix 3-9)
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices 3-6 to 3-8,
One of the plurality of types of operation means displays is the fourth operation means display,
The fourth operation means display is a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is effective,
If the player's operation of the operation means is performed while the fourth operation means display is displayed, the display of the first advance notice may be started,
The fourth operation means display is a display that can be displayed in the second state,
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed in parallel with the first operation means display,
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed in parallel with the second operation means display,
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed in parallel with the third operation means display.
A game stand characterized by

  Note that the display of the operation means may be displayed simultaneously with the normal button effects (including the judgment effect of the judge effect, the pseudo link, the button hold, and the button announcement of conversation announcement) performed other than the operation means display.

  In addition, the effect performed by the operation while the fourth operation means is displayed may be the first notice effect.

(Appendix 3-10)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 3-9,
In the case where the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are displayed in parallel, when the player operates the operation means once, only the first preview effect is performed. Will be displayed,
A game stand characterized by

  The first preliminary announcement effect may be a display related to the operation while the fourth operation means is displayed.

  Further, the effect (notice) displayed by operating the operation means when the second operation means display is displayed may be the second notice effect.

(Appendix 3-11)
Supplementary note 3-1 to 3-10, which is the game console according to any one of
The operation means display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3-1)
Display means,
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
A game console equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of operation means displays;
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative pattern,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a pending display according to the number of pending balls,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a first operation means display,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a second operation means display,
The second operation means display is a display different from the first operation means display,
The first operation means display is a display different from the hold display.
The second operation means display is a display different from the hold display.
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed across the variable display of the decorative symbol a plurality of consecutive times,
The second operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display has changed,
The first operation means display may change to the second operation means display during display of the variation display of the decorative symbol.
The first operation means display may be displayed for a certain period of time,
The certain period is a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the number of holding balls is zero,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the first operation means display is displayed during the certain period, there may be a case where a response display corresponding to the operation of the operation means may be performed. Has been
There may be a case where advance notice effects other than reach may be started by operating the operation means while the second operation means display is displayed while displaying the variation display of the decorative symbol. To play with.

(Appendix A3-2)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note A3-1,
When the operation means is operated while the first operation means display is displayed, the first operation means display is configured not to change.
When the operation means is operated in a state where the second operation means display is displayed, the second operation means display may be changed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3-3)
It is a game console described in Appendix A3-2,
"When the second operation means display changes" described in the appendix A3-2 means "when the second operation means display changes to the first operation means display".
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3-4)
It is a game console described in Appendix A3-2,
"When the display of the second operation means changes" described in Appendix A3-2 means "When the display of the first operation means is displayed after the display of the second operation means has once disappeared" Is
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3-5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A3-4,
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of times of the variable display of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3-6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A3-5,
The response display is effect display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3-7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A3-6,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a third operation means display,
The third operation means display is a display different from the first operation means display,
The third operation means display is a display different from the hold display.
The third operation means display is a display that does not change even if the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3-8)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A3-7,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the third operation means display is displayed, a response operation may be performed in response to the operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3-9)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note A3-7 or A3-8,
The third operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display has changed,
The first operation means display may change to the third operation means display during display of the variation display of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3-10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-7 to A3-9,
The third operation means display is a display that may be displayed across the variable display of the decorative symbol a plurality of times,
The third operation means display is a display that may continue to be displayed even while the stop display of the decorative symbol is being displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3-11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-7 to A3-10,
The second operation means display is a display mode in which the display mode of the first operation means display is different from at least one of color and size,
The third operation means display is a display mode in which the display mode of the first operation means display is different from at least one of color and size.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3-12)
It is a game console as described in any one of supplementary notes A3-1 to A3-11,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a fourth operation means display,
The fourth operation means display is a display different from the hold display.
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed during display of the variable display of the decorative symbol,
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed while the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed,
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed across the variable display of the decorative symbol a plurality of times,
When the operation means is operated in a state in which the fourth operation means display is displayed, an effect of normal notice may be started,
The effect of the normal advance notice is an effect relating to a big hit with the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed when it is started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3-13)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A3-12,
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed simultaneously with the second operation means display,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are simultaneously displayed, the second operation means display does not change.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3-14)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A3-13,
The second operation means display is a display including a display indicating an operation valid period of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3-15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A3-14,
At least one of the display of the plurality of types of operation means is a display including a display imitating the operation means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3-16)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A15,
The display means can display the hold display in a mode including an operation means display.
The operation means display is an enlarged or reduced display of the second operation means display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3-17)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A3-16,
The certain period is a period from the stop display of the decorative pattern to the start of the demonstration display,
A game stand characterized by

  The operation means display may be displayed only during the normal game.

  In addition, the operation means display may not be displayed during the specific effect (for example, during super reach).

  Further, the second operation means display may be one in which the color is changed with respect to the first operation means display, or the first operation means display may be enlarged and displayed.

  Further, the third operation means display may be one in which the color is changed with respect to the first operation means display, or the first operation means display may be enlarged and displayed.

  It should be noted that what is described as the variation display of the decorative symbol in the above may be the variation display of the symbol (more specifically, the special figure), and the description that the stop symbol of the decoration symbol is described is the symbol (more Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

  In addition, "may be" may be replaced with "always", "always be", or "always become", etc., and "○ possible" in the above is It may be replaced by "must be xxx".

  In addition, even if the constituent requirements included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, and supplementary notes described above, the constituent requirements are not limited to the other embodiments, examples, or examples. The present invention may be applied to modified examples, various examples, and supplementary notes.

100 Pachinko Machine 136 Chance Button 181 Operation Key Unit 191 Transparent Part 208 Decorative Symbol Display Device 208L First Decorative Symbol Display Device 208 M Second Decorative Symbol Display Device 208 N Third Decorative Symbol Display Device 208 O Fourth Decorative Symbol Display Device 224 E Family Gift Item 251 first movable means 2521 and 2522 second movable means 253 third movable means 254 fourth movable means 255 fixed effect means 256 movable means IL light guide plate 300 main control section 400 first sub control section 500 second sub control section Control unit 600 Payout control unit 1000 Slot machine pd3 3rd symbol pd4 4th symbol pd5 5th symbol h1 to h4 Hold icon c Fluctuation icon Wd Wipe display Od1 1st operation means display Od2 2nd operation means display Od3 3rd Operation means display Od4 4th operation hand Display

Claims (14)

It is a game console provided with effect means capable of executing a plurality of effects,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The second effect is an effect that has a case of changing the first effect (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”),
In the first case, the first effect is changed and the third effect is performed.
The case where the third effect is performed is more likely to be advantageous development for the player than when the first effect is performed,
The first effect is a kind of effect,
The third effect may be another type of effect than the one type of effect.
In the first case, the other type of effect may be executed as the third effect.
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
The third effect may be the certain type of effect,
In the first case, the certain type of effect may be executed as the third effect,
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The effect of at least one of the one type of effect and the other type of effect is an effect of preview advance notice.
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
At least one of the effect of the one type and the effect of the other type is usually an effect of advance notice.
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The first effect is an effect that an icon may be displayed,
The third effect is also an effect that an icon may be displayed,
If the icon is displayed in the second display mode than the icon is displayed in the first display mode, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be displayed,
The icon of the second display mode is easier to be displayed in the third effect than in the first effect.
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein
The second effect is also an effect that an icon may be displayed,
The first effect and the second effect are effects for the same icon,
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The first effect is an effect that may change the display mode of the icon,
The third effect is also an effect that may change the display mode of the icon,
If the icon is displayed in the second display mode than the icon is displayed in the first display mode, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be displayed,
The third effect is easier to change the icon to the second display mode than the first effect.
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to claim 7, and
The second effect is also an effect that may change the display mode of the icon,
The first effect and the second effect are effects for the same icon,
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein
One of the first effect and the second effect is an effect that may be started during the execution of the other effect.
A game stand characterized by A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
“The case where the third effect is performed is more likely to be an advantageous development for the player than the case where the first effect is performed” according to claim 1 The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finalized and displayed when the third effect is performed than when the effect is performed.
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein
The first effect is an effect including display of a first character.
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 11,
The second effect is an effect including display of a second character.
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
The effect means is a display means.
A game stand characterized by 14. A game stand according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by